Handbook of Nutrition and Food PDF
Handbook of Nutrition and Food PDF
of
NUTRITION
and
FOOD
2705_frame_FM Page 2 Thursday, September 20, 2001 2:09 PM
HANDBOOK
of
NUTRITION
and
FOOD
Edited by
CAROLYN D. BERDANIER
Editorial Board
Carolyn D. Berdanier, Ph.D.
Editor-in-Chief and Editor, Food and Metabolism
CRC PR E S S
Boca Raton London New York Washington, D.C.
2705_frame_FM Page 4 Friday, August 16, 2002 11:17 AM
CRC handbook of nutrition and food / edited by Carolyn D. Berdanier … [et al.].
p. cm.
Includes bibliographical references and index.
ISBN 0-8493-2705-9
1. Nutrition—Handbooks, manuals, etc. I. Title: Handbook of nutrition and food. II.
Berdanier, Carolyn D.
This book contains information obtained from authentic and highly regarded sources. Reprinted material is quoted with
permission, and sources are indicated. A wide variety of references are listed. Reasonable efforts have been made to publish
reliable data and information, but the author and the publisher cannot assume responsibility for the validity of all materials
or for the consequences of their use.
Neither this book nor any part may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means, electronic or mechanical,
including photocopying, microfilming, and recording, or by any information storage or retrieval system, without prior
permission in writing from the publisher.
All rights reserved. Authorization to photocopy items for internal or personal use, or the personal or internal use of specific
clients, may be granted by CRC Press LLC, provided that $1.50 per page photocopied is paid directly to Copyright clearance
Center, 222 Rosewood Drive, Danvers, MA 01923 USA. The fee code for users of the Transactional Reporting Service is
ISBN 0-8493-2705-9/02/$0.00+$1.50. The fee is subject to change without notice. For organizations that have been granted
a photocopy license by the CCC, a separate system of payment has been arranged.
The consent of CRC Press LLC does not extend to copying for general distribution, for promotion, for creating new works,
or for resale. Specific permission must be obtained in writing from CRC Press LLC for such copying.
Direct all inquiries to CRC Press LLC, 2000 N.W. Corporate Blvd., Boca Raton, Florida 33431.
Trademark Notice: Product or corporate names may be trademarks or registered trademarks, and are used only for
identification and explanation, without intent to infringe.
Preface
A number of years ago, Harvey Kane, an editor for CRC Press, approached me to organize
a reference text for nutrition along the lines of the CRC Handbook of Chemistry and Physics.
Little did I realize what a mammoth undertaking this would be. An initial Advisory Board
was convened and consisted of Ronald Entmiller, William P. Flatt, Terrance Yen, Mario
DiGirolamo, Malcolm Watford, Mary Francis Picciano, and myself. Once the Advisory
Board had outlined the Table of Contents, its work was complete. Together with Elaine
Feldman, Sachiko St. Joer, and William Flatt, the details of the book were finalized, authors
identified and contacted, and the book was put together. It was a four-year effort.
The Advisory Board met several times to discuss the target audience and what infor-
mation that audience would want in a reference book. We decided to include as much
material as possible that could be accessed using the World Wide Web. Hence, a number
of Web addresses are used in which large databases can be found. In the first section, for
instance, the data on food composition that has been accumulated by the United States
Department of Agriculture is not provided. Rather, the web addresses are given so that
the reader can find the specific information desired from this electronic alternative. A
number of uses exist for food composition data, and each user will have specific objectives
that we felt could be met if the electronic version was identified. In addition to these large
data sets, smaller tables of food composition are provided that may not be in the larger
data sets. Thus, the reader can find information about a food additive, tagatose, trans-
fatty acids, vitamin terminology, or tocopherol and tocotrienol content of selected foods.
In this first division of the book, the reader will also find several tables on food additives,
food contaminants, and toxins. These tables are supplemented by Section 55, prepared by
Venkitanarayanan and Doyle, that addresses food-borne illness and contains tables
describing bacterial, viral, fungal, and parasitic pathogens sometimes present in food.
These pathogens can cause a variety of clinical conditions; notably symptoms in the
digestive tract. The mechanisms of infection as well as how to avoid such infestation is
complemented by Sections 56 and 57, which describe nutrition and the hollow organs (the
upper and lower gastrointestinal tract). These sections, prepared by Mutlu et al., review
not only the anatomy and physiology of the gastrointestinal tract but also some of the
diseases that involve these organs with respect to nutrition.
In Section 1, the reader will find tables on plants — not only those that are edible and
those that are toxic, but also plants that some people believe have medicinal uses. Herbal
medicine is gaining popularity, and the reader should note that these tables contain certain
plants that meet all three definitions. They may have edible parts, they may have toxic
parts, and they may also be herbal remedies. The lines between these properties are
blurred mainly because the information about plants other than the traditional food plants
is minimal.
There are five tables in this section on vitamins and minerals. Summary tables give the
essentials of their use, chemical and physical properties, and so forth. These tables are
supplemented by Section 64 on vitamin deficiencies, Section 65, which describes the
rationale for the use of vitamin and mineral supplements, and Section 71, on trace mineral
deficiencies. These sections, prepared by Rivlin, Perelson and Ellenbogen, and Nielsen,
respectively, are in turn supplemented by sections that address the needs of humans at
various periods in the normal life cycle (Sections 5 through 10) and people who have
2705_frame_FM Page 6 Thursday, September 20, 2001 2:09 PM
The nutrient needs of humans throughout the life cycle, from gestation to the later years,
are represented in Part IV. Each of these periods of life has special considerations and
these are summarized in Sections 5 through 10. Kolasa and Weismiller have discussed the
food and nutrition needs of the pregnant woman and her fetus. Bhatia et al. continue with
a description of the nutrition of the premature and full term infant (Sections 6 and 7).
Baxter addresses the nutrition concerns of the child and adolescent. This is followed by
an extensive discussion of a health-promoting diet throughout life (Section 9) and the later
years (Section 10).
Part VI contains information about modified diets. Included is a section on vegetarian
diets, sections on enteral and parenteral nutrition support, and a section devoted to the
elite athlete.
Lastly, Part VII, the largest division, is devoted to the clinical conditions that have a
nutrition component in either their management or development. The anemias are
addressed by Hendricks and Kutlar, alcoholism is described by Lieber, hypertension by
Prisant, diabetes, obesity, lipemias, and heart disease as mentioned above; cancer is dis-
cussed in Sections 49 and 50, and nutrition as related to oral medicine; the pancreas, liver,
kidney, skeletal system, teeth, and eyes are all given special treatment.
Altogether this broad range of nutrition concerns should be of interest to the clinician,
the dietician, the nutrition scientist, and the pharmacist. There is a degree of unavoidable
redundancy in the book since there are several different uses for the materials provided.
Rather than deleting these duplications, we felt that their inclusion with interpretive text
made sense. We hope that you, the reader, enjoy this book and find it a useful reference.
Carolyn D. Berdanier
2705_frame_FM Page 8 Thursday, September 20, 2001 2:09 PM
2705_frame_FM Page 9 Thursday, September 20, 2001 2:09 PM
Editors
Elaine Bossak Feldman holds M.D., A.B. (magna cum laude) and M.S. degrees from New
York University, where she was elected to Phi Beta Kappa and Alpha Omega Alpha. She
trained in internal medicine, metabolism, and nutrition at the Mount Sinai Hospital in
New York, held research fellowships from the New York Heart Association and the
National Institutes of Health (Career Development Award, Department of Physiological
Chemistry, Lund University, Sweden), and served on the faculty of the Department of
Medicine, State University of New York Medical School in New York City. She is board
certified in internal medicine and clinical nutrition.
Dr. Feldman is Professor Emeritus of Medicine, Physiology, and Endocrinology at the
Medical College of Georgia in Augusta; she is Chief Emeritus of the Section of Nutrition
and Director Emeritus of the Georgia Institute of Human Nutrition. She was the founding
director of the Southeastern Regional Medical Nutrition Education Network of 15 medical
schools in the Southeast. At the Medical College she was the principal investigator of a
curriculum development grant from the Department of Health and Human Services, and
of a Clinical Nutrition Research Unit, as well as a number of diet and drug studies in
hyperlipidemia.
A noted author and lecturer on nutrition and lipidology, Dr. Feldman has published 82
articles in peer-reviewed biomedical journals and 56 invited articles. She currently serves
on the editorial boards of Nutrition Reviews, Nutrition Today, and Nutrition Update. She has
edited or written 32 books, book chapters, and monographs, including a textbook, Essen-
tials of Clinical Nutrition. Dr. Feldman is a Fellow of the American Heart Association’s
Council on Arteriosclerosis, the American College of Physicians, and the American Society
for Nutrition Sciences. She serves as a consultant for the American Institute for Cancer
Research and the American Medical Women’s Association.
2705_frame_FM Page 10 Thursday, September 20, 2001 2:09 PM
Dr. Feldman served on the Nutrition Study Section of the National Institutes of Health
and is listed in Who’s Who in America. She has received the Goldberger Award in clinical
nutrition from the American Medical Association, the Calcium Nutrition Education Award
from the American Medical Women’s Association, the Special Recognition Award of the
Council on Arteriosclerosis, and the National Dairy Council’s award for Excellence in
Medical Nutrition Education from the American Society for Clinical Nutrition.
Sachiko T. St. Jeor, Ph.D., R.D. is Director of the Nutrition Education and Research
Program and Professor of Clinical Medicine at the University of Nevada School of Med-
icine in Reno, Nevada. Her research interests are in the areas of obesity, weight manage-
ment, nutrition assessment, and nutrition in medical education. Dr. St. Jeor has been
honored as an outstanding alumna from both the College of Human Development at the
Pennsylvania State University and the College of Health at the University of Utah. She
has also received the Medallion Award and Excellence in the Practice of Dietetic Research
and chaired the Council of Research of the American Dietetic Association. She is a founding
member of the Council on Renal Nutrition of the National Kidney Association. Dr. St. Jeor
was a member of the 1995 U.S. Dietary Guidelines Committee, and the Institute of Med-
icine’s Committee on Opportunities in the Nutrition and Foods Sciences and Committee
to Develop Criteria for Evaluating the Outcomes of Approaches to Prevent and Treat
Obesity. She has also served on the Behavioral Medicine Study Section, Epidemiology and
Disease Prevention Study Section, and Clinical Applications and Prevention Advisory
Committee for the National Institutes of Health. She has served on the editorial boards
of the Topics in Applied Nutrition, Journal of the American Dietetic Association, Behavioral
Medicine Abstracts, Obesity Research, and Weight Control Digest. Dr. St. Jeor holds a B.A. in
Nutrition from the University of Utah, Salt Lake City, an M.S. in Nutrition from the
University of Iowa, Iowa City; and a Ph.D. in Nutrition from Pennsylvania State Univer-
sity, University Park.
William P. Flatt, Ph.D. is Professor Emeritus, Department of Foods and Nutrition, and
D.W. Brooks Distinguished Professor, University of Georgia.
Dr. Flatt earned his Ph.D. in Animal Nutrition at Cornell University in 1955. He has
served on the faculty of the University of Georgia since 1974, during which time he was
department head for Animal Sciences, Experiment Station Director, and Dean of the
College of Agriculture. Following his tenure as dean, he affiliated with the Department
of Foods and Nutrition, where he maintains an active research agenda in energy metab-
olism, calorimetry, and obesity.
2705_frame_FM Page 11 Thursday, September 20, 2001 2:09 PM
Acknowledgments
The editors would like to express their appreciation to the many authors who contributed
their expertise and time to the preparation of this reference text. Also appreciated are the
many secretaries who prepared the typed material and the artists who prepared the
illustrations. We also wish to acknowledge the contributions of the many journal and
textbook publishers who allowed us to include their copywrited material in this book. Of
course it goes without saying that this reference text would not have become a reality
without the encouragement and support of the editors at CRC Press. We especially appre-
ciate the efforts of Ira Wolinsky, Harvey Kane, Lourdes Franco, and Carol Hollander. Lastly,
let me say thanks to my faithful helpers here at the University of Georgia: Kathie Wickwire
and Tonya Dalton.
2705_frame_FM Page 12 Thursday, September 20, 2001 2:09 PM
2705_frame_FM Page 13 Thursday, September 20, 2001 2:09 PM
Contributors
Kim M. Forde
Johns Hopkins School of Medicine Linda K. Hendricks
Division of Geriatric Medicine and Section of Hematology and Oncology
Gerontology Department of Medicine
Baltimore, Maryland Medical College of Georgia
Augusta, Georgia
John P. Foreyt
Behavioral Medicine Research Center Victor Herbert
Baylor College of Medicine Bronx V.A. Medical Center
Houston, Texas Bronx, New York
Contents
Part I Food
Part II Metabolism
Table 3.14 Drugs That May Have Anti-Obesity Properties ....................... 138
Table 3.15 Micronutrient Interactions ......................................................... 139
Table 3.16 Preferred Ligand Binding Groups for Metal Ions .................... 140
Table 3.17 Food Components That Affect Calcium Absorption ................ 140
Table 3.18 Calcium-Binding Proteins .......................................................... 141
Table 3.19 The Body Content of Iron .......................................................... 141
Table 3.20 Body Mass Index for Adults ...................................................... 142
Table 3.21 Standard International Units (SI Units) for Reporting Clinical
Data .......................................................................................... 144
Table 3.22 Conversion Factors for Values in Clinical Chemistry
(SI Units).................................................................................. 145
Table 3.23 Small Animal Analogs of Human Degenerative Diseases ....... 160
Table 3.24 Composition of the AIN-93 Maintenance (M) and Growth
(G) Diets .................................................................................. 160
32 Height, Weight, and Body Mass Index (BMI) in Childhood ...................... 673
Christine L. Williams and Mary Horlick
Introduction ....................................................................................................... 673
Height................................................................................................................. 673
Weight ................................................................................................................ 676
Body Mass Index (BMI) .................................................................................... 677
Sources of Further Information........................................................................ 694
Figure 32.1 Weight-for-age percentiles, boys, birth to 36 months, Centers for
Disease Control (CDC) growth charts: U.S. ......................... 680
Figure 32.2 Weight-for-age percentiles, girls, birth to 36 months, CDC
growth charts: U.S. ................................................................. 681
Figure 32.3 Length-for-age percentiles, boys, birth to 36 months, CDC
growth charts, U.S. ................................................................. 682
Figure 32.4 Length-for-age percentiles, girls, birth to 36 months, CDC
growth charts: U.S. ................................................................. 683
Figure 32.5 Weight-for-length, boys, birth to 36 months, CDC growth
charts: U.S. .............................................................................. 684
Figure 32.6 Weight-for-length percentiles, girls, birth to 36 months,
CDC growth charts: U.S. ........................................................ 685
Figure 32.7 Weight-for-age percentiles, boys, 2 to 20 years, CDC growth
charts: U.S. .............................................................................. 686
Figure 32.8 Weight-for-age percentiles, Girls, 2 to 20 years, CDC growth
charts: U.S. .............................................................................. 687
Figure 32.9 Stature-for-age percentiles, boys, 2 to 20 years, CDC growth
charts: U.S. .............................................................................. 688
Figure 32.10 Stature-for-age percentiles, girls, 2 to 20 years, CDC growth
charts, U.S. .............................................................................. 689
Figure 32.11 Weight-for-stature percentiles, boys, CDC growth charts:
U.S. ........................................................................................... 690
Figure 32.12 Weight-for-stature percentiles, girls, CDC growth charts:
U.S. ........................................................................................... 691
Figure 32.13 Body mass index-for-age percentiles, boys, 2 to 20 years,
CDC growth charts: U.S. ........................................................ 692
2705_frame_FM Page 38 Thursday, September 20, 2001 2:09 PM
Kim M. Forde
Johns Hopkins School of Medicine Linda K. Hendricks
Division of Geriatric Medicine and Section of Hematology and Oncology
Gerontology Department of Medicine
Baltimore, Maryland Medical College of Georgia
Augusta, Georgia
John P. Foreyt
Behavioral Medicine Research Center Victor Herbert
Baylor College of Medicine Bronx V.A. Medical Center
Houston, Texas Bronx, New York
Figure 61.1 Conversion cascade for the synthesis of the active metabolite
of vitamin D, 1,25-dihydroxy-cholecalciferol (DHCC) from
cholesterol.............................................................................. 1278
Table 69.10 Food Group Exchanges for Various Caloric Levels ............... 1439
Table 69.11 Sample Meal Plan for 1500 Calories........................................ 1440
Table 69.12 Educational Topics for Weight Loss Counseling .................... 1440
Table 69.13 Sample Meal Plan for Low-Fat, High-Fiber Diet ................... 1441
Table 69.14 Contraindications to Very Low Calorie Diets (VLCDs) ......... 1442
Table 69.15 VLCD Sample Meal Plan .......................................................... 1443
Table 69.16 Proposed Mechanisms Linking Exercise with Successful
Weight Maintenance ............................................................. 1444
Table 69.17 Behavior Modification Techniques .......................................... 1445
Table 69.18 Weight Loss Agents .................................................................. 1446
Table 69.19 Predictors of Weight Loss ........................................................ 1446
Table 69.20 Predictors of Maintenance of Weight Loss ............................. 1447
Part I
Food
2705_frame_C01 Page 2 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:06 PM
2705_frame_C01 Page 3 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:06 PM
1
Food Constituents
Carolyn D. Berdanier
Animals, including man, consume food to obtain the nutrients they need. Throughout the
world there are differences in food consumption related to socioeconomic conditions, food
availability, and cultural dictates. If a variety of fresh and cooked foods is consumed in
sufficient quantities to meet the energy needs of the consumer, then the needs for protein
and the micronutrients should be met. Having this in mind, it is surprising to learn that
some people are poorly nourished, and indeed may develop one or more nutrition-related
diseases. The early years of nutrition research focused on diseases related to inadequate
vitamin and mineral intake. An important component of this research was the determi-
nation of the vitamin and mineral content of a vast variety of foods. The composition of
these foods has been compiled by the USDA, and Table 1.1 provides web addresses to
access these data sets. Several data sets that may not be available on the web can be found
in this section. Table 1.2 provides the sugar content of selected foods in 100 g portions.
This may be a very large serving size or a very small one, depending on the food in
question. However, using a standard portion allows one to compare the sugar content of
a variety of foods. Those that are very rich sources, i.e., honey or table sugar (sucrose), of
course will have a very high value, yet one would not consume this much in a single food
under most circumstances. Usually, one would select a portion size compatible with the
need for sweetness in the particular food product. For example, one might add a teaspoon
of table sugar to a cup of coffee. That teaspoon of sugar might weigh 8 grams.Table 1.3
provides information on the tagatose content of food. Tagatose is a new food additive
used to reduce the amount of sugar in a food. It has a sweet taste, yet does not have the
same energy value as sucrose. Other sugar substitutes are also used in the preparation of
reduced-energy foods; however, data on their quantitative occurrence is not as readily
available because of the proprietary interests of food producers. A list of sweeteners added
to foods is provided in Table 1.5. Following this table is a list of the types of food additives
that change the properties of food (Table 1.6). This table describes compounds that increase
the shelf life of a class of foods, or additives that change the texture of a food. The specific
attributes of individual food additives are described in Table 1.7. This table provides
information on how these additives function in particular food products. Table 1.8 is a list
of mycotoxins and bacterial toxins that can occur in food. The reader should also review
Section 52 for an extensive description of foodborne illness. Table 1.9 provides a list of
antinutrients sometimes found in food, and Table 1.10 is a list of toxic substances that can
be present in food. Some of these toxic substances are added inadvertently by the food
processing methods, but some occur naturally. If consumed in minute quantities, some of
these toxic materials are without significant effect, yet other compounds (e.g., arsenic),
even in minute amounts, could accumulate and become lethal.
0-8493-2705-9/01/$0.00+$1.50
© 2002 by CRC Press LLC 3
2705_frame_C01 Page 4 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:06 PM
Tables 1.11, 1.12, and 1.14 overlap to some extent. All contain information about plants.
Some of these plants can have both a food and a non-food use. Non-food use is defined
as a use that may have a real or imagined pharmacologic (drug/herbal) effect. The reader
should use this information with considerable caution. Plants can differ from variety to
variety, and indeed from one growing condition to another in the content of certain of
their herbal or nutritive ingredients. Over-the-counter herbal preparations can also vary.
There is little regulation of these preparations and few safeguards exist to protect the
consumer with respect to biopotency. Furthermore, the consumer should be aware of the
fact that some of these herbal remedies may interact with prescribed drugs, either nulli-
fying the drug effect or, worse, interacting to cause an unwarranted or even lethal effect.
Consumers of plants used for herbal remedies should consult their pharmacists and
physicians about these potentially dangerous uses.
The next six tables provide information about the micronutrients. Table 1.14 gives
vitamin terminology. Table 1.15 is a list of compounds that have vitamin A activity. Table
1.16 gives the structures and characteristics of the vitamins. The use of vitamin supple-
ments as well as descriptions of vitamin deficiency is covered in Sections 43, 61, and 62.
Table 1.17 summarizes vitamin deficiencies and needs. Table 1.18 summarizes the essential
minerals and their functions. A more detailed description of the minerals is provided in
Section 57. Table 1.19 lists the essential fatty acids, and Table 1.20 gives the common and
technical names for fatty acids. It should be noted that felines require arachidonic acid as
well as linoleic and linolenic acid in their diets. Other mammals only require linoleic and
linolenic acids.
2705_frame_C01 Page 5 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:06 PM
Food Constituents 5
TABLE 1.1
Web Addresses for Information on the Composition of Food
Data Set Web Address
Composition of foods, raw, processed, prepared; 6200 http://www.nal.usda.gov/fnic/foodcomp/Data/
foods, 82 nutrients
Daidzein, genisten, glycitein, isoflavone content of 128 Use above address, click on this file to open
foods
Carotenoid content of 215 foods Use above address, click on this file to open
Trans fatty acid content of 214 foods Use above address, click on this file to open
Sugar content of 500+ foods Use above address, click on this file to open
Nutritive value of food in common household units; Use above address, click on Nutritive Value of Foods
more than 900 items are in this list (HG-72) to open
Vitamin K Use above address, click on vitamin K to open
List of key foods (foods that contribute up to 75% of Use above address, click on Key Foods to open
any one nutrient)
Nutrient retention factors: calculations of retention of Use above address, click on Nutrient Retention
specific micronutrients Factors, Release 4 (1998)
Primary nutrient datasets (results of USDA surveys) Use above address, click on Primary Nutrient for
USDA Nationwide Food Surveys Dataset
Selenium and vitamin D (provisional values) Use above address, click on selenium and vitamin D
to open
Food composition (foods from India) www.unu.edu/unupress/unupbooks/80633e/
80633Eoi.htm
European foods Cost99/EUROFOODS:Inventory of European Food
Composition food.ethz.ch/cost99db-inventory.htm
Foods in developing countries www.fao.org/DOCREP/W0073e/woo73eO6.htm
Other food data www.arborcom.com/frame/foodc.htm
Soy foods (beneficial compounds) See above, isoflavone, etc.
Individual amino acids and fatty acids http://www.infinite faculty.org/sci/cr/crs/1994
Note: Most of these databases can be accessed as subdirectories of:
http://www.Nal.USDA.gov/foodcomp/data/. A printed format can be obtained from the Superinten-
dent of Documents, U.S. Printing Office, Washington D.C. 20402. Request USDA Handbooks 8 through
16. A CD-ROM can also be obtained. None of these are free.
TABLE 1.2
Sugar Content of Selected Foods, 100 Grams, Edible Portion1
Moisture Monosaccharides (in grams) Disaccharides (in grams) Other Total
Food Item (%) Galactose Glucose Fructose Lactose Sucrose Maltose Sugars Sugars
Dairy Products
Cheese
Brie 47.7 — 1.0 0.3 0.2 0.1 TR — 1.6
Edam 41.1 — 0.1 — — 0.1 — — 0.2
Mozzarella 47.0 — 1.1 — TR — — — 1.1
Ice cream
Chocolate 53.7 — — — 3.7 14.9 TR — 18.6
Strawberry 56.9 — 1.5 0.8 4.1 8.5 TR — 14.9
Vanilla 60.5 — — — 5.1 8.9 TR — 14.0
Ice milk, vanilla 59.3 — 1.6 0.8 5.8 6.5 TR — 14.7
Yogurt
Plain 86.0 — 0.3 — 3.0 — — — 3.3
Strawberry 72.5 — 2.3 2.1 3.2 7.3 — — 14.9
2705_frame_C01 Page 6 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:06 PM
Bread
Banana 32.9 — TR 0.1 — 25.8 — — 25.9
Hamburger 34.7 — 1.7 1.3 0.2 — 0.2 — 3.4
buns
Pita 20.5 — 0.1 0.2 — — 1.0 — 1.3
Pumpernickel 37.1 — 0.6 0.1 — — 1.0 — 1.7
Raisin 31.5 — 7.3 6.6 — TR TR — 13.9
Rye 36.5 — 0.6 0.4 — 0.6 — — 1.6
White 36.3 — 1.8 1.2 — 0.4 0.2 — 3.6
Whole wheat 39.3 — 0.7 0.6 — — 0.6 — 1.9
Cake
Angel food 34.8 — — — — 33.7 — — 33.7
Sponge 21.1 — TR — — 23.6 — — 23.6
Yellow 33.9 — TR — — 25.8 — — 25.8
Cheesecake, 38.2 — TR — 0.1 7.0 — — 7.1
plain
Chocolate chip 3.7 — TR TR — 18.7 — — 18.7
cookies
Corn flakes 1.7 — 2.2 2.1 — 2.9 — — 7.2
Crude wheat 9.6 — 0.9 TR — 6.9 — — 7.8
germ
Donuts
Cake type 20.8 — 0.9 0.1 TR 8.6 TR — 9.6
Yeast type 26.3 — 1.4 1.4 1.0 — 1.4 — 5.2
Flour
Rye 11.0 — 0.2 0.1 — 0.6 — — 0.9
White 10.5 — TR TR — 0.1 TR — 0.1
Whole wheat 9.3 — TR TR — 0.4 — — 0.4
Graham 5.6 — 1.9 1.2 — 12.6 — — 5.7
crackers
Pasta
Egg noodles, 8.8 — — — — 0.1 0.8 — 0.9
raw
Egg noodles, 67.0 — 0.1 — — TR 0.2 — 0.3
cooked
Spaghetti, 9.8 — TR — — 0.1 0.4 — 0.5
raw
Spaghetti, 62.7 — 0.1 — — — 0.2 — 0.3
cooked
Rice
Parboiled, 9.8 — TR — — 0.1 — — 0.1
raw
Parboiled, 72.8 — 0.1 TR — 0.1 — — 0.2
cooked
Tortillas
Flour 18.5 — — TR — 0.1 0.5 — 0.6
Corn 49.6 — — TR — 0.5 — — 0.5
Apples
Delicious, 84.5 — 1.8 6.4 — 1.8 — — 10.0
golden
2705_frame_C01 Page 7 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:06 PM
Food Constituents 7
Vegetable Products
Broccoli
Raw 90.9 — 0.4 0.4 — 0.1 — — 0.9
Cooked 90.7 — 0.4 0.3 — 0.1 — — 0.8
Cabbage
Raw 92.7 — 1.5 1.1 — TR TR — 2.6
Cooked 93.8 — 1.0 0.7 — 0.1 — — 1.8
Carrots
Raw 88.3 — 0.6 0.5 — 3.1 — — 4.2
Cooked 90.1 — 0.3 0.3 — 1.6 — — 2.2
Mushrooms, 93.2 — 2.6 TR — — — — 2.6
raw
Spinach
Raw 93.5 — 0.1 TR — TR — — 0.1
Cooked 93.2 — 0.1 TR — TR — — 0.1
Sprouts
Alfalfa, raw 92.3 — 0.1 0.1 — TR — — 0.2
Mung bean, 91.0 — 1.0 0.5 — 0.2 — — 1.7
raw
Sweet potatoes
Raw 73.4 — 0.9 0.7 — 3.5 — — 5.1
Cooked 82.1 — 0.7 0.8 — 2.4 2.6 — 6.5
2705_frame_C01 Page 8 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:06 PM
Beverages
Beer
Light 97.9 — TR TR — — TR — TR
Regular 96.1 — TR — — — — — TR
Sherry
Dry 72.2 — 0.6 0.5 — TR TR — 1.1
Medium 71.7 — 1.6 1.3 — — — — 2.9
Sweet 70.8 — 0.9 5.2 — — — — 6.1
Wine
Port, dessert 69.0 — 4.3 5.1 — TR — — 9.4
Red, dry 85.1 — 0.4 0.3 — 0.1 — — 0.8
Rose, dry 84.2 — 1.4 1.4 — — — — 2.8
White, dry 86.5 — 0.6 0.6 — — 0.1 — 1.3
Vermouth, dry 72.8 — 0.6 0.5 — — — — 1.1
Sweets
Legumes
Baked beans
In tomato 73.8 — 0.6 0.5 — 4.2 — 0.3 5.6
sauce
With pork 69.0 — 1.4 1.0 — 4.2 — 0.3 6.9
Black-eyed peas 75.9 — — 0.2 — 0.3 — — 0.5
Chickpeas 65.0 — — 0.2 — 0.2 — — 0.4
Note: Dash denotes lack of data for sugar that may be present; (0.0) denotes lack of data for sugar thought not
to be present; TR denotes trace.
1 See also http://www.nal.usda./goo/fnic/foodcomp/data/sugar.
TABLE 1.3
Tocopherols and Tocotrienols in Selected Food Products (mg/100 g)
α Tocopherol
Product α-T α-T3 β-T β-T3 γ-T γ-T3 δ-T δ-T3 Total Equivalents
Breakfast Cereals
Food Constituents
Fortified
Total 104.50 ND ND 104.50 104.50
King Vitamin 35.10 ND ND 35.10 35.10
Non-Fortified
Post Natural Raisin Bran 1.50 ND ND 1.50 1.50
Kellogg’s 1.30 ND ND 1.30 1.30
Cheese
American
2705_frame_C01 Page 9 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:06 PM
Chips
Potato
Lay’s 1.30 4.60 1.30 7.20 1.80
Wise 7.40 1.20 0.10 8.70 7.52
Tortilla
Tostitos 1.10 2.40 0.50 4.00 1.36
Tostados 1.50 1.00 0.30 2.80 1.61
9
0.00
TABLE 1.3 (Continued)
10
Fish
Salmon, waterpack
Chicken of the Sea 0.70 ND ND 0.70 0.70
Black Top 0.60 ND ND 0.60 0.60
Sardines, in tomato sauce
Spirit of Norway 3.60 0.20 0.10 3.90 3.62
Orleans 3.90 ND 0.10 4.00 3.90
Tuna, canned in oil 0.00
Starkist 1.00 4.80 1.90 7.70 1.54
Chicken of the Sea 0.98 2.60 1.10 4.68 1.27
2705_frame_C01 Page 10 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:06 PM
Nuts
Brazil nuts
Health food store 6.60 2.10 1.60 10.30 6.86
Dekalb Farmers Market 11.00 5.10 2.60 18.70 11.59
English walnuts
Diamond 1.40 9.20 0.60 11.20 2.34
Kroger 6.70 0.50 7.20 0.69
Hazelnuts
Health food store 21.50 0.10 0.01 21.61 21.51
Handbook of Nutrition and Food
Margarine, stick
Mazzola 8.40 24.40 0.40 33.20 10.85
Fleischman 7.90 23.10 0.60 31.60 10.23
Mayonnaise
Kraft 1.30 6.60 1.00 8.90 1.99
Food Constituents
Salad Dressings
Bleu Cheese
Marie’s 4.70 57.50 25.40 87.60 11.21
Kraft 2.80 49.00 14.40 66.20 8.13
French
Wishbone 3.00 66.90 27.70 97.60 10.52
Kraft 3.10 61.90 18.20 83.20 9.84
Italian
Wishbone 4.40 60.60 30.00 95.00 11.36
Kraft 4.00 62.70 17.80 84.50 10.80
Tea
Tomato Products
Barbecue sauce
11
Vegetables
Asparagus
Sample 1 1.00 0.10 ND 1.10 1.01
Sample 2 1.30 0.10 ND 1.40 1.31
Cabbage
Sample 1 0.12 ND ND 0.12 0.12
Sample 2 0.09 ND ND 0.09 0.09
Cucumbers
Sample 1 0.04 0.02 ND 0.06 0.04
Sample 2 0.09 0.02 ND 0.11 0.09
Turnip greens
Sample 1 2.90 0.10 ND 3.00 2.91
Sample 2 2.80 0.20 ND 3.00 2.82
Note: ND, not detectable.
Handbook of Nutrition and Food
2705_frame_C01 Page 13 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:06 PM
Food Constituents 13
TABLE 1.4
Occurrence of D-Tagatose in Foods1
Food Result (mg/kg) Sample Preparation Apparatus
Sterilized cow’s milk 2 to 3000 Extracted with methanol; Gas chromatography (GC),
prepared trimethylsilyl fused silica capillary column
(TMS) derivatives (18m × 0.22mm) coated with
AT-1000; carrier gas-N2 ; flame
ionization detector (FID)
Hot cocoa (processed 140 Extracted with deionized (DI) High performance liquid
with alkali) prepared water chromatography (HPLC); used
with milk Bio-Rad Aminex® HPX-87C
column (300 mm × 7.8 mm)
heated to 85º C; mobile phase-
DI water; flow rate-0.6 mL/
min; refractive index (RI)
detector
Hot cocoa prepared 190 Extracted with DI water HPLC; Bio-Rad Aminex® HPX-
with milk 87C column heated to 85ºC;
mobile phase-DI water; flow
rate-0.6 mL/min; RI detector
Powdered cow’s milk 800 Extracted three times with Paper partition
distilled water for 3h at 60ºC; chromatography, descending
column chromatography to method on Whatman no.1
remove organic acids and paper; used three solvent
bases; fractionation by systems
partition chromatography
Similac® infant 4 Extracted with 90% ethanol; GC; DB-5 fused-silica capillary
formula prepared TMS derivatives column (15 m × 0.53 mm, 1.5
µm film thickness); carrier gas-
He; FID detector
Enfamil® infant 23 Extracted with 90% aqueous GC; DB-17 fused-silica capillary
formula ethanol; prepared TMS column (15 m × 0.53 mm,1 µm
derivatives film thickness); carrier gas-He;
FID detector
Parmesan cheese 10 Extracted with 80% aqueous GC; DB-5 fused silica capillary
methanol; prepared TMS column (30 m, 0.25 µm film
derivatives thickness); carrier gas-He; FID
detector
Gjetost cheese 15 Extracted with 80% aqueous GC; DB-5 fused silica capillary
methanol; prepared TMS column (30 m, 0.25 µm film
derivatives thickness); carrier gas-He; FID
detector
Cheddar cheese 2 Extracted with 80% aqueous GC; DB-5 fused silica capillary
methanol; prepared TMS column (30 m, 0.25 µm film
derivatives thickness); carrier gas-He; FID
detector
Roquefort cheese 20 Extracted with 80% aqueous GC; DB-5 fused silica capillary
methanol; prepared TMS column (30 m, 0.25 µm film
derivatives thickness); carrier gas-He; FID
detector
Feta cheese 17 Extracted with 80% aqueous GC; DB-5 fused silica capillary
methanol; prepared TMS column (30 m, 0.25 µm film
derivatives thickness); carrier gas-He; FID
detector
2705_frame_C01 Page 14 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:06 PM
Acesulfame-K (sold 130 Nonnutritive; artificial Tabletop sweetener, chewing gum, dry beverage This is actually the potassium salt of the 6-methyl
under brand Sunette) mixes, puddings derivative of a group of chemicals called
oxathiazinone dioxides; approved by the FDA in
1988
Aspartame 180 Nutritive; artificial In most diet sodas; also used in cold cereals, drink Composed of the two naturally occurring amino
mixes, gelatin, puddings, toppings, dairy products, acids, aspartic acid and phenylalanine; sweeter than
and at the table by the consumer; not used in sugar, therefore less required, hence fewer calories
cooking due to lack of stability when heated
Cyclamate 30 Nonnutritive; artificial Tabletop sweetener and in drugs in Canada and 40 Discovered in 1937; FDA banned all cyclamate-
other countries containing beverages in 1969 and all cyclamate-
2705_frame_C01 Page 15 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:06 PM
SRI Oxime V (Perilla 450 Nonnutritive; artificial None approved Derived from extract of Perilla namkinensis; clean
sugar) taste; needs research; used as sweetening agent in
Japan
Stevioside 300 Nutritive; natural None approved Isolated from the leaves of the wild shrub Stevia
rebaudiana Bertoni; used by the people of Paraguay
to sweeten drinks; limited evidence suggests
nontoxic to humans
Rebaudioside A is isolated from the same plant and
is said to taste superior to stevioside; its chemical
structure is very similar to stevioside and it is 190
2705_frame_C01 Page 17 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:06 PM
TABLE 1.6
Terms used to Describe the Functions of Food Additives
Term Function
Anticaking agents and free-flow agents Substances added to finely powdered or crystalline food products to
prevent caking
Antimicrobial agents Substances used to preserve food by preventing growth of
microorganisms and subsequent spoilage, including fungicides,
mold and yeast inhibitors, and bacteriocides
Antioxidants Substances used to preserve food by retarding deterioration,
rancidity, or discoloration due to oxidation
Colors and coloring adjuncts Substances used to impart, preserve, or enhance the color or shading
of a food, including color stabilizers, color fixatives, color-retention
agents
Curing and pickling agents Substances imparting a unique flavor and/or color to a food, usually
producing an increase in shelf life stability
Dough strengtheners Substances used to modify starch and gluten, thereby producing a
more stable dough
Drying agents Substances with moisture-absorbing ability, used to maintain an
environment of low moisture
Emulsifiers and emulsifier salts Substances which modify surface tension of two (or more) immiscible
solutions to establish a uniform dispersion of components; called
an emulsion
Enzymes Substances used to improve food processing and the quality of the
finished food
Firming agents Substances added to precipitate residual pectin, thus strengthening
the supporting tissue and preventing its collapse during processing
Flavor enhancers Substances added to supplement, enhance, or modify the original
taste and/or aroma of a food without imparting a characteristic taste
or aroma of its own
Flavoring agents and adjuvants Substances added to impart or help impart a taste or aroma in food
Flour treating agents Substances added to milled flour, at the mill, to improve its color
and/or baking qualities, including bleaching and maturing agents
Formulation aids Substances used to promote or produce a desired physical state or
texture in food, including carriers, binders, fillers, plasticizers, film-
formers, and tableting aids
Fumigants Volatile substances used for controlling insects or pests
Humectants Hygroscopic substances incorporated in food to promote retention
of moisture, including moisture-retention agents and antidusting
agents
Leavening agents Substances used to produce or stimulate production of carbon
dioxide in baked goods to impart a light texture, including yeast,
yeast foods, and calcium salts
Lubricants and release agents Substances added to food contact surfaces to prevent ingredients and
finished products from sticking to them
Nonnutritive sweeteners Substances having less than 2% of the caloric value of sucrose per
equivalent unit of sweetening capacity
Nutrient supplements Substances which are necessary for the body’s nutritional and
metabolic processes
Nutritive sweeteners Substances having greater than 2% equivalent unit of sweetening
capacity
Oxidizing and reducing agents Substances which chemically oxidize or reduce another food
ingredient, thereby producing a more stable product
pH control agents Substances added to change or maintain active acidity or alkalinity,
including buffers, acids, alkalis, and neutralizing agents
Processing aids Substances used as manufacturing aids to enhance the appeal or
utility of a food or food component, including clarifying agents,
clouding agents, catalysts, flocculents, filter aids, and crystallization
inhibitors
2705_frame_C01 Page 19 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:06 PM
Food Constituents 19
TABLE 1.7
Specific Food Additives and Their Functions
Name Function1 Food Use and Comments2
Acetic acid pH control, preservative Acid of vinegar is acetic acid; miscellaneous and/or
general purposes; many food uses; GRAS additive
Adipic acid pH control Buffer and neutralizing agent; use in confectionery;
GRAS additive
Ammonium alginate Stabilizer and thickener, Extracted from seaweed; widespread food use; GRAS
texturizer additive
Annatto Color Extracted from seeds of Bixa crellana; butter, cheese,
margarine, shortening, and sausage casings; coloring
foods in general
Arabinogalactan Stabilizer and thickener, Extracted from Western larch; widespread food use;
texturizer bodying agent in essential oils, nonnutritive
sweeteners, flavor bases, nonstandardized dressings,
and pudding mixes
Ascorbic acid Nutrient, antioxidant, Widespread use in foods to prevent rancidity,
(Vitamin C) preservative browning; used in meat curing; GRAS additive
Aspartame Sweetener; sugar substitute Soft drinks, chewing gum, powdered beverages,
whipped toppings, puddings, gelatin; tabletop
sweetener
Azodicarbonamide Flour treating agent Aging and bleaching ingredient in cereal flour
Benzoic acid Preservative Occurs in nature in free and combined forms;
widespread food use; GRAS additive
Benzoyl peroxide Flour treating agent Bleaching agent in flour; may be used in some cheeses
Beta-apo-8′ carotenal Color Natural food color; general use not to exceed 30 mg/
lb or pt of food
2705_frame_C01 Page 20 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:06 PM
Food Constituents 21
Food Constituents 23
TABLE 1.8
Mycotoxins/Bacterial Toxins in Foods
Toxins from Bacteria
Staphylococcus aureus: α exotoxin (lethal, dermonecrotic, hemolytic, leucolytic)
β exotoxin (hemolytic)
γ exotoxin (hemolytic)
δ exotoxin (dermonecrotic, hemolytic)
leucocidin (leucolytic)
exfoliative toxin
enterotoxin
Clostridium botulinum (four strains): Toxins are lettered as A,B, Cα (1,2,D), Cβ, D(C1 and D), E, F, G. All of the
toxics are proteolytic and produce NH3, H2S, CO2, and volatile amines. The toxins are hemolytic and neurotoxic
Escherichi coli (several serotypes): Induce diarrhea, vomiting; produce toxins that are heat labile
Bacillus cereus (several types): Produces heat labile enterotoxins that induce vomiting and diarrhea
Mycotoxins Produced by Fungi
Aspergillus flavis
Claviceps purpura
Fusarium graminearum
Aspergillus ochraceus
Aspergillus parasiticus
Penicillium viridicatum
TABLE 1.9
Antinutrients in Food
Type of Factor(s) Effect of Factor(s) Legumes Containing the Factor(s)
Antivitamin factors Interfere with the actions of certain
vitamins
Antivitamin A Lipoxidase oxidizes and destroys Soybeans
carotene (provitamin A)
Antivitamin B12 Increases requirement for Vitamin Soybeans
B12
Antivitamin D Causes rickets unless extra vitamin Soybeans
D is provided
Antivitamin E Damage to the liver and muscles Alfalfa, Common beans (Phaseolus
vulgaris), Peas (Pisum sativum)
2705_frame_C01 Page 25 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:06 PM
Food Constituents 25
Relatively heat resistant protease inhibitors include the antitryptic factor in milk, the
alcohol-precipitable and nondialyzable trypsin inhibitor in alfalfa, the chymotrypsin inhib-
itor in potato, the kidney bean inhibitor, and the trypsin inhibitor in lima beans.
Lectin is the general term for plant proteins that have highly specific binding sites for
carbohydrates. They are widely distributed among various sources such as soybeans,
peanuts, jack beans, mung beans, lima beans, kidney beans, fava beans, vetch, yellow wax
beans, hyacinth beans, lentils, peas, potatoes, bananas, mangoes and wheat germ. Most
plant lectins are glycoproteins, except concanavalin A from jack beans, which is carbohy-
drate-free. The most toxic lectins in food include ricin in castor bean (oral toxic dose in
man: 150-200 mg; intravenous toxic dose: 20 mg), and the lectins of kidney bean and
hyacinth bean. The mode of action of lectins may be related to their ability to bind to
specific cell receptors in a way comparable to that of antibodies. Because they are able to
agglutinate red blood cells, they are also known as hemaglutinins. The binding of bean
lectin on rat intestinal mucosal cells has been demonstrated in vitro, and it has been
suggested that this action is responsible for the oral toxicity of the lectins. Such bindings
may disturb the intestines’ absorptive capacity for nutrients and other essential com-
pounds. The lectins, being proteins, can easily be inactivated by moist heat. Germination
decreases the hemaglutinating activity in varieties of peas and species of beans.
Type B antinutritives. Substances interfering with the absorption or metabolic utiliza-
tion of minerals are also known as antiminerals. Although they are toxic per se, the
amounts present in foods seldom cause acute intoxication under normal food consump-
tion. However, they may harm the organism under suboptimum nutriture. The most
important type B antinutritives are phytic acid, oxalates, and glucosinolates.
Phytic acid, or myoinositol hexaphosphate, is a naturally occurring strong acid which
binds to many types of bivalent and trivalent heavy metal ions, forming insoluble salts.
Consequently, phytic acid reduces the availability of many minerals and essential trace
elements. The degree of insolubility of these salts appears to depend on the nature of the
metal, the pH of the solution, and for certain metals, on the presence of another metal.
Synergism between two metallic ions in the formation of phytate complexes has also been
observed. For instance, zinc-calcium phytate precipitates maximally at pH 6, which is also
the pH of the duodenum, where mainly calcium and trace metals are absorbed. Phytates
occur in a wide variety of foods, such as cereals (e.g. wheat, rye, maize, rice, barley),
legumes and vegetables (e.g. bean, soybean, lentil, pea, vetch); nuts and seeds (e.g. walnut,
hazelnut, almond, peanut, cocoa bean), and spices and flavoring agents (e.g. caraway,
coriander, cumin, mustard, nutmeg). From several experiments in animals and man it has
been observed that phytates exert negative effects on the availability of calcium, iron,
magnesium, zinc, and other trace essential elements. These effects may be minimized
considerably, if not eliminated, by increased intake of essential minerals. In the case of
calcium, intake of cholecalciferol must also be adequate, since the activity of phytates on
calcium absorption is enhanced when this vitamin is inadequate or limiting. In many
foodstuffs the phytic acid level can be reduced by phytase, an enzyme occurring in plants,
that catalyzes the dephosphorylation of phytic acid.
Oxalic acid is a strong acid which forms water soluble Na+ and K+ salts, but less soluble
salts with alkaline earth and other bivalent metals. Calcium oxalate is particularly insol-
uble at neutral or alkaline pH, whereas it readily dissolves in acid medium. Oxalates
mainly exert effects on the absorption of calcium. These effects must be considered in
terms of the oxalate/calcium ratio (in milliequivalent/milliequivalent): foods having a
ratio greater than 1 may have negative effects on calcium availability, whereas foods with
a ratio of 1 or below do not. Examples of foodstuffs having a ratio greater than 1 are:
rhubarb (8.5), spinach (4.3), beet (2.5 to 5.1), cocoa (2.6), coffee (3.9), tea (1.1), and potato
(1.6). Harmful oxalates in food may be removed by soaking in water. Consumption of
2705_frame_C01 Page 27 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:06 PM
Food Constituents 27
calcium-rich foods (e.g. dairy products and seafood), as well as augmented cholecalciferol
intake, are recommended when large amounts of high oxalate food are consumed.
A variety of plants contain a third group of type B antinutritives, the glucosinolates,
also known as thioglucosides. Many glucosinolates are goitrogenic. They have a general
structure, and yield on hydrolysis the active or actual goitrogens, such as thiocyanates,
isothiocyanates, cyclic sulfur compounds, and nitriles. Three types of goiter can be iden-
tified: 1) cabbage goiter, 2) brassica seed goiter, and 3) legume goiter. Cabbage goiter, also
known as struma, is induced by excessive consumption of cabbage. It seems that cabbage
goitrogens inhibit iodine uptake by directly affecting the thyroid gland. Cabbage goiter
can be treated by iodine supplementation. Brassica seed goiter can result from the con-
sumption of the seeds of Brassica plants (e.g. rutabaga, turnip, cabbage, rape) which
contain goitrogens that prevent thyroxine synthesis. This type of goiter can only be treated
by administration of the thyroid hormone. Legume goiter is induced by goitrogens in
legumes like soybeans and peanuts. It differs from cabbage goiter in that the thyroid gland
does not lose its activity for iodine. Inhibition of the intestinal absorption of iodine or the
reabsorption of thyroxine has been shown in this case. Legume goiter can be treated by
iodine therapy. Glucosinolates which have been shown to induce goiter, at least in exper-
imental animals, are found in several foods and feedstuffs: broccoli (buds), brussels sprouts
(head), cabbage (head), cauliflower (buds), garden cress (leaves), horseradish (roots), kale
(leaves), kohlrabi (head), black and white mustard (seed), radish (root), rape (seed), ruta-
baga (root), and turnips (root and seed). One of the most potent glucosinolates is progoitrin
from the seeds of Brassica plants and the roots of rutabaga. Hydrolysis of this compound
yields 1-cyano-2-hydroxy-3-butene, 1-cyano-2-hydroxy-3,4-butylepisulfide, 2-hydroxy-
3,4-butenylisothiocyanate, and (S)-5-vinyl-oxazolidone-2-thione, also known as goitrin.
The latter product interferes, together with its R-enantiomer, in the iodination of thyroxine
precursors, so that the resulting goiter cannot be treated by iodine therapy.
Type C antinutritives. Naturally occurring substances which can decompose vitamins,
form unabsorbable complexes with them, or interfere with their digestive or metabolic
utilization. Also known as antivitamins. The most important type C antinutritives are
ascorbic acid oxidase, antithiamine factors, and antipyridoxine factors.
Ascorbic acid oxidase is a copper-containing enzyme that catalyzes the oxidation of free
ascorbic acid to diketogluconic acid, oxalic acid, and other oxidation products. It has been
reported to occur in many fruits (e.g. peaches, bananas) and vegetables (e.g. cucumbers,
pumpkins, lettuce, cress, cauliflowers, spinach, green beans, green peas, carrots, potatoes,
tomatoes, beets, kohlrabi). The enzyme is active between pH 4 and 7 (optimum pH 5.6 to
6.0); its optimum temperature is 38°C. The enzyme is released when plant cells are broken.
Therefore, if fruits and vegetables are cut, the vitamin C content decreases gradually.
Ascorbic acid oxidase can be inhibited effectively at pH 2 or by blanching at around 100°C.
Ascorbic acid can also be protected against ascorbic acid oxidase by substances of plant
origin. Flavonoids, such as the flavonoles quercetin and kempferol, present in fruits and
vegetables, strongly inhibit the enzyme.
A second group of type C antinutritives are the antithiamine factors, which interact with
thiamine, also known as vitamin B1. Antithiamine factors can be grouped as thiaminases,
catechols, and tannins. Thiaminases, which are enzymes that split thiamine at the meth-
ylene linkage, are found in many freshwater and saltwater fish species, and in certain
species of crab and clam. They contain a nonprotein coenzyme structurally related to
hemin. This coenzyme is the actual antithiamine factor. Thiaminases in fish and other
sources can be destroyed by cooking. Antithiamine factors of plant origin include catechols
and tannins. The most well known ortho-catechol is found in bracken fern. In fact, there
are two types of heat-stable antithiamine factors in this fern, one of which has been
identified as caffeic acid, which can also by hydrolyzed from chlorogenic acid (found in
2705_frame_C01 Page 28 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:06 PM
Aluminum (Al) Food additives, mainly pre- Abnormally large intakes of Distribution: Aluminum is Prevention: Based on the ev- Aluminum toxicity has been
sented in such items as aluminum irritate the di- widely used throughout idence presented, no pre- reported in patients receiv-
baking powder, pickles, gestive tract. Also, unusual the world. ventative measures are ing renal dialysis.
and processed cheeses. conditions have sometimes Magnitude: The U.S. uses recommended.
Aluminum-containing ant- resulted in the absorption more aluminum than any
acids. of sufficient aluminum other mineral except iron.
from antacids to cause However, known cases of
brain damage. Aluminum aluminum toxicity are rare.
may form non-absorbable
complexes with essential
2705_frame_C01 Page 29 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:06 PM
nana-shaped, dense mass and convulsions, and ex- rye. But, normally, screen- more than 0.3% ergot are ly used in the treatment of
from 1/4-3/4 in. (6-9 mm) treme pain. When smaller ing grains before process- classed as "ergoty." In Can- migraine headaches.
long. amounts of ergot are con- ing alleviates ergotism in ada, government regula-
sumed over an extended people. tions prohibit more than
period, ergotism is charac- 0.1% ergot in feeds.
terized by gangrene of the Treatment: An ergot-free di-
fingertips and toes, caused et; good nursing; treatment
by blood vessel and muscle by a doctor.
contraction stopping blood
circulation in the extremi-
2705_frame_C01 Page 31 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:06 PM
Fluorine (F) (fluorosis) Ingesting excessive quanti- Acute fluoride poisoning: Distribution: The water in Prevention: Avoid the use of Fluorine is a cumulative poi-
ties of fluorine through ei- Abdominal pain, diarrhea, parts of Arkansas, Califor- food and water containing son.
ther the food or water, or a vomiting, excessive saliva- nia, South Carolina, and excessive fluorine. The total fluoride in the hu-
combination of these. tion, thirst, perspiration, Texas contains excess fluo- Treatment: Any damage man body averages 2.57 g.
Except in certain industrial and painful spasms of the rine. Occasionally, may be permanent, but Susceptibility to fluoride
exposures, the intake of flu- limbs. throughout the U.S., high- people who have not de- toxicity is increased by de-
oride inhaled from the air Chronic fluoride poisoning: fluorine phosphates are veloped severe symptoms ficiencies of calcium, vita-
is only a small fraction of Abnormal teeth (especially used in mineral mixtures. may be helped to some ex- min C, and protein.
the total fluoride intake in mottled enamel) during the Magnitude: Generally tent if the source of excess Virtually all foods contain
man. first 8 years of life; brittle speaking, fluorosis is limit- fluorine is eliminated. trace amounts of fluoride.
Pesticides containing fluo- bones. Other effects, pre- ed to high-fluorine areas. High dietary levels of calci-
rides, including those used dicted from animal studies, Only a few instances of um and magnesium may
to control insects, weeds, may include loss of body health effects in man have reduce the absorption and
and rodents. weight and altered struc- been attributed to airborne utilization of fluoride.
Although water is the prin- ture and function of the fluoride, and they occurred
cipal source of fluoride in thyroid gland and kidneys. in persons living in the vi-
an average human diet in Water containing 3-10 ppm cinity of fluoride-emitting
the U.S., fluoride is fre- of fluoride may cause mot- industries.
quently contained in tooth- tling of the teeth.
paste, tooth powder, An average daily intake of
chewing gums, mouth- 20-80 mg of fluoride over a
washes, vitamin supple- period of 10-20 years will
ments, and mineral result in crippling fluoro-
supplements. sis.
Handbook of Nutrition and Food
Lead (Pb) Consuming food or medici- Symptoms develop rapidly Distribution: Predominant- Prevention: Avoid inhaling Lead is a cumulative poison.
nal products (including in young children, but ly among children who or consuming lead. When incorporated in the
health food products) con- slowly in mature people. may eat chips of lead-con- Treatment: soil, nearly all the lead is
taminated with lead. Acute lead poisoning: Col- taining paints, peeled off Acute lead poisoning: An converted into forms that
Inhaling the poison as a dust ic, cramps, diarrhea or con- from painted wood. emetic (induce vomiting), are not available to plants.
by workers in such indus- stipation, leg cramps, and Magnitude: The Centers for followed by drinking plen- Any lead taken up by plant
tries as painting, lead min- drowsiness. Disease Control, Atlanta, ty of milk and 1/2 oz (14 g) roots tends to stay in the
Food Constituents
ing, and refining. The most severe form of lead GA, estimates that (1) lead of Epsom salts in 1/2 glass roots, rather than move up
Inhaling airborne lead dis- poisoning, encountered in poisoning claims the lives of water. to the top of the plant.
charged into the air from infants and in heavy drink- of 200 children each year, Chronic lead poisoning: Re- Lead poisoning can be diag-
auto exhaust fumes. ers of illicitly distilled and (2) 400,000-600,000 move the source of lead. nosed positively by analyz-
Consuming food crops con- whiskey, is characterized children have elevated lead Sometimes treated by ad- ing the blood tissue for lead
taminated by lead being by profound disturbances levels in the blood. ministration of magnesium content; clinical signs of
deposited on the leaves of the central nervous sys- Lead poisoning has been re- or lead sulphate solution as lead poisoning usually
and other edible portions tem and permanent dam- duced significantly with a laxative and antidote on are manifested at blood
of the plant by direct fall- age to the brain; damage to the use of lead-free paint. the lead in the digestive lead concentrations above
out. the kidneys; and shortened system, followed by potas- 80 µg/100 grams.
2705_frame_C01 Page 33 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:06 PM
Consuming food or water life span of the erthrocytes. sium iodide which cleanses
contaminated by contact Chronic lead poisoning: the tracts.
with lead pipes or utensils. Colic, constipation, lead Currently, treatment of lead
Old houses in which the in- palsy especially in the fore- poisoning makes use of
teriors were painted with arm and fingers, the symp- chemicals that bind the
leaded paints prior to 1945, toms of chronic nephritis, metal in the body and help
with the chipped wall paint and sometimes mental de- in its removal.
eaten by children. pression, convulsions, and
Such miscellaneous sources a blue line at the edge of
as illicitly distilled whis- the gums.
key, improperly lead-
glazed earthenware, old
battery casings used as fu-
el, and toys containing
lead.
33
34
trial operations and is used of mercury are dissimilar. dustrial operations or used FDA prohibits use of mercu-
in herbicide and fungicide The organic compounds of in herbicide or fungicide ry-treated grain for food or
treatments. mercury, such as the vari- treatments. feed.
Mercury poisoning has oc- ous fungicides (1) affect the Magnitude: Limited. But Grain crops produced from
curred where mercury central nervous system, about 1200 cases of mercu- mercury-treated seed and
from industrial plants has and (2) are not corrosive. ry poisoning identified in crops produced on soils
been discharged into water, The inorganic compounds of Japan in the 1950s were treated with mercury her-
then accumulated as meth- mercury include mainly traced to the consumption bicides have not been
ylmercury in fish and shell- mercuric chloride, a disin- of fish and shellfish from found to contain harmful
fish. fectant; mercurous chloride Japan's Minamata Bay con- concentrations of this ele-
Accidental consumption of (calomel), a cathartic; and taminated with methyl- ment.
seed grains treated with elemental mercury. mercury. Some of the off-
fungicides that contain Commonly the toxic symp- spring of exposed mothers
mercury, used for the con- toms are corrosive gastro- were born with birth de-
trol of fungus diseases of intestinal effects, such as fects, and many victims
oats, wheat, barley, and vomiting, bloody diarrhea, suffered central nervous
flax. and necrosis of the alimen- system damage. Another
tary mucosa. outbreak of mercury toxic-
ity occurred in Iraq, where
more than 6000 people
were hospitalized after eat-
ing bread made from
wheat that had been treat-
ed with methylmercury.
Handbook of Nutrition and Food
Polychlorinated biphenyls Sources of contamination to Clinical effects on people Distribution: PCBs are Although the production of
(PCBs), industrial chemi- man include: are: an eruption of the skin widespread. Their use by PCBs was halted in 1977
cals; chlorinated hydrocar- 1. Contaminated foods resembling acne, visual industry is declining. and the importing of PCBs
bons which may cause 2. Mammals or birds that disturbances, jaundice, was banned January 1,
cancer when taken into the have fed on contaminated numbness, and spasms. 1979, the chemicals had
food supply. foods of fish. Newborn infants from been widely used for 40
3. Residues on foods that mothers who have been years, and they are excep-
Food Constituents
ple highly susceptible to and chronic digestive dis- haps areas in other states in from a wide area, and (3)
selenium toxicity. turbances. the Great Plains and Rocky the metabolic processes
Normally, people who have Mountains. Also, in Canada. normally convert excess se-
consumed large excesses of Magnitude: Selenium toxic- lenium into harmless sub-
selenium excrete it as tri- ity in people is relatively stances which are excreted
methyl selenide in the rare. in the urine or breath.
urine, and/or as dimethyl
selenide on the breath. The
latter substance has an
odor resembling garlic.
Tin (Sn) From acid fruits and vegeta- Methylated tin is a neuro- Distribution: Worldwide. Prevention: Tin cans are Currently, not much is
bles canned in tin cans. The toxin — a toxin that attacks Magnitude: The use of tin in rare. Many tin cans are known about the amount
acids in such foods as citrus the central nervous system, advanced industrial societ- coated on the inside with of tin in the human diet.
fruits and tomato products the symptoms of which are ies has increased 14-fold enamel or other materials.
can leach tin from the in- numbness of the fingers over the last 10 years. Most cans are steel.
side of the can. Then the tin and lips followed by a loss
is ingested with the canned of speech and hearing.
food. In the digestive tract Eventually, the afflicted
tin goes through a methy- person becomes spastic,
lation process in which then coma and death fol-
nontoxic tin is converted to low.
methylated tin, which is
toxic.
Adapted from Ensminger et al. Foods & Nutrition Encyclopedia, 2nd ed., CRC Press, Boca Raton, 1994, pp. 1790-1803.
Handbook of Nutrition and Food
2705_frame_C01 Page 37 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:06 PM
Food Constituents 37
TABLE 1.11
Edible Weeds
Common Name Scientific Name Use
Maple tree Acer (many varieties) Sap can be collected and reduced by evaporation
into syrup.
Sweetflag Acorus calamus Rootstocks or stems are edible with a sweet taste.
Young shoots can be used as salad.
Quackgrass Agropyron repens L. (has many Rootstocks can be chewed or scorched to use as
other names) coffee substitute; seeds can be used for breadstuffs
and for beer.
Waterplantain Alisma spp. Root is starchy and edible; should be dried to
reduce acrid taste. Three varieties of this plant can
be toxic.
Garlic mustard Alliaria petiolata Leaf, stem, flower, and fruit are spicy and hot. If
cooked, some of this spiciness is lost. Several
plants that resemble this one are not edible.
Wild garlic Allium vineale L. Used as an herbal seasoning; there are similar
plants that are not garlic in aroma; they can be
toxic.
Pigweed Amaranthus spp. Leaves from a young plant can be eaten raw as
salad or boiled like spinach.
Serviceberry Amelanchier spp. Berries are rich and sweet; pits and leaves contain
cyanide; also called shadbush or juneberry.
Hog peanut Amphicarpaea bracteata Fleshy seedpods found underground are edible.
Ground nut Apios americana Root can be eaten raw or cooked. Seeds can also be
Medik used. Europeans use the term ground nut to refer
to peanuts. This is not the same plant.
Common burdock Arctium minus Young leaves can be eaten as salad; roots are carrot-
like in shape and can be cooked (boiled) and
eaten. A little baking soda added to the cooking
water improves tenderness and flavor. Scorched
roots can be used as a coffee substitute.
Giant reed Arundo donax L. Young shoots and rootstalks are sometimes sweet
enough to be used as a substitute for sugar cane.
Infusions of the root stocks can have some herbal
properties; local weak anesthetic and in some
instances either a hypotensive agent or
hypertensive agent (depends on dose).
Milkweed Asclepias syriaca L. Young shoots, flower buds boiled with at least two
changes of water. The plant contains cardiac
glycosides and can be toxic.
Pawpaw Asimina triloba L. The aromatic fruits are quite tasty. Seeds and bark
have pesticide properties and should be handled
with caution.
Wild oat Avena Fatua L. Seeds are similar to cultivated oats. Useful when
dried and ground as a cereal. Seeds can be
scorched and used as a coffee substitute.
Wintercress/Yellow Barbarea spp. (B. vcma; B. Young leaves and stems can be used as a salad.
rocket vulgaris)
Birches Betula spp. (Betulacea) Spring sap can be reduced to a syrup; bark can be
boiled for tea.
Mustard; black or Brassica nigra Seeds used to prepare mustard; leaves can be
yellow boiled for consumption, as can young stalks.
Bromegrass Bromus japonicus Seeds can be dried, ground, and used as cereal.
Shepherd’s purse Capsella bursa-pastoris Seeds are used as a spicy pot herb. Tender young
shoots can be eaten raw. Has a peppery taste.
Bittercress Cardamme bulbosa Roots can be ground for a horseradish substitute;
leaves and stems can be added to salad. The roots
of some species (C. bulbosa) can be toxic.
2705_frame_C01 Page 38 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:06 PM
Food Constituents 39
Actaea sp. to 3 ft (1 m) tall from a thick America from Canada south to glycoside or essential oil which symptoms persisting for
root; compound leaves; small, Georgia, Alabama, Louisiana, causes severe inflammation of hours.
white flowers; white or red Oklahoma, and the northern the digestive tract. Treatment may be a gastric
berries with several seeds Rockies; red-fruited western Symptoms: Acute stomach lavage or vomiting.
borne in short, terminal baneberry from Alaska to cramps, headache, increased Bright red berries attract
clusters. central California, Arizona, pulse, vomiting, delirium, children.
Toxic parts: All parts, but Montana, and South Dakota. dizziness, and circulatory
primarily roots and berries. failure.
Buckeye; Horsechestnut Description: Shrub or tree; Various species throughout the Poisoning: Toxic parts contain By making a “tea” from the
2705_frame_C01 Page 41 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:06 PM
Aesculus sp. deciduous, opposite, United States and Canada; the glycoside, esculin. leaves and twigs or by eating
palmately, divided leaves with some cultivated as Symptoms: Nervous twitching the seeds, children have been
5-9 leaflets on a long stalk; red, ornamentals, others growing of muscles, weakness, lack of poisoned.
yellow, or white flowers; 2- to wild. coordination, dilated pupils, Honey collected from the
3-valved, capsule fruit; with nausea, vomiting, diarrhea, buckeye flower may also cause
thick, leathery husk enclosing depression, paralysis, and poisoning.
1-6 brown shiny seeds. stupor. Roots, branches, and fruits have
Toxic parts: Leaves, twigs, been used to stupefy fish in
flowers, and seeds. ponds.
Treatment usually is a gastric
lavage or vomiting.
Buttercup Description: Annual or Widely distributed in woods, Poisoning: The alkaloid Sap and leaves may cause
Ranunculus sp. perennial herb growing to meadows, pastures, and along protoanemonin, which can dermatitis.
16–32 in. (41–81 cm) high; streams throughout temperate injure the digestive system and Cows poisoned by buttercups
leaves alternate entire to and cold locations. ulcerate the skin. produce bitter milk or milk
compound, and largely basal; Symptoms: Burning sensation with a reddish color.
yellow flowers borne singly or of the mouth, nervousness,
in clusters on ends of seed nausea, vomiting, low blood
stalks; small fruits, 1-seeded pressure, weak pulse,
pods. depression, and convulsions.
Toxic parts: Entire plant.
41
42
Chinaberry Description: Deciduous tree A native of Asia introduced as Poisoning: Most result from Six to eight berries can cause the
Melia azedarach 20–40 ft (6–12 m) tall; twice, an ornamental in the United eating pulp of berries; toxic death of a child.
pinnately divided leaves and States; common in the principle is a resinoid with The berries have been used to
toothed or lobed leaflets, southern United States and narcotic effects. make insecticide and flea
purple flowers borne in lower altitudes in Hawaii; has Symptoms: Nausea, vomiting, powder.
clusters; yellow, wrinkled, become naturalized in old diarrhea, irregular breathing,
rounded berries which persist fields, pastures, around and respiratory distress.
throughout the winter. buildings, and along fence
Toxic parts: Berries, bark, rows.
flowers, and leaves.
Death camas Description: Perennial herb Various species occur Poisoning: Due to the alkaloids The members of Lewis and
Zigadenus paniculatus resembling wild onions but the throughout the United States zygadenine, veratrine, and Clark Expedition made flour
onion odor lacking; long, and Canada; all are more or others. from the bulbs and suffered the
slender leaves with parallel less poisonous. Symptoms: Excessive symptoms of poisoning. Later
veins; pale yellow to pink salivation, muscular some pioneers were killed
flowers in clusters on slender weakness, slow heart rate, low when they mistook death
seedstalks; fruit a 3-celled blood pressure, subnormal camas for wild onions or
capsule. temperature, nausea, garlic.
Toxic parts: Entire plant, vomiting, diarrhea,
especially the bulb. prostration, coma, and
sometimes death.
Handbook of Nutrition and Food
Dogbane (Indian hemp) Description: Perennial herbs Various species growing Poisoning: Only suspect since it Compounds extracted from
Apocynum cannabinum with milky juice and throughout North America in contains the toxic glycoside, roots of dogbane have been
somewhat woody stems; fields and forests, and along cymarin and is poisonous to used to make a heart
simple, smooth, and streams and roadsides. animals. stimulant.
oppositely paired leaves; bell- Symptoms: In animals,
shaped, small, white to pink increased temperature and
flowers borne in clusters at pulse, cold extremities,
Food Constituents
long stalks; white, pink, rose, in flower gardens. Symptoms: Burning sensation Seeds are used in some
blue, or purple flowers each in the mouth and skin, low commercial lice remedies.
with a spur; fruit a many- blood pressure, nervousness,
seeded, 3-celled capsule. weakness, prickling of the
Toxic parts: Entire plant. skin, nausea, vomiting,
depression, convulsions, and
death within 6 hours if eaten
in large quantities.
Laurel (Mountain laurel) Description: Large evergreen Found in moist woods and Poisoning: Contains the toxic The Mountain laurel is the state
Kalmia latifolia shrubs growing to 35 ft (11 m) along streams in eastern resinoid, andromedotoxin. flower of Connecticut and
tall; alternate leaves dark green Canada southward in the Symptoms: Increased Pennsylvania.
on top and bright green Appalachian Mountains and salivation, watering of eyes By making “tea” from the leaves
underneath; white to rose Piedmont, and sometimes in and nose, loss of energy, slow or by sucking on the flowers,
flowers in terminal clusters; the eastern coastal plain. pulse, vomiting, low blood children have been poisoned.
fruit in a dry capsule. pressure, lack of coordination,
Toxic parts: Leaves, twigs, convulsions, and progressive
flowers, and pollen grains. paralysis until eventual death.
45
46
berries. throughout North America. pain, diarrhea, slow pulse, and people eat the berries or make
Toxic parts: All parts, especially collapse; possibly nausea, “tea” from the berries.
the berries. vomiting, nervousness, Indians chewed the leaves to
difficult breathing, delirium, relieve toothache.
pupil dilation, and abortion; in
sufficient amounts, death
within a few hours.
Monkshood Description: Perennial herb Rich, moist soil in meadows and Poisoning: Due to several Small amounts can be lethal.
(Wolfsbane) about 2–5 ft (61–152 cm) high; along streams from western alkaloids, including aconine Death in humans reported from
Aconitum columbianum alternate, petioled leaves Canada south to California and aconitine. eating the plant or extracts
which are palmately divided and New Mexico. Symptoms: Burning sensation made from it.
into segments with pointed of the mouth and skin; nausea, It has been mistaken for
tips; generally dark blue vomiting, diarrhea, muscular horseradish.
flowers with a prominent weakness, and spasms, weak,
hood; seed in a short-beaked irregular pulse, paralysis of
capsule. respiration, dimmed vision,
Toxic parts: Entire plant, convulsions, and death within
especially roots and seeds. a few hours.
47
48
Toxic parts: Entire plant, hands, irregular heartbeat, Honey made from oleander
especially the leaves. dilation of pupils, drowsiness, flower nectar is poisonous.
unconsciousness, paralysis of
respiration, convulsions,
coma, death within a day.
Peyote (Mescal buttons) Description: Hemispherical, Native to southern Texas and Poisoning: Contains mescaline, The effects of chewing fresh or
Lophophora williamsii spineless member of the cactus northern Mexico; cultivated in lophophorine and other dried “buttons” of peyote are
family growing from carrot- other areas. alkaloids. similar to those produced by
shaped roots; low, rounded Symptoms: Illusions and LSD, only milder.
2705_frame_C01 Page 49 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:06 PM
sections with a tuft of yellow- hallucinations with vivid color, In some states, peyote is
white hairs on top; flower from anxiety, muscular tremors and recognized as a drug.
the center of the plant, white to twitching, vomiting, diarrhea, Peyote has long been used by
rose-pink; pink berry when blurred vision, wakefulness, the Indians and Mexicans in
ripe; black seeds. forgetfulness, muscular religious ceremonies.
Toxic parts: Entire plant, relaxation, dizziness.
especially the buttons.
Poison hemlock Description: Biennial herb with A native of Eurasia, now a weed Poisoning: The poisonous Poisoning occurs when the
(poison parsley) a hairless purple-spotted or in meadows, and along roads alkaloid coniine and other leaves are mistaken for parsley,
Conium maculatum lined, hollow stem growing up and ditches throughout the related alkaloids. the roots for turnips, or the
to 8 ft (2.4 m) tall; turniplike, United States and southern Symptoms: Burning sensation seeds for anise.
long, solid taproot; large, Canada where moisture is in the mouth and throat, Toxic quantities seldom
alternate, pinnately divided sufficient. nervousness, dyscoordination, consumed because the plant
leaves; small, white flowers in dilated pupils, muscular has such an unpleasant odor
umbrella-shaped clusters, dry; weakness, weakened and and taste.
ribbed, 2-part capsule fruit. slowed heartbeat, convulsions, Assumed by some to be the
Toxic parts: Entire plant, coma, death. poison drunk by Socrates.
primarily seeds and root.
49
50
fruits. fruit.
Pokeweed Description: Shrublike herb Native to the eastern United Poisoning: Highest Young tender leaves and stems
(Pokeberry) with a large fleshy taproot; States and southeastern concentration of poison mainly of pokeweed are often cooked
Phytolacca americana large, entire, oblong leaves Canada. in roots; contains the bitter as greens.
which are pointed; white to glycoside, saponin and Cooked berries are used for pies
purplish flowers in clusters at glycoprotein. without harm.
ends of branches; mature fruit Symptoms: Burning and bitter It is one of the most dangerous
a dark purple berry with red taste in mouth, stomach poisonous plants because
juice. cramps, nausea, vomiting, people prepare it improperly.
Toxic parts: Rootstalk, leaves, diarrhea, drowsiness, slowed
and stems. breathing, weakness, tremors,
convulsions, spasms, coma
and death if eaten in large
amounts.
Poppy (common poppy) Description: An erect annual Introduced from Eurasia and Poisoning: Crude resin from The use of poppy extracts is a
Papaver somniferum herb with milky juice, simple, widely grown in the United unripe seed capsule source of double edged sword —
coarsely toothed, or lobed States until cultivation without narcotic opium alkaloids. addictive narcotics and
leaves; showy red, white, pink, a license became unlawful. Symptoms: From unripe fruit, valuable medicines.
or purple flowers; fruit an oval, stupor, coma, shallow and Poppy seeds used as toppings
crowned capsule; tiny seeds in slow breathing, depression of on breads are harmless.
capsule. the central nervous system;
Toxic parts: Unripe fruits or possibly nausea and severe
their juice. retching (straining to vomit).
Handbook of Nutrition and Food
Rhododendron, azaleas Description: Usually evergreen Throughout the temperate parts Poisoning: Contains the toxic Cases of poisoning are rare in
Rhododendron sp. shrubs; mostly entire, simple, of the United States as a native resinoid, andromedotoxin. this country but
leathery leaves in whorls or and as an introduced Symptoms: Watering eyes and rhododentrons should be
alternate; snowy white to pink ornamental. mouth, nasal discharge, suspected of possible danger.
flowers in terminal clusters; nausea, severe abdominal
fruit a wood capsule. pain, vomiting, convulsions,
Toxic part: Entire plant. lowered blood pressure, lack
Food Constituents
short pod containing ovoid vomiting, severe diarrhea, swallowed to cause poisoning.
seeds which are glossy, bright weakness, cold sweat, Whole seeds pass through the
scarlet over 3/4 of their drowsiness, weak, fast pulse, digestive tract without causing
surface, and jet black over the coma, circulatory collapse, symptoms. One thoroughly
remaining 1/4. death. chewed seed is said to be
Toxic parts: Seeds. potent enough to kill an adult
or child.
Snow-on-the-mountain Description: A tall annual herb, Native to the western, dry Poisoning: Toxins causing Milky juice of this plant is very
Euphorbia marginata browing up to 4 ft (122 cm) plains and valleys from dermatitis and severe irritation caustic.
high; smooth, lance-shaped Montana to Mexico; of the digestive tract. Outwardly resembles a
leaves with conspicuously sometimes escapes in the Symptoms: Blistering of the poinsettia.
white margins; whorls of white eastern United States. skin, nausea, abdominal pain,
petal-like leaves border fainting, diarrhea, possibly
flowers; fruit a 3-celled, 3- death in severe cases.
lobed capsule.
Toxic parts: Leaves, stems,
milky sap.
51
52
Common and Scientific Name Description; Toxic Parts Geographical Distribution Poisoning; Symptoms Remarks
Skunkcabbage Description: Tall, broadleaved Various species throughout Poisoning: Contains such These plants have been used for
Veratrum californicum herbs of the lily family, North America in wet alkaloids as veradridene and centuries as a source of drugs
growing to 6 ft (183 cm) high; meadows, forests, and along veratrine. and as a source of insecticide.
large, alternate pleated, streams. Symptoms: Nausea, vomiting, Since the leaves resemble
clasping, and parallel-veined diarrhea, stomach pains, cabbage, they are often
leaves; numerous whitish to lowered blood pressure, slow collected as an edible wild
greenish flowers in large pulse, reduced body plant, but with unpleasant
terminal clusters; 3-lobed, temperature, shallow results.
capsule fruit. breathing, salivation,
Toxic parts: Entire plant. weakness, nervousness,
convulsions, paralysis,
possibly death.
Tansy Description: Tall, aromatic herb Introduced from Eurasia; Poisoning: Contains an oil, Tanys and oil of tansy are
Tanacetum vulgare with simple stems to 3 ft (91 widely naturalized in North tanacetin, or oil of tansy. employed as an herbal remedy
cm) high; alternate, pinnately America; sometimes found Symptoms: Nausea, vomiting, for nervousness, intestinal
divided, narrow leaves, flower escarped along roadsides, in diarrhea, convulsions, violent worms, to promote
heads in flat-topped clusters pastures, or other wet places; spasms, dilated pupils, rapid menstruation, and to induce
with numerous small, yellow grown for medicinal purposes. and feeble pulse, possibly abortion. Some poisonings
flowers. death. have resulted from the use of
Toxic parts: Leaves, stems, and tansy as a home remedy.
flowers.
Handbook of Nutrition and Food
Waterhemlock Description: A perennial with Wet meadows, pastures, and Poisoning: Contains the toxic One mouthful of the
Cicuta sp. parsleylike leaves; hollow, flood plains of western and resinlike higher alcohol, waterhemlock root is reported
jointed stems and hollow, eastern United States, cicutoxin. to contain sufficient poison to
pithy roots; flowers in generally absent in the plains Symptoms: Frothing at the kill a man.
umbrella clusters; stems states. mouth, spasms, dilated pupils, Children making whistles and
streaked with purple ridges; 2- diarrhea, convulsions, peashooters from the hollow
6 ft (61-183 cm) high. vomiting, delirium, stems have been poisoned.
Food Constituents
Toxic parts: Entire plant, respiratory failure, paralysis, The waterhemlock is often
primarily the roots and young and death. mistaken for the edible wild
growth. artichoke or parsnip. However,
it is considered to be one of the
poisonous plants of the North
Temperate Zone.
White snakeroot Description: Erect perrenial From eastern Canada to Poisoning: Contains the higher Recovery from a nonlethal dose
Eupatorium rogosum with stems 1-5 ft (30-152 cm) Saskatchewan and south to alcohol, tremetol and some is a slow process, due to liver
tall; opposite oval leaves with Texas, Louisiana, Georgia, and glycosides. and kidney damage.
2705_frame_C01 Page 53 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:06 PM
pointed tips and sharply Virginia. Symptoms: Weakness, nausea, Poison may be in the milk of
toothed edges, and dull on the loss of appetite, vomiting, cows that have eaten white
upper surface but shiny on the tremors, labored breathing, snakeroot — “milk sickness.”
lower surface; showy, snow constipation, dizziness,
white flowers in terminal delirium, convulsions, coma,
clusters. and death.
Toxic parts: Entire plant.
Taken from Ensminger et al., Foods and Nutrition Encyclopedia, 2nd ed., CRC Press, Boca Raton, 1994, pp. 1776-1785.
53
2705_frame_C01 Page 54 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:06 PM
TABLE 1.13
Plants Used as Herbal Remedies1
Common and Part(s) of
Scientific Name Description Production Plant Used Reported Uses
Agrimony Small yellow Needs good soil Whole plant A tonic, alterative,
Agrimonia flowers on a long and sunshine; including diuretic, and
gryposepala spike; leaves hairy grows in New roots astringent; infusions
and at least 5 in. England and from the leaves for sore
(13 cm) long, Middle Atlantic throats; treatment of
narrow and states. kidney and bladder
pointed; leaf stones; root for
edges toothed; a jaundice.
perennial.
Aletris root Grasslike leaves in Moist locations in Leaves, roots Poultice of leaves for
(whitetube a flat rosette woods, meadows, sore breast; liquid from
stargrass) around a spike- or bogs; New boiled roots for
Aletris farinosa like stem; white to England to stomach pains, tonic,
yellow tubular Michigan and sedative, and diuretic.
flowers along Wisconsin; south
stem. to Florida and
west to Texas.
Alfalfa Very leafy plant A legume Leaves Powdered and mixed
Medicago sativa growing 1–2 ft cultivated widely with cider vinegar as a
(30–61 cm) high; in the United tonic; infusions for a
small green States. tasty drink; leaves may
leaves; bluish- also be used green.
purple flowers;
deep roots.
Aloe vera A succulent plant A semidesert plant Mucilaginous Effective on small cuts
Aloe barbadensis with leathery which grows in juice of the and sunburn; speeds
sword-shaped Mexico and leaves healing; manufactured
leaves, 6–24 in. Hawaii; product for variety of
(15–61 cm) long. temperature must cosmetic purposes.
remain above 50°F
(10°C); can be a
house plant.
Angelica Shrub growing to 8 Grows in rich low Roots, seeds Small amount of dried
Angelica ft (2.4 m) high; soil near streams root or seeds for relief
atropurpurea stem purplish and swamps and of flatulence; roots for
with 3 toothed in gardens; from the induction of
leaflets at tip of New England vomiting and
each leaf stem; west to Ohio, perspiration; roots for
white or greenish Indiana, Illinois, treatment of toothache,
flowers in clusters and Wisconsin; bronchitis,
at end of each south to rheumatism, gout,
stalk. Delaware, fever, and to increase
Maryland, West menstrual flow.
Virginia, and
Kentucky.
Anise (Anise seed) Annual plant, 1–2 ft Grown all over the Seed As a hot tea to relieve
Pimpinella anisum (30–61 cm) high; world; grows wild flatulence or for colic.
belongs to carrot in countries
family; small around the
white flowers on Mediterranean;
long hairy stalk; much is imported
lower leaves egg- to United States.
shaped; upper
leaves feathery.
2705_frame_C01 Page 55 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:06 PM
Food Constituents 55
Food Constituents 57
Food Constituents 59
Food Constituents 61
Food Constituents 63
Food Constituents 65
Food Constituents 67
TABLE 1.14
Vitamin Terminology
Vitamins were named according to a) their function; b) their location; c) the order in which they were discovered;
or d) combinations of a, b, or c. Some of these names became obsolete as their proposed functions or their isolated
structures were found to duplicate already named and described vitamins. Obsolescence also occurred as research
showed that certain of these compounds were not needed dietary factors but were synthesized by the body in
needed amounts.
Name Comment
Vitamin A A number of compounds have vitamin A activity but differ in biopotency. All trans retinol
is the standard, and the activity of other compounds can be stated as retinol equivalents.
This includes the aldehyde (retinal), acid (retinoic acid), and provitamin (carotene) forms.
Vitamin B Although orginally thought to be a single compound, researchers found that eight major
compounds comprised this "vitamin."
Vitamin B complex A group of vitamins; includes thiamin, riboflavin, niacin, pyridoxine (3 forms),
pantothenic acid, biotin, cyanocobalamin (B12), folacin.
Vitamin B1 Aneurin; antineuritic factor. Obsolete synonym for thiamin.
Vitamin B2 Lactoflavin, Ovoflavin. Obsolete synonyms for riboflavin.
Vitamin B3 Antipellagra factor. Obsolete synonym for niacin.
Vitamin B4 Not proven to have vitamin activity; thought to be a mixture of arginine, glycine,
riboflavin, and pyridoxine.
Vitamin B5 Probably identical to niacin.
Vitamin B6 Synonym for pyridoxine, pyridoxal, pyridoxamine.
Vitamin B7 Not proven to have vitamin activity;1 sometimes referred to as Vitamin I, a factor which
improves food digestibility in pigeons.
2705_frame_C01 Page 68 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:06 PM
Food Constituents 69
TABLE 1.15
Nomenclature of Compounds with Vitamin A Activity
Recommended Name Synonyms
Retinol Vitamin A alcohol
Retinal Vitamin A aldehyde, retinene, retinaldehyde
Retinoic acid Vitamin A acid
3-dehydroretinol Vitamin A2 (alcohol)
3-Dehydroretinal Vitamin A2 aldehyde, retinene2
3-Dehydroretinoic acid Vitamin A2 acid
Anhydroretinol Anhydrovitamin A
Retro retinol Rehydrovitamin A
5,6-Epoxyretinol 5,6-Epoxyvitamin A alcohol
Retinyl palmitate Vitamin A palmitate
Retinyl acetate Vitamin A acetate
Retinyl β-glucuronide Vitamin A acid β-glucuronide
11-cis-retinaldehyde 11-cis or neo β vitamin A aldehyde
4-Ketoretinol 4-Keto vitamin A alcohol
Retinyl phosphate Vitamin A phosphate
β-Carotene Provitamin A
α-Carotene Provitamin A
γ-Carotene Provitamin A
TABLE 1.16
70
OH |
all trans retinal CH3 CH3 O 284.4 | 100
CH3 CH3
C |
H
|
CH3
|
|
11-cis retinal CH3 CH3 CH3 284.4 373 | 61–64
|
|
CH3 CH3
|
H O |
13-cis-retinoic acid 300.4 351 | 180–182
CH3 CH3 CH3 CH3
|
|
|
CH3 O OH |
all trans retinoic acid |
CH3 CH3 CH3 CH3 O 300.4 351
C |
OH
|
CH3 |
|
all trans retinyl O 364 10–100
|
phosphate O P OH
|
Handbook of Nutrition and Food
OH ↓
Provitamin A α carotene H3C 536.9 Ether, 187.5 26
H3C CH3 CH3 CH3 benzene
|
CH3 CH3 H 3C CH3
CH3
|
|
β carotene H 3C 536.9 | 184 50
H3C CH3 CH3 CH3
|
Food Constituents
|
|
|
|
|
CH2 |
|
HO |
1,25-(OH)2 vitamin 426.67 265 ↓ 84–85 500–1000
D3 OH
CH2
HO OH
Vitamin E Tocopherols R1 Unstable to
HO oxygen, light,
metal, salts
R2 O
R3
Handbook of Nutrition and Food
Tocotrienols R1
HO
R2 O
R3
R1 R2 R3
Food Constituents
tocol or tocotrierol α CH3 CH3 CH3 430.7 294 Alcohol, 2.5–3.5 1.49 Unstable to O2,
tocol or tocotrierol β CH3 H CH3 416.7 ether, 0.12 light, metals,
tocol or tocotrierol γ H CH3 CH3 416.7 298 acetone 0.05 salts
tocol or tocotrierol δ H H CH3 416.7 | 0.32
↓ 0.05
Vitamin K Phylloquinone 325 240–270 Alcohol, 0°C 5 Unstable to light
n=1
CH3 396 ether, 10 and alkali, stable
O
n=2 acetone, 30 to heat
n=3 450.7 benzene –20 100
3 CH3
2705_frame_C01 Page 73 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:06 PM
CH3 | 80
H n=4 | 50
O
n(1-6) n=5 |
repeats
|
n=6
|
Menaquinone 3-(preny1)n |
CH3 preny1n-1 n=2 |
| 15
O n=3 40
2 |
CH3 n=4 448.7 243–328 ↓ 54 100
CH3
120
H n=5
O 100
n=6 70
n(2-7)
repeats n=7
73
74
O
Vitamin C Ascorbic acid HO CH2OH 176.14 245 Water 190–192 100 Unstable to heat
O and alkali
O
|
|
C C |
HO OH |
Dehydroascorbic 174.14 245 Water 190–192 80 ↓
HO CH2OH
acid O
O
O O
Vitamin B1 Thiamin 337.27 — Water 177 100
NH2 CH3
N C-CH2-N+ C-CH2CH2-OH
H3C C S
N
Handbook of Nutrition and Food
Vitamin B2 Riboflavin CH2-(CHOH)3-CH2OH 376.4 220, 225, Water 278 100 Unstable to UV
266, 371, light and heat
C N N O 444, 475
H3C C C C C
H3C C C C NH
C N C
O
Food Constituents
H3C H
N
Pyridoxamine 205.6 255, 326 Water 160 100
CH2NH
2
HO CH2OH
H3C N
Pyridoxine 169.18 — Water 160 100
CH2OH
HO CH2OH
H3C N H
75
76
O
and alkaline
HN NH conditions
O
HO
S
Pantothenic acid 219.2 — Water — 100 Unstable to heat
OH CH3OH O
O
C C C C NH CH2-CH2-C
CH3 OH
as calcium salt 476.5 — Water 195 100
Folate O 441 256, 283, Water 250 100 Unstable to
Folacin O C 368 light, acid,
OH
(pteroylmonogluta- CH alkaline,
mic acid) N reducing agents,
OH NH (CH2)2
O heat
N H
C
N
NH
O
HO
H2N N N
O OH
Handbook of Nutrition and Food
Vitamin B12 Cyanocobalamin CH2CONH2 1355.4 278, 361, Water >300 100 Unstable to light
CH2-CH2-CONH2
CH3 CH 550
3
C
NH2CO CH2 CH2 CH2 CONH2
A B
N N
H3C
H3 C CN
Food Constituents
+
CoO
CH
N N
NH2CO CH2 C CH3
D
CH3
CH3 C CH2 CH2 CONH2
CH2 CH3
CH2
CH3 C O
2705_frame_C01 Page 77 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:06 PM
CH CH2 NH N
CH3
O -
O
O N CH3
R
O
O HO
H
H H
O
HO CH2 H
77
78
TABLE 1.17
Summary of Vitamin Deficiency Signs and Need1
Functions Deficiency and Toxicity Symptoms Sources Comments
Fat-Soluble Vitamins
Vitamin A Deficiency symptoms: Night blindness Liver, carrots, dark-green leafy The forms of vitamin A are alcohol
Helps maintain normal vision in dim (nyctalopia) xerosis, and vegetables. Yellow vegetables: (retinol), ester (retinyl palmitate),
light — prevents night blindness and xerophthalmia. pumpkins, sweet potatoes, squash aldehyde (retinal or retinene), and acid
2705_frame_C01 Page 78 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:06 PM
xerophthalmia. Stunted bone growth, abnormal bone (winter). Yellow fruits: apricots, (retinoic acid).
Essential for body growth. shape, and paralysis. peaches. Some seafoods (crab, halibut, Retinol, retinyl palmitate, and retinal are
Necessary for normal bone growth and Unsound teeth, characterized by oysters, salmon, swordfish); milk and readily converted from one form to
normal tooth development. abnormal enamel, pits, and decay. milk products, eggs. other forms. Retinoic acid fulfills some
Acts as a coenzyme in glycoprotein Rough, dry, scaly skin — a condition Supplemental sources: Synthetic of the functions of vitamin A, but it does
synthesis; functions like steroid known as follicular hyperkeratosis (it vitamin A, cod and other fish liver oils. not function in the visual cycle.
hormones, with a role in the cell nuclei, looks like “gooseflesh”); increased β carotene found in vegetables serves as
leading to tissue differentiation. sinus, sore throat, and abscesses in ears, a vitamin A precursor.
Necessary for (1) thyroxine formation mouth, or salivary glands; increased
and prevention of goiter; (2) protein diarrhea and kidney and bladder
synthesis; and (3) synthesis of stones.
corticosterone from cholesterol, and the Reproductive disorders, including poor
normal synthesis of glycogen. conception, abnormal embryonic
growth, placental injury, and death of
the fetus.
Toxicity: Characterized by loss of
appetite, headache, blurred vision,
excessive irritability, loss of hair,
dryness and flaking of skin (with
itching), swelling over the long bones,
drowsiness, diarrhea, nausea, and
enlargement of the liver and spleen.
Handbook of Nutrition and Food
Vitamin D Deficiency symptoms: Rickets in infants D-fortified foods: Milk (400 IU/qt) and Vitamin D includes both D2
Increases calcium absorption from the and children, characterized by enlarged infant formulas. Other foods to which (ergocalciferol, calciferol, or viosterol)
small intestine. joints, bowed legs, knocked knees, vitamin D is often added include: and D3 (cholecalciferol).
Promotes growth and mineralization of outward projection of the sternum breakfast and infant cereals, breads, Vitamin D is unique among vitamins
bones. (pigeon breast), a row of beadlike margarines, milk flavorings, fruit and because it can be formed in the body
Promotes sound teeth. projections on each side of the chest at chocolate beverages, and cocoa. and in certain foods by exposure to
Food Constituents
Increases absorption of phosphorus the juncture of the rib bones and joining Supplemental sources: Fish liver oils ultraviolet rays, and the active
through the intestinal wall; increases (costal) cartilage (called rachitic rosary), (from cod, halibut, or swordfish); compound of vitamin D (1, 25-(OH)2-
resorption of phosphates from the bulging forehead, pot belly; delayed irradiated ergosterol or 7-dehydro- D3) functions as a hormone.
kidney tubules. eruption of temporary teeth and cholesterol such as viosterol.
Maintains normal level of citrate in the unsound permanent teeth. Exposure to sunlight or sunlamp
blood. Osteomalacia in adults, in which the converts the vitamin D precursor to
Protects against the loss of amino acids bones soften, become distorted, and active vitamin D.
through the kidneys. fracture easily.
Tetany, characterized by muscle
2705_frame_C01 Page 79 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:06 PM
Biotin Deficiency symptoms: The deficiency Rich sources: Cheese (processed), Avidin, found in raw egg white, binds
Functions as a coenzyme mainly in symptoms in man include a dry, scaly kidney, liver, soybean flour. biotin, making it unavailable. Avidin is
decarboxylation-carboxylation and in dermatitis, loss of appetite, nausea, Good sources: Cauliflower, chocolate, destroyed by cooking.
deamination reactions. vomiting, muscle pains, glossitis eggs, mushrooms, nuts, peanut butter,
Food Constituents
choline, transmits nerve impulses. in most species except chickens and Good sources: Soybeans, potatoes the criteria for vitamins, especially
2. Is essential for one of the membrane turkeys. Chickens and turkeys develop (dehydrated), cabbage, wheat bran, those of the B vitamins. The body
phospholipids (phosphatidylcholine) slipped tendons (perosis). In young navy beans, alfalfa leaf meal, dried manufactures choline from methionine,
3. Serves as a methyl donor. rats, choline deficiency produces buttermilk and dried skimmed milk, with the aid of folacin and vitamin B12.
hemorrhagic lesions in the kidneys and rice polish, rice bran, whole grains
other organs. (barley, corn, oats, rice, sorghum,
Toxicity: No toxic effects have been wheat), hominy, turnips, wheat flour,
observed. blackstrap molasses.
Supplemental sources: Yeast (brewers’,
torula), wheat germ, soybean lecithin,
egg yolk lecithin, and synthetic choline
and choline derivatives.
81
82
the following important functions: which the red blood cells are larger and vegetables (such as asparagus, broccoli, and a group of closely related
1. The formation of purines and fewer than normal, and also immature. Brussels sprouts, cabbage, cauliflower, substances which are essential for all
pyrimidines which, in turn, are The anemia is due to inadequate endive, lettuce, parsley, spinach, turnip vertebrates, including man.
needed for the synthesis of the nucleic formation of nucl-proteins, causing greens), nuts, oranges, orange juice, Ascorbic acid, vitamin B12, and vitamin
acids DNA and RNA. failure of the megaloblasts (young red soybeans, and whole wheat products. B6 are essential for the activity of the
2. The formation of heme, the iron- blood cells) in the one marrow to Supplemental sources: Yeast, wheat folacin coenzymes.
containing protein in hemoglobin. mature. The hemoglobin level is low germ, and commercially synthesized Folacin deficiencies are thought to be a
3. The interconversion of the three- because of the reduced number of red folic acid (pteroyl-glutamic acid, or health problem in the U.S. and
carbon amino acid serine from the blood cells and the white blood cell, PGA). throughout the world. Infants,
two-carbon amino acid glycine. blood platelet, and serum folate levels adolescents, and pregnant women are
4. The formation of the amino acids are low. particularly vulnerable.
tyrosine from phenylalanine and Other symptoms include a sore, red, The folacin requirement is increased by
glutamic acid from histidine. smooth red tongue (glossitis), tropical sprue, certain genetic
5. The formation of the amino acid disturbances of the digestive tract disturbances, cancer, parasitic infection,
methionine from homocysteine. (diarrhea), and poor growth. alcoholism, and oral contraceptives.
6. The synthesis of choline from Toxicity: Normally, no toxicity. Raw vegetables stored at room
ethanolamine. temperature for 2–3 days lose as much
7. The conversion of nicotinamide to N- as 50–70% of their folate content.
methylnicotinamide, one of the Between 50 and 95% of food folate is
metabolites of niacin that is excreted destroyed in cooking.
in the urine. Intestinal synthesis provides some
folacin.
Handbook of Nutrition and Food
Niacin Deficiency symptoms: A deficiency of Generally speaking, niacin is found in An average mixed diet in the U.S.
(Nicotinic acid; nicotinamide) is a niacin results in pellagra, the symptoms animal tissues as nicotinamide and in provides about 1% protein as
constituent of two important of which are: dermatitis, particularly of plant tissues as nicotinic acid. Both tryptophan. Thus, a diet supplying 60 g
coenzymes in the body; nicotinamide areas of skin which are exposed to light forms are of equal niacin activity. of protein contains about 600 mg of
adenine and dinucleotide (NAD) and or injury; inflammation of mucous Rich sources: Liver, kidney, lean meats, tryptophan, which will yield about 10
nicotinamide adenine dinucleotide membranes, including the entire poultry, fish, rabbit, corn flakes mg of niacin (on the average, 1 mg of
phosphate (NADP). These coenzymes gastrointestinal tract, which results in a (enriched), nuts, peanut butter, milk, niacin is derived from each 60 mg of
function as reducing equivalent (H+) red, swollen, sore tongue and mouth, cheese, and eggs, although low in niacin dietary tryptophan).
Food Constituents
acceptors or donors. diarrhea, and rectal irritation; and content, are good antipellagra foods, Niacin is the most stable of the B-
psychic changes, such as irritability, because their niacin is in available form. complex vitamins. Cooking losses of a
anxiety, depression, and in advanced Enriched cereal flours and products are mixed diet usually do not amount to
cases, delirium, hallucinations, good sources of niacin. more than 15–25%.
confusion, disorientation, and stupor. Supplemental sources: Both synthetic
Toxicity: Only large doses of niacin, nicotinamide and nicotinic acid are
sometimes given to individuals with commercially available. For
mental illness, are known to be toxic. pharmaceutical use, nicotinamide is
However, ingestion of large amounts usually used; for food nutrification,
may result in vascular dilation, or nicotinic acid is usually used. Also,
2705_frame_C01 Page 83 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:06 PM
“flushing” of the skin, itching, liver yeast is a rich natural source of niacin.
damage, elevated blood glucose, elevated
blood enzymes, and/or peptic ulcer.
Pantothenic acid Deficiency symptoms: Organ meat (liver, kidney, and heart), Coenzyme A, of which pantothenic acid
(Vitamin B3) Pantothenic acid functions The symptoms: irritableness and cottonseed flour, wheat bran, rice bran, is a part, is one of the most important
as part of two enzymes — coenzyme A restlessness; loss of appetite, indigestion, rice polish, nuts, mushrooms, soybean substances in body metabolism. It
(CoA) and acyl carrier protein (ACP). abdominal pains, nausea; headache; flour, salmon, bleu cheese, eggs, functions in acetyl group transfer and
CoA functions in the following sullenness, mental depression; fatigue, buckwheat flour, brown rice, lobster, thus is important to fatty acid synthesis
important reactions: weakness; numbness and tingling of sunflower seeds. and degradation.
1. The formation of acetyl-choline, a hands and feet, muscle cramps in the Supplemental sources: Synthetic
substance of importance in arms and legs; burning sensation in the calcium pantothenate is widely used as
transmitting nerve impulses. feet; insomnia; respiratory infections; a vitamin supplementation. Yeast is a
2. The synthesis of porphyrin, a rapid pulse; and a staggering gait. Also, rich natural supplement.
precursor of heme, of importance in in these subjects there was increased Intestinal bacteria synthesize
hemoglobin synthesis. reaction to stress; increased sensitivity to pantothenic acid, but the amount and
3. The synthesis of cholesterol and other insulin, resulting in low blood sugar availability is unknown.
sterols. levels; increased sedimentation rate for
4. The steroid hormones formed by the erythrocytes; decreased gastric
adrenal and sex glands. secretions; and marked decrease in
5. The maintenance of normal blood antibody production.
sugar, and the formation of antibodies. Toxicity: Pantothenic acid is relatively
6. The excretion of sulfonamide drugs. nontoxic. However, doses of 10 to 20 g
ACP, along with CoA, required by the per day may result in occasional
83
2. Biosynthesis of methyl groups (-CH3), consume no animal food; or (2) which there are at least three active requires a specific gastrointestinal
and in reduction reactions such as the deficiency of intrinsic factor due to total forms, produced by microbial growth; factor for its absorption (intrinsic
conversion of disulfide (S-S) to the or partial removal of the stomach by available at the corner drugstore. factor); and (2) that the absorption of
sulfhydryl group (-SH). surgery, or infestation with parasites Some B12 is synthesized in the intestinal vitamin B12 in the small intestine
such as the fish tapeworm. tract of human beings. However, little requires about 3 hours.
The common symptoms of a dietary of it may be absorbed.
deficiency of vitamin B12 are: sore
tongue, weakness, loss of weight, back
pains, tingling of the extremities,
apathy, and mental and other nervous
abnormalities. Anemia is rarely seen in
dietary deficiency of B12.
In pernicious anemia, the characteristic
symptoms are: abnormally large red
blood cells, lemon-yellow pallor,
anorexia, prolonged bleeding time,
abdominal discomfort, loss of weight,
glossitis, an unsteady gait, and
neurological disturbances, including
stiffness of the limbs, irritability, and
mental depression. Without treatment
death follows.
Toxicity: No toxic effects of vitamin B12
85
are known.
TABLE 1.17 (Continued)
86
vessels. body; large bruises; big joints, such as quarter, spinach, Swiss chard, and
Metabolism of folic acid. the knees and hips, due to bleeding into watercress. Also, cantaloupe, papaya,
the joint cavity; anemia; degeneration of strawberries, and tomatoes and tomato
muscle fibers; including those of the juice (fresh or canned).
heart; and tendency of old wounds to Supplemental sources: Vitamin C
become red and break open. Sudden (ascorbic acid) is available wherever
death from severe internal hemorrhage vitamins are sold.
and heart failure.
Toxicity: Adverse effects reported of
intakes in excess of 8 g per day (more
than 100 times the recommended
allowance) include: nausea, abdominal
cramps, and diarrhea; absorption of
excessive amounts of iron; destruction
of red blood cells; increased
mobilization of bone minerals;
interference with anticoagulant
therapy; formation of kidney and
bladder stones; inactivation of vitamin
B12; rise in plasma cholesterol; and
possible dependence upon large doses
of vitamin C.
1
Handbook of Nutrition and Food
Macrominerals
Calcium (Ca) Deficiency symptoms: Cheeses, wheat-soy flour, blackstrap Calcium is the most abundant mineral in
The primary function of calcium is to 1. Stunting of growth. molasses, milk, and milk products. the body. It comprises about 40% of the
build the bones and teeth and to 2. Poor quality bones and teeth. total minerals present; 99% of it is in the
maintain the bones. 3. Malformation of bones — rickets. bones and teeth.
The clinical manifestations of calcium
Other functions are: Generally, nutritionists recommend a
related diseases are:
1. Blood clotting. calcium–phosphorus ratio of 1.5:1 in
1. Rickets in children.
2705_frame_C01 Page 87 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:06 PM
functions, especially: in the blood). the rest of life, although they consider
1. Energy utilization ratios between 2:1 and 1:2 as
2. Phospholipid formation satisfactory.
3. Amino acid metabolism; protein
formation
4. Enzyme systems
Sodium (Na) Deficiency symptoms: Reduced growth, Table salt, processed meat products, and Deficiencies of sodium may occur when
Helps to maintain the balance of water, loss of appetite, loss of body weight due pickled/cured products. there has been heavy, prolonged
acids, and bases in the fluid outside the to loss of water, reduced milk sweating, diarrhea, vomiting, or
cells. production of lactating mothers, muscle adrenal cortical insufficiency. In such
As a constituent of pancreatic juice, bile, cramps, nausea, diarrhea, and cases, extra salt should be taken.
sweat, and tears. headache.
Associated with muscle contraction and Excess perspiration and salt depletion
nerve functions. may be accompanied by heat
Plays a specific role in the absorption of exhaustion.
carbohydrates. Toxicity: Salt may be toxic when (1) a
high intake is accompanied by a
restriction of water, (2) when the body
is adapted to a chronic low salt diet, or
(3) when it is fed to infants or others
whose kidneys cannot excrete the
Handbook of Nutrition and Food
Constituent of bones and teeth. magnesium is characterized by (1) powder, cottonseed flour, peanut flour, magnesia” (magnesium hydroxide) or
Essential element of cellular metabolism, muscle spasms (tremor, twitching) and sesame seeds, soybean flour, spices, “Epsom salts” (magnesium sulfate)
often as an activator of enzymes rapid heartbeat; (2) confusion, wheat bran, and wheat germ. may lead to deficiencies of other
involved in phosphorylated hallucinations, and disorientation; and minerals or even to toxicity.
compounds and of high energy (3) lack of appetite, listlessness, nausea,
phosphate transfer of ADP and ATP. and vomiting.
Involved in activating certain peptidases Toxicity: Magnesium toxicity is
in protein digestion. characterized by slowed breathing,
Relaxes nerve impulse, functioning coma, and sometimes death.
antagon-istically to calcium which is
stimulatory.
89
90
nutrients in and out of individual cells. electrocardiograms; muscle weakness, bran. the concentration of sodium
Relaxes the heart muscle — action irritability, and occasionally paralysis;
opposite to that of calcium which is and nausea, vomiting, diarrhea, and
stimulatory. swollen abdomen. Extreme and
Required for the secretion of insulin by prolonged deficiency of potassium may
the pancreas in enzyme reactions cause hypokalemia, culminating in the
involving the phosphorylation. heart muscles stopping.
Toxicity: Acute toxicity from potassium
(known as hyperpotassemia or
hyperkalemia) can result when kidneys
are not functioning properly. The
condition may prove fatal due to
cardiac arrest.
Cobalt (Co) A cobalt deficiency as such has never Cobalt is present in many foods. Cobalt is an essential constituent of
The only known function of cobalt is that been produced in humans. The signs Vitamin B12 and must be ingested in the
of an integral part of Vitamin B12, an and symptoms that are sometimes form of vitamin molecule inasmuch as
essential factor in the formation of red attributed to cobalt deficiency are humans synthesize little of the vitamin.
blood cells. actually due to lack of Vitamin B12, (A small amount of Vitamin B12 is
characterized by pernicious anemia, synthesized in the human colon by E.
poor growth, and occasionally coli, but absorption is very limited.)
neurological disorders.
Handbook of Nutrition and Food
Copper (Cu) Deficiency symptoms: Deficiency is Black pepper, blackstrap molasses, Brazil Most cases of copper poisoning result
Facilitating the absorption of iron from most apt to occur in malnourished nuts, cocoa, liver, and oysters (raw). from drinking water or beverages that
the intestinal tract and releasing it from children and in premature infants fed have been stored in copper tanks and/
storage in the liver and the exclusively on modified cow’s milk and or pass through copper pipes.
reticuloendothelial system. in infants breast fed for an extended Dietary excesses of calcium, iron,
Essential for the formation of period of time. cadmium, zinc, lead, silver, and
Food Constituents
hemoglobin, although it is not a part of Deficiency leads to a variety of molybdenum plus sulfur reduce the
hemoglobin as such. abnormalities, including anemia, utilization of copper.
Constituent of several enzyme systems. skeletal defects, demyelination and
Development and maintenance of the degeneration of the nervous system,
vascular and skeletal structures (blood defects in pigmentation and structure of
vessels, tendons, and bones). the hair, reproductive failure, and
Structure and function of the central pronounced cardiovascular lesions.
nervous system. Required for normal Toxicity: Copper is relatively nontoxic to
pigmentation of hair. Component of monogastric species, including man.
2705_frame_C01 Page 91 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:06 PM
proteins, sulfur-containing amino acids, especially susceptible to the toxic effects is derived from organ meats, whole molybdenum, copper, and sulfur.
nucleic acids (DNA and RNA), and of bisulfite, characterized by breathing grains, leafy vegetables, legumes, and Excess molybdenum will cause copper
iron. difficulties and neurological disorders. yeast. deficiency. However, when the sulfate
Severe molybdenum toxicity in animals content of the diet is increased, the
(molybdenosis), particularly cattle, symptoms of toxicity are avoided
occurs throughout the world wherever inasmuch as the excretion of
pastures are grown on high- molybdenum is increased.
molybdenum soils. The symptoms
include diarrhea, loss of weight,
decreased production, fading of hair
color, and other symptoms of copper
deficiency.
93
94
Food Constituents 95
TABLE 1.19
Essential Fatty Acids
H H H H
CH3CH2CH2CH2C=C–CH2–C=CCH2CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2COOH linoleic acid [18:2, (9, 12)]
18 12 9
H H H H H H
CH3CH2CH2CH2CH2C=C–CH2–C=C–CH2–C=CCH2CH2CH2CH2COOH γ linolenic acid [18:3, (6, 9, 12)]
18 12 9 6 1
H H H H H H
CH3CH2C=C–CH2–C=C–CH2–C=C–(CH2)7COOH
18 15 12 9 linolenic acid [18:3 (9, 12, 15)]
TABLE 1.20
Structure and Names of Fatty Acids Found in Food
# Carbons:
Double Systematic Trivial
Structure Bonds Name Name Source
Part II
Metabolism
2705_frame_C02 Page 98 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:08 PM
2705_frame_C02 Page 99 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:08 PM
2
Metabolic Maps
Carolyn D. Berdanier
The individual reactions of metabolisms have been studied extensively. The details of
their regulation within a given pathway has likewise received considerable attention. The
entire map can be obtained from Boehringer Manheim (BM) at minimal cost. (Boehringer
Mannheim, PO Box 31 01 20, D-6800 Mannheim 31 Germany.) The maps come complete
with citations of the works that provided the critical information for these maps as well
as notations on species differences and differences between mammals, plants, and micro-
organisms.
The maps that follow are general and lack the detail found in the BM maps. They are
provided to give the user an idea of where in metabolism the use of the various macro-
nutrients occur. They also provide some details about intermediary metabolism.
0-8493-2705-9/01/$0.00+$1.50
© 2002 by CRC Press LLC 99
2705_frame_C02 Page 100 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:08 PM
FIGURE 2.1
The glycolytic pathway.
2705_frame_C02 Page 101 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:08 PM
FIGURE 2.2
Reaction sequence of the hexose monophosphate shunt commonly referred to as the “shunt.”
2705_frame_C02 Page 102 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:08 PM
FIGURE 2.3
Metabolism of fructose.
2705_frame_C02 Page 103 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:08 PM
FIGURE 2.4
Conversion of galactose to glucose.
FIGURE 2.5
Glycogen synthesis (glycogenesis).
2705_frame_C02 Page 104 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:08 PM
FIGURE 2.6
Stepwise release of glucose molecules from the glycogen molecule.
2705_frame_C02 Page 105 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:08 PM
FIGURE 2.7
Pathway for gluconeogenesis.
2705_frame_C02 Page 106 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:08 PM
FIGURE 2.8
Catabolism of branched chain amino acids showing their use in the production of metabolites that are either
lipid precursors or metabolites than can be oxidized via the Krebs cycle.
2705_frame_C02 Page 107 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:08 PM
FIGURE 2.9
Catabolism of threonine showing its relationship to that of serine and glycine.
FIGURE 2.10
Phenylalanine and tyrosine catabolism. This pathway has a number of mutations that result in a variety of
genetic disease.
2705_frame_C02 Page 108 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:08 PM
FIGURE 2.11
Catabolism of tryptophan showing conversion to the vitamin niacin. This conversion is not very efficient.
Tryptophan catabolism also results in picolinate, which is believed by some to play a role in trace-mineral
conservation.
2705_frame_C02 Page 109 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:08 PM
FIGURE 2.12
Catabolism of histidine. Note that 3-methyl histidine is not part of the pathway. This metabolite is formed in
the muscle when the contractile proteins actin and myosin are methylated.
FIGURE 2.13
Conservation of SH groups via methionine–cysteine interconversion. Spermine, putrescine, and spermidine are
polyamines that are important in cell and tissue growth.
2705_frame_C02 Page 110 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:08 PM
FIGURE 2.14
The urea cycle. Locations of mutations in the urea cycle enzymes are indicated with a star. Persons with these
mutations have very short lives, with evidence of mental retardation, seizures, coma, and early death due to
the toxic effects of ammonia accumulation. Rate controlling steps are indicated with a circled cross.
2705_frame_C02 Page 111 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:08 PM
FIGURE 2.15
Krebs citric acid cycle in the mitochondria. This cycle is also called the tricarboxylate cycle (TCA).
2705_frame_C02 Page 112 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:08 PM
+ FMNH2 Fe+++
NAD CoQ Fe++ Fe++ Fe+++
ADP, Pi FADH+H+ ADP, Pi
++ HOH
Krebs Cycle FADH
Pyruvate +
Fatty Acid 2H
Oxidation
FIGURE 2.16
The respiratory chain showing the points where sufficient energy has been generated to support the synthesis
of 1 molecule of ATP from ADP and Pi. Each of the segments generates a proton gradient. This energy is captured
by the F0 portion of the ATPase and transmitted to the F1 portion of the ATPase. If uncouplers are present, the
proton gradient is dissipated and all of the energy is released as heat.
FIGURE 2.17
Fatty acid synthesis.
2705_frame_C02 Page 113 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:08 PM
FIGURE 2.18
Pathways for synthesis of long-chain polyunsaturated fatty acids (PUFA) through elongation and desaturation.
Not all of these reactions occur in all species. The ω symbol is the same as the n symbol. Thus, 18:2ω6, linoleic
acid, could also be written 18:2n6.
2705_frame_C02 Page 114 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:08 PM
FIGURE 2.19
Pathway for β oxidation of fatty acids in the mitochondria.
2705_frame_C02 Page 115 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:08 PM
FIGURE 2.20
Pathways for the synthesis of triacylglycerides and phospholipids.
2705_frame_C02 Page 116 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:08 PM
FIGURE 2.21
Eicosanoid synthesis from arachidonic acid.
FIGURE 2.22
Cholesterol biosynthesis.
2705_frame_C02 Page 117 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:08 PM
FIGURE 2.23
Overview of protein synthesis. Signals are transmitted to the nucleus that stimulate the exposure of a gene for
a specific protein. A specific messenger RNA is synthesized. The mRNA moves out into the cytosol and attaches
to the ribosome, whereupon tRNAs attached to amino acids dock at appropriate complementary bases and the
amino acids are joined together to make protein.
2705_frame_C02 Page 118 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:08 PM
FIGURE 2.24
Detailed structure of the components of a gene that is to be transcribed.
FIGURE 2.25
Synthesis of messenger RNA and its migration to the ribosomes in the cytoplasm.
2705_frame_C02 Page 119 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:08 PM
FIGURE 2.26
Overview of translation involving mRNA, tRNA-amino acids, and small and large ribosomal units.
FIGURE 2.27
Synthesis of creatine and creatinine.
2705_frame_C02 Page 120 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:08 PM
FIGURE 2.28
Modification of β oxidation for unsaturated fatty acid.
2705_frame_C03 Page 121 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:12 PM
3
Tables of Clinical Significance
Carolyn D. Berdanier
In this section can be found a variety of tables with importance to the clinician and nutrition
scientist. There are no discussions of these tables because sections later in the book address
key issues related to them. Rather, these tables represent a quick look at topics essential
to an understanding of the health-related, nutrition-related human conditions.
TABLE 3.1
Proteins Involved in Lipid Transport
Protein Function
apo A-II Transport protein in HDL
apo B-48 Transport protein for chylomicrons; synthesized in the enterocyte in the human.
High density Binds HDL and functions in the removal of excess cellular cholesterol
lipoprotein
binding protein
(HDLBP)
apo D Transport protein similar to retinol-binding protein
apo (a) Abnormal transport protein for LDL
apo A-I Transport protein for chylomicrons and HDL; synthesized in the liver and its synthesis is
induced by retinoic acid
apo C-III Transport protein for VLDL
apo A-IV Transport protein for chylomicrons
CETP Participates in the transport of cholesterol from peripheral tissue to liver; reduces HDL size
LCAT Synthesized in the liver and is secreted into the plasma where it resides on the HDL.
Participates in the reverse transport of cholesterol from peripheral tissues to the liver;
esterifies the HDL cholesterol.
apo E Mediates high affinity binding of LDL's to LDL receptor and the putative chylomicron
receptor. Required for clearance of chylomicron remnant. Synthesized primarily in the
liver.
apo C-I Transport protein for VLDL
apo C-II Chylomicron transport protein required cofactor for LPL activity
Apo B-100 Synthesized in the liver and is secreted into the circulation as part of the VLDL. Also
serves as the ligand for the LDL receptor mediated hepatic endocytosis.
Lipoprotein lipase Catalyzes the hydrolysis of plasma triglycerides into free fatty acids
Hepatic lipase Catalyzes the hydrolysis of triglycerides and phospholipids of the LDL and HDL. It is
bound to the surfaces of both hepatic and non hepatic tissues.
0-8493-2705-9/01/$0.00+$1.50
© 2002 by CRC Press LLC 121
2705_frame_C03 Page 122 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:12 PM
TABLE 3.2
Inherited Disorders of Carbohydrate Metabolism
Disease Mutation Characteristics
Digestion Lactose intolerance Lactase Chronic or intermittent diarrhea,
flatulence, nausea, vomiting, growth
failure in young children
Sucrose intolerance Sucrase Diarrhea, flatulence, nausea, poor
growth in infants
Intestinal Glucose-galactose Glucose-galactose Diarrhea, growth failure in infants,
transport intolerance carrier stools contain large quantities of
glucose and lactic acid
Interconversion Galactosemia Galactose-1-P-uridyl Increased cellular content of galactose
of sugars transferase 1-phosphate, eye cataracts, mental
retardation, increased cellular levels of
galactitol; three mutations have been
reported
Galactokinase Cataracts, cellular accumulation of
galactose and galactitrol; two
mutations have been reported
Galactoepimerase No severe symptoms; two mutations
have been reported
Fructosemia Fructokinase Fructosuria, fructosemia
Fructose-1-P-aldolase Hypoglycemia, vomiting after fructose
load, fructosemia, fructosuria; in
children: poor growth, jaundice,
hyperbilirubinemia, albuminuria,
amino-aciduria
Fructose-1,6- Hypoglycemia, hepatomegaly, poor
diphosphatase muscle tone, increased blood lactate
levels
Pentosuria NADP-lined xylitol Elevated levels of xylose in urine
dehydrogenase
Glucose Hemolytic anemia Glucose-6-phosphate Low erythrocyte levels of NADPH,
catabolism dehydrogenase hemolysis of the erythrocyte
Pyruvate kinase Nonspherocytic anemia, accumulation
of phosphorylated glucose metabolites
in the cell, jaundice in newborn
Type VII glycogenosis Phosphofructokinase Intolerance to exercise, elevated muscle
glycogen levels, accumulation of
hexose monophosphates in muscle
Gluconeogenesis Von Gierke's disease Glucose-6- Hypoglycemia, hyperlipemia, brain
(Type I glycogenosis) phosphatase damage in some patients, excess liver
glycogen levels, shortened lifespan,
increased glycerol utilization
Glycogen Amylopectinosis Branching enzyme Tissue accumulation of long-chain
synthesis (Type IV Liver amylo (1,4→1,6)- glycogen that is poorly branched,
glycogenosis) transglucosidase intolerance to exercise
Glycogenolysis Pompe's disease Lysosomal a-1,4- Generalized glycogen excess in viscera,
(Type II glucosidase (acid muscles, and nervous system, extreme
glycogenosis) maltase) muscular weakness, hepatomegaly,
Forbe's disease Amylo-1,6- enlarged heart
(Type III glucosidase Tissue accumulation of highly
glycogenosis) (debrancing enzyme) branched, short-chain glycogen,
hypoglycemia, acidosis, muscular
weakness, enlarged heart
2705_frame_C03 Page 123 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:12 PM
TABLE 3.3
Genetic Diseases in Lipid Metabolism
Disease Mutation Characteristics
Tay-Sachs disease Hexosaminidase A deficiency Early death, CNS degeneration,
ganglioside GM2 accumulates
Gaucher's disease Glucocerebrosidase deficiency Enlarged liver and spleen; erosion
of long bones and pelvis; mental
retardation; glucocerebroside
accumulates
Fabry's disease α Galactosidase A deficiency Skin rash, kidney failure, pain in
legs and feet, ceramide
trihexoside accumulates
Niemann-Pick disease Sphingomyelinase deficiency Enlarged liver and spleen, mental
retardation, sphingomyelin
accumulates
Krabbe's disease (globoid Galactocerebroside deficiency Mental retardation, absence of
leukodystrophy) myelin
Metachromatic leukodystrophy Arylsulfatase A deficiency Mental retardation, sulfatides
accumulate
Generalized gangliosidosis Gmi,Gandioside: β galactosidase Mental retardation, enlarged liver
deficiency
Sandhoff-Jatzkewitz disease Hexosaminidase A and B Same as Tay-Sachs but develops
deficiency quicker
Fucosidosis α-L-Fucosidase Cerebral degeneration, spastic
muscles, thick skin
Acetyl CoA carboxylase deficiency Acetyl CoA carboxylase deficiency No de novo fatty acid synthesis
Hypercholesterolemia LDL receptor deficiency Premature atherosclerosis and
death from CVD
Refsum's disease α hydroxylating enzyme Neurological problems: deafness,
blindness, cerebellar ataxia,
phytanic acid accumulates
2705_frame_C03 Page 124 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:12 PM
TABLE 3.4
Genetic Mutations in Enzymes of Amino Acid Metabolism
Disease Mutation Characteristics
Maple syrup urine disease Branched chain keto acid Elevated levels of α ketoacids and
dehydrogenase (Several variants) their metabolites in blood and
urine; mental retardation,
ketoacidosis, early death
Methylmalonuria Methylmalonyl CoA mutase High blood levels of
(Several variants) Inability to use methylmalonate; pernicious
vitamin B12 anemia, early death
Nonketotic hyperglycinemia Glycine cleavage enzyme Severe mental retardation, early
death, high blood glycine levels
Hypermethioninemia Methionine adenosyltransferase Accumulation of methionine in
(↑ Km not deficiency per se) blood (condition is benign)
Homocysteinemia Cystathionine synthase Elevated blood levels of
methionine, homocysteine;
abnormal collagen (no cross
linking); dislocated lenses and
other ocular malformations;
osteoporosis; mental retardation,
thromboembolism and vascular
occlusions; short lifespan
Cystathioninuria Cystathionase Elevated levels of cystathionine in
urine (condition is benign)
Phenylketonuria Phenylalanine hydroxylase Increased levels of phenylalanine
(several variants) and deaminated metabolites in
blood and urine; mental
retardation; decreased
neurotransmitter synthesis;
shortened lifespan
Tyrosinemia Tyrosine transaminase Eye and skin lesions, mental
retardation
Fumarylacetoacetate hydrolase Liver failure, renal failure
p-hydroxylphenylpyruvate Increased need for ascorbic acid
oxidase
Albinism Tyrosinase Lack of melanin (skin pigment)
formation; increased sensitivity to
sunlight; lack of eye pigment
Alcaptonuria Homogentisate oxidase Elevated urine levels of
homogentisate; slow deposits of
homogentisate in bones,
connective tissue and internal
organs resulting in gradual
darkening of these structures.
Increased susceptibility to
arthritis
Histidenemia Histidase Elevated levels of histidine in
blood and urine. Can give false
positive result in test for
phenylketonuria. Elevated
urocanase levels in sweat.
Decreased histamine formation.
2705_frame_C03 Page 125 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:12 PM
TABLE 3.5
Mutations that Phenotype as Obesity
Genotype Species Phenotype
Estrogen receptor β
Codons 238-244 — 21 bp deletion human obesity1
846G to A human obesity1
1421T to C human obesity1
1730A to G human obesity1
POMC (Proopiomelanocortin gene)
codon 73-74 (btwn. 6997 and 6998) human extreme childhood and adolescent obesity2
within codon 176 (btwn. 7304 and 7305) human extreme childhood and adolescent obesity2
G7316T human extreme childhood and adolescent obesity2
G7341G human extreme childhood and adolescent obesity2
C6982T human extreme childhood and adolescent obesity2
C7111G human extreme childhood and adolescent obesity2
LEP (Leptin gene)
G144A substitution in codon 48 human extreme obesity and very low serum leptin levels3
G328A substitution in codon 110 human extreme obesity and very low serum leptin levels3
c'some 6-10.5 mouse obesity4
c'some 7-q32 human obesity4
LEPR (Leptin receptor)
c'some 4-46.7 mouse obesity4
c'some 1-p31 human obesity4
UCP1 (Uncoupling protein)
Arg/Trp 40 human juvenile onset obesity5
Ala/Thr 64 human juvenile onset obesity5
Val/Met 137 human juvenile onset obesity5
Met/Leu 229 human juvenile onset obesity5
Lys/Asn 257 human juvenile onset obesity5
UCP2 (11q13) human obesity4
UCP3 (11q13) human obesity4
MC3R (20q13) human obesity4
NPYR5 (4q31-q32) human obesity4
MSTN (2q32.1) human obesity4
Chromosome 2p12-13 human Alstrom Syndrome (retinal pigment degeneration,
neurogenic deafness, infantile obesity,
hyperlipidemia, NIDDM6
fa mutation
269Gln to Pro Zucker rat Obesity: Severe insulin resistance,
hyperinsulinemia, hyperglycemia,
hyperlipidemia, hypercortisolemia7
Ob-Rb (269Gln to Pro) Zucker rat Obesity: Decreased cell-surface expression and
decreased leptin binding affinity7
C57 BLKS/J-Leprdb/Leprdb mouse hyperphagia, obesity, hyperinsulinemia,
hyperglycemia8
Gsalpha
R258W human Albright hereditary osteodystrophy: skeletal
abnormalities and obesity9
R258A human Albright hereditary osteodystrophy: skeletal
abnormalities and obesity9
PPARg2
Pro115Gln human extreme obesity10
CPE (carboxypeptidase E) mouse hyperproinsulinemia, late onset obesity, diabetes11
IRS 1 (insulin receptor substrate) S13 and human NIDDM and obesity12
972
Beta3 AR 64 (Beta 3 adrenergic receptor) human NIDDM and obesity12
OB D75514 — D7S530 human NIDDM, obesity, hypertension, and insulin
resistance13
2705_frame_C03 Page 126 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:12 PM
TABLE 3.6
Mutations that Phenotype as Heart Disease
Genotype Species Phenotype
LPL gene
G188E (exon 5) human High plasma TG — heart disease1
P207L (exon 5) human High plasma TG — heart disease1
D250N (exon 6) human High plasma TG — heart disease1
Homocysteine gene
373C/T = R125W(autosomal recessive) human Homocystinuria2
456C/G = I152M (autosomal recessive) human Homocystinuria2
494G/A = C165Y(autosomal recessive) human Homocystinuria2
539T/C = V180A(autosomal recessive) human Homocystinuria2
833T/C = I278T(autosomal recessive) human Homocystinuria2
1105C/T = R369C(autosomal recessive) human Homocystinuria2
1111G/A = V137M(autosomal recessive) human Homocystinuria2
1301 C/A = T434N(autosomal recessive) human Homocystinuria2
1330 G/A = D444N(autosomal recessive) human Homocystinuria2
1471 C/T = R491C(autosomal recessive) human Homocystinuria2
MTHR gene
792+1G to A/? human Hyperhomocysteinemia/Hypomethioninemia3
G458T/G458T human Hyperhomocysteinemia/Hypomethioninemia3
C692T/C692T human Hyperhomocysteinemia/Hypomethioninemia3
C559T/C559T human Hyperhomocysteinemia/Hypomethioninemia3
249-IG to T/G164C human Hyperhomocysteinemia/Hypomethioninemia3
G428A/? human Hyperhomocysteinemia/Hypomethioninemia3
C985T/C985T human Hyperhomocysteinemia/Hypomethioninemia3
G167A/C1015T human Hyperhomocysteinemia/Hypomethioninemia3
C559T/C559T human Hyperhomocysteinemia/Hypomethioninemia3
C764T/C764T human Hyperhomocysteinemia/Hypomethioninemia3
G167A/C1081T human Hyperhomocysteinemia/Hypomethioninemia3
T980C/C1141T human Hyperhomocysteinemia/Hypomethioninemia3
C559T/N human Hyperhomocysteinemia/Hypomethioninemia3
833T to C = I278T human Mild hyperhomocysteinuria2
677C to T (A to V) human Mild hyperhomocysteinuria2
4p16.1 (btwn. D4S2957 and D4S827) human Ellis van Creveld Syn (cardiac malformations)4
9q31
TD1 = G1764del to Stop (autosomal human Tangier disease — premature CAD5
recessive)
TD2 = 3' del (autosomal recessive) human Tangier disease — premature CAD5
TD3 = N875S (autosomal recessive) human Tangier disease — premature CAD5
TD4 = A877V (autosomal recessive) human Tangier disease — premature CAD5
TD5 = W530S (autosomal recessive) human Tangier disease — premature CAD5
LDLR gene
Missense C240 to F (Cys to Phe) Exon 5 human Hypercholesterolemia/Premature CVD6
Missense G5218 to D (Gly to Asp) Exon 11 human Hypercholesterolemia/Premature CVD6
Nonsense C122 to X (Cys to stop) Exon 4A human Hypercholesterolemia/Premature CVD6
Nonsense C122 to X (Cys to stop) Exon 4A human Hypercholesterolemia/Premature CVD6
Missense E187 to K (Glu to Lys) Exon 4B human Hypercholesterolemia/Premature CVD6
Missense C356 to Y (Cys to Tyr) Exon 8 human Hypercholesterolemia/Premature CVD6
Nonsense C122 to X (Cys to stop) Exon 4A human Hypercholesterolemia/Premature CVD6
Nonsense C122 to X (Cys to stop) Exon 4A human Hypercholesterolemia/Premature CVD6
Missense w66 to G (Trp to Gly) Exon 3 human Hypercholesterolemia/Premature CVD6
Missense W66 to G (Trp to Gly) Exon3 human Hypercholesterolemia/Premature CVD6
Missense 187E to K (Glu to Lys) Exon 4B human Hypercholesterolemia/Premature CVD6
Missense W66 to G (Trp to Gly) exon 3 human Hypercholesterolemia/Premature CVD6
Insertion 785insG (frameshift) Exon 17 human Hypercholesterolemia/Premature CVD6
Missense W66 to G (Trp to Gly) Exon 3 human Hypercholesterolemia/Premature CVD6
Deletion 165delG (frameshift) Exon 4A human Hypercholesterolemia/Premature CVD6
Missense D245 to E (Asp to Glu) Exon 5 human Hypercholesterolemia/Premature CVD6
2705_frame_C03 Page 128 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:12 PM
TABLE 3.7
Mutations that Phenotype as Diabetes
Genotype Species Phenotype
TRNAthr
C15904T, A15924G, G15927A human same as above
G15928A
D-loop
C16069T,T16093C,C16126T human same as above
1. Jackson, RS, Creemers, JW, Ohagi, S, et al. Nat Genet 16: 303; 1997.
2. Utsunomiya, N, Ohagi, S, Sanke, T, et al. Diabetologia 41: 701; 1998.
3. Froguel, P, Vaxillaire, M, Velho, G. Diabetes Rev 5: 123; 1997.
4. Velho, G, Blanche, H, Vaxillaire, M, et al. Diabetologia 40 : 217; 1997.
5. Vionnet, N, Stoffel, M, Takeda, J, et al. Nature 356: 721; 1992.
6. Shimada, F, Makino, H, Hashimoto, H. Diabetologia 36: 433; 1993.
7. Hattersley, AT, Turner, RC, Permutt, MA. Lancet 339:1307; 1993.
8. Zhang, Y, Wat, N, Stratton, IM, et al. Diabetologia 39: 1505; 1996.
9. Shitani, M, Ikegami, H, Yamato, E, et al. Diabetologia 39: 1398; 1996.
10. Taylor, SI, Kadowaki, H, Accili, D, et al. Diab Care 13: 257; 1990.
11. Cama, A, Sierra, ML, Ottini, L. J Clin Endocrinol Metab 73: 894; 1991.
12. Kadowaki, T, Kadowaki, H, Rechler, MM. J Clin Invest 86: 254; 1990.
13. Odawara, M, Kadowaki, T, Yamamoto, R. Science 245: 66; 1989.
14. Taylor, SI, Cama, A, Accili, D, et al. Endocr Rev 13: 566; 1992.
15. Hani, EH, Boutin, P, Durand, E, et al. Diabetologia 41: 1511; 1998.
16. Chevre, JC, Hani, EH, Boutin, P, et al. Diabetologia 41: 1017; 1998.
17. Velho, G, Froguel, P, Endocrinology 138: 233; 1998.
18. Vaxillaire, M, Rouard, M, Yamagata, K, et al. Hum Mol Genet 6: 583; 1997.
19. Frayling, TM, Bulamn, MP, Ellard, S, et al. Diabetes 46: 720; 1997.
20. Hansen, T, Eiberg, H, Rouard, M, et al. Diabetes 46: 726; 1997.
21. Yagui, K, Shimada, F, Mimura, M, et al. Diabetologia 41: 1024; 1998.
22. Steiner, DF, Tager, HS, Chan, SJ, et al. Diabetes Care 13: 600; 1990.
23. DeFronzo, RA, Diabetes Rev 5; 177; 1997.
24. Strom, TM, Hortnagel, K, Hofmann, S, et al. Hum Mol Genet 7: 2021; 1998.
25. van den Ouweland, JMW, Lemkes, HHPJ, Ruitenbeek, W, et al. Nat Genet 1: 368; 1992.
26. Mathews, CE, Berdanier, CD. Proc Soc Exp Biol Med 219: 97; 1998.
TABLE 3.8
Normal Values for Micronutrients in Blood
Ascorbic acid, plasma 0.6–1.6 mg/dl Phosphorus 3.4–4.5 mg/dl
Calcium, serum 4.5–5.3 meq/l Potassium 3.5–5.0 meq/l
β-Carotene, serum 40–200 µg/dl Riboflavin, red cell >14.9 µg/dl cells
Chloride, serum 95–103 meq/l Folate, plasma >6 ng/ml
Lead, whole blood 0–50 µg/dl Pantothenic acid, plasma ≥6 µg/dl
Magnesium, serum 1.5–2.5 meq/l Pantothenic acid, whole blood ≥80 µg/dl
Sodium, plasma 136–142 meq/l Biotin, whole blood >25 ng/ml
Sulfate, serum 0.2–1.3 meq/l B12, plasma >150 pg/ml
Vitamin A, serum 15–60 µg/dl Vitamin D 25(OH)–D3, plasma >10 ng/ml
Retinol, plasma >20 µg/dl α-Tocopherol, plasma >0.80 mg/dl
Note: For more information on blood analysis see: NHANES Manual for Nutrition Assessment,
CDC, Atlanta, GA (contact Elaine Gunter); ICNND Manual for Nutrition Surveys, 2nd
ed., 1963, U.S. Government Printing Office, Washington, D.C.; Sauberlich et al., 1974,
Laboratory Tests for the Assessment of Nutritional Status, CRC Press, Boca Raton, FL.
2705_frame_C03 Page 134 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:12 PM
TABLE 3.9
Normal Clinical Values for Constituents of Blood
Common Units or SI Units
Ammonia 22-39 umol/L
Calcium 8.5-10.5 mg/dl or 2.25-2.65 mmol/L
Carbon dioxide 24-30 meq/l or 24-29 mmol/L
Chloride 100-106 meq/L or mmol/L
Copper 100-200 µg/dl or 16-31 µmol/L
Iron 50-150 µg/dl or 11.6-31.3 µmol/L
Lead 50 µg/dl or less
Magnesium 1.5-2.0 meq/L or 0.75-1.25 mmol/L
P CO2 35-40 mm Hg
pH 7.35-7.45
Phosphorus 3.0-4.5 mg/dl or 1-1.5 mmol/L
PO2 75-100 mm Hg
Potassium 3.5-5.0 meq/L or 2.5-5.0 mmol/L
Sodium 135-145 meq/L or 135-145 mmol/L
Acetoaetate less than 2 mmol
Ascorbic adic 0.4-15 mg/dl or 23-85 µmol/L
Bilirubin 0.4-0.6 mg/dl or 1.71-6.84 µmol/L
Carotinoids 0.8-4.0 µg/ml
Creatinine 0.6-1.5 mg/dl or 60-130 µmol/L
Lactic acid 0.6-1.8 meq/L or 0.44-1.28 µmol/L
Cholesterol 120-220 mg/dl or 3.9-7.3 mmol/L
Triglycerides 40-150 mg/dl or 6-18 mmol/L
Pyruvic acid 0-0.11 meq/L or 79.8-228 µmol/L
Urea nitrogen 8-25 mg/dl or 2.86-7.14 mmol/L
Uric acid 3.0-7.0 mg/dl or 0.18-0.29 mmol/L
Albumin 3.5-5.0 g/dl
Insulin 6-20 µU/dl
Glucose 70-100 mg/dl or 4-6 mmol/L
TABLE 3.10
Normal Values for Micronutrients in Urine
Calcium, mg/24 hr 100–250
Chloride, meq/24 hr 110–250
Copper, µg/24 hr 0–100
Lead, µg/24 hr < 100
Phosphorus, g/24 hr 0.9–1.3
Potassium, meq/24 hr 25–100
Sodium, meq/24 hr 130–260
Zinc, mg/24 hr 0.15–1.2
Creatinine, mg/kg bodyweight 15–25
Riboflavin, µg/g creatinine > 80
Niacin metabolite,a µg/g creatinine > 1.6
Pyridoxine, µg/g creatinine ≥ 20
Biotin, µg/24 hr > 25
Pantothenic acid, mg/24 hr ≥1
Folate, FIGLUb after histidine load < 5 mg/8 hr
B12, methylmalonic acid after a valine load ≤ 2 mg/24 hr
Note: For more information on urine analyses see: ICNNO, 1963,
Manual for Nutrition Surveys, 2nd ed., U.S. Government
Printing Office, Washington, D.C.; Sauberlich et al., 1974,
Laboratory Tests for the Assessment of Nutritional Status, CRC
Press, Boca Raton, FL; NHANES Manual for Nutrition As-
sessment, CDC, Atlanta, GA; Gibson, R.S., 1990. Principles
of Nutrition Assessment, Oxford University Press, New York.
a N1-methylnicotinamide.
b Formiminoglutamic acid.
2705_frame_C03 Page 135 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:12 PM
TABLE 3.11
Normal Clinical Values for Constituents of Human Urine
Constituent Content
Aldosterone 2–26 µg/24 hr; 5.5–72 nmol/d
Catecholamines (total) < 100 µg/24 hr
Epinephrine < 10 µg/24 hr; <100 nmol/d
Norepinephrine < 100 µg/24 hr; <590 nmol/d
Cortisol, free 20–100 µg/24 hr; 0.55–2.76 µmol/d
11,17-Hydroxycorticoids men: 4–12 µg/24 hr; women, 4–8 µg/24 hr
17-Ketosteroids <8 yrs: 0–2 mg/24 hr; 9–20 yrs: 2–20 mg/24
Metanephrine < 1.3 mg/24 hr; 6.6 umol/d
Vanillylmandilic acid < 7 mg/24 hr; < 35 µmol/d
Lead < 80 µg/24 hr; 0.4 µmol/d
Sodium 190 mmol/l
Potassium 70 mol/l
Chloride 200 mmol/l
Phosphate (PO4) 35 mmol/l
Phosphorus 22.5 mmol/g creatinine/l urine
Sulfate (SO4) 21–34 mmol/l
Calcium 204 ± 73 mg/24 hr; 1.25–12.5 mmol/24 hr
Iodine >50 µg/g creatinine
Chromium 3.27–3.85 nmol/l
Manganese 7–10.6 nmol/24 hr
Urea 330–580 mmol/l (depends on diet)
Uric acid 0.4–5.8 mmol/l
Amino nitrogen 19–31 mmol/l (depends on diet)
Ammonia 29–72 mmol/l (depends on diet)
Creatinine 9.5–28.5 mmol/l
Porphyrins
D aminolevulinic acid 1.5–7.5 mg/24 hr; 11–57 umol/d
Coproporphyrin < 230 µg/24 hr; < 350 nmol/d
Uroporphyrin < 50 µg/24 hr; < 60 nmol/d
Porphobilinogen < 2 mg/24 hr; 8.8 µmol/d
Urobilinogen < 2.5 mg/24 hr; 70–470 µmol/d
Vitamins (well nourished adult subjects)
Riboflavin > 120 µg/24 hr
Niacin > 66 µg/g creatinine
B6 > 20 µg/g creatinine
Methylmalonic acid (B12 deficient) >5.0 ug/mg creatinine
Gla:creatinine (K deficient) Men: 3.16 ± 0.06; women 3.83±0.08
Specific gravity of urine 1.003–1.030
pH 5.5–7.0
Note: Values were from: Sauberlich, HE Assessment of Nutritional Status, 2nd Edition CRC
Press, Boca Raton, 1999; Banks, P, Bartley, W, Birt, LM, The Biochemistry of Tissues
2nd Edition John Wiley 1976; and Murray, RK, Granner, DK, Mayes, PA, Rodwell,
VW Harper’s Biochemistry 24th Edition Appleton & Lange, 1996.
136
TABLE 3.12
Retinol Binding Proteins
Acronym Protein Molecular Weight Location Function
RBP Retinol binding protein 21,000 Plasma Transports all-trans retinol from
intestinal absorption site to target
tissues
CRBP Cellular retinol binding protein 14,600 Cells of target tissue Transports all-trans retinol from plasma
membrane to organelles within the
cell
2705_frame_C03 Page 136 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:12 PM
CRBP II Cellular retinol binding protein 16,000 Absorptive cells of small intestine Transports all-trans retinol from
Type II absorptive sites on plasma membrane
of mucosal cells
CRABP Cellular retinoic acid binding 14,600 Cells of target tissue Transports all-trans retinoic acid to the
protein nucleus
CRALBP Cellular retinal binding protein 33,000 Specific cells in the eye Transports 11-cis retinal and 11-cis
retinol as part of the visual cycle
IRBP Interphotoreceptor or interstitial 144,000 Retina Transports all-trans retinol and 11-cis
retinol binding protein retinal in the retina extracellular space
RAR Nuclear retinoic acid receptor, 3 All cells Binds retinoic acid and regions of DNA
main forms (α, β, γ) α-liver having the GGTCA sequence
β-brain
γ-liver, kidney, lung
RXR Nuclear retinoic acid receptors,
multiple forms
Handbook of Nutrition and Food
2705_frame_C03 Page 137 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:12 PM
TABLE 3.13
Drugs that Alter Nutritional State
Drug Effect
Spironolactone Increases need for vitamin A
Thiazides Increases potassium excretion
Cholestyramine Increases fecal excretion of cholesterol, vitamin A, B12, folacin
Colestipol Increases fecal excretion of bile acids, cholesterol, Vitamin A, K, & D
Phenolphthalein Increases fecal excretion of ingesta (laxative effect) also affects
availability of vitamins A, D, K and increases potassium loss
Phenytoin, dilantin Impairs use of folate
Coumarin, dicoumarol Interferes with vitamin K in its role in coagulation
Cyclosporin Interferes with vitamin K metabolism
Isoniazid Increases need for niacin and B6
Sulfasalazine Increases need for folacin
p-aminosalicylic acid Increases need for vitamin B12
Neomycin Increases need for vitamin B12
Tetracycline Interferes with uptake of calcium, magnesium, iron, and zinc
EDTA Binds divalent ions in the intestine thus decreasing availability
Phenylbutazone Increases niacin need
Penicillamine Binds copper and B6 thus increasing need
Thiosemicarbazide Binds vitamin B6
L-DOPA Increases need for vitamin B6
Hydralazine Increases need for vitamin B6
Pyrimethane Increases need for folacin
Methotrexate Increases need for folacin
Theophylline Increases protein turnover, increases calcium mobilization in cells
Ametine Interferes with vitamin B12
Aluminum hydroxide Reduces folate availability as well as phosphate use
Magnesium hydroxide Counteracts phosphate in intestine
Sodium bicarbonate Reduces folate availability
Ethanol Drives up need for niacin, riboflavin, B6 and folacin
Mineral oil Impairs absorption of vitamin A & β carotene
Azulfidine Impairs absorption of folacin, B12 and fat soluble vitamins
Oral contraceptives Increases folacin turnover
Amphetamine Anorexia
Phenethylamine & related compounds Anorexia
Colchicine Promotes peristalsis thus reducing the absorption of all nutrients
Biguanides Promotes glucose use; decreases absorption of B12
Note: The information in this table provided by the Physicians’ Desk Reference; The Merck Index; Sauberlich, HE,
Assessment of Nutritional Status, 2nd ed., CRC Press, 1999; and Murray, RK, Granner, DK, Mayes, PA,
Rodwell, VW, Harper’s Biochemistry 24 ed. Appleton & Lange, Stamford, CN, 1997.
138
TABLE 3.14
Drugs that May Have Anti-Obesity Properties
Drug Example Effect
a) Anti Nutrition Drugs
1. Gastric emptying inhibitors (--) threochlorocitric acid Delays gastric emptying, induces satiety
2. Glucosidase inhibitors Acarbose, miglitol Inhibits carbohydrate digestion
3. Inhibitors of lipid uptake Cholestyramine Binds bile acids, disrupts micelle formation
4. Pseudonutrients Olestra Fat substitute with less energy
Artificial sweeteners Sugar substitute, no energy
2705_frame_C03 Page 138 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:12 PM
c) Appetite Suppressors
1. β phenethylamine derivatives Fastin, Dexatrim Interferes with hunger signaling via norepinephrine
2. Serotonergic agents Fenfluramine, fluoxetine Increases serotonin release and signals satiety
3. Amine reuptake inhibitor Sibutramine Blocks reuptake of norepinephrine and 5-HT and suppresses appetite
Handbook of Nutrition and Food
TABLE 3.15
Micronutrient Interactions
Tables of Clinical Significance
Calcium
Phosphorus
Potassium
Sodium
Magnesium
Zinc
Iron
Copper
Iodine
Fluorine
Vitamin A
Vitamin D
Vitamin E
B12
Vitamin K
Riboflavin
Niacin
Thiamin
Ascorbic acid
B6
Folacin
Calcium X
2705_frame_C03 Page 139 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:12 PM
TABLE 3.16
Preferred Ligand Binding Groups for Metal Ions
Metal Ligand Groups
TABLE 3.17
Food Components That Affect Calcium Absorption
Component Effect
Alcohol ↓
Ascorbic acid ↓↑
Cellulose ↓
Fata ↑↓
Fiber ↓
Lactose ↑
Medium-chain triglycerides ↑
Oxalates ↓
Pectin ↑↓
Phytate ↓
Proteinb ↑↓
Sodium alginate ↓
Uronic acid ↓
a In cases of steatorrhea, calcium absorption is reduced.
b Certain proteins, e.g., those in milk, enhance calcium
availability while others, e.g., those in plants, reduce it.
2705_frame_C03 Page 141 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:12 PM
TABLE 3.18
Calcium Binding Proteins
Protein Function
TABLE 3.19
The Body Content of Iron
Male Female
Types of Iron (70 kg) (60 kg)
TABLE 3.20
Body Mass Index Calculated as Body Mass Index = Body Weight/Height.2 BMI for a given height
wt/lb wt/kg
Height 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68
142.2 144.8 147.3 149.9 152.4 154.9 157.5 160.0 162.6 165.1 167.6 170.2 172.7
100 45.5 22.5 21.7 20.9 20.2 19.6 18.9 18.3 17.8 17.2 16.7 16.2 15.7 15.2
110 50.0 24.7 23.8 23.0 22.3 21.5 20.8 20.2 19.5 18.9 18.3 17.8 17.3 16.8
120 54.5 27.0 26.0 25.1 24.3 23.5 22.7 22.0 21.3 20.6 20.0 19.4 18.8 18.3
130 59.1 29.2 28.2 27.2 26.3 25.4 24.6 23.8 23.1 22.4 21.7 21.0 20.4 19.8
140 63.6 31.5 30.4 29.3 28.3 27.4 26.5 25.7 24.9 24.1 23.3 22.7 22.0 21.3
150 68.2 33.7 32.5 31.4 30.3 29.4 28.4 27.5 26.6 25.8 25.0 24.3 23.5 22.9
160 72.7 36.0 34.7 33.5 32.4 31.3 30.3 29.3 28.4 27.5 26.7 25.9 25.1 24.4
170 77.3 38.2 36.9 35.6 34.4 33.3 32.2 31.2 30.2 29.2 28.3 27.5 26.7 25.9
180 81.8 40.5 39.0 37.7 36.4 35.2 34.1 33.0 32.0 30.9 30.0 29.1 28.2 27.4
190 86.4 42.7 41.2 39.8 38.4 37.2 36.0 34.8 33.7 32.7 31.7 30.7 29.8 29.0
200 90.9 45.0 43.4 41.9 40.5 39.1 37.9 36.6 35.5 34.4 33.4 32.4 31.4 30.5
210 95.5 47.2 45.5 44.0 42.5 41.1 29.8 38.5 37.3 36.1 35.0 34.0 33.0 32.0
220 100.0 49.5 47.7 46.1 44.5 43.1 41.7 40.3 39.1 37.8 36.7 35.6 34.5 33.5
230 104.5 51.7 49.9 48.2 46.5 45.0 43.6 42.1 40.8 39.5 38.4 37.2 36.1 35.1
240 109.1 53.9 42.0 50.3 48.5 47.0 45.5 44.0 42.6 41.3 40.0 38.8 37.7 36.6
250 113.6 56.2 54.2 52.4 50.6 48.9 47.4 45.8 44.4 43.0 41.7 40.5 39.2 38.1
260 118.2 58.4 56.4 54.5 52.6 50.9 49.3 47.6 46.2 44.7 43.4 42.1 40.8 39.6
270 122.7 60.7 58.5 56.6 54.6 52.8 51.1 49.5 47.9 46.4 45.0 43.7 42.4 41.1
280 127.3 62.9 60.7 58.7 56.6 54.8 53.0 51.3 49.7 48.1 46.7 45.3 43.9 43.7
290 131.8 65.2 62.9 60.8 58.7 56.8 54.9 53.1 51.5 49.9 48.4 46.9 45.5 44.2
300 136.4 67.4 65.0 62.8 60.7 58.7 56.8 55.0 53.3 51.6 50.0 48.5 47.1 45.7
310 140.9 69.7 67.2 64.9 62.7 60.7 58.7 56.8 55.0 53.3 51.7 50.2 48.6 47.2
320 145.5 71.9 69.4 67.0 64.7 62.6 60.6 58.6 56.8 55.0 53.4 51.8 50.2 48.8
330 150.0 74.2 71.5 69.1 66.8 64.6 62.5 60.5 58.6 56.7 55.0 53.4 51.8 50.3
340 154.5 76.4 73.7 71.2 68.8 66.5 64.4 62.3 60.4 58.5 56.7 55.0 53.4 51.8
350 159.1 78.7 75.9 73.3 70.8 68.5 66.3 64.1 62.1 60.2 58.4 56.6 54.9 53.3
360 163.6 80.9 78.0 75.4 72.8 70.5 68.2 66.0 63.9 61.9 60.0 58.3 56.5 54.9
370 168.2 83.2 80.2 77.5 74.8 72.4 70.1 67.8 65.7 63.6 61.7 59.9 58.1 56.4
380 172.7 85.4 82.4 79.6 76.9 74.4 72.0 69.6 67.5 65.3 63.4 61.5 59.6 57.9
390 177.3 87.7 84.5 81.7 78.9 76.3 73.9 71.5 69.2 67.1 65.0 63.1 61.2 59.4
400 181.8 89.9 86.7 83.8 80.9 78.3 75.8 73.3 71.0 68.8 66.7 64.7 62.8 61.0
2705_frame_C03 Page 143 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:12 PM
and weight is where the horizontal line intersects the vertical line.
69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84
175.3 177.8 180.3 182.9 185.4 188.0 190.5 193.0 195.6 198.1 200.7 203.2 205.7 208.3 210.8 213.4
14.8 14.4 14.0 13.6 13.2 12.9 12.5 12.2 11.9 11.6 11.3 11.0 10.7 10.5 10.2 10.0
16.3 15.8 15.4 14.9 14.5 14.1 13.8 13.4 13.1 12.7 12.4 12.1 11.8 11.5 11.3 11.0
17.7 17.3 16.8 16.3 15.9 15.4 15.0 14.6 14.3 13.9 13.5 13.2 12.9 12.6 12.3 12.0
19.2 18.7 18.2 17.7 17.2 16.7 16.3 15.9 15.4 15.1 14.7 14.3 14.0 13.6 13.3 13.0
20.7 20.1 19.6 19.0 18.5 18.0 17.5 17.1 16.6 16.2 15.8 15.4 15.0 14.7 14.3 14.0
22.2 21.6 21.0 20.4 19.8 19.3 18.8 18.3 17.8 17.4 16.9 16.5 16.1 15.7 15.3 15.0
23.7 23.0 22.4 21.7 21.2 20.6 20.0 19.5 19.0 18.5 18.1 17.6 17.2 16.8 16.4 16.0
25.1 24.4 23.8 23.1 22.5 21.9 21.3 20.7 20.2 19.7 19.2 18.7 18.3 17.8 17.4 17.0
26.6 25.9 25.2 24.5 23.8 23.1 22.5 22.0 21.4 20.8 20.3 19.8 19.3 18.9 18.4 18.0
28.1 27.3 26.6 25.8 25.1 24.4 23.8 23.2 22.6 22.0 21.4 20.9 20.4 19.9 19.4 19.0
29.6 28.8 28.0 27.2 26.4 25.7 25.1 24.4 23.8 23.2 22.6 22.0 21.5 21.0 20.5 20.0
31.1 30.2 29.4 28.5 27.8 27.0 26.3 25.6 24.9 24.3 23.7 23.1 22.6 22.0 21.5 21.0
32.5 31.6 30.8 29.9 29.1 28.3 27.6 26.8 26.1 25.5 24.8 24.2 23.6 23.0 22.5 22.0
34.0 33.1 32.2 31.3 30.4 29.6 28.8 28.1 27.3 26.6 26.0 25.3 24.7 24.1 23.5 23.0
35.5 34.5 33.6 32.6 31.7 30.9 30.1 29.3 28.5 27.8 27.1 26.4 25.8 25.1 24.5 24.0
37.0 35.9 35.0 34.0 33.1 32.2 31.3 30.5 29.7 29.0 28.2 27.5 26.9 26.2 25.6 25.0
38.5 37.4 36.4 35.3 34.4 33.4 32.6 31.7 30.9 30.1 29.3 28.6 27.9 27.2 26.6 26.0
39.9 38.8 37.8 36.7 35.7 34.7 33.8 32.9 32.1 31.3 30.5 29.7 39.0 28.3 27.6 26.9
41.4 40.3 39.2 38.0 37.0 36.0 35.1 34.2 33.3 32.4 31.6 30.8 30.1 29.3 28.6 27.9
42.9 41.7 40.5 39.4 38.3 37.3 36.3 35.4 34.5 33.6 32.7 31.9 31.2 30.4 29.7 28.9
44.4 43.1 41.9 40.8 39.7 38.6 37.6 36.6 35.6 34.7 33.9 33.0 32.2 31.4 30.7 29.9
45.9 44.6 43.3 42.1 41.0 39.9 38.8 37.8 36.8 35.9 35.0 34.1 33.3 32.5 31.7 30.9
47.3 46.0 44.7 43.5 42.3 41.2 40.1 39.0 38.0 37.1 36.1 35.2 34.4 33.5 32.7 31.9
48.8 47.4 46.1 44.8 43.6 42.4 41.3 40.3 39.2 38.2 37.2 36.3 35.5 34.6 33.8 32.9
50.3 48.9 47.5 46.2 45.0 43.7 52.6 41.5 40.4 39.4 38.4 37.4 36.5 35.6 34.8 33.9
51.8 50.3 48.9 47.6 46.3 45.0 43.8 42.7 41.6 40.5 39.5 38.5 37.6 36.7 35.8 34.9
53.2 51.8 50.3 48.9 47.6 46.3 45.1 43.9 42.8 41.7 40.6 39.6 38.7 37.7 36.8 35.9
54.7 53.2 51.7 50.3 48.9 47.6 46.3 45.2 44.0 42.9 41.8 40.7 39.7 38.8 37.8 36.9
56.2 54.6 53.1 51.6 50.3 48.9 47.6 46.4 45.1 44.0 42.9 41.8 40.8 39.8 38.9 37.9
57.7 56.1 54.5 53.0 51.6 50.2 48.8 47.6 46.3 45.2 44.0 42.9 41.9 40.9 39.9 38.9
59.2 57.5 55.9 54.4 52.9 51.4 50.1 48.8 47.5 46.3 45.1 44.0 43.0 41.9 40.9 39.9
2705_frame_C03 Page 144 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:12 PM
TABLE 3.21
Standard International Units (SI Units) for Reporting Clinical Data
Physical Quantity Base Units SI Symbol
I. Base Units
Length Meter m
Mass Kilogram kg
Time Second s
Amount Moles mol
Thermodynamic Temperature Kelvin K
Electric Current Ampere A
Luminous Intensity Candela cd
normal salt diet 8.1-15.5 ng/dL 27.74 220-430 pmol/L XXO 10 pmol/L
restricted salt diet 20.8-44.4 ng/dL 27.74 580-1240 pmol/L XXO 10 pmol/L
negative 0-3 fmol estradiol 1.00 0-3 fmol estradiol/ XXX 1 fmol/mg
bound/mg mg cytosol protein
cytosol protein protein
doubtful 4-10 fmol estradiol 1.00 4-10 fmol estradiol/ XXX 1 fmol/mg
bound/mg mg cytosol protein
cytosol protein protein
positive >10 fmol estradiol 1.00 >10 fmol estradiol/ XXX 1 fmol/mg
bound/mg mg cytosol protein
cytosol protein protein
estrone (P, S)
- female 1-10 days of cycle 43-180 pg/mL 3.699 160-665 pmol/L XXX 5 pmol/L
-female 11-20 days of cycle 75-196 pg/mL 3.699 275-725 pmol/L XXX 5 pmol/L
-female 20-39 days of cycle 131-201 pg/mL 3.699 485-745 pmol/L XXX 5 pmol/L
-male 29-75 pg/mL 3.699 105-275 pmol/L XXX 5 pmol/L
estrone (U) female 2-25 µg/24 h 3.699 5-90 nmol/d XXX 5 nmol/d
ethanol (P)
legal limit [driving] <80 mg/dL 0.2171 <17 mmol/L XX 1 nmol/L
-toxic >100 mg/dL 0.2171 >22 mmol/L XX 1 mmol/L
ethchlorvynol (P) toxic >40 mg/L 6.915 >280 µmol/L XXO 10 µmol/L
ethosuximide (P)
therapeutic 40-110 mg/L 7.084 280-780 µmol/L XXO 10 µmol/L
ethylene glycol (P)
toxic >30 mg/dL 0.1611 >5 mmol/L XX 1 mmol/L
Handbook of Nutrition and Food
fat (F)
[as stearic acid] 2.0-6.0 g/24 h 3.515 7-21 mmol/d XXX 1 mmol/d
fatty acids, non-
esterified (P) 8-20 mg/dL 10.00 80-200 mg/L XXO 10 mg/L
ferritin (S) 18-300 ng/mL 1.00 18-300 µg/L XXO 10 µg/L
fibrinogen (P) 200-400 mg/dL 0.01 2.0-4.0 g/L X.X 0.1 g/L
fluoride (U) <1.0 mg/24 h 52.63 <50 µmol/d XXO 10 µmol/d
folate (S) [as pteroylglutamic acid] 2-10 ng/mL 2.266 4-22 nmol/L XX 2 nmol/L
µg/dL 22.66 nmol/L 2 nmol/L
folate (Erc) 140-960 ng/mL 2.266 550-2200 nmol/L XXO 10 nmol/L
follicle stimulating hormone
[FSH] (P)
Tables of Clinical Significance
potassium ion (S) 3.5-5.0 mEq/L 1.00 3.5-5.0 mmol/L X.X 0.1 mmol/L
mg/dL 0.2558 mmol/L X.X 0.1 mmol/L
potassium ion (U)
[diet dependent] 25-100 mEq/24 h 1.00 25-100 mmol/d XX 1 mmol/d
pregnaediol (U)
2705_frame_C03 Page 155 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:12 PM
dehydroepiandrosterone
-female 0.2-1.8 mg/24 h 3.467 1-6 µmol/d XX 1 µmol/d
-male 0.2-2.0 mg/24 h 3.467 1-7 µmol/d XX 1 µmol/d
etiocholanolone
-female 0.8-4.0 mg/24 h 3.443 2-14 µmol/d XX 1 µmol/d
-male 1.4-5.0 mg/24 h 3.443 4-17 µmol/d XX 1 µmol/d
sulfonamides (B) [as sulfanilamide]
-therapeutic 10.0-15.0 mg/dL 58.07 580-870 µmol/L XXO 10 µmol/L
testosterone (P)
-female 0.6 ng/mL 3.467 2.0 nmol/L XX.X 0.5 nmol/L
-male 4.6-8.0 ng/mL 3.467 14.0-28.0 nmol/L XX.X 0.5 nmol/L
theophylline (P)
-therapeutic 10.0-20.0 mg/L 5.550 55-110 µmol/L XX 1 µmol/L
thiocyanate (P) (nitroprusside toxicity) 10.0 mg/dL 0.1722 1.7 mmol/L X.XX 0.1 mmol/L
thiopental (P) individual mg/L 4.126 individual µmol/L XX 5 µmol/L
thyroid tests:
thyroid stimulating
hormone [TSH] (S) 2-11 µU/mL 1.00 2-11 mU/L XX 1 mU/L
thyroxine [T4] (S) 4.0-11.0 µg/dL 12.87 51-142 nmol/L XXX 1 nmol/L
157
158
urea nitrogen (U) 2.0-20.0 diet g/24 h 35.700 450-700 mmol/d UREA XXO 10 mol/d
dependent
urobilinogen (U) 0.0-4.0 mg/24 h 1.693 0.0-6.8 µmol/d X.X 0.1 µmol/d
valproic acid (P)
-therapeutic 50-100 mg/L 6.934 350-700 µmol/L XO 10 µmol/L
vanillylmandelic acid [VMA] (U)* <6.8 mg/24 h 5.046 <35 µmol/d XX 1 µmol/d
Handbook of Nutrition and Food
vitamin A [retinol] (P,S) 10-50 µg/dL 0.03491 0.35-1.75 µmol/L X.XX 0.05 µmol/L
vitamin B1 [thiamine hydrochloride] (U) 60-500 mg/24 h 0.002965 0.18-1.48 µmol/d ZX.XX 0.01 µmol/d
vitamin B2 [riboflavin] (S) 2.6-3.7 µg/dL 26.57 70-100 nmol/L XXX 5 nmol/L
vitamin B6 [pyridoxal] (B) 20-90 ng/mL 5.982 120-540 nmol/L XXX 5 nmol/L
vitamin B12 (P,S) [cyanocobalamin] 200-1000 pg/mL 0.7378 150-750 pmol/L XO 10 pmol/L
vitamin C [see ascorbate] (B,P,S) ... ... ... ... ... ... ...
vitamin D3 [cholecalciferol] (P) 24-40 mg/mL 2.599 60-105 nmol/L XXX 5 nmol/L
25 OH-cholecacliferol 18-36 ng/mL .496 45-90 nmol/L XXX 5 mmol/L
vitamin E [alpha-tocopherol] (P,S) 0.78-1.25 mg/dL 23.22 18-29 µmol/L XX 1 µmol/L
warfarin (P)
-therapeutic 1.0-3.0 mg/L 3.243 3.3-9.8 µmol/L XX.X 0.1 µmol/L
xanthine (U)
Tables of Clinical Significance
(excreted in
5 h)
zinc (S) 75-120 µg/dL 0.1530 11.5-18.5 µmol/L XX.X 0.1 µmol/L
zinc (U) 150-1200 µg/24 h 0.01530 2.3-18.3 µmol/d XX.X 0.1 µmol/d
159
2705_frame_C03 Page 160 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:12 PM
TABLE 3.23
Small Animal Analogs of Human Degenerative Diseases*
Type 1 Diabetes Mellitus (IDDM) Obesity
Streptozotocin or alloxan treated animals of most Zucker rat
species db/db mouse
Pancreatectomy will also produce IDDM SHR/N-cp rat
BB rat, NOD mouse (Both of these develop diabetes LA/N-cp rat
as an autoimmune disease and both mimic Type I ob/ob mouse
diabetes mellitus as found in humans.) Ventral hypothalamus lesioned animals
db/db mouse Osborne-Mendel rats fed high fat diets
FAT mouse
Hypertension
NZO mouse
TUBBY mouse SHR rats WKY rats
Adipose mouse JCR:LA rats Transgenic rats
Chinese hampster (Cricetulus griseus)
Gallstones
South African hamster (Mystromys alb)
Tuco-Tuco (Clenomys tabarum) (The rat does not have a gall bladder nor does it
have stones.)
Gerbil fed a cholesterol-rich, cholic acid-rich diet
Type 2 Diabetes Mellitus Hamster, prairie dog, squirrel monkey, or tree
shrew fed a cholesterol-rich diet
ob/ob mouse
KK, yellow KK mouse Lipemia
Avy, Ay yellow mouse
P, PB 13/Ld mouse Zucker fatty rat
db PAS mouse BHE/Cdb rat
BHE/Cdb rat NZW mouse
Zucker diabetic rat Transgenic mice given gene for atherosclerosis
SHR/N-cp rat
Atherosclerosis
Spiny mouse
HUS rat Transgenic mice given gene for atherosclerosis
LA/N-cp rat NZW mouse
Wistar Kyoto rat JCR:LA cp/cp rat
* There are several compilations of animal models for human disease. See the series of books edited
by Shafrir having the general title Lessons from Animal Diabetes published by Smith Gordon, London.
See also the NIH Guide for Animal Resources, updated annually, and the Jackson Laboratory catalog,
Bar Harbor, Maine.
TABLE 3.24
Composition of the AIN-93 Maintenance (M) and Growth (G) Diets
Ingredient AIN-93M (g/kg) AIN-93G (g/kg)
Part III
Comparative Nutrition
2705_frame_C04 Page 162 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:13 PM
2705_frame_C04 Page 163 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:13 PM
4
Animal Needs and Uses (Comparative Nutrition)
William P. Flatt
0-8493-2705-9/01/$0.00+$1.50
© 2002 by CRC Press LLC 163
2705_frame_C04 Page 164 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:13 PM
with the proper proportions of these nutrients to the animals. Because of the economic
importance of this knowledge, scientists throughout the world have conducted research
with different species of animals, birds, and fish, and feeding standards based on this
research have been developed to formulate diets and rations for domestic livestock, poul-
try, companion animals, laboratory animals, and other species.
During the past century, scientists from many nations have conducted research on the
specific nutritional requirements of numerous species of animals, but there are so many
interactions among nutrients — and so many factors that influence nutrient utilization by
different species — that tables or formulae for calculating nutritional requirements must
be modified periodically. The data presented in this section are based on research sum-
marized by groups of scientists who are most knowledgeable about the nutritional research
that has been conducted anywhere in the world on that particular species. In the United
States, the National Academy of Sciences, National Research Council (NRC), Board on
Agriculture, Committee on Animal Nutrition has been responsible for appointing com-
mittees of expert animal scientists to publish periodical reports that summarize the most
up-to-date information on nutritional requirements of various species. The nutrient com-
position of feeds usually consumed by these animals is also included in each of the
publications, because the feed evaluation system used to express the nutritional value of
feeds determines the manner in which the nutritional requirements of the animal are
expressed. Specific information on each species may be obtained by obtaining the most
recent NRC publication on that species.
The health and wellbeing of animals are affected markedly by their nutritional status.
It is important to know how to properly provide feed that contains the nutrients animals
need to meet their nutritional requirements. This applies to companion animals such as
dogs, cats, birds, and fish as well as recreational animals such as horses, ponies, donkeys,
and camels. The efficient and economical production of food and fiber by domestic live-
stock and poultry requires good management practices, and especially balanced rations
that contain adequate supplies of protein, minerals, vitamins, and energy. In most, if not
all, animal production systems a limited energy supply more frequently retards growth
and limits production than a deficiency of any other nutrient. Crampton (1956)1 stated
that “the basic need of animals fed normal rations is for energy, and this demand is the
basis for most, and perhaps all, of the other nutrient requirements.”
The National Research Council, Board on Agriculture, Committee on Animal Nutrition
subcommittees prepare reports periodically published by the National Academy Press,
2101 Constitution Avenue NW, Washington, D.C. 20055. The most recent publications
(dairy cattle, horses, beef cattle, and swine) have included computer disks with tables of
nutrient requirements and feed composition. The full text, including tables, for Nutrient
Requirements of Swine, 10th Revised Edition, 1998, and may be accessed on the web site of
the National Academy Press (http://books.nap.edu).
The most recent National Academy Press series of publications on Nutrient Require-
ments of Domestic Animals is summarized in Table 4.l. The pages of the tables of nutrient
requirements of each species are included, but in order to use this information most
effectively, the tables of nutrient composition of most commonly used feed ingredients
are needed. The feed composition tables are included in each of these publications. The
1999 Feedstuffs Reference Issue (Volume 71, Number 31, July 30, 1999, pages 40-84) has
tables based on the NRC publications for swine, beef cattle, dairy cattle, chickens and
turkeys, horses, and pets (dogs and cats). There are numerous publications, including
animal nutrition textbooks, that have used the tables of nutrient requirements of various
species of livestock as well as the tables of nutrient composition. One recent example is
Livestock Feeds and Feeding, 4th Edition, 1998, by Richard O. Kellems and D.C. Church,
Prentice Hall, New Jersey. The species included in this text are: beef cattle, dairy cattle,
2705_frame_C04 Page 165 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:13 PM
sheep, goats, swine, poultry, horses, dogs and cats, and rabbits (pages 485–552). Tables of
the composition of feedstuffs commonly fed to livestock are on pages 468–484.
Dogs
Nutrient Requirements of Dogs, Revised 1985, 79 pp. ISBN 0-309-03496-5 (S 95 .N28
1985).
Rabbits
Nutrient Requirements of Rabbits, Second Revised Edition, 1977.
Laboratory Animals
Rat, mouse, guinea pigs, hamster, gerbils, voles
Fish
Nutrient Requirements of Fish (BOA) 128 pp., ISBN-04891-5, 1993 (SH 156 .N86
1993).
2705_frame_C04 Page 167 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:13 PM
Avian Species
Poultry (chickens, turkeys, geese, ducks, pheasants, Japanese quail, bobwhite quail)
Nutrient Requirements of Poultry, Ninth Revised Edition, 1994 (BOA) 176 pp., ISBN
0-309-04892-3.
Domestic Livestock
Nonruminant Species
Swine
Nutrient Requirements of Swine, Tenth Revised Edition, 1998 (BOA) 210 pp., ISBN
0-309-05993-3, Computer laser optical disc (4 3/4 in.).
Horses
Nutrient Requirements of Horses, Fifth Revised Edition, 1989 (BOA) 112 pp., ISBN
03989-4.
Ruminant Species
Beef cattle
Nutrient Requirements of Beef Cattle, Seventh Revised Edition, 1996 (BOA) Note: The
7th Revised Edition Update 2000 was released and is on the web site. 242 pp.,
ISBN 0-309-05426-5, 1 computer disk (3 1/2 in.).
Dairy cattle
Nutrient Requirements of Dairy Cattle, Sixth Revised Edition, Update l989 (BOA) 168
pp., ISBN 0-309-03826-X.
Sheep
Nutrient Requirements of Sheep, Sixth Revised Edition, 1985 (BOA) 112 pp., ISBN 0-
309-03596-1.
Goats
Nutrient Requirements of Goats: Angora, Dairy, and Meat Goats in Temperate and Tropical
Countries (BOA) 84 pp., ISBN 0-309-03185-0 (SF 95. N28 no. 15).
Nonhuman Primates
Nutrient Requirements of Nonhuman Primates 1978 ix, 83 p.: ill. :28 cm. 1978 ISBN
0-309-02786-1 (SF 95 .N28 1978).
Nutrient Requirements of Nonhuman Primates: Second Revised Edition, 2000, 300 pages
(not yet available).
2705_frame_C04 Page 170 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:13 PM
TABLE 4.1
Web Addresses for Tables of Nutrient Requirements for a Variety of Animals
National Academy Press. Washington, D.C. List of publications with tables of nutrient requirements of each
species. http://books.nap.edu. To obtain complete text, including tables, fill in the box labeled SEARCH ALL
TITLES with “Nutrient Requirements” and all the following publications with hyperlinks will appear at URL
http://books.nap.edu/catalog/910.html.
Nutrient Requirements of Cats, Revised Edition, 1986 (SF 447.6 .N88 1986) Nutrient Requirement Tables, pages 41-
44. (http://www.nap.edu/openbook/0309036828/html)
Nutrient Requirements of Dogs, Revised 1985 (S 95 .N28 1985) Nutrient Requirement Tables, pages 44-45. (http://
www.nap.edu/openbook/0309034965/html/44.html)
Nutrient Requirements of Mink and Foxes, Second Revised Edition, 1982 (SF 95 .N28 1982) Nutrient Requirement
Tables, pages 33-36. (http://www.nap.edu/openbook/030903325X/html/33.html)
Nutrient Requirements of Rabbits, Second Revised Edition, 1977 (SF 95 .N32 1977) Nutrient Requirement Tables,
pages 14-15. (http://www.nap.edu/openbook/0309026075/html/14.html)
Nutrient Requirements of Laboratory Animals, Fourth Revised Edition, 1995 (SF 406.2 .N88 1995) Nutrient Requirement
Tables for Rats, page 13; Mice, page 82; Guinea Pigs, page 104-105; (Hamsters, Gerbils, and Voles — text rather
than tables) (http://www.nap.edu/openbook/0309051266/html/11.html)
Nutrient Requirements of Fish, 1993 (SH 156 .N86 1993) Nutrient Requirements Table, pages 62-63. (http://
www.nap.edu/openbook/0309048915/html/62.html)
Nutrient Requirements of Poultry, Ninth Revised Edition, 1994 (SF 95 .N28 1994) Nutrient Requirement Tables for
Chickens, pages 19-34 for Tables 2-1 through 2-8; for Turkeys, pages 35-39, Tables 3-1 through 3-3; for Geese
pages 40-41; for Ducks, pages 42-43; for Ring-Necked Pheasants, page 44; for Japanese Quail, page 45; for
Bobwhite Quail, page 45. (http://www.nap.edu/openbook/0309048923/html/19.html)
Nutrient Requirements of Swine, 10th Revised Edition, 1998 (SF 396.5 .N87 1998). Nutrient Requirement Tables,
pages 110-123. Computer laser optical disc (4 3/4 in.). (http://www.nap.edu/openbook/0309059933/html/
110.html)
Nutrient Requirements of Horses, Fifth Revised Edition, 1989 (SF 285.5 .N37 1989). Nutrient Requirement Tables,
pages 39-48. Computer disk (5 1/4 in.). (http://www.nap.edu/openbook/0309039894/html/39.html)
Nutrient Requirements of Beef Cattle, Seventh Revised Edition, 1996 (SF 203 .N88 1996) Nutrient Requirement Tables,
pages 102-112. Prediction Equations and Computer Models, pages 113-131. Computer disk (3 1/2 in.). (http:
//www.nap.edu/openbook/0309069343/html/102.html)
Nutrient Requirements of Beef Cattle, Seventh Revised Edition: Update 2000, NRC Model Application software
available on line at http://stills.nap.edu/readingroom/books/beefmodel/
Nutrient Requirements of Dairy Cattle, Sixth Revised Edition, Update 1989 (SF 203 .N34 1988) Nutrient Requirement
Tables, pages 78-88. Computer disk (5 1/4 in.). (http://www.nap.edu/openbook/030903826X/html/78.html)
Nutrient Requirements of Sheep, Sixth Revised Edition, 1985 (SF 376 .N85 1985) Nutrient Requirement Tables, pages
45-53. (http://www.nap.edu/openbook/0309035961/html/45.html)
Nutrient Requirements of Goats: Angora, Dairy, and Meat Goats in Temperate and Tropical Countries, 1981 (S 95 .N28
1981) Nutrient Requirement Tables, pages 10-12. (http://www.nap.edu/openbook/0309031850/html/10.html)
Nutrient Requirements of Nonhuman Primates 1978 (SF 95 .N28 1978) Nutrient Requirement Table 1 pages 18-19.
Print-On-Demand. (http://books.nap.edu/catalog/34.html)
Nutrient Requirements of Nonhuman Primates: Second Revised Edition, 2000 300 pages In press, not yet available.
2705_frame_C04 Page 171 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:13 PM
TABLE 4.2
Publications Providing Information on the Nutrient Needs of Specific Animals
A. Nutrient requirements of companion animals (cats and dogs), rabbits, mink and foxes, and
laboratory animals (rats, mice, guinea pigs, hamsters, gerbils, and voles) and rabbits, mink, and
foxes. Tables of nutrient requirements from Nutrient Requirements of Domestic Animals: A Series.
National Research Council, National Academy Press (http://books.nap.edu)
Year last Pages of Computer NAP Web
Species NRC Publication revised Tables disk site of Tables
Companion Animals
Laboratory Animals
Avian Species
Other Species
C. Nutrient requirements of ruminants (beef cattle, dairy cattle, sheep and goats). Tables of nutrient
requirements from Nutrient Requirements of Domestic Animals: A Series. National Research Council,
National Academy Press (http://books.nap.edu)
Year last Pages of Computer NAP Web
Species NRC Publication revised Tables disk site of Tables
Ruminant Species
Beef Cattle Nutrient Requirements of Beef Cattle 2000 102–112 Yes Yes
(3 1/2 in.)
Dairy Cattle Nutrient Requirements of Dairy 1989 78–88 Yes Yes
Cattle (5 1/4 in.)
Sheep Nutrient Requirements of Sheep 1985 45–53 No Yes
Goats Nutrient Requirements of Goats: 1981 10–12 No Yes
Angora, Dairy and Meat Goats in
Temperate and Tropical Countries
References
1. Crampton, EW. 1956. Applied Animal Nutrition. The Use of Feedstuffs in the Formulation of Livestock
Rations. W.H. Freeman and Co., San Francisco, CA.
2705_frame_C05 Page 173 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:14 PM
Part IV
5
Nutrition during Pregnancy and Lactation
Risk Factors for Prenatal Nutrition Risk and Indications for Referral
Table 5.2 includes nutrition assessment, counseling, and treatment strategies for women
seeking care in both the prenatal and postnatal stages. Fetal growth is affected by the
TABLE 5.1
Special Recommendations for Women before Pregnancy
Maintain a healthy weight.
Engage in physical activity regularly.
If you need to gain or lose weight, do so gradually (no more than 1–2 pounds/week).
If trying to become pregnant and ordinarily drink alcoholic beverages, stop drinking or cut back on the amount
you drink.
If you smoke, quit or cut back to improve health.
To minimize risk of having an infant with a neural tube defect, eat a highly fortified breakfast cereal that provides
100% of the Daily Value (DV) for folate or take a vitamin supplement that provides 400 µg/day of folic acid.
Folic acid, the synthetic form of folate, is obtained only from fortified foods or vitamin supplements. It is not
yet known whether naturally occurring folate is as effective as folic acid in the prevention of neural tube defects.
0-8493-2705-9/01/$0.00+$1.50
© 2002 by CRC Press LLC 175
2705_frame_C05 Page 176 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:14 PM
TABLE 5.2
Nutritional Care at Preconception, Prenatal, and Postnatal Visits
Visit Assessment Counseling/Treatment
Preconception Determine BMI If <18 or >25, counsel on appropriate weight
care
Evaluate diet/supplement Develop a concrete plan for eating enough food to
intake achieve/maintain a healthy weight
Begin prenatal vitamin/mineral supplement
Prescribe calcium supplement if intake <1000 mg
Prescribe synthetic folic acid supplement of 400 µg per day
Botanical use Discontinue those with known or potential toxicities
Evaluate for anemia Hgb <12 g/dl, start therapeutic regimen of approximately
60–120 mg/day of ferrous iron; give multivitamin/
mineral supplement that contains ~15 mg of zinc and ~2
mg of copper
When anemia has resolved, discontinue high-dose iron
Use of harmful substances Reinforcement for any constructive steps already taken;
provide assistance with quitting, and refer for further
evaluation
Prenatal Evaluate diet Utilize dietary intake questionnaire, e.g. Diet Score, food
frequency questionnaires
Optimal weight gain during BMI <19.8 28–40 lbs
pregnancy 19.8–26.0 25–35 lbs
26.1–29.0 15–25 lbs
>29 ~15 lbs
Rate of weight gain First trimester 1 1/2–5 lbs
Second and third trimester 1/2–2 lbs/week
Poor weight gain Intensive assessment and counseling
< 2 lbs/month
< 10 lbs by mid-pregnancy
Nutritional needs/barriers If patient is economically unable to meet nutritional needs
— referral to federal food and nutrition programs (WIC)
Increase knowledge with dietary counseling
Vitamin/mineral No requirement for routine supplementation except folate
supplementation (400 µg/day) and iron (30–60 mg elemental iron/day)
Dietary supplements should be given if the adequacy of
a patient’s diet is questionable or if she is at high
nutritional risk
Excessive vitamin and mineral intake (more than twice
the RDA) should be avoided
Prophylaxis for iron deficiency Supplement of ferrous iron — 30 mg elemental iron daily
Iron deficiency anemia 60–120 mg elemental iron daily
Evaluate use of alcohol, Effects of substance use/abuse on perinatal outcomes
tobacco, drugs Abstinence from alcoholic beverages
Caffeine intake Consumption of 2–3 servings of caffeinated beverages is
unlikely to have adverse effects; in general, caffeinated
beverages provide few essential nutrients and often
crowd out better sources of nutrients
Lactose intolerance May result in insufficient calcium intake
Supplemental calcium necessary if insufficient calcium
consumed from food sources
Gestational diabetes mellitus Referral for nutrition assessment and counseling
Nausea/emesis Eat crackers before getting out of bed in the morning; eat
frequent small meals; eat low-fat, bland foods; eat ginger
(soda, tea, or ginger snaps); suck on hard candy; eat
salty/tart foods combined (e.g., potato chips with
lemonade); supplement with vitamin B6 (25 mg three
times daily); wear Sea Band® (an elastic band worn on
wrists to counter nausea caused by sea-sickness)
2705_frame_C05 Page 177 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:14 PM
quality and quantity of the maternal diet, the ability of the mother to digest and absorb
nutrients, maternal cardiorespiratory function, uterine blood flow, placental transfer, pla-
cental blood flow, and appropriate distribution and handling of nutrients and oxygen by
the fetus. Factors that put women at nutritional risk for pregnancy are listed in Table
5.3.5,8-10 Patients at high nutritional risk should be provided professional nutritional coun-
seling and/or referral to a nutrition intervention program. (Table 5.4). The Women, Infants,
and Children (WIC) Program is a food prescription program designed and proven to
reduce poor pregnancy outcomes (Table 5.5).
TABLE 5.3
Risk Factors for Prenatal Nutritional Risk
Risk Factor Low Risk High Risk
Is patient pre- or adolescent or less than 3 yrs post menarche? No Yes
Is patient economically disadvantaged or have limited income for food? No Yes
Does patient have history of anemia or is anemic (hematocrit <32 mg/% during No Yes
pregnancy)?
Is patient’s BMI <19.8 or >26.1? No Yes
Does patient have history of fad dieting, or restrictive eating? No Yes
Does patient have illness or medication that will interfere with absorption; is she No Yes
HIV+ ?
Does patient use tobacco, alcohol, or drugs? No Yes
Does patient practice pica (consume ice, starch, clay, or other substances in large No Yes
amounts)?
Does patient experience nausea and/or vomiting? No Yes
Is patient lactose intolerant? No Yes
Is weight gain 0.8–1.0 lb/wk? No Yes
Does patient stay within the weight gain range recommended for her prepregnancy Yes No
BMI?
Weight gain less than 15 lbs or more than 45 lbs? No Yes
TABLE 5.4
Indications for a Referral of Pregnant Patients for Nutrition Assessment and Counseling
Patient has interest in and desire to see a nutritionist
Patient has inappropriate weight gain
Patient has gestational diabetes
Patient has chronic condition managed with diet (e.g., diabetes, hyperlipidemia)
Patient has history of anemia
Patient has inadequate or inappropriate food supply
Patient has history of prepregnancy anorexia or bulimia
Patient has significant discomforts of pregnancy (e.g., heartburn, nausea, vomiting)
Patient has preeclampsia
Patient has multiple gestation
Patient is adolescent
Patient is vegetarian
Patient is interested in or undecided about breastfeeding
TABLE 5.5
Characteristics of Women, Infants, and Children (WIC) Program
Target Audience Pregnant women
Breastfeeding women
Non-breastfeeding mothers of infants <6 months old
Infants <1 y/o
Children <5 y/o
Purpose Provide nutritious foods, health checks, referrals, nutrition education, and counseling
Eligibility Criteria Low income: <185% U.S. federal poverty level for women and children
Food Nutrient rich, high in protein, calcium, iron and vitamins A & C
Limited brand names
Patient-purchased food and infant formula from local supermarkets
Nutrition Education Individual and group
Specific to risk
Health Checks Height, weight, and anemia testing for women, infants and children
Height, weight, and anemia testing for women and children
1 yr old test for lead
2705_frame_C05 Page 179 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:14 PM
TABLE 5.6
Pregnancy Weight Goals
Optimal Weight Gain
(pounds) Characteristic
25–35 Most women and normal pregnancy
Prepregnancy BMI 19.8–26.0 or 100% prepregnancy
ideal body weight
28–40 Women at higher risk for low birth weight babies
including adolescents and African American women
Prepregnancy BMI <19.8 (underweight) or 90% ideal
body weight
Twin pregnancy
15–25 Prepregnant BMI >26.1 (overweight or obese) or
>120% ideal body weight
15 Prepregnant BMI >29 or >135% ideal body weight
Date
Weeks'
gestation 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
Fundal height (cm)
40
+50 lb 35
ight 50 lb
al he
+40 lb 30 Fund 40 lb
+30 lb 25 30 lb
+20 lb 20 Weight 20 lb
+10 lb 10 lb
FIGURE 5.1
Graph for tracking weight and fundal height. (From Kolasa, K.M. and Weismiller, D.G., Nutrition during
pregnancy, Am Fam Phys, 56(1): 206, July 1995. With permission.)
protein intakes but the implications for fetal, infant, or maternal health cannot be judged
from the available trials.26
Some researchers question the recommendation that African American women gain
more weight than caucasian women, suggesting that the data only show questionable
benefit in reducing risks for low birth weight babies. Obese women have a greater risk of
pregnancy complications, especially gestational diabetes, hypertensive disorders, cesarean
deliveries, and postoperative morbidity. Infants of obese women may be at greater risk
for macrosomia and perinatal death.21,25
The recommendations in Table 5.6 were established by the National Academy of Sciences
of the National Institute of Medicine in 1990.16 They were reviewed and left unchanged
by the Maternal Weight Gain Expert Group in 1996.24 Weight gain goals are determined
to provide optimal risk reduction for delivering a low birth weight baby while avoiding
adverse effects on the mother’s health. The recommendations vary based on prepregnancy
weight, age, and ethnicity. The weight gain expected is essentially linear, as demonstrated
in Figure 5.1.4
Women with prepregnant body mass index (BMI) >35 are at increased risk for gestational
diabetes, preeclampsia, placenta abrupta, cesarean delivery, and endometriosis.
TABLE 5.7
Rate of Weight Gain (Pounds)
Timing
(trimester) Appropriate Inadequate Excessive
1st 3–5 Total Less More
2nd, 3rd 1/wk Less than 2 lbs in a single month for normal More than 6.5 in a single month
wt women or less than 1 lb in obese
TABLE 5.8
Weight Gain Distribution during Pregnancy (Pounds)
Source Pounds
Amniotic fluid 2–2.6
Baby 7–8.5
Fat/breast tissue stores for breastfeeding 1–4
Increased blood volume 4–5
Increased weight of uterus 2
Maternal fat stores 4–7
Placenta 0.7–1.0
Tissue fluid 3–5
Total 25–35
Weight gain is the single most reliable indicator of pregnancy outcome.11,23 Weight status
should be routinely assessed for amount and rate. Figure 5.1 depicts an example of a graph
for tracking weight. Weight charts should be shown to women and their support partners.
Table 5.7 gives recommended weight gains. The optimal weight for a newborn infant of
39 to 41 weeks gestation is 6.6 to 8.8 pounds.9
Women with inadequate weight gain should eat more frequently, be referred to a die-
titian for nutrient assessment and counseling, choose more nutrient-dense foods, avoid
alcohol and tobacco use, limit activity, and avoid caffeine or other appetite depressants.
Women with excessive gain should reduce portion sizes, limit intake of sweets and foods
high in fat, increase activity, and be evaluated by a registered dietitian.
Nutrition Snacks
Pregnant women may need suggestions for healthy snacks. Table 5.9 includes snacks of
about 100 calories.
TABLE 5.9
Nutritious Snacks of 100 kcalories or Less
Food Item Serving Size
Applesauce 2/3 cup
Bagel 1 /2
includes the Recommended Dietary Allowances (RDA) and Adequate Intakes (AI) as
available in 1999 for pregnancy and lactation.27,28 These levels are set by the Food and
Nutrition Board of the National Academy of Sciences.
Nutrient needs that are increased during pregnancy and/or lactation include protein,
folate, vitamins A, B6, C, and D, calcium, iron, and zinc.18,29-34 Energy needs are also
increased by 300 kcal/day at the second trimester of pregnancy and by 850 kcal/day
during lactation to produce adequate breast milk supply. During lactation 500 calories
should be consumed as nutrient-dense foods, with the remaining 350 calories coming from
maternal fat stores accumulated during pregnancy.35
TABLE 5.10
Food and Nutrition Board, National Academy of Sciences — National Research Council Recommended Dietary
Allowances,a revised 1989 (abridged) and Dietary Reference Intakes (DRI)
Designed for the maintenance of good nutrition of practically all healthy people in the United States
Protein Vitamin A Vitamin E Vitamin K Vitamin C Iron Zinc Iodine Selenium
2705_frame_C05 Page 182 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:14 PM
Category Condition (g) (µg RE)b (mg α-TE)c (µg) (mg) (mg) (mg) (µg) (µg)
Pregnant 60 800 10 65 70 30 15 175 65
Lactating 1st 6 months 65 1300 12 65 95 15 19 200 75
2nd 6 months 62 1200 11 65 90 15 16 200 75
Note: Dietary Reference Intakes for Calcium, Phosphorus, Magnesium, Vitamin D, and Fluoride [1997] and Dietary Reference Intakes for Thiamin,
Riboflavin, Niacin, Vitamin B6, Folate, Vitamin B12, Pantothenic Acid, Biotin, and Choline [1998].
a The allowances, expressed as average daily intakes over time, are intended to provide for individual variations among most normal
persons as they live in the U.S. under usual environmental stresses. Diets should be based on a variety of common foods in order to
provide other nutrients for which human requirements have been less well defined.
b Retinol equivalents. 1 retinol equivalent = 1 µg retinol or 6 µg β-carotene.
c α-Tocopherol equivalents. 1 mg d-α tocopherol = α-TE.
Handbook of Nutrition and Food
TABLE 5.10 (Continued)
Food and Nutrition Board, Institute of Medicine — National Academy of Sciences
19-30 yr 1000* 700 350 5* 3* 1.4 1.4 18 1.9 600h 2.6 6* 30* 450*
31-50 yr 1000* 700 360 5* 3* 1.4 1.4 18 1.9 600h 2.6 6* 30* 450*
Lactation
≤ 18 yr 1300* 1250 360 5* 3* 1.5 1.6 17 2.0 500 2.8 7* 35* 550*
19-30 yr 1000* 700 310 5* 3* 1.5 1.6 17 2.0 500 2.8 7* 35* 550*
31-50 yr 1000* 700 320 5* 3* 1.5 1.6 17 2.0 500 2.8 7* 35* 550*
Note: This table presents Recommended Dietary Allowances (RDAs) in bold type and Adequate Intakes (AIs) in ordinary type followed by an asterisk (*).
a As cholecalciferol. 1µg cholecalciferol = 40 IU vitamin D.
b In the absence of adequate exposure to sunlight.
c As niacin equivalents (NE). 1 mg of niacin = 60 mg of tryptophan; 0-6 months = preformed niacin (not NE).
d As dietary folate equivalents (DFE). 1 DFE = 1µg food folate = 0.6 µg of folic acid (from fortified food or supplement) consumed with food = 0.5 µg of synthetic (supplemental)
folic acid taken on an empty stomach.
e In view of evidence linking folate intake with neural tube defects in the fetus, it is recommended that all women capable of becoming pregnant consume 400 µg of synthetic
folic acid from fortified foods and/or supplements in addition to intake of food folate from a varied diet.
f It is assumed that women will continue consuming 400 µg of folic acid until their pregnancy is confirmed and they enter prenatal care, which ordinarily occurs after the
end of the periconceptional period — the critical time for formation of the neural tube.
183
2705_frame_C05 Page 184 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:14 PM
TABLE 5.11
Food Guide Pyramid Servings
Number of Servings
During Adolescent During During
Food Group Serving Size Pregnancy Pregnancy Pregnancy
Milk/dairy 1 milk, cottage cheese, or 5 4 4
yogurt; 1 oz. cheese
Protein-rich 3 oz. meat, fish, or poultry; 4 3–4 3–4
1 dried beans
Breads/cereals, 1/2 cooked rice, cereal, or pasta; 9–11 6–11 6–11
rice/pasta 1 slice bread; 4 crackers
Fruits 1 small piece fresh fruit; 2–4 2–4 2–4
1/2 canned fruit; 1/3 fruit juice
TABLE 5.12
Behavior Change Dietary Assessment Tool
What you eat and some of the lifestyle choices you make can affect your nutrition and health now
and in the future. Your nutrition can also have an important effect on your baby’s health. Please
answer these questions by circling the answers that apply to you.
Eating Behavior
1. Are you frequently bothered by any of the following? (circle all that apply)
Nausea Vomiting Heartburn Constipation
2. Do you skip meals at least 3 times a week? No Yes
3. Do you try to limit the amount or kind of food you eat to control your weight? No Yes
4. Are you on a special diet now? No Yes
5. Do you avoid any foods for health or religious reasons? No Yes
Food Sources
11. Which of these did you drink yesterday? (circle all that apply)
Soft drinks Coffee Tea Fruit drink
Orange juice Grapefruit juice Other juices Milk
Kool-Aid® Beer Wine Alcoholic drinks
Water Other beverages (list) ________________________
12. Which of these foods did you eat yesterday (circle all that apply):
Cheese Pizza Macaroni and cheese
Yogurt Cereal with milk
2705_frame_C05 Page 185 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:14 PM
13. Other foods made with cheese (such as tacos, enchiladas, lasagna, cheeseburgers)
Corn Potatoes Sweet potatoes Green salad
Carrots Collard greens Spinach Turnip greens
Broccoli Green beans Green peas Other vegetables
Apples Bananas Berries Grapefruit
Melon Oranges Peaches Other fruit
Meat Fish Chicken Eggs
Peanut butter Nuts Seeds Dried beans
Cold cuts Hot dog Bacon Sausage
Cake Cookies Doughnut Pastry
Chips French fries Deep fried foods, such as fried chicken or egg rolls
Bread Rolls Rice Cereal
Noodles Spaghetti Tortillas
Were any of these whole grain? No Yes
13. Is the way you ate yesterday the way you usually eat? No Yes
Lifestyle
14. Do you exercise for at least 30 minutes on a regular basis — 3 times a week or more? No Yes
15. Do you ever smoke cigarettes or use smokeless tobacco? No Yes
16. Do you ever drink beer, wine, liquor, or any other alcoholic beverages? No Yes
17. Which of these do you take? (circle all that apply)
Prescribed drugs or medications
Any over the counter products (such as aspirin, acetaminophen, antacids, or vitamins)
Street drugs (such as marijuana, speed, downers, crack, or heroin)
From: Institute of Medicine, 1992.
Systematic assessment of the diet is preferable to questions like “How are you eating?”
The 24-hour dietary recall method is commonly used to recall the types and amounts of
foods and beverages consumed during the previous day. The food frequency questionnaire
has been demonstrated to detect pregnancy-related changes in diet.
TABLE 5.13
Nutritional Risk Score (Massachusetts Department of Health)
Foods Usually Eaten Amount
Meat or alternates
meats, fish, poultry (fresh or processed), liver, eggs, nuts, ________ servings
peanut butter, legumes
1 oz = 5 points ________ oz. meat, fish, cheesea
maximum score = 40 points ________ oz. alternate
Bread and cerealc whole grain, enriched, other maximum ________ servings
score = 15 points
total score: more than 80 = no risk, less, less than 80 = risk, less than 50 = high risk
a Cheese in excess of the 3 units scored in milk; 1 oz. cheese equals 1 unit
b Maximum of 3 oz. scored
c Unit = 1 slice of bread or 1 oz cereal. Less than 3 units = 0, 3 units = 5 points, 4 units = 10
points, 5 units = 15 points
d Not given a score
From JADA: 86(10), 1986, with permission.
TABLE 5.14
Nonpharmacological Remedies for Nausea and Vomiting
Eat small, frequent meals
Eat dry foods/cold foods
Take dietary supplements after meals
Suck on candy
Switch brands of iron supplements
Eat combinations of foods that are salty and tart
Eat vitamin B6-rich foods
Try seabands or accupressure bands
Avoid beverages with meat
Avoid caffeine
Avoid spicy, acidic foods, strong odors
Sniff lemon
Drink ginger root tea, ginger ale; eat ginger snaps; take ginger tablets
(250 mg tablets 4x daily for 4–5 days)
Drink plenty of fluids to avoid dehydration
2705_frame_C05 Page 187 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:14 PM
TABLE 5.15
Hyperemesis Gravidurum
Medication Dosage
Vitamin B6 25 mg tid
Doxylamine 12.5–25 mg tid
Emetrol 5–10 cc in the morning and
every 3–4 hrs as needed
Anti-emetic/anti-nausea medications, 200 mg suppository q 8 prn
e.g., trimethobenyamine (Tigan)
Promethazine 12.5–25 mg po. Pr or iv q 4-6
Hyperemesis Gravidarum
Vomiting that produces weight loss, dehydration, acidosis from starvation, alkalosis from
loss of hydrochloric acid in vomitus, and/or hypokalemia may be treated pharmacolog-
ically. Management is to correct dehydration, fluid and electrolyte deficits, acidosis, and
alkalosis. Table 5.15 includes some pharmacological approaches.
Constipation
Constipation is extremely common in pregnancy due to decreased motility of the gas-
trointestinal (GI) tract. Constipation can be exacerbated by iron supplementation. Consti-
pation is often related to low dietary fiber intake and low fluid intake. Table 5.16 includes
foods rich in dietary fiber. The recommended intake is 20 to 30 grams of dietary fiber daily.
Alcohol
Consumption of alcohol during pregnancy and lactation is controversial.
Pregnancy
A safe lower limit of alcohol during pregnancy is not known. Therefore, the only sure
way to avoid the possible harmful effects of alcohol on the fetus is to abstain. Binge
2705_frame_C05 Page 188 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:14 PM
TABLE 5.16
Dietary Sources of Fiber
Serving Size Food Grams of Fiber
Fruits
1 cup Raisins 6
3 Dried prunes 5
1 medium Pear with skin 4
1 medium Apple with skin 3
1 cup Strawberries 3
1 medium Banana 3
1 medium Orange 3
Vegetables
1 2
/ cup Cooked frozen peas 4
1 medium Baked potato w/ skin 4
1/2 cup Brussels sprouts 3
1/2 cup Cooked broccoli tops 3
1/2 cup Cooked carrots 3
1/2 cup Cooked corn 3
drinking or excessive drinking during pregnancy results in fetal alcohol syndrome. How-
ever, even small amounts of alcohol can temporarily alter fetal function. Adverse outcomes
have not been found with daily consumption of fewer than two standard drinks. The
danger from light drinking should not be overstated. This may cause undue stress in some
patients who had a few drinks before realizing they were pregnant (see Table 5.18).
Lactation
Alcohol does not increase milk volume. Chronic consumption can inhibit milk ejection
reflex. The American Academy of Pediatrics does, however, consider minimal alcohol (no
more than 2 to 2.5 oz liquor, 8 oz wine, or 2 cans of beer on any day) compatible with
lactation.
Hypertension
In 1999 the National High Blood Pressure Education Committee issued an advisory on
diagnoses and treatment of high blood pressure.41 Using evidence-based medicine and
consensus, this report updates contemporary approaches to hypertension control during
pregnancy by expanding on recommendations made in the Sixth Report of the Joint National
Committee on Prevention, Detection, Evaluation, and Treatment of High Blood Pressure (JNC VI).
2705_frame_C05 Page 189 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:14 PM
TABLE 5.17
Caffeine Audit
Approximate the caffeine you consume by filling in the table. Recall caffeine consumption during
the past 24 hours and record in column A, the number of servings or doses for each listed item.
Then multiply the column A value by its corresponding column B value and record the product
in column C. Add all values in column C to estimate your intake.
Column A Column B Column C
Number of Servings Amount of Caffeine Total Caffeine
Sources of Caffeine per Day per Serving (mg) (mg)
Coffee (6 oz.)
Cocoa Products
Tea (6 oz.)
Total = ___________
The recommendations to use K5 for determining diastolic pressure and to eliminate edema
as a criterion for diagnosing preeclampsia are discussed. In addition, the use of blood
pressure increases of 30 mm Hg systolic or 15 mm Hg diastolic as a diagnostic criterion
has not been recommended, as available evidence shows that women in this group are
not likely to suffer increased adverse outcomes. Management considerations are made
between chronic hypertension present before pregnancy and hypertension occurring as
part of the pregnancy-specific condition preeclampsia, as well as management consider-
ations in women with comorbid conditions. A discussion of the pharmacologic treatment
of hypertension in pregnancy includes recommendations for specific agents. The use of
low-dose aspirin, calcium, or other dietary supplements in the prevention of preeclampsia
is described, and expanded sections on counseling women for future pregnancies and
recommendations for future research are included.14
2705_frame_C05 Page 190 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:14 PM
TABLE 5.18
Effects of Alcohol, Tobacco, and Drug Use on Nutritional Status and Pregnancy Outcomes and
Lactation
Effect Cause
Increased nutrient requirements/impaired nutrient Smokers have reduced vitamin C levels
absorption
Drinkers have reduced serum folate, vitamin C levels
Impaired growth of the fetus/stunted growth of child Drinkers (1–2 alcoholic beverages/day) associated
with LBW, and slow weight gain and failure to thrive
Smokers
Infant sleep disruption/increased arousal Consumption of one drink/day in first trimester
Delayed development/mental retardation Drinkers have children who are more at risk for
hyperactivity, poor attention span, language
dysfunction
Reduced fertility Chronic drinking and smoking associated with lower
fertility in men and women
Transfer to baby during lactation disrupted sleep Alcohol found in breast milk about 30 min after
pattern of infant consumption; if woman chooses to drink during
lactation, limit to 1.5 oz distilled spirits, 5 oz wine, or
12 oz beer, and consume after breastfeeding
Prenatal Vitamins
Indications for vitamin and mineral supplementation are in shown Table 5.19, which lists
nutrient dose and indication for use. The contents of typical prenatal vitamin-mineral
supplements are shown in Table 5.20, which includes usual formation of an over-the-
counter (OTC) and a prescription supplement recommended to pregnant women.
Vitamin A
Most pregnant women do not need supplemental vitamin A, the teratogenic threshold of
which may be lower than previously thought. Vitamin A is essential for embryogenesis,
2705_frame_C05 Page 191 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:14 PM
TABLE 5.19
Indications for Vitamin and Mineral Supplementation
Indication Nutrient Dose
Inadequate diet; during first two Prenatal Supplements Read label
trimesters for women at risk for preterm
labor or low birth weight baby
Up to 1200 mg/day if dairy or fortified Calcium 250–300 mg
foods not consumed
For women receiving supplemental iron Copper 2 mg
For all women of child bearing age Folate 400 ug
Inadequate diet; anemia Irona 30–60 mg elemental
Inadequate diet Vitamin B6 2 mg
Inadequate diet Vitamin C 50 mg
Inadequate diet; no exposure to sunlight Vitamin D 10 µg
For women receiving supplemental iron Zinc 15 mg
a Supplements containing high levels of folate or iron negatively affect zinc metabolism.
Supplementary forms of folic acid are better absorbed than folate occurring in food.
TABLE 5.20
Prenatal Vitamin Mineral Supplements
Flintstones Complete Prenatal Vitamin
Chewables (PreCare®)
Vitamin A 5000 IU —
Vitamin C 60 mg 50 mg
Vitamin D 400 IU 6 µg
Thiamin 1.5 mg —
Riboflavin 1.7 mg —
Niacin 20 mg —
B6 2 mg 2 mg
Folic acid 400 µg 1 mg
B12 6 µg —
Biotin 40 µg —
Pantothenic acid 10 mg —
Calcium (as carbonate) 100 mg 250 mg
Iron 18 mg 40 mg
Phosphorus 100 mg —
Iodine 150 µg —
Magnesium 20 mg 50 mg
Zinc 15 mg 15 mg
Copper 2 mg 2 mg
Vitamin E — 3.5 mg
growth, and epithelial differentiation. Case reports have suggested an association between
high doses of vitamin A (> 25,000 IU) during pregnancy and birth defects. The American
College of Obstetricians and Gynecologists established 10,000 IU as the cutoff for supple-
mental vitamin A (retinol) prior to or during pregnancy.2
reduction in systolic and diastolic blood pressure.29,31 Controlled clinical trials to test the
hypothesis that calcium supplements during pregnancy reduce the incidence of preg-
nancy-induced hypertension have had mixed results. Therefore there is no support for
routine supplementation with 2000 mg/day for all pregnant women. In pregnant women
who have diets deficient in calcium, prepregnancy hypertension, history of preeclampsia,
or chronic use of heparin and steroids, supplemental calcium is recommended.42
The fetus absorbs 6 mg of magnesium each day. Maternal magnesium levels remain
constant during pregnancy despite reported inadequate intakes. Magnesium supplemen-
tation has been associated with fewer hospitalizations, fewer preterm births, and more
perinatal hemorrhages compared with placebo-supplemented women. Thus, further study
is needed before routine supplementation is recommended.
Folate
The available data from controlled trials provide clear evidence of an improvement in
hematological indices in women receiving routine iron and folate supplementation in
pregnancy.30 No conclusions can be drawn in terms of any beneficial or harmful effects
on clinical outcomes for mother and baby. However, the Cochrane Pregnancy and Child-
birth Group concludes that there is no evidence to advise against a policy of routine iron
and folate supplementation in pregnancy.25 Both folate intake from food and synthetic
folic acid should be included in assessing and planning diet. The literature contains a
variety of recommendations. The DRI is higher than can usually be obtained from food.
The current recommendation during pregnancy is 600 µg/day of folic acid per day. It is
well established that periconceptional use of folic acid supplementation reduces the risk
of first occurrence and recurrence of neural tube defect (NTD)-affected pregnancies. The
Center for Disease Control (CDC) recommends supplementation with 400 µg/day.
Research is needed to determine effective strategies for disseminating information about
the protective effects of folate.26
Iron
Additional iron is needed by most pregnant women in the U.S. A substantial amount
of iron is required, given the amount of erythropoiesis. For example, a term infant
contains an average of 225 mg of iron, the placenta and cord contain 50 mg of iron
through the pregnancy, and the maternal red blood count volume increases 500 mL.
Although maternal absorption of iron from the GI tract is increased by about 15%, it
remains difficult to meet the increased iron need through diet alone. Iron absorption is
increased in the presence of ascorbic acid. Adverse pregnancy outcomes are associated
with hemoglobin levels below 10.4 g/dL or above 13.2 g/dL. Clinical diagnosis of
anemia is made based on hemoglobin below 10.5 g/dL, a low MCV, and serum ferritin
level below 12 µg/dL. Supplementation of 30 to 60 mg per day of elemental iron is
usually prescribed, although the benefit of routine iron supplementation for healthy,
well nourished women during pregnancy is unproven.26,32 Common side effects include
stomach upset, nausea, and constipation. These effects may be relieved by reducing the
dosage or switching the brand of iron supplement. Some, but not all, sustained release
preparations have been clinically shown to be associated with fewer discomforts. The
safety of iron supplementation at dosages greater than 100 mg per day has been ques-
tioned. Researchers suggest that excess iron may lead to zinc depletion, which is asso-
ciated with intrauterine growth retardation.
2705_frame_C05 Page 193 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:14 PM
Zinc
The prevalence and effects of mild zinc deficiency in pregnancy are poorly defined.
However, there have been a few case reports of severe human zinc deficiency in pregnancy
that led to major obstetric complications and congenital malformations in the fetus. Sup-
plementation studies have yielded mixed results. Iron appears to depress plasma zinc in
pregnant women; therefore, zinc supplementation is recommended when >30 mg supple-
mental iron is taken.43 Higher birth weights in infants of women with low prepregnancy
weight (BMI <26) and low plasma zinc levels have been reported in women who received
25 mg zinc daily.
Vitamin B6
The value of supplementation with Vitamin B6 in pregnancy is controversial. However, it
is included in most prenatal vitamins.
Vitamin C
Taking iron tablets along with a source of vitamin C facilitates iron absorption.
Vitamin D
Vitamin D is critical in the absorption, distribution, and storage of calcium. Relatively few
foods are good sources of vitamin D.
TABLE 5.21
Dietary Sources of Calcium (DRI = 1000–1300 mg/d)
Food Item Serving Size
Broccoli/greens 2 cups
Calcium fortified foods (juice, cereal) varies, read label
Canned salmon w/bones 3 oz.
Canned sardines w/bones 3 oz.
Cheese (cheddar, edam, Monterey jack, mozzarella, Parmesan, provolone, ricotta) 1 oz.
Ice cream 1 cup
Ice milk 1 cup
Milk (skim, 2%, whole, buttermilk) 1 cup
Yogurt 6-8 oz.
2705_frame_C05 Page 194 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:14 PM
TABLE 5.22
Dietary Sources of Folate (DRI = 500–600 µg/d of
dietary folate equivalents (DFE)
Food Item Serving Size
Excellent >100 µg
Good: 15–99 µg
Almonds 4 oz.
Bread, fortified 1 slice
Beets 1/2 cup
Egg 1
French fries large order
Lettuce (romaine) 1/2 cup
Orange 1 med
Turnip greens 1/2 cup
sources of calcium. Table 5.22 lists common food sources of folate, Table 5.23 includes
common dietary sources of iron, and Table 5.24 includes common dietary sources.
TABLE 5.23
Dietary Sources of Iron (DRI = 15–30 mg/d)
Food Item Serving Size
Excellent >4 mg
Figs (dried) 10
Iron-fortified infant cereal 1/2 cup
Good: 2–4 mg
Beef 3 oz.
Egg yolks 3
Iron-fortified infant formula 4 oz.
Lamb 3 oz.
Lima beans 1/2 cup
Oysters 3 oz.
Peas 1 cup
Pork 3 oz.
Prune juice 1 cup
Raisins 2/3 cup
TABLE 5.24
Dietary Sources of Zinc (DRI = 15–19 mg/d)
Food Item Serving Size mg/Serving
Excellent: >4 mg
Good: 0.9–3.4 mg
TABLE 5.25
Benefits of Physical Activity during Pregnancy
Improvement in circulation
Improved posture
Improved or maintained cardiovascular fitness
Reduced risk of cesarean section, decreased labor time, decreased use of epidural and forceps
Positive effects on mood, energy level
Release of tension and reduction of stress
Prevention of injury
TABLE 5.26
Contraindications to Physical Activity
Active myocardial disease, congestive heart failure, rheumatic heart disease
Thrombophlebitis
Risk of premature labor; incompetent cervix; uterine bleeding; ruptured membranes
Intrauterine growth retardation
Severe hypertensive disease
Suspected fetal distress
TABLE 5.27
Warning Signs to Stop Physical Activity
Vaginal bleeding
Uterine contractions
Nausea, vomiting
Dizziness or faintness
Difficulty walking
Decreased fetal activity
Palpitations or rapid heart rate
Numbness in any part of the body
Problems with vision
TABLE 5.28
Guidelines for Physical Activity
Activity Guideline
Intensity Reduce the intensity of exercise by 25%
Heart rate Not to exceed 140 beats per minute
Temperature Not to go above 101 degrees
Time Moderate activity should not exceed 30 minutes; intersperse
with low-intensity exercise and rest periods
Position Avoid lying on back for more than 5 minutes after entering the
2nd trimester
Frequency Exercise should be performed consistently at least three times
per week and include a warm-up and a cool-down period
2705_frame_C05 Page 197 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:14 PM
TABLE 5.29
Guidelines for Recreational Activity
Activity Guideline
General conditioning exercises Kegel, breathing, calf pumping, abdominal, bridging, lower trunk rotation,
tail wagging
Jogging May be continued moderately, however should not be started as a new activity
after pregnancy; watch out for joint pain and decrease overall distance —
recommendation is 2 miles or less per day
Aerobics Avoid high impact or step aerobics; as for jogging, look out for joint pain or
signs of over exertion; avoid exercises that involve lying on the back for more
than 5 minutes
Bicycling In the third trimester it may be necessary to switch to a stationary bike due
to problems with balance
Weight lifting Can be continued during pregnancy — use light weights and moderate
repetitions; avoid heavy resistance
Avoid during pregnancy Downhill skiing, gymnastics, horseback riding, scuba diving, any contact
sports
TABLE 5.30
Strategies for Postpartum Weight Loss
Encourage a healthy diet based on current dietary guidelines
Make energy intake less than energy expenditure
Reduce portion size but do not restrict kcalories to less than 1800 per day
Determine foods high in fats and calories and substitute with fruits, vegetables, lean meats and fish, skinless
poultry
Avoid cooking in oil, butter, margarine
Drink 8–10 glasses fluid per day
Discuss feasible physical activity
Monitor women who
Restrict intake to less than 1800 kcalories per day
Are vegans (avoid all animal products including dairy, eggs, and meats)
Avoid foods enriched with Vitamin D and have limited exposure to sunlight
with increased risks for chronic disease later in life. Table 5.30 includes currently recom-
mended strategies for post partum weight loss.
TABLE 5.31
Maternal Nutrition during Breastfeeding
Encourage a healthy diet based on current dietary guidelines
Reinforce that milk quality is generally not affected by the mother’s diet
Suggest eating meals and snacks that are easy to prepare
Provide patient with information on normal postpartum weight loss in a breastfeeding woman
Drink enough fluids to keep from getting thirsty
Eat at least 1800 kcalories per day
Use appetite as a guide to amount of food eaten in first six weeks
Keep intake of coffee, cola, or other sources of caffeine to 2 servings or less per day. Caffeine accumulates in the
infant and use should be discontinued if infant becomes wakeful, hyperactive, or has disturbed sleep patterns.
This reaction is intensified with a smoking mother.
TABLE 5.32
Benefits of Frequent, Early, Unrestricted Nursing
Provides colostrum that the baby needs
Helps decrease newborn jaundice because of the laxative effect of colostrum
Provides a period of practice time before milk volume increases
Stimulates uterine contractions, lessening chances of maternal postpartum hemorrhage
Prevents infant hypoglycemia
TABLE 5.33
Signs of Insufficient Milk Intake in the Newborn
Failure to regain birth weight by 2 weeks of age
Weight gain of less than 7 oz per week after regaining birth weight and less than 4 lbs in 4 months
Fewer than 3–4 stools per day after day 5
Fewer than 6 urinations per day after day 5. (During the first 5 days wet and soiled diapers should increase in
number each day.)
TABLE 5.34
Breastfeeding Tips: Common Concerns about the Infant
Concern Recommended Action
Jaundice Continue to breastfeed at least every 2 hours around the clock. If breastfeeding is
stopped, pump breasts to maintain milk supply. Avoid water or formula feedings.
Latch-on Latch-on is necessary for baby to begin sucking at the breast. Poor latch-on is a
major cause of sore nipples. Baby’s mouth should be at nipple level. Support the
breast by placing the thumb on the top and four fingers underneath. Tickle baby’s
bottom lip with nipple until baby opens mouth very wide. Center nipple quickly
and bring baby very close. Baby’s nose and chin should be touching breast.
Leaking Leaking is a sign of normal letdown in the early weeks of breastfeeding. Use breast
pads in bra between feedings. Avoid pads with plastic lining. During sexual
activity, leaking may occur; breastfeed your baby first.
Duration of breastfeeding: Frequent (every 2–3 hours) and unrestricted breastfeeding for the first weeks. Baby
how long and how should empty one breast, be burped, and offered the second breast. Watch baby
often? for signs that he is full, like falling asleep, losing interest in feeding, or stopping
breastfeeding.
Early first feeding Put baby to breast soon after delivery, if possible within the first 2 hours. Cuddling,
licking, and brief sucking are good signs that baby is learning to breastfeed. Offer
your breast often to let your baby practice. Ask a supportive nurse for help.
Extra feedings Healthy breastfed newborns do not need formula, water, or juice. Breastfeed at
least every 2–3 hours during the first month. Older breastfed babies will be ready
for solid foods and juices between 4-6 months of age.
2705_frame_C05 Page 199 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:14 PM
TABLE 5.35
Breastfeeding Tips: Common Discomforts That Lead to Breastfeeding Termination
Concern Recommended Action
Hospital survival skills “Rooming-in” with your baby is your right as a consumer. Keep your baby with
you as much as possible so you can breastfeed often. Do not give bottles of
formula or water. Do not limit feeding time at breast. Ask a supportive nurse for
help. Do not accept formula gift packs.
Mastitis Mastitis is a swollen, inflamed, or infected area in the breast. Watch for flu-like
symptoms such as fever above 101°F, chills and muscle aches, and a reddened,
hot, tender, or swollen area in the breast. Rest, breastfeed often, and drink more
fluids. Avoid tight bra or clothing. Apply warm water soaks, heating pad.
Massage affected area. Antibiotics may be needed. No reason to stop
breastfeeding.
Myths and misconceptions Breast sagging is not a result of breastfeeding. Breast size does not affect ability
to breastfeed. Drinking beer, manzanilla tea, or large amounts of fluids does not
make more milk.
Nipples, flat or inverted Flat or inverted nipples retract or move in toward the breast. Breast shells (milk
(before birth) cups) may be worn during the last month of pregnancy to help minimize inverted
nipples. Gradually increase time of use from a few hours to 8–10 hours/day. Do
not wear while sleeping. Air-dry nipples if leaking occurs. Breast shells should
not be used by women at risk for preterm labor.
Nipples, flat or inverted Begin breastfeeding as soon as possible after birth. Breastfeed frequently to avoid
(after birth) engorgement. Use nipple rolling or stretching before each breastfeeding. Pump
breast for a short period before breastfeeding, or apply ice wrapped in a cloth
and placed on the nipple before feeding. Breast shells (milk cups) may be used
between feedings. Remove the breast shell just before placing baby at breast.
Engorgement Engorgement may occur when milk first comes in or when feedings are missed
or delayed. Use warm compresses or shower before feedings. Hand-express to
soften areola, making it easier for baby to latch on. Breastfeed every 1–2 hours
for 10–20 minutes per breast. Apply ice to breast and under arm after feeding
until swelling decreases. Gentle breast massage toward nipple. Take non-aspirin
pain reliever.
Breast care Nipple pulling, tugging, or rolling during pregnancy is not necessary to prepare
for breastfeeding. Avoid soaps or lotions to the nipples. Air dry nipples after
breastfeeding.
Breast creams Vitamin E, breast creams, or ointments are not recommended. No evidence exists
that they heal the nipple. May make soreness worse by keeping the nipple moist.
Use pure lanolin. Can massage drops of breast milk on nipples.
Breast surgery Any type of breast surgery may interfere with milk supply.
Cesarean section Breastfeed baby as soon as possible after delivery, preferably in the recovery room.
Hold baby in a comfortable position. Use pillows across abdomen to protect the
incision and support baby.
Resource Materials
American College of Obstetricians and Gynecologists, Office of Public Information, 409 12th Street
SW, Washington, DC 20024-2188; 202-638-5577.
Best Start Social Marketing. 3500 E. Fletcher Avenue, Suite 519, Tampa, FL 33613; 1-800-277-4975.
Best Start is a not-for-profit corporation. One of its largest social marketing projects was
developed in 1997 for USDA as part of the WIC National Breastfeeding Promotion Project. A
wide variety of campaign and professional materials is available.
[email protected]; Also see http://www.opc.on.ca/beststart/info_sheets/feed.html
Erick M. No More Morning Sickness. A Survival Guide for Pregnant Women, Plume Book, NJ. 1-800-
245-6476.
2705_frame_C05 Page 200 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:14 PM
Food and Nutrition Information Center, National Agricultural Library, ARS, USDA, Beltsville, MD
20705-2351. 301-504-5719.
http://www.nal.usda.gov/fnic
La Leche League International, 1400 N Meacham Rd, PO Box 4079, Schaumburg IL 60168-4079.
http://www.lalecheleague.org
Lopes GL. Gestational Diabetes and You. NCES, Inc. 1995. 913-782-4385.
March of Dimes Birth Defects Foundation Resource Center, 1275 Mamoroneck Ave, White Plains,
NY 10605.
http://modimes.org
National Maternal and Child Health Clearinghouse, 2070 Chain Bridge Road, Suite 450, Vienna, VA
22182-2536. 703-356-1964; fax: 703-821-2098.
e-mail: [email protected]; Web site: http://www.circsol.com/mch.
National Center for Nutrition and Dietetics, The American Dietetic Association, 216 W Jackson Blvd,
Suite 800, Chicago, IL 60606-6995.
http://www.eatright.org
USDA. Is Someone You Know At Risk for Foodborne Illness? Food Safety and Inspection Service,
April 1990.
http://www.fightbac.org
References
1. Am Coll OB-GYN. ACOG Technical Bulletin No. 205, May, 1995.
2. Am Acad Ped. Am Coll OB-GYN. Chapter 11, pages 279-284. In Guidelines for Perinatal Care,
1997.
3. Institute of Medicine, Subcommittee for a Clinical Application Guide. Nutrition During Preg-
nancy and Lactation: An Implementation Guide, National Academy Press, Washington, DC, 1992.
4. Kolasa KM, Weismiller D. AFP 56:205; 1997.
5. Newton E. Maternal nutrition. In Management of High Risk Pregnancy. (Queen, JT, Ed) Blackwell
Science, 4th ed. 1999.
6. Peshicka D, Riley J, Thomson C. Obstetrics/Gynecology Nutrition Handbook. Chapman and Hall,
New York, NY 10003, 1996.
7. Suitor CW. Update for Nutrition during Pregnancy and Lactation: An Implementation Guide.
National Center for Education in Maternal and Child Health. Maternal and Child Health
Bureau, Health Resources and Services Administration, Public Health Service, U.S. Depart-
ment of Health and Human Services.
8. Homan RK, Korenbrot CC. Medical Care 36: 190; 1998.
9. Luke B. Clin Obstet Gynecol 37: 538; 1994.
10. Matthews F, Yudkin P, Neil A. Brit Med J 319: 339; 1999.
11. Abrams B, Carmichael S, Selvin S. Obstet Gynecol 86: 170; 1995.
12. Ananth CV, Vintzileos AM, Shen-Schwarz S, et al. Obstet Gynecol 91: 917; 1998.
13. Boardley DJ, Sargent RG, Coker AL, et al. Obstet Gynecol 86: 834; 1995.
14. Cattingius S, Bergstrom R, Lipworth L, Kramer M. 338: 147; 1998.
15. Cogswell ME, Serdula MK, Hungerford DW, Yip R. Am J Ob-Gyn 172: 705; 1995.
16. Keppel KG, Taffel SM. AJPHA 83: 1100; 1993.
17. King JC, Butte NF, Bronstein MN, et al. Am J Clin Nutr 59(suppl): 439S; 1994.
18. Luke B, Hediger ML, Scholl TO. J Mat Fetal Med 5: 168; 1996.
19. Parker JD, Abrams B. Obstet Gynecol 79: 664; 1992.
20. Schieve LA, Cogswell ME, Scanlon KS. Obstet Gynecol 91: 878; 1998.
21. Scholl TO, Hedinger ML, Schall JI, et al. Obstet Gynecol 86: 423; 1995.
22. Siega-Riz AM, Adair LS, Hobel CJ. Nutrition 126: 146; 1996.
23. Taffel SM, Keppel KG, Jones GK. Ann NY Acad Sci 678: 293; 1993.
24. Suitor CW. Maternal Weight Gain: A Report of an Expert Work Group, National Center for
Education in Maternal and Child Health, Arlington, VA, 1997.
2705_frame_C05 Page 201 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:14 PM
25. Cochrane Pregnancy and Childbirth Group. Cochrane Database of Systematic Reviews. Issue
3, 1999.
26. Institute of Medicine, Food and Nutrition Board. Dietary Reference Intakes for Thiamin, Riboflavin,
Niacin, Vitamin B6, Folate, Vitamin B12, Pantothenic Acid, Biotin, and Choline. National Academy
Press, Washington, DC, 1998.
27. Institute of Medicine, Food and Nutrition Board, Dietary References Intakes for Calcium, Phos-
phorus, Magnesium, Vitamin D, and Fluoride. National Academy Press, Washington, DC, 1997.
28. Allen L. Am J Clin Nutr 67: 591; 1998.
29. Kloeblen AS. J Am Diet A 99: 33; 1999.
30. Levine RJ, Hauth JC, Curet LB, et al. N Engl J Med 337: 69; 1997.
31. Long PJ. J Nurse Midwifery 40: 36; 1995.
32. Matthews F. Nutr Res Rev 9: 175; 1996.
33. Rose NC, Mennuti MT. Clin Obstet Gynecol 37: 605; 1998.
34. Brown JE, Buzzard M, Jacobs DR, et al. JADA 96: 262; 1996.
35. Kennedy E. JADA 86: 1372; 1986.
36. Erick M. Nutrition Rev 53: 289; 1995.
37. Stainton MC, Neff EJA. Health Care for Women International 15: 563; 1994.
38. Klebanoff MA, Levine RJ, DerSimonian R, et al. N Engl J Med 341: 1639; 1999.
39. Bucher HC, Guyatt GH, Cook RJ, et al. JAMA 275: 1113 1996.
40. Goldenberg RL, Tamura T, Neggers Y, et al. JAMA 274: 463; 1995.
41. Institute of Medicine, Subcommittee on Nutrition During Lactation. Nutrition During Lactation.
National Academy Press: Washington, DC, 1991.
42. National Academy of Sciences, Institute of Medicine, Food and Nutrition Board, Committee
on Nutritional Status During Pregnancy and Lactation. Nutrition Services in Perinatal Care (2nd
ed.). National Academy Press, Washington, DC, 1992.
43. Lawrence, RA . Maternal and Child Health Technical Information Bulletin. National Center
for Education in Material and Child Health, Arlington, VA, 1997.
44. Lawrence RA and Lawrence RM. Breastfeeding: A Guide for the Medical Profession. C.V. Mosby,
St. Louis, MO, 1998.
45. Mohrbacher N and Stock J. The Breastfeeding Answer Book. La Leche League International.
Schaumburg, IL, 1997.
46. Am Acad Ped. Work Group on Breastfeeding. Pediatrics 100: 1035; 1997.
47. Riordan J and Auerbach KG. Pocket Guide to Breastfeeding and Human Lactation, Jones and
Bartlett, Boston, MA, 1997.
48. Prentice A. N Engl J Med 337: 558; 1997.
2705_frame_C05 Page 202 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:14 PM
2705_frame_C06 Page 203 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:14 PM
6
Feeding the Premature Infant
Nutritional management of the premature infant has become an integral part of the
medical care provided to these infants. With the ever increasing survival of low-birth-
weight and very-low-birth-weight infants, understanding the principles of nutritional
therapy becomes all the more important. It is estimated that there are four million births
in the United States every year; with an estimated prematurity rate of 9%, the number of
infants requiring such management is enormous. This section focuses on nutritional goals,
nutrient requirements, and enteral and parenteral routes of nutritional therapy.
0-8493-2705-9/01/$0.00+$1.50
© 2002 by CRC Press LLC 203
2705_frame_C06 Page 204 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:14 PM
infant needs to be supine, head held in the Frankfurt plane vertical, legs extended, and
ankles flexed, and the movable footpiece is brought to rest firmly against the infant’s heels.
An average of two measurements documents the length. If crown–heel length cannot be
measured due to limb anomalies or if there is a discrepancy between weight and length,
a crown–rump length is sometimes measured.
Head circumference measured with a non-stretchable tape is the largest of three mea-
surements around the head, with the tape held snugly above the ears.
Weight, length, and head circumference are then plotted on standard curves to classify
an infant as appropriate, small, or large for gestational age for each measurement. Most
measurements define appropriate for age as measurements that fall within the 10th to
90th percentiles, ideally based on charts constructed for similar race and height above sea
level. Infants who are appropriate for age on the three measures are at the lowest risk,
within that gestational age grouping, for problems associated with neonatal morbidity
and mortality. An example of growth curves commonly used in neonatal nurseries is
depicted in Figure 6.1.
Provision of Nutrients
Energy Needs
Energy needs are based on basal metabolic rate, cost of growth, and losses in stool and
urine. The factorial method cannot be used to estimate energy requirements. It is gen-
erally recognized that preterm infants have higher energy requirements compared to
their term counterparts.7 To gain the predicted growth in weight for premature infants
2705_frame_C06 Page 205 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:14 PM
DATE OF BIRTH
Length (cm)
10
Weight (g)
2600 44
2400 43
2200 42
2000 41
1800 40
1600 39
1400 38
1200 37
1000 36
800 35
600 34
PRETERM TERM
400 33
0 32
24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 PRETERM TERM
Gestational Age (week) 31
0
24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
Gestational Age (week)
HEAD CIRCUMFERENCE PERCENTILES
38
37
90 CLASSIFICATION OF INFANT* Weight Length Head Circ.
36
75
35 50 Large for
34
25 Gestational Age (LGA)
Head Circumference (cm)
33 (>90th percentile)
10
32
31
Appropriate for
30
Gestational Age (AGA)
29 (10th to 90th percentile)
28
27
Small for
26
Gestational Age (SGA)
25
(<10th percentile)
24
23
PRETERM TERM * Place an ''X'' in the appropriate box (LGA, AGA or SGA) for weight, for
22 length and for head circumference.
0
24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
Gestational Age (week)
FIGURE 6.1
Classification of newborns by intrauterine growth and gestational age.
(10 to 15g/kg/d), it is estimated that premature infants would need 110 to 130 kcal/kg/
d. Energy requirements must take into account the route of administration, enteral vs.
parenteral, since 90 to 95 kcal/kg/d may satisfy energy requirements by the parenteral
route. Disease states such as sepsis, chronic lung disease,8,9 and concomitant use of
corticosteroids will increase energy needs. The mainstay of energy support should be
balanced between carbohydrates, fat, and amino acids.
2705_frame_C06 Page 206 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:14 PM
30
13.3
13.9 13.9
DAILY INCREMENTS (gm/day)
12.2
20 19.8
11.4
10.8
7.8
10
79.0 74.0 69.9 62.5
FIGURE 6.2
Average composition of weight gain of the reference fetus; numbers indicate percentages of gained accounted
for by components. From Ziegler E.E., O’Donnell A.M., Nelson S.E., Fomon S.J. Growth 40: 329; 1976. With
permission.
TABLE 6.1
Daily Increments of Body Weight and Body Composition of the Reference Fetus
Age
Interval Weight Protein Lipid Ca P Mg Na K Cl
(Weeks) (g) (g) (g) (mg) (mg) (mg) (mEq) (mEq) (mEq)
24–25 11.4 1.25 0.5 61 39 1.8 0.9 0.5 0.8
25–26 15.7 1.67 1.2 84 54 2.4 1.3 0.6 1.0
26–27 18.6 2.00 1.6 101 65 2.8 1.5 0.8 1.1
27–28 21.4 2.37 2.0 119 76 3.3 1.7 0.9 1.3
28–29 22.6 2.59 2.3 129 83 3.5 1.7 0.9 1.3
29–30 23.1 2.76 2.6 138 89 3.7 1.7 1.0 1.3
30–31 24.3 3.00 2.9 152 97 4.0 1.8 1.0 1.3
31–32 25.7 3.28 3.2 171 109 4.4 1.8 1.1 1.3
32–33 27.1 3.55 3.5 193 123 4.8 1.9 1.1 1.3
33–34 30.0 3.97 4.0 228 144 5.5 2.1 1.2 1.4
34–35 31.4 4.23 4.4 258 162 6.0 2.2 1.3 1.4
35–36 34.3 4.62 5.1 301 189 6.9 2.4 1.4 1.4
36–37 35.7 4.83 5.6 341 212 7.5 2.5 1.5 1.4
37–38 31.4 4.34 5.6 344 211 7.1 2.1 1.3 1.1
38–39 24.3 3.44 5.4 325 197 6.1 1.6 1.0 0.7
39–40 17.1 2.50 5.0 302 179 5.0 1.0 0.6 0.3
From Ziegler E.E., O’Donnell A.M., Nelson S.E., Fomon S.J. Growth 40: 329; 1976. With permis-
sion.
2705_frame_C06 Page 207 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:14 PM
Lipid Needs
Lipid emulsions are used in conjunction with glucose and amino acid solutions. Generally,
lipids are started at 0.5 g/kg/d intravenously, increasing by 0.5 g/kg to a maximum of
3.0 g/kg/d. Infusion rates are maintained between 0.15 to 0.25 g/kg/h in order to avoid
hypertriglyceridemia (triglycerides > 175 mg/dL). Essential fatty acid deficiency may be
prevented by lipid intakes as low as 0.5 to 1.0 g/kg/d.
Fat particle size is between 0.4 and 0.5µ in diameter, similar to that of endogenous
chylomicrons. Clearance of lipids by premature infants may be limited, thereby requiring
frequent assessment of tolerance. Emulsions of 20% are preferred due to lower total
phospholid and liposome content per gram of triglyceride.17,18
Parenteral Nutrition
It is common practice to provide initial nutrient requirements, especially in a sick neonate,
by the parenteral route. A typical parenteral regimen is depicted in Table 6.2. Commonly
available lipid products are listed in Table 6.3. Currently, two amino acid formulations are
available in the U.S. specifically designed for preterm infants: Trophamine® and Amino-
syn-PF®. These amino acid formulations were designed to result in a plasma amino acid
profile similar to that of a 30-day-old breastfed infant.19 It is generally recommended that
parenteral nutrition be started within the first two days of life in preterm infants and
advanced in a systematic fashion to achieve 3.0–4.0 g/kg/d of amino acids, 90–100 kcal/
kg/d of energy. Most preterm infants do not achieve these intakes until well into the
second week of life because of issues such as glucose and lipid intolerance.
Mineral Requirements
Mineral requirements have also been estimated based on body composition and the
reference fetus.4,5 From a practical standpoint, daily needs for sodium, potassium, and
2705_frame_C06 Page 208 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:14 PM
TABLE 6.2
Parenteral Nutrition Regimen
Component Amount/kg/d
Amino acids (g) 3–4
Glucose (g) 15–25
Lipid (g) 0.5–3.0
Sodium (mEq)1 2–5
Potassium (mEq)2 2–4
Calcium (mg) 80–100
Magnesium (mg) 3–6
Chloride (mEq) 2–3
Phosphorus (mg)2 40–60
Zinc (µg) 200–400
Copper (µg) 20
Iron (µg) 100–200
Other trace minerals3
Vitamins4
Total Volume 120–150 mL
Nutrient <14 d >14 d
Manganese (µg) 0.0–0.75 1.0
Chromium (µg) 0.0–0.05 0.2
Selenium (µg) 0.0–1.3 2.0
Iodide (µg) 0.0–1.0 1.0
Molybdenum (µg) 0 0.25
C (mg) 80
A (mg) 0.7
D (µg) 10 (= 400 µ)
B1 (mg) 1.2
B2 (mg) 1.4
B6 (mg) 1
Niacin (mg) 17
1 Sodium requirements may vary between infants and
within the same infant, and should be tailored to
serum values.
2 Phosphorus intakes are maintained in a ratio of 1:2
to 1:2.6 with calcium (mEq:mM) and may be limiting
in parenteral nutrition because of insolubility; in gen-
eral, the more acidic the TPN, the more calcium and
phosphorus can be dissolved in the solution without
precipitation. Care must be taken to avoid hyper-
phosphatemia with its resultant hypocalcemia.
3 amount/kg/d.
4 Provided as MVI-Pediatric®; each 5 mL provides
(MVI is to be provided in amounts not exceeding 2.0
ml/kg/d).
chloride are based on serum measurements, while calcium and phosphorus needs are
based on the factorial method.4,5 Requirements are listed in Table 6.2. In general, the
preterm infant has higher requirements of most minerals than term infants. During total
parenteral nutrition, requirements for calcium and phosphorus may not be met because
of the insolubility of calcium salts. Human milk may not provide adequate amounts of
sodium, and hyponatremia has been reported.20 Calcium and phosphorus needs of preterm
infants cannot be met by human milk from mothers delivering preterm or term infants,
and will need to be supplemented.21 Since calcium transfer across the placenta occurs in
the third trimester, the very premature infant is relatively osteopenic, and prolonged
2705_frame_C06 Page 209 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:14 PM
TABLE 6.3
Fatty Acid Composition of Commonly Used Lipid Emulsions
Intralipid® 20% Liposyn III® 20%
Oils % — —
Safflower 0 0
Soybean 20 20
Fatty acid content (%) — —
Linoleic 50 54.5
Oleic 26 22.4
Palmitic 10 10.5
Linolenic 9 8.3
Stearic 3.5 4.2
Egg yolk phospholipid % 1.2 1.2
Glycerine % 2.25 2.5
kcal/mL 2 2
mOsm/L 260 292
parenteral nutrition and/or unfortified human milk feedings puts the infant at great risk
for metabolic bone disease.
Iron is accumulated in the fetus in the third trimester with an iron content of 75 mg/
kg at term. Small-for-gestational-age infants, preterm infants, and infants of diabetic moth-
ers have low iron stores at birth. Coupled with the need for frequent blood sampling, the
premature infant is at great risk for the development of iron deficiency anemia, and the
exact time for supplementation remains controversial. However, given that the criteria for
blood transfusion have become more stringent,21 iron should be supplemented as early
as two weeks. If recombinant erythropoietin is used to stimulate endogenous iron pro-
duction,22 iron requirements may be 6.0 mg/kg/d or higher.
Nutrient Delivery
Delivery of enteral nutrients is based on gestational age. In general, infants of 33 weeks
gestation and beyond can be fed orally soon after birth. However, if medical or surgical
illness precludes enteral feedings, parenteral nutrition is indicated. Parenteral nutrition
can be considered as total (where all nutrients are delivered, for example in an infant with
a surgical condition precluding enteral nutrition: gastroschisis) or supplemental (to com-
plement enteral nutrition). It can be further described as peripheral parenteral nutrition
(provided by a peripheral intravenous line) or central (where the tip of the catheter is in
a central location or deep vein). The latter should be the route if long-term parenteral
nutrition (for example, greater than 2 weeks) is anticipated, since it allows for higher
glucose delivery compared to the peripheral vein (>12.5% dextrose in water). A typical
nutrition plan for a very-low-birth weight infant is depicted in Table 6.4, and indications
for parenteral nutrition are listed in Table 6.5.
The metabolic complications (Table 6.6) can be avoided by careful assessment of toler-
ance to the macronutrients as nutrition delivery is advanced. Premature infants do not
tolerate high concentrations of glucose or rapid advances in glucose delivery; similarly,
rates of fat infusion of greater than 2.0 g/kg/d may result in hypertriglyceridemia, par-
ticularly in the small or ill preterm infant (triglycerides >175 mg/dL). A suggested regimen
of monitoring parenteral nutrition is depicted in Table 6.7. A multidisciplinary approach
with physicians, pharmacists, nutritionists, and nursing staff who are knowledgeable in
parenteral nutrition and monitoring should be implemented for the care of such infants.
Early recognition of metabolic effects (pharmacist/nutritionist) or catheter-related effects
2705_frame_C06 Page 210 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:14 PM
TABLE 6.4
Initiation and Advancement of Parenteral and Minimal Enteral Feedings in an Infant with a
Birthweight of <1000 g
Parenteral Enteral
Age, d Amino Acid [g/kg] Glucose Lipids [g/kg] Electrolytes mL/h
1 0.0 D 5W 0.0 0.0 0.0
2 1.0 D 5W 0.5 Add if Na <130 mEq/l 0.25
3 1.5 Increments of 2.5% 1.0a Standard 0.25
4 2.0 Increase as tolerated 1.5a Standard 0.5
5 2.5 Increase as tolerated 2.0a Standard 0.5
6 3.0 Increase as tolerated 2.5a Standard 0.75
7 3.0 or higherb Same or higher 3.0a Standard 0.75
a Monitor triglycerides to assess lipid tolerance.
b Optional; infants requiring catch up growth, on corticosteroids or demonstrating low BUN despite ade-
quate protein intakes may need higher amino acid intakes at later stages.
TABLE 6.5
Parenteral Nutrition is Indicated in the Following Conditions
Condition Indication
Medical Inadequate enteral nutrition
Necrotizing enterocolitis
Feeding intolerance/difficulty
Ileus
Surgical Omphalocele
Gastroschisis
Tracheo-esophageal fistula
Atresias of the intestine (duodenal/jejunal/ileal)
Diaphragmatic hernia
Hirschsprung’s disease
TABLE 6.6
Complications of Parenteral Nutrition
Type Complication
Metabolic Hypo- or hyperglycemia
Electrolyte imbalance
Metabolic bone disease
Hepatic dysfunction
Infectious Bacterial sepsis
Fungal sepsis
Mechanical Extravasation
Thrombosis
Pericardial effusion
Diaphragmatic palsy
(nursing) could help to minimize the potential complications of parenteral nutrition. The
most common metabolic complications observed are hepatic dysfunction and metabolic
bone disease.
Hepatic dysfunction is defined as an increase in serum bile acids followed by an
increase in direct bilirubin, alkaline phosphatase, and gamma-glutamyl transferase. The
hepatocellular enzymes, ALT and AST, are late to increase, and are often seen in the more
severe cases. Gamma-glutamyl transferase is probably the most sensitive but least specific
2705_frame_C06 Page 211 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:14 PM
TABLE 6.7
Suggested Monitoring during Parenteral Nutrition
Component Initial Later
Weight Daily Daily
Length Weekly Weekly
Head circumference Weekly Weekly
Na, K, Cl, CO2 Daily until stable Weekly
Glucose Daily PRN
Triglycerides With every lipid change Weekly or biweekly
Ca, PO4 Daily until stable Weekly or biweekly
Alkaline phosphatase Initial Weekly or biweekly
Bilirubin Initial Weekly or biweekly
Mg Initial Weekly or biweekly
Ammonia PRN PRN
Gamma GT Initial Weekly or biweekly
ALT/AST Initial Weekly or biweekly
Complete blood count Initial Weekly or PRN
indicator, whereas elevation in direct bilrubin is the most specific and least sensitive
indicator of hepatic dysfunction. The etiology is multi-factorial,23-25 but the incidence
appears to be declining as a result of both specialized amino acid solutions and early
provision of enteral nutrients.
Premature infants are at high risk for the development of metabolic bone disease most
commonly due to inadequate intakes of calcium and phosphorus during parenteral nutri-
tion. Infants born before 32 weeks of gestation have some degree of hypomineralization
which is worsened during the subsequent period of hospitalization, especially coupled
with inadequate intakes of calcium and phosphorus. In general, both calcium and phos-
phorus levels are maintained in serum, while the bones appear more osteopenic on
radiographs, and ultimately hypophosphatemia with increasing alkaline phosphatase is
observed. Rising alkaline phosphatase in the absence of elevated liver enzymes is a strong
indicator of metabolic bone disease. Incidence of rickets (metabolic bone disease) is
inversely proportional to birth-weight, and has been reported to be as high as 50–60% in
very-low-birth-weight infants.26 Diagnosis is made by routine radiographs which in the
initial stages would demonstrate bone undermineralization, especially in the ribs and
scapula, subsequently showing the classic forms of rickets in the wrists and long bones.
Strategies to increase calcium and phosphorus delivery should be considered. Unfortu-
nately, the very small preterm infant is more often at risk for these complications, given
the duration of parenteral nutrition and the coexistence of hepatic dysfunction.
Enteral Nutrition
Even if enteral nutrition is started in the first days after birth, it is suggested that supple-
mental parenteral nutrition be started because immaturity, feeding intolerance, and GI
motility may affect the rate of advancement of enteral nutrition. Further, intakes are also
dictated by the feedings used: human milk or formula. Composition of formulas available
in the U.S. is depicted in Table 6.8. Composition of human milk (Table 6.9), especially from
a mother delivering a preterm infant, is different from that of mothers delivering at term;
further, differences between and within the same woman makes the average content
difficult to estimate. The route of enteral nutrition is dictated not only by the gestational
age of the infant, but also the coexistence of medical or surgical morbidity. Routes and
types of delivery are depicted in Table 6.10.
2705_frame_C06 Page 212 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:14 PM
TABLE 6.8
Composition of Formulas Commonly Used in Premature Infants
Enfamil®
Premature Similac®
Nutrients per Formula 24 Similac® Special Enfamil 22™ NeoCare™
100 Calories with Iron Care® 24 with Iron with Iron 22 with Iron
Protein, g 3 2.71 2.8 2.6
Whey:casein 60:40 60:40 60:40 50:50
Fat, g 5.1 5.43 5.3 5.5
Source MCT, soy, coconut MCT, soy, coconut High oleic Soy, MCT, coconut
oils oils sunflower, soy, oils**
MCT, coconut oils
Carbohydrate, g 11.1 10.6 10.7 10.3
Source Corn syrup, solids, Corn syrup, solids, Corn syrup solids,* Corn syrup solids,
lactose lactose lactose lactose
Water, g 108 109 120 120
Lineoleic acid, mg 1060 700 950 750
Vitamin A, IU 1250 1250 450 460
Vitamin D, IU 270 150 80 70
Vitamin E, IU 603 4 4 3.6
Vitamin K, mcg 8 12 8 11
Thiamin (B1), mcg 200 250 200 220
Riboflavin (B2), 300 620 200 150
mcg
Vitamin B6, mcg 150 250 100 100
Vitamin B12, mcg 0.25 0.55 0.3 0.4
Niacin, mcg 4000 5000 2000 1950
Folic acid, mcg 35 37 26 25
Pantothenic acid, 1200 1900 850 800
mcg
Biotin, mcg 4 37 6 9
Vitamin C, mg 20 37 16 15
Choline, mg 12 10 15 16
Inositol, mg 17 5.5 30 6
Calcium, mg 165 180 120 105
Phosphorus, mg 83 100 66 62
Calcium: 2:1 1.8:1 1.8:1 1.7:1
phosphorus
Magnesium, mg 6.8 12 8 9
Iron, mg 108 1.8 1.8 1.8
Zinc, mg 105 1.5 1.25 1.2
Manganese, mcg 603 12 15 10
Copper, mcg 125 250 120 120
Iodine, mcg 25 6 15 15
Selenium, mcg 1.8 1.8 2.3 2.3
Sodium, mg 39 43 35 33
Potassium, mg 103 129 105 142
Chloride, mg 85 81 78 75
Osmolality, 310 280 260 250
m0sm/kg water
* Powder form only. Ready-to-use form contains maltodextrin.
** Ready to feed.
2705_frame_C06 Page 213 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:14 PM
TABLE 6.9
Composition of Human Milk
Human milk
(2 wks postpartum)
Term Preterm
Volume (ml) 147–161 139–150
Water (ml) 133–145 125–135
Protein
Lipid
Composition
Carbohydrate
Vitamins
Fat-soluble
Vitamin A (IU) 155–333 72–357
Vitamin D (IU) 0.7–3.3 0.7–12
Vitamin E (IU) 0.45–0.75 0.42–1.42
Vitamin K (µg) 0.29–3 0.29–3
2705_frame_C06 Page 214 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:14 PM
Other
TABLE 6.10
Routes of Feeding Preterm Infants
Route <34 weeks >34 weeks
Per os No Yes
Continuous gastric <1250 g Failure to tolerate bolus gastric,
significant GER
Bolus gastric (every 3 h) >1250 g; infants <1250 g not tolerating Failure to tolerate per os
continuous
Transpyloric, continuous Failure to tolerate gastric feeds, gastric Same as <34 weeks
distention due to positive pressure,
poor gastric emptying
Motor responses to feedings are similar whether feedings are provided by the gastric
or transpyloric route.27 However, when feeds are provided slowly over 120 min as com-
pared to 15 min, gastric emptying is better, suggesting that in the smaller premature infant,
slow infusions may be better tolerated.28,29
Oral Feeding
Term and preterm infants greater than 33 to 34 weeks gestation may be fed soon after
birth by the oral route. This should be attempted in the delivery room in healthy infants
or initiated soon after birth. Human milk feedings (i.e., breast feeding) should be encour-
aged, and all steps should be taken by the medical team and hospital staff to encourage
breast feeding once the decision is made.30 If breast feeding is precluded due to craniofacial
anomalies such as cleft lip or palate, feeding devices are available and speech and/or
feeding teams may need to be involved. Lactation consultation should be sought for
mothers who have difficulty in either initiation or maintenance of breast feeding. Hospitals
should avoid supplementing breastfed infants and the use of pacifiers.30
Most mothers delivering preterm infants have not made a decision about breast feeding,
and should be counseled appropriately. All delivery sites should have facilities to pump
2705_frame_C06 Page 215 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:14 PM
breast milk if actual breastfeeding is not possible and the mother wishes to breastfeed.
Teaching should include appropriate techniques for pumping and storing milk.
Nutrient Delivery
For infants born after 33 to 34 weeks of gestation, enteral feedings may be started per os.
Although it is recognized that infants at this gestational age can coordinate their suck,
swallow, and respiratory activities, thus enabling feedings, not all infants respond in such
a fashion and careful assessment is warranted. In the event that nipple feedings are not
achieved, the infant may be fed by the gastric route.
In general, the alternatives to feedings by mouth are gastric and transpyloric. Gastric
feedings can be further described as bolus or continuous, where the feedings are either
provided intermittently every 2 to 3 hours, or by a pump continuously. Transpyloric feeds
are provided continuously, with the tip of the feeding tube in the second part of the
duodenum. General indications for the latter include failure to tolerate gastric feeding
due to delayed gastric emptying, gastric distention due to positive pressure ventilation,
or gastroesophageal reflux. Feedings can also be planned based on birth-weight. In general,
infants below 1250 g are fed by the continuous gastric method, whereas bigger infants are
fed by the intermittent method.
Special Considerations
Essential Fatty Acids
Vegetable oils contain the precursor essential fatty acids linoleic acid (18:2w-6) and in most
cases alpha linolenic acid (18:3w-3). Linoleic and linolenic acids serve as precursors for
the synthesis of long-chain polyunsaturated fatty acids (LC-PUFA) including arachdonic
(20:4w-6), eicosopentaenoic (20:5w-3), and docosahexaenoic (22:6w-3) acids. Human milk
lipids contain preformed LC-PUFA; LC-PUFA are essential components of membrane
systems and are incorporated in membrane-rich tissues such as the brain during early
growth.31,32 Some of the LC-PUFA serve as precursors for prostaglandins, prostacyclin,
thromboxanes, and leukotrienes. The fetus and the fully breastfed infant do not depend
on active synthesis of LC-PUFA, since the placenta and human milk provide LC-PUFA in
amounts considered appropriate.33-36 Premature infants fed formulas without LC-PUFA
develop depletion of LC-PUFA in plasma and red cell membranes, indicating limited
endogenous LC-PUFA synthesis.37 Recent studies by Carlson et al. demonstrate that pre-
term infants have high cord blood phosphatidlyethalonamine (PE), phosphatidlycholine
(PC), docosahexanoic acid (DHA), and arachadonic acid (AA), but that these levels decline
rapidly.38 Further, PE, PC, DHA, and PC AA declined in formula-fed infants, but were
maintained in human milk-fed infants;38 at the end of the six-week study period, although
PE, PC DHA, and AA were significantly higher in human milk-fed than formula-fed
infants, these levels did not reach cord blood levels.38 These declines in erythrocyte PE
DHA could be prevented with supplementation of DHA.39 However, supplementation
with DHA (0.5% total fatty acids) resulted in decreased AA concentrations compared to
feeding with 0.2% DHA, suggesting adverse effects on AA synthesis at the higher con-
centration.40 Similar effects on AA were observed in premature infants fed formulas with
similar linoleic acid content (16%) but different alpha-linolenic acid contents (1 vs. 3.2%);
high alpha-linolenic acid-supplemented infants had lower AA and despite a higher DHA
content, rate of weight gain was significantly less than the lower-supplemented infants
throughout the study.41 There were no demonstrable effects on visual evoked potential or
2705_frame_C06 Page 216 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:14 PM
latency at 56 weeks between the two groups of infants, although mean latency in both
groups was higher and mean amplitude lower than in age-matched breastfed term infants
or in term infants fed similar formulas. Higher visual acuity in DHA-supplemented infants
has been reported at 2 and 4 months42-44 but not at 6, 9, and 12 months. Further studies
are required before the optimal dose of DHA can be determined on growth and longer
term followup of premature infants.
Carnitine
Current parenteral nutrition regimens do not contain carnitine. Low plasma concentrations
of carnitine and its decline with postnatal age has been demonstrated in infants receiving
carnitine-free nutrition.45,46 Although fatty acid metabolism has not been shown to be
impaired in short-term parenteral nutrition, carnitine is an accepted additive for infants
requiring parenteral nutrition for longer periods.47-49 Carnitine is provided at doses of 8.0
to 20 mg/kg/d.
Glutamine
Glutamine is the most abundant amino acid in the human body and is the most important
"nitrogen shuttle," accounting for 30 to 35% of all amino acid nitrogen transported in the
blood.50 Glutamine concentrations in blood and tissue fall following starvation, surgery,
infection, and trauma.51,52 In addition, glutamine plays an important role in protein and
energy metabolism, nucleotide synthesis, and lymphocyte function.53 Glutamine is known
to be an important fuel for small intestinal enterocytes;54 however, an absolute need of
glutamine for gut growth has not been demonstrated with either detrimental or negligible
effects reported in the literature.55-57 Nonetheless, absence of glutamine in the diet has
been shown to cause villous atrophy, fall in lumina propria lymphocyte populations, and
increased bacterial translocation.58-62 While optimal intakes of glutamine for premature
infants is not known, enteral supplementation with glutamine has been shown to decrease
feeding intolerance,63 and there is a possible decrease in hospital costs64 with glutamine
supplemented up to 0.3 g/kg/d. Further studies on optimal supplementation of
glutamine, enterally and parenterally, in preterm infants are required.
Summary
Despite the many questions that remain regarding optimal nutritional management of the
neonate, it is nonetheless important to develop rational protocols for the management of
nutritional issues that arise. This chapter has provided some guidelines and the framework
from which these guidelines arose. There are numerous different approaches to feeding
a neonate. The ultimate goal should be to optimize nutrition, and hence growth and
ultimately development in this ever-increasing population of small premature infants.
References
1. Ballard J. L., Novak K. K., Driver, M. J Pediatr 95: 769; 1979.
2705_frame_C06 Page 217 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:14 PM
2. Alexander G. R., de Caunes F., Hulsey T. C., Thompkins M. E., Allen M. Am J Obstet Gynecol
166: 891; 1992.
3. Ballard J. L., Khoury J. C., Wedig K., Wang L., Wilers-Walsman B. L., Lipp R. J Pediatr 119:
417; 1991.
4. Ziegler E. E., O’Donnell A. M., Nelson S. E., Fomon S. J. Growth 40: 329; 1976.
5. Widdowson, E. M., Spray, C. M. Arch Dis Child 26: 205; 1951.
6. Ziegler E.E. Energy and Protein Needs during Infancy, Academic Press, Florida, 1996.
7. Weinstein M. R. Oh W. J Pediatr 99: 958; 1981.
8. Billeaud C., Piedboeuf B., Chessex P. J Pediatr 120: 461; 1992.
9. Kashyap S., Hierd W. C. NCR [ed]: Protein Metabolism During Infancy, Nestle Nutrition Workshop
Series, Raven Press, New York, 33: 133; 1994.
10. Rivera A. Jr., Bell E. F., Stegink L. D., Ziegler E. E. J Pediatr 115: 465; 1989.
11. Kashyap S., Abildskov A., Heird W.C. Pediatr Res 31: 290A; 1992.
12. Saini J., MacMahon P., Morgan J. B., Kovar I. Z. Arch Dis Child 64: 1362; 1989.
13. Van Lingen R.A., van Goudoever J. B., Luijendijk I. H., et al. Clin Sci 82:199; 1992.
14. van Goudoever J. B., Sucklers E. J., Timmerman M., et al. J Parent Enteral Nutr 18: 404; 1994.
15. Zlotkin S. H., Bryan M. H., Anderson G. H. J Pediatr 99: 115; 1981.
16. Haumont D., Deckelbaum R. J., Richelle M., et al. J Pediatr 115: 787; 1989.
17. Brans Y. W., Andrews D. S., Carrillo D. W., et al. Am J Dis Child 142: 145; 1988.
18. Wu P. Y., Edwards N., Storm M. C. J Pediatr 109: 347; 1986.
19. Schanler R. J. Clin Perinatol 22: 207; 1995.
20. Schanler R. J., Garza C. J Pediatr 112: 452; 1988.
21. Widness J. A., Seward, V. J., Kromer, I. J., et al. J Pediatr 129: 680; 1996.
22. Shannon K. M., Keith J. F., Mentzer W. C., et al. Pediatrics 95: 1; 1995.
23. Grant J. P., Cox C. E., Kleinman L. M. et al., Surg Gynecol Obstet 145: 573; 1977.
24. Balistreri W. F., Bove K. E. Prog Liver Dis 9: 567; 1990.
25. Bhatia J., Moslen M. T., Haque A. K. Pediatr Res 33: 487; 1993.
26. Greer F. R. Ann Rev Nutr 14: 169; 1994.
27. Koenig W. J., Amarnath R. P., Hench V., Berseth C. L. Pediatrics 95: 203; 1995.
28. Berseth C. L. J Pediatr 117: 777; 1990.
29. Berseth C. L., Ittmann P. I. J Pediatr Gastroenterol Nutr 14: 182; 1992.
30. American Academy of Pediatrics. Work Group on Breastfeeding. Pediatrics 100: 1035; 1997.
31. Clandinin M. T., Chappell J. E., Leong S., et al. Human Dev 4: 121; 1980.
32. Martinez M., Ballabriga A. Lipids 22: 133; 1987.
33. Koletzko B., Thiel I., Springer S. Eur J Clin Nutr 46: S45; 1992.
34. Jensen R. G., The Lipids of Human Milk, CRC Press, Boca Raton, 1995.
35. Sanders T. A., Naismith D. J. Br J Nutr 41: 619; 1979.
36. Putnam J. C., Carlson S. E., DeVoe P. W., Barness L. A. Am J Clin Nutr 36: 106; 1982.
37. Koletzko B., Schmidt E., Bremer H. J., et al. Eur J Pediatr 148: 669; 1989.
38. Carlson S. E., Rhodes P. G., Ferguson M. G. Am J Clin Nutr 44: 798; 1986.
39. Carlson S. E., Rhodes P. G., Rao V. S., Goldgar D. E. Pediatr Res 21: 507; 1987.
40. Liu C. C., Carlson S. E., Rhodes P. G., et al. Pediatr Res 22: 292; 1987.
41. Jensen C. L., Chen H. M., Prager T. C., et al. Pediatr Res 37: 311A, 1995.
42. Uauy R. D., Birch D. G., Birch E. E. et al., Pediatr Res 28: 485; 1990.
43. Carlson S. E., Werkman S. H., Tolley E. A. Am J Clin Nutr 63: 687; 1996.
44. Carlson S. E., Werkman S. H., Rhodes P. G., Tolley E. Am J Clin Nutr 58: 35; 1993.
45. Penn D., Schmidt-Sommerfeld E., Pascu F. Early Hum Develop 4: 23; 1979.
46. Shenai J. P., Borum P. R. Pediatr Res 18: 679; 1984.
47. Orzali A., Donzelli F., Enzi G., Rubaltelli F. Biol Neonate 43: 186; 1983.
48. Orzali A., Maetzke G., Donzelli F., Rubaltelli F. F. J Pediatr 104: 436; 1984.
49. Schmidt-Sommerfeld E., Penn D., Wolf H. J Pediatr 102: 931; 1983.
50. Souba W. W. J Parent Enteral Nutr 11: 569; 1987.
51. Askanazi J., Carpentier Y. A., Michelsen C. B., et al. Ann Surg 192: 78; 1980.
52. Roth E., Funovics J., Muhlbacher F., et al. Clin Nutr 1:25; 1982.
53. Neu J., Shenoy V., Chakrabarti R. FASEB J 10: 829; 1996.
2705_frame_C06 Page 218 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:14 PM
54. Souba W. W., Herskowitz, K., Salloum, R. M., et al. J Parent Enteral Nutr 14: 45S; 1990.
55. Bark T., Svenberg T., Theodorsson E., et al. Clin Nutr 13:79; 1994.
56. Burrin D. G., Shulam R. J., Storm M. C., Reeds P. J. J Parent Enteral Nutr 15: 262; 1991.
57. Vanderhoof J. A., Blackwood D. J., Mohammadpour H., Park, J. H. J Am Coll Nutr 11: 223;
1992.
58. Hwang T. L., O’Dwyer S. T., Smith R. J., et al. Surg Forum 38: 56; 1987.
59. Grant J. J Surg 44: 506; 1988.
60. Burke D. J., Alverdy J. C., Aoys E., Moss G. S. Arch Surg, 124: 1396; 1989.
61. Alverdy J. C., Aoys E., Weiss-Carrington P., Burke D. A. J Surg Res 52: 34; 1992.
62. Neu J., Roig J. C., Meetze W. H., et al. J Pediatr 131: 691; 1997.
63. Dallas M. J., Bowling D., Roig J. C., et al. J Parent Enteral Nutr 22: 352; 1998.
2705_frame_C07 Page 219 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:15 PM
7
Feeding the Term Infant
Growth
The average weight of a healthy term infant is 3.5 kg. With an anticipated loss of 10% in
body weight in the first week of life, birth weight is regained by two weeks of age in both
breast-fed and formula-fed infants, with the formula-fed infants demonstrating a tendency
to regain birth weight sooner than their breast-fed counterparts.
Body weight should be measured with an electronic scale or a beam balance without
detachable weights, with the balances capable of weighing to the nearest 10 g. Even with
the use of electronic scales, balances should be tared with calibrated weights at least two
times a year. Mean weight and selected centiles for weight are summarized in Table 7.1.
In clinical practice, however, weight and other anthropometric measurements including
length, head circumference, and weight for length are plotted on growth charts (Figures
7.1 and 7.2) adapted from Hamill et al.1 The plotting of growth on these charts will suffice
for monitoring of normal infants; however, a different and more sensitive approach will
be needed for infants with faltering growth. The “reference data” provided by Fomon2
combine data from the University of Iowa and the Fels Longitudinal Study, the latter data
used in the growth charts.
Length
Length should be measured by two examiners using a calibrated length board with a fixed
headpiece and a movable foot board. The head is held by one examiner with the Frankfort
plane (defined as a line that passes through the left porion, the right porion, and the orbits)
0-8493-2705-9/01/$0.00+$1.50
© 2002 by CRC Press LLC 219
2705_frame_C07 Page 220 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:15 PM
TABLE 7.1
Mean Body Weight and Selected Centiles for Males and Females, 0–12 Months of Age
Age Mean 5th centile (g) 50th centile (g) 95th centile (g)
Mean body weight and selected centiles for males, 0–12 months of age
Mean body weight and selected centiles for females, 0–12 months of age
in the vertical position, and gentle traction is placed to bring the head into contact with
the headpiece. A second examiner holds the infant’s feet with the toes pointing upwards,
and while applying gentle traction, brings the footpiece to rest firmly against the infant’s
heels. Measurements agreeing to within 0.4 cm are considered adequate, and the impor-
tance of length measurements is underscored, particularly when serial measurements are
made in a longitudinal fashion. It is generally agreed that faltering in length as well as
weight suggests growth faltering of a longer duration than when weight alone is affected.
Head Circumference
Head circumference is measured by a narrow flexible steel or paper tape applied to the
head above the supraorbital ridges and encircling the most prominent parts of the forehead
and the occiput. The maximum of three measurements should be used as the maximal
circumference. Weight-for-length measurements (Figures 7.1 and 7.2) are also available
and are useful in defining obesity as well as leanness.
A variety of other measures to define growth include skin fold thickness, limb length
and circumference, and body mass index. The latter, body mass index, is calculated by
dividing weight in kilograms by length in meters squared, replacing weight for length in
older children. In any case, accurate measurements are essential to the interpretation of
growth charts.
Normal growth is a strong indicator of nutritional sufficiency and overall health of an
infant. Since infancy is a period of rapid growth, particularly early infancy, identifying
growth failure is important and requires prompt medical attention. As we understand
more about the complex interactions between genetic, immunologic, metabolic, physio-
logic, and psychologic factors and their effects on long-term outcomes of infant feeding
decisions, defining appropriate growth becomes a very important issue for health care
providers of children.
2705_frame_C07 Page 221 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:15 PM
Birth 3 6 9 12 15 18 21 24 27 30 33 36
in cm AGE (MONTHS)
cm in
41 41 L
40 40 E
100 95 100
39 90 39 N
38 G
75 38
95 95 T
37 50 37 H
36 25 36
90 90
35 10 35
5
34
85
33
32 38
80 95 17
31
L 30 36
75 90 16
E
N
29
34
G 28
70 75
15
T 27 32
H 26 65 14
25 50 30 W
24 E
60 13
23 25 28 I
G
22 55 12 H
10 26
21 5 T
20 50 11 24
19
18 45 10 22
17
16 40 9 20
15
8 18
16 16
7 AGE (MONTHS)
kg lb
12 15 18 21 24 27 30 33 36
14
6 Mother’s Stature Gestational
W Father’s Stature Age: Weeks Comment
E 12
Date Age Weight Length Head Circ.
I 5 Birth
G 10
H
T
4
8
3
6
2
lb kg
Birth 3 6 9
FIGURE 7.1
Girls: birth to 36 months: physical growth NCHS percentiles.
2705_frame_C07 Page 222 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:15 PM
Birth 3 6 9 12 15 18 21 24 27 30 33 36
in cm AGE (MONTHS) cm in H
E
A
52 52
D
95
20 90 20
50 50 C
75 I
50 R
H 19 19
48 48 C
E 25 U
A 10 M
D 18 46 5 46 18 F
E
R
C 44 44 E
I 17 17 N
R C
C 42 42 E
U 16
M 40 50
F 22 48
E
15 38 21 46
R
E 20 44
N 36 19 42
14
C 95
E 18 40
34 90
17 38
13 75 36
32 16
50 34
12 25
15
30 32
10 14
5 30 W
13 28 E
12 I
26 G
24 11 11 24 H
22 10 10 22 T
20 9 9 20
18 8 8 18
16 7 7 16
W
E 14 14
6 6
I 12
14 12
G 5 5
10 kg lb
H 4 LENGTH
T 8 cm
64 66 68 70 72 74 76 78 80 82 84 86 88 90 92 94 96 98100
6 3
26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 in
4 2
Date Age Weight Length Head Circ. Comment
2 1
lb kg
cm 46 48 50 52 54 56 58 60 62
in 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
FIGURE 7.1
Continued.
2705_frame_C07 Page 223 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:15 PM
Birth 3 6 9 12 15 18 21 24 27 30 33 36
in cm AGE (MONTHS)
cm in
41 41 L
40 95 40 E
100 90 100 N
39 39
75 G
38 38
95 50 95 T
37 37 H
25
36 36
90 10 90
35 5 35
34
85
33
32 95 38
80 17
31
L 90 36
30
E 75 16
N
29
75
34
G 28
70 15
T 27 32
H 26 50
65 14
25 30 W
24 25 E
60 13
23 28 I
10 G
22 55 12 H
5 26
21 T
20 50 11 24
19
18 45 10 22
17
16 40 9 20
15
8 18
16 16
7 AGE (MONTHS)
kg lb
12 15 18 21 24 27 30 33 36
14
6 Mother’s Stature Gestational
W Father’s Stature Age: Weeks Comment
E 12
Date Age Weight Length Head Circ.
I 5 Birth
G 10
H
T
4
8
3
6
2
lb kg
Birth 3 6 9
FIGURE 7.2
Boys: birth to 36 months: physical growth NHS percentiles.
2705_frame_C07 Page 224 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:15 PM
Birth 3 6 9 12 15 18 21 24 27 30 33 36
in cm AGE (MONTHS) cm in H
E
95 A
52 90 52
D
20 75 20
50 50 C
50
I
25 R
H 19 19
48 48 C
E 10 U
A 5 M
D 18 46 46 18 F
E
R
C 44 44 E
I 17 17 N
R C
C 42 42 E
U 16
M 40 50
F 22 48
E
15 38 21 46
R
E 20 44
N 36 19 42
14
C
E
95
18 40
34 90
17 38
13 75
36
32 50
16
34
12 25 15
30 10 32
5 14
30 W
13 28 E
12 I
26 G
24 11 11 24 H
22 10 10 22 T
20 9 9 20
18 8 8 18
16 7 7 16
W
E 14 14
6 6
I 12
14 12
G 5 5
10 kg lb
H 4 LENGTH
T 8 cm
64 66 68 70 72 74 76 78 80 82 84 86 88 90 92 94 96 98100
6 3
26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 in
4 2
Date Age Weight Length Head Circ. Comment
2 1
lb kg
cm 46 48 50 52 54 56 58 60 62
in 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
CDC
FIGURE 7.2
Continued.
2705_frame_C07 Page 225 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:15 PM
Energy
Energy requirements during infancy may be partitioned into basal metabolism, thermic
effect of feeding, thermoregulation, physical activity, and growth. The energy requirements
for growth relative to maintenance, except in early infancy, are small, and satisfactory
growth can be considered a sensitive indicator that energy requirements are being met.
Energy balance may be defined as gross energy intake = energy excreted + energy
expended + energy stored. Gross energy intake, measured by the heat of combustion, is
greater than energy available when fed because most foods are not completely digested,
and protein oxidation is incomplete. Fat absorption varies widely among infants fed
various formulas, particularly in infancy. Urea and other nitrogenous compounds are
excreted in the urine. Gross intake is calculated as 5.7 kcal/g, 9.4 kcal/g, and 4.1 kcal/g
obtained from protein, fat, and carbohydrate, respectively, and therefore it varies given
the type of diet fed. The term “digestible energy” refers to gross energy intake minus
energy excreted in the feces. Metabolizable energy is defined as digestible energy minus
energy lost in urine. The metabolizable energy values for protein, fat, and carbohydrate
are close to 4, 9, and 4 kcal/g, respectively. Losses of energy, other than feces and urine,
are negligible and are ignored for practical purposes.
The energy intake of normal infants per unit body weight is much greater than in adult
counterparts. Energy requirements for term infants have been estimated by various groups
and vary from 100–116 kcal/kg/d from 0–3 months and decline to about 100 kcal/kg/d
by the end of the first year.3-7 These recommendations are based on the median intake of
thriving infants; the intakes of breast-fed infants are lower than that of formula-fed infants,
with an average of 3–4% lower in the first three months, and 6–7% from three to six
months. As new, more precise estimates of energy expenditure become available, these
recommendations are apt to change, given that current recommendations are higher than
the “gold” standard — the breast-fed infant. Energy intakes of infants from 6 to 12 months
of age have been reported to be between 91 and 100 kcal/kg/d.8-10
Protein
Intakes of protein and essential amino acids are generally sufficient in developed countries,
in contrast to developing countries where protein and protein-energy malnutrition are still
a frequent occurrence. In appropriately fed infants, protein is not a limiting dietary com-
ponent in infancy and is clearly essential for normal growth and development. For the
human infant, histidine, isoleucine, leucine, lysine, methionine, phenylalanine, threonine,
tryptophan, and valine are considered essential amino acids. The data for cysteine are
conflicting11,12 for the term infant, although the data are clear for the preterm infant.
Conditionally essential amino acids are those that become essential under certain circum-
stances, since they may be produced in inadequate amounts endogenously. An example
of this is taurine, which is now added to formulas based on reports of greater concentrations
of taurine in the plasma and urine of preterm13,14 and term15 infants. The concern about
taurine depletion stems from the observations of growth retardation, abnormal retinal
findings, and impaired bile acid metabolism in taurine-deficient animals and humans.
Recommended dietary intakes of protein are summarized in Table 7.2. In contrast,
intakes recommended by WHO16 are 2.25, 1.86, 1.65, and 1.48 g/100 kcal from 1–2, 3–6,
2705_frame_C07 Page 226 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:15 PM
TABLE 7.2
Recommended Dietary Intakes of Protein
Age Interval Recommended Dietary Intake
(mo) (g · kg–1 · d–1) (g/100 kcal)
0 to 1 2.6 2.2
1 to 2 2.2 2.0
2 to 3 1.8 1.8
3 to 4 1.5 1.6
4 to 5 1.4 1.6
5 to 6 1.4 1.6
6 to 9 1.4 1.5
9 to 12 1.3 1.5
Reproduced with permission from Fomon, S. J.
Pediatric Research 30, 391, 1991.
6–9, and 9–12 months, respectively. Both of these recommendations are generally higher
than the intakes observed in human milk-fed infants.
Fat
The importance of dietary fat is underscored by the fact that 35% of the weight gain of an
infant in early infancy is accounted for by fat.17 Most of the dietary fat is in the form of
triglyceride formed by three fatty acids esterified to a glycerol backbone. In the body, trig-
lycerides are the main form of storage and transport of fatty acids. Phospholipids and
cholesterol are indispensable components of the lipid bi-layer of all cell membranes, and the
amount of different phospholipids and cholesterol, as well as the fatty acid pattern of incor-
porated phospholipids, modulate membrane fluidity, permeability, enzyme and receptor
activity, and signal transduction. Cholesterol is required for the synthesis of steroids and bile
acids, although the majority of the cholesterol pool in tissue and plasma is derived from
endogenous synthesis; dietary cholesterol contributes to the pool, and diet modifies liver
synthesis.18 Fatty acids (4-26 carbon atoms) are either saturated (no double bonds in the
carbon chain), mono-unsaturated (one double bond) or polyunsaturated (two or more double
bonds). Double bonds occur in two isomeric forms: cis and trans; unsaturated fatty acids are
folded at the site of each double bond, cis, and trans-fatty acids have straight carbon chains.
Human milk contains approximately 4% lipids, but the reported variation is between
3.1 and 5.2%,19,20 with 99% of the fat present in the form of triglycerides and the rest in
the form of diglycerides, monoglycerides, free fatty acids, phospholipids, and cholesterol.
The fat content of human milk increases with duration of lactation.19,21 During this period,
the average size of the fat globules increases, and the ratio of phospholipids and cholesterol
to triglycerides decreases.22 The concentration of fat in human milk remains similar regard-
less of maternal diet or nutritional status, although poor nutrition has been shown to
decrease fat content.23 Fatty acid content of human milk has been reported by numerous
investigators and demonstrates a wide range, as summarized by Fomon.2 Fatty acid
content of human milk is also altered by dietary manipulation.24-27 Human milk fat pro-
vides the essential fatty acids linoleic and α-linolenic acids, along with the long-chain
polyunsaturated fatty acids such as arachidonic and docosahexaenoic acids. The decrease
of milk phospholipid content during the first few weeks after birth is accompanied by a
decrease in arachidonic and docosahexaenoic acids.28 Fat content of human milk and
commonly used formulas is summarized in Table 7.3.
TABLE 7.3
Nutritional Composition of Human Milk and Commonly Used Formulas
Kilocalories/ Protein Fat Carbohydrate Na K Phosphorus Calcium Osmolality
oz. Source gm/dl Source gm/dl Source gm/dl mEq/dl mEq/dl mg/dl mg/dl mOsm/kg water
Mature human 20 Human milk 1.0 Human milk 4.4 Lactose 6.9 0.7 1.3 14 32 300
milk
Feeding the Term Infant
Enfamil (Mead 20 Whey, nonfat 1.5 Palm olein, soy 3.6 Lactose 7.3 0.8 1.9 36 53 300
Johnson) milk coconut,
high-oleic
sunflower oils
Enfamil AR 20 Nonfat milk 1.7 Palm olein, soy 3.5 Lactose, rice 7.4 1.2 1.9 36 53 240
(Mead coconut, starch
Johnson) sunflower oils maltodextrin
2705_frame_C07 Page 227 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:15 PM
Good Start 20 Enzymatically 1.6 Palm olein, 3.4 Lactose, 7.4 0.7 1.7 24 43 265
(Nestle/ hydrolyzed soybean, maltodextrin
Carnation) reduced coconut,
mineral whey high-oleic
safflower oils
Lactofree 20 Milk protein 1.4 Palm olein, soy 3.6 Corn syrup 7.4 0.9 1.9 37 55 200
(Mead isolate coconut, high- solids
Johnson) oleic
sunflower oils
Similac 20 Nonfat milk, 1.4 High-oleic 3.7 Lactose 7.3 0.7 1.8 28 53 300
Improved whey safflower,
(Ross) coconut, soy
oils
Similac Lactose 20 Milk protein 1.4 Soy, coconut 3.6 Corn syrup 7.2 0.8 1.8 38 57 230
Free (Ross) isolate oils solids, sucrose
Similac PM/ 20 Whey, sodium 1.5 Soy, corn, 3.8 Lactose 6.9 0.7 1.5 19 38 280
60/40 (Ross) caseinate coconut oils
Alsoy (Nestle/ 20 Soy protein 1.9 Palm olein, soy, 3.3 Corn 7.5 0.9 2.0 41 71 200
Carnation) isolate with coconut, maltodextrin,
L-methionine high-oleic sucrose
safflower oils
227
228
oils
Isomil DF 20 Soy protein 1.8 Soy, coconut 3.7 Corn syrup, 6.8 1.3 1.9 51 71 240
(Ross) isolate with oils sucrose, soy
L-methionine fiber
ProSobee 20 Soy protein 1.7 Palm olein, soy, 3.7 Corn syrup 7.3 1.0 2.1 56 71 200
(Mead isolate with coconut, solids
Johnson) L-methionine high-oleic
sunflower oils
Alimentum 20 Casein 1.9 MCT 33%, 3.7 Sucrose, 6.9 1.3 2.0 51 71 370
(Ross) hydrolysate safflower, soy modified
with added oils tapioca starch
amino acids
Nutramigen 20 Casein 1.9 Palm olein, soy, 3.4 Corn syrup 7.5 1.4 1.9 43 64 320
(Mead hydrolysate coconut, solids,
Johnson) with added high-oleic modified corn
amino acids sunflower oils starch
Pregestimil 20 Casein 1.9 MCT (55%), 3.8 Corn syrup 6.9 1.4 1.9 51 78 340
Powder hydrolysate corn, soy, solids,
(Mead with added high-oleic oils dextrose,
Johnson) amino acids modified corn
starch
Handbook of Nutrition and Food
Pregestimil 20 Casein 1.9 MCT (55%), 3.8 Corn syrup 6.9 1.4 1.9 51 78 280
Liquid (Mead hydrolysate soy, high-oleic solids,
Johnson) with added safflower oils modified corn
amino acids starch
Neocate (SHS) 20 L-amino acids 2.1 Hybrid 3.0 Corn syrup 7.8 1.1 2.7 62 82 342
safflower, solids
refined
vegetable oils,
(coconut, soy)
Feeding the Term Infant
Follow-Up 20 Nonfat milk 1.8 Palm olein, soy, 2.8 Corn syrup 8.9 1.2 2.3 61 91 326
(Nestle/ coconut, solids, lactose
Carnation) high-oleic
safflower oils
Follow-Up Soy 20 Soy protein 2.1 Palm olein, soy, 3.0 Corn 8.1 1.2 2.0 61 91 200
(Nestle/ isolate with coconut, maltodextrin,
Carnation) L-methionine high-oleic sucrose
safflower oils
2705_frame_C07 Page 229 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:15 PM
Whole cow’s 20 Cow’s milk 3.3 Cow’s milk 3.7 Lactose 4.7 2.1 3.9 93 119 288
milk
Next Step 20 Nonfat milk 1.8 Palm olein, soy, 3.4 Lactose, corn 7.5 1.2 2.3 57 81 270
(Mead coconut, syrup solids
Johnson) high-oleic
sunflower oils
Next Step Soy 20 Soy protein 2.2 Palm olein, soy, 3.0 Corn syrup 8.0 1.3 2.6 61 78 260
(Mead isolate with coconut, solids, sucrose
Johnson) L-methionine high-oleic
sunflower oils
229
2705_frame_C07 Page 230 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:15 PM
Carbohydrate
Carbohydrates generally account for 35 to 42% of the energy intake of breast- or formula-
fed infants, and the usual carbohydrates in infants’ diets are listed in Table 7.4. Carbohy-
drates may be classified as monosaccharides, oligosaccharides, and polysaccharides.
Monosaccharides can be further defined as aldoses (glucose, galactose, xylose, for example)
or ketoses (fructose). Oligosaccharides are consumed in the diet mainly in milk with lactose,
maltose and sucrose being the main sugars present. Polysaccharides are starches, starch
hydrolysates, glycogen, or components of fiber. The major carbohydrate in human milk
is lactose, although small amounts of glucose and other oligosaccharides are also present.
Carbohydrate content of human milk and various formulas is listed in Table 7.3. Carbo-
hydrate malabsorption, apart from genetic causes, is unusual. When the colonic capacity
to ferment carbohydrate is exceeded by the unabsorbed load, symptoms of carbohydrate
intolerance, usually in the form of diarrhea, occur. The diarrhea improves when dietary
carbohydrates are reduced or eliminated from the diet, making the diagnosis of carbohy-
drate intolerance. Normally, electrolytes in the distal gastrointestinal tract and unabsorbed
TABLE 7.4
Usual Carbohydrates and Related Enzymes
Carbohydrate Enzyme
Lactose Lactase
Sucrose Sucrase-isomaltase
Isomaltose Sucrase-isomaltase
Maltose Maltase-glucoamylase
Amylose α-Amylase
Amylopectin β-Amylase
2705_frame_C07 Page 231 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:15 PM
TABLE 7.5
Commonly Used Formulas and Their Indications
Commonly Used Formulas and Their Indications
Formula Carbohydrate Protein Fat Indication
Bovine milk-based Lactose Bovine whey and Vegetable, animal Normal function
casein
Soy-protein-based Sucrose, glucose Soy Soy Lactose intolerance
Hydrolyzed Sucrose, glucose Hydrolyzed whey or Medium chain Cow milk and soy
protein casein triglycerides protein
hypersensitivity;
pancreatic
insufficiency
Casein-based Modified tapioca Casein hydrolysate MCT oil, corn oil Lactase, sucrase and
(modular) starch, added with added amino maltase deficiency,
carbohydrate acids impaired glucose
transport
Elemental Lactose- and sucrose- Hydrolyzed casein Vegetable Cow milk allergy
free, corn syrup
solids, modified
corn starch
“Metabolic” Depends on Corn syrup solids/ Corn oil/ coconut oil Specific metabolic
condition sucrose disorders
carbohydrates (fermented to volatile fatty acids) are rapidly absorbed. Inadequate colonic
salvage results in diarrhea. In young infants and children with disorders of carbohydrate
metabolism, the ultimate goal of carbohydrate digestion and absorption is to render all
available carbohydrates into smaller compounds that the body can use; chiefly, glucose
and fructose. Lactase deficiency is exceedingly rare in newborn infants. Infants usually
develop diet-induced diarrhea following introduction of lactose-containing milk. The
disease, thought to be autosomal recessive, is treated with the elimination or limitation
of lactose in the diet. More commonly, a transient lactose intolerance can occur after acute
or repeated bouts of diarrhea. Sucrase-Isomaltase deficiency is a rare disease that does not
appear until diets containing sucrose, dextrin, or starch are begun. Bouts of diarrhea may
be observed in infants with this deficiency, and management includes eliminating sucrose
and limiting starch in the diet. Older affected children and adults usually tolerate normal
quantities of carbohydrates. Glucose-Galactose deficiency manifests itself with diet-induced
diarrhea soon after birth and responds to withdrawal of these carbohydrates from the
diet. The defect appears to be a specific absence of glucose and galactose transport mech-
anisms, whereas amino acid transport is normal. Fructose transport is normal, and these
infants respond to a diet containing fructose with relief from diarrhea. With age, variable
amounts of starch and milk may be tolerated. Commonly used formulas for various forms
of intolerance are listed in Table 7.5.32
Iron
Iron deficiency is the most common nutritional deficiency in the U.S. and worldwide, with
young children the most susceptible. The increased susceptibility comes from an increased
iron requirement for the rapid growth during this period and inadequate amounts of iron
in the diet unless adequately supplemented.33 According to the third National Health and
Nutrition Examination Survey (NHANES, 1991), ~5% of children between one and two
2705_frame_C07 Page 232 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:15 PM
TABLE 7.6
Stages of Iron Deficiency
Iron Nutritional Status Indices
Adequate stores Normal
Decreased stores Decreased ferritin (10–20 ng/mL), transferrin normal, erythtrocyte
protoporphyrin normal, MCV normal, hemoglobin normal, transferrin
receptor normal
Iron deficiency Decreased ferritin, transferrin saturation decreased, erythrocyte
protoporphyrin increased, MCV normal, hemoglobin normal,
transferrin receptor increased
Iron deficiency anemia Decreased ferritin, transferrin saturation decreased, erythrocyte
protoporphyrin increased, MCV decreased, hemoglobin decreased,
transferrin receptor increased
years of age had evidence of iron deficiency, and about half were also anemic. However,
between the two previously published studies, NHANES II and I, prevalence of iron
deficiency was observed to be decreasing.34 Stages of iron nutritional status are listed in
Table 7.6.
One should distinguish between anemia and iron deficiency anemia, since the latter
occurs when hemoglobin concentration falls below the 90 to 95% range for the same age
and sex.34 A diagnosis of iron deficiency is made when the anemia is accompanied by
evidence of iron deficiency or when there is a rise in hemoglobin following treatment with
iron. In this regard, serum transferrin receptor may offer an advantage for screening for
iron deficiency, since it rises with iron deficiency and is not affected by infection or acute
liver disease.35
Iron deficiency peaks between six and nine months of age and is a consequence of
multiple factors: rapid growth, depleted stores, low iron content of the diet, and early
feeding of cow’s milk.36,37 Since a milk-based diet is the predominant source of energy, at
least in the first six months of life, the iron content and its bioavailability are strong
predictors of iron nutritional status.38 The estimated requirement of absorbed iron from
birth to one year is 0.55 to 0.75 mg/d, thereby underscoring the need for adequate iron
in the diet to meet these needs. Iron concentration in human milk is low (0.3 to 0.5 mg/
L), and although well absorbed, iron content declines between 14 and 183 days of age.39
Therefore, even given the better absorption as milk intake increases and iron content
decreases, it is easy to see that the amount of absorbed iron will be inadequate to meet
the estimated requirements. Therefore, breastfed infants who do not receive iron supple-
ments or iron from other sources are at risk of becoming iron deficient between 6 and 12
months of age.40 Iron-fortified cow’s milk or soy-based formulas are effective in preventing
iron deficiency, and the decline in iron deficiency anemia over the past few decades has
been attributed to their use.34 Systemic manifestations of iron deficiency anemia include
behavioral and cognitive abnormalities expressed as lower scores on tests of psychomotor
development. These effects have to be interpreted keeping the confounding variables of
poor nutrition, environment, and poor socioeconomic background that often coexist. The
studies suggest that infants with iron deficiency anemia, but not iron deficiency without
anemia, have impaired performance of mental and psychomotor development.41-45 These
deficiencies do not improve with iron therapy, and follow-up studies at five to six years
of age still demonstrate poorer scores in the children who were previously anemic.43,44
Strategies to prevent iron deficiency could include the feeding of iron-fortified formulas,
avoidance of non-iron fortified milks and cow’s milk (the latter, at least, till beyond 12
months of age), the feeding of meats and iron-fortified foods, and, if needed, medicinal
iron supplementation in the form of ferrous sulfate.
2705_frame_C07 Page 233 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:15 PM
TABLE 7.7
Unique Constituents of Breast Milk
Unique Constituents of Breast Milk
Docosahexanoic acid Necessary for growth and development of the brain and retina and for
myelinization of nervous tissue
Cholesterol Enhances myelinization of nervous tissue
Taurine Second most abundant amino acid in human milk, important for bile acid
conjugation
Choline May enhance memory
Enzymes Numerous enzymes such as lipases that are important in digestion and
absorption of fat
Lactoferrin Prevents iron from being available to bacteria
Inositol Enhances synthesis and secretion of surfactant in immature lung tissue
Poly- and Oligosaccharides Inhibit bacterial binding to mucosal surfaces
Protein (such as α- Supply amino acids to the infant, help synthesize lactose in the mammary gland,
lactalbumin) and bind calcium and zinc
Bifidobacterium species Predominant bacterial flora in the gastrointestinal tract of breastfed infants,
creates unfavorable pH conditions for the growth of enteric pathogens
Macrophages Macrophages in human colostrum have high concentrations of slgA which is
released during phagocytosis
Epidermal growth factor Promotes cell proliferation in the gastrointestinal mucosa
Breastfeeding
The benefits of breastfeeding to the infant, mother, family, and society are numerous and
impressive, but they must be put into context when making individual decisions about
breast feeding. These include ready availability, possible enhancement of intestinal devel-
opment, resistance to infection, and bonding between mother and infant. It is the preferred
feeding method for the normal infant. Breast milk, in addition to providing the required
nutrients for the healthy infant, has unique constituents, as listed in Table 7.7.
Protein
Approximately 20% of the total nitrogen in human milk is in the form of non-protein
nitrogen compounds such as free amino acids, and urea, which is considerably greater
than the 5% found in bovine milk,46 although there remains a debate about their contri-
bution to nitrogen utilization.47 The quality of the protein differs from that of bovine milk
as well, with the whey-to-casein protein ratios being 70:30 and 18:82 in human and bovine
milk, respectively. These differences in whey-to-casein ratio are reflected in the plasma
amino acid profile of infants and are readily observed within the first three days of age.48
Further, plasma amino acid patterns in human milk-fed infants has been used as a refer-
ence in infant nutrition.49,50 In addition, specific human whey proteins — lactoferrin,
lysozyme, and slgA — are involved in host defense.51,52
Lipids
Lipids in human milk provide 40 to 50% of the energy content and are vehicles for fat
soluble vitamins. The total fat content varies from 2% in colostrum to 2.5–3.0% in transi-
2705_frame_C07 Page 234 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:15 PM
tional milk, and 3.5–4.5% in mature human milk.19 Cholesterol, phospholipids, and essen-
tial fatty acids are highest in colostrum, and more than 98% of human milk fat comes from
11 major fatty acids of 10-20 carbon length. Human milk lipids can inactivate enveloped
viruses including herpes simplex I, measles, and cytomegalovirus, to name a few.
Monoglycerides also exert antiviral activity.
Fat content of human milk is variable, with the fat content rising throughout lactation
but with changes apparent within the course of one day, within feeds and between
women.53 The effects of these differences in thriving infants is not clear, even given that
hind milk has a higher fat content than fore milk. Human milk lipids provide preformed
LC-PUFAs in amounts sufficient to meet nutrient needs. In term infants, plasma concen-
trations of essential fatty acids (arachidonic acid) at two and four weeks of age were
significantly lower in infants fed formula without LC-PUFA compared to breastfed infants.
Docosahexanoic acid concentrations were similarly lower at four and eight weeks of age.
Neuringer and colleagues showed that visual acuity and learning abilities correlate well
with the amount of DHA in the retina and brain phospholipids.54
Nucleotides
Nucleotides represent 2 to 5% of the non-protein nitrogen in human milk.55 Nucleotides
participate in many biological functions such as forming the basis of genetic information
(DNA, RNA) and storing energy (AMP, GMP), and they play roles in immunity as well
as cellular activities. Although they can be produced by the liver, the body’s requirements
vary considerably, especially during infancy.56 The effect of nucleotides on immune func-
tion is not well understood, but infants fed breast milk or nucleotide-supplemented for-
mula have been shown to exhibit increased natural killer cell activity compared to infants
fed unsupplemented formula.57 Infants fed nucleotide formulas had enhanced Haemophi-
lus influenza type B and diphtheria humoral responses compared to non-supplemented
infants.58 Feeding of human milk resulted in significantly higher neutralizing antibody
titers to polio virus at six months of age than were found in control or formula-fed cohorts.
These data suggest that dietary factors play a role in the antibody response to immuni-
zation, and more studies are needed to better understand the mechanisms involved.
Infection
There are several enzymes present in human milk that appear to be important in the
prevention of infection. These include glutathione peroxidase, alkaline phosphatase, and
xanthine oxidase. In addition, other anti-inflammatory agents such as catalase, lactoferrin,
immunoglobulins, and lysozyme are also present in human milk. The antimicrobial activ-
ities of these are generally found at mucosal surfaces, such as the gastrointestinal, urinary,
and respiratory tracts. Specific factors, such as lactoferrin, lysozyme, and slgA, resist
proteolytic degradation and can line the mucosal surfaces, preventing microbial attach-
ment and inhibiting microbial activity. Each of the mammary immune systems is active
against a variety of antigens. Prospective studies in developing countries indicate that
breast milk feeding reduces the incidence or severity of diarrhea,59 lower respiratory tract
infection,60 otitis media,61 bacteremia,62 bacterial meningitis,63 botulism,64 urinary tract
infection,65 and necrotizing enterocolitis.66
Hyperbilirubinemia is more common in breast-fed than formula-fed infants. This is
usually transient, and discontinuation of breast feeding is not recommended unless biliru-
bin values reach excessively high levels or the jaundice persists. Usually, switching to a
2705_frame_C07 Page 235 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:15 PM
formula for one to two days is therapeutic and diagnostic, and breastfeeding can be safely
resumed. Other causes of jaundice should be sought before making a firm diagnosis of
breast-milk jaundice.
Certain chemicals, drugs, foreign proteins, and viruses may be present in human milk.67
However, the risk–benefit ratio of artificial milk needs to be weighed, especially if the
water sources for mixing the milk are contaminated. Breastfeeding is currently contra-
indicated in disease states such as active herpes, tuberculosis, and AIDS.
Formula Feeding
A variety of formulas are available for feeding infants (Table 7.3). The most commonly
used formulas are from bovine milk, and nutrient specifications for infant formulas are
available.68 Commercially available formulas are recommended when breast feeding is
not chosen. Cow’s milk is not recommended in the first year of life due to its nutritional
limitations and inappropriate nutrient concentrations. Cow’s milk has higher concentra-
tions of protein and phosphorus, a lower calcium-to-phosphorus ratio, limited iron, less
essential fatty acids, vitamin C, and zinc than human milk. Increased renal solute load
due to cow’s milk and increased occult blood loss via the gastrointestinal tract leading to
iron deficiency and anemia in infants fed cow’s milk unsupplemented by other nutrients
are additional reasons to discourage the feeding of cow’s milk in early infancy.
1. Isolated soy protein-based formulas are safe and effective alternatives to provide
appropriate nutrition if breast milk or cow milk-based formulas do not meet the
nutritional needs in term infants. However, no advantage is provided over cow’s
milk protein-based formulas as a supplement for breast feeding.
2. Soy protein-based formulas are appropriate for use in infants with galactosemia
and hereditary lactase deficiency.
3. There is no proven value of the routine use of soy-protein based formula in the
prevention or management of infantile colic.
4. There is no proven value of the routine use of soy protein-based formula in the
prevention of atopic disease in healthy or at-risk infants.
5. Infants with documented cow milk protein-induced enteropathy or enterocolitis
should not be given soy protein-based formula routinely.
The nutritional needs of infants zero to six months can be met by breast milk or infant
formulas. Although both groups of infants need to have health surveillance including
growth and development, breastfed infants need to be followed closely over the first few
weeks to assure appropriate feeding practices and resultant growth. Appropriate counsel-
ing for common breast feeding problems needs to be provided, and community support
groups can be involved if needed. Beyond six months, recommendations for infant feeding
2705_frame_C07 Page 236 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:15 PM
are variable, and the recommendations are largely based on extrapolation from data on
younger infants. Nutritional composition of “follow-up” formulas is specified with mini-
mum lower limits for energy (60 kcal/dL), higher minimum limits for protein (2.25 to 3.0
g/100 kcal) and lower minimum limits for fat (3.0 to 4.0 g/100 kcal) compared to formulas
for younger infants. Nonetheless, iron-fortified formulas designed for younger infants may
be safely fed from 6 to 12 months. Infants by this age are physiologically and develop-
mentally ready to accept a variety of dietary items, and feeding practices vary based on
ethnic, cultural, and economic reasons. As stated earlier, feeding of bovine milk is discour-
aged during this period, although a substantial number of infants are indeed fed bovine
milk.70 In addition, there are concerns about the substitution of low-fat or skimmed milks
during this period because of higher intakes of protein and sodium and lower intakes of
iron and essential fatty acids. However, if infants are being fed non-milk foods, the actual
intake of energy may not be lower than of infants fed bovine milk or formula.71
Weaning
The transition from suckling to eating of non-milk foods occurs during the first year of
life based on cultural beliefs and practices, physicians beliefs, mothers’ perceptions of their
infants’ needs, and economic realities. Complementary foods are introduced from before
three months to by six months of age, and a variety of foods are offered.72-74 In the U.S.,
the total transition to beikost usually occurs by the end of the first year of life and continues
during the second year.
The weaning process can be considered in three ways. First, it could be the weaning
from breast feeding to other milks which may replace breast feeding partially or com-
pletely. In the second form, weaning could be considered the transition from liquid to
non-liquid diet. Health concerns may arise during this period if the added foods are too
nutrient dense (protein or energy) or nutrient-deficient (iron, protein), thus altering the
protein:energy ratio or causing deficiency of specific nutrients. The third aspect of weaning
may be the transition from human milk or formula to bovine milk in addition to the
provision of beikost. Since weaning typically occurs during a period of rapid growth,
attention to both nutritional and developmental issues during this period is warranted.
Complementary foods, in addition to providing the required nutrients, are also important
in establishing lifelong patterns of eating.
Failure to Thrive
Growth, as assessed by weight, length (and subsequently height) and head circumference,
is an important part of anticipatory guidance provided in well child care. These anthro-
pometric measurements, especially weight, can be used to detect inadequate attained
growth or reduced growth velocity. The average birth weight of a full term infant is 3300
to 3500 g; after a weight loss of ~10%, infants should regain their birth weight by two
weeks, with formula-fed infants tending to regain their birth weight a little sooner than
their breastfed counterparts. On an average, infants gain about 1 kg per month for the
first three months, 1/2 kilogram per month for the next three months, 1/3 kilogram per
2705_frame_C07 Page 237 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:15 PM
month from 6 to 9 months and 1/4 kilogram per month from 9 to 12 months. Full term
infants double their weight by 4 months and triple their weight by 12 months, while
doubling their length during the same period. Both weight and length gain are slower in
the second year of life, underscoring the anticipatory nutritional guidance needed during
that period. Growth faltering, or failure to thrive, a descriptive term, is then identified by
the following criteria: (1) weight less than 80 to 85% of the 50th percentile on the National
Center for Health Statistics (NCHS) growth charts, (2) weight for age less than the 3 to 5
percentile on the NCHS growth charts, (3) drop in weight that crosses two or more
percentile categories on standard growth charts from previously established pattern of
adequate growth, and (4) a Z-score of –2 SD below the normal 50th percentile. If growth
velocity is used, a decrement of 2 SD over a 90-day period and loss of >1 SD Z score over
90 days is used as a measure of growth faltering.
Since decline in rate of weight gain or growth velocity is more sensitive than decline in
length or head circumference, serial measurements of weight are an important part of the
anticipatory guidance given during well child checks, and provide an early warning of
growth faltering.75,76 The Body Mass Index (BMI), calculated by dividing weight in kilo-
grams by length/height in meters squared, has largely replaced weight for stature. It should
be recognized that there are growth differences between breast and formula-fed infants. As
reported by Nelson et al.,77 mean gains in both weight (g/d) and length (cm/d) were greater
in formula-fed males and females than their breastfed counterparts from 8–122 days of age.
Since the NCHS growth charts were made from data that was cross-sectional and the infants
were fed formulas, attention to growth faltering in the breastfed infant requires both under-
standing of the growth of breastfed infants and the early recognition of decrease in weight
or growth velocity.78 There are numerous organic and non-organic causes of growth failure
or faltering which need to be addressed during such an evaluation. It is important to realize
that failure to thrive or malnutrition may occur in hospitalized infants and children, as well,
and efforts to recognize and nourish these infants and children should be made.
Summary
In summary, the period of infancy is one of rapid changes in growth and attainment of
developmental milestones. This period imposes unique nutritional needs and challenges
for the health care provider. Understanding nutritional needs, ways of meeting these needs
(Table 7.8), deviations in growth and their causes, and providing nutrition in age-appro-
TABLE 7.8
Recommendations for Feeding Healthy Full-Term Infants
Breastfeeding is strongly recommended.
Infant formulas that meet AAP guidelines are recommended when breastfeeding is not chosen or breast milk
is not available.
Breast milk or infant formula is the preferred feeding in the first year of life.
Adequate intakes of human milk or formula meet all nutrient requirements for the first 6 months of life (exception
may be vitamin D in dark-skinned, sun deprived breast fed infants). Infant formula or “follow-up” formula
may be fed in the second 6 months of life.
Introduction of complementary foods should be based on growth, developmental, cultural, social, psychological
and economic considerations. As a general rule, when an infant is consuming 32 ounces of milk per day and
appears to want more, supplemental feedings may be indicated. This usually occurs between 4 and 6 months
of age.
2705_frame_C07 Page 238 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:15 PM
priate, culturally and ethnically sensitive ways while addressing economic issues is the
task of the health care team. Ideally, the infant’s nutritional need (expressed as hunger),
developmental progress (as observed in attainment of feeding skills), and mother’s and
care provider’s beliefs within the context of the family will guide the infant’s feeding
experience and transition to the next phase in life.
Acknowledgment
The authors thank Tina Corbin for her tireless secretarial support in the preparation of
this manuscript.
References
1. Hamill P. V., Drizd T. A., Johnson C. L., et al. Am J Clin Nutr 32: 607; 1979.
2. Fomon S. J., Nelson S. E. Size and growth: In Nutrition of Normal Infants, CV Mosby, 1993, 36,
p. 155.
3. Butte N. F. Eur J Clin Nutr 50: 24S; 1996.
4. Health and Welfare Canada. Nutrition Recommendations. The report of the scientific review
committee, Ottawa, Canada: Supply and Services, 1990.
5. Dewey K. G., Lonnerdal B. J Pediatr Gastroenterol Nutr 2: 497; 1983.
6. Dewey K. G., Heinig M. J., Nommsen L. A., et al. J Pediatr 119: 538; 1991.
7. Whitehead R. G., Paul A. A., Cole T. J. Acta Paediatr Scand 299: 43S; 1982.
8. Kylberg H., Hofvander Y., Sjolin S. Acta Paediatr Scand 75: 932; 1986.
9. Persson L. A., Johansson E., Samuelson G. Human Nutrition — Applied Nutrition 38: 247; 1984.
10. Heinig M. J., Nommsen L. A., Peerson J. M., et al. Am J Clin Nutr 58: 152; 1993.
11. Zlotkin S. H., Anderson G. H. Pediatr Res 16: 65; 1982.
12. Pohlandt P. Acta Paediatr Scand 63: 801; 1974.
13. Gaull G. E., Rassin D. K., Raiha N. C., et al. J Pediatr 90: 348; 1977.
14. Rassin D. K., Gaull G. E., Jarvenpaa A. L., et al. Pediatrics 71: 179; 1983.
15. Jarvenpaa A. L., Rassin D. K., Raiha N. C., et al. Pediatrics 70: 221; 1982.
16. World Health Organization. Energy and protein requirements. WHO Technical Report Series
No. 742, Geneva, WHO. 98, 1985.
17. Fomon S. J., Haschke F., Ziegler E. E., Nelson S. E. Am J Clin Nutr 34(5): 1169S; 1982.
18. Wong W. W., Hachey D. L., Insull W., et al. J Lipid Res 34: 1403; 1993.
19. Bitman J., Wood L., Hamosh M., et al. Am J Clin Nutr 38: 300; 1983.
20. Harzer G., Haug M., Dieterich I., et al. Am J Clin Nutr 37: 612; 1983.
21. Hibberd C. M., Brooke O. G., Carter N. G., et al. Arch Dis Child 57: 658; 1982.
22. Jensen R. G. The Lipids of Human Milk. Boca Raton: CRC Press, 1989.
23. Prentice A., Prentice A. M., Whitehead R. G. Br J Nutr 45: 495; 1981.
24. Hachey D. L., Thomas M. R., Emken E. A., et al. J Lipid Res 28: 1185; 1987.
25. Hachey D. L., Silber G. H., Wong W. W., Garza C. Pediatr Res 25: 63; 1989.
26. Koletzko B., Thiel I., Abiodun P. O. Z Ernahrungwiss 30: 289; 1991.
27. Harris W. S., Conner W. E., Lindsey S. Am J Clin Nutr 40: 780; 1984.
28. Genzel-Boroviczeny O., Wahle J., Koletzko B. Eur J Paediatr 156: 142; 1997.
29. Joint FAO/WHO Codex Alimentarius Commission, 1984; Food and Drug Administration 1985;
Commission of European Communities, 1991.
30. Lifshitz F., Moses N. Am J Dis Child 143: 537; 1989.
31. Michaelsen K. F., Jorgensen M. H. Eur J Clin Nutr 49: 467; 1995.
2705_frame_C07 Page 239 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:15 PM
32. Bhatia J., Bucher C., Bunyapen C. Pediatr Ann 27: 525; 1998.
33. Dallman P. R., Siimes M. A., Stekel A. Am J Clin Nutr 33: 86; 1980.
34. Yip R. In Dietary Iron: Birth to Two Years. (Filer L. J. Jr., Ed): New York: Raven Press, 1989, pg 37.
35. Ferguson B. J., Skikne B. S., Simpson K. M., et al. J Lab Clin Med 119: 385; 1992.
36. Ziegler E. E., Fomon S. J., Nelson S. E., et al. J Pediatr 116: 11; 1990.
37. Fomon S. J., Ziegler E. E., Nelson S. E., et al. J Pediatr 98: 540; 1981.
38. Pizarro F., Yip R., Dallman P. R., et al. J Pediatr 118: 687; 1991.
39. Siimes M. A., Vuori E., Kuitunen P. Acta Paediatr Scand 68: 29; 1979.
40. Haschke F., Vanura H., Male C., et al. J Pediatr Gastroenterol Nutr 16: 151; 1993.
41. Lozoff B., Brittenham G. M., Viteri F. E., et al. J Pediatr 100: 351; 1982.
42. Lozoff B., Brittenham G. M., Wolf A. W., et al. Pediatrics 79: 981; 1987.
43. Lozoff B., Jiminez W., Wolf A. W. N Eng J Med 325: 687; 1991.
44. Walter T. In: Nutritional Anemias. (Fomon S. J., Zlotkin S., Eds) Nestle Nutrition Workshop
Series, 30. New York: Raven Press; 1990, pg 81.
45. Pollitt E. Ann Rev Nutr 13: 521; 1993.
46. Hambraeus L. Pediatr Clin N Am 24: 17; 1977.
47. Fomon S. J., Bier D. M., Mathews D. E., et al. J Pediatr 113: 515; 1988.
48. Cho F., Bhatia J., Rassin D. K. Nutrition 6: 449; 1990.
49. Lindblad B. S., Alfven G., Zetterstrom R. Acta Paediatr Scand 67: 659; 1978.
50. Rassin D. K. In: Protein Requirements in the Term Infant. (Barness L., Ed) Princeton: Excerpta
Medica: 1988, pg 3.
51. Goldman A. S., Cheda S., Keeny S. E., et al. Sem Perinatol 18: 495; 1994.
52. Hanson L. A., Ahlstedt S., Andersson B., et al. Pediatrics 75: 172; 1985.
53. Neville M. C., Keller R. P., Seacat J., et al. Am J Clin Nutr 40: 635; 1984.
54. Neuringer M., Conner W. E., Van Patten C., et al. J Clin Invest 73: 272; 1984.
55. Uauy R., Quan R., Gil A. J Nutr 124(8): 1436S; 1994.
56. Jyonouchi H. J Nutr 124(1): 138S; 1994.
57. Carver J. D. J Nutr 124(1): 144S; 1994.
58. Pickering L. K., Granoff D. M., Erickson J. R., et al. Pediatrics 101: 242; 1998.
59. Dewey K. G., Heinig M. J., Nommsen-Rivers L. A. J Pediatr 126: 696; 1995.
60. Wright A. L., Holberg C. J., Taussig L. M., et al. Arch Pediatr Adolesc Med 149: 758; 1995.
61. Kovar M. G., Serdula M. K., Marks J. S., et al. Pediatrics 74: 615; 1984.
62. Takala A. K., Eskola J., Palmgren J., et al. J Pediatr 115: 694: 1989.
63. Cochi S. L., Fleming D. W., Hightower A. W., et al. J Pediatr 108: 887; 1986.
64. Arnon S. S. Rev Infect Dis 6, 193S.
65. Pisacane A., Graziano L., Mazzarella G., et al. J Pediatr 120: 87; 1992.
66. Lucas A., Cole T. J. Lancet 336: 1519; 1990.
67. Goldfarb J. Clin Perinatol 20: 225; 1985.
68. Food and Drug Administration: Rules and regulations. Nutrient requirements for infant for-
mulas (21 CFR part 107), Fed Reg 50:45106, 1985.
69. American Academy of Pediatrics, Committee on Nutrition. Pediatrics 101: 148; 1998.
70. American Academy of Pediatrics, Committee on Nutrition. AAP News 8: 18; 1992.
71. Martinez G. A., Ryan A. S., Malec D. J. Am J Dis Child 139: 1010; 1985.
72. Anderson T. A., Ziegler E. E. In: Weaning, Why, What and When? ( Ballabriga A., Ray J., Eds)
Nestle Nutrition Workshop Series, 10, New York: Raven Press, 1987, pg 153.
73. Ballabriga A., Schmidt E. In: Weaning, Why, What and When? (Ballabriga A., Ray J., Eds) Nestle
Nutrition Workshop Series, 10, Raven Press, New York, 1987, pg 129.
74. Ahmad A. In: Weaning, Why, What and When? (Ballabriga A., Ray J., Eds) Nestle Nutrition
Workshop Series, 10, New York: Raven Press, 1987, pg 197.
75. Zumrawi F. Y., Min Y., Marshall T. Ann Human Biol 19: 165; 1992.
76. Healy M. J. R., Yang M., Tanner J. M., Zumrawi F. Y. In: Linear Growth Retardation in Less
Developed Countries. (Waterlow, J. C., Ed) New York: Raven Press, 41, 1988.
77. Nelson S. E., Rogers R. R., Ziegler E. E., et al. Early Hum Devel 19: 223; 1989.
78. Garza C., Frongillo E., Dewey K. G. Acta Paediatr 404: 4S; 1994.
2705_frame_C07 Page 240 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:15 PM
2705_frame_C08 Page 241 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:15 PM
8
Nutrition for Healthy Children and Adolescents
Ages 2 to 18 Years
0-8493-2705-9/01/$0.00+$1.50
© 2002 by CRC Press LLC 241
2705_frame_C08 Page 242 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:15 PM
TABLE 8.1
Recommended Levels for Individual Intakea for Children and Adolescents
Children Boys Girls
1–3 years 4–8 years 9–13 years 14–18 years 9–13 years 14–18 years
Calcium (mg/d) 500* 800* 1300* 1300* 1300* 1300*
Phosphorus (mg/d) 460 500 1250 1250 1250 1250
Magnesium (mg/d) 80 130 240 410 240 360
Vitamin D (µg/d)bc 5* 5* 5* 5* 5* 5*
Fluoride (mg/d) 0.7* 1* 2* 3* 2* 3*
Thiamin (mg/d) 0.5 0.5 0.9 1.2 0.9 1.0
Riboflavin (mg/d) 0.5 0.6 0.9 1.3 0.9 1.0
Niacin (mg/d)d 6 8 12 16 12 14
Vitamin B6 (mg/d) 0.5 0.6 1.0 1.3 1.0 1.2
Folate (µg/d)e,f 150 200 300 400 300 400
Vitamin B12 (µg/d) 0.9 1.2 1.8 2.4 1.8 2.4
Pantothenic acid (mg/d) 2* 3* 4* 5* 4* 5*
Biotin (µg/d) 8* 12* 20* 25* 20* 25*
Choline (mg/d)g 200* 250* 375* 550* 375* 400*
Vitamin C (mg/d) 15 25 45 75 45 65
Vitamin E (mg/d of α- 6 7 11 15 11 15
tocopherol)h
Selenium (µg/d) 20 30 40 55 40 55
Vitamin A (µg/d) 300 400 600 900 600 700
Vitamin K (µg/d) 30* 55* 60* 75* 60* 75*
Chromium (µg/d) 11* 15* 25* 35* 21* 24*
Copper (µg/d) 340 440 700 890 700 890
Iodine (µg/d) 90 90 120 150 120 150
Iron (mg/d)i 7 10 8 11 8 15
Manganese (mg/d) 1.2* 1.5* 1.9* 2.2* 1.6* 1.6*
Molybdenum (µg/d) 17 22 34 43 34 43
Zinc (mg/d) 3 5 8 8 11 9
a Recommended Dietary Allowances (RDAs) are presented in bold type and Adequate Intakes (AIs) in ordinary
type followed by an asterisk (*). RDAs and AIs may both be used as goals for individual intake. RDAs are
set to meet the needs of almost all (97-98%) individuals in a group. The AI for other life-stage and gender
groups is believed to cover needs of all individuals in the group, but lack of data or uncertainty in the data
prevent being able to specify with confidence the percentage of persons covered by this intake. Adapted from:
Food and Nutrition Board, Institute of Medicine, Dietary Reference Intakes for Calcium, Phosphorus, Magnesium,
Vitamin D, and Fluoride, National Academy Press, Washington, DC, 1997; Food and Nutrition Board, Institute
of Medicine, Dietary Reference Intakes for Thiamin, Riboflavin, Niacin, Vitamin B6, Folate, Vitamin B12, Pantothenic
Acid, Biotin, and Choline, National Academy Press, Washington, DC, 1998; Food and Nutrition Board, Institute
of Medicine, Dietary Reference Intakes for Vitamin C, Vitamin E, Selenium, and Carotenoids, National Academy
Press, Washington, DC, 2000; Food and Nutrition Board, Institute of Medicine, Dietary Reference Intakes for
Vitamin A, Vitamin K, Arsenic, Boron, Chromium, Copper, Iodine, Iron, Manganese, Molybdenum, Nickel, Silicon,
Vanadium, and Zinc, National Academy Press, Washington, DC, 2001.
b As cholecalciferol. 1 µg cholecalciferol = 40 IU vitamin D.
c In the absence of adequate exposure to sunlight.
d As niacin equivalents (NE). 1 mg niacin = 60 mg tryptophan.
e As dietary folate equivalent (DFE). 1 DFE = 1 µg food folate = 0.6 µg folic acid (from fortified food or
supplement) consumed with food = 0.5 µg synthetic (supplemental) folic acid taken on an empty stomach.
f In view of evidence linking folate intake with neural tube defects in the fetus, it is recommended that all
women capable of becoming pregnant consume 400 µg synthetic folic acid from fortified foods and/or
supplements in addition to intake of food folate from a varied diet.
g Although AIs have been set for choline, there are few data to assess whether a dietary supply of choline is
needed at all states of the life cycle, and it may be that the choline requirement can by met by endogenous
synthesis at some of these stages.
h DRIs for vitamin E are based on α-tocopherol only and do not include amounts obtained from the other seven
naturally occurring forms historically called vitamin E. RDAs and AIs apply only to intake of 2 R-stereoisomeric
forms of α-tocopherol from food, fortified food, and multivitamins.
i For girls under 14 years who have started to menstruate, one might advise an increased intake to approxi-
mately 2.5 mg/d to what would be advised for a girl of the same characteristics before menarche.
2705_frame_C08 Page 244 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:15 PM
TABLE 8.2
Tolerable Upper Intake Levelsa,b (ULs) for Children and Adolescents
1–3 years 4–8 years 9–13 years 14–18 years
Calcium (g/d) 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5
Phosphorus (g/d) 3 3 4 4
Magnesium (mg/d)c 65 110 350 350
Vitamin D (µg/d) 50 50 50 50
Fluoride (mg/d) 1.3 2.2 10 10
Niacin (mg/d)d 10 15 20 30
Vitamin B6 (mg/d) 30 40 60 80
Synthetic folic acid (µg/d)d 300 400 600 800
Choline (g/d) 1.0 1.0 2.0 3.0
Vitamin C (mg/d) 400 650 1200 1800
Vitamin E (mg/d α-tocopherol)e 200 300 600 800
Selenium (µg/d) 90 150 280 400
Vitamin A (µg/d performed A) 600 900 1700 2800
Copper (µg/d) 1000 3000 5000 8000
Iodine (µg/d) 200 300 600 900
Iron (mg/d) 40 40 40 45
Manganese (mg/d) 2 3 6 9
Molybdenum (µg/d) 300 600 1100 1700
Zinc (mg/d) 7 12 23 34
Boron (mg/d) 3 6 11 17
Nickel (mg/d soluble nickel salts) 0.2 0.3 0.6 1.0
Vanadium (mg/d)f
a UL = the maximum level of daily nutrient intake that is likely to pose no risk of adverse
effects. Unless otherwise specified, the UL represents total intake from food, water, and
supplements. Currently, ULs are not available for other nutrients. In the absence of ULs, extra
caution may be warranted in consuming levels above recommended intakes.
b Adapted from: Food and Nutrition Board, Institute of Medicine, Dietary Reference Intakes for
Calcium, Phosphorus, Magnesium, Vitamin D, and Fluoride, National Academy Press, Washing-
ton, DC, 1997; Food and Nutrition Board, Institute of Medicine, Dietary Reference Intakes for
Thiamin, Riboflavin, Niacin, Vitamin B6, Folate, Vitamin B12, Pantothenic Acid, Biotin, and Choline,
National Academy Press, Washington, DC, 1998; Food and Nutrition Board, Institute of
Medicine, Dietary Reference Intakes for Vitamin C, Vitamin E, Selenium, and Carotenoids, National
Academy Press, Washington, DC, 2000; Food and Nutrition Board, Institute of Medicine,
Dietary Reference Intakes for Vitamin A, Vitamin K, Arsenic, Boron, Chromium, Copper, Iodine, Iron,
Manganese, Molybdenum, Nickel, Silicon, Vanadium, and Zinc, National Academy Press, Wash-
ington, DC, 2001.
c The UL for magnesium represents intake from a pharmacological agent only and does not
include intake from food and water.
d The ULs for niacin and synthetic folic acid apply to forms obtained from supplements, fortified
foods, or a combination of the two.
e DRIs for vitamin E are based on α-tocopherol only and do not include amounts obtained from
the other seven naturally occurring forms historically called vitamin E. The ULs apply to any
form of supplementary α-tocopherol.
f The UL for adults is 1.8 mg/d of elemental vanadium. It was not possible to establish ULs
for children for vanadium, but the source of intake should be from food only.5
adverse effects increases as intake increases above the UL.2 Although the DRIs are based
on data, scientific judgment was required in setting all reference values because data
were often scanty or drawn from studies with limitations; this is especially true in
deriving DRIs for children and adolescents.2
In 1997, DRIs were published for calcium, phosphorus, magnesium, vitamin D, and
fluoride.2 In 1998, DRIs were published for thiamin, riboflavin, niacin, vitamin B6, folate,
vitamin B12, pantothenic acid, biotin, and choline.3 In 2000, DRIs were published for
vitamin C, vitamin E, and selenium.4 No DRIs were proposed for carotenoids, although
2705_frame_C08 Page 245 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:15 PM
TABLE 8.3
1989 Recommended Dietary Allowances (RDAs) for Children and
Adolescents for Nutrients without Dietary Reference Intakesa
Weightb Heightb Calories Protein
Category Age (years) (kg) (lb) (cm) (in) (kcal/day) (g/day) (g/kg)
Children 1–3 13 29 90 35 1300 16 1.2
4–6 20 44 112 44 1800 24 1.1
7–10 28 62 132 52 2000 28 1.0
Boys 11–14 45 99 157 62 2500 45 1.0
15–18 66 145 176 69 3000 59 0.9
Girls 11–14 46 101 157 62 2200 46 1.0
15–18 55 120 163 64 2200 44 0.8
a Adapted from Food and Nutrition Board, National Research Council, Recom-
mended Dietary Allowances, 10th ed, National Academy Press, Washington, DC,
1989. The RDAs, expressed as average daily intakes over time, are intended
to provide for individual variations among most normal persons as they live
in the U.S. under usual environmental stresses. Diets should be based on a
variety of common foods in order to provide other nutrients for which human
requirements have been less well defined. The RDAs are designed for the
maintenance of good nutrition of practically all healthy people in the U.S.
b The median weights and heights of those under 19 years of age were taken
from Hamill, P. V. V., Drizd, T. A., Johnson, R. B., et al., Am J Clin Nutr, 32,
607, 1979. The use of these figures does not imply that the height-to-weight
ratios are ideal.
Energy
Daily energy needs depend on three major factors: energy expended when at rest, during
physical activity, and as a result of thermogenesis. Resting energy expenditure is the largest
of the three factors unless the physical activity level is very high; thermogenesis is the
smallest. In turn, these factors are affected by individual variables which include age, sex,
body size and composition, genetics, energy intake, physiologic state (e.g., growth, preg-
nancy, lactation), coexisting pathological conditions, and ambient temperature.
Recommended energy allowances for children and adolescents from the 1989 RDAs are
stipulated as kilocalories (kcal)/day based on reference weights for children ages 1 to 10
years in three age groups for both genders combined, and for adolescents ages 11 to 18
years in two age groups for boys and girls separately (see Table 8.3). According to Heald
and Gong, the best way to calculate individual energy requirements for adolescents may
be to use kcal/centimeter (cm) of height; thus, boys 11 to 14 years of age need 15.9 kcal/
cm, boys 15 to 18 years of age need 17.0 kcal/cm, girls 11 to 14 years of age need 14.0
kcal/cm, and girls 15 to 18 years of age need 13.5 kcal/cm.6 In Table 8.4, energy require-
ments for children and adolescents from Pellett7 are stipulated in terms of kcal/day (mean
2705_frame_C08 Page 246 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:15 PM
TABLE 8.4
Energy Requirements for Children and Adolescentsa
Estimated Energy Allowance
Age Weightb Height By Time By Weight By Height
(years) (kg) (cm) (kcal/d (range)) (kcal/kg) (kcal/cm)
Children
Boys
Girls
and range), kcal/kilogram (kg), and kcal/cm for children ages 1 to 9.9 years in five groups
for both genders combined, for adolescent boys ages 10 to 17.9 years in two groups, and
for adolescent girls ages 10 to 17.9 years in two groups.
Physical activity patterns are quite variable among children and adolescents, and there
is considerable variability in both the timing and magnitude of the growth spurt. Thus,
recommended energy allowances for children and adolescents assume a wide range within
which energy can be adjusted individually to account for body weight, activity, and rate
of growth. An accepted and practical method for assessing the adequacy of a child’s or
adolescent’s energy intake is to monitor growth by tracking height and weight on growth
charts developed by the National Center for Health Statistics; these charts are provided
in Section 32.
Protein
Protein is essential for growth, development, and maintenance of the body; it also provides
energy. Protein yields 4 kcal/gram (g). Food sources of protein include meat, fish, poultry,
milk, cheese, yogurt, dried beans, peanut butter, nuts, and grain products. Animal proteins
are called “high-quality” or “complete” because they contain all the essential amino acids
in the proportions needed by humans. Vegetable proteins, with the exception of soybeans,
are called “low-quality” or “incomplete” because they have low levels of one or more
essential amino acids. A vegetable protein may be paired with another vegetable protein
or with a small amount of animal protein to provide adequate amounts of all the essential
amino acids. For example, black-eyed peas can be paired with rice, peanut butter with
wheat bread, pasta with cheese, or cereal with milk.
2705_frame_C08 Page 247 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:15 PM
Proteins in the body are continuously being degraded and resynthesized. Because the
process is not entirely efficient and some amino acids are lost, a continuous supply of
amino acids is needed to replace these losses, even after growth has stopped. The primary
factor that influences protein needs is energy intake because when energy intake is insuf-
ficient, protein is used for energy. Thus, all protein recommendations are based on the
assumption that energy needs are adequately met. In addition, protein recommendations
are based on high-quality protein intakes; appropriate corrections must be made for diets
which customarily provide low-quality proteins.
Table 8.3 provides the 1989 RDAs for high-quality protein in g/day and g/kg of body
weight for children and adolescents. As Table 8.3 indicates, requirements slowly decline
relative to weight during the preschool and elementary school-age years. During the
adolescent years, protein recommendations do not emphasize the growth spurt because
it is small relative to body size. A 14-year-old adolescent who weighs 54 kilograms (kg)
(118.8 pounds) needs 54 g of protein each day; assuming that energy needs are met, this
protein need is met by eating a hamburger (3-ounce meat patty on a bun) and two slices
of cheese pizza.
According to Heald and Gong,6 the most useful method for determining protein needs
for adolescents is to use the 1989 RDAs for protein as they relate to height. For adolescent
boys ages 11-14 and 15-18 years, the protein daily recommendation based on height is
0.29 and 0.34 g/cm height, respectively. For adolescent girls ages 11-14 and 15-18 years,
the protein daily recommendation based on height is 0.29-0.27 g/cm height, respectively.6
Carbohydrates
Children and adolescents should get 55-60% of their daily calories from carbohydrates.8
Complex carbohydrates (starchy foods such as pasta, breads, cereals, rice, and legumes)
should provide the majority of kcal from carbohydrates, and simple carbohydrates (nat-
urally occurring sugars in fruits and vegetables) should provide the rest. Carbohydrate
yields 4 kcal/g. A 4- to 6-year-old child who needs 1800 kcal/day would need about 990
to 1080 kcal (or 248 to 270 g) from carbohydrates daily. An 11- to 14-year-old adolescent
who needs 2500 kcal/day would need about 1375 to 1500 kcal (or 344 to 375 g) from
carbohydrates daily.
These recommendations are consistent with those of the Dietary Guidelines for Americans,
which were designed to provide advice for healthy Americans age two years and over
2705_frame_C08 Page 248 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:15 PM
about food choices that promote health and prevent disease.10 A precise percentage of
dietary fat intake that supports normal growth and development while maximally reduc-
ing atherosclerosis risk is unknown. Thus, a range of appropriate values averaged over
several days for children and adolescents is recommended based on the available scientific
information. More information regarding the safety of low-fat diets for children is found
in “Low Fat Diets” in this section.
Fat yields 9 kcal/g. Dietary sources of fat include oils, margarine, butter, fried foods,
egg yolks, mayonnaise, salad dressings, ice cream, hard cheese, cream cheese, nuts, fatty
meats, chips, and doughnuts. Table 8.5 provides the fat, saturated fat, and cholesterol
content of various foods.
TABLE 8.5
Total Fat, Saturated Fat, and Cholesterol Content of Various Foods
Total Saturated Cholesterol
Food Amount Fat (g) Fat (g) (mg) Kcal
Almonds, roasted, salted 1 oz 15.3 1.1 0 172
Bacon 2 slices 6.3 2.2 11 73
Bread, white 1 slice 0.9 0.0 0 64
Butter 1t 4.1 2.5 11 36
Cheese, American 1 oz 8.9 5.6 27 106
Cheese, cheddar 1 oz 9.4 6.0 30 114
Chicken breast with skin, roasted 1/2 breast 7.6 2.2 83 193
Chicken breast without skin, roasted 1/2 breast 3.1 0.9 73 142
Coconut, dried, sweetened, flaked 1/3 c 8.1 7.2 0 115
Corn oil 1t 13.6 1.7 0 120
Cottonseed oil 1t 13.6 3.5 0 120
Egg, whole, boiled 1 large 5.3 1.6 213 77
Egg, white only, boiled 1 large 0.0 0.0 0 17
Egg, yolk only, boiled 1 large 5.1 1.6 213 59
Fish, flounder or sole, cooked 3 oz 1.3 0.3 58 99
Ground beef, regular, broiled 3.5 oz 19.5 7.7 101 292
Ground beef, extra lean, broiled 3.5 oz 15.8 6.2 99 265
Ice cream, vanilla, 10% fat 1/2 c 7.3 4.5 29 132
Ice milk, vanilla 1/2 c 2.8 1.7 9 92
Lard (pork fat) 1t 12.8 5.0 12 115
Margarine, corn & hydrogenated corn 1t 3.8 0.7 0 34
Margarine, liquid oil 1t 3.8 0.7 0 34
Milk, whole 1 cup 8.2 5.1 33 150
Milk, 2% 1 cup 4.7 2.9 18 121
Milk, 1% 1 cup 2.6 1.6 10 102
Milk, skim 1 cup 0.4 0.3 4 86
Olive oil 1t 13.5 1.8 0 119
Peanut butter 2t 16.0 3.1 0 188
Peanuts, dry roasted 1 oz 13.9 1.9 0 164
Pecans, raw 1 oz 19.0 2.0 0 190
Pork, lean, roasted 3.5 oz 4.8 1.7 93 166
Safflower oil 1t 13.6 1.2 0 120
Shrimp, boiled 3 oz 0.9 0.2 166 84
Soybean oil 1t 13.6 2.0 0 120
Tuna fish, oil pack, drained 3 oz 7.0 1.3 15 169
Tuna fish, water pack, drained 3 oz 0.7 0.2 25 99
Turkey breast with skin, roasted 3.5 oz 3.5 1.0 42 126
Yogurt, frozen, vanilla, soft serve 1/2 c 4.0 2.5 2 114
Adapted from Bowes, A. D. P., Bowes and Church’s Food Values of Portions Commonly Used, 16 ed,
revised by Pennington, J. A. T., J. B. Lippincott Company, Philadelphia, 1994.
2705_frame_C08 Page 249 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:15 PM
TABLE 8.6
Fiber Content of Foods that Most U.S. Children and
Adolescents Will Eat
Approximate grams of
Food source Serving size dietary fiber
Baked Beans 1c 13
Chili with beans 1c 7
Refried beans 4 oz 6
Brown rice 1c 4
Peanuts (dry roasted) 2 oz 4
Strawberries 1c 4
Whole-wheat bread 2 slices 4
Potato, baked, with skin 1 medium 3.5
Apple 1 medium 3
Banana 1 large 3
Carrot (raw) 1 medium 3
Corn 1/2 c 3
Kiwi 1 large 3
Raisins 1/3 c 3
Whole-grain crackers 1/2 oz 2–3
Cereal 1c 2–3a
Applesauce 1/2 c 2
Broccoli 1/2 c 2
Orange 1 medium 2
Peanut butter 2 Tbsp 2
a Dietary fiber content of cereal varies widely. Best fiber choice for
children has 3+ g per cup.
b Adapted from Williams, C. L., J Am Diet Assoc, 95, 1140, 1995.
Fiber
Fiber has important health benefits such as promoting normal laxation which can be a
problem for many children. In addition, fiber may help reduce the risk of certain chronic
diseases of adulthood such as some cancers, cardiovascular disease, and diabetes. The
American Health Foundation recommends that children ages two years and older consume
a minimal amount of fiber equal to their age plus 5 g/day, and a maximum amount of
age plus 10 g/day, to achieve intakes of a maximum of 35 g/day after the age of 20 years.11,12
This range is thought to be safe even if intake of some vitamins and minerals is marginal.
According to the American Academy of Pediatrics,13 a reasonable daily fiber intake for
children is 0.5 g/kg of body weight to a maximum of 35 g/day. The two recommendations
are similar for children up to age 10 years, but the age plus 5 recommendation is lower
for older adolescents than the recommendation for 0.5 g/kg of body weight.
Fiber intake should be increased gradually through consumption of a variety of fruits,
vegetables, legumes, cereals, and other whole-grain products such as breads and crackers.
Fiber supplements for children are not recommended as a means of meeting dietary fiber
goals.11 Increased intakes of dietary fiber should be accompanied by increased intakes of
water because dietary fiber increases water retention in the colon, which leads to bulkier
and softer stools.11 For most children and adolescents, dietary fiber goals can be met if the
daily diet includes two servings of vegetables, three servings of fruits, two slices of whole
wheat bread, and a serving of breakfast cereal containing three or more grams of fiber.12
Table 8.6 provides a list of foods containing fiber that most U.S. children and adolescents
will eat.
2705_frame_C08 Page 250 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:15 PM
High-fiber diets do have the potential for reduced energy density, reduced kcal intake,
and poor growth, especially in very young children. Furthermore, high-fiber diets may
reduce the bioavailability of minerals such as iron, calcium, and zinc. However, the
potential health benefits of a moderate increase in dietary fiber intake in childhood are
thought to outweigh the potential risks significantly, especially in highly industrialized
countries such as the U.S.11
Folate
Folate is important during periods of increased cell replication and growth due to its role
in DNA synthesis and the formation of healthy red blood cells; thus, the 1998 RDAs for
folate are 1.5 times greater for children age 9 to 13 years than for children age 4 to 8 years
(see Table 8.1). There is strong evidence that the risk of having a fetus with a neural tube
defect decreases with increased intake of folate during the periconceptional period; thus,
it is recommended that all women capable of becoming pregnant take 400 µg of synthetic
folic acid daily, from fortified foods and/or supplements, in addition to consuming food
folate from a varied diet. Folate fortification became mandatory for enriched grain products
in the U.S. effective January 1, 1998. Besides fortified grains and cereals, other food sources
of folate include leafy green vegetables, orange juice, liver, cantalope, yeast, and seeds.3
Calcium
Over 99% of total body calcium is found in teeth and bones. Approximately 45% of adult
skeletal mass is accounted for by skeletal growth during adolescence; thus, achieving and
maintaining adequate calcium intake during adolescence is necessary for the development
of a maximal peak bone mass which may help reduce the risk of osteoporosis later in
adulthood.
2705_frame_C08 Page 251 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:15 PM
TABLE 8.7
Approximate Calcium Content for One Serving of Various Foods
Approximate Calcium Content
Food Serving Size (mg)
Cheese (Swiss) 1.5 oz 405
Cheese (cheddar or jack) 1.5 oz 310
Milk (whole, 1%, 2%, or buttermilk) 1c 300
Yogurt 8 oz 300
Cheese (part skim mozzarella) 1.5 oz 280
Tofu, raw, firm 1/2 c 260
Cheese (American) 2 oz 250
Calcium-fortified orange juice 6 oz 200
Canned sardines (with bones) 2 oz 180
Canned salmon (with bones) 3 oz 180
Cooked greens (collards) 1/2 c 180
Pudding 1/2 c 150
Spinach (cooked) 1/2 c 120*
Frozen yogurt (vanilla, soft serve) 1/2 c 100
Ice cream (vanilla, 10% fat) 1/2 c 85
Cooked greens (mustard, kale) 1/2 c 80
Cottage cheese 1/2 c 75
Spinach (raw) 1c 60*
Orange 1 medium 55
Beans, canned (baked, pinto, or navy) 1/2 c 50
Sweet potatoes (mashed) 1/2 c 40
Broccoli (cooked) 1/2 c 35
Broccoli (raw) 1/2 c 20
* The calcium from spinach is essentially nonbioavailable.
Adapted from Bowes, A. D. P., Bowes and Church’s Food Values of Portions Commonly Used,
16th ed, revised by Pennington, J. A. T., J. B. Lippincott Company, Philadelphia, 1994.
The calcium AIs for adolescents are higher than for children because from age 9 through
18 years (see Table 8.1), calcium retention increases to a peak and then declines. However,
the calcium AIs remain the same for adolescents from age 9 to 18 years because calcium
absorption efficiency decreases. Thus, during this developmental period, measures of
sexual maturity are better predictors of calcium retention than chronological age.2
Major food sources of calcium include milk, yogurt, cheese, and green leafy vegetables.
Calcium-fortified orange juice is also an excellent source of calcium, as is tofu. Table 8.7
contains approximate calcium contents for one serving of various common foods. Vitamin
D (discussed previously in this section) is needed for the body to absorb calcium.
The calcium content of food is generally of greater importance than bioavailability when
evaluating food sources of calcium. The efficiency of calcium absorption is fairly similar
from most foods, including milk and milk products and grains, which are major food
sources of calcium in North American diets. Calcium may be poorly absorbed from foods
such as spinach, beans, sweet potatoes, and rhubarb which are rich in oxalic acid, and
from unleavened bread, raw beans, seeds, nuts and grains, and soy isolates which are rich
in phytic acid. Calcium absorption is relatively high from soybeans, although they contain
large amounts of phytic acid. Compared to calcium absorption from milk, calcium absorp-
tion from spinach is about one tenth, and from dried beans is about half.2
When developing the AIs for calcium, the Food and Nutrition Board of the Institute of
Medicine reviewed concerns regarding factors that affect the calcium requirement.2 For
example, they discussed racial differences in calcium metabolism, that sodium and calcium
excretion are linked in the proximal renal tubule and that many commonly consumed
processed foods are high in sodium, that protein increases urinary calcium excretion, that
2705_frame_C08 Page 252 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:15 PM
caffeine has a modest negative impact on calcium retention, that calcium bioavailability
is reduced in vegetarian diets due to the high oxalate and phytate content, and that exercise
and calcium both influence bone mass. However, the Board concluded that available
evidence did not warrant different calcium intake requirements for individuals according
to their race, sodium consumption, protein intake, caffeine intake, level of physical activity,
or for individuals who consume a vegetarian diet.2
Children and adolescents (and adults) with lactose intolerance develop symptoms of
diarrhea and bloating after ingesting large doses of lactose such as the amount present in
a quart of milk (~46 g). People who generally are lactose digesters include Northern
Europeans, Finns, Hungarians, probably Mongols, the Fulani and Tussi tribes of Africa,
and the Punjabi of India; the remainder of the world’s population are lactose nondigest-
ers.14 However, as digesters intermix reproductively with nondigesters, the rate of lactose
malabsorption falls.14 In general, evidence for lactose malabsorption as a clinical problem
is not manifest until after five to seven years of age, although this age can vary.14 Individ-
uals with lactose intolerance can increase their tolerance to dairy products by drinking
smaller doses of milk (such as eight ounces), or by ingesting fermented products such as
yogurt, hard cheeses, cottage cheese, and acidophilus milk.14 In addition, lactose-free dairy
products are available. Although lactose intolerance may influence intake, lactose-intol-
erant individuals absorb calcium normally from milk; thus, there is no evidence to suggest
that it influences the calcium requirement.2
Iron
According to the American Academy of Pediatrics,15 iron deficiency is the most common
nutritional deficiency in the U.S. Children aged one to two years are the most susceptible
to iron deficiency due to increased iron needs related to rapid growth during the first
two years of life and a relatively low iron content in most infant diets when iron is not
added by supplementation or fortification. Children age 3 to 11 years are at less risk for
iron deficiency until the rapid growth of puberty. Preadolescent school-age children who
consume a strict vegetarian diet are at greater risk for iron deficiency anemia. Adolescent
boys are at risk for iron deficiency anemia during their peak growth period when iron
stores may not meet the demand of rapid growth; however, the iron deficiency anemia
generally corrects itself after the growth spurt. Adolescent girls are at greater risk for
iron deficiency anemia due to blood losses during menstruation. A major consequence
of iron deficiency is that significant iron deficiency adversely affects child development
and behavior. Furthermore, iron deficiency leads to enhanced lead absorption, and
childhood lead poisoning is a well-documented cause of neurologic and developmental
deficits. These consequences, along with evidence that dietary intake during infancy is
a strong determinant of iron status for older infants and younger children, emphasize
the importance of prevention. Significant improvements have been made in the iron
nutritional status of infants and young children in the U.S. during the past two decades,
perhaps because during this same time frame, several changes were made in infant
feeding patterns.15 These changes included increased dietary iron content or iron bio-
availability, increased incidence of breastfeeding, increased use of iron-fortified formula,
and reduced use of whole milk and low-iron formula during the first year of life.15
Dietary iron is classified as “heme” or “non-heme” iron. Heme iron is found in foods
from animals such as meat, fish, and poultry. Non-heme iron is provided by plants; good
sources include dark-green leafy vegetables, tofu, lentils, white beans, dried fruits, and
iron-fortified breads and cereals. On average, healthy people absorb about 5 to 10% of
the iron consumed, and people who are iron deficient absorb about 10 to 20%. Heme iron
is more easily absorbed than non-heme iron. About 20% of heme iron consumed is
2705_frame_C08 Page 253 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:15 PM
absorbed regardless of how it is prepared and served; however, the absorption rate of
non-heme iron can be increased by eating foods with non-heme iron with either meat,
foods rich in vitamin C, or foods that contain some heme iron at the same meal. Non-
heme iron absorption can be hindered by as much as 50% when tannins, phytates, and
calcium (which are found in foods such as tea, bran, and milk, respectively) are eaten at
the same meal.
The RDAs for iron for children and adolescents are included in Table 8.1. Because the
amount of iron available in the American diet is estimated to be about 5 to 7 mg/1000
kcal, it may be difficult for adolescent girls to obtain 15 mg of iron from dietary sources
alone if their caloric intake is between 2000 and 2400 kcal/day. Groups of adolescents at
special risk of iron deficiency include 1) older adolescent girls due to their increased iron
need and their low dietary intake, 2) pregnant adolescents, and 3) girl athletes such as
runners who may lose iron through occult gastrointestinal bleeding.
The Committee on the Prevention, Detection, and Management of Iron Deficiency Ane-
mia Among U.S. Children and Women of Childbearing Age was established under the
Food and Nutrition Board of the Institute of Medicine; its recommended guidelines were
published in 1993.16 The committee concluded that iron enrichment and fortification of
the U.S. food supply should remain at current levels rather than increasing or decreasing
the levels. Furthermore, it was recommended that dietary sources of iron be consumed
instead of supplemental sources when possible. Iron supplements should be kept out of
reach of children because iron is a very common cause of poisoning in children.16
Zinc
Zinc is needed for protein synthesis, wound healing, and sexual maturation; thus, zinc is
especially important during adolescence due to the rapid rate of growth and sexual
maturation.6 (See Table 8.1 for the RDAs for zinc for children and adolescents.) Adolescents
undergoing rapid growth are at risk for inadequate zinc levels, and should be encouraged
to include zinc-rich foods in their daily diet. Foods high in zinc include red meats, certain
seafood, and whole grains; many breakfast cereals are fortified with zinc. The bioavail-
ability of zinc in foods varies widely. Zinc from whole grain products is less available
than zinc from meat, liver, eggs, and seafood (especially oysters). Furthermore, consump-
tion of phytate-rich foods limits absorption and maintenance of zinc balance.5
Guide P Y R A M I D
F O O D
A Daily Guide for
2-to 6-Year-Olds
January 2000
Program Aid 1651
W H AT C O U N T S A S O N E S E R V I N G ?
GRAIN GROUP FRUIT GROUP MEAT GROUP
1 slice of bread 1 piece of fruit or melon wedge 2 to 3 ounces of cooked lean
1/2 cup of cooked rice or pasta 3/4 cup of juice meat, poultry, or fish.
FOOD IS FUN and learning about food 1/2 cup of cooked cereal
TABLE 8.8
Changes Made in the New Food Guide Pyramid for Young Children
• The food groups have shorter names.
• A single number of servings is given for each food group rather than a range of servings.
• Foods are drawn in a realistic style.
• Foods are illustrated in single serving portions when possible.
• Foods included are those commonly eaten by young children such as fruit juice, green beans, breads, cereals,
and pasta. (Although the baked potato is not the most commonly served form of potato, it is illustrated to
encourage children to consume a lower fat version of potato. Also, dark-green leafy vegetables and whole-
grain products are illustrated to encourage children to eat them more often.)
• Abstract symbols for fat and added sugars in the original pyramid have been eliminated.
• The tip of the pyramid has drawings of food items rather than symbols.
• The pyramid is surrounded with illustrations of children engaged in active pursuits, to show the importance
of physical activity.
From Tips for Using the Food Guide Pyramid for Young Children 2 to 6 Years Old, USDA, Center for Nutrition Policy
and Promotion, Washington, DC, 1999, Program Aid 1647.
A booklet entitled Tips for Using the Food Guide Pyramid for Young Children 2 to 6 Years Old
was developed to go along with the new pyramid.19 It includes tips to encourage healthful
eating, basic information about the new pyramid, “child-size” serving sizes, lists of foods
by group to encourage children to eat a variety of foods, suggested kitchen activities for
parents to do with children, snack and meal planning ideas, a chart to track foods eaten
over several days, and “hands-on” food activities for home or child care centers.
Both the original and the new pyramid show how adults, adolescents, and children can
make food choices for a healthful diet as described in the Dietary Guidelines for Americans.10
The five food groups in the pyramid include grains, vegetables, fruits, milk, and meat.
Each group provides some, but not all, of nutrients and energy that children need. No
one food group is more important than another. The grain group forms the base of the
pyramid because the largest number of servings needed each day comes from this group.
Grain products provide vitamins, minerals, complex carbohydrates, and dietary fiber.
Foods from the fruit and vegetable groups provide vitamins, minerals, and dietary fiber.
Foods from the milk group provide calcium. Foods from the meat group (meat, poultry,
fish, eggs, dry beans/peas, and peanut butter) provide protein, iron, and zinc. The small
tip of the pyramid shows fats and sweets (e.g., salad dressing, cream, butter, margarine,
soft drinks, and candy); these foods contain kcal but few vitamins and minerals.
Table 8.9 contains young children’s serving sizes by food group, along with the number
of servings needed from each food group each day. Two- to three-year-olds need the same
variety of foods as four- to six-year-olds but fewer kcal, so offer them smaller amounts
(about 2/3 serving). The one exception is that two- to six-year-olds need a total of two
servings from the milk group each day. Offer children a variety of foods from the five
food groups, and let children decide how much to eat. Table 8.10 contains a sample meal
and snack plan according to food group for one day for four- to six-year-old children.
TABLE 8.9
Young Children’s Serving Sizes by Food Group
For this amount of food … Count this many milk group servings
1 cup milk or 1 cup soy milk (calcium fortified) 1
1/2 cup milk 1/2
1 cup yogurt (8 ounces) 1
1.5 ounces natural cheese 1
2 ounces processed cheese 1
1 string cheese (1 ounce) 2/3
1/2 cup cottage cheese 1/4
1/2 cup ice cream 1/3
1/2 cup frozen yogurt or 1/2 cup pudding 1/2
2705_frame_C08 Page 257 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:15 PM
household members were asked to provide intake information. Each individual provided
three consecutive days of dietary data which consisted of one 24-hour recall and a two-
day food record. A knowledgeable adult (usually the primary meal planner/preparer)
reported the food intakes of household members younger than 12 years.20
Data from the 1989–1991 CSFII have been analyzed numerous ways to provide insight
into what children and adolescents are eating. For example, data were analyzed to deter-
mine dietary sources of nutrients among 4008 U.S. children age 2 to 18 years.21 Results
indicated that fortified foods (e.g., ready-to-eat cereals) were influential contributors of
many vitamins and minerals. Furthermore, low nutrient-dense foods were major contrib-
utors of energy, fats, and carbohydrate, which compromises intakes of more nutrient-dense
foods, and may impede compliance with current dietary guidance.
Data from CSFII 1989–1991 were also analyzed to determine fruit and vegetable con-
sumption among 3148 U.S. children age 2 to 18 years.22 Results indicated that only one in
five children met the recommendation of consuming five or more servings of fruits and
vegetables per day. Intakes of all fruits and of dark green and/or deep yellow vegetables
were very low compared with recommendations. Furthermore, almost one-fourth of all
vegetables consumed by children and adolescents were french fries.
Finally, data from the CSFII 1989–1991 were analyzed to determine what percentage of
children ages 4-6 (n = 603) and 7-10 (n = 782) met the American Health Foundation’s age
plus 5 recommendation for fiber,11,12 and what the leading contributors to total dietary
fiber intake were.23 Results indicated that only 45% of 4- to 6-year-olds and 32% of 7- to
10-year-olds met the age plus 5 rule. Children who met the rule did so by consuming
significantly more high- and low-fiber breads and cereals, fruits, vegetables, legumes, nuts,
and seeds. Furthermore, children who met the rule had significantly higher energy-
adjusted intakes of vitamins A and E, folate, magnesium, and iron compared to children
with low fiber intakes who had significantly higher energy-adjusted intakes of fat and
cholesterol. Surprisingly, low-fiber breads and cereals provided 21 and 19% of total dietary
fiber for 4- to 6-year-olds and 7- to 10-year-olds, respectively, whereas high-fiber breads
and cereals provided only 6% of total dietary fiber for both age groups. Conclusions from
these results include that substituting high-fiber breads and cereals for low-fiber ones
would increase children’s fiber intakes and should be relatively easy to accomplish.23
2705_frame_C08 Page 258 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:15 PM
TABLE 8.10
Sample Meal and Snack Plan according to Food Group for One Day
for Four- to Six-Year-Old Children (Offer two- to three-year-old
children the same variety but smaller portions.)
Grain Vegetable Fruit Milk Meat
Breakfast
Mid-Morning Snack
Lunch
Mid-Afternoon Snack
Animal crackers, 9 1
Peanut butter, 2 Tbsp 1 oz
Cold water, 1/2 cup
Dinner
Chicken, 2 oz 2 oz
Baked potato, 1 medium 1
Broccoli, 1/2 cup 1
Milk, 1/2 cup 1/2
Evening Snack
through in-person interviews.20 Proxy interviews were conducted routinely for subjects
under 6 years of age, and children 6 to 11 years of age were asked to describe their own
food intake assisted by an adult household member (referred to as the assistant). The
preferred proxy or assistant was the person responsible for preparing the subject’s
meals.24
To determine how the dietary intake of children and adolescents compared with nutri-
tion recommendations, the Healthy Eating Index (HEI) was used to examine the diets of
5354 American children ages 2 to 18 from USDA’s 1994–1996 CSFII.25 The HEI is computed
on a regular basis by USDA as a summary measure of people’s diet quality. It consists of
10 components, each representing different aspects of a healthful diet. Components 1 to
5 measure the degree to which a person’s diet conforms to USDA’s Food Guide Pyramid
serving recommendations for the five major food groups: grains, vegetables, fruits, milk,
and meat/meat alternatives. Components 6 and 7 measure total fat and saturated fat
consumption, respectively, as percentages of total kcal intake. Components 8 and 9 mea-
sure total cholesterol and sodium intake, respectively. Component 10 measures the degree
of variety in a person’s diet. Each component has a maximum score of ten and a minimum
score of zero. High component scores indicate intakes close to recommended ranges or
amounts; low component scores indicate less compliance with recommended ranges or
amounts. The maximum combined score for the 10 components is 100. An HEI score above
80 implies a good diet, a score between 51 and 80 implies a diet that needs improvement,
and a score less than 51 implies a poor diet.25
Results indicate that most children have a diet that is poor or needs improvement. As
children get older, their overall HEI score declines; thus, the percentage of children with
a diet that needs improvement or is poor increases, and the percentage of children with
a good diet declines. For children ages 2 to 3, 35% have a good diet, and 5% have a poor
diet. For boys 15 to 18 years old, only 6% have a good diet, and 21% have a poor diet.
The decline in diet quality begins between the 2-3 and 4-6 age groups, with the percentage
of children having a good diet falling from 35 to 16%, and the percentage having a diet
that needs improvement rising from 60 to 75%. The decline continues between the 7-10
and 11-14 age groups, with the percentage of children having a good diet falling from 14
to 7%. As indicated by the HEI component scores in Table 8.11, the decline in the quality
of children’s diets as they get older is linked to declines in their fruit and milk consumption.
Fifty-three percent of children ages 2 to 3 meet the recommendation for fruit compared
to only 11 to 12% of children ages 15 to 18. Although 44% of children ages 2 to 3 meet the
recommendation for milk, only 12 and 28% of girls and boys, respectively, ages 15 to 18,
do so. Except for cholesterol and variety to a smaller extent, most children do not meet
most recommendations.25
Further analyses of data from the 1994–1996 CSFII indicated that the quality of a child’s
diet is related to the income of his or her family.26 As indicated in Table 8.12, poor children
are less likely than nonpoor children to have a diet rated as good. For children ages 2-5,
19% of those in a poor household had a good diet compared to 28% of those in a nonpoor
household.
Data from the 1994–1996 CSFII were also analyzed to determine whether carbonated
soft drink consumption was associated with consumption of milk, fruit juice, and the
nutrients concentrated in these beverages among children and adolescents age 2-18 years
(n = 1810).27 Results indicated that adolescents (13-18 years) were more likely to consume
soft drinks than preschool-age children (2-5 years) and school-age children (6-12 years).
Among preschool-age children, school-age children, and adolescents, 49.5, 35.9, and 17.5%,
respectively, did not consume any soft drinks during the two days of dietary recall;
furthermore, the majority of children in each age category were nonconsumers of diet soft
2705_frame_C08 Page 260 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:15 PM
TABLE 8.11
Healthy Eating Index (HEI): Overall and Component Mean Scores for Children, 1994–1996a,b
Children Children Children Girls Boys Girls Boys
Age (years) 2–3 4–6 7–10 11–14 11–14 15–18 15–18
Overall HEI Score 73.8 67.8 66.6 63.5 62.2 60.9 60.7
1. Grains 8.3 7.2 7.6 6.7 7.2 6.3 7.5
(54) (27) (31) (16) (29) (17) (34)
2. Vegetables 5.9 4.9 5.1 5.5 5.4 5.8 6.3
(31) (16) (20) (24) (23) (26) (35)
3. Fruits 7.0 5.3 4.3 3.9 3.5 3.1 2.8
(53) (29) (18) (14) (9) (12) (11)
4. Milk 7.2 7.4 7.6 5.2 6.2 4.2 6.1
(44) (44) (49) (15) (27) (12) (28)
5. Meat 6.3 5.3 5.5 5.7 6.5 5.8 6.9
(28) (14) (17) (15) (28) (21) (36)
6. Total fat 7.4 7.3 7.2 7.2 6.8 7.1 6.8
(40) (38) (35) (37) (33) (38) (34)
7. Saturated fat 5.4 5.6 5.7 5.8 5.7 6.6 6.0
(27) (28) (28) (31) (32) (42) (35)
8. Cholesterol 9.0 8.9 8.7 8.5 7.6 8.4 6.7
(83) (83) (80) (78) (69) (77) (58)
9. Sodium 8.8 8.1 6.8 7.1 5.2 6.9 3.7
(64) (53) (34) (39) (21) (37) (15)
10. Variety 8.4 7.9 8.1 7.8 8.1 6.7 7.8
(64) (53) (54) (51) (58) (37) (51)
a Parentheses contain % of children meeting dietary recommendations for each component.
b From Report Card on the Diet Quality of Children. Nutrition Insights, Insight 9, October, 1998, issued by the
Center for Nutrition Policy and Promotion, USDA, http://www.usda.gov/cnpp (accessed July 21, 1999).
TABLE 8.12
Percentage of Children Ages 2 to 18 by Age, Poverty Status, and
Diet Quality as Measured by the Healthy Eating Index, Three-Year
Average 1994–1996
Characteristic Good Dieta Needs Improvementa Poor Dieta
Ages 2-5
At or below poverty 19 70 11
Above poverty 28 65 7
Ages 6-12
At or below poverty 10 78 12
Above poverty 12 78 10
Ages 13-18
At or below poverty 3b 72 25
Above poverty 7 74 19
a A Healthy Eating Index (HEI) score above 80 implies a good diet, a score
between 51 and 80 implies a diet that needs improvement, and a score
less than 51 implies a poor diet.
b Sample size relatively small to make reliable comparisons.
Adapted from Federal Interagency Forum on Child and Family Statistics,
America’s Children: Key National Indicators of Well-Being, 1999. Federal Inter-
agency Forum On Child and Family Statistics, Washington, DC, US Gov-
ernment Printing Office. The report is also available on the World Wide
Web: http://childstats.gov.
2705_frame_C08 Page 261 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:15 PM
drinks (94.9, 89.0, and 85.9%, respectively). White preschool-age children and adolescents
were more likely to consume soft drinks than black preschool-age children and adoles-
cents. Among adolescents, boys were more likely than girls to consume soft drinks.
Among preschool-age children and adolescents, those who resided in central city metro-
politan statistical areas (within a metropolitan area containing the largest population)
were more likely to consume soft drinks than those residing in noncentral city metropol-
itan statistical areas (within a metropolitan area not containing the largest population).
No significant differences in soft drink consumption were found by poverty status or
region of the country. In general, soft drink consumption was inversely associated with
consumption of milk, fruit juice, and the nutrients concentrated in these beverages. For
all age groups, energy intake was higher among those in the highest soft drink consump-
tion category compared with nonconsumers. These results indicate that nutrition educa-
tion messages for children and/or their parents should encourage limited consumption
of soft drinks.27
TABLE 8.13
Nutrient Intakes: Mean Intakes as Percentages of the 1989 Recommended Dietary Allowances
Intakes by Individuals 1994–1996, 1998
Sex and
Age Sample Food Vitamin A Vitamin Vitamin
(Years) Size Energy Protein (µg RE) E C Thiamin Riboflavin Niacin
- - - - - - Number - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Percentages of 1989 RDA - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
Boys
Girls
(RDAs), by Sex and Age, Children 19 Years of Age and Under, One Day, Continuing Survey of Food
Sex and
Age Vitamin Vitamin
(Years) B6 Folate B12 Calcium Phosphorus Magnesium Iron Zinc Selenium
- - - - - - Number - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Percentages of 1989 RDA - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
Boys
6–9 136 319 337 122 159 156 158 109 334
6–11 133 298 326 116 152 146 161 107 318
12–19 117 180 292 95 136 92 169 96 263
Girls
TABLE 8.14
Nutrient Intakes: Percentage of Children with Diets Meeting 100% of the 1989 Recommended Dietary
Individuals 1994–1996, 1998
Sex and
Age Sample Food Vitamin A Vitamin Vitamin
(Years) Size Energy Protein (µg RE) E C Thiamin Riboflavin Niacin
- - - - - - Number - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Percentage of Children - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
1–2 2023 45.1 98.9 78.5 19.0 81.4 85.7 95.1 71.8
3–5 4386 44.6 99.1 75.5 25.2 79.6 89.6 93.1 82.7
Boys
6–9 758 46.3 98.7 66.3 35.5 77.4 93.4 93.5 87.2
10–11 991 42.9 97.8 63.2 33.4 78.3 90.2 92.2 86.0
12–19 696 39.4 90.4 35.9 35.4 67.5 76.0 76.8 75.8
Girls
6–9 665 26.3 98.9 53.5 28.0 77.8 83.4 85.7 77.0
10–11 922 27.9 95.3 50.4 27.7 75.1 80.5 83.8 74.7
12–19 702 25.2 76.2 30.6 24.0 57.7 68.0 64.4 61.9
Adapted from USDA, Agricultural Research Service, Food and Nutrient Intakes by Children 1994-96, 1998, 1999,
bhnrc/foodsurvey/home.htm (accessed December 22, 1999).
2705_frame_C08 Page 265 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:15 PM
Allowances (RDAs), by Sex and Age, Two-Day Average, Continuing Survey of Food Intake by
Sex and
Age Vitamin Vitamin
(Years) B6 Folate B12 Calcium Phosphorus Magnesium Iron Zinc Selenium
- - - - - - Number - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Percentage of Children - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
1–2 65.5 99.0 99.0 49.9 65.6 97.4 44.5 15.2 97.9
3–5 75.7 99.1 98.0 48.4 75.3 95.2 65.7 30.4 99.7
Boys
6–9 68.9 96.6 97.9 63.0 89.9 85.6 82.9 49.6 99.4
10–11 67.9 95.5 97.8 57.2 83.3 77.2 81.6 47.0 99.1
12–19 53.8 73.2 92.5 36.2 72.9 33.4 83.2 34.6 97.4
Girls
6–9 56.1 95.6 96.9 47.3 78.9 80.2 69.5 32.7 99.3
10–11 55.1 90.6 93.9 43.2 73.1 68.3 61.5 31.9 98.3
12–19 42.4 58.3 73.9 13.4 33.6 17.8 27.5 23.9 86.4
Online, ARS Food Surveys Research Group, available on the “Products” page at http://www.barc.usda.gov/
2705_frame_C08 Page 266 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:15 PM
TABLE 8.15
Nutrient Intakes: Mean Percentage of Calories from Protein, Total Fat, Saturated
Fat, and Carbohydrate, by Sex and Age, One-Day, Continuing Survey of Food
Intakes by Individuals 1994–1996, 1998
Sex and Age Sample Size Protein Total Fat Saturated Fat Carbohydrate
(Years) Number - - - - - - - - - - - - - Percentage of kcal - - - - - - - - - - - - -
Boys
Girls
TABLE 8.16
Nutrient Intakes: Percentage of Children with Diets Meeting Recommendations for Total Fat,
Saturated Fatty Acids, and Cholesterol, by Sex and Age, Two-Day Average, Continuing Survey of
Food Intakes by Individuals 1994–1996, 1998
Total Fat Intake at or Saturated Fatty Acid Intake Cholesterol Intake at or
Sex and Age below 30% of kcal below 10% of kcal below 300 Milligrams
(Years) Sample Size - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Percentage of Children - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
Boys
Girls
Vitamin-Mineral Supplements
According to the Food and Nutrition Board, the “RDAs can typically be met or closely
approximated by diets that are based on the consumption of a variety of foods from diverse
food groups that contain adequate energy.”1,29 According to the American Dietetic Asso-
ciation,30 children can best achieve healthful eating habits by consuming a varied diet in
moderation10 that includes foods from each of the major food groups, as illustrated by the
Food Guide Pyramid.18 Routine supplementation is not necessary for healthy growing
children who consume a varied diet, according to the American Academy of Pediatrics.31
If parents wish to give supplements to their children, a standard pediatric vitamin-mineral
product with nutrients in amounts no larger than the RDA may be given. Megadose levels
should be discouraged due to potential toxic effects. Parents should be cautioned to keep
vitamin-mineral supplements out of the reach of children because the taste, shape, and
color of most pediatric preparations make them quite appealing to children.
Although the American Academy of Pediatrics advocates that routine vitamin-mineral
supplementation is not necessary for healthy growing children who eat a varied diet, it
does identify five groups of children at nutritional risk who may benefit from supplemen-
tation.31 These groups are identified in Table 8.17. Dietary intake over several days should
be assessed by a Registered Dietitian to determine if an individual child from one of these
groups needs to take a supplement.
TABLE 8.17
Five Groups of Children at Nutritional Risk Who May Benefit from Vitamin-Mineral
Supplementation
• Children from deprived families or who suffer parental neglect or abuse
• Children with anorexia or an inadequate appetite or who consume a fad diet
• Children with chronic disease (e.g., cystic fibrosis, inflammatory bowel disease, hepatic disease)
• Children who participate in a dietary program for managing obesity
• Children who consume a vegetarian diet without adequate dairy products
From Committee on Nutrition, American Academy of Pediatrics, Feeding from Age One Year to Adolescence,
Pediatric Nutrition Handbook, 4th ed., Kleinman, R. E., Ed., American Academy of Pediatrics, Elk Grove Village,
IL, 1998, pg 125, with permission.
fat, and cholesterol.35 Furthermore, the incidence of childhood obesity has increased dra-
matically during the last three decades.36,37 To help understand why children eat less of
what is recommended by nutrition guidelines and more of what is not recommended,
and why the incidence of childhood obesity is increasing, Birch and Fisher38 recommend
that consideration be given to factors that impact children’s food preferences and con-
2705_frame_C08 Page 268 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:15 PM
sumption patterns. Extensive evidence suggests that children’s food preferences are
shaped by early experience with food and eating, and that family environment and
practices used by parents and other adults (e.g., school staff) may permanently affect
dietary practices of children.39 Birch and colleagues40 have repeatedly found that exposure
to food, as well as the social environment in which it is eaten, are crucial in the develop-
ment of preschool children’s food preferences and consumption patterns. Research indi-
cates that children’s food preferences are major determinants of consumption;41-45
therefore, not eating certain items (such as vegetables) is related to low preferences.
Furthermore, research indicates that preschool children’s preferences for dietary fat are
related to their levels of body fat.45
Learning to Eat
During the first years of life, an enormous amount of learning about food and eating
occurs as infants transition from consuming only milk to consuming a variety of foods,38
and from eating when depleted or hungry to eating due to a variety of social, cultural,
environmental, and/or physiological cues.46 According to Birch and Fisher,38 this transition
from univore to omnivore is shaped by the infant’s innate preference for sweet and salty
tastes and the rejection of sour and bitter tastes,47 and by the predisposition of infants and
children to be neophobic or to reject new foods.48 A child’s experience with food and
flavors is shaped beginning with the parents’ decision to breastfeed or formula-feed.38
Limited research indicates that breastfed infants eat more of new foods than formula-fed
infants, which suggests that the varied flavors in breastmilk facilitate the breastfed infant’s
acceptance of new foods during the weaning period.49
TABLE 8.18
Research Concerning Exposure to Food and Preschool Children’s Food Preferences and
Consumption
Reference Authors and Year Subjects Study Design Results
50 Birch and Marlin, 14 two-year-olds Each child received Later, children ate
1982 2-20 exposures to 5 more of items with
novel fruits or higher exposures
cheeses over 25-26 when given pairs of
days items and asked to
taste both and pick
one to eat more of
51 Birch et al., 1987 43 children in 3 age Each child received 5, For all age groups,
groups: 26, 38, or 64 10, or 15 exposures to preferences increased
months old 7 new fruits; asked to significantly only
taste some and look at when foods were
others tasted
52 Sullivan and Birch, 39 children, 4-5 years Each child tasted 1 of 3 Preferences increased
1990 old versions of tofu with exposure
(sweetened, salty, or regardless of added
plain) 15 times over sugar, salt, or plain;
several weeks 10 exposures needed
2705_frame_C08 Page 269 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:15 PM
these studies indicate that preschool children’s food preferences are learned through
repeated exposure to foods.
TABLE 8.19
Research Concerning Social Environment of Eating and Preschool Children’s Food Preferences and
Consumption
Reference Authors and Year Subjects Study Design Results
54 Birch et al., 1980 64 children, 3-4 years Children given sweet Preferences increased
old; 16 per context or nonsweet foods when foods
(with initially neutral presented as rewards,
preferences) over or paired with adult
several weeks in 1 of greeting; effects
4 contexts: lasted longer than 6
1) as reward for weeks after contexts
behavior, 2) paired ended; suggest
with adult greeting, positive social
3) as nonsocial contexts can be used
behavior (put in to increase
child’s locker), or 4) at preferences for foods
snack time not liked but more
nutritious
55 Birch et al., 1982 12 children, 3-5 years Children told if they Instrumental (“if”) use
old drank juice, then they of juice reduced
could play preferences for it
56 Birch et al., 1984 31 children, 3-5 years Children told if they Instrumental (“if”) use
old drank milk drink, of milk beverage
then they received reduced preferences
verbal praise or a for it
movie
57 Newman and 86 children, 4-7 years Children told that if “If” snacks became less
Taylor, 1992 old they ate one snack, preferred and “then”
then they could eat snacks became more
another snack (with preferred
both of neutral
preference initially)
58 Hendy, 1999 64 preschool children To encourage Choice-offering and
acceptance of 4 new reward were more
fruits and vegetables effective than other
during 3 preschool actions; Hendy
lunches, teachers concluded that
used 1 of 5 actions: dessert rewards are
1) choice-offering not needed because
(“Do you want any of the less expensive
this?”), 2) reward and more nutritious
(special dessert), action of choice-
3) insisting children offering works as
try one bite, 4) well
modeling by teacher,
or 5) simple exposure
TABLE 8.20
Research Concerning Adult Influences on Preschool Children’s Ability to Self-Regulate Caloric
Intake
Reference Authors and Year Subjects Study Design Results
65 Birch et al., 1987 22 children, 4 years old Flavored pudding Only children
preload of different encouraged to focus
kcal followed by ad on internal cues
lib snacks; children showed sensitivity to
encouraged to focus kcal density of
on either internal preload by
cues (hunger, satiety) decreasing kcal eaten
or external cues (time in snack after preload
of day, amount left, that was high in kcal
rewards) (and vice versa)
66 Johnson and Birch, 77 children, 3-5 years Preload snacks of Children with greater
1994 old different kcal body fat stores were
followed by ad lib less able to regulate
foods; children’s kcal consumption in
body fat measured; response to
mothers completed alterations in preload
questionnaire snacks; more
regarding their controlling mothers
degree of control of had children who
what and how much showed less ability to
their children ate self-regulate
(r = 0.67).
to eat certain foods, and food jags. Parents may resort to feeding tactics such as bribery,
clean your plate rules, struggles, or short-order cooking to encourage their child to eat. A
more healthful approach is Satter’s division of feeding responsibility (see “Adult Influ-
ences on Preschool Children’s Ability to Self-Regulate Caloric Intake” in this section).
Table 8.21 contains suggestions for concerns parents commonly encounter when feeding
young children. Table 8.22 contains healthful eating tips to use with young children.
Snacks
Most young children fare best when fed four to six times a day, due to their smaller
stomach capacities and fluctuating appetites. Snacks should be considered minimeals by
contributing to the total day’s nutrient intake. Snacks generally accepted by many children
include fresh fruit, cheese, whole-grain crackers, breads (e.g., bagels, tortilla), milk, raw
vegetables, 100% fruit juices, sandwiches, peanut butter on crackers or bread, and yogurt.
Choking
Young children should always be watched while eating meals and snacks because they
are at risk for choking on food. Children remain at risk for choking on food until around
age four years when they can chew and swallow better. Foods most likely to cause
problems include ones that are hard, round, and do not readily dissolve in saliva. Table
8.23 contains a list of foods that may cause choking, along with some tips to decrease
young children’s risk of choking. Any food can cause choking if the child is not supervised
while eating, if the child runs while eating, or if too much food is stuffed in the mouth.
2705_frame_C08 Page 272 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:15 PM
TABLE 8.21
Suggestions for Concerns Parents Commonly Encounter when Feeding Children
• Remember, this is normal! Continue to offer each new food twice per week for a total of 10-12 times.
• Serve a new food with familiar ones.
• Ask the child if s/he would like to try some of the new food, but avoid forcing or bribing the child to eat the
new food. Be an effective role model and eat some of the new food yourself.
• Involve the child in shopping for and preparing the new food.
• Remember, children may have strong likes and dislikes, but this does not mean they need to be served different
foods than the rest of the family.
• Allow the child to choose from the foods available at a meal what s/he will eat, but avoid forcing or bribing
him/her to eat.
• Include at least one food at each meal that you know your child will eat, but do not cater to a child’s likes
or dislikes. Avoid becoming a short-order cook. The less attention paid to this behavior, the better.
If a child is stuck on a food jag or wants to eat the same food over and over
• Children may want to eat only one or two foods day after day, meal after meal; common food jags occur with
peanut butter and jelly sandwiches, pizza, macaroni and cheese, and dry cereal with milk.
• Relax, and realize this is normal and temporary. Refuse to call attention to the behavior.
• Continue to offer regular meal, but do not force or bribe the child to eat it.
• Serve the food jag item as you normally would (maybe once or twice a week).
• Tough meat is often difficult for children to chew. Offer bite-size pieces of tender, moist meat, poultry, or fish.
• Use meat in casseroles, meatloaf, soup, spaghetti sauce, pizza, or burritos.
• Try other high-protein foods such as eggs, beans, and peanut butter.
• Offer cheese, cottage cheese, yogurt, or pudding either alone or in combination dishes (such as macaroni and
cheese, pizza, cheese sauce, banana pudding).
• Use milk when cooking hot cereals, scrambled eggs, macaroni and cheese, soup, and other recipes.
• Use calcium-fortified juices.
TABLE 8.22
Healthful Eating Tips to Use with Young Children
Be Patient
Be a Planner
Most children need three regular meals plus one or two snacks each day.
• For breakfast and lunch, offer foods from three or more of the five pyramid food groups.
• For the main meal, offer foods from four or more of the five pyramid food groups.
• For snacks, offer foods from two or more of the five pyramid food groups. Make sure that snacks are not
served too close to mealtime.
Remember, what you do can mean more than what you say.
Children learn about how and what to eat from routine eating experiences.
• Eat meals with children whenever possible.
• Try new foods and new preparation methods.
• Walk, run, and play with children instead of just watching them.
Be Adventurous
• Take children grocery shopping and let them choose a new vegetable or fruit from two or three choices.
• Have a weekly “family try-a-new-food” night.
• At home, allow children to help you wash and prepare food.
Be Creative
• Encourage children to invent a new snack or sandwich from three or four healthful ingredients you provide.
• Try a new bread or whole grain cracker.
• Talk about food groups in the new snack or sandwich, how they taste — smooth, crunchy, sweet, juicy, chewy,
and how colorful the items are.
Adapted from Tips for Using Food Guide Pyramid for Young Children, USDA, Center for Nutrition Policy and
Promotion, Washington, DC, 1999, Program Aid 1647.
TABLE 8.23
Choking in Young Children
Low-Fat Diets
Emphasis regarding low-fat, low-cholesterol diets has increased during the past decade,
as has the debate over whether low-fat diets are appropriate for children.75-80 Parental
concern about later atherosclerosis or obesity has led to failure to thrive in some infants
age 7 to 22 months who were fed very low-fat, calorie-restricted diets.81 The American
Academy of Pediatrics Committee on Nutrition supports recommendations that children
older than two years follow a diet with a maximum of 30% of calories from fat and no
more than 300 mg of cholesterol per day.9 (Ages two to five years represent a transition
between the higher fat intake during infancy and the population-based recommended fat
intake). Nonfat and low-fat milks are not recommended for use during the first two years
of life.
The Special Turku coronary Risk factor Intervention Project for Babies (STRIP Baby Trial)
evaluated the effects of a low-saturated fat diet on growth during the first three years of
life in 1062 healthy infants who were randomized at age seven months into an intervention
group (n = 540) or control group (n = 522).82 The intervention consisted of individualized
dietary counseling provided to parents at one- to six-month intervals to reduce risk factors
to atherosclerosis. Results indicated that mean fat intake of children in both groups was
lower than expected, especially during the first two years of life. The true mean of the
height of intervention boys was at most 0.34 cm more or 0.57 cm less, and the weight was
at most 0.19 kg more or 0.22 kg less than that of control boys. The respective values for
girls were at most 0.77 cm more or 0.16 cm less and at most 0.42 kg more or 0.04 kg less.
2705_frame_C08 Page 275 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:15 PM
Furthermore, there were similar numbers of slim children in both groups. The authors
concluded that a supervised, low-saturated fat, low-cholesterol diet had no influence on
growth of children in the study between 7 and 36 months of age.82 Follow-up analyses
were conducted on intervention and control children who were followed for more than
two years (n = 848) to study the fat and energy intakes of children with different growth
patterns. Results indicated that relative fat intakes (as percent of energy intake) were
similar in children showing highly different height gain patterns. Furthermore, children
with consistently low fat intake grew equally to the children with higher fat intake. The
authors concluded that moderate supervised restriction of fat intake to values between
25 and 30% of kcal is compatible with normal growth in children ages 7 to 36 months.83
The safety and efficacy of lower fat diets in pubertal children have been indicated by
results from the Dietary Intervention Study in Children (DISC). The three-year, six-center
randomized controlled trial involved 663 children; at baseline, boys (n = 362) and girls (n
= 301) had a mean age of 9.7 and 9.0 years, respectively.84 An intervention group (n = 334)
followed a diet with 28% of kcal from total fat, ~10% of kcal from saturated fat, and 95
mg/day of cholesterol. A comparable usual care group (n=329) consumed ~33% of kcal
from total fat, ~12% of kcal from saturated fat, and 113 mg/day of cholesterol. The
intervention group had significant but modestly lower levels of LDL-cholesterol and
maintained a psychologic well-being; however, there were no differences in height, weight,
or serum ferritin levels in the two groups. The authors concluded that a properly designed
dietary intervention is effective in achieving modest lowering of LDL cholesterol levels
over three years while maintaining adequate growth, iron stores, nutritional adequacy,
and psychological well-being during the critical growth period of adolescence. Further-
more, “an important public health inference from the DISC results is that current dietary
recommendations for healthy children, which are less restricted in total fat than the DISC
diet, can be advocated safely, particularly when children are under health care that follows
their growth and development.”84 Follow-up analyses were conducted to assess the rela-
tionship between energy intake from fat and anthropometric, biochemical, and dietary
measures of nutritional adequacy and safety.85 Results indicated that lower fat intakes
during puberty were nutritionally adequate for growth and maintenance of normal levels
of nutritional biochemical measures; furthermore, they were associated with beneficial
effects on blood folate and hemoglobin. Lower fat diets were related to lower self-reported
intakes of several nutrients (i.e., calcium, zinc, magnesium, phosphorus, vitamin B12,
thiamin, niacin, and riboflavin); however, no adverse effects were observed on blood
biochemical measures of nutritional status. The authors concluded that “current public
health recommendations for moderately lower fat intakes in children during puberty may
be followed safely.”85
Further evidence regarding the safety and efficacy of lower fat diets in upper elementary
school children (third through fifth grades) has been provided by the Child and Adolescent
Trial for Cardiovascular Health (CATCH), which is described more fully later in this
section. Results from CATCH failed to indicate any evidence of deleterious effects of the
three-year intervention on growth or development of children who were third-graders at
the beginning of the intervention.86
Group Feeding
Many young children spend some or most days away from home in child care centers,
preschools, Head Start programs, or home child care centers, where they may eat up to
two meals and two snacks daily. Federal and state regulations or guidelines exist for food
service in child care centers, Head Start programs, and preschool programs in public
2705_frame_C08 Page 276 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:15 PM
Portion Sizes
Portion sizes for young children are small, especially when compared with adult portions.
A rule-of-thumb method is to initially offer one tablespoon of each food for every year of
age for preschool children; more food may be provided according to appetite.
Limited research indicates the effects of portion size on children’s food intake.88 Sixteen
younger (three years) and 16 older (five years) preschool children participated in three
lunches during their usual lunchtime at day-care. Each lunch consisted of macaroni and
cheese served in either small, medium, or large portion sizes, along with set portion sizes
of carrot sticks, applesauce, and milk. Results indicated that older preschoolers consumed
more macaroni and cheese when served the large portion compared to the small portion
(p<0.002). However, portion sizes did not significantly affect food intake among younger
preschoolers. These results indicate the important role of portion size in shaping children’s
dietary intake, and imply that portion size can either promote or prevent the development
of overweight among older preschool children. Furthermore, these results indicate the
importance of encouraging preschool children to focus on their own internal cues of
hunger and satiety instead of “eating everything to clean the plate.”88
patterns of third graders were examined using baseline data from CATCH, 94% of the
1872 children from 96 public schools in four states reported eating breakfast on the day
of the survey.92 Of the 94% who ate breakfast, 80% ate at home, 13% ate at school, 3% ate
at both home and school, and 4% ate breakfast elsewhere.
breakfast for free, has been advocated by some as a means to increase the percentage of
children who eat breakfast. However, results from the SNDAS indicated that approximately
42% of children who were eligible for free or reduced price school breakfast did not eat
it.94 Perhaps scheduling the SBP for classes to eat as a part of regular school hours (similar
to the NSLP) is needed to increase the percentage of children who eat breakfast.
Results from a study by Baranowski et al.101 indicate the important contribution that
school lunch makes in increasing children’s consumption of fruits and vegetables. Differ-
ences in children’s consumption of fruits and vegetables by meal and day of the week
were assessed using seven-day food records completed by 2984 third-graders from 48
elementary schools in the Atlanta, Georgia area. Results indicated that fruits and vegeta-
bles were most frequently consumed at weekday lunch, and second most frequently at
dinner. Participation in school lunch accounted for a substantial proportion of fruits and
vegetables consumed at lunch. Few fruits and vegetables were consumed at breakfast or
snack.101
are continually modified because they eat daily.114 More than 95% of children in the U.S.
are enrolled in school, where they may eat one or two meals per school day.115 Thus,
elementary schools play a critical role in shaping children’s food acceptance patterns and
can therefore help to improve their diet.116 No other public institution has as much con-
tinuous and intensive contact with children during their first two decades of life than
public schools.113 Elementary school staff have a greater potential influence on a child’s
health than any other group outside of the home.117 School-based programs offer a sys-
tematic and efficient means to improve the health of youth in America by promoting
positive lifestyles.118 Health promotion programs in elementary schools have the potential
to help prevent chronic diseases in U.S. adults.117 Although school-based health programs
may promote healthful lifestyles, classroom lessons are not sufficient to produce lasting
changes in students’ eating behaviors.53 In fact, curriculum-based nutrition education in
schools has had minimal effects on student’s eating behavior.119 Children’s food prefer-
ences and consumption are influenced by the elementary school environment through
familiarity and reinforcement.120 Students of public elementary schools generally attend
for 7 hours a day, 180 days a year. Although students have options for obtaining food in
schools, the most prominent federally supported programs are the SBP and the NSLP.
Elementary school breakfast and lunch menus typically follow a cycle that repeats
several times during the school year; thus, children are provided with repeated exposures
to healthful foods (e.g., fruits and vegetables).121 However, elementary schools also provide
children with repeated exposures to other foods (e.g., candy and pizza) which are used
by school staff as rewards.53,122-124 Unfortunately, the social context in which vegetables are
often offered at school (e.g., “If you eat your peas, then you can eat your cookie”) probably
negatively affects preferences for them, thereby potentially decreasing their consump-
tion.121 However, the social context in which candy and pizza are offered probably posi-
tively affects preferences for those foods, thereby potentially increasing their
consumption.121 These repeated exposures to vegetables and foods such as candy and
pizza in negative and positive social contexts, respectively, provide the associative learning
that help children develop food consumption patterns that are inconsistent with nutrition
guidelines40 which recommend increased intake of vegetables but moderation in sugar
and fat intake.10,29,125,126 In addition, school staff often encourage children to finish all of
their food, regardless of whether or not the children are still hungry,122 which encourages
children to disregard their own feelings of hunger and satiety.
Concern regarding the impact of school staff on children’s food preferences and con-
sumption patterns has been voiced by several government and professional groups.
According to the Centers for Disease Control and Prevention,116 students need exposure
to healthful foods as well as the support of people around them, and teachers need to be
discouraged from using food for disciplining or rewarding students. According to the
American Dietetic Association, “… the nutrition goals of the National School Lunch
Program and School Breakfast Program should be supported and extended through school
district policies that create an overall school environment with learning experiences that
enable students to develop lifelong, healthful eating habits.”127 Furthermore, the American
Dietetic Association recommends that school meals be served in an environment that
encourages their acceptance,128 or a setting and atmosphere that encourages their con-
sumption,127 which may be interpreted to mean an environment that avoids the use of
food contingencies. A joint statement by the American Dietetic Association, Society for
Nutrition Education, and the American School Food Service Association indicates that
schools are to be healthful environments where the cafeteria and food-related policy allow
students the opportunity to make healthful food choices and provide them with models
of healthful food practices.129
2705_frame_C08 Page 280 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:15 PM
Considerable research has been conducted concerning the impact of exposure and the
social context of eating on preschool children’s food preferences, consumption, self-regu-
lation of intake, and adiposity. However, research of this type is needed with older
children. According to Hill and Trowbridge,39 insights gained from research concerning
children’s food preferences and consumption patterns “can assist in developing interven-
tions to improve child-feeding practices, which may lead to development of healthier
eating patterns.” Parents and school staff need to expose children to healthful foods,
provide opportunities for children to learn to like rather than dislike healthful foods,
encourage children to respect their own feelings of hunger and satiety, and reduce the
extent to which learning and experience potentiate children’s liking for high-sugar and/
or high-fat foods.130 Interventions to increase children’s consumption of foods consistent
with nutrition guidelines and to prevent childhood obesity must educate adults about
their role in the development of children’s food preferences and consumption patterns,
specifically exposure to food, the social context of eating (e.g., food rewards and contin-
gencies), and adult influences on children’s ability to self-regulate caloric intake. Table
8.24 provides five practical applications for adults to use when feeding children.
TABLE 8.24
Five Practical Applications for Adults to Use when Feeding Children
• Offer a variety of healthful foods in a positive environment at regular meal and snack times.
• Instead of requiring children to finish all of their food, encourage them to respect their own feelings of hunger
and satiety. Use choice-offering statements such as “If you’re still hungry, there’s more ___” or “If you’re full,
then you don’t have to eat any more.”
• To help children learn to eat a variety of foods, continue to offer new foods even if a new food is initially
rejected. Ten to 12 exposures at two per week may be needed before a child learns to accept a new food.
• To encourage children to eat or to try new foods, use choice-offering statements such as “Would you like to
try/taste your ___?” Avoid rewarding or bribing children for eating. Also, avoid using food contingencies
(e.g., “If you eat your ___, then you can ___.”)
• Instead of using food as a reward, use non-food items such as stickers or a token economy (e.g., wherein
tokens are exchanged for tangible non-food rewards such as shoe laces, wrist bands, play time).
Childhood Obesity
Overwhelming evidence indicates that the incidence of obesity among children and ado-
lescents has increased dramatically during the last three decades.36,37 According to Dietz,
“obesity is now the most prevalent nutritional disease of children and adolescents in the
United States.”131 Critical periods during the childhood years for the development of
obesity include the period of adiposity rebound that occurs between five and seven years
of age, and adolescence.131 The causes of childhood obesity are multifactorial, including
both genetics and environment. Inactivity appears to play a major role in the increasing
rate of childhood obesity, as does television viewing. Results from the Third National
Health and Nutrition Examination Survey indicated that children ages 8 to 16 years who
watched four or more hours of television each day had greater body fat and greater body
mass index than children who watched television less than two hours each day.132 With
the advances in technology, especially regarding computers, more children are spending
more hours in sedentary states. Preventing childhood obesity is more desirable than trying
to treat obesity during adolescence and adulthood. One critical component of obesity
prevention is increased physical activity; another is educating adults regarding the devel-
opment of children’s food preferences and food consumption patterns. The topic of child-
hood obesity is covered thoroughly in Section 70.
2705_frame_C08 Page 281 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:15 PM
Association regarding the use of nutritive and nonnutritive sweeteners137 is that “consum-
ers can safely enjoy a range of nutritive and nonnutritive sweeteners when consumed in
moderation and within the context of a diet consistent with the Dietary Guidelines for
Americans.”
Feeding Adolescents
Characteristics of Food Habits of Adolescents
Adolescents often experience newly found independence, busy schedules, searches for
self-identification, dissatisfaction with body image, difficulty accepting existing values,
and a desire for peer acceptance. Each of these events may help explain changes in food
habits of adolescents. Common characteristics of food habits of adolescents include an
increased tendency to skip meals (especially breakfast and lunch), eating more meals
outside the home, increased snacking (especially on candy), consumption of fast foods,
and dieting.138
Insight regarding adolescents’ perceptions about factors influencing their food choices
and eating behaviors was provided from focus groups with 141 seventh- or tenth-graders
(40% white, 25% Asian-American, 21% African-American, 7% multiracial, 6% Hispanic,
1% Native American) from two urban schools in St. Paul, Minnesota.139 Factors identified
by the adolescents as being most influential on their food choices included hunger and
food cravings, appeal of food (primarily taste), time considerations of themselves and their
parents, and convenience of food. Factors identified by the adolescents to be of secondary
importance included food availability, parental influences on eating behavior (including
the family’s culture or religion), perceived benefits of food (e.g., for health, energy, body
shape), and situational factors (e.g., place, time). Additional factors discussed included
mood, body image concerns, habit, cost, media influences, and vegetarian lifestyle choices.
A sense of urgency about personal health in relation to other concerns, and taste preferences
for other foods were major barriers to eating more fruits, vegetables, and dairy products
and eating fewer high-fat foods. Suggestions provided by the adolescents to help adoles-
cents eat a more healthful diet included making healthful food taste and look better, making
healthful food more available and convenient, limiting the availability of unhealthful
options, teaching them good eating habits at an early age, and changing social norms to
make it “cool” to eat healthfully. These results suggest that if interventions to improve
adolescent nutrition are to be effective, they need to have adolescent input and address a
broad range of factors, especially environmental factors (e.g., increased availability and
promotion of appealing, convenient foods in homes, schools, and restaurants).139
The Minnesota Adolescent Health Survey (MAHS) was completed by more than 30,000
adolescents from 1986 through 1987. The MAHS was a comprehensive assessment of
adolescent health status, health behaviors, and psychosocial factors; although it included
relatively few nutrition-related items, a wealth of knowledge about adolescent nutrition
was gained. Neumark-Sztainer et al. summarized the knowledge learned from a decade
of subsequent analyses of data collected in the MAHS, as well as implications for working
with youth.140 Major concerns identified included overweight status, unhealthful weight-
control practices, and high prevalence rates of inadequate intakes of fruits, vegetables,
and dairy products. Risk factors for inadequate food intake patterns or unhealthful weight-
control practices included low socioeconomic status, minority status, chronic illness, poor
school achievement, low family connectedness, weight dissatisfaction, overweight, homo-
2705_frame_C08 Page 283 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:15 PM
sexual orientation among boys, and use of health-compromising behaviors. The results
suggest a need for innovative outreach strategies that include educational and environ-
mental approaches to improve adolescent eating behaviors. A critical issue that needs to
be addressed is the validity of adolescents’ self-reported behaviors.140
TABLE 8.25
Results Regarding Dietary Behaviors from the Youth Risk Behavior Survey, United States, 1997
Dietary Behavior Percentage of Students*
Ate five or more servings of fruits and vegetables (defined as fruit, fruit juice, green
salad, or cooked vegetables) during day prior to survey:
Overall 29
Boys 32a
Girls 26a
Ate two or fewer servings of foods typically high in fat content (defined as
hamburgers, hot dogs, or sausage; french fries or potato chips; and cookies,
doughnuts, pie, or cake) during day prior to survey:
Overall 62
Girls 71a
Boys 56a
Hispanics 64b
Whites 63b
Blacks 55b
White girls 73c
Black girls 63c
Hispanic boys 60d
Black boys 47d
Girls in grade 12 77e
Girls in grade 9 65e
Boys in grade 12 59f
Boys in grade 10 52f
Boys in grade 11 61g
Boys in grade 9 50g
Boys in grade 10 52g
Considered themselves overweight:
Overall 27
Girls 34a
Boys 22a
Hispanics 30b
Blacks 24b
Hispanic boys 27c
White boys 22c
Black boys 15c
Tried to lose weight during the 30 days preceding the survey:
Overall 40
Girls 60a
Boys 23a
2705_frame_C08 Page 284 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:15 PM
sales were monitored for an additional three weeks. Results indicated that even though
promotion was minimal, lower pricing significantly increased sales for fruit and carrots
but not salads among high school students. However, the magnitude of the intervention
effects differed by school, which suggests that contextual factors (e.g., packaging, display)
may modify pricing effects. These results imply that adolescents can be encouraged to
select fruits and vegetables when the prices of these items are lowered, and that this may
occur without measurable changes in the overall a la carte sales revenue or the number
of meal pattern customers, which are both important considerations for school food
service revenues.144
Caffeine
Caffeine is a stimulant for the central nervous system; it tends to decrease drowsiness
and reduce the sense of fatigue, but too much can cause palpitations, stomach upset,
insomnia, and anxiety. Its effects vary among individuals, depending on the amount
ingested, body size of the individual, and personal tolerance. Some people are able to
build up a tolerance to caffeine through regular use; others are more sensitive to it. If
someone who has regularly consumed caffeine suddenly stops using it, mild withdrawal
symptoms (e.g., headaches, craving for caffeine) may occur. Substantial amounts of caf-
feine are found in several soft drinks, coffee, tea, and some pain relievers; smaller amounts
are found in chocolate and foods with cocoa. Consumption of caffeine increases during
adolescence with greater intakes of soft drinks, tea, and coffee. This can be a concern
because caffeine has a modest negative impact on calcium retention, yet consumption of
milk and other foods high in calcium decreases as children get older.25,28 Furthermore, the
stimulating effect of caffeine may set the stage for needing stimulation; although caffeine
is classified as a drug, society is very accepting of this stimulant and has not considered
it a nuisance.145
Vegetarian Diets
During the adolescent years, when there is increased independence and decision making
and greater influence by peers and role models, vegetarian diets may be relatively com-
mon. There is considerable variation in the eating patterns of vegetarians. For the lacto-
ovo-vegetarian, the eating pattern is based on grains, vegetables, fruits, legumes, seeds,
nuts, dairy products, and eggs; meat, fish, and poultry are excluded. For the vegan, or
total vegetarian, the eating pattern is similar to the lacto-ovo-vegetarian pattern except
for the additional exclusion of eggs, dairy, and other animal products. However, consid-
erable variation may exist in the extent to which animal products are avoided within both
of these patterns.146
According to the American Dietetic Association, “well-planned vegan and lacto-ovo-
vegetarian diets are appropriate for all stages of the life cycle, including pregnancy and
lactation.”146 Appropriately planned vegan and lacto-ovo-vegetarian diets satisfy nutrient
needs of infants, children, and adolescents and promote normal growth.147 Dietary defi-
ciencies are more common in populations with very restrictive diets. All vegan children
need a reliable source of vitamin B12; in addition, vitamin D supplements or fortified foods
should be used if sun exposure is limited. Emphasis should be placed on foods rich in
calcium, iron, and zinc. Vegetarian children can be helped to meet energy needs through
frequent meals and snacks, as well as the use of some refined foods and foods higher in
fat.146 Section 40 contains additional information regarding vegetarian diets.
2705_frame_C08 Page 287 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:15 PM
Eating Disorders
Anorexia nervosa and bulimia may affect about one million adolescents. Eating disorders
are thought to occur for a variety of reasons which include poor self-concept, pressure to
be thin, body shape and size, depression, and biological errors in organ function or
structure. Up to 10% of these adolescents may die prematurely as a result of eating
disorders.145 Most eating disorder patients develop the problem during adolescence; how-
ever, it may be difficult to distinguish an adolescent with “normal” eating habits from one
with an eating disorder, due to some of the psychologic changes which occur during
adolescence.6 More information regarding eating disorders may be found in Section 68.
Teen Pregnancy
Nutrient needs rise considerably during pregnancy; for adolescents who are pregnant,
nutritional considerations are paramount, especially if they are still growing. For adoles-
cent girls, linear growth typically is not completed until approximately four years after
the onset of menarche. Some indication of physiologic maturity and growth potential may
be obtained from gynecologic age, which is the difference between chronologic age and
age at menarche. A young adolescent girl (i.e., gynecologic age of two years or less) who
becomes pregnant may still be growing; thus, her nutrient requirements must meet her
own needs for growth and development, as well as the extra demands of fetal growth.6
Eating habits of adolescents (e.g., skipped meals, increased snacking, consumption of fast
foods, and dieting) create a health risk for pregnant adolescents because during pregnancy,
nutritional needs for the fetus are met before needs of the mother.145 Adolescents who are
pregnant should be cautioned against skipping meals, especially breakfast, because skip-
ping meals may increase the risk of ketosis.138 More information regarding teen pregnancy
may be found in Section 5.
TABLE 8.26
Healthy People 2010 Nutrition Objectives for Children and Adolescents
19-3. Reduce the proportion of children and adolescents who are overweight or obese (defined as at or
above the gender- and age-specific 95th percentile of BMI).
Reduction in Overweight or
Objective Obese Children and Adolescents* 2010 Target 1988–1994 Baseline
19-3a. Children and adolescents aged 6 to 11 years 5% 11%
19-3b. Children and adolescents aged 12 to 19 years 5% 10%
19-3c. Children and adolescents aged 6 to 19 years 5% 11%
* Defined as at or above the gender- and age-specific 95th percentile of BMI based on the revised
CDC growth charts for the U.S.
19-4. Reduce growth retardation (defined as height-for-age below the fifth percentile in the age-gender
appropriate population using the 1977 NCHS/CDC growth charts) among low-income children under
age 5 years.
Target: 5% Baseline: 8%
19-5. Increase the proportion of persons age 2 years and older who consume at least two daily servings of
fruit.
Target: 75% Baseline: 28%
19-6. Increase the proportion of persons age 2 years and older who consume at least three daily servings
of vegetables, with at least one-third being dark green or orange vegetables.
Target: 50% Baseline: 3%
19-7. Increase the proportion of persons age 2 years and older who consume at least six daily servings of
grain products, with at least three being whole grains.
Target: 50% Baseline: 7%
19-8. Increase the proportion of persons age 2 years and older who consume less than 10 percent of calories
from saturated fat.
Target: 75% Baseline: 36%
19-9. Increase the proportion of persons age 2 years and older who consume no more than 30 percent of
calories from total fat.
Target: 75% Baseline: 33%
19-10. Increase the proportion of persons age 2 years and older who consume 2400 mg or less of sodium
daily (from foods, dietary supplements, tap water, and salt use at the table).
Target: 65% Baseline: 21%
19-11. Increase the proportion of persons aged two years and older who meet dietary recommendations for
calcium (based on consideration of calcium from foods, dietary supplements, and antacids).
Target: 75% Baseline: 46%
19-12. Reduce iron deficiency among young children and females of childbearing age.
19-15. (Developmental) Increase the proportion of children and adolescents aged 6 to 19 years whose intake
of meals and snacks at school contributes to good overall dietary quality.
21-1. Reduce the proportion of children and adolescents who have dental caries experience in their primary
or permanent teeth.
21-13. (Developmental) Increase the proportion of school-based health centers with an oral health component.
Adapted from US Department of Health and Human Services, Healthy People 2010, 2nd ed., US Government
Printing Office, Superintendent of Documents, Washington, DC, November, 2000. Available online at
http://www.health.gov/healthypeople (accessed July 30, 2001).
the beginning of the program in 1991, a baseline survey with adults indicated that only
23% reported consuming five or more daily servings of fruits and vegetables.149 The NCI
funded nine studies in the spring of 1993 to develop, implement, and evaluate interventions
in specific community channels to increase the consumption of fruits and vegetables in
specific target populations; four of the nine projects used school-based programs to target
children or adolescents.150 Of these four projects, one targeted fourth-grade students and
their parents,110 two targeted fourth- and fifth-grade students,106,109 and one targeted high
school students.111 Although all four interventions increased daily consumption of fruits
and vegetables, the increases were small for three interventions and ranged from 0.2 servings
for “Gimme 5 Fruit, Juice, and Vegetables for Fun and Health” in Georgia,106 0.4 servings
for “Gimme 5: A Fresh Nutrition Concept for Students” in New Orleans,111 and 0.6 servings
for “5 A Day Power Plus” in Minnesota.109 Increases were larger, at 1.4 servings for “High
Five” in Alabama, possibly because classroom lessons were delivered by trained curriculum
coordinators instead of classroom teachers.110 Perhaps the limited success of school-based
interventions to date is because they have not attempted to educate school staff about how
their behaviors impact children’s food acceptance patterns as discussed earlier.
Five papers which review the scientific literature regarding links between nutrition and
cognition have been published.12,35,89,152,153 An intensive media program was developed to
bring three key messages to various audiences through publications, public service
announcements, news releases, consumer education activities, professional kits, and a
video. The three key messages are: 1) give children a healthy start to their day, 2) get
children (and adults) moving for the fun of it, and 3) grownups: be a role model.151
USDA School Meals Initiative for Healthy Children and Team Nutrition
The USDA School Meals Initiative (SMI) for Healthy Children underscores the national
health responsibility to provide children with school meals consistent with the Dietary
Guidelines for Americans and current scientific nutrition recommendations; the vision of
the SMI is to “improve the health and education of children through better nutrition.”154
Team Nutrition was established by USDA as a nationwide integrated initiative to help
implement the SMI; the goal of Team Nutrition is to “improve the health and education
of children by creating innovative public and private partnerships that promote food
choices for a healthful diet through the media, schools, families, and the community.”
Team Nutrition exists to empower schools in all 50 states to serve meals that meet the
Dietary Guidelines for Americans, and to teach and motivate children in grades pre-
kindergarten through 12 to make healthy eating choices. The four Dietary Guidelines for
Americans that Team Nutrition focuses on are 1) eat a variety of foods, 2) eat more fruits,
vegetables and grains, 3) eat lower fat foods more often, and 4) be physically active.
Helping every child in the nation to have the opportunity to learn how to eat for good
health is made possible by extensive, strategic public-private partnerships and approxi-
mately 300 Team Nutrition Supporters who represent all of the industries that touch
children’s lives, including nutrition and health, education, food and agriculture, consumer,
media and technology, and government.154 Table 8.27 lists common values shared by
supporters of Team Nutrition.
TABLE 8.27
Common Values Shared by Supporters of Team Nutrition
• Children should be empowered to make food choices that reflect the Dietary Guidelines for Americans.
• Good nutrition and physical activity are essential to children’s health and educational success.
• School meals that meet the Dietary Guidelines for Americans should appeal to children and taste good.
• Programs must build upon the best science, education, communication and technical resources available.
• Public/private partnerships are essential to reaching children to promote food choices for a healthful diet.
• Messages to children should be age appropriate and delivered in a language they speak, through media they
use, in ways that are entertaining and actively involve them in learning.
• The focus should be on positive messages regarding food choices children can make.
• It is critical to stimulate and support action and education at the national, state, and local levels to successfully
change children’s eating behaviors.
From http://www.fns.usda.gov/tn/Missions/index.htm (accessed January 29, 2000).
Food Safety
The Fight Bac!™ campaign is a partnership of industry, government, and consumer groups
dedicated to reducing the incidence of foodborne illness.157 The multifaceted campaign
includes television and radio public service announcements in several languages, media
mailings, newspaper articles, publications, World Wide Web (www.fightbac.org), commu-
nity action kits, supermarket action kits, exhibit and convention kits, and educator kits
for grades kindergarten through three and four through six. Launched in October, 1997,
the eye-catching Fight Bac!™ cartoon character teams up with the following four critical
messages to teach consumers about safe food handling: clean, separate, cook, and chill.157
Table 8.28 provides more details regarding these four messages.
Children, adolescents, and adults of all ages need to understand the important role they
play in decreasing the incidence of foodborne illnesses through proper hand washing as
well as safe food preparation and storage. According to the Hospitality Institute of Tech-
nology and Management,158 hands should be washed with soap, a fingernail brush with
soft bristles, and a large volume of flowing warm water to ensure adequate removal of
pathogenic microorganisms (e.g., those from fecal sources) from fingertips and under
fingernails. Fingernails should be neatly trimmed to less than 1/16 inch to make them
easier to clean. When working with food, hand washing without the fingernail brush is
sufficient because the pathogen count is much lower. Table 8.29 describes the double and
single methods of hand washing. Although young children may be encouraged to wash
2705_frame_C08 Page 292 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:15 PM
TABLE 8.28
Details Regarding the Four Critical Messages of the Fight Bac!™ Campaign
• Keep raw meat, poultry, and seafood separate from other foods in grocery carts and refrigerators.
• Use a different cutting board for preparing raw meats.
• Wash hands, cutting boards, dishes, and utensils with hot soapy water after they come in contact with raw
meat, poultry, or seafood.
• Do not place cooked food on a plate or serving dish that previously held raw meat, poultry, or seafood.
• To make sure that meat, poultry, casseroles, etc. are cooked all the way through, use a clean thermometer.
• Cook roasts and steaks to at least 145°F; cook whole poultry to 180°F.
• Cook ground beef to at least 160°F. Do not eat ground beef that is still pink inside.
• Cook eggs until the white and yolk are firm.
• Do not eat foods that contain raw eggs or only partially cooked eggs.
• Cook fish until it is opaque and flakes easily with a fork.
• When microwaving foods, make sure there are not cold spots by stirring and rotating food for even heating.
• Reheat sauces, soups, and gravies to a boil. Heat other leftovers thoroughly to at least 165°F.
• Refrigerate or freeze prepared foods and leftovers within two hours or sooner.
• Defrost food in the refrigerator, under cold running water, or in the microwave, but never at room temperature.
• Marinate foods in the refrigerator.
• Divide large amounts of leftovers into small, shallow containers for quick cooling in the refrigerator.
• Avoid packing the refrigerator because cool air must circulate to keep food safe.
Adapted from Fight Bac!™ Four Simple Steps to Food Safety, Partnership for Food Safety Education,
www.fightbac.org (accessed January 11, 2000).
their hands long enough for them to sing their “A, B, Cs” slowly, the amount of lathering
and the volume of water used to wash off the lathering appear to be more important than
the length of time spent washing.158
Dental Health
Nutrition is an integral component of oral health.159 Nutrition and diet may affect the
development and progression of diseases of the oral cavity. Likewise, oral infectious
diseases and acute, chronic, and terminal systemic diseases with oral manifestations, affect
diet and nutritional status. The primary factors to be considered in determining the
cariogenic, cariostatic, and anticariogenic properties of the diet include the form of the
food (liquid, solid and sticky, long lasting), frequency of consumption of sugar and other
fermentable carbohydrates, nutrient composition, sequence of food intake, and combina-
tions of foods.159
Because children of all ages eat frequently, snacks should emphasize foods that are low
in sucrose, are not sticky, and that stimulate saliva flow which helps limit acid production
in the mouth.160 Protein foods such as nuts and cheese may provide nutritional and dental
2705_frame_C08 Page 293 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:15 PM
TABLE 8.29
Two Methods of Hand Washing
Double Wash Procedure (to be used to remove fecal pathogens and other pathogenic microorganisms
from skin surfaces when entering the kitchen, after using the toilet, after cleaning up vomitus or fecal
material, or after touching sores or bandages):
First wash using the fingernail brush (~7 seconds required to complete):
• Turn on water so it runs at 2 gallons per minute with a temperature of 110 to 115°F. Place hands, lower arms,
and fingernail brush under flowing water and thoroughly wet them.
• Apply 1/2 to 1 teaspoon of hand soap or detergent to fingernail brush.
• Brush and lather hand surfaces with tips of bristles on fingernail brush under flowing water, especially
fingertips and around and under fingernails. Build a good lather.
• Continue to use fingernail brush under water until there is no more soapy lather on hands, lower arms, or
nail brush. Hazardous microorganisms in the lather are only removed to a safe level when all the soap is
rinsed off the hands, arms, and fingertips.
• Place nail brush on holder with bristles up so bristles can dry.
Second wash without the fingernail brush (~13 seconds required to complete):
• Apply 1/2 to 1 teaspoon of hand soap or detergent to hands.
• While adding warm water as necessary, rub hands together to produce a good lather; lathering must extend
from fingertips to shirt sleeves.
• After lathering, rinse all of lather from fingertips, hands, and arms in flowing water. The volume of water
used for rinsing hands, not the time of the wash, is the critical factor.
• Thoroughly dry hands and arms using disposable paper towels. Discard paper towels in waste container
without touching container.
Single Wash Procedure (to be used to remove normal low levels of pathogens before and after eating
and drinking; after handling garbage; after handling dirty dishes or utensils; between handling raw and
cooked foods; after blowing or wiping nose; after touching skin, hair, or soiled clothes; and as often as
necessary to keep hands clean after they become soiled):
• Wet hands and lower arms with warm water.
• Follow directions above for “Second wash without the fingernail brush.”
Adapted from Snyder, O. P., Hospitality Institute of Technology and Management, 1998, http://www.hi-tm.com/
Documents/Safehands.html (accessed January 11, 2000).
benefits because some protein foods are thought to have a protective effect against caries.
When desserts are consumed, it is best if they are eaten with meals. Chewing sugarless
gum after snacks containing fermentable carbohydrate may benefit school-age children
and adolescents. The efforts of dietary control are complemented by good oral hygiene.
A fluoride supplement is recommended into the teen years if the water supply is not
fluoridated.160
Maxillary anterior caries (baby bottle tooth decay or BBTD) is the major nutrition-related
dental disease found in infants and preschool children; it appears to be related to feeding
behaviors after longer bottle or breastfeeding.159 The primary cause of BBTD is prolonged
exposure of the teeth to a sweetened liquid such as formula, milk, juice, soda pop, or other
sweetened drinks.160 This often occurs when a child is routinely given a bottle at bedtime
or naptime, because the liquid pools around the teeth during sleep, saliva flow decreases,
and the child may continue to suck liquid over an extended period of time. Toddlers are
also at high risk if they hold their own bottle and have access to it anytime throughout
the day. The primary strategy to prevent BBTD is education. Parents and child care
providers should be encouraged to avoid putting an infant or young child to sleep with
a bottle, and to use a cup to offer juices and liquids other than breast milk or formula.160
Section 54 provides additional information regarding the prevention of dental caries in
children and adolescents.
2705_frame_C08 Page 294 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:15 PM
References
1. Food and Nutrition Board, National Research Council, Recommended Dietary Allowances, 10th
ed, National Academy Press, Washington, DC, 1989.
2. Food and Nutrition Board, Institute of Medicine, Dietary Reference Intakes for Calcium, Phospho-
rus, Magnesium, Vitamin D, and Fluoride, National Academy Press, Washington, DC, 1997.
Available online at www.nap.edu (accessed July 13, 2001).
3. Food and Nutrition Board, Institute of Medicine, Dietary Reference Intakes for Thiamin, Riboflavin,
Niacin, Vitamin B6, Folate, Vitamin B12, Pantothenic Acid, Biotin, and Choline, National Academy
Press, Washington, DC, 1999.
4. Food and Nutrition Board, Institute of Medicine, Dietary Reference Intakes for Vitamin C, Vitamin
E, Selenium, and Carotenoids, National Academy Press, Washington, DC, 2000. Available online
at www.nap.edu (accessed July 13, 2001).
5. Food and Nutrition Board, Institute of Medicine, Dietary Reference Intakes for Vitamin A, Vitamin
K, Arsenic, Boron, Chromium, Copper, Iodine, Iron, Manganese, Molybdenum, Nickel, Silicon, Vana-
dium, and Zinc, National Academy Press, Washington, DC, 2001. Available online at
www.nap.edu (accessed July 13, 2001).
6. Heald, F. P., Gong, E. J. In: Modern Nutrition in Health and Disease, 9th ed, (Shils, M. E., Olson,
J. A, Shike, M., Ross, A. C., Eds), Williams & Wilkins, Baltimore, 1999, pg 857.
7. Pellett, P. L., Am J Clin Nutr, 51: 711; 1990
8. Nutrition Committee, American Heart Association, Circulation, 94: 1795; 1996.
9. Committee on Nutrition, American Academy of Pediatrics, Pediatrics, 101: 141; 1998.
10. Nutrition and Your Health: Dietary Guidelines for Americans, 5th ed, USDA and US Dept of Health
and Human Services, 2000, Home and Garden Bulletin No. 232.
11. Williams, C. L., Bollella, M., Wynder, E. L., Pediatrics, 96: 985; 1995.
12. Williams, C. L., J Am Diet Assoc, 95: 1140; 1995.
13. Committee on Nutrition, American Academy of Pediatrics, Carbohydrates and Dietary Fiber,
Pediatric Nutrition Handbook, 4th ed, Kleinman, R. E., Ed, American Academy of Pediatrics,
Elk Grove Village, IL, 1998, pg 203.
14. Committee on Nutrition, American Academy of Pediatrics, Pediatrics, 86: 643; 1990.
15. Committee on Nutrition, American Academy of Pediatrics, Iron Deficiency, Pediatric Nutrition
Handbook, 4th ed, Kleinman, R. E., Ed, American Academy of Pediatrics, Elk Grove Village,
IL, 1998, pg 233.
16. Food and Nutrition Board, Institute of Medicine, Iron Deficiency Anemia: Recommended Guide-
lines for the Prevention, Detection, and Management among U.S. Children and Women of Childbearing
Age, National Academy Press, Washington, DC, 1993.
17. Food Guide Pyramid for Young Children, USDA, Center for Nutrition Policy and Promotion,
Washington, DC, 1999, Program Aid 1649. Also available at http://www.usda.gov/cnpp.
18. Food Guide Pyramid: A Guide to Daily Food Choice, USDA, Human Nutrition Service, Home and
Garden Bulletin No. 252, 1992.
19. Tips for Using the Food Guide Pyramid for Young Children 2 to 6 Years Old, USDA, Center for
Nutrition Policy and Promotion, Washington, DC, 1999, Program Aid 1647. Also available at
http://www.usda.gov/cnpp.
20. Borrud, L. G., Introduction and Overview, Design and Operation: The Continuing Survey of Food
Intakes by Individuals and the Diet and Health Knowledge Survey, 1994-96, Tippett, K. S., Cypel,
Y. S., Eds, USDA, Agricultural Research Service, NFS Report No. 96-1, December, 1997, pg 1.
21. Subar, A. F., Krebs-Smith, S. M., Cook, A., et al., Pediatrics 102: 913; 1998.
22. Krebs-Smith, S. M., Cook, A., Subar, A. F., et al., Arch Pediatr Adolesc Med, 150: 81; 1996.
23. Hampl, J. S., Betts, N. M., Benes, B. A., J Am Diet Assoc, 98: 1418; 1998.
24. Guenther, P. M., Cleveland, L. E., Ingwersen, L. A., Questionnaire Development and Data
Collection Procedures, Design and Operation: The Continuing Survey of Food Intakes by Individuals
and the Diet and Health Knowledge Survey, 1994-96, Tippett, K. S., Cypel, Y. S., Eds, USDA,
Agricultural Research Service, NFS Report No. 96-1, December, 1997, pg 42.
2705_frame_C08 Page 295 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:15 PM
25. Nutrition Insights, Insight 9, October, 1998, issued by the Center for Nutrition Policy and
Promotion, USDA, http://www.usda.gov/cnpp (accessed July 21, 1999).
26. Federal Interagency Forum on Child and Family Statistics, America’s Children: Key National
Indicators of Well-Being, 1999, Federal Interagency Forum On Child and Family Statistics,
Washington, DC, US Government Printing Office, p 79. The report is also available on the
World Wide Web: http://childstats.gov.
27. Harnack, L., Stang, J., Story, M., J Am Diet Assoc, 99: 436; 1999.
28. USDA, Agricultural Research Service, Food and Nutrient Intakes by Children 1994-96, 1998, 1999,
Online, ARS Food Surveys Research Group, available on the “Products” page at
http://www.barc.usda.gov/bhnrc/foodsurvey/home.htm (accessed December 22, 1999).
29. Food and Nutrition Board, National Research Council, Diet and Health: Implications for Reducing
Chronic Disease Risk, Washington, DC, Government Printing Office, 1989.
30. American Dietetic Association, J Am Diet Assoc, 99: 93; 1999.
31. Committee on Nutrition, American Academy of Pediatrics, Feeding from Age 1 Year to Ado-
lescence, Pediatric Nutrition Handbook, 4th ed, Kleinman, R. E., Ed, American Academy of
Pediatrics, Elk Grove, IL, 1998, pg 125.
32. Domel, S. B., Baranowski, T., Davis, H., et al., J Nutr Educ, 25: 345; 1993.
33. Domel, S. B., Baranowski, T., Davis, H., et al., J Am Coll Nutr, 13: 33; 1994.
34. Wolfe, W. S., Campbell, C. C., J Am Diet Assoc, 93: 1280; 1993.
35. Nicklas, T. A., J Am Diet Assoc, 95: 1127; 1995.
36. Freedman, D. S., Srinivasan, S. R., Valdez, R. A., et al., Pediatrics, 99: 420; 1997.
37. Troiano, R. P., Flegal, K. M., Pediatrics, 101: 497; 1998.
38. Birch, L. L., Fisher, J. O., Pediatrics, 101: 539; 1998.
39. Hill, J. O., Trowbridge, F. L., Pediatrics 101: 570; 1998.
40. Birch, L. L., Johnson, S. L., Fisher, J. A., Young Child, 50: 71; 1995.
41. Birch, L. L., J Nutr Educ, 11: 189; 1979.
42. Calfas, K., Sallis, J., Nader, P., J Dev Behav Ped, 12: 185; 1991.
43. Domel, S. B., Baranowski, T., Leonard, S. B., et al., Prev Med, 22: 866; 1993.
44. Domel, S. B., Thompson, W. O., Davis, H. C., et al., Health Educ Res: Theory Prac, 11: 299; 1996.
45. Fisher, J. O., Birch, L. L., J Am Diet Assoc, 95: 759; 1995.
46. Birch, L. L., Bull Psychonomic Soc, 29: 265; 1991.
47. Cowart, B. J., Psychol Bull, 90: 43; 1981.
48. Birch, L. L., J Am Diet Assoc, 87: S36; 1987.
49. Sullivan, S. A., Birch, L. L., Pediatrics, 93: 271; 1994.
50. Birch, L. L., Marlin, D. W., Appetite: J Intake Res, 3: 353; 1982.
51. Birch, L. L., McPhee, L., Shoba, B. C., et al., Appetite, 9: 171; 1987.
52. Sullivan, S. A., Birch, L. L., Dev Psychol, 26: 546; 1990.
53. Lytle, L., Achterberg, C., J Nutr Educ, 27: 250; 1995.
54. Birch, L. L., Zimmerman, S. I., Hind, H., Child Dev, 51: 856; 1980.
55. Birch, L. L., Birch, D., Marlin, D. W., et al., Appetite: J Intake Res, 3: 125; 1982.
56. Birch, L. L., Marlin, D. W., Rotter, J., Child Dev, 55: 431; 1984.
57. Newman, J., Taylor A., J Exp Child Psychol, 64: 200; 1992.
58. Hendy, H. M., Ann Behav Med, 21: 1; 1999.
59. Nahikian-Nelms, M., J Am Diet Assoc, 97: 505; 1997.
60. Fomon, S. J., Nutrition of Normal Infants, Mosby-Yearbook, St. Louis, MO, 1993, pg 114.
61. Adair, L. S., J Am Diet Assoc, 84: 543; 1984.
62. Birch, L. L., Deysher, M., Learning and Motivation, 16: 341; 1985.
63. Birch, L. L., Deysher, M., Appetite, 7: 323; 1986.
64. Birch, L. L., Johnson, S. L., Andresen, G., et al., N Eng J Med 324: 232; 1991.
65. Birch, L. L., McPhee, L., Shoba, B. C., et al., Learning and Motivation, 18: 301; 1987.
66. Johnson, S. L., Birch, L. L., Pediatrics, 94: 653; 1994.
67. Klesges, R. C., Coates, T. J., Brown, G., et al., J Appl Behav Anal, 16: 371; 1983.
68. Satter, E., How to Get Your Kids to Eat … But Not Too Much, Bull Publishing, Palo Alto, CA, 1987.
69. Satter, E. M., J Am Diet Assoc, 86: 352; 1986.
70. Dennison, B. A., J Am Coll Nutr, 15(5): 4S; 1996.
2705_frame_C08 Page 296 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:15 PM
71. Hyams, J. S., Etienne, N. L., Leichtner, A. M., et al., Pediatrics, 82: 64; 1988.
72. Committee on Nutrition, American Academy of Pediatrics, AAP News, February, 1991, http:/
/www.aap.org/policy/899.html (accessed December 29, 1999).
73. Smith, M. M., Lifshitz, F., Pediatrics, 93: 438; 1994.
74. Dennison, B. A., Rockwell, H. L., Baker, S. L., Pediatrics, 99: 15; 1997.
75. Olson, R. E., J Am Diet Assoc, 100: 28; 2000.
76. Satter, E., J Am Diet Assoc, 100: 32; 2000.
77. Dwyer, J., J Am Diet Assoc, 100: 36; 2000.
78. Krebs, N. F., Johnson, S. L., J Am Diet Assoc, 100: 37; 2000.
79. Lytle, L. A., J Am Diet Assoc, 100: 39; 2000.
80. Van Horn, L., J Am Diet Assoc, 100: 41; 2000.
81. Pugliese, M. T., Weyman-Daum, M., Moses, N., et al., Pediatrics, 80: 175; 1987.
82. Niinikoski, H., Lapinleimu, H., Viikari, J., et al., Pediatrics, 99: 687; 1997.
83. Niinikoski, H., Viikari, J., Rönnemaa, T., et al., Pediatrics, 100: 810; 1997.
84. The Writing Group for the DISC Collaborative Research Group, JAMA, 273: 1429; 1995.
85. Obarzanek, E., Hunsberger, S. A., Van Horn, L., et al., Pediatrics, 100: 51; 1997.
86. Luepker, R. V., Perry, C. L., McKinlay, S. M., et al., JAMA, 275: 768; 1996.
87. Birch, L. L., Child Development, 51: 489; 1980.
88. Rolls, B. J., Engell, D., Birch, L. L., J Am Diet Assoc, 100: 232; 2000.
89. Pollitt, E., J Am Diet Assoc, 95: 1134; 1995.
90. Pollitt, E., Cueto, S., Jacoby, E. R., Am J Clin Nutr, 67: 779S; 1998.
91. Grantham-McGregor, S. M., Chang, S., Walker, S. P., Am J Clin Nutr, 67: 785S; 1998.
92. Dwyer, J. T., Ebzery, M. K., Nicklas, T. A., et al., Fam Econ Nutr Rev, 11: 3; 1998.
93. Nicklas, T. A., Bao, W., Webber, L. S., et al., J Am Diet Assoc, 93: 886; 1993.
94. Gleason, P., Am J Clin Nutr, 61(1): 213S; 1995.
95. Siega-Riz, A. M., Popkin, B. M., Carson, T., Am J Clin Nutr, 67: 748S; 1998.
96. Dwyer, J., Am J Clin Nutr, 61: 173S; 1995.
97. School Lunch Program — Frequently Asked Questions, http://www.fns.usda.gov/cnd/
Lunch/AboutLunch/faqs.htm (accessed May 20, 1999).
98. School Breakfast Program — Frequently Asked Questions, http://www.fns.usda.gov/cnd/
Breakfast/AboutBFast/faqs.htm (accessed May 20, 1999).
99. Burghardt, J. A., Am J Clin Nutr, 61(1): 182S; 1995.
100. Burghardt, J. A., Devaney, B. L., Gordon, A. R., Am J Clin Nutr, 61(1): 252S; 1995.
101. Baranowski, T., Smith, M., Hearn, M. D., et al., J Am Coll Nutr, 16: 216; 1997.
102. Hearn, M. D., Baranowski, T., Baranowski, J., et al., J Health Educ, 29: 26; 1998.
103. Baranowski, T., Domel, S., Gould, R., et al., J Nutr Educ, 25: 114; 1993.
104. Kirby, S., Baranowski, T., Reynolds, K., et al., J Nutr Educ, 27: 261; 1995.
105. Resnicow, K., Davis-Hearn, M., Smith, M., et al., Health Psychol, 16: 272; 1997.
106. Baranowski, T., Davis, M., Resnicow, K., et al., Health Educ Behav, 27: 96; 2000.
107. Resnicow, K., Davis, M., Smith, M., et al., Am J Public Health 88: 250; 1998.
108. Luepker, R. V., Perry, C. L., Osganian, V., et al., J Nutr Biochem, 9: 525; 1998.
109. Perry, C. L., Bishop, D. B., Taylor, G., et al., Am J Public Health, 88: 603; 1998.
110. Reynolds, K. D., Franklin, F. A., Binkley, D., et al., Prev Med, 30(4): 309; 2000.
111. Nicklas, T. A., Johnson, C. C., Myers, L., et al., J School Health, 68: 248; 1998.
112. Donnelly, J. E., Jacobsen, D. J., Whatley, J. E., et al., Obesity Res, 4: 229; 1996.
113. Resnicow, K., Ann N Y Acad Sci, 699: 154; 1993.
114. Birch, L. L., Dev Psychol, 26: 515; 1990.
115. Kennedy, E., Prev Med, 25: 56; 1996.
116. Centers for Disease Control and Prevention. Guidelines for School Health Programs to Promote
Lifelong Healthy Eating. MMWR. No. RR-9, 1996.
117. Berenson, G., Arbeit, M., Hunter, S., et al., Ann N Y Acad Sci, 623: 299; 1991.
118. Kolbe, L. J., Prev Med, 22: 544; 1993.
119. Contento, I. R., Manning, A. D., Shannon, B., J Nutr Educ, 24: 247; 1992.
120. Contento, I., Balch, G. I., Bronner, Y. L., et al., J Nutr Educ, 27: 298; 1995.
121. Baxter, S. D., J Sch Health, 68: 111; 1998.
2705_frame_C08 Page 297 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:15 PM
122. Gittelsohn, J., Evans, M., Story, M., et al., Am J Clin Nutr, 69(4): 767S; 1999.
123. Lytle, L., Nutrition Education for School-aged Children: A Review of Research. USDA, Food and
Consumer Service, Office of Analysis and Evaluation, Alexandria, VA, 1994.
124. Molnar, A., Sponsored Schools and Commercialized Classrooms: Schoolhouse Commercializing Trends
in the 1990s, Center for the Analysis of Commercialism in Education (CACE), University of
Wisconsin-Milwaukee, 1998, http://www.uwm.edu/Dept/CACE/.
125. The Surgeon General’s Report on Nutrition and Health, US Dept of Health and Human
Services, Public Health Service, Washington, DC, DHHS (PHS) publication 88-50210, 1988.
126. US Department of Health and Human Services, Healthy People 2010, 2nd ed, US Government
Printing Office, Superintendent of Documents, Washington, DC, November, 2000. Available
online at http://www.health.gov/healthypeople (accessed July 3, 2000).
127. American Dietetic Association, J Am Diet Assoc, 100: 108; 2000.
128. American Dietetic Association, J Am Diet Assoc, 96: 913; 1996.
129. American Dietetic Association, Society for Nutrition Education, and American School Food
Service Association, J Am Diet Assoc, 95: 367; 1995.
130. Birch, L. L., Nutr Rev, 50: 249; 1992.
131. Dietz, W. H., Pediatrics, 101: 518; 1998.
132. Andersen, R. E., Crespo, C. J., Bartlett, S. J., et al., JAMA, 279: 938; 1998.
133. Kotz, K., Story, M., J Am Diet Assoc, 94: 1296; 1994.
134. Kanarek, R. B., Nutr Rev, 52: 173; 1994.
135. Wolraich, M. L., Lindgren, S. D., Stumbo, P. J., et al., N Eng J Med, 330: 301; 1994.
136. Wolraich, M. L., Wilson, D. B., White, J. W., JAMA, 274: 1617; 1995.
137. American Dietetic Association, J Am Diet Assoc, 98: 580; 1998.
138. Committee on Nutrition, American Academy of Pediatrics, Adolescent Nutrition, Pediatric
Nutrition Handbook, 4th ed, Kleinman, R. E., Ed, American Academy of Pediatrics, Elk Grove
Village, IL, 1998, pg 141.
139. Neumark-Sztainer, D., Story, M., Perry, C., et al., J Am Diet Assoc, 99: 929; 1999.
140. Neumark-Sztainer, D., Story, M., Resnick, M.D., et al., J Am Diet Assoc, 98: 1449; 1998.
141. Kann, L., Kinchen, S. A., Williams, B. I., et al., Youth Risk Behavior Surveillance — United States, 1997,
In CDC Surveillance Summaries, MMWR 47 (No. SS-3), 1998; available at http://www.cdc.gov/.
142. World Health Organization, Health and Health Behaviour among Young People. WHO Policy
Series: Health policy for children and adolescents. Issue 1. International Report, 2000. Available
at http://www.nih.gov/news/pr/jan2000/nichd-31.htm and
http://www.ruhbc.ed.ac.uk/hbsc/download/hbsc.pdf (accessed February 7, 2000).
143. Meyer, M. K., J Am Diet Assoc, 100, 100, 2000.
144. French, S. A., Story, M., Jeffery, R. W., et al., J Am Diet Assoc, 97: 1008; 1997.
145. Frank, G., Nutrition for Teens, Promoting Teen Health: Linking Schools, Health Organizations, and
Community, Henderson, A., Champlin, S., Evashwick, W., Eds, Sage Publications, Thousand
Oaks, CA, 1998, pg 28.
146. American Dietetic Association, J Am Diet Assoc, 97: 1317; 1997.
147. Sanders, T. A. G., Reddy, S. Am J Clin Nutr, 59: 1176S; 1994.
148. Havas, S., Heimendinger, J., Reynolds, K., et al, J Am Diet Assoc, 94: 32; 1994.
149. Subar, A. F., Heimendinger, J., Patterson, B. H., et al., Am J Health Promot, 9: 352; 1995.
150. Havas, S., Heimendinger, J., Damron, D., et al., Public Health Reports, 110: 68; 1995.
151. Stedronsky, F. M., J Am Diet Assoc, 98: 758; 1998.
152. Rickard, K. A., Gallahue, D. L., Fruen, G. E., et al., J Am Diet Assoc, 95: 1121; 1995.
153. Bronner, Y. L., J Am Diet Assoc, 96: 891; 1996.
154. http://www.fns.usda.gov/tn (accessed January 29, 2000).
155. Perry, C. L., Stone, E. J., Parcel, G. S., et al., J Sch Health, 60: 406; 1990.
156. Nader, P. R., Stone, E. J., Lytle, L. A., et al., Arch Pediatr Adolesc Med, 153: 695; 1999.
157. www.fightbac.org (accessed January 11, 2000).
158. Snyder, O., P., Hospitality Institute of Technology and Management, 1998,
http://www.hi-tm.com/Documents/Safehands.html (accessed January 11, 2000).
159. American Dietetic Association, J Am Diet Assoc, 96; 184; 1996.
160. Lucas, B., Normal Nutrition from Infancy through Adolescence, Handbook of Pediatric Nutrition,
Queen, P. M., Lang, C. E., Eds, Gaithersburg, MD, 1993, pg 145.
2705_frame_C08 Page 298 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:15 PM
2705_frame_C09 Page 299 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:16 PM
9
The Health-Promoting Diet throughout Life: Adults
Marsha Read
Introduction
The normal diet for adults is based on the need to provide sufficient nutrients to sustain
life and an appropriate balance of nutrient intake to support optimal health. The first
Surgeon General’s Report on Nutrition and Health in 19881 brought together a substantial
body of research that documented that diet, aside from providing the essential nutrients
for daily functioning, was a key factor with respect to chronic diseases such as coronary
heart disease, cancer, diabetes, and obesity. The underlying premise of the various dietary
guidelines/recommendations that have been developed has been to provide adequate
nutrient intake while avoiding dietary patterns that might place an individual at greater
risk for chronic disease. The following subsections describe the most commonly used
dietary guidelines/recommendations, guidelines for counseling healthy adults, informa-
tion on current food and nutrient consumption patterns of adults, and current research
with respect to health implications of inappropriate macronutrient intake.
0-8493-2705-9/01/$0.00+$1.50
© 2002 by CRC Press LLC 299
2705_frame_C09 Page 300 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:16 PM
TABLE 9.1
1980 U.S. Dietary Guidelines
Eat a wide variety of foods
Maintain ideal weight
Avoid too much fat, saturated fat, and cholesterol
Eat foods with adequate starch and fiber
Avoid too much sugar
Avoid too much sodium
If you drink alcohol, do so in moderation
TABLE 9.2
2000 U.S. Dietary Guidelinesa
Aim for Fitness
Aim for a healthy weight
Be physically active each day
Build a Healthy Base
Let the Pyramid guide your food choices
Eat a variety of grains daily, especially whole grains
Eat a variety of fruits and vegetables daily
Keep food safe to eat
Choose Sensibly
Choose a diet low in saturated fat and cholesterol, and moderate in total fat
Choose beverages and foods that limit your intake of sugars
Choose and prepare foods with less salt
If you drink alcoholic beverages, do so in moderation
a www.ars.usda.gov/dgac/dgacguideexp.pdf
a Healthy Base, and Choose Sensibly as the key constructs2 (Table 9.2). These current
dietary guidelines continue to emphasize sensible dietary choices, variety, and moderation.
From the first edition of the guidelines to the current, the focus has been on a variety
of foods to supply adequate nutrient intake, increased complex carbohydrate consump-
tion, moderate fat intake, and moderate alcohol consumption if you drink. A new concept
added to the 2000 guidelines deals with the issue of food safety. This introduces a new
concept on diet and health and reflects the current issues with respect to maintaining a
safe food supply from production to consumption. The concept “Keep Food Safe” adds
discussion on prevention of foodborne illness consistent with the concerns arising from
several recent food poisoning outbreaks in the United States.
Bread, Cereal
Rice & Pasta
Group
6-11
SERVINGS
FIGURE 9.1
USDA Food Guide Pyramid.
Advantages:
• The pyramid depicts foods, which makes it easier for consumers to relate to
rather than nutrients and numbers such as recommended dietary allowances
(RDAs).
• The pyramid is relatively simple and easy to read and to remember.
• The pyramid food groups and recommended servings from each food group are
likely to represent a variety of foods that can subsequently provide adequate
nutrient intake.
• The pyramid food groups allow for personal choice within a food group and
thereby supports individual food choices.
Disadvantages:
• Applicability of the food groups within the pyramid to alternate dietary patterns
such as vegetarianism and ethnic food patterns may be unclear.
• The Food Guide Pyramid does not address the dietary guideline regarding
alcohol intake.
2705_frame_C09 Page 302 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:16 PM
TABLE 9.3
Meal Plans Based on the Food Guide Pyramid
Breakfast
1 cup Raisin Bran cereal
4 oz skim milk
1/2 grapefruit
Lunch
Turkey sandwich with mustard
2 pieces of whole wheat bread
3 ounces lean turkey
1 tablespoon mustard
Carrot sticks (1 medium)
Apple (1 medium)
Snack
1 cup low fat yogurt
1/2 sesame bagel
Dinner
3 ounces grilled salmon
Green salad (romaine, iceberg lettuce, tomato, cucumber)
1 tablespoon low-fat dressing
1/2 cup green beans
1 cup wild rice
2800 kcalorie Menu (Upper Serving Recommendations from Each Food Group)
Breakfast
1 bowl oatmeal cereal with 1/4 cup raisins
4 ounces skim milk
2 pieces whole wheat toast
2 teaspoons margarine
1 tablespoon jam
4 ounces orange juice
Lunch
1 peanut butter and jelly sandwich
2 pieces whole wheat bread
1 tablespoon jelly
2 tablespoons peanut butter
Apple (1 medium)
Celery sticks (1 stalk)
Snacks (a.m. and p.m.)
1 ounce low fat cheese
4 crackers
banana
plain bagel
Dinner
3 ounces grilled chicken breast
1/2 cup peas
1 cup herb rice
Green salad (romaine, iceberg lettuce, sliced tomatoes, cucumber)
1 tablespoon of low-fat dressing
Melon slices
Dinner roll
2705_frame_C09 Page 303 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:16 PM
• Interpretation of combination foods as pizza, stews, etc., is not clear within the
framework of the pyramid food groups.
• Dietary adequacy may not be obtained if individuals make poor choices within
the pyramid food groups.
While there is only one Food Guide Pyramid published by the U.S. Department of
Agriculture, variations of the pyramid have arisen. These variations have been constructed
to help Americans with alternative dietary preferences build a healthy dietary pattern.
These are described in other sections of this handbook (see Section 11 on Guidelines).
Recommended Dietary Allowances (RDA), Estimated Safe and Adequate Daily Dietary
Intakes (ESADDIs), Daily Reference Intake (DRI), and Daily Values (DV)
The most common reference standard for nutrient intake has been the recommended
dietary allowance (RDA). This standard was first established by the Food and Nutrition
Board in 1941, with the most recent edition in 1989.7 The original intent was to review and
revise the RDAs every four to five years, taking into account current research. The constructs
used in formulating a specific RDA were: (a) an estimation of how much of each essential
nutrient the average healthy person requires to maintain health and how those require-
ments vary among people; (b) an increase in the average requirement to cover the needs
of almost all members of the population, based on a bell curve distribution; (c) an increase
in the RDA again to cover cooking losses and inefficient body utilization, as well as provide
for cases of greater nutrient need such as in pregnancy and infancy; and (d) use of scientific
judgment in establishing the RDA. Three central premises underlie the RDAs:
For nutrients in which scientific evidence provides support for their essentiality but are
insufficient to establish an RDA, there are estimated safe and adequate daily dietary
intakes (ESADDIs). Most ESADDIs are shown as a range of intake values that represent
the upper and lower limits of safe intake. ESADDIs are established for biotin, copper,
manganese, and molybdenum.7
The current iteration of recommended intakes includes the dietary reference intake
(DRI). DRI encompasses four types of nutrient recommendations for healthy individuals:
adequate intake (AI); estimated average intake (EAR); recommended dietary allowance
(RDA); and tolerable upper intake levels (UL).8,9 AI is a nutrient recommendation based
on observed or experimentally determined approximation of nutrient intake by a group
(or groups) of healthy people when sufficient scientific evidence is not available to calculate
an RDA or an EAR. The EAR is the average requirement of a nutrient for healthy indi-
viduals in which a functional or clinical assessment has been conducted and measures of
adequacy have been made at a specified level of dietary intake. The EAR is an amount of
intake of a nutrient at which approximately 50% of subjects would have their needs met
and 50% would not. The EAR is intended to be used for assessing nutrient adequacy of
populations and not individuals. The new RDA is the amount of a nutrient needed to
meet the requirements of nearly all (97 to 98%) of the healthy population of individuals
2705_frame_C09 Page 304 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:16 PM
TABLE 9.4
WHO Dietary Recommendations
Total Energy: sufficient to support normal growth, physical activity, and body weight
(body mass index = 20-22)
Total Fat: 15-30% of total energy
Saturated fatty acids: 0-10% total energy
Polyunsaturated fatty acids: 3-7% total energy
Dietary cholesterol: 0-300 milligrams per day
Total Carbohydrate: 55-75% total energy
Complex carbohydrates: 50-75% total energy
Dietary fiber: 27-40 grams/day
Refined sugars: 0-10% total energy
Protein: 10-15% total energy
Salt: upper limit of 6 grams/day (no lower limit set)
for whom it was developed. An RDA for a nutrient should serve as an intake goal for
individuals and not as a standard of adequacy for diets of populations. This is different
than the previous or old RDA. UL values are established in cases where there is adequate
scientific evidence to suggest an upper level of intake that is consistent with adverse or
toxic reactions. The UL represents the maximum level of intake for a nutrient that will
not cause adverse effects in almost all of the population ingesting that amount.
The daily values (DV) are used as standards in food labeling. DVs provide reference
intake standards for nutrients that have an RDA, in which case they are referred to as
reference daily intakes (RDIs), and for nutrients for which no RDA exists, in this case referred
to as daily reference values (DRVs). DRVs are established for fat, saturated fat, cholesterol,
carbohydrate, dietary fiber, sodium, and potassium. As a rule the RDIs are greater than the
RDA for specific nutrients and provide a large margin of safety. The term RDI replaces the
term U.S. Recommended Daily Allowances (USRDAs) used on earlier food labels.10
Food Labels
Food labeling became mandatory in 1993 with the enactment of the Nutrition Labeling
and Education Act (NLEA).10 The legislation required food labeling on most foods with
the exceptions of low nutrient-dense foods such as coffee, spices, and ready-to-eat foods
prepared on site. Nutrition information remains voluntary on many raw foods. The nutri-
tion facts panel on food labels provides information to help the consumer make more
informed choices, including information on calories per serving, calories from fat, satu-
rated fat and cholesterol, and protein among other nutrients (Table 9.5).
TABLE 9.5
Nutrition Facts Panel Informationa
Serving size (based on amounts commonly used)
Number of servings per container
Kcalories per serving
Kcalories from fat
% Daily value of total fat, saturated fat, cholesterol, sodium, total carbohydrate, dietary fiber, sugars, protein,
vitamin A, vitamin C, calcium and iron
Reference values for total fat, saturated fat, cholesterol, sodium, total carbohydrate, and fiber
Kcaloric conversion guide for protein, fat, and carbohydrates
a www.healthfinder.gov/searchoptions/topicsaz.htm — search for food labels.
• Eat foods from plant sources, such as breads, cereals, grain products, rice,
pasta, or beans several times each day.
2. Limit your intake of high-fat foods, particularly from animal sources.
• Choose foods low in fat.
• Limit consumption of meats, especially high-fat meats.
3. Be physically active: achieve and maintain a healthy weight.
• Be at least moderately active for 30 minutes or more on most days of the week.
• Stay within your healthy weight range.
4. Limit consumption of alcoholic beverages, if you drink at all.
The National Cancer Institute endorses the following guidelines, which reflect in large
part the recommendations of the American Cancer Society:13
1. Avoid obesity.
2. Reduce fat intake to 30% of total energy intake as a start. Then consider a
reduction closer to 20% of total energy intake if at high risk, such as a family
history of cancer.
3. Eat more higher-fiber foods, such as fruits, vegetables, and whole-grain cereals.
4. Include foods rich in vitamins A, E, and C, as well as carotenoids, in the daily diet.
5. If alcohol is consumed, do not drink excessively.
6. Use moderation when consuming salt-cured, smoked, and nitrite-cured foods.
There are also guidelines set forth by the National Cholesterol Education Program and
the American Heart Association (refer to the section on cardiovascular disease).
For adults:
Women wt in kg × 23
Men wt in kg × 24
• Seated work with no option of moving around and little or no strenuous leisure
activity (PAL factor = 1.4 to 1.5 × REE)
• Seated work with ability or requirement to move around but little or no strenuous
leisure activity (PAL factor = 1.6 to 1.7 × REE)
• Standing work (housework, shop clerks) (PAL factor 1.8 to 1.9 × REE)
• Significant amounts of sport or strenuous leisure activity (30 to 60 minutes four
to five/week) (PAL factor + 0.3 increment over 1.8 to 1.9 × REE)
• Strenuous work or highly active leisure (PAL factor 2.0 to 2.4)
1. Protein: by converting grams of protein into its caloric equivalent, the percent
of protein from total calories can be derived.
2705_frame_C09 Page 307 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:16 PM
2. Fat: the recommendation for fat is 30% or less of total energy requirements.
3. Carbohydrate: the percent of calories that will come from carbohydrate will be
the difference between total energy requirements minus the percent of kcalories
from protein and fat.
Energy Intake
With respect to total energy intake, for adult men, caloric consumption consistently exceeds
that of adult women by approximately 400 kcalories. With one age group exception (ages
>70 years), men consumed in excess of 2000 kcalories on average, while women consistently
averaged less than 2000 kcalories per day. Fat was contributing slightly above the recom-
mended 30% of kcalories for both men and women. Adult men derive somewhat more
kcalories from alcohol compared to women, but women are considerably higher in their
carbohydrate intake than men. Men consumed not quite a third of their total energy intake
from foods consumed away from home. For women, the contribution of energy from foods
eaten away from home is one fourth of their total energy intake. Men were more likely
than women to consume a diet that met 100% of the RDA. Table 9.6 provides energy intake
data on age cohorts for adult men and women based on the 1994-96 Continuing Survey of
Food Intake for Individuals (CSFII). Foods eaten away from home are contributing approx-
imately 30 to 40% of total kcalories consumed by young adults. The percent of kcalories
derived from foods eaten away from home decreases with age (Table 9.7).
TABLE 9.6
Total Energy Intake and Sources of Energy for Adult Men and Womena
Age Males Females
20–29 yrs 2821 1841
30–39 yrs 2665 1710
40–49 yrs 2435 1682
50–59 yrs 2270 1600
60–69 yrs 2072 1489
70 > yrs 1834 1384
20 < yrs 2455 1646
Percent of Individuals Meeting 100% of the 1989 RDA for Energy (2-Day Average)
TABLE 9.7
Contribution (% kcal) of Breakfast, Snacks, and Foods
Consumed Away from Home to Total Energy Intake (1
day) 1994–1996; M = males; F = femalesa
Foods Away
Breakfast Snacks From Home
Age M F M F M F
20–29 yrs 14.2 16.0 18.2 17.0 40.0 34.3
30–39 yrs 15.5 16.9 15.5 16.9 31.4 26.6
40–49 yrs 16.3 16.9 15.5 17.1 29.4 25.4
50–59 yrs 18.2 19.1 15.4 15.2 26.7 23.0
60–69 yrs 20.9 19.9 15.0 15.1 20.0 17.6
70 > yrs 23.8 23.0 12.2 12.3 14.2 12.5
20 < yrs 17.1 18.2 15.7 15.9 29.4 24.5
a http://www.barc.usda.gov/bhnrc/foodsurvey/home.htm
recommendation. Foods eaten away from home contributed 30.9% of the total fat intake
for men and 26.2% for women (Table 9.8). Cholesterol intake is considerably less for
women than men. Women of all age groups consumed under 300 mg/day, whereas, adult
men generally consumed slightly more than 300 mg/day on average (Table 9.10). More
2705_frame_C09 Page 309 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:16 PM
TABLE 9.8
Total Protein, Carbohydrate, and Fat Intakes (gm)a
Protein Intake Carbohydrate Fat
(gm) (gm) (gm)
Age M F M F M F
20–29 yrs 104.1 65.9 344.9 241.6 103.3 65.9
30–39 yrs 102.7 65.3 322.3 218.8 102.7 63.2
40–49 yrs 95.3 63.5 294.7 213.8 95.3 63.5
50–59 yrs 90.3 64.1 273.1 201.5 90.3 59.4
60–69 yrs 83.5 60.4 252.5 188.7 83.5 56.2
70 > yrs 72.9 56.6 239.2 183.5 72.9 49.2
20 < yrs 94.9 63.8 298.8 211.7 94.9 50.5
M = males, F = females
a http://www.barc.usda.gov/bhnrc/foodsurvey/home.htm
TABLE 9.9
Fiber Intake (gm)a
Age M F
20–29 yrs 18.3 13.2
30–39 yrs 19.4 13.6
40–49 yrs 18.3 14.0
50–59 yrs 18.5 14.5
60–69 yrs 18.5 14.2
70 > yrs 17.7 14.2
20 < yrs 18.6 13.9
M = males, F = females
a http://www.barc.usda.gov/bhnrc/foodsurvey/home.htm
adults consumed a diet consistent with the recommended cholesterol intake (55.1% of
men; 79.4% of women) than for total fat, where only 29.4% of adult men and 36.8% of
adult women maintained a diet within 30% of the total energy intake. The intake of the
types of fat — saturated, polyunsaturated, monounsaturated, and cholesterol is presented
in Table 9.10.
TABLE 9.10
Intake of Saturated Fatty Acids, Monounsaturated Fatty Acids,
Polyunsaturated Fatty Acids, and Cholesterola,b
Saturated Monounsaturated Polyunsaturated
Fatty Acids Fatty Acids Fatty Acids Cholesterol
Age M F M F M F M F
20–29 yrs 35.4 22.3 40.1 25.2 19.6 13.5 348 219
30–39 yrs 35.3 21.3 39.4 24.1 20.1 12.8 362 217
40–49 yrs 30.6 21.0 35.6 24.0 18.3 13.6 331 222
50–59 yrs 28.6 19.1 33.9 22.6 18.1 13.1 332 200
60–69 yrs 25.9 17.9 30.1 20.8 16.5 12.1 307 218
70 > yrs 22.8 15.9 26.4 18.7 13.9 10.6 270 188
20 < yrs 31.3 20.0 36.8 23.0 18.4 12.8 331 213
Percent of Individuals Meeting the Recommendations for Total Fat, Saturated Fat, and
Cholesterol
Total Saturated
Fat Fatty Acids Cholesterol
Age M F M F M F
20–29 yrs 29.3 40.1 34.1 42.3 63.1 77.0
30–39 yrs 28.1 35.9 30.7 39.7 62.6 80.9
40–49 yrs 27.4 30.5 31.7 38.5 53.5 76.0
50–59 yrs 28.0 36.5 36.2 46.0 54.2 80.7
60–69 yrs 33.9 38.0 42.1 46.1 58.1 78.7
70 > yrs 34.4 42.2 41.6 47.9 67.1 84.5
20 > yrs 29.4 36.8 34.5 42.7 55.1 79.4
M = males, F = females
a Saturated fatty acids, monounsaturated fatty acids, polyunsaturated fatty acids
in grams; cholesterol in milligrams.
b http://www.barc.usda.gov/bhnrc/foodsurvey/home.htm
TABLE 9.11
Incidence of Overweight (%)a
Age Men Women
20–29 yrs 21.5 22.1
30–39 yrs 32.3 27.4
40–49 yrs 37.0 36.1
50–59 yrs 39.9 37.8
> 60 yrs 40.7 33.4
< 20 yrs 31.8 31.7
a http://www.barc.usda.gov/bhnrc/foodsurvey/home.htm
Protein Supplements
Protein supplements are quite common among athletes and physically active adults as
part of their strength training regimens.35 Bucci argues that while there is very little
research that documents the benefits of protein supplementation, high protein diets are
safe.35 However, the amount recommended for endurance athletes is 70 gm/day, and for
strength athletes 112 to 178 gm. The lower range of these recommendations is clearly
within the normal intake of American men. This argues against the need for further protein
supplementation.
ments concluded that there is little research on which to support making amino acid
supplement recommendations, and some amino acid supplementation (serine and proline)
can have adverse health effects. Consequently, the panel concluded that no level of amino
acid supplementation may be considered safe at this time.36
men consumed on average 8 servings of grain products per day, which is approximately
mid-range of the 6 to 11 servings of grain products recommended by the Food Guide
Pyramid. Women averaged six servings from grain products. However, for both men and
women, only one of these servings was from whole grain products. The health benefits
of a higher fiber diet are addressed in other relevant sections of this handbook.
The other carbohydrate intake issue is the consumption of refined sugar, which contrib-
utes calories but little other nutritive value to the diet. The 1994-96 CSFII data revealed
that approximately 14% of the average energy intake for adult males was from added
sugars. For women, the caloric contribution from added sugars was slightly higher at
approximately 15%. Foods such as breads, cakes, soft drinks, jam, and ice cream were
contributing to the discretionary sugar intake. In 1994 to 1996, soft drink consumption
out-paced milk and coffee, and approximately 75% of the soft drink consumption is of
the sugar-sweetened variety.43 During the last decade, consumption of snack foods such
as cakes, cookies, pastries, and pies has increased 15%, likely contributing to the high
intake of discretionary sugar.43 These data are in contrast to the importance consumers
report they place on a diet moderate in sugar intake. A majority (slightly over 50%) of
adults surveyed in the 1994-96 CSFII indicated it was very important to consume a diet
moderate in sugar.
Summary
Counseling the normal healthy American adult should focus on dietary intake patterns
that promote health and reduce risk for chronic disease, i.e., diet recommendations should
follow the U.S. Dietary Guidelines. Therefore, consistent with the 2000 edition of the U.S.
Dietary Guidelines, the focus on nutrition counseling should be:
Choose sensibly.
• Choose a diet low in saturated fat and cholesterol and moderate in total fat.
Over-consumption of discretionary fat is common with adult Americans.
Counseling that helps identify small dietary changes that can be made to
reduce total fat, saturated fat and cholesterol intake is appropriate.
• Choose beverages and foods that limit your intake of sugars. Nutrition coun-
seling for adults should help clients identify sources of sugars in their diet,
particularly the sugar contribution that might be coming from soft drinks.
Not only are soft drinks widely promoted in the American culture, but pop-
ular serving sizes range from 8 to 16 to as high as 32 ounces.
• Choose and prepare foods with less salt. The concerns of a high salt intake
are dealt with in other sections of this handbook, which also indicate the need
to help adults recognize foods that are contributing to an excessive salt intake.
• If you drink alcoholic beverages, do so in moderation. The average American
adult needs to be cognizant of his/her caloric intake. Low nutrient dense
alcohol calories may be inconsistent with the caloric intake needed to achieve/
maintain a healthy weight. This fact needs to be discussed in a nutrition
counseling session.
References
1. United States Department of Health and Human Services, Public Health Service, No. 88-50210,
Surgeon General’s Report on Nutrition and Health. United States Government Printing Office,
Washington DC, 1988.
2. Dietary Guidelines for Americans 2000, www.ars.usda.gov/dgac
3. US Senate, Select Committee on Nutrition and Human Needs, US Senate, December 1977,
95th Congress — 1st Session.
2705_frame_C09 Page 316 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:16 PM
4. United States Department of Agriculture, United States Department of Health and Human
Services, Nutrition and Your Health. Dietary Guidelines for Americans. Home and Garden Bulletin
No. 232, Washington, DC, 1980.
5. United States Department of Agriculture, The Food Guide Pyramid. Home and Garden Bulletin
No. 252.a, United States Printing Office, Washington, DC, 1992.
6. Kant, A.K., Block, G., Schatzkin, A., et al., JADA 91: 1526; 1991.
7. Food and Nutrition Board, National Research Council, Recommended Dietary Allowances, 10th
ed., National Academy Press, Washington, DC, 1989.
8. Food and Nutrition Board, Institute of Medicine, Dietary Reference Intakes for Calcium, Phospho-
rus, Magnesium, Vitamin D and Fluoride, National Academy Press, Washington, DC, 1997.
9. Food and Nutrition Board, Institute of Medicine, Dietary Reference Intakes for Thiamin, Riboflavin,
Niacin, Vitamin B6, Folate, Vitamin B12, Pantothenic Acid, Biotin, and Choline. National Academy
Press, Washington, DC, 1998.
10. Food and Drug Administration, Focus on Food Labeling. Special Issue of FDA Consumer Mag-
azine, May 1993, DHHS Publication No. (FDA) 93-2262, United States Government Printing
Office, Washington, DC, 1993.
11. _________________ Nutrition Reviews, 49: 291; 1991.
12. _________________ American Cancer Society, Nutrition and Prevention,
www2.cancer.org/Prevention/index.cfm?prevention=importance.
13. Wardlaw, G. Contemporary Nutrition: Issues and Insights. 3rd ed., Brown and Benchmark, Mad-
ison, WI, 1997.
14. Shetty, P.S., Henry, C.J.K., Black, A.E., Prentice, A.M.., Eur J Clin Nutr, 1006: 11S; 1996.
15. Boyle, M.A., Morris, D.H., Community Nutrition in Action: An Entrepreneurial Approach, 2nd
ed., Wadsworth Publishing, Belmont, CA, 1999, p. 112.
16. Federation of American Societies for Experimental Biology, Third Report on Nutrition Moni-
toring in the United States, Vol. 1, United States Government Printing Office, Washington DC,
1995.
17. Centers for Disease Control and Prevention, National Diabetes Fact Sheet: National Estimate and
General Information on Diabetes in the United States, United States Department of Health and
Human Services, Centers for Disease Control and Prevention, Atlanta, GA, Nov. 1, 1977.
18. McGinnis, J.M., Foege, W.H., JAMA, 270: 2207; 1993.
19. National Institutes of Health, National Heart, Lung and Blood Institute, Clinical guidelines
on the identification, evaluation, and treatment of overweight and obesity in adults — the
evidence report, Ob Res, 6: 51S, 1998.
20. Colditz G.A., Wolf, A.M., In: Progress in Obesity Research, (Anderson, A.H., Bouchard, C., Lau,
D., Leiter, L., Mendelson, R., Eds) John Libbey & Co., 7th International Congress on Obesity,
1996.
21. Centers for Disease Control and Prevention, Update: prevalence of overweight among chil-
dren, adolescents and adults, United States, 1988-94, Mortality and Morbidity Weekly Report,
46(9), 199-202, 1997b.
22. Foreyt, J., Goodrick, K., The Lancet, 346: 134; 1995.
23. American Dietetics Association, Position of the American Dietetic Association: Weight man-
agement. JADA, 97: 71; 1997.
24. National Institutes of Health, Methods for voluntary weight loss and control, Technology Assess-
ment Conference, Bethesda, MD, 1992.
25. The Low-Carb, High-Protein Craze, Am Inst Cancer Res Newsl, Vol. 67, Spring 2000.
26. American Dietetic Association, Position of the American Dietetic Association: Very-low-calorie
weight loss diets, JADA, 90: 722; 1990.
27. Kendall, A., Levitski, D.A., Strupp, B.J., Lissner, L., Amer J Clin Nutr, 53: 1124; 1991.
28. U.C. Berkeley Wellness Letter, June, 1998.
29. Liebman, B., Nutrition Action Health Letter, July/August, 1996.
30. Rippe, J.M., Crossley, S., Ringer, R., Obesity as a chronic disease: modern medical and lifestyle
management, JADA, 98: 2: S9; 1998.
31. Ahmed, F.E., JADA, 91: 1266; 1991.
32. Chow, W.H., Gridley, G., McLaughlin, J.K., Mandel, J.S., et al., J Natl Cancer Inst, 86: 1131; 1994.
2705_frame_C09 Page 317 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:16 PM
33. Hu, J., Zhao, X.H., Parpia, B., Am J Clin Nutr, 58: 398; 1993.
34. Hegsted, D.M., J Nutr, 116: 2316; 1986.
35. Bucci, L., Nutrients as Ergogenic Aids for Sports and Exercise, CRC Press, Boca Raton, 1993.
36. Anderson, S.A., Raiten, D.J., Eds, Safety of Amino Acids Used as Supplements, Federation of
American Societies for Experimental Biology, Bethesda, MD, 1992.
37. Emken, E.A., Amer J Clin Nutr, 62: 659S; 1995.
38. Katan, M.B., Zock, P.L., Ann Rev Nutr 15: 473; 1995.
39. Shapiro, S., Amer J Clin Nutr, 66: 1011S; 1997.
40. Jenkins, D.J.A., New Engl J Med, 329: 21; 1993.
41. Munster, I.P., de Boer, H.M., Jansen, M.C., et al., Amer J Clin Nutr, 59: 626; 1994.
42. Salmeron, J., Manson, J.E., Stampfer, M.J., Coldizt, G.A., et al., JAMA, 277: 472; 1997.
43. Frazao, E., Ed, America’s Eating Habits, Economic Research Service Report. Agriculture Infor-
mation Bulletin No. 750. Washington, DC, 1999.
2705_frame_C09 Page 318 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:16 PM
2705_frame_C10 Page 319 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:16 PM
10
Nutrition in the Later Years
Elaine B. Feldman
Introduction
This section incorporates some nutritional concepts that are described in more detail in
the sections on cardiovascular disease, cancer, skeletal disorders, neuropsychiatric disor-
ders (cognitive), and the adult diet. Information will be provided on the varying problems
of the successful and healthy free-living older adults and domiciled elderly, the very old
(>85 years), and the old old (centenarians).
Background
The elderly are the fastest growing segment of the U.S. population (see below). It is
projected that the number of institutionalized elderly will triple in the next few decades,
and the number of people over 85 years of age (the very old) as a percent of the total
population will quadruple. The nutritional needs and problems of these groups differ
from those of their younger cohorts. Specific changes in lifestyle and physiology influence
nutritional status. The prevalence of chronic disease increases with age, and the treatment
of these diseases with drugs and diet have an additional impact on nutritional status.
Dietary recommendations need to be designed for these people in order to obtain their
compliance. Surveys have shown that in people over age 75, malnutrition affects 15% of
outpatients, 50% of hospitalized patients, and 85% of institutionalized patients.1
0-8493-2705-9/01/$0.00+$1.50
© 2002 by CRC Press LLC 319
2705_frame_C10 Page 320 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:16 PM
and biochemically, senescence occurs not in an orderly fashion but at unexpected times
and with unanticipated events. Some of these events are predictable, but some are not.
For example, the loss of ovarian function is predictable but its timing is not. There is
considerable individual variation in the loss of menses among women. Some of the age-
related loss in metabolic control can be explained by age-related accumulations of DNA
mutations in both the nuclear and mitochondrial genome. Some of these mutations are
diet responsive while others are not.
With age there are changes in DNA (base substitutions, deletions, aberrant repair) that
result in functional loss in the activity of the gene product(s) the DNA encodes. Changes
in the DNA (as well as some of the gene products) are biomarkers of aging.2 Studies in
animals have shown that lifelong food restriction results in a delay in the appearance of
DNA aberrations as well as a delay in the changes in the activities of key enzymes.
Food–restricted animals live longer than non-restricted animals that are kept under the
same conditions, fed the same qualitative diet, and are of the same gender and genetic
makeup.3 The extrapolation of these findings in rats and mice to humans is questionable
because of the nature of the experimental conditions used. The animals are genetically
similar and they are protected from infectious agents. They are reared under conditions
of carefully regulated environments that are temperature, humidity, and light controlled.
The food is carefully prepared to contain all the needed nutrients, with the only constraint
being the reduction in the energy supply. Humans do not exist under these conditions.
They are randomly exposed to environmental insults, their food is seldom consistent from
one day to the next, and their genetic backgrounds are highly variable. As social creatures
we do not live singly in cages; we experience wars, economic duress, social upheavals,
and so forth. Nonetheless, some of the observations in animals have been also made in
humans. For example, normal aging in humans is characterized by an accumulation of
deletions in mitochondrial DNA in various tissues.4 This may result from free radical
attack on the genome, and may be ameliorated by antioxidants.5
Age has a profound effect on membrane saturation and fluidity.6 An age-related decline
in membrane-associated reactions or pathways occurs, independent of changes in the diet
or the hormonal milieu. The efficiency of oxidative phosphorylation declines with age
(Table 10.1). Mitochondrial damage and loss of function occurs, in part related to increased
formation of superoxide and other free radicals.
With age, the efficiency of transmission of hormone and secondary messenger commu-
nications decreases (Table 10.2). This is due to numerous structural and functional changes
in the endocrine glands, a decline in gene expression, and in the accuracy and efficiency
of protein synthesis. The hormones affected regulate the metabolism of carbohydrates,
lipid, and protein. The progressive changes in the mitochondria and in gene expression
lead to progressive loss in the tight control of intermediary metabolism (Table 10.1). This
is coupled with age-related changes in the endocrine and central nervous systems.
TABLE 10.1
Effects of Age on Intermediary Metabolism and Its Control
Pathway Control Points Effects of Agea
Glycolysis Transport of glucose into the cell (mobile glucose transporter) ↓
Glucokinase ↓
Phosphofructokinase ↓
α-Glycerophosphate shuttle
Redox state, phosphorylation state
Pentose phosphate shunt Glucose-6-phosphate dehydrogenase ↓
6-phosphogluconate dehydrogenase ↓
Glycogenesis Stimulated by insulin and glucose ND
High-phosphorylation state (ratio of ATP to ADP) ND
Glycogenolysis Stimulated by catecholamines ND
Lipogenesis Stimulated by insulin
Acetyl-CoA carboxylase
High-phosphorylation state
Malate citrate shuttle ↓
Gluconeogenesis Stimulated by epinephrine
Malate aspartate shuttle ↓
Redox state ↑
Phosphoenopyruvate carboxykinase ↓
Pyruvate kinase
Cholesterogenesis HMG CoA reductase
Ureogenesis Carbamyl phosphate synthesis ↑,↓
ATP ND
Citric acid cycle All three shuttles
Phosphorylation state ↓
Lipolysis Lipoprotein lipase ↓
Respiration ADP influx into the mitochondria ↓
Ca2+ flux
Shuttle activities ↓
Substrate transporters ↓
Oxidative phosphorylation ADP-ATP exchange ↓
Ca2+ ion
Protein synthesis Accuracy of gene transcription ↓
Availability of amino acids ↓
ATP ↓
a ↑ — increased as the animal ages; ↓ — decreased as the animal ages; ND — no data.
From Berdanier, C.D., Advanced Nutrition: Macronutrients, 2nd ed., CRC Press, Boca Raton, 2000, pg. 252. With
permission.
TABLE 10.2
Hormone Changes with Age
Hormone Age Effects
Serum thyroxine (T4) ↓
Serum triiodothyronine (T1) ↓
Thyroid-binding globulin No change or ↑
Thyroid-stimulating hormone ↓
Insulin ↑ followed by ↓
ACTH ↓
Epinephrine ↓
Glucagon ↓
Growth hormone ↓
Estrogen ↓
Testosterone ↓
Cortisol (glucocorticoids) ↓
Pancreatic polypeptide ↑
Note: ↑ — increase; ↓ — decrease.
From Berdanier, C.D., Advanced Nutrition: Macronutrients, 2nd
ed., CRC Press, Boca Raton, 2000, pg. 250. With permission.
2705_frame_C10 Page 322 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:16 PM
TABLE 10.3
Leading Causes of Death and Numbers of Deaths, According to Sex and
Race, United States, 1996
Sex, Race, and
Rank Order Cause of Death Deaths
All Persons
Male
Female
White
Black
TABLE 10.4
Leading Causes of Death in the United States, Death Rates and
Age-Adjusted Death Rates, 1996
% of Total Rate/100,000 Age-Adjusted
Rank1 Cause of Death Deaths Population Rate
1 Heart diseases 31.6 276.6 134.6
2 Cancers 23.4 205.2 129.1
3 Stroke 6.9 60.5 26.5
4 Lung diseases 4.5 40.0 21.0
5 Accidents2 4.0 35.4 30.1
6 Pneumonia and flu 3.5 31.1 12.6
7 Diabetes mellitus 2.6 23.2 13.6
8 AIDS 1.4 12.3 11.6
9 Suicide 1.3 — 10.8
10 Liver disease 1.1 11.6 7.5
11 Renal diseases 1.1 9.5 4.3
12 Infections 0.9 9.2 4.1
1 Based on the total number of deaths in 1996 (2,322,421). These 12 causes account
for 82.3% of the total.
2 The preferred term is unintentional death. It includes motor vehicle-related deaths.
Taken from Morbidity and Mortality Weekly Report, U.S. Department of Health and
Human Services, Vol. 46, Oct. 10, 1997.
of these disorders are nutrition-related in their etiology or treatment, and are discussed
in individual sections in this handbook.
These mortality statistics are relatively similar for men and women, with striking differ-
ences seen only in the higher prevalence of Alzheimer’s disease, renal disease, and septi-
cemia appearing for women, and HIV, suicide, and liver disease replacing these in men.
Life expectancy at birth is expected to exceed 80 years in the first century of this
millennium, up from 49 years in 1900. The proportion of people in the U.S. over age 65
increased by 89% between 1960 and 1990, and over age 84 by 232%. The number of
centenarians in the U.S. has increased eightfold from 1950 (4447) 1990 (35,808).9
2705_frame_C10 Page 324 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:16 PM
Diseases that are common in the elderly and impact on their nutritional status include:
• Senile dementia of the Alzheimer’s type, with cognitive impairment and memory
loss
• Arthritis, with limited mobility of joints, and deformities
• Osteopenia, with fractures and deformities
• Parkinson’s disease, with rigidity and tremor
• Dental and oral health problems — problems with chewing
• Gastrointestinal disorders — swallowing difficulties
• Neoplasms, with hypercatabolism, anorexia, and cachexia
• Diabetes mellitus, with restrictive diets and medication interactions
• Renal insufficiency, with restrictive diets and dialysis treatment
• Paralysis, limiting mobility
• Depression, leading to anorexia
210
Systolic
Black women
185
Mean Blood Pressure, mm HG Black men
160
White women
135
White men
110
115
100
Diastolic
85
70
15 25 35 45 55 65 75
Age, years
FIGURE 10.1
The change in blood pressure with age. The ordinate represents mean blood pressure, with the upper curves
depicting systolic blood pressure and the lower curves diastolic pressure. The circles represent black women,
the triangles represent black men, the filled circles represent white women, and the squares represent white
men. From Feldman, E.B., Nutrition in the Middle and Later Years, Wright-PSG, Littleton, MA, 1983. Data are
adapted from Hames, C.G., Postgrad Med, 56: 110; 1974, with permission.
• Osteoporosis
• Anemia
Pathophysiology of Aging
The changes with aging and old age that may be nutrition related and/or diet responsive
include:
• Blood pressure (Figure 10.1)11,12 — Both systolic and diastolic blood pressure
increase with age, so beyond age 50 half of the population has hypertension. In
the Southeast, this is especially prevalent in African-American women.12 A vari-
ety of nutrients affect blood pressure, including energy, sodium, potassium,
calcium, magnesium, selenium, lipids, protein, and vitamin C. Consumption of
fruits and vegetables (10 servings a day) lowered blood pressure significantly.13
While the role of sodium has been questioned, recent trials show a beneficial
effect of sodium restriction even in the presence of other successful non-phar-
macologic interventions.14
• Blood lipids — Genetics and lifestyle (diet, exercise) interact to influence the
concentration and composition of blood lipids and lipoproteins. To date, there
is no convincing evidence that risk factors for cardiovascular disease differ in
the elderly, although their impact may differ because of changes in vasculature.
2705_frame_C10 Page 326 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:16 PM
Calcium, vitamin D,
vitamin B-12
SUPPLEMENTS
Fats, Oils, and Sweets
USE SPARINGLY
ƒ+ ƒ+
ƒ+ Bread, Fortified
ƒ+ Cereal, Rice, and
ƒ+ Pasta Group
≥ 6 SERVINGS
ƒ+ ƒ+ ƒ+
Water
≥ 8 SERVINGS
FIGURE 10.2
The Food Pyramid modified for adults 70 years of age and older. From Russell, R.M., Rasmussen, H., and
Lichtenstein, A.H. J. Nutr. 129: 156; 1999, with permission.
Energy
The decrease with age in the whole body basal metabolic rate (Figure 10.4) is especially
pronounced in the cells of the brain, skeletal muscle, and heart that are major contributors
to the resting energy expenditure. In combination with the decline in physical activity,
overall energy consumption declines on average 10% per decade after age 60. In men
between age 28 and 80, energy intake declines by 600 kcal.21 Women have a lower metabolic
rate than men, independent of body size. The resting metabolic rate in women declines
2705_frame_C10 Page 329 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:16 PM
Fat 20%
36%
Cell
Mass
47%
36%
Bone
6%
Mineral 4%
Age Age
25 70
FIGURE 10.3
The age-related change in body composition in men. From Feldman, E.B., Essentials of Clinical Nutrition, F.A.
Davis, Philadelphia, 1988, with permission.
4% per decade between age 50 and 80, with an increased downward slope after menopause
compared to a nonsignificant decline before age 50.24
The decline in basal/resting metabolic rate can be lessened somewhat by increased
physical activity (Figure 10.5). A combination of strength training and moderate aerobic
exercise, e.g., 30 minutes/day or walking 10 to 12 miles per week, can increase the resting
metabolic rate by 10%.25
Voluntary expenditure can increase significantly with physical activity. An increase in
energy expenditure by physical activity in an exercise program will have beneficial effects,
improving glucose uptake and metabolism by tissues (Figure 10.6), thereby normalizing
glucose tolerance.26 Studies used the insulin clamp technique and showed no difference
in glucose uptake in healthy persons age 21 to 53 years, with significantly lower values
in persons over 54 years of age. The relative drop in muscle mass in older subjects may
be responsible for this difference.
Fat stores in older men and women can be reduced towards those of younger individuals
(Figure 10.7) with an increase in lean body mass.27 Studies showed that the proportion of
body fat was significantly less in 67-year-olds who exercised regularly than in age-matched
sedentary controls. The loss of aerobic capacity with aging can be attenuated by 50% with
a regular exercise program (Figure 10.8).27 The maximal aerobic capacity of physically
active older subjects was significantly greater than that of persons of comparable age and
2705_frame_C10 Page 330 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:16 PM
3000
2400
Kilocalories/Day
1800
1200
600
28 40 50 60 70 80
Age (Years)
FIGURE 10.4
Energy expenditure and aging. The solid line represents energy expenditure in men, the dashed line indicates
basal expenditure in men, the dotted line shows energy expended for activity in men. The resting metabolic
rate in women is the dot/dash line. The resting metabolic rate in kcal/minute is the ordinate and age in years
is the abscissa. Adapted from Feldman, E.B., In: Essentials of Clinical Nutrition, F.A. Davis, Philadelphia, 1988,
ch. 9 and Rudman, D., Feller, A.G., Nagrai, H.S., et al. N Engl J Med, 323: 11; 1991.
Moderate
1.13 +- 0.14
Exercise
300
200
mL/m/min
150
100
50
0
21-34 35-54 > 55
Age (years)
FIGURE 10.6
The effect of age on glucose uptake. The height of the bar represents the mean insulin-stimulated glucose uptake.
The error bars represent 2.5 standard deviations from the mean. The lesser glucose uptake in those over age 55
differs significantly from the other two age groups (p<0.01). Adapted from Rosenthal, M., Doberne, L., Greenfield,
M., et al. J. Am. Geriatr. Soc. 30: 562; 1982.
BMI who did not exercise regularly, and was similar to that of young subjects who did
not exercise regularly.
An exercise program is important to prevent or limit obesity, diabetes mellitus, and
increases in blood pressure, lessen bone loss, and provide a favorable blood lipid profile,
increasing HDL-cholesterol and decreasing triglycerides.
To compensate for decreased energy requirements and prevent excessive weight gain,
overweight, and obesity, the energy intake of the elderly usually needs to decrease. Older
subjects who limit their energy intake, however, must consume more nutrient-dense foods
in order to meet protein and micronutrient needs. They should limit their intakes of
energy-dense foods such as fats and sweets, and take in adequate amounts of protein-rich
foods. A one-a-day multivitamin supplement designed for older adults may be indicated
when decreased energy intake is prescribed.
Vitamin B12
Vitamin B12 status in the elderly is impaired by achlorhydria and bacterial overgrowth
that binds this vitamin, inhibiting absorption. Achlorhydria affects 10 to 30% of the geri-
atric population, and associated atrophic gastritis further decreases the absorption of
vitamin B12 from food. The absorption of synthetic B12 is not adversely affected. This has
led some nutritionists to recommend markedly increasing the level of oral intake for older
adults from the RDA of 2.6 to 25 µg/day. This increased amount may be found in some
2705_frame_C10 Page 332 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:16 PM
Age 34
p < 0.05
Age 68, not trained
0 10 20 30
Body Fat (%)
FIGURE 10.7
The effect of aging and physical training on body fat. The length of the top bar indicates values for % body fat
in young people, the middle bar represents these values in old people, not physically trained, and the bar at
the bottom represents the values in old people who are physically trained. Young people differ significantly
from old untrained, and old physically trained differ from old untrained. Adapted from Hollenbeck, C. et al. J.
Am. Geriatr. Soc. 33: 273; 1985.
vitamin supplements formulated for the older age group. The body’s handling of vitamin
B12 is reviewed in the section on Anemia.
Vitamin D
Vitamin D status in the elderly is impaired by multiple factors that decrease:
• Dietary intake
• Exposure to the sun
• Skin synthesis
• Hepatic and renal hydroxylation
• Receptors in the gastrointestinal tract
• Absorption
Skin synthesis of vitamin D by the elderly is only 30-40% of that of children and young
adults.28 The resulting decreases in vitamin D stores in the body lead to an increase in
parathyroid hormone and an increase in bone remodeling and bone loss. These factors
are discussed in the section on Skeletal Disorders.
2705_frame_C10 Page 333 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:16 PM
Age 34
p < 0.001
Age 68, not trained
p < 0.05
Age 67, trained
FIGURE 10.8
The effect of aging and physical training on aerobic capacity. The length of the top bar indicates values for
maximum oxygen consumption in young people. The middle bar represents these values in old persons not
physically trained, and lowest the bar represents the values in old people who are physically trained. Young
people differ significantly from old untrained, and old physically trained differ from old untrained. Adapted
from Hollenbeck, C. et al. J. Am. Geriatr. Soc. 33: 273; 1985.
Multivitamin/Mineral Supplement
A daily multivitamin supplement suitable for the older age group may be indicated to
meet general micronutrient needs (vitamins, minerals). This is especially true for small,
old people, and whenever energy intake to meet energy expenditure is less than 1300
kcal/day.
the use of enteral supplements and, if necessary, tube feedings or parenteral nutrition.
The underlying medical or psychiatric disorder must also be diagnosed and treated.
Various interventions have been proposed to improve appetite and metabolism in the
elderly. Among these is the use of growth hormone supplements. Growth hormone has
been shown to have some favorable effects on function, yet it is not without risk and is
quite expensive.23
Other studies in men comparing subjects with average ages 24 and 70 years showed
that aging may be associated with a significant impairment in the ability to control food
intake following overeating or undereating. These findings may explain the vulnerability
of older persons to unexplained weight loss.30
patients should be evaluated promptly on or after admission. These risk factors include
a history of inadequate food intake or unexplained, rapid weight loss, body weight or
other anthropometric measurements that show depletion, and low serum albumin.
With acute illness, food and water intake may cease. In the presence of hypercatabolism
from diseases, especially inflammatory or infectious disease, nutrient needs are increased.
Injuries or surgery may have similar effects. The elderly have fewer nutritional reserves,
especially if they are already undernourished; attention to feeding is vital. Any deficits
may be enhanced by the food deprivation resulting from tests or treatments that withhold
meals.
A study in a veterans’ hospital of non-terminally ill hospitalized patients indicated that
many elderly patients were maintained on inadequate energy intakes that may have
contributed to an eightfold increased risk of mortality in this group. These patients with
low nutrient intake also exhibited significantly lower serum cholesterol and serum albu-
min levels on discharge than other patients.33 The investigators recommend that greater
efforts should be made to prevent the development of protein–energy undernutrition
during hospitalization. Caregivers should be aware that the food may be unpalatable or
unacceptable by some ethnic groups, and this adds to the difficulty of adequate patient
nourishment. Illness or medication-related nausea, vomiting, or diarrhea will exacerbate
these difficulties.
Enteral supplements or total enteral or parenteral nutrition should be considered when
appropriate. An energy-rich, protein-rich beverage (one to two 8-oz servings daily) can
improve the outcome of patients with hip fracture and chronic obstructive pulmonary
disease, and be associated with diminished falling in frail elderly. Consultation with a
dietitian can help immeasurably.
Conclusion
The older population differs from younger adults not only by age but also by health status.
The elderly group is not a homogeneous population, and their many different health and
social problems impact their nutritional status.35 Optimal nutrient intake not only meets
their needs but prevents some chronic diseases and ameliorates others. Attention must be
paid to environmental, psychological, and pathophysiological parameters in evaluating
nutritional status and interventions. While there is no panacea for the aged, nor a “fountain
of youth,” much can be done to recognize their nutritional needs and improve their
nutritional health.
References
1. Ausman LA, Russell RM. In: Modern Nutrition in Health and Disease (Shils ME, Olson JO, Shike
M, Ross AC, Eds), 9th ed., Williams & Wilkens, Baltimore, 1999, ch. 53.
2. Berdanier CD. In: Encyclopedia of Gerontology (Birren JE, Ed), Vol 2, Academic Press, New York,
1996, pg 135.
3. Wei EC. In: Nutrients and Gene Expression: Clinical Aspects (Berdanier CD, Ed) CRC Press, Boca
Raton, 1996, pg 165.
4. Masoro EJ. Exptl Gerontology 30: 291; 1995.
5. Carr AC, Frei B. Am J Clin Nutr 69: 1086; 1999.
2705_frame_C10 Page 336 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:16 PM
6. Berdanier CD. In: Fatty Acids in Foods and Their Health Implications (Chow CK, Ed) 2nd ed,
Marcel Dekker, New York, pg 569.
7. Health United States, 1998.
8. Morbidity and Mortality Weekly Report, US Department Health and Human Services, Vol. 46,
October 10, 1997.
9. Berdanier CD. Advanced Nutrition: Macronutrients, 2nd ed., CRC Press, Boca Raton, 2000.
10. White P. Nutrition Today 26:142; 1991.
11. Feldman EB. In Nutrition in the Middle and Later Years (Wright-PSG, Ed), Littleton, MA, 1983,
ch. 6.
12. Hames CG. Postgrad Med 56: 110; 1974.
13. Appel LJ, Moore TJ, Obarzanek E, et al. N Eng J Med 338: 1117; 1997.
14. Whelton PK, Appel L, Espeland MA, et al. JAMA 279: 839; 1998.
15. Selhub J, Jaques PF, Bostom AG, et al. N Eng J Med 331: 286; 1995.
16. James MJ, Cleland LG. Sem Arth Rheum 27: 85; 1997.
17. Bogden JD, Bendich A, Kemp FW, et al. Am J Clin Nutr 60: 137; 1994.
18. Fogt EJ, Bell SJ, Blackburn GL. In: Geriatric Nutrition, a Comprehensive Review (Morley JE, Glick
Z, Rubenstein LZ, Eds), 2nd ed., Raven Press, New York, 1995, ch. 5.
19. Russell RM, Rasmussen H, Lichtenstein AH. J Nutr 129: 156; 1999.
20. Feldman EB. In: Essentials of Clinical Nutrition, FA Davis, Philadelphia, 1988, ch. 9.
21. Munro HN. Br Med Bull 37: 84; 1981.
22. Horber FF, Kohler SA, Lippuner K, Jaeger P. Eur J Clin Invest 26: 279; 1996.
23. Rudman D, Feller AG, Nagrai HS, et al. N Eng J Med, 323: 11; 1991.
24. Poehlman ET, Goran MI, Gardner AW, et al. Am J Physiol 264: E450; 1993.
25. Poehlman ET, Gardner AW, Goran MI. Metabolism, 41: 041, 1992.
26. Rosenthal M, Doberne L, Greenfield M, et al. J Am Geriatr Soc 30: 562; 1982.
27. Hollenbeck C, Haskell W, Rosenthal M, Reaven GM, J Am Geriatr Soc 33: 273; 1985.
28. Holick MF, Matsuoka LY, Wortsman J. Lancet 2: 1104; 1989.
29. Morley JE. Drugs & Aging 8: 134; 1996.
30. Roberts S, Fuss P, Heyman MB, et al. JAMA 272: 1601; 1994.
31. Rudman D, Feller AG. J Am Geriatr Soc 37: 173; 1989.
32. Thomas DR, Verdery RB, Gardner L, et al. J Parent Ent Nutr 15: 400; 1991.
33. Fiatarone MA, Marks EC, Ryan ND, et al. JAMA 263: 3029; 1990.
34. Sullivan DH, Sun S, Walls R. JAMA 281: 2013; 1999.
35. Feldman EB. Am J Clin Nutr 58: 1; 1993.
2705_frame_C11 Page 337 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:17 PM
Part V
Human Nutritional
Status Assessment
2705_frame_C11 Page 338 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:17 PM
2705_frame_C11 Page 339 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:17 PM
11
Dietary Guidelines, Food Guidance, and Dietary
Quality
Eileen Kennedy
The 1969 White House Conference on Food, Nutrition, and Health1 was instrumental in
the development of the first set of U.S. dietary guidelines. Specific recommendations
emerged out of this conference advocating that the government examine the links between
diet and chronic disease. The 1969 conference was followed in 1977 by the release of the
U.S. Senate Dietary Goals;2 these dietary goals for the first time summarized specific
recommendations for diet-related goals for the American public.
The Dietary Guidelines for Americans are the cornerstone of federal nutrition policy in
the U.S. Nutrition programs use the Dietary Guidelines as the basis of the nutrition
standards; thus programs such as Food Stamps, School Lunch/School Breakfast, and
Women, Infants, and Children (WIC) use the dietary guidelines in developing program
services. In addition, all nutrition education programs at the federal level must have
messages consistent with the Dietary Guidelines. As a result, the impact of the Dietary
Guidelines is broad. It is estimated that one of every five Americans participates in at least
one federal nutrition program.
0-8493-2705-9/01/$0.00+$1.50
© 2002 by CRC Press LLC 339
2705_frame_C11 Page 340 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:17 PM
Since 1985, the United States Department of Agriculture (USDA) and the Department
of Health and Human Services (HHS) have used essentially the same process to prepare
the Dietary Guidelines. An external Dietary Guidelines Advisory Committee (DGAC) has
been appointed by the two secretaries to review and revise the Dietary Guidelines as
necessary. The members of the DGAC are widely recognized nutrition and medical
experts. A series of open public meetings are held to review and discuss the guidelines.
Upon completion of the DGAC process, a technical report is sent to the two secretaries
and reviewed within the two departments. In addition, in 1995 and 2000, consumer
research was conducted9-10 to test consumer reaction to specific design and content ele-
ments of the technical report. The consumer research is also used as one element in
promoting the Dietary Guidelines.
TABLE 11.1
Dietary Guidelines for Americans, 1980 to 2000
1980 7 Guidelines 1985 7 Guidelines 1990 7 Guidelines 1995 7 Guidelines
Eat a variety of foods. Eat a variety of foods. Eat a variety of foods. Eat a variety of foods.
Maintain ideal weight Maintain desirable Maintain healthy weight Balance the food you eat
weight with physical activity —
maintain or improve
your weight
Avoid too much fat, Avoid too much fat, Choose a diet low in fat,
saturated fat, and saturated fat, and saturated fat, and
cholesterol cholesterol cholesterol
Eat foods with adequate Eat foods with adequate Choose a diet with plenty Choose a diet with plenty
starch and fiber starch and fiber of grain products, of grain products,
vegetables, and fruits vegetables, and fruits
Choose a diet low in fat,
saturated fat, and
cholesterol
Avoid too much sugar Avoid too much sugar Use sugars only in Choose a diet moderate
moderation in sugars
Avoid too much sodium Avoid too much sodium Use salt and sodium only Choose a diet moderate
in moderation in salt and sodium
If you drink alcohol, do If you drink alcohol If you drink alcoholic If you drink alcoholic
so in moderation beverages, do so in beverages, do so in beverages, do so in
moderation moderation moderation
2705_frame_C11 Page 341 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:17 PM
foods from the base of the pyramid (grains) to form the center of the plate, accompanied
by food from other food groups.
For the first time, the Dietary Guidelines in 1995 recognized that with careful planning,
a vegetarian diet can be consistent with the Dietary Guidelines and the Recommended
Dietary Allowances.11 The guidelines also present a clear message that food sources of
nutrients are preferred to supplements. This “food first” strategy is reinforced by a dis-
cussion of other healthful substances present in food but not in dietary supplements.
However, the 1995 guidelines do provide specific examples of situations where dietary
supplements may be needed.
The 1995 guidelines also more forcefully moved in the direction of providing a discus-
sion of the direct link between diet and health. Weight gain with age was discouraged for
adults. Weight maintenance is encouraged as a first step to achieving a healthy weight.
The benefits of physical activity are emphasized, and for the first time, a statement was
included on the benefits of moderate alcohol consumption in reducing the risk of heart
disease. On this later point, both HHS and USDA were clear that the alcohol guideline
was not intended to recommend that people start drinking.
In the 1995 guidelines there was also direct reference to nutrition education tools that
could be used to promote the Dietary Guidelines. The guidelines explain how consumers
can use the “three crown jewels” to build a healthy diet — the Dietary Guidelines, the
Food Guide Pyramid,12 and the Nutrition Facts Label.
The Dietary Guidelines 2000, released by President Clinton in May 2000,7 break with
the tradition of seven guidelines and now incorporate ten guidelines. Not only do the
Dietary Guidelines 2000 continue to emphasize a total diet approach, they also emphasize
a healthy lifestyle approach. This is reflected clearly in three concepts that are used as
organizing principals for the 2000 Guidelines aim for fitness, build a healthy base, and
choose sensibly.
Three new guidelines have been added to the Dietary Guidelines 2000 (Table 11.2). There
is now a separate guideline for physical activity which states, “be physically active every
TABLE 11.2
U.S. Dietary Guidelines 2000 and Countries having Similar Guidelines
U.S. Dietary Guidelines 20007 Countries Having Similar Guidelines13
Aim for a healthy weight Australia, Canada, China, Japan, Korea, Malaysia, The
Netherlands, New Zealand, Philippines, Singapore,
Thailand, United Kingdom
Let the Pyramid guide your food choices Variety: Australia, Canada, China, France, Germany,
Hungary, Indonesia, Korea, Malaysia, New Zealand,
Philippines, Singapore, South Africa, Sri Lanka,
Thailand, United Kingdom, Japan Five Steps to Healthy
Eating: India
Eat a variety of grains daily, especially whole grains Australia, Canada, Denmark, Germany, Hungary
(choose potatoes over rice), India, Malaysia, Norway,
Singapore, South Africa (starchy foods), Thailand
Choose a diet that is low in saturated fat, and Australia (but low fat diets not suitable for children),
cholesterol, and moderate in total fat Canada, Japan, The Netherlands, New Zealand,
Singapore, South Africa
Choose and prepare foods with less salt Australia, Canada, China, Denmark, Germany,
Hungary, India, Japan, Korea, Malaysia, The
Netherlands, Singapore, South Africa, Thailand
If you drink alcoholic beverages, do so in moderation Canada, China, France, Germany, Indonesia (avoid),
Hungary (forbidden for pregnant women and
children), Korea, The Netherlands, New Zealand,
Singapore, South Africa, United Kingdom
2705_frame_C11 Page 342 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:17 PM
day.” In addition to help in maintaining a healthy weight, this guideline discusses other
health benefits of physical activity. Specific quantitative recommendations are given for
amount of physical activity for adults (30 minutes or more) and children (60 minutes or
more) per day. For the first time ever, there is a guideline on food safety. Again, this
reinforces components of a healthy diet and healthy lifestyle. Finally, there is a separate
guideline for fruits and vegetables.
The consumer research conducted as part of the Dietary Guidelines 2000 process10
influenced the development of the guidelines. One clear message is that consumers
preferred simple, action-oriented guidelines. Thus, the guidelines are much more direct
and action oriented as evidenced by “aim for a healthy weight” and “keep foods safe
to eat.”
The guidelines are more consumer friendly, and emphasize practical ways in which the
consumers can put the concepts into practice. To that end, a section entitled “Advice for
Today” is included at the end of each individual guideline and includes suggestions on
key ways to operationalize the guidelines. The consumer research on the 2000 Dietary
Guidelines 10 indicated that consumers particularly appreciated sections such as “Advice
for Today.”
Future Directions
Many countries have been successful in developing and promoting food-based Dietary
Guidelines. In most cases these guidelines are intended for individuals ages two and older.
In the U.S., the Dietary Guidelines from their inception in 1980 have been intended for
individuals ages two and older. There is a clear gap in dietary guidelines for children ages
two and younger.
A limited number of countries have some parts of their food-based guidelines devoted
to children less than two years of age. In most cases the advice for children under two
years of age relates to a discussion of breastfeeding. Australia, for example, states: “encour-
age and support breastfeeding.” Similar wording is found in guidelines from the Philip-
pines and Singapore.
Most industrialized countries rely on national pediatric associations to guide the broad
policy recommendations for infant feeding and/or feeding practices for the first two years
of life. In almost all cases, advice from pediatric associations stresses that human milk is
the preferred form of infant feeding.17
In devising food-based dietary guidelines for children under two, there would be a clear
need to segment this group of children by age groups; birth to 6 months, 6 to 12 months,
and 13 to 24 months. The dietary issues addressed across these three age groups would
differ.
Dietary Guidance
In the preceeding segment the development of the U.S. Dietary Guidelines was traced.
The United States Department of Agriculture (USDA) has a long, rich history of providing
science-based nutrition information and education for the general public (Table 11.4). The
Organic Act of 1862 not only created USDA but also mandated that the department,
“acquire and diffuse among people useful information on subjects connected to agricul-
ture.” This led to some of the pioneering work of W.O. Atwater, who in the 1890s began
identifying the links between food composition, dietary intake, and health. This seminal
344
TABLE 11.3
Comparison of Three Sets of Dietary Recommendations
Recommendation DGA AHA ACS
Include a variety of foods in the diet; Yes, include food from five major food Yes, echo DGA recommendations: Yes, with emphasis on grains, especially
emphasis on a plant-based diet. groups: bread, cereal, rice, and pasta; grains, fruits, and vegetables should whole grains, fruits, vegetables, and
vegetables, fruits, meat, poultry, fish, supply 55 to 60 percent of total beans as an alternative to meat.
dry beans, eggs, and nuts; and milk, kcalories.
yogurt, and cheese. Also provide
information on good food sources of
nutrients.
Encourages maintenance of a healthy Yes, defined as Body Mass Index (BMI) Yes, healthy weight not specifically Yes, refers to DGA definition of BMI of
weight including importance of of 19 to 25. Recommend gaining no defined. Weight gain in adulthood not 19 to 25. Recommend moderate activity
physical activity. more than 10 pounds after achieving specifically addressed. Regular physical for 30 minutes/day on most, if not all
adult height. Recommend moderate activity encouraged. days.
2705_frame_C11 Page 344 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:17 PM
TABLE 11.4
History of USDA Food Guidance
1860s 1862 USDA formed
1870s
1880s
1890s 1890 W. O. Atwater — human nutrition research
1900s 1902 Atwater — Variety, Balance, and Moderation
1910s 1914 Cooperative Extension Service
1916 Caroline Hunt — First food guide
1920s
1930s 1933 Food Plans at 4 Cost Levels
1940s 1941 National Nutrition Conference for Defense
1946 School Lunch Program began
1950s 1956 Basic Four Food Guide
1960s 1964 Food Stamp Program began
1969 White House Conference on Food, Nutrition, and Health
1970s 1970 EFNEP began
1971 FNIC formed at NAL
1975 WIC began (WIC pilot projects authorized in 1972)
1977 Food and Agriculture Act of 1977, NET began; USDA named “lead” agency for nutrition research,
extension, and teaching
1980s 1980 Dietary Guidelines for Americans first issued
1982 JSHNR defines “nutrition education research”
1986 USDA Comprehensive Plan for HN Research and Education
1990s 1990 National Nutrition Monitoring and Related Research Act
1990 Nutrition Labeling and Education Act/NEFLE
1992 Food Guide Pyramid
1994 Nutrition and Food Safety Education Task Force
1995 Dietary Guidelines for Americans, 4th edition
2000 May, 2000 National Nutrition Summit
science led to the development of the USDA food guides. Dissemination of the food guides
was facilitated by the 1914 Smith-Lever Act which created the Cooperative Extension
Service and specified that the Extension Service provide people with, “useful and practical
information on subjects relating to agriculture and home economics.”
In the 1930s the USDA began developing family food plans at four separate cost levels.
The food plans continue to be used with the best known — the Thrifty Food Plan —
serving as the nutritional basis of benefits of the Food Stamp Program. Former Secretary
of Agriculture Henry Wallace once commented, “the lack of common-sense knowledge of
nutrition even among the many well to-do people in the U.S. is appalling.”
In 1941 the first set of Recommended Dietary Allowances was released at the National
Nutrition Conference for Defense; at this conference USDA scientists noted that consumers
spent enough money on food but did not obtain an adequate diet. As a result, the USDA
was urged to develop nutrition education and media-type materials to promote good
nutrition for the American public. This emphasis on nutrition education continued in the
1950s and 1960s, culminating with the 1969 White House Conference on Food, Nutrition,
and Health.18,19 The 1969 conference reinforced the need for aggressive nutrition promotion
activities for all Americans, with a special emphasis on reaching low income populations.
Throughout the 1970s, federal agencies increased funding for nutrition programs and
nutrition education activities.20 New programs were created, including the Special Sup-
plemental Food Program for Women, Infants, and Children (WIC), School Breakfast, and
other programs such as Food Stamps and School Lunch were expanded nationwide.
2705_frame_C11 Page 346 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:17 PM
Bread, Cereal
Rice & Pasta
Group
6-11
SERVINGS
FIGURE 11.1
Food Guide Pyramid: a guide to daily food choices.
The 1977 Food and Agriculture Act named USDA as the lead agency for nutrition
research, extension, and teaching. In 1980 USDA and HHS released the first Dietary
Guidelines for Americans.21 Throughout the 1980s and into the 1990s USDA placed a
renewed emphasis on developing comprehensive, coordinated efforts to promote nutrition
for all Americans.
1600, 2200, and 2800 kcalories. Within the Food Guide Pyramid Bulletin (USDA, 1992)
there is an in-depth discussion of “How to Make the Pyramid Work for You.” Topics such
as what constitutes a serving, different types of fats, and how to use the Pyramid to make
low-fat selections are also included in the Pyramid Bulletin.
The Pyramid graphic shown in Figure 11.1 communicates not only balance, variety, and
moderation but provides the basis of a healthful diet. The number and amounts of foods
recommended in the Pyramid are based on three factors:
The advice provided in the Food Guide Pyramid is designed to provide dietary guidance
that ensures nutritional adequacy — defined as the RDAs and Dietary Guidelines — within
the framework of typical consumption patterns. Thus, while ostensibly an infinite number
of food combinations could be used to ensure nutritional adequacy, the five major food
groups emphasized in the USDA Pyramid anchor the food selections to current consump-
tion patterns.
A proliferation of pyramids has emerged since the USDA version was published in 1992.
However, all of the Pyramids, whether Asian, Mediterranean, or vegetarian, are based on
the same building blocks — grains, vegetables, and fruits.23-25 The similarities in the various
pyramids are more dominant than the differences.
In addition, in 1999, USDA released a children’s version of the Food Guide Pyramid
targeted at children ages two to six years. Here again, the concepts of balance, variety,
and moderation underpin the children’s graphic (Figure 11.2). The specific icons used in
the food groups are based on foods typically consumed by children. Worth noting are the
age-specific recommendations for serving sizes at the bottom of the graphic as well as the
deliberate inclusion of exercise icons.
The year 2000 Dietary Guidelines for Americans26 for the first time include the Food
Guide Pyramid as part of a specific guideline; “Let the Pyramid Guide Your Food Choices”
is the first guideline put forward to build a healthy base. One key reason for including
the Pyramid as a direct part of the Dietary Guidelines is the wide-ranging familarity of
consumers with the Pyramid and the messages embedded within. The USDA Food Guide
Pyramid and the Children’s Food Guide Pyramid will continue to be essential parts of
the nutrition education and nutrition promotion efforts within the USDA.
Guide P Y R A M I D
F O O D
A Daily Guide for
2-to 6-Year-Olds
January 2000
Program Aid 1651
W H AT C O U N T S A S O N E S E R V I N G ?
GRAIN GROUP FRUIT GROUP MEAT GROUP
1 slice of bread 1 piece of fruit or melon wedge 2 to 3 ounces of cooked lean
1/2 cup of cooked rice or pasta 3/4 cup of juice meat, poultry, or fish.
FOOD IS FUN and learning about food 1/2 cup of cooked cereal
TABLE 11.5
Components of the Healthy Eating Index and Scoring System
Score Criteria for Maximum Criteria for Minimum
Ranges1 Score of 10 Score of 0
Grain consumption 0–10 6–11 servings2 0 servings
Vegetable consumption 0–10 3–5 servings2 0 servings
Fruit consumption 0–10 2–4 servings2 0 servings
Milk consumption 0–10 2–3 servings2 0 servings
Meat consumption 0–10 2–3 servings2 0 servings
Total fat intake 0–10 30% or less energy 45% or more energy
from fat from fat
Saturated fat intake 0–10 Less than 10% energy 15% or more energy
from saturated fat from saturated fat
Cholesterol intake 0–10 300 mg or less 450 mg or more
Sodium intake 0–10 2400 mg or less 4800 mg or more
Food variety 0–10 8 or more different 3 or fewer different
items in a day items in a day
1 People with consumption or intakes between the maximum and minimum ranges or
amounts were assigned scores proportionately.
2 Number of servings depends on Recommended Energy Allowance.
often these measures were based on measures such as mean percent of the Recommended
Dietary Allowances.27,28
Despite the U.S. Dietary Guidelines’ emphasis on a total diet, indices based on the
dietary guidelines have tended to be selective in the components included.29,30 Few assess-
ment indices have been developed to assess overall diet quality. In an effort to measure
how well American diets conform to recommended healthy eating patterns, USDA devel-
oped the Healthy Eating Index (HEI) in 1995.
Each of the ten components has a score ranging from zero to ten; cutoffs for scoring the
minimum and maximum scores are shown in Table 11.5. Thus, the HEI can vary from one
to 100.
Policy Implications
The Food Guide Pyramid and the Dietary Guidelines for Americans provide a standard
against which to evaluate the total diet. However, neither the Pyramid nor the Dietary
Guidelines provide a method for easily assessing total diet. The development of the USDA
Healthy Eating Index provided an easy to use, single summary measure of diet quality.
The HEI provides a method for monitoring diet quality over time using national survey
2705_frame_C11 Page 351 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:17 PM
data. In addition, the HEI has the potential to serve as a tool for individuals to self-evaluate
diet quality.
The data from both 1989 to 1990 and 1994 to 1996 indicate that improvements need to
be made in the dietary patterns of most Americans. The data obtained from applying the
HEI to nationally representative surveys can be one tool to help focus our national nutri-
tion promotion interventions.
Summary
Worldwide major improvements in public health will be accomplished by improvement
in dietary patterns. Food-based dietary guidelines have been developed in a broad range
of countries. A move toward consensus on food-based dietary guidelines is a practical
way to develop core elements of global dietary guidelines that can be effectively promoted
by individual countries as well as international health organizations.
References
1. Office of the President, Proceedings of White House Conference on Food, Nutrition and
Health. White House, Washington, DC, 1970.
2. US Senate Select Committee on Nutrition and Human Needs. Dietary Goals for the United States
(2nd ed.), 1977.
3. US Department of Agriculture and US Department of Health and Human Services. Nutrition
and Your Health: Dietary Guidelines for Americans. Home and Garden Bulletin No. 232, 1980.
4. US Department of Agriculture and US Department of Health and Human Services. Nutrition
and Your Health: Dietary Guidelines for Americans (2nd ed.). Home and Garden Bulletin No. 232,
1985.
5. US Department of Agriculture and US Department of Health and Human Services. Nutrition
and Your Health: Dietary Guidelines for Americans (3rd ed.). Home and Garden Bulletin No. 232,
1990.
6. US Department of Agriculture and US Department of Health and Human Services. Nutrition
and Your Health: Dietary Guidelines for Americans (4th ed.). Home and Garden Bulletin No. 232,
1995.
7. US Department of Agriculture, US Department of Health and Human Services, Nutrition and
Your Health: Dietary Guidelines for Americans (5th ed.). Home and Garden Bulletin No. 232, 39
pp, May 2000.
8. US Congress, Public Law 101-445, 7U.S.C.5341, Library of Congress, Washington DC, 1990.
9. Prospect Associates. Dietary Guidelines Focus Group Report, Final Report, Washington, DC,
Nov 1995.
10. Systems Assessment & Research, Inc; Report to USDA of the Initial Focus Groups on Nutrition
and Your Health: Dietary Guidelines for Americans (4th ed.), Lanham, MD, September 1999.
11. National Research Council, National Academy of Sciences. Recommended Dietary Allowances
(10th ed.), Washington, DC, National Academy Press, 1989a.
12. US Department of Agriculture, The Food Guide Pyramid, Home and Garden Bulletin No. 252,
1992.
13. Modern Nutrition in Health and Disease (9th ed.), Williams & Wilkins, Baltimore, MD, 1990.
14. Peng M, Molina V. Food Dietary Guidelines and Health-Based Promotion in Latin America, Pan
American Health Organization, Washington, DC, April 1999.
2705_frame_C11 Page 352 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:17 PM
15. Krauss RM, Deckelbaum RJ, Ernst N, et al. Dietary guidelines for healthy American adults, a
statement for health professionals from the Nutrition Committee, American Heart Association,
Circulation, 94:1795; 1996.
16. American Cancer Society Advisory Committee on Diet, Nutrition, and Cancer Prevention.
Guidelines on diet, nutrition, and cancer prevention: reducing the risk of cancer with healthy
food choices and physical activity, CA Cancer J Clin 1996; 46: 325-341.
17. American Academy of Pediatrics, Breastfeeding and the Use of Human Milk, Pediatrics. 100(6):
1035-1039.
18. Healthy People: The Surgeon General’s Report on Health Promotion and Disease Prevention, Wash-
ington, DC; US Dept of Health, Education, and Welfare, 1979; 177. DHHW (PHS) publication
79-55071.
19. The Surgeon General’s Report on Nutrition and Health, Washington, DC: US Dept of Health and
Human Services; 1988. DHHS (PHS) publication 88-50210.
20. Healthy People 2000: National Health Promotion and Disease Prevention Objectives, Washington,
DC; US Dept of Health and Human Services; 1991. DHHS (PHS) publication 91-60213.
21. Nutrition and Your Health: Dietary Guidelines for Americans, Washington, DC; US Dept of Agri-
culture/Dept of Health and Human Services; 1980. Home and Garden Bulletin No. 328.
22. Food Guide Pyramid, Washington, DC: US Dept of Agriculture, Human Nutrition Information
Service; 1992. Home and Garden Bulletin No. 252.
23. Kennedy E, Ohls J, Carlson S, Fleming K. JADA 95: 1103; 1995.
24. Kennedy E. Oct, 1998. Building on the pyramid — where do we go from here? Nutrition Today
11: 183-185.
25. Kennedy E, Bowman S, Lino M, Gerrior S, Basiotis PP. 1999. Diet Quality of Americans,
Chapter 5. In: America’s Eating Habits. Frazao E, Ed. Economic Research Service, Washington,
DC.
26. USDA/HHS. May, 2000. Nutrition and Your Health: Dietary Guidelines for Americans, 5th
ed. Home and Garden Bulletin No. 232, Washington, DC.
27. Guthrie HA, Scheer JC. JADA 78: 240; 1981.
28. Block GA. Am J Epidemiol 115: 402; 1982.
29. Patterson RE, Haines RS, Popkin BM. JADA 94: 57; 1994.
30. Kent AK, Schatzkin A, Harris TU, et al. Am J Clin Nutr 57: 434; 1993.
31. Krebs-Smith S, Smieiklas-Wright H, Guthrie HA, Krubs-Smith J. JADA 87: 807; 1987.
Other References
USDA, Center for Nutrition Policy and Promotion. October, 1996. The State of Nutrition Education
in USDA: A Report to the Secretary. USDA: Washington, D.C.
Childrens Food Guide Pyramid, 1999.
2705_frame_C12 Page 353 Thursday, September 20, 2001 9:16 AM
12
Dietary Guidelines in Three Regions of the World
0-8493-2705-9/01/$0.00+$1.50
© 2002 by CRC Press LLC 353
2705_frame_C12 Page 354 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:18 PM
All of these affluent countries share similar dietary patterns and nutrition-related prob-
lems, including a diet excessive in calories, fat, salt, sugars, and alcohol, and too low in
fruits, vegetables, and whole grains. Their guidelines have addressed excessive as well as
inadequate food consumption, weight, and physical activity since they were first formu-
lated in the late 1970s and early 1980s.
Each of these countries has an ethnically diverse population. In the U.S., according to
1990 census data, 12% of the population was African American and 9% were of Hispanic
origin.2 The Aboriginal and Torres Strait Islander people comprise only about 2% of the
Australian population, but they often live under impoverished, overcrowded conditions
that put them at nutritional risk,3 and they have a high prevalence of android pattern obesity,
which is associated with many health problems.4 In New Zealand, 13% of the population
belong to the rapidly growing Maori minority, and another 5% are Pacific Islanders.5 Some
of these minority groups have increased risks of chronic degenerative diseases as they move
away from traditional customs to modern diets and lifestyles. The information accompa-
nying the Australian and New Zealand dietary guidelines refers to these special problems,
although the dietary guidelines are targeted to the general population.
Similarities and Differences among Dietary Guidelines in the United States, Canada,
Australia, and New Zealand
Table 12.2 shows that all of these countries have recommendations for certain nutrients
and also for groups of foods, such as fruits/vegetables, grains, dairy, and meats. Food
TABLE 12.1
Development of Dietary Guidelines in the United States, Canada, Australia, and New Zealand
United States Canada Australia New Zealand
2705_frame_C12 Page 355 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:18 PM
Title of guideline Dietary Guidelines for Americans Canada’s Guidelines for Healthy Australian Dietary Guidelines Food and Nutrition Guidelines
Eating
Year 1995, 2000 1991 1992 1991
Dietary Guidelines in Three Regions of the World
Endorsing unit Departments of Agriculture, Department of National Health National Health and Medical Nutrition Task Force at the
Health, and Human Services and Welfare Research Council Ministry of Health
Approaches* 1-5, 7 1-5, 7 1-5 1-5
Target audiences** G, H, P, N G, H, P, N G, H, P G, H, P
Graphic representation Pyramid Rainbow Pyramid None
* 1 = Experts, scientists views; 2 = Review of former guidelines; 3 = From food groups; 4 = From consumption/nutrition survey; 5 = Definition of nutritional objectives;
6 = Economic data; 7 = Consumer focus groups.
** G = General population; H = Health professionals; P = Policy makers; N = Nutrition education of schoolchildren.
355
356
TABLE 12.2
Dietary Guidelines of the United States, Canada, Australia and New Zealand
United States 2000 Canada Australia New Zealand
1. Aim for a healthy weight 1. Enjoy a variety of foods 1. Enjoy a wide variety of nutritious 1. Eat a variety of foods from each of
2. Be physically active each day 2. Emphasize cereals, breads, other foods the four major food groups each day
3. Let the pyramid guide your food grain products, vegetables and fruits 2. Eat plenty of bread and cereals 2. Prepare meals with minimal added
choices 3. Choose lower-fat dairy products, (preferably whole grain), vegetables fat (especially saturated fat), salt,
4. Build a healthy base leaner meats, and foods prepared (including legumes), and fruits and sugar
5. Choose a variety of grains daily, with little or no fat 3. Eat a diet that is low in fat, and in 3. Choose prepared foods, drinks and
especially whole grains 4. Achieve and maintain a healthy particular, low in saturated fat snacks that are low in fat (especially
2705_frame_C12 Page 356 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:18 PM
6. Choose a variety of fruits and body weight by enjoying regular 4. Maintain a healthy body weight by saturated fat), salt, and sugar
vegetables daily physical activity and healthy eating balancing physical activity and food 4. Maintain a healthy body weight by
7. Keep food safe to eat 5. Limit salt, alcohol, and caffeine intake regular physical activity and by
8. Choose a diet that is low in saturated 5. If you drink alcohol, limit your healthy eating
fat and cholesterol and moderate in intake 5. Drink plenty of liquids each day
total fat 6. Eat only moderate amounts of 6. If drinking alcohol, do so in
9. Choose sensibly sugars and foods containing added moderation
10. Choose beverages and foods that sugars
limit your intake of sugars 7. Choose low salt foods and use salt
11. Choose and prepare foods with less sparingly
salt 8. Encourage and support breast-
12. If you drink alcoholic beverages, do feeding
so in moderation 9. Eat foods containing calcium; this is
particularly important for girls and
women
10. Eat foods containing iron; this is
particularly important for girls and
women, vegetarians and athletes
Handbook of Nutrition and Food
2705_frame_C12 Page 357 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:18 PM
based guidelines are easier than nutrient based guidelines for the consumer to implement,
since human beings eat foods, not specific nutrients.
In all of these countries, heart disease, hypertension, diabetes with its complications,
and cancer are the leading causes of death.4,9,11-13 Obesity is prevalent and increases the
severity of many of these diseases.13,14
The core messages in all of these dietary guidelines are similar: eat a variety of foods
and include physical activity to achieve/maintain a healthy weight (Table 12.2). All of
these countries have recommendations on limiting fat, salt, and alcohol and increasing
fruits, vegetables, and whole grains. The U.S., Canada, and New Zealand all suggest
limiting alcoholic beverages to less than two drinks per day for men and one for women.
Australia has a higher limit — less than four drinks for men and two for women per day.
The background and supporting information accompanying the Dietary Guidelines
provides the rationale for quantitative suggestions for intakes of specific nutrients.4,9,15,16
All of these countries suggest that 50 to 55% of total calories should come from carbohy-
drates. The U.S., Canada, and Australia recommend less than 30% of total calories from
fat and less than 10% from saturated fat. New Zealand is more liberal, suggesting no more
than 30 to 35% of kcalories from fat and 12% from saturated fat.
There are some differences in the guidelines. In the most recent U.S. guidelines (2000),
food safety is addressed. Australia includes a guideline specifically to encourage and
support breastfeeding, and it also has two other nutrient-specific guidelines, “eat foods
containing calcium” and “eat foods containing iron.”4 The calcium and iron guidelines are
emphasized for both girls and women, and iron is also stressed for vegetarians and athletes.
Most of the guidelines other than alcohol for the U.S. and Canada are for all healthy
individuals over age two years. The fat guideline in Canada is not applicable until a child
reaches age five.
Other health recommendations included in New Zealand’s guidelines are non-smoking
related, especially for adolescents, and pregnant and breastfeeding women. The elderly,
who may suffer from isolation and therefore poor nutrition, are encouraged to “make
mealtime a social time.” Australia encourages its elderly to eat at least three meals per
day. Elderly people and pregnant women are especially vulnerable to risks associated
with foodborne illnesses. Australia’s food safety guidelines address food safety in the
elderly (care for your food: prepare and store it correctly), and the New Zealand guidelines
discuss Listeria in the information specifically directed to pregnant women.
Latin America
Dietary guidelines were first formulated in Latin America in the late 1980s.17 Guidelines
from Chile, Guatemala, Mexico, Panama, and Venezuela are provided as examples of
dietary guidelines in the region.
Latin America is a region with great inequalities in the distribution of welfare, and also
large variations in the nutritional health of its population groups. There has been a shift
from dietary deficiency disease to problems of dietary excess in many countries of the
region over the past two decades. In Chile, the prevalence of protein–calorie malnutrition
in children is declining rapidly. However, the prevalence of chronic degenerative diseases
associated with imbalances in food intake and sedentary lifestyles is rising.18 In contrast,
in Guatemala, Mexico, and Panama, poverty-related undernutrition and dietary deficiency
diseases are still prevalent, especially among children and women of reproductive age in
2705_frame_C12 Page 358 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:18 PM
rural areas. At the same time, the prevalence of diet-related chronic diseases is rising.
Venezuela is an oil-exporting country, but it still has large economic inequalities and
grapples with poverty-related malnutrition as well as dietary excess.
In most Latin American countries, food consumption patterns are influenced by those
of the U.S. Changing cultural and economic influences, rural–urban migration, greater
availability of processed foods, and advertising also affect food consumption.19 Both
over- and undernutrition result.20 The development of poor ghettos in metropolitan areas,
short lactation periods, low wages, and low maternal educational levels is associated
with undernutrition in young children. The interactions of urbanization, sedentary life-
styles, lack of nutrition education, and excessive consumption of cheap foods low in
nutritional value lead to diseases of overconsumption such as obesity, diabetes, and
cardiovascular disease.20
Most of the Latin American countries are in the implementation stage in formulating
dietary guidelines.21 The dietary guidelines for the Mexican population were issued by
the Mexican Institute of Nutrition.22 Venezuela issued dietary guidelines in the late 1980s
that were later revised and updated.23 The dietary guidelines have been implemented in
many ways. For example, they have been incorporated into Venezuelan kindergarten,
elementary, and secondary school curricula.23-25
Table 12.3 contains details about the dietary guidelines development process. Four of
the countries have dietary guidelines for the general population. Some also have guide-
lines for specific population groups (Chile, Panama, and Venezuela) or target certain
groups on specific concerns (Guatemala for food safety among the poor). Governmental
or quasi-governmental organizations develop and promulgate the guidelines based on
the views and opinions of experts and scientists. Some also use background data on food
consumption surveys (Chile, Mexico, Panama) and economic data (Venezuela, Mexico).
Most of the countries also refer to food groups in their dietary guidelines.18,22,23,26,27
Four of the countries also use graphic representations of food groups and supporting
messages (see Table 12.3). Chile, Mexico, and Panama adapted the food guide pyramid
used in the U.S. Guatemala summarized its food groups and dietary guidelines in a family
pot, or “crockpot” graphic. Venezuela has no graphic but the government has produced
an extensive set of educational materials directed at different target groups.24,25
Table 12.4 summarizes the dietary guidelines for the Latin America. The number of
guidelines range from 6 in Panama to 12 in Venezuela; Venezuela also has issued 40
educational messages to facilitate implementation of the guidelines. Mexico has ten dietary
guidelines — each one contains several additional messages.
In general, the guidelines are focused on foods, and provide general guidance. Variety
is mentioned in all guidelines. Guatemala, Mexico, and Venezuela discuss economic dis-
parities in supporting documents. For example, Guatemala recommends that those with
limited resources eat meats, eggs, and dairy products at least once or twice a week, while
Venezuela urges prudence in the management of financial resources (see Table 12.4).
TABLE 12.3
Development of Dietary Guidelines in Latin American Countries
Chile Guatemala Mexico Panama Venezuela
Title of guideline Food Guidelines for Chile Food Guidelines for Food Guidelines — Food Guidelines for Food Guidelines for
Guatemala Mexico Panama Venezuela
Year 1997 1998 1993 1995 1991
Endorsing unit Ministry of Health, the Food Guidelines National Nutrition Ministry of Health CAVENDES Foundation,
2705_frame_C12 Page 359 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:18 PM
TABLE 12.4
Dietary Guidelines of Selected Latin American Countries
Chile Guatemala Mexico Panama Venezuela
1. Eat different types of foods 1. Include grains, cereals, or 1. Avoid monotony by 1. Eat a variety of foods 1. Eat a variety of foods every
throughout the day potatoes at each meal consuming a wide variety 2. Eat sufficient grains, roots, day
2. Increase consumption of because they are nutritious, of foods; select different vegetables, and fruits 2. Eat just enough to maintain
fruits, vegetables, and tasty, and have low cost foods each day and at each 3. Select a diet low in a proper weight
green vegetables 2. Eat vegetables and greens meal, choosing among saturated fat, cholesterol, 3. Eat preferably with your
3. Prefer vegetable oil and every day to benefit your those available at the and oil family
limit animal fats body market and following the 4. Eat sugar and sweets in 4. Practice good hygiene
4. For meat, prefer fish and 3. Every day, eat any type of proportions recommended moderation when handling food
2705_frame_C12 Page 360 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:18 PM
poultry fruit, because they are by the food guide pyramid 5. Eat sat and sodium in 5. Manage your money well
5. Increase consumption of healthy, easy to digest, and 2. Include at least two moderation when selecting and
low fat milk nutritious servings of fruits and 6. Maintain a healthy weight purchasing food
6. Reduce salt intake 4. If you eat tortilla and beans vegetables at every meal 6. Breast milk is the best food
7. Moderate sugar every day, eat one spoonful 3. Eat variety of grains and for children under 6 months
consumption of beans with each tortilla grain products, preferably of age
to make it more nutritious whole grains, at every meal, 7. Eat only moderate
5. At least twice a week eat mixing cereals and legumes quantities of food of animal
one egg or one piece of 4. Include a moderate serving origin
cheese, or drink one glass of of animal products at every 8. Use vegetable oils in
milk, to complement your meal, choosing those with preparing meals and avoid
diet the least fat excess animal fat
6. At least once per week, eat 5. Limit consumption of fats, 9. Get the fiber your body
a serving of liver (beef) or including cooking oils and needs from the vegetable
meat to strengthen your fatty foods, to less than 30% products you eat daily
body of daily energy intake; limit 10. Consume salt in
7. To stay healthy, eat a variety saturated fats, of animal moderation
of foods as indicated in the origin, to less than 10% of 11. Water is essential for life,
household pot total energy; reduce and drinking water helps to
cholesterol intake to less preserve your health
than 300 mg per day 12. Alcoholic beverages are not
part of a healthy diet
Handbook of Nutrition and Food
6. Reduce consumption of salt
and sugar, starting by not
using salt at the table and
reducing sugars in liquids
(coffee, tea, or juices)
7. Restrict consumption of
products with excess of
additives (colorants,
flavorings, etc.); avoid
alcohol and do not smoke
8. Breastfeed children from
birth and start
complementary food at the
fourth month of age
9. Avoid obesity by
monitoring weight
according to the suggested
2705_frame_C12 Page 361 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:18 PM
Some countries incorporate specific concerns about food consumption (Table 12.4).
Guatemala emphasizes the importance of hand washing, and keeping food and water
well covered. Venezuela has a guideline emphasizing good hygiene in handling food.
Guidelines directed to over-consumption are included by all the countries. These include
specific recommendations to increase physical activity (Mexico), maintain a healthy weight
(Mexico, Panama), or to moderate or reduce the use of fats and sugars (Chile, Mexico,
Panama, and Venezuela). Chronic disease risks are also addressed. These include recom-
mendations for moderate use of salt (Chile and Venezuela) or sodium (Panama), limiting
consumption of fats and sugars (Chile, Mexico, Panama, Venezuela), saturated fats (Mex-
ico, Panama), and cholesterol (Mexico, Panama). Other guidelines are directed to limiting
specific foods or nutrients, or to increase other more nutrient-rich foods (fruits, vegetables,
whole grains) (See Table 12.4).
The Latin American guidelines focus mostly on foods, not specific nutrients (Table 12.4).
However, Panama recommends moderation in the use of sodium along with salt. Guate-
mala, a country with low literacy rates, also emphasizes nutrients but in simple, short
messages; it singles out energy, protein (both animal and vegetable), vitamins A and C,
calcium, iron, and zinc, as well as fiber. This emphasis reflects Guatemala’s goals of
preventing both dietary deficiencies and excesses. Venezuela’s guidelines have little
emphasis on specific foods (Table 12.4).
All of the Latin American countries include advice on consuming fruits, vegetables, and
grains daily. Guatemala specifically mentions beans and tortillas. Other countries (Chile,
Mexico, and Venezuela) mention the need for limiting fat. Salt restriction is mentioned in
Mexico, Venezuela, and Panama. Both Mexico and Venezuela have a guideline limiting
alcohol. Chile and Guatemala include a guideline on use of dairy products; Chile focuses
on low-fat milk products; Guatemala urges at least one to two servings of whole fat milk
products, since much of the population is poor and does not consume milk. Mexico and
Venezuela have specific guidelines stressing the importance of breastfeeding. Panama has
special dietary guidelines for infants, recommending exclusive breastfeeding during the
first six months of life, and complementary feeding thereafter.27
Asian Countries
Introduction
Asia’s diversity is reflected in the many nutritional problems that were evident in the ten
countries we reviewed. Until the mid 1950s, poverty-related malnutrition was the major
2705_frame_C12 Page 363 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:18 PM
problem. The primary concern was to ensure adequate energy intakes and prevention or
control of dietary deficiency diseases.28,29 Today, nutrition problems in Asia cover the entire
spectrum from deficiency disease to excess.
Asian dietary guidelines focus on reducing or preventing both chronic deficiency and
chronic degenerative diseases, since both problems are often prevalent.1,30,31 Presently,
India still has high rates of protein–energy malnutrition among some groups. In coun-
tries such as Korea, Japan, Taiwan, and Singapore, protein–energy malnutrition has
declined dramatically in the past three decades.29,31,32 Countries such as Thailand and
China have low rates of protein–energy malnutrition, but micronutrient deficiencies
(iron, iodine, vitamin A, and riboflavin) are still common.33-36 Indonesia and the Philip-
pines face persistent problems of undernutrition and deficiency disease among the poor
coupled with emerging problems of overnutrition and increased chronic degenerative
disease, particularly among the affluent.28,35,37 Filipino guidelines for more affluent pop-
ulations focus on chronic degenerative diseases and avoiding excess,38 whereas their
guidelines for the relatively less affluent population emphasize achieving sufficiency of
nutrient intakes.37
Table 12.5 shows the various approaches used in developing dietary guidelines in Asia.
The guidelines are all intended to provide nutrition education and dietary guidance to
the general public in terms that are understandable to most consumers. They are also
often used to help officials in the health, agricultural, and education sectors in program
planning. All of the countries surveyed rely on government agencies and/or professional
societies to develop and endorse their official guidelines.37 Some countries (the Philippines,
Korea, and Japan) formulate guidelines based on findings from national nutrition or food
consumption surveys. Others develop their dietary guidelines based on what experts deem
appropriate.
Graphics have been adopted by many Asian countries to help the public visualize these
dietary guidelines and food guides. These include pyramids (India, Malaysia, Singapore),
pagodas (Korea and China), a plum flower (Taiwan), the “Big 6” for the six food groups
(Japan), and a six-sided star (Philippines). Another pyramid is also available for the more
affluent Filipinos.38
Table 12.6 presents information on representative dietary guidelines from the Asian
region. Most of the guidelines are general, and are food- rather than nutrient-based.
The exception is Singapore, which has guidelines that are quantitative and nutrient-
specific.39 There are common core food-based messages in all the guidelines; these
include: choose a diet composed of a wide variety of foods, eat enough food to meet
bodily needs and maintain or improve body weight, select foods that are safe to eat,
and enjoy your food.
The guidelines also vary with respect to number and relative emphasis on balance,
adequacy, moderation, and restriction. Although all the Asian dietary guidelines recom-
mend eating a variety of foods, they differ on how they suggest achieving a varied pattern
(see Table 12.6). Some include recommendations for frequency of consumption. Eating
breakfast daily is recommended in the Indonesian guidelines, and having regular meals
is recommended in the Korean guidelines.35,40 Other guidelines recommend specific
364
TABLE 12.5
Development of Dietary Guidelines in Asian Countries
India Indonesia Philippines Malaysia Thailand
Title of guideline Dietary Guideline for 13 Core Messages for a Nutritional Guidelines for Proposed Dietary The Thai Dietary
affluent Indians; Dietary Balanced Diet Filipinos Guidelines for Malaysia Guidelines for Better
Guideline for relatively Health
poor Indians
Year 1988 1995 1990 1996 1995
Endorsing unit Indian Council of Medical National Development Dept. of Science and Ministry of Health The Division of Nutrition,
Research (Expert and Planning Technology (National Department of Health,
Committee) Coordinating Board Guidelines Committee) Ministry of Public
Health
Approaches* 1-6 1 1-5 1, 2 , 3 1
2705_frame_C12 Page 364 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:18 PM
Target audiences** N G G, H G, H G
Graphic representation Pyramid None Pyramid, Pyramid None
6-sided star
Korea Japan Taiwan China Singapore
Title of guideline National Dietary Guidelines for Health Dietary Guidelines for the Chinese Dietary Guidelines for a Healthy
Guidelines Promotion: Dietary Population Guidelines for Chinese Diet
Guidelines Residents
Year 1990 1985 1995 1997 1993
Endorsing unit Korean Nutrition Ministry of Health and Department of Health Chinese Nutrition Society National Advisory
Society/ Ministry of Welfare Committee on Food &
Health and Welfare Nutrition, Ministry of
Health
Approaches* 1, 2, 4 1, 2, 3, 5 1 1 1
Target audiences** G G, H G G G
Graphic representation Pagoda Numeral 6 Plum flower Pagoda Pyramid
* 1 = Experts, scientists views; 2 = Review of former guidelines; 3 = From food groups; 4 = From consumption/nutrition survey; 5 = Definition of nutritional objectives;
6 = Economic data.
** G = General population; H = Health professionals; P = Policy makers; N = Nutrition education of school children.
Handbook of Nutrition and Food
TABLE 12.6
Dietary Guidelines of Selected Asian Countries
India Affluent India Relatively Poor Indonesia Philippines Malaysia
1. Overall energy should be 1. Diet should be the least 1. Eat a wide variety of foods 1. Eat a variety of foods 1. Enjoy a variety of foods
restricted to levels expensive and conform to 2. Consume foods that 2. Keep ideal body weight 2. Maintain healthy body
commensurate with traditional and cultural provide sufficient energy 3. Consume enough protein weight by balancing food
sedentary occupations so practices as closely as 3. Obtain about half of total 4. Keep fat consumption at intake with regular
that obesity is avoided possible energy requirements from 20% of energy intake physical activity
2. Give preference to 2. Energy derived from complex CHO-rich foods 5. Drink milk every day 3. Eat plenty of rice and other
undermilled over highly cereals should not exceed 4. Obtain not more than a 6. Reduce salt intake cereal products, fruits, and
refined and polished cereals 75% of the total energy quarter of total energy 7. Keep in good dental health vegetables
3. Include green leafy requirement intake from fats or oils 8. Moderate alcohol and 4. Minimize fat in food
vegetables in the diet 3. Some pulses should be 5. Use only iodized salt caffeine consumption preparation and choose
4. Restrict daily edible fat eaten along with the high- 6. Consume iron-rich foods 9. Keep harmony between foods low in fat and
2705_frame_C12 Page 365 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:18 PM
intake to less than 40g, total cereal diet, with at least 7. Breastfeed your baby diet and daily life cholesterol
fat intake to less than 20% 150 ml of milk and 150 g of exclusively for four months 10. Enjoy meals 5. Choose foods low in salt
of total calories, and intake vegetables per day 8. Have breakfast every day and sugar
Dietary Guidelines in Three Regions of the World
of ghee (clarified butter) to 4. Energy from fat and oil 9. Drink adequate quantities 6. Drink plenty of water daily
special occasions only should not exceed 10%, and of fluids that are free of 7. Practice breastfeeding
5. Restrict intake of sugar and that from refined contaminants
sweets carbohydrate (sugar or 10. Take adequate exercise
6. Avoid high-salt intake, jaggery) should not exceed 11. Avoid drinking alcoholic
especially for those prone to 5% of total calories drinks
hypertension 12. Consume foods prepared
hygienically
13. Read the labels of packaged
foods
Thailand Korea Japan China Singapore
1. Eat sufficient and 1. Eat a variety of foods 1. Obtain well-balanced 1. Eat a variety of foods 1. Eat a variety of foods
appropriate cereals or 2. Keep ideal body weight nutrition with a variety of 2. Eat appropriate quantity of 2. Maintain desirable body
whole grain cereal products 3. Consume enough protein foods (30 foods a day); take foods weight
2. Eat fish, lean meat, legumes, 4. Keep fat consumption at staple food, main dish, and 3. Moderate oil and fat 3. Restrict total fat intake to
and their products 20% of energy intake side dishes together 4. Eat moderately polished 20-30% of total energy
5. Drink milk every day cereals intake
365
366
in moderation happy family life; sit down 7. Reduce salt intake to less
6. Restrict salt intake and eat together and talk; than 4.5 g a day (1800 mg
7. Recognize and eat well treasure family taste and Na)
prepared food which is free home cooking 8. Reduce intake of salt-cured,
of microorganisms and preserved, and smoked
food contaminants foods
8. Avoid or restrict alcohol 9. Reduce intake of refined
consumption and processed sugar to less
than 10% of energy
10. Increase intake of fruit and
vegetables and whole-grain
cereal products
11. For those who drink
alcohol, have no more than
2-3 standard drinks (about
40 g alcohol) per day
12. Encourage breastfeeding in
infants until at least 6
months of age
Handbook of Nutrition and Food
2705_frame_C12 Page 367 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:18 PM
amounts of different kinds of foods. For example, to assure a well-balanced diet, the
Japanese guidelines recommend eating thirty or more different kinds of foods daily.41
Japanese guidelines also suggest balancing main and side dishes around staple foods.
Malaysia recommends choosing foods from each of the food groups daily.42 The Filipino
and Chinese guidelines also focus on achieving dietary adequacy, emphasizing food rather
than nutrient-based interventions.
Table 12.6 describes the guidelines with respect to nutrients. Virtually all emphasize
ensuring adequacy of energy/calorie intake. Korea mentions achieving and maintain-
ing energy balance by balancing intake and expenditure.35 Most guidelines stress
increased intakes of fruits, vegetables, cereal, and dairy food to promote fiber, vitamin,
and mineral intakes and geting enough food. Some also indicate the proportion of
foods that should be consumed in relation to total energy intake. For example, the
Indian guidelines for the low-income population recommend that less than 75% of
kcalories should come from cereals.43 In countries where deficiencies of vitamins and
minerals have been identified as public health problems, the guidelines reflect this and
emphasize food sources rich in those nutrients. For example, calcium is mentioned
specifically in some guidelines; a specific calcium-rich food (milk) is mentioned in the
Taiwanese, Chinese, and Korean guidelines, and fish and seaweed in the Japanese
guidelines. In Indonesia, people are advised to “consume iron-rich foods, and use only
iodized salt.”40 The Filipino guidelines recommend choosing “foods fortified with
nutrients.”37 The guidelines for less affluent Indians and Indonesians recommend eating
enough food.40,43
The guidelines for more affluent countries such as Taiwan, Singapore, Korea, Japan
(and also for the more affluent members of the populations in Indonesia and India)
emphasize moderation in fat, saturated fat, and/or simple sugars. The major difference
between the various guidelines in Asia is in the amounts and the relative balance
suggested between dietary constituents. The Asian guidelines on moderation in fat and
salt intake vary greatly. Some simply say to avoid excess, or to limit/restrict the use of
fat (see guidelines for India, Malaysia, Taiwan, China), while others specify the type of
fat to be consumed. For example, the Japanese guidelines recommend use of vegetable
oil instead of animal fat, and in the Indian guidelines, ghee (clarified fat, very high in
saturated fat) is recommended but only for special occasions for affluent Indians. China,
Taiwan, and Singapore are three countries with similar ethnic origins and dietary patterns
that share similar dietary guidelines recommending reducing intake of salt and salt-
cured foods. Singapore is the most specific, recommending eating less than 5 grams of
salt or 2000 mg of sodium per day.39 General recommendations on limiting salt intake
are present in other guidelines throughout the region. The Japanese guidelines recom-
mend eating less than 10 grams of salt per day. Neither Malaysia nor the Philippines
mention salt.39
The majority of the guidelines stress common nonfood-related healthy behaviors such
as not smoking, dental hygiene, stress management, weight control, and physical activity.
Asian dietary guidelines also specify the settings (places or environments) or other cir-
cumstances surrounding food and eating (Table 12.6). Most countries in this region also
acknowledge the impacts of lifestyle changes on health, and emphasize attaining a healthy
body weight to prevent diet-related disease. The Indonesian guideline recommends con-
suming “foods to provide sufficient energy.”40 Some of these differences in emphasis
reflect the vastly different levels of affluence within and between countries in Asia. For
example, India has two sets of guidelines. One is for the poor and emphasizes nutrient
adequacy and avoiding dietary deficiency diseases. The other Indian guideline is for
affluent individuals and emphasizes energy balance, restricting energy intakes to levels
2705_frame_C12 Page 368 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:18 PM
Conclusions
Dietary guidelines in the future must continue to take into account local dietary patterns,
cultural traditions, and food availability. Guidelines are most effective when they indicate
what aspects of diet need to be addressed to promote nutritional health in both the poor
and rich. In some countries where disparities in incomes are very large, two sets of
guidelines may be necessary.
Dietary guidelines should be flexible so that they can be used by people with different
lifestyles as well as by people of different ages, and with different population groups
(pregnant, lactating, infants, children, and elderly persons). Different guidelines may be
2705_frame_C12 Page 369 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:18 PM
needed for urban and rural populations or for other special groups such as ethnic minor-
ities in some countries.
Messages delivered to the public in dietary guidelines should provide advice on the
selection of a nutritionally balanced diet and encourage other suitable lifestyle behaviors
to promote health in target groups. It is difficult to include all without making the guide-
lines so long that their communicability is compromised. Therefore, other ancillary forms
of nutrition education are also needed. Graphics allow people to put dietary guidelines
and other recommendations about food consumption into action.
Nutrition education using dietary guidelines is only one ingredient for ensuring suffi-
cient knowledge to choose a healthful diet. Motivation and opportunities to change nutri-
tion and health behaviors in favorable directions are also necessary. Knowledge, science,
technology, culture, and food sources all change with the times, and so do foodways.
Therefore, it is necessary to review guidelines periodically and make appropriate modi-
fications, i.e., every five or ten years.
In conclusion, dietary guidelines can serve multiple purposes. These include providing
useful information to the public policy maker; serving as communication tools to nutrition
and health professionals, as guides to the food industry in product formulation, and as
instructional objectives for those involved in the provision of food, nutrition, and health
education. Food is not the only factor that can influence health. Most health problems in
modern society are multifactorial in origin. However, people can help themselves by
establishing healthy dietary habits and paying attention to other factors (such as physical
activity, not smoking, decreasing stress, and improving work environments). Such mea-
sures increase the chances for a long and active life. What individuals and families under-
stand, accept, and do in their day-to-day lives matters the most in implementing healthy
lifestyles. The Dietary Guidelines help people to ensure their nutritional health.
References
1. Tontisirin K, Kosulwat V. In: Florentino RF, Ed. Meeting National Needs of Asian Countries in
the 21st Century. Singapore: International Life Sciences Institution Press, 1996: pg 15.
2. United States Census Bureau. Population Estimates, 1999. At: http://www.census.gov, access-
ed March 15, 2000.
3. Australian Bureau of Statistics. The Health and Welfare of Australian’s Aboriginal and Torres
Strait people, 1999. At: http://abs.gov.au, accessed March 15, 2000.
4. National Health and Medical Research Council. Dietary Guidelines for Australians. Canberra:
Australian Government Publishing Service, 1992.
5. Thompson CD. In: C.A. F, Ed. Dietary Guidelines in Asia-Pacific. Philippines, Quezon City:
ASEAN-New Zealand IILP Project 5, 1997: pg 69.
6. US Department of Agriculture, US Department of Health, Committee DGA. Report of the
Dietary Guidelines Advisory Committee on the Dietary Guidelines for Americans, 1980.
Springfield: National Technical Information Service, 1980.
7. US Department of Agriculture, US Department of Health, Committee DGA. Report of the
Dietary Guidelines Advisory Committee on the Dietary Guidelines for Americans, 1990.
Springfield: National Technical Information Service, 1990.
8. US Department of Agriculture. Report of the Dietary Guidelines Advisory Committee on the
Dietary Guidelines for Americans, 1995: Agricultural Research Service, Dietary Guidelines
Advisory Committee, 1995.
9. US Department of Agriculture, A Dietary Guidelines Advisory Committee. Report of the dietary
guidelines advisory committee on dietary guidelines for American, 2000, to the secretary of
Health and Human Services and the Secretary of Agriculture, National Technical Information
Service, 2000. Spingfield: Department of Agriculture, US Department of Health, 2000.
2705_frame_C12 Page 370 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:18 PM
10. Food and Nutrition Information Center. Food guide pyramid information.
At: http://www. nla.usda.gov/fnic/etext, accessed March 20, 2000.
11. CDC. 1999. Cancer prevention and control.
At: http://www.cdc.gov/cancer/nper/register.htm, accessed March 22, 2000.
12. CDC. 1999. Chronic diseases conditions.
At: http://www.cdc.gov/nccdphp/major.htm, accessed March 22, 2000.
13. Mokdad AH. JAMA 282:1519; 1999.
14. Health Canada on-line. Nature and dimensions of nutrition related problems, 1999.
At: http://www.hc-sc.gc.ca, accessed March 15, 2000.
15. Nutrition Taskforce. Food for Health. Wellington: Department of Health (pamphlet), 1991.
16. Department of National Health and Welfare. Canada’s Guidelines for Healthy Eating. Ottawa:
Department of Health and Welfare, 1990.
17. Bengoa J, Torun B, Behar M, Scrimshaw N. In: Nutritional Goals and Food Guides in Latin
America. Basis for Their Development. JM Bengoa BT, M Behar, and N Scrimshaw, Eds. Caracas,
Venezuela: Arch Latinoam Nutr, 1987: pg 373-426.
18. Chilean Ministry of Health, Institute of Nutrition and Food Technology, Nutrition Center at
the University of Chile. Guias de alimentacion para la poblacion Chilena. Santiago, Chile:
Ministry of Health, 1997: pg 164.
19. Tagle MA. In: Nutritional goals and food guides in Latin America. Basis for their development.
JM Bengoa BT, M Behar, and N Scrimshaw, Eds. Caracas, Venezuela: Arch Latinoam Nutr 1987:
pg 750-765.
20. Valiente S, Abala C, Avila B, Monckeberg F. In: Nutritional goals and food guides in Latin
America. Basis for their development. JM Bengoa BT, M Behar, and N Scrimshaw, Eds. Caracas,
Venezuela: Arch Latinoam Nutr 1987: pg 445-465.
21. Peña M, Molina V. Food based dietary guidelines and health promotion in Latin America.
Washington, DC: Pan American Health Organization and Institute of Nutrition of Central
America and Panama, 1999: pg 31.
22. Chavez MMd, Chavez A, Rios E, Madrigal H. Guías de alimentación: Consejos practicos para
alcanzar y mantener un buen estado de nutricion y salud. Mexico, DF: Salvador Zubiran
National Institute of Nutrition, 1993: pg 58.
23. Instituto Nacional de Nutrición, Fundación Cavendes. Guías de Alimentación para Venezuela.
Caracas, Venezuela: Fundación Cavendes, 1991: pg 88.
24. Ministerio de la Familia, Fundación Cavendes. Guías de Alimentación en el Niño Menor de
seis Años. Orientacion Normativa. Caracas, Venezuela: Fundación Cavendes, 1997: pg 44.
25. Ministerio de la Familia, Fundación Cavendes. Guías de Alimentación para Venezuela del
Niño Menor de seis Años. Manual para hogares y multihogares de cuidado diario. Caracas,
Venezuela: Fundación Cavendes, 1996: pg 131.
26. Guatemala NCoDG. Guías alimentarias para Guatemala: Los siete pasos para una alimenta-
cion sana. Guatemala: Dietary Guidelines National Committee, 1998: pg 44.
27. Panamanian Ministry of Health. Guías alimentarias para Panama. Panama City, Panama:
Ministry of Health, 1995: pg 40.
28. Florentino RF. In: Dietary Guidelines in Asian Countries: Towards a Food-Based Approach,
proceedings of a seminar and workshop on national dietary guidelines. Florentino RF, Ed.
Meeting National Needs of Asian Countries in the 21st Century. Singapore: International Life
Sciences Institution Press, 1996: pg 32.
29. Karyadi D, Karyadi E. In: Dietary Guidelines in Asian Countries: Towards a Food Based
Approach, proceedings of a seminar and workshop on national dietary guidelines. Florentino
RF, Ed. Meeting National Needs of Asian Countries in the 21st Century. Singapore: International
Life Sciences Institution Press, 1996: pg 28.
30. Department of Health Taiwan ROC. Daily dietary guidelines for all populations. 1999. At:
http://health99.doh.gov.tw/Query/ShowPic.pl?t106.htm, accessed March 23, 2000.
31. WHO. Obesity epidemic puts millions at risk from related diseases. Press release WHO/46.
1997. At: http://www.who.int/dsg/justpub/obesity.htm, accessed March 15, 2000.
32. WHO. Malnutrition — The Global Picture.
At: http://www.who.int/nut/ malnutrition_worldwide.htm, accessed March 15, 2000.
2705_frame_C12 Page 371 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:18 PM
13
Healthy People — Goals and Interpretations*
Overview
In the 1970s, the United States Department of Health and Human Services began the
process of defining specific goals to improve the health of Americans. The first publication,
Healthy People: The Surgeon General’s Report on Health Promotion and Disease Prevention,1 was
released in 1979. This preventive health initiative is now entering its third decade with
the January 2000 release of Healthy People 2010.2
Healthy People: The Surgeon General’s Report on Health Promotion and Disease Prevention
outlined goals for the nation to reduce premature death and preserve independence for
older adults. In 1980, Promoting Health/Preventing Disease: Objectives for the Nation was
released.3 This report delineated 15 priority areas and 226 objectives for the country to
achieve over the next decade. These objectives were organized under the general heading
of prevention services, health protection, and health promotion.
Healthy People 2000: National Health Promotion and Disease Prevention Objectives4 was
released in 1990. This report expanded on the 1980 objectives. Two new focus areas, cancer
and HIV, were also added. Healthy People 2000 consisted of the following three goals:
The report was comprised of 22 priority areas organized under the general headings of
health promotion, health prevention services, and surveillance and data systems. The
report also organized the appropriate objectives in four areas according to age (children,
adolescent and young adults, adults and older adults) and special at–risk population
groups (low income, minorities, and people with disabilities).
In 1995, Healthy People 2000 Midcourse Review and 1995 Revisions5 was released. This
report evaluated the nation’s progress on the 2000 objectives and resulted in changes in
* Special thanks to Judy Moreland, Judy Nowak, Sharon Sass, and Geri Tebo for their help in developing this
manuscript.
0-8493-2705-9/01/$0.00+$1.50
© 2002 by CRC Press LLC 373
2705_frame_C13 Page 374 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:18 PM
TABLE 13.1
Healthy People 2010 Focus Areas
1. Access to quality health services
2. Arthritis, osteoporosis, and chronic back conditions
3. Cancer
4. Chronic kidney disease
5. Diabetes
6. Disability and secondary conditions
7. Educational and community-based programs
8. Environmental health
9. Family planning
10. Food safety
11. Health communications
12. Heart diseases and stroke
13. HIV
14. Immunization and infectious disease
15. Injury and violence prevention
16. Maternal, infant, and child health
17. Medical product safety
18. Mental health and mental disorders
19. Nutrition and overweight
20. Occupational safety and health
21. Oral health
22. Physical activity and fitness
23. Public health infrastructure
24. Respiratory diseases
25. Sexually transmitted diseases
26. Substance abuse
27. Tobacco use
28. Vision and hearing
U.S. Department of Health and Human Services, Healthy
People 2010 2nd ed., Government Printing Office, Super-
intendent of Documents, Washington, DC, January 2000.
The two-volume report consists of 467 objectives organized in 28 focus areas. These
focus areas are listed in Table 13.1.
2705_frame_C13 Page 375 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:18 PM
TABLE 13.2
Leading Health Indicators
Physical activity
Overweight and obesity
Tobacco use
Substance abue
Responsible sexual behavior
Mental health
Injury and violence
Environmental quality
Immunization
Access to health care
U.S. Department of Health and Human Services, Healthy
People 2010 2nd ed., Government Printing Office, Super-
intendent of Documents, Washington, DC, January 2000.
A new addition to Healthy People 2010 is the identification of leading health indicators
(Table 13.2). These represent major public health concerns in the U.S. They are divided
into two groups: lifestyle challenges and system enhancement challenges.6 The lifestyle
challenges are physical activity, overweight and obesity, tobacco use, substance abuse, and
responsible sexual behavior. The system challenges are mental health, injury and violence,
environmental quality, immunizations, and access to health care. Specific objectives will
be used to track progress toward improving the leading health indicators.
Nutrition has been one of the focus areas since the beginning of the Healthy People
initiative. In Healthy People 2010, the goal of the nutrition and overweight focus area is to
promote health and reduce chronic disease associated with diet and weight. There are 18
objectives listed in the nutrition section, with 33 other nutrition-related objectives listed
in other focus areas.
Table 13.3 delineates the primary nutriton-related objectives from Healthy People 2000
and Healthy People 2010. The table is organized around the Healthy People 2000 objectives.
The first column lists the nutrition objectives from Section 2 as well as key nutrition-related
objectives from other Healthy People 2000 focus areas. The objectives from the nutrition
section are bolded. The information in italic print was added at the midcourse review. The
second column is the baseline data that was used to evaluate the objectives, and the third
column is the source of that data. The fourth column, Outcome, evaluates the success in
meeting the Healthy People 2000 objective. The fifth column lists the corresponding Healthy
People 2010 objectives, if available. It also lists any new objectives. Again, the objectives
from the nutrition section (Section 19) are bolded. The last two columns list the baseline
data, and data sources for Healthy People 2010. The baseline data rates used in Healthy
People 2010 were age-adjusted to the year 2000, whereas the rates used in Healthy People
2000 were age-adjusted to the 1940 population or are crude rates. If an objective does not
have baseline data or a known data source, it is listed as a developmental objective.
Table 13.4 provides the full names for the abbreviations used in the data source columns.
The information presented in the chart is taken directly from the references indicated in
the footnotes.
Healthy People is truly one of this country’s most significant public health initiatives.
It is a valuable tool to help Americans promote health and prevent disease, disability, and
premature death. To be successful, we must continue to work together to put Healthy
People into practice.
TABLE 13.3
Summary of Healthy People 2000 and 2010 Objectives
376
2.1 Reduce coronary Age-adjusted baseline: NVSS, CDC (4) In 1996, the death rate 12-1 Reduce coronary 208 coronary heart NVSS, CDC, NCHS (2)
heart disease deaths to 135/100,000 in 1987. (4) from coronary heart heart disease deaths. disease deaths/100,000
no more than 100/ disease (CHD) was 105 Target: 166/100,000 population (age-
100,000 people. (4) deaths/100,000 people. (2) adjusted) in 1998. (2)
population. (8)
2.2 Reverse the rise in Age-adjusted baseline: NVSS, CDC (4) In 1997, the age adjusted 3-1 Reduce the overall 201.4 cancer deaths/ NVSS, CDC, NCHS (2)
cancer deaths to 133/100,000 in 1987. (4) cancer death rate was cancer death rate. 100,000 population
achieve a rate of no 125 deaths/100,000 Target: 158.7 cancer (age-adjusted) in 1998.
more than 130/100,000 population deaths/100,000 (2)
people. (4) (preliminary data). (8) population. (2)
2.3 Reduce overweight 26% for people age 20 NHANES, CDC; In 1994, the prevalence of 19-1 Increase the 42% of adults age 20 NHANES, CDC,
to a prevalence of no through 74 in 1976-80, Hispanic HANES, overweight was 35% proportion of adults years and older were at NCHS (2)
more than 20% among 24% for men and 27% CDC; IHS; NHIS, CDC for people 20-74 years who are at a healthy a healthy weight
people age 20 and for women; 15% for (4) and 24% for weight. Target: 60%. (2) (defined as a body mass
older and no more than adolescents age 12 adolescents 12-19 years. index (BMI) equal to or
2705_frame_C13 Page 376 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:18 PM
15% among through 19 in 1976-80. This is a substantial greater than 18.5 and
adolescents through (4) increase over the 1976- less than 25) in 1988-94.
19. (4) 80 baseline data. (8) (2)
19-2 Reduce the 23% of adults age 20 NHANES, CDC,
proportion of adults years and older were NCHS (2)
who are obese. Target: identified as obese
15%. (2) (defined as a BMI of 30
or more) in 1988-94. (2)
1988-94 baseline for NHANES, CDC,
19-3 Reduce the children age 6-11: 11%; NCHS (2)
proportion of children age 12-19: 10%; age 6-
and adolescents who 19: 11%. (2)
are overweight or
obese. Target: age 6-11
years: 5%; age 12-19
years: 5%; age 6-19
years: 5%. (2)
2.4 Reduce growth Up to 16% among low- Pediatric Nutrition The target to reduce 19-4 Reduce growth 8% of low-income PNSS, CDC, NCCDPHP
retardation among income children in Surveillance System, growth retardation to retardation among children under age 5 (2)
low-income children 1988, depending on age CDC (4) less than 10% for all low-income children years were growth
age 5 and younger to and race/ethnicity. (4) low-income children under age 5 years. retarded in 1997
less than 10%. (4) age 5 years and under Target: 5%. (2) (defined as height-
has been met, although forage below the 5th
the target for African- percentile in the age-
American children gender appropriate
under 1 year has not. (7) population using the
1977 NCHS/CDC
Handbook of Nutrition and Food
fat. (5)
2.6 Increase complex 2 1/2 servings of CSFII, USDA (1) 4.7 servings of 19-5 Increase the 28% of persons age 2 CSFII, USDA (2)
carbohydrate and vegetables and fruits vegetables and fruits proportion of persons years and older
fiber-containing foods and 3 servings of grain and 6.9 servings of age 2 years and older consumed at least 2
in the diets of adults to products for women grain products for who consume at least 2 daily servings of fruit in
5 or more daily age 19 through 50 in people age 2 and over; daily servings of fruit. 1994-96. (2)
servings for vegetables 1985. (4) Baseline for 35% met the goal for Target: 75%. (2)
(including legumes) the midcourse fruits and vegetables 19-6 Increase the 3% of persons age 2 years CSFII, USDA (2)
and fruits, and to 6 or addition): 29% met the and 52% met the goal proportion of persons and older consumed at
more daily servings for goal for fruits and for grain products for age 2 years and older least 3 daily servings of
grain products. (4) In vegetables and 40% met people age 2 and older who consume at least 3 vegetables, with at least
addition, increase to at the goal for grain in 1989-91. (8) daily servings of one-third of these
least 50% the products for people age vegetables, with at servings being dark
proportion of people 2 and older based on 3- least one-third being green or deep yellow
age 2 and older who day dietary data in dark green or deep vegetables in 1994-96.
meet the Dietary 1989-91. (5) yellow vegetables. (2)
Guidelines' average Target: 50%. (2) 7% of persons age 2 years
daily goal of 5 or more 19-7 Increase the and older consumed at CSFII, USDA (2)
servings of vegetables/ proportion of persons least 6 daily servings of
fruits, and increase to age 2 years and older grain products, with at
at least 50% the who consume at least 6 least 3 being whole
proportion who meet daily servings of grain grains in 1994-96. (2)
the goal of 6 or more products, with at least
grain products. (5) 3 being whole grains.
Target: 50%. (2)
377
378
2.7 Increase to at least 30% of overweight NHIS, CDC (4) In 1995, 15% of the No corresponding
50% the proportion of women and 25% of overweight women and objective.
overweight people age overweight men for 19% of the overweight
12 and older who have people age 18 and older men age 18 and older
adopted sound dietary in 1985. (4) have adopted sound
practices combined dietary practices
with regular physical combined with
activity to attain an physical activity to
appropriate body attain an appropriate
weight. (4) body weight. (8)
2705_frame_C13 Page 378 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:18 PM
2.8 Increase calcium 7% of women and 14% of CSFII, USDA (4) 15% of people 11-24 19-11 Increase the 46% of persons age 2 NHANES, CDC, NCHS
intake so at least 50% men age 19 through 24 years and 13% proportion of persons years and older were at (2)
of youth age 12 and 24% of pregnant pregnant and lactating age 2 years and older or above approximated
through 24 and 50% of and lactating women females consumed an who meet dietary mean calcium
pregnant and lactating consumed 3 or more average of 3 or more recommendations for requirements (based on
women consume 3 or servings, and 15% of servings daily, and 47% calcium. Target: 75%. consideration of
more servings daily of women and 23% of men of children 2-10 years (2) calcium from foods,
foods rich in calcium, age 25 through 50 and 21% people 25 dietary supplements,
and at least 50% of consumed 2 or more years and over and antacids) in 1988-
people age 25 and servings in 1985-86. (4) consumed 2 or more 94. (2)
older consume 2 or servings in 1996. (8)
more servings daily. (4)
2.9 Decrease salt and 54% of women age 19 CSFII, USDA; Health In 1995, 19% of people 18 19-10 Increase the 21% of persons age 2 NHANES, CDC, NCHS
sodium intake so at through 50 who served and Diet Survey, FDA years and over proportion of persons years and older (2)
least 65% of home as the main meal (4) regularly purchase age 2 years and older consumed 2400 mg of
meal preparers prepare preparer did not use foods with reduced salt who consume 2,400 mg sodium or less daily
foods without adding salt in food and sodium content, or less of sodium daily. (from foods, dietary
salt, at least 80% of preparation, and 68% of 58% rarely or never use (2) supplements, tap
people avoid using salt women age 19 through salt at the table. (8) water, and salt use at
at the table, and at least 50 did not use salt at the the table) in 1988-94. (2)
40% of adults regularly table in 1985; 20% of all
purchase foods people age 18 and older
modified or lower in regularly purchased
sodium. (4) foods with reduced salt
and sodium content in
1988. (4)
Handbook of Nutrition and Food
2.10 Reduce iron 9% among children age 1 NHANES, CDC; Alaska 6% among children age 19-12 Reduce iron 1988-94 baseline: NHANES, CDC, NCHS;
deficiency to less than through 2, 4% for Native Children, CDC 1-4 years; 9% for deficiency among children age 1-2 years: NCHS (2)
3% among children children age 3 through 1988; PNSS, CDC (4) children age 1-2 years; young children and 9%; Children age 3-4
age 1 through 4 and 4, 5% for women age 20 4% for children age 3-4 females of years: 4%; Non-
among women of through 44 in 1976-80. years; 8% for females childbearing age. pregnant females age
childbearing age. (4) (4) age 20-44 years were Target for children age 12 to 49 years: 11%. (2)
anemic in 1988-94. (8) 1-2 years: 5%; Children
age 3-4 years: 1%; Non-
pregnant females age
12-49 years: 7%. (2)
19-13 Reduce anemia
among low-income 29% of low-income PNSS, CDC, NCCDPHP
pregnant females in pregnant females in (2)
their third trimester. their third trimester
Target: 20%. (2) were anemic (defined
as hemoglobin <11.0 g/
19-14 (Developmental) dL) in 1996. (2)
Reduce iron deficiency Potential Data Source:
among pregnant NHANES, CDC, NCHS
females. (2) (2)
2705_frame_C13 Page 379 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:18 PM
2.11 Increase to at least 54% at discharge from Ross Laboratories 62% in early postpartum 16-19 Increase the 1998 baseline: in early Mothers' Survey, Abbott
Healthy People — Goals and Interpretations
75% the proportion of birth site and 21% at 5 Mothers Survey; PNSS, period and 26% at 6 proportion of mothers postpartum period: Laboratories Inc., Ross
mothers who to 6 months in 1988. (4) CDC (4) months in 1997. (8) who breastfeed their 64%; at 6 months: 29%; Products Division (2)
breastfeed their babies babies. Target: in early at 1 year: 16%. (2)
in the early postpartum period:
postpartum period and 75%; at 6 months: 50%;
to at least 50% the at 1 year: 25%. (2)
proportion who
continue
breastfeeding until
their babies are 5 to 6
months old. (4)
2.12 Increase to at least 55% for parents and NHIS, CDC (8) No data beyond No corresponding
75% the proportion of caregivers of children 6- baseline. (7) objective.
parents and caregivers 23 months in 1988. (5)
who use feeding
practices that prevent
baby bottle tooth
decay. (4)
379
380
2.13 Increase to at least 74% used labels to make Health and Diet Survey, In 1995, 75% of the No corresponding
85% the proportion of food selections in 1988. FDA (4) people 18 years and objective.
people age 18 and (4) over reported using
older who use food food labels. (8)
labels to make
nutritious food
selections. (4)
2.14 Achieve useful and 60% of sales of processed Food Label and Package In 1995, 96% of pro- No corresponding
informative nutrition foods regulated by Survey, FDA (4) cessed foods had objective.
2705_frame_C13 Page 380 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:18 PM
2.15 Increase to at least 2500 items reduced in fat Nielsen Company In 1991, 5618 reduced fat No corresponding
5000 brand items the in 1986. (4) National Scantrack (4) and saturated fat food objective.
availability of products were
processed food available. (8)
products that are
reduced in fat and
saturated fat. (4)
2.16 Increase to at least About 70% of fast food Survey of Chain In 1990, 75% of large- No corresponding
90% the proportion of and family restaurant Operators, National chain restaurants objective.
restaurants and chains with 350 or more Restaurant Association offering at least one
institutional food units had at least one (4) low-fat, low-calorie
service operations that low-fat, low-calorie item. (8)
offer identifiable low- item on their menu in
fat, low-calorie food 1989. (4)
choices, consistent
with the Dietary
Guidelines for
Americans. (4)
Handbook of Nutrition and Food
2.17 Increase to at least 1% of schools offered 1992 School Nutrition There were no new data 19-15 (Developmental) Potential Data Source:
90% the proportion of lunches that provided Dietary Assessment beyond the baseline to Increase the CSFII, USDA (2)
school lunch and an average of 30% or Study; SHPPS, CDC, measure this objective. proportion of children
breakfast services and less of calories from NCCDPHP (8) (7) and adolescents age 6
child care food services total fat, and less than to 19 years whose
with menus that are 1% offered lunches that intake of meals and
consistent with the provided an average of snacks at schools
nutrition principles in less than 1% of calories contributes
the Dietary Guidelines from saturated fat. Of proportionally to good
for Americans. (4) the schools partici- overall dietary quality.
pating in the USDA (2)
school breakfast
program, 44% offered
breakfasts that
provided an average of
30% or less of calories
from total fat, and 4%
offered breakfasts that
provided an average of
less than 10% of calories
from saturated fat in
2705_frame_C13 Page 381 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:18 PM
1992. (5)
Healthy People — Goals and Interpretations
2.18 Increase to at least 48% in 1991. (8) NHIS, CDC (8) 50% in 1995. (8) No corresponding
80% the receipt of objective.
home food services by
people age 65 and
older who have
difficulty in preparing
their own meals or are
otherwise in need of
home-delivered meals.
(4)
381
382
2.19 Increase to at least 60% of states in 1991. (5) National Survey of The proportion of States 7-2 Increase the Summary objective SHPPS, CDC,
75% the proportion of School Health that required nutrition proportion of middle, baseline: 28%; NCCDPHP (2)
the nation's schools Education Activities, education increased junior high, and senior unhealthy dietary
that provide nutrition CDC, NCCDPHP (8) from 60% in 1990 to high schools that patterns baseline: 78%
education from 69% in 1994. (8) provide comprehensive in 1994. (2)
preschool through 12th school health education
grade, preferably as to prevent health
2705_frame_C13 Page 382 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:18 PM
2.20 Increase to at least 17% offered nutrition NWHPS, ODPHP (4) The proportion of 19-16 Increase the pro- 55% of worksites with 50 NWHPS, AWHP (2)
50% the proportion of education activities and worksites with 50 or portion of worksites or more employees
worksites with 50 or 15% offered weight more employees that that offer nutrition or offered nutrition or
more employees that control activities in offer programs for weight management weight management
offer nutrition 1985. (4) employees increased classes or counseling. classes or counseling at
education and/or from 17% in 1985 to Target: 85%. (2) the worksite or through
weight management 31% in 1992. (8) their health plans in
programs for 1998-1999. (2)
employees. (4)
Handbook of Nutrition and Food
2.21 Increase to at least Physicians provided diet Lewis 1988 (4) There were no new data 19-17 Increase the Counseling or education NAMCS, CDC, NCHS
75% the proportion of counseling for an beyond the baseline to proportion of on diet and nutrition (2)
primary care providers estimated 40-50% of measure this objective. physician office visits was ordered or
who provide nutrition patients in 1988. (4) (7) made by patients with provided for 42% of
assessment and a diagnosis of physician visits that
counseling and/or cardiovascular disease, were related to the
referral to qualified diabetes, or diagnosis of cardio-
nutritionists or hyperlipidemia that vascular disease,
dietitians. (4) include counseling or diabetes, or hyper-
education related to lipidemia in 1997. (2)
diet and nutrition.
Target: 75%. (2)
2.22 Reduce stroke Age-adjusted baseline: NVSS, CDC (4) In 1996, the age adjusted 12-7 Reduce stroke 60 deaths from stroke/ NVSS, CDC, NCHS (2)
deaths to no more than 30.3/100,000 in 1987. death rate from stroke deaths. Target: 48 100,000 population in
20/100,000 people. (5) (5) was 26.4/100,000. (8) deaths/100,000 1998. (2)
population. (2)
2.23 Reduce colorectal 14.4/100,000 in 1987. (5) NVSS, CDC (4) In 1996, the age adjusted 3-5 Reduce the colorectal 21.1 colorectal cancer NVSS, CDC, NCHS (2)
cancer deaths to no death rate was for cancer death rate. deaths/100,000 pop-
more than 13.2/100,000 colorectal cancer 16.3 Target: 13.9 deaths/ ulation in 1998. (2)
2705_frame_C13 Page 383 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:18 PM
population. (8)
2.24 Reduce diabetes to 1986-88, the indence was NHIS, CDC; IHS; In 1994-96, the incidence 5-3 Reduce the overall 40 overall cases (new and NHIS, CDC, NCHS (2)
an incidence of no 2.9/1,000; the Hispanic HANES, CDC of diabetes was 3.1/ rate of diabetes that is existing) of diabetes/
more than 2.5/1,000 prevalance was 28/ (4) 1,000 population and clinically diagnosed. 1,000 population (age-
people and a 1,000. (5) the prevalence was 31/ Target: 25 overall adjusted) in 1997. (2)
prevalence of no more 1,000 population. (8) cases/1,000
than 25/1,000 people. population. (2)
(5)
2.25 Reduce the 27% for people age 20-74 NHANES, CDC (4) The prevalence of high 12-14 Reduce the 21% of adults age 20 NHANES, CDC, NCHS
prevalence of blood in 1976-80, 29% for blood cholesterol was proportion of adults years and older had (2)
cholesterol levels of women and 25% for 19% among people 20- with high total blood total blood cholesterol
240 mg/dL or greater to men. (5) 74 years in 1988-94. (8) cholesterol levels. levels of 240 mg/dL or
no more than 20% Target: 17%. (2) greater in 1988-94. (2)
among adults. (5)
2.26 Increase to at least 11% controlled among NHANES, CDC; 1982-88 In 1991, the control rate 12-10 Increase the 18% of adults age 18 NHANES, CDC, NCHS
50% the proportion of people age 18-74 in Seven State Survey, among people 18-74 proportion of adults years and older with (2)
people with high 1976-80; an estimated NIH (4) years with high blood with high blood high blood pressure
blood pressure whose 24% for people age 18 pressure was 29%. (8) pressure whose blood had it under control in
blood pressure is and older in 1982-84. (5) pressure is under 1988-94. (2)
under control. (5) control. Target: 50%. (2)
383
384
2.27 Reduce the mean 213 mg/dL among NHANES, CDC (4) Average total serum 12-13 Reduce the mean 206 mg/dL was the NHANES, CDC, NCHS
serum cholesterol people age 20-74 in cholesterol for people total blood cholesterol mean total blood (2)
among adults to no 1976-80, 211 mg/dL for 20-74 years was 203 levels among adults. cholesterol level for
more than 200 mg/dL. men and 215 mg/dL for mg/dL in 1988-94. (8) Target: 199 mg/dL. (2) adults age 20 years and
(5) women. (5) older in 1988-94. (2)
19-18 Increase food 88% of all US households Current Population
security among US were food secure in Survey, US Dept of
households and in so 1995. (2) Commerce, Bureau of
doing reduce hunger. the Census; National
Target: 94%. (2) Food and Nutrition
Survey, (beginning in
2001) DHHS and USDA
2705_frame_C13 Page 384 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:18 PM
(2)
4.8 Reduce alcohol 2.54 gallons of ethanol in NIAAA, ADAMHA (4) In 1994, 2.21 gallons 26-12 Reduce average 2.19 gallons of ethanol/ AEDS, NIH, NIAAA (2)
consumption by people 1987 (4) alcohol/person age 14 annual alcohol person age 14 years and
14 and older to an years and older were consumption. Target: 2 older were consumed
annual average of no consumed. (8) gallon. (2) in 1996. (2)
more than 2 gallons of
ethanol/person. (4)
12.1 Reduce infections Salmonella species:18/ NCID, CDC (4) In 1996, Salmonella 10-1 Reduce infections In 1997, the case/100,000 Foodborne Disease
caused by key 100,000; Campylobacter species: 15/100,000; caused by key population was Network (FoodNet),
foodborne pathogens to jejuni: 50/100,000; Campylobacter jejuni: foodborne pathogens. Campylobacter species: CDC, NCID; FDA,
incidences of no more Escherichia coli: 24/100,000; Escherichia Target (cases/100,000): 24.6; Escherichia coli: CFSAN; FSIS, OPHS
than: Salmonella species: 0157:H7: 8/100,000; coli: 0157:H7: 3/ Campylobacter species: 0157-H7:2.1; Listeria and state agencies.
16/100,000 Listeria monocytogenes: 100,000; Listeria 12.3; Escherichia coli monocytogenes: 0.5; Potential data sources:
Campylobacter jejuni: 0.7/ 100,000. (4) monocytogenes: 0.5/ 0157-H7: 1.0; Listeria Salmonella species: 13.7. NNDSS, CDC, NCID
25/100,000; Escherichia 100,000. (8) monocytogenes: 0.25; (2) (2)
coli: 0157:H7: 4/ Salmonella species: 6.8;
100,000; Listeria Cyclospora cayetanensis:
monocytogenes: 0,5/ developmental;
100,000. (4) Postdiarrheal
hemolytic uremic
syndrome:
developmental;
Congenital Toxoplasma
gondii: developmental.
(2)
Handbook of Nutrition and Food
12.2 Reduce outbreaks of 77 Outbreaks in 1989. (4) NCID, CDC (4) In 1996, there were 50 10-2 Reduce outbreaks of The number of outbreaks Foodborne Disease
infections due to outbreaks due to infections caused by in 1997: Escherichia coli Outbreak Surveillance
Salmonella enteritidious Salmonella enteritidious. key foodborne bacteria. 0157-H7-22; Salmonella System, CDC, NCID (2)
to fewer than 25 (8) Target (number of serotype Enteridis-44.
outbreaks yearly. (4) outbreaks/year): (2)
Escherichia coli 0157-
H7:11; Salmonella
serotype Enteridis: 22.
(2)
12.3 Increase to at least For refrigeration of Food Safety Survey, For refrigeration of 10-5 Increase the 72% of consumers Food Safety Survey,
75% the proportion of perishable foods, 70%; FDA; Diet-Health perishable foods, 72% proportion of followed key food FDA: FSIS, USDA (2)
households in which for washing cutting Knowledge Survey, (in 1993); for washing consumers who follow safety practices in 1998.
principal food boards with soap, 66%; USDA (4) cutting boards with key food safety (2)
preparers routinely and for washing soap, 71% (in 1997); practices. Target: 79%.
refrain from leaving utensils with soap, 55%, washing utensils with (2)
perishable food out of in 1988. (4) soap, no data beyond
the refrigerator for over the baseline. (8)
2 hours and wash
cutting boards and
utensils with soap after
2705_frame_C13 Page 385 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:18 PM
14.1 Reduce the infant 10.1/1000 live births in NVSS, CDC: Linked In 1996, the infant 16-1 Reduce fetal and In 1997, (per 1000 live NVSS, CDC, NCHS (2)
mortality rate to no 1987. (4) Birth and Infant Death mortality rate was 7.3/ infant deaths. Target births plus fetal deaths)
more than 7/1000 live Data Set, CDC (4) 1,000 live births. (8) (per 1000 live births 6.8 for 20 or more
births. (4) plus fetal deaths): 4.1 at weeks of gestation; 7.5
20 or more weeks of during the perinatal
gestation; 4.5 during period. (2)
the perinatal period. (2)
14.5 Reduce low birth 6.9 and 1.2%, NVSS, CDC (4) 7.4% and 1.4% 16-10. Reduce low birth 1998 baseline: 7.6% for NVSS, CDC, NCHS (2)
weight to an incidence respectively, in 1987. (4) respectively, in 1996. (8) weight (LBW) and very LBW 1.4% for VLBW.
of no more than 5% of low birth weight (2)
live births and very low (VLBW). Target: 5.0%
birth weight to no more for LBW Target: 0.9%
than 1% of live births. for VLBW. (2)
(4)
14.6 Increase to at least 68% of married females National Natality In 1990, 75% of mothers 16-12. (Developmental) Potential data sources:
85% the proportion of who had a full-term Survey, CDC, National achieved the minimum Increase the proportion NVSS, CDC, NCHS (2)
mothers who achieve live birth and prenatal Maternal and Infant recommended weight of mothers who achieve
the minimum care in 1980. (8) Health Survey, CDC, gain during their a recommended weight
recommended weight NCHS (8) pregnancies. (8) gain during their
gain during their pregnancies. (2)
pregnancies. (4)
385
386
15.5 Increase to at least 79% of aware NHIS, CDC (4) In 1994, 71% of people 18 12-11 Increase the 72% of adults age 18 NHIS, CDC, NCHS (2)
90% the proportion of hypertensives age 18 years and over with proportion of adults years and older with
people with high blood and older were taking high blood pressure with high blood high blood pressure
pressure who are action to control their were using medication pressure who are were taking action to
taking action to help blood pressure in 1985. and diet. (8) taking action (for control it in 1998. (2)
control their blood (4) example, losing weight,
pressure. (4) increasing physical
activity, and reducing
2705_frame_C13 Page 386 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:18 PM
15.8 Increase to at least 11% of all people age 18 Health and Diet Survey, 60% of all people age 18 No corresponding
60% the proportion of and older, and thus an FDA (4) Cholesterol and older with high objective.
adults with high blood estimated 30% of Awareness Survey, blood cholesterol were
cholesterol who are people with high blood NHLBI, NIH. (8) aware that their blood
aware of their condition cholesterol were aware cholesterol was high in
and are taking action to that their blood 1995. (8)
reduce their blood cholesterol was high in
cholesterol to 1988. (4)
recommended levels.
(4)
15.15 Increase to at least In 1986, the median Cholesterol Awareness In 1995, the median No corresponding
75% the proportion of cholesterol level when Survey, NIH, NHLBI cholesterol level when objective.
primary care providers diet therapy was (8) diet therapy was
who initiate diet and, if initiated: 240-259 mg/ initiated: 200-219 mg/
necessary, drug therapy dL; median cholesterol dL; median cholesterol
at levels of blood level when drug level when drug
cholesterol consistent therapy was initiated: therapy was initiated:
with current 300-319 mg/dL. (8) 240-259 mg/dL. (8)
management
guidelines for patients
with high blood
cholesterol. (4)
Handbook of Nutrition and Food
15.16 Increase to at least 16.5% offered high blood NWHPS, ODPHP (4) In 1992, 29% offered high No corresponding
50% proportion of pressure activities and blood pressure objective.
worksites with 50 or 16.8% offered nutrition activities; 31% offered
more employees that education activities in nutrition education
offer high blood 1985. (4) activities; 32% offered
pressure and/or blood pressure
cholesterol education screening. (8)
and control activities to
their employees. (4)
2-9. Reduce the overall 10% of adults age 50 NHANES, CDC, NCHS
number of cases of years and older had (2)
osteoporosis Target: osteoporosis as
8%. (2) measured by low total
femur bone mineral
density (BMD) in 1988-
94. (2)
16.3 Reduce breast 22.9 breast cancer NVSS, CDC (4) 20.2 breast cancer death/ 3-3 Reduce the breast 27.7 breast cancer NVSS, CDC, NCHS (2)
cancer deaths to no deaths/100,000 females 100,000 females in 1997. cancer death rate. deaths/100,000 females
more than 20.6/100,000 in 1987. (4) (8) Target: 22.2 deaths/ in 1998. (2)
2705_frame_C13 Page 387 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:18 PM
4-3 Increase the 45% of newly diagnosed USRDS, NIH, NIDDK (2)
proportion of treated patients with treated
chronic kidney failure chronic kidney failure
patients who have received counseling on
received counseling on nutrition, treatment
nutrition, treatment choices, and
choices, and cardiovascular care in
cardiovascular care 12 1996. (2)
months before the start
of renal replacement
therapy. Target: 60%. (2)
5-1 Increase the 40% of persons with NHIS, CDC, NCHS (2)
proportion of persons diabetes received
with diabetes who formal diabetes
receive formal diabetes education in 1998. (2)
education. Target: 60%.
(2)
5-2 Prevent diabetes. 3.1 new cases of NHIS, CDC, NCHS (2)
Target: 2.5 new cases/ diabetes/1000 persons
1,000 persons/year. (2) (3-year average) in
1994-96. (2)
387
388
7-11 Increase the 44% for nutrition and NHIS, CDC, NCHS (2)
proportion of local overweight in 1996-97.
health departments (2)
that have established
2705_frame_C13 Page 388 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:18 PM
culturally appropriate
and linguistically
competent community
health promotion and
disease prevention
programs for racial and
ethnic minority
populations. Target:
nutrition and
overweight - 50%. (2)
TABLE 13.4
Abbreviations for Data Sources
Abbreviation Source
ADAMHA Alcohol, Drug Abuse and Mental Health Administration
AEDS Alcohol Epidemiologic Data System
ASTDHPPE Association of State and Territorial Directors of Health Promotion and Public Health Education
AWHP Association of Worksite Health Promotion
CDC Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
CFSAN Center for Food Safety and Applied Nutrition
CSFII Continuing Survey of Food Intake by Individuals
FASnet Fetal Alcohol Syndrome Network
FDA Food and Drug Administration
FSIS Food Safety and Inspection Survey
IHS Indian Health Service
NAMCS National Ambulatory Medical Care Survey
NBDPN National Birth Defects Prevention Network
NCCDPHP National Center for Chronic Disease Prevention and Health Promotion
NCEH National Center for Environmental Health
NCHS National Center for Health Statistics
NCID National Center for Infectious Disease
NHANES National Health and Nutrition Examination Survey
NHIS National Health Interview Survey
NHLBI National Heart, Lung and Blood Institute
NIAAA National Institute of Alcohol Abuse and Alcoholism
NIDDK National Institute of Diabetes and Digestive and Kidney Disease
NIMH National Institute of Mental Health
NIH National Institute of Health
NNDSS National Notifiable Disease Surveillance System
NVSS National Vital Statistics System
NWHPS National Worksite Health Promotion Survey
ODPHP Office of Disease Prevention and Health Promotion
OPHS Office of Public Health and Science
SAMHSA Substance Abuse and Mental Health Services Administration
SHPPS School Health Policies and Programs Study
USDA United States Department of Agriculture
USRDS U.S. Renal Data System
U.S. Department of Health and Human Services, Healthy People 2010 (conference edition, in two volumes),
Washington, DC, January 2000.
References
1. US Department of Health, Education and Welfare (HEW), Healthy People: the Surgeon General’s
Report on Health Promotion and Disease Prevention, Washington, DC, 1979, Superintendent of
Documents.
2. US Department of Health and Human Services, Healthy People 2010, 2nd ed., Government
Printing Office, Superintendant of Documents, Washington, DC: January 2000.
3. US Department of Health and Human Services, Public Health Service: Promoting Health and
Preventing Disease: Objectives for the Nation, Washington, DC, 1980, U.S. Government Printing
Office.
4. US Department of Health and Human Services, Healthy People 2000: National Health Promotion
and Disease Prevention Objectives, Washington, DC, 1990, U.S. Government Printing Office.
5. US Department of Health and Human Services, Healthy People 2000: Midcourse Review and 1995
Revisions, Washington, DC, 1990, U.S. Government Printing Office.
6. ADA Courier, Chicago, 2000. The American Dietetic Association, 39: 5; 5.
2705_frame_C13 Page 391 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:18 PM
7. US Department of Health and Human Services, Healthy People 2010 Objectives: Draft for Public
Comment, Washington, DC: September, 1998.
8. National Center for Health Statistics. Healthy People 2000 Review, 1998-99, Hyattsville, MD,
Public Health Service.
2705_frame_C13 Page 392 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:18 PM
2705_frame_C14 Page 393 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:20 PM
14
Food Labeling: Foods and Dietary Supplements
Constance J. Geiger
Overview
Definition of Food Labeling
Food labeling consists of the information present on all food packages. Nutrition labeling
is one component of the food label. Other components include the principal display panel,
the information panel, the identity of the food, the list of ingredients, the name and place
of business of the manufacturer, packer, or distributor, as well as any claims made.1
0-8493-2705-9/01/$0.00+$1.50
© 2002 by CRC Press LLC 393
2705_frame_C14 Page 394 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:20 PM
TABLE 14.1
Major Food and Nutrition Labeling Laws/Selected Regulations
Law Primary Provisions
Pure Food and Drug Act, 1906 2 Barred false and misleading statements on food and
drug labels.
Federal Food, Drug, and Cosmetic Act, 1938 Replaced the Pure Food and Drug Act of 1906. Created
distinct food labeling requirements. Required
“common and usual name” of food, ingredient
declarations, net quantity information, name and
address of manufacturer/distributor. Defined
misbranding.4
Fair Packaging and Labeling Act, 1966 Provided FDA with authority to regulate provision of
label information and package size.8
Regulations for enforcement of the Federal Food, Merged existing regulations into one entity. Required
Drug, and Cosmetic Act and the Fair Packaging and nutrition labeling on processed foods that were
Labeling Act fortified or carried claims. Provided for labeling of fat
and cholesterol. Established standards for dietary
supplements. Established regulations for artificially
flavored foods and imitation foods per serving.
Disallowed nutrient claims unless food contained
10% or more of the US RDA. Incorporated label
information: number of servings/container; calories,
protein, carbohydrate, and fat content; percentage of
adult US RDA for protein and seven vitamins and
minerals. Provided for sodium labeling without
requirement for the full nutrition label panel.9-11
Nutrition Labeling and Education Act, 1990 Provided for mandatory nutrition labeling on almost
all food products, expanded required nutrition
information in a new format, created standardized
serving sizes, provided consistent definitions of
nutrient content claims, and defined permissible
health claims.3
Dietary Supplement Health and Education Act, 1994 Defined dietary supplements, provided for nutrition
labeling in a new format, required the name and
quantity of every active ingredient, provided for
structure/functions claims and good manufacturing
practices, encouraged research on dietary
supplements, created two new government entities:
Commission on Dietary Supplement Labels and the
Office of Dietary Supplements.12
FDA Modernization Act, 1997 Expanded procedures by which FDA can authorize
health claims and nutrient content claims, e.g.,
provided for a notification process.13
nutrient content claims, and for the first time, health claims. In the interest of harmony
and uniformity, the U.S. Department of Agriculture’s Food Safety and Information Service
(FSIS) issued similar regulations for meat and poultry products.5 Table 14.1 summarizes
the major laws and selected regulations dealing with food labeling. (For further details,
see Geiger, 19926 and Geiger, 1998.7)
TABLE 14.2
Agencies having Jurisdiction over Food Labeling
Agency Responsibility
FDA Mandatory labeling of most packaged foods except products containing certain amounts of meat and
poultry, and beverages with certain amounts of alcohol. Voluntary labeling of fresh fruits and
vegetables, fresh fish, game, and restaurant foods except those containing certain amounts of meat
and poultry
USDA Mandatory labeling on most processed meat and poultry products, e.g., hot dogs, chicken noodle
soup
FTC Claims made in food advertising
BATF Voluntary labeling of alcoholic beverages
Required Nutrients
The nutrients required to be labeled in the Nutrition Facts Panel are listed in Table 14.3.
If a product is fortified with a certain nutrient or a claim is made about a voluntary
nutrient, then that nutrient also is required to be labeled. Other nutrients (voluntary
nutrients) that may be included on the label are found in Table 14.3.
Serving Size
Standardized serving sizes, known as Reference Amounts Customarily Consumed
(RACCs), are established for many categories of foods. RACCs are based on average
amounts people usually eat at one time, based on USDA survey data. These uniform
serving sizes help consumers compare products. See Table 14.4 for selected RACCs.
Daily Values
The standards for labeling of nutrients are known as Daily Values (DVs). The percent of
DV is listed for certain nutrients on the label so that consumers can determine how a serving
of a food fits into their total daily diet. The DVs include Daily Reference Values (DRVs)
and Reference Daily Intakes (RDIs). DRVs are set for nutrients that previously did not have
label standards, such as fat, cholesterol, and saturated fat (see Table 14.5). DRVs are based
on a daily intake of 2000 kcalories, which is a reasonable reference number for adults and
children over four, and are calculated based on current nutrition recommendations. The
2705_frame_C14 Page 396 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:20 PM
Cholesterol 20mg 7%
Sodium 170mg 7% % Daily Values
To t a l C a r b o h y d r a t e 1 7 g 6% (DVs) shows how a
Dietary Fiber 0g 0% food fits into a
2,000 calorie
Sugars 17g reference diet
Protein 13g
Vitamin A 4% • Vitamin C 6%
Calcium 40% • Iron 0%
*Percent Daily Values are based on a 2,000 calorie
Consistent Information,
THIS LABEL IS ONLY A SAMPLE. EXACT SPECIFICATIONS ARE IN THE CODE OF FEDERAL REGULATIONS.
FIGURE 14.1
Nutrition facts panel (© 1994, American Dietetic Association. Learning the New Food Labels. Used with permission).
2705_frame_C14 Page 397 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:20 PM
TABLE 14.3
Labeling of Nutrients: Required and Voluntary1
Required Nutrients Voluntary Nutrients
Total kcalories kcalories from saturated fat
kcalories from fat kcalories from polyunsaturated fat
Total fat kcalories from monounsaturated fat
Saturated fat Potassium
Cholesterol Soluble fiber
Sodium Insoluble fiber
Total carbohydrate Sugar alcohol
Dietary fiber Other carbohydrates
Sugars Other essential vitamins and minerals
Protein
Vitamin A
Vitamin C
Calcium
Iron
TABLE 14.4
Selected Reference Amounts Customarily Consumed (RACCs)1,a
Category RACC
Bakery products: biscuits, bagels, tortillas, soft pretzels 55 g
Beverages: carbonated and noncarbonated beverages, 240 mL
wine coolers, water; coffee or tea, flavored and
sweetened; juice, fruit drinks
Breads 50 g
Cereals and other grain products Varies from 25 g for dry pasta to 140 g for prepared rice
Cheese 30 g
Eggs 50 g
Fats and oils 1 tbsp
Fruits: fresh, canned, or frozen except watermelon 140 g
Meat: entrees without sauce 85 g cooked; 110 g uncooked
Nuts and seeds 30 g
Soups 245 g
Vegetables; fresh, canned, or frozen 85 g fresh or frozen
95 g for vacuum packed
130 g for canned in liquid
a See 21 CFR 101.12 for details.
TABLE 14.5
DRVs for Adults: Calculations and Values1
Nutrient Derivation/Calculation Label Value
Fat 30% of 2000 kcalories from fat = 600 kcalories/9 kcalories/g 65 g
Saturated fat 10% of kcalories from saturated fat = 200 kcalories/9 kcalories/g 20 g
Carbohydrate 60% of kcalories from carbohydrate = 1200 kcalories/ 4 kcalories/g 300 g
Protein 10% of kcalories from protein = 200 kcalories/ 4 kcalories/g 50 g
Fiber 11.5 g per 1000 kcalories 25 g (rounded up)
Cholesterol NA <300 mg
Sodium NA <2400 mg
Potassium NA 3500 mg
2705_frame_C14 Page 398 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:20 PM
TABLE 14.6
RDIs for Adults and Children over 41
Nutrient RDI
Vitamin A 5000 IU
Vitamin C 60 mg
Calcium 1000 mg
Iron 18 mg
Vitamin D 400 IU
Vitamin E 30 IU
Vitamin K 80 µg
Thiamin 1.5 mg
Riboflavin 1.7 mg
Niacin 20 mg
Vitamin B6 2.0 mg
Folate 400 µg
Vitamin B12 6 µg
Biotin 300 µg
Pantothenic acid 10 mg
Phosphorus 1000 mg
Iodine 150 µg
Magnesium 400 µg
Zinc 15 mg
Selenium 70 µg
Copper 2 mg
Manganese 2 mg
Chromium 120 µg
Molybdenum 75 µg
Chloride 2400 mg
term RDIs replaces the term U.S. Recommended Dietary Allowances (RDAs), but the values
are currently the same as the U.S. RDAs, which represent the highest recommended levels
of the 1968 RDAs (see Table 14.6). The RDI values will be updated when the National
Academy of Sciences completes its latest review of all nutrient recommendations.
A DVs footnote is provided at the bottom of the label to inform consumers of the DVs
for both 2000- and 2500-calorie levels. The calorie information at the bottom of the label
is voluntary (see Figure 14.1).
does not need to appear. Only the amount of the nutrient that is the subject of the claim
needs to be labeled, e.g., “low fat,” contains 3 g of fat.
comparable food comparable food comparable food comparable food comparable food comparable food
“Light” 1/3 fewer kcalories 50% less fat than the NA NA 50% less sodium NA NA NA NA
than the reference reference food than the reference
foods, only if the food, food also is
reference food low fat and low
contains less than calorie
50% calories from
fat
“Good source,” NA NA NA NA NA 2.5-4.9 g NA 5 g or 10 — 19%
“provides,” more of the DV
“contains”
“High,” NA NA NA NA NA 5 g or NA 10 g or 20% or
“excellent more more more of
source of,” “rich the DV
in”
“More,” “added,” NA NA NA NA NA NA NA 10% 10% more
“enriched,” more of of the DV
“fortified” the DV
(5 g)
a Definitions vary for meal and main dishes.
b
Handbook of Nutrition and Food
TABLE 14.8
Other Nutrient Content Claims Definitionsa,b
Claim Definition
% Fat-free Must be “low-fat” or “fat-free.” Must indicate the amount of fat present in
100 g of food
Lean Less than 10 g fat, less than 4 g saturated fat, less than 95 mg cholesterol
per RACC and per 100 g
Extra lean Less than 5 g fat, less than 2 g saturated fat, less than 95 mg cholesterol per
RACC and per 100 g
a Definitions vary for main dish and meal products.
b Complete definitions are found in 21 CFR 101.13 and 21 CFR 101.54-101.69.
Regulations (21 CFR 101.14; 101.70-101.81), except for those authorized through FDAMA
or by the courts.
Current health claims are authorized in three ways: by FDA as a result of NLEA, which
also allowed for petitions for new health claims (12 claims); by notification of FDA through
FDAMA (two claims); or through court action as a result of the Pearson decision (two
claims at time of section submission). FDAMA allowed FDA to authorize a health claim
if a scientific body of the U.S. Government that has official responsibility for human
nutrition research or public health protection publishes a current authoritative statement.
A company or organization must notify FDA at least 120 days prior to the introduction
of the food carrying the claim into interstate commerce. FDAMA health claims, unlike the
other claims, do not allow an opportunity for public comment. If FDA takes no action
within 120 days of the notification, the health claim can be made on the food qualifying
for the claim. The Pearson decision resulted from a lawsuit filed by Durk Pearson, Sandy
Shaw, and the American Preventive Medical Association to allow four previously denied
health claims to be made on dietary supplements. The court decision mandated that FDA
1) reconsider whether to authorize the four previously denied health claims, 2) determine
if the weight of the scientific evidence in support of the claim is greater than that against
it, and 3) if so, then determine if qualifying language would not mislead consumers. FDA
is also required to define significant scientific agreement.
FDA authorized seven claims as a result of NLEA. Since that time, FDA has approved
an additional three claims submitted as petitions, two claims submitted as notifications
through FDAMA, and two claims as a result of the Pearson decision.
The health claim model language and requirements are indicated in three tables: those
resulting from NLEA and petitions (Table 14.9); those not prohibited by FDA through
FDAMA (Table 14.10), and those allowed by court decision that carry extensive qualifying
language (Table 14.11). Again, the requirements for the FDAMA and court-mandated
(Pearson decision) health claims do not appear in the Code of Federal Regulations.
Cancer
Fruits and vegetables and Low fat diets rich in fruits and vegetables (foods that are Food product must be or must contain a fruit or vegetable; Foods
cancer low in fat and may contain dietary fiber, vitamin A, and product is “low fat;” product is a “good source” of at least
vitamin C) may reduce the risk of some types of cancer, one of the following: vitamin A, vitamin C, or fiber
a disease associated with many factors. Broccoli is high in
vitamins A and C and is a good source of dietary fiber
Fiber-containing grain Low fat diets rich in fiber-containing grain products, fruits, Food product must be or must contain a grain product, Foods
products, fruits and and vegetables may reduce the risk of some types of fruit, or vegetable; food product is “low fat,” and is (prior
vegetables and cancer cancer, a disease associated with many risk factors to fortification) a “good source of dietary fiber”
2705_frame_C14 Page 402 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:20 PM
Fat and cancer Development of cancer depends on many factors. A diet Food product is “low fat;” fish and game meats must be Foods
low in total fat may reduce the risk for some cancers “extra lean”
Fruits, vegetables and Development of heart disease depends on many factors. Food products contains ≥ 0.6 g soluble fiber; soluble fiber Foods
grain products that Eating a diet low in saturated fat and cholesterol and high is listed on Nutrition Facts Panel. Food product must be
contain fiber, especially in fruits, vegetables, and grain products that contain fiber “low fat,” “low saturated fat,” and “low cholesterol;” food
soluble fiber, and risk of may lower blood cholesterol levels and reduce risk of is, or must contain, a vegetable, fruit, or grain product
coronary heart disease heart disease
Soluble fiber from certain Diets low in saturated fat and cholesterol that include ___ g Food is “low saturated fat,” “low cholesterol,” and “low Foods
foods (oats and psyllium) of soluble fiber per day from (name of food) may reduce fat;” food contains β-glucan soluble fiber from whole oats;
and coronary heart the risk of heart disease. One serving of (name of food) food contains ≥0.75 g whole oat soluble fiber; soluble fiber
disease supplies ___ g of the ___ g necessary per day to have this is listed on the Nutrition Facts Panel;
effect or
Food is “low saturated fat,” “low cholesterol,” and “low
fat”; food contains ≥1.7 g soluble fiber from psyllium husk;
soluble fiber is listed on the Nutrition Facts Panel
Soy protein and coronary Diets low in fat and cholesterol that include 25 g of soy Food contains ≥6.25 g soy protein; food is “low cholesterol,” Foods
heart disease protein a day may reduce the risk of heart disease. One “low saturated fat;” food is “low fat,” unless it is derived
serving of (name of food) provides ___ g of soy protein from or consists of whole soybeans and contains no fat in
addition to the fat naturally present in the whole soybeans
Handbook of Nutrition and Food
Plant sterols/stanol For plant stanol esters: Food contains 1.7 g of plant stanol esters/RACC (spreads, Foods and dietary
esters and coronary heart Diets low in saturated fat and cholesterol that include two salad dressings, snack bars, and dietary supplements in supplements
disease servings of foods that provide a daily total of at least 3.4 softgel form) or 0.65 g of plant sterol esters/RACC
g of vegetable oil stanol esters in two meals may reduce (spreads and salad dressings); food is “low cholesterol”
the risk of heart disease. A serving of [name of food] and “low saturated fat;” food must not exceed the fat
supplies ___ g of vegetable oil stanol esters disqualifying levels (13 g) of health claims unless it is a
For plant sterol esters: spread or a salad dressing. Those products (spreads or
Foods containing at least 0.65 g per serving of plant sterol salad dressings) exceeding 13 g of fat must carry a
esters, eaten twice a day with meals for a daily total intake disclosure statement referring people to the Nutrition
of at least 1.3 g, as part of a diet low in saturated fat and Facts Panel for information about fat content; food
cholesterol, may reduce the risk of heart disease. A serving contains 10% or more of the DV for vitamin A, vitamin C,
of [name of food] supplies ___ g of vegetable oil sterol iron, calcium, protein, or fiber unless the product is a salad
esters dressing14
2705_frame_C14 Page 403 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:20 PM
Calcium and osteoporosis Regular exercise and a healthy diet with enough calcium Food or dietary supplement must be “high” in calcium Foods and dietary
help teen and young adult white and Asian women supplements
maintain good bone health and may reduce their high risk
of osteoporosis later in life. Adequate calcium intakes are
important, but daily intakes above 2000 mg are not likely
to provide any additional benefit
Sodium and hypertension Diets low in sodium may reduce the risk of high blood Food must be “low sodium” Foods
pressure, a disease caused by many factors
Sugar alcohols and dental Frequent eating of foods high in sugars and starches as Food must contain less than 0.5 g sugar; sugar alcohol in Foods
caries between-meal snacks can promote tooth decay. The sugar the food shall be sorbitol, isomalt, xylitol, lactitol,
alcohol used to sweeten this food may reduce dental caries hydrogenated glucose syrup, hydrogenated starch
hydrolysates, or a combination
Folic acid and neural tube Healthful diets with adequate folate may reduce a woman’s Food or supplements must be a “good source” of folate; Foods and dietary
defects risk of having a child with a brain or spinal cord defect claim cannot be made on foods that contain more than supplements
100% of the RDI for vitamin A, such as preformed vitamin
A or retinol, or vitamin D
403
TABLE 14.10
Health Claims Allowed to Pass Through FDAMA
404
Can Be Made on
Health Claim Model Language Requirements Qualified
Whole grains and CHD Diets rich in whole grains and other plant foods and low Diets rich in whole grain foods and other plant foods and Foods
in total fat, saturated fat, and cholesterol may help reduce low in total fat, saturated fat, and cholesterol may help
the risk of heart disease and certain cancers reduce the risk of heart disease and certain cancers15
Potassium-containing Diets containing foods that are good sources of potassium Foods contain at least 10% DV for potassium/RACC; food Foods
foods and blood pressure and low in sodium may reduce the risk of high blood is “low sodium,” “low cholesterol,” “low saturated fat”/
and stroke pressure and stroke RACC; potassium is listed on the Nutrition Facts Panel16
TABLE 14.11
Qualified Health Claims Allowed by the Pearson Decision
Can Be Made on
Health Claim Model Language Requirements Qualified
2705_frame_C14 Page 404 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:20 PM
Omega-3 fatty acids and The scientific evidence about whether omega-3 fatty acids Dietary supplement cannot state the daily dietary intake Dietary
CHD may reduce the risk of coronary heart disease is necessary to achieve a claimed effect because the evidence supplements
suggestive, but not conclusive. Studies in the general is not definitive; labeling cannot recommend or suggest
population have looked at diets containing fish and not intakes of more than 2 g per day, preferable 1 g or less17
omega-3 fatty acids, and it is not known whether diets or
omega-3 fatty acids in fish may have a possible effect on
a reduced risk of coronary heart disease. It is not known
what effect omega-3 fatty acids may or may not have on
risk of CHD in the general population
Folic acid, vitamin B6, It is known that diets low in saturated fat and cholesterol Dietary supplement cannot state the daily dietary intake Dietary
vitamin B12 and vascular may reduce the risk of heart disease. The scientific necessary to achieve a claimed effect because the evidence supplements
disease evidence about whether folic acid, vitamin B6, and vitamin is not definitive; products with more than 100% DV
B12 may also reduce the risk of heart disease and other (400 µg) of folic acid must identify the safe upper limit of
vascular disease is suggestive, but not conclusive. Studies 1000 µg in parentheses18
in the general population have generally found that these
vitamins lower homocysteine, an amino acid found in the
blood. It is not known whether elevated levels of
homocysteine may cause vascular disease or whether high
homocysteine levels are caused by other factors. Studies
that will directly evaluate whether reducing homocysteine
may also reduce the risk of vascular disease are not yet
Handbook of Nutrition and Food
complete
2705_frame_C14 Page 405 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:20 PM
Requirements
The general requirements for structure/function claims are: 1) the statement must be
truthful and not misleading, 2) the manufacturer of the product carrying the claim must
notify the FDA within 30 days of first marketing a dietary supplement, and 3) the dietary
supplement must carry the following disclaimer: “This statement has not been evaluated
by the FDA. This product is not intended to diagnose, treat, cure or prevent any disease.”12
Specific requirements for structure/function claims are not found in the Code of Federal
Regulations. FDA does not approve individual claims.
Resources
Food and Drug Association www.fda.gov
The FDA website provides a wealth of information about FDA regulatory actions and
positions, industry guidance, and consumer education materials. The site provides FDA
organizational structure and a telephone and email directory so that staff contacts can be
made. The “What’s New” section lists FDA’s latest actions. A separate page is devoted to
dietary supplements. Links are provided to other regulatory agencies such as the FTC and
the FSIS.
Federal Register
The Federal Register is one of the most important sources for information on any govern-
ment agency’s activities. Federal government agencies, such as FDA and USDA, publish
regulations in the Federal Register to implement food and dietary supplement laws in
various forms (notice, proposed rule, final rule) on a daily (Monday through Friday) basis.
Once a final rule is published it becomes incorporated into the CFR. The Federal Register
can be accessed through FDA’s website. It can be searched by agency, date, date range,
or topic.
2705_frame_C14 Page 406 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:20 PM
References
1. Food and Drug Administration, US Department of Health and Human Services. Code of
Federal Regulations, Title 21, Parts 100-169. Washington, DC: Superintendent of Documents,
US Government Printing Office, 2000.
2. Federal Food and Drug Act of 1906. 34 USC § 768.
3. Nutrition Labeling and Education Act. P. L. No. 101-535, 104 Stat 2353.
4. Federal Food, Drug and Cosmetic Act of 1938. 52 USC § 1040.
5. US Department of Agriculture, Food Safety and Information Service. Code of Federal Regu-
lations, Title 9, Parts 200 to end. Washington, DC: Superintendent of Documents, US Govern-
ment Printing Office, 2000.
6. Geiger, CJ. Review of nutrition labeling formats. J Amer Diet Assoc 91: 808; 1992.
7. Geiger, CJ. Health claims: history, current regulatory status and consumer research. J Amer
Diet Assoc 98: 1312; 1998.
8. Federal Fair Packaging and Labeling Act 1966. 80 USC § 1966.
9. Food and Drug Administration. Nutrition labeling: proposed criteria for food label informa-
tion panel. Federal Register March 30, 1972; 37(62): 6493-6497.
10. Food and Drug Administration. Nutrition labeling: Federal Register January 19, 1973; 38(13):
2124-2164.
11. Food and Drug Administration. Nutrition labeling: Federal Register March 14, 1973; 38(49):
6950-6975.
12. Dietary Supplement Health and Education Act of 1994. 108 Stat. 4325, 4322.
13. Food and Drug Administration Modernization Act of 1997. 21 USC § 301 note.
14. Food and Drug Administration. Food labeling: health claims; plant sterol/stanol esters and
coronary heart disease; interim final rule. Federal Register September 8, 2000; 65(175): 54686-
54739.
15. General Mills. Whole grain foods authoritative statement claim notification. July 1999. Avail-
able at http://vm.cfsan.fda.gov/
16. Tropicana Products, Inc. Notification for a health claim based on an authoritative statement
for potassium containing foods. Docket No. 00Q-1582. Available at http://vm.cfsan.fda.gov/
17. FDA, Center for Foods Safety and Applied Nutrition. Letter regarding dietary supplement
health claim for omega-3 fatty acids and CHD. October 31, 2000. Available at
http://vm.cfsan.fda.gov/
18. FDA. Center for Foods Safety and Applied Nutrition. Letter regarding dietary supplement
health claim for folic acid, vitamin B6, vitamin B12 and vascular disease. November 28, 2000.
Available at http://vm.cfsan.fda.gov/
2705_frame_C15 Page 407 Thursday, September 20, 2001 9:17 AM
15
Nutrition Monitoring in the United States
Nutrition monitoring has been defined as “an ongoing description of nutrition conditions
in the population, with particular attention to subgroups defined in socioeconomic terms,
for purposes of planning, analyzing the effects of policies and programs on nutrition
problems, and predicting future trends.”1 The nutrition monitoring program in the United
States has evolved over the past century to meet data needs for nutrition policy and
nutrition research. This section provides a brief review of the evolution of the nutrition
monitoring program, summarizes the program’s monitoring and surveillance activities
during the past decade, and describes the links between nutrition monitoring, nutrition
research, and nutrition policy.
0-8493-2705-9/01/$0.00+$1.50
© 2002 by CRC Press LLC 407
2705_frame_C15 Page 408 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:20 PM
FOOD
Away-from- House-
Influential
Home Food hold Food
Factors
Acquired Acquired
Nutrient
Imports Requirements
Nutrition and
Consumption Nutrient Nutrient
Food Supply Related Health
by Individuals Intake Utilization Measurements
Food Supplement
Production Use
Food Knowledge,
Composition Attitudes, and
Behavior
HEALTH
FIGURE 15.1
Food and health relationships. Source: Adapted from U.S. Department of Health and Human Services and U.S.
Department of Agriculture. Ten-Year Comprehensive Plan for the National Nutrition Monitoring and Related
Research Program. 1993.
TABLE 15.1
Uses of Nutrition Monitoring Data1
Public Policy
Identify high-risk groups and geographical areas with nutrition related problems
Assess progress toward achieving the nutrition and health objectives in Healthy People 2000 and 20106,7
Recommend guidelines for the prevention, detection, and management of nutrition and health conditions
Evaluate the effectiveness of nutritional initiatives for military feeding systems
Evaluate changes in agricultural policy, food production and marketing, that may affect the nutritional quality
and healthfulness of the U.S. food supply
Develop reference standards for nutritional status
Programmatic
Develop nutrition education and dietary guidance (e.g., Dietary Guidelines for Americans and 5 A Day
Plan and evaluate food assistance programs
Plan and assess nutrition intervention programs and public health programs
Regulatory
Scientific Research
Establish nutrient requirements through the lifecycle (Recommended Dietary Allowances and Dietary Reference
Intakes)
Study diet-health relationships and the relationship of knowledge and attitudes to dietary and health behavior
Foster and conduct national and international nutrition monitoring research
Conduct food composition analysis
Study the economic aspects of food consumption and food security
1 Adapted from the U.S. Department of Health and Human Services and U.S. Department of Agriculture. Ten-
Year Comprehensive Plan for the National Nutrition and Related Research Program. 1993.
One example of the use of nutrition monitoring data for the development of population
reference standards is the U.S. Growth Charts. Data from the third National Health and
Nutrition Examination Survey (NHANES III) were used to develop the revised U.S.
Growth Charts which were released in 2000.17 The revised standards include charts for
infants through 19 years of age, as well as a new chart for body mass index (BMI) by age.17
The charts are included in the Anthro module of the computer software package EpiInfo,
providing both z-scores and percentiles for each chart. NHANES trend data on anthro-
pometric measures in children have been used by the U.S. Consumer Product Safety
Commission to evaluate the need to revise standards for consumer items such as infant
safety seats.18
Nutrition monitoring data are also used to estimate food insecurity in the U.S. Food
security refers to assured access to nutritionally adequate and safe foods “without resort-
ing to emergency food supplies, scavenging, stealing, and other coping strategies.”19
Efforts spearheaded by the private sector and academia began to pave the way toward a
scientific basis for defining and measuring food insecurity and hunger in the mid-
1980s.20-22 Although national surveys such as NHANES and the USDA’s food consumption
surveys used questions related to a food security construct as early as 1977,23-27 the Ten-
Year Comprehensive Plan for the National Nutrition Monitoring and Related Research
Program called for the development of a standard measure of food insecurity.4 Research
2705_frame_C15 Page 410 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:20 PM
and refinement led to an 18-item food security scale that was first included as a supple-
ment to the 1995 Current Population Survey.23 Using the scale, it is estimated that the
prevalence of food security in U.S. households is approximately 88%.28 A number of
nationally representative surveys of the U.S. population have begun to incorporate this
standard measure, and a number of state and local surveys are including an abbreviated
short form.29 Policy documents like Healthy People 20107 and the U.S. Action Plan on Food
Security30 use the food security measure to assess progress, and the scale can also be used
as a yardstick by which to evaluate federal food and nutrition assistance programs with
respect to welfare reform.
Programmatic uses of nutrition monitoring data include developing and promoting
nutrition education activities and programs such as the Dietary Guidelines for Americans31
and 5 A Day for Better Health,32 public health programs such as the National Cholesterol
Education Program8 and the National High Blood Pressure Education Program,9 and
federally supported food assistance programs such as the Food Stamp Program and the
Special Supplemental Nutrition Program for Women, Infants, and Children (WIC).33,34
Regulatory uses of nutrition monitoring data include developing food fortification,35,36
food safety,16 and food labeling policies to inform consumers.37 Nutrition monitoring data
have been used by regulatory agencies to examine U.S. food fortification policies35,36 and
to provide dietary exposure estimates for nutrient and non-nutrient food components.16
For example, dietary intake and serum data collected in NHANES III were used to assess
folate status and the relationship between serum determinations, diet, and other nutrition
and health variables prior to folate food fortification rulemaking by the Food and Drug
Administration (FDA).36,38
Scientific research uses of nutrition monitoring data range from revising the standards
of human nutrient requirements39-41 to studying the relationship between diet, nutrition,
and health. National data on the population’s dietary intakes and serum nutrient levels
have been used extensively for the investigation of nutrient requirements throughout the
lifecycle and for the development of the Dietary Reference Intakes by the National Acad-
emy of Sciences (NAS).39,40 Continued research to develop nutrition status indicators will
be important for future monitoring efforts.
Nutrition monitoring data are essential to identify food and nutrition research priorities
of significance to public health.6,7,13,14,42,43 National nutrition data have been used for sci-
entific reviews such as The Surgeon General’s Report on Nutrition and Health13 and the
NAS report on Diet and Health: Implications for Reducing Chronic Disease Risk.14 Such
scientific reviews often form the basis for the development of nutrition policies. Other
research is focused on studying the relationships between knowledge and attitudes to
dietary and health behavior, the economic aspects of food consumption and food security,
and food composition analysis.
The increased prevalence of overweight and obesity in the U.S. is the current focus of
public health nutrition efforts. Using standardized international health-based definitions
for men and women aged 20 to 74 years, the age-adjusted prevalence of overweight (BMI
> = 25) was 59%, and obesity (BMI > = 30.0) was 20% in NHANES III (1988-94), compared
to 51 and 12%, respectively, in NHANES II (1976-80).7,44 This increasing trend has also
been observed for adolescents, children, and preschoolers.45,46 Using the 95th percentile of
BMI from NHANES II as the definition of overweight and the 85th to 95th percentile as
the definition of risk for overweight, 11% of children and adolescents were overweight
and another 14% were at risk for overweight during 1988 to 1994.45 The prevalence of
overweight in children and adolescents increased from about 5% in the 1960s and 1970s.45
NHANES III anthropometry data serve as the baseline measures for the Healthy People
2010 weight objectives.7 Future NHANES data will be used to track progress in reducing
the prevalence of overweight and obesity. The NIH Obesity Initiative is aimed at public
2705_frame_C15 Page 411 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:20 PM
health efforts to reduce overweight and foster collaborative research to better understand
the etiology and prevention of obesity.10,47 National and state nutrition monitoring data
on dietary intake, physical activity patterns, weight loss efforts, and consumer knowledge,
attitudes, and behaviors will be important for public health education and research efforts
to reduce the prevalence of overweight and obesity in the U.S.
population to Congress. In 1993 and 1995, respectively, the Board published Chartbook I:
Selected Findings from the National Nutrition Monitoring and Related Research Program57
and the Third Report on Nutrition Monitoring in the United States.58
Three staff working groups (Survey Comparability, Food Composition Data, and Fed-
eral-State Relations and Information Dissemination and Exchange [Federal-STRIDE]) were
established under the board to improve communication and coordination among member
agencies on high-priority issues. After the welfare reform law was enacted in 1996, a fourth
group — the Welfare Reform, Nutrition, and Data Needs Working Group — was estab-
lished to determine whether federal surveys and surveillance systems represented by the
IBNMRR could capture the effects of welfare reform on nutrition, hunger, and health
status, identify gaps in data collections, encourage use of comparable data collection
among surveys, serve as a repository on national nutrition survey efforts related to welfare
reform, and foster collaborative research on nutrition and welfare reform. The group has
been quite active and now includes federal as well as non-federal members.
The act also established the National Nutrition Monitoring Advisory Council (NNMAC)
to provide scientific and technical guidance to the IBNMRR. The council includes nine
members (five appointed by the President and four by Congress) with expertise in the
areas of public health, nutrition monitoring research, and food production and distribution.
Finally, the 1990 act called for the development of a Ten-Year Comprehensive Plan.59
The plan includes three primary goals: to provide for a comprehensive National Nutrition
Monitoring and Related Research Program (NMRRP) through continuous and coordinated
data collection, improve the comparability and quality of data across NNMRRP, and
improve the research base for nutrition monitoring. These national goals are comple-
mented by state and local objectives to strengthen data collection capacity, improve the
quality of state and local data, and improve methodologies to enhance comparability of
NNMRRP data across national, state, and local levels. Table 15.2 includes a summary of
the nutrition monitoring program’s history.
TABLE 15.2
Milestones and Publications of the National Nutrition Monitoring and Related Research Program
1977 Food and Agriculture Act (P.L. 95-113) passed
1978 Proposal for a comprehensive nutritional status monitoring system submitted to Congress
1986 First progress report on Nutrition Monitoring in the United States published
1988 Interagency Committee on Nutrition Monitoring formed
1989 Second progress report on Nutrition Monitoring in the United States and The Directory of Federal
Nutrition Monitoring Activities published
1990 National Nutrition Monitoring and Related Research Act (P.L. 101-445) passed
1991 Interagency Board for Nutrition Monitoring and Related Research established through incorporation
and expansion of the ICNM
Proposed Ten-Year Comprehensive Plan for the Nutrition Monitoring and Related Research Program
published for comment
1992 National Nutrition Monitoring Advisory Council formed
The Directory of Federal and State Nutrition Monitoring Activities published
1993 Ten-Year Comprehensive Plan for the National Nutrition Monitoring and Related Research Program
published
Chartbook I: Selected Findings from the National Nutrition Monitoring and Related Research Program
published
1995 Third progress report on Nutrition Monitoring in the U.S. published
1998 The Directory of Federal and State Nutrition Monitoring and Related Research Activities published
2000 The Directory of Federal and State Nutrition Monitoring and Related Research Activities revised and
published
2705_frame_C15 Page 413 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:20 PM
Continuous (1915) HHS National Vital Registration System All births and deaths in the total U.S. population
Annual (1957) HHS National Health Interview Survey (NHIS) Civilian, noninstitutionalized household population (N = 103,477
individuals and N = 39,832 households in 1997)
1985, 1990, 1998 HHS National Health Interview Survey on Health Promotion Civilian, noninstitutionalized household population in the U.S., ages 18+ y
and Disease Prevention (N = 41,104 households in 1990)
1987, 1992 HHS National Health Interview Survey on Cancer Epidemiology Civilian, noninstitutionalized household population ages 18+ y in the U.S.
and Cancer Control (N = 12,000 households in 1992)
1991 HHS 1991 National Health Interview Survey on Health Civilian, noninstitutionalized, household population of the United States,
Promotion and Disease Prevention ages 18+ y (N = 43,732 households)
1992–1993 HHS National Health Interview Survey on Youth Behavior Youth ages 12-21 y (N = 10,645 households)
2705_frame_C15 Page 414 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:20 PM
Supplement
1994 HHS National Health Interview Survey on Disability Civilian, noninstitutionalized household population (N = 107,469
households)
1993, 1995 HHS National Health Interview Survey Civilian, noninstitutionalized household population in U.S., ages 18+ y
Year 2000 Objectives Supplement (N = 17,317 households in 1995)
1990, 1995 (1973) HHS National Survey of Family Growth Women, 15-44 y (N = 10,847 households in 1995)
Continuous (1973) HHS Pregnancy Nutrition Surveillance System (PNSS) Low-income, high-risk pregnant women participating in programs in 18
states, the Navajo Nation, and the Intertribal Council of AZ (N = 599,000
records in 1995)
Continuous (1973) HHS Pediatric Nutrition Surveillance System (PedNSS) Low-income, high-risk children, birth-17 y in participating programs in 43
states and DC, Puerto Rico, and 6 Indian reservations (N = 8,800,000 records
in 1995)
1988–1990 HHS National Maternal and Infant Health Survey Women, hospitals, and prenatal care providers associated with live births
(N = 9953), still births (N = 3309), and infant deaths (N = 5332)
1988–1994 HHS Third National Health and Nutrition Examination Survey U.S. noninstitutionalized, civilian population, 2+ mo; Oversampling of
(NHANES III). Followup study is under consideration blacks and Mexican-Americans, children 0-5 y, and individuals 60+ y
(N = 33,994 individuals interviewed; N = 31,311 individuals examined)
1989–1993 HHS National Health and Nutrition Examination III NHANES III (1988-91) examinees 50+ years (N = 2602 completed NHANES
Supplemental Nutrition Survey of Older Americans III dietary recall (DR) and 1st SNS interview; N = 2519 completed NHANES
III DR and 2nd SNS interview; N = 2261 completed NHANES III DR and
2 SNS interviews)
Handbook of Nutrition and Food
1990–1991 HHS Survey of Heights and Weights of American Indian School American Indian school children, ages 5-18 y (N = 9464 children in 1990-91
Children school year)
1991–1992 HHS Navajo Health and Nutrition Survey Persons ages 12+ y residing on or near the Navajo reservation in AZ, NM,
and CO (N = 985 examined)
1991–1992 HHS Longitudinal Followup to the National Maternal and Infant Participants of the 1988 NMIHS (N = 9400 mothers of 3 yr olds; N = 1000
Health Survey women who had infant deaths; N = 1000 women who had late fetal deaths
in 1988
1992 HHS NHANES I Epidemiologic Followup Study Individuals examined in NHANES I, 25-74 y at baseline, 1971-74 (N = 9281,
1992 cohort)
Continuous (1992) HHS NHANES II Mortality Followup Survey Individuals examined in NHANES II, 30-74 y at baseline, 1976-80 (N = 9252)
Continuous (1992) HHS Hispanic HANES (HHANES) Mortality Followup Survey Individuals interviewed in HHANES, 20-74 y at baseline, 1982-84 (N = NA)
(in progress)
Annual (1992) HHS National Health Care Survey (integrates: National Home Record-based health care provider surveys including: visits to hospital
and Hospice Care Survey (1992-94; 1996), National emergency and outpatients departments of non-Federal, short-stay, general
Nursing Home Survey (since 1973-74) and Followup and specialty hospitals and ambulatory surgical centers; office visits to non-
(1995, 1997), National Hospital Discharge Survey (since Federal, office-based physicians; and home health agencies and nursing
1965), National Ambulatory Medical Care Survey (since homes (N = 11,396 for 1996 NHHCS; N = 9556 for 1995 NNHS; N = 282,525
2705_frame_C15 Page 415 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:20 PM
1973), National Hospital Ambulatory Medical Care Survey for 1995 NHDS; N = 32,978 for 1996 NAMCS; N = 52,194 for 1996
(1992), and National Survey of Ambulatory Surgery (1994- NHAMCS; N = 125,751 for 1996 NSAS)
96)
Continuous (1992) HHS NHANES III Mortality Followup Survey Individuals interviewed and examined in NHANES III, 20+ y at baseline,
1988-94 (N = NA)
1996–1999 HHS Demonstration Sites for PedNSS and PNSS Low-income, high risk women, infants, and children that participate in
government food assistance programs and participate in PedNSS and PNSS
(N = minimum of 1000 children in WIC for PedNSS; N = minimum of 300
women in WIC for PNSS)
1999+ HHS National Health and Nutrition Examination Survey Civilian, noninstitutionalized individuals. Oversampling of blacks,
Mexican-Americans, adolescents, older persons, and pregnant women in
the first 3 years. (N = NA)
Continuous (1917) DOD Nutritional Evaluation of Military Feeding Systems and Enlisted personnel of the Army, Navy, Marine Corps, and Air Force
Military Populations (N = 20-240 depending on study focus)
Annual supplement BLS; Current Population Survey, Supplement on Food Security Civilian, noninstitutionalized U.S. population (N = approx. 59,500 for CPS)
(1995) CB;
USDA
415
TABLE 15.3 (Continued)
Federal Nutrition Monitoring Surveys and Surveillance Activities Since 1990
416
Date (initiated) Dept. Survey Sample Size and Target U.S. Population
Continuous (1980) DOL Consumer Expenditure Survey Civilian, noninstitutionalized, population and a portion of the
institutionalized population (N = 5000 in quarterly interview survey of
consumer unites; N = 6000 diary surveys of consumer unites kept for 2
consecutive 1-week periods)
Continuous (1983) DOC Survey of Income and Program Participation (SIPP) Civilian, noninstitutionalized population of the U.S. (N = 11,600-36,800
households in a continuous series of panels)
1994, 1996 (1984) USDA Study of WIC Participants and Program Characteristics WIC participants using mail surveys of State and local WIC agencies, record
abstractions at local WIC service sites and, in 1988, interviews with
participants (N = 7,000,000+ individuals in 1996)
1988–1994 HHS NHANES III and Supplemental Nutrition Survey of Older See NHANES III listing above. Individuals ages 50+ y examined in
Americans NHANES III with telephones (See listing above for N)
1989–1991, annual USDA Continuing Survey of Food Intakes by Individuals (CSFII) Females 19-50 y and their children 1-5 y and males 19-50 y residing in
1994–1996, annual (Intake of Pyramid Servings and Servings database 1994- households in 48 conterminous States in 1985-86, individuals of all ages
2705_frame_C15 Page 416 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:20 PM
Continuous (1984) HHS Behavioral Risk Factor Surveillance System Individuals 18+ y residing in households with telephones in participating
States (N = approx 2039 per state in all 50 states for 1995)
1990, 1994 (1982) HHS Health and Diet Survey Civilian, noninstitutionalized individuals in households w/telephones,
18+ y (N = 5005 in 1995)
1989–1991 USDA Diet and Health Knowledge Survey Main meal-planner/preparers in households participating in 1989-91 and
1994–1996 1994-96 CSFII (N = 5765 for 1994-96)
Annual (1990) HHS Youth Risk Behavior Survey (YRBS) Youths attending school in grades 9-12 and 12-21 y of age in households in
50 States, D.C., Puerto Rico, and Virgin Islands (N = approx 12,000 for the
National surveys and N = approx 2000 for the State and local surveys)
1990 HHS Cholesterol Awareness Survey — Physicians’ Survey Physicians practicing in the conterminous U.S. (N = 1,604)
1990–1991 HHS Nationwide Survey of Nurses’ and Dietitians’ Knowledge, Registered nurses and registered dietitians currently active in their
Attitudes, and Behavior Regarding Cardiovascular Risk professions (N = 7200 registered nurses; N = 1621 occupational health
Factors nurses oversample; N = 1782 registered dietitians)
1990–1991 HHS Nutrition Label Format Studies Primary food shoppers, ages 18+ y (N = 2676)
2705_frame_C15 Page 417 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:20 PM
1991 HHS Weight Loss Practices Survey Individuals currently trying to lose weight, ages 18+ y, in households with
telephones (N = 1232 current dieters; N = 205 African American
oversample; N = 218 nondieting controls)
1991 HHS 5 A Day for Better Health Baseline Survey Individuals ages 18+ y with telephones (N = approx. 2059)
1992–1993; 1998 HHS Consumer Food Handling Practices and Awareness of Individuals in households w/telephones, 18+ y (N = 1620)
Microbiological Hazards Screener
1993–1994 HHS Infant Feeding Practices Survey New mothers and healthy, full-term infants 0-1 y (N = 1200)
1994–1995 USDA WIC Infant Feeding Practices Survey Prenatal and postnatal women and their infants participating in the WIC
program (N = 971)
The Pediatric Nutrition Surveillance System (PedNSS), sponsored since 1973, is used to
monitor simple key indicators of nutritional status among low-income, high-risk infants
and children who participate in publicly funded health, nutrition, and food assistance
programs.66 Data can be analyzed at individual, clinic, county, state, and national levels.
The Pregnancy Nutrition Surveillance System (PNSS), sponsored since 1978, tracks nutri-
tion-related problems and behavioral risk factors associated with low birth weight among
high-risk prenatal women.66 The PNSS is used to identify preventable nutrition-related
problems and behavioral risk factors to target interventions.
vegetables.71 NCI also conducted the Cancer Prevention Awareness Survey and the
National Knowledge, Attitudes, and Behavior Survey to measure progress on knowledge,
attitudes, and behaviors regarding lifestyle and cancer prevention and risk factors. The
FDA conducted a study to assess consumer food handling practices and awareness of
microbiological hazards, and also conducted a number of studies to evaluate the Nutrition
Facts Label features and usability by consumers.72
The focus of the Behavioral Risk Factor Surveillance System (BRFSS) is on personal
behavior and its relationship to nutritional and health status. BRFSS has been used by
state health departments to plan, initiate, and guide health promotion and disease pre-
vention programs, and to monitor their progress over time.73 The Youth Risk Behavior
Survey monitors priority health risk behaviors among adolescents through national, state,
and local surveys.74
the food supply over time. They are also used to evaluate the effects of technological
alterations and marketing changes on the food supply over time, to study the relationships
between food and nutrient availability and nutrient-disease associations, and to facilitate
management of federal marketing, food assistance, nutrition education, food enrichment
and fortification policy. The Fisheries of the United States Survey has been conducted by
the National Marine Fisheries Service since 1909 to provide annual estimates of fish and
shellfish availability and consumption in the U.S. food system.
patterns, and practices of the population. The number of Hispanics and blacks in the U.S.
population is increasing at a rate faster than the white, non-Hispanic population. The
population is also becoming older as the baby boomers and their children age. Changes
in income levels and income disparities in the population may result in changes in diet
and health outcomes reported from surveys. Income disparities among racial and ethnic
groups and among age and gender categories will continue to be important in identifying
population groups that are more vulnerable to diet and health-related problems.
Modifications in individual dietary and other lifestyle behavior may lead to changes in
health. Consumers are encouraged to follow the Dietary Guidelines for Americans and the
Food Guide Pyramid, to read Nutrition Facts Labels, and to be more physically active. These
nutrition education efforts may help consumers improve their diets and health outcomes.
Consumers may become increasingly knowledgeable of the health effects of overweight
and obesity and make attempts to alter their eating patterns and physical activity to lose
weight. People are also influenced by the nutrition information they receive from other
sources (TV, radio, books, magazines, advertisements). They may begin to take (or alter
their intake of) dietary supplements, increase intake of functional foods, or become inter-
ested in organic produce, herbal products, or botanicals. Such behavior changes could affect
health. Hopefully, consumers will adopt behaviors that will improve their health; however,
it is possible that poor dietary advice may have the opposite effect. It is also possible that
continued sedentary lifestyles and wide access to food will maintain the current problems
of overweight and obesity in the U.S. and the health problems related to them.
Survey Integration
Continuous collection of diet- and nutrition-related data in cross-sectional and longitudi-
nal surveys and surveillance systems is needed to assess the health of the U.S. population
and plan nutrition services and educational programs. Efforts are under way to integrate
and merge the NHANES and the CSFII by 2002. The survey will include a nationally
representative annual sample of black, white, and Mexican-American persons for all
income and low income households, and a common dietary data collection and processing
system. Federal agencies are currently conducting sample design and dietary survey
methodology research, evaluating the extent of seasonal and geographic coverage with
the combined annual survey, and designing and implementing the integrated sample to
better meet nutrition monitoring data needs and develop a “core” (identical) set of demo-
2705_frame_C15 Page 423 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:20 PM
graphic, socioeconomic, nutrition, and health-related program questions that are essential
to estimate and report dietary intakes for the integrated sample. The two departments are
also working to operationalize improvements in sample design, dietary methodologies,
and questionnaires. The framework for the survey’s design will need to provide flexibility
and opportunities for modifications over time.
Nutrition Nutrition
Research Monitoring
Research Results,
Needs for Data
FIGURE 15.2
Overlapping of nutrition monitoring, policy making, and research. Source: Adapted from U.S. Department of
Health and Human Services and U.S. Department of Agriculture. Ten-Year Comprehensive Plan for the National
Nutrition and Related Research Program. 1993.
osteoporosis. All dietary components have unique considerations with respect to deter-
mining dietary adequacy and measuring physiological status. The example of calcium
and osteoporosis illustrates some of the challenges of measuring both dietary and phys-
iological status, drawing conclusions about the relationship between dietary intake and
health, and providing guidance to the public to improve health based on the available
data and scientific research.
TABLE 15.4
Percent of the U.S. Population Meeting the Adequate Intake (AI) for Calcium,
1988–1994
Total Intake
Dietary Intake (Food) (Food + Supplements + Antacids)
Age and Median % Meeting Mean Median % Meeting
Sex Mean (mg) (mg) AI (mg) (mg) AI
Males
Females
Total
patterns.39 Many individuals are not consuming sufficient intakes to meet their require-
ments and reduce the likelihood that they will develop osteoporosis.
Dairy products provide three-fourths of the dietary calcium intake in U.S. diets, and the
dietary intake of calcium parallels what is known about intake of dairy products, i.e., that
milk consumption begins to decline for females in their teenage years and remain low
throughout life (except perhaps during pregnancy and lactation, when women are advised
to drink milk). Milk consumption is also generally low among older men and women.
Monitoring data from the 1987-88 NFCS showed that 50% of dietary calcium came from
milk and milk products, 20% from milk and cheese as ingredients in mixed dishes, and
30% from all other food groups.87 Additional USDA data indicate that between 1909 and
1990 dairy products comprised approximately 75% of calcium intake, indicating that the
major contributing source has not changed a great deal.58
Because information on the use of dietary supplements and antacids was collected in
NHANES III, it is possible to estimate the total intake of calcium from all sources. About
17% of the population reported the use of supplemental calcium in the diet in 1988 to
1994.86 Table 15.4 indicates that these additional non-food sources of calcium in the diet
have little overall impact on the percentage of the population meeting the AI for calcium.
Overall, children ages 2 to 8 years are most likely to meet the recommended adequate
intakes of calcium, with food sources providing the majority of calcium intake. In fact,
just approximately 52% of calcium for children ages 2 to 18 years is derived from milk.
For children 2 to 5 years, milk contributes almost 60% of calcium, for those 6 to 11 years
milk contributes about 54% of calcium, and it contributes 46% of calcium to the diets of
12- to 18-year-olds.88 Other calcium sources for children ages 2 to 18 include cheese (14%),
yeast bread (7%), ice cream/sherbet/frozen yogurt (3%), and cakes/cookies/quickbreads/
donuts (2.3%).
not getting the calcium they need to maintain optimal bone health and prevent age-related
bone loss. Low peak bone density coupled with inadequate calcium intake in subsequent
years may increase the risk of bone fracture in later years. Osteopenia and osteoporosis are
both associated with inadequate bone mineral, especially calcium. Fractures resulting from
osteoporosis are a major cause of morbidity in post menopausal caucasian females in the
U.S. Osteoporosis develops over several decades of life and may not be apparent until a
fracture occurs. Although loss of bone mineral is related to dietary intake of calcium, there
are also other important considerations with regard to this condition.
The link between dietary calcium intake and bone status (osteoporosis) is not always
direct. Dietary intake of calcium may not be a good predictor of physiological calcium
status in some population groups or individuals because of the following confounding
factors:
Calcium intake:
• Calcium intake collected in national surveys captures only recent (1 to 2 days)
dietary intake, whereas osteoporosis takes several decades to develop.
NHANES III and NHANES 1999+ did include questions about the historical
consumption of milk, although long-term intake is difficult for many people
to report accurately.93,94 In addition, dietary intake surveys tend to underes-
timate total food and energy intake, so that calcium intake from surveys may
be underestimated as well.95
• The use of calcium supplements will increase calcium intake and may affect
bone health.
Intake of other nutrients:
• If energy intake has not been adequate (as with malnutrition or severe diet-
ing), there may not be sufficient protein or sufficient amounts of other nutri-
ents to help build or maintain bone. Bone is a complex tissue with a steady
turnover rate that requires many nutrients. Even if calcium is adequate, the
bone may not form properly if other important nutrients are lacking.
• Excess protein intake, especially from animal sources, may lead to increased
excretion of calcium in the urine. IOM (1997) points out that while dietary
protein intake increases urinary calcium excretion, inadequate protein intakes
(34 g/day) are associated with poor general health and poor recovery from
osteoporotic hip fractures.
• Dietary phylloquinone (vitamin K-1) or phylloquinone status may be associ-
ated with age-related bone loss.96-98
• The effects of caffeine on the skeleton are modest at calcium intakes of 800
mg/day or higher.39
• The Institute of Medicine39 reviewed the relationship between salt intake and
bone health, and concluded that indirect evidence indicates that dietary salt
has a negative effect on the skeleton, although the effect of a change in sodium
intake on bone loss and fracture rates has not been reported. IOM (1997)
concluded that available evidence does not warrant different calcium intake
requirements for individuals according to their salt consumption.
Role of genetics:
• Blacks and Asians experience more lactose intolerance than whites and tend
to eat fewer dairy products than whites. Although blacks and Asians tend to
have lower calcium intakes than whites, they do not necessarily show an
2705_frame_C15 Page 428 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:20 PM
Many Americans are not getting the calcium they need to maintain optimal bone health
and prevent age-related bone loss. Achieving peak bone mass and maintaining bone
mass appear to be related to adequate calcium intake in adolescence and early adult-
hood. Because of the high rates of bone accretion during adolescence, continued mon-
itoring of calcium intake is important.
The report classifies calcium as a “current public health issue” along with food energy,
total fat, saturated fatty acids, cholesterol, alcohol, iron, and sodium and recommends the
“development of interpretive criteria to link monitoring data to functional outcomes or
health outcomes.”
Nutrition monitoring data on calcium intake and calcium-containing foods were used
to make scientific recommendations at the 1994 NIH Consensus Conference on Optimal
2705_frame_C15 Page 429 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:20 PM
Calcium Intake.12 The U.S. policy on calcium is to continue to emphasize the consumption
of dairy products through the Dietary Guidelines for Americans31 and the Food Guide
Pyramid, and to suggest alternatives (fish with bones, green leafy vegetables, legumes,
calcium-fortified orange juice, calcium supplements) for those who do not consume dairy
products (e.g., those who are vegans, lactose intolerant, allergic to milk, those who do not
like dairy products, and those whose cultural diets do not include dairy products). The
Food Guide Pyramid recommendations are for two servings of dairy products per day
for adults 24 years of age and older, and 3 servings per day for children, teenagers, younger
adults, and pregnant and lactating women.
Conclusion
The primary goal of the 1990 Ten-Year Comprehensive Plan, “to establish a comprehensive
nutrition monitoring and related research program by collecting quality data that are
continuous, coordinated, timely, and reliable; using comparable methods for data collec-
tion and reporting of results; conducting relevant research; and efficiently and effectively
disseminating and exchanging information with data users” is still pertinent a decade
later.39 Nutrition monitoring data are needed to inform both research and policy agendas.
It is through this intertwined relationship between monitoring, research, and policy that
we can continue to effect change. Given the competing demands for limited national
resources and resulting budget limitations, however, the goals for the nutrition monitoring
program will continue to be evaluated against other competing national needs. Continued
support is necessary to maintain and expand the nutrition monitoring program in the U.S.
References
1. Mason JB, Habicht JP, Tabatabai H, Valverde V. Nutritional Surveillance. Geneva: WHO, 1984.
2. Ostenso GL. JADA 84:1181; 1984.
3. U.S. Congress. P. L. 101-445. National Nutrition Monitoring and Related Research Act of 1990.
Washington, DC: 101st Congress, October 22, 1990.
4. U.S. Department of Health and Human Services and U.S. Department of Agriculture. Ten-
year comprehensive plan for the national nutrition monitoring and related research program.
Federal Register, 58:32752-32806, June 11, 1993.
5. Kuczmarski MF, Kuczmarski RJ. In: Modern Nutrition in Health and Disease, 8th ed. Shils ME,
Olson JA, Shike M, Eds. Philadelphia: Lea & Febiger, 1994:1506-1516.
6. U.S. Department of Health and Human Service. Healthy People 2000: National Health Promotion
and Disease Prevention Objectives. DHHS Publication No. (PHS) 91-50212. Washington, DC: U.S.
Government Printing Office, 1991.
7. U.S. Department of Health and Human Services. Healthy People 2010. Conference Edition in
Two Volumes. U.S. Department of Health and Human Services. Washington, DC: U.S. Depart-
ment of Health and Human Services, January, 2000.
8. National Cholesterol Education Program. Second Report of the Expert Panel on Detection,
Evaluation, and Treatment of High Blood Cholesterol in Adults (Adult Treatment Panel II).
NIH Publication No. 93-3095. Bethesda, MD: National Heart, Lung, and Blood Institute, 1993.
9. National Heart, Lung, and Blood Institute. Sixth report of the Joint National Committee on
Detection, Evaluation, and Treatment of High Blood Pressure. DHHS Publ. No. 98-4080.
Washington, DC: U.S. Department of Health and Human Services, November, 1997.
2705_frame_C15 Page 430 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:20 PM
39. Institute of Medicine, Food and Nutrition Board. Dietary Reference Intakes for Calcium,
Phosphorus, Magnesium, Vitamin D, and Fluoride. A Report of the Standing Committee on
the Scientific Evaluation of Dietary Reference Intakes. Washington, DC: National Academy
Press, 1997.
40. Institute of Medicine, Food and Nutrition Board. Dietary Reference Intakes for Thiamin,
Riboflavin, Niacin, Vitamin B6, Folate, Vitamin B12, Pantothenic Acid, Biotin, and Choline: A
Report of the Standing Committee on the Scientific Evaluation of Dietary Reference Intakes
and its Panel on Folate, Other B Vitamins, and Choline and Subcommittee on Upper Reference
Levels of Nutrients. Washington, DC: National Academy Press, 1998.
41. National Research Council. Recommended Dietary Allowances, 10th ed. Washington, D.C.:
National Academy Press, 1989.
42. Sims LS. Research aspects of public policy in nutrition generating research questions to
determine the impact of nutritional, agricultural, and health care policy and regulations on
the health and nutritional status of the public. The Research Agenda for Dietetics Conference
Proceedings. Chicago, IL: American Dietetic Association, 1993: 25-38.
43. Office of Science and Technology Policy, Executive Office of the President. Meeting the Chal-
lenge. A research agenda for America’s Health, Safety, and Food. Washington, DC: Govern-
ment Printing Office, February, 1996.
44. Pamuk E, Makuc D, Heck K, Reuben C, Lochner K. Socioeconomic status and health chartbook.
Health, United States, 1998. Hyattsville, MD: National Center for Health Statistics, 1998.
45. Troiano RP, Flegal KM, Kuczmarski RJ, Campbell SM, Johnson CL. Arch Pediatr Adolesc Med
1995 Oct; 149(10): 1085-91
46. Ogden CL, Troiano RP, Briefel RR, Kuczmarski RJ, et al. Pediatrics 1997 Apr; 99(4): E1.
47. National Institute of Diabetes and Digestive and Kidney Diseases (NIDDK), National Institutes
of Health, Weight-control Information Network (WIN),
http://www.niddk.nih.gov/health/nutrit/win.htm.
48. Peterkin BB. J Nutr 1994 Sep; 124: 1836S-1842S.
49. Food and Agriculture Act of 1977 (PL 95-113). Sec. 1428. Cong Rec 123, September 29, 1977.
50. U.S. Department of Health and Human Services, U.S. Department of Agriculture. Nutrition
monitoring in the United States: A progress report from the Joint Nutrition Monitoring Eval-
uation Committee. DHHS Publication No. (PHS) 86-1255. Washington, DC: U.S. Government
Printing Office, 1986.
51. Life Sciences Research Office. Nutrition monitoring in the United States: An update report on
nutrition monitoring. DHHS Publication No. (PHS) 89-1255. Washington, DC: U.S. Govern-
ment Printing Office, 1989.
52. U.S. Department of Health and Human Services, Interagency Committee on Nutrition Mon-
itoring. Announcement of committee formation. 53 FR 26505 no. 134. Washington, DC: U.S.
Government Printing Office, 1988.
53. Interagency Committee on Nutrition Monitoring. Nutrition monitoring in the United States:
The directory of federal nutrition monitoring activities. DHHS Publication No. (PHS) 89-1255-
1. Washington, DC: Public Health Service, 1989.
54. Interagency Board for Nutrition Monitoring and Related Research. Wright J, ed. Nutrition
monitoring in the United States: The directory of federal and state nutrition monitoring
activities. DHHS Publication No. (PHS) 92-1255-1. Hyattsville, MD: Public Health Service,
1992.
55. Interagency Board on Nutrition Monitoring and Related Research. The directory of federal
and state nutrition monitoring and related research activities. Bialostosky K, ed. Washington,
DC: Public Health Service, 1998.
56. Interagency Board on Nutrition Monitoring and Related Research. The directory of federal
and state nutrition monitoring and related research activities. Bialostosky K, ed. Washington,
DC: Public Health Service, 2000. http://www.cdc.gov/nchs/data/direc-99/pdf.
57. Interagency Board for Nutrition Monitoring and Related Research. Nutrition Monitoring in
the United States. Chartbook I: Selected Findings from the National Nutrition Monitoring and
Related Research Program. Ervin B, Reed D, eds. DHHS Publication No. (PHS) 93-1255-2.
Hyattsville, MD: Public Health Service, 1993.
2705_frame_C15 Page 432 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:20 PM
58. Life Sciences Research Office, Federation of American Societies for Experimental Biology. Third
report on nutrition monitoring in the United States: Vol. 1 and 2. Prepared for the Interagency
Board for Nutrition Monitoring and Related Research. Washington, DC: U.S. Government
Printing Office, 1995.
59. U.S. Department of Health and Human Services and Department of Agriculture. Proposed
Ten-Year Comprehensive Plan for the National Nutrition Monitoring and Related Research
Program. Federal Register, October 29, 1991; 91-25967: SS716-55767.
60. Briefel R. Nutrition monitoring in the U.S. In: Present Knowledge in Nutrition, 7th edition. EE
Ziegler and LLJ Filer, Jr., eds. ILSI Press, Washington, DC. 1996. ch 52.
61. Kuczmarski MF, Moshfegh AJ, Briefel RR. J Am Diet Assoc 1994; 94: 753-60.
62. Woteki CE, Wong FL. Interpretation and utilization of data from the National Nutrition
Monitoring System. In Research. Successful Approaches. Monsen ER, ed. American Dietetic
Association, Mexico. 1992.
63. Woteki CE. Conference Proceedings. J Am Dietetic Assoc pp 39-48; 1993.
64. U.S. Department of Health and Human Services. National Center for Health Statistics. Third
National Health and Nutrition Examination Survey, 1988-94, Reference manuals and reports
(CD-ROM). Hyattsville, MD: Centers for Disease Control and Prevention, 1996. Available from
the National Technical Information Service (NTIS), Springfield, VA. Acrobat .PDF format;
includes access software: Adobe Systems Inc. Acrobat Reader 2.1.
65. Randall B, Bartlett S, Kennedy S. Study of WIC Participant and Program Characteristics, 1996.
Alexandria, VA: U.S. Department of Agriculture, Food and Nutrition Service. August, 1998.
66. Centers for Disease Control and Prevention. From Data to Action. CDC’s Public Health
Surveillance for Women, Infants and Children. Wilcox LS, Marks JS, eds. Public Health Service.
Washington, DC. 1994.
67. Hamilton WL, Cook JT, Thompson WW, Buron LF, et al. Measures of food security, food
insecurity, and hunger in the United States in 1995: Technical report of the food security
measurement study. Alexandria, VA: U.S. Department of Agriculture, Food and Consumer
Service, July, 1997.
68. Burghardt JA, Devaney BL, Gordon AR. Am J Clin Nutr 1995; 61: 252S-257S.
69. Heaton AW, Levy AS. J Nutr Educ 1995; 27: 182-90.
70. Levy AS, Heaton AW. Ann Intern Med 1993; 119: 661-6.
71. Heimendinger J, Van Duyn MA, Chapelsky D, Foerster S, et al. J Public Health Manag Pract
1996; 2(2): 27-35.
72. Schucker RE, Levy AS, Tenney JE, Mathews O. J Nutr Educ 1992; 24(2): 75-81.
73. Serdula MK, Williamson DF, Anda RF, Levy A, et al. Am J Public Health 1994; 84: 1821-4.
74. Youth Risk Behavior Surveillance — United States, 1997. MMWR 47 (SS-3). August 14, 1998.
75. O’Brien T. Office of Food Labeling, Center for Food Safety and Applied Nutrition, Food and
Drug Administration. Status of Nutrition Labeling of Processed Foods: 1995 Food Label and
Package Survey (FLAPS). Washington, DC: Food and Drug Administration. 1996.
76. Brecher S. Office of Food Labeling, Center for Food Safety and Applied Nutrition, Food and
Drug Administration. Status of Serving Size in the Nutrition Labeling of Processed Foods:
Food Label and Package Survey (FLAPS). Washington, DC: Food and Drug Administration.
1997.
77. Schakel SF, Buzzard IM, Gebhardt SE. J Food Comp Anal 10: 102-114. 1997
78. Haytowitz DB, Pehrsson PR, Smith J, Gebhardt SE, et al. J Food Comp Anal 1996; 9(4): 331-364.
79. Holden JM, Davis CS. Strategies for sampling: The assurance of representative values. In:
Quality and Accessibility of Food-Related Data. Greenfield, H, AOAC International 105-117.
1995.
80. Perloff BP, Rizek RR, Haytowitz DH et al. J Nutr 120: 1530-4. 1990.
81. Ervin RB, Wright JD, Kennedy-Stephenson J. Vital Health Stat 11. 1999 Jun; (244): i-iii, 1-14.
82. International Conference on Nutrition, Food and Agriculture Organization of the United
Nations/World Health Organization Joint Secretariat for the Conference. The International
Conference on Nutrition: World Declaration and Plan of Action for Nutrition, Rome; 1992.
83. Calloway CW. J Am Dietetic Assoc 1984: 1179-1180.
84. Brown Jr. GE (1984) J Am Dietetic Assoc 84: 1185-1188.
2705_frame_C15 Page 433 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:20 PM
85. National Center for Health Statistics. Unpublished data from the third National Health and
Nutrition Examination Survey. April 2000.
86. Forbes AL, Stephenson MG. J Am Dietetic Assoc 1984; 84: 1189-1193.
87. Fleming KH, Heimbach JT. J Nutr 1994; 124: 1426S-1430S.
88. Subar AF, Krebs-Smith SM, Cook A, Kahle LL. 1989-1991. Pediatrics 1998 Oct; 102(4 Pt 1): 913-23.
89. Looker AC, Orwoll ES, Johnston CC Jr, Lindsay RL, et al. J Bone Miner Res 1997 Nov; 12(11):
1761-8.
90. Garnero P, Hausherr E, Chapuy M-C, Marcelli C, et al. J Bone Miner Res 1996; 11: 1531-1538.
91. Rico H, Relea P, Crespo R, Revilla M, et al. J Bone Joint Surg 1995; 77-B: 148-151.
92. Hannon R, Blumsohn A, Naylor K, Eastell R. J Bone Mineral Res 1998; 13(7): 1124-1133.
93. Murphy S, Khaw KT, May H, Compston JE. BMJ 1994 Apr 9; 308(6934): 939-41.
94. Soroko S, Holbrook TL, Edelstein S, Barrett-Connor E. Am J Public Health 1994 Aug; 84(8):
1319-22.
95. Bingham SA. Nutr Abst Rev 1987; 57: 705-42.
96. Feskanich D, Weber P, Willett WC, Rockett H, Booth SL, Colditz GA. Am J Clin Nutr 69: 74-79,
1999.
97. Liu G, Peacock M. Calcified Tissue Int 62: 286-289, 1998.
98. Szulc P, Arlot M, Chapuy MC, Duboeuf F, et al. J Bone Miner Res 9: 1591-1595, 1994.
99. Gallagher JC, Goldgar D, Moy A. J Bone Miner Res 2: 491-496, 1987.
100. Frost HM. Bone Miner 2: 73-85, 1987.
101. Specker BL. J Bone Miner Res 11: 1539-1544, 1996.
2705_frame_C15 Page 434 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:20 PM
2705_frame_C16 Page 435 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:21 PM
16
Clinical Nutrition Studies: Unique Applications
Marlene M. Most, Valerie Fishell, Amy Binkoski, Stacie Coval, Denise Shaffer Taylor,
Guixiang Zhao, and Penny Kris-Etherton
Nutrition research is the hallmark of establishing nutrient requirements and giving dietary
guidance to promote health and wellbeing throughout life. Over the years it has been an
active area of investigation, leading to the discovery of many important findings that have
provided the basis for dietary guidelines and recommendations. Until recently, resources
describing the design, implementation, and management of clinical nutrition studies were
limited. Because of the growing interest and activities in clinical nutrition research, a
number of important resources are now available that describe key aspects of conducting
clinical nutrition studies. These resources (i.e., books and journal articles) are listed in
Table 16.1. They provide detailed information about all aspects of conducting nutrition
research with human participants. Collectively, they are a wealth of information for all
researchers interested in and actively involved with human nutrition research. Indeed,
these resources are a true “goldmine” to the field for standard studies, including those
that employ either a single- or multicenter model. However, there are many studies that
are uniquely different, presenting what may seem to be insurmountable challenges with
respect to the experimental design, diet design, participant population studied, and feed-
ing model utilized. For the most part, these have not been discussed in detail in the
publications listed in Table 16.1.
Thus, the purpose of this section is to describe unique challenges in human nutrition
research applications and provide guidance about how they can be effectively managed
to maintain tight experimental control. First, we have included a variety of forms that
were developed for different nutrition studies we have conducted that are not available
in other resources. These forms deal with important aspects of conducting a well-con-
trolled feeding study. They can be adapted to other human nutrition studies that vary in
design from more typical protocols. Second, we provide descriptions of studies that
illustrate challenges in the design and conduct of clinical nutrition studies, with notes on
how these were handled.
0-8493-2705-9/01/$0.00+$1.50
© 2002 by CRC Press LLC 435
2705_frame_C16 Page 436 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:21 PM
TABLE 16.1
Resources for Information on the Conduct of Clinical Nutrition Studies
Dennis, BH, Ershow, AG, Obarzanek, E, Clevidence, BA. Well-Controlled Diet Studies in Humans. The American
Dietetic Association, Chicago, IL, 1999.
Dennis, BH, Kris-Etherton, PM. Designing and Managing a Small Clinical Trial. In: Research, Successful Approaches,
pp. 151-170. Edited by E. Monsen. The American Dietetic Association, Chicago, IL, 1992.
Dennis, BH, Stewart, P, Hua-Wang, C, Champagne, C, Windhauser, M, Ershow, A, Karmally, W, Phillips, K,
Stewart, K, Van Heel, N, Farhat-Wood, A, Kris-Etherton, PM. Diet design for a multicenter controlled feeding
trial: The DELTA Program. JADA 1998; 98: 766-776.
Obarzanek, E, Moore, TJ. The Dietary Approaches to Stop Hypertension (DASH) Trial. JADA 1999; 8: S1-S104.
the experimental protocol. Hence, they serve as partners in research with the investigative
team. Also important are the day-to-day operations that depend largely on the proper
preparation, delivery, and consumption of the diets and adherence to study protocol by
the participants. For many studies the diets are the treatments, and therefore must be
strictly delivered as set forth by the protocol. Forms to assist with participant selection
and documentation of diet adherence activities are needed to assure quality.
Recruiting Participants
The major goal of recruitment is to enroll the required number of participants necessary
for the study within the projected timeline and within the budget constraints. The recruit-
ment of potential study participants can be accomplished in many ways, and will be
guided by inclusion/exclusion criteria set forth in the study protocol. Reaching the target
study population is key. For example, post-menopausal women would more likely see an
advertisement in a community weekly than, obviously, in a high school newspaper. There-
fore, recruitment tactics focus on the groups that need to be recruited, and are planned
accordingly. The Institutional Review Board (IRB) must clear all recruiting materials before
use to assure that the information is not misleading and the study is accurately represented.
Detailed information about recruiting is available elsewhere (see Table 16.1), but is briefly
discussed below.
Advertisements in the local media are effective recruitment tools. Newspaper advertise-
ments can be general in nature or contain specific information about the study (see
example, Figure 16.1). An advantage of a newspaper advertisement is that it reaches a
large audience, while a disadvantage is that it can be expensive. The ability to target a
specific audience may be somewhat limited unless the newspaper audience is narrow,
such as for business reports or campus newspapers. Radio and television advertisements
also can be expensive and are limited in the amount of information that can be dissemi-
nated about the study. However, it may be possible to obtain free radio and television
advertising by submitting the material as a public service announcement. Local morning
or early evening magazine-format programs often welcome an interview with the study
investigator, who can describe the study and ask for volunteers.
Other recruiting tools include speaking about the study to different local community
organizations, such as the Lions clubs or church groups. Although time consuming, it
targets a specific audience. Health fairs provide a community service as well as a recruit-
ment opportunity. For example, free blood pressure screenings will help identify potential
participants for a study examining blood pressure-lowering diets. Distributing and posting
flyers on bulletin boards in supermarkets, drug stores, or doctors’ offices is an excellent
avenue for communicating the need for study participants. Mass mailings of a brochure,
postcard, or letter describing the study can be sent to a target population. This tends to
2705_frame_C16 Page 437 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:21 PM
• You must be healthy and between the ages of 20–67 (male or pre-menopausal
female);
• You must not be a smoker and cannot consume alcohol, coffee, or tea during
the study;
• You must be willing to eat only foods (including cocoa and chocolate) provided
for the study and come to the study center on University Park campus for
breakfast and dinner 5 days/week — food for lunches and the weekend will
be packed for takeout;
• You must not have diabetes mellitus or uncontrolled (> 140/95) high blood
pressure or other serious health conditions;
• You must not be pregnant, nursing, or planning to get pregnant.
All food will be provided during the study along with monetary
compensation. If you are interested in participating in this study, please call
(814) 863-3168, give your name, mention that you are interested in the Cocoa
Study, and give us a number where you can be reached.
FIGURE 16.1
Sample subject recruitment advertisement.
be an effective tool but is labor-intensive and costly for the materials, mailing list, and
postage. Email also can be used for recruitment but, like mass mailings, it sometimes
requires the purchase of the mailing list.
Regardless of the recruitment method used, careful records are required to track the
recruitment progress, and more importantly, to document that the eligibility criteria are
being met.
Before asking any questions, please read the following paragraph to obtain verbal consent to conduct the
telephone interview:
“We received your message that you are interested in participating in the Folate Study. I would like to ask you
a series of questions about your willingness to participate in the study, your past medical history, and your
current lifestyle behaviors. If you agree to answer these questions, and it is then determined that you meet the
criteria for this study, we will schedule you for a screening visit. Are you willing to answer a series of questions,
which will take about 15 minutes?”
1. Yes (continue with interview)
2. No (thank them for their time and interest)
1. Are you a female between the ages of 19–35 years inclusive? Yes No
2. Do you plan to remain in the area for the duration of the Yes No
study?
3. Are there any personal reasons (e.g., family problems, Yes No
vacations, child care difficulties, etc.) that would keep you
from participating in the study?
4. Are there any professional reasons (e.g., job-related travel, Yes No
irregular work schedule, conferences, etc.) that would keep
you from participating in the study?
5. There is a variety of foods in the Folate Study. Are there Yes No
any foods you refuse to eat, are allergic to, or for whatever
reason have to avoid?
*Go to Food List*
Listed are foods included on the diet for this study. I will go through the list — tell me if there is any food you
cannot or would not eat.
FIGURE 16.2
Telephone interview form.
2705_frame_C16 Page 439 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:21 PM
FIGURE 16.2
Continued.
2705_frame_C16 Page 440 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:21 PM
FIGURE 16.2
Continued.
wasting resources in terms of staff time and money. For those who pass the initial telephone
interview, further screening is required. They will come to the study site for clinical
laboratory tests or other measurements to assure that they are relatively healthy and meet
all the study eligibility criteria.
To assist with identifying whether someone would be able to adequately follow the
dietary protocol, general dietary information may be gathered in questionnaire form
during the study screening visits. The questions identify participants who cannot or will
not eat any foods due to religious reasons, allergies, or severe physical discomfort. A
complete list of study foods or a copy of the study menus in layman’s terms may be
reviewed with potential participants. This information is especially important when par-
ticular foods in the menu cannot be substituted.
Other useful screening information includes whether a person can safely store and
prepare foods to be consumed away from the clinical site, and environmental, family, or
work situations that may make adherence to the protocol difficult (see General dietary
questionnaire, Figure 16.3). For persons whose adherence may appear to be questionable,
a meeting with the study dietitian may help to determine if reasonable provisions can be
made within the protocol requirements, or they may be deemed ineligible. For example,
participants who have lactose intolerance may be allowed to use lactose digestive aids
and be eligible. Someone who does not have adequate facilities in their home to store and
prepare study foods would be ineligible to participate in the study.
2705_frame_C16 Page 441 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:21 PM
The following questions are related to your overall eating environment. Your answers will help the staff
determine ways they can make your participation in the study more enjoyable.
Yes No
1. Do you foresee any problems transporting, storing, refrigerating, and warming your
study foods when you are away from our center?
2. Do you participate in activities where food is served, such as sporting events,
religious gatherings, business meetings, etc.?
3. Will any holidays, birthdays, family reunions, vacations, etc., occur during the period
you are on the study?
4. If you are responsible for preparing meals in your household, will this make it
difficult for you to meet study requirements?
5. Will anyone in your household be affected or inconvenienced by your participation
in this study?
If yes, who are they and how will they be affected?
6. Will your employment (e.g., job transfer) or work hours (e.g., moving to a night
shift) change during the study?
7. Do you, or anyone in your household, work in the food service industry (cafeteria,
bakery, restaurant, etc.)?
If yes, do you eat any meals or snacks at work either as a requirement of your job
or as a matter of convenience?
8. If you have any concerns about the study, please write them in the space provided
below (use the back of this page if you need additional space).
FIGURE 16.3
General dietary questionnaire.
Orientation Session
When taking part in a feeding study, it is important that each participant carefully follow
the dietary protocol. An orientation form that lists these guidelines may be developed and
reviewed immediately prior to the actual study start date during an orientation session.
Helpful information for the form would be instructions to finish all foods and beverages
provided, squeeze condiment packets until empty, use a rubber spatula or bread to clean
the plate, and eat fruit and vegetable peels as appropriate. Reminders to complete the
daily forms, check for accuracy of the meals, and not make substitutions may be listed.
A guideline stating what to do if participants find that they are too full or hungry is useful.
Heating directions for takeout foods could also be included. A list of contact persons with
telephone numbers is imperative for when questions or problems arise. Participants appre-
ciate a copy of the beverage and seasoning guidelines that specify the types and amounts
that may be consumed. If there are restrictions on mints or gum, these should be listed.
Participants must be instructed in the safe handling of foods provided to be consumed
off site. For example, a simple handout may be given that reminds participants to use a
cooler to transport foods for longer than one hour, to refrigerate all perishable foods as
soon as possible, and to not eat suspected spoiled foods, but to notify the staff immediately
to avoid a missed meal.
1. _______ _______ Were there any study foods you did not eat/drink on this day? Reasons include missing,
Yes No spilled, or inedible food, illness or other.
2. _______ _______ Did you eat or drink any foods that were not provided by the Metabolic Kitchen today?
Yes No If yes, please give the food/drink (be very specific), the amount, and reason consumed.
3. _______ _______ Did you consume any decaffeinated sugar-free beverages on this day? Record all
Yes No beverages, including those provided by the Metabolic Kitchen.
Food/Drink Amount
______________________________ __________________ oz.
______________________________ __________________
______________________________ __________________
4. Did you eat any of the “unit foods” today? Y _____N _____
How may “unit foods” did you eat? 0 1 2 3 4 5 Other _____
5. _______ _______ Is there anything you would like us to know in relation to your participation in this
Yes No study?
FIGURE 16.4
Daily checklist.
reason, the participants must be encouraged to record honestly and must not feel that
their participation is threatened in any way. The data, which document diet adherence
and deviations, may be used to calculate daily energy and nutrient intakes and to compute
a compliance score. The form, called a daily diary, daily log, or food and beverage intake
form, may gather information for the following broad categories:
The forms should provide the participant’s identification number and date for which
diet information is obtained. It may also contain the kcalorie level for the participant, coded
2705_frame_C16 Page 443 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:21 PM
Week 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
2. Have you taken any vitamin, mineral, or other supplements in the past week? Yes No
a. If Yes, specify: description amount
______________________________ _________________________
______________________________ _________________________
4. If you were ill in the past week, did your eating change as a result? Yes No
a. If Yes, describe: _____________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________
If any of the bolded boxes are checked, please notify Study Coordinator
FIGURE 16.5
Weekly monitoring form.
treatment diet, a field for entering the participant’s weight, and for females, menstruation
information. The information gathered then may be coded by the study staff, either on the
same form or another form, for data entry.
Another form for staff documentation of diet deviations may be used. This would
provide a record of deviations observed during on-site meals or those called in to staff
during times of off-site meals, such as weekends. If any study food or beverage is left on
the meal tray and was unnoticed during the meal tray check, information regarding the
food (i.e., type and amount) is recorded. Similarly, if a participant calls a staff member to
report a deviation for an off-site meal (i.e., missing, lost, or spoiled food), the appropriate
information is recorded. If discrepancies between the kitchen staff observations and infor-
mation reported by the participant are found, the study dietitian should adjudicate those.
In addition, the study protocol may require the participant to return uneaten portions of
study-provided foods. The type and amount of food returned would be recorded on this
form. Additional information may be collected regarding what was done with the food
not consumed. For example, was the food given back to the participant to eat, replaced
at the next meal and eaten, not replaced or not eaten? The data then may be coded for
compliance measures and energy or nutrient calculations.
Usually on a weekly basis, the participant will complete another form that asks about
general health-related items that might influence food intake or study outcomes (see
Weekly monitoring form, Figure 16.5). For example, changes in exercise, any illnesses, and
any medications or supplements taken may be reported. Queries for possible symptoms,
2705_frame_C16 Page 444 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:21 PM
Diet D Menu 1
Date: ____/____/____
Mm dd yy
Day: M T W T F S S Staff Initials 1500 2000 2500 3000 3500
Breakfast
Orange juice 124.0 124.0 124.0 124.0 248.0
Puffed rice cereal 23.0 23.0 23.0 46.0 46.0
White bread 22.7 45.4 90.4 90.4 90.4
Butter 8.0 9.0 15.0 20.0 20.0
Sweets; jellies 0.0 10.0 10.0 10.0 10.0
Jellies, dietetic 14.2 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
Milk, whole 245.0 245.0 245.0 490.0 490.0
Lunch
Sandwich package:
*Turkey breast meat 35.0 50.0 56.7 56.7 75.0
*Mayonnaise, regular 4.3 5.0 6.0 9.0 9.0
*Iceberg lettuce 0.0 0.0 0.0 10.0 10.0
*White bread 45.4 45.4 45.4 45.4 90.8
Iceberg lettuce 24.0 24.0 24.0 40.0 40.0
Olive oil 0.0 2.0 2.0 10.0 8.0
Peaches, juice pack 127.6 127.6 127.6 127.6 127.6
Ginger Cookie 14.0 22.0 22.0 22.0 22.0
FIGURE 16.6
Food production form. Foods are indicated in grams for each energy level diet.
such as poor appetite, stuffy nose, fatigue, diarrhea, constipation, nausea, or headache
could also be included as appropriate.
Breakfast
Orange juice
Puffed rice cereal (1 PC)*
White bread (1 slice)
Butter
Dietetic jelly (1/2 oz.)
Whole milk (1 PC)
Staff Initials
Lunch
Turkey sandwich package
Salad
Salad dressing
Peaches (1 PC)
Ginger cookie (1 small)
Staff Initials
Snack
Trail mix
Staff Initials
FIGURE 16.7
Tray assembly check sheet. * PC = portion control.
Another practical form for packed meals and/or snacks is a checklist of the menu items
that participants use to verify that all items have been packed in their takeout containers
(see Packed meal form, Figure 16.8). The form is attached to or placed inside the container,
and the participant is instructed to contact a kitchen staff member if any item on the form
is missing from the container. Menu cards also could be used in place of the form. These,
Diet D Menu 1
Name ______________________ I.D. ________________________ Telephone Contact (___)___-____
Day M T W T F Sa Su Date ___ ___ ___ Packed by __________________ Meal B L D S
(Circle One) mm dd yy
FIGURE 16.8
Packed meal form.
2705_frame_C16 Page 446 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:21 PM
when placed on the on-site meal trays, also provide a means for the participant to double-
check the accuracy of the menu items.
Miscellaneous Forms
The use of a food service sanitary inspection checklist for personnel, food handling,
equipment, storage practices, dishwashing, and department areas is standard. Inspection
of refrigerator and freezer temperatures also should be conducted on a regular basis. In
a research kitchen, regular accuracy checks of the electronic balances should be docu-
mented. Use of a form that lists acceptable ranges is a practical way to indicate whether
to recalibrate a balance. If foods are donated to the study, their expected delivery, date
received, and accuracy may be tracked on a form that also includes a description of the
food items, company, address, contact person, and telephone number.
2705_frame_C16 Page 447 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:21 PM
Exit Interview
At the end of the study, an exit interview may be planned for each individual or for a
group of participants. Information offered could include laboratory data gathered during
the study, health risk assessments, and appropriate educational materials. In addition,
anonymous input from completing participants about their experiences and views is help-
ful for planning future studies. For example, questions asking about favorite foods, disliked
foods, and about the menus in general that were served during the study can provide
information for improving future menus. Factors that made it easy or difficult to follow
the study protocol may be assessed. Additional questions include how study staff treated
participants and whether the subjects would recommend participating in a study to their
friends. This information can be invaluable for improving future studies by increasing
menu acceptability and making study participation a more enjoyable experience.
not. To overcome similar problems with recruiting persons in this age group, other clinical
centers provide guest meal passes so that family members or friends may regularly join
the study participants for meals.
Two studies that needed young females presented unique recruiting and retention
situations. Participants with low iron status were required to observe the overloading
effect of an iron supplement. Females, who generally have a lower iron status than males
due to menstruation, were targeted. Therefore, participants were females, ages 19 to 47,
with regular menstrual periods, in good general health and from all ethnic groups. Diffi-
culties in recruiting occurred for several reasons in a college town. During the summer
months the overall student population at the university diminishes greatly, presenting a
problem by reducing the potential participant pool. Also, the prospect of strictly adhering
to a controlled diet during the relaxing summer months provided another hurdle. The
two-week break between diet periods was planned around the July 4 holiday and a
summer arts festival to avoid further recruiting obstacles.
For this study and one that required females 18 to 22 years of age, weight concerns
proved to be a barrier for recruiting. Many young women were trying to lose weight and
did not want to maintain their current weight as required by the study protocols. In
addition, women in this age group tend to be “fat phobic” and careful about their fat
consumption. They were hesitant to consume diets that may have contained more fat than
their usual diets. Therefore, it was important that the fats and oils were discreetly added
to the study diets. This was accomplished by choosing meals such as turkey with dressing
and mashed potatoes or stuffed flounder, which would readily accept the oils and fats
without drawing attention.
Both recruitment and retention of participants were challenged in a study that compared
whole-food diets with formula diets. For recruitment, potential participants sampled the
formula diets. It was emphasized that the formula was all they would consume during two
of the four diet periods. Once enrolled, participant retention became the paramount issue.
One way of maintaining their participation in the study was to conduct a raffle during each
diet period. Raffle items included tickets to a football game, a movie, and a Broadway show
that came to campus. Another way was to prepare a portion of the daily formula as “ice
cream.” The “flavor of the day” was posted, and chocolate and strawberry flavors were
always available. For the participants, this alleviated the boredom from having to always
drink their meals. Many enjoyed telling their friends that they were on an “ice cream diet.”
Providing specialized, prepackaged meals or foods to participants for daily consumption
may make recruiting easier (i.e., more participants are willing to eat prepackaged foods
at home, rather than having all meals served through a metabolic kitchen), yet challenges
still abound as in other clinical nutrition studies. As one site of a year long, multicenter
study testing the effect of a prepackaged meal plan on multiple CVD risk factors, 70 men
and women with hyperlipidemia, hypertension, and/or Type 2 diabetes mellitus were
recruited. Finding participants who met the entry criteria proved to be difficult in a small
college town. Thus, the study was conducted simultaneously in a more urban location 90
miles away, where the university’s medical school is located. Once all of the participants
were recruited, problems arose with the weekly home delivery of the prepackaged, frozen
meals. The food could not be left without a signature, which proved to be an obstacle.
Participants sometimes received meals different than those they ordered, and they became
bored with their limited food selection during the year-long study.
dark chocolate (16 g/day) on LDL oxidative susceptibility and total antioxidant capacity
of plasma. The study employed a two-period, crossover design. Using a randomized
diet treatment assignment, participants were fed the cocoa powder/dark chocolate diet
(CP/DC) and an Average American Diet (AAD, control) for four weeks each. The cocoa
powder and dark chocolate were incorporated into only one experimental diet, making
it impossible to employ a blinded experimental diet design. Planning a study of chocolate
would appear to be easy, but the cocoa powder and menu development actually pre-
sented some challenges.
First, it was necessary to control for components present in the cocoa powder and dark
chocolate to “isolate” the flavonoids for testing their contribution to a possible antioxidant
benefit. To do this, the cocoa butter present in the dark chocolate was included in a similar
amount in the AAD. Other components included caffeine, theobromine, and fiber, since
cocoa powder and dark chocolate contain these in addition to the flavonoids. The caffeine
was supplemented in the AAD with diet cola, and 431 mg/day of pure theobromine in a
gel capsule was provided. The fiber was equilibrated with bran cereal. In addition, the
diets were designed to be low in non-CP/DC flavonoids. Thus, foods that were limited
or excluded included tea, coffee, wine, onions, apples, beans, soybeans, orange juice, and
grape juice.
Second, there was a fair amount of cocoa powder in the experimental diet, so the
participants were sometimes required to add cocoa powder (about 15 g) to their milk (or
any other menu item). They also could add a non-caloric sweetener to the “chocolate milk”
if they chose to do so. The resulting beverage was notably different from commercially
available chocolate milk and that prepared from chocolate syrups. Nonetheless, it was a
menu item that the participants found acceptable, albeit different from what they were
accustomed to drinking, and they were willing to consume it throughout the study.
Third, the cocoa powder and dark chocolate were incorporated into the diets in different
ways to avoid monotony. The daily allotment of cocoa powder was also baked into cookies,
muffins, and brownies that would be served at meals. This assured that the cocoa powder
and dark chocolate would be consumed throughout the day.
A soy study evaluated the effects of 31 g/day of an isoflavone-rich soy powder (equiv-
alent to 25 g soy protein) on plasma lipids and lipoproteins and vascular reactivity in
hypercholesterolemic but otherwise healthy male and female participants. All participants
were first fed a Step-I (run-in) diet followed by either a Step-I diet plus soy protein or a
Step-I diet with milk protein. Isoflavones are cleared rapidly from the plasma after inges-
tion, so soy-containing menu items were incorporated throughout the day in an attempt
to achieve maximal effects. The barrier to overcome was incorporation of the soy or milk
protein into baked products at an acceptable level without sacrificing the quality and
acceptability of the product. Acknowledging the importance of this, we worked with a
faculty member with expertise in food product design who prepared several great-tasting
soy products for the study. With considerable product development effort it was possible
to employ a blinded study design.
Similar barriers to flavor were overcome in a study that examined the effects of defatted
rice bran on blood lipids and lipoproteins in moderately hypercholesterolemic men and
women. Participants were randomly assigned to a reference diet with typical levels of
dietary fiber (approximately 15 g/day) or one that contained defatted rice bran to increase
dietary fiber to the recommended intake level (30 g/day). Foods were developed with the
intention of incorporating the highest amount of defatted rice bran possible. The defatted
rice bran had a nutty flavor, a somewhat grainy texture, and imparted a brown color to
all the products to which it was added. After much experimentation, we found that one
gram beyond a certain amount would yield an unacceptable food product. Because of the
2705_frame_C16 Page 450 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:21 PM
color, food products that are expected to be brown, such as spice muffins and ginger
cookies, were ideal for the addition of the defatted rice bran.
Folate fortification of foods in the U.S. created some obstacles in menu development for
a study that examined the effects of a low-folate diet with milk (8 oz milk, 3 times/day)
or with no milk (8 oz apple juice, 3 times/day) on folate absorption and blood homocys-
teine levels. For a low-folate diet, it was necessary to purchase foods from countries that
did not fortify their food products. Pasta imported from Italy became a staple in these
menus and was used for lunch salads and dinner items. Foods which are manufactured
for individuals with celiac sprue are naturally low in folate because they are made with
rice flour and corn starch rather than wheat flour. Some of these items included crackers,
pretzels, and a delicious chocolate truffle brownie. The sources of these low-folate foods
were obtained by searching shops that specialize in imported foods. Furthermore, infor-
mation available on the Worldwide Web was immensely helpful to make these menus
appealing. One limitation with the menus was that there was only a four-day rotation
because of the lack of foods that are naturally low in folate. A short menu rotation may
contribute to monotony and boredom, so encouraging adherence may require extra effort.
The Worldwide Web also proved to be useful in finding food items for other studies,
such as one that manipulated the glycemic load of a low-fat, high-carbohydrate diet. The
number of food items with a known glycemic index is relatively low, and therefore limited
the food choices for the menus. Some of the foods are not routinely eaten in the U.S. For
example, chana dal, a dried baby garbanzo bean, is a staple in Indian food and has a
glycemic index of 8 compared to glucose at 100. Locating a source of the chana dal was
made easy by searching various websites. It was used as the carbohydrate source for
several meals for the low glycemic index menus.
meals for the Easter, July 4, and Labor Day holidays. In addition, they were allowed to
take a total of seven “vacation” days within the six weeks immediately following the
testing days. As for the previously described study, incentives were provided throughout
the time period for encouragement.
A study designed to achieve weight maintenance after a weight loss phase presented
interesting situations with participant adherence to and acceptability of the protocol.
Participants who were moderately overweight were placed on one of two energy-restricted
diets to achieve a weight loss of two pounds per week. Following a six-week weight loss
period, they were fed the same diets, but with enough energy to maintain their weight.
Despite using a metabolic cart to calculate energy needs, about 20% of the participants
continued to lose weight during the weight maintenance phase. Because of this, periods
longer than four weeks were necessary to establish a stable body weight.
In general, people enjoy participating in controlled weight loss studies, and conse-
quently, adherence is ideal. For this study, the weight loss aspect generally was motivation
enough for the participants, although weekly incentives were provided. The hardest part
of the study was getting the participants to eat all of their food during the weight main-
tenance phase of the study. Most wanted to continue to lose weight and had to be
encouraged to adhere to the study protocol.
Several people enrolled in the weight loss study had unrecognized eating disorders,
making it difficult for them to comply with the protocol, where kcalories were restricted
for a portion of the study and then increased for the remainder of the study. This problem
pointed out the need for a screening questionnaire that would help identify people with
eating disorders so that they would not be enrolled in the study.
In the following series of studies, each of which incorporated a particular food product,
it is important that participants like the food, or at least tolerate it and be willing to eat
large amounts or more “realistic” quantities daily. While efforts are made to incorporate
the food product into a number of tasty products, it would be difficult for participants to
adhere to the experiment diet if they dislike the particular food product or the foods that
serve as a major delivery vehicle (i.e., milk for cocoa powder).
Studies were conducted using chocolate as a vehicle to assess the effects of stearic acid
on plasma lipids, lipoproteins, and platelet function. Our approach was to first evaluate
a large dose of the major fat in chocolate (i.e., cocoa butter) and subsequently assess a
large dose of milk chocolate (i.e., 10 oz/day), as well as the fat mixture found in chocolate
(cocoa butter and dairy butter — 4:1). Our rationale for using large doses was first to
determine if there was any effect of chocolate on the study endpoints of interest. Then,
more realistic intakes that reflect usual consumption practices would be examined. Initially
we needed to assess whether a large dose of chocolate would cause any significant adverse
side effects, such as gastrointestinal distress, headaches, or skin problems. Thus, a small
pilot study evaluated six participants who were fed large amounts of chocolate (10 oz/
day) for approximately one month. Having seen no adverse symptoms, two studies were
conducted to evaluate the effects of cocoa butter and milk chocolate on plasma lipids,
lipoproteins, and platelet function.
A subsequent study evaluated the incorporation of more realistic amounts of milk
chocolate (1 candy bar/day) to a Step-I diet. Moreover, we wanted to mimic real-world
chocolate consumption practices. Since a peak time for consumption of chocolate is in the
mid-afternoon, participants were required to eat their candy bar at that time. They were
required to return the wrapper to the study staff at the dinner meal for adherence assess-
ment and for communicating an important message that participants needed to consume
the chocolate bar as well as follow all aspects of the experimental protocol.
2705_frame_C16 Page 452 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:21 PM
Conclusions
Well-controlled clinical nutrition studies have been invaluable in generating results that
have advanced our understanding of diet–disease relationships and have provided infor-
mation that has formed the basis for making nutrient recommendations. A number of
recent publications have comprehensively described the process of how to conduct well-
controlled feeding studies in humans that employ quality control standards at each step
(Table 1). Inherent to conducting these studies is the associated myriad of challenges, not
discussed in depth in the literature, that need to be resolved in order to conduct successful
studies. This section has presented an overview of these, which relate globally to subject
recruitment and compliance/adherence, and maintenance of subject and staff enthusiasm
during the feeding study. In addition, we have provided a “forms library” that provides
specific forms or a description for virtually every aspect involved in carrying out these
studies. Specific examples from the many clinical studies that we have conducted are
presented herein, and the approaches we implemented to resolve these problems are
described. This information will help readers to overcome the challenges that can arise
during the conduct of a well-controlled feeding study. Avoiding inherent pitfalls in feeding
studies will facilitate conducting high quality clinical nutrition research efficiently and
effectively, and therefore help advance the field.
2705_frame_C17 Page 453 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:21 PM
17
Nutrition Monitoring and Research Studies:
Observational Studies
Purpose
The purpose of this section is to provide an overview and examples of observational
studies; specifically, cohort observational studies that incorporate nutritional assessment.
After a brief review of the various types of observational studies and their corresponding
purposes, a detailed description of the characteristics, advantages, and disadvantages of
a cohort study is provided. Next, in order to demonstrate the use of the cohort design in
the area of nutrition, a description of six cohort studies that utilized nutritional assessments
is provided. Finally, selected nutrition-related publications from the six cohort examples
are referenced, along with the corresponding measured nutritional variables.
Observational Studies
Epidemiology is classically known as the study of the distribution of disease in popula-
tions; however, this definition expands and often overlaps with other areas of research.
We are concerned with two types of research here: clinical studies and observational
studies. The primary difference between these two types of research is the randomization
of subjects into groups. Clinical studies allow for the randomization of subjects into various
treatment or control groups, whereas observational studies examine the subjects according
to their natural selection into groups.
Observational studies include natural history studies, case-control studies, prevalence
(cross-sectional or population) studies, and cohort (incidence) studies. The research ques-
tion of interest would generally dictate which of the various observational studies would
be used (see Table 17.1). For example, the diagnosis or prevalence of a disease would be
facilitated by using the prevalence study design. Cohort studies provide the opportunity
to observe populations prospectively, thereby enabling observation of incidence rates as
well as prevalence rates. Risk factors and prognosis of a disease can be identified through
several different types of observational studies.
0-8493-2705-9/01/$0.00+$1.50
© 2002 by CRC Press LLC 453
2705_frame_C17 Page 454 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:21 PM
TABLE 17.1
The Question and Appropriate Design
Question Observational Studies
Diagnosis Prevalence
Prevalence Prevalence
Incidence Cohort
Risk factors Cohort, case/control, prevalence
Prognosis Cohort, natural history
TABLE 17.2
Characteristics of a Cohort or Incidence Study
Characteristic
Selection of a study cohort WITHOUT disease
Follow study cohort over time (prospective)
Measurement of incidence and/or absolute risk (new cases developed in a time period)
Comparison of incidence in those with and without the risk factor (relative risk and attributable risk)
Cohort Studies
As noted in Table 17.1, the purpose of cohort studies is to identify the risk factors associated
with a disease of interest and obtain the incidence of disease1 and/or its prognosis. Overall,
cohort studies allow the development of a disease to be described, and are therefore
typically a favorite among the various types of observational studies.2
The defining characteristics of a cohort study are shown in Table 17.2. The first charac-
teristic is identification of a study cohort who currently does not have the disease of interest.
Any group of individuals who have either been exposed to the same occurrence, live in a
defined geographic area, or have the same risk factors may be identified as a cohort.1-3
When similar risk factors identify a cohort, a second similar cohort without the identified
risk factors and the disease of interest must be obtained for comparison purposes.2
The second characteristic is that the study cohort(s) is followed over time. Because the
study cohort(s) are disease free, the cohort(s) are followed over time to see which indi-
viduals in the cohort(s) actually develop the disease of interest.1-4 The new cases of the
particular disease which developed within a specified time period are then measured to
obtain the incidence and absolute risk of the particular disease. Finally, a comparison
between the incidence in those individuals who had the risk factors and those individuals
who did not produce a relative risk and attributable risk of these risk factors on the
development of the disease of interest.
TABLE 17.3
Advantages and Disadvantages of a Cohort Study
Advantages Disadvantages
Easier to distinguish cause from association Results are delayed for low incidence or long
Incidence can be obtained incubation
Multiple outcomes can be studied Large number may be needed
Standard questions and measurements can be used Expensive in resources
May lead to identification of variables which can be Losses may bias results
experimentally examined Methods, criteria, and exposure status may change
over time
TABLE 17.4
Factors Associated with Causality
Magnitude of the association’s strength
Ability to show the association’s consistency through replication
Association’s identification of one risk factor to one outcome
Risk factor must precede outcome
Outcome is sensitive to different levels of risk factor
Association’s logical adherence to current theory
Association’s consistency with other information about the outcome
Association’s correspondence to other causal associations
prior to the development of the disease of interest, temporal order is established. Temporal
order is just one of eight factors associated with causality (see Table 17.4)4 and strengthens
a causal conclusion instead of simply an association between risk factors and outcome
often found in other study designs.1,4 On the other hand, the comparison of cohorts based
on risk factors makes the assumption that both cohorts are similar except for the suspected
risk factor. However, such an assumption rarely is completely supported and, hence
restricts causal implications.1
Another important advantage of cohort studies is the ability to obtain the incidence of
a disease which in turn can provide estimates of new incidences that preventive programs
can use to identify programmatic needs and support budgetary plans.4 Further, multiple
outcomes can be studied, and standard questions and measurements can be used to
compare results found in this study to previously completed studies. For example, the
Framingham study5 has provided important information on blood pressure, cholesterol,
diet, eye disease, and a number of other risk factors and outcome measures. Other studies,
such as the Coronary Artery Risk Development in Young Adults (CARDIA)6 have emu-
lated Framingham. In this study, variables were selected for inclusion in the baseline
examination because of their known or suspected relationships to cardiovascular disease.
The availability of multiple endpoints in the same populations further enables one to
study the temporal development of the components and their interrelationships. Finally,
cohort studies may permit the identification of additional variables related to specific
outcome measures which can then be further examined experimentally.3
One of the most obvious disadvantages of the cohort studies is that length has to be
adequate for development of the disease or a surrogate of the disease of interest.1,4 For
example, blood pressure and cardiovascular disease: cardiovascular disease is the ultimate
outcome of interest, but the surrogate, blood pressure, is sufficiently linked to the outcome
to make it a viable outcome in its own right. For these diseases or surrogates with low
incidence or long incubation periods, the results are delayed. With low disease incidence
rates, the sample size for each study cohort may need to be extremely large in order to
make the necessary comparisons.1,4 With both a lengthy process and large sample size,
2705_frame_C17 Page 456 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:21 PM
another disadvantage is the expense associated with conducting the study.4 The length
of the study may also influence the ability to recapture all of the subjects at the end of
the study. This ability to recapture the study participants depends on their geographic
mobility, interest in continuing the study, and death.4 The inability to capture all study
participants may bias the results1,2 by so-called informative censoring. In addition, the
length of the study dictates other potential concerns. Methods, criteria, and exposure
status may change over time. For example, environmental, cultural, or technological
changes may influence the risk factors identified and the measurement of the variables
under study.2,4
TABLE 17.5
Examples of Cohort Studies Utilizing Nutrition Assessments
Nutrition
Years Intake
Cohort Study Conducted Sample Studied Outcome Measurement
Coronary Artery Baseline: 5116 sampled men and Coronary heart Baseline:
Risk Development 1985-1986 women blacks and disease risk factors Diet History
in Young Adults Year 2: whites 18-30 years old Questionnaire
(CARDIA) 1987-1988 (interview-
administered)
Year 2:
NCI (Block) Food
Frequency
Questionnaire
Framingham Study: 1949-1989 5209 sampled men and Cardiovascular risk Semi-Quantitative
Heart and Vascular women primarily factors Food Frequency
Disease Program whites 30-62 years old Questionnaire
(Willet)
Framingham 1971-1988 5135 sampled men and Cardiovascular risk 24-hr dietary recall
Offspring and Their women primarily factors
Spouse Study whites 12-60 years old
The RENO 1985-1993 508 sampled men and Cardiovascular risk 1. 24-hr dietary recall
(Relationship of women primarily factors 2. 7-Day food record
Energy and whites 20-69 years old 3. NCI (Block) Food
Nutrition to normal/overweight Frequency
Obesity) Diet-Heart Questionnaire
Study
The Nurses’ Study 1976-1996 121,700 sampled female Cancer risk factors Semi-Quantitative
registered nurses Food Frequency
primarily whites 30-55 Questionnaire
years old (Willet)
The Health 1986-1994 51,529 sampled male Heart disease and Semi-Quantitative
Professionals health professionals cancer risk factors Food Frequency
Follow-Up Study primarily whites 40-75 Questionnaire
years old (Willet)
Selected from 11 states, nurses were chosen because they were expected to be more
accurate in reporting the incidence of diseases and lifestyle factors, and in addition were
expected to have higher participation and retention rates.21-23
Measurements were requested biennially from 1976 to 1996. Unique to this study, the
study researchers did not have personal contact with the nurse participants; instead, all
contact was maintained through the mail. That is, study participants were required to
mail in their bodily samples, anthropometric information, and the various question-
naires.21-25 Only when a participant was nonresponsive to mailing in measurements were
telephone interviews conducted. Measurements included basic demographics, medical
history including the use of medications, blood and toenail samples, anthropometrics,
lifestyle factors such as diet, exercise, and cigarette smoking, and quality of life and social
support questionnaires.21,22 In order to confirm the presence of a specified outcome (e.g.,
cancer, myocardial infarction, diabetes, or fractures), medical chart reviews were con-
ducted when participants indicated an outcome’s existence.21,23,25 Nutrition intake was
measured with Willett’s semi-quantitative food frequency questionnaire, which assessed
the consumption frequency of specified portions of food within the last year.21,23-25 In 1980,
the food frequency questionnaire identified only 61 common foods,21 while the 1984, 1986,
1990, and 1994 measures were expanded to include 120 common foods, and both vitamin
and mineral supplementations.23
Summary
This section has focused on the benefits of the cohort study and has provided examples
of several studies that have used this form of design. There are certainly other forms
that can be utilized to assess the impact of diet on disease or health. The value of
2705_frame_C17 Page 460 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:21 PM
TABLE 17.6
Selected Nutrition-Related Publications from the Six Cohort Examples
Reference Nutrient Variables
Slattery, M.L., Dyer, A., Jacobs, D.R., Jr., Hilner, J.E., Total kcals, macronutrients, and selected
Cann, B.J., Bild, D.E., Liu, K., McDonald, A., Van micronutrients by gender and race.
Horn, L., Hardin, M. (1994). A comparison of two
methods to ascertain dietary intake: The CARDIA
Study. J Clin Epidemiol, 47, 701-711.
Liu, K., Slattery, M., Jacobs, D. Jr., Cutter, G., Total kcals, macronutrients, and selected
McDonald, A., Van Horn, L., Hilner, J.E., Caan, B., micronutrients by gender and race.
Bragg, C., Dyer, A., Havlik, R. (1994). A study of the
reliability and comparative validity of the CARDIA
dietary history. Ethnicity & Disease, 4, 15-27.
Bild, D.E., Sholinsky, P., Smith, D.E., Lewis, C.E., Baseline caloric and fat intake, change in caloric and
Hardin, J.M., Burke, G.L. (1996). Correlates and fat intake at year 2 by gender and race.
predictors of weight loss in young adults: The
CARDIA Study. Int J Obesity, 20, 47-55.
Tucker, K.L., Selhub, J., Wilson, P.W.F., Rosenberg, I.H. Folate intake, ranking of dietary contributors to folate
(1996). Dietary intake pattern relates to plasma folate intake by gender and age (67-95 years old). Folate
and homocysteine concentrations in the Framingham intake through supplements and breakfast cereals,
Heart Study. Hum Clin Nutr, 126, 3025-3031. orange juice, green leafy vegetables.
Posner, B.M., Cupples, L.A., Franz, M.M., Gagnon, Total kcals, macronutrients, and selected
D.R. (1993). Diet and heart disease risk factors in adult micronutrients by gender. Ranking of dietary
American men and women: The Framingham contributors to total fat, saturated fat, cholesterol,
Offspring-Spouse nutrition studies. Int J Epidemiol, 22, calories, carbohydrate, protein, oleic acid, and linoleic
1014-1025. acid.
Posner, B.M., Cupples, L.A., Gagnon, D., Wilson, Total kcals, macronutrients, and selected
P.W.F., Chetwynd, K., Felix, D. (1993). Healthy People micronutrients by gender.
2000: the rationale and potential efficacy of preventive
nutrition in heart disease: The Framingham
Offspring-Spouse study. Arch Intern Med, 153, 1513-
1556.
Dodds, M.P., Silverstein, L.J. (1997). The 24-Hour Total kcals, macronutrients, and selected
Dietary Recall, in S. St. Jeor (Ed.). Obesity Assessment: micronutrients by gender and weight status. Total
Tools, Methods, Interpretations, New York: Chapman kcals, macronutrients, and selected micronutrients by
and Hall. BMI and age.
RENO Diet-Heart Study
Scott, B.J., Reeves, R.B. (1997). Seven Day Food Total kcals, macronutrients, and selected
Records. In S. St. Jeor (Ed.). Obesity Assessment: Tools, micronutrients by gender and weight status.
Methods, Interpretations, New York: Chapman and
Hall.
RENO Diet-Heart Study
Benedict, J.A., Block, G. (1997). Food Frequency Total kcals, macronutrients, and selected
Questionnaires, in S. St. Jeor (Ed.). Obesity Assessment: micronutrients by gender and weight status. Total
Tools, Methods, Interpretations, New York: Chapman kcal, macronutrients, and selected micronutrients by
andHall. BMI and age.
RENO Diet Heart Study
Silverstein, L.J., Scott, B.J., St. Jeor, S.T. (1997). Eating Number of foods per day, caloric density, number of
Patterns, in S. St. Jeor (Ed.). Obesity Assessment: Tools, meals per day and number of eating incidents per
Methods, Interpretations, New York: Chapman and day by age group. Number of foods per day, caloric
Hall. density, eating incidents per day, calories per eating
RENO Diet Heart Study incident, percent fat and total calories by gender and
weight status. Breakfast eating variables by gender
and weight status.
2705_frame_C17 Page 461 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:21 PM
Colditz, G.A. (1995). The Nurses’ Health Study: A Selected macronutrients and selected micronutrients
cohort of U.S. women followed since 1976. JAMWA, by breast cancer, CHD/stroke, colon cancer, fracture,
50, 40-63. diabetes, and other diseases. Fruits and vegetables by
CHD/stroke, red meat by colon cancer, and caffeine
by fractures.
Hu, F.B., Stampfer, M.J., Manson, J.E., Ascherio, A., Saturated fat consumption over ten years. Saturated
Colditz, G.A., Speizer, F.E., Hennekens, C.H., Willett, fat top 5 contributors. Saturated fat consumption by
W.C. (1999). Dietary saturated fats and their food coronary heart disease risk factors. Red meat, white
sources in relation to the risk of coronary heart meat, high-fat and low-fat dairy consumption by
disease in women. Am J Clin Nutr, 70, 1001-1008. coronary heart disease.
The Nurses’ Health Study
Liu, S., Willett, W.C., Stampfer, M.J., Hu, F.B., Franz, Selected macronutrients, selected micronutrients, and
M., Sampson, L., Hennekens, C.H., Manson, J.E. selected food sources by glycemic load. Energy-
(2000). A prospective study of dietary glycemic load, adjusted dietary glycemic load by CHD. Energy-
carbohydrate intake, and risk of coronary heart adjusted total carbohydrate, type of carbohydrate and
disease in U.S. women. Am J Clin Nutr, 71, 1455-1461. glycemic index by CHD.
The Nurses’ Health Study
Michels, K.B., Giovannucci, E., Joshipura, K.J., Rosner, Frequency of fruit and vegetable intake by colorectal
B.A., Stampfer, M.J., Fuchs, C.S., Colditz, G.A., cancer age-standardized risk factors. Selected
Speizer, F.E., Willett, W.C. (2000). Prospective study categories of fruit and vegetables by relative risk of
of fruit and vegetable consumption and incidence of colon cancer and rectal cancer. Selected categories of
colon and rectal cancers. J Nat Cancer Inst, 92, 1740- fruits and vegetables stratified by vitamin
1752. supplement useage by relative risk of colon cancer.
The Nurses’ Health Study and The Health
Professionals’ Follow-Up Study
Van Dam, R.M., Huang, Z., Giovannucci, E., Rimm, Demographics related to nutrient intake, energy-
E.B., Hunter, D.J., Colditz, G.A., Stampfer, M.J., adjusted dietary fat intake by relative risk of basal cell
Willett, W.C. (2000). Diet and basal cell carcinoma of carcinoma of the skin, energy-adjusted intake of select
the skin in a prospective cohort of men. Am J Clin micronutrients and relative risk of basal cell
Nutr, 71, 135-141. carcinoma of the skin.
The Health Professionals’ Follow-Up Study
Platz, E.A., Willett, W.C., Colditz, G.A., Rimm, E.B. Mean alcohol intake, mean red meat intake, mean folic
(2000). Proportion of colon cancer risk that might be acid intake by colon cancer risk factors.
preventable in a cohort of middle-aged U.S. men.
Cancer Causes and Control, 11, 579-588.
The Health Professionals’ Follow-Up Study
Giovannucci, E., Rimm, E.B., Colditz, G.A., Stampfer, Fat intake by cancer-free members and by relative risk
M.J., Ascherio, A., Chute, C.C., Willett, W.C. (1993). of prostate cancer. Levels of fat from various animal
A prospective study of dietary fat and risk of prostate sources by relative risk of advanced prostate cancer.
cancer. J Nat Cancer Inst, 85, 1571-1579.
The Health Professionals’ Follow-Up Study
Giovannucci, E., Rimm, E.B., Wolk, A., Ascherio, A., Low and high intake of total calcium, total fructose,
Stampfer, M.J., Colditz, G.A., Willett, W.C. (1998). fruit fructose and non-fruit fructose by age-
Calcium and fructose intake in relation to risk of standardized selected characteristics. Total calcium
prostate cancer. Cancer Res, 58, 442-447. intake and total fructose intake by total, advanced
The Health Professionals’ Follow-Up Study and metastatic prostate cancer.
2705_frame_C17 Page 462 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:21 PM
References
1. Monsen ER, Cheney CL. J Am Diet Assoc 88: 1047; 1988.
2. Friedman GD. Primer of Epidemiology, McGraw-Hill, New York, 1987.
3. Zolman JF. Biostatistics: Experimental Design and Statistical Inference, Oxford University Press,
New York, 1993.
4. Slome et al. Basic Epidemiological Methods and Biostatistics: A Workbook, Wadsworth Health
Sciences Division, Monterey, 1982.
5. Dawber TR. The Framingham Study: The Epidemiology of Atherosclerotic Disease, Harvard Uni-
versity Press, Cambridge, 1980.
6. Friedman, GD, et al. J Clin Epidemiol 41: 1105; 1988.
7. McDonald A, et al. J Am Diet Assoc 91: 1104; 1991.
8. Liu K, et al. Ethnicity Disease 4: 15; 1994.
9. Slattery ML, et al. J Clin Epidemiol 47: 701; 1994.
10. Bild DE, et al. Int J Obesity 20: 47; 1996.
11. Tucker KL, et al. Hum Clin Nutr 126: 3025; 1996.
12. Kannel WB, et al. Am J Epidemiol 110: 281; 1979.
13. Posner BM, et al. Int J Epidemiol 22: 1014; 1993.
14. Posner BM, et al. Arch Intern Med 153: 1993.
15. St. Jeor ST, Dyer AR. In Obesity Assessment: Tools, Methods, Interpretations, St Jeor ST, Ed,
Chapman and Hall, New York, 1997, ch. 1.
16. St. Jeor ST, Ed, Obesity Assessment: Tools, Methods, Interpretations, Chapman and Hall, New
York, 1997.
17. Dodds MP, Silverstein LJ. In Obesity Assessment: Tools, Methods, Interpretations, St Jeor ST, Ed,
Chapman and Hall, New York, 1997, ch. 17.
18. Benedict JA, Block G. In Obesity Assessment: Tools, Methods, Interpretations, St Jeor ST, Ed,
Chapman and Hall, New York, 1997, ch. 19.
19. Scott BJ, Reeves RB. In Obesity Assessment: Tools, Methods, Interpretations, St Jeor ST, Ed, Chap-
man and Hall, New York, 1997, ch. 18.
20. Silverstein LJ, Scott BJ, St Jeor ST. In Obesity Assessment: Tools, Methods, Interpretations, St Jeor
ST, Ed, Chapman and Hall, New York, 1997, ch. 22.
21. Colditz GA. JAMWA 50: 40; 1995.
22. Colditz GA, Coakley E. Int. J. Sports Med 18: S162; 1997.
23. Hu FB, et al. Am J Clin Nutr 70: 1001; 1999.
24. Liu S, et al. Am J Clin Nutr 71: 1455; 2000.
25. Michels KB, et al. J Natl Cancer Inst 92: 1740; 2000.
26. Rimm EB, et al. The Lancet 338: 464; 1991.
27. Van Dam RM, et al. Am J Clin Nutr 71: 135; 2000.
28. Giovannucci E, et al. J Natl Cancer Inst 85: 1571; 1993.
29. Platz EA, et al. Cancer Causes Control 11: 579; 2000.
30. Giovannucci E, et al. Cancer Res 58: 442; 1998.
2705_frame_C18 Page 463 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:22 PM
18
Nutrition Monitoring and Research Studies: Nutrition
Screening Initiative
Ronni Chernoff
0-8493-2705-9/01/$0.00+$1.50
© 2002 by CRC Press LLC 463
2705_frame_C18 Page 464 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:22 PM
Developing a Tool
Keeping these criteria in mind, and looking for a way to make both professional and
volunteer care providers more attentive to the malnutrition risks encountered by older
adults, the Nutrition Screening Initiative (NSI) was established in 1990 as a public aware-
ness tool for use by community and health care workers who have regular contact with
older adults. The tools were developed as a joint venture of the American Dietetic Asso-
ciation, the American Academy of Family Physicians, and the National Council on the
Aging. The premise of the Nutrition Screening Initiative is that if factors associated with
malnutrition risk are identified early, interventions can be instituted that may delay or
avoid the progression of the risk factors towards overt malnutrition.10
The NSI was developed as a nested set of tools that identify risk factors for poor
nutritional status and then diagnose malnutrition. There are three tiers: a checklist, level
II, and level III screens.11 The items on the tools were developed by reviewing the
literature and developing consensus by a technical advisory committee of experts. The
checklist was tested using a follow-up sample from a previous study of nutritional status
in older people.12
The Checklist
The checklist was created as a public awareness screening tool for use by health care and
social services personnel and other providers who work in community-based programs
in which older adults participate. It was conceived and designed to bring awareness to
nutritional issues that may impact on the health status of elderly clients. The checklist is
widely available for reproduction and information collection, and permission to use it in
non-profit settings is not required.11
The checklist was titled “Determine Your Nutritional Health” based on a mnemonic that
contains the risk factors for malnutrition listed on the reverse side of the checklist. (Figures
18.1a and b). The checklist is a one-page questionnaire that can be used in community, long
term care, or acute health settings by volunteers, health aides, or health professionals. The
objective of awareness of potential nutritional problems in older people was easily achieved;
those who have been critical have built their criticisms on the basis of assumptions that
have gone farther than the original intent of the tool or the NSI campaign.13
The items on the checklist were developed using reference literature, expert opinion,
existing databases, and pilot testing.12 Using biochemical or laboratory parameters to
define nutritional status may be misleading because the most commonly used measures,
such as serum proteins, are affected by so many different factors independent of diet or
nutritional status.9
Implementation Strategies
Screening can be conducted in many settings, and by health professionals as well as health
care workers or lay volunteers. Involving interested participants (nurses, aides, admission
clerks, etc.) will increase the likelihood that data collection (weights, heights, completion
of screening instruments) will be more complete.
Modifications that allow the screening tools to be used in different settings and for
unique purposes make this approach and this instrument user friendly, applicable, and
relevant. A tool that is flexible, valid, and reliable and allows different applications in
diverse settings is very valuable. The easier and less time consuming it is to collect data
that give insights into an individual’s nutrition and health status, the more valuable the
2705_frame_C18 Page 465 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:22 PM
YES
I have an illness or condition that made me change the kind and/or amount of food I eat. 2
Without wanting to, I have lost or gained 10 pounds in the last 6 months. 2
TOTAL
Total Your Nutritional Score. If it's - These materials developed and distributed by
the Nutrition Screening Initiative, a project of:
FIGURE 18.1
Determine your nutritional health.
2705_frame_C18 Page 466 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:22 PM
EATING POORLY
Eating too little and eating too much both lead to poor health. Eating the same foods day after day or not
eating fruit, vegetables, and milk products daily will also cause poor nutritional health. One in five adults
skips meals daily. Only 13% of adults eat the minimum amount of fruit and vegetables needed. One in four
older adults drinks too much alcohol. Many health problems become worse if you drink more than one or
two alcoholic beverages per day.
ECONOMIC HARDSHIP
As many as 40% of older Americans have incomes of less that $6000 per year. Having less - or choosing to
spend less - than $25 to 30 per week for food makes it very hard to get the foods you need to stay healthy.
MULTIPLE MEDICINES
Many older Americans must take medicines for health problems. Almost half of older Americans take multi-
ple medicines daily. Growing old may change the way we respond to drugs. The more medicines you take,
the greater the chance for side effects such as increased or decreased appetite, change in taste, constipation,
weakness, drowsiness, diarrhea, nausea, and others. Vitamins or minerals when taken in large doses act like
drugs and can cause harm. Alert your doctor to everything you take.
The Nutrition Screening Initiative, 1010 Wisconsin Avenue, NW, Suite 800, Washington, D.C. 20007
The Nutrition Screening Initiative is funded in part by a grant from Ross Laboratories, a division of Abbott Laboratories.
FIGURE 18.1
Determine your nutritional health. (Continued.)
information. One example is the slight modifications made to the Nutrition Screening
Initiative Checklist for use in a dental office14,15 (Figure 18.2). Dental professionals are in
a unique position to monitor their patients’ nutritional status since many of the conse-
quences of poor nutrition manifest themselves in the oral cavity (bleeding or swollen
gums; pain in mouth, teeth, gums; angular cheilosis; alterations in the surface of the
tongue). Additionally, oral health problems may contribute to the development of inade-
quate nutritional status due to lesions, loose or missing teeth, poorly fitting dentures, dry
mouth, tooth decay or disease, and difficulty in chewing or swallowing.
2705_frame_C18 Page 467 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:22 PM
The warning signs of poor nutritional health are often overlooked. A checklist can help determine
if someone is a nutritional risk:
Read the statements below. Circle the number in the yes column for those that apply to you. For each yes answer,
score the number in the box. Total your nutritional score.
YES
An illness or condition makes me change the kind and/or amount of food I eat. 2
I avoid eating a food group, i.e., meat, dairy, vegetables, and/or fruit. 2
I have two or more drinks of beer, liquor, or wine almost every day 2
I have tooth pain or mouth sores that make it hard to eat or make me avoid certain foods. 2
I snack or drink sweetened beverages two or more times per day between meals. 2
I have a dry mouth, which makes me drink or use gum, hard candy, cough drops, or mints to moisten 1
my mouth two or more times per day.
Without wanting to, I have lost or gained 10 pounds in the last six months. 2
TOTAL
FIGURE 18.2
Determine your nutritional health checklist, modified for use in a dental office.
The checklist can also be modified for use in specialized community or clinical settings.
One example is use in a rural community setting as reported by Jensen et al.16 They found
that the checklist items indicating poor appetite, eating problems, low income, eating
alone, and depression were associated with functional limitation.
Implementation Partners
Nurses are essential partners and participants in nutrition screening. They are the best
individuals to gather anthropometric data and health history information. They are well-
positioned to evaluate individuals’ functional status by assessing ability to engage in
activities of daily living (self care) and instrumental activities of daily living (managing
independence). Clinical nurse specialists (CNS) are uniquely positioned to conduct health
and nutrition screenings in clinic settings, particularly to identify risk factors that are
modifiable before nutritional status begins a slippery slope downward. The advantage of
implementing health promotion programs before or concurrently with the emergence of
risk-associated conditions should be apparent.17
Other health practitioners (dentists, social workers, physical therapists, speech pathol-
ogists, etc.) may also use the screening tool for clients who may have risk factors for the
2705_frame_C18 Page 468 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:22 PM
development of malnutrition. Community workers who run senior centers, senior meal
programs, home health agencies, etc. can also use the checklist to help identify clients
who may require more attention to their dietary intake, social circumstance, and chronic
disease management.
(Select appropriate category with a checkmark, or enter numerical value where indicated by “#.”)
A. History
1. Weight change
Overall loss in past 6 months: amount = # ____________ kg; % loss = # ____________
Change in past 2 weeks: ____________ increase
____________ no change
____________ decrease
2. Dietary intake change (relative to normal)
____________ No change
____________ Change Duration = # ____________ weeks
Type: ____________ suboptimal solid diet ____________ full liquid diet
____________ hypocaloric liquids ____________ anorexia
3. Gastrointestinal symptoms (that persisted for >2 weeks)
__________ none __________ nausea __________ vomiting __________ diarrhea __________ anorexia
4. Functional capacity
____________ No dysfunction (e.g., full capacity)
____________ Dysfunction Duration = # ____________ weeks
Type: ____________ working suboptimally
____________ ambulatory
____________ bedridden
5. Disease and its relation to nutritional requirements __________________________________________
Primary diagnosis (specify) ____________
Metabolic demand (stress): ____________ no stress ____________ low stress
____________ moderate stress ____________ high stress
B. Physical (for each trait specify: 0 = normal, 1+ = mild, 2+ = moderate, 3+ = severe)
# ____________ loss of subcutaneous fat (triceps, chest)
# ____________ muscle wasting (quadriceps, deltoids)
# ____________ ankle edema
# ____________ sacral edema
# ____________ ascites
C. SGA rating (select one)
____________ A = Well nourished
____________ B = Moderately (or suspected of being) malnourished
____________ C = Severely malnourished
FIGURE 18.3
Features of Subjective Global Assessment (SGA).
2705_frame_C18 Page 469 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:22 PM
ent muscle wasting.8,18 This tool has been successfully adopted and used by physicians
and nurses in clinical settings. It has been tested in the clinical setting with different
assessors, with a high degree of interrater reliability (0.91).19,20 Most of validity reports of
the SGA were conducted on hospitalized subjects with mean ages of 50 years or older,
which may contribute to some questions about its general applicability. However, the
addition of laboratory values to the SGA did not improve its validity.19
Although the SGA is a short tool that can be used successfully by health practitioners,
there are limitations to its use as a screening tool. It requires a trained clinician to admin-
ister, since there is some clinical judgment involved that would not be expected in someone
who is not a health professional. It requires that the individual being assessed is undressed
and able to be turned, which does not lend itself to community-based assessment pro-
grams. Also, its validation has been demonstrated on middle-aged, rather than elderly,
subjects.8
• Be a reliable instrument
• Define thresholds
• Be used with minimal training
• Be free of rater bias
• Be minimally intrusive to patients
• Be inexpensive
The tool was designed to collect 18 items that combine objective and subjective data. These
data include simple anthropometric measures (height, weight, arm and calf circumfer-
ences, and weight loss), general geriatric assessment items, a brief general dietary assess-
ment, and self-assessment of health and nutrition perception (Figure 18.4).
This tool has been validated in several studies by comparing the scores to the judgments
of trained nutrition clinicians and to a comprehensive nutritional assessment that collected
in-depth data about the nutritional status of the subjects.22 These studies found that the
threshold for well-nourished on this instrument with a 30-point scale was 22 to 24 points;
the threshold for malnutrition was 16 to 18 points on this scale.
The MNA meets its objectives of being a practical, non-invasive tool that contributes to
the rapid evaluation of an elderly subject’s nutritional status, contributing early interven-
tion to correct nutritional deficits. This tool is easily used in a variety of settings including
hospitals, nursing homes, physician offices, or clinics.
2705_frame_C18 Page 470 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:22 PM
Complete the form by writing the numbers in the boxes. Add the numbers in the boxes and compare the total assessment to the
Malnutrition Indicator Score.
ANTHROPOMETRIC ASSESSMENT
1. Body Mass Index (BMI) (weight in kg) / (height in m)2 Points 12. Selected consumption markers for protein intake Points
a. BMI < 19 = 0 points . At least one serving of dairy products (milk,
b. BMI 19 to < 21 = 1 points cheese, yogurt) per day? yes no
c. BMI 21 to < 23 = 2 points
d. BMI >
_ 23 = 3 points
. Two or more servings of legumes or eggs per week?
yes no
2. Mid-arm circumference (MAC) in cm . Meat, fish, or poultry every day? yes no
a. MAC < 21 = 0.0 points a. if 0 or 1 yes = 0.0 points
b. MAC 21 <_ 22 = 0.5 points b. if 2 yes = 0.5 points
c. MAC > 22 = 1.0 points c. if 3 yes = 1.0 points
3. Calf circumference (CC) in cm 13. Consumes two or more servings of fruits or
a.CC < 31 = 0 points b. CC >
_ 31 = 1 point vegetables per day?
a. no = 0 points b. yes = 1 point
4. Weight loss during last 3 months
a. weight loss greater than 3kg (6.6 lbs) = 0 points 14. Has food intake declined over the past three
b. does not know = 1 point months due to loss of appetite, digestive problems,
c. weight loss between 1and 3 kg chewing or swallowing difficulties?
(2.2 and 6.6 lbs) = 2 points a. severe loss of appetite = 0 points
d. no weight loss = 3 points b. moderate loss of appetite = 1 point
c. no loss of appetite = 2 points
GENERAL ASSESSMENT
15. How much fluid (water, juice, coffee, tea, milk,...)
5. Lives independently (not in a nursing home or hospital)
is consumed per day? (1 cup = 8 oz.)
a. no = 0 points b. yes = 1 point
a. less than 3 cups = 0.0 points
6. Takes more than 3 prescription drugs per day b. 3 to 5 cups = 0.5 points
a. yes = 0 points b. no = 1 point c. more than 5 cups = 1.0 points
FIGURE 18.4
The Mini Nutritional Assessment form.
2705_frame_C18 Page 471 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:22 PM
Anthropometric Measures
Anthropometric measures, including height, weight, and skinfold measures, are usually
important components of a nutritional assessment. These parameters are the ones most
affected by the aging process.24 The most apparent age-related change occurs in height.
Height decreases as people get older due to changes in skeletal integrity, most noticeably
affecting the spinal column. Loss of height may be due to thinning of the vertebrae,
compression of the vertebral discs, development of kyphosis, and the effects of osteoma-
lacia and osteoporosis.25 Loss of height occurs in both males and females, although it may
happen more rapidly to elderly women with osteoporosis. Therefore, stature changes and
body appearance may be altered and, as older people lose their ability to stand erect, the
organs in the thoracic cavity will become displaced and breathing and gastrointestinal
problems may ensue.26,27
Height is difficult to measure in individuals who are unable to stand erect, cannot stand
unaided, cannot stand at all due to neuromuscular disorders, paralysis, or loss of lower
limbs, or are bedbound due to other medical problems. One estimate of stature in these
individuals is to measure their recumbent height or the bone lengths of extremities.23,28
This estimate of stature may not be very reliable, but it provides some estimate of height
to help determine whether body weight is appropriate for height.
Weight is another important anthropometric measure that is altered with advancing age.
Weight changes occur at different rates among elderly people. Use of most standard height
and weight tables is not valid in older people since most reference tables do not include
elderly people in their subject pool, and most are not age-adjusted.
Body mass index (BMI) is a commonly-used measure to evaluate relative weight for
height using a mathematical ratio of weight (in kilograms) divided by height (in square
meters).
Wt (Kg)/Ht (M)2
This formula yields a whole number that should be greater than 21 and less than
approximately 35.10 Nomograms and tables are available that minimize the need for
calculation. There is some controversy among experts regarding the range of acceptable
BMI measures in elderly people.4,29
Skinfold measurements (triceps, biceps, subscapular, suprailiac, thigh) are often
included in a thorough nutritional assessment. However, loss of muscle mass, shifts in
body fat compartments, changes in skin compressibility and elasticity, and lack of
age-adjusted references serve to decrease the reliability of skinfold measures in the assess-
ment of nutritional status in elderly people.30
2705_frame_C18 Page 472 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:22 PM
Biochemical Measures
Biochemical assessment parameters are also affected by advancing age.23 Laboratory mea-
sures may reflect an age-related decline in renal function, fluid imbalances or hydration
status, or the effects of long-term chronic illnesses. Among the commonly used biochemical
markers of nutritional status, serum transferrin is one that is markedly affected by advanc-
ing age. Since tissue iron stores increase with age, circulating serum transferrin levels are
reduced. A lower than normal serum transferrin should be evaluated in relation to other
biochemical measures and serum iron levels, if obtainable.31
The most reliable predictor of nutritional status in elderly people is serum albumin. A
serum albumin below 4.0 g/dl (depending on local laboratory normal ranges) is not usual
in an older person unless the subject is overhydrated, has cancer, renal or hepatic disease,
or is taking medications that may interfere with hepatic function. Recent evidence suggests
that serum albumin is a prognostic indicator of potential infectious complications and
other nosocomial problems in hospitalized, frail, or dependent elderly individuals.32 A
depressed serum albumin seems to be a primary prognostic indicator of rehospitalization,
extended lengths of stay, and other complications associated with protein energy malnu-
trition in elderly people.33,34 Unless there are medical reasons, most biochemical measures
should remain within normal limits.
Serum cholesterol has been considered in the risk for coronary heart disease, but a
depressed serum cholesterol is also associated with poor health status in older people.35
It may be predictive of impending mortality36 and should be evaluated carefully within
the context of other health measures.
Immunologic Assessment
Tests for immunocompetence are often included as part of a nutritional assessment because
malnutrition results in compromised host-defense mechanisms. However, the incidence
of anergy is reported to increase with advanced age, and the response to skin test antigens
appears to peak after longer intervals in older people.37 The value of these tests is limited
in elderly people.
Socioeconomic Status
Social history, economic status, drug history, oral health condition, family and living
situations, and alcohol use should be evaluated along with the physical and physiologic
measures usually assessed.23 It is also useful to assess elderly individuals using instru-
ments that evaluate how well they perform activities of daily living. Available tools assess
the capability of an individual in managing the activities necessary for independence;
these tools add another valuable dimension to the assessment of elderly people.38,39 (See
Tables 18.1 and 18.2.)
Summary
Nutrition monitoring, screening, and assessment in the older adult population pose chal-
lenges to health care professionals due to the heterogeneity of this group. It has been said
that the older we become, the more unique we are. The difficulty in using the tools
2705_frame_C18 Page 473 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:22 PM
TABLE 18.1
Activities of Daily Living
Toileting
Feeding
Dressing
Grooming
Ambulation
Totally independent
Ambulates in limited geographical area
Ambulates with assistance (cane, wheelchair, walker, railing)
Sits unsupported in chair or wheelchair but needs help with motion
Bedridden
Bathing
Bathes independently
Bathes self with help getting into bath or shower
Washes hands and face but needs help with bathing
Can be bathed with cooperation
Does not bathe and is combative with those trying to help
Adapted from M.P. Lawton, The functional assessment of elderly
people, Journal of the American Geriatrics Society 19: 4465, 1971.
2705_frame_C18 Page 474 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:22 PM
TABLE 18.2
Instrumental Activities of Daily Living
Ability to use telephone
Shopping
Food preparation
Housekeeping
Laundry
Mode of transportation
Responsibility for own medications
Ability to handle finances
Adapted from M.P. Lawton, The functional
assessment of elderly people, Journal of the
American Geriatrics Society 19: 4465, 1971.
discussed here is that people age at different rates and in different ways related to their
health status, their lifestyle, and their genetic inheritance. Although a variety of reasonable
approaches to nutrition assessment and monitoring in the older population exist, it is wise
for the clinician to understand that the definitive tool or definition of malnutrition in older
people has yet to be reported and that there are vast opportunities for research in this area.
References
1. Bienia R, Ratcliff S, Barbour GL, et al. J Am Geriatr Soc 30: 433; 1982.
2. Herrmann FR, Safran C, Levkoff SE, et al. Arch Int Med 152: 125; 1992.
3. Harris T, Cook EF, Garrison R, et al. JAMA 259: 1520; 1988.
4. Galanos AN, Pieper CF, Cornoni-Hunt JC, et al. J Am Geriatr Soc 42: 368; 1994.
5. Epstein AM, Read JL, Hoefer M. Am J Pub Health 77: 993; 1987.
6. MacLellan DL, Van Til LD. Can J Pub Health 89: 342; 1998.
7. Millen B, Levine EL. In: Geriatric Nutrition: A Health Professional’s Handbook, (Chernoff R, Ed).
Gaithersburg, MD: Aspen Publishers, 1999.
8. Reuben DB, Greendale GA, Harrison GG. J Am Geriatr Soc 43: 415; 1995.
9. Rush D. Ann Rev Nutrition 17: 101; 1997.
10. Lipschitz DA, Ham RJ, White JV. Am Fam Phys 45: 601; 1992.
11. Wellman, NS. Nutrition Today (II), 44S; 1994.
12. Posner BM, Jette AM, Smith KW, Miller DR. Am J Pub Health 83: 972; 1993.
13. Rush D. Am J Pub Health 83: 944; 1993.
14. Boyd LD, Dwyer JT. J Dental Hyg 72: 31; 1998.
15. Saunders MJ. Special Care in Dentistry 15: 26; 1995.
16. Jensen GL, Kita K, Fish J, et al. Am J Clin Nutr 66: 819; 1997.
17. Curl PE, Warren JJ. Clin Nurse Spec 11: 153; 1997.
18. Detsky AS, McLaughlin JR, Baker JP, et al. J Parent Enteral Nutr 11: 8; 1987.
19. Detsky AS, Baker JP, Mendelson RA, et al. J Parent Enteral Nutr 8: 153; 1984.
20. Baker JP, Detsky AS, Wesson D, et al. N Engl J Med 306: 969; 1982.
21. Guigoz Y, Vellas B, Garry PJ. Nutr Rev 54: S59; 1996.
22. Guigoz Y, Vellas B, Garry PJ. Facts Res Gerontol 4: 15; 1994.
23. Mitchell CO, Chernoff R. In: Geriatric Nutrition: The Health Professional’s Handbook, 2nd ed.
(Chernoff R, Ed). Gaithersburg MD, Aspen Publishers, 1999.
24. Mitchell CO, Lipschitz DA. Am J Clin Nutr 35: 398; 1982.
25. Chumlea WC, Garry PJ, Hunt WC, et al. Hum Biol 60: 918; 1988.
26. Silverberg SJ, Lindsay R. Med Clin N Am 71: 41; 1987.
27. Heaney RP. In: Nutrition in Women’s Health (Krummel DA, Kris-Etherton PM, Eds) Gaithers-
burg MD, Aspen Publishers, 1996.
2705_frame_C18 Page 475 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:22 PM
28. Martin AD, Carter JEL, Hendy KC, et al. In: Anthropometric Standardization Reference Manual
(Lohman TG, Roche AF, Martorell R, Eds) Champaign IL, Human Kinetics Publishers, 1988.
29. Nutrition Interventions Manual for Professionals Caring for Older Adults. Washington DC,
Nutrition Screening Initiative, 1992.
30. Chumlea WC, Guo SS, Glasser RM, et al. Nutrition, Health and Aging 1: 7; 1997.
31. Fleming DJ, Jacques PF, Dallal GE, et al. Am J Clin Nutr 67: 722; 1998.
32. Finucane P, Rudra T, Hsu R, et al. Gerontology 34: 304; 1988.
33. Ferguson RP, O’Connor P, Crabtree B, et al. J Am Geriatr Soc 41: 545; 1993.
34. Sullivan DH, Walls RC, Lipschitz DA, Am J Clin Nutr 53: 599; 1991.
35. Wilson PWF, Anderson KM, Harris T, et al. J Gerontol Med Sci 49: M252; 1994.
36. Rudman D, Mattson DE, Nagraj HS, et al. J Parent Enteral Nutr 12: 155; 1988.
37. Cohn JR, Buckley CE, Hohl CA, et al. J Am Geriatr Soc 31: 261; 1983.
38. Katz S. J Am Geriatr Soc 31: 721; 1983.
39. Spector WD. In: Quality of Life Assessments in Clinical Trials (Spilker B, Ed) New York, Raven
Press, 1990.
2705_frame_C18 Page 476 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:22 PM
2705_frame_C19 Page 477 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:23 PM
19
Dietary Intake Assessment: Methods for Adults
Introduction
There has been longstanding interest in assessing diets of individuals.1,2 Early in the 20th
century, nutritionists studied food and nutrient intakes in order to provide guidance in
food selection,3,4 to interpret clinical and laboratory findings,5 and to establish dietary
requirements.6,7 Interest in dietary assessment was stimulated in the latter part of the
century with the increasing evidence for the role of diet in promoting health and reducing
chronic disease risk.8-11
Early investigators were concerned with many of the issues that continue to be important
for dietary assessment:
The following statement appears in the National Research Council’s report on diet and
chronic disease: “One of the most difficult tasks in nutrition research is documenting the
actual or habitual food and nutrient intake of individuals or groups.”8 We should not be
surprised that obtaining information about what individuals consume and analyzing for
dietary components is a challenging undertaking. Food intake can be a complex behav-
ior.22 In any day, an individual may consume many different foods, at several eating
occasions, both at home and away from home. Willingness and ability to report what is
consumed can be influenced by social and environmental events and cognitive abili-
ties.23-25 Furthermore, food composition databases must continuously be updated to reflect
an expanding food marketplace and an increasing number of dietary components asso-
ciated with health.26
This section is organized to review the methods most commonly used to assess intakes
by individuals. Attention is given to methodologic validity as well as to the current
emphasis on food pattern analysis, dietary supplements, and functional foods.
0-8493-2705-9/01/$0.00+$1.50
© 2002 by CRC Press LLC 477
2705_frame_C19 Page 478 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:23 PM
Food Record
Food records, also known as food diaries, provide a prospective account of foods and
beverages consumed in a defined period of time. Generally, records are kept for brief time
periods (one to seven days),28 but they have been kept for up to a month35 and even a
year.36 To be representative of usual intake, multiple days of records are needed.27,37
Food records may be used to meet a variety of objectives. Records are useful for detecting
imbalances in food intake and making dietary change recommendations.38 They are used as
self-management tools in weight loss interventions and may be valuable in predicting suc-
cessful weight loss.39 Food records have been used extensively to calibrate other dietary
assessment methods.40-45 Records are also useful for documenting compliance of an individ-
ual’s food intake with a feeding protocol in studies where adherence to a specific diet regimen
is important.46 Intervention studies may use food records to document effectiveness.47-49
Food portions may be either weighed or estimated depending on the subjects and the
purpose(s) of the assessment.50 While weighing foods will increase the accuracy of the
portion size recorded, it can also increase respondent burden. Sophisticated scales that do
not disclose food weights are available, decreasing respondent recording burden51 but
increasing cost. A variety of portion size aids, listed in Table 19.1, are available when
portion sizes are to be estimated.
While records are usually kept by respondents, they may also be kept by observers.
When food intake is recorded by observation, trained personnel visually estimate dietary
intake.52,53 Observation is particularly useful when circumstances preclude self-reporting
of food intake. Thus, observation has been used in assessing intake of nursing home
residents. The Omnibus Budget Reconciliation Act54 requires that all Medicare and Med-
icaid certified nursing facilities implement a standardized comprehensive assessment,
including a measure of nutrient intake, for all residents. Observers visually estimate the
portion of served items consumed (i.e., from all to none) by a resident.55
When using food records, consideration should be given to the record forms to be used
as well as instructions and training for subjects, particularly regarding portion size. Instruc-
tions should include guidance on completing the record form as well as directives encour-
aging subjects to record foods at the time of consumption and not to alter normal eating
patterns. Table 19.2 provides sample instructions for the administration of a food record.
2705_frame_C19 Page 479 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:23 PM
TABLE 19.1
Tools for Portion Size Estimation
Type Examples
Household measures Measuring cups and spoons161
Rulers161
Food models Food replicas165
Graduated food models166
Thickness sticks161
Pictures 2-Dimensional portion shape drawings124,161
Portion photos of popular foods167
Portion drawings of popular foods161
Food labels Nutrition facts label
Food package weights
TABLE 19.2
Sample Instructions for the Administration of a Food Record
To help us do the best analysis of your food intake, please follow these instructions.
Maintain Your Usual Eating Pattern. Try not to modify your food intake because you are keeping a record.
Record Everything You Eat or Drink. Be sure to include all snacks and drinks. Also include any vitamin or
mineral supplements and the dosage for each day.
Write Foods Down As Soon As You Eat Them. Three daily record pages are provided for each day; however,
you may not need to use all three. Try to write clearly.
After records have been completed, they should be reviewed to ensure completion. If
reviewed with the subject, probing questions may be used to clear up ambiguities and
ensure the completeness of the record. This is termed interviewer-assisted food records.
When data from food records are compiled and analyzed, records will need to be coded
using a standard method.
As subject burden can be high for food records, participant willingness and abilities are
considerations when using this method. Literacy is required for completion of records;
therefore, the method may not be appropriate for all individuals. The act of keeping food
records can affect dietary intake,56,57 which may be critical for estimates of usual intake.
Cost is an additional consideration, as reviewing records for completeness, data entry, and
data analysis can be expensive.31
Recall
Dietary recall provides a retrospective record of intake over a defined time period. While
dietary recall may be for any length of time, this method is almost always administered
2705_frame_C19 Page 480 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:23 PM
to cover a 24-hour time period and is generally termed the 24-hour recall.30 Data can be
collected either for the previous day or for the 24 hours preceding the interview. To
estimate the usual intake of individuals, multiple recalls are needed, preferably on random,
nonconsecutive days.36,58 Typically, an individual is asked to recall all foods eaten during
the reference time period, describe the foods, and estimate the quantities consumed.
The 24-hour recall has become a favored way of collecting dietary data,33,47,59 as recalls
can be administered easily and quickly with low respondent burden. Depending on the
objectives of the recall, the amount and depth of information collected will vary. This
method is becoming the gold standard, particularly as methodological improvements60-62
and technological capabilities63,64 increase validity. With the emergence of technological
aids in dietary assessment, it is becoming more common for interviewers to collect intake
data using interactive software, entering intake data directly into a computer as it is
collected.
Recalls may be obtained either in person or by telephone-administered interview.
Because recalls by telephone interview have been shown to be practical, valid, and cost-
effective,63-68 they are becoming an increasingly popular mode of data collection, especially
for research purposes.
Prior to conducting recalls, training of interviewers is important. This is particularly
relevant when more quantitative data are required, increasing the need to use multiple
pass and probing techniques. Figure 19.1 provides a sample probing sequence to elicit
detailed information regarding one specific food (i.e., macaroni and cheese). The complex-
ity of this probing sequence exemplifies the potentially complex nature of probing ques-
tions and the need for good interviewer training. More qualitative food intake data can
be achieved with more limited questions.
The 24-hour recall has been criticized because of accuracy related to portion size esti-
mation and subject memory. Portion size estimation aids are available to facilitate quantity
estimation (Table 19.1). While 24-hour recalls are not designed to affect the “encoding” of
food information, they can incorporate strategies to facilitate memory retrieval. Those
strategies include standardized data collection protocols, structured probes to ensure
standardized collection, and interactive interview systems.29,47 The multiple pass tech-
nique, which will be discussed later in this section, has also been designed to facilitate
memory retrieval.
Plain
With egg
With frankfurters
How was it prepared?
Canned or frozen
Prepared from a mix
Prepared from a recipe
FIGURE 19.1
A sample probing scheme. This scheme could be used with recalls to elicit more information from a respondent
who consumed macaroni and cheese. Bold print indicates respondent’s reply. Probing questions, which are
specific for each response, are italicized. (Adapted from Nutrition Data System for Research [NDS-R] software,
developed by the Nutrition Coordinating Center [NCC], University of Minnesota, Minneapolis, MN.)
2705_frame_C19 Page 482 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:23 PM
nostic information on nutrition status.75,76 Very abbreviated instruments may not be valid
representations of true intake.77
Creating a food frequency questionnaire is an intensive process,78 thus, there is heavy
reliance on instruments that have already been developed. Validity is a critical issue and
is generally determined by calibration with other assessment methods.73,79-84 When using
an FFQ, it is important to ensure that the questionnaire is valid for use in the population
of interest, as the performance of an instrument may vary between subgroups. Question-
naires have been validated in specific populations such as adolescents,85 pregnant
women,42 and low-income black women.86
Several cognitive issues could compromise the validity of an FFQ. Subjects may have
difficulty recalling foods consumed over a lengthy time period. Additionally, participants
may need to perform arithmetic computations to average usual consumption of foods to
fit into the response categories for consumption frequency. The cognitive demands of the
FFQ may be reduced by a new variation in questionnaire administration, termed the
picture sort approach, in which participants sort food cards into categories.87,88
While FFQs generally provide qualitative data, if portion size estimation is included on
the questionnaire, semi-quantitative information can be deduced from these instruments.
In some cases, inclusion of portion size may yield only small differences in data as
compared to FFQs analyzed using only medium portions.89
Diet History
Food frequency questionnaires are sometimes referred to as diet histories. The classic diet
history method was designed to estimate an individual’s usual intake over a relatively
long period of time. Originally developed by Burke,90 the method consists of several
components, including a 24-hour recall and questions about usual eating patterns, a cross-
check questionnaire with a list of foods and questions about likes, dislikes, and usages,
and a three-day food record. This method is not used commonly today. Administration
requires a highly trained dietitian and can be time consuming.
Summary
Several methods have been listed which can be used to assess the usual dietary intake of
adults. Well-designed quality control procedures are particularly important in research
studies to ensure consistency of data across time and subjects.33 Additionally, the advan-
tages and disadvantages of data collection modes (i.e., self- or interviewer-completed)
should be considered (See Table 19.3). The success of any assessment method is based
upon a partnership between the individual respondent and the assessment staff. Care
should be taken to ensure the appropriateness of the method and the level of detail
collected. Respecting participants’ abilities and ensuring that their dignity is not compro-
mised is salient in establishing a successful partnership.
TABLE 19.3
Self-Completed and Interviewer-Completed Data Collection
Collection Mode Advantages Disadvantages
Self Interviewer training not needed Response rate may be low
Sense of privacy Respondent burden may be high
Data collection time may be reduced Tasks may be misinterpreted
Respondent training needed for more
complete data
Data preparation and entry time may
be high
Interviewer by phone Good Response rate Contact times may be inconvenient
Opportunities for probing Hearing problems for some subjects
Low respondent burden Availability of portion aids
Relatively quick Data collection may be more
Interviewer anonymity expensive for toll calls
Potential for interviewer bias
Interviewer in person Good response rate Contact times may be inconvenient
Opportunities for probing Potential for interviewer bias
Low respondent burden
Respondent interviewer rapport
in dietary data…this is understandable, but unfortunate because it can easily leave the
impression that dietary data are worthless.”91 He reminded his audience that, while dietary
intake data cannot and never will be estimated without error, a serious limitation is not
the errors themselves, but failure to understand the nature of the errors and the consequent
impact on data analysis and interpretation. Several recent reviews have delineated poten-
tial sources of error for different assessment methods.28,31,51 Consideration of strategies to
minimize error is pertinent in yielding accurate intake data, regardless of assessment
method (see Table 19.4).
Recent attention to the accuracy of dietary intake data has focused on the underreport-
ing of energy by 10 to almost 40%.59,92-97 These findings are based on an extensive literature
comparing intakes to energy needs estimated using doubly-labeled water,98 weight main-
tenance data,59 and applying age- and sex-specific equations to estimate energy require-
ments.99 Underreporting has been found to be more common among women99-101 and
older persons99,100,102 as well as overweight,99-101 post-obese,92 and weight-conscious indi-
viduals.99,100 Literacy103 and depression104 have been associated with underreporting. Selec-
tive underreporting has also been associated with certain food types such as fats95,99,105
and sweets.105
While underreporting of energy is common in groups of individuals,59,94,95,99,100,106-108 both
underreporting and overreporting can occur.44,59,100 Individuals who possess characteristics
TABLE 19.4
Benefits Derived from Minimizing Assessment Error
Clinical Setting Research Setting
Improve ability to detect inadequate, imbalanced, or Improve accuracy of nutrient intake estimations
excessive dietary intake
Provide a better basis for nutrition counseling and Decrease attenuation between intake data and
interventions biomarkers
Improve ability to monitor dietary changes Provide a better basis for nutrition education program
Provide a better basis for elucidation of diet-disease
relationships
2705_frame_C19 Page 484 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:23 PM
associated with underreporting may actually report intake accurately or overreport intake.
However, the magnitude of underreporting may be even greater for individuals as error
due to overestimation can reduce underestimation bias in groups.102
Due to the complex nature of intake data and the variability of under and over reporting,
it is unlikely that a single correction factor will be derived that could be applied to self-
reported energy intake.109 The purpose of this section is to review components of assess-
ment that may be modified to reduce sources of error.
Memory
Food recall is a cognitively demanding task. Understanding of dietary recall accuracy is
derived from advances in cognitive psychology.23 Classic work in this area described
memory processes: encoding or learning information, transmission to long-term memory,
and retrieval.110-112 Early studies described strategies for encoding information as well as
strategies for retrieving memories, such as free recall, recognition, and cued recall.
The memory model of cognitive psychology is applicable to dietary recall.25 To accurately
report intake, people must be able to remember what foods were consumed, how the
foods were prepared, and the quantities of foods eaten. This requires the acquisition of
specific food memories and the ability to retrieve these memories. Individuals who pay
little attention to foods consumed, people who have difficulty storing information in
memory, and those who lack the cognitive ability to retrieve food memories may not be
able to accurately recall dietary intake.
Several techniques have been developed to reduce memory-related error in dietary data.
For the 24-hour recall, techniques such as probing (See Figure 19.1),113 encoding strategies,25
memory retrieval cues,25 and a multiple pass system59,62 have been employed to improve
memory. Campbell and Dodd’s113 classic paper showed that probing elicited additional
information with significant impact on total caloric intake. Ervin and Smiciklas-Wright
found that older adults were able to remember more foods when a deeper processing
strategy was used during encoding and a recognition task was used for memory retrieval.25
Record-assisted recalls may be used to help reduce memory-related error in food
records.114,115
Recent work suggests that 24-hour recalls which incorporate a multiple pass technique
into a standardized interview protocol with structured probes can reduce the commonly
observed underestimation of intake for groups of individuals.62 A multiple pass technique
provides respondents several opportunities (i.e., passes) to recall foods eaten using both
free recall and cued (probed recall) strategies.59,62,116,117 As generally administered, the
strategy involves three recall passes: an introductory opening sequence in which a respon-
dent is asked to recall all items eaten, an interactive, structural probe sequence to elicit
food descriptions and amounts, and a final review of the recall. The multiple pass tech-
nique is theoretically sound,117 and when incorporated into a well-structured interactive
interview process may decrease underreporting for groups of individuals.59,62 While these
studies are encouraging for the presentation of group data, there is room for improvement
in assessing individuals’ intakes.59 Little data exists, however, on alternative modes of
administering a multiple pass strategy and the “gains” at each pass.
A multiple pass technique can be facilitated by the use of interactive software.118 This
allows for a greater level of detail and facilitates data collection, but the technology is
generally expensive and is not used commonly in clinical settings. However, written
tools, such as probing guides, may be used to mimic this process when quantitative
analysis is critical.
2705_frame_C19 Page 485 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:23 PM
Portion Sizes
It is well documented that individuals have difficulty estimating amounts of foods and
beverages.61,119-121 There is a tendency toward overestimation of smaller portion sizes and
underestimation of larger portion sizes which can lead to the “flat slope syndrome.”121,122
Portion size estimation aids (Table 19.1) have been shown to reduce portion size estimation
error.123 Estimation aids vary in sophistication and cost. Choice of tools is dictated partially
by feasibility. In a clinical setting, aids such as food replicas, real foods, and food picture
books may be appropriate. For interviews conducted by phone, tools that are compact for
mailing, such as a chart with two-dimensional portions,124 would be more appropriate.
A number of investigators have investigated whether training subjects to “judge” por-
tion sizes improves quantity estimates.61,125-130 These studies suggest that training effects
may be retained for some days after training and may have significant impact on some,
but not all foods. For example, amorphous foods (e.g., salads) are more resistant to training
effects.
Variability of Intake
Day-to-day variation of food intake has been well documented in the literature.36,131,132
Accordingly, assessment of an individual’s total dietary intake, particularly by quantitative
daily methods, at any one time may not yield an accurate measure of usual intake.36
Basiotis et al. found that over 100 days of dietary data may be needed to accurately estimate
an individual’s typical intake for certain nutrients, such as vitamin A.133 To lessen the effect
of day-to-day dietary variation when using 24-hour recalls, assessment should be done
on multiple, random, nonconsecutive days36,58,134 that include both weekend and week-
days. For food records and 24-hour recalls, increasing the number of assessment days will
decrease error related to variation in food intake; however, this must be balanced with
subject tolerability and assessment objectives.
Consumption Frequency
Accurate estimation of how often foods are consumed is particularly important for retro-
spective assessment methods. For food frequency questionnaires, frequency of consump-
tion estimates may contribute more error than portion size estimates.135 The cognitive
demands required to mathematically calculate consumption frequency contribute to the
error involved with this measure. It has been suggested that the precision of food frequency
questionnaires can be increased by not using predefined consumption frequency catego-
ries, such as three to four times per week, instead allowing participants to simply enter
a number to reflect intake.135 Ability to accurately recall the frequency of consumption of
foods deteriorates as the amount of time between intake and assessment increases, yet
longer reference time periods yield more accurate results than questionnaires with shorter
reference periods.136
Response Bias
All assessment methods are subject to response bias. Social desirability may lead some
individuals to selectively omit foods that may be regarded as unacceptable (e.g., alcohol,
high fat foods),23 while others may report eating a healthier diet than that which was
2705_frame_C19 Page 486 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:23 PM
Data Entry
Data entry is the link between the information provided by a respondent and analysis of
the data. Data entry often requires decisions by coders to adjust information provided to
meet the demands of a specific data analysis program.145 If the respondent provides
incomplete data or the database does not include all diet items, coders must decide on
reasonable substitutions for portion size or food items. Thus, the quality of the data
provided by respondents, the quality of the database, and the default assumptions by
coders can all contribute to variability in the final food and nutrient data descriptions.145
Decisions about amounts of foods eaten may be guided by U.S. Department of Agricul-
ture (USDA) publications on portions commonly consumed in the United States. The
USDA has published several reports on foods commonly eaten and the quantities con-
sumed at an eating occasion.146,147 These reports provide data on amounts eaten by par-
ticipants in nationwide food consumption surveys.
Summary
Dietary assessment is a dynamic field, with novel approaches being developed, such as
computer-assisted self-interviews.148 Various techniques to improve validity have been
developed (See Table 19.5), but much work still needs to be done to decrease both sys-
tematic and random errors. Refinement of current methods and the development of new
techniques will improve confidence in the accuracy of dietary data.
2705_frame_C19 Page 487 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:23 PM
TABLE 19.5
Considerations to Reduce Error when Collecting Assessment Data
Potential Food Frequency
Error Sources 24-Hour Recalls Food Records Questionnaire
Memory Multiple pass technique Interviewer assisted records Memory retrieval techniques
Probing questions Encouraging adherence to
Encoding strategies appropriate instructions
Portion size Portion size estimation aids Portion size estimation aids Portion size estimation aids
Subject training Weighing scale Subject training
Interviewer training Subject training
Day-to-day Multiple recall days Multiple days of records N/A
variability Nonconsecutive days of data Include weekdays &
Include weekdays & weekends
weekends Collect data in different
Collect data in different seasons
seasons
Response bias Interviewer training Objective instructions Objective responses for
Clearly worded, open-ended Reduce respondent burden interviewer mode
questions Limit days of data collection
Objective interviewer
responses
Recalls on unannounced,
random days
Data entry Documentation of decisions Strict coding and data entry Strict coding and data entry
Interactive software with rules rules
detailed probes and Interviewer assisted records Computer scannable forms
automatic coding Detailed probing guides and for automatic coding
instructions
Index score, created by the USDA, takes into account servings from the major food groups
of the Food Guide Pyramid as well as a dietary variety and health risk-related nutrient
intakes.154 This more comprehensive approach, as well as others that have been devel-
oped,155 is becoming an increasingly popular approach to interpretation of the dietary
intakes of groups or individuals. According to a recent article, identifying food patterns
in groups and in individuals might be a better determinant of risk for disease as well as
mortality.156 This is based on the premise that diets are not comprised of single nutrients
or foods but combinations of nutrients and nonnutrient components. The interactions of
all these dietary components make it difficult to determine the effects of single dietary
components. Additionally, dietary behaviors are complex and many different patterns of
intake may be occurring simultaneously, such as decreasing fat intake while increasing
fruits and vegetables.
Any method of assessing an individual’s dietary intake is dependent on the methods
of interpretation. More comprehensive methods of interpretation may facilitate the iden-
tification of more specific patterns of intake and their relationship to disease.
Dietary Supplements
Increased nutrient intakes from supplements have been related to certain disease risk such
as cardiovascular disease (vitamin E), neural tube defects (folate), osteoporosis (calcium),
and cancer (antioxidants such as vitamin C and beta-carotene). Approximately 40 to 50%
of the general population over the age of two years in the U.S. takes a dietary supplement
(see Table 19.6).157,158 These numbers continue to rise especially for more non-traditional
or complementary therapies such as herbal or botanical supplements. Supplement use is
higher in non-Hispanic white females, and increases with age in some segments of the
population.157,159 The supplement intake of special populations such as individuals with
cancer diagnosis are much higher, up to 80% in some studies.159,160 Knowledge of dietary
supplements as well as an understanding of assessment methods is critical to the overall
assessment of nutrient and other dietary components.
Supplement intake data can be assessed in a variety of ways and is usually collected
by questionnaire, including food frequency questionnaires, or as part of intake data such
TABLE 19.6
Categories of Supplements
Category Examples
Vitamins Vitamin C, E, D, B6
(single or multiple formulations)
Minerals Iron, calcium, chromium, zinc
(single or multiple formulations)
Vitamin(s) with mineral(s) Calcium with vitamin D; vitamin E with selenium
Herbs and other botanicals St. John’s Wort, ginkgo biloba, ginseng, saw palmetto
Flavonoids Quercetin, rutin, hesperidin, diadzin
Carotenoids Lycopene, zeaxanthin, lutein, dried carrot extract,
other vegetable extracts
Fatty acids/fish oils, other oils Linoleic acid, omega 3 fatty acids, DHA EPA
Amino acids/nucleic acids/proteins including co- L-glutamine, coenzyme Q-10, bromelain, tryptophan
enzymes, enzymes & hormones
Microbial prepartions/probiotics Lactobacillus acidophilus, B. bifidus, L. bulgaris
Glandular and other organ preparations Dessicated glands such thyroid and adrenal
Miscellaneous Shark cartilage, pycogenol, chrondoitin sulfate
2705_frame_C19 Page 489 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:23 PM
as by 24-hour dietary recall or by food records. When collected by the latter methods it
is important to recognize that the intake of supplements for the day of data collection may
not reflect the pattern of intake over an extended period of time. Detailed questionnaires,
which are better for capturing long-term intake and frequency of intake, are used fre-
quently in research studies, clinical practice, and nutrition monitoring and surveys.161,162
Quantifying supplement intake is a difficult and tedious process. When collecting sup-
plement information, it is important to identify what level of detail is needed to describe
or quantify dietary intakes with dietary supplements. Strategies may include having those
individuals bring in their supplement labels, or photocopy the labels. Other strategies
include having the participants respond to questionnaires that provide lists of single
vitamins and minerals as well as common brand names for multiple formulations. For
herbal and botanical ingredients and other components not typically found in common
formulations, it might be necessary to identify the active components and, above all else,
to obtain brand name and label information.
Functional Foods
According to the Institute of Medicine of the National Academy of Sciences (1994) the
definition of functional foods is “any food or food ingredient that may provide a health
benefit beyond the traditional nutrients it contains.”163 Currently, there is a major research
emphasis to identify physiologically active components, or phytochemicals, and their
potential for decreasing disease risk. Functional foods can consist of foods or food ingre-
dients, including fruits and vegetables to more specialized products such as those contain-
ing soy or phytostanols (i.e., margarines with claims of reducing blood cholesterol levels).
Since many of the phytochemicals in foods are still under investigation, it is premature
to emphasize quantification of single functional food components in dietary assessment.
However, improvements in individual assessment methods will make it possible to quan-
tify and link these components in functional foods with their potential health benefits.
Examples of where individual assessment plays a significant role in providing this linkage
can be found in the literature examining fruit and vegetable intakes. There are now
databases that can accurately quantify the carotenoid content of foods.118,164 As cooking
methods, storage, and exposure to air and water are known to affect the carotenoid content
of fruits and vegetables, the development of these databases has been a challenge. In the
case of assessing carotenoids, for example, it is important to distinguish between pink
and white grapefruit (i.e., pink grapefruit has 3740 mg lycopene, whereas white grapefruit
has 0 mg). This one simple observation in assessing an individual’s intake can have a
significant impact on determining the relationship between dietary carotenoids and blood
carotenoids and the potential role they may have in cancer risk in groups of individuals.
In assessing diets for research purposes it is important to consider the level of detail
required for other components in foods as well. The assessment issues outlined in this
section are the same for assessing functional foods. As more components are identified
and quantification is possible, databases need to be developed that make analysis of
functional foods and their components possible. The knowledge gained in the study of
functional foods will drive the type and level of detail in methodology and database
development.
2705_frame_C19 Page 490 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:23 PM
References
1. Bingham S. Nutr Abstr Rev (Series A) 57: 705; 1987.
2. Medlin C, Skinner JD. JADA 88: 1250; 1988.
3. Mudge GG. J Home Ec 15: 181; 1923.
4. Mudge GG. JADA 1: 166; 1926.
5. Turner D. JADA 16: 875; 1940.
6. Widdowson EM. J Hygiene 36: 269; 1936.
7. Widdowson, EM. J Hygiene 36: 293; 1936.
8. National Research Council, Diet and Health: Implications for Reducing Chronic Disease Risk,
National Academy Press 46; 1989.
9. Public Health Service, Healthy people: Surgeon General’s Report on Health Promotion and Disease
Prevention, US Department of Health and Human Services, Washington DC; 1979.
10. Public Health Service, Promoting Health/Preventing Disease: Objectives for the Nation, US Depart-
ment of Health and Human Services, Washington DC; 1980.
11. US Department of Health and Human Services, Healthy People 2010 (Conference Edition), US
Department of Health and Human Services, Washington DC; 2000.
12. Leverton RM, Marsh AG. J Home Ec 31: 111; 1939.
13. Huenemann RL, Turner D. JADA 18: 562; 1942.
14. Young C, et al. JADA 28: 124; 1952.
15. Young C, et al. JADA 28: 218; 1952.
16. Wait B, Roberts LJ. JADA 8: 323; 1932.
17. Yudkin J. Brit J Nutr 5: 177; 1951.
18. Hunt CL. J Home Ec 5: 212; 1918.
19. Burke BS, Stuart HC. J Pediatr 12: 493; 1938.
20. Donelson EG, Leichsenring JM. JADA 18: 429; 1942.
21. Tigerstedt R. Skand Arch Physiol 24: 97; 1910.
22. Blundell JE. Am J Clin Nutr 71: 3; 2000.
23. Dwyer JT, Krall EA, Coleman KA. JADA 87: 1509; 1987.
24. Smith AF. Eur J Clin Nutr 47: S6; 1993.
25. Ervin RB, Smiciklas-Wright H. JADA 98: 989; 1998.
26. Roberfroid MB. J Nutr 129: 1398S; 1999.
27. Life Sciences Research Office, Guidelines for Use of Dietary Intake Data, Federation of American
Societies for Experimental Biology, Bethesda, MD; 1996.
28. Gibson RS. Principles of Nutritional Assessment, Oxford University Press, New York; 1990.
29. Thompson FE, Byers T. Dietary assessment resource manual, J Nutr 124: 2245S; 1994.
30. Smiciklas-Wright H, Guthrie HA. Nutrition Assessment: A Comprehensive Guide for Planning
Intervention, 2nd ed, Simko MD, Cowell C, Gilbride, JA Eds, Aspen Publishers, Gaithersburg,
MD: 165; 1995.
31. Dwyer J. Modern Nutrition in Health and Disease, 9th ed, Shils ME, Olson JA, Shike M, Ross
AC, Eds, Williams & Wilkins, Philadelphia: 937; 1999.
32. Christakis G. Am J Public Health 63: 1S; 1973.
33. Copeland T, et al. JADA in press.
34. Olendzki B, et al. JADA 99: 1433; 1999.
35. St. Jeor ST, Guthrie HA, Jones MB. JADA 83: 155; 1983.
36. Tarasuk V, Beaton GH. Am J Clin Nutr 54: 464; 1991.
37. Craig MR, et al. JADA 100: 421; 2000.
38. Tian HG, et al. Eur J Clin Nutr 49: 26; 1995.
39. Streit KJ, et al. JADA 91: 213; 1991.
40. Achterberg C, et al. J Can Diet Assoc 52: 226; 1991.
41. Block G, Hartman AM, Naughton D. Epidemiology 1: 58; 1990.
42. Brown JE, et al. JADA 96: 262; 1996.
43. Cummings SR, et al. Am J Epidemiol 126: 796; 1987.
2705_frame_C19 Page 491 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:23 PM
20
Validity and Reliability of Dietary Assessment in
School-Age Children
Introduction
This review of 50 studies examines the validity and/or reliability of dietary assessment
methods used for school-age children during the last three decades, and discusses the
challenges of measuring children’s dietary behaviors. This section is an update from
previously published work of the referenced authors.67 Recommendations on the use of
available assessment methods are discussed and gaps in our knowledge of dietary assess-
ment in children are outlined, along with suggestions for future research.
Review Methodology
The studies included in this review cover a variety of dietary assessment methods includ-
ing the 24-hour recall, food record, food frequency questionnaire, diet history, and obser-
vation. A total of 41 validity and 9 reliability studies used at least one of these
methodologies and met the three review criteria: 1) publication in a peer-reviewed English
journal article between January 1970 and August 2000; 2) inclusion of school children age
5 to 18 years living in an industrialized country; and 3) reporting of specific reliability
and/or validity tests from a minimum sample of 30 children in either the main study
sample or a subsample (denoted by age, gender, or ethnic), after the publishing author’s
exclusions for analyses. Studies were identified by Medline searches using key words and
supplemented by cross-referencing from author reference lists. Studies that did not spe-
cifically use the words validity, reliability, reproducibility, or repeatability in the results or
discussion may not have been identified. The degree of reliability or validity of the
instrument reported was not considered an inclusion factor. Multiple validity or reliability
studies that were included in a single article were considered separately and are repeated
in the descriptions of results.
0-8493-2705-9/01/$0.00+$1.50
© 2002 by CRC Press LLC 495
2705_frame_C20 Page 496 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:23 PM
TABLE 20.1
Definitions and Explanation of Tables
General
Definitions
Adults required — Adults provided all of the intake information or were required to supplement and assist the
child’s report.
Quantitative — Quantity of food consumed was estimated using weights, measures, or food models. Responses
were open-ended.
Semi-quantitative — Quantity of food consumed was estimated using a standard portion size, serving, or a
predetermined amount, and respondent was asked about the number of portions consumed.
Non-quantitative — Quantity of food consumed was not assessed.
Self-administered — Child completed the dietary assessment without assistance.
Group-administered — Child completed the dietary assessment with help from a proctor, teacher, or caregiver in
a group setting.
Interviewer-administered — A trained interviewer elicited the dietary assessment information from the child in a
one-on-one setting.
Results Section
Omission of any of the following components indicates it was not provided in the article or was from a sample
of less than 30 children. Statistical significance of measures is noted with clarifications as to whether significance
testing was shown in the article or only reported via a statement from the publishing authors. The results are
ordered as follows:
Correlations for energy, protein, and total fat between methodologies or administrations.
Range of correlations between methodologies or administrations for the nutrients assessed.
For validity studies: the absolute values and percent difference in energy intake between the validation standard
and the instrument ([instrument-validation standard]/validation standard × 100).
For reliability studies: the absolute values and percent difference in energy intake between the first and follow-
up assessment ([follow-up instrument-first instrument]/follow-up instrument × 100).
Comparison of mean intake of nutrients assessed.
Comparison of foods or food groups consumed.
Comparison of portion size.
Results by age, gender, or ethnicity.
Reynolds et al. 18 M&F 7-8 y Daytime Observation Compared average of Recalled energy intake was 34% lower for 7-8 year olds (1818 vs.
199017 25 M&F 9-10 y recall; non- 3 child’s recalls of 2751 kcal/daytime meals), 21% lower for 9-10 year olds (2291
31 M&F 11-12 y quantitative daytime meals vs. 2887 kcal/ daytime meals) and 17% lower for 11 year olds
against observation of (2643 vs. 3185 kcal/daytime meals) than observed intake.
daytime meals. Children significantly underestimated their energy,
Exchange units of carbohydrate and fat consumption as compared to observers,
foods that were with younger children having larger differences. Exact
developed from the agreement for the 9 exchange groups ranged from 94% for lean
recalls for analyses. fat meat to 17% for the fat group. Girls were significantly more
accurate in reporting medium fat meat exchange units than
boys, 62% versus 50% respectively (significance testing not
shown).
Lytle et al. 19937 49 M&F 3rd Grade 24-hour Observation Compared food Pearson correlations between recalled and observed intakes were
recall record-assisted recalls 0.59 for energy, 0.62 for protein as % of kcal and 0.64 for total
assisted by completed by fat as % of kcal. Range of correlations for the 8 nutrients assessed
food record; children against was 0.41 for polyunsaturated fat as % of kcal to 0.79 for saturated
quantitative observation of school fat as % of kcal. Recalled energy intake was 10% higher than
lunch and breakfast observed intake (1823 vs. 1650 kcal/day). There was an overall
by trained personnel 77.9% agreement in the types of food items recalled and
and of other meals at observed. Food portions were recalled within 10% of observed
home by parents. portions 35% of the time; overestimation occurred 42% and
underestimation occurred 23% of the time.
Handbook of Nutrition and Food
Van Horn et al. 18 M 8-10 y 24-Hour 1-Day food Compared child’s Pearson correlations between recalled intake and record of intake
19908 14 F recall by record recall of intake were 0.76 for energy, 0.74 for protein as % of kcal and 0.73 for
phone; against parent’s total fat as % of kcal. Range of correlations for the 10 nutrients
quantitative observation recorded assessed was 0.64 for saturated fat as % of kcal to 0.93 for iron.
as a food record. Recalled energy intake was 2% lower than recorded intake (1799
vs. 1836 kcal/day). There were no significant differences
between child and parent reports of nutrient intake (significance
testing not shown).
Todd & Kretsch 30 M&F 8-11 y Breakfast Observation Compared child’s Pearson correlations between recalled lunch and observed lunch
1986a10 Chinese and lunch recall of intake of for Chinese were 0.49 for energy, 0.62 for protein and 0.25 for
31 M&F recall; school breakfast and total fat, and for Hispanics were 0.53 for energy, 0.51 for protein
Hispanic quantitative lunch against and 0.46 for total fat. Range of correlations for the 15 nutrients
observation of school assessed for Chinese was –0.10 for sodium to 0.63 for thiamin,
meals with plate and for Hispanics was 0.34 for niacin to 0.81 for vitamin C.
waste subtracted. Chinese children’s recalled energy intake was 10% lower than
Excerpted breakfast observed intake (686 vs. 765 kcal/2 meals). Chinese children
and lunch meals from recalled consistently less food than consumed, which was
2705_frame_C20 Page 499 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:23 PM
analyses of a double olds were 0.55 and 0.45, respectively. Correlations for total fat
portion of lunch, with of 8- and 13-year olds were 0.61 and 0.69, respectively. Range of
plate waste correlations for the 4 nutrients assessed for 8-year-olds was 0.55
subtracted. Excerpted for protein to 0.68 for energy. Range of correlations for 13-year-
lunch meal from 24- olds was 0.45 for protein to 0.71 for energy. Among 8-year-olds,
hour recall. recalled energy intake was 18% higher than chemical analyses
(472 vs. 399 kcal/meal). Among 13-year-olds, recalled energy
intake was 1% higher than chemical analyses (494 vs. 491 kcal/
meal). Median portion size estimated by child compared to
weighing was not significantly different for 8-year-olds and was
14% lower among 13-year-olds (significance testing not shown).
499
TABLE 20.2 (Continued)
500
58 White from school lunch respectively. Rates for omitted and added (phantom) foods were
179 Black either the same day or significantly lower for the same day (16% vs. 5%) than next day
the following day recalls (32% vs. 13%). Children were least likely to omit
against observation of beverages and main dishes and most likely to omit condiments
that lunch. and miscellaneous foods. There were no significant gender,
ethnic, or time interval differences in the accuracy of recalling
the amount of food consumed (significance testing not shown).
Mullenbach et al. 22 M 6-9th 24-Hour 3-day food Compared adolescents’ Pearson correlations between recall and food records were 0.42
19929 18 F Grade recall by record parent-assisted recall for energy, 0.42 for protein, and 0.33 for total fat. Range of
Adults phone; against adolescents’ correlations for the 19 nutrients assessed was 0.09 for cholesterol
required quantitative parent-assisted 3-day to 0.57 for riboflavin. Recalled energy intake was 12% lower than
food records recorded energy intake (1835 vs. 2097 kcal/day). There were no
completed 2-4 weeks significant differences between recalled and recorded average
prior to recalls. nutrient intake, although the 24-hour recall estimates were all
lower than those from the food record.
a Results of all subgroups not reported due to samples below the N=30 criterion
b Males (M), females (F)
c Adult assistance required for instrument administration
d N/A — not applicable
e FFQ — food frequency questionnaire
f TEE — total energy expenditure
Handbook of Nutrition and Food
2705_frame_C20 Page 501 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:23 PM
drank during a specified time period, typically the previous day.5 The 24-hour recall is an
estimate of actual intake that incorporates a detailed description of the food, including
brand names, ingredients of mixed dishes, food preparation methods, and portion sizes
consumed. Because of the detail provided, complete nutrient intake can be calculated for
the designated day. When conducted with a random sample population, a single 24-hour
recall is appropriate for estimating group means, but is not a tool to predict individual-
level health outcomes such as serum cholesterol levels. Because of intra-individual vari-
ation in intake, multiple recalls are needed to accurately estimate usual nutrient intake.
Nelson and colleagues have addressed how to calculate the number of days of recording
required to estimate intakes of individual nutrients for children age 2 to 17 years.6 Col-
lection of 24-hour recall data can occur via paper records or with a computer-assisted
program. Prompts for quantification of portion size such as two- or three-dimensional
food models are typically employed.
TABLE 20.3
Food Record Validity Studies Among School-Age Children
Validation
Reference Sample Age/Grade Instrument Standard Design Results
Lindquist et al. 17 M b 6.5-11.6 y 3-Day audio- f
TEE by Compared average of Mean recorded energy intake from 3-day audiotaped records was
200065 13 Fb Adults taped food doubly- 3 child’s parent- 14% lower than TEE from doubly-labeled water (6.73 vs. 7.86
17 White requiredc record labeled assisted reports of mJ/day). Age was significantly related to reporting accuracy
13 Black water intake from with underestimation of energy intake from audiotaped food
audiotaped food records increasing with age.
records against 14-d
2705_frame_C20 Page 502 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:23 PM
TEE.
Knuiman et al. 30 M 8-9 y 3-Day lunch Observation Compared child’s Correlations between mean values from recorded and observed
198721 Adults food record; parent-assisted lunch intake were 0.71 for energy, 0.66 for protein, and 0.63 for
required quantitative record of lunch intake total fat. Range of correlations for 14 nutrients (i.e., both absolute
against observation of and density values) assessed was 0.62 for saturated fatty acids
lunch with weighed as % of kcal to 0.92 for polyunsaturated fat as % of kcal. Recorded
duplicate portions. energy intake was 25% higher than observed intake (456 vs. 365
Excerpted lunch meal kcal/meal). Ten nutrients were significantly overestimated by
from 7-day non- recorded intake of lunch as compared to observation.
consecutive food
records collected over
15 days.
Knuiman et al. 68 M 8-9 y 7-Day dinner Chemical Compared mothers’ Correlations between mean values from recorded dinner intake
198721 Adults food record; analysis of record of dinner and chemical analyses of dinner were 0.52 for energy, 0.56 for
required quantitative food intake against protein, and 0.58 for total fat. Range of correlations for the 14
chemical analyses of nutrients (i.e., both absolute and density values) assessed was
duplicate portions of 0.45 for polyunsaturated fat as % of kcal to 0.85 for cholesterol.
dinner. Excerpted Recorded energy intake was 31% higher than chemical analysis
dinner from 7-day of food (647 vs. 495 kcal/meal). Nine nutrients were significantly
non-consecutive food overestimated by mother’s record of dinner as compared to
records collected over chemical analysis of dinner.
15 days.
Handbook of Nutrition and Food
Van Horn et al. 33 M&F 8-10 y 1-Day food Observation Compared child’s Pearson correlations between child’s and parent’s records were
19908 record report of intake from 0.68 for energy, 0.82 for protein as % of kcal, and 0.82 for total
audio- taped food record fat as % of kcal. Range of correlations for the 10 nutrients
taped; against parent’s assessed was 0.68 for energy to 0.96 for iron. Child’s recorded
quantitative observation recorded energy intake was 2% lower than parents’ recorded energy
as a food record. intake (1882 vs. 1913 kcal/day). There were no significant
differences between child and parent reports of nutrient intake
(significance testing not shown).
Bandini et al. 109 Fb 8-12 y 7-Day food TEE by Compared child’s Mean recorded energy intake was 13% lower than TEE from
199719 White, Adults record; doubly adult-assisted food doubly labeled water (7.00 vs. 8.03 mJ/day). Age was
Black, required quantitative labeled record against 14-day significantly related to reporting accuracy with underestimation
Hispanic, water TEE. of energy intake from food records increasing with age. There
other were no significant differences by ethnicity.
Champagne et al. 60 Mb 9-12 y 8-Day food TEE by Compared child’s Mean recorded energy intake was 24% lower than TEE from
1998 a20 58 F Adults record; doubly- parent assisted record doubly labeled water for boys (1953 vs. 2555 kcal/day) and 27%
56 Black required quantitative labeled of intake against TEE. lower for girls (1633 vs. 2232 kcal/day). Mean recorded energy
62 White water intake was 28% lower than TEE from doubly labeled water for
2705_frame_C20 Page 503 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:23 PM
blacks (1678 vs. 2346 kcal/day) and 22% lower for whites (1909
vs. 2441 kcal/day).
Green et al. 199818 14 F 16 y 3-Day food Serum Compared adolescent’s Pearson correlations between recorded folate intake and serum
19 F 17 y record; folate, red report of folate and folate were 0.65, between recorded folate intake and RBC folate
29 F 18 y quantitative blood cell vitamin B12 intake on were 0.50, and between recorded vitamin B12 intake and serum
43 F 19 y (RBC) weighed record B12 were 0.32.
folate, and against serum
serum micronutrient levels
vitamin collected 1 week
B12. before food records.
a
Validity and Reliability of Dietary Assessment in School-Age Children
Results of all subgroups not reported due to samples below the N=30 criterion
b Males (M), females (F)
c Adult assistance required for instrument administration
d N/A — not applicable
e FFQ — food frequency questionnaire
f TEE — total energy expenditure
503
504
TABLE 20.4
Food Frequency Questionnaire (FFQ) Validity Studies Among School-Age Children
Response
Categories Validation
Reference Sample Age/Grade Instrument (Range) Standard Design Results
Blom et al. 13 Mb 2-16 y 36 Items; (sucrose, Unknown (<1/ 7-Day food Compared child’s parent- Spearman correlations between FFQ and food
1989a22 17 F Adults protein, fat, fiber, week to ≥4 record assisted report of intake records for frequency of food groups with
requiredc nitrite, vitamin C) times/day) of foods with high high content of protein and fat were 0.69 and
self-administered; content of sucrose, 0.69, respectively. Range of correlations for 6
referent period not protein, fat, fiber, nitrite, food groups assessed was 0.52 for sucrose to
specified; and vitamin C against 0.76 for vitamin C. Compared to the food
non-quantitative child’s parent- and other record, 2 food groups were significantly
adult-assisted report of overestimated and 3 significantly
2705_frame_C20 Page 504 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:23 PM
semi-quantitative; months/year) administrations against food record were 0.13 to 0.22 for energy, 0.20
adult portions child’s parent-assisted to 0.30 for protein, and 0.28 to 0.46 for fat,
report of intake on 14- respectively. Range of correlations for 16
day food records. nutrients assessed was 0.06 for starch to 0.61
Records, consisting of 2 for vitamin B2. For the first FFQ, energy intake
sets of 7-day consecutive was 24% higher than the first food record
food records were (2319 vs. 1861 kcal/day). For the second FFQ,
completed 1 month after energy intake was 16% higher than the
the first FFQ and 6 second food record (2205 vs. 1902 kcal/day).
months later. Both administrations of the FFQ
overestimated intake for all 16 nutrients
compared to the corresponding food records
(significance testing not shown).
Baranowski, 1530-1570 3rd Grade 7 Items (3 fruit, 4 10 (None to ≥5 7-Day food Compared child’s report Pearson correlations between FFQ and food
Smith et al. Mb&Fb vegetables); times/day) record of servings of fruits and records for fruits and vegetables, fruits and
199726 black & white group-administered; vegetables against juices, and vegetables were 0.20, 0.24, and
past month; child’s report of intake 0.15, respectively. Total servings of fruits and
semi-quantitative; on 7-day food records. vegetables/week as measured by the FFQ
“serving” portions Foods from the records was 50.9; by food record was 15.9. The FFQ
were abstracted into the significantly overestimated intake of food
FFQ categories by a items in all 7 food categories, both aggregate
dietitian. and individual items (significance testing not
shown).
Handbook of Nutrition and Food
Bellu et al. 39 M 9-12 y 116 Items; Unknown 14-Day food Compared parent’s report Pearson correlations between FFQ and food
199534 49 F Adults self-administered; record of child’s nutrient intake records were 0.46 for energy, 0.34 for protein,
required past 6 months; semi- against parent’s report of and 0.39 for fat. Range of correlations for 18
quantitative; child’s intake on 14-day nutrients assessed was 0.07 for vitamin A to
“average” portions weighed food records. 0.52 for carbohydrates. FFQ energy intake
Records consisted of 2 was 40% higher than the diet record (2620 vs.
sets of 7-day consecutive 1865 kcal/day). The FFQ significantly
food records at the overestimated 6 nutrients and significantly
beginning of the study underestimated 5 nutrients compared to the
and 6 months later, food records.
respectively, before and
after the FFQ.
Rockett et al. 122 Mb 9-18 y 131 Items Dependent on 24-Hour recall Compared child’s report Pearson correlations (unadjusted log-
199735 139 Fb Youth/Adolescent type of food of nutrient intake (mean transformed values) between FFQs and
96% White Questionnaire; of 2 administrations 1 recalls were 0.35 for energy, 0.30 for protein,
self-administered; year apart) against and 0.41 for fat. Range of correlations for 28
past year; child’s report of intake nutrients assessed was 0.09 for copper to 0.46
semi-quantitative; on three 24-hour recalls. for vitamin C. Deattenuated correlations
2705_frame_C20 Page 507 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:23 PM
child portions Recalls were collected via (adjusted for energy and within-person
telephone by research variation) were 0.43 for protein and 0.57 for
dietitians in the year total fat. Range of deattenuated correlations
between FFQ for 29 nutrients assessed was 0.24 for sodium
administrations. to 0.75 for vitamin C. FFQ energy intake was
1% higher than the recalls (2196 vs. 2169 kcal/
day). Of 31 nutrients assessed, 16 were
overestimated by the FFQ and 8 were
underestimated (significance testing not
shown). Correlations did not show a
consistent pattern by gender or age
Validity and Reliability of Dietary Assessment in School-Age Children
abstracted by a dietitian records (11.7 vs. 2.3), and 135% higher for the
into servings of fruit and month 2 FFQ compared to the food records
vegetables. (5.4 vs. 2.3). Both administrations of the
monthly FFQ significantly overestimated
mean daily servings for all 8 fruit/vegetable
groupings compared to the corresponding
food records.
Domel et al. 154-156 Mb&Fb 4-5th Grade 45 Items (15 fruit, 30 5 (None or <1/ 2-Week food Compared child’s report Spearman correlations between week 1 FFQ
199427 black & white vegetables); week to record of frequency of fruit and and food records and week 2 FFQ and food
group-administered; several per vegetable intake (mean records were 0.18 and 0.18 for total fruit, –0.01
past week; day) of 2 administrations) and 0.11 for total vegetable, and 0.00 and 0.05
semi-quantitative; against child’s report of for total fruit and vegetable. Range of
“serving” portions intake on 7-day food correlations for 8 fruit/vegetable groupings
records. Records were assessed was –0.01 for total vegetable to 0.25
collected between FFQ for total legumes and fruit. Mean daily
administrations; foods servings of total fruits and vegetables were
from the records were 295% higher for week 1 FFQs compared to
abstracted by a dietitian the corresponding food record (8.3 vs. 2.1)
into servings of fruit and and 306% higher for week 2 FFQ (7.3 vs. 1.8).
vegetables. Both administrations of the weekly FFQ
significantly overestimated mean daily
servings for all 8 fruit and vegetable
groupings compared to the corresponding
food records.
Handbook of Nutrition and Food
Koehler et al. 66 M 5-8th Grade 33 Items Yes, not sure, 24-Hour recall Compared child’s Spearman correlations between scores on the
200066 54 F Yesterday’s Food and no reported intake of FFQ and 24-hour recall were 0.71 for low fat
American Choices-YFC; particular foods against foods, 0.35 for high fiber foods, 0.29 for fruits
Indian, non- self-administered; child’s 24-hour recall, and vegetables, and 0.40 for high fat foods.
hispanic- past day; non- both completed on same
white, quanitative day.
Hispanic
Jenner et al. 61 M ~11-12 y 175 Items; group- 6 (None to 14-Day food Compared child’s report Pearson correlations (log-transformed)
198936 57 F administered; every day) record of nutrient intake against between the children’s FFQs and diet records
past week; child’s report of intake were 0.25 for energy, 0.18 for protein, and 0.19
non-quantitative on 14-day diet records. for total fat. Range of correlations for 13
Seven sets of 2 nutrients assessed was 0.11 for
consecutive day records monounsaturated fat to 0.42 for complex
were collected in the 3 carbohydrates. Correlations between the
months following parents’ FFQs and diet records were 0.38 for
administration of the energy, 0.26 for protein and 0.30 for total fat.
FFQ. Nutrient estimates Range of correlations was 0.26 for protein to
from FFQ completed by 0.47 for complex carbohydrates. Children’s
2705_frame_C20 Page 509 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:23 PM
parents were also FFQ energy intakes were 36% higher than
compared to the 14-day diet records (10.9 vs. 8.0 mJ/day). Parents’
diet records. FFQ estimates of children’s energy intake
were 21% higher than the children’s diet
records (9.7 vs. 8.0 mJ/day). All 13 nutrients
were overestimated by both the child and the
parent FFQ (significance testing not shown).
Kinlay et al. 57 Mb 13-17 y 12 Items Dependent on FFQe Compared child’s parent- Spearman correlations between the brief FFQ
199128 48 Fb Adults (fat, saturated fat); type of food assisted report of fat and the FFQ were 0.40 for total fat as % of
required self-administered; intake against child’s kcal and 0.54 for saturated fat as % of kcal.
past week; parent assisted report of
Validity and Reliability of Dietary Assessment in School-Age Children
50% M vegetable) (none to ≥3 recalls of fruit and vegetable and mean of 24-hour recalls were 0.17 for fruit
50% F Youth Risk Behavior times/day) intake against child’s only, 0.07 for fruit juice, 0.21 for fruit and
35% White Surveillance System reported mean intake of juice, 0.24 for vegetables, and 0.28 for fruit
24% Black Questionnaire fruits and vegetables (including juice) and vegetables.
15% Hispanic (YRBSS); self- calculated with an
administered; past algorithm using 3
day; nonconsecutive 24-hour
semi-quantitative recalls completed 2
weeks apart. YRBSS was
administered 2-4 weeks
after the third recall.
Field et al. 199829 102 M&F 9-12th Grade 6 Items (2 fruit, 4 Unknown Three 24-hour Compared child’s report Spearman correlations between past day
50% M vegetable) (none to ≥3 recalls of fruit and vegetable BRFSS and mean of 24-hour recalls were 0.33
50% F Behavioral Risk times/day) intake against child’s for fruit only, 0.30 for fruit juice, 0.34 for fruit
35% White Factor Surveillance reported mean intake of and juice, 0.14 for vegetables, and 0.30 for
24% Black System fruits and vegetables fruit (including juice) and vegetables.
15% Hispanic Questionnaire calculated with an
(BRFSS); self- algorithm using 2
administered; past nonconsecutive 24-hour
day; recalls completed 4
semi-quantitative weeks apart. BFRSS was
administered halfway
between the two recalls.
Handbook of Nutrition and Food
Field et al. 199829 100 M&F 9-12th Grade 6 Items (2 fruit, 4 Unknown Three 24-hour Compared child’s report Spearman correlations between past year
50% M vegetable) (none to ≥5 recalls of fruit and vegetable BRFSS and mean of 24-hour recalls were 0.36
50% F BRFSS; times/day) intake against child’s for fruit only, 0.36 for fruit juice, 0.35 for fruit
35% White self-administered; reported mean intake of and juice, 0.33 for vegetables, and 0.43 for
24% Black past year; fruits and vegetables fruit (including juice) and vegetables.
15% Hispanic semi-quantitative calculated with an
algorithm using 3
nonconsecutive 24-hour
recalls completed 4
weeks apart. BFRSS was
administered preceding
the third recall.
Green et al. 14 F 16 y 116 Items; Unknown Serum folate, Compared child’s report Pearson correlations were 0.48 between folate
199818 19 F 17 y self-administered; red blood cell of folate and vitamin B12 intake from the FFQ and serum folate, 0.42
29 F 18 y past year; (RBC) folate, intake against serum between folate intake from the FFQ and RBC
43 F 19 y semi-quantitative and serum micronutrient levels. folate, and 0.25 between vitamin B12 intake
vitamin B12 from the FFQ and serum B12.
Andersen et al. 13 M 11th Grade 190 Items; Dependent on 7-Day food Compared child’s parent Spearman correlations between FFQ and food
2705_frame_C20 Page 511 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:23 PM
199537 36 F Adults group-administered; type of food record assisted report of records were 0.51 for energy, 0.48 for protein,
required past year; nutrient intake against 0.57 for total fat. Range of correlations for 18
semi-quantitative child’s report of intake nutrients assessed was 0.14 for vitamin D to
on 7-day weighed food 0.66 for monounsaturated fat. FFQ energy
records completed 2-3 intake was 24% higher than diet records (10.7
months after FFQ vs. 8.6 mJ/day). The FFQ significantly
administration. Records overestimated 16 of the 18 nutrients. The FFQ
consisted of 4 significantly overestimated intake of 8 of 13
consecutive days, a 1- food items as compared to diet records.
week interval, and 3
consecutive days.
Validity and Reliability of Dietary Assessment in School-Age Children
a Results of all subgroups not reported due to samples below the N=30 criterion
b Males (M), females (F)
c Adult assistance required for instrument administration
d N/A — not applicable
e FFQ — food frequency questionnaire
f TEE — total energy expenditure
511
512
TABLE 20.5
Food Frequency Questionnaire (FFQ)e Reliability Studies Among School-Age Children
Response
Age/ Categories
Reference Sample Grade Instrument (Range) Design Results
Basch et al. 166 4-7 y ~116 Items; 9 (None or <1/ Compared both 3-month and Pearson correlations (log-transformed) between the 2 FFQs at 3
199439 M&Fb Adults interviewer- month to ≥6/ 1-year test-retest months were 0.53 for energy, 0.49 for protein, and 0.56 for total
Latino requiredc administered; day) reproducibility of nutrient fat. Range of correlations for 12 nutrients assessed at 3 months
past 6 months; estimates from FFQs was -0.06 for sucrose to 0.61 for crude fiber. At 1 year, correlations
semi-quantitative; completed by the parent. were 0.46 for energy, 0.40 for protein, and 0.47 for total fat. Range
child portions of correlations for 12 nutrients assessed at 1 year was 0.06 for
sucrose to 0.57 for polyunsaturated fat.
Arnold et al. 77 F 7-12 y 160 Items; 5 (Open-ended, Compared 6-month test-retest Pearson correlations (log-transformed, energy adjusted) between
199533 Adults self-administered; none to number reproducibility of nutrient the 2 FFQs were 0.60 for energy, 0.51 for protein, and 0.14 for
required past year; of months/ estimates from FFQs total fat. Range of correlations for 16 nutrients assessed was 0.14
2705_frame_C20 Page 512 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:23 PM
semi-quantitative; year) completed by the parent and for total fat to 0.71 for fiber. Mean energy intake was 5% higher
adult portions child. in the first FFQ compared to the second (2319 vs. 2205 kcal/day).
Mean intake of 15 nutrients was higher in the first FFQ compared
to the second; 1 nutrient was lower (significance testing not
shown).
Domel et al. 146 M&F 4-5th 45 Items (15 fruit, 5 (None or <1/ Compared 1-week test-retest Spearman correlations between the 2 FFQs were 0.50 for total fruit,
199427 black & Grade 30 vegetable); week to several reproducibility of fruit and 0.48 for total vegetable, and 0.54 for total fruit and vegetable
white group- per day) vegetable intake from FFQs intake. Range of correlations for 8 fruit and vegetable groupings
administered; completed by the child. assessed was 0.39 for fruit and vegetable juice to 0.54 for total
past week; Order of fruit (15 items) and fruit and vegetables. Mean daily servings of total fruits and
semi-quantitative; vegetables (30 items) was vegetables was 12% higher for Week 1 FFQ compared to Week 2
“serving” portions reversed between first and FFQ (8.3 vs. 7.3). Mean daily servings of 6 fruit and vegetable
second administrations. groupings of 8 assessed were higher for Week 1 FFQ compared
to Week 2 FFQ (significance testing not shown).
Domel et al. 156 M&F 4–5th 45 Items (15 fruit, 7 (None or <1/ Compared 1-month (3.5- Spearman correlations between the 2 FFQs were 0.43 for total fruit,
199427 black & Grade 30 vegetable); month to week) test-retest 0.37 for total vegetable and 0.47 for total fruit and vegetable
white group- several per day) reproducibility of fruit and intake. Range of correlations for 8 fruit and vegetable groupings
administered; vegetable intake from FFQs assessed was 0.28 for fruit and vegetable juice to 0.47 for both
past month; completed by the child. legumes and total fruit and vegetable intake. Mean daily servings
semi-quantitative; Order of fruit (15 items) and of total fruits and vegetables was 54% higher for Month 1 FFQ
“serving” portions vegetables (30 items) was compared to Month 2 FFQ (11.7 vs. 5.4). Mean daily servings of
reversed between first and 8 fruit and vegetable groupings were higher for Month 1 FFQ
second administrations. compared to Month 2 FFQ (significance testing not shown).
Handbook of Nutrition and Food
Rockett et 75 M 9-18 y 151 Items 9 (None or <1/ Compared 1-year test-retest Pearson correlations (log-transformed, energy-adjusted) between
al. 199538 101 F Youth/ month to ≥6/ reproducibility of nutrient the 2 FFQs were 0.49 for energy, 0.26 for protein, and 0.41 for
3 N/Ad Adolescent day) estimates from FFQs total fat. Range of correlations for 7 nutrients assessed was 0.26
multi- Questionnaire; completed by the child. for protein and iron to 0.58 for calcium. Mean energy intake was
ethnic self-administered; 10% higher in the first FFQ compared to the second (2477 vs.
past year; 2222 kcal/day). Mean intake of 6 nutrients assessed was
semi-quantitative; significantly higher in the first FFQ compared to the second.
adult portions Range of correlations for 8 food groups assessed was 0.39 for
meats to 0.57 for soda. Pearson correlations (log-transformed) for
servings/day were 0.49 for fruits, 0.48 for vegetables, and 0.48
for fruits and vegetables. Of 8 food groups, mean serving
frequencies of 5 were significantly higher in the first FFQ
compared to the second. Reproducibility of nutrient intake was
significantly higher for girls than boys (mean correlation for all
nutrients was 0.44 and 0.34, respectively). There were no
significant differences by age or ethnicity.
Frank et al. 189 M&F 12-17 y 64 Items; 6 (None to >3 Compared 2-week test-retest Two-thirds of the children reported similar responses for the
199240 black & group- times/day) reproducibility of food frequency of consumption of low-fat milk, diet carbonated soft
2705_frame_C20 Page 513 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:23 PM
white administered; intake from FFQs completed drinks and shellfish. Twelve food groups had percent agreement
past week; by the child. of 50% or better (significance testing not shown).
semi-quantitative;
adult portions
Andersen et 53 M 11th 190 items; Dependent on Compared 6-week test-retest Spearman correlations (energy-adjusted) between the 2 FFQs were
al. 199537 50 F Grade group- type of food reproducibility of nutrient 0.87 for energy, 0.86 for protein, and 0.86 for total fat. Range of
Adults administered; estimates from FFQs correlations for 18 nutrients assessed was 0.72 for vitamin C to
required past year; completed by the child and 0.91 for alcohol. Median energy intake was 11% higher in the first
semi-quantitative parent. FFQ compared to the second (12.3 vs. 10.9 mJ/day). Median
intake of 15 nutrients was significantly higher in the first FFQ
compared to the second FFQ. Differences in median correlations
Validity and Reliability of Dietary Assessment in School-Age Children
for nutrient intake were not significant between girls and boys
(0.78 vs. 0.74, respectively).
a Results of all subgroups not reported due to samples below the N=30 criterion
b Males (M), females (F)
c Adult assistance required for instrument administration
d N/A — not applicable
e FFQ — food frequency questionnaire
513
2705_frame_C20 Page 514 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:23 PM
The diet history provides a measure of usual intake appropriate for ranking individuals
and predicting health outcomes. In contrast to other methods of dietary assessment, a diet
history is usually more qualitative than quantitative, allowing detailed information about
food preparation, eating habits, and food consumption to be collected by a highly trained
interviewer. This method requires children and/or parents to recall dietary intake from
the past, understand spatial relationships, be able to apply math skills, and have the
stamina to complete the typically one- to two-hour interview. Because of the respondent
burden, diet histories are not often used to assess children’s diets.
Discussion
Ideally, a comprehensive review of validity and reliability studies such as this one would
direct researchers to the best assessment technique for a particular setting. Unfortunately,
as this report indicates, dietary assessment techniques for children are difficult to evaluate
and generalize because the validation standards against which the instruments have been
compared are frequently beset with shortcomings. These validation standards may have
inconsistent validity, or use a referent period that differs from that used for the instrument.
Heterogeneity of the studies also makes it difficult to draw conclusions; the differences
in study administrations and study populations make comparisons uncertain both within
a type of assessment method and between methods. Noting these challenges to interpre-
tation, the correlations between the validation standard and the dietary assessment tool
were almost always higher for recalls or records than for FFQs.
This review may serve best to facilitate comparison of dietary methods to determine
the most effective data collection instruments to use with particular quantitative or qual-
itative research questions.43-44 The reader may, for example, scan each table for instruments
with higher or lower nutrient correlations with a particular validity standard, instruments
that children can complete without adult assistance, those with no portion size estimation,
and instruments specific to assessing intake of food groups — all by age or grade. Appli-
cations of the dietary assessment methods are summarized in Table 20.7 which provides
advantages and disadvantages for using the dietary assessment methodologies, applicable
study designs, and brief highlights of their validity from this review. Using this series of
tables, the reader can select a dietary assessment tool that is appropriate for specific
research questions.
It is evident that many of the validation standards used in the reviewed articles are
imperfect, especially for children. Food records or recalls were the most common choices
TABLE 20.6
Diet History and Observation Reliability Studies Among School-Age Children
Age/
Reference Sample Grade Instrument Design Results
Rasanen, 1979 41 47 M&Fb 5y Diet history; Compared 7-month test-retest Pearson correlations between the first and second interviews were
50 M&F 9y past year; reproducibility of nutrient 0.59 for energy, 0.60 for protein, and 0.57 for total fat. Range of
37 M&F 13 y interviewer intake from a diet history correlations for 11 nutrients assessed was 0.41 for ascorbic acid
Adults administered; completed by child and to 0.60 for protein. Mean daily energy intake was 27% higher in
requiredc quantitative parent. the first diet history interview as compared to the second
2705_frame_C20 Page 515 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:23 PM
a Results of subgroups not reported due to samples below the N=30 criterion
b males (M), females (F)
c adult assistance required for instrument administration
d N/A — Not applicable
e FFQ — Food frequency questionnaire
515
516
TABLE 20.7
Summary of Reviewed Dietary Assessment Methods for School-Age Children
Energy &
Method and Macro- Energy Intake
Number of Studies Ages Nutrient Compared with Type of Diet Study Design
Reviewed Evaluated Validitya Standardb Measure Applications Advantages Disadvantages
FOOD RECALL 4-14 y Energy –34 to 18% One recall • Cross-sectional • Short administration time • Recall depends on memory
0.23-0.87 measures • Intervention • Defined recall time • Portion size difficult to estimate
Validity — 12 Adult group intake • Monitoring • Intake can be quantified • Trained interviewer required
Reliability — 0 assistance Protein • Clinical • Procedure does not alter habitual • Expensive to collect and code
needed for 0.05-0.82 Multiple recalls • Epidemiologic dietary patterns
2705_frame_C20 Page 516 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:23 PM
for validation standards here, and information on the validity of these methods in children
is mixed. Recalls both over- and underestimated energy, and food records underestimated
energy intake. Most recall validity studies used observation of the child as the standard,
but the majority of the studies only considered individual meals or daytime intakes to
determine validity of the 24-hour recall. Accurate completion of food records is greatly
dependent on the ability of the child to read and write. Because young children have not
been shown to accurately complete food records independently, caution is suggested when
interpreting studies that use records as the validation standard. The validity of food
records or recalls for measuring long term or usual food intake improves with more days
of recording,5 indicating that multiple records may be needed. Multiple food records/
recalls can introduce compliance issues for children because of the high respondent bur-
den. Since a high degree of cooperation is required from children for food records and
recalls, it is essential for both methods that children be motivated to participate, and in
particular be cognitively able to complete the records.
In evaluating validation studies, the effect of correlated errors between the method
evaluated and the validation standard should be considered. All dietary assessment meth-
ods have inherent errors; for validation studies, it is important that these errors be as
independent as possible.45 For example, if errors between the methods are similar (e.g.,
both methods rely on dietary information from a respondent such as FFQ and recalls),
correlations between the two methods will be artificially inflated. In contrast, errors inher-
ent in physiologic measures (e.g., doubly labeled water measurements or serum micron-
utrients) or observational data do not rely on information provided by respondents, and
would be a more independent comparison to a respondent-based measure.46 Comparisons
of physiologic endpoints, such as blood nutrient levels, to dietary assessment methods
have not been widely used with school-age children and offer other problems, since food
intake may not be directly correlated with physiologic endpoints.
Selecting a validation standard can be a difficult task, because there is often no dietary
assessment tool available with the same referent period as the assessment tool. Thus, a
compromise may be needed in the study design. For example, an FFQ measures usual
food consumption over a period of six months to a year, while a food record generally is
used to measure food consumption on a day-to-day basis. In order to validate an FFQ, it
would be necessary to complete several sets of food records over the referent period for
the FFQ. Clearly, validation studies that use a week of continuous consecutive food records
may not capture seasonal variation in diet. Similarly, a food recall, which is generally used
to measure one complete day of consumption, should be validated by a method that
assesses an entire day, not just a portion of the day.
The problem of referent periods also influences the experimental design for reliability
studies. Because there is much day-to-day variation in diet, re-administration should be
close enough in time to reflect the same referent period. Since some methods reflect diet
over a short span of time (e.g., 1-day records and 24-hour recalls), theoretically the reli-
ability testing should be completed on the same day as the assessment tool, which may
allow memory effects from the first assessment to bias the re-administration. Studies that
examine reliability should alternate administrations in order to eliminate bias as much as
possible. Because FFQs usually include a longer referent period, it is easier to develop
reproducibility studies for this method.
In all the studies reviewed, adult dietary assessment methods were adapted for admin-
istration to a pediatric population. Specific adaptations included incorporating parental
or adult assistance, adjusting portion size information, using shorter referent times, and
administering the instrument in the school setting. Children younger than nine years of
age need adult assistance to provide accurate dietary information because they usually
2705_frame_C20 Page 519 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:23 PM
have limited reading skills and adults control most of the food offered, as well as the
timing and frequency of eating occasions.47-48 This review found that almost all of the
validity and reliability studies among children less then nine years of age, with the
exception of a few of the recall and FFQ studies, included adult participation. This par-
ticipation varied from completion of the form entirely to obtaining only supplemental
information from parents or surrogates, such as childcare providers, or secondary sources
such as school food service observations.
Children generally have difficulty in estimating portion sizes.30,49,50 A recent review of
portion size aids was unable to make guidelines for portion size estimation for children
or adults.51 Both two- and three-dimensional models have been used to enhance children’s
portion size estimation.7-9,11,16,21,39,41-42,52-54 Pictures of food and portions have been incorpo-
rated in assessments to enhance children’s understanding; however, the addition of pic-
tures did not increase accuracy among third-graders.55 Among the newer tools for dietary
assessment are reference books with life-size photographs of portion sizes, which have
been credited as being both easy and accurate.56-59 Training to improve portion size esti-
mation among children has been attempted with significant improvements in estimation;
however, even with training, some errors were reported as high as 100%.60
Semi-quantitative FFQs have not generally used portion sizes adjusted for children’s
level of intake. This may have enhanced the lack of agreement between the FFQ and
validation standard, if the validation standard allowed for collection of specific portions
consumed by the child. These FFQs may have systematically overestimated intake due to
portion size miscalculations.
Because the school provides a natural means of regularly accessing school-age children,
several researchers continue to explore ways of using this setting to collect dietary intake
data. Methods such as using a group workbook to collect 24-hour recall information61
have been developed to expand the number of eating occasions that can be evaluated,
while trying to minimize the respondent burden for multiple records or recalls.
Recommendations
Despite the extensive dietary intake data available to nutritionists, epidemiologists, and
pediatricians, this review identifies methodological concerns associated with the assess-
ment tools currently used to determine dietary intake of school-age children. Generally,
comparisons across studies were limited by differences in instruments, research design,
validation standards, and populations. The paucity of data in many areas also made it
difficult to draw generalized conclusions.
In the last three decades the most extensive body of validation work among children
has occurred with FFQs, with only a limited number of validation studies and even fewer
reliability studies of the other methods among school-age children. In the future, evalua-
tions of dietary assessment techniques for children need to be conducted that give partic-
ular attention to experimental design, careful use of validation standards, and inclusion
of different age, gender, and ethnic subgroups. As with adults, there is no perfect method
of assessing dietary intake in children. Special consideration must be given to the age and
cognitive ability of the child as well as methodological issues associated with nutrient
analyses, food coding, and portion sizes. Both age and cognitive ability relate to the child’s
understanding of the method used and the thought processes that contribute to self-
reporting of food choices.
2705_frame_C20 Page 520 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:23 PM
What needs to be done? Ideally, studies need to examine the validity and reliability of
each dietary assessment method by age, gender, and ethnic subgroup to understand the
best application of each tool. Selection of the measure of truth for validation studies will
be challenging, since there is not always a good choice when the referent periods differ
so markedly between instruments, and the potential effect of correlated errors is consid-
ered. Physiologically based measures, such as doubly labeled water or serum micronutri-
ent concentrations, represent a type of standard with considerable appeal and merit further
study, since these measures are not affected by respondent error. In addition, studies that
compare multiple validation standards for a particular assessment method would allow
comparisons of the validation standards best suited for particular situations. Future stud-
ies need to address the timing of the referent period that best suits the assessment instru-
ment in the design phase.
New approaches and modifications to existing approaches for dietary assessment among
school-age children are needed. The dietary habits of children, especially young children
who are preliterate, are inherently difficult to study. Unfortunately, assessment techniques
that work reasonably well among adult men and women may not be useful for children,
especially those less than nine years of age, who may need assistance from a proxy or
special prompting techniques to estimate portion size. Creative measures must be devel-
oped to better estimate children’s portion sizes and enhance researchers’ ability to capture
details of their dietary intake. Systematic evaluations of children’s ability to estimate
portion size utilizing various approaches by age are needed.
Researchers are urged to investigate how variables such as age, gender, ethnicity, socio-
economic status, and obesity affect the validity of dietary assessment methods. This
review found little research on the effects of age, gender, or ethnicity. Given the multi-
plicity of minority groups in the U.S., there is a need for research to determine whether
group-specific dietary assessment tools are necessary. Other areas, such as the effect of
body size on reporting of dietary intake, require further study. For example, a recent study
suggested that children with central fat distribution had higher rates of underreporting
energy intake than lean or obese children, or those with peripheral fat distribution.20
Another study reported that energy intake was significantly lower in obese children than
non-obese children when compared to doubly labeled water as a percentage of energy
expenditure.62 Underreporting of dietary intake by obese adolescents is consistent with
recent findings that obese adults tend to underreport their dietary intake.62 With the
increasing prevalence of obesity among children and adolescents, it is essential to deter-
mine whether body size differences significantly affect completion of dietary assessment
instruments.64
In summary, much remains to be learned about the dietary intake of American youth.
This review serves as a guide to the state of dietary assessment among school-age children.
Recalls and records generally agreed more with the validation standards than did FFQs.
Administration protocols differed greatly, the recalls and records often represented only
meals or portions of the day, and the FFQ food lists varied from a few items to the total
diet. This review can also serve as a foundation for initiating new studies and as a resource
for developing research questions from the gaps identified in the current methodologies.
The key to advancing the field is to build on our current base of methods, refine techniques
that are useful, and develop new approaches to overcome obstacles that have been iden-
tified in study designs and data collection procedures. In the new millenium we must be
able to accurately assess the dietary intake of our school-age children so that we can
monitor dietary intake trends, make accurate research and policy decisions, and develop
and effectively evaluate nutrition interventions.
2705_frame_C20 Page 521 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:23 PM
Acknowledgment
The authors would like to thank Heidi Nowak for assisting with manuscript preparation.
References
1. McPherson RS, Montgomery DH, Nichaman MZ. J Nutr Ed 27: 225; 1995.
2. Kennedy E, Goldberg J. Nutr Rev 53: 111; 1995.
3. US Department of Health and Human Services. Healthy people 2000: national health promo-
tion and disease prevention objectives. DHHS Publication No. (PHS) 91-50212, US Gov. Print-
ing Office, Washington, DC, 1990.
4. Ferro-Luzzi A, Martino L. In Implementing Dietary Guidelines for Healthy Eating, (Wheelock V,
Ed), Blackie A&P, London, 1997, pg 3.
5. Thompson FE, Byers T. J Nutr, 124: 2245S, 1994.
6. Nelson M, et al. Am J Clin Nutr 50: 155; 1989.
7. Lytle LA, et al. JADA 93:1431; 1993.
8. Van Horn LV, et al. JADA 90: 412; 1990.
9. Mullenbach V, et al. JADA 92: 743; 1992.
10. Todd KS, Kretsch MJ. Nutr Res 6: 1031; 1989.
11. Eck LH, Klesges RC, Hanson CL. JADA 89: 784; 1989.
12. Emmons L, Hayes M. JADA 62: 409; 1973.
13. Samuelson G. Nutr Metabol 12: 321; 1970.
14. Lytle LA, et al. JADA, 98: 570; 1998.
15. Baxter SD, et al. JADA 97: 1293; 1997.
16. Basch CE, et al. Am J Pub Health 81: 1314; 1990.
17. Reynolds LA, Johnson SB, Silverstein J. J Ped Psych 15: 493; 1990.
18. Green TJ, Allen OB, O’Connor DL. J Nutr 128, 1665, 1998.
19. Bandini LG, et al. Am J Clin Nutr 65: 1138S; 1997.
20. Champagne CM, et al. JADA 98: 426; 1998.
21. Knuiman JT, et al. JADA 87: 303; 1987.
22. Blom L, et al. Acta Pediatr Scand 78: 858; 1989.
23. Taylor RW, Goulding A. Eur J Clin Nutr 52: 404; 1998.
24. Hammond J, et al. Eur J Clin Nutr 47: 242; 1993.
25. Byers T, et al. Epidemiology 4: 350; 1993.
26. Baranowski T, et al. JADA 97: 66; 1997.
27. Domel SB, et al. J Am Col Nutr 13: 33; 1994.
28. Kinlay S, Heller RF, Halliday JA. Prev Med 20: 378; 1991.
29. Field AE, et al. Am J Pub Health 88: 1216; 1998.
30. Kaskoun MC, Johnson RK, Goran MI. Am J Clin Nutr 60: 43; 1994.
31. Persson LA, Carlgren G. Int J Epidemiol 13: 506; 1984.
32. Bellu R, et al. Nutr Res 16: 197; 1996.
33. Arnold JE, et al. Ann Epidemiol 5: 369; 1995.
34. Bellu R, et al. Nutr Res 15: 1121; 1995.
35. Rockett HRH, et al. Prev Med 26: 808; 1997.
36. Jenner DA, et al. Eur J Clin Nutr 43: 663; 1989.
37. Andersen LF, et al. Eur J Clin Nutr 49: 543; 1995.
38. Rockett HRH, Wolf AM, Colditz GA. JADA 95: 336; 1995.
39. Basch CE, Shea S, Zybert P. Am J Pub Health 84: 861; 1994.
40. Frank GC, et al. JADA 92: 313; 1992.
41. Rasanen L. Am J Clin Nutr 32: 2560; 1979.
42. Simons-Morton BG, et al. JADA 92: 219; 1992.
43. Cullen KW, et al. JADA 99: 849; 1999.
44. Eldridge AL, et al. JADA 98: 777; 1998.
2705_frame_C20 Page 522 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:23 PM
45. Willett W. Nutritional Epidemiology, 2nd ed, Oxford University Press, New York, 1998.
46. Bingham SA. Am J Clin Nutr 59: 227S; 1994.
47. Frank GC. Am J Clin Nutr 59: 207S; 1994.
48. Baranowski T. In Handbook of Health Behavior Research I: Personal and Social Determinants,
(Grochman DS, Ed), Plenum Press, New York, 1997, pg 179.
49. Buzzard IM, Siever YA. Am J Clin Nutr 59: 275S; 1994.
50. Contento I, et al. J Nutr Educ 27: 284; 1995.
51. Cypel YS, Guenther PM, Petot GJ. JADA 97: 289; 1997.
52. Crawford PB, et al. JADA 94: 626; 1994.
53. Frank GC, et al. JADA 71: 26; 1977.
54. McPherson RS, et al. Pediatrics 86: 520; 1990.
55. Baranowski T, et al. JADA 86: 1381; 1986.
56. Nelson M, Atkinson M, Darbyshire S. Br J Nutr 72: 649; 1994.
57. Nelson M, Atkinson M, Darbyshire S. Br J Nutr 76: 31; 1996.
58. Faggiano F, et al. Epidemiology 3: 379; 1992.
59. Hess MA, Ed. Portion Photos of Popular Foods. The American Dietetic Association & Center for
Nutrition Education, University of Wisconsin-Stout, 1997.
60. Weber JL, et al. Am J Clin Nutr 69: 782S; 1999.
61. Farris RP, et al. JADA 85: 1315; 1985.
62. Bandini LG, et al. Am J Clin Nutr 52: 421; 1990.
63. Schoeller DA. Metabolism 44: 18S; 1995.
64. Goran MI. Pediatrics 101: 505S; 1998.
65. Lindquist CH, et al. Obesity Res 8: 2; 2000.
66. Koehler KM, et al. JADA 100: 205, 2000.
67. McPherson RS, et al. Prev Medicine 31: 11S; 2000.
2705_frame_C21 Page 523 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:24 PM
21
Methods and Tools for Dietary Intake Assessment in
Individuals vs. Groups
Ruth E. Patterson
Introduction
Dietary intake is an important, modifiable determinant of health and longevity. Compre-
hensive reviews of the literature have consistently concluded that clear, causal links exist
between food intake and major causes of morbidity and mortality, such as coronary heart
disease, cancer, diabetes, and obesity.1-3 In addition, undernutrition continues to be a
substantial health problem in many countries.4
Given the importance of diet in human health, assessment of dietary intake plays a
pivotal role in efforts to improve the health of individuals and populations throughout
the world. Dietary intake data are used for three major purposes:
0-8493-2705-9/01/$0.00+$1.50
© 2002 by CRC Press LLC 523
2705_frame_C21 Page 524 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:24 PM
Methods and Tools for Dietary Intake Assessment in Individuals vs. Groups 525
for assessing food intake. The principal problems are the large respondent burden of
recording food intake and the impact on usual food consumption caused by record keep-
ing. Respondents may alter their normal food choices merely to simplify record keeping
or because they are sensitized to food choices. The latter reason appears more likely among
women,6 restrained eaters,7 obese respondents,8 or participants in a dietary intervention.9
Other sources of error by respondents include mistakes or omissions in describing foods
and assessing portion sizes.
Unannounced, interviewer-administered 24-hour dietary recalls are often recommended
because respondents cannot change what they ate retrospectively.10 One major disadvan-
tage of dietary recalls is that they rely on the respondent’s memory and ability to estimate
portion sizes. In addition, it cannot be verified that social desirability does not influence
self-report of the previous day’s intake. A noteworthy benefit of recalls is that they are
appropriate for low literacy populations.
Both records and recalls are expensive and time-consuming. However, the major scien-
tific issue with records/recalls concerns the issue of day-to-day variability in intake, which
means that several days of records/recalls are required to characterize usual intake. Using
data on variability in intake from food records completed by 194 participants in the Nurses
Health Study, 11 the number of days needed to estimate the mean intakes for individuals
within 10% of “true” means would be 57 days for fat, 117 days for vitamin C, and 67 days
for calcium. For estimating food consumption for individuals, variability can be even
greater. For example, the number of days needed to estimate the following foods within
10% of “true” means would be 55 days for white fish and 217 days for carrots. Unfortu-
nately, research has shown that reported energy intake, nutrient intake, and recorded
numbers of foods decreases with as few as four days of recording dietary intake.12 These
changes may reflect reduced accuracy and completeness of recording intake or actual
changes in dietary intake to reduce the burden of recording intake. In either case, there
are considerable limitations on the usefulness of this methodology for characterizing usual
intake in individuals.
to “2+ per day” for foods and “6+ per day” for beverages. Portion sizes are often assessed
by asking respondents to mark “small,” “medium,” or “large” in comparison to a given
medium portion size. However, some questionnaires only ask about the frequency of
intake of a “usual” portion size (e.g., 3 ounces of meat).
The food list in an FFQ is chosen to capture data on major sources of energy and nutrients
in the population of interest, between-person variability in food intake, and specific sci-
entific hypotheses. The choice of a food list is part data-driven and part scientific judgment.
One data-based approach uses record/recall data to determine the major nutrient sources
in the diet (i.e., the contribution of specific foods to the total population intake of nutrients).
Information on food sources of nutrients in the American population have been
published13,14 but are often unavailable for specific population groups (e.g., Hispanics).
However, a food is only informative if intake varies from person to person such that it
discriminates between respondents. Therefore, another data-based approach to choosing
the food list is to start with a extensive list of foods that is completed by a representative
sample of the larger population. Stepwise regression analysis is performed where the
dependent variable is the nutrient and the independent variable is frequency of consump-
tion of foods.15 In this process the computer algorithm ranks foods by the degree to which
they explain the most between-person variance in nutrient intake, which is reflected in
change in cumulative R2. In addition to these two data-driven methods, items are often
added to a questionnaire because of specific hypotheses (e.g., does consumption of soy
foods reduce breast cancer risk).
A particularly challenging issue in FFQ food lists has to do with assessing intake of
mixed dishes. For example, many FFQs ask about frequency of pizza consumption. How-
ever, from a nutrient perspective there is no accurate way to define “pizza.” Depending
on whether it is meat or vegetarian, thick or thin crust, tomato or pesto sauce, and so
forth, pizza may be either low-fat and high-carbohydrate or extremely high-fat and high-
protein. However, it is unreasonable to ask individuals to disaggregate their pizza into
servings of breads, vegetables, meats, cheese, and added fats. Therefore FFQs typically
strike an uneasy compromise between asking about some mixed dishes (e.g., pizza, ham-
burgers, tacos) while also asking the respondent to provide information on foods contained
in their mixed dishes: “cheese, including cheese added to foods and in cooking.” Unfor-
tunately, asking about both “lasagna” and “cheese in cooking” presents the peril of double
counting. There are little or no data to guide an investigator in making these judgments.
Finally, to save space and reduce respondent burden, similar foods are often grouped
into a single line item (e.g., white bread, bagels, and pita bread). When grouping foods,
important considerations include whether they are nutritionally similar enough to be
grouped and whether the group will make cognitive sense to the respondent. For example,
a food group composed of rice, macaroni, and cooked breakfast cereal may be nutritionally
sensible. However, this question could be difficult to answer because it requires summing
food consumption across different meal occasions.
Finally, FFQ summary questions that ask about usual intake of fruits and vegetables are
often included in the questionnaire because the long lists of these foods needed to capture
micronutrient intake can lead to overreporting of intake.16
Methods and Tools for Dietary Intake Assessment in Individuals vs. Groups 527
one population group (e.g., older caucasian men) may be wholly inappropriate for another
subgroup (e.g., teenage African-American females). Finally, given changes in the food
supply over time, such as the introduction of specially manufactured low-fat foods, ques-
tionnaires can become obsolete. Therefore the measurement characteristics (i.e., reliability
and validity) of an FFQ need to be assessed for each new questionnaire and each new
population group assessed.
Reliability generally refers to reproducibility, or whether an instrument will measure an
exposure (e.g., nutrient intake) in the same way twice on the same respondents. Validity,
which is a higher standard, refers to the accuracy of an instrument. Generally a validity
study compares a practical, epidemiologic instrument (e.g., an FFQ) with a more accurate
but more burdensome method (e.g., dietary recalls).
Reliability and validity of an FFQ are typically investigated using measures of bias and
precision. Bias is the degree to which the FFQ accurately assesses mean intakes in a group.
Lack of bias is especially important when the goal is to measure absolute intakes for
comparison to dietary recommendations or some other objective criteria. For example,
when the aim is to estimate how close Americans are to meeting the dietary recommen-
dation to eat five servings of fruits and vegetables per day, it is critical to know whether
the assessment instrument used under- or overestimates fruit and/or vegetable intake.
Precision concerns whether an FFQ accurately ranks individuals from low to high nutrient
intakes, which is typically the information needed to assess associations of dietary intake
with risk of disease. It is important to remember than an instrument can be reliable without
being accurate. That is, it can yield the same nutrient estimates two times and be wrong
(e.g., biased upward) both times. Alternatively, an instrument can be reliable and consis-
tently yield an accurate group mean (e.g., unbiased), but have poor precision such that it
does not accurately rank individuals in the group from low to high in nutrient intake.
A reliability study compares intake estimates from two administrations of the FFQ in
the same group of respondents. If an instrument is reliable, the mean intake estimates
should not vary substantially between the two administrations. In addition, correlation
coefficients between nutrient intakes estimated from two administrations of the FFQ in
the same group of respondents should be high, and are generally in the range of 0.6 to
0.7. Reliability is easy to measure and gives an upper bound as to the accuracy of an
instrument. While a high reliability coefficient does not imply a high validity coefficient,
a low reliability coefficient clearly means poor validity. That is, if an instrument cannot
measure a stable phenomenon (such as usual nutrient intake) the same way twice, it clearly
cannot be accurate.
In a validity study, bias is assessed by comparing the mean estimates from an FFQ to
those from multiple days of records/recalls in the same respondents. This comparison
allows us to determine whether nutrient intake estimates from an FFQ appear to be under-
or overreported in comparison to the criterion measure. Precision is measured as the
correlation coefficients between nutrient intake estimates from the FFQ in comparison to
a criterion measure, and typically range from 0.4 to 0.6. However, lower correlation
coefficients (<0.4) are not unusual for nutrients that are poorly estimated with an FFQ,
such as energy.17 In addition, inclusion of dietary supplement use will often improve
correlation coefficients (>0.8) because supplement use may be more accurately assessed
and/or because supplement doses can be extraordinarily high compared to dietary intake,
and thereby markedly increase the variability in intake for a nutrient. Some studies also
assess precision by ranking nutrient intake estimates, dividing them into categories (e.g.,
quartiles) and comparing these to similar categories calculated from another instrument.
However classifying a continuous exposure into a small number of categories does not
reduce the effects of measurement error, and therefore this analysis does not provide
additional information above correlation coefficients.18
2705_frame_C21 Page 528 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:24 PM
The theory behind these (so-called) validity studies is that the major sources of error
associated with FFQs are independent of those associated with records and recalls, which
avoids spuriously high estimates of validity resulting from correlated errors. The errors
associated with FFQs are the limitations imposed by a fixed list of foods and the respon-
dents’ ability to report usual frequency of food consumption (and usual portion sizes)
over a broad time frame. In contrast, diet records are open-ended, do not depend on
memory, and permit measurement of portion sizes. Errors in food records result from
coding errors and changes in eating habits while keeping the records. Error in recalls
results from estimation of portion sizes, participant memory, and coding errors.
Nonetheless, it is apparent that there are correlated errors between FFQs and records
or recalls. Social desirability could influence how participants record or recall food intake
across all types of dietary assessment instruments.6,9 Participant error in estimating portion
sizes could bias recall and FFQ estimates of intake in similar ways. There are also correlated
errors in nutrient databases. Finally, research using doubly-labeled water to determine
energy requirements have demonstrated significant underreporting of energy intakes from
food records that may vary by participant characteristics.8 It is important to be aware of
the limitations of records and recalls as criterion measures of dietary intake, and cautiously
interpret results based on these measures.
A final note is that an FFQ cannot, in and of itself, be validated. Only individual nutrient
intake estimates can be validated by comparison of a nutrient estimate from the FFQ to
a more accurate measure.
Methods and Tools for Dietary Intake Assessment in Individuals vs. Groups 529
instruments. These include three general types: 1) ecologic-level measures such as food
disappearance data or household food inventories, 2) short instruments that target a limited
number of foods and/or nutrients, and 3) questionnaires that assess dietary behavior.
Ecologic-Level Measures
One well-known ecologic assessment of dietary intake is per capita food consumption
estimated using national data on the total food supply. Publications from the Food and
Agricultural Organization provide data on a country’s total food supply from which non-
consumption uses (such as exports and livestock feed) are subtracted, after which the total
remaining food available can be divided by the population to obtain the per capita estimate
of intake. These population intakes have been correlated with disease incidence across
countries in provocative hypothesis-generating studies.21-24
Other ecologic measures, such as supermarket sale receipts,25 have been developed and
evaluated. Household food inventories are another example. In one study, the presence
(in the house) of 15 high-fat foods was found to correlate with household members’ dietary
fat intake at 0.42 (p<0.001).26 Individuals with ≤ 4 high-fat foods in their house had a mean
of 32% energy from fat compared to 37% for those with ≥ 8 high-fat foods. Poor household
food availability has also been shown to be significantly associated with greater individual-
level measures of food insecurity.27
Targeted Instruments
Dietary assessment instruments that measure a limited number of foods and/or nutrients
are most useful when the target food/nutrient is not distributed throughout the food
supply. For example, dietary fat is widely distributed in dairy foods, meats, added fats,
desserts, prepared foods, etc. Therefore, short instruments that attempt to estimate fat
intake tend to be biased and imprecise.28,29 Alternatively, intake of the isoflavones genestein
and daidzain, which are largely limited to soy foods, can be captured with a relatively
short instrument (15 foods).30
Behavioral Instruments
The development of diet behavioral instruments was motivated by problems with assess-
ing dietary intervention effectiveness, particularly low-fat interventions. Traditional com-
prehensive instruments, such as records and FFQs, yield fairly imprecise estimates of fat
intake that may not be sensitive to an intervention focused on changing participants’
dietary behavior. One of the best known instruments of this type is the fat-related diet
habits questionnaire.31 This instrument was based on an anthropologic model that
described low-fat dietary change as four types:
Methods and Tools for Dietary Intake Assessment in Individuals vs. Groups 531
these reasons, FFQs are not generally useful for assessing an individual’s nutrient intake
for purposes of counseling.
However, data on food consumption from FFQs has been used for individual feedback.
For example, Kristal et al. developed computer programs for tailored feedback to partic-
ipants in a self-help dietary intervention that used FFQ data to provide food-specific
recommendations to reach nutritional goals (e.g., “if you use low-fat mayonnaise instead
of regular mayonnaise you will cut your fat by 28 g per week”).35 Because the feedback
provided to the participants is food based and taken directly from their responses (e.g.,
type of mayonnaise used and frequency consumed), this approach avoids the black box
problems associated with using FFQs to estimate nutrient intake.
null or spurious associations. Prentice used data from FFQs collected in a low-fat dietary
intervention trial to simulate the effects of random and systematic error on an association
of dietary fat and breast cancer, where the true relative risk (RR) was assumed to be 4.0.36
Assuming only random error exists in the estimate of fat intake, the projected (i.e.,
observed) RR for fat and breast cancer would be 1.4. Assuming both random error and
systematic error exists, the projected RR would be 1.1, similar to that reported in a recent
meta-analysis on dietary fat and breast cancer.37 Data on systematic error from biomarker
studies, combined with these types of statistical simulations, clearly suggest that measures
of self-reported dietary intake may not be adequate to detect many associations of diet
with disease, even when a strong relationship exists. It is important to note that records/
recalls are not exempt from these biases.
Finally, FFQs cannot provide detailed information on specific foods (e.g., brand names)
or eating patterns (e.g., meals per day or consumption of breakfast) that may be important
in some research studies.
1. The population mean intake should be 30% energy from fat, in which case
approximately half of the group will have intakes exceeding that level, or
2705_frame_C21 Page 533 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:24 PM
Methods and Tools for Dietary Intake Assessment in Individuals vs. Groups 533
2. The entire population should have intakes less than or equal to 30% energy from
fat, in which case the group mean will be several percentage points below 30%.
If the public health objective is the first goal listed, then nutrition monitoring can be
appropriately performed with a single 24-hour record/recall for determination of mean
intake in the population. Alternatively, if the public health objective is the second, then
multiple records/recalls (per person) will need to be collected for assessment of intake
distribution in the population to determine the proportion of individuals consuming more
than 30% energy from fat.
Summary
Much of what has been presented here is summarized in Tables 21.1 through 21.3. Spe-
cifically, Table 21.1 summarizes the major scientific and practical advantages and disad-
vantages of the major dietary assessment methods. Table 21.2 provides an overview of
the issues regarding use of data from dietary intake assessment methods. Table 21.3 gives
a summary of consideration regarding use of dietary intake assessment in individuals
versus groups.
The use of sophisticated computerized technologies and internet accessibility has the
potential to address many of the practical and logistic limitations of the major dietary
intake assessment methods. For example, a computer screen could provide life-size pic-
tures of foods to help respondents more accurately estimate serving sizes. A user-friendly
computer-administered dietary recall could eliminate the costs associated with this
method of collecting data. A touch-screen FFQ program, with algorithms for limiting
questions to foods eaten with some minimal frequency, could eliminate the unfriendly
format of the questionnaire and tailor the food list. Nonetheless, these practical advances
will not eliminate the scientific problems inherent in dietary self-report. In particular, the
2705_frame_C21 Page 534 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:24 PM
issues of systematic and person-specific biases in self-report can likely only by addressed
by use of objective biomarkers for identification, quantification, and correction of random
and systematic error.39
It is clear from this brief overview that choosing the appropriate dietary assessment
method is a complex decision based on the specific objective, with an eye toward the
competing demands of accuracy and practicality. There is no right or wrong approach, only
the best possible measure given the specific objectives of the assessment. In spite of all the
challenges and limitations of dietary assessment methods, these data will continue to serve
an essential role in efforts to improve the health and longevity of individuals and groups.
TABLE 21.1
Summary of the Major Advantages and Disadvantages of Dietary Assessment Methods
Food Frequency Questionnaire
Characteristics Single Record/Recall Multiple Record/Recalls per Person (FFQ) Brief Assessment Instruments
Brief Description Detailed recording of everything Multiple days (per person) of Measure of usual intake determined Diverse group of short tools
consumed in one day recording of everything consumed from frequencies of consumption of developed to target limited number
about 100 foods (or food groups) of foods, nutrients, and/or dietary
behavior
Scientific Features
Advantages Open-ended format appropriate for (Same as single records/recalls) Captures data on usual, long-term Ideal for studies where
all types of eating patterns 3-4 days of records/recalls have been intake comprehensive assessment is not
Provides detailed information on used to characterize usual intake in Can be used retrospectively needed
foods consumed individuals Some are non-intrusive and therefore
Provides data that are comparable relatively objective
across populations and time Behavioral assessments may be more
Recalls can’t affect (past) food sensitive to dietary interventions
2705_frame_C21 Page 535 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:24 PM
Advantages Recalls do not require literate (Same as single records/recalls) Fairly low respondent burden Low respondent burden
respondents Once developed, scannable FFQs are Usually simple and inexpensive to
Because recalls are interviewer inexpensive and easy to analyze code and analyze
administered, data can be collected
in a standardized way
Disadvantages Expensive to collect, code, and (Same as single records/recalls) FFQ development costs are
analyze Multiple records or recalls are extremely high
extremely burdensome for
participants
535
* All types of dietary self-report are subjective and are subject to under-reporting and person-specific biases associated with sex, obesity, social desirability, etc.
536
TABLE 21.2
Summary of the Issues Regarding Use of Data from Dietary Intake Assessment Methods
Multiple Record/Recalls Food Frequency Questionnaire
Data Single Record/Recall per Person (FFQ) Brief Assessment Instruments
Appropriate use To estimate absolute mean values As an approximation of usual Ranking individuals from low to Ranking individuals from low to
of data for intakes of foods and nutrients intake in an individual if used high intakes for foods or nutrients high intakes for the specific food
Group means and standard with caution and recognition that or nutrient being targeted
deviations for comparison to there will be considerable
2705_frame_C21 Page 536 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:24 PM
Inappropriate use Ranking respondents from low to Estimation of absolute nutrient Estimation of absolute intakes for
of data* high intakes intakes for comparison to other nutrients
For determination of the percent of questionnaires or populations
population above (or below) some Just because an FFQ has been
cut-point “validated” does not mean that it
assesses all nutrients with good,
or equal, accuracy
Data not available These methods cannot be used to (Same as single record/recall) Eating pattern information (e.g., (Same as FFQ)
assess dietary intake in the past meals per day).
Detailed information on foods
consumed, such as brand names
* Because of considerable random and systematic error, no forms of dietary self-report data should be regarded as “truth.”
Handbook of Nutrition and Food
TABLE 21.3
Summary of Considerations Regarding Use of Dietary Intake Assessment in Individuals vs. Groups
Multiple Record/Recalls per Food Frequency Questionnaire
Single Record/Recall Person (FFQ) Brief Assessment Instruments
Individual Assessment
Appropriate Use Qualitative use in clinical setting (Same as single record/recall) To provide feedback regarding Targeted instrument may be
Teaching tool regarding food 3-4 days can be used as an respondent consumption of a food appropriate for individual
composition approximation of usual intake vs. recommended intake counseling for the food or nutrient
For self-monitoring being assessed
Inappropriate Use As estimate of usual intake Nutrient intake estimates too Reliable estimate of absolute
imprecise for individual intakes
counseling
2705_frame_C21 Page 537 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:24 PM
Research Studies
Appropriate Use For comparing mean intakes in (Same as single record/recall) For ranking individuals from low Where costs or logistic realities
control vs. intervention group Validity substudies for comparison to high intakes for determination prohibit use of a comprehensive
As a check of FFQ mean intake of nutrient intake estimates to of associations with disease risk assessment instrument
estimates for a group FFQ
Inappropriate Use When characterization of usual, (Same as single record/recall) For estimation of absolute intakes In cases where there is the potential
long-term diet is the exposure of In study population where When comparable data needed for important, new research
interest respondent burden will result in across markedly different questions to emerge
poor quality data populations
Nutrition Monitoring of Populations
Appropriate Use Nutrition monitoring of group (Same as single record/recall)
means, including trends analyses 3-4 days can approximate usual
Methods and Tools for Dietary Intake Assessment in Individuals vs. Groups
Inappropriate Use To determine percentage of For estimation of absolute intakes To estimate absolute intakes
population meeting a dietary For time trends analyses because
recommendation or at risk changing food supply cam make
questionnaires obsolete
537
2705_frame_C21 Page 538 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:24 PM
References
1. National Research Council and Committee on Diet and Health, Diet and Health: Implications
for Reducing Chronic Disease, National Academy Press, Washington, DC, 1989.
2. US Dept of Health and Human Services, Public Health Service, DHHS (PHS) publication 88-
50210, The Surgeon General’s Report on Nutrition and Health, Washington, DC, 1988.
3. World Cancer Research Fund and the American Institute for Cancer Research, Food, Nutrition,
and the Prevention of Cancer: A Global Perspective. Potter J. Ed, American Institute for Cancer
Research, Washington DC, 1997.
4. Torun B, Chew F. In Modern Nutrition in Health and Disease, 8th ed (Shils ME, Olson JA, Shike
M, Eds.), Lea & Febiger, Philadelphia, PA, 1994, pg 950.
5. Patterson RE. In Nutrition in the Prevention and Treatment of Disease, Coulston M, Rock CL,
Monson E, Eds, Academic Press (in press).
6. Hebert JR, Clemow L, Pbert L, et al. Int J Epidemiol 24: 389; 1995.
7. Jansen A. Br J Clin Psychol 35: 381; 1996.
8. Black AE, Prentice AM, Goldberg GR, et al. JADA 93: 572; 1993.
9. Kristal AR, Andrilla CAH, Koepsell TD, et al. JADA 98: 40; 1998.
10. Buzzard IM, Faucett CL, Jeffery RW, et al. JADA 96: 574; 1996.
11. Willet W. Nutritional Epidemiology, Oxford University Press, New York, 1990.
12. Rebro S, Patterson RE, Kristal AR, Chaney C. JADA 98: 1163; 1998.
13. Block G, Dresser CM, Hartman AM, Carrol MD. Am J Epidemiol 122: 13; 1985.
14. Block G, Dresser CM, Hartman AM, Carrol MD. Am J Epidemiol 122: 27; 1985.
15. Willet W. Nutritional Epidemiology. 2nd ed., Oxford University Press, New York, 1998.
16. Kristal AR, Vizenor NC, Patterson RE, et al. Cancer Epidemiol Biomarkers Prev 9: 939; 2000.
17. Patterson RE, Kristal AR, Carter RA, et al. Ann Epidemiol 9: 178; 1999.
18. Armstrong BK, White E, Saracci R. In: Monographs in Epidemiology and Biostatistics, Oxford
University Press, Oxford, 1994.
19. Black AE. Eur J Clin Nutr 54: 395; 2000.
20. Kristal AR, Feng Z, Coates RJ, et al. Am J Epidemiol 146: 856; 1997.
21. Armstrong B, Doll R. Int J Cancer 15: 617; 1975.
22. Gray GE, Pike MC, Henderson BE. Br J Cancer 39: 1; 1979.
23. Prentice RL, Sheppard L. Cancer Causes Control 1: 81; 1990.
24. Roberts DC. Prostaglandins Leukotrienes Essential Fatty Acids 44: 97; 1991.
25. Kerr GR, Amante P, Decker M, Callen PW. Am J Clin Nutr 37: 622; 1983.
26. Patterson RE, Kristal AR, Shannon J, et al. Am J Pub Health 87: 272; 1997.
27. Kendall A, Olson CM, Frongillo EA. J Nutr 125: 2793; 1995.
28. Neuhouser ML, Kristal AR, McLerran D, et al. Cancer Epidemiol Biomarkers Prev 8: 649; 1999.
29. Tinker LF, Patterson RE, Kristal AR, et al. JADA (in press).
30. Kirkley P, Patterson RE, Lampe J. JADA 99: 558; 1999.
31. Kristal AR, Shattuck AL, Henry HJ. JADA 90: 214; 1990.
32. Patterson RE, Kristal AR, White E. Am J Pub Health 86: 1394; 1996.
33. Neuhouser ML, Kristal AR, Patterson RE. JADA 98: 45; 1998.
34. Thompson FE, Subar AF, Kipnis V, et al. Eur J Clin Nutr 52: S45; 1998.
35. Kristal AR, Curry SJ, Shattuck AL, et al. Prev Med 31: 380; 2000.
36. Prentice RL. J Natl Cancer Inst 88: 1738; 1996.
37. Hunter DJ, Speigelman D, Adami HO, et al. N Engl J Med 334: 356; 1996.
38. Beaton GH, Milner J, Corey P. Am J Clin Nutr 32: 2546; 1979.
39. Prentice RL, Sugar E, Wang CY, et al. Pub Health Nutr (in press).
2705_frame_C22 Page 539 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:24 PM
22
The Use of Food Frequency Questionnaires in Minority
Populations
Rebecca S. Reeves
Food frequency questionnaires (FFQs) are selected by investigators to assess the usual
food or nutrient intakes of groups or individuals because they are relatively easy to
administer, less expensive than other dietary assessment methods, and can be adapted to
all racial and ethnic populations in the United States.1 Investigators can also modify these
dietary instruments for telephone interviews or self-administered mailed surveys. FFQs
are commonly used in epidemiological studies on diet and disease, but are also chosen
by investigators as the dietary assessment instrument in clinical intervention studies. The
use of these questionnaires in minority populations in the U.S. is increasing for several
reasons: the country is becoming more racially and ethnically diverse,2 government agen-
cies have placed emphasis on including minority population in health-related research,3
and variations in disease incidence and dietary practices within and across ethnic minor-
ities offer important opportunities for examining the role of diet in relation to risk for
chronic disease.4
This section reviews 12 published studies evaluating the validity and/or reliability of
FFQs used in measuring dietary intakes in adult minority populations in the U.S. over
the last 20 years. Also included are selected samples of FFQs and information on obtaining
copies. Recommendations on the use of these FFQs are discussed.
A search of the National Library of Medicine’s (Bethesda, MD) MEDLINE system was
conducted using various terms such as validity, reliability, reproducibility, diet, food frequency
questionnaire, minority, Hispanic, black, Asian, Pacific-islander and native America to identify
articles published between 1980 and 2000. These searches were supplemented by cross-
referencing from author reference lists. Articles were selected that described the evaluation
of any FFQ that assessed the usual daily diet and provided data on the validity and/or
reliability of the instrument in a specific U.S. ethnic minority population or a diverse
population representing at least 40% minority persons. The degree of reliability or validity
of the instrument reported was not considered an inclusion factor. Validity and reliability
studies that were reported in the same article were considered separately and are refer-
enced in different tables. The measures of performance chosen were reliability, comparison
of means (when available), and validity, because these are usually reported to describe
the results of the evaluation of the FFQ. Correlation coefficients were selected as indicators
of reliability and validity because they are commonly used and are more easily summa-
rized. Factors that can influence correlation coefficients are the number of days between
the times the questionnaire is administered (reliability coefficients) and the number of
0-8493-2705-9/01/$0.00+$1.50
© 2002 by CRC Press LLC 539
2705_frame_C22 Page 540 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:24 PM
days of food records or 24-hour recalls used for the referent period (validity coefficients).
Unadjusted correlation coefficients if available are reported in the tables because of the
considerable variation in the kinds of adjustment procedures that were used in these
studies and the lack of standardization across studies for methods used.
Terms used to describe FFQs in the tables:
The twelve studies reviewed for this section were divided into two groups based on
ethnic participation. Within the group labeled Minority studies, two consisted of only
black subjects,5,6 one of Asian,7 and one of Hispanic subjects.8 In the group labeled Diverse,
two studies included black and white subjects,9,10 three studies black, Hispanic, and white
subjects,11,12,13 one study Hispanic and white,14 one study Asian and white,15 and one
recruited Asian, black, Hispanic, and white subjects.16
The review of the validation studies on FFQs was not conclusive. The median correla-
tions (Table 22.1) between questionnaire–based estimates of nutrient intakes and esti-
mates derived from referent methods were not consistent for ethnic groups, but trends
were suggested. The median correlations for black males and females across validation
studies were in the range of 0.23 to 0.46; for Hispanic females, 0.32 to 0.49 except for one
study conducted in Starr County, Texas which reported a median correlation of 0.75; for
white males and females, 0.53, and for Asian males and females, 0.53. If you consider a
measure of ≥0.05 as satisfactory or good, 0.30 to 0.49 as fair, and <0.30 as poor,15 then
these median correlations suggest that black and Hispanic groups do not perform
extremely well on FFQs.
The validation correlations for total energy, total fat, and vitamin A were inconsistent
and in some cases very low across studies. In Table 22.2 the correlation coefficients for
total fat ranged from 0.23 to 0.65, with the higher correlations usually found in the Asian
or white populations. A similar trend was found for energy among the various groups.
The correlation coefficients for Hispanic and black populations were commonly in the
range of 0.24 to 0.43, but in the white and Asian groups the coefficients ranged from 0.41
to 0.61. Values for vitamin A were more inconsistent, ranging from 0.15 to 0.67 across all
groups. The number of days of food records and recalls that are compared against FFQs
can explain some of these low correlations, especially for vitamin A. Many days are
required to provide a precise estimate of vitamin A intake, and in these studies the greatest
number of daily recalls or records collected over one year was 28. Even in this study,
certain subgroup correlations for vitamin A were still 0.23 and 0.29.
The study5 that reported serum nutrient concentrations of carotenoids, vitamin E, lyco-
pene, and lutein as a referent reported correlations that were much lower for smokers
2705_frame_C22 Page 541 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:24 PM
TABLE 22.1
Median and Reported Range of Correlation Coefficients
Median and Reported Range
Study Validity Coefficients Reliability Coefficients
Diverse Groups
Baumgartner et al.14 0.50 (0.21–0.57) HF+WF (adjusted value) 0.62 (0.40–0.71) Unadjusted
Hankin et al.15 0.63 (0.58–0.67) Chinese females
0.46 (0.38–0.64) White females
0.56 (0.49–0.60) Filipino females
0.38 (0.29–0.41) Hawaiian females
0.60 (0.23–0.68) Japanese females
0.58 (0.38–0.68) Chinese males
0.45 (0.34–0.64) White males
0.57 (0.21–0.84) Filipino males
0.36 (0.26–0.62) Hawaiian males
0.55 (0.46–0.77) Japanese males
Kristal et al.11 Baseline
0.31 (0.26–0.46) Black females 0.51(0.37–0.60) Black females
0.35 (0.25–0.48) Hispanic females 0.51(0.19–0.75) Hispanic females
Six months (control group)
0.40 (0.29–0.49) Black females
0.37 (–0.01–0.48) Hispanic females
Larkin et al.9 0.43 (0.26–0.62) White males
0.23 (0.09–0.41) Black males
0.44 (0.27–0.57) White females
0.32 (0.24–0.43) Black females
Liu et al.10 0.64 (0.50–0.86) White males 0.70 (0.60–0.91) White M+F
0.53 (0.13–0.68) White females 0.58 (0.45–0.85) Black M+F
0.42 (0.23–0.67) Black males
0.27 (0.04–0.53) Black females
Mayer-Davis et al.12 0.58 (0.30–0.77) White females, urban 0.71 (0.43–0.82) White females
0.38 (0.22–0.62) Black females, urban 0.62 (0.26–0.69) Black females
0.57 (0.24–0.68) White females, rural 0.64 (0.25–0.88) White females, rural
0.32 (0.21–0.44) Hispanic females, rural 0.58 (0.33–0.66) Hispanic females, rural
Stram et al.16 Average correlation for amount
0.30 (0.16–0.41) Black M+F
0.48 (0.27–0.62) Hispanic M+F
0.57 (0.48–0.64) White M+F
Suitor et al.13 0.32 (0.12–0.52) All females combined 0.88 (0.80–0.94) All females
Minority Groups
(≤0.02) than for nonsmokers (<0.40). The investigators summarize that their FFQ is rea-
sonably valid for use in a Southern, urban, low-income black population, except for the
analysis of lutein and lycopene.
In most of the studies reviewed, the FFQ overestimated the mean of the referent recall
or records, and in some cases by nontrivial amounts. One explanation for this difference
was, again, the number of days of recalls or records collected for comparison to the FFQ.
Depending on which nutrient is of interest in the study and the time period the participant
542
TABLE 22.2
Food Frequency Questionnaire (FFQ) Validity Studies among Diverse Adult Populations in the U.S.
Reference Sample Instrument Response Categories Validation Standard Design Results
Baumgartner 43 HF (Hispanic) 140 Items; interviewer- Included per month, 4-Day food records Compared subject’s report Pearson correlation coefficients
et al.14 89 NHF administered; open- week or day of past month’s food (log transformed and energy
ended; referent period intake against 4 randomly adjusted); nutrients which
was previous 4 weeks selected nonconsecutive differed significantly by ethnicity
day food records; third between FFQ2 + FFQ3 and food
FFQ taken 6 months after records:
1st FFQ to recall original Protein(g)
month, then compared HF 0.40 NHF 0.35
2705_frame_C22 Page 542 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:24 PM
HF — 0.48
WF — 0.68
Beta-carotene (unadjusted)
BF — 0.34
WF — 0.23
HF — 0.27
WF — 0.57
Educational level associated with
poor validity of FFQ and/or FR
measures.
543
544
Larkin et al. 9 43 BM In Michigan FFQ-113 9 (Not in past year to One 24-hr recall + 3-day Compared by sex and Pearson correlation (nonadjusted)
2705_frame_C22 Page 544 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:24 PM
48 BF food items based on more than once a day) food record collected 4 ethnic group (BM, BF, values between FFQ and 16 days
64 WM data from NFCS 77-78; times/yr about 3 WM, WF) report of food of FR:
73 WF semiquantitative; months apart. FR’s intake (4 sets of food Energy:
(40% subjects black) collected food intake administered and record) against the FFQ BM — 0.23
over past 12 months reviewed in subject’s BF — 0.26
home. FFQ WM — 0.41
administered in WF — 0.43
subject’s home about 3 Protein (gm):
months after 4th set of BM — 0.30
records had been BF — 0.40
completed WM — 0.41
WF — 0.36
Total fat (gm):
BM — 0.23
BF — 0.35
WM — 0.44
WF — 0.39
Vitamin A(IU):
BM — 0.15
BF — 0.28
WM — 0.26
WF — 0.27
FFQ showed larger mean nutrient
intakes compared to FR. Black
M+F had lower coefficients
between FFQ and FR than white
M+F
Handbook of Nutrition and Food
Liu et al. 10 33 BM About 300 items in 20 Open-ended Seven 24-hr food recalls Compared subject’s recall Mean nutrient values for WM are
32 BF categories; Interviewer- collected by phone of last 30 days against similar between 2 methods; for
30 WM administered seven 24-hr food recalls WF values from FFQ are
33 WF quantitative FF based generally higher than recalls
on the Western Electric (VitA significantly different); for
dietary history; referent BM + BF values from history are
period is past month. much higher than recalls (VitA+
Kcal significantly different);
Pearson correlations (log
transformed)
Total Calories:
WM — 0.64
WF — 0.47
BM — 0.43
BF — 0.21
Total Fat: (g)
WM — 0.65
WF — 0.37
BM — 0.36
BF — 0.23
Vitamin A: (IU)
2705_frame_C22 Page 545 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:24 PM
WM — 0.67
WF — 0.62
BM — 0.62
BF — 0.32
The Use of Food Frequency Questionnaires in Minority Populations
545
546
Mayer-Davis 32 WF (urban) 114-Item, interviewer- 9 (Never or <1/month to Eight 24-hr recalls over Compared subject’s report Pearson correlations (log-
et al.12 63 BF (urban) administered FFQ; 2 or more times/day) course of 1 year of frequency of intake transformed) between FFQ2 and
30 WF (rural) modified from NCI- (randomly selected from FFQ2 to average of food recalls were:
2705_frame_C22 Page 546 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:24 PM
61 HF (rural) HHHQ to include days, about every 6 eight 24-hr recalls; Energy:
regional and ethnic weeks) WF (urban) — 0.61
food choices; past year BF (urban) — 0.37
WF (rural) — 0.56
HF (rural) — 0.27
Total fat: (g)
WF (urban) — 0.66
BF (urban) — 0.59
WF (rural) — 0.58
HF (rural) — 0.40
Vitamin A: (IU)
WF (urban) — 0.38
BF (urban) — 0.28
WF (rural) — 0.24
HF (rural) — 0.28
Correlations by educational status:
Total fat: (g)
<12 grade — 0.05
12 grade — 0.59
Total CHO: (g)
<12 grade — 0.19
12 grade — 0.53
Saturated fat: (g)
<12 grade — 0.07
12 grade — 0.63
Vitamin A: (IU)
<12 grade — 0.31
12 grade — 0.21
Handbook of Nutrition and Food
Stram et al.16 African-Am Based on Hawaiian Unknown; highest Three random 24-hr An initial FFQ was mailed Corrected correlations for the
151BM, 186 BF Cancer Research Center response for food is >2 recalls conducted by to random sample of regression of mean 24-hr recalls
Japanese FFQ; quantitative by times/day; for phone prospective subjects; 3-24 on the 2nd FFQ by ethnic sex/
224 JM, 222 JF placing serving size beverages, 4 times/day hr recalls were collected group for following nutrients:
Hispanics photos beside the by phone after the initial Total kcals:
136 HM, 123 HF amount category; 8 contact; a second FFQ BM — 0.16 BF — 0.17
Caucasians frequency categories was sent 4-6 weeks after JM — 0.34 JF — 0.19
264 WM, 264 WF for food and 9 for the recalls were HM — 0.33 HF — 0.40
beverages completed; the subjects’ WM — 0.48 WF — 0.28
responses on the 2nd FFQ Total Protein: (g)
were compared against BM — 0.17 BF — 0.22
the 24-hr recall values JM — 0.31 JF — 0.25
HM — 0.27 HF — 0.35
WM — 0.51 WF — 0.38
Total Fat: (g)
BM — 0.29 BF — 0.24
JM — 0.41 JF — 0.32
HM — 0.33 HF — 0.57
WM — 0.57 WF — 0.39
Vitamin A: (IU)
BM — 0.30 BF — 0.22
2705_frame_C22 Page 547 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:24 PM
JM — 0.45 JF — 0.49
HM — 0.62 HF — 0.52
WM — 0.59 WF — 0.58
Suitor et al.13 Initially who provided 3 Willett (Harvard Un.) 111 Unknown (recall of past Three 24-hr recalls Compared female’s report Pearson correlation (unadjusted,
diet recalls: items, self-administered 2 weeks) conducted by phone of food intake between log transformed values) between
WF — 54 (edited foods, portion food recalls and FFQ2 FFQ2’s and recalls
BF — 20 size information which were mailed Energy — 0.41
HF — 18 deleted); developed as Protein — 0.33
Subjects who provided a prenatal FFQ Vitamin A — 0.12
FFQ2 and FR = 62 but Calcium — 0.52
no ethnic breakdown
The Use of Food Frequency Questionnaires in Minority Populations
547
548
Coates et al.5 91 BF HHHQ-original 98 item 4 (Times/day, week, Serum carotenoids, Compared female’s FFQ Pearson correlations (log
FFQ revised to include month or year) alpha-tocopherol, responses to 15-ml transformed, unadjusted)
19 ethnic/regional lycopene, crytoxanthin, nonfasting venous blood between FFQ and serum for
foods resulting in 117 lutein/xeaxanthin sample nonsmokers:
item FFQ; past year Alpha-tocopherol (food only) —
0.19
Provitamin A carotenoids — 0.37
Beta-carotene — 0.34
Cryptoxanthin — 0.37
Lycopene — (-0.02)
Lutein — 0.12
Person correlations (log
transformed, unadjusted) for
smokers were:
Alpha-tocopherol — (–0.12)
Provitamin A carotenoids — 0.07
Beta-carotene — 0.11
Cryptoxanthin — 0.18
Lycopene — (–0.02)
Lutein — 0.11
Results suggest that FFQ was
reasonably valid for black
females. Analysis of lycopene
and lutein may not reflect validity
of the assessment of these
nutrients
Handbook of Nutrition and Food
Forsythe et 80 BF ethnic mix of FFQ-82 items compiled Unknown (weekly Three 24-hr recalls Compared female’s report Paired t-tests examined differences
al.6 African blacks, Asian from Caribbean food intake patterns) of intake against 3, 24-hr between the food recall means
Indians, Caribbean tables, Willett FFQ, recalls, one recall at and the means of the FFQ at time
whites, Guyanese Stower prenatal food prenatal visit and two 1. Most of the 14 nutrients were
Amerindians, and guide, and regional others by phone during significantly different using the
Caribbean Chinese recipes next 7 days. 2nd FFQ two instruments, with the
administered 3 weeks exception of saturated fat,
later vitamin A and caffeine. The
percentage of energy from
protein, CHO, and fat showed no
significant differences on either
method of assessment. Mean
difference scores were computed
between food recalls and time 2
FFQ responses in the subsample.
Significant differences were
found for energy , CHO and
vitamin C and the percentage of
energy from CHO.
The 24-hr recalls did not fully
support the responses provided
on the FFQ’s.
2705_frame_C22 Page 549 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:24 PM
Lee et al.7 74 Chin W 84 Items; interviewer 5 (Day, week, month, One 24-hr recall (typical Compared female’s report Pearson correlations between the
administered; past year or not at all) day during past month) of frequency of intake FFQ and the food recall:
year; portion size asked against the 1-24 recall; Total kcal — 0.05
for foods eaten >1/ Total fat — 0.21
week; 3-dimensional Protein — 0.56
actual size food models Vitamin A — 0.46.
used; type of fat used in Nutrient intakes by FFQ that were
cooking asked significantly higher than 24-hr
recall were total kcal, total fat,
vitamin A, saturated fat,
cholesterol and beta carotene.
Use of only 1-24 hr recall could
The Use of Food Frequency Questionnaires in Minority Populations
is asked to recall on the FFQ, more than four to seven days may be required to capture
the actual intake of the individual.
The reliability coefficients across all diverse and minority studies were much higher
than the validity coefficients (Table 22.3). The median correlations for black males and
females across studies were in the range of 0.51 to 0.88; for Hispanic females, 0.51 to 0.58
except for one study conducted in Starr County, Texas which reported a median correla-
tion of 0.85; for white males and females, 0.64 to 0.71. These coefficients would suggest
that within minority and diverse populations, the FFQ can usually describe with some
consistency the food or nutrient intakes of individuals when administered at two points
in time.
In most of the studies reviewed, the investigators made suggestions and recommenda-
tions for improving the performance of the FFQ in minority populations. It was repeatedly
mentioned that a “gold standard” referent method was not available, so collecting valid
dietary intake data remains challenging. The need to identify a complete food list on the
FFQ that captures all of the foods in the usual diet of the study population was highly
recommended. Depending on the study, the food list should include foods that will
contribute substantially to the nutrients under investigation. This importance of a food
list capturing the usual intake of study participants was demonstrated in the study con-
ducted in Starr County, Texas. Because of the limited number of overall foods that the
participants consumed, the food list of the FFQ was able to reflect the major sources of
food and nutrient intake of these individuals. Because of this unique situation, the nutrient
values from the FFQ were more likely to agree with the values from the food records.
Several suggestions were made regarding administration of the dietary assessment forms
in minority populations. It is recommended that any staff person who is responsible for
interviewing a subject for any dietary assessment measure, whether the conversation takes
place in person, or over the phone should be of the same ethnic background as the subject.
Educational attainment of participants appeared to be a major determinant of the valid-
ity of the dietary assessment measures in several studies. Agreement between the food
frequency and the criterion measure of 24-hour dietary recalls was substantially compro-
mised among individuals with less than a high school education. This was particularly
true within a Hispanic group of one study. In another study, it was found that increasing
validity with increased education suggested that poor education is a barrier to accurate
completion of the FFQ, the food record, or both. In this same study, low educational levels
did not affect reliability measures. These findings would suggest that special efforts are
needed when using dietary assessment tools with participants of low educational status
or culturally diverse dietary habits. Small group instruction and practice in using the
dietary tools could improve the dietary information collected. Instructing participants by
videotape on completing dietary forms is another method to help improve the accuracy
of information.
This section includes examples of the food frequency questionnaires that have been used
or adapted for studies of minority populations. This is not intended to be a complete list
of all the questionnaires that were used in the 12 studies reviewed, nor is inclusion in this
set of examples an implied endorsement of one instrument. The FFQs included are those
that are widely available. The FFQs in this set were originally selected by an investigator
for modification to his/her population, or the FFQ is the actual instrument used to assess
dietary intake. Readers who are interested in using or adapting these dietary assessment
tools should contact the resource people listed with each tool.
In selecting a food frequency questionnaire, the reader should consider several points:
1. What is the primary purpose of the project or study you are planning to conduct
and how does the food intake data relate to the outcome?
TABLE 22.3
Food Frequency Questionnaire (FFQ) Reliability Studies among Adult Minority Populations in the U.S.
Response Categories
References Sample Instrument (range) Design Results
Baumgartner 43 HF (Hispanic) 140-items; interviewer Included per month, Compared 6-month test- Pearson coefficients (log transformed, adjusted) by
et al.14 89 WF administered; semi- week or day retest reproducibility of ethnic group between the 2 FFQ’s for 2 nutrients:
quantitative; referent nutrient estimates from Saturated fat:
period was previous 4 FFQ2 and FFQ3. HF — 0.57
weeks Reproducibility coefficients WF — 0.77
were not reported by ethnic Retinol:
group except for 2 nutrients HF — 0.50
WF — 0.80
Forsythe et al.5 80 BF ethnic mix of African FFQ- 82 items compiled Unknown (weekly Compared 3 wk test-retest Paired t-tests examined differences between the food
blacks, Asian Indians, from Caribbean food intake patterns) reproducibility of nutrient recall means and the means of the FFQ at time 1. Most
Caribbean whites, tables, Willett FFQ, estimates from FFQs and of the 14 nutrients were significantly different using
Guyanese Amerindians, Stower prenatal food food recalls the two instruments, with the exception of saturated
and Caribbean Chinese guide, and regional fat, Vitamin A and caffeine. The percentage of energy
recipes from protein, CHO, and fat showed no significant
2705_frame_C22 Page 551 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:24 PM
159 H F recruited at three quantitative; last three times/day) selected nutrient estimates Fat (% energy):
clinical centers. Because months; portion sizes from baseline and 6 month BF — 0.37
Hispanics recruited at were S, M, L. FFQ FFQ’s in the control group WF — 0.51
Miami clinic only, their collected at screening, only HF — 0.45
data was compared with baseline and six months Analyses were also stratified WF — 0.34
WF from same clinic; data on level of education Vitamin C (unadjusted):
for WF and BF at two BF — 0.60
other centers were WF — 0.67
collapsed and compared HF — 0.75
WF — 0.44
Beta-carotene (unadjusted):
BF — 0.54
WF — 0.61
HF — 0.62
WF — 0.46
551
Liu et al.10 33 black M About 300 items in 20 Open-ended Compared subject’s history Sex-adjusted partial correlation coefficients (log
32 black F categories; interviewer- of last 30 days against transformed, not calorie adjusted) between the first
30 white M administered; baseline history and last histories
33 white F quantitative history Energy:
2705_frame_C22 Page 552 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:24 PM
diet recalls: items, self-administered 2 weeks) food intake between values) between FFQ1 and FFQ2:
WF 54 (edited foods, portion baseline FFQ1 which was Energy — 0.92
BF 20 size information deleted); completed in the clinic and Protein — 0.87
HF 18 developed as a prenatal FFQ2 which was mailed. Vitamin A — 0.89
Subjects who provided FFQ Those returning FFQ2 were Calcium — 0.80
FFQ1 and FFQ2 = 43 but unrepresentative of the
no ethnic breakdown original sample
The Use of Food Frequency Questionnaires in Minority Populations
553
2705_frame_C22 Page 554 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:24 PM
2. What length of time are you interested in assessing food intake? 12 months, 3
months?
3. How current is the food list? Does it reflect the current food supply?
4. Does the food list contain foods that contribute significantly to the nutrients you
are interested in assessing?
5. Does the food list reflect the traditional or cultural foods eaten by your population?
6. Is the nutrient software analysis program updated on a regular basis to reflect
the changing composition of our food supply?
7. Can you individualize the food list of the FFQ to your specific population? How
much latitude do you have to modify the existing questionnaire? Can the existing
software be modified to reflect the changes you wish to make?
8. Request a list of the validity and reliability studies that investigators have con-
ducted using the FFQ you are considering. Were these studies conducted with
populations similar to the groups of persons you wish to recruit into your study?
women. The 140-item FFQ was a modified version of a questionnaire developed by the
Human Nutrition Center, University of Texas School of Public Health — Houston for a
Texas Hispanic population. The FFQ was revised to include important food sources of
energy, macronutrients, and vitamins that were identified following an analysis of food
intake recalls. Emphasis was placed on specific rather than grouped food items because
recall is considered better for specific items. Usual portion size, based on two-dimensional
food models, included data on number of servings, type of food model, and thickness of
food. Common serving descriptions were included for each food item and were based
either on food models or defined portion size. This FFQ was translated into Spanish. For
further information contact R. Sue McPherson, Ph.D., Director, Human Nutrition Center,
Associate Profession of Epidemiology and Nutrition, University of Texas — Houston
School of Public Health, 1200 Herman Pressler, Houston, TX 77030. Phone: 713-500-9317.
References
1. Coates RJ, Monteilh CP. Am J Clin Nutr 65: 1108S; 1997.
2. Spencer G. Projections of the Hispanic Population: 1983-2089. US Department of Commerce,
Bureau of Census, (Series P-25), Washington, DC, 1989.
3. National Institutes of Health, NIH guidelines on the inclusion of women and minorities as
subjects in clinical research, Fed Reg 59: 14508; 1994.
4. Hankin JH, Wilkens LR. Am J Clin Nutr 59: 198S; 1994.
5. Coates RJ, Eley JW, Block G, et al. Am J Epidemiol 15: 658; 1991.
6. Forsythe HE, Gage B. Am J Clin Nutr 59: 203S; 1994.
7. Lee MM, Lee F, Ladenla SW, Miike R. Ann Epidemiol 4: 188; 1994.
8. McPherson RS, Kohl HW, Garcia G, et al. Ann Epidemiol 5: 378; 1995.
2705_frame_C22 Page 557 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:24 PM
9. Larkin FA, Metzner HL, Thompson FE, et al. JADA 89: 215; 1989.
10. Liu K, Slattery M, Jacobs D, et al. Ethnicity Dis 4: 15; 1994.
11. Kristal AR, Feng Z, Coates RJ, et al. Am J Epidemiol 146: 856; 1997.
12. Mayer-Davis JE, Vitolins MZ, Carmichael SL, et al. Ann Epidemiol 9: 314; 1999.
13. Suitor C, Gardner J, Willett WC. JADA 89: 1786; 1989.
14. Baumgartner KB, Gilliland FD, Nicholson CS. Ethnicity Dis 8: 81; 1998.
15. Hankin JH, Wilkens LR, Kolonel LN, Yoshizawa CN. Am J Epidemiol 15: 616; 1991.
16. Stram DO, Hankin JH, Wilkens LR. Am J Epidemiol 15: 358; 2000.
2705_frame_C22 Page 558 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:24 PM
2705_frame_C23 Page 559 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:29 PM
23
Computerized Nutrient Analysis Systems
Introduction
Since the early 1980s, nutrient analysis software programs have taken advantage of micro-
computer technology to offer an effective and time-efficient method for calculating dietary
intake for a variety of users.1,2 For health professionals, the computerized dietary analyses
can be used as a persuasive tool to provide feedback for clients about current food choices
as well as healthful alternatives. For nutrition educators, the hands-on applications of
dietary analysis programs are an integral part of student education. For researchers and
government agencies, the computerized dietary results are an essential component for
documenting and analyzing the usual food intake of individuals and groups or target
populations. Computerized nutrient analysis software is also important for recipe develop-
ment by chefs and caterers, as well as for label information provided by food manufacturers.
Nutrient analysis systems convert individual food choices entered from a food record or
food frequency to nutrients.3,4 Computerized data processing includes creating a data file
with a food code and an amount consumed for each food item reported. The computer
software then links the nutrient composition of each food, stores that information, and sums
across all foods for each nutrient. Dietary analysis software is provided by a large number
of companies and organizations today. These companies continually update the quality and
scope of their services to stay competitive in the marketplace. However, their computer
programs vary considerably in cost, ease of use, features, and capabilities. For the prospec-
tive user, the choice of software requires careful consideration of needs and available
resources of staff, and financial support for computer hardware and peripherals. Charac-
teristics and general operating features of a number of widely used commercial nutrient
software programs with extensive database development are included in Table 23.1.
0-8493-2705-9/01/$0.00+$1.50
© 2002 by CRC Press LLC 559
TABLE 23.1
Comparison of Features in Five Selected Programs Available Nationwide
560
Current
Total Number of Number of
Product Targeted Unique Foods/Items Diet Operating Cost of Users or Other Important
Company Name(s) End Users* in Database Comparisons** Support*** Requirements Product Installations Features
Computrition, Inc. Nutritional C, H, M 4200, small database N, M CE, U WindowsNT, $495 small N/A Integrated with
Chatsworth, CA Software 20,000+, large 98, and 2000 database foodservice and
818-701-5544 Library database $995 large nutrition
www.computrition.com database management
(single user software systems
system only)
ESHA Research, Inc. The Food C, H, M, R 25,000+, includes the N, FC, FG, M C, CE, U WindowsNT, $599 3200 Menu analysis, recipe
Salem, OR Processor®: Canadian Nutrient 98, and 2000 Educational analysis
800-659-3742 Nutrition File prices Exercise planning
www.esha.com analysis & available
fitness (cost to add
software stations)
First DataBank Nutritionist Pro H, M, R 18,000 N, FC, FG, M C, CE, U WindowsNT, $595 Thousands Professionally
2705_frame_C23 Page 560 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:29 PM
San Bruno, CA Nutritionist Pro Food groups 98, and 2000 designed reports
800-633-3453 (East); Food Labeling using diabetic Ability to create
800-428-4495 (West) exchanges menu templates to
www.firstdatabank.com make data entry
faster
Ability to generate
food labels
Nutrition Coordinating Nutrition Data R 18,000 N, FC, M C, CE, U WindowsNT, $8500 initial, Over 700 Prompts for complete
Center (NCC) System for System 98, and 2000 $2500 installations food descriptions,
University of Minnesota Research generates 12 additional recipe ingredients,
612-626-9450 (NDS-R) standard years and food
www.ncc.umn.edu Academic NDS- reports $690 Academic preparation
R (for teaching $495 Grad- methods
purposes) Pack Interview facilitated
Grad-Pack by multiple-pass
NDS-R (for system
graduate
students)
University of Texas Food Intake R 7320 Comparison C, U DOS $3500 60 Commercial version
School of Public Analysis standards of USDA’s Survey
Health System 3.99 input by the Net, used in the
713-500-9775 individual user Continuing Survey
www.sph.uth.tmc.edu:8 of Food Intakes
052/hnc/software/ (CSFI)
soft.htm
* C = Consumers, H = Health Professionals, M = Medical Centers or Hospitals, R = Research
Handbook of Nutrition and Food
** N = Nutrients using DRI/RDA, FC = Other Food components, FG = Food Guide Pyramid food groups, M = Meals
*** C = Company Support Included in Cost, CE = Company Support Extra Cost, U = Updates available
2705_frame_C23 Page 561 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:29 PM
TABLE 23.2
Examples of Dietary Components Available from Computerized Nutrient Analysis
Energy Sources Fiber Fatty Acids
Energy (kilocalories) Total dietary fiber SFA 4:0 to 22:0
Total protein Soluble fiber MUFA 14:1 to 22:1
Total fat Insoluble fiber PUFA 18:2 to 22:6
Total carbohydrate Pectins Trans FA 16:1 to 18:2
Alcohol
Animal protein Vitamins Amino Acids
Vegetable protein Vitamin A RE Tryptophan
% Calories protein Beta-carotene RE Threonine
% Calories fat Retinol Isoleucine
% Calories carbohydrate Alpha-tocopherol RE Leucine
% Calories alcohol Beta-tocopherol RE Lysine
Gamma-tocopherol RE Methionine
Fat and Cholesterol Delta-tocopherol RE Cystine
Cholesterol Vitamin C Phenylalanine
Total sat fatty acids (SFA) Vitamin D Tyrosine
Total mono fatty acids (MUFA) Vitamin K Valine
Total poly fatty acids (PUFA) Thiamin Arginine
Total trans fatty acids (TFA) Riboflavin Histidine
% Cal SFA Niacin Alanine
% Cal MUFA Folate Aspartic acid
% Cal PUFA Vitamin B6 Glutamic acid
Vitamin B12 Glycine
Carbohydrates Pantothenic acid Proline
Starch Biotin Serine
Fructose
Galactose Minerals Other
Glucose Calcium Aspartame
Lactose Chromium Saccharin
Maltose Copper Ash
Sucrose Magnesium Caffeine
Manganese Oxalic acid
Phosphorous Phytic acid
Potassium Sucrose polyester
Selenium 3-methylhistidine
Sodium Water
Zinc
standards or guidelines used for evaluation (e.g., DRI/RDAs, U.S. Dietary Guidelines,
National Cholesterol Education Program), and 3) comparison by food groups, diabetic
exchanges, selected food items, or meal patterns. Many programs begin with client profile
information such as gender, age, height, weight, pregnancy or lactation status for women,
and tracking information (name, address, phone number, case number). With some pro-
gram packages, dietary standards can be tailored to fit a specific client’s needs, such as
calculating energy needs or targeted weight goals. The final presentation of the data may
take the form of two- and three-dimensional pie and bar charts, Food Pyramid or DRI
comparisons, nutrient summaries, or ranking foods in descending or ascending order
based on any nutrient. Data may be collected and averaged for individuals or groups for
a specified period, from days to weeks. Nutrients commonly included in software systems
results are listed in Table 23.2.
Additional features that may be relevant to users include the software program’s ability
to provide food–drug interaction data; to incorporate nutrition support regimens; to incor-
porate a recipe database; to add and/or modify foods, nutrients, and recipes; to scale and/
or cost recipes; to provide a shopping list; to plan meals and/or provide sample menus;
2705_frame_C23 Page 562 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:29 PM
and to compare a meal with one-third RDA values (for menu planning). The software
may have data export capability (for export into statistical analysis software packages or
word processing programs so that text can be edited, or logos or other graphics added),
support for scannable questionnaires (useful for health surveys, food frequency checklists,
or entering calorie count data from inpatient menus), support for multi-user application,
and interface capability with foodservice management software.
• What are the operating system and hardware requirements? Would this involve an
investment in new equipment and peripherals?
• Who is the target audience of the output? Are consumers, health professionals,
Medical Centers or Hospitals and/or Research included?
• What are the total number and types of foods contained in the database? How many
foods are included? Are baby foods, convenience foods, fast foods, regional
specialties, ethnic specialties, and nutritional supplements included?
• What specific nutrients or food components are in the database? Are only a dozen or
more than 100 nutrients or other components calculated? Can the database be
altered?
• How complete is the database? What is the extent of missing values? When data
for specific nutrients are missing, are they estimated or left as zero (reducing the
usefulness of nutrient reports)? Are missing nutrient values identified on reports,
so that they are not misleading?
• How is the quality of database maintained? As new nutrient data become available,
how often does the software vendor respond?
• What is the ease of inputting for foods and amounts? Are there numeric code, food
name, and search feature options for entering a food? Is online help provided
to distinguish food listings and store frequently used food or meal categories
for ready access? Does flexible entry of portions allow choices by weight, volume,
and/or dimensions?
• Is there an accommodation to support food frequency data? Is this available in a
scannable form?
• Which nutrient standards are used, and are they up to date? Are the latest DRIs used?
Are standards omitted for subpopulations (children, pregnant or lactating
women)?
• What is the variety and quality of on-screen feedback for viewing reports? Can on-
screen reports be used for client counseling? Is the software interactive, allowing
a user to experiment with dietary choices while offering instantaneous feedback
about the bottom-line impact on nutrient intake?
• What is the variety and quality of printed reports? Does the program provide easy-
to-understand graphics (e.g., bar graphs, pie charts) in comparing intake with
designated standards? Are graphical comparisons available with several stan-
2705_frame_C23 Page 563 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:29 PM
dards, such as the Food Pyramid or NCEP, included? Is the report’s final message
well formatted and descriptive?
• Can the reports be customized? Can reports be reformatted or can specific infor-
mation and comments be added?
• Is the report capable of using different measures for comparison? Does the report
include food groups, diabetic food exchanges, glycemic index values?
• Can multiple-day intakes be summarized? Can the report include several days or
weeks for comprehensive analysis?
• What are the formulas used for calculating ideal body weight and energy requirements?
Are current and reasonable standards used?
• Can exercise data be incorporated into caloric requirements? Does the report include
exercise recommendations?
• Can key sources of each nutrient be identified in the food records? Can lists of food
sources of key nutrients be generated?
• What is the quality of software documentation, on-line help, and tutorials? Are they
easy to understand and specific to user needs?
• What is the quality of product support and ongoing maintenance? Is there sufficient
technical support provided to answer user needs?
• What are the system utilities? Are there utilities for backing up valuable data and
reports?
• Finally, what does the complete system, with updates and service, cost? Are there
additional costs to add stations or for multiple users?
Conclusion
Nutrient or dietary analysis software designed to aid in calculations offers an important
adjunct for improving dietary intake and health for individuals and population. However,
health professionals and consumers alike need to be aware of both the benefits and
limitations of the various systems and reports available.
References
1. Hoover LW. Clin Nutr 6: 198; 1987.
2. Feskanich D, Buzzard IM, Welch BT, et al. JADA 88: 1263; 1988.
3. Byers T, Thompson FE. J Nutr 124: 2245S; 1994.
4. Grossbauer S. In Communicating as Professionals (2nd ed), Chernoff R, Ed, The American Dietetic
Association: Chicago, IL. 1994, pg 56.
5. Adelman MO, Dwyer JT, Woods M, et al. JADA 83: 421; 1983.
6. Hoover LW. JADA 83: 501; 1983.
7. Frank GC, Farris RP, Hyg MS, Berenson GS. JADA 84, 818; 1984.
8. Taylor ML, Kozlowski BW, Baer MT. JADA 85: 1136; 1985.
9. Shanklin D, Endres JM, Sawicki M. JADA 85: 308; 1985.
10. Eck LH, Klesges RC, Hanson CL, et al. JADA 88: 602; 1988.
11. Stumbo PJ. JADA 92: 57; 1992.
12. LaComb RP, Taylor ML, Noble JM. JADA 92: 1391; 1992.
13. Nieman DC, Nieman CN. JADA 87: 930; 1987.
14. Nieman DC, Butterworth DE, Nieman CN, et al. JADA 92: 48; 1992.
15. Lee RD, Nieman DC, Rainwater M. JADA 95: 858; 1995.
16. Pennington JAT, Wilson DB. JADA 90: 375; 1990.
17. Obarzanek E, Reed DB, Bigelow C, et al. Int J Food Sci Nutr 44: 155; 1993.
18. McKeown NM, Rasmujssen HM, Charnley JM, et al. JADA 100: 1201; 2000.
19. McCullough ML, Karanja NM, Lin PH, et al. JADA 99: S45; 1999.
20. Schakel SF, Sievert YA, Buzzard IM. JADA 88: 1268; 1988.
21. US Dept of Agriculture. Agricultural Research Service. 1999. USDA Nutrient Database for
Standard Reference, Release 13. Nutrient Data Laboratory home page,
http://www.nal.usda.gov/fnic/foodcomp.
2705_frame_C23 Page 566 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:29 PM
2705_frame_C24 Page 567 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:30 PM
24
Nutrient Data Analysis Techniques and Strategies
Overview
Analyses of nutrient data pose special challenges to investigators. In such analyses, inves-
tigators need to consider:
The objectives of this section are to examine various approaches to addressing the above
issues; to briefly describe the common types of observational and experimental studies
that collect nutritional data; and to describe the most common methods of analysis used
in the types of studies described.
Quality Control
Whether investigators use a validated food frequency questionnaire or single or multiple
24-hour recalls to collect dietary data, the importance of quality control in such data
collection cannot be overemphasized. The phrase GIGO (garbage in, garbage out) serves
as a stark reminder of the importance of ensuring that dietary data are of the highest
0-8493-2705-9/01/$0.00+$1.50
© 2002 by CRC Press LLC 567
2705_frame_C24 Page 568 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:30 PM
quality when they are submitted for analysis. No amount of analytic sophistication can
make up for poor quality data.
To improve the quality of collected data, investigators should:
Interviewers may also be requested to indicate whether they believe the participant has
provided reliable data. Persons deemed by the interviewer as not providing reliable data
should be excluded from the analyses.
Prior to conducting analyses, investigators might wish to set limits on total caloric intake
above or below which persons would be excluded. For example, in the Coronary Artery
Risk Development in (young) Adults Study (CARDIA),1 men who reported intake of
>8000 kcals or <800 kcals and women who reported intake of >6000 kcals or <600 kcals
on food frequency questionnaires were excluded from analyses, because values outside
these limits were not considered consistent with a normal lifestyle.2 The INTERMAP study
of macronutrients and blood pressure also established exclusionary cutoffs for caloric
intake obtained from 24-hour recalls.3,4 Food frequency questionnaires generally have
larger standard deviations in total energy intake than 24-hour recalls, and thus are more
likely to have individuals with “impossible” or extreme values.5 Hence, investigators using
food frequency questionnaires need to be particularly attentive to establishing exclusion-
ary cutoffs for total energy intake, such as those used in CARDIA. Investigators using 24-
hour recalls should consider whether or not to exclude persons reporting that their 24-
hour intake was unusual.
statistics, e.g., mean, median, standard deviation, range, etc., this procedure also identifies
the five largest and five smallest values for each variable, and the 1st, 5th, 95th, and 99th
percentiles. The user can also request a box plot of the data, which can be very helpful in
identifying extreme values. The box plot helps indicate how discrepant the largest and
smallest values are from the rest of the data.
The fact that a statistical software package identifies values as large or extreme relative
to other values in the distribution should not be taken as prima facie evidence that such
values are invalid or that an error was made in data collection or data entry. Values so
identified should be examined for such problems. However, if the values are biologically
plausible and no error appears to have been made, they should not be arbitrarily excluded
from the analysis. Neter, Wasserman, and Kutner7 suggest that a safe rule is “to discard
an outlier only if there is direct evidence that it represents an error in recording, a mis-
calculation, a malfunctioning piece of equipment, or a similar type of circumstance.” When
outliers are retained in a data set, the investigator needs to take special steps to assess
any influence they may have on the results of the analysis. This can include analyses with
and without the outlying value or values, use of nonparametric statistical methods, e.g.,
the Spearman rank correlation instead of the usual Pearson correlation coefficient, trans-
formations of the data which bring the outlying value closer to the other values, e.g., the
log or square root transformation, specific tests for influential observations,7 or use of
robust regression methods.8
These definitions produce the following values on each of the variables for individuals in
the first through fourth quartiles:
Quartile of intake X1 X2 X3
1 0 0 0
2 1 0 0
3 0 1 0
4 0 0 1
In defining categories for a nutrient, investigators should adjust for total energy intake
by defining the categories based on nutrient residuals or nutrient densities, rather than
absolute intake.12 While the standard multivariate method and the nutrient residual
2705_frame_C24 Page 572 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:30 PM
method provide identical regression coefficients for the nutrient of interest when the
nutrient is entered as a continuous variable, this is not the case when nutrient intake is
categorized.12 In this case, the standard multivariate method should be avoided. It is also
desirable to model total energy intake as a continuous variable in such analyses rather
than as a second categorical variable, particularly if nutrient density is the variable being
categorized.10,12
Multicollinearity
Multicollinearity in a regression model can occur when highly intercorrelated variables
are entered simultaneously into the model, or when a linear combination of several
variables essentially equals a constant. For example, multicollinearity would occur with
nutrient data if the model included percent of kcalories from total fat, protein, and car-
bohydrate, since the sum of these three variables is often 100 or quite close to 100. Hence,
investigators should not attempt to enter more than two of these variables simultaneously
into a regression model. Similarly, multicollinearity would also occur if these same three
variables were entered into a model as g/day along with total energy intake. In this case,
only three of these four variables should be entered simultaneously. In general, investi-
gators need to ensure that they do not include in the same model variables representing
total intake for a nutrient and all individual components of that intake, e.g., total fat plus
saturated fats, polyunsaturated fats, and monounsaturated fats. However, even if inves-
tigators are careful to ensure that the types of multicollinearity described above do not
occur, multicollinearity can still be a problem when multiple intercorrelated variables are
included in a model, e.g., nutrients that come from the same sources. In this situation it
may be impossible to determine the separate and independent associations of the multiple
variables with the dependent variable. For example, in a study on the associations of
potassium, calcium, protein, and milk intakes with blood pressure, the investigators found
that while potassium had a relatively stronger association with blood pressure than the
other three dietary factors, the high correlations of potassium intake with intakes of the
other three made it impossible to determine the independent association of potassium
intake with blood pressure.14
The use of nutrient residuals and nutrient densities help to reduce the likelihood of
multicollinearity, since energy-adjusted nutrients generally have lower intercorrelations
than nutrients expressed as absolute amounts.10 Methods for assessing and detecting mul-
ticollinearity, as well as remedial measures, can be found in Neter, Wasserman, and Kutner.7
Some investigators may believe that procedures that select variables for inclusion in
regression models based on whether or not the variable is significantly related to the
dependent variable are appropriate approaches for preventing multicollinearity. Such
procedures include forward selection or backward elimination of variables, and stepwise
regression. In forward selection of variables, variables are entered into the model one at
a time, beginning with the variable that has the strongest association with the dependent
variable, followed sequentially by those having the strongest residual associations with
the dependent variable, i.e., after taking into account the association of the entering
variable with the variables previously entered and their associations with the dependent
variable. Variables are entered into the model until no remaining variable would have a
statistically significant association with the dependent variable, if it were to enter the
model next. In backward elimination of variables, all available variables are entered into
2705_frame_C24 Page 573 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:30 PM
the model, and those with the weakest association are sequentially removed until only
variables significantly related to the dependent variable remain. Stepwise regression com-
bines forward selection and backward elimination of variables by removing those that are
no longer significant when a new variable is entered into the model, so that the final model
only contains variables significantly related to the dependent variable.
These variable selection procedures should be avoided for a number of reasons. First,
the final model selected will not necessarily be optimal, e.g., maximize R2. Second, the
hypothesis tests used to determine which variables remain in the model are correlated.8
Third, if a large number of variables is involved, initial entry of all variables may not be
possible if one or more is a linear combination of the other variables. Fourth, stepwise
procedures may not select possible confounders that should be included whether or not
the confounder has a significant association with the dependent variable, e.g., age and
sex, or total energy intake in the multivariate nutrient density approach. Fifth, the results
of these procedures are often not unique, i.e., they yield final models that do not include
the same variables. For example, in a logistic analysis involving the associations of total
energy intake and intakes of protein, fat, and carbohydrate with CHD incidence, McGee,
Reed, and Yano15 found that only carbohydrate intake had a significant association with
CHD incidence if forward selection of variables was used. When backward elimination
was used instead, the final model included fat intake and total energy intake as the only
variables significantly and independently related to CHD incidence.
Dietary Supplements
The use of dietary supplements poses a number of complexities for analyses involving
nutrient intake, which are not easily resolved. The first question that must be addressed
is whether supplement-based intake should be included or excluded. The approach rec-
ommended here is to analyze the data with and without inclusion of the supplement-
based intake, since this is likely to provide the most complete information on the associ-
ation of the nutrient with outcome. It may also be beneficial to treat the intake from
supplements and food-based intake as separate nutrients. Such an approach is likely to
be particularly appropriate if it is difficult to determine the separate and independent
effects of food-based intake of the nutrient, or the separate and independent effects of the
supplement due to its high correlation with supplemental intake of other nutrients, or
where food-based intake and supplement-based intake have very different correlations
with other nutrients. If such an analysis is done, food-based intake should be energy
adjusted using nutrient residuals or nutrient densities, with supplement-based intake not
energy adjusted, except through inclusion of total energy intake in the model. Hence, the
analysis for food-based intake would be based on the residual or nutrient density model,
whereas the analysis for supplement-based intake would follow the standard multivariate
model. If intake is categorized, the categorization of food-based intake should use the
nutrient residuals or nutrient densities, whereas the categories for supplement-based
intake would be based on absolute amounts. The reason for not suggesting that supple-
ment-based intake be adjusted for total energy intake through calculation of nutrient
residuals or nutrient densities is a likely low correlation between total energy intake and
supplement-based intake, particularly if the nutrient does not contribute to energy intake.
If analyses are to be conducted in which food- and supplement-based intakes are com-
bined, the investigator needs to decide whether to simply add the two intakes together
2705_frame_C24 Page 574 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:30 PM
regression, and Cox proportional hazards regression. The regression calibration method
is appropriate when a gold standard is available in a validation study and a linear
measurement error with a constant variance applies, or when replicate measurements are
available in a reliability study and linear random within-person error can be assumed.
These authors also describe SAS macros that can be used to adjust regression coefficients
in these models when the assumptions underlying use of the regression calibration method
appear appropriate.
of alcohol more likely to have a stroke than persons who consume less alcohol? Persons
found to be disease free at the time of the cross-sectional survey are followed over time
to determine who develops the disease and when the disease occurs.
Ecologic studies compare aggregate data representing entire populations. A common
example of this type of study is one in which disease-specific mortality rates for different
countries are correlated with nutrient measurements based on food disappearance data.22
The INTERSALT study included ecologic analyses on associations of urinary electrolytes
and other factors with blood pressure, as well as cross-sectional analyses on electrolyte-
blood pressure associations within individuals.23,24
Experimental studies involving nutritional interventions include feeding or metabolic
ward studies and randomized clinical trials. Feeding studies involve feeding groups of
individuals precisely measured diets with one or more components varied, with an effect
on a biologic variable then measured. The Keys equation for predicting change in total
cholesterol from changes in intakes of saturated and polyunsaturated fatty acids and
dietary cholesterol was determined from a metabolic ward study.25 A common design for
feeding studies is the crossover design, in which each participant serves as his/her own
control. The randomized clinical trial is a prospective study in which individuals are
randomly assigned to intervention and control groups. After randomization, both groups
are followed over time to assess the efficacy and safety of the intervention. For example,
the trial on the Primary Prevention of Hypertension was a randomized, controlled clinical
trial on the effects of weight loss, reduction in sodium intake, decreased alcohol intake,
and increased exercise on the five-year incidence of hypertension in men and women with
high normal blood pressure.26
TABLE 24.1
Methods for Comparing Nutrient Intake among Groups in Cross-Sectional Studies
Number of Groups (k)
Description k=2 k>2
analysis, the nonparametric alternative, and methods that can be used to adjust for poten-
tial confounders of differences between groups, e.g., age or total energy intake. Nonpara-
metric tests make fewer assumptions about the shape of the distributions of variables than
parametric tests such as the two-sample t-test or analysis of variance. In the Wilcoxon
rank-sum test and the Kruskal-Wallis test, the actual observations are replaced by their
ranks in the combined sample of all observations. If nutrient intake is divided into cate-
gories, the goal of the analysis is usually to determine whether the distributions of intake
are homogeneous across groups. The methods listed in Table 24.1 can also be used to
compare nutrient intake at baseline in an experimental study; for example, to determine
whether in a randomized clinical trial randomization has provided comparable groups
with respect to intake of specific nutrients. A useful text on these methods and those
described below is that of Rosner.27
TABLE 24.2
Methods for Comparing Nutrient Intake between Cases and Controls in Case-Control
Studies
Description Unmatched Matched
TABLE 24.3
Methods for Assessing Associations in Epidemiologic Studies
Dependent Adjusted for
Variable Nutrient Intake Unadjusted Other Variables
Prospective Study
pair, while the independent variables are the within-pair differences for the potential
confounding variables. The test of significance for the adjusted mean difference is the test
of the hypothesis that the intercept in the model is equal to zero.
intake or the second variable has a very skewed distribution, since the assumption
underlying its use is that each variable has a normal distribution for each value of the
other variable.
In analyses involving linear regression, interest focuses on the difference in the mean
of the dependent variable for a one-unit or greater difference in the independent variable.
Hence, the focus is on the regression coefficient. In logistic and Cox regression, interest
focuses on estimates of relative risk. In logistic regression, the relative risk is given by the
odds ratio, and in Cox regression the hazard ratio. In both models, relative risk estimates
are obtained by exponentiation of the regression coefficient or the regression coefficient
times some convenient multiplier. For example, if total energy intake is the dietary variable
of interest, exponentiation of the regression coefficient gives the relative risk of the outcome
for two persons who differ in total energy intake by 1 kcal. Since this is not a particularly
meaningful difference for calculating relative risk, an investigator might multiply the
regression coefficient by 500 to obtain the relative risk of the outcome for two persons
who differ in total energy intake by 500 kcal. When nutrient intake is categorized and
dummy variables are included in the regression model, exponentiation of the regression
coefficient for a dummy variable gives the risk of the outcome for those in the category
corresponding to the dummy variable relative to the referent category, e.g., quartile 4
relative to quartile 1.
In analyses based on Cox regression, true associations between diet and disease may
not be found if there are substantial changes in nutrient intake between the baseline
assessment of diet and the development of disease, or if there are substantial changes in
the rank ordering of study participants with respect to intake over the course of followup.
Investigators typically use the second approach for intervention studies, even though
it tends to be less powerful than analysis of covariance. Assumptions in regard to the
analysis of covariance may or may not be met in an intervention study. The first approach
may, however, be preferable to the second, if there are no differences in intake among the
groups compared at the pre-intervention assessment, and the correlation between the pre-
intervention and followup assessments for the nutrient of interest is less than 0.5. Corre-
lations smaller than 0.5 are not uncommon for many nutrients assessed on two occasions.11
2705_frame_C24 Page 580 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:30 PM
Hence, for nutrient intake the best approach may be to ignore pre-intervention intake.
Prior to conducting analyses in nutritional intervention studies, investigators should
examine the correlations of the nutrients from pre-intervention to followup and be pre-
pared to ignore pre-intervention intake in the analyses.
References
1. Slattery ML, et al. J Am Coll Nutr 14: 635; 1995.
2. Goldberg GR, et al. Eur J Clin Nutr 45: 569; 1991.
3. INTERMAP Cooperative Research Group Canad J Cardiol 13: 235B; 1997.
4. INTERMAP Research Group. Canad J Cardiol 13: 80B; 1997.
5. Liu K. Am J Clin Nutr 59: 262S; 1994.
6. SAS Procedures Guide, Release 6.03 Edition. Cary, NC: SAS Institute, 1988.
7. Neter J, Wasserman W, Kutner MH. Applied Linear Regression Models. Homewood, IL: Richard
D. Irwin, Inc., 1983.
8. Ryan TP. Modern Regression Methods. New York, NY: John Wiley & Sons, 1997.
9. Willett WC, Howe GR, Kushi LH. Am J Clin Nutr 65: 1220S; 1997.
10. Willett W. Nutritional Epidemiology. New York, NY: Oxford University Press, 1990.
11. Grandits GA, Bartsch GE, Stamler J. In: Dietary and Nutritional Methods and Findings: The
Multiple Risk Factor Intervention Trial (MRFIT) (Stamler J, et al. Eds.) Am J Clin Nutr 65: 211S;
1997.
12. Brown CC, et al. Am J Epidemiol 129: 323; 1994.
13. National Research Council. Diet and Health: Implications for Reducing Chronic Disease Risk.
Washington, DC: National Academy Press, 1989.
14. Reed D, McGee D, Yano K, Hankin J. Hypertension 7: 405; 1985.
15. McGee D, Reed D, Yano K. J Chron Dis 37: 713; 1984.
16. Liu K, et al. J Chron Dis 31: 399; 1978.
17. Fuller WA. Measurement Error Models. New York, NY: John Wiley & Sons, 1987.
18. Clayton D, Gill C. In: Design Concepts in Nutritional Epidemiology. Margetts BM, Nelson M,
Eds, Oxford, UK: Oxford University Press, 1991, pp. 79-96.
19. Spiegelman D, McDermott A, Rosner B. Am J Clin Nutr 65: 1179S; 1997.
20. Sempos CT, Liu K, Ernst N. Am J Clin Nutr 69: 1S; 1999.
21. Hennekens CH, Buring JE. Epidemiology in Medicine (Mayrent SL, Ed) Boston, MA: Little,
Brown, 1987.
22. Stamler J, Shekelle R. Arch Pathol Lab Med 112: 1032; 1988.
23. The INTERSALT Cooperative Research Group. J Hypertens 4: 781; 1986.
24. The INTERSALT Cooperative Research Group. Br Med J 297: 319; 1988.
25. Keys A, Anderson JT, Grande F. Metabolism 65; 776; 1965.
26. Stamler R, et al. JAMA 262: 1801; 1989.
27. Rosner B. Fundamentals of Biostatistics, 5th ed. Belmont, CA: Duxbury Press, 1999.
28. Kahn HA, Sempos C. Statistical Methods in Epidemiology. New York, NY: Oxford University
Press, 1989.
2705_frame_C25 Page 581 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:31 PM
25
Medical Nutritional Evaluation
Elaine B. Feldman
Introduction
Family physicians, pediatricians, and internists are the usual providers of primary medical
care for adults, with gynecologists increasingly performing that task for women. The
assessment of nutritional status should be carried out in their offices and in hospital
settings.1 The most common reasons for office visits that may require nutritional interven-
tion are problems related to hypertension, diabetes mellitus, degenerative joint disease,
heart disease, asthma, abdominal pain, and pregnancy care, as well as part of a general
medical examination.2
Nutrition science should be applied to many aspects of primary care delivery.1,3,4 The
history, physical examination, and laboratory tests are used to assess nutritional status. As
a result, patients may be categorized as normal, malnourished, or at risk of malnutrition.
Dietary history, anthropometric measurements, and specific physiologic and biochemical
laboratory tests should be appropriately elaborated in patients with malnutrition or at
nutritional risk. These usually require referrals. In order to communicate effectively with
their patients, physicians should know the components of a healthy diet in terms of foods
as well as nutrients and the patterns of consuming food in meals. Details of food compo-
sition, however, are more likely in the knowledge base of dietitians and nutritionists.
The physician should obtain specific information about the patient’s body weight and
its change over time, the patient’s recent meal intake (e.g., foods eaten the previous day),
appetite, food preferences, level of physical activity, special diets, and intake of supple-
ments. Height and weight are vital signs that should be measured accurately under
standardized conditions (not self-reported) in all patients, and body weight should be
measured at followup visits. The complete blood count (CBC) and serum albumin provide
clues to nutritional anemias and protein status. The patient who is starved, or with
gastrointestinal diseases, malabsorption, hepatic and pancreatic disease, renal failure,
trauma, sepsis, cancer, or requiring critical care should be given special attention in
assessing nutritional status and developing nutritional therapy.5 A registered dietitian is
an invaluable resource in assessing dietary intake by dietary recalls, prospective food
records, or food frequency questionnaires.
0-8493-2705-9/01/$0.00+$1.50
© 2002 by CRC Press LLC 581
2705_frame_C25 Page 582 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:31 PM
The use of dietary supplements of vitamins and minerals is common in our population
to meet nutritional needs, optimize nutritional health, and prevent disease. Over-the-
counter remedies are available and are marketed with little restriction. Since patients often
do not report supplement use to the physician, toxicity or possible drug–nutrient interac-
tions can be overlooked with serious adverse consequences. Unsubstantiated health claims
may lead to problems because of toxicity, adverse interactions with other medications or
foods, and avoidance of orthodox effective remedies.
The health professional should be aware of good food sources for vitamins and minerals
(Section 1, 5-10), appropriate serving sizes, and the facts of nutrient fortification and
enrichment of foods, especially as they evolve into newer modalities for nourishment.
Encouraging patients to read food labels will result in improving their nutrition knowledge
and health (see Section 14). Proper food/nutrient intake lessens the risk of cardiovascular
and cerebrovascular diseases (atherosclerosis, hypertension) and cancer.
In the practice of primary care, a miscellany of special circumstances, when suspected,
may warrant nutritional interventions. While serious nutritional deficiencies have disap-
peared in affluent countries, physicians should be aware of their occurrence in patients
with alcoholism. That diagnosis should be recognized and the substance abuse treated.
Special nutritional needs of women should be addressed. These include replacing iron
loss from menstruation to prevent or treat anemia, ameliorating accelerated menopause-
related calcium loss from bone, and the special needs of pregnant and lactating women
including meeting the periconceptual need for folic acid to prevent neural tube defects,
and recognizing the greater susceptibility of women to obesity and alcoholism because of
their size, body composition, and metabolic/hormonal differences compared to men.
Dementia is increasing as the population ages. More than one-half of cognitive deficiencies
in the elderly are attributable to vascular disease and increasingly result from thromboem-
bolism. Risk of vascular disease is increased by a diet high in saturated fats, low in
antioxidants, vitamin B12, and choline — especially important in the patient in the middle
years. Vegetarians not ingesting any animal products may be at nutritional risk, and
vitamin supplementation may be recommended. Patients who cannot or will not eat
should be evaluated for possible enteral or parenteral nutrition support and referred to a
dietitian or nutrition support team. Caregivers must be wary of dietary fads, most prev-
alent with regard to weight reduction. Finally, all physicians should be educated in the
principles of a health-promoting diet.6
Patient Evaluation
The medical history will provide 80 to 90% of the information leading to a diagnosis.5,7,8
The evaluation of nutritional status will emphasize certain elements of the medical history
and social background that will differ depending on the patient’s gender, age, and the
presenting problem. The usual level of physical activity and the degree of stress should
be noted. It is imperative to distinguish whether any impairment of nutritonal status is
caused by a patient’s disease or is directly related to abnormal intake of nutrients or an
unbalanced diet. Malnutrition resulting from disease can be managed effectively only if
the underlying disease is controlled or cured. For example, is there physiological or
anatomic loss of gastrointestinal function, or is the degree of weight change out of pro-
portion to food intake indicating hyper- or hypometabolism? Does the patient have dia-
betes mellitus? Is there excessive blood loss from menstruation?
2705_frame_C25 Page 583 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:31 PM
Medical History
The elements of a medical history include the present illness, past medical and surgical
history, family history, a medication list, and review of systems.
Pertinent questions to ask are:
A rapid and profound weight loss is probably the single most important clue to malnu-
trition. This leads the history taker into an evaluation of normal or abnormal food and
nutrient intake. Are there
Hypermetabolism
Multiple trauma, burns
Constipation, obstipation
• Special requirements
Chronic disease
Recent major surgery
Alcohol abuse
Hormone replacement therapy
Chemotherapy
Immunosuppressive therapy
Behavior
Excessive use of caffeine
Alcohol abuse
Fad diets
Excessive use of dietary supplements
• Miscellaneous
Neurologic symptoms, e.g., numbness, dizziness, weakness
Skin rash, dryness, flaking, hair loss
Socioeconomic History
The psychosocial evaluation should generate information concening the patient’s income
and living conditions. This is especially important in the elderly.
Family History
Many nutritional disorders are familial or inherited. Thus, history of cancer, cardiovascular
disease, metabolic diseases, gastrointestinal or liver disease, obesity, etc., should alert the
examiner in the patient evaluation.
2705_frame_C25 Page 585 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:31 PM
Laboratory Tests
Some routine laboratory tests can assist in the nutritional assessment and diagnosis. These
include CBC, blood chemistries (glucose, electrolytes, minerals, liver and kidney function
tests), and tests of blood coagulation (Table 25.2).
Hemoglobin levels will show the presence of anemia that may be vitamin-specific or
mineral related, and can indicate chronic disease. The red blood cell size and hemoglobin
content and concentration can provide clues to liver disease, alcoholism, and specific
nutritional deficiencies. While serum albumin is not a sensitive indicator of protein status,
it does provide a clue. Low levels may indicate a limiting amount of substrate for hepatic
protein synthesis. On the other hand, non-nutritional factors may be responsible for
hypoalbuminemia such as expanded extracellular fluid, accelerated protein breakdown,
and impaired liver and kidney function. Albumin levels also may be unreliable indicators
2705_frame_C25 Page 586 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:31 PM
TABLE 25.1
Physical Signs of Malnutrition
System Sign Deficiency/Abnormality
Hair Luster, texture (dull, dry) Protein
Depigmentation (flag sign)
Color (reddening)
Easily plucked
Areas of hair loss (alopecia)
Face Rash, seborrhea Riboflavin
Pallor Iron, folate, B12
Eyes Luster of cornea decreased, Bitot spots, Vitamin A, riboflavin
xerosis, keratomalacia, night blindness Iron, B12, folate
Conjunctival injection Hypercholesterolemia
Conjunctival pallor Wilson’s disease, copper excess
Corneal arcus, eyelid xanthelasma Wernicke’s syndrome, thiamin
Kayser-Fleischer ring
Nystagmus
Lips Cheilosis (swelling), angular stomatitis (fissures) Riboflavin
Tongue Glossitic (smooth, red) B12, folate, riboflavin
Pallor, atrophy Iron
Decreased taste Zinc
Gums Bleeding, hypertrophy Vitamin C
Neck Goiter (enlarged thyroid) Iodine
Skin Rash, edema Protein
Pigmentation or depigmentation Niacin
Flakiness, peeling, dry Protein, zinc
Bleeding Vitamin K
Perifollicular hemorrhage Vitamin C
Hyperkeratoses Vitamin A
Nails Spooning Iron
Brittle Protein
Muscles Atrophy Protein
Weakness Protein, iron, B12, folate
Bones, joints Fractures, deformities, tenderness Vitamin D
Deformities Vitamin C
Heart Enlargement Selenium
Failure Thiamin
Arrhythmias Calcium, magnesium, potassium
Abdomen Ascites Protein
Hepatomegaly Alcohol abuse
Neurologic Mental status/dementia Thiamin, B12, folate, niacin
Cranial nerves Thiamin
Gait, ataxia Thiamin, B12, pyridoxine
Sensory Thiamin
Diminished reflexes Iodine
Tetany Calcium, magnesium
Paralysis Potassium
2705_frame_C25 Page 587 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:31 PM
TABLE 25.2
Laboratory Tests Useful in Clinical Nutritional Assessmenta
Body Compartment/
Laboratory Test Organ System Function
Hemoglobin, hematocrit, red and white blood cell counts and indices, differential Protein, visceral
(calculate total lymphocyte count) Anemia
Urea, creatinine, glucose, sodium, potassium, chloride, carbon dioxide Renal function
Diabetes mellitus
Acid-base balance
Cholesterol, triglycerides, lipoproteins Lipid disorders
Total protein, albumin, uric acid Liver, kidney function
Calcium, phosphate, magnesium, bilirubin, alkaline phosphatase Minerals, skeleton
Aminotransferases, iron, ferritin Liver function
Anemia
Transferrin, transthyretin, retinol-binding protein Iron
Protein, visceral
Prothrombin time, partial thromboplastin time Vitamin K, blood clotting
a Adapted from Feldman, E.B. In Laboratory Medicine; the Selection and Interpretation of Clinical Laboratory Studies.
Noe, D.A., Rock, R.C., Eds. Williams & Wilkins. Baltimore, 1993, ch. 10.
of protein status in the postoperative or acutely injured patient. Some enzyme tests are
indicators of nutritional cofactor status, e.g., alkaline phosphatase and zinc, or aminotrans-
ferase for Vitamin B6.
TABLE 25.3
Recommended Nutrition Guidelines for Family Practicea
Develop Knowledge Of
Develop Skills In
References
1. Feldman EB. In Laboratory Medicine; the Selection and Interpretation of Clinical Laboratory Studies.
Noe DA, Rock RC, Eds, Williams & Wilkins, Baltimore, 1993, ch 10.
2. Kolasa KM. Eur J Clin Nutr 53: S89; 1999.
3. Feldman EB. Southern Med J 88: 204; 1995.
4. Feldman EB. Nutrition 16: 649; 2000.
2705_frame_C25 Page 589 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:31 PM
26
Assessment of Lipids and Lipoproteins
Elaine B. Feldman
Introduction
The circulating lipids include free cholesterol, cholesterol esterified with long-chain fatty
acids, triacylglycerols (triglycerides, TG), phospholipids, and unesterified or free fatty
acids. Lipids are transported in the blood plasma in the form of lipoproteins. The lipo-
proteins include:
• Chylomicrons
• Very low-density lipoproteins (VLDL)
• Intermediate-density lipoproteins (IDL, beta-VLDL)
• Low-density lipoproteins (LDL)
• High-density lipoproteins (HDL)
The chemical and physical properties of the lipoproteins1 are shown in Table 26.1. This
section summarizes biological factors influencing lipid and lipoprotein levels, describes
methodology for assays in common clinical use in laboratories or health care facilities,
and provides data on the range of normal values.
Cholesterol
Cholesterol is synthesized by all animal cells (endogenous) and by no plants. It also is
derived from animal products in the diet (exogenous). Food sources are listed in Table
51.6 in Section 51. Circulating cholesterol levels vary with age, increasing in men from
puberty to the fifth decade of life, and in women until the seventh decade2 (Table 26.2).
Levels in women are lower than in men from age 30 to 50. Mean cholesterol levels vary
0-8493-2705-9/01/$0.00+$1.50
© 2002 by CRC Press LLC 591
592
TABLE 26.1
Plasma Lipoproteins in Humansa
Chemical Composition, %
Surface Core
Particle Diameter Flotation Electrophoretic Major Cholesterol
2705_frame_C26 Page 592 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:31 PM
Class (nm) Density Mobility Apoproteins Proteins Phospholipids Cholesterol Esters Tryglycerides
Chylomicrons 80–500 <0.95 α2 B, E, A-1 2 7 2 3 86
A-IV, C
VLDL 30–80 0.95–1.006 pre-β B, E, C 8 18 7 12 55
IDL 25–35 1.006–1.019 slow B, E 19 19 9 29 23
pre-β
LDL 18–28 1.019–1.063 β B 22 22 8 42 6
HDL2 9–12 1.063–1.125 α1 A-I, A-II 40 33 5 17 5
HDL3 5–9 1.125–1.210 α1 A-I, A-II 55 25 4 13 3
Note: VLDL, Very low-density lipoprotein; IDL, intermediate-density lipoprotein; LDL, low-density lipoprotein; HDL, high-density lipoprotein.
a Modified from Feldman, E.B. Essentials of Clinical Nutrition, F.A. Davis, Philadelphia, 1988, p. 433.
Handbook of Nutrition and Food
2705_frame_C26 Page 593 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:31 PM
TABLE 26.2
Average Levels of Circulating Lipidsa,b
Total C LDL C HDL C TG
Age, yr mmol/L mg/dl mmol/L mg/dl mmol/L mg/dl mmol/L mg/dl
White Men
White Women
between 4.2 and 6 mmol/L, depending on age and gender. Population levels have been
declining over recent decades. About two-thirds of the plasma cholesterol is transported
as LDL and levels of LDL cholesterol parallel those of total cholesterol (Table 26.2). HDL
transports about one-quarter of the plasma cholesterol, with levels averaging about 1.17
mmol in men, and are 0.23 to 0.44 mmol higher in women (Table 26.2). Table 26.3 provides
data on the upper limits of normal for LDL- and HDL-cholaterol. Table 26.4 provides
data on mean values for lipids and lipoproteins in men and women from NHANES III
data.3
Cholesterol assays and the reference method4-7 are provided in Table 26.5. Clinical
laboratories are automated for the lipid analyses. Specific methods are provided as kits
by the manufacturer of the analytical instrument in use. Desktop methodologies also are
available for outpatient facilities (physicians’ offices, clinics) but are not as accurate or
precise as the commercial or hospital laboratory procedures. The latter are regulated and
supervised by accrediting organizations such as the College of American Pathologists, and
laboratories are regulated by the government (CLIA).
2705_frame_C26 Page 594 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:31 PM
TABLE 26.3
Levels of Circulating Lipids Warranting Attentiona,b
LDLC HDLC TG
75th percentile 25th percentile 90th percentile
Age, yr mmol/L mg/dl mmol/L mg/dl mmol/L mg/dl
White Men
15–19 2.83 109 1.01 39 1.41 125
20–24 3.07 118 0.99 38 1.64 146
25–29 3.59 138 0.96 37 1.92 171
30–34 3.74 144 0.99 38 2.41 214
35–39 4.00 154 0.94 36 2.81 250
40–44 4.08 157 0.94 36 2.84 252
45–49 4.24 163 0.99 38 2.84 252
50–54 4.21 162 0.94 36 2.74 244
55–59 4.37 168 0.99 38 2.36 210
60–64 4.29 165 1.07 41 2.17 193
70+ 4.26 164 1.04 40 2.27 202
White Women
15–19 2.89 111 1.12 43 1.26 112
20–24 2.07 118 1.14 44 1.52 135
25–29 3.28 126 1.22 47 1.54 137
30–34 3.33 128 1.20 46 1.58 140
35–39 3.61 139 1.14 44 1.91 170
40–44 3.80 146 1.25 58 1.81 161
45–49 3.90 150 1.22 47 2.02 180
50–54 4.16 160 1.30 50 2.14 190
55–59 4.37 168 1.30 50 2.6 229
60–64 4.37 168 1.33 51 2.36 210
65–69 4.78 184 1.27 49 2.49 221
70+ 4.42 170 1.25 48 2.13 189
a See Table 26.1 for abbreviations.
b Adapted from Lipid Research Clinics Program, JAMA 251, 351, 1984.
Triacylglycerols (TG)
Circulating TG levels average about 1.13 mmol/L in young adults after overnight fasting.
Levels increase from 50 to 75% with age, and are lower in women compared to men.
(Tables 26.2 and 26.3). Median TG values range from 0.90 to 1.47 mmol/L. TG levels are
labile, varying by up to 50% daily depending on the recent diet. In the fasting state, TG
are transported in the VLDL, whereas chylomicrons transport newly absorbed fat. Upper
limits of normal for TG are given in Table 26.3.
Triacylglycerol assays and reference method9-11 are listed in Table 26.5.
Lipoproteins
Lipoprotein assays12-15 are given in Table 26.5.
2705_frame_C26 Page 595 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:31 PM
TABLE 26.4
Lipid Levels U.S. NHANES III Populationa,b
Lipid Level (mg/dL) Mean ± SD (mg/dL)
Mean total cholesterol 225 ± 45
Men 218 ± 42
Women 237 ± 47
Mean LDL-C 142 ± 37
Men 139 ± 35
Women 147 ± 40
Mean HDL-C 50 ± 16
Men 47 ± 14
Women 56 ± 17
Median TG 140 ± 120
Men 137 ± 129
Women 144 ± 108
Mean total-C/HDL-C 4.9 ± 2.1
Men 5.1 ± 1.7
Women 4.7 ± 2.6
Mean LDL-C/HDL-C 3.1 ± 1.5
Men 3.2 ± 1.2
Women 2.9 ± 1.9
Apolipoprotein A1 147 ± 27
Men 139 ± 23
Women 158 ± 29
Apolipoprotein B 116 ± 26
Men 115 ± 24
Women 119 ± 27
a See Table 26.1 for abbrevations.
b DHHS NCHS. Third National Health and Nutrition Examina-
tions Survey, 1988-94, NHANES III, Hyattsville, MD, 1996.
Chylomicrons
These particles originate in the small intestine when fat is absorbed, and are absent in
plasma from fasting subjects. They are visibly present in blood when TG levels exceed
7.90 mmol/L, and the refrigerated plasma may appear turbid (Figure 52.8, Section 52). At
higher TG levels the standing plasma will show a creamy top layer. Chylomicrons are
transported into the lymphatic system, delivered into the blood, and removed by the
action of the enzyme lipoprotein lipase (LPL) to produce remnant particles that are taken
up by specifc receptors in the liver. (Figure 26.1). The composition of chylomicrons is listed
in Table 26.1.
VLDL
These particles are produced in the liver and result from in vivo synthesis from carbohy-
drate precursors or from free fatty acids mobilized from adipose tissue and delivered to
the liver. VLDL composition is given in Table 26.1. The standing plasma begins to appear
diffusely turbid when TG levels exceed 2.25 mmol/L (Figure 52.8, Section 52). Lipoprotein
lipase action produces VLDL remnants, or IDL, that are rapidly removed from the blood
by receptors in the liver (Figure 26.1). An assay for VLDL remnants that has been
developed for research studies12 is under consideration by laboratory manufacturers for
clinical applications.
596
TABLE 26.5
Tests for Plasma Lipids, Lipoproteins, and Lipolytic Enzymes
Assay Principle of Method Reference Method Clinical/Usual Method Performance Criteria
Total cholesterol Chemical Abell-Kendall5 CV ≤3%
Spectrophotometric Bias <3%
Modified Liebermann-Burchard4a,b
Automated enzymatic Allain6
Colorimetric Rautela7
Triacylglycerol (TG) Glycerol assay Van Handel-Zilversmit8 CV <5%
Spectrophotometric Bias <5%
Automated enzymatic
Spectrophotometric Sampson9
Hagen10
Rautela11
VLDL
2705_frame_C26 Page 596 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:31 PM
Extrahepatic
NORMAL
LIVER
LDL
VLDL
IDL
LPL
FIGURE 26.1
Production of lipoproteins, delivery into blood, and removal by tissues. See Table 26.1 for abbreviations. LPL =
lipoprotein lipase.
IDL
This TG-rich particle is relatively enriched in the proportion of cholesterol esters compared
to its precursor VLDL (Table 26.1). The atherogenic beta-VLDL is a related cholesterol-
rich particle with interactions with the LDL and remnant receptors (Figure 26.1). This
particle is evanescent in the plasma of healthy normolipidemic subjects.
LDL
This particle is the main transporter of cholesterol in the blood and is considered the most
atherogenic lipoprotein. The LDL cholesterol level reflects changes in lipoprotein compo-
sition. LDL delivers cholesterol to cells and is taken up by specific cell surface receptors
(Figure 26.2). LDL assays are listed in Table 26.5. LDL cholesterol may be calculated as:
FIGURE 26.2
The generation of HDL and the interrelations of the lipoproteins, their production, and removal. ABC 1 = ATP-
binding-cassette transporter. SRB 1 = Scavenger receptor binder. Adapted from Young S. G., and Fielding C. J.,
Nature Genetics, 22, 316, 1999.
HDL
The HDL particle is generated by the transfer of surface lipids from TG-rich lipoproteins
during lipolysis18 (Figure 26.2). The HDL2 and HDL3 particles differ in size and compo-
sition, and particles vary in their content of the specific apolipoproteins, apo A-I and A-II
(Tables 26.1 and 26.6). HDL is protective against atherosclerosis, enhancing removal mech-
anisms by reverse cholesterol transport. Methods of assay19, 20 are described in Table 26.5.
Standardization of Assays
Blood samples for assays of serum or plasma lipids and lipoproteins should be obtained
under standardized conditions of a stable diet, avoiding alcohol, and in the morning after
an overnight fast. Serum and plasma values differ as do values of cholesterol when the
2705_frame_C26 Page 599 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:31 PM
TABLE 26.6
Lipoprotein Subclassesa
Association with
Particle Diameter nm Risk of CVD
VLDL 1 Large 80 Higher
2 Medium 70 Intermediate
3 Small 60 Lower
IDL 1 Large 40 Higher
2 Small
LDL I Large 30 Lower
II a
II b
III a Medium Intermediate
III b
IV a Small Higher
IV b 20
HDL 2 b Large 10 Negative risk
2a 9
3a Small 8 Positive risk
3b 7
3c 6
a See Table 26.1 for abbreviations.
subject is supine, sitting, or standing. A recent meal has minor effects on cholesterol and
predominantly cholesterol-containing lipoproteins (LDL, HDL), but has a major influence
on levels of TG and TG-containing lipoproteins (VLDL). Optimally, determinations should
be carried out on plasma samples obtained by using EDTA as anticoagulant and prepared
and stored carefully. The biological variation of cholesterol, within the normal range,
approximates 16%.21 Laboratory accuracy and precision should be standardized with
reference materials or reference laboratories.22 Because of variability, more than one sample
of plasma or serum lipids should be drawn, with an interval of several weeks of unchanged
lifestyle, and analyzed in order to evaluate lipid status or therapy.23
A simple clue to lipid/lipoprotein values is provided by the standing plasma test (Figure
52.8, Section 52). Plasma is refrigerated overnight and examined for turbidity. Hypercho-
lesterolemia does not cause the plasma to become cloudy, whereas elevated TG, either as
VLDL, remnants, or chylomicrons will produce diffuse turbidity with or without a creamy
supernatant layer (see Section 52).
Apoproteins
The apolipoproteins or apoproteins determine the metabolic fate of the lipoprotein parti-
cles and the solubility of lipoprotein lipids in plasma. They include:
• Apo A-I
• Apo A-II
• Apo A-IV
• Apo B-100
• Apo B-48
2705_frame_C26 Page 600 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:31 PM
• Apo C-I
• Apo C-II
• Apo C-III
• Apo-D
• Apo E-2
• Apo E-3 {E-phenotype: E2/2, 2/3, 2/4, 3/3, 3/4, 4/4}
• Apo E-4
• Apo-F
• Apo-G
• Apo-H
• Apo-J
• Apo (a)
TABLE 26.7
Average Levels of Apoproteins in Plasma (mg/L)a,b
Apoprotein Mean ± SD
A-I 1,200 ± 200 (men)
360 ± 60 (women)
B 1,000 ± 200
C-I 70 ± 20
C-II 40 ± 20
C-III 130 ± 50
D 60 ± 10
E 50 ± 20
a SD = standard deviations.
b From Albers, in Eleventh International Congress of Clinical
Chemistry. Keuser, E., Giabal, F., Muller, M. M., et al.,
Eds., Walter de Greyter, Berlin, 1982, with permission.
References
1. Feldman EB. Essentials of Clinical Nutrition FA Davis, Philadelphia, 1988.
2. Lipid Research Clinics Program, JAMA 251, 351, 1984.
3. NHANES III, JAMA 269, 3000, 1993.
4a. Liebermann C. Ber Deut Chem Ges 18, 1803, 1885.
4b. Burchard H. Chem Zentraalbl 610, 25, 1890.
5. Abell LL, Levy BB, Brodie BB, Kendall FE. J Biol Chem 195, 357, 1952.
6. Allain CC, Pool NS, Chan CSG, et al. Clin Chem 20, 470, 1974.
7. Rautela SS, Liedtke RJ. Clin Chem 24, 108, 1978.
8. Van Handel E, Zilversmit DB. J Lab Clin Med 50P, 152, 1957.
9. Sampson EG, Demers LM, Kreig AF. Clin Chem 21, 1983, 1975.
10. Hagen JR, Hagen PB. Can J Biochem Physiol 40, 1129, 1962.
11. Rautela SS. Clin Chem 20, 857, 1974.
12. Nakajima K, Sato T, Tamura A, et al. Clin Chim Acta 223, 53, 1993.
13. Friedewald WT, Levy RI, Fredrickson DS. Clin Chem 18, 499, 1972.
14. Havel RJ, Eder HA, Bragdon JH. J Clin Invest 34, 1345, 1955.
15. McNamara JR, Cole TG, Contols JH, et al. Clin Chem 46, 232, 1995.
16. Krauss RM, Burke DJ. J Lipid Res 12, 97, 1983.
17. Marcovina SM, Albers JJ, Gabel B, et al. Clin Chem 41, 246, 1995.
18. Young SG, Fielding CJ. Nature Genetics 22, 316, 1999.
19. Burstein M, Scholnick HR, Mortin R. J Lipid Research 11, 283, 1970.
2705_frame_C26 Page 602 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:31 PM
27
Genetics of Energy and Nutrient Intake
Introduction
The study of the role of genetic variation on energy intake and nutrient intake is broad
and has considerable public health implications. Genetic differences influence behavioral
and biological affectors of food intake. They are also thought to impact on several nutri-
tionally influenced risk factors (e.g., dyslipoproteinemia) and morbid conditions (e.g.,
diabetes). These issues have been the topic of much research in the past few decades, as
evidenced by the multiple review articles cited in this section. In the behavioral domain,
the questions are relatively simple. Do genes determine eating behaviors such as how
much one eats, preferences for certain types of foods, and frequency or pattern of eating?
The current research suggests that there is resemblance among family members for these
behaviors, although it is unclear if they are determined by genes, shared environments,
or both.1 In the physiological domain the questions center on the physical and hormonal
mechanisms leading to such things as taste preferences, hunger, and satiety. For instance,
taste receptors are clearly genetically determined, although the gene(s) may not be all
identified yet,2 and a growing number of genes encoding hormones and proteins that
regulate hunger and satiety have been identified recently.3
The genetics of energy and nutrition intake invoke complex issues from the fields of
genetic and molecular epidemiology, involving both genetic and environmental interac-
tions. Gene-gene (GxG) interactions occur when the effect of one gene is modified by or
depends on the effects of another. For example, leptin is a hormone involved in the
signaling between adipose tissue and the hypothalamus. The gene (LEP) that synthesizes
leptin has been identified and mapped to chromosome 7. However, multiple factors
influence the circulating levels of leptin, and some of these (such as insulin levels) have
their own genetic determinants. Thus, the measurable levels of circulating leptin can be
influenced by interactions with other genes.
Another complex issue from genetic and molecular epidemiology involves gene-envi-
ronment interactions (GxE). In this situation, energy and nutrient intake are considered
environmental factors which impact on other traits that may have a profound interest
from a public health perspective. For example, the exposure of individuals with certain
0-8493-2705-9/01/$0.00+$1.50
© 2002 by CRC Press LLC 603
2705_frame_C27 Page 604 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:32 PM
+ 3 + 3
pe e
oty typ
Fat Mass Response
n o
Ge n
Ge
p e2
n oty pe
2
Ge ty
G eno
e1
o typ
G en Genotype 1
(a) (b)
+ +
Energy Intake
FIGURE 27.1
Hypothetical example of three genotypes plotted by energy intake (X-axis) and fat mass (Y-axis) values. In panel
(a), there is no gene-diet interaction since the lines depicting the responses by genotype are parallel. In panel
(b), gene by diet interaction is demonstrated, since there is a differential response in fat mass due to energy
intake as a function of the genotype. That is, the genotypes respond differently.
Two major approaches are used to study GxE, unmeasured genotype (genetic epidemi-
ology) and measured genotype (molecular epidemiology), as recently reviewed by Pérusse
and Bouchard.6 The twin methodology is a very useful unmeasured genotype approach
for testing GxE. One important assumption underlying the twin method is that MZ and
DZ twins have equal environmental covariances. Variances can be tested for significant
differences across twin types using classical analysis of variance approaches. If the vari-
ances are different prior to but not after adjustment for pertinent environmental covariates,
then there is indirect evidence of GxE interaction. Alternatively, the twins can be stratified
according to degree of environmental sharing, and heritability estimates may be compared
across the strata.
The above twin method is cross-sectional and therefore an indirect assessment of the
GxE effects. Another unmeasured genotype approach that more directly indexes GxE is
the twin intervention study, where MZ pairs (who share 100% of their genes in common)
are challenged under standardized treatments (environments). A comparison of the
within- and between-pair variances of the response to treatment provides an indication
of whether genetic factors underlie the response. That is, a greater variability between-
than within-pairs suggests a greater correlated response to environmental challenge for
the same genotype.
The second major approach for detecting GxE involves measured genotypes,6 with the
preponderance of evidence for measured gene-nutrition interactions arising from inter-
vention studies. This method is usually applied to association analysis of candidate genes.
However, it can be applied to association or linkage analysis of candidate genes or genome
scan data.7 Linkage studies seek identification of loci that cosegregate with the trait (e.g.,
dietary response) within families, while association studies seek identification of particular
variants that are associated with the response at the population level. In other words,
2705_frame_C27 Page 606 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:32 PM
linkage analysis is often useful in localizing gene effects but requires family data, while
association analysis can provide information about the functional variants that ultimately
give rise to the observed phenotypic variability and may be applied to family or individual
data. These complementary methods provide the means to probe the genome and describe
the complex genetic etiologies underlying the responses to interventions. In association
analysis of candidate genes, the phenotypic responses to intervention are compared among
groups stratified by genotypes. If individuals with a particular allele form tend to respond
to the intervention differently than do individuals with alternative allele forms, then there
is evidence of GxEs. GxG interactions are simply incorporated in association analysis by
including the main effects of multiple candidate genes, as well as the interaction terms
between them.
Although association analysis may be applied to either individual or family data, the
dependencies among related individuals should be considered, since failure to adjust for
nonindependence can inflate the association evidence. Methods for dealing with this
problem range from complex, such as bootstrapping8 where the model is repeatedly fit to
subsets of the data, to relatively simple, such as sandwich estimators.9,10 The sandwich
method asymptotically yields the same parameter estimates as ordinary least squares or
regression methods, but the standard errors (and consequently hypothesis tests) are
adjusted for the dependencies.
environmental factors. An early study, involving the largest sample sizes reported to date,15
reflects the most probable answer to the question of genetic vs. environmental determi-
nation of food intake: people who live together come to resemble each other whether they
are genetically related or not. This conclusion is based on the fact that correlations between
genetically unrelated pairs of individuals who live together are as large as those for
genetically related cohabitating individuals. Similar conclusions were drawn from both
twin12,16 and family studies.13,14,17,18
The magnitude of the familial effect for macronutrient intake generally centers between
30 to 50% in family studies, with higher estimates derived from many twin studies.
However, as shown in Table 27.1, there is a considerable range in estimates across studies.
Moreover, resemblance tends to be higher for nutrients expressed in percent of total caloric
intake as compared to absolute amounts, both across studies and within studies that
indexed both types of measures.13,19 This suggests that the familial effect may be specific
to food selection or preference (nutrient concentrations) rather than for amount of foods
consumed. Results from twin studies 20,21 and from animal models showing differences in
2705_frame_C27 Page 607 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:32 PM
TABLE 27.1
Range of Heritability Estimates (%) for Macronutrients*
Macronutrient Genetic Cultural Combined
Total kcalories 0–78 23–45 24–51
Absolute values
Protein 0–70 26–41 8
Total fat 0–56 26–50 9–24
Saturated fat 50–60 10–27
Monounsaturated fats 33–41
Polyunsaturated fats 10–40 3
Saturated/unsaturated ratio 3–12
Total carbohydrates 0–68 20–26 31–36
Simple carbohydrates 12–60 8–20
Complex carbohydrates 22–62 55–56
Sodium 10–71
Dietary Na/K 20–68
Urinary Na/K 18–53
Percent of total kcalories
Protein 10–70 25–61 61
Total fat 18–48 8–51 27–54
Saturated fat 10–70
Monounsaturated fats 50
Polyunsaturated fats 47
Total carbohydrates 15–67 12–47 52
Dietary cholesterol 66
Sodium 51
Potassium 24
Calcium 52
* Estimates extracted from References 12-14, 16-19, 102.
macronutrient selection among various mouse strains22 also suggest that food preferences
are partly explained by genetic factors. From this review it appears likely that there are
substantial familial effects underlying nutrient intake, but whether this effect is due to
genetic, familial environmental, or both factors is unclear.
Gene-Diet Interactions
While an appropriate diet is recommended for reducing the risks of many common
diseases, it is well known that there is a great deal of variability in people’s responses to
dietary change. For example, atherogenic diets may carry little risk for some people, but
for others dietary changes generally have a good outcome. While the causes for this
heterogeneity across people are not completely understood, there is convincing evidence
that genes play a role. Phenylketonuria (PKU), an inborn error of metabolism causing an
accumulation of phenylalanine in the blood leading to mental retardation, is a classic
example. Restriction of dietary phenylananine in individuals who are homozygous for
the mutation reduces the phenylalanine accumulation and mental retardation.
The following summary of gene-diet interactions is organized around two general topics:
1) adiposity and 2) lipids and lipoproteins. A summary of some of the genes that may
interact with dietary intake to influence these phenotypic domains is given in Table 27.2.
Most of the molecular work investigating specific genes has centered on the latter domain.
608
TABLE 27.2
Summary of Measured Gene-Diet Interactions
Cytogenic
Gene* Location* Intervention** Response Phenotype Study
MTHFR 1p36.32 Cross-sectional, folate Homocysteine Jing Ma et al., 199692
TNFR2 1p36.23 High fat Wt, insulin, leptin in mice Schreyer et al., 199839
Cross-section, diet-treated diabetic vs nondiabetic BMI, leptin Fernandez-Real et al., 200040
Dob1 1p35-1p31 High fat Mice bred for diet response West et al., 1994a, 1994b29,30
LEPR 1p22.3 Overfeeding Fasting insulin, leptin, HDL-c Ukkola et al., 2000b46
HSD3B1 1p12 Aging (longitudinal) Skinfold sum Vohl et al., 1994103
APOB 2p22.3 Crossover, high vs low saturated fat and cholesterol CH, LDL-c Friedlander et al., 200059
2705_frame_C27 Page 608 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:32 PM
Crossover, saturated vs monounsaturated fat ApoAI, LDL-c, ApoB, HDL-c Dreon et al., 1994; 199588,89
Crossover, high saturated vs NCEP vs high monounsaturated TG Lopez-Miranda et al., 200083
IRS1 2q36.3 Optifast wt loss program: diet, exercise, and support group Wt loss Benecke et al., 200038
Dob2 3p21 High fat Mice bred for diet response West et al., 1994a, 1994b29,30
PPARG 3p25.2 Aging (longitudinal) obese vs lean BMI change Ek et al., 199949
FABP2 4q26 Crossover, insoluble vs soluble fiber Total cholesterol, LDL-c, ApoB Hegele et al., 199745
UCP1 4q28.2 Low kcalorie Wt and BMI loss Fumeron et al., 1996104
Low kcalorie + exercise Wt loss Kogure et al., 199844
GRL 5q31.3 Overfeeding Wt, AVF, SBP, CH Ukkola et al., 2000a36
ADRB2 5q32 Overfeeding Wt, leptin, SF8, OGTT insulin area, abdominal Ukkola et al., 2000c37
total fat
Crossover, saturated vs monounsaturated fats TG López-Miranda et al., 200083
LPL 8p21.3 Low kcalorie TG, VLDL-tg, ApoB Jemaa et al., 199774
Crossover, high saturated vs low saturated and high CH Humphries et al., 199675
polyunsaturated
Crossover, high vs low saturated fat and cholesterol TG, HDL-c Friedlander et al., 200059
Handbook of Nutrition and Food
ADRB3 8p11.22 Aging morbid obese vs normal wt Wt gain Nagase et al., 199753
Wt gain Clément et al., 199554
Optifast wt loss program: diet, exercise, and support group Wt loss Benecke et al., 200038
Dob3 8q23-q24 High fat Mice bred for diet response West et al., 1994a, 1994b29,30
Dob1 9p13 High fat Mice bred for diet response West et al., 1994a, 1994b29,30
UCP3 11q14.1 Cross-sectional, morbidly obese vs nonobese BMI, max BMI, Wt, diabetes Otabe et al., 199943
APOCIII 11q23.2 Crossover, saturated vs monounsaturated fats CH, LDL-c, Apo B López-Miranda et al., 199782
APOAI 11q23.2 Crossover, saturated vs monounsaturated fats LDL-c López-Miranda et al., 199478
APOAIV 11q23.2 Reduced fat HDL-c, TG Dreon et al., 1994; 199588,89
High cholesterol LDL-c McCombs et al., 199479
Crossover, NCEP vs average LDL-c, HDL-c, TG Mata et al., 199480
Crossover, saturated vs monounsaturated fats CH, LDL-c, Apo B Jansen et al., 199781
LDLR 19p13.2 Fiber ApoB, total cholesterol, LDL-c Hegele et al., 199384
APOE 19q13.32 Reduced fat LDL particle size Dreon et al., 1994; 199588,89
Crossover, low vs high cholesterol HDL-c, CETP Martin et al., 199386
Crossover, low vs high fat HDL-c subclasses and LDL particle size Williams et al., 199587
* MTHFR = 5,10-methylenetetrahydrofolate reductase (NADPH); TNFR2 = tumor necrosis factor alpha, receptor 2; Dob1 = Dietary obese; HSD3B1 = hydroxy-delta-5-steroid
dehydrogenase, 3 beta- and steroid delta-isomerase 1; APOB = apolipoprotein B; IRS1 = insulin receptor substrate 1; Dob2 = Dietary obese; PPARG = peroxisome proliferative
activated receptor, gamma; FABP2 = fatty acid binding protein 2; UCP1 = uncoupling protein 1; GRL = glucocorticoid receptor locus; ADRB2 = beta 2 adrenergic receptor;
LEP = leptin; LPL = lipoprotein lipase; ADRB3 = beta 3 adrenergic receptor; Dob3 = Dietary obese; Dob1 = Dietary obese; UCP3 = uncoupling protein 3; APOCIII =
apolipoprotein C-III; APOAI = apolipoprotein A-I; APOAIV = apolipoprotein A-IV; CETP = cholesteryl ester transfer protein, plasma; LDLR = low-density lipoprotein
receptor; APOE = apolipoprotein E.
** Cross-sectional = different subjects across groups; Crossover = same subjects with repeated measured across groups; NCEP = National Cholesterol Education Program diet
(total fat < 30%, saturated fat < 10%, cholesterol intake < 300 mg/d)
609
2705_frame_C27 Page 610 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:32 PM
Regarding the twin intervention method, one series of studies dominates the literature.
This was an overfeeding experiment involving MZ twin pairs. In the long-term experi-
ment, 12 pairs of male MZ twins were submitted to a 1000 kcal surplus diet 6 days a week
for a period of 100 days.23 The nutrient content of the diet was 50% carbohydrate, 35%
lipid, and 15% protein. During the course of the protocol the excess energy intake was
84,000 kcal. In the short-term experiment, 6 pairs of male MZ twins were given the same
protocol for a period of 22 consecutive days24 In both the long-term and short-term
experiments, a variety of physical and metabolic measurements spanning the phenotypic
domains listed above were measured before and after the dietary interventions. Genetic
epidemiology results from both the long-term and short-term studies have been reported
in several publications and provide evidence for GxE interaction. More recently, associa-
tion studies of the responses to overfeeding for a few candidate genes have been reported.
Adiposity
It is not surprising that overfeeding has an adverse effect on adiposity. In general, an
increase in caloric intake leads to an increase in adiposity, and this effect appears to be
more pronounced in some individuals, depending on genotypes. Evidence for these con-
clusions arises from several sources using different study designs.6,25-27
More direct evidence of GxE on adiposity was obtained in both the short-term24 and
long-term23 MZ intervention experiments. In the long-term intervention experiment, there
was a mean increase in body mass of 8.1 kg, with a threefold difference between the lowest
and highest gainers, ranging from 4 to 12 kg.23 The variability in response for weight was
at least three times greater (F-ratio of 3.4) between unrelated individuals than within twin
pairs, suggesting a significant genotype–overfeeding interaction. Similar magnitudes of
results were found for body mass index (BMI), percent body fat, fat mass measured with
underwater weighing, and subcutaneous fat measured by summing across six skinfolds.
Moreover, the variance was six times greater between than within pairs for abdominal
visceral fat (measured with computed tomography scan) after adjusting for total fat mass.
These findings indicate that some individuals tend to store fat predominantly in selected
fat depots in response to caloric surplus primarily as a result of genetic factors. In another
MZ twin intervention study,28 the opposite dietary treatment was conducted. Fourteen
pairs of female MZ twins were strictly supervised for 28 days on a very low calorie diet.
The diet provided for 1.6 MJ/day and included 37 g protein, 50 g carbohydrates, and 3.8 g
fat. Significant diet-induced reductions were seen for several measures of body composi-
tion, including weight, BMI, percent fat, fat mass, abdominal fat, and several skinfold
measures. Moreover, the variance was 11 to 17 times higher among unrelated individuals
than between twin pairs, suggesting a significant GxE interaction effect. Together, these
twin studies suggest that the changes in body composition due to dietary intervention
(both overfeeding and underfeeding) are due in part to the genotype.
Some of the evidence for gene-diet interactions on adiposity comes from the measured
genotype approach. Given the obvious connection between food intake and obesity, there
is nevertheless a paucity of measured gene-by-diet interaction studies of obesity. West
et al. provided early evidence of gene-diet interaction on obesity in mice.29,30 Nine strains
of mice were selectively bred for their responses to a high-fat diet; there was a sixfold
difference in adiposity gain between strains that were sensitive (AKR/J) and resistant
(SWR/J) to weight gain. Three dietary obese loci (Dob1, Dob2, and Dob3) were found
to underlie these differences, and they have been mapped to syntenic human chromo-
somes on 1p35-p31 and 9p13 for Dob1, 3p21 for Dob2, and 8q23-q24 for Dob3. No studies
were found reporting linkage or association of these genes to dietary responses in
humans. However, linkage of nearby anonymous markers (D1S476, D1S200, D1S193,
2705_frame_C27 Page 611 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:32 PM
stratifying the sample based on nutritional variables. In another study of children with
elevated LDL-c levels, the effect of a nutrition-education program was investigated.66
Greater reductions in plasma total and LDL-c were observed in children with less family
history of coronary heart disease.
Evidence for gene-diet interactions on HDL-c subfractions (HDL1-c, HDL2-c, and HDL3-
c) were also reported in a baboon population.67 The baboons were measured under a basal
diet and again after being fed a high cholesterol and saturated fat challenge diet. The
results suggested that there were both pleiotropic effects (i.e., the same gene(s) influencing
multiple traits) and GxE interactions. The authors concluded that although a similar set
of genes influenced the variation in each of the three subfractions under both diet condi-
tions, the expression of the genes influencing HDL1-c and HDL2-c were altered by the
high-fat diet (i.e., a GxE interaction).
Additional evidence of GxE effects come from the short-term MZ twin overfeeding
intervention study. Plasma responses in CH, triglycerides (TG), LDL-c, HDL-c, and the
HDL-c/CH ratio were investigated.68 Although overfeeding induced significant changes
only in CH and LDL-c, there were large interindividual differences in the responses of all
of these variables. GxE interactions were detected for TG, HDL-c, and HDL-c/CH. It was
noted that TG changes were negatively correlated with HDL changes, and that the corre-
lated responses may be related to the susceptibility to develop hypertriglyceridemia, which
is known to be under genetic control and related to changes in insulin concentrations.
Much of the evidence for GxE interactions on lipids, lipoproteins, and apolipoproteins
involve the measured gene approach.59,69-71 Genetic variations in several apolipoprotein
genes (A-I, A-IV, B, CIII, E), the LDL receptor (LDLR) and LDL subclasses (patterns A and
B) have been implicated in the dietary response of lipids.
The LPL gene discussed above, involved in partitioning exogeneous triglycerides
between storage and oxidation, has been associated with plasma lipid levels and CHD
risk.72,73 In humans, several mutations have been implicated in the gene-diet interaction.
For example, the Hind III polymorphism was associated with variability in plasma cho-
lesterol, LDL-c, LDL-triglyceride, and Apo B responses to diet.70,74,75 The N291S mutation
showed a significant effect on TG and HDL-c responses to diet.59 Other evidence from a
MZ twin study (non-intervention) suggests GxE involvement of the Ser447Ter mutation.76
Intrapair variances were different across twin types for CH, TG, and HDL-c levels,
although the environmental source using this method is not specified. The authors sug-
gested that this LPL variant acts as a restrictive variability gene, so that individuals without
the mutation are more susceptible to fluctuations in plasma cholesterol and HDL-c.
Several of the apolipoprotein genes have been implicated in gene-diet interactions.71,77
The APO A-I, A-IV, and C-III complex of genes is involved in lipid metabolism. A mutation
in the A-I gene promoter region (G → A) was associated with the plasma LDL-c response
to a high monounsaturated fat diet.78 Apo A-IV is an intestinal glycoprotein with two
allele forms (A-IV-1 and A-IV-2); its synthesis is stimulated by dietary lipids and it may
act centrally to inhibit food intake. Although conflicting reports are found, individuals
homozygous for the A-IV-1 allele generally have lower HDL-c and higher TG.71 In a
crossover intervention study, subjects consumed a low-cholesterol diet for two weeks,
then three weeks of a high-cholesterol diet.79 In the high-cholesterol diet condition, plasma
LDL-c increased more in the A-IV-1 group than the A-IV-2 group, with no change in HDL-c
or TG levels for either genotype. Similar results were found in men (but not women) in
another report combining data from three intervention studies.80 In another study,81 an
A → T mutation in position 347 affected the total CH, LDL-c, and Apo B responses to a
high fat diet. Lipid changes due to dietary intervention were found to be similar for the
Apo C-III gene. For example, the SstI polymorphism interacted with diet to produce
genotype-dependent responses in total CH, LDL-c, and Apo B levels.82 Thus, for this cluster
2705_frame_C27 Page 614 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:32 PM
depleted LDL, without a change in LDL particle number. This shift in LDL distribution
with the low fat diet induced expression of pattern B phenotype in 36 of the 87 pattern A
subjects who did not express it on a high fat diet. Thus, in response to a low fat diet 41%
of the pattern A subjects exhibited the more atherogenic pattern B lipoprotein profile. The
results of this study provide a good example of genotype-diet interaction and show that
dietary recommendations may not be equally good for every individual in the population.
LDLR mediate cholesterol uptake and are located on cells of many tissues. LDLR poly-
morphisms within the exon have been related to reductions in plasma concentrations of
ApoB, total, and LDL cholesterol response to dietary fiber,84 but not to the response of
LDL-c concentrations to dietary fatty acids.91
MTHFR is an enzyme involved in folate production and in remethylation of homocys-
teine. Elevated levels of homocysteine are due to enzymatic deficiencies or to low intake
of vitamins B6, B12, and folic acid, and are risk factors for coronary heart disease. Gene-
diet interactions on homocysteine levels have been reported.92 A MTHFR polymorphism
was associated with increased homocysteine levels, but only in men with low folate intake.
Thus, low folate intake may increase the risk of hyperhomocysteinemia in subjects with
the MTHFR mutation. The MTHFR locus is closely linked to both the TNFR2 and Dob1
loci involved with adiposity responses to dietary intervention.
The FABP2 gene produces the intestinal fatty acid binding protein. It plays a role in
absorption and intracellular transport of saturated and unsaturated long chain fatty
acids.93,94 The FABP2 T54 allele has been associated with insulin resistance and an athero-
genic metabolic profile. In a crossover study of the effects of dietary soluble and insoluble
fiber, the T54 allele was associated with a significant decrease in total and LDL cholesterol
and Apo B during a period when the diet was high in soluble fiber.95
Finally, the cholesteryl ester transfer protein (CETP) gene mediates the transfer of cho-
lesteryl ester from HDL-c to triglyceride-rich lipoproteins. It also has a role in reverse
cholesterol transport and in the catabolism of HDL-c. CETP isoforms were associated
HDL-c levels and risk for myocardial infarction, but only in subjects who drank 25 g/day
of alcohol.96 Thus, there is evidence of a gene-alcohol interaction effect on HDL-c levels.
Other examples of GxG interactions are found in the body composition domain. For
example, indirect evidence for two pleiotropic loci affecting fat mass and BMI was
reported by Borecki et al.100 using segregation analysis. One locus apparently affected
extreme overweight, while the other influenced variation only in the “normal” range.
Evidence for multiple loci affecting body composition has also been explored using the
measured gene approach. Since each of the LPL, GRL, and ADRA2 loci had similar effects
on several correlated body composition traits, the hypothesis of GxG interaction was
investigated.101 Previous studies had reported that the ADRA2 Dra I variant and the GRL
Bcl I variant were each associated with abdominal fat. When the three candidates (GRL,
ADRA2, and LPL) were considered simultaneously, significant interactions on overall and
abdominal adiposity were observed that accounted for a small but significant percentage
of the variance.
Only one study was found investigating GxG interactions for responses to dietary inter-
vention, involving the APO A-I and A-IV loci.81 Male subjects were fed three consecutive
diets, each lasting for four weeks, which differed in amounts of saturated and monoun-
saturated fats. The G → A mutation in APOAI and the 347Thr/Ser mutation in APOAIV
were examined. Each locus showed a gene-diet interaction effect on responses in total
cholesterol, LDL-c, and Apo B levels. However, the GxG effect on the response was not
significant, resulting in a simple additive effect of the two loci on the lipid responses.
Conclusions
This section is not intended to be an exhaustive summary of the genetics of nutrition.
Rather, we have attempted to show the broad scope of behavioral and physiological factors
underlying the genetics of nutrition. The general findings may be summarized as follows.
First, there are familial factors underlying food intake and preferences. However, whether
this effect is due to genes, familial environments, or some combination of both is not clear.
Second, it is obvious that nutrition plays an important role in the development of certain
diseases leading to morbidity and mortality such as obesity, dyslipidemia, and diabetes,
and that genes underlie this effect to some extent. Third, there are multiple complex
etiologies that lead to increased risk for these diseases.
A great deal of work remains to be done on several fronts. First, very little was found
regarding gene-diet interactions for many of the peptides and hormones3 that have been
implicated in food intake. Some of these include cholecsytokinin (CCK), glucagon-like
peptide 1, agouti-related peptide, CART, corticotropin releasing factor (CRF), pro-opiomel-
anocortin (POMC), opioids, neuropeptide Y (NPY), and others. These inhibit food intake,
while others stimulate appetite and thus may contribute significantly to the responses to
energy intake. More extensive candidate genotyping of existing intervention data would
be helpful in this regard. Second, it is highly unlikely that the genes identified to date are
the only ones affecting the traits discussed here, even in the lipid domain, for which much
is already known. While candidate gene studies are useful in confirming the effects of
these known genes, linkage analysis of genome scan data are needed in order to locate
novel chromosomal regions that may lead to identification of new genes. In this regard,
large-scale diet intervention studies of family data are needed. While this may be imprac-
tical in human populations, genome scans from intervention studies of closely related
species such as the baboons are feasible. Third, in addition to gene-diet interactions,
models that incorporate the possibility of other complex etiologies such as pleiotropy and
2705_frame_C27 Page 617 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:32 PM
oligogenic and epistatic actions are needed. Since candidate genes for lipids (e.g., LPL)
may also influence other traits such as diabetes and obesity, we should not limit our
candidate gene investigations to one type of trait. This field is ripe for an explosion of
studies that probe the genome and describe the complex genetic etiologies underlying
responses to nutrition. It is obvious that nutrition plays a large role in several traits of
public health interest such as those involved in the metabolic syndrome and discussed
here. An understanding of the factors involved in this syndrome should take nutritional
factors into account.
References
1. Pérusse L, Bouchard C. In: The Genetics of Obesity (Bouchard C, Ed) Boca Raton: CRC Press,
1994, p 125.
2. Prutkin J, Fisher EM, Etter L, et al. Physiol Behav 69:161; 2000.
3. Smith GP. Neuropeptides 33: 323; 1999.
4. Rice TK, Borecki IB. In: Genetic Dissection of Complex Traits (Rao DC, Province MA, Eds) San
Diego: Academic Press, 2001, p 35.
5. Rao DC, Rice T. In: Encyclopedia of Biostatistics, Vol 4. (Armitage P, Colton T, Eds) Sussex, UK:
Wiley, 1998, p 3285.
6. Pérusse L, Bouchard C. Nutr Rev 57: 31S; 1999.
7. Borecki IB, Suarez BK. In: Genetic Dissection of Complex Traits (Rao DC, Province MA, Eds) San
Diego: Academic Press, 2001, p 45.
8. Effron B. Philadelphia, PA: SIAM. 1982
9. Huber PJ. Proceedings of the 5th Berkeley Symposium on Mathematical Statistics and Prob-
ability. Berkeley, CA: University of California Press, Vol I: 221; 1967.
10. White M. Econometrica 48: 817; 1980.
11. Woods SC, Schwartz MW, Baskin DG, Seeley RJ. Ann Rev Psychol 51: 255; 2000.
12. DeCastro JM. Physiol Behav 54: 677; 1993.
13. Pérusse L, Tremblay A, Leblanc C, et al. Am J Clin Nutr 47: 629; 1988.
14. Vauthier J-M, Lluch A, Lecomte E, et al. Int J Epidemiol 25: 1030; 1996.
15. Garn SM, Cole PE, Bailey SM. Hum Biol 51: 565; 1979.
16. Fabsitz RR, Garrison RJ, Feinleib M, Hjortland M. Behav Genet 8: 15; 1978.
17. Patterson TL, Rupp JW, Sallis JF, et al. Am J Prev Med 4: 75; 1988.
18. Oliveria SA, Ellison RC, Moore LL, et al. Am J Clin Nutr 56: 593; 1992.
19. Wade J, Milner J, Krondl M. Am J Clin Nutr 34: 143; 1981.
20. Reed DR, Bachmanov AA, Beauchamp GK, et al. Behav Genet 27: 373; 1997.
21. Faith MS, Rha SS, Neale MC, Allison DB. Behav Genet 29: 145; 1999.
22. Smith BK, Andrews PK, West DB. Am J Physiol 278: R797; 2000.
23. Bouchard C, Tremblay A, Després J-P, et al. N Engl J Med 322: 1477; 1990.
24. Bouchard C, Tremblay A, Després J-P, et al. Prog Food Nutr Sci 12: 45; 1988.
25. Leibel RL, Bahary N, Friedman JM. World Rev Nutr Diet 63: 90; 1990.
26. Weinsier RL, Hunter GR, Heini AF, et al. Am J Med 105: 145; 1998.
27. Pérusse L, Bouchard C. Ann Med 31S: 19; 1999.
28. Hainer V, Stunkard AJ, Kunesova M, et al. Int J Obes 24: 1051; 2000.
29. West DB, Waguespack J, York B, et al. Mamm Genome 5: 546; 1994.
30. West DB, Goudey-Lefevre J, York B, Truett GE. J Clin Invest 94; 1410; 1994.
31. Chagnon YC, Pérusse L, Lamothe M, et al. Obes Res 5: 115; 1997.
32. Chagnon YC, Rice T, Pérusse L, et al. J Appl Physiol 90: 1777; 2001.
33. Jensen DR, Schlaepfer IR, Morin CL, et al. Am J Physiol 273; R683, 1997.
34. Vohl M-C, Lamarche B, Moorjani S, et al. Arterioscler Thromb Vasc Biol 15: 714; 1995.
35. Cigolini M, Smith U. Metabolism 28: 502; 1979.
36. Ukkola O, Rosmond R, Tremblay A, Bouchard C. Atherosclerosis 157: 221; 2001.
2705_frame_C27 Page 618 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:32 PM
92. Jing Ma, Stampfer MJ, Hennekens CH, et al. Circulation 94: 2410; 1996.
93. Baier LJ, Sacchettini JC, Knowler WC, et al. J Clin Invest 95: 1281; 1995.
94. Hegele RA. Clin Biochem 31: 609; 1998.
95. Hegele RA, Wolever TMS, Story JA, et al. Eur J Clin Invest 27: 857; 1997.
96. Fumeron F, Betoulle D, Luc G, et al. J Clin Invest 96: 1664; 1995.
97. Pedersen JC, Berg K. Clin Genet 35: 331; 1989.
98. Helbecque N, Dallongeville J, Codron V. Arterioscler Thromb Vasc Biol 17: 2759; 1997.
99. Ukkola O, Pérusse L, Weisnagel SJ, et al. Metabolism 50: 246; 2001.
100. Borecki IB, Blangero J, Rice T, et al. Am J Hum Genet 63: 831; 1998.
101. Ukkola O, Pérusse L, Chagnon YC, et al. Int J Obes (in press) 2001.
102. Heller RF, O’Connell DL, Roberts DCK. Genet Epidemiol 5: 311; 1988.
103. Vohl M-C, Dionne FT, Pérusse L, et al. Obes Res 2: 444; 1994.
104. Fumeron F, Durack-Bown I, Betoulle D, et al. Int J Obes 20: 1051; 1996.
105. Oksanen L, Ohman M, Heiman M, et al. Hum Genet 99: 559; 1997.
2705_frame_C27 Page 620 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:32 PM
2705_frame_C28 Page 621 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:33 PM
28
Documentation to Improve Medical Assessment Access
and Reimbursement
Jessica A. Krenkel
Introduction
Nutrition and nutrition-related medical diagnoses are the basis for medical assessment
and the administration of patient nutrition care. Standards of nutrition care are directed
to quality treatment but reimbursement issues drive treatment access, and reimbursement
is being closely tied to outcomes and costs versus benefits. The recent emphasis on evi-
dence-based medicine and outcomes has stimulated the collection of data to reinforce the
cost benefit for professional nutrition services, usually provided by a registered dietitian.
Registered dietitians are currently the single identifiable group with the standardized
education, clinical training, continuing education, and national credentialing requirements
necessary to be directly reimbursed as a provider of nutrition therapy. Professional services
may include counseling for preventing disease (primary prevention), for detecting asymp-
tomatic disease or risk factors at early, treatable stages (secondary prevention), for disease
treatment (tertiary prevention), and to promote normal growth and development.1 The
approach taken by the National Institute of Medicine (IOM) in making recommendations
for future Medicare coverage included two nutrition service categories or levels: nutrition
therapy and basic education or advice.2 Nutrition therapy was identified by the IOM to
include the assessment of nutritional status, evaluation of nutritional needs, intervention
that ranges from counseling on diet prescriptions to the provision of enteral and parenteral
nutrition, and follow-up care as appropriate. Since nutrition therapy is an intensive
approach to the management of chronic diseases and requires significantly more training
in food and nutrition science than is commonly provided in the curriculum of other health
professions, the registered dietitian is the most common reimbursable provider, while basic
nutrition could be provided by many health professionals.
The American Dietetic Association (ADA) uses the designation medical nutrition ther-
apy (MNT) for assessment and interventions to treat illness and injury based on clinical
research and experience. MNT involves the assessment and analysis of medical and diet
history, blood chemistry lab values, and anthropometric measurements. Components of
MNT include: 1) Diet modification and counseling and 2) specialized nutrition therapies
0-8493-2705-9/01/$0.00+$1.50
© 2002 by CRC Press LLC 621
2705_frame_C28 Page 622 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:33 PM
TABLE 28.1
Nutrition Diagnoses
260 Failure to thrive, kwashiorkor
261 Marasmus
263.8 Hypoalbuminemia with malnutrition
262-263.9 Mixed protein-kcalorie malnutrition and
263.0, 263.1 Malnutrition of mild to moderate degree
269.9 Nutritional deficiencies, unspecified
278 Obesity
281.9 Anemia, nutritional
646.1 Obesity/Pregnancy
646.8 Weight Loss/Pregnancy
733.1 Failure to thrive, child
783.1 Abnormal weight gain
783.2 Abnormal weight loss
733.0 Anorexia
307.1 Anorexia nervosa
783.6 Bulimia
307.50 Eating disorder, NOS
such as medical foods through food intake, enteral nutrition delivered via tube, or parental
nutrition delivered via intravenous infusion.3
Nutrition Diagnosis
Medical diagnoses are officially coded by the International Classification of Diseases,
Ninth Revision, Clinical Modification, ICD-9-CM, codes.4 The codes identify the reasons
services, equipment, or supplies are ordered. Diseases and injuries are arranged into 17
groups with 3 to 5 numeric descriptors. These include only a few codes specific to a
nutrition diagnosis (Table 28.1) but many that are nutrition-related (Table 28.2) and there-
fore may require medical nutrition therapy as part of the treatment. A clinical modification
of ICD-10-CM has been developed as a replacement for ICD-9-CM but has not been
implemented yet.
There are 24 disease management protocols for the most common nutrition-related
diagnoses provided by the ADA publication, Medical Nutrition Therapy across the Con-
tinuum of Care.5 When coding the diagnosis for reimbursement, the code of choice should
agree with the M.D.-identified diagnosis. For example, the ICD-9-CM codes for diabetes
are very specific for complications and control (250.01 — diabetes mellitus without men-
tion of complication, type 1; 250.02 — diabetes mellitus without mention of complication,
type 2, uncontrolled). Familiar nutrition diagnoses are the codes related to malnutrition:
failure to thrive, kwashiorkor (260), marasmus (261), hypoalbuminemia with malnutrition
(263.8), mixed protein-calorie malnutrition (262-263.9), and malnutrition of mild to mod-
erate degree (263, 263.1). There are suggestions for further clarification of malnutrition
and weight loss diagnoses by describing body compartments: wasting (involuntary
weight loss), cachexia (involuntary loss of body cell mass or fat-free mass when this
compartment is reduced by little or no weight loss), and sarcopenia (involuntary loss of
muscle mass). An increased degree of specificity for malnutrition may have value to
increase the perception of nutrition as medical treatment for the future and to focus
treatment on identified patient needs. Submitting codes to the American Medical
2705_frame_C28 Page 623 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:33 PM
TABLE 28.2
Nutrition-Related ICD-9 Diagnosis Code Examples
042 AIDS/HIV
693.1 Allergies — food related
626 Amenorrhea
429.2 ASCVD
239.6 Breast cancer
579.0 Celiac sprue
574 Cholelithiasis
558.9 Colitis/Ileitis
558.10 Colon cancer
428 Congestive heart failure
564 Constipation
555.9 Crohn’s disease
250 Diabetes mellitus
250.91 Diabetes mellitus, I, complications
250.01 Diabetes mellitus, I, uncomplicated
250.90 Diabetes mellitus, II, complications
250.0 Diabetes mellitus, II, uncomplicated
648.8 Diabetes, gestational
251.0 Diabetic ketoacidosis
558.9 Diarrhea
271 Disorders of lipid metabolism
562.10 Diverticulitis
536.8 Dyspepsia
535.5 Gastritis
553.3 Hiatal hernia
272.03 Hypercholesterolemia
643.0 Hyperemesis gravidarum
272.1 Hyperglycemia
272.3 Hyperlipidemia
275.42 Hypercalcemia
276.7 Hyperkalemia
276.0 Hypernatremia
252.0 Hyperparathyroidism
275.41 Hypocalcemia
250.80 Hypoglycemia, diabetic, unspecified
251.2 Hypoglycemia, nondiabetic, unspecified
276.8 Hypokalemia
276.1 Hyponatremia
272.4 Hyperlipidemia
401-405 Hypertension
564.1 Irritable bowel
271.3 Lactose intolerance
579.9 Malabsorption syndrome
581.9 Nephrotic syndrome
733 Osteoporosis
239 Stomach cancer
2705_frame_C28 Page 624 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:33 PM
Care Standards
Clinical practice tools including practice guidelines, protocols, clinical pathways, care
maps, and algorithms integrate clinical expertise and scientific evidence to reduce frag-
mentation of care, and to guide nutrition practice and nutrition-related diagnoses. The
development of these tools begins with the most costly and frequent medical conditions.
Professional organizations, insurance companies, government agencies, accrediting orga-
nizations, and corporation policies and procedures may establish standards of practice.
Standards of practice are gaining importance for justifying treatment approaches for
patients and for providing legal justification for time, billing, and counseling content.
Professional organizations that provide standards of practice include the American
Dietetic Association, American Society for Parenteral and Enteral Nutrition, American
Public Health Association, American Diabetic Association, and other professional associ-
ations and practice groups. Government agencies provide standards for various practice
settings, which are published in the Federal Register. Additionally, interpretive guidelines
and survey procedures provide additional sources for practice expectations. The Health
Care Financing Administration (HCFA), with responsibility for Medicare, influences
healthcare facility standards as well as the reimbursement system for private and public
health plans. Additionally, the Agency for Health Care Policy and Research (AHCPR) was
created by the U.S. Congress to enhance the quality, appropriateness, and effectiveness of
clinical practice guidelines.6 Accrediting organizations such as the Joint Commission on
Accreditation of Healthcare Organizations (JCAHO), dictate expectations for quality nutri-
tion care for many types of facilities. Corporations have relied on many published stan-
dards of practice to establish contracts, competencies, and policies and procedures for
nutrition practitioners. Employer or professional liability may be determined by adherence
to practice standards. Lawsuits related to practice guidelines in the medical profession
have not permitted a lower standard for different rural communities, geographical areas,
or resource availability, and this would be predicted to be the case for nutrition practice
standards as well. Whether established practice guidelines will foster increased lawsuits
against practitioners who fail to follow recommendations is unknown.7
TABLE 28.3
Major Classifications and Models of Managed Care Systems
Classification/Model Characteristics
Health maintenance A managed care organization that provides or arranges for specific health care
organization (HMO) services for plan members for a fixed, prepaid premium or dollar amount.
Staff model The HMO owns and operates all facilities needed for the care of plan members
and directly hires providers to work in HMO facilities. Closed panel with tight
control over practice and benefits.
Group model The HMO contracts with physician groups to care for plan members instead of
directly employing these physicians. These physician groups are managed
independently from the HMO and are paid at negotiated, capitated rates.
Network model The HMO contracts with several single- or multispecialty physician groups.
Independent practice The HMO contracts directly with individual, independent physicians, who are
association (IPA) paid on a capitated basis. These physicians work in their own offices and serve
both HMO and non-HMO patients.
Mixed-model A combination of the above four distinct HMO models and fee-for-service plans
to accommodate the different preferences of providers and health plan members.
Preferred provider The HMO contracts with individual providers or networks of providers to
organization (PPO) provide health care, such as nutrition services or dental care, for plan members
at discounted fee-for-service rates. Plan members are not matched with
gatekeepers and can go to specialists without referrals.
Point-of-service (POS) plan Plan members are coupled with primary care providers but can seek care directly
from other providers for higher copayments.
quently, measures of nutrition access across a continuum of care are an important way to
evaluate quality of care.
A significant measure of the trend of decreased access is the proportion of people who
have health insurance. In 1997, 85% of persons under 65 years of age had health insurance.
Health insurance may be either private or public health plans.8 Private insurance includes
fee-for-service (FFS) plans, single-service hospital plans, or coverage by managed care
organizations. Managed care is divided into three major classifications (See Table 28.3):
health maintenance organizations (HMOs), preferred provider organizations (PPOs), and
point-of-service (POS) plans.9,10 Public insurance includes Medicaid or other public assis-
tance, Aid for Families with Dependent Children (AFDC), Supplemental Security Income
(SSI), Indian Health Service, Medicare, or military health plan coverage.
Medicare Part A (hospital insurance) covers inpatient hospital, home care, and hospice
services, skilled nursing facility care, and end-stage renal disease services. Medicare is
managed by the Health Care Financing Administration (HCFA) which contracts with 46
fiscal intermediaries who are private insurance companies to process claims. Under Medi-
care Part A there are no payments specifically for dietitian services, as facility reimburse-
ment is related to complexity of care for different diagnoses and conditions. For hospitals,
the HCFA classification scheme is called Diagnosis Related Groups (DRGs), while for
skilled nursing facilities the classifications are called Resource Utilization Group (RUGs).
The DRGs and RUGs provide the basis for a Prospective Payment System (PPS) or “bun-
dled” approach for hospitals since 1983, skilled nursing facilities since 1998, and home
health agencies as of October 2000.11
Medicare Part B (medical insurance) provides coverage for outpatient physician and
hospital services, laboratory services, durable medical equipment, and other medical
services. Part B professional services are administered by 33 carriers. Part B equipment
and supplies are administered by four regional durable medical equipment carriers
(DMERCs).11 While there is not a benefit for nutrition counseling under Part B, this is the
focus of current legislative efforts by the ADA.
2705_frame_C28 Page 626 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:33 PM
Medicare Part C (Medicare + Choice) offers alternate health plan options in addition to
the traditional fee-for-service plan. Medicaid is a federal–state matching entitlement pro-
gram for certain individuals and families with low income and resources. State participation
in the Medicaid program is optional as long as the state has a similar program for this
population. Each state has varying coverage of nutrition services for Medicaid recipients.11
Although lack of health insurance is clearly a major factor impeding access to care,
having health insurance does not guarantee that health care will be accessible or affordable.
Managed care has become the dominant form of healthcare delivery in the U.S. replacing
the traditional FFS or indemnity system.12 Managed care shifts financial risk from employ-
ers, insurance companies, and self-paying patients to healthcare systems and providers.
Providers are paid set or predetermined fees under capitation and bundled fee systems
regardless of services ultimately rendered. Managed care attempts to control costs by
preventing duplication of services, restricting choices of providers, and increasing effi-
ciency. Access to service is provided by precertification, utilization review, and credential-
ing. Gatekeepers to the system vary, but the case manager has a key role in complex
medical cases. Educating case managers to showcase the benefits of medical nutrition
therapy, improved patient care, and cost containment is essential for improved nutrition
service access. Nutrition professionals potentially impact preventive services, screening
programs, health risk assessments, and case management if they become more knowl-
edgeable about how the systems operate.
Reimbursement for some care settings over others causes an uneven distribution of
access to service. Access sites should include the entire continuum of care: acute care,
ambulatory care, home care, skilled nursing, and long-term care. While nutrition counsel-
ing is generally more effective outside the hospital setting, coverage for nutrition therapy
in ambulatory settings is at best inconsistent, but most often nonexistent.2 This lack of
access is a significant barrier to improved patient outcomes associated with nutrition care.
Outcomes
Analysis of the effectiveness of the practice guidelines for medical nutrition therapy is a
focus of outcomes research. The outcomes determine reimbursement for clinical practice
in our health care system as evidence-based medicine is becoming a controlling factor in
determining the distribution of healthcare dollars.13 The outcome is the result of a process
of healthcare that weighs options as to cost and effects. The two major categories of
outcomes are health and cost. Outcomes data provide health care payers information on
the effectiveness of care to help them “1) reduce health care costs, 2) prioritize care and
make reimbursement decisions, 3) establish guidelines, and 4) make purchasing deci-
sions.”14 Decisions such as which tests to run first, or whether to try enteral or parenteral
feeding, require knowledge of the evidence which supports nutrition decisions. Accep-
tance of clinical nutrition by the plan practitioners may be enhanced by the realization
that cost-effective medical practice is optimized by wider application of nutrition princi-
ples to health maintenance and patient care.15
Health outcomes include clinical outcomes such as lab results and length of stay, func-
tional outcomes such as quality of life, and general outcomes such as patient satisfaction
and interventions.14 Clinical research, as well as continuous quality improvement (CQI)
or other in-house quality measurements, utilize health outcomes to determine results.16
These need to be coupled with the cost outcomes of cost-effectiveness, cost-benefit, and
charges. Cost-effectiveness is a ratio measure of the number of dollars spent for the
2705_frame_C28 Page 627 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:33 PM
TABLE 28.4
Types of Outcomes
Clinical Outcomes
Primary Secondary
Anatomic or Anthropometric — weight, height, % body fat, etc. Morbidity
Physiologic — Mortality
Biochemical labs, such as albumin, hemoglobin, cytokines Length of stay
Healing, such as pressure ulcers, wounds, burns Rates of infection
Metabolic rate Re-admissions
Study or Disease Specific Drug utilization
Such as stool analysis in cystic fibrosis, or residuals in enteral feeding studies Number of doctor visits
Home health care nursing visits
Economic Outcomes
Reimbursement
The value of the dietitian is determined by income generation and by contribution to the
goals of the organization in the private and public sectors of society. A lack of reimburse-
2705_frame_C28 Page 628 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:33 PM
ment is a specific barrier to more consistent delivery of diet counseling and to employment
of nutrition professionals.
Reimbursement issues have become a barrier for clinical nutrition in hospitals, clinics,
and educational and other settings that have begun to operate their clinics with more of
a business approach. Reimbursement has been poor to variable, with a wide range of
experience expressed nationwide. The Health Care Financing Team at ADA has encour-
aged registered dietitians to develop skill understanding medical nutrition therapy coding
and the coverage issues that surround reimbursement.20 Recent efforts by ADA offer
potential for increased reimbursement. The ADA has had three MNT current procedural
terminology (CPT) codes accepted by the American Medical Association and published
in the 2001 CPT Code.21 Under HCFA’s coding system, CPT codes are considered Level I
HCPCS codes (acronym for HCFA’s Common Procedure Coding System). These represent
levels of service for individual new (97802) and established (97803) patients and group
(97804) that may be used in the private sector (e.g., with third party payers); however,
they have not been assigned relative value units (RVU). The RVUs will determine possible
payment for MNT levels of service by Medicare and HCFA. The RVU represent a fair and
reasonable fee structure based on geographical location, work required/resources con-
sumed to perform service, other operating expenses, and other related factors. The AMA
Health Care Professional Advisory Committee (HCPAC) has not accepted ADA’s recom-
mended work values which were based on practitioner data collected in March 2000, due
to their unfamiliarity with the content and complexity of nutrition services. ADA has
notified the AMA and HCFA that the Association will extend development of codes by
seeking additional codes and reformatting the present codes to separate the tasks of
assessment and intervention. Similar problems have occurred with the codes and RVUs
being used for diabetes counseling, as the time needs and complexity are unfamiliar to
the AMA. The acceptance of AMA codes and RVU for nutrition provider services is crucial
in obtaining reimbursement from Medicare. Medicare decisions set precedents often fol-
lowed by insurance companies, and add to the credibility of nutrition professionals as
providers. The CPT codes and RVUs specific for recognized nutrition providers would be
expected to become the basis of reimbursement for Medicare and insurance companies.22
Recent bills before congressional committees, the Medical Nutrition Therapy Act of 1999
(H.R. 1187/S.660) and the Medicare Wellness Act of 2000 (S.2225/H.R. 3887), which include
some preventive services for Medicare beneficiaries, demonstrate a climate of change for
Medicare reimbursement. The Medical Nutrition Therapy Act provides coverage for med-
ical nutrition therapy under Medicare Part B furnished by registered dietitians and qual-
ified nutrition professionals. A compromise is being considered that would be a five-year
demonstration project for Medicare coverage of diabetes and renal disease.23 The major
reforms, including prescription drugs, will delay consideration of the controversial Medi-
care Wellness Act until at least 2001. These bills have gained momentum due to the study
of the National Academy of Sciences Institute of Medicine, The Role of Nutrition in
Maintaining Health in the Nations Elderly: Evaluating Coverage of Nutrition Services for
the Medicare Population, which recommends that medical nutrition therapy — with phy-
sician referral — be a covered benefit under the Medicare program.2
Presently, numerous CPT codes are used for clinical nutrition services.10,24,25 Codes and
reimbursement vary from state to state, among the various payors, and in different care
settings, but commonly used codes include physician codes for new patients (99201 series),
established patient or follow-up (99211 series), and consultation codes (99241 series). There
is considerable controversy about the use of these codes by non-physician providers with
and without “incident to” a physician billing. “Incident to” a physician billing requires
supervision by the physician and billing under his tax ID, and is primarily used in states
without dietitian licensure. Legal opinion has questioned the use of this billing practice
2705_frame_C28 Page 629 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:33 PM
by non-physicians for Medicare patients except at the lowest level of service and pay-
ment.26 Health insurance companies with provider agreements continue to accept “inci-
dent to” billing. Hospital-based outpatient clinics bill under the hospital tax ID instead of
the physician or the licensed dietitian certified provider ID.
Other codes such as the new MNT codes (97802, 97803, and 97804), or preventive medicine
codes (99381, 99391, and 99401 series) are available but may often have low reimbursement,
as the RVU are minimal to none. Group counseling for preventive counseling (99411 and
99412) is seldom reimbursed, and also has RVU minimal to none. There has been some
progress with the use of G-codes (G0108, G0109) for diabetes counseling, but numerous
criteria must be met to bill when using these codes, including the need for services to be
provided “incident to” a physician’s services and under the physician’s supervision. The
G codes are provisional codes for a new benefit.10 The HCPCS Level II manual includes a
series of temporary national non-Medicare S codes and descriptors: S9465 — Diabetic
management program, dietitian visit, S9470 — Nutritional counseling, dietitian visit.27
Articles and previously published information about which codes to use may not meet
legal challenge and claims of fraud, as there has not been an easily understandable
definition of how dietitians should use the codes. “Practice” does not mean that Medicare
will accept the coding if investigated. This has recently been emphasized with Medicare’s
vigorous monitoring for fraud and abuse, 28 although thus far dietitians have not faced
prosecution. Requests for clarification from Medicare are often verbal, and there has been
resistance to putting interpretations in writing that are not in the published standards.
These numerous inconsistencies and the increasing legal environment emphasize the need
to have professional organizations such as the ADA involved in coding issues and sup-
porting bills to clarify services.
Contracts with insurance companies and health maintenance organizations may closely
follow Medicare guidelines or may be negotiated for acceptable codes and reimburse-
ment/billing rates. Working with the clinic personnel responsible for these contracts has
been beneficial compared to spending time calling each company to get approval for
individual patients or to become a provider. The provider forms for dietitians are usually
the same as for physicians, but many of the questions are not applicable, and dietitians
are not credentialed the same as physicians, especially in states without licensure. Nutri-
tion provider or credentialing information for contracts and provider agreements varies
between health insurance companies, and within the same company there may be different
benefits, interpretations, and provider agreements by region. A negative complication to
payment for nutrition services is the idea of health insurance companies approving pro-
fessionals for “access.” The nutrition professionals on the list are recommended but the
health insurance company does not provide payment, and the insured have to self-pay.
The billing level does not reflect the reimbursement level. It is important to have a set
fee for any code that is being used, no matter what the reimbursement level. If rates are
set at the expected level of payment the reimbursement will most likely be disappointing,
as most schedules are discounted by payors. Published fees cannot be varied for different
payors, but the fee schedule can be discounted at a set amount for ability to pay or cash
payment. A good practice is to keep track of all patients seen, diagnosis, referring physi-
cian, and charges or amount billed for future use. Certainly the collectibles are only part
of services billed, and nutrition services should be documented to justify diagnosis codes
used on reimbursement claims and provide support for medical necessity.10,11
Key staff in insurance, billing, or information systems can help track billing and code
results and develop procedures to maximize reimbursement. Private practice nutrition
professionals may want to contract out insurance and billing tasks until they become more
familiar with these systems. Claim forms and processing are integral to reimbursement.
Physician offices and some individual certified hospital providers submit claims using
2705_frame_C28 Page 630 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:33 PM
HCFA-1500 and electronic filing. Hospital clinics typically use the HCFA 1450 (UB-92)
form for hospital-employed providers, and most hospital outpatient programs use HCFA
1450 form.
Data on the payor mix is important for assessing contracts, marketing, and reimburse-
ment potential. Cost data analysis helps evaluate if your claims are 80 or 30 cents on the
dollar. A streamlined approach to analysis in a large center with many payors would be
to start with Medicare and the other top four payors.29 Reimbursement may not always
cover costs, but this is important information for decision making and to lobby for changes
in rates. Knowing ahead of time that the dietitian costs are not being covered, such as in
capitated contracts, allows time to present evidence to clinic or facility administrators that
consults are saving physician time or preventing hospitalization and therefore reducing
overall costs.
Conclusion
Medical assessment of nutrition contributes to the diagnosis and interventions that
improve the quality of health care for patients. Access to nutrition care by the patient and
reimbursement of the nutrition professional are inexorably tied to quality outcomes with
cost effectiveness. Nutrition professionals need to actively communicate that medical
assessment and nutrition care are essential components of quality health care with a low
cost versus substantial benefit worthy of healthcare dollars.
Terminology
Capitated Fee — A fixed sum of money per enrollee, paid in advance, for a specified
period of time.
Continuum of care — The array of health services and care settings that address
health promotion, disease prevention, and the diagnosis, treatment, management,
and rehabilitation of disease, injury and disability. Included are primary care and
specialized clinical services provided in community and primary care settings,
hospitals, trauma centers, and rehabilitation and long-term care facilities.
Managed care — According to the Institute of Medicine, “a set of techniques used
by or on behalf of purchasers of health care benefits to manage health care costs
by influencing decisionmaking through case-by-case assessments of the appro-
priateness of care prior to its provision.”
Primary care — According to the Institute of Medicine, “The provision of integrated,
accessible health care services by clinicians who are accountable for addressing
a large majority of personal health care needs, developing a sustained partner-
ship with patients, and practicing in the context of family and community.”
Primary prevention — Measures such as health care services, medical tests, coun-
seling, and health education designed to prevent the onset of a targeted condi-
tion. Routine immunization of healthy individuals is an example of primary
prevention.
2705_frame_C28 Page 631 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:33 PM
References
1. US Department of Health and Human Services, Office of Public Health and Science, Healthy
People 2010, National Institute of Medicine, Washington, DC, 2000.
2. National Academy of Science’s Institute of Medicine Committee on Nutrition Services for
Medicare Beneficiaries, The Role of Nutrition in Maintaining Health in the Nation’s Elderly:
Evaluating Coverage of Nutrition Services for the Medicare Population, National Academy
Press, Washington, DC, 2000.
3. What is medical nutrition therapy? www.eatright.com/gov/mnt/html, November 30, 2000.
4. US Department of Health and Human Services. International Classification of Diseases, 9th
Revision, Clinical Modification, 6th ed, DHHS Publication No (PHS), 96-1260, US Department
of Health and Human Services, Public Health Service, Health Care Financing Administration,
Washington, DC, 1997.
5. The American Dietetic Association, Medical Nutrition Therapy Across the Continuum of Care, 2nd
ed, The American Dietetic Association and Morrison Healthcare, Chicago, 1998.
6. Rodriguez DJ. Support Line, 21(5), 8, 1999.
7. CDC, National Center for Health Statistics. National Health Interview Survey. Hyattsville,
MD: National Center for Health Statistics, unpublished data, 1999.
8. Donaldson MS, Yordy KD, Kohr KN (Eds.) Institute of Medicine. Primary Care: America’s Health
in a New Era, National Academy Press, Washington, DC, 1996.
9. Ransom SB, Pinsky WW. Clinical Resource and Quality Management, American College of
Physician Executives, Tampa, FL, 1999.
10. American Association of Diabetes Educators, Reimbursement Primer, American Association of
Diabetes Educators and Roche Diagnostics Corporation, Alexandria, VA, 2000.
11. The Medicare program and nutrition services, www.eatright.com/gov/mntcoverrage.html,
December 12, 2000.
12. Kohn L, Corrigan J, Donaldson M. To Err is Human: Building a Safer Health System, Com-
mittee on Quality Healthcare in America, Institute of Medicine, Washington, DC, 1999.
13. US Preventive Services Task Force. Guide to Clinical Preventive Services, 2nd ed, US Depart-
ment of Health and Human Services, Washington, DC, 1995.
14. Voss AC. The Consultant Dietitian, 23: 1; 1999.
15. Halsted CH. Am J Clin Nutr 67: 192; 1998.
16. Byham-Gray LD. Today’s Dietitian April, 31, 2000.
17. Andrews M, Karras, C. STAT Line VII(3): 1; 2000.
18. Committee on Performance Measurement. Health Plan Employer Data and Information Set.
HEDIS 3.0. Washington, DC: National Committee on Quality Assurance; 1997.
2705_frame_C28 Page 632 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:33 PM
29
Body Composition Assessment
Carolyn D. Berdanier
Mammals, including man, consist of water, protein, fat, and mineral matter. The assess-
ment of this composition can be direct or indirect. Few studies exist on the direct assess-
ment of body composition of man. Analyses of bodies donated for medical research have
been published.1,2 A total of eight such analyses are available. They were done using
gravimetric analysis methods, with discrete tissue samples held to be representative of
the whole body. Gravimetric methods are those that directly measure the water content
of the sample as the difference in sample weight before and after drying. Fat content is
difference in tissue weight before and after solvent extraction of the sample. Mineral
content (ash content) is the weight of the sample after combustion in a muffle furnace.
Protein content is the amount of nitrogen in the sample multiplied by 6.25 under the
assumption that most samples are 16% protein. The results of these studies are shown in
Table 29.1.
Direct body composition methods are unwieldy for large animals. There is considerable
sampling error because of difficulty in preparing a homogeneous body mixture for sam-
pling. In some instances dissection data (Table 29.2) have been accumulated.3 Direct
analysis is possible for small species, i.e., rodents, but even with these species there are
difficulties attributed to the preparation of a whole body homogenate and sampling errors
associated with nonhomogeniety.
The indirect methods for assessing body composition are more practical. These are listed
in Table 29.3. These methods do not require the death of the donor, and can be used at
intervals to determine whether a given treatment has an effect on certain body compo-
nents. For example, bone mass and density (the mineral component of the body) can be
assessed using an instrument called a dual energy x-ray absorptiometry (DXA). This
machine passes an x-ray through the body and compares the strength of the excitement
of the electrons with a known excitement base. The difference in signal strength is attrib-
uted to the density of the bone through which the x-ray passes. Changes (losses) in bone
mass/density can occur with age, especially in females. Interventions that interfere with
this age-related loss are desirable and can be documented using DXA. For example, Deng
TABLE 29.1
Proximate Body Composition of Adult Humans
% Water 50–70
% Fat 4–27
% Protein 14–23
% Mineral 4.6–6
0-8493-2705-9/01/$0.00+$1.50
© 2002 by CRC Press LLC 633
2705_frame_C29 Page 634 Tuesday, September 25, 2001 11:11 AM
TABLE 29.2
Size and Body Composition of Adult Men and Women
Men Women
Age 57 ± 22 76 ± 15
Height (cm) 170 ± 9 158 ± 6
Weight (kg) 64 ± 14 57 ± 11
Skin (kg) 3.9 ± 1.1 3.2 ± 0.6
Adipose (kg) 13.0 ± 7.3 20.8 ± 10.0
Muscle (kg) 25.3 ± 6.7 16.4 ± 3.8
Bone (kg) 10.2 ± 1.5 7.6 ± 1.3
Residual (kg) 11.6 ± 3.5 9.3 ± 5.5
Body mass index (kg/m2) 21.9 ± 3.7 23.2 ± 4.6
Source: Clarys JP, Martin AD, Martell-Jones MJ, et al. Am J Hum
Biol 11: 167; 1999 (with permission).
TABLE 29.3
Indirect Methods for Determining Body Composition
Total body water: dilution of heavy water
Muscle mass: dilution of labeled creatine
Lean body mass: body content of K40 (requires use of whole body counter)
% Body fat: specific gravity (weight of body in air versus under water)
2.118 − 1.354 − 078
% Body fat, calculated: × (% total body water/body weight)
density
% fat = (5.548 – 5.044)/specific gravity
% fat = 100 – total body water/0.732
et al.4 have reported that the effectiveness of hormone replacement therapy is associated
with vitamin D and estrogen receptor genotypes. They documented this association with
periodic DXA determinations of bone mass.
Body fat content can be calculated using either DXA or computer-assisted tomography.5
Investigators have used this technology and compared it with the measurement of skinfold
thickness, and have found a good correlation. Skinfold thicknesses are measured using
calipers at designated places in the body. The most frequent are the skinfold under the
upper arm, the fold over the iliac crest, and the abdominal fold. Using equations (Table
29.4), body fat stores can be estimated.
The body minus its fat store is defined as the lean body mass. This is an arbitrary
designation that assumes that the fat store is not metabolically active, but it is not a correct
assumption from a metabolic point of view. The adipose tissue is a very active tissue,
TABLE 29.4
General Formulas for Calculating Body Fatness from Skinfold Measurements
Males:
Females:
having a role in the control of energy balance and a role in the food intake regulatory
system. However, from the body composition point of view, these roles are ignored. Lean
body mass (LBM) can be estimated if one assumes that the fat-free body has a water
content of 72%. The total body water can be measured using heavy water (deuterium) as
a diluent. This water distributes itself throughout the total body and through the appli-
cation of the formula C1V1 = C2V 2 the total body water can be calculated. C1 is the
concentration of the deuterium in the infusate; V1 is the volume of the infusate. C2 is the
concentration of deuterium in the volume of blood withdrawn after a fixed interval
(usually 30 minutes). One then solves for V2, which is the volume of the total body water.
The LBM is then calculated:
The details of body composition measurement have been published, and the reader is
referred to these sources for further information.6-8
References
1. Forbes RM, Cooper AR, Nitchell HH. J Biol Chem 203: 359; 1953.
2. Forbes RM, Mitchell HH, Cooper AR. J Biol Chem 223: 969; 1956.
3. Clarys JP, Martin AD, Marfell-Jones MJ, et al. Am J Hum Biol 11: 167; 1999.
4. Deng H-W, Li J, Li J-l, et al. Hum Genet 103: 576; 1998.
5. Malina RM, Koziell S, Bielicki T. Am J Hum Biol 11: 189; 1999.
6. Jebb SA, Elia M. Int J Obesity 17: 611; 1993.
7. Withers RT, Laforgia J, Heymsfield SB. Am J Hum Biol 11: 175; 1999.
8. Lee RD, Nieman DC. Nutritional Assessment WCB Brown & Benchmark, Madison WI, 1993;
pg 121.
2705_frame_C29 Page 636 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:33 PM
2705_frame_C30 Page 637 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:34 PM
30
The How and Why of Body Composition Assessment
Introduction
When it comes to body composition assessment and availability of methods, exercise
specialists, health practitioners, and clinicians must consider the demographic character-
istics of their clients. Age, ethnicity, sex, degree of adiposity, and physical activity are a
few important factors in the selection of appropriate methods and instruments for obtain-
ing the most accurate results. Many methods rely on prediction equations developed from
validation groups with specific characteristics. When these instruments and equations are
used on individuals or groups with characteristics different from those of the validation
group, the accuracy of the results may be questioned. It is also important when selecting
a body composition method to assess the relative worth of the method in terms of the
criterion or reference method used to evaluate the technique of choice. Acceptable refer-
ence or criteria methods include hydrodensitometry (underwater weighing), hydrometry
(isotope dilution), or dual energy x-ray absorptiometry (DXA). These reference methods,
however, are not without errors and assumptions, and cannot be considered “gold stan-
dards” for in vivo body composition assessment.
Reference methods typically focus on the body as a two-compartment system consisting
of the fat-free mass (FFM) and fat mass (FM), and can be of limited use for individuals
whose fat-free mass density and hydration levels differ from the assumed values for this
model. Methods that have been validated against the reference two-compartment model
will systemically underestimate body fatness for American Indian women, black men and
women, and Hispanic women, because the average density of the FFM in these groups
exceeds the assumed value of 1.1 g/cc. This can be avoided, however, if one uses methods
that have been validated against a multi-compartment model which makes corrections
for differences in the hydration level and bone mineral content of the FFM.
Not all body composition assessment is done for the purpose of determining FFM or
FM. Other reasons may include but are not limited to determination of 1) osteoporosis
risk for older women, 2) fluid balance in individuals with renal disease or other disorders,
or 3) monitoring changes in FFM during medical treatment such as AIDS-associated
wasting. In this section a variety of body composition methods will be reviewed and
evaluated regarding their uses, applications, and limitations.
0-8493-2705-9/01/$0.00+$1.50
© 2002 by CRC Press LLC 637
2705_frame_C30 Page 638 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:34 PM
Ultrasound
Principles
Ultrasound for the assessment of subcutaneous adipose tissue thickness (SAT) was intro-
duced by Booth et al. in 1966.1 The ultrasound method, as its name implies, uses high
frequency sound waves produced by piezoelectrical crystals in a transducer or probe. The
sound waves are “injected” into the skin by placing the transducer over the area of interest.
As the waves pass through the skin they are reflected back or “bounce back” to the
transducer probe when the waves hit different tissue interfaces. When the reflected sound
waves hit the transducer they create a pressure stress on the transducer which is converted
to an electrical signal. A-mode ultrasound instruments (no longer in use) measure the
delay from when the sound was “injected” into the skin until it “bounced” back to the
transducer probe. SAT thickness was then calculated based on the assumption that the
speed of ultrasound transmission through different tissue layers was a constant 1500 m/
sec. Measurements with the A-mode ultrasound had limited precision and were compro-
mised by the occurrence of numerous echos from connective tissue layers within the SAT.
This was especially problematic over the abdomen, the region of most interest.
right angles to the skin surface. To make SAT measurements, the right and left sides of
the transducer are matched with the corresponding sides of the subject, but measurements
of the limb and paraspinal sites are made with the transducer parallel to the limbs and
trunk. Similarly, ultrasound measurements over the suprailiac are made with the trans-
ducer in a direction toward the pubis symphysis. Variations in the alignment of the
transducer are necessary to match the direction of the skinfold measurements.
The use of B-mode ultrasound for the measurement of SAT is similar to that of skinfold
measurements for the estimation of body fat.4 Studies using B-mode ultrasound report
mixed results. Equations to estimate body density from ultrasound measurements of SAT
were reported by Abe et al.5 with an error of 0.0006 g/cc for men and women, as well as
an equation to predict FFM from the muscle thickness measurement of the ultrasound
image. The equations for predicting FFM had errors of 4.4 kg for men and 2.5 kg for women.
Z = R 2 + Xc 2 (30.1)
In biological systems, cell membranes function as condensers, and briefly retain some
of the electrical charge. This practice is of little or no consequence for single frequency
BIA but is of some importance for MF-BIA use and will be addressed further in the MF-
BIA section.
In the BIA literature, Z and R are used interchangeably because the reactance component
in biological systems is relatively small. The impedance of the lean body is a function of
the specific resistivity of the lean tissue, the cross-sectional area of the tissue, and the
length of the conductor. This relationship is expressed in the following equation:
Z = ρ L/A (30.2)
Z = ρL2/AL (30.3)
Z = ρL2/V (30.4)
V = ρL2/R (30.5)
A simple compartment model would consist of cells in extracellular fluid. The electrolytes
within the intra- and extracellular fluid are highly conductive, while the cell membranes
act as an insulating layer of proteins and lipids. This model is present in Figure 30.1 as
parallel conductive paths where RE and RI represent the resistance of the intra- and
extracellular compartments, and CM is the capacitance of the cell membrane.
Because the human body consists of multiple body parts with differing shapes, sizes,
and geometry as well as differing electrical characteristics, the principles of BIA do not
completely apply. However, the empirical relationship in Eq. 30.5 has been validated and
is used extensively for body composition assessment.
FIGURE 30.1
A circuit equivalent model for conduction of an electrical current through the body, where RE represents the
resistance of the extracellular fluid, RI is the resistance of the intracellular fluid, and CM is the capacitance of the
cell membrane.
kHz) is capable of passing through the cell membrane, and thus is conducted through the
total body water compartment of the body. So, MF-BIA has the potential for distinguishing
ECF from total body water (TBW) and, by difference, estimating intracellular fluid, as
shown in Figure 30.2.
This approach, however, still depends on the development of prediction equations using
standard laboratory methods such as isotope dilution for TBW and tracer dilution for ECF.
Again, these prediction equations will vary based on the sample studied, the physical
characteristics of the sample subjects, and whether the individuals represent a “normal”
healthy population or a specific clinical population. There are numerous clinical conditions
for which accurate estimation of fluid compartments can provide valuable information.
FIGURE 30.2
Conduction of low and high frequency currents through the extracellular fluid and the total body water
compartments, respectively.
FIGURE 30.3
Cole-Cole Model of an impedance locus plot with resistance vs. reactance at increasing frequencies.
2705_frame_C30 Page 643 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:34 PM
center. In the BIS technique, this modeling is essentially the only way of independently
analyzing the components of a heterogeneous material, such as the human body.
The prediction of fluid volumes must be adjusted for the mixture effect of having
materials of differing conductive capacity within the fluid being measured. This is done
using mixture theory,10,11 which adjusts for the nonlinear relationship between R and water
volume in a mixed medium system. The mixture effects are greatest at low frequency
because the conductive volume, presumably ECF, is a smaller proportion of the total
volume. Hanai10 developed an equation to describe the effect on the conductivity of a
conducting material having nonconductivity entities in suspension, and hypothesized that
the theory could be applied to tissues with non-conductivity materials ranging from 10 to
90%. This theory requires that at low frequencies, the ECF be considered the conductive
medium, with all other materials as nonconductive. At high frequencies, the combined
fluid compartments of extra- and intracellular fluids are the conductive medium and all
other materials nonconductive.11 This approach has been used successfully by a number
of investigators to monitor changes in ECF, TBW, and FFM under a variety of conditions.12-15
prior to electrode placement, electrode placement, and test conditions. Variation from day
to day in weight-stable individuals is good, and has been reported to vary by 3 to 10 ohms
or 1 to 2%.16,18 Precision when measuring electronic resistors of known resistance is excel-
lent, and is reported to be less than 0.5%. Other factors that can effect the accuracy of
measurement include time of measurement relative to food consumption, strenuous exer-
cise, alcohol consumption, or other conditions resulting in dehydration. Recommended
guidelines for impedance testing have been standardized, and are outlined in a report
from the National Institutes of Health (NIH).19 Standardized measurement procedures for
single-frequency BIA also apply to MF-BIA and BIS.
BIA Application
Bioelectrical Impedance Analysis (BIA)
Research studies on the validation of BIA for the assessment of FFM and FM are extensive,
and are beyond the limits of this section. However, a brief overview of research with BIA
for the general population, ethnic groups, and children is in order. One of the early studies
which demonstrated the application of a tetrapolar arrangement of electrodes for the
assessment of body composition was that of Lukaski. 20 Lukaski found that the impedance
index, height squared divided by resistance, (HT2/R) was the single best predictor of body
weight, FFM, TBW, and total body potassium (TBK). Numerous other research studies
have documented a strong relationship between the impedance index (HT2/R) or R and
FFM, or components thereof. The single largest set of published BIA data for body com-
position assessment was reported by Segal et al. 21 and consisted of 1567 adults (1069 men,
498 women) ages 17 to 62 years. In this study hydrodensitometry was used as the criterion
method for determination of FFM and FM. Data from four laboratories were pooled and
prediction equations developed for the estimation of lean body mass (LBM) based on
body fatness; over or under 20% fat for men and over or under 30% for women. Initial
fatness level was determined by the sum of four skinfold measurements. Prediction errors
ranged from 1.97 kg LBM for women to 2.47 and 3.03 kg LBM for normal weight and
obese men, respectively. Because the sample size was so large, the Segal study has proven
to be robust and has been successfully cross-validated by other researchers.22,23
The use of BIA for the prediction of TBW and FFM of children has also been studied
by numerous investigators. Typical of these results are the findings of Davies and Preece24
and Houtkooper et al.25 The research conducted by Davies and Preece24 included 26
children and adolescents in whom TBW measurements were made as an indicator of FFM.
Results included the development of a prediction equation for TBW. TBW was highly
correlated (r = 0.97) with the impedance index (HT2/R), and had a prediction error of 1.67
liters. Research by Houtkooper and colleagues25 included an original sample of 94 children,
with cross-validation samples of 68, 25, and 38 from three other research laboratories. The
final prediction equation for children age 10 to 19 years included 225 boys and girls, and
used the impedance index and weight to predict FFM with an R2 = 0.95 and a standard
error of estimate of 2.1 kg.
Prediction equations for use of BIA with different ethnic groups includes white, black,
and Asian adults,26 Hispanic women,23 and West Indians,27 to name a few. The Hispanic
women who were studied were 20 to 39 years of age and had an average body fat of 27%
and a FFM of 43.5 kg. The investigators compared six different BIA prediction equations
in the literature and found that the Segal equations21 and equations published by Lohman
et al.28 and Gray et al.29 gave results comparable to those obtained from hydrodensitometry.
The study by Wang et al.26 included 778 healthy adult men and women ranging from 18
to 94 years and from three ethnic groups: whites 371, blacks 182, and Asians 225. Again,
2705_frame_C30 Page 645 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:34 PM
strong correlations were obtained between the HT2/R and measurements of TBW, FFM,
and TBK. The research conducted on the West Indian volunteers included men, women,
and children ranging in age from 8 to 20 years. The BIA equation used was included in
the standard software package that accompanies the instrument (RJL, Model 103). The
investigators found that the body fat estimates provided by the BIA were similar to those
obtained from hydrodensitometry, and the errors were lower than previously reported.
They concluded that the equations provided in the RJL instrument were appropriate for
a West Indian population residing in the West Indies.
MF-BIA Application
A variety of studies have been conducted to examine the use of MF-BIA for estimation of
body fluid compartments and body composition. An early report by Segal et al.30 used a
trifrequency instrument (TVI-10, Daniger Medical Technology, Columbus, OH) with fre-
quencies of 5, 50, and 100 kHz. Segal and co-workers found a strong relationship between
ECF and HT2/R at 5 kHz, and between TBW and HT2/R at 100 kHz. The prediction
equations developed from this study had an error of estimate of 1.94 and 2.64 L for ECF
and TBW, respectively. Similarly, Van Loan and Mayclin31 also studied multiple frequencies
in an attempt to predict ECF. Using the Xitron-4000 impedance analyzer (Xitron Technol-
ogies Inc., San Diego, CA) they measured R, Xc, Z, and phase angle at 25 frequencies
ranging from 1 kHz to 1.35 mHz. They found that the same frequency that was the best
predictor of TBW was also the best predictor of ECF. In this particular study the impedance
index at a frequency of 224 ohms was the best predictor of both ECF and TBW. In both of
these investigations healthy research volunteers were used. In healthy individuals, where
fluid balance is maintained by normal physiological mechanisms, TBW and ECF are
intricately linked. Therefore, if ECF either increases or decreases, then TBW will also
increase or decrease. In other words, a frequency that is found to accurately predict ECF
will also predict TBW, as in the case of the Van Loan and Mayclin study. In a study with
MF-BIA for predicting water compartments in patients with non-ascitic liver cirrhosis,
Borghi et al.32 used equations developed by Segal et al.30 and Deurenberg et al.33 These
equations used low frequency impedance for the prediction of ECF and a high frequency
current for estimation of TBW. Although the Segal and Deurenberg equations used different
low frequency currents for the prediction of ECF (5 and 1 kHz, respectively), results from
the two equations were similar to each other and to standard laboratory dilution methods.
Likewise, the Segal and Deurenberg equations measured the impedance index at a fre-
quency of 100 kHz for the prediction of TBW and achieved results similar to those obtained
from laboratory dilution techniques. Although the MF-BIA technique appears to give
results equivalent to those obtained from standard laboratory techniques for the prediction
of ECF and TBW, there is a shortcoming. Because multiple regression prediction equations
are used to make estimations for groups, estimates for ECF and TBW compartments on
an individual basis have an error associated with them. Multiple regression analysis results
in smaller individuals being regressed upward toward the group average while larger
individuals are regressed downward toward the group average. Thus, at the low end of
the spectrum the result is an over-prediction of the value, be it ECF, TBW or FFM, while
at the upper end an under-prediction occurs. So, to get the best results possible the user
must be aware of the various prediction equations in the scientific literature and select the
equation that best represents the sample being studied.
BIS Application
More and more studies are available in the scientific literature in which BIS was the
technique by which fluid compartments or FFM were estimated. Four such studies will
2705_frame_C30 Page 646 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:34 PM
be briefly reviewed. Van Loan et al.13 were the first to successfully report the use of BIS
in humans for the assessment of ECF, TBW, ICF, and FFM. Using the Cole-Cole modeling
technique and the Hanai mixture theory, results reported by Van Loan and co-workers
were not different from those obtained by standard laboratory methods. Group averages
for ECF and FFM were identical (14.6 and 45.5 L, respectively), while group averages for
TBW and ICF differed by only 0.1 L or 100 ml. Never before had such close agreement
between a noninvasive bioimpedance method and standard laboratory methods been
reported. A similar experiment was conducted by Cornish et al.34 in healthy adults using
the BIS technique and an SEAC analyzer (Brisbane, Australia). The results of Cornish and
colleagues demonstrated that the estimation was only slightly better than results obtained
by single-frequency BIA and anthropometric measurements. The variability associated
with the SEAC’s estimation of TBW and ECF was 5.2 and 10%, respectively. The difference
between findings reported by Van Loan et al.13 and those of Cornish may be due to different
BIS instruments, instrument sensitivity, variability in the standard techniques for assessing
TBW and ECF, test conditions, etc.; it’s difficult to say. However, the data suggest that
better accuracy was obtained using the Xitron Technologies, Inc. BIS device. Van Loan et
al.14 also used the BIS technique to monitor fluid changes in a group of women prior to
conception, during pregnancy, and postpartum. At 34 to 36 weeks of conception, when
fluid volume is at a maximum, BIS results for ECF and TBW were within about 1 L of
values obtained by standard lab methods; they were about 5% different for ECF and 1%
different for TBW. More recently, Van Loan and co-workers15 reported on the nitrogen
accretion of lean tissue in AIDS-wasted patients using BIS. Based on classic nitrogen
balance techniques, cumulative nitrogen retention over a 12-week period was 5 kg. At 6
weeks, nitrogen retention was 2.5 kg; BIS results indicated an accretion of 2.8 kg; by 12
weeks cumulative accretion by nitrogen balance methods was 5.0 kg, and by BIS was
5.3 kg. These data, in conjunction with other studies, demonstrate that the BIS technique,
using Cole-Cole modeling and Hanai mixture theory, can accurately assess changes in
TBW, ECF, and lean tissue accretion.
at specific energy levels. For example, hydrogen, with an atomic number of 1, has a µm of
0.3458 at 40 keV (kilelectron Volts) and a µm of 0.3175 at 70 keV, giving a R value of 1.0891.
Elements with higher atomic numbers have larger R values. Thus elements found in soft
tissue, like Na, K, Cl, have higher atomic numbers and larger R values. There are, however,
other elements in vivo with even higher numbers, such as Ca, found primarily in bone.
Thus, it is the R value which allows for the distinction between soft tissue, lower attenu-
ation coefficients, and bone with higher attenuation coefficients. So, the R value of an
unknown element can be used to identify the element because of the known and specific
R values for each element. DXA measurements assume that the body is composed of two
basic compartments, bone and soft tissue. Again, based on attenuation coefficients, soft
tissue can be further divided into two compartments, fat or lean. Therefore, it is the R
value that is used to determine the amount of bone and soft tissue and also the amount
of fat and lean within the soft tissue.
Early devices for the assessment of bone mineral content (BMC) and density (BMD)
used radioisotopes and were either single photon (SPA) or dual photon absorptiometers
(DPA). SPA used iodine-125 (125I) as the photon source (Figure 30.4). This instrument
allowed for the measurement of BMD, BMC, and bone width in the distal end of the radius
and ulna. Cameron and Sorenson36 and Mazess and co-workers37 conducted research
which provided the foundation for validation, standardization, and comparative data for
this early technique.
The second phase of method development for BMD and BMC measurements was the
development of DPA using gadolinium –153 (153Gd) as the photon source. The use of DPA
advanced the technology from a single energy emission to an isotope with gamma emis-
FIGURE 30.4
Single photon absorptiometer using radionuclide source from 125I. Measurement of bone mineral content, bone
width, and bone density is being made of the 1/3 distal radius and ulna of the forearm. Material around the
forearm is “tissue equivalent” material to equalize the size among different individual forearms.
2705_frame_C30 Page 648 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:34 PM
sions at two energy levels, 44 and 100 keV.38,39 This method now included a measurement
surface large enough for an individual to recline and have measurements taken of the
total body, lumbar spine, and femur. In addition to the measurements of BMD and BMC,
this technique now allowed for the assessment of total body composition.40,41 As with all
techniques, this method is not without its limitations. First, the constant decay of the
radioisotope over time resulted in a lack of precision in the BMD measurement for the
same individual and a constant correction of the attenuation coefficient for soft tissue
because of the decaying radionuclide. Another method was needed that was not depen-
dent upon a radioisotope as the energy source for the measurement technique.
Dual energy x-ray absorptiometry (DXA) was the third wave in the development of
this technique for the assessment of bone parameters as well as body composition param-
eters. DXA consists of an x-ray tube, as the replacement for previously used radioisotopes,
and a filter to split the x-ray beam into two distinct low and high energy levels. The use
of two energy levels allows for greater precision in the measurement and estimation of
soft tissue composition, and therefore, greater precision in the measurement of BMC and
BMD. This technical advance resulted in the use of DXA for both bone metabolism studies
and body composition studies. Thus, use of DXA allows for the estimation of numerous
parameters for bone: total body bone mineral content and density (TBBMC or TBBMD)
plus specific sites such as lumbar spine (Figure 30.5) and proximal femur BMC and BMD.
Numerous estimates for body composition can also be made, including total body soft
tissue mass (STM), which consists of lean tissue mass (LTM) and fat mass (FM) (STM =
LTM + FM). Additionally, soft tissue masses can be examined over different regions of
the body.
FIGURE 30.5
Image of the spine from a dual energy x-ray absorptiometer (DXA).
tissue attenuation. The net result was a change in the calculation of BMD without a
corresponding change in the BMC. In weight-stable individuals, measurement of soft
tissue composition has been reported to be similar to reference techniques. One such report
was that of Van Loan and Mayclin,47 who compared DXA estimates of body fat and lean
masses to those determined using a four-compartment model for body composition assess-
ment. DXA body composition assessment was in agreement with the results obtained
using this model. These results have been confirmed by others.48 In addition, DXA has
reportedly been useful in the determination of intraabdominal adipose tissue (IAAT).
Treuth and colleagues 49 derived a prediction equation for estimating IAAT using DXA
scans analyzing the upper trunk, lower trunk, and pelvis regions. Anthropometric vari-
ables such as waist circumference and sagittal diameter were also made. These variables
were used in a multiple regression equation to predict the IAAT mass based on images
from computed tomography. This equation can be used in women of varying ages and
body composition.
Equipment
Commercially available DXA instruments have been manufactured primarily by three
companies in the U.S.: Lunar Corp., Madison, WI; Hologic, Waltham, MA; and Norland,
Fort Atkinson, WI. The basis of the measurements for all three instruments is the mass
attenuation ratio (R) discussed above. However, all three instruments do not provide the
same result. Tothill50 reported significant differences among the instruments in the estimate
of percent body fat. When anthropometric models were tested, no differences were
observed between manufacturers; however, there was significant differences in percent
body fat between pairs of instruments when research volunteers were tested, varying 2.6
to 6.3%. Differences in regional body composition indicated trunk percent fat was under-
2705_frame_C30 Page 650 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:34 PM
Accuracy of DXA
A variety of DXA issues have been discussed here regarding the accuracy of DXA in
measuring different body compartments. The basic tenet has been that DXA does provide
an accurate measure of BMC compared to neutron activation. Several studies have shown
that DXA estimates of soft tissue lean and fat compartments are equivalent to results
obtained from reference methods when used in weight-stable individuals; however, con-
cerns do arise when using the DXA technique for determining BMD in larger individuals,
especially when these individuals engage in a weight loss intervention. DXA has been
shown to be a valuable tool in the estimation of IAAT. Despite these positive outcomes,
all DXA instruments are not “created equal.” Several studies have demonstrated that
differences exist in soft tissue and bone parameters between manufacturers and between
software versions within a given manufacturer. Therefore, one must use caution when
using this technique to monitor individuals longitudinally. In summary, DXA can be used
as a component in multiple-compartment body composition assessment by using just the
BMC values. It can also be used separately as a stand-alone technique for the estimation
of bone mineral, lean tissue, and fat mass. A significant amount of research has been done
to suggest that pencil beam DXA may be viewed as a reference method; however, the
newer fan beam mode of operation has not yet been thoroughly examined. More research
is needed to validate the results using this new approach and determine what, if any,
differences exist between the fan beam mode and the pencil beam mode of operation.
Computed Tomography
Basic Principles
Computed tomography (CT) is another x-ray device used commonly in medical diagnosis.
However, in the 1980s several studies indicated that the technique could be used for the
2705_frame_C30 Page 651 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:34 PM
determination of body composition because images of adipose tissue, muscle, and bone
could be obtained with this technique.53 In this technique, like the DXA, attenuation of an
x-ray signal is the process by which different tissues are distinguished. Many people are
familiar with the “large tunnel” of a CT scanner. Within the structure of the tunnel is an
x-ray tube and detectors. The detectors and x-ray tube are placed opposite one another
so that the detectors can rapidly measure the x-ray attenuation as the x-ray photons pass
through the individual. For a CT scan, the patient lies on a moveable table which positions
the patient in the tube at the appropriate position for the needed image. For example, a
brain CT scan would require specific positioning of the head within the CT tunnel. Once
properly positioned, the x-ray tube rotates around the table while the detectors collect the
necessary attenuation data. A computer then generates an image based on the specific
attenuation coefficient characteristics of the different tissues, thus allowing for the separate
imaging of bone, adipose tissue, and lean tissue. The differences in the attenuation coef-
ficients allow CT to be used for body composition assessment.54,55 The CT attenuation
score, referred to as Hounsfield units (HU) depends on the level of absorption of the
emitted x-ray, and may range from –1000 HU for air to +1000 HU for bone. Research by
Sjöström56 demonstrated that the attenuation score for adipose tissue (AT) was between
–190 and –30 HU.
Accuracy
CT scans are expensive, and this cost has no doubt limited the number and extent of
validation studies. One study, however, conducted by Rössner et al.54 compared direct
adipose tissue thicknesses from cadavers to CT images from 21 cross-sectional abdominal
images and found a significant relationship between the two methods for total adipose
tissue (r = 0.94) and intraabdominal adipose tissue (r = 0.83). Work by Ross and colleagues
on rats demonstrated a relationship between CT images and chemical analysis of lipids
(r = 0.98).57 Validation and accuracy check with this technique are very limited due
primarily to the need for cadaver analysis of humans or chemical analysis of animals.
A major focus of researchers using CT technology for the estimation of adipose tissue
is the association between body fat and chronic disease. More specifically, determination
of at risk individuals for diabetes mellitus, cardiovascular diseases, and elevated plasma
lipid profiles, to name a few, can be improved using CT scans. Investigations61,62 have
shown that obesity with increased levels of VAT was associated with a higher glycemic
response even with hyperinsulinemia, suggesting insulin resistance. VAT was also corre-
lated with glucose tolerance and plasma insulin levels in both men and women. These
relationships were independent of total body fat. Furthermore, obese subjects will smaller
amounts of VAT showed only marginally higher plasma insulin levels compared to control
subjects. It appears that the assessment of total body fat alone can be a misleading indicator
of individuals at risk, and that the more important concern is the amount of adipose tissue
that is sequestered intraabdominally.
FIGURE 30.6
Magnetic resonance image of the abdominal cavity of an individual. Lighter images around the perimeter
represent skin and subcutaneous adipose tissue. Lighter images within the body cavity are visceral adipose
tissue depots. The adipose tissue mass can be quantified by digital analysis of the individual image pixels.
is referred to as a pixel. Pixel values in an MRI are dependent upon 1) the excitation pulse
used, 2) the proton density, and 3) tissue relaxation times, which may vary among indi-
viduals. Additionally, signal intensity may vary within the same tissue in a single acqui-
sition. This is referred to as “ghosting,” and can result in tissue being excluded from the
analysis. This phenomenon has been improved in recent years. However, changes in signal
intensity do require that software programs allow for visual verification and, when nec-
essary, adjustments to include all appropriate tissue. Therefore, adipose tissue quantifica-
tion cannot be done by simply setting an adipose tissue threshold and using software to
count pixels either above or below the designated threshold without manual verification
and correction.
Accuracy
Foster and co-workers63 first reported that MRI could measure adipose tissue and adjacent
muscle tissue. This work was confirmed by carcass and cadaver analysis in which direct
2705_frame_C30 Page 654 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:34 PM
measurements were made of the tissues. Work by Abate et al.64 demonstrated that MRI
measurement of adipose tissue in humans was similar to direct measurement of visceral
and subcutaneous adipose tissue on cadavers. Similar supporting documentation for the
accuracy of MRI has been done by comparing MRI to CT scan results.55 In general, the
relationship between CT and MRI for the assessment of adipose tissue is good, with
correlations ranging from 0.79 for SAT to 0.98 for VAT, and 0.99 for total adipose tissue.
Summary
The techniques discussed in this section are high tech methods, and may not be suitable
for all situations. So, how does one decide which method to use, especially when costs
and technical expertise vary widely among the methods? Appropriate questions might
include the following:
More often than not, time and money will be overriding factors in consideration of a
body composition methodology. Thankfully, all the methods discussed in this section do
provide reliable and accurate results when used appropriately.
References
1. Booth RA, Goddard BA, Paton A. Br J Nutr 20: 719; 1966.
2. Bellisari A. J Diag Med Sonography 19: 15; 1993.
3. Bellisari A, Roche AF, Siervogel RM. Internat J Obesity 17: 475; 1993.
4. Roche AF. In Human Body Composition (Roche AF, Heymsfield SB, Lohman TG, Eds) Human
Kinetics Publishers, Champaign, IL, 1996, p 167.
5. Abe T, Kondo M, Kawakami Y, Fukunagg T. Am J Human Biol 6: 1661; 1994.
6. Lochmuller E-M, Zeller J-B, Kaiser D, et al. Osteoporosis Internat 8: 591; 1998.
7. Adams JE, Harrison EJ, Alsop CW, Selby PL. Osteoporosis Internat 8: 55S; 1998.
8. Nyboer J, Bagno S, Nims LF. The electrical impedance plethysmograph, an electrical volume
recorder. National Research Council, Committee on Aviation, Report No. 149. Washington,
DC, 1943.
9. Cole KS. Membranes, Ion, and Impulses: A Chapter on Classical Biophysics. University of California
Press, Berkeley, CA, 1972.
10. Hanai T. In: Emulsion Science (Sherman PH, Ed), Academic Press, London, 1968, p 354.
11. MacDonald JR. Impedance Spectroscopy: Emphasizing Solid Materials and Systems. John Wiley &
Sons, New York, 1987.
12. De Lorenzo A, Andreoli A, Matthie J, Withers P. J Applied Physiol 82: 1542; 1997.
13. Van Loan MD, Withers P, Matthie J, Mayclin PL. In: Human Body Composition: In Vivo Methods,
Models, and Assessment. (Ellis KJ, Eastman JD, Eds) Plenum Publishers, New York, 1993, p 67.
14. Van Loan MD, Koop LE, King JC, et al. J Applied Physiol 78: 1037; 1995.
15. Van Loan MD, Strawford A, Jacob M, Hellerstein M. AIDS 13: 241; 1999.
16. Graves JE, Polock ML, Colvin AB, et al. Am J Human Biol 1: 803; 1989.
17. Loy SF, Likes EA, Andrews PM, et al. ACSM’s Health & Fitness Journal 2: 16; 1998.
18. Van Loan MD, Mayclin PL. Human Biol 59: 299; 1987.
19. Bioelectrical Impedance Analysis in Body Composition Measurement. National Institutes of Health
Technology Assessment Conference Statement. December 12-14, 1994.
20. Lukaski HC, Johnson PE, Bolonchuk WW, Lykken GI. Am J Clin Nutr 41: 810; 1985.
21. Segal KR, Van Loan MD, Fitzgerald PI, Hodgdon JA. Am J Clin Nutr 47: 7; 1988.
22. Stolarczyk LM, Heyward VH, Van Loan MD, et al. Am J Clin Nutr 66: 8; 1997.
23. Stolarczyk LM, Heyward VH, Goodman JA, et al. Med Sci Sports Exerc 27: 1450; 1995.
24. Davies PSW, Preece MA. Ann Hum Biol 15: 237; 1988.
25. Houtkooper LB, Going SB, Lohman TG, et al. J Applied Physiol 72: 366; 1992.
26. Wang J, Thornton JC, Burastero S, et al. Am J Hum Biol 7: 33; 1995.
27. Young RE, Sinha DP. Am J Clin Nutr 55: 1045; 1992.
28. Lohman TG. Advances in Body Composition Assessment. Human Kinetics Publishers, Cham-
paign, IL, 1992, p 53.
2705_frame_C30 Page 656 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:34 PM
29. Gray DS, Bray GA, Gemayel N, Kaplan K. Am J Clin Nutr 50: 225; 1989.
30. Segal KR, Burastero S, Chun A, et al. Am J Clin Nutr 54: 26; 1991.
31. Van Loan MD, Mayclin PL. Eur J Clin Nutr 46: 117; 1992.
32. Borghi A, Bedogni G, Rocchi E, et al. Br J Nutr 76: 325; 1996.
33. Deurenberg P, Schouten FJM, Andreoli A, De Lorenzo A. In: Human Body Composition. In Vivo
Methods, Models and Assessment (Ellis KJ, Eastman JD, Eds) Plenum Press, New York, 1993, p
129.
34. Cornish BH, Ward LC, Thomas BJ, Elia M. Eur J Clin Nutr 50: 159; 1996.
35. Pietrobelli A, Formica C, Wang Z, Heymsfield SB. Am J Physiol 271: E941; 1996.
36. Cameron JR, Sorenson JA. Science 142: 230; 1963.
37. Mazess RB, Cameron JR, Miller H. Internat J Applied Rad Isotopes 23: 471; 1972.
38. Mazess RB, Peppler WW, Chestnut CH, et al. Calcified Tissue Internat 33: 361; 1981.
39. Mazess RB, Peppler WW, Gibbons M. Am J Clin Nutr 40: 834; 1984.
40. Gotfredsen A, Jensen J, Borg J, Christiansen C. Metabolism 35: 88; 1986.
41. Heymsfield SB, Wang J, Heshka S, et al. Am J Clin Nutr 49: 1283; 1989.
42. Svendsen OL, Haarbo J, Hassager C, Christiansen C. Am J Clin Nutr 57: 605; 1993.
43. Brunton JA, Bayley HS, Atkinson SA. Am J Clin Nutr 58: 839; 1993.
44. Jebb SA, Goldberg GR, Jennings G, Elia M. In: Human Body Composition. In Vivo Methods,
Models and Assessment. (Ellis KJ, Eastman JD, Eds) Plenum Press, New York, 1993, p 129.
45. Jebb SA, Goldberg GR, Jennings G, Elia M. Clin Sci 88: 319; 1995.
46. Van Loan MD, Johnson HL, Barbieri TF. Am J Clin Nutr 67: 734; 1998.
47. Van Loan MD, Mayclin PL. Eur J Clin Nutr 46: 125; 1992.
48. Tothill P, Han TS, Avenell A, et al. Eur J Clin Nutr 50: 747; 1996.
49. Treuth MS, Hunter GR, Kekes-Szabo T. Am J Clin Nutr 62: 527; 1995.
50. Tothill P, Avenell A, Love J, Reid D. Eur J Clin Nutr 48: 781; 1994.
51. Van Loan MD, Thompson J, Butterfield G, et al. Med Sci Sports Exerc 26: 40S; 1994.
52. Faulkner G, Gleur CC, Engelke K, Genant HK. J Bone Min Res 7: 518S; 1992.
53. Borkan GA, Hults DE, Gerzof SF, et al. Ann Hum Biol 10: 537; 1983.
54. Rössner S, Bo WG, Hiltbrandt E, et al. Internat J Obesity 14: 839; 1990.
55. Seidell JC, Bakker CJ, van der Kooy K. Am J Clin Nutr 51: 953; 1990.
56. Sjöström L, Kvist H, Cederblad A, Tylén U. Am J Physiol 250: 736E; 1986.
57. Ross R, Léger L, Guardo R, et al. J Applied Physiol 70: 787; 1991.
58. Tokunaga K, Matsuzawa Y, Ishikawa K, Tarui S. Internat J Obesity 7: 437; 1983.
59. Sjöström L, Kvist H. Acta Medicia Scan 723: 169; 1988.
60. Deprés J-P, Prud’homme D, Pouliot MC, et al. Am J Clin Nutr 54: 474; 1991.
61. Deprés J-P, Nadeau A, Tremblay A, et al. Diabetes 38: 304; 1989.
62. Pouliot MC, Deprés J-P, Lemieux S, et al. Am J Cardiol 73: 460; 1994.
63. Foster MA, Hutchinson JMS, Mallard JR, Fuller M. Magnetic Res Imaging 2: 187; 1984.
64. Abate N, Burns D, Peshock RM, et al. J Lipid Res 35: 1490; 1994.
65. Fowler MA, Fuller MF, Glasbey CA, et al. Am J Clin Nutr 54: 18; 1991.
66. Ross R, Léger L, Morris D, et al. J Applied Physiol 72: 787; 1992.
2705_frame_C31 Page 657 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:36 PM
31
Frame Size, Circumferences, and Skinfolds
Barbara J. Scott
Introduction
Numerous studies conducted over the past 70 years provide a large body of knowledge
and evidence that simple methods of quantifying body size and proportions can be used
in many settings to predict body composition and regional fat distribution. This section
discusses the strengths, weaknesses, and potential best applications of three field anthro-
pometric methods: frame size, skin folds, and circumferences. These methods have been
widely studied and are commonly used because they yield valid and reliable results when
applied correctly and because they are noninvasive, inexpensive, portable, and relatively
simple to perform.
Applications to Practice
Important applications for the measurement and analysis of body composition and body
dimensions using the above methods include:
0-8493-2705-9/01/$0.00+$1.50
© 2002 by CRC Press LLC 657
2705_frame_C31 Page 658 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:36 PM
• Assessing level of potential risk for chronic disease (cardiovascular, cancer, dia-
betes, osteoporosis) and monitoring relative risk over time
TABLE 31.1
Data Quality and Anthropometric Measurement Error7,8
Goal of Quality
Measurement Terminology, Definitions, and Causes or Contributing Factors
Repeated measures Reliability: Differences between measures on a single subject (within subject
give the same value variability) are not caused by errors in measurement (site or technique) or
physiologic variation.
Imprecision: Different results are obtained for a single subject when measurements
are done either by one person (intra-observer differences) or two or more persons
(interobserver differences) and reflect measurement errors.
Undependability: Different results are due to physiologic factors (such as differences
over the course of a day in weight [due to weight of food eaten or fullness of the
bladder] or height [due to compression of the spine]).
Unreliability: The sum of errors due to imprecision and undependability.
Measurement represents Inaccuracy: A systematic bias is present due to instrument errors or errors of
a “true” value measurement technique.
Validity: Measurement is as close to the true value as it is possible to determine.
because it is more acceptable and easier for the subjects, and because it does not rely on
assumptions about bone mineral content. More recent studies suggest the simultaneous
use of multiple methods is best suited to measuring or accurately examining different
body compartments to establish and/or validate field methods on diverse populations.4
Measurement Error
Once the field method has been selected as appropriate to the purpose or study at hand,
adherence to guidelines for achieving acceptable levels of measurement error5,6 are needed
to evaluate the quality of data collected. (See Table 31.1).
Guidelines for training and certification of measurers direct a repeated-measures pro-
tocol where the trainee and trainer measure the same subjects until the difference between
them is very small. However, the definition of “small difference” is constrained to some
extent by the technique itself (how precise can it be), equipment (how exactly can it be
calibrated, how fine is the scale), and by the magnitude of the potential size of the
measurement itself (measured in many centimeters, such as height versus in few millime-
ters, such as some skinfolds).
Some targets for difference to be achieved to certify competency have been proposed
(Table 31.2).9 Given the limits of what accuracy level is possible, investigators must also
be aware of the proportion of the total measurement represented by the acceptable
difference.10
TABLE 31.2
Recommendations for Evaluating Measurement Differences
between Trainer and Trainee
Difference between Trainer and Trainee
Measurement Good Fair Poor Gross Error
Methods
Even though literally hundreds of anthropometric studies have been done comparing
methods and developing predictive equations,11 there is neither clear evidence nor scien-
tific consensus as to which methods, sites, or equations should be used. Thus, the best
practice is to select a method with a preponderance of supporting evidence for the specific
setting, population, and application, use good equipment, train staff well, understand the
limitations, and be able to interpret the results within these limitations. Specific instruc-
tions for taking measurements or locating anatomical sites will not be covered in this
section as detailed anthropometric manuals are available.12,13
Once a method and/or site of measurement has been selected as appropriate to the
purpose for which the information is needed, the next steps include the logistics of
selecting, calibrating, and using equipment, and training and certifying staff in the mea-
surement procedures.
Frame Size
It seems intuitive that fat weight is unhealthy, and that persons with larger frames can
weigh more and still be healthy. While there is general agreement that frame is a valid
consideration in the assessment of weight for height, identifying an exact method for
classifying frame size has been problematic.14 The literature includes a variety of different
concepts of frame size: body type and body proportions (length of trunk relative to total
height), bone and skeletal size and thickness, and muscularity. There are two general
schools of thought, one that frame is primarily a skeletal concept, and the other that it
encompasses the fat-free mass (everything that is not fat including bone and muscle). Most
researchers agree that a valid measure of frame must be independent of body fatness,
while others believe that it must also be somewhat independent of height to be of value
in the assessment of weight. However, studies have shown varying degrees of correlation
of different measures of skeletal size and dimension with height (the linear dimension of
the skeleton) and correlation of measures of both bone and muscle with body weight and
fatness. Therefore, additional criterion for validity of frame size measures have been
proposed:
1. The correlation of the measure with fat free mass (FFM) should be greater than
the correlation of height alone with FFM
2. The measure should have little or no association with body fat beyond that
accounted for by the association of FFM with fat15
Other studies have proposed more generalized methods or observations for classifying
frame according to body type or morphology. The categories of leptomorph, metromorph,
and pyenomorph16 follow the idea that the human body is like a cylinder, and its mass is
determined by height, breadth, and depth.
The main purpose for assessing frame size is to evaluate weight and recommend an
optimal weight that would be associated with the best present state of health and longest
life expectancy. One of the first proposed common uses of frame size was with weight
tables published by the Metropolitan Life Insurance Company in 1954, based on mortality
rates of insured adults in the U.S. and Canada.17 These early tables suggested “ideal”
2705_frame_C31 Page 661 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:36 PM
TABLE 31.3
Approximation of Frame Size by 1983 Metropolitan Height and Weight Tables
Women Men
Height (inches) Elbow Breadth Height (inches) Elbow Breadth
in 1” heels (inches) in 1” heels (inches)
58–59” (4’10”–4’11”) 2 1 4
/ –2 1 2
/” 62–63” (5’2”–5’3”) 2 1/2–2 7/8”
60–63” (5’0”–5’3”) 2 1 4
/ –2 1 2
/” 64–67” (5’4”–5’7”) 2 5/8–2 7/8”
64–67” (5’4”–5’7”) 2 3/8–2 5/8” 68–71” (5’8”–5’11”) 2 3/4–3”
68–71” (5’8”–5’11”) 2 3/8–2 5/8” 72–75” (6’–6’3”) 2 3/4–3 1/8”
72” (6’0”) 2 1/2–2 3/4” 76” (6’4”) 2 7/8–3 1/4”
TABLE 31.4
Frame Size by Elbow Breadth by Gender and Age
Age Males Females
(years) Small Frame Medium Frame Large Frame Small Frame Medium Frame Large Frame
18–24 ≤ 6.6 > 6.6 and <7.7 ≥7.7 ≤5.6 > 5.6 and <6.5 ≥6.5
25–34 ≤ 6.7 > 6.7 and <7.9 ≥7.9 ≤5.7 > 5.7 and <6.8 ≥6.8
35–44 ≤ 6.7 > 6.7 and <8.0 ≥8.0 ≤5.7 > 5.7 and <7.1 ≥7.1
45–54 ≤ 6.7 >6.7 and <8.1 ≥8.1 ≤5.7 > 5.7 and <7.2 ≥7.2
55–64 ≤ 6.7 > 6.7 and <8.1 ≥8.1 ≤5.8 > 5.8 and <7.2 ≥7.2
65–74 ≤ 6.7 > 6.7 and <8.1 ≥8.1 ≤5.8 > 5.8 and <7.2 ≥7.2
Source: Frisancho, A.R., Am. J. Clin. Nutr., 40: 808; 1984.
weights by gender and by ranges of height and frame size (small, medium, and large),
but provided no method or instructions for assessing frame.18 The tables were updated
in 1983 and provided instructions for measuring elbow breadth and applying cutoffs for
classifying frame size using data from the U.S. National Health and Nutrition Examination
Survey (HANES, 1971-75) that were to result in approximately 50% of persons falling in
medium frame and 25% in small and large frame categories, respectively (see Table 31.3).19
When these cutoffs were subsequently tested on a large Canadian sample (n = 12,348
males and 6957 females), they were found to classify only a small percent of the sample
as having large frames, thereby increasing the probability of misclassification into incorrect
frame size categories and consequent unrealistic weight recommendations.20
Practical evaluation of measures of frame size is complicated by several factors including
a lack of national reference standards for any measure except elbow breadth (see Table
31.4). Because frame size can not be directly measured by any single parameter, there is
no “gold standard” by which to judge proposed surrogate measures, nor is there consensus
on how to assign cut points for small, medium, or large frame or a standard upon which
to base expectations of how frame size is (should be) distributed in a normal population.
Different conceptualizations include:
• Distribution by percentiles:
Terciles (equal numbers in each of three frame categories)
Distribution by quartiles where the lowest and highest quartiles constitute
the small and large frame categories, respectively, with the middle two
quartiles combined to indicate medium frame
Distribution by varying “border values” defined at the 15th, 20th , or 25th
and 75th, 80th , or 85th percentiles for small and large frame
2705_frame_C31 Page 662 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:36 PM
Circumferences
Circumference measurements have been widely examined because they are relatively easy
to perform, inexpensive, noninvasive, and require only a tape measure and minimal
training of personnel. Primary applications include:
Techniques for taking circumference measures are relatively simple. However, signifi-
cant errors can result from improper positioning or placement of the tape and from
differences in tension applied. In general, the tape is placed perpendicular to the long axis
of the body, but exceptions include the head and neck, where the measurement is made
at the widest and narrowest points, respectively. In almost all cases except the head, the
tension on the tape is just enough to place it snug against the skin without causing an
indentation. However, if the purpose of the circumference is to estimate frame size (or
skeletal size), it is not entirely clear whether the tape should be pulled more tightly to get
as close to the bone as possible. Equipment includes a flexible, nonstretchable, relatively
narrow (0.7 cm) tape measure that has metric measures on one side and English on the
other. Special anthropometric tapes are available, such as those already interlocked to slip
over the arm or head, with arrows to make reading the measurement or finding the
midpoint of the back of the arm easier. Detailed instructions for technique for measurement
TABLE 31.5
Selected Validation Studies of Determinants of Frame Size (FS)
Frame Size Measure Subjectsa Methods and Criterionb,d Results
Bony chest breadth 21 n = 2201, , Scotland. a. Bony chest breadth measured by a. Correlation of bony chest breadth to wt > correlation of ht to wt
x-ray b. Wt ↑ about 3.7 kg per each cm ↑ in bony chest breadth
b. Criterion tested: 1, 3, and sig ↑ c. Wt ↑ about 12 kg per FS (S → M → L)
in wt with ↑ in FS d. Wt: bony chest breadth ratio correlated with FFM
Ratio of height (cm) to wrist 100 and adult patients at a. Wrist measured distal to styloid a. Method for assigning frame size not stated. It appears that some
circumference (cm)23 a university medical center, process at wrist crease on right sort or “normal” distribution was applied, but no other criteria
USA arm of validity were tested.
b. Frame size (S, M, L) assigned b. FS assigned by Ht:wrist ratio:
using this ratio by gender S > 10.4; M 9.6-10.4; L < 9.6;
S > 11.0; M 10.1-11.0; L < 10.1
Elbow and bitrochanteric n = 16,494 ; age range: 18 to a. Criterion tested: 1, 3, and 4 a. Correlation coefficients of weight, elbow, bitrochanteric breadth
breadths24 74; and ; black and b. Body fat determined by sum of to log-transformed sum of skinfold values done by gender by 3
white; USA NHANES 1971- triceps and subscapular age groups by race demonstrate lowest correlation with elbow
Frame Size, Circumferences, and Skinfolds
2705_frame_C31 Page 663 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:36 PM
sitting ht (Singapore and Beijing groups b. % BF calculated vs. measured not different for Beijing Chinese
Slenderness index (ht/wrist + Chinese) and Netherlands b. % BF calculated from BMI and Dutch.
knee width) (Caucasian) compared to measured c. % BF calculated underpredicted true value by 4% in Singapore
% BF measured by UWW and c. Skeletal mass calculated from ht, Chinese.
BIA.31 wrist, and knee width d. Differences in FS are at least partially responsible for differences
in relationship of BMI → % BF among different ethnic groups.
a Footnotes: Subjects (all information provided in the original reference is given): n = number of subjects; age in years; health status: H = healthy; gender: = male; = female.
b Criterion applied: 1 = highly correlated with weight; 2 = highly correlated with fat free mass (FFM); 3 = minimally correlated with body fatness; 4 = minimally correlated
with height; 5 = correlation with FFM is greater than the correlation of height alone with FFM; 6 = little or no association with body fat beyond that accounted for by the
association of FFM with fat.
c In this study, the authors propose a reference measure “actual FS” comprised on the sum of a battery of 22 different skeletal measures (11 breadths, 9 lengths, and 2
depths) as described in text of Logman et al.12
d Methods for determing body composition: UWW = underwater weighing; BIA = bioelectrical impendance analysis; JP = regression equations of Jackson and Pollack;32,33
Br = formula of Brozek et al.;34 DW = regression equation of Durnin and Wormersley;35 BIA-Lu = bioelectrical impedance analysis using the equations of Lukaski et al.36
e Abbreviations: FS = frame size; S, M, L= small, medium, large; ht = height; wt = weight; FFM = fat free mass; FM = fat mass; % BF = percent body fat; r = correlation
coefficient; sig = statistically significant; ns = not statistically significant; sd = standard deviation.
665
2705_frame_C31 Page 666 Thursday, September 20, 2001 9:19 AM
of the head, neck, chest, waist, abdomen, hips or buttocks, thigh, calf, ankle, forearm, and
wrist are described by Callaway et al., who recommend intra- and intermeasurer limits
of agreement of 0.2 cm for relatively small sites (calf, ankle, wrist, head, arm, forearm)
and 1.0 for the large sites (waist, abdomen, buttocks, chest).37
One of the most commonly measured and clinically practical anthropometric methods
is the arm muscle area. This method was originally developed for use in the field for the
evaluation of undernourished children.38 Arm circumference and tricep skinfold measure-
ment can be used to compare an individual to a reference population39 and estimate the
relative proportion of fat and muscle40 or to estimate the severity of undernutrition in
seriously ill hospitalized patients.41 The use of arm circumference has importance when
either undernutrition or overnutrition are of concern, and it can be easily used in the field,
hospital, or community setting. Similarly, head circumference is a common measurement
for infants in the first two to three years of life and can be plotted on standard growth
charts to be compared with population norms.
Because of some of the difficulties of applying traditional height-weight tables to indi-
viduals who are either very lean or very fat and because of the practicality of doing
circumference measurements, various researchers have evaluated the validity of using
circumferences to estimate body composition and physical fitness (see Table 31.6). Using
underwater weighing as the “gold standard,” tables have been developed to estimate
percent body fat within 2.5 to 4% for women and men using the following circumferences:
The U.S. Navy requires personnel to pass certain physical fitness screening tests includ-
ing having an appropriate weight for height. In this setting it is quite important to use a
method that provides more specific information than traditional height-weight indices in
differentiating individuals who have excess lean weight from those individuals with excess
fat. Because of the large numbers of potential recruits and enlisted personnel being mea-
sured, practicality is also very important. Equations using circumference measures have
been used to estimate percent body fat and body density since the early 1980s.
Skinfold Measurements
The skinfold (sometimes referred to as fatfold) technique is performed by pinching the
skin and underlying fat at a given location between the thumb and forefinger, pulling the
fold slightly away from the body, placing calipers on the fold, and measuring its thickness.
Some skinfold sites are relatively easy to locate and measure, while others are not. Many
individual factors can affect the accuracy of skinfold measurements:
Abbreviations: IAF = intraabdominal fat; WHR = waist to hip ratio; ht = height; wt = weight; BMI = body mass index; ffm = fat free mass; fm = fat mass; % BF = percent
body fat; r = correlation coefficient; sig = statistically significant; ns = not statistically significant; sd = standard deviation.
2705_frame_C31 Page 668 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:36 PM
Use of this method relies on two main assumptions: 1) skinfolds provide good measures
of subcutaneous fat; and 2) there is a good relationship between subcutaneous fat and
total body fat. The ability to predict total body fat varies by site, with some sites highly
correlated with total fat and others relatively independent of total fat. Studies show that
the relationship between subcutaneous and total body fat (ranging from 20 to 70%) is
affected by age, gender, degree of fatness, and race.51-53 Thus, it is important to review the
literature carefully and select sites and predictive equations that have been validated for
the population being measured and provide sufficient precision for the desired application.
Guidelines for skinfold measurement technique, location of measurement sites, and
information on reliability of measurement at the various sites have been published.54
Considerable supervised practice is required before an individual can take accurate skin-
fold measurements. Training by an experienced person should be conducted, and mea-
sures practiced until consistency is achieved between the expert and trainee and by the
trainee on within-subject repeated measures. Experts agree on the importance of using
standardized techniques in both locating the site and using calipers to take the measure-
ment, yet some argue that in light of the many biologic variables affecting body compo-
sition, technical errors in skinfold measurement are of comparatively little importance.55
Nonetheless, given a standard level of training and care in measurement, high levels of
reliability can be achieved (see Table 31.7).
Many different models of skinfold calipers are available, but only those designed to
maintain a constant tension (10 g/mm) between the jaws should be used. However, even
with the higher quality calipers, there is a difference in the pressure exerted by the jaws
and therefore in the degree of compression of the skinfold.56 Differences in compression
have also been attributed to differences in caliper jaw surface area such that calipers with
smaller surface area and lighter spring tension (such as the Lange) give larger values than
TABLE 31.7
Reliability of Selected Skinfold Measurement Sites
Site Intermeasurer Error Intrameasurer Error
Subscapular SEM: 0.88 to 1.53 mm SEM: 0.88 to 1.16 mm
Midaxillary SEM: ± 0.36; 1.47 mm (children); ± 0.64 mm SEM: Children: ± 0.95 mm
(adults) Adults: ± 1.0,1.22, 2.08 mm
Pectoral (chest) R: .9, .93, .97; SEM: 2.1 mm R: .91 to .97 mm; SEM: ± 1-2 mm
Abdominal R: .979; SEM: 0.89 mm
Suprailiac SEM: 1.53 mm (children); 1.7 mm (adults) R: .97; SEM: 0.3-1.0 mm
Thigh R: > .9, .97, .975; SEM: ± 2.1, ± 2.4, 3-4 mm R: .91, .98, .985; SEM: 0.5-0.7 mm, 1-2 mm
Medial calf R: .94, .98, .99; SEM: 1.0-1.5 mm
Tricep SEM: 0.8-1.89 mm SEM: 0.4-0.8 mm
Bicep SEM: ± 1.9 mm SEM: 0.2-0.6, ± 1.9 mm
a Information in this table has been summarized from Harrison GG, Buskirk ER, Carter JEL, et al. Skinfold
Thickness and Measurement Technique. In: Lohman TG, Roche AF, Martorell R. Anthropometric Standard-
ization Reference Manual. (1988) Champaign, IL: Human Kinetics. pp 55-80. This chapter includes the
specific citations for the reliability studies.
b Abbreviations used: SEM: Standard error of measurement; R: reliability coefficient.
c Multiple error estimates represent differing results from different studies.
2705_frame_C31 Page 669 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:36 PM
calipers with larger surface area and tighter spring tension (Holtain and Harpenden).57
Because of these differences attributable to the calipers themselves, it is important to
calibrate often,58 and to consistently use the same equipment in order to compare data
within or across subjects.
Selected Studies Examining the Relationships between Anthropometric Measures and Bone Mass or Bone Mineral Density
Anthropometric Measures Subjects Methods Results
a. Frame: biacromial, biiliac, n = 342; mean age = Correlation of anthropometric a. For all skeletal sites one frame measure (biacromial width [BW]), one
bicofemoral, bicohumeral, and 44.1 (range = 25- measures to: skinfold (subscapular[SSF]) and one circumference (calf[CC]) provided
wrist breadths; 79); ; USA a. Measured (photon the strongest correlations.
b. Skinfold: triceps, biceps, forearm, absorptiometry) bone mineral b. The greater trochanter was more strongly correlated with all
subscapula, suprailium, calf, density (g/cm2) at the radius, anthropometric measures than any other skeletal site.
abdomen, thigh; femoral neck, Ward’s triangle, c. After inclusion of age, BW, SSF, and muscularity in multiple regression
c. Circumferences: calf, waist, trochanter, lumbar spine model, BW was a significant predictor for all sites except the radius,
upper arm, abdomen b. Constructed summary bone and SSF and muscularity were significant for all sites.
d. Height and weight65 density score (radius, spine, d. Neither height nor weight contributed significantly to the model after
femoral neck) BW, SSF, and CC or muscularity were included.
Muscle mass (termed e. Despite the strength of the associations, none of the models accounted
“muscularity”) estimated from for more than 40-45% of the variability in bone mass at any site and
circumferences and skinfoldsa therefore are not adequate to predict bone mass for individuals.
2705_frame_C31 Page 670 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:36 PM
Multiple regression models f. No measures of distribution of body fat were significantly associated
constructed to test the usefulness with bone mass.
of measures in predicting bone g. Cross-sectional data not adequate to address questions of rates of bone
mass. loss.
a. Elbow breadth n = 6705; Bone mineral density (BMD) a. Weight was the major determinant of BMD at all sites, explaining 6-
b. Height, weight and BMI mean age = 71.2 ± 5, measured by single-photon 20% of the variability. (Weight explained more of the variability at
c. Waist:Hip ratio67 Non-black, USA (proximal and distal radius and direct weight bearing sites — proximal femur and os calcis.) Effect of
calcaneus) and dual-energy x-ray weight on BMD did not seem to vary with age. (Age had independent
absorptiometry (lumbar spine and significant effect on BMD decline.)
proximal femur) b. Although the measures of BMI, elbow breadth, height, and waist:hip
Adiposity measured by bioelectrical ratio resulted in statistically significant (P<0.001) improvements in fit
impedance of the model, they added very little explanatory power over weight
alone.
c. A modest proportion of the weight effect was explained by adiposity
(36-63% at weight bearing sites and 8-12% at forearm sites).
d. These data suggest that both mechanical loading and metabolic
mechanisms affect BMD.
Waist:Hip ratio, wt, BMI, arm n = 1873 (97% Bone mineral content (BMC) and Body wt., BMI, arm muscle and fat sig > in N than either OPN or OPR
muscle and fat area post-menopausal), density (BMD) evaluated by DXA groups.
Italy as normal (N), osteopenic (OPN) or WHR not different between groups.
osteoporotic (OPR) Wt and age sig predictors of BMC and BMD but high levels of variation
in BMC for the same level of wt (under, normal, over) negate its
Handbook of Nutrition and Food
Conclusion
Even though there is an extensive body of literature examining the validity of using
measures of frame size, circumferences, or skinfolds to predict disease risk or disease
outcomes, conclusive findings and consensus on which measures are best remain elusive.
Nonetheless, the ability of researchers to build on the lessons learned from these early
studies and apply emerging new technologies give reason for optimism about reaching
the goal of using simple, inexpensive techniques to improve individual and public health.
References
1. Wang J, Thornton JC, Kolesnik S, Pierson RN. Ann NY Acad Sci 904: 317; 2000.
2. Sutcliffe JF. Phys Med Biol 41: 791; 1996.
3. Wagner DR, Heywood VH. Res Q Exec Sport 70: 135; 1999.
4. Heywood VH. Sports Med 22: 146; 1996.
5. Frisancho AR. Anthropometric Standards for The Assessment of Growth and Nutritional Status
University of Michigan Press, Ann Arbor, 1990.
6. Ulijaszek SJ, Mascie-Taylor CGN (Eds). Anthropometry: The Individual and The Population Cam-
bridge University Press, Cambridge 1994.
7. Ulijaszek SJ, Kerr, DA. Br J Nutr 82: 165; 1999.
8. Nordhamm K, Sodergren E, Olsson E, et al. Int J Obes 24: 652; 2000.
9. Zerfas AJ. Manual for Anthropometry University of California Press, Los Angeles, 1985.
10. Ulijaszek SJ, Lourie JA. Coll Antropol 21: 429; 1997.
11. Fuller NJ, Sawyer MB, Elia M. Int J Obesity 18: 503; 1994.
12. Lohman TG, Roche AF, Martorell R. Anthropometric Standardization Reference Manual University
of Illinois Press, Champaign, 1988.
13. Heyward VH, Stolarczyk LM. Applied Body Composition Assessment University of Illinois Press,
Champaign, 1996.
14. Van Itallie TB. Am J Public Health 75: 1054; 1985.
15. Himes JH, Bouchard C. Am J Public Health 75: 1076; 1985.
16. Kretschmer E, Korperbautypus und Charakter Springer, Berlin 1921.
17. Metropolitan Life Insurance Co. Statistical Bulletin 40: 1; 1959.
18. Weigley ES, JADA 84: 417; 1984.
19. Metropolitan Life Insurance Co. Statistical Bulletin 64: 2; 1983.
20. Faulkner RA, Dailey DA. Can J Public Health 80: 369; 1989.
21. Frisancho AR. Am J Clin Nutr 40: 808; 1984.
22. Garn SM, Pesick SD, Hawthorne VM. Am J Clin Nutr 37: 315; 1983.
23. Grant JP. Handbook of Total Parenteral Nutrition WB Saunders, Philadelphia, 1980.
24. Frisancho AR, Flegel PN. Am J Clin Nutr 11: 418; 1983.
25. Katch VL, Freedson PS. Am J Clin Nutr 36: 669; 1982.
26. Peters DM, Eston R. J Sports Sci 11: 9; 1993.
27. Greil H, Trippo U. Coll Anthropol 2: 345; 1998.
28. Fehily AM, Butland BK, Yarnell JWG. Eur J Clin Nutr 44: 107; 1990.
29. Nowak RK, Olmstead SL. JADA 87: 339; 1987.
30. Mitchell MC. JADA 93: 53; 1993.
31. Deurenberg P, Deurenberg YM, Wang J, et al. J Obes Relat Metab Disord 23: 537; 1999.
32. Jackson AS, Pollock ML. Br J Nutr 40: 497; 1978.
33. Jackson AS, Pollock ML, Ward A. Med Sci Sports Exerc 12: 175; 1980.
34. Brozek J, Grande F, Anderson JT, et al. Ann NY Acad Sci 110: 113; 1963.
35. Durnin JVGA, Womersley J. Brit J Nutr 32: 77; 1974.
2705_frame_C31 Page 672 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:36 PM
36. Lukaski HC, Johnson PE, Bolonchuk WW, Lykken GI. Am J Clin Nutr 41: 1985; 1984.
37. Callaway CW, Chumlea WC, Bouchard C, et al. Anthropometric Standardization Reference Manual
University of Illinois Press, Champaign, 1988.
38. Jelliffe EFP, Jelliffe DB. J Trop Pediatr 15: 179; 1969.
39. Frisancho AR. Am J Clin Nutr 34: 2540; 1981.
40. Gurney JM, Delliffe DB. Am J Clin Nutr 26: 912; 1973.
41. Heymsfield SB, McManus C, Smith J, et al. Am J Clin Nutr 36: 680; 1982.
42. Katch FI, McArdle WD. Nutrition, Weight Control and Exercise Lea & Febiger, Philadelphia, 1988.
43. Kamel EG, McNeill G, Van Wijk MC. Obes Res 8: 36; 2000.
44. Conway TL, Cronan TA, Peterson KA. Aviat Space Environ Med 60: 433; 1989.
45. Wright HF, Dotson CO, Davis PO. US Navy Med 72: 23; 1981.
46. Hodgdon JA, Beckett MB. Technical Report No. 84-29 Naval Health Research Center, San Diego,
1984.
47. Wright HF, Dotson CO, Davis PO. US Navy Med 71: 15; 1980.
48. Molarius A, Seidell JC, Sans S, et al. J Clin Epidemiol 52: 1213; 1999.
49. Rutishauser IHE, Pasco JA, Wheeler CE. Eur J Clin Nutr 49: 248; 1995.
50. Goodman-Gruen D, Barrett-Connor E. Am J Epidemiol 143: 898; 1996.
51. Vickery SR, Cureton KJ, Collins MA. Hum Biol 60: 135; 1988.
52. Behnke AR. Obesity FA Davis, Philadelphia, 1969.
53. Lohman TG. Hum Biol 53: 181; 1981.
54. Harrison GG, Buskirk ER, Carter JEL, et al. Anthropometric Standardization Reference Manual
University of Illinois Press, Champaign, 1988.
55. Durnin JVGA, DeBruin H, Feunekes GIJ. Br J Nutr 77: 3; 1997.
56. Schmidt PK, Carter JEL. Hum Biol 62: 369; 1990.
57. Gruber JJ, Pollack ML, et al. Res Q 61: 184; 1990.
58. Gore CJ, Woolford SM, Carlyon RG. J Sports Sci 13: 355; 1995.
59. Williams SRP, Jones E, Bell W, et al. Eur Heart J 18: 376; 1997.
60. Freedman DS. Am J Med Sci 310: S72; 1995.
61. Van Lenthe FJ, Kemper HCG, Van Mechelen W, Twist JWR. Int J Epidemiol 25: 1162; 1996.
62. Paccaud F, Schluter-Fasmeyer V, Wietlisbach V, Bovet P. J Clin Epidemiol 53: 393; 2000.
63. Ohrval M, Berglund L, Vessby B. Int J Obesity 24: 497; 2000.
64. Gustat J, Elkasabany A, Srinivasan S, Berenson GS. Am J Epidemiol 151: 885; 2000.
65. Slemenda CW, Hui SL, Williams CJ, et al. Bone Miner 11: 101; 1990.
66. Ross WD, Crawford SM, Kerr DS, et al. Am J Phys Anthropol 77: 169; 1988.
67. Glauber HS, Vollmer WM, Nevitt MC, et al. J Clin Endocrinol Metab 80: 1118; 1995.
68. Bedogni G, Simonini G, Viaggi S, et al. Ann Hum Biol 26: 561; 1999.
2705_frame_C32 Page 673 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:36 PM
32
Height, Weight, and Body Mass Index (BMI)
in Childhood
Introduction
In childhood, height (stature) and weight are the two most frequently used measures of
growth and nutritional status. In addition, indices of weight-for-height, especially BMI,
are used as a proxy for body fatness or obesity. Since growth is the most sensitive indicator
of overall health in childhood, it is essential that accurate measurements be made on a
regular basis during routine health supervision of children and adolescents to identify
and address significant deviations in a timely manner.
Pediatric health professionals take two basic anthropometric measurements on each
child: recumbent length (for children under two years of age) or standing height (for children
over two years of age) and weight. From these two measurements, body mass index (BMI)
can be derived from a reference chart or calculated by formula. This section will focus on
these three measures: height (or length), weight, and BMI. For each measurement the
following aspects will be discussed: definition, normal patterns of change, measurement
techniques, and interpretation of values using reference growth charts. Since most prac-
ticing pediatricians in the U.S., as well as other health professionals who care for children,
record their measurements in inches and pounds, these units will be used in the discussion.
Height
Description
Height, or stature, is a linear measure from the base on which the child is standing, to the
firm top of the child’s head. Height is measured in children over two years of age. It is
measured with the child standing with erect posture, and without shoes. From birth to
two years of age, the infant or toddler’s stature is measured as recumbent length. This is
the total length of the child from the bottom of the feet (positioned at a 90-degree angle)
to the top of the head. Recumbent length is slightly greater than standing height measured
in the same individual.
0-8493-2705-9/01/$0.00+$1.50
© 2002 by CRC Press LLC 673
2705_frame_C32 Page 674 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:36 PM
Measuring Length
The stature of subjects less than two years of age is measured as recumbent length. This
is done most accurately with a measuring “box” or “board” that has an inflexible headpiece
against which the top of the head is positioned, and a moveable footboard against which
the feet are placed at a 90-degree angle. If possible, the child should be relaxed, the legs
should be fully extended, and the head should be positioned so that a line connecting the
outer margin of the eyes with the ears is at a 90-degree angle with the bottom of the
measuring box. Recumbent length is measured from the top of the head to the bottom of
the feet. It should be measured to the nearest quarter inch and recorded in the child’s
chart. Measurement of recumbent length on an examining table without a “box” should
also be from the top of the head to the bottom of the feet, which are positioned at a 90-
degree angle. It is recommended that the same examiner measure the child at each visit
to minimize inter-examiner variability.
Because recumbent length is slightly greater than standing height, it is recommended
that measurements of both length and height be obtained for two visits between two and
three years of age. With these simultaneous recumbent length and standing height values,
measurement discrepancy can be distinguished from actual change in growth rate.
Measuring Height
The height of subjects older than two years of age is measured, without shoes, with a
stadiometer. A stadiometer consists of a measuring tape affixed to a vertical surface, such
as a wall or a rigid free-standing measuring device, and a movable block, attached to the
2705_frame_C32 Page 675 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:36 PM
vertical surface at a right angle, that can be brought down to the crown of the head. In the
absence of a stadiometer, height can be measured on a platform scale, but this is less
accurate than the stadiometer. In either case, the subject should stand with heels together
and back as straight as possible; the heels, buttocks, shoulders, and head should touch the
wall or the vertical surface of the measuring device. The weight of the subject is distributed
evenly on both feet and the head is positioned in the horizontal plane. The arms hang
freely by the sides with the palms facing the thighs. The subject should be asked to inhale
deeply and maintain a fully erect position. The examiner positions the movable block until
it touches the head; applying sufficient pressure to compress the hair. The height marker
is read while pressing firmly on the headpiece. The number on the height bar immediately
behind the indicator line of the height marker is read. The examiner’s eyes should look
directly at the indicator line at about the same height in order to avoid parallax in reading
the measurement. The height is measured to the nearest quarter inch, and then recorded
on the child’s chart. It is recommended that a second reading be taken to check accuracy.
Height has diurnal variation. Children are tallest in the morning, and shrink as much
as a centimeter during the course of a day as the fibrous intervertebral cartilaginous disks
are compressed. Diurnal variation in height is completely due to changes in the height of
the vertebral column, and full height is regained when the child lies down flat for about
30 minutes.
axis at the bottom of the chart and height in inches (or centimeters) is plotted along the
vertical axis on the left of the chart. The 50th percentile, representing the average height for
a given age, is drawn as a heavy line. Growth charts are commonly drawn for values
between the 5th and 95th or 3rd and 97th percentiles of the population distribution values.
The Center for Disease Control (CDC) has published Growth Charts for boys and girls,
for birth to 36 months of age and for ages 2 to 20 years. These include charts for plotting
linear growth including Length-for-Age (age 2 years of age and under), Height-for-Age
(age 2 years and older), Weight-for-Length, and Weight-for-Height. These charts may be
downloaded from the CDC internet website: http://www.cdc.gov/growthcharts.
Weight
Description
Body weight is a measure of body mass, which is a composite of each contributing tissue
(e.g., fat, muscle, bone, etc). Although weight should ideally be measured without clothing,
this is often impractical. Most commonly, weight is measured with the child in underwear
only, or in light indoor clothing, without shoes.
Measurement Techniques
Weight should be measured in the clinical setting using a standard balance beam scale
with moveable weight or with an instrument of equivalent accuracy. It is recommended
that the scale be calibrated at least monthly using standard weights. It is preferable to
weigh the child without clothing, or in light indoor clothing, but at least the child’s shoes
and heavy outer clothing should be removed. With older children, heavy belts should be
removed and their pockets should be emptied. The beam of the platform scale must be
graduated so that it can be read from both sides. The subject stands still over the center
of the platform with body weight evenly distributed between both feet. Weight is recorded
to the nearest quarter pound.
Weight, like height, has diurnal variation. In contrast to height, however, weight is lowest
in the morning after emptying the bladder, and increases gradually through the day,
depending on diet and physical activity.
parents. The phenotype expressed, however, with respect to body weight and fatness, is
also heavily influenced by environmental factors such as diet and physical activity. Most
children will gravitate toward a specific percentile curve of the standard weight charts
during the first few years of life. However, with the increasing prevalence of childhood
obesity in the U.S., it is not uncommon for children’s weights to gradually cross upward
across percentiles, rather than maintain a consistent percentile position relative to their
peers. It is recommended that body weight, height, and calculated BMI values all be mon-
itored carefully during routine health supervision, so that children and adolescents who
begin to deviate from normal growth patterns may receive further evaluation and treatment.
Children’s weight percentiles may be similar to their height percentiles, or may be
somewhat above or below, and still be “normal” or healthy if the BMI is below the 85th
percentile for age.
Healthy children who consistently track along the lower weight percentiles throughout
childhood are considered normal if their weight is proportionate to their height (close to
the same percentile) and consistent with parental heights and weights.
Children whose weight gain decelerates and shifts gradually downward to a lower
percentile, or who actually lose weight (with the exception of overweight children on
medically supervised diets), should be medically evaluated to determine the cause. Poor
weight gain or unexplained weight loss may reflect inadequate nutrition, an eating dis-
order, an underlying disease affecting a major organ system, or depression or other
psychological problems.
Overweight children who are placed on a medically supervised diet to slow down the
rate of weight gain or to lose weight should be carefully monitored so adequate intake of
essential nutrients is assured through a balanced calorie-controlled diet, and caloric intake
is adequate to maintain linear growth throughout treatment.
because levels of fatness vary among children at a given BMI. This is true because BMI
reflects (1) frame size, (2) leg length, and (3) amount of lean and fat tissue. Although BMI
correlates less well with the percent of body weight that is fat than other more direct
measures of fat such as triceps skinfold thickness or other body composition techniques,
the readily available weight and height data make BMI a more useful tool for assessment
of overweight or underweight.
BMI in children and adolescents compares well to laboratory measurements of body
fat. Children and adolescents with a BMI-for-age above the 95th percentile are classified
as overweight. BMI values above the 95th percentile, applied as a definition of overweight
in children and adolescents
1. Reflects adiposity
2. Is consistent across age groups
3. Is predictive of morbidity
The percentage of children and adolescents who are overweight in the U.S. has more
than doubled in the past 30 years, and the sharpest increase has occurred in the last 20
years, since the late 1970s. For 6 to 17 year old youth, about 12.5% (or 5.3 million) are
overweight (BMI >95th percentile reference value).
The rationale for proposing a pediatric BMI classification is based on studies indicating
that BMI is related to health risks. Overweight children are likely to become overweight
adults, with risk increasing with severity and duration of the problem. Sixty percent of
youth with a BMI-for-age above the 95th percentile have at least one risk factor for cardio-
vascular disease, while twenty percent have two or more risk factors. High blood pressure,
abnormal blood lipid levels (elevated total cholesterol, LDL-cholesterol, and/or triglycer-
ides; low HDL-cholesterol), insulin resistance, and Type II diabetes mellitus are some of
the risk factors observed in overweight children and adolescents. Overweight children are
also at increased risk for a wide range of other medical and psychological problems.
Measurement of BMI
BMI, also known as the weight-height index or Quetelet index, is calculated as the quotient
of weight divided by height squared:
kg lb lb
40 40
18 97th
95th
17
38
Weight-for-age percentiles: 38
90th
36 Boys, birth to 36 months 36
16
34 75th 34
15
32 32
50th
14
30 30
25th
13
28 28
10th
12 5th
26 3rd 26
11 24 24
10 22 22
9 20 20
18 18
8
16 16
7
14 14
6
12 12
5
10 10
4
8 8
3
6 6
2
4 4
kg lb lb
Birth 3 6 9 12 15 18 21 24 27 30 33 36
Age (months)
FIGURE 32.1
Weight-for-age percentiles, boys, birth to 36 months, CDC growth charts: United States. Source: Developed by
the National Center for Health Statistics in collaboration with the National Center for Chronic Disease Prevention
and Health Promotion (2000).
2705_frame_C32 Page 681 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:36 PM
kg lb lb
40 40
18 97th
95th
17
38
Weight-for-age percentiles: 38
34 34
15
75th
32 32
14
50th
30 30
13
25th
28 28
12 10th
26 26
5th
3rd
11 24 24
10 22 22
9 20 20
18 18
8
16 16
7
14 14
6
12 12
5
10 10
4
8 8
3
6 6
2
4 4
kg lb lb
Birth 3 6 9 12 15 18 21 24 27 30 33 36
Age (months)
CDC
CENTERS FOR DISEASE CONTR
AND PREVENTION
CONTROL
FIGURE 32.2
Weight-for-age percentiles, girls, birth to 36 months, CDC growth charts: United States. Source: Developed by
the National Center for Health Statistics in collaboration with the National Center for Chronic Disease Prevention
and Health Promotion (2000).
2705_frame_C32 Page 682 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:36 PM
cm in in
42 42
105
41 97th 41
38 50th 38
95
37 25th 37
36 10th 36
90 5th
35 3rd 35
34 34
85
33 33
32 32
80
31 31
30 30
75
29 29
28 28
70
27 27
26 26
65
25 25
24 24
60
23 23
22 22
55
21 21
20 20
50
19 19
18 18
45
17 17
cm in in
Birth 3 6 9 12 15 18 21 24 27 30 33 36
Age (months)
CDC
CENTERS FOR DISEASE CONTR
AND PREVENTION
CONTROL
FIGURE 32.3
Length-for-age percentiles, boys, birth to 36 months, CDC growth charts: United States. Source: Developed by
the National Center for Health Statistics in collaboration with the National Center for Chronic Disease Prevention
and Health Promotion (2000).
2705_frame_C32 Page 683 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:36 PM
cm in in
42 42
105
41 41
97th
40 Length-for-age percentiles: 95th 40
90th
100
39 Girls, birth to 36 months 39
75th
38 38
95 50th
37 37
25th
36 36
90 10th
35 5th 35
3rd
34 34
85
33 33
32 32
80
31 31
30 30
75
29 29
28 28
70
27 27
26 26
65
25 25
24 24
60
23 23
22 22
55
21 21
20 20
50
19 19
18 18
45
17 17
cm in in
Birth 3 6 9 12 15 18 21 24 27 30 33 36
Age (months)
CDC
CENTERS FOR DISEASE CONTR
AND PREVENTION
CONTROL
FIGURE 32.4
Length-for-age percentiles, girls, birth to 36 months, CDC growth charts: United States. Source: Developed by
the National Center for Health Statistics in collaboration with the National Center for Chronic Disease Prevention
and Health Promotion (2000).
2705_frame_C32 Page 684 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:36 PM
kg lb lb
23
50 50
22 48 48
Weight-for-length percentiles:
21 46
Boys, birth to 36 months 46
20 44 44
97th
19 42 42
95th
40 90th 40
18
38 75th 38
17
36 50th 36
16
34 25th 34
15 10th
32 5th 32
14 3rd
30 30
13
28 28
12 26 26
11 24 24
10 22 22
9 20 20
18 18
8
16 16
7
14 14
6
12 12
5
10 10
4
8 8
3
6 6
2 4 4
1 2 2
kg lb lb
in 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40
cm 45 50 55 60 65 70 75 80 85 90 95 100
Length
CDC
CENTERS FOR DISEASE CONTR
AND PREVENTION
CONTROL
OL
FIGURE 32.5
Weight-for-length percentiles, boys, birth to 36 months, CDC growth charts: United States. Source: Developed
by the National Center for Health Statistics in collaboration with the National Center for Chronic Disease
Prevention and Health Promotion (2000).
2705_frame_C32 Page 685 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:36 PM
kg lb lb
23
50 50
22 48 48
21
Weight-for-length percentiles:
46 46
Girls, birth to 36 months
20 44 97th 44
19 42 95th 42
40 90th 40
18
38 38
17 75th
36 50th 36
16
34 25th 34
15
10th
32 32
5th
14 3rd
30 30
13
28 28
12 26 26
11 24 24
10 22 22
9 20 20
18 18
8
16 16
7
14 14
6
12 12
5
10 10
4
8 8
3
6 6
2 4 4
1 2 2
kg lb lb
in 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40
cm 45 50 55 60 65 70 75 80 85 90 95 100
Length
CDC
CENTERS FOR DISEASE CONTR
AND PREVENTION
CONTROL
OL
FIGURE 32.6
Weight-for-length percentiles, girls, birth to 36 months, CDC growth charts: United States. Source: Developed
by the National Center for Health Statistics in collaboration with the National Center for Chronic Disease
Prevention and Health Promotion (2000).
2705_frame_C32 Page 686 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:36 PM
kg lb lb
105 230
230
97th
100 220 220
90 200
Boys, 2 to 20 years 200
90th
190 190
85
180 180
80 75th
170 170
75
160 160
50th
70
150 150
65
140 25th 140
60
130 10th 130
5th
55 120 120
3rd
50 110 110
45 100 100
90 90
40
80 80
35
70 70
30
60 60
25
50 50
20
40 40
15
30 30
10
20 20
kg lb lb
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
Age (years)
CDC
CENTERS FOR DISEASE CONTR
AND PREVENTION
CONTROL
OL
FIGURE 32.7
Weight-for-age percentiles, boys, 2 - to 20 years, CDC growth charts: United States. Source: Developed by the
National Center for Health Statistics in collaboration with the National Center for Chronic Disease Prevention
and Health Promotion (2000).
2705_frame_C32 Page 687 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:36 PM
kg lb lb
105 230 230
200
Girls, 2 to 20 years 200
90
97th
190 190
85
95th
180 180
80
170 170
75 90th
160 160
70
150 150
75th
65
140 140
60
130 130
50th
55 120 120
25th
50 110 110
10th
5th
45 100 3rd 100
90 90
40
80 80
35
70 70
30
60 60
25
50 50
20
40 40
15
30 30
10
20 20
kg lb lb
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
Age (years)
CDC
CENTERS FOR DISEASE CONTR
AND PREVENTION
CONTROL
OL
FIGURE 32.8
Weight-for-age percentiles, girls, 2 to 20 years, CDC growth charts: United States. Source: Developed by the
National Center for Health Statistics in collaboration with the National Center for Chronic Disease Prevention
and Health Promotion (2000).
2705_frame_C32 Page 688 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:36 PM
cm in in
200
78 78
195
76 76
190 Stature-for-age percentiles: 97th
74 95th 74
185
Boys, 2 to 20 years 90th
72 72
75th
180
70 70
50th
175
68 68
25th
170
66 10th 66
165 5th
64 3rd 64
160
62 62
155
60 60
150
58 58
145
56 56
140
54 54
135
52 52
130
50 50
125
48 48
120
46 46
115
44 44
110
42 42
105
40 40
100
38 38
95
36 36
90
34 34
85
32 32
80
30 30
75
cm in in
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
Age (years)
CDC
CENTERS FOR DISEASE CONTR
AND PREVENTION
CONTROL
OL
FIGURE 32.9
Stature-for-age percentiles, boys, 2 to 20 years, CDC growth charts: United States. Source: Developed by the
National Center for Health Statistics in collaboration with the National Center for Chronic Disease Prevention
and Health Promotion (2000).
2705_frame_C32 Page 689 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:36 PM
cm in in
200
78 78
195
76 76
190
74
Stature-for-age percentiles: 74
185
72
Girls, 2 to 20 years 72
180
70 70
175 97th
68 95th 68
90th
170
66 75th 66
165
64 50th 64
160 25th
62 62
155 10th
60 5th 60
3rd
150
58 58
145
56 56
140
54 54
135
52 52
130
50 50
125
48 48
120
46 46
115
44 44
110
42 42
105
40 40
100
38 38
95
36 36
90
34 34
85
32 32
80
75 30 30
cm in in
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
Age (years)
CDC
CENTERS FOR DISEASE CONTR
AND PREVENTION
CONTROL
OL
FIGURE 32.10
Stature-for-age percentiles, girls, 2 to 20 years, CDC growth charts: United States. Source: Developed by the
National Center for Health Statistics in collaboration with the National Center for Chronic Disease Prevention
and Health Promotion (2000).
2705_frame_C32 Page 690 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:36 PM
kg lb lb
76 76
34
33
72 72
32
Weight-for-stature percentiles: Boys
31 68 68
30
97th
29 64 64
28 95th
60 60
27
90th
26
56 85th 56
25
24 75th
52 52
23
50th
22
48 48
25th
21
10th
5th
20 44 3rd 44
19
18 40 40
17
36 36
16
15
32 32
14
13
28 28
12
11 24 24
10
9 20 20
8
kg lb lb
in 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47
CDC
CENTERS FOR DISEASE CONTR
AND PREVENTION
CONTROL
OL
FIGURE 32.11
Weight-for-stature percentiles, boys, CDC growth charts: United States. Source: Developed by the National
Center for Health Statistics in collaboration with the National Center for Chronic Disease Prevention and Health
Promotion (2000).
2705_frame_C32 Page 691 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:36 PM
kg lb lb
76 76
34
33
72 72
32
Weight-for-stature percentiles: Girls
31 68 68
30
97th
29 64 64
28 95th
60 60
27
90th
26
56 85th 56
25
75th
24
52 52
23
50th
22
48 48
25th
21
10th
20 44 5th 44
3rd
19
40 40
18
17
36 36
16
15
32 32
14
13
28 28
12
11 24 24
10
9 20 20
8
kg lb lb
in 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47
CDC
CENTERS FOR DISEASE CONTR
AND PREVENTION
CONTROL
OL
FIGURE 32.12
Weight-for-stature percentiles, girls, CDC growth charts: United States. Source: Developed by the National Center
for Health Statistics in collaboration with the National Center for Chronic Disease Prevention and Health
Promotion (2000).
2705_frame_C32 Page 692 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:36 PM
BMI BMI
Boys, 2 to 20 years
97th
32 32
95th
30 30
90th
28 28
85th
26 26
75th
24 24
50th
22 22
25th
20 10th 20
5th
3rd
18 18
16 16
14 14
12 12
kg/m2 kg/m2
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
Age (years)
FIGURE 32.13
Body mass index-for-age percentiles, boys, 2 to 20 years, CDC growth charts: United States. Source: Developed
by the National Center for Health Statistics in collaboration with the National Center for Chronic Disease
Prevention and Health Promotion (2000).
2705_frame_C32 Page 693 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:36 PM
BMI BMI
97th
Body mass index-for-age percentiles:
34 34
Girls, 2 to 20 years
32 95th 32
30 30
90th
28 28
85th
26 26
75th
24 24
22 22
50th
20 20
25th
10th
18 5th 18
3rd
16 16
14 14
12 12
kg/m2 kg/m2
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
Age (years)
FIGURE 32.14
Body mass index-for-age percentiles, girls, 2 to 20 years, CDC growth charts: United States. Source: Developed
by the National Center for Health Statistics in collaboration with the National Center for Chronic Disease
Prevention and Health Promotion (2000).
2705_frame_C32 Page 694 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:36 PM
33
Anthropometric Assessment: Height, Weight, Body
Mass Index (Adults)
George A. Bray
Historical Perspective
Quetelet
Lambert-Adolf-Jacques Quetelet is credited with the concept of the body mass index (BMI).1
The proposal was made in a monograph in 1835 on the development of the human body.
As Freudenthal says, “With Quetelet’s work in 1835 a new era in statistics began … The
work gave a description of the average man as both a static and dynamic phenomenon.”2
It was Quetelet who introduced the concept of quantitation in measurement of the human
being, thus providing a framework for progess in epidemiology and statistics. Quetelet,
with his mathematical background, took statistical methods into new arenas. He was a
pioneer in the application of statistics to human biology, anthropology, and criminology.
Quetelet was interested in the underlying factors that determined the distribution of
such events as births, marriages, deaths, and the prevalence of various types of crime. In
his work he noted the seasonal distribution of births, deaths, and marriages. He also noted
a seasonal distribution of crime, and that crimes against property appeared more fre-
quently in cold months while crimes against the person were more common in the summer.
Commenting on the constancy of crimes from year to year, he said, “Thus we pass from
one year to another with the sad perspective of seeing the same crimes reproduced in the
same order and calling down the same punishments in the same proportions. Sad condi-
tion of humanity …”.1 Fortunately, the human being has been able to change this apparent
constancy by education, laws, and better government. Much of the work in the volume
Sur l’Homme deals with means and distributions of the measurements he made. It was
not until a later publication in 1845 in the Bulletin de la Commission de Statistique (de Belgique)
that he dealt with the concept of the binomial distribution in detail. In his work, Quetelet
devoted a significant amount of space to the issues of height and weight. The concept of
the “average man” originated with Quetelet, and is one of his seminal contributions. To
quote from Chapter 2 of his work, Quetelet says:
If man increased equally in all his dimensions, his weight at different ages would be as
the cube of his height. Now, this is not what we really observe. The increase in weight
0-8493-2705-9/01/$0.00+$1.50
© 2002 by CRC Press LLC 695
2705_frame_C33 Page 696 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:37 PM
is slower, except during the first year after birth; then the proportion which we have
just pointed out is pretty regularly observed. But after this period, and until near the
age of puberty, the weight increases nearly as the square of the height. The development
of the weight again becomes very rapid at the time of puberty, and almost stops at the
25th year. In general, we do not err much when we assume that, during development,
the square of weight at different ages are as the fifth powers of the height; which
naturally leads to this conclusion, in supposing the specific gravity constant, that the
transverse growth of man is less than the vertical.
However, if we compare two individuals who are fully developed and well-formed with
each other, to ascertain the relations existing between the weight and stature, we shall
find that the weight of developed persons, of different heights, is nearly as the square
of the stature. Whence it naturally follows, that a transverse section, giving both the
breadth and thickness, is just proportioned to the height of the individual. We further-
more conclude that, proportion still being attended, width predominates in individuals
of small stature.1
These two paragraphs succinctly summarize the concept of the body mass according to
Quetelet, and the rationale on which he developed his concept.
Life Insurance
Nearly 70 years after Quetelet, the life insurance industry in the United States began to
weigh in on the importance of excess weight as a risk for early death.3 It was also noted
that a central distribution of weight was important. The 1922 Statistical Bulletin of the
Metropolitan Life Insurance Company4 says:
It is generally recognized that weight of the human body in relation to its height plays
a part in determining the health and longevity of the individual. It is only recently,
however, that the long experience of the insurance companies has made possible the
crystallization of this impression into a series of definite propositions. We know now,
for example, that overweight is a serious impairment among insured lives, the gravity
increasing with the excess in weight over the average for the height and age. But, even
this statement has its exceptions because, at younger ages, a limited amount of over-
weight is apparently an advantage. Such persons have uniformly lower death rates from
tuberculosis. It is after the age of 35 that overweight, even in relatively small amounts,
begins to be dangerous. The seriousness increases with advancing age and with the
amount of overweight.
From this point forward until the last decade of the 20th century, there were “weight
tables” of appropriate, desirable, or ideal weight proposed by the life insurance industry.
The Framingham Study, which was the first American effort at a long-term population-
based evaluation of health risks, used the Metropolitan Life Insurance Table of 1959 as
the basis for comparing the weights of people living in Framingham with some standard.
The term came to be called the Metropolitan Relative Weight, which was the weight for
height of an individual to the expected weight for height from the Metropolitan Life
Insurance Table median frame grouping.
Various Indices
Several indices relating height to weight were proposed in the middle of the 20th century.
The BMI, or what might be appropriately called the Quetelet Index (QI), was compared
2705_frame_C33 Page 697 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:37 PM
against several other indices by Keys et al.5 They evaluated three indices of weight and
height: the Wt/Ht, the Wt/[Ht]2 (QI), and the Ht/[Wt]1/3 (Ponderal Index) against skinfold
estimates of fat. Of these three, the QI had a slightly better correlation with fatness than
Wt/Ht. The Ponderal Index was clearly the worst.
In summary, the relationship between height and weight [wt/(Ht)2] proposed by Quete-
let in 1835 has stood the test of time. In tribute to his contribution and its validation from
a number of sources, it would be appropriate to refer to it as the Quetelet Index, or QI,
and replace the frequently used body mass index, or BMI, with this new nomenclature.
Measurement of Weight
Recommended Technique
During infancy, a leveled pan scale with a beam and movable weights is used to measure
weight. The pan must be at least 100 cm long so that it can support a 2-year-old infant at
the 95th percentile for recumbent length. A quilt is left on the scale at all times, and the
scale calibrated to zero and across the range of expected weights when only a quilt is on
it, using test objects of known weights. Calibration is performed monthly and whenever
the scales are moved. Similar procedures are used to calibrate the scales used for older
individuals. When the scales are not in use, the beam should be locked in place or the
weights shifted from zero to reduce wear.
The infant, with or without a diaper, is placed on the scales so that the weight is
distributed equally on each side of the center of the pan. Weight is recorded to the
nearest 10 g with the infant lying quietly, which may require patience. When an infant
is restless, it is possible to weigh the mother when holding the infant and then weigh
the mother without the infant, but this procedure is unreliable, partly because the
mother’s weight will be recorded to the nearest 100 g. It is better to postpone the
measurement and try later. The measurement is repeated three times, and the average
recorded after excluding any clearly erroneous value. If a diaper is worn, the weight of
the diaper is subtracted from the observed weight, because most reference data for
infants are based on nude weights.
In a clinic, the measured weight is recorded in tabular form in addition to being plotted.
This plotting is done while the subject is present. Irregularities may be noted in the serial
data for a subject or there may be major discrepancies between the percentile levels for
highly correlated variables. When this occurs, the measurer checks the accuracy of the
plotting and remeasures the subject if the plotting is correct.
A subject able to stand without support is weighed using a leveled platform scale with
a beam and moveable weights or an electronic balance. The beam on the scale must be
graduated so that it can be read from both sides and the scale positioned so that the measurer
can stand behind the beam, facing the subject, and can move the beam weights without
reaching around the subject. The movable tare is arranged so that a screwdriver is needed
to shift it. The subject stands still over the center of the platform with the body weight
evenly distributed between both feet. Light indoor clothing can be worn, excluding shoes,
long trousers, and sweater. It is better to standardize the clothing, for example, a disposable
paper gown. The weight of this clothing is not subtracted from the observed weight when
the recommended reference data are used. Weight is recorded to the nearest 100 g.*
Handicapped subjects, other than infants, who cannot stand unsupported can be
weighed using a beam chair scale or bed scale. If an adult weighs more than the upper
limit on the beam, a weight can be suspended from the left-hand end of the beam, after
* For electronic scales, the subject stands in the center of the platform in appropriate clothing and the weight is
recorded when stable.
2705_frame_C33 Page 699 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:37 PM
which the measurer must determine how much weight must be placed on the platform
for the scale to record zero when there is no weight on the platform. This weight is added
to the measured value when a scale modified in this fashion is used. In studies to assess
short-term changes, weights must be recorded at times standardized in relation to inges-
tion, micturition, and defecation, but for single weight this is not necessary.
Purpose
Weight is the most commonly recorded anthropometric variable, and generally is mea-
sured with sufficient accuracy. Accuracy can be improved, however, by attention to details
of the measurement technique. Strictly, this measurement is of mass rather than weight,
but the latter term is too well established to be replaced easily. Weight is a composite
measure of total body size. It is important in screening for unusual growth, obesity, and
undernutrition.
Literature
There is general agreement that weight should be measured using a beam scale with
movable weights or a calibrated electronic balance. A pan scale is needed for measure-
ments made during infancy. The use of a spring scale is not recommended, despite its
greater mobility, except in field conditions where there may be no practical alternative.
Automatic scales that print the weight directly onto a permanent record are available but
expensive. The scale should be placed with the platform level and in a position where the
measurer can see the back of the beam without leaning around the subject. Scales with
wheels to facilitate movement from one location to another are not recommended because
they need calibration every time they are moved.
Weight is best measured with the subject nude, which is practical during infancy.10 At
older ages, nude measurements may not be possible.10 If not, standardized light clothing,
for example, a disposable paper gown, should be worn in preference to “light indoor
clothing.”10
There are diurnal variations in weight of about 1 kg in children and 2 kg in adults.
Therefore, recording the time of day at which measurements are made is necessary.10
Usually it is not practical to measure at a fixed time, but a narrow range may be achievable.
Reliability
Intermeasurer differences (M) from the Fels Longitudinal Study are as follows:10
In the Health Examination Survey by the National Center for Health Statistics, the
intermeasurer and intrameasurer technical errors were about 1.2 kg, when pairs of mea-
surements were made 2 weeks apart.10 About 10% of the observed error would have been
due to growth.
2705_frame_C33 Page 700 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:37 PM
Purpose
Stature is a major indicator of general body size and bone length. It is important in screening
for disease or malnutrition and in the interpretation of weight. Variations from the normal
range can have social consequences, in addition to their association with disease.
When stature cannot be measured, recumbent length can be substituted and, depending
on the purpose of the study, adjustments for the systematic differences between these highly
correlated measurements may be desirable.10 Arm span may be used in place of stature
when stature cannot be measured and it is not practical to measure recumbent length. The
measurement of arm span is described in the section on segment lengths. Also, stature can
be estimated from knee height, as described in the section on recumbent anthropometry.
2705_frame_C33 Page 701 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:37 PM
Literature
Stature can be measured using a fixed or movable anthropometer. An anthropometer consists
of a vertical graduated rod and a movable rod that is brought onto the head. An anthro-
pometer can be attached to a wall or used in a free-standing mode, utilizing a base plate to
keep the vertical rod properly aligned. Measurements of stature with a movable anthropom-
eter tend to be less than those with a stadiometer.10 It is not recommended that stature be
measured against a wall, but if this must be done, a wall should be chosen that does not
have a baseboard, and the subject should not stand on a carpet. An apparatus that allows
stature to be measured while the subject stands on a platform scale is not recommended.
Some workers do not ask subjects to stretch to the appropriate extent. This is likely to
lead to less reproducible positioning and less reliability than the recommended procedure.
Some workers ask the subjects to assume a position of military attention; this is inappro-
priate for young children and for the elderly. In one alternative technique, a measurer
exerts upward force under the mastoid processes to keep the head at the maximum level
to which it was raised when the subject inhaled deeply. A second measurer lowers the
headboard and observes its level, while a third person records the value. The need for
three measurers reduces the practicality of this technique, but when it is applied the
diurnal variation in stature is reduced.10
Some workers place the head in a “normal” position, with the eyes looking straight
ahead; this is less precise than positioning in the Frankfort Horizontal Plane. Others tilt
the head backwards and forwards and record stature when the head is positioned so that
the maximum value is obtained. It is difficult to apply the latter procedure while the
subject maintains a full inspiration.
It is general practice to place the subject’s heels together, but the angle between the
medial borders has varied from study to study. If these borders are parallel, or nearly so,
many young children and some obese adults are unable to stand erect.
Reliability
Intermeasurer differences (M) for large samples in the Fels Longitudinal Study are as
follows:10
Comments
BMI and Gender
Women are fatter than men at any BMI. On average, this number is 11-12% higher for the
same BMI and age group. Yet this extra fatness in women is not associated with extra risk
to health. Thus, because the component units of the BMI, height, and weight can be
2705_frame_C33 Page 702 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:37 PM
measured with great reliability compared to total body fat, measuring body fat is not
recommended. Rather, BMI is preferred because it is gender neutral. Table 33.1 shows BMI.
Misclassification
Since BMI measures height and weight, it is an imperfect tool for evaluating fat. Correlations
of fat with BMI vary from <0.1 to >0.8 depending on initial percent of fat, level of physical
training, and age. Older people tend to lose height, and this elevates the BMI inappropri-
ately. Body builders, Sumo wrestlers, and professional athletes will have high BMI values
for low body fat. However, the purpose and value of the BMI is not to assess athletes, but
to provide a starting point in risk assessment of overweight in sedentary people.
5’1” 100 106 111 116 122 127 132 137 143 148 153 158 164 169 174 180 185 190 195 201 206 211
5’2” 104 109 115 120 126 131 136 142 147 153 158 164 169 175 180 186 191 196 202 207 213 218
5’3” 107 113 118 124 130 135 141 146 152 158 163 169 175 180 186 191 197 203 208 214 220 225
5’4” 110 116 122 128 134 140 145 151 157 163 169 174 180 186 192 197 204 209 215 221 227 232
5’5” 114 120 126 132 138 144 150 156 162 169 174 180 186 192 198 204 210 216 222 228 234 240
5’6” 118 124 130 136 142 148 155 161 167 173 179 186 192 198 204 210 216 223 229 235 241 247
5’7” 121 127 134 140 146 153 159 166 172 178 185 191 198 204 211 217 223 230 236 242 249 255
5’8” 125 131 138 144 151 158 164 171 177 184 190 197 203 210 216 223 230 236 243 249 256 262
5’9” 128 135 142 149 155 162 169 176 182 189 196 203 209 216 223 230 236 243 250 257 263 270
5’10” 132 139 146 153 160 167 174 181 188 195 202 209 216 222 229 236 243 250 257 264 271 278
5’11” 136 143 150 157 165 172 179 186 193 200 208 215 222 229 236 243 250 257 265 272 279 286
6’ 140 147 154 162 169 117 184 191 199 206 213 221 228 235 242 250 258 265 272 279 287 294
6’1” 144 151 159 166 174 182 189 197 204 212 219 227 235 242 250 257 265 272 280 288 295 302
Anthropometric Assessment: Height, Weight, Body Mass Index (Adults)
6’2” 148 155 163 171 179 186 194 202 210 218 225 233 241 249 256 264 272 280 287 295 303 311
6’3” 152 160 168 176 184 192 200 208 216 224 232 240 248 256 264 272 279 287 295 303 311 319
6’4” 156 164 172 180 189 197 205 213 221 230 238 246 254 263 271 279 287 295 304 312 320 328
703
2705_frame_C33 Page 704 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:37 PM
TABLE 33.2
Percent Body Fat for Men and Women of Different Ethnic Groups and Three
Age Ranges According to Body Mass Index*
Females (% fat) Males (% fat)
BMI African African
(kg/m2) American Asian Caucasian American Asian Caucasian
Age 20–39
18.5 20 25 21 8 13 8
25 32 35 33 20 23 21
30 38 40 39 26 28 26
Age 40–59
18.5 21 25 23 9 13 11
25 34 36 35 22 24 23
30 39 41 41 27 29 29
Age 60–79
18.5 23 26 25 11 14 13
25 35 36 38 23 24 25
39 41 41 43 29 29 31
* Adapted from Gallagher, D et al. Am J Clin Nutr 2000 Sep; 72(3): 694-701.
Male Female
100 100
Never Overweight
Never Overweight
Pre-overweight
Overweight (%)
Pre-overweight
50 50
Overweight
Overweight
Clinical
Overweight Clinical
Overweight
0 0
Birth 10-19 20-29 30-39 40-49 50-59 69-69 Birth 10-19 20-29 30-39 40-49 50-59 69-69
FIGURE 33.1
The natural history of overweight is a gradual transition of the potentially, pre-overweight into overweight, or
clinical overweight categories. In addition, there appears to be about 25% of the population who will never
become overweight.
2705_frame_C33 Page 705 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:37 PM
300
Digestive & Cardiovascular
Pulmonary Gall Bladder
250 Disease Diabetes Mellitus
200
Mortality Ratio
Clinical
150
Overweight
Overweight
100
Pre-overweight
FIGURE 33.2
In epidemiological studies, the risk of many diseases increases as BMI increases. The curvilinear relationship
shown here is for overall mortality. The steepness of the curve varies for different diseases.
this disease, individuals with a BMI of 23 to 24 are already at higher risk than those with
a BMI of 20.
The curvilinear relationship of BMI has a similar shape to that of diastolic blood pressure
and risk of death, or cholesterol concentrations and the risk of death. This is shown for
all three in Figure 33.3. The dashed vertical lines in this figure represent the arbitrary cut
points that separate low from moderate and high risk.
Starting with an accurately determined BMI, a clinician can sort through an algorithm
such as that developed by the National Heart, Lung, and Blood Institute (Figure 33.4).
Using this algorithm points the clinician and patient along the path of effectively evalu-
ating the patient’s BMI. “Know Your BMI” could serve as an effective public health
campaign. If the public began to learn their BMI, it would be incumbent upon health
professionals to be able to guide their patients in its use.
2705_frame_C33 Page 706 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:37 PM
1.5
0.5
0
20 24 26 28 30.5 35
4 Cholesterol
Relative Risk
0
150 170 200 210 220 230 240 250 290
Cholesterol (mg/dL)
5
Diastolic Blood Pressure
4
1
75 80 85 90 95 100 105 110 115 120
FIGURE 33.3
The curvilinear relationship of BMI has a similar shape to that of diastolic blood pressure and risk of death or
cholesterol concentrations and the risk of death. The dashed vertical lines represent the arbitrary cut points that
separate low from moderate and high risk.
1
Patient Encounter
2
Hx of > 25 BMI?
No
3 BMI Yes
measured in past
2 years?
4 6
BMI > 25 BMI > 30
• Measure weight, 5 or waist 7 or waist
height, and waist Yes circumference Yes
circumference Assess
2705_frame_C33 Page 707 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:37 PM
FIGURE 33.4
This algorithm developed by the National Heart, Lung, and Blood Institute can point the clinician and patient along the path of effectively evaluating the patient’s BMI.
707
2705_frame_C33 Page 708 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:37 PM
References
1. Quetelet, A. Sur l’homme et le developpement de ses facultes, ou essai de physique sociale;
Paris: Bachelier, 1835.
2. Freudenthal H. In: Dictionary of Scientific Biography (Gillespie CC, Ed). New York: Charles and
Sons; 1975; pg 236.
3. Bray GA. Obes Res 3: 97; 1885.
4. Metropolitan Life Insurance Company. Stat Bull Met Life Ins 1922; 3: 3-4.
5. Keys A, Fidanza F, Karvonen MJ, et al. J Chronic Dis 25: 329; 1972.
6. Benn RT. Brit J Prev Soc Med 25: 42; 1971.
7. Lee J, Kolonel N, Hines MW. Int J Obes 6: 233; 1982.
8. Garn SM, Pesick SD. Am J Clin Nutr 36: 573; 1982.
9. Garrow JS, Webster JD. Int J Obes 9: 147; 1985.
10. Gordon CC, Chumlea WC, Roche AF. In: Anthropometric Standardization Reference Manual.
Champaign, IL: Human Kinetics Books, 1988, pg 3.
11. Gallagher D, Heymsfield SB, Heo M, Jebb SA, Murgatroyd PR, Sakamoto Y. Am J Clin Nutr
2000 Sep;72(3):694-701.
2705_frame_C34 Page 709 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:38 PM
34
Glossary of Terms Used in Energy Assessment
Carolyn D. Berdanier
All living things require energy to sustain life. If a plant, that energy comes from the sun.
If an animal, the energy must be provided by the food that is consumed. Warm-blooded
animals are kept warm by their metabolisms. All the reactions that comprise intermediary
metabolism release heat as a byproduct. Some reactions are exogonic; that is, they release
more heat than they consume. Others are endogonic; they consume more energy than
they release. None of the reactions in a living system are 100% efficient. The reaction
produces a product(s) plus heat. This is the heat that sustains the body temperature and
yet also escapes from the body via radiation or evaporation (insensible water loss and
sweating) from the body surface. If a body is neither gaining nor losing weight, the energy
released as heat is equal to that needed by the body to sustain its metabolism. Thus, the
heat that is produced is equal to the total food energy (corrected for digestive loss and
internal energy conversion to mechanical, chemical, and electrical energy) that must be
provided on a daily basis to sustain the body. Altogether, the living system is a heat-
generating system. That heat can be measured directly using a calorimeter or indirectly
by measuring the oxygen consumed and the carbon dioxide produced. Using equations
that relate heat production to the gas exchange (CO2 and O2), the energy used by the body
can be calculated.
The measurement of energy need and energy production has been the subject of nutri-
tional investigation since the time of Lavoisier. A number of terms have evolved that refer
to discrete portions of the energy equation. These are listed in Table 34.1 along with other
terms relevant to energy balance in man and other species.
The standardization of energy terms has been published by the National Academy of
Sciences.1 Nutrition scientists (as well as other scientists interested in energy metabolism)
are encouraged to use these terms.
0-8493-2705-9/01/$0.00+$1.50
© 2002 by CRC Press LLC 709
2705_frame_C34 Page 710 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:38 PM
TABLE 34.1
Terms of Reference in Energy Metabolism
Anabolism: the totality of reactions that account for the synthesis of the body’s macromolecules; heat is a
byproduct of these reactions.
Android obesity: a form of obesity where fat distribution is mainly in the shoulders and abdomen; sometimes
referred to as the “apple” shape.
Anthropometry: Measurements of body features, i.e., weight, height, etc.
Apparent digested energy (DE): energy of the consumed food (IE) less the energy of the feces (FE); DE = IE – FE.
Archimedes principle: an object’s volume when submerged in water equals the volume of the water it displaces.
If the mass and volume are known, the density can be calculated. This principle is used to determine body
fatness.
Balance: When energy intake (EI) equals energy expenditure (EE), energy balance is zero. When energy intake
exceeds expenditure, balance is positive and weight is gained. When intake is less than expenditure, balance
is negative and weight is lost. (EI = EE; balance = 0)
Basal metabolic rate (BMR): the energy required to sustain life; measured in a resting animal in a thermoneutral
environment (neither sweating nor shivering), at sexual repose, and in the postabsorptive (but not starving)
state. Expressed as heat units/hour/unit body surface or per unit body weight (Kg0.75 ). A less stringent
measurement of this basal energy requirement is the resting metabolic rate (RMR). RMR is measured under
clinical conditions to provide an approximation of the BMR and provide a basis for diet recommendations.
Body cell mass: the metabolically active, energy-requiring mass of the body.
Body density: mass (weight) per unit volume.
Calorie: a unit of heat energy; a calorie is defined as the amount of heat required to raise the temperature of
one gram of water one degree Celsius; this is the physicist’s unit. The nutritionist’s unit is the calorie or
kilocalorie (abbreviated, kcal), and refers to the heat needed to raise the temperature of one kilogram of water
rather than one gram of water. The term kilojoule is the preferred term for expressing the energy need for
living systems because it accounts for not only heat energy but also other forms of energy (mechanical, electrical,
etc.) that living systems use. The kcal can be converted to the kilojoule by multiplying kcal × 4.184.
Calorimetry: the measurement of heat production by the body. This measurement can be either direct (using a
whole body calorimeter) or indirect (using measurements of oxygen consumed and carbon dioxide produced).
Catabolism: the totality of those reactions that reduce macromolecules to usable metabolites, CO2, and water.
Heat is a byproduct of these reactions.
Digestive energy (DE): the energy of food after the energy losses of digestion are subtracted. Similar to apparent
ingestive energy (see above).
Gaseous products of digestion (GE): the energy of combustible gases produced in the digestive tract incident
to fermentation of food by microorganisms. In ruminants, that can account for a substantial energy lost from
the system. In nonruminents this loss is relatively minor.
Gynoid obesity: excess body fat deposited mainly on the hips and thighs; sometimes referred to as the “pear”
form of obesity.
Heat of activity (HjE): the heat produced through muscular activity; an active person can have a very large
percent of their energy need accounted for by HjE. A sedentary person can have the reverse. The energy need
for different activities has been determined, and some of these are listed in Table 34.2. Sometimes TEA (total
energy from activity) is used for this term.
Heat of digestion and absorption (HdE): the heat produced as a result of the action of the digestive enzymes,
and the heat produced when the products of digestion are absorbed. Expressed in heat units (see DE above).
Sometimes DIT (diet-induced thermogenesis) is used.
Heat of fermentation (HfE): the heat produced in the digestive tract as a result of microbial action. Expressed
in heat units (see GE above).
Heat of product formation (HrE): the heat produced in association with metabolic processes of product formation
from absorbed metabolites. In its simplest form, HrE is the heat produced by a biosynthetic pathway. Expressed
as heat units.
Heat of thermal regulation (HcE): the additional heat needed to maintain body temperature when the
environmental temperature falls below or rises above the zone of thermic neutrality. Expressed in heat units.
Sometimes CIT (cold-induced thermogenesis) or BAT (brown fat thermogenesis) is used. It is thought that the
heat generated upon cold exposure emanates primarily from the brown fat depots. There is some argument
about this role of the brown fat.
Heat of waste formation and excretion (HwE): the additional heat production associated with the synthesis
and excretion of waste products. For example, the synthesis and excretion of urea is energetically expensive in
mammals and results in a measurable increase in total heat production. Expressed in heat units.
2705_frame_C34 Page 711 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:38 PM
TABLE 34.2
Methods and Equations Used for Calculating Basal Energy Need
Method Equation
1. Heat production, direct calorimetry kcal (kJ)/m2 (surface area)
2. Oxygen consumption; indirect O2 cons./W0.75
3. Heat production; indirect Insensible Water Loss (IWL) = Insensible Weight Loss (IW) + (CO2
exhaled – O2 inhaled)
100
Heat production = IWL × 0.58 ×
25
4. Energy used; indirect Creatinine N (mg / day)
Basal energy =
0.00482 (W)
5. Estimate (energy need not measured) BMR = 66.4730 + 13.751W + 5.0033L – 6.750A (men)
(Harris Benedict equation)
6. Estimate (energy need not measured) BMR = 655.9055 + 9.563W + 1.8496L – 4.6756A (women)
L
BMR = 71.2 W 0.75 1 + 0.004(30 − A) + 0.010 − 43.4 ( men )
W 0.33
L
BMR = 65.8W 0.75 1 + 0.004(30 − A) + 0.018 (women)
W 0.33 − 42.1
Reference
1. Subcommittee on Biological Energy, National Research Council, Nutritional Energetics of Do-
mestic Animals Nat. Acad. Press, Washington, DC, 1981.
2705_frame_C35 Page 713 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:39 PM
35
Metabolic Assessment of the Overweight Patient
Introduction
Clinicians often see overweight patients seeking weight loss, and those seeking weight
loss implore advice from nutrition specialists and dietitians on the quantity of calories
they should consume each day. To produce weight loss, a negative energy balance needs
to exist whereby the patient consumes less energy than he or she expends in a day. The
total energy need of a person is expressed as:
Total daily energy needs (TDEE) = BMR + TEF + TEA + energy needed for growth,
reproduction, lactation or healing from injury.
The total amount of energy a person expends daily during the waking hours is termed
Total Daily Energy Expenditure (TDEE) and is composed of three different components:
the Resting Metabolic Rate (RMR), the Thermic Effect of Feeding (TEF), and the Thermic
Effect of Activity (TEA) (see Figure 35.1). RMR is the energy expenditure needed to sustain
the basic biochemical reactions of the body in a resting state. A resting state is when a
person is fasting (not starving), awake in a thermoneutral environment (not sweating or
shivering), and lies still without any skeletal muscle movement. The TEF is the energy
expenditure attributed to the digestion and absorption of food. The energy needed for the
digestion and absorption of foods is greater than that needed for resting, and therefore is
designated as TEF. It is the difference in energy use between the fed and fasting states.
The TEA is the energy expenditure associated with skeletal muscle movement. TEA is the
most influenced component of TDEE because a person can choose to do variable amounts
of physical activity that ultimately involve skeletal muscle movement. The RMR accounts
for approximately 60 to 75% of TDEE, the TEF constitutes approximately 10%, and the
TEA comprises 15 to 30% of energy expenditure.
0-8493-2705-9/01/$0.00+$1.50
© 2002 by CRC Press LLC 713
2705_frame_C35 Page 714 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:39 PM
kcal
3000
Thermic Effect of
Feeding (TEF) ~10%
1500
Resting Metabolic
1000 Rate (RMR)
~60% - 75%
500
0
FIGURE 35.1
The three major components of the total daily energy expenditure (TDEE). RMR: Resting Metabolic Rate, TEF:
Thermic Effect of Feeding, TEA: Thermic Effect of Activity. Adapted from Poehlman, E.T. Med Sci Sports Exerc,
21; 516, 1989.
TDEE
TDEE in free-living populations can be measured using doubly-labeled water (2H218O).
Measurement of TDEE by doubly-labeled water involves using stable isotopes of hydrogen
and oxygen. A specimen of urine is collected from the subject at baseline; the administered
dosage of doubly-labeled water is determined by body weight. Although this is the gold
standard for the measurement of TDEE , doubly-labeled water is very costly and is almost
exclusively used by scientists involved in measuring TDEE and various components of
the metabolism for clinical research studies.
Usually, clinicians do not have the option of estimating TDEE by doubly-labeled water.
Therefore, TDEE is typically estimated by measuring the RMR and estimating the energy
expenditure of physical activity. Physical activity patterns may be assessed using acceler-
ometers or by administering a valid questionnaire.
RMR
RMR is one of the three components that comprise total daily energy expenditure.3 RMR
can be defined as the energy required to sustain bodily functions and maintain body
temperature at rest, and is quantitatively the largest component of energy expenditure in
humans. Typically it can account for 60 and 75% of the total daily expenditure.4 RMR is
often used to estimate the daily energy needs of individuals for population-based studies.
It is a useful tool in the clinical management of obesity.4 Researchers have defined RMR
as being different from that of BMR; BMR is the energy expenditure of a person at rest
(not asleep) in a fasting state, at sexual repose in a thermoneutral environment (neither
shivering nor sweating). The RMR is defined as the energy expenditure measured on an
outpatient basis.5 For clinical purposes, the RMR can be assumed to be similar to the BMR.5
It is less expensive and intrusive for the participant.
The RMR is the component of metabolism that is difficult to influence. Clinicians work-
ing with overweight patients will be quick to point out that their overweight clients often
believe that they have a low or sluggish RMR, and consequently feel that this is the reason
for their inability to lose or maintain weight. Often, RMR values are not as low as the
patient believes. RMR measurements are frequently within the normal range for the
patient’s age, gender, height, and weight.
2705_frame_C35 Page 716 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:39 PM
TEF
TEF is occasionally called diet-induced thermogenesis, and accounts for 10% of the TDEE
of a person. TEF represents the energy expenditure associated with the ingestion, diges-
tion, and absorption of food. There is an increase in the metabolic rate when a person has
eaten food. This is why the assessment of RMR typically requires individuals to be fasted
for a minimum of 12 hours prior to the assessment of that component of the metabolism.
TEF can be measured by taking the measurements of a valid RMR assessment and com-
paring these to values attained using the same testing procedures after the ingestion of a
meal of known energy value and composition. The difference between the RMR and the
energy used for digestion and absorption is the TEF (TEF + RMR = energy expended after
a meal is consumed).
TEA
The TEA is the only component of the TDEE that we can directly influence. TEA is the
amount of energy expended as a direct result of voluntary skeletal muscle movement.
TDEE differs between active and sedentary persons. Sedentary persons expend less energy
than active persons, and thus their TEA as a percent of their total energy expenditure is
less than that of active persons.
Direct Calorimetry
The measurement of energy need of an adult who is neither gaining nor losing weight
can be made using a whole body calorimeter. This instrument measures the heat released
by the body as a result of its metabolism.7-9 It is a composite value in that it is not only
the result of baseline metabolic reactions that produce heat, but also the heat that results
from the ingestion, digestion, and absorption of foods, plus that which results from
muscular activity. Subjects must remain in the whole body calorimeter for hours at a time
so that sufficient data can be accumulated. This technique is extremely expensive and has
limited clinical potential.7
Indirect Calorimetry
For most, a viable alternative is the indirect calorimeter or metabolic cart. Indirect calorim-
etry measures the gas exchange of an individual.8,10 The gases detected by the metabolic
cart are compared to the environmental conditions of the surrounding room’s gases at
standard temperature, pressure, and humidity (STPD). STPD is a symbol indicating that a
gas volume has been expressed as if it were at standard temperature (0° Celsius), standard
pressure (760 mm Hg absolute), and 0% humidity; under these conditions, a mole of gas
occupies 22.4 liters. The testing environment should be controlled for temperature, baro-
metric pressure, and humidity. Depending on the instrumentation, the measurement con-
ditions are entered prior to beginning the assessment, and correction factors are applied to
standardize the results. The room temperatures should also be kept between 68 and 74°
Fahrenheit. Furthermore, the room should be dimly lit, and spare blankets should be offered
to individuals who may experience coldness when sitting for prolonged periods of time.
The measurement of gas exchange allows for the calculation of the respiratory quotient
(RQ). (RQ = CO2/O2). The RQ reflects cellular metabolism and is a reflection of heat
production (direct calorimetry). The RQ indicates the fuel mixture being oxidized.8 Dif-
ferent fuels such as fats, carbohydrates, and proteins require different amounts of oxygen
for oxidation to CO2 and water. Thus, the RQ varies depending on the ratio of fat to
carbohydrate in the fuel mixture.11 In starvation, the major fuel is fat, and the RQ is 0.70.
Usually a mixture of fuels (carbohydrate and fat) is oxidized. The various substrates and
their RQ values are shown in Table 35.1.
TABLE 35.1
Respiratory Quotient and Energy Content of Various Substrates
Fuel Energy Content Respiratory Quotient
(Substrate) (Kcal · g–1) (RQ)
Carbohydrate 4.1 1.00
Fat 9.3 0.70
Protein 4.3 0.80
Adapted from American College of Sports Medicine. Guidelines for Exer-
cise Testing and Prescription. Malvern, PA: Lea & Febiger, page 14, 1991.
Instrumentation Available
There are two indirect calorimetry systems: open-circuit and closed-circuit systems. Both
techniques require devices to measure the concentration of O2, CO2, gas volume or flow
2705_frame_C35 Page 718 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:39 PM
F out O F o u t CO
F in O 2 2
2
V
F i n CO
2
FIGURE 35.2
Open Circuit technique of Indirect Calorimetry using a canopy hood. From Ferrenini E. Metabolism, 37; 296,
1988. With permission.
Labels: FinO2: Forced Inspiratory Oxygen; FinCO2: Forced Inspiratory Carbon Dioxide; : Gas Flow; FoutO2:
Forced Expiratory Oxygen; FoutCO2: Forced Expiratory Carbon Dioxide.
rate, temperature, and time. In the closed-circuit system, the patient breathes from a
reservoir (a mixture of gases resembling ambient air), and the decrease in oxygen over
time is used to calculate V̇O2. Closed-circuit systems are usually simpler in design and
less costly than open systems. Open-circuit systems are more versatile and can be more
easily used in the clinical setting.7 The patient breathes from a reservoir of air of known
composition in the closed-circuit system; the depletion of oxygen, V̇C O2 and V̇O2 are
calculated.7 In the open-circuit technique (see Figure 35.2), the patient breathes room air
and expires into a gas sampling system which eventually vents the expired air back into
the room. Open-circuit systems are more commonly used to measure RMR in the clinical
setting, since they are more versatile and can be used in a variety of clinical conditions.
The techniques described in this section will therefore focus on the open-circuit indirect
calorimetry system.
Face Masks
Similar to the face masks used by firefighters and military personnel, face masks provide
a sealed environment around the nose and mouth in order to collect all gases. The face
mask has an elastic head harness which encompasses the back of the head. These work
well for collection of gases; however, they may be more awkward for some patients than
other collection systems, and it is important to have several sizes of masks on hand to
optimize fit. Although not as comfortable as some of the other collection devices, the face
mask is very easily used with portable gas analyzers and is useful for field settings or
where exercise-induced energy expenditure is measured.12
2705_frame_C35 Page 719 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:39 PM
Mouthpieces
These are similar to the snorkel that is used to allow breathing underwater. The mouth-
pieces used for RMR measurement are usually identical to mouthpieces used for max-
imal VO2 testing. In order for the mouthpiece to work correctly, the subject being tested
needs to maintain a tight seal around the mouthpiece and have a nose clip sealing off
the nasal passageway. A certain amount of discomfort may be experienced from a static
contraction of the jaw muscles to keep a tight seal around the mouthpiece. Therefore,
this collection system is not often used to assess RMR.
TABLE 35.2
Factors for Estimating Total Daily Energy Needs of Activities for
Men and Women (Age 19 to 50)
Activity Factor Energy Expenditure
Level of General Activity (Multiplied by REE†) (Kcal/kg/day)
Very light
Men 1.3 31
Women 1.3 30
Light
Men 1.6 38
Women 1.5 35
Moderate
Men 1.7 41
Women 1.6 37
Heavy
Men 2.1 50
Women 1.9 44
Exceptional
Men 2.4 58
Women 2.2 51
From Food and Nutrition Board, National Research Council, NAS: Recom-
mended Dietary Allowances, 10th ed. Washington, DC. National Academy
Press, 1989, p. 29 (with permission). See Heshka S., Feld K., Yang M.U. et al.
Resting energy expenditure in the obese: A cross-validation and comparison
of prediction equations. J. Am. Diet. Assoc. 93, 1031-1036, 1993 for a compar-
ison of various prediction equations.
† REE = resting energy expenditure.
Case Studies
Person Seeking Weight Loss
A 40-year-old woman with a height of 5’6” and weight of 185 pounds (BMI of 30 kg/m2)
seeks to lose 20 pounds. This person seeks treatment from a dietician in a hospital that
has no metabolic cart. Therefore, an equation to predict resting metabolic rate will be used.
Using a prediction equation that has a table with value of kcals based on age and gender
multiplied by body surface area,13 the RMR is predicted to be 1498 kcal/d. Furthermore,
2705_frame_C35 Page 721 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:39 PM
the woman participates in 30 minutes of vigorous aerobic exercise 4 days per week.
Therefore, to determine her predicted TDEE, we multiply her RMR by an activity factor
that is equal to a moderately active person. This activity factor is 1.5. Multiplying 1498 by
1.5 yields a TDEE of 2247 kcal/d. To predict a safe rate of weight loss of 1.5 pounds per
week, the energy intake needs to be restricted by 750 kcals per day, equaling a consumption
of approximately 1447 kcal/d (if 3500 kcal equals one pound of weight loss).
Predicting RMR
Often, technology for direct measurement of RMR is not readily available to healthcare
professionals who provide treatment plans based on RMR values. As an alternative,
clinicians frequently use prediction equations to estimate RMR. These prediction equations
have mostly been developed using regression equations to fit functions according to
gender, age, height, weight, and other available clinical variables.14 A majority of these
equations were developed using normal-weight persons who were relatively sedentary.
Unfortunately, this poses a problem when predicting RMR in the obese population, con-
sidering that RMR is directly related to the fat-free mass (FFM) of the individual,15-18 and
the obese person has a larger distribution of adipose tissue and a decreased proportion
of FFM when compared to their normal-weight counterparts.19 Equations are available for
the prediction of RMR for the normal weight and overweight populations (Table 35.3).
Harris-Benedict Equation
For normal-weight individuals (determined by BMI or body composition analysis), the
prediction equation of Harris and Benedict20 offers an appropriate equation:
These equations were developed in 1919 and are currently widely used by clinicians.
However, given the increased prevalence of overweight in industrialized countries like
the U.S.,21 it may be necessary for the clinician to use prediction equations that have been
validated using overweight persons.
2705_frame_C35 Page 722 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:39 PM
TABLE 35.3
Equations for Estimating Resting Metabolic Rate (RMR) kcal/24 hoursa
Reference Equations Reference
Bernstein et al. W: 7.48(kg) – 0.42(cm) – 3.0(yr) + 844 81
M: 11.0(kg) + 10.2(cm) – 5.8(yr) – 1,032
Cunningham 501.6 + 21.6(LBM); where 82
for W: LBM = [69.8 – 0.26(kg) – 0.12(yr)] × kg/73.2
for M: LBM = [79.5 – 0.24(kg) – 0.15(yr)] × kg/73.2
Harris and Benedict W: 655 + 9.5(kg) + 1.9(cm) – 4.7(yr) 20
M: 66 + 13.8(kg) + 5.0(cm) – 6.8(yr)
Fleischa W/M: kcal’s/m2 of BSA from Fleisch table × [[0.007184 × (kg)]0.425 × 22
(cm)0.725]] × 24
James W: 18 – 30yr: 487 + 14.8(kg) 83
30 – 60yr: 845 + 8.17(kg)
>60yr: 658 + 9.01(kg)
M: 18 – 30yr: 692 + 15.1(kg)
30 – 60yr: 873 + 11.6(kg)
>60yr: 588 + 11.7(kg)
Mifflin et al. W: 9.99(kg) + 6.25(cm) – 4.92(yr) – 161 23
M: 9.99(kg) + 6.25(cm) – 4.92(yr) + 5
Owen et al. W: 795 + 7.18(kg) 84
M: 879 + 10.2(kg)
Pavlou et al. M: –169.1 + 1.02(pRMR) 85
Robertson and Reida W/M: kcals/m2 of BSA from Robertson and Reid table × [[0.007184 13
× (kg)]0.425 × (cm)0.725]] × 24
Key. W = Women, M = Men, pRMR = predicted RMR from the Harris and Benedict equation, athis equation
uses tabled values for kcals/m2. From Heshka S., Feld K., Yang M.U. et al. Resting energy expenditure in
the obese: A cross-validation and comparison of prediction equations. Copyright The American Dietetic
Association. Reprinted with permission from J. Am. Diet. Assoc. 93, 1031-1036, 1993.
The equation of Fleisch uses the same concept as the Robertson and Reid equation.
However, the values of heat output differ, and Fleisch provides a separate table to calculate
the predicted RMR.22
2705_frame_C35 Page 723 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:39 PM
Weight Stable
If the subject has experienced recent weight loss, measurement of RMR may not be valid.
Measurement should be avoided if the person being tested is on a weight loss program
or has lost or gained more than one pound in the past week. To reduce error associated
with physiological responses to weight loss, a period of weight stabilization of two weeks
is necessary prior to an RMR assessment.
Well Rested
RMR measurement should be administered as close to the time a person awakes as
possible. Additionally, the individual being tested should get a restful night’s sleep prior
to coming to the clinic or hospital for the RMR assessment. If an individual has had an
uneasy night’s rest prior to RMR assessment, confounding environmental influences may
unduly increase the metabolic expenditure of the individual. Measurement should occur
before 10:00 am; measurements taken in the late morning may be suspect to increased
metabolic activity.
Fasted
Measurements should be taken first thing in the morning after a 12-hour overnight fast.24
A light meal the night before measurement should be encouraged; RMR is the energy
expended at rest in a fasted state, and therefore any lasting effects of food or drink would
contribute additional energy expenditure from diet-induced thermogenesis. Early morn-
ing coffee or tea should be avoided, and only water should be ingested prior to mea-
2705_frame_C35 Page 724 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:39 PM
surement. Clinicians can determine whether the patient is fasting by examining the RQ
values during testing.
Analysis
The metabolic cart will often express resting metabolic rate as the mean of multiple minute
measurements. However, the cart will also provide continuous measurements of VO2 and
VCO2. Many researchers suggest that the calculation of RMR be the average of five of these
continuous minute measurements of steady state.18,26 Steady state is 5 minutes of mea-
surement of VO2 and VCO2 that possess an intravariability of 5% or less.26
Table 35.4 is a simple checklist to ensure that the assessment of RMR is valid.
Exercise
Since exercise training has been associated with increases in fat-free mass, this is one factor
which can be manipulated to potentiate resting metabolism. Cross-sectional studies have
2705_frame_C35 Page 725 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:39 PM
TABLE 35.4
Checklist for RMR Testing
Laboratory Requirements
Testing Procedures
Monitor subject during testing. Direct subject to avoid any: talking, fidgeting, and sleeping.
Acclimate patient to test. Possibly perform practice test prior to actual procedure.
Rest subject in semi-recumbent position for at least 30 minutes prior to testing.
If able to, use HR monitor to track HR the day before, morning of and during test.
Authors would like to thank Dr. Jack Wilmore for the helpful suggestions for the RMR checklist.
demonstrated that aerobically trained individuals have higher resting metabolic rates for
their metabolic size than their untrained counterparts.29-32
Age
Age is another variable that has been found to have a significant impact on an individual’s
resting metabolism. In fact, the decline in resting metabolic rate is one of the most consistent
physiological changes that occurs with age.33 Recent studies have suggested a curvilinear
reduction in RMR with advancing age that is accelerated beyond middle-age and post-
menopausal years.33 Several studies attribute the age-related decline in RMR primarily to
the loss of fat-free mass that often accompanies aging; however, there remains uncertainty
whether other physiological factors may also contribute to the reduction of RMR.33
Gender
Gender differences in resting metabolism have also been reported, with males having a
higher RMR than females by approximately 50 kcal/day.28 This difference is independent
of the gender difference in fat-free mass, and is consistent across the life span.28 Menopausal
status has also been pinpointed as an influence on RMR in women. Studies have found
lower RMR in postmenopausal women relative to premenopausal women, which was
again primarily attributable to reductions in lean mass and a decline in aerobic fitness.33-35
Environment
Environmental factors also influence RMR, with the resting metabolism of people in
tropical climates typically 5 to 20% higher than that of their counterparts living in more
2705_frame_C35 Page 726 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:39 PM
temperate areas.36 Cold climates also have a significant impact on resting metabolic rate
that is dependent on an individual’s body fat content and the amount and type of clothing
worn.36 During extreme cold stress at rest, metabolic rate can double or triple with shiv-
ering as the body attempts to maintain a stable core temperature.36
Cigarette Smoking
Some studies have documented the influence of such substances as cigarettes, caffeine,
alcohol, and certain medications on resting metabolism. Many lay persons believe that
cigarette smoking may be helpful in maintaining body weight,37 and many smokers are
unwilling to quit because of their fear of weight gain. Over time, studies have demon-
strated that the increase in metabolic rate resulting from cigarette smoking is transient.37
One study found no effect in habitual smokers when assessment of metabolic rate did not
begin until 25 to 30 minutes after smoking. Thus, it is thought that the acute metabolic
effects of cigarettes are not significant beyond 30 minutes after smoking. Yet, given the
typical ~30 minutes between cigarettes for most smokers, RMR may remain slightly
elevated throughout the day as a result of these “acute” effects.37
Caffeine
Caffeine has been identified as a substance that elevates metabolic rate, and caffeine
ingestion has also been shown to increase work performance and promote lipid oxidation
during prolonged exercise.38-40 In a study investigating the influence of caffeine on the
resting metabolic rate of exercise-trained and inactive subjects it was found that metabolic
rate was increased in response to a stimulus of approximately two cups of coffee (300 mg).38
This study also compared regular and non-regular caffeine consumers to investigate the
effects of consumption levels on metabolic response. This investigation confirmed previ-
ous findings that with regular consumption, the physiological and stimulatory effects of
caffeine were not diminished.38
Alcohol
Alcohol is another substance that has been found to influence resting metabolic rate.
Alcohol is decidedly the most commonly consumed psychoactive drug in the U.S., and
because of its energy density, it is widely believed to be a causal factor in the development
and maintenance of obesity.41 However, in a study utilizing data gathered in two national
cross-sectional surveys — the Second National Health and Nutrition Examination Survey
(NHANES II; n = 10929) — and the Behavioral Risk Factor Surveys (BRFS; n = 18388), it
was found that alcohol consumption had a slight negative effect on the body weights of
men, and a profound negative effect on the body weights of women.41,42 This negative
effect was not a result of lowered dietary intake among drinkers. In fact, in controlled
isoenergetic dietary studies, subjects tended to lose weight on alcohol-containing regi-
mens.43,44 This has lead to the hypothesis that alcohol intake may increase resting energy
expenditure.41 Early studies found inconsistent evidence regarding the effects of alcohol
on resting energy expenditure.41,45 However, recent studies have found evidence in support
of the hypothesis that alcohol may increase resting energy expenditure,41,46 although fur-
ther investigations are needed to explain the mechanism by which alcohol suppresses
body weight.41
2705_frame_C35 Page 727 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:39 PM
Medications
Medications are also known to impact resting metabolism. Beta-blocking medications, for
example, are prescribed to several million Americans with cardiovascular disease to treat
conditions such as hypertension and angina.47 Unfortunately, despite their widespread
use in medical practice, beta-blocking medications have many side effects. One such side
effect is the influence on resting energy expenditure. Research indicates that resting energy
expenditure and perhaps the energy needs of individuals treated with beta-blockers are
reduced.47 The magnitude of this reduction in resting metabolic rate has been found to
vary between 8 and 17%.47 One study reported a reduction in resting metabolism of
approximately 17% or 4 kcal/kg/day in a group of healthy subjects taking 80 mg of
propranolol twice daily for 5 days.47 This could result in significant weight gain in a
patient receiving beta-blockers long-term if no changes were made to both dietary and
exercise habits.47
in resting metabolism was associated with a weight reduction of only 5.8%. There was,
however, an observed rebound in RMR accompanying the patients’ return to a 1000 to
1200 kcal/d balanced diet, and the 11% end-of-treatment decline in RMR was paralleled
by a 12% reduction in body weight.54
It appears that RMR declines rapidly in response to energy restriction. Reductions as
great as 30% have been reported in some individuals.27 Very low-energy diets, in particular,
have been found to be associated with substantial short-term reductions in RMR.26 This
decline, however, appears to be attributable primarily to the caloric restriction, and is
largely reversed when dieting is stopped.26 With weight stability, reductions in RMR have
been found to be modest, and are highly related to the changes in fat-free mass.26 It is
thought that physical activity, energy deficit, macronutrient distribution, and rate of
weight loss may be key factors in the retention of fat free mass, and by extension, RMR.
Men Women
0
Diet alone Diet plus exercise
-2
Changes in RMR (%)
-4
-6
-8
-10
-12
-14
FIGURE 35.3
Changes in resting metabolic rate following interventions of diet plus exercise training or dietary restriction
alone. Data adapted from Ballor, D.L. and Poehlman, E.T. Eur J Appl Physiol, 71; 535-42, 1995.
lost as fat-free mass for DPE subjects was approximately half (P <0.05) of that for DO
subjects of the same sex. The DO males lost 28 ± 4% of weight as fat-free mass, while DPE
males lost 13 ± 6%. The DO females lost 24 ± 2% of their weight from lean mass compared
to the DPE females, who only lost 11 ± 3% of their weight from the FFM. These data
provide evidence that exercise training reduces the amount of fat-free mass lost during
diet-induced weight loss. In addition, gender differences do not seem to exist with respect
to body composition changes of weight reduction.
The decline of RMR in response to energy restriction has been well documented, and
is suspected to decrease the rate of weight loss during periods of energy restriction.63
Exercise is frequently advocated in the treatment of obesity as a means of increasing
energy expenditure and potentially counteracting the negative effects of dietary restric-
tion.16 Several studies based on the addition of a component of exercise to dietary restric-
tion have been published.15,16,49,61,64 Some studies have continued to report similar
decreases in RMR, whereas others have shown an attenuation of the decrement, or an
increase in RMR when an element of exercise was added. Ballor and Poehlman conducted
a meta-analysis to examine the independent and interactive effects of dietary restriction,
endurance exercise training, and gender on RMR.65 Collectively, weight loss was greater
(P <0.05) for men (18 kg) than for women (12 kg). They found no exercise training or
gender effects on RMR during weight loss. Collectively, dietary restriction resulted in a
–0.59 kJ min–1 (approximately –12%) decrease in RMR (P <0.05). When normalized to
body weight, RMR was reduced by less than 2% (P <0.05). These data suggest that exercise
training does not differentially affect RMR during diet-induced weight loss. In addition,
decreases in resting metabolism appear to be proportional to the loss of the metabolically
active tissue (Figure 35.3).
50% of the fat free mass of the body.64 It is for this reason that resistance training was
initially added to weight-loss programs: to reduce or prevent the loss of muscle during
energy restriction, which, in theory, should attenuate the drop in RMR typically seen with
weight loss.
Few studies have been conducted that combined diet with heavy resistance exercise,
and studies evaluating the impact of high-intensity resistance exercise on body composi-
tion and other physiological adaptations during weight loss have reported inconsistent
findings.61 Conflicting results regarding the impact dietary restriction combined with
resistance training has on lean body mass have been reported. An additional problem in
evaluating the impact of resistance training is the fact that many investigators fail to
examine all the physiological variables of interest simultaneously. Two studies incorpo-
rating strength training during energy restriction found contradictory results. One study
reported an increase in fat free mass (RMR was not measured),64,66 whereas the second
found no effect of strength training on fat free mass or RMR, indicating that there are no
advantages of a resistance training program to maintenance of lean body mass and atten-
uating reductions in resting metabolic rate.64,67 The lack of an effect on fat free mass in
this study may have been attributable to the relatively low energy intake of 522 kcal/d
overriding the potential benefits of strength training.64
In the case of VLCDs, a limited number of studies have combined resistance training
with a VLCD.68 Most studies have found that incorporating resistance training into the
very low energy diet regimen does not attenuate the loss of fat free mass or decrease in
RMR.68 It has, however, been reported that significant muscle hypertrophy is possible in
an individual undergoing severe energy restriction.68,69 Hypertrophy was observed only
in the exercised muscles, and the resistance training was unable to prevent the loss of
overall fat free mass any better than diet alone.68,69 In a study comparing the benefits of
aerobic and resistance training when combined with an 800 kilocalorie liquid diet, it was
found that the addition of an intensive, high-volume resistance training program resulted
in preservation of fat free mass and RMR during weight loss.68
The results of studies examining both moderate and severe dietary energy restriction
have lead to the following hypothesis: there may be a minimum level of dietary intake
necessary for significant muscle hypertrophy to occur with resistance training.68 Research-
ers have reported that a dietary intake of at least 1000 to 1500 kcal/day is required to
attain the positive benefits that exercise training can have on RMR and fat free mass.68,70,71
Further studies are therefore necessary to determine whether a diet adequate in protein,
fiber, and vitamins and minerals, but low in total energy, can help mediate the expected
chronic adaptations to heavy resistance training.61
increased 10% in this group of obese women.74 In another study examining the effects of
exercise on weight, body composition, REE, appetite, and mood in obese women, it was
found that participants who consumed diets providing 1200 to 1500 kcal/day and engaged
in aerobic activity experienced favorable changes in REE.72 In addition, the study con-
firmed the findings of previous investigators regarding the effect of aerobic training in
participants consuming VLCDs.77,78 When participants were prescribed a 925 kcal/day
diet, there was no effect of aerobic training on REE. However, when participants termi-
nated their marked dietary energy restriction, a positive effect was observed.72 In contrast,
there have been studies that have found no attenuation of the reduction in RMR in patients
consuming a balanced deficit diet consisting of 1200 to 1500 kcal/day. In a study examining
the physiologic changes after weight reduction with vigorous exercise and moderate
intensity physical activity, there were no differences between groups in decreases in RMR.79
In this study, vigorous aerobic activity did not attenuate reductions in RMR in patients
consuming a self-selected diet.79 There have also been studies which have failed to find
any positive effect on RMR of aerobic training in participants consuming VLCDs. In fact,
one study found that participants who exercised vigorously while consuming 720 kcal/
day had significantly greater reductions in REE than did nonexercising dieters.77 Similar
findings were reported by Heymsfield et al.78 This reduction in REE appears to be a
consequence of compounding the marked caloric deficit introduced by the VLCD with
that introduced by exercise.72 It has therefore been suggested that the most favorable
findings for weight loss are obtained when exercise was combined with diets of 1000 to
1500 kcal/day rather than with VLCDs providing 400 to 800 kcal/day.72
Summary
The research literature regarding the effects of dieting resistance and endurance training,
separately or in combination, on RMR is mixed. (Table 35.5 shows a collection of studies.)
Despite the numerous reported benefits of exercise training, many studies have failed to
show significant benefits of exercise on changes in weight and body composition or RMR.
Consequently, the significance of many of the effects of exercise remains questionable.16
The precise cause of the discrepancy among longitudinal studies investigating the effects
of exercise training on RMR is unknown. There are, however, several factors which have
been suggested as playing a role in the inconsistent findings. The timing of the RMR
measurement in regard to the last bout of exercise training, as well as differences in training
mode, exercise intensity, duration, frequency, and total training load have been highlighted
as potential factors which may account for some of the discrepancies among studies.27
Thus, more rigorous, well-controlled longitudinal studies are needed to elucidate the
impact of exercise training, both resistance and endurance as well as combined strength
and endurance, on RMR.
Despite the equivocal findings regarding the impact of exercise training on resting
metabolic rate of dieting individuals, exercise appears to be the single most important
behavior for long-term weight control in obese individuals.80 In addition to the well-known
benefits of both resistance and endurance training, it has been found, almost universally,
that persons who maintain their weight loss report that they exercise regularly, whereas
weight regainers do not. Exercise should therefore remain a cornerstone in the treatment
of overweight and obesity.
2705_frame_C35 Page 733 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:39 PM
TABLE 35.5
Collection of Some of the Studies Investigating Changes in Physiological Variables Associated
with Treatment
Weight Fat FFM RMR
# of Change Change Change Change
Study Intervention Participants (kg) (kg) (kg) (kcal/day)
Belko et al., 1987 86 diet only 5 –7.78 –5.1 –2.68 –109.9
diet + aerobic 6 –5.70 –4.7 –0.96 –10.0
Broeder et al., control 19 0.3 0.1 0.2 –17.2
199287 strength only 13 0.00 –2.1 2.10 58.5
aerobic only 15 –1.10 –1.4 0.30 30.9
van Dale et al., diet only 6 –12.2 –9.4 –2.80 –533.66
198788 diet + aerobic 6 –13.2 –10.9 –2.30 –371.53
van Dale et al., diet only (no yo-yo) 7 –15.20 –11.9 –3.30 –389.0
198989 diet + aerobic (no yo-yo) 7 –18.90 –15.2 –3.70 –374.0
diet + aerobic (no yo-yo) 6 –19.40 –15.4 –4.00 –302.0
Frey-Hewitt et al., control 41 0.38 –0.27 0.64 27.1
199090 diet only 36 –6.68 –5.52 –1.16 –149.0
aerobic only 44 –4.10 –4.12 0.01 –22.8
Hill et al., 198791 diet only 3 –7.90 –4.48 –3.44 –211.2
diet + aerobic 5 –8.30 –6.13 –2.13 –252.0
Keim et al., 199092 diet + aerobic 5 –13.08 –7.30 –4.70 –139.0
aerobic only 5 –5.61 –3.90 –1.30 18.0
Lennon et al., diet only 22 –6.90 –6.01 –0.89
198574 diet + aerobic (self- 23 –6.70 –6.40 –0.30
selected) 20 –9.70 –8.60 –1.10
diet + aerobic
(prescribed)
Wadden et al., diet (BDD) + aerobic 9 –18.20 –16.3 –0.70 –203.3
199026 diet (VLCD) + aerobic 6 –21.60 –15.6 –1.90 –166.5
Geliebter et al., diet only 22 –9.50 –6.80 –2.70 –88.2
199764 diet + strength 20 –7.80 –6.70 –1.10 –127.2
diet + aerobic 23 –9.60 –7.20 –2.30 –148.9
Pavlou et al., 198915 diet + aerobic 15 –8.30 –6.91 –1.30 1.0
diet only 16 –6.40 –5.47 –0.80 –176.0
Mathieson et al., diet + aerobic (high carb 5 –6.70 na na –333.0
198693 VLCD) 7 –8.00 na na –207.0
diet + aerobic (low carb
VLCD)
Svendson et al., control 20 0.50 0.50 0.60 63.0
199394 diet only 50 –9.50 –7.80 –1.20 –86.25
diet + aerobic 48 –10.30 –9.60 0.00 –45.95
Wilmore et al., aerobic only 77 0.00 –0.60 0.70 16.72
199825
Kraemer et al., control 6 132.0
199761 diet only 8 –6.2 –75.0
diet + aerobic 9 –6.8 –30.0
diet + aerobic + strength 8 –7.0 –143.0
Wadden et al., diet only 29 –14.40 –11.6 –2.80 –106.0
199772 diet + aerobic 31 –17.20 –10.6 –3.20 –46.0
diet + strength 31 –13.70 –14.0 –3.10 –20.0
diet + aerobic + strength 29 –15.20 –13.4 –1.80 –7.0
Racette et al., diet only 13 –8.30 –6.1 –2.2 –129.0
199516 diet + aerobic 10 –10.50 –8.8 –1.7 –129.0
Sum et al., 199495 aerobic + strength 42 –16.10 1.70 –17.8 109.3
Donnelly et al., diet only 26 –20.4 –4.70 –16.1 –138.3
199196 diet + aerobic 16 –21.4 –4.80 –16.6 –158.6
diet + strength 18 –20.9 –4.70 –16.1 –186.9
diet + aerobic + strength 9 –22.9 –4.10 –18.0 –217.0
2705_frame_C35 Page 734 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:39 PM
Acknowledgment
The authors would like to acknowledge the support from NIH Grant M400-215-2111 RO1
(Dr. Andersen).
References
1. Stedman’s Medical Dictionary. Baltimore, MD: Williams & Wilkins; 1995, pg 262.
2. Moffett DF, Moffett SB, Schauf CL. Human Physiology: Foundations and Frontiers. St. Louis, MO:
Mosby-Yearbook, 1993, ch 4.
3. Poehlman ET. Med Sci Sports Exerc 21: 515; 1989.
4. Andersen, RE. In: Lifestyle and Weight Management Consultant Manual. Cotton RT, Ed. San Diego,
CA: American Council on Exercise; 1996, pg 95.
5. Bullough RC, Melby CL. Ann Nutr Metab 37: 24; 1993.
6. Weir JBdV. J Physiol 109: 1; 1949.
7. Matarese LE. J Am Diet Assoc 97: 154S; 1997.
8. Webb P. In: Obesity (Björntorp P, Brodoff BN, Eds). Philadelphia, PA: J.B. Lippincott; 1992, pg
91.
9. Jéquier E. In: Substrate and Energy Metabolism, Garrow JS, Halliday D, Eds. London: Libbey;
1985, pg 82.
10. Ferrannini E. Metabolism 37: 287; 1988.
11. American College of Sports Medicine. Guidelines for Exercise Testing and Prescription. Malvern,
PA: Lea and Febiger; 1991, pg 14.
12. National Institutes of Health. Consensus conference on physical activity and cardiovascular
health. 276, 241-246. 1996.
13. Robertson JD, Reid DD. Lancet 1: 940; 1952.
2705_frame_C35 Page 735 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:39 PM
14. Heshka S, Feld K, Yang MU, et al. JADA 93: 1031; 1993.
15. Pavlou KN, Whatley JE, Jannace PW, et al. Am J Clin Nutr 49: 1110; 1989.
16. Racette SB, Schoeller DA, Kushner RF, et al. Am J Clin Nutr 61: 486; 1995.
17. Seefeldt VD, Harrison, GG. In: Anthropometric Standardization Reference Manual, Lohman TG,
Roche AF, Martorell R, Eds. Champaign, IL, Human Kinetics Books, 1988: pg 111.
18. Cullinen K, Caldwell M. JADA 98: 414; 1998.
19. Heshka S, Yang M-U, Wang J, et al. Am J Clin Nutr 52: 981; 1990.
20. Harris JA, Benedict FG. Biometric Studies of Basal Metabolism in Man. Washington, DC: Carnegie
Institute of Washington; 1919.
21. Kuczmarski RJ, Flegal KM, Campbell SM, et al. JAMA 272: 205; 1994.
22. Fleisch A. Helv Med Acta 1: 23; 1951.
23. Mifflin MD, St.Jeor ST, Hill LA, et al. Am J Clin Nutr 51: 241; 1990.
24. Berke EM, Gardner AW, Goran MI, et al. Am J Clin Nutr 55: 626; 1992.
25. Wilmore JH, Stanforth PR, Hudspeth LA, et al. Am J Clin Nutr 68: 66; 1998.
26. Wadden TA, Foster GD, Letizia KA, et al. JAMA 264: 707; 1990.
27. Broeder CE, Burrhus KA, Svanevick LS, et al. Am J Clin Nutr 55: 795; 1992.
28. Goran MI. Med Clin N Am 2: 347; 1984.
29. Poehlman ET, Gardner AW, Ades PA, et al. Metabolism 41: 1351; 1992.
30. Poehlman ET, McAuliffe TL, Van Houten DR, et al. Am J Physiol 259: E66; 1990.
31. Poehlman ET, Melby CL, Badylak SF. Am J Clin Nutr 47: 793; 1988.
32. Poehlman ET, Melby CL, Badylak SF, et al. Metabolism 38: 85; 1989.
33. Poehlman ET, Arciero PJ, Goran MI. Exerc Sport Sci Rev 22: 251; 1994.
34. Arciero PJ, Goran MI, Poehlman ET. J Appl Physiol 75: 2514; 1993.
35. Poehlman ET, Goran MI, Gardner AW, et al. Am J Physiol 264: 450E; 1993.
36. McArdle WD, Katch FI, Katch VL. Exercise Physiology: Energy, Nutrition, and Human Perfor-
mance. Philadelphia: Lea & Febiger; 1991, ch 9.
37. Perkins KA. J Appl Physiol 72: 401; 1992.
38. Poehlman ET, Despres JP, Bessette H, et al. Med Sci Sports Exerc 17: 689; 1985.
39. Costill DL, Dalsky GP, Fink WJ. Med Sci Sports 10: 155; 1978.
40. Ivy JL, Costill DL, Fink WJ, et al. Med Sci Sports Exerc 11: 6; 1979.
41. Klesges RC, Mealer CZ, Klesges LM. Am J Clin Nutr 59: 805; 1994.
42. Williamson DF, Forman MR, Binkin NJ, et al. Am J Publ Health 77: 1324; 1987.
43. McDonald JT, Margen S. Am J Clin Nutr 29: 1093; 1976.
44. Pirola RC, Lieber CS. Pharmacology 7: 185; 1972.
45. Lieber CS. Nutr Rev 46: 241; 1988.
46. Suter PM, Schutz Y, Jequier E. N Engl J Med 326: 983; 1992.
47. Lamont LS. J Cardiopulm Rehabil 15: 183; 1995.
48. Connolly J, Romano T, Patruno M. Fam Pract 16: 196; 1999.
49. Andersen RE, Wadden TA, Bartlett SJ, et al. JAMA 281: 335;1 999.
50. Coulston AM. JADA 98: 6S; 1998.
51. Mokdad AH, Serdula MK, Dietz WH, et al. JAMA 282: 1519; 1999.
52. Serdula MK, Mokdad AH, Williamson DF, et al. JAMA 282: 1353; 1999.
53. Elliot DL, Goldberg L, Kuehl KS, et al. Am J Clin Nutr 49: 93; 1989.
54. Foster GD, Wadden TA, Feurer ID, et al. Am J Clin Nutr 51: 167; 1990.
55. Bullough RC, Gillette CA, Harris MA, et al. Am J Clin Nutr 61: 473; 1995.
56. Phelain JF, Reinke E, Harris MA, et al. J Am Coll Nutr 16: 140; 1997.
57. Quinn TJ, Vroman NB, Kertzer R. Med Sci Sports Exerc 26: 908; 1994.
58. Almuzaini KS, Potteiger JA, Green SB. Can J Appl Physiol 23: 433; 1998.
59. Short KR, Sedlock DA. J Appl Physiol 83: 153; 1997.
60. Gillette CA, Bullough RC, Melby CL. Int J Sport Nutr 4: 347; 1994.
61. Kraemer WJ, Volek JS, Clark KL, et al. Med Sci Sports Exerc 31: 1320; 1999.
62. Ballor DL, Poehlman ET. Int J Obes Relat Metab Disord 18: 35; 1994.
63. Henson LC, Poole DC, Donahoe CP, et al. Am J Clin Nutr 46: 893; 1987.
64. Geliebter A, Maher MM, Gerace L, et al. Am J Clin Nutr 66: 557; 1997.
65. Ballor DL, Poehlman ET. Eur J Appl Physiol 71: 535; 1995.
2705_frame_C35 Page 736 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:39 PM
66. Ballor DL, Katch VL, Becque MD, et al. Am J Clin Nutr 47: 19; 1988.
67. Donnelly JE, Pronk NP, Jacobsen DJ, et al. Am J Clin Nutr 54: 56; 1991.
68. Bryner RW, Ullrich IH, Sauers J, et al. J Am Coll Nutr 18: 115; 1999.
69. Donnelly JE, Sharp T, Houmard J, et al. Am J Clin Nutr 58: 561; 1993.
70. Poehlman ET, Melby CL, Goran MI. Sports Med 11: 78; 1991.
71. Sweeney ME, Hill JO, Heller PA, et al. Am J Clin Nutr 57: 127; 1993.
72. Wadden TA, Vogt RA, Andersen RE, et al. J Consult Clin Psychol 65: 269; 1997.
73. King AC, Haskell WL, Taylor CB, et al. JAMA 266: 1535; 1991.
74. Lennon D, Nagle F, Stratman F, et al. Int J Obes Relat Metab Disord 9: 39; 1985.
75. Tremblay A, Fontaine E, Poehlman ET, et al. Int J Obes Relat Metab Disord 10: 511; 1986.
76. Nieman DC, Haig JL, de Guia ED, et al. J Sports Med 28: 79; 1988.
77. Phinney SD, LaGrange BM, O’Connell M, et al. Metabolism 37: 758; 1988.
78. Heymsfield SB, Casper K, Hearn J, et al. Metabolism 38: 215; 1989.
79. Franckowiak SC, Andersen RE, Bartlett SJ, et al. Med Sci Sports Exerc 31: 345S; 1999.
80. Kayman S, Bruvold W, Stern JS. Am J Clin Nutr 52: 800; 1990.
81. Bernstein RS, Thornton JC, Yang M-U, et al. Am J Clin Nutr 37: 595; 1983.
82. Cunningham JJ. Am J Clin Nutr 33: 2372; 1980.
83. James WPT. Postgrad Med J 60: 50; 1984.
84. Owen OE, Kavle E, Owen RS, et al. Am J Clin Nutr 44: 1; 1986.
85. Pavlou KN, Hoeffer MA, Blackburn GL. Ann Surg 203: 136; 1986.
86. Belko AZ, Van Loan M, Barbieri TF, et al. Int J Obes Relat Metab Disord 11: 93; 1987.
87. Broeder CE, Burrhus KA, Svanevick LS, et al. Am J Clin Nutr 55: 802; 1992.
88. van Dale D, Saris WHM, Schoffelen PFM, et al. Int J Obes Relat Metab Disord 11: 367; 1987.
89. van Dale D, Saris WHM. Am J Clin Nutr 49: 409; 1989.
90. Frey-Hewitt B, Vranizan KM, Dreon DM, et al. Int J Obes Relat Metab Disord 14: 327; 1990.
91. Hill JO, Sparling PB, Shields TW, et al. Am J Clin Nutr 46: 622; 1987.
92. Keim NL, Barbieri TF, Belko AZ. Int J Obes Relat Metab Disord 14: 335; 1990.
93. Mathieson RA, Walberg JL, Gwazdauskas FC, et al. Metabolism 35: 394; 1986.
94. Svendsen OL, Hassager C, Christiansen C. Am J Med 95: 131; 1993.
95. Sum CF, Wang KW, Choo DCA, et al. Metabolism 43: 1148; 1994.
96. Donnelly JE, Pronk NP, Jacobsen DJ, et al. Am J Clin Nutr 54: 56; 1991.
97. Henson LC, Poole DC, Donahoe CP, et al. Med Sci Sports Exerc 46: 893; 1987.
98. Doucet E, Imbeault P, Almeras N, et al. Obes Res 7: 323; 1999.
2705_frame_C36 Page 737 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:39 PM
36
Energy Assessment: Physical Activity
Introduction
Measuring physical activity is one of the most difficult tasks in physical activity research
due to its complexity and the fact that it is based on individual behavior characterized by
daily variability in practices and routines. A recent conference at the Cooper Institute
focused on the Measurement of Physical Activity.1 A major conclusion was that for field
studies there is no single measure able to accurately assess physical activity in all groups
of the population, in all settings, and for all aspects of physical activity. Although some
methods are highly accurate and valid, it may not be feasible to use them in field settings,
as the cost may be prohibitive. Another problem is the lack of a field criterion measure
capable of testing the concurrent validity of current or newly developed methods for
assessing physical activity. Choosing a method to assess physical activity is difficult and
requires finding the balance between objectives of the study or project and the accuracy,
validity, and feasibility of available instruments.
0-8493-2705-9/01/$0.00+$1.50
© 2002 by CRC Press LLC 737
2705_frame_C36 Page 738 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:39 PM
intensity, and duration. Some authors also consider the importance of the circumstances
and purpose of activity3 or its efficiency.4
Although physical activity results in energy expenditure, the latter can remain constant,
whereas the activity may vary immensely; this may result in different physiological effects
and health outcomes for various activities. Energy expenditure varies with body size, so
individuals of different body sizes might be expending different amounts of calories while
performing the same activity. Activity-related energy expenditure is determined by fre-
quency, intensity, and duration and may be expressed in total kilocalories (or kilojoules)
or kilocalories per kilogram of body mass.
Purpose
Many different physical activity assessments are available, and selecting a method for a
particular project can be complicated. The purpose of this section is to provide guidance
and suggestions for this process. Specifically, we will:
The techniques available to measure daily physical activity and energy expenditure are
summarized here, and more extensive recent reviews can be found in previous publica-
tions.1,3,10-16 Although some methods estimate total energy expenditure, which is addressed
in a different section of this handbook, we also will discuss them briefly here because they
provide estimates of activity-related energy expenditure. In summary, this section aims
to provide useful and practical information on the assessment of physical activity sum-
marized from recent reviews and relevant published papers.
present in a population when planning what assessment method to use. If the study group
is a general population sample, it will probably be necessary to include a wide range of
activities, including occupational, household, caretaking, leisure time, walking or cycling
for transportation to work or on errands, and sports. If the project is to be conducted in
a group of business executives, it is probably reasonable to evaluate leisure time physical
activity in detail, since these are activities that provide most of the energy expenditure
beyond RMR and TEF in this group. For these executives, it is reasonable to give only
limited attention to occupational and household activities.
Physical activity varies with age, with general population data showing a gradual
decline and the highest prevalence of sedentary behavior observed in elderly persons,
especially women.5 However, there may be substantial differences in activity patterns in
retired individuals. For some, most of the activity might be housework and yard work,
for others it might be walking, and perhaps for those living in retirement centers the major
activities might be recreational activities such as golf or dancing. It is not possible to select
a single activity assessment method for use with older individuals, but it is important to
consider the type of older population that will be included in the project.
In summary, the nature of the population to be monitored is important to consider when
selecting a physical activity assessment method. In general, younger persons are more
active than older individuals, men are more active than women, and members of minority
groups tend to be less active than non-Hispanic whites. Nonetheless, it is not possible to
simply select a method based on age, gender, or racial/ethnic group status. Many other
factors such as educational level, health status, geography, climate, and occupational group
must be considered. Ideally, it would be useful to collect some pilot data, perhaps by open-
ended questionnaires, to obtain information on types of activity most often reported by
the target population.
Sample/Population Size
The characteristics or the size of a sample must be taken into account before selecting the
activity measure. A national survey or a large population study is not likely to use labor-
intensive or high-cost techniques. A validation study or clinical trial with a relatively
small sample means that the cost, time, logistical complexity, and other resources per
person can be increased allowing the use of more sophisticated, time-consuming, and
accurate techniques.
Period of Measurement
For instruments that measure activity over periods of time, an important question is the
length of the monitoring period. This may differ for adults as compared with children
and adolescents. According to Janz et al.,22 four or more days of activity monitoring are
needed to achieve satisfactory reliability, although Gretebeck and Montoye23 suggested
that at least five or six days of monitoring are needed to minimize intra-individual vari-
ance. More recently, Trost et al.19 concluded that a seven-day monitoring period was
required for accelerometers to assess usual activity in children and adolescents and account
for apparent differences between weekday and weekend activity behaviors in the same
way as within daily differences.
In addition to considering the length of the monitoring period, it also is necessary to
consider whether multiple periods need to be monitored over the course of a year. It is
obvious that seasonal or climatic effects could have an influence on physical activity, but
this has not been studied adequately. Most epidemiological studies on physical activity
2705_frame_C36 Page 743 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:39 PM
and health have obtained activity measurements at one time point. However, some of
these approaches have asked about activity over periods of various lengths — past week,
past month, past three months, past year, or usual activity. It is not clear whether any
single approach is better than any other, so at this time investigators should simply select
the recall period that seems logical for their specific population.
Summary
It is not possible to give a few simple guidelines for selecting a physical activity assessment
method, and we have presented several factors that need to be considered when making
a decision. The purpose of the study, type of physical activity that is of interest, nature of
the study group, size and complexity of the study, and the available resources are all
essential elements to be evaluated in order to select the most appropriate method for
measuring physical activity. It is important to spend sufficient time in planning and
selecting an assessment method to avoid later problems.
Methods Available
Extensive research has been carried out on methods for assessing physical activity, which
has resulted in a great number of methods being developed and made available. We review
several categories of activity assessment methods here. Techniques available for assessing
physical activity can be grouped into two broad categories:
Objective measures assess activity directly. They have been used in many studies to
assess levels of physical activity in all age groups, and also have been used extensively
to validate self-report measures. Continuing development and refinement of the different
devices are beginning to overcome their high cost and complexity, facilitate their use in
2705_frame_C36 Page 744 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:39 PM
wider samples, and provide easier data entry, manipulation, and analyses. Subjective
methods have been most frequently used in population surveillance and large population
studies. These methods typically result in assigning individuals to one of a few broad
categories of habitual activity — perhaps sedentary, low active, moderately active, or
highly active.
Several recent reviews are available on the different techniques for assessing physical
activity and energy expenditure in both field and laboratory settings.1,3,10-15,24 Some of the
available methods will be discussed here, with particular emphasis on methods that have
been tested for validity and reliability.
Subjective Assessments
Subjective physical activity assessments rely principally on self-report of activity patterns
by the study participant. This information may be obtained by structured interview, self-
completed questionnaires, or diaries. Self-report methods have been widely used in studies
on physical and health outcomes and for population surveillance of physical activity.
Self-report techniques such as physical activity diaries, recall surveys, quantitative his-
tory surveys, and proxy report (e.g., provided by parents, spouses, or teachers) are widely
used to assess typical levels of physical activity. They rely on the subject (or proxy) to
recall activities performed over a period of time that can vary from one day to one year
(more often one week to one month) on the assumption that this period represents the
individual’s typical activity for most of the time. The complexity of the self-report mea-
sures may also vary immensely, in which the subject may be asked a few simple questions
to very detailed information regarding type, frequency, time, duration, intensity, and
perceived exertion. As result, levels of activity are expressed in different scoring systems,
which makes it difficult to interpret and compare among studies.
Self-report methods are useful for adolescents and adults, but are not particularly appro-
priate for children. Self-report methods are unreliable in young children as they do not
have the cognitive ability needed to recall and record type, duration, and intensity of
physical activity, particularly over extended periods of time.25 Furthermore, children seem
to expend energy in diverse contexts and styles, such as those involved in spontaneous
play. This diversity ranges between brief but frequent bouts of vigorous activity to activ-
ities of a longer duration such as walking or biking to school, and this diversity makes
accurate recall difficult. According to Sallis et al.,26 reliability and validity improve with
increasing age, and validity is improved when the recall interval (i.e., time from the
physical activity to the moment of report) is as short as possible. They conclude that recall
instruments should only be used with children 10 years old or older.
Advantages of self-report methods are that they are:
• Validity is limited by the ability of the subject (or proxy) to recall and report
activity behaviors accurately12
• Intensity of activity is difficult to obtain
Interviews
Structured physical activity interviews may facilitate the recall of type, amount, frequency,
duration, and intensity of activity episodes. However, even with this structure and guid-
ance by the interviewer, it is still difficult for participants to recall and report all details
of physical activity participation. A major problem is accurately classifying activity inten-
sity and accurately reporting actual minutes spent in an activity. For example, a person
may report swimming for an hour, when in fact they were at the beach for an hour and
only swam for 10 minutes. When reporting minutes spent in an activity, it is difficult to
know the minimum length of the bout that should be counted. It is reasonably easy to
identify activity bouts of 10 to 15 minutes, but should repeated bouts of five minutes or
two minutes be counted and summed over the course of the day? One of the most widely
used structured interviews is the seven-day physical activity recall, which has been used
in both community surveys and clinical trials.27,28 A major disadvantage with the interview
method for large studies is the increased cost incurred by the interviewers’ time.
Self-Completed Questionnaires
Questionnaires are the most common instruments used in large-scale studies because of
their low cost and ease of administration in large groups of subjects. One problem with
the self-completed questionnaire approach is that study participants often overestimate
the amount of their physical activity. However, even with their limitations, a large body
of evidence from studies on physical activity and health outcomes has been based on self-
completed activity questionnaires. There is good consensus from these studies, with the
clear finding that sedentary individuals are more likely than their more active peers to
develop chronic disease or die prematurely during followup. Thus, the relatively crude
classifications of activity status by the questionnaires appear to be valid for predicting
health outcomes. The various recent reviews of physical activity assessment methods
include a detailed listing of questionnaires.3,24 We encourage investigators to review these
various instruments and select the one that logically appears to be best suited to the specific
purposes and needs of the planned study. Most of the published questionnaires have
acceptable reliability and validity for assigning individuals into broad activity categories.
One of the problems faced by public health officials is surveillance of physical activity
in the population. Issues that can be addressed with a good surveillance system include
trends in population physical activity over time and comparisons of activity in different
regions. Many times it also would be desirable to make cross-national comparisons.
Unfortunately, physical activity surveys in different countries have been performed with
different methods and measurement strategies. In order to help standardize definitions
and physical activity assessments across countries, the World Health Organization and
the U.S. Centers for Disease Control and Prevention have convened an international group
of experts to develop an International Physical Activity Questionnaire (IPAQ). Short and
long versions of the questionnaire have been developed, reviewed, and revised, and are
currently being tested for reliability and validity. Preliminary results of these studies are
now available and are encouraging. The short and long versions of IPAQ can be admin-
istered by interview, self-completed questionnaire (in person or by mail-back survey), or
by a telephone interview. Although the IPAQ may be revised in light of the ongoing
2705_frame_C36 Page 746 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:39 PM
studies, the final version should be available by 2001. Contact information for the Chair
of the International Working Group and the U.S. coordinator is:
• Michael Booth
[email protected]
• Michael Pratt
[email protected]
Diaries
Some investigators have used physical activity diaries to classify study participants.29
According to Bratteby et al.,30 the activity diary method provides a reasonable estimate
of total energy expenditure and physical activity levels in population groups. However,
Sallis concluded that diary measures have strong validity but that the burden on subjects
is high and compliance varies with the population being studied.31 Diaries are not con-
sidered feasible in young children. Physical activity diaries are likely to be most useful
when used in small studies or clinical trials. Participants in these studies are likely to be
more motivated than participants in large population studies to accept the high participant
burden involved in keeping a diary. Diaries are more likely to be successful when used
for relatively short periods of a few days.
Objective Assessments
Several methods of physical activity assessment using objective approaches are available.
These methods tend to require a higher participant burden than the subjective approaches,
and the cost for objective methods is higher, often much higher. Nonetheless, these objec-
tive methods are extremely useful, especially for small and highly controlled clinical trials.
Calorimetry
Calorimetry involves measurement of calories expended. This can be done by directly
measuring heat production by the body, but such methods are costly and are most appli-
cable to a few studies where highly accurate measures of energy expenditure are required.3
Indirect calorimetry is a method that determines energy expenditure from VO2 consump-
tion and VCO2 production, and is frequently used in the laboratory to measure exercise
metabolism. Calorimetry is usually used to validate other physical activity assessment
methods in laboratory settings. Recent advances in instrumentation for portable metabolic
analyzers have made these devices more suitable for field settings to evaluate the metabolic
rate, and thus the energy cost of various free-living activities. These methods are still
intrusive, have a high participant burden, require technically trained laboratory staff, and
are relatively expensive. These approaches can be quite useful to validate other physical
activity assessments in field settings, but have limited applicability in most clinical settings
where activity assessment is desired.
Doubly-Labeled Water
DLW is considered the gold standard for validating other field methods of assessing total
energy expenditure. The measurement of average daily metabolic rate, combined with a
measurement of resting metabolic rate and an estimate of TEF, permits the calculation of
energy expenditure for physical activity under normal daily living conditions.32 This
technique consists of administering an oral dose of 2H218O, after which carbon dioxide
2705_frame_C36 Page 747 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:39 PM
production over time is calculated from the difference in the elimination rates of 2H and
18O, because the 2H label is eliminated from the body only as water, while the 18O label is
eliminated as water and carbon dioxide. Goran et al.33 indicate that studies examining the
validity of the DLW method show the technique to be accurate within 5 to 10% when
compared with data from subjects living in metabolic chambers. Although the DLW
technique is considered the gold standard for validating field methods to assess energy
expenditure, it is notable that it has never been validated in field settings because of the
lack of a suitable reference criterion.3
The advantages of the DLW method are:
Direct Observation
Direct observation consists of an observer coding the activities (type and intensity) per-
formed by an individual during short periods of time. The observation usually takes place
during specific periods such as playtime at school or physical education classes. It may
be done in real time or by viewing videotapes. Direct observation has been used mainly
to assess physical activity in children. It does not interfere directly with the activities,
assesses multiple dimensions of physical activity, and can include information concerning
contextual variables such as physical and social environments. Although the physical
activity data collected are objective and reliable, times and places available to observe
participants are limited. Thus, observation studies are done more often on preschool37,38
than on school-age children.39 Another disadvantage of direct observation studies is the
fact that they require intensive training and monitoring of observers to maintain quality
control. Direct observation is time-consuming and costly, which may explain its infrequent
use. The method is used primarily with small samples, and also as a criterion measure to
validate other instruments.
2705_frame_C36 Page 748 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:39 PM
Activity Monitors
In the last few years, activity monitors have been increasingly investigated and used in
cross-sectional and intervention studies and to validate other physical activity assessment
instruments. Activity monitors can be simple, such as pedometers or step counters, or
more complex, such as accelerometers.
Pedometers
Pedometers record the number of steps taken, which is provided as total volume during
a period of time, such as one or several days’ activity. Earlier pedometers operated on a
pendulum principle, and there were major problems with reliability and validity of these
instruments. Some more recent pedometers are electronic devices, which are substantially
more accurate than the older pendulum models.
2705_frame_C36 Page 749 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:39 PM
Overall, we find these devices useful for self-monitoring of physical activity in behav-
ioral intervention programs and think that they provide objective data that allows for
assignment to broad activity categories. Ordering information for a frequently used
pedometer that has undergone extensive reliability and feasibility testing is given here.
Yamax DigiWalker
New LifeStyles, 5900 Larson Avenue, Kansas City, MO 64133 USA
Phone: U.S. 888-748-5377, outside U.S. 816-353-1852; Fax 816-353-9808
E-mail [email protected]; Website www.digiwalkerinfo.com
Accelerometers
Accelerometers are motion sensors that detect movement of the body. There has been
extensive research and development of these instruments over the past several years, and
several devices are currently available. Major advantages of accelerometers are:
• Their ability to record and store activity data on a minute-by-minute basis for
extended periods of time under free-living conditions
• The objective measure of total body movement or limb movement respectively
depending on whether they are placed on the torso or on the limbs
• The chronological recording of acceleration allows for evaluation of frequency,
intensity, and duration of body movement; time spent in sedentary activities can
also be determined
• The estimates of total energy expenditure
• They cannot be worn during any water activities since they are not developed
to be exposed to water
• They are unable to discriminate the energy cost of activities such as carrying
loads or walking upstairs, and do not distinguish between uphill and downhill
walking or hiking45
2705_frame_C36 Page 750 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:39 PM
• The cost of the equipment and the time needed to download and manipulate
the data for some of these devices are too great for use in large-scale studies
• They have not been validated for the assessment of upper body activities such
as throwing, catching, and lifting
When all things are considered, we think accelerometers offer great potential for physical
activity assessment, especially for smaller studies such as clinical trials or clinical inter-
ventions. Because of the potential of these instruments and the large amount of recent
and ongoing research on accelerometer measurement of physical activity, we will provide
a more extensive review of this approach than we have for other methods presented in
this section.
Accelerometers are available for measurement of movement in a single plane (usually
the vertical plane) or in all three planes. The unidimensional Caltrac is the accelerometer
that has been used most widely in physical activity research.10 A second unidimensional
accelerometer has been developed by Computer Science and Applications (CSA, Shalimar,
FL). Janz et al.22 found correlations of r = 0.50 to 0.74 between the CSA accelerometer and
heart rate telemetry, with higher correlations found for more vigorous activities.
Presently, there are two tridimensional accelerometers, the Tracmor and the TriTrac-R3D
(Hemokinetics, Inc., Madison, WI); however, only the latter is commercially available.
Bouten et al.46 report that tridimensional accelerometers predicted activity-related energy
expenditure better than unidimensional accelerometers when young adults performed
different types of activity (sedentary activities, walking). Tridimensional accelerometers
should more accurately record activities that include extensive horizontal motion, bending,
and twisting. However, some investigators find little difference between unidimensional
and tridimensional accelerometers.
In a study of college students, Matthews and Freedson47 compared results from the
Tritrac accelerometer with self-reports of activity on a three-day log (r = 0.82) and a seven-
day recall (r = 0.77). They concluded that although the Tritrac accelerometer underesti-
mated daily energy expenditure, it provided more accurate results than the Caltrac accel-
erometer. The Tritrac accelerometer correctly classified 84% of the students into two
groups: low active and high active. The ability of the Tritrac accelerometer to measure
activity in one-minute intervals makes it possible to analyze data from specific time
segments and allows determining total time spent at different activity intensities as well
as sustained periods of moderate or vigorous activity.
There have been few investigations using the TriTrac-R3D with children and adolescents.
Results of accelerometer studies may be different in adults than in children, because
children are more likely than adults to expend vertical energy through jumping and
climbing and have more frequent but short bouts of moderate to vigorous activity.48 Welk
and Corbin were among the first to report the use of the Tritrac accelerometer in children.49
In a sample of 35 children (9 to 11 years old), they evaluated the TriTrac-R3D against heart
rate monitoring and the unidimensional Caltrac accelerometer. The TriTrac-R3D was mod-
erately correlated (r = 0.58) with the heart rate monitor and highly correlated (r = 0.88)
with the Caltrac. The correlation of accelerometer data with heart rate was highest during
free play and lowest when activity was more limited or structured.
Ordering information for accelerometers is included here.
• TriTrac-R3D
StayHealthy, Inc, 222 East Huntington Drive, Suite 213, Monrovia, CA 91016
Phone 626-256-6152
Email [email protected]; Website www.stayhealthy.com
2705_frame_C36 Page 751 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:39 PM
• CSA
Computer Science and Applications, Inc., 2 Clifford Drive, Shalimar, FL 32579
Phone 850-651-4991; Fax 850-651-2816
Email [email protected]; Website www.csa-ucc.com
Summary
Motion sensors and heart rate monitors overcome problems associated with inaccurate
subject recall of activity and are less costly than direct observation. Objective measure-
ments provided by heart rate monitors and accelerometers can be used across all age
groups as long as their output is provided in raw scores. This is because estimates of
energy expenditure provided by some devices have substantial errors due to the fact that
the population from which the equations were derived is specific and may not represent
the population to be studied. Investigators may need to develop their own energy expen-
diture equations based on their own study group. It is important to remember that these
instruments can be prone to technical problems, are expensive, and they provide no
information concerning specific activities or the context in which activities are performed.12
Although they provide an objective measure of physical activity, accurate assessment relies
on each participant complying to wear the device throughout the monitoring period.
Conclusions
We have reviewed several categories of physical activity assessment methods and discussed
the strengths and weaknesses of each approach. Table 36.1 includes a listing of several
physical activity assessment methods and indications of how each meets various factors
that need to be considered when selecting the most appropriate method. The table combines
information presented in preceding sections and should be a useful summary tool to help
investigators and clinicians make decisions regarding physical activity assessment.
All physical activity assessment methods and instruments have strengths, limitations,
advantages, and disadvantages. Our major recommendation is that the choice of a method
to assess physical activity depends primarily on the purpose of the study and the dimen-
sions to be assessed in order to answer the relevant questions. Other critical factors to be
taken into account include the population to be evaluated, the size of the study group,
and cost and feasibility issues.
Acknowledgments
We thank Melba Morrow for editorial assistance and Stephanie Parker for administrative
assistance. The work reported here was supported in part by grants from the National
Institutes of Health (AG06945 and HL58608).
752
TABLE 36.1
Methods for Assessing Physical Activity
Characteristics of Activity Context in which
Assessed Activity Occurs Population
Field Measure
Type
Frequency
Intensity
Duration
Total Volume
of Activity
Sedentary
Leisure
Work
Household
Transport
Children
Adolescents
Adults
Older adults
Cost
Sample Size
Objective Measures
isotopes
Whole-room indirect Re-create free-living EE through A few days H S
calorimeter conditions in a measurement of
confined space heat production
and/or respiratory
gas exchange
Indirect calorimetry Standardized protocols VO2 uptake Minute or less H S
of exercise in a EE intervals
controlled
environment
HR monitor4 Wearing the monitor for Beats/min Intervals of 1 M M
all the measurement minute or less
period for up to
several days
Pedometer Wearing the device for Steps L L
Yamax Digiwalker5 all the measurement
period
Caltrac6,7 Wearing the monitor for Movement counts/ M L
all the measurement kcal
period
CSA8-10 Wearing the monitor for Counts M L
all the measurement
period
Handbook of Nutrition and Food
TriTrac-R3D11,12 Wearing the monitor for Movement Counts/ M
all the measurement kcal
period
Tracmor13 Wearing the monitor for Counts M
all the measurement
period
Direct Observation14 Observer rates the Minutes of activity H S
activity and intensity
Subjective Measures
Quest. (LTEQ)17
PDPAR18,19 After school
2705_frame_C36 Page 753 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:39 PM
Self-administered PA
checklist (SAPAC)20
Child/Adol Activity
Log (CAAL)21
4 x 1 day recalls Interview 1 day repeated M S
four times
Diary22 Can be minutes, kcal, M M
or other measures,
depending on how
diary structured
Cost: L = Low; M = Medium; H = High
Sample size: S = Small (this is typically a few dozen participants); L = Large (can be up to a few 100 participants)
1. Schoeller DA. J Nutr 118:1278; 1988. 2. Schoeller DA. J Nutr 129:1765; 1999. 3. Seale JL, Conway JM, Canary JJ. J Appl Physiol 74:402; 1993. 4. Murayama N, Ohtsuka R. Am
J Hum Biol 11:647; 1999. 5. Eston RG, Rowlands AV, Ingledew DK. J Appl Physiol 84:362; 1998. 6. Bray MS, Wong WW, Morrow JR, Jr., et al. Med Sci Sports Exerc 26:1524; 1994.
7. Nichols JF, Patterson P, Early T. Can J Sport Sci 17:299; 1992. 8. Janz KF. Med Sports Exerc 26:369; 1994. 9. Melanson ELJ, Freedson PS. Med Sci Sports Exerc 27:934; 1995. 10.
Trost SG, Ward DS, Moorehead SM, et al. Med Sci Sports Exerc 30:629; 1998. 11. Welk GJ, Corbin CB. Res Q Exerc Sport 66:202; 1995. 12. Nichols JF, Morgan CG, Sarkin JA, et
al. Med Sci Sports Exerc 31:908; 1999. 13. Bouten CV, Westerterp KR, Verduin M, Janssen JD. Med Sci Sports Exerc 26:1516; 1994. 14. Rowe PJ, Schuldheisz JM, vanderMars H.
Pediatr Exerc Sci 9:136; 1997. 15. Sallis JF, Buono MJ, Roby JJ, et al. Med Sci Sports Exerc 25:99; 1993. 16. Crocker PR, Bailey DA, Faulkner RA, et al. Med Sci Sports Exerc 29:1344;
1997. 17. Raudsepp L, Pall P. Biol Sport 14:199; 1997. 18. Trost SG, Ward DS, McGraw B, Pate RR. Pediatr Exerc Sci 11:341; 1999. 19. Weston AT, Petosa R, Pate RR. Med Sci
Sports Exerc 29: 138; 1997. 20. Sallis JF, Strikmiller PK, Harsha DW, et al. Med Sci Sports Exerc 28:840; 1996. 21. Garcia AW, George TR, Coviak C, et al. Internat J Behav Med
4:323; 1997. 22. Bratteby LE, Sandhagen B, Fan H, Samuelson G. Eur J Clin Nutr 51:585; 1997.
753
2705_frame_C36 Page 754 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:39 PM
References
1. __________ Res Q Exerc Sport 71(2), 1S. 2000.
2. Caspersen CJ, Powell KE, Christenson GM. Pub Health Rep 100:126; 1985.
3. Montoye HJ. Measuring physical activity and energy expenditure, Human Kinetics, Champaign,
IL: 1996.
4. Goran MI, Sun M. Am J Clin Nutr 68: 944S; 1998.
5. __________ US Department of Health and Human Services. Physical Activity and Health: A
Report of the Surgeon General, Atlanta, GA: US Department of Health and Human Services,
Centers for Disease Control and Prevention, National Center for Chronic Disease Prevention
and Health Promotion; 1996.
6. Blair SN, Kohl HW, III, Paffenbarger RS, Jr, et al. JAMA 262: 2395; 1989.
7. Blair SN, Kohl HW, III, Barlow CE, et al. JAMA 273: 1093; 1995.
8. Ainsworth BE, Sternfeld B, Slattery ML, et al. Cancer 83:611; 1998.
9. Stone EJ, McKenzie TL, Welk GJ, Booth ML. Am J Prev Med 15:298; 1998.
10. Melanson EL, Jr., Freedson PS. Crit Rev Food Sci Nutr 36: 385; 1996.
11. Baranowski T, Bouchard C, Bar-Or O, et al. Med Sci Sports Exerc 24: 237S; 1992.
12. Heath GW, Pate RR, Pratt M, Pub Health Rep 108(1): 42; 1993.
13. Wareham NJ, Rennie KL. Int J Obes Relat Metab Disord 22: 30S; 1998.
14. Rowlands AV, Eston RG, Ingledew DK. Sports Med 24: 258; 1997.
15. Riddoch CJ, Boreham CA. Sports Med 1995; 19: 86; 1995.
16. Freedson PS. Pediatr Exerc Sci 1: 8; 1989.
17. Paffenbarger RS, Jr, Lee I-M, Kampert JB. World Rev Nutr Diet 82: 210; 1997.
18. Welk GJ, Corbin CB, Dale D. Measurement issues in the assessment of physical activity in
children. Res Q Exerc Sport 71: 59S; 2000.
19. Trost SG, Pate RR, Freedson PS, Sallis JF, Taylor WC. Med Sci Sports Exerc 32: 426; 2000.
20. Sallis JF. J Sch Health 61: 215; 1991.
21. Masse LC, Fulton JE, Watson KL, et al. Res Q Exerc Sport 70: 212; 1999.
22. Janz KF, Witt J, Mahoney LT. Med Sci Sports Exerc 27: 1326; 1995.
23. Gretebeck RF, Montoye HJ. Med Sci Sports Exerc 24: 1167; 1992.
24. FitzGerald SJ, Kriska AM, Pereira MA, de Courten, MP. Med Sci Sports Exerc 29: 910; 1997.
25. Sallis JF, Buono MJ, Roby JJ, et al. Med Sci Sports Exerc 22: 698; 1990.
26. Sallis JF, McKenzie TL, Alcaraz, JE. Am J Dis Child 147: 890; 1993.
27. Blair SN, Haskell WL, Ho P, et al. Am J Epidemiol 122: 794; 1985.
28. Sallis JF, Haskell WL, Wood PD, et al. Am J Epidemiol 121: 91; 1985.
29. Bouchard C, Tremblay A, Leblanc C, et al. Am J Clin Nutr 37: 461; 1983.
30. Bratteby LE, Sanhagen B, Fan H, Samuelson GA. Eur J Clin Nutr 51: 585; 1997.
31. Sallis JF, Buono MJ, Roby JJ, et al. Med Sci Sports Exerc 25: 99; 1993.
32. Westerterp KR, Bouten CV. Z Ernahrungswiss 36: 263; 1997.
33. Goran MI, Poehlman ET, Danforth EJ, Nair KS. Int J Obes Relat Metab Disord 18: 622; 1994.
34. Stager JM, Lindeman A, Edwards J. Sports Med 19: 166; 1995.
35. Racette SB, Schoeller DA, Kushner RF. Med Sci Sports Exerc 27: 126; 1995.
36. Bouten CV, Verboeket-van d V, Westerterp KR, et al. J Appl Physiol 81: 1019; 1996.
37. Danner F, Noland M, McFadden M, et al. Pediatr Exerc Sci 3: 11; 1991.
38. DuRant RH, Baranowski T, Davis H, et al. Med Sci Sports Exerc 24: 265; 1992.
39. Bailey RC, Olson J, Pepper SL, et al. Med Sci Sports Exerc 27: 1033; 1995.
40. McKenzie TL, Sallis JF, Nader PR, et al. J Appl Behav Anal 24: 141; 1991.
41. Welk GJ, Corbin CB. Res Q Exerc Sport 66: 202; 1995.
42. Maffeis C. Pinelli L, Zaffanello M, et al. Int J Obes Relat Metab Disord 19: 671; 1995.
43. Sallis JF, Strikmiller PK, Harsha DW, et al. Med Sci Sports Exerc 28: 840; 1996.
44. Freedson PS. J Sch Health 61: 220; 1991.
45. DeVoe D, Gotshall RW. J Hum Movement Studies 34: 271; 1998.
46. Bouten CV, Westerterp KR, Verduin M, Janssen JD. Med Sci Sports Exerc 26: 1516; 1994.
2705_frame_C36 Page 755 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:39 PM
47. Matthews CE, Freedson PS. Med Sci Sports Exerc 27: 1071; 1995.
48. Corbin SB. J Am Coll Dent 61: 17; 1994.
49. Welk GJ, Corbin CB. Res Q Exerc Sport 66: 202; 1995.
2705_frame_C36 Page 756 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:39 PM
2705_frame_C37 Page 757 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:40 PM
37
Thermogenesis
Introduction
This section deals with thermogenesis, which we define as energy expenditure (EE) above
resting metabolic rate (RMR) not associated with physical activity. Other sections in this
volume deal with both RMR and physical activity individually, and therefore these subjects
will not be addressed. As defined for discussion in this section, thermogenesis can be
produced from diet, drugs, and cold exposure. This section will discuss factors that may
enhance thermogenesis, followed by a discussion of potential implications of thermogen-
esis in determining total energy expenditure (TEE), and how modulations in thermogen-
esis may influence the obesity epidemic now facing the United States and other countries.
0-8493-2705-9/01/$0.00+$1.50
© 2002 by CRC Press LLC 757
2705_frame_C37 Page 758 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:40 PM
FFM
Meal Size
100
Meal Size
Body Fat
50
MS2
0 Meal Comp
0 1 2 3 4 5 6
Time in hours
FIGURE 37.1
An illustration of how the TEF (thermic effect of food) curve shifts depending on subject and meal characteristics.
Meal size and fat-free mass (FFM) tend to increase the peak; subject’s body fat and meal size squared (MS 2) tend
to lower the peak; meal size and subject’s body fat tend to move the time of the peak further out. There is some
evidence that increased fat in the meal may decrease the peak. Illustrated curve equation: 175.9 × T x e–T/1.3,
where T is time and e is the base of the natural logarithm. RMR, resting metabolic rate. Reprinted with permission
from: Reed, G. W. and Hill, J. O. Measuring the thermic effect of food. Am J Clin Nutr 63: 164-9, 1996.
Meal Composition
Macronutrient composition of the meal influences the magnitude of TEF. Meals containing
a high percentage of protein invoke a greater TEF compared to isoenergetic meals with a
2705_frame_C37 Page 759 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:40 PM
Thermogenesis 759
high percentage of carbohydrate,11-14 which are more thermogenic than a meal containing
a greater percentage of fat,13,15-17 although there is data to the contrary.6 Additionally, higher
fiber content in isoenergenic- and macronutrient-matched meals may result in enhanced
TEF compared with low fiber meals.18
An important question to consider is whether alterations in TEF can modulate daily EE.
If a high-protein diet increases TEF compared to a high-carbohydrate or high-fat diet, it
is possible that high protein diets may increase daily EE, which may explain some of the
anecdotal success of high-protein diets for weight loss. However, Westerterp et al.17 found
that changes in TEF from alterations in macronutrient content did not significantly affect
daily EE determined by whole room calorimetry. Moreover, others have also reported
isoenergetic high-carbohydrate and low-carbohydrate diets did not change TEE measure
by whole room calorimetry.19,20 Therefore, because TEF is such a small percentage of TEE,
alterations in TEF induced by changes in macronutrient composition do not appear to
increase daily EE, and thus will not enhance weight loss or weight maintenance.
for effects of obesity on TEF have been reviewed by de Jonge and Bray,34 who suggested
that obesity does decrease TEF. Additionally, obese type II diabetic men29 have lower TEF
compared to age-matched obese men, and insulin-resistant lean men exhibit decreased
TEF compare to insulin-sensitive lean men.35 However, when obese subjects lose weight,
TEF is either partially normalized36 or not different from age-matched lean subjects.37,38
These data suggest that alterations in TEF are a result of the obese state and not a
predisposing factor promoting accumulation of adiposity.
post exercise is quantitatively small, with enhanced EE of 4.5 kcal/hr for 4 hours reported
by Nichols et al.39 and 5 and 6 kcal/hr for 2 hours reported by Young5 with a 630 and
1260 kcal meal, respectively. Mechanisms for elevations in TEF following exercise are
unclear, as further research is necessary to elucidate mechanisms responsible for
enhanced TEF. Due to the small absolute increase in TEF post exercise, meal consumption
after exercise is not likely to increase whole-body EE or help promote weight loss or
maintenance.
In obese subjects, enhanced post-exercise TEF occurs following an acute one-hour bout
of cycle ergometry.32,35 After exercise, TEF was elevated 3.3 and 7.6 kcal/hr for 3 hours in
insulin-sensitive and non-insulin-sensitive obese men, respectively. While TEF was ele-
vated after exercise in obese men, values were lower than lean men with similar insulin
sensitivity.35 Thus, dampened TEF is a consequence of obesity both at rest and immediately
following exercise.
The literature is also unclear with respect to effects of chronic endurance exercise training
on TEF. Investigators have reported endurance exercise training to both decrease,40 and
increase TEF41 by 30% (4.5 kcal/hr for 2 hrs) in men and rats.42 Additionally, enhanced
TEF has been reported in obese and diabetic men following 12 weeks of cycle ergometer
training.29 While TEF was not normalized compared to age-matched lean subjects, these
data suggest that chronic endurance exercise training may increase TEF. Thus, while most
data suggest that chronic endurance exercise training increases TEF, the absolute change
relative to daily EE is small.
Thermogenesis 761
Cold-Induced Thermogenesis
During cold exposure, the first method of maintaining body heat is shunting of blood
from the periphery to the body core to reduce heat loss. As body temperature drops
slightly, shivering is initiated to generate heat through contraction of pilo-erectile muscles
in the skin, followed by involuntary contraction of skeletal muscle. Chronic cold exposure
may lead to cold acclimatization and the development of non-shivering thermogenesis
(NST), where other body tissue begins to produce heat which replaces shivering thermo-
genesis. While NST is well documented in rodents, its role in human thermoregulation
during chronic cold exposure is less clear.
Cold exposure in rats results in increased rates of heat production due, in part, to
increased sympathetic nervous system activity.54 Enhanced norepinephrine release55 and
concentration56 persist for the duration of cold exposure, and serve to increase brown
adipose tissue (BAT) thermogenesis for maintenance of body temperature. BAT is a miton-
chondrially dense specialized tissue for heat generation found in rodents and animals
which hibernate. Heat is generated from uncoupling of oxygen consumption to the phos-
phorylation of ADP to ATP such that oxygen is consumed, but ATP is not produced. The
metabolic energy is released as heat instead of captured in high-energy phosphate bonds.
Norepinephrine is thought to be a vital component to the development of cold tolerance,
as daily injections of norepinephrine improve cold tolerance in animals which had never
before been exposed to cold.57 Acute exposure of rats to cold results in loss of body weight,
and initiation of energetically inefficient shivering thermogenesis for warmth.58 However,
continued exposure results in normalization of weight as animals eat more when shivering
abates due to enhanced activity of BAT for heat production.58,59
Humans, however, respond much differently than rats when exposed to cold. There has
been little evidence to suggest that humans have the capacity for BAT thermogenesis.
Humans have a small amount of BAT, and compared to rodents this tissue is less active.
Thus, compared to rodents, humans exhibit different adaptive mechanisms to tolerate cold
exposure. Following cold acclimatization, humans tolerate lower core body temperature
during cold exposure without enhanced thermogenesis seen in the rat model.59 As a result,
humans acclimatized to cold shiver less during a cold challenge, and adaptive heat pro-
duction is reduced. One study has shown that it is possible to induce NST through chronic
cold exposure in humans;60 however, others have not replicated this result, as shivering
thermogenesis was maintained after cold acclimatization with no evidence for NST.48 Cold
acclimatization is largely an academic question, as it generally does not occur in humans
except under extreme circumstances. Normally, human behavior can be changed to get
out of the cold or alter the microenvironment to prevent a drop in body temperature.61
the consumer, both between different products and between batches of one individual
product. Additionally, supplements exhibit great variability in drug bioavailability, espe-
cially when the stimulant in question is consumed with other foods and/or drugs. Here
we will attempt to cover the main thermogenic substances on the market, as well as
potential summation or synergy when using these drugs in combination.
Caffeine
Caffeine is a stimulant of EE in both rats and humans. Caffeine ingestion alone has been
reported to increase EE by 3 to 7% for up to three hours.62-64 Dulloo et al.63 reported that
a single 100 mg caffeine dose increased resting metabolic rate by 3 to 4% over 150 minutes
in both lean and post-obese humans. Thus, caffeine ingestion may have utility in enhancing
daily EE for weight loss. However, some investigators have not observed increased EE
with caffeine ingestion alone,65 likely due to small dose administration, as caffeine’s effects
on thermogenesis are dose dependent.66 The mechanism of action of caffeine’s stimulatory
effect on EE may be a result of the energy cost of enhanced lipolysis from phosphodi-
esterase inhibition and/or antagonism of adenosine action.67 In addition to thermogenic
properties of caffeine ingested alone, caffeine also increases TEF when consumed with a
meal in both young and old men and women.68 Additionally, caffeine ingestion with a
meal partially normalizes the attenuated TEF observed in post-obese subjects.63
Not all population groups exhibit similar increases in thermogenesis following caffeine
consumption. Thermogenic effects of caffeine appear to be similar in men and women,68
and in habitual and non-habitual consumers of caffeine.69 However, older men and women
tend to exhibit less of an increase in thermogenesis when compared to young controls.70
Caffeine-stimulated thermogenesis may also be attenuated in endurance-trained subjects
compared to sedentary control subjects.69 Differences in the magnitude of caffeine-induced
thermogenesis in obese compared to lean individuals is unclear. Some investigators
reported less of an effect of caffeine to increase thermogenesis in obese compared to lean
women,71 while others reported no difference in the thermogenic response to caffeine in
lean and obese women.72,73
Following repeated administration of caffeine, Dulloo et al.63 reported that the net
increase in daily EE in post-obese subjects was roughly half that observed in lean controls.
This study found that 100 mg of caffeine ingested at 2-hour intervals for 12 hours promoted
an 11 and 8% increase in EE in lean and post-obese subjects, respectively, during that 12-
hour period, with no effect of caffeine on subsequent 12-hour EE (Figure 37.2).63 Caffeine
administration repeated for 12 hours resulted in an increase in daily EE of 150 kcal/day
in lean, and 79 kcal/day in post-obese subjects. Thus, this study suggested that caffeine
consumption throughout the day may have utility in promoting weight loss or weight
maintenance. However, the effects of caffeine supplementation on weight loss in obese
subjects during an energy-restricted diet were evaluated in a 24-week double-blind trial
by Astrup et al.74 These authors reported no significant difference in weight loss during
200 mg caffeine supplementation administered three times per day compared to placebo
in obese subjects (Figure 37.3). Subjects supplemented with caffeine reported side effects
which included dizziness, headache, and insomnia which abated after eight weeks, with
no effects on systolic or diastolic blood pressure or heart rate. Thus, these data suggest
that caffeine alone in combination with energy restriction offers no benefit for added
weight loss compared to placebo control. Considering the small effect of caffeine to
stimulate thermogenesis, it is not surprising that caffeine ingestion alone does enhance
weight loss via enhanced thermogenesis. However, based on data from Dulloo et al.,63
caffeine supplementation may be needed more times per day than performed by Astrup
2705_frame_C37 Page 763 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:40 PM
Thermogenesis 763
5.0 (+8% )
p < 0.05 Control
Caffeine
NS
Energy Expenditure ( MJ )
NS
2.5
0
Lean Post - Lean Post -
obese obese
FIGURE 37.2
Energy expenditure compartmented into the first 12-h d period (0 to 12 h) and the subsequent 12-h night period
(12 to 24 h) in lean (n = 5) and postobese (n = 6) subjects during a control study (open bars) and during
administration of caffeine. Vertical bars represent the SEM values. The probability level for significant differences
is for paired data. MG values can be converted to kcal by multiplying them by 239. Reprinted with permission
from: Dulloo, A. G., Geissler, C. A., Horton, T., Collins, A., and Miller, D. S. Normal caffeine consumption:
influence on thermogenesis and daily energy expenditure in lean and postobese human volunteers. Am J Clin
Nutr 49: 44-50, 1989.
et al.74 to significantly increase daily EE. If true, repeated caffeine supplementation for 12
hours during the day may be useful in promoting enhanced EE for weight loss. While not
discussed in this section, caffeine ingestion may be beneficial for assisting weight loss via
appetite suppression, regardless of effects on thermogenesis.
Ephedrine
Ephedrine is a sympathomimetic agent which increases energy expenditure by enhancing
norepinephrine release from sympathetic nerve endings with stimulation of all three beta
receptor subtypes.75 Ephedrine administration alone via intravenous injection has been
reported to increase resting energy expenditure by 16% in dogs76a and 17% in obese
premenopausal women.76 Moreover, chronic oral ephedrine administration in female sub-
jects induced a sustained 10% increase in resting metabolic rate compared to pretreatment
values.77 Similarly, chronic administration of ephedrine alone to mice increased EE by 9%
and induced an 18% decrease in body weight.78 Chronic ephedrine supplementation may
increase the magnitude of enhanced EE compared to acute ephedrine administration.79
2705_frame_C37 Page 764 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:40 PM
FIGURE 37.3
Changes in body weight of diet plus placebo, caffeine (C), ephedrine (E) or E + C. Means ± SEM are presented.
E + C versus placebo: *P<0.04 †P<0.01. Reprinted with permission from: Astrup, A., Breum, L., Toubro, S., Hein,
P., and Quaade, F. The effect and safety of an ephedrine/caffeine compound compared to ephedrine, caffeine,
and placebo in obese subjects on an energy restricted diet. A double blind trial. Int J Obes Relat Metab Disord 16:
269-77, 1992.
These data suggest that chronic ephedrine administration may be a useful adjunct to
promote weight loss in obese individuals.
Despite evidence suggesting ephedrine alone can increase RMR, experimental evidence
is lacking for ephedrine supplementation alone in enhancing weight loss when combined
with energy restriction. Astrup et al.74 reported that ephedrine supplementation of 20 mg
three times per day during energy restriction for 24 weeks did not enhance weight loss
compared to placebo (Figure 37.3). Subjects reported significantly more side effects com-
pared to caffeine-only supplementation, which also did not enhance weight loss, with
symptoms including insomnia, tremor, and dry mouth most prevalent for the first four
weeks of treatment. Additionally, Pasquali et al.80 reported no enhancement of weight loss
with two doses of ephedrine compared to placebo during a three-month intervention.
While evidence suggests ephedrine administration alone does not enhance weight loss
compared to placebo, several studies have investigated ephedrine combined with other
potentially thermogenic agents on RMR and weight loss. A combination of ephedrine and
caffeine administration is more effective in enhancing thermogenesis compared to either
caffeine or ephedrine alone,81 with above additive synergism observed at a dose of 20 mg
ephedrine and 200 mg caffeine.82,83 Additionally, data suggest that addition of ephedrine
and caffeine to an energy-restricted diet enhances weight loss in obese women compared
to caffeine or ephedrine administered separately during isocaloric energy restriction,74 or
compared to energy restriction alone.84 Astrup et al.71 reported supplementation with
ephedrine plus caffeine during a 6-month energy-restricted diet enhanced weight loss by
3.4 kg compared with placebo, caffeine alone, or ephedrine alone (Figure 37.3). Similarly,
Dulloo and Miller81 reported that daily administration of 22 mg ephedrine, 30 mg caffeine,
and 50 mg theophylline to post-obese subjects decreased energy intake by 16% and
increased EE 8%. These data are corroborated by animal studies reporting decreased body
weight during eight weeks of daily ephedrine and caffeine supplementation due to
decreased energy intake and increased EE in monkeys.85 These data suggest that ephedrine
plus caffeine supplementation decreases appetite and enhances TEE, which may be ben-
eficial for weight loss practices in the obese.
Ephedrine supplementation has also been combined with aspirin, which doubled ephe-
drine’s thermogenic action in mice78 and enhanced ephedrine stimulation of TEF in obese,
but not lean women.86 Aspirin acts only to enhance the thermogenic effects of ephedrine,
2705_frame_C37 Page 765 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:40 PM
Thermogenesis 765
as chronic aspirin administration alone had no effect on energy balance in mice.78 However,
addition of aspirin to an ephedrine and caffeine mixture does not further potentiate TEF
induced by ephedrine and caffeine alone in lean and obese women.86 The drug combina-
tion of ephedrine, caffeine, and aspirin taken before meals for two months has been
reported to induce weight loss without controlled energy restriction in a double-blind
experiment in obese humans.87
These data suggest that administration of caffeine and ephedrine in combination, with
or without aspirin, may increase daily EE and enhance weight loss during energy restric-
tion. The increase in metabolic rate is small and may promote weight loss from appetite
suppression when these drugs are used in combination.84,85
Nicotine
Anecdotal evidence suggests that smoking either increases metabolic rate, decreases appe-
tite, or both, as weight gain frequently occurs with smoking cessation. Many investigations
support the former, as resting EE in men has been found to increase 5% for one hour after
smoking 2 cigarettes in 20 minutes (.8 mg nicotine yield),88 3.3% over a 3-hour period after
smoking 4 cigarettes (3.2 mg nicotine yield),62 6.5% over 2 hours following nicotine nasal
spray administration,89 and 6% increase in RMR in male habitual smokers after smoking
2 cigarettes in 20 minutes.90 While an increase in RMR may be advantageous for weight
loss or weight maintenance, the absolute increase in EE from nicotine administration is
not convincing. Collins et al.62 reported the most dramatic increase in RMR (6%) for 3 hours
after smoking 2 cigarettes in 20 minutes. However, the absolute increase in EE was only
an additional 12.5 kcals over the 3-hour period, which is unlikely to promote substantial
weight loss, even if smoking was maintained throughout the day. DIT is not enhanced
following nicotine administration via nasal inhalation at 15 micrograms/kg body weight.89
Additionally, habitual smoking does not appear to influence nicotine-induced thermogen-
esis in men.90 Thus, data are lacking to suggest nicotine administration, either from cigarette
smoking or nasal spray inhalation, may have weight loss effects via enhancement of EE.
Nicotine may be more potent in appetite suppression than in enhancement of EE. Miyata
et al. 91 reported that systemic nicotine infusion decreased body weight in rats via reduc-
tions in energy intake, with the most dramatic effects on reduction in meal number. Gender
differences were not observed for the alterations in meal size and number and body weight
reduction during nicotine administration in rats.92 Increased concentrations of serotonin
and dopamine were found in the lateral hypothalamus following nicotine administration,
which suggested that nicotine may exert anorectic effects in part by alterations in these
brain neurotransmitters. Appetite supressive effects of nicotine are not as clear in humans.
Perkins et al.93 administered nicotine via nasal spray inhalation at three doses and then
monitored subsequent meal size following an overnight fast. Suprisingly, the authors
reported meal caloric intake was increased following nicotine administration in both men
and women compared to placebo controls. However, the same authors reported that
nicotine reduced appetite in men during a subsequent meal test when nicotine was
administered following consumption of a morning meal.94 More studies are needed to
determine if nicotine is an anorectic agent in humans.
Only one study investigated gender differences in thermogenic effects of nicotine, where
nicotine was administered via nasal spray inhalation.89 Nicotine was administered once
every 30 minutes for 2 hours at 20 micrograms nicotine/kg for each dose. Nicotine
increased resting EE in men, but not women. Since nicotine intake is associated with lower
body weights in both men and women, the authors speculated that nicotine exerts anorec-
tic effects in women via more dramatic appetite suppression compared to men.
2705_frame_C37 Page 766 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:40 PM
Obviously, cigarette smoking should not be used to promote weight loss, due to well
documented health risks caused by smoking. However, since smoking cessation should
be a health goal for the population, understanding the expected alterations in appetite
and/or RMR following nicotine withdrawl will be vital to attenuate weight gain often
reported with smoking cessation. The literature suggests that clinicians and health pro-
fessionals may expect a slight decrease in RMR, potentially as dramatic as 6% in chronic
smokers, upon cessation of smoking.62 Assuming that smoking only occurs during waking
hours, 8 hours sleep/night, a caloric equivalent for oxygen of 4.85 kcal/L O2, and RMR
of 3.5 ml/kg/min; a 6% decrease in RMR in a 70 kg individual would be predicted to
decrease EE by only 70 kcal/day. While the accumulation of 70 kcal/day positive energy
balance may promote slight weight gain, this simple calculation suggests that enhanced
appetite following smoking cessation may be more powerful for promoting weight gain,
and thus behavioral therapy may be indicated to help control energy intake.
Sibutramine
Sibutramine is a serotonin and norepinephrine reuptake inhibitor95 which enhances weight
loss compared to placebo both with96,97 and without95 behavior modification. However,
thermogenic effects of sibutramine are less clear. Studies in rats suggest that sibutramine
increases resting EE via beta adrenergic stimulation of BAT.98 However, human data
suggests that sibutramine increases resting metabolic rate,99 or does not change RMR or
TEF.96,97 Several investigators have reported that sibutramine attenuates the decline in
RMR that occurs during weight loss.100,101 Thus, effects of sibutramine on thermogenesis
in humans are unclear; however, evidence indicates that sibutramine does decrease appe-
tite and/or increase satiety, which promotes weight loss.99,100
Fenfluramine
Fenfluramine is a serotonin-releasing agent and reuptake inhibitor102 which enhances
weight loss compared to placebo in both rats103 and humans.104-106 Effects of fenfluramine
on thermogenesis are not clear, and there appear to be species differences which further
cloud data interpretation. Investigations on rats suggested fenfluramine promotes a tran-
sient decrease in energy intake, with maintenance of weight loss via enhanced TEF, as
there were no changes in resting energy expenditure.103,107 Others, however, reported that
fenfluramine decreased energy intake throughout the treatment period108 in rats. In
humans, fenfluramine appears to act as an appetite suppressant, with decreased energy
intake compared to placebo reported for treatment groups.105 Most investigators report
unchanged RMR and TEF following fenfluramine treatment in humans.105,109-111 However,
enhanced TEF has been reported in humans following acute administration of fenflu-
2705_frame_C37 Page 767 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:40 PM
Thermogenesis 767
ramine in men.112 Thus, fenfluramine appears to have little, if any, thermogenic action,
with enhancement of weight loss in humans predominately via appetite suppression.
obese, which suggests that UCP1 is not a determinant of obesity.128 Recent reports indicate
that UCP3 knockout mice are also not obese, and they do not show alterations in fatty
acid oxidation, exercise tolerance, or cold-induced thermogenesis.129,130 These knockout
mice do exhibit more tightly coupled mitochondria (state 3/state 4 ratio) as well as reduced
production of reactive oxygen species. Thus, these data suggest that neither UCP1 nor 3
solely determine metabolic rate or body weight regulation.
Thermogenesis 769
FIGURE 37.4
The relation of the change in (A) basal metabolic rate, (B) postprandial thermogenesis, and (C) activity thermo-
genesis with fat gain after overfeeding (27-33). Exercise levels and the thermic efficiency of exercise were
unchanged with overfeeding, so that changes in activity thermogenesis represent changes in NEAT. Reprinted
with permission from: Levine, J. A., Eberhardt, N. L., and Jensen, M. D. Role of nonexercise activity thermogenesis
in resistance to fat gain in humans [see comments]. Science 283: 212-4, 1999.
the day with no other lifestyle changes, the authors predicted weight loss of up to 5 kg
body weight in one year. Thus, NEAT activities increase EE only slightly, but may have
important implications for long-term energy balance.
Thermic effect of food has the largest influence in dictating changes in whole-body EE
excluding physical activity and NEAT. However, diet composition is the most influential
moderator of TEF, more so than age, gender, or weight.11-17 Thus, differences between
individuals in TEF are mostly due to alterations in macronutrient composition of the diet
(see “Meal Composition” under TEF) and have very small effects on changing whole body
EE. It is therefore unlikely that alterations in TEF are responsible for changes in daily EE
in most people. Rather, the amount of planned physical activity far exceeds any small
increment in thermogenesis induced by drugs, cold, or diet in determining daily EE.
Conclusions
Thermogenesis, as defined in this section, is an increase in whole body EE above RMR
which is not due to physical activity. Meal consumption increases EE, called TEF, which
accounts for up to 10% of daily EE and therefore is the most important element in
determining thermogenesis. Over-the-counter stimulants such as caffeine, ephedrine, and
nicotine are also important in enhancing thermogenesis and reducing appetite, and may
be beneficial in enhancing weight loss during energy restriction. Cold exposure also can
induce thermogenesis to maintain body temperature. But in humans, this process is largely
unimportant except under extraordinary circumstances, as behavior can be changed to
alter our microenvironment to prevent prolonged cold exposure necessary to induce
shivering and non-shivering thermogenesis observed in rodents. Alterations in thermo-
genesis are also unlikely to play a major role in the development of obesity and the growing
problem of obesity around the world, since thermogenesis is a relatively minor determi-
nant of whole-body EE.
2705_frame_C37 Page 770 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:40 PM
References
1. Reed GW, Hill JO. Am J Clin Nutr 63: 164; 1996.
2. Horton ES. Am J Clin Nutr 38: 972; 1983.
3. Schutz Y, Bessard T, Jequier E. Am J Clin Nutr 40: 542; 1984.
4. Weststrate JA. Am J Clin Nutr 58: 592; 1993.
5. Young JC. Eur J Appl Physiol 70: 437; 1995.
6. Kinabo JL, Durnin JV. Br J Nutr 64: 37-44, 1990.
7. Belko AZ, Barbieri TF, Wong, EC. Am J Clin Nutr 43: 863; 1986.
8. D’Alessio DA, Kavle EC, Mozzoli MA, et al. J Clin Invest 81: 1781; 1988.
9. Tai MM, Castillo P, Pi-Sunyer FX. Am J Clin Nutr 54: 783; 1991.
10. Kinabo JL, Durnin, JV. Eur J Clin Nutr 44: 389; 1990.
11. Karst H, Steiniger J, Noack R, Steglich HD. Ann Nutr Metab 28: 245; 1984.
12. Nair KS, Halliday D, Garrow JS. Clin Sci 65: 307; 1983.
13. Tappy L. Reprod Nutr Dev 36: 391; 1996.
14. Zed C, James WP. Int J Obes 10: 391; 1986
15. Labayen I, Forga L, Martinez JA. Eur J Nutr 38: 158; 1999.
16. Schwartz RS, Ravussin E, Massari M. et al. Metabolism 34: 285; 1985.
17. Westerterp KR, Wilson SA, Rolland V. Int J Obes Relat Metab Disord 23: 287; 1999.
18. Raben A, Christensen NJ, Madsen J, et al. Am J Clin Nutr 59: 1386; 1994.
19. Abbott WG, Howard BV, Ruotolo G, Ravussin E. Am J Physiol 258: E347; 1990.
20. Hill JO, Peters JC, Reed GW, et al. Am J Clin Nutr 54: 10; 1991.
21. Tataranni PA, Larson DE, Snitker S, Ravussin E. Am J Clin Nutr 61: 1013; 1995.
22. Schwartz RS, Jaeger LF, Veith RC. Metabolism 39: 733; 1990.
23. Armellini F, Zamboni M, Mino A, et al. Metabolism 49: 6; 2000.
24. Murgatroyd PR, Van De Ven ML, Goldberg GR, Prentice AM. Br J Nutr 75: 33; 1996
25. Piers LS, Diggavi SN, Rijskamp J, et al. Am J Clin Nutr 61: 296; 1995.
26. Tai MM, Castillo TP, Pi-Sunyer FX. Am J Clin Nutr 66: 1110; 1997.
27. Melanson KJ, Saltzman E, Russell R, Roberts SB. J Nutr 126: 2531; 1996.
28. Nelson KM, Weinsier RL, James LD, et al. Am J Clin Nutr 55: 924; 1992.
29. Segal KR, Blando L, Ginsberg-Fellner F, Edano A. Metabolism 41: 868; 1992.
30. Segal KR, Chun A, Coronel P, et al. Metabolism 41: 754; 1992.
31. Segal KR, Edano A, Tomas MB. Metabolism 39: 985; 1990.
32. Segal KR, Gutin B, Albu J, Pi-Sunyer FX. Am J Physiol 252: E110; 1987.
33. Swaminathan R, King RF, Holmfield J, et al. Am J Clin Nutr 42: 177; 1985.
34. de Jonge L, Bray GA. Obes Res 5: 622; 1997.
35. Segal KR, Albu J, Chun A, et al. J Clin Invest 89: 824; 1992.
36. Schwartz RS, Halter JB, Bierman, EL. Metabolism 32: 114; 1983.
37. Bukkens SG, McNeill G, Smith JS, Morrison DC. Int J Obes 15: 147; 1991.
38. Weinsier RL, Nelson KM, Hensrud DD. J Clin Invest 95: 980; 1995.
39. Nichols J, Ross S, Patterson P. Ann Nutr Metab 32: 215; 1988.
40. Poehlman ET, Melby CL, Badylak SF. Am J Clin Nutr 47: 793; 1988.
41. Witt KA, Snook JT, O’Dorisio TM, et al. Int J Sport Nutr 3: 272; 1993.
42. McDonald RB, Wickler S, Horwitz B, Stern JS. Med Sci Sports Exerc 20: 44; 1988.
43. King RF, McMahon MJ, Almond DJ. Clin Sci 71: 31; 1986.
44. Klein S, Goran M. Metabolism 42: 1201; 1993.
45. Poehlman ET, Tremblay A, Despres JP, et al. Am J Clin Nutr 43: 723; 1986.
46. Welle SL, Nair KS, Campbell RG. Am J Physiol 256: R653; 1989.
47. Hill JO, Peters JC, Yang D, et al. Metabolism 38: 641; 1989.
48. Poehlman ET, Tremblay A, Fontaine E, et al. Metabolism 35: 30; 1986.
49. Ravussin E, Schutz Y, Acheson KJ, et al. Am J Physiol 249: E470; 1985.
50. Roberts SB, Young VR, Fuss P, et al. Am J Physiol 259: R461; 1990.
51. Weststrate JA, Hautvast JG. Metabolism 39: 1232; 1990.
2705_frame_C37 Page 771 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:40 PM
Thermogenesis 771
106. O’Connor HT, Richman RM, Steinbeck S, Caterson ID. Int J Obes Relat Metab Disord 19: 181;
1995.
107. Levitsky DA, Stallone D. Clin Neuropharmacol 11: 90S; 1988.
108. Vickers SP, Benwell KR, Porter RH, et al. Br J Pharmacol 130: 1305; 2000.
109. Durnin JV, Womersley J. Br J Pharmacol 49: 115; 1973.
110. Garrow JS, Belton EA, Daniels A. Lancet 2: 559; 1972.
111. Recasens MA, Barenys M, Sola R, et al. Int J Obes Relat Metab Disord 19: 162; 1995.
112. Troiano RP, Levitsky DA, Kalkwarf HJ. Int J Obes 14: 647; 1990.
113. Ricquier D, Bouillaud F. Biochem J 345(2): 161; 2000.
114. Heaton GM, Wagenvoord RJ, Kemp Jr, A, Nicholls DG. Eur J Biochem 82: 515; 1978.
115. Lin CS, Hackenberg H, Klingenberg EM. FEBS Lett 113: 304; 1980.
116. Jacobsson A, Stadler U, Glotzer MA, Kozak LP. J Biol Chem 260: 16250; 1985.
117. Nicholls DG. Biochim Biophys Acta 549: 1; 1979.
118. Fleury C, Neverova M, Collins S, et al. Nat Genet 15: 269; 1997.
119 Gimeno RE, Dembski M, Weng X, et al. Diabetes 46: 900; 1997.
120. Boss O, Samec S, Kuhne F, et al. J Biol Chem 273: 5; 1998.
121. Brun S, Carmona MC, Mampel T, et al. FEBS Lett 453: 205; 1999.
122. Samec S, Seydoux J, Dulloo AG. FASEB J 12: 715; 1998.
123. Millet L, Vidal H, Andreelli F, et al. J Clin Invest 100: 2665; 1997.
124. Ma SW, Foster DO. Can J Physiol Pharmacol 64: 1252; 1986.
125. Esterbauer H, Oberkofler H, Dallinger G, et al. Diabetologia 42: 302; 1999.
126. Vidal-Puig A, Rosenbaum M, Considine RC, et al. Obes Res 7: 133; 1999.
127. Weigle DS, Selfridge LE, Schwartz MW, et al. Diabetes 47: 298; 1998.
128. Enerback S, Jacobsson A, Simpson EM, et al. Nature 387: 90; 1997.
129. Weststrate JA, Hautvast JG. Metabolism 39: 1232; 1990.
130. Witt KA, Snook JT, O’Dorisio TM, et al. Int J Sport Nutr 3: 272; 1993.
131. Segal KR, Gutin B, Nyman AM, Pi-Sunyer FX. J Clin Invest 76: 1107; 1985.
132. Levine JA, Eberhardt NL, Jensen MD. Science 283: 212; 1999.
133. Levine J, Baukol P, Pavlidis I. N Engl J Med 341(27): 2100, 1999.
2705_frame_C38 Page 773 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:41 PM
38
Environmental Challenges and Assessment*
Introduction
Several environmental changes, including advances in technology, research, and educa-
tion, as well as economic improvements have brought about the near disappearance of
many nutritional disorders such as pellagra, beriberi, scurvy, and rickets.1 However, while
these nutritional problems have declined, other nutritional disorders have increased. For
example, the prevalence of overweight and obesity has increased from 43 to 54% of the
U.S. population since 1980 (Figure 38.1).2 Similar increases have occurred in Europe and
other industrialized countries.3
In this section, the major environmental factors that have contributed to the rise in
obesity are examined. In addition, methods of assessing environmental influences at the
population and clinical levels are reviewed.
Etiology of Obesity
Obesity is the result of an energy imbalance in which intake exceeds expenditure. Both
biological and behavioral factors play a role in the development of obesity.4 Research over
the past 15 years has underscored the importance of genetic factors.5,6 However, it is
unlikely that changes in the gene pool could account for the significant increase in obesity
that has occurred since 1980 in both adults and children (Figures 38.1 and 38.2).2,3,7-9 People
of the same genetic makeup who move to industrialized cultures from less industrialized
cultures have a corresponding increase in body weight, suggesting the importance of
environmental factors in the development of obesity.10
Indeed, the environment of industrialized countries has been viewed as so severely
promoting obesity that it has been labeled “toxic.”11,12 In order to combat this toxic envi-
ronment, extreme measures have been proposed, including a tax on high-fat, low-nutrition
foods.13-15 Clearly, the environment of industrialized nations is obesity-promoting.4,16,17 In
0-8493-2705-9/01/$0.00+$1.50
© 2002 by CRC Press LLC 773
2705_frame_C38 Page 774 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:41 PM
60
Prevalence % 50
40
Obesity
30
Overweight
20
10
0
1960-62 1971-74 1976-80 1988-94
NHES I NHANES I NHANES NHANES
II III
FIGURE 38.1
Prevalence of overweight (BMI ≥ 25–29.9 kg/m2) and obesity (BMI ≥ 30 kg/m2) in the U.S. from 1960 to 1994.
NHES = National Health Examination Survey; NHANES = National Health and Nutrition Examination Survey.
Flegal, K.M., et al., Int. J. Obes. Relat. Metab. Disord., 22: 39; 1998, with permission.
16
14
12
10 6-11 y
Percentage %
12-17y
8
6
4
2
0
1963-70 1971-74 1976-80 1988-94
NHES NHANES I NHANES II NHANES III
FIGURE 38.2
Prevalence of overweight and obesity (BMI ≥ 95th percentile) in children and adolescents in the U.S., 1963–1994.
Third Report on Nutrition Monitoring in the United States, U.S. Government Printing Office, Washington, D.C.,
1995, 1–51; Troiano, R.P. et al., Arch. Pediatr. Adolesc. Med., 149: 1085; 1995.
2705_frame_C38 Page 775 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:41 PM
3900
3800
3700
Food energy (kcal/d)
3600
3500
3400
3300
3200
3100
3000
1909 1945 1946 1965 1970 1980 1994
FIGURE 38.3
Food energy per capita per day in the U.S. USDA Center for Nutrition Policy and Promotion, Washington, D.C.,
1996, 1–10.
order to better understand the environmental influences on obesity, both energy intake
and expenditure must be examined.
Environmental Factors
Energy intake
Despite the increasing prevalence of obesity, U.S. data on food intake suggest only a slight
increase or modest decline in energy intake over the past two to three decades.18,19 Simi-
larly, daily energy intake in England appears to have decreased.20 However, the interpre-
tation of these data is compromised given the consistent inaccuracy of self-reported food
intake.21-23
Several other key indicators suggest that energy consumption may have increased. Data
from the U.S. Department of Agriculture (USDA) indicate that the food supply has
increased substantially over the past century and most significantly over the past few
decades (Figure 38.3). Specifically, the amount of food available for consumption per
capita per day has increased from 3300 kcalories in 1980 to 3800 kcalories in 1994.24
Although these data do not measure energy consumption, other indicators, including
increases in portion sizes and the widespread availability of high-fat, energy-dense foods,
further suggest that increases in energy intake likely account, in part, for the rising
prevalence of obesity.25
TABLE 38.1
Typical vs. Recommended Serving Sizes
Typical USDA
Medium baked potato 7 oz 4 oz
Medium bagel 4 oz 2 oz
Medium muffin 6 oz 2 oz
USDA = United States Department of Agriculture
Young, L.R. and Nestle, M., JADA, 98: 458; 1998,
with permission.
available, today 16, 32, and 64 oz drinks can be purchased at convenience stores and
restaurants nationwide.11 A McDonald’s “medium” serving of French fries was re-classi-
fied to “small” in order to make room for a new supersized serving of French fries. In
addition, recommended serving sizes are often much smaller than people’s perceptions.
For example, research participants selected a “medium” bagel that was twice the size of
the recommended USDA serving, and chose a “medium” muffin that was three times the
recommended serving size (Table 38.1).26
Consumption of larger portions is further enhanced by attractive size/quantity dis-
counts. “Value meals” offering larger burgers, fries, and soft drinks for only a small
increase in cost have continued to gain in popularity. Similarly, a 22 oz soft drink at a
movie theatre costs $2.50 while a drink twice the size (i.e., 44 oz) costs only 50 cents more.
In addition, marketing data suggest that supersizing and multiple unit pricing (i.e., “2 for
$1.00” instead of “50 cents each”) translate into greater food consumption.11 In one study,27
subjects poured themselves 20% more bottled water when it came in a two-liter container
than when it came in a one-liter container. Interestingly, when the containers were labeled
“tap water,” participants poured the same amount from each container, suggesting that
consumption is influenced by perceived cost/value. Other research has shown that reduc-
ing the price of health foods increases sales of these items.28,29
1909 1994
Other
22% Other Grains
23% 25%
Grains
39%
Sugars and
sweeteners
11% Sugars and Meat,
sweeteners poultry and
Fats and 18% fish
oils Meat, 14%
poultry and Fats and
12%
fish oils
16% 20%
FIGURE 38.4
Sources of food energy in the U.S. food supply. USDA Center for Nutrition Policy and Promotion, Washington,
D.C., 1996, 1–10.
1.5
1.4
Fats, oils, prepackaged
foods, frozen meals
1.3
Share Index* (1980 = 1)
1.2
0.7
0.6
80
82
84
86
88
90
92
19
19
19
19
19
19
19
FIGURE 38.5
Relative changes in amount of home foods purchased, 1980 to 1992. U.S. Bureau of Labor Statistics, Monthly
Labor Review, December: 3–32. * reflects food purchasing habits adjusted for price changes.
proportion of home food purchases of fats, oils, prepackaged foods, and frozen meals has
increased more than any other category of food since the 1980s, even after controlling for
changes in food prices.37 The second largest increase was in cereal and bakery products,
including cookies, cakes, and doughnuts (Figure 38.5). Interestingly, the percentage of
Americans consuming low-fat products has also increased from 19% in 1978 to 76% in
2705_frame_C38 Page 778 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:41 PM
1991.38 The added sugars in low-fat foods and the belief that larger portions are more
acceptable may offset any caloric benefit of consuming low-fat products.39
Summary
The available research, based principally on self-report, does not reveal significant
increases in dietary intake over the past few decades. However, several indicators suggest
that the environment has promoted increased energy intake. Two principal factors appear
to be responsible: 1) increasing portion sizes; and, 2) accessibility to high-fat, energy-dense
foods at affordable prices.
Energy Expenditure
Although about one-fourth of U.S. adults do not engage in any physical activity during
their leisure time, there is little evidence that physical activity levels have changed signif-
icantly over the past decade (Figure 38.6).40 Nonetheless, it is generally accepted that with
the modernization of society, energy expenditure has decreased and is at least partly
responsible for the increasing prevalence of obesity.20,41,42 The decrease in energy expen-
diture is most likely due to changes in activities of daily living.41 While data in the U.S.
are lacking, evidence from Finland and Britain support that decreases in energy spent on
activities of daily living and work have indeed occurred.43
Table 38.2 lists some of the ways time (and energy) is saved each day. While little data
have documented trends in the use of such energy-saving devices, consumer purchases
suggest a proliferation. Automobiles are clearly the preferred mode of travel over walking
in both the U.S. (Figure 38.7)44 and the United Kingdom.45 Purchases of cable television
and videocassette rentals have increased dramatically (Figure 38.8).46 While longitudinal
30
25
Prevalence %
20
No activity
15 Regular, sustained
Regular, vigorous
10
0
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
19
19
19
19
19
19
19
FIGURE 38.6
Trends in leisure-time physical activity of adults age 18+ years. U.S. Department of Health and Human Services,
Washington, D.C., 1996, 88-50210, Government Printing Office.
2705_frame_C38 Page 779 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:41 PM
TABLE 38.2
Energy Savers
Personal computers
Telecommuting
Cellular phones
E-mail/Internet
Shopping by phone
Food delivery services
Phone extensions
Dishwashers
Escalators/Elevators
Cable movies
Drive-thru windows
Computer games
Intercoms
Moving sidewalks
Remote controls
Garage door openers
100
80
Percentage of Trips/Year
60 Other
Bicycle
40 Public Transit
20 Walk
Motor Vehicle
0
1977 1983 1990 1995
50 Cable television
Percentage of households 40
30
20 Rental of videocassettes
10 Videocassette recorders
Telephone answering machines
Computers
0
80
82
84
86
88
90
19
19
19
19
19
19
FIGURE 38.8
Percentage of households reporting expenditures, 1980 to 1990. U.S. Bureau of Labor Statistics, Monthly Labor
Review, May 18–26, 1992.
data on television viewing in the U.S. are lacking, television viewing in England has
increased from 13 hours per week in the 1960s to 26 hours per week today.20 In the U.S.,
television viewing is strongly related to the increasing prevalence of obesity among
children47-49 and to the level of obesity in adults.50,51 Research is needed from other countries
and for other sedentary activities such as video watching and computer work.
80
70
Prevalence % 60 Females
50
40
30
Males
20
10
0
Non-Hispanic Non-Hispanic Mexican-
White Black American
FIGURE 38.9
Prevalence of overweight (BMI ≥ 25 kg/m2) in the U.S. by race-ethnic group for men and women age 20–74
years, 1998–1994. Flegal, K.M., et al., Int. J. Obes. Relat. Metab. Disord., 22: 39; 1998, with permission.
Epidemiologic Assessment
Physical Activity
Although physical activity tends to be over-reported,23,40 questionnaires are frequently
used in epidemiologic studies to classify levels of physical activity.63,64 Although several
physical activity measures exist (e.g., diaries, retrospective histories), recall surveys appear
to be the least likely to influence behavior and generally require the least amount of effort
by respondents.40,63 Among the most frequently used measures are the Physical Activity
Recall (PAR)65 and the Paffenbarger.66 The PAR is available in interviewer- and self-
administered versions65 and categorizes activities by their intensity; the Paffenbarger is a
one-page questionnaire that evaluates habitual daily and weekly activity. Measures of
sedentary-promoting behaviors, such as television viewing and computer use, are only
beginning to be utilized and validated. However, sedentary behavior can be simply
assessed by the number of reported minutes per day spent in sedentary behaviors (e.g.,
watching television, using the computer, video games, and driving).
Food Intake
As noted earlier, food intake tends to be underreported, particularly in obese individuals.22
Nonetheless, several methods of assessment exist to measure nutrient intake. The 24-hour
recall has been used in many large-scale studies (e.g., the National Health and Nutrition
Examination Surveys) to assess nutrient intake. The 24-hour recall is typically adminis-
tered by trained interviewers. It takes about 20 minutes to complete, requires no record
keeping on the part of respondents, and, unlike other measures (e.g., food diaries), does
not cause subjects to alter their intake.67 Alternatively, if assessment of subjects’ average,
long-term intake is needed (rather than a more precise measurement of short-term con-
sumption), food frequency questionnaires (FFQ) are an appropriate alternative. FFQ (e.g.,
2705_frame_C38 Page 782 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:41 PM
the Block68) assess the frequency and quantity of habitual consumption of food items listed
on a questionnaire in reference to the past week or month. These are easy to administer
and do not require trained interviewers.
Clinical Assessment
Physical Activity
The questionnaires reviewed above (i.e., PAR65 and the Paffenbarger66) may also be useful
in assessing physical activity in the clinical setting. Alternatively, a few simple questions
may provide a practical and efficient means of assessing physical activity. These include:
“How many minutes do you spend each week in planned physical activity?”; “Approxi-
mately how many city blocks do you walk each day?”; and “How many flights of stairs
do you climb each day?” Television viewing, computer and video game use, and driving
time may also be evaluated in the clinical setting by weekly number of minutes for each
activity. Finally, pedometers, which provide a count of the total number of steps taken
each day, can be very useful in monitoring changes in physical activity.
Food Intake
The most commonly used means to assess energy and nutrient intake in the clinical setting
is the food record. Food records are patients’ daily notations of the type, quantity, and
calories of food and liquid consumed. Patients are instructed to record all meals, drinks,
and snacks immediately after eating. Patients may also record the number of fat grams
consumed, place of consumption, and minutes of television viewing per day. It should
also be noted that food records are commonly used as an intervention tool.69 If a less
reactive and more immediate assessment of intake is required, FFQ or 24-hour recalls may
be used. Restaurant eating can be assessed at the time of the clinic assessment with the
question, “How many times per week, on average, do you eat at restaurants?”.
Assessment Model
The ultimate challenge of environmental assessment is to integrate the multiple factors
that influence obesity. As Figure 38.10 illustrates, food intake and physical activity may
result from a combination of influences (e.g., large portion sizes, use of labor-saving
devices) that interact with cultural and social factors to promote obesity. In this model,
excess food intake may be due to larger portion sizes at restaurants, but other factors must
also be considered. For example, cultural taste preferences and economic status may also
influence restaurant selection. Although distinguishing among the several overlapping
environmental influences can be difficult, an awareness of such interrelationships is critical
for designing public health and clinical interventions aimed at decreasing the prevalence
of obesity.
Social Factors
Socioeconomic Status
Economy
Education Food Supply
General Health
Industrialization
FIGURE 38.10
Environmental influences on obesity.
occurred over the past few decades that appear to contribute to the increase in obesity in
industrialized nations. In particular, portion sizes are larger, and high-fat, energy-dense
foods are heavily marketed and readily available at a low cost. In addition, the amount
of energy expended in activities of daily living appears to have declined.
The problem of obesity may be instructive to understanding other nutrition-related
disorders affected by environmental factors, including high cholesterol, hypertension, and
osteoporosis. As in the case of obesity, it is likely that a combination of cultural, societal,
and other environmental forces leads to the development of nutritional problems in the
world today. Clearly, promoting healthy nutrition will require targeting multiple environ-
mental components and encouraging a partnership among various sectors of society,
including the government, food industry, and the media.3
2705_frame_C38 Page 784 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:41 PM
References
1. Food, Nutrition, and Diet Therapy, W.B. Saunders, Philadelphia, 1984.
2. Flegal KM, Carroll MD, Kuczmarski RJ, Johnson CL. Int J Obes Relat Metab Disord, 22: 39; 1998.
3. WHO. Obesity: Preventing and Managing the Global Epidemic, Geneva, 1998.
4. Brownell KD, Wadden TA. J Consult Clin Psychol 60: 505; 1992.
5. Stunkard AJ, Sorenson T, Hanis, C et al. N Engl J Med, 314: 193; 1986.
6. Bray GA. In Contemporary Diagnosis and Management of Obesity, Bray G.A, Ed, Handbooks in
Health Care, Newtown, 1998, pg 35.
7. Third Report on Nutrition Monitoring in the United States, US Government Printing Office,
Washington, DC, 1995, 1-51.
8. Kuczmarski RJ, Flegal K, Campbell S, Johnson C. JAMA 242: 205; 1994.
9. Troiano RP, Flegal KM, Kuczmarski RJ, et al. Arch Pediatr Adolesc Med 149: 1085; 1995.
10. Bhatnagar D, Anand IS, Durrington PN, et al. Lancet 345: 405; 1995.
11. Center for Science in the Public Interest, The pressure to eat, Nutrition Action Health Letter, 25:
3; 1998.
12. Battle KE, Brownell KD. Addict Behav 21: 755; 1996.
13. Brownell KD. New York Times, A29, Dec. 15, 1994.
14. Horgan KB, Brownell KD. In Treating Addictive Behaviors, Miller and Heather, Eds, Plenum,
New York, 1998; pg 105.
15. Ahmad S. U.S. News and World Report, 62-63, 1997.
16. Brownell KD,Wadden TA. In: The Handbook of Eating Disorders: The Physiology, Psychology, and
Treatment of Obesity, Bulimia, and Anorexia, Brownell KD, Foreyt JP, Eds, Basic Books, New
York, 1986.
17. Wadden TA, Brownell KD. In Behavioral Health: A Handbook of Health Education and Disease
Prevention, Matarazzo JB, Miller N, Weiss SM, Herd A, Weiss S, Eds, Wiley, New York, 1984;
pg 608.
18. Ernst N, Obarzanek E, Clark MB. JADA 97: S47; 1997.
19. Federation of American Societies for Experimental Biology, Third Report in Nutrition Monitoring
in the Unites States, US Government Printing Office, Washington, DC, 1995, pg 148.
20. Prentice AM, Jebb SA. Br Med J 311: 437; 1995.
21. Schoeller DA, Fjeld CR. Ann Rev Nutr 11: 355; 1991.
22. Schoeller DA. Metabolism 44: 18; 1995.
23. Lichtman SW, Pisarka K, Berman ER, et al. N Engl J Med, 327: 1893; 1992.
24. US Department of Agriculture’s Center for Nutrition Policy and Promotion, Nutrient Content
of the U.S. Food Supply, 1909-94: A Summary, Washington, DC, 1996, 1-10.
25. Wadden TA, Brownell KD, Foster GD. J Consult Clin Psychol (in press).
26. Young LR, Nestle M. JADA 98: 458; 1998.
27. Wansink B. J Marketing, 60: 1; 1996.
28. French SA, Jeffery RW, Story M, et al. Am J Publ Health 87: 849; 1997.
29. Jeffery RW, French SA, Raether C, Baxter JE. Prev Med, 23: 788; 1994.
30. Golay A, Bobbioni E. Int J Obes Relat Metab Disord 21: S2; 1997.
31. Lissner L, Levitsky DA, Bengtsson C. Am J Clin Nutr 46: 886; 1987.
32. Stubbs RJ, Harbron CG, Murgatroyd PR. Am J Clin Nutr 62: 316; 1995.
33. Thomas CD, Peters JC, Reed GW. Am J Clin Nutr 55: 934; 1992.
34. Kennedy ET, Bowman SA, Powell R. J Am Coll Nutr 18: 207; 1999.
35. Kinsey JD. J Nutr 124: 1878S; 1994.
36. Binkley JK, Eales J, Jekanowski M. Int J Obes Relat Metab Disord 24: 1032; 2000.
37. Bureau of Labor Statistics, The changing food-at-home budget: 1980 and 1992 compared,
Monthly Labor Review, December: 3-32, 1998.
38. Heini AF, Weinsier RL. Am J Med 102: 259; 1997.
39. Rolls BJ, Miller DL. J Am Coll Nutr 16: 535; 1997.
2705_frame_C38 Page 785 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:41 PM
40. US Dept of Health and Human Services, The Surgeon General’s Report on Nutrition and Health.
88-50210. 1996. Washington, DC, Government Printing Office.
41. Hill JO, Wyatt HR, Melanson EL. Med Clin North Am 84: 333; 2000.
42. Weinsier RL, Hunter GR, Heini AF, et al. Am J Med 105: 145; 1998.
43. Fogelholm M, Mannisto S, Vartiainen E. Int J Obes Relat Metab Disord 20: 1097; 1996.
44. Pickrell D, Schimek P. Trends in Personal Motor Vehicle Ownership and Use: Evidence From the
Nationwide Personal Transportation Survey, US Department of Transportation, Washington, DC,
1998.
45. DiGuiseppi C, Roberts I, Li L. Br Med J 314: 710; 1997.
46. Bureau of Labor Statistics, Consumer spending on durables and services in the 1980s, Monthly
Labor Review, May: 18-26, 1992.
47. Dietz WH, Gortmaker SL. Pediatrics 75: 807; 1985.
48. Gortmaker SL, Must A, Sobol AM, et al. Arch Pediatr Adolesc Med 150: 356; 1996.
49. Andersen RE, Crespo CJ, Bartless SJ, et al. JAMA 279: 938; 1998.
50. Tucker LA, Friedman GM. Am J Pub Health 79: 516; 1989.
51. Tucker LA, Bagwell M. Am J Pub Health 81: 908; 1991.
52. Kumanyika S, Morssink C, Agurs T. Ethnicity and Disease 2: 166; 1992.
53. Kumanyika S, Wilson JF, Guilford-Davenport M. JADA 93: 416; 1993.
54. Foster GD, Wadden TA, Swain RM, et al. Am J Clin Nutr 69: 13-17, 1999.
55. Sobal J, Stunkard AJ. Psychol Bull 105: 260; 1989.
56. Ginzberg E. JAMA 262: 238; 1991.
57. Finucane TE, Carrese JA. J Gen Intern Med 5: 120; 1990.
58. Wenneker MB, Epstein AM. JAMA 261: 253; 1987.
59. Carlisle DM, Leake BD, Shapiro MF. Am J Pub Health 85: 352; 1995.
60. Ten-State Nutrition Survey, 1968-1970, US Department of Health, Education, and Welfare, Cen-
ter for Disease Control, Washington, DC, 1972.
61. Hulshof KF, Lowik MR, Kik FJ, et al. Eur J Clin Nutr 45: 441; 1991.
62. St. Jeor ST. Obesity Assessment: Tools, Methods, Interpretations, Chapman & Hall, New York, 1997.
63. LaPorte RE, Montoye HJ, Caspersen CJ. Pub Health Rep 100: 131; 1985.
64. Caspersen CJ. Exerc Sport Sci Rev 17: 423; 1989.
65. Blair SN. In: Behavioral Health: A Handbook of Health Enhancement and Disease Prevention, Mat-
arazzo JD, Weiss SM, Herd JA, Miller NE, Eds, John Wiley & Sons, New York, 1984, pg 424.
66. Foreyt JP, Poston WSC. Obes Res 6: 18S; 1998.
67. Wolper C, Heshka S, Heymsfield SB. In: Handbook of Assessment Methods for Eating Behaviors
and Weight-Related Problems. Measures, Theory, and Research, Allison DB, Ed, Sage,Thousand
Oaks, 1995, pg 215.
68. Block G, Woods M, Potosky A, Clifford C. J Clin Epidemiol 43: 1327; 1990.
69. Wadden TA, Foster GD. Med Clin North Am 84: 441; 2000.
2705_frame_C38 Page 786 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:41 PM
2705_frame_C39 Page 787 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:42 PM
39
Psychological Tests
Obesity
Obesity is epidemic in our modern society.1 In the U.S. from 1960 to 1994 the prevalence
of obesity has increased from 10 to 20% in men, and from 15 to 25% in women.2 The
abundance of good tasting, energy-dense food is a significant factor fueling this increasing
prevalence of obesity. Aromas, advertisements, and social gatherings are some of the
environmental cues that trigger eating behavior. An individual’s susceptibility to external
cues to eat, perceptions of ability to control behavior, and feelings of self-efficacy and self-
esteem are factors that interact with the environment to determine behavioral responses.
Despite awareness of the problem of obesity in the U.S., and the chronic and debilitating
conditions related to it, many people do not attempt to change behaviors that contribute
to the problem.1 Of those who do attempt change, the majority fail to maintain their weight
loss goals. Researchers have speculated as to why this is the case. One theory is that, in
general, interventions do not match the way people change. This theory, known as the
Stages of Change or the Transtheoretical Model,3 posits that people move through various
levels of readiness to change, from not interested (precontemplation), to thinking about
it (contemplation), to planning to do it one day (preparation), to making concrete efforts
to change (action), to maintaining successful change (maintenance). The criticism is that
traditional interventions are overwhelmingly action-oriented and offer no help to indi-
viduals in the precontemplation and contemplation stages who might benefit from more
0-8493-2705-9/01/$0.00+$1.50
© 2002 by CRC Press LLC 787
2705_frame_C39 Page 788 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:42 PM
TABLE 39.1
Psychological Factors Contributing to Nutritional Abnormalities
Depression, anger, anxiety
Emotional eating
Distorted body image
Low self-esteem
Poor self-efficacy
Dietary restraint
Stress
Susceptibility to external cues to eat, locus of control
Stage of change
TABLE 39.2
Psychological Instruments and What They Measure
Body Eating Restricted Locus of Stage of
Mood Image Self-Esteem Self-Efficacy Disorders Eating Control Change
RLCQ X
SCL90-R X
BECK X
FRS X
EDI2 X X
RSE X
ESES X X
BES X X
EDE X
EI X
DEBQ X X
DBS X
SOCA X
URICA X
RLCQ — Recent Life Change Questionnaire; SCL90-R — System Checklist 90 — Revised; BECK — Beck
Depression Inventory; FRS — Figure Rating Scale; EDI2 — Eating Disorders Inventory 2; RSE — Rosenberg
Self-Esteem Scale; ESES — Eating Self-Efficacy Scale; BES — Binge Eating Scale; EDE — Eating Disorders
Examination; EI — Eating Inventory; DEBQ — Dutch Eating Behavior Questionnaire; DBS — Diet Beliefs
Scale; SOCA — Stages of Change Algorithm; URICA — University of Rhode Island Change Assessment Scale
Eating Disorders
Anorexia nervosa (AN), bulimia nervosa (BN), and binge eating disorder (BED) are eating
disorders described in the Diagnostic and Statistical Manual, 4th edition, (DSM-IV) pub-
lished by the American Psychiatric Association (1994). Anorexia nervosa is marked by a
failure to maintain a minimal healthy body weight and a fear of gaining weight. Bulimia
2705_frame_C39 Page 789 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:42 PM
Mood
Recent Life Changes Questionnaire (RLCQ)
Overeating has been identified as a compensatory behavior used by some individuals to
cope with stress.9-11 Life events can be a major source of stress. Some individuals experi-
encing high amounts of stress in their lives find it particularly difficult to control their
eating behavior. Rahe12 reported that overweight women experienced more recent stress
than normal controls. The Recent Life Changes Questionnaire (RLCQ)13,14 estimates the
amount of stress experienced by determining the number of significant events that have
recently occurred in the person’s life.
The RLCQ is a popular 74-item questionnaire that quantifies the occurrence of specific
events in the areas of health, work, home/family, personal/social, and finance. It has been
used to assess the relation between stress and general illness susceptibility.13,14 For each
event identified, the RLCQ asks the respondent to give a value on a 100-point scale
representing an appraisal of the degree of stressfulness associated with the event. The
values are added together for a subjective life change unit (SLCU) total. Normative values
(i.e., weights or LCUs) are also available for these 74 items.15
Descriptions of the psychometric properties of the RLCQ are limited. Two studies
address test-retest reliability. Using SLCU values (weights), Rahe16 reported an alpha
correlation of 0.90 for the RLCQ when given one week apart and 0.56 when given eight
months apart. Pearson and Long17 found the alpha reliability of the RLCQ using SLCU
values to be 0.84 (p<.001) over a one-month interval. The RLCQ can be found in Rahe.14
personal sensitivity, depression, anxiety, hostility, phobic anxiety, paranoid ideation, and
psychosis. The scales of particular interest to clinicians are anxiety, hostility, and depression
because they measure characteristics that may be related to abnormal eating behaviors.6
The items describe physical and psychological conditions, and subjects are asked to assess
the degree to which the conditions have affected them over the past seven days. Responses
are selected from a five-point Likert scale that ranges from “not at all” (0) to “extremely”
(4). The subscale scores are determined by averaging the scores of the items comprising
each subscale.
The SCL-90-R has extensive normative data for psychiatric and non-psychiatric popu-
lations, white and non-white subjects, men, women, and adolescents.18 The subscales have
good internal consistency with alpha coefficients ranging from .77 to .90.19 Investigations
yielded Pearson Product Moment Coefficients in the range from .78 to .90, which indicate
good test-retest reliability.19
A weakness of the SCL90-R is a lack of evidence supporting the discriminant validity
of the subscales. The test appears to have the ability to measure general distress; however,
its ability to discriminate between types of distress is not supported. The SCL-90-R is
available from National Computer Systems, Inc. in Minneapolis, Mn. Their email address
is [email protected].
Body Image
Figure Rating Scale (FRS)
The FRS28 is a popular instrument used to assess an individual’s level of dissatisfaction
with physical appearance. Dissatisfaction with aspects of physical appearance is very
2705_frame_C39 Page 791 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:42 PM
common among people suffering with weight and eating problems. Indeed, it is part of
the DSM-IV criteria for diagnosing anorexia and bulimia.5
The instrument consists of a set of nine figures of increasingly larger size. Administration
is done in two parts. First, respondents are asked to select the figure that most closely
resembles their current size. They are then asked to select the figure that most closely
resembles their ideal size. The difference (discrepancy score) between selections represents
their level of body dissatisfaction.
Despite its popularity, little reliability and validity data exist for this instrument. Mea-
surement of internal consistency is not applicable with this type of scale. Two-week test-
retest reliability was .82 for ideal size and .92 for current size in a sample of 34 men, and
.71 for ideal size and .89 for current size in a sample of 58 women.29 In a sample of 146
women, correlations between discrepancy scores and other measures of self-image were
moderate to strong.29 These results suggest that the FRS has adequate validity and good
test-retest reliability. The scale appears in Stunkard, Sorenson, and Schlusinger.28
Self-Esteem
Rosenberg Self-Esteem Scale (RSE)
The RSE34 is a ten-item Likert scale that measures global self-esteem. This construct refers
to a person’s general feelings of self-worth. Low self-esteem is related to various eating
disorders35,36 and may confound efforts to correct dysfunctional eating behavior. Identify-
ing and treating low self-esteem may improve outcome in the treatment of some eating
disorders.37
2705_frame_C39 Page 792 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:42 PM
The items are statements of self-perception. Respondents are presented with a choice of
four responses ranging from “strongly agree” to “strongly disagree.” The scale is scored
by assigning a zero to low self-esteem responses and a one to high self-esteem responses.
Individual item scores are summed to arrive at the scale score. A score of 10 indicates
high self-esteem across all items.
The RSE is a mature instrument with norms available from many samples. However,
several scoring approaches have been used, which sometimes makes comparisons tricky.
For example, the aforementioned scoring method is suggested in the RSE available from
the University of Maryland.38 Descriptive statistics for a Guttman-scale version of the RSE
are reported by Wylie.39 In the Guttman-scale version, higher scores represent lower self-
esteem and lower scores represent higher self-esteem. Conversely, Poston et al.40 suggest
that a scoring method resulting in scores ranging from 10 to 40 is the most widely used
method. In this method, lower scores represent lower self-esteem and higher scores rep-
resent higher self-esteem.
The RSE has good internal consistency. Rosenberg34 reported an alpha coefficient of .77
for a sample of 5024 high school juniors and seniors. In a survey of seven studies, Wylie
reported alpha coefficients in the range from .72 to .87.39 Two-week test-retest reliability
for a sample of 28 college students was .85. With a sample of 990 Canadian high school
students, test-retest correlation after a seventh-month interval was .63.39
The RSE is available free of charge for educational and research purposes. It can be
downloaded directly from the University of Maryland website.38 The University of Maryland
website address (URL) for the scale is http://www.bsos.umd.edu/socy/rosenberg.htm.
Self-Efficacy
Eating Self-Efficacy Scale (ESES)
The ESES41 is a self-report instrument designed to measure perceived ability to control
eating behavior in 25 challenging situations. Perceived ability to control eating is evaluated
along two subscales: control in socially acceptable situations and control when experienc-
ing negative affect. For many people, today’s environment is filled with opportunities and
encouragement to consume large quantities of food, and this is especially challenging for
those who eat in response to stress. Understanding a person’s behavioral response in the
presence of gastronomical opportunities and stress is important in the design of programs
to normalize eating.
The ESES is a 25-item Likert scale that presents answers in a 7-point format. Ten of the
items make up the social acceptability subscale and the other 15 make up the negative
affect subscale. Subscale scores are computed by summing the scores of the associated items.
The instrument appears to have good internal consistency across subscales. Alpha coef-
ficients for a sample of 484 female undergraduates were .85 for the negative affect subscale
and .85 for the social acceptability subscale.41 Seven-week test-retest reliability computed
using a sample of 85 female undergraduates was .70.41 The ESES appears in Glynn and
Ruderman.41
behavior and the other eight measure associated feelings and thoughts. Each item consists
of a cluster of self-statements. Respondents are asked to select the statement that most
closely resembles their feelings. Responses are given different weights. The scale score is
computed by summing weighted scores of the 16 items. The BES does not assess all of the
information necessary to make a clinical diagnosis, but does measure behavioral features
and cognitions associated with binge eating. The scale score has been interpreted as an
indication of severity of binge eating.43 The range of potential scores is 0 to 46. The higher
the score, the more severe the binge eating. A score above 27 suggests severe binge eating.
The original work by Gormally et al.42 suggests that the BES has adequate internal
consistency. The scale discriminates well between people with bulimia nervosa (non-
purging) and normal controls.43 The BES has good test-retest reliability.44 The BES, along
with norms and instructions for scoring, appears in Gormally et al.42
Eating Disorders
Eating Disorders Examination (EDE)
The EDE45 is a 62-item semistructured interview that measures the presence of disorders
along four subscales: shape concern, weight concern, eating concern, and dietary restraint.
Shape concern is related to general feelings of dissatisfaction and preoccupation with issues
related to body image. Weight concern relates to the desire to lose weight and the impor-
tance given to it. The eating concern subscale measures fear and guilt about eating as well
as any preoccupation with food. The dietary restraint scale attempts to quantify the degree
to which the subject is guided by strict rules concerning type and quantity of food.
In addition to subscale items, the examination also has diagnostic items used in making
a clinical diagnosis of eating disorders. The EDE was originally developed with individuals
suffering from bulimia and anorexia nervosa. Hence, the examination is useful in deter-
mining specific areas of concern as well as in making formal clinical diagnosis of eating
disorders. It is a mature instrument that underwent many revisions before publication.
The items used in calculating the four subscales are scored using a severity indicator
expressed by a seven-point Likert scale value that ranges from zero to seven. These items
are organized within a set of 23 higher-order categories such as pattern of eating, restraint,
and fear of losing control. The 4 subscales are comprised of these 23 higher order items,
with the restraint scale consisting of 5 items, the eating concern scale 5, the weight concern
scale 5, and the shape concern scale 8. Subscale values are computed by summing the
severity indicators of the related items and then dividing by the number of valid items.
A global score, defined as the sum of the individual subscale scores divided by the number
of valid subscales, may also be computed. The diagnostic items are scored in terms of
frequency; e.g., frequency of binge days over the preceding two months.
The EDE has become the preferred method for the assessment of binge eating. It mea-
sures eating behavior using a 28-day recall method, although some questions extend out
to the previous 3 and 6 months. Even when administered by trained interviewers, requir-
ing subjects to recall what they ate more than 14 days prior is problematic.
The EDE is designed to be administered and scored by trained interviewers familiar
with eating disorders. Administration may take one hour or more when properly admin-
istered. The authors of the instrument recommend that the interviewer first seek to develop
a rapport with the subject. The belief is that good rapport and a feeling of trust facilitates
disclosure and contributes in a positive way to the validity of the process.
2705_frame_C39 Page 794 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:42 PM
The EDE appears to have satisfactory internal consistency. With a sample of 100 eating
disordered patients and 42 controls, Cooper et al.46 reported alpha coefficients ranging
from .68 to .82 for the four subscales. Another study measuring internal consistency in a
sample of 116 eating-disordered people reported alpha coefficients ranging from .68 to
.78.47 In studies of inter-rater reliability, very good correlations were reported across all
items.48,49 The EDE appears in Fairburn and Cooper.45
Restrained Eating
The EI,50 also known as the Three-Factor Eating Questionnaire (TFEQ-R), is a 51-item
self-report instrument that was developed as a measure of behavioral restraint in eating.
Measuring restraint is important in the nutritional context of obesity because severe
caloric restriction may lead to binge eating and increased metabolic efficiency, promoting
weight gain.51,52 Restriction also has nutritional sequelae such as vitamin deficiency and
related morbidity.
The instrument is divided into two parts. The first part consists of 36 true/false ques-
tions. The second part has 14 questions presented in a four-level Likert format with choices
ranging from rarely to always, plus an additional question that is a six-point rating of
perceived self-restraint. Questions ask about cues to eat, ability to control eating, and
willingness to diet. Respondents are asked to indicate how often each statement applies
to their personal behavior patterns.
The questionnaire has three subscales:
The first subscale is related to one’s awareness of, and ability to cognitively control or
restrain, eating behavior. The second subscale refers to one’s tendency to periodically lose
control of eating, and the third relates to one’s ability to resist cues to eat.
Scoring is described in the Eating Inventory Manual.53 The control sub-scale has 21
questions, the disinhibition subscale has 16, and the hunger subscale has 14. Each question
has a value of zero or one. Individual subscale scores are calculated by summing the scores
of the related questions. Scores above 13, 11, and 10 are considered to be in the clinical
range for the control, disinhibition, and hunger subscales, respectively.
The EI appears to have good construct validity. Food diaries and doubly-labeled water
techniques have been used to assess the construct validity of the subscales. These studies
have shown that high scores on the restraint scale are correlated in the hypothesized
direction with low levels of caloric intake.54,55
The test has good internal consistency (>.80)50 and test-retest reliability of .91 over 2
weeks.56 The inventory appears in Stunkard and Messick (1985).50 The inventory and
related scoring materials are available from The Psychological Corporation, San Antonio,
Texas. Their email address is [email protected].
2705_frame_C39 Page 795 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:42 PM
Locus of Control
Dieting Beliefs Scale (DBS)
The DBS60 is a 16-item scale that measures weight-specific locus of control. Weight locus
of control is a method for categorizing beliefs about factors influencing weight. Individuals
with an internal locus of control have the expectancy that they can control, to some extent,
their own weight. An external locus of control implies a more fatalistic orientation marked
by beliefs that weight is determined by factors outside of personal control, e.g., genetics,
environment, and/or social context.
The utility of this instrument is in the planning of treatment for obese and overweight
people. Theoretically, individuals who believe they have control over factors determining
their weight would be expected to have greater success in weight management programs.
Identifying individuals with an external locus of control might be valuable in the process
of treatment planning because it would cue the counselor to be particularly mindful to
avoid interventions that might inadvertently reinforce pre-existing negative expectations.
For example, very modest and frequently measured short term goals may be set for
people with external loci of control in an effort to encourage them toward more positive
expectations.
The 16 items are statements expressing either internal or external locus of control
viewpoints: eight are internal and eight are external. The items are presented in a six-point
Likert format ranging from not at all descriptive of my beliefs (1) to very descriptive of my
beliefs (6). Eight of the items are reverse scored. The instrument is scored in the internal
direction so that high scores indicate more of an internal locus of control.
The DBS has three subscales: internal control, uncontrolled factors, and environmental
factors. The internal control subscale is related to the belief that individuals can control
their weights through internal means such as willpower and effort. The uncontrolled
factors subscale is associated with belief in the importance of factors such as genetics and
fate. The environmental factors subscale is related to beliefs in the importance of context
2705_frame_C39 Page 796 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:42 PM
and social setting. The subscales are scored by summing the scores of the individual items
that make up the scale.
This scale demonstrates moderate internal consistency (Chronbach’s alpha = .69) and
good stability in a sample of undergraduate students.60 The DBS is published in Stotland
and Zuroff.60
Stage of Change
Stages of Change Algorithm (SOCA)
The SOCA61 is a self-report instrument that assesses weight loss activities and intentions.
The instrument is based on the transtheoretical model,62 which conceptualizes change as
a five-stage process. The stages are precontemplation, contemplation, planning, action,
and maintenance. The purpose of the model is to maximize successful behavior change.
The model posits that optimal intervention strategies vary according to a person’s position
in the change process. The purpose of the SOCA is to facilitate treatment planning by
identifying the individual’s position in the process. Persons in the precontemplation stage
may not be at all concerned with their condition. These individuals might benefit from
efforts to raise their awareness and to personalize their risk factors. People in the contem-
plation stage may be concerned but not yet decided on taking action. Such people might
benefit from information regarding possible treatment alternatives. The preparation stage
is characterized by people who have decided to do something about their condition but
who have not yet begun. Encouragement to take action and to make a commitment to
their health may help people in this stage to move to the action stage. Individuals who
are ready to take action, or who have recently begun taking action, may benefit most from
behavioral interventions such as goal setting and self-monitoring. Moral support and
recognition might be best for people in the maintenance stage. The SOCA uses only four
of the stages: precontemplation, contemplation, action, and maintenance. The model is of
particular interest in the context of nutrition because of the refractory nature of dysfunc-
tional eating behavior.
The SOCA consists of four yes/no items. The scoring is simple and the determination
of the person’s stage of change is quickly determined.61 Data describing the reliability of
the SOCA for weight loss are not available. The SOCA was found to be reliable when
applied to similar problems. For example, in their investigation of the processes of change
in smoking-related behavior, Prochaska et al. observed alpha coefficients ranging from .69
to .92, with the majority being above .80.63 The SOCA is published in Rossi et al.61
general in format and not specific to any particular problem area. It has been widely used
across an array of problem areas, including a sample of 184 people in a weight control
program.
Items are presented in a five-point format. Scale scores are computed by summing the
responses to the scale items. Good internal consistency is indicated by numerous studies
reporting alpha coefficients ranging from .69 to .89 across all scales.64-66 The general version
of the URICA is published in McConnaughy et al.64 A version designed for use in a weight
control context is available in Rossi et al.61
References
1. Mokdad AH, Serdula MK, Dietz WH, et al. JAMA 282: 1519; 1999.
2. AACE/ACE Obesity Task Force. AACE/ACE Position Statement on the Prevention, Diagnosis
and Treatment of Obesity, Am Assoc Endocrinol Am Coll Endocrinol, 1998.
3. Prochaska JO, Norcross JC, DiClemente CC. Changing for Good: The Revolutionary Program that
Explains the Six Stages of Change and Teaches You How to Free Yourself From Bad Habits. W. Morrow,
New York; 1994.
4. Perri MG, Nezu AM, Viegener BJ. Improving the Long-Term Management of Obesity: Theory,
Research, and Clinical Guidelines. John Wiley & Sons, New York; 1992.
5. Am Psychiatric Assoc Diagnostic and Statistical Manual of Mental Disorders (4th ed). Washington,
DC, 1994.
6. Maxmen JS, Ward NG. Essential Psychopathology and Its Treatment. Norton, New York 1995.
7. Halmi KA, Eckert E, Marchi P, et al. Arch Gen Psychiatry 48: 712; 1991.
8. Polivy J, Herman CP. In: Binge Eating: Nature, Assessment and Treatment. Fairburn CG, Wilson
GT, Eds, Guilford, New York 1993; pg 173.
9. Heatherton TF, Baumeister RF. Psych Bull 110: 86; 1991.
10. Pendleton VR, et al. Eat Disord (in press).
11. Striegel-Moore R. Addict Behav 20: 713; 1995.
12. Rahe RH. In: Obesity Assessment: Tools, Methods, Interpretations. St. Jeor ST, Ed, Chapman &
Hall, New York, 1997; pg 400.
13. Rahe RH. Internat J Psychiat Med 6: 133; 1975.
14. Rahe RH. In: Comprehensive Textbook of Psychiatry, Kaplan HI, Sadock BJ, Eds, Williams &
Wilkins, Baltimore 1995; pg 1545.
15. Miller GD, Harrington ME. In: Obesity Assessment: Tools, Methods, Interpretations. St. Jeor, ST
Ed) Chapman & Hall, New York 1997; pg 457.
16. Rahe RH. Psychosomatic Med 40: 95; 1978.
17. Pearson JE, Long TJ. Eval Counsel Devel 18: 72; 1985.
18. Derogatis LR. Symptom Checklist-90-R Administration, Scoring and Procedures Manual National
Computer Systems, Minneapolis, 1994.
19. Derogatis LR, Cleary PA. J Clin Psychol 33: 891; 1977.
20. Garner DM, Olmstead MP, Davis R, et al. Internat J Eat Disord 9: 1; 1990.
21. Strober M, Katz JL. Internat J Eat Disord 6: 171; 1987.
22. Marcus MD. In: Binge Eating: Nature, Assessment, and Treatment. Fairburn CG, Wilson GT, Eds,
Guilford Press, New York; 1993; pg 77.
23. Webber EM. J Psychol 128: 339; 1994.
24. Clark MM, Niaura R, King TK, Pera V. Addict Behav 21: 509; 1996.
25. Tanco S, Linden W, Earle T. Internat J Eat Disord 23: 325; 1998.
26. Beck AT, Ward C, Mendelson M, et al. Arch Gen Psychiat 4: 53; 1961.
27. Beck AT, Steer RA, Garbin MG. Clin Psychol Rev 8: 77; 1988.
28. Stunkard A, Sorenson T, Schlusinger F. In: The Genetics of Neurological and Psychiatric Disorders.
Kety S, Rowland LP, Sidman RL, Matthysse SW, Eds, Raven, New York, 1983; pg 115.
2705_frame_C39 Page 798 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:42 PM
29. Thompson JK, Atalbe MN. Internat J Eat Disord 10: 615; 1991.
30. Garner DM, Olmnsted MP, Polivy J. Internat J Eat Disord 2: 15; 1983.
31. Garner DM. Eating Disorder Inventory-2 Manual Psychological Assessment Resources Inc, Odes-
sa, FL; 1991.
32. Crowther JH, Lilly RS, Crawford PA, et al. Am Psychol Assoc Nat Convention, Boston; 1990.
33. Wear RW, Pratz O, Internat J Eat Disord 6: 767; 1987.
34. Rosenberg M. Society and the Adolescent Self Image Princeton University Press, Princeton NJ;
1965.
35. Herman CP, Polivy J. In: The Psychobiology of Bulimia. Pirke K, Vandereycken W, Ploog D, Eds,
Springer-Verlag, Munich; 1988.
36. Polivy J, Heatherton TF, Herman CP. J Abnormal Psychol 97: 354; 1988.
37. Fairburn CG, Marcus MD, Wilson GT. In: Binge Eating: Nature, Assessment, and Treatment.
Fairburn CG, Wilson GT, Eds, Guilford, New York 1993; pg 361.
38. Rosenberg M. The Rosenburg Self-Esteem Scale University of Maryland, College Park, 1965.
39. Wylie RC Measures of Self-Concept University of Nebraska Press, Lincoln, 1989.
40. Poston WSC, Goodrick GK, Foreyt JP. In: Obesity Assessment: Tools, Methods, Interpretations. St.
Jeor ST, Ed, Chapman & Hall, New York, 1997; 425.
41. Glynn SM, Ruderman AJ. Cognitive Therapy Res 10: 403; 1986.
42. Gormally J, Black S, Daston S, Rardin D. Addictive Behav 7: 47; 1982.
43. Marcus MD, Wing RR, Hopkins JJ. Consult Clin Psychol 3: 433; 1988.
44. Wilson GT. In Binge Eating: Nature, Assessment, and Treatment. Fairburn CG, Wilson GT, Eds,
Guilford, New York, 1993; pg 227.
45. Fairburn CG, Cooper Z. In: Binge Eating: Nature, Assessment, and Treatment. Fairburn CG, Wilson
GT, Eds, Guilford, New York, 1993; pg 317.
46. Cooper Z, Cooper PJ, Fairburn CG. Br J Psychiat 154: 807; 1989.
47. Beumont PJ, Kopec-Schrader EM, Touyz SW. Aus N Zea J Psychiat 27: 506; 1993.
48. Cooper Z, Fairburn CG. Internat J Eat Disord 6: 1; 1987.
49. Wilson GT, Smith D. Internat J Eat Disord 8: 173; 1989.
50. Stunkard AJ, Messick S. J Psychosomat Res 29: 71; 1985.
51. Klesges RC, Isbell TR, Klesges LM. J Abnormal Psychol 101: 668; 1992.
52. Polivy JH, Herman CP. Am Psychol 40: 193; 1985.
53. Stunkard AJ, Messick S. Eating Inventory Manual Harcourt Brace Jovanovich San Antonio 1988.
54. Tuschi RL, Platte P, Laessie RG, et al. Am J Clin Nutr 52: 81; 1990.
55. Laessie RG, Tuschi RJ, Kotthaus BC, Pirke KM. J Abnormal Psychol 98: 504; 1990.
56. Allison DB, Kalinsky LB, Gorman BS. Psychol Assess 4: 391; 1992.
57. Van Strien T, Frijters JE, Bergers GP, Defares PB. Internat J Eat Disord 5: 295; 1986.
58. Gorman BS, Allison DB. In: Handbook of Assessment Methods for Eating Disorders and Weight
Related Problems. Allison DB, Ed, Sage, London 1995; pg 149.
59. Wardle J. J Personal Assess 31: 161; 1987.
60. Stotland S Zuroff, DC. J Personal Assess 54: 191; 1990.
61. Rossi JS, Rossi SR, Velicer WF, Prochaska JO. In: Handbook of Assessment Methods for Eating
Behaviors and Weight Related Problems. Allison DB, Ed, Sage, London 1995; pg 387.
62. Prochaska JO, DeClemente CC, Norcross JC. Am Psychol 47: 1102; 1992.
63. Prochaska JO, Velicer WF, DiClemente CC, Fava J. J Clin Consult Psychol 56: 520; 1988.
64. McConnaughy EA, DiClemente CC, Prochaska JO, Velicer WF. Psychotherapy 26: 494; 1989.
65. McConnaughy EA, Prochaska JO, Velicer WF. Psychotherapy 20: 368; 1983.
66. DiClemente CC, Hughes SO. J Substance Abuse 2: 217; 1990.
2705_frame_C40 Page 799 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:43 PM
Part VI
Modified Diets
2705_frame_C40 Page 800 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:43 PM
2705_frame_C40 Page 801 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:43 PM
40
Vegetarian Diets in Health Promotion and Disease
Prevention
Overview/Introduction
Vegetarianism is rapidly growing in popularity. Technically defined, vegetarians are indi-
viduals who do not eat any meat, poultry, or seafood.1,2 Estimates on the number of
vegetarians in the United States vary greatly according to the definition of vegetarianism
provided in the survey. True vegetarians make up about 1% of the population, representing
approximately two million people, according to a 1997 poll.3 A higher percentage of
teenagers than adults follow a vegetarian diet — almost 2%.3
Vegetarian dietary patterns can represent an exceptionally healthy way of eating. They
are typically rich in vitamins, minerals, phytochemicals, and fiber while often also low in
fat, saturated fat, and cholesterol.1,4 However, each individual diet will need to be assessed
for its nutritional adequacy. This section provides some guidance in characterizing vege-
tarian dietary patterns, health benefits, and concerns as well as identifying sources of
various nutrients that may be marginal in many vegetarian diets.
0-8493-2705-9/01/$0.00+$1.50
© 2002 by CRC Press LLC 801
2705_frame_C40 Page 802 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:43 PM
TABLE 40.1
Types of Vegetarian Diets
Vegan Consumes nuts, fruits, grains, legumes, and vegetables. Does not consume animal-
based food products, including eggs, dairy products, red meats, poultry, or seafood.
Some vegetarians may avoid foods with animal processing (honey, sugar, vinegar,
wine, beer).
Lacto-Vegetarian Consumes milk and other dairy products, nuts, fruits, grains, legumes, and vegetables.
Does not consume eggs, red meats, poultry, or seafood.
Ovo-Vegetarian Consumes eggs, nuts, fruits, grains, legumes, and vegetables. Does not consume milk
or dairy, red meats, poultry, or seafood.
Lacto-Ovo Vegetarian Consumes milk and other dairy products, eggs, nuts, fruits, grains, legumes, and
vegetables. Does not consume red meats, poultry, or seafood.
Pollo-Vegetariana Not technically considered a vegetarian type of diet, although often referred to as
“vegetarian” in popular culture. Consumes milk and other dairy products, eggs, nuts,
fruits, grains, legumes, vegetables, and poultry.
Peche-Vegetarian also Not technically considered a vegetarian type of diet, although often referred to as
called pesco- and “vegetarian” in popular culture. Consumes milk and other dairy products, eggs, nuts,
pecto-vegetariana fruits, grains, legumes, vegetables, and seafood.
Omnivore Consumes from a wide variety of foods, including meats, grains, fruits, vegetables,
legumes and dairy products. Individuals who consume red meats (beef, pork, lamb,
etc.), poultry, seafood, or any still or once living non-plant-based matter are not
vegetarians.
a This is not technically a vegetarian diet, although it is often referred to as such.
TABLE 40.2
Types of Popular Diets Incorporating Various Principles of Vegetarianisma
Fad diets Popular weight loss diets often incorporate various principles of vegetarianism,
although not generally in nutritious, balanced ways. The cabbage soup diet is an
example, which is based on consuming only a vegetable soup based on cabbage as a
weight-loss technique.
Fruitarian Consumes botanical fruits (including nuts and seeds); avoids meats, poultry, seafood,
dairy, eggs, and vegetables. May avoid legumes.
Macrobiotic Largely based on grains and in-season foods, including vegetables (except those of the
nightshade family), sea vegetables, soups, and beans. Nuts and seeds are not
consumed on a daily basis; fruits are included with the exception of tropical fruits.
Seafood is sometimes included as well. Asian foods contribute significantly to food
choices. This is an example of a diet following a food-combining philosophy.
Natural hygiene or Generally raw vegetables, fruits, whole grains or sprouted grains (in some cases may
raw foods diet be cooked), sprouted or non-sprouted legumes, nuts, and seeds. Some individuals
may consume raw dairy products. There is great variation in this diet plan: many
followers do consume cooked foods, and some consume meat as well. This is an
example of a diet following a food-combining philosophy, but has many variations
among followers.
a Many variations exist on each of these types of diets. This is not intended as a comprehensive listing.
Individuals following restrictive diets are more susceptible to dietary deficiencies and
imbalances.1,2 Table 40.3 describes the nutrients that may be of concern in many vegetarian
diets.
TABLE 40.3
Nutrients Potentially at Risk in Vegetarian Diets; Dietary Reference Intakes (DRIs), Functions and
Sources2,27-29
DRI: adult value
Vitamin/ 19–50 yr old,
Mineral non-pregnant Function Good Sources in Vegetarian Diet
Vitamins
Vitamin B12 M: 2.4 µg Works with folic acid to make red Dairy products, eggs, fortified
F: 2.4 µg blood cells; important in cereals, fortified soy products/
maintaining healthy nerve fibers; meat substitutes, fortified
helps the body use fat and protein. nutritional yeast.
Vitamin D Adequate Intake Promotes absorption of calcium Fortified milk; made in body
(AI): and phosphorus and helps deposit when skin is exposed to sunlight.
M: 5 µg them in bones and teeth.
F: 5 µg
Riboflavin (B2) M: 1.3 mg Helps the body release energy from Fortified dairy products, fortified
F: 1.1 mg protein, fat, and carbohydrates. breads and cereals, tomatoes,
lima beans, raisins, avocado,
beans, and legumes.
Minerals
Calcium AI: Used to build bones and teeth and Dairy products, broccoli, mustard
M: 1000 mg keep them strong; important in and turnip greens.
F: 1000 mg muscle contraction and blood
clotting.
Irona M: 8 mg Carries oxygen in the body, both as Whole-grain and enriched cereals,
F: 18 mg a part of hemoglobin (in the some dried fruits, soybeans.
blood), and myoglobin (in the
muscles).
Zinc M: 11 mg Assists in wound healing, blood Plant and animal proteins.
F: 8 mg formation, and general growth
and maintenance of all tissues;
component of many enzymes.
Manganeseb AI: Found in most of body’s organs and Whole grains, cereal products, tea,
M: 2.3 mg tissues, particularly in bones, liver, some fruits and vegetables.
F: 1.8 mg and kidneys. Serves as a cofactor
in many metabolic processes.
Deficiency not seen in human
populations.
Iodine 150 µg/d Constituent of thyroid hormones Fortified in salt, found widely in
(regulation of metabolic rate, body processed foods and grains
temperature, growth, where soil concentration is
reproduction, making body cells, adequate.
muscle function, nerve growth).
Copperc 900 µg Necessary for the formation of Nuts, legumes, whole grains.
hemoglobin; keeps bones, blood
vessels, and nerves healthy.
Selenium 55 µg Antioxidant functions, role in Eggs, whole grains, legumes,
eicosanoid metabolism, regulation brazil nuts.
of arachadonic acid and lipid
peroxidation, some hormone
conversions.
Macronutrients and Other Dietary Components
Protein RDA: Building of nearly all body tissues, Dairy products, legumes, meat
Male: 63 g particularly muscle tissue, energy. analog products often made
Female: 50 g from soy; whole grains and
or 0.8 gm/kg vegetables are poorer sources.
2705_frame_C40 Page 804 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:43 PM
vegetarians, or lacto-ovo vegetarians.1,5,6 Table 40.4 lists the health risks of vegetarianism,
most of which are related to the potential for nutrient deficiencies found with this type
of diet. These health risks are not unique to vegetarians, however, as they can be quite
common in people following an imbalanced omnivorous diet.
Many vegetarians follow a dietary pattern that reduces their risks for common chronic
diseases, as noted in Tables 40.5 and 40.6.4 New vegetarians, in particular, however, may
rely heavily on dairy products which may actually increase risk for cardiovascular disease.
Other practical concerns for new vegetarians are found in Table 40.7.
Table 40.8 compares the typical dietary intake of vegans and lacto-ovo vegetarians with
omnivores; the health risks/outcomes associated with specific kinds of vegetarian diets
are mentioned in Table 40.9. The nutrients of special concern will vary depending on the
TABLE 40.4
Health Risks of Vegetarianism1,5,7,13,22-26,30,31
Dietary Factor Risk
Calcium Low calcium intake in vegan or macrobiotic diet can lead to low bone mineral density.
Iodine A strict vegan consuming no iodized salt or processed food products can develop
goiter.
Vitamin B12 In strict vegans or in the offspring of vegan mothers only, deficiency can lead to anemia,
or in far more severe cases, neuropathy.
Energy Impaired growth can result in infants and children with inadequate energy intake or
those weaned to “homemade” formulas.
Docosahexaenoic acid Greatest concern for fetus and young infants. DHA is needed for neural and retinal
(DHA) development.
Dairy products Limited evidence exists linking high consumption of dairy products to diabetes (type
1) primarily in infants and children, and to ovarian cancer in adults with galactose-
1-phosphate uridyltransferase defects.
2705_frame_C40 Page 805 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:43 PM
TABLE 40.5
Health Benefits of Vegetarianism1,2,4,10-13,19,32-34
Lower Risk Of
Arthritis
Gout
Dementia
Tooth decay
Duodenal ulcers
TABLE 40.6
Protective Factors in the Typical Lacto-Ovo Vegetarian Diet1,4,10,18,20
Higher fiber
Lower fat, saturated fat, and cholesterol
Higher folate intake
Higher intake of antioxidants
Higher intake of phytochemicals
Lower intake of total and animal protein
TABLE 40.7
Practical Concerns about Vegetarianism
New vegetarians or those who are vegetarian for philosophical (as opposed to health) reasons may rely heavily
on the use of dairy products and eggs.
Whole milk cheeses, 2% and higher fat content milk, eggs and whole milk yogurts are rich in fat, saturated fat,
and in some cases cholesterol. These can contribute to higher risks for cardiovascular disease in particular, and
should be evaluated.
Some adolescents with eating disorders may use vegetarianism as a rationalization for avoiding foods or entire
food groups.
TABLE 40.8
Nutrient Differences between Omnivore, Lacto-Ovo and Vegan Dietary Patterns1,2,33
Dietary
Component Vegan Lacto-ovo Omnivore
Total fat ~30% fat 30-36% fat 34-38% fat
Saturated fat Generally low saturated fat Generally moderate Generally higher saturated
intake saturated fat intake fat intake
P/S ratio High P/S Mod P/S Poor P/S
Cholesterol 0 mg 150-300 mg 400 mg
Fiber (g/d range) Generally 50-100% higher Generally 50-100% higher Generally low (range:
than omnivores and higher than omnivores (range: 3.5-33.8 g/d)
than lacto-ovo vegetarians. 5.2-74.4 g/d)
(range: 16.1-55.3 g/d)
2705_frame_C40 Page 806 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:43 PM
TABLE 40.9
Health Risks of Individuals Following Various Types of Vegetarian Diets1,2,33
Type of Nutrients at
Vegetarian Diet Health Risk Profile Greatest Risk
Vegan Low risk of obesity, heart disease, cancer, hypertension, and diabetes. Vitamin B12
Vegans may have a lower health risk than lacto-ovo vegetarians due to Vitamin D
the typical lower fat and higher fiber content than either lacto-ovo or Calcium
non-vegetarians. Zinc
Energy
Potentially Iron
Lacto-vegetarian Generally low risk of obesity, heart disease, cancer, hypertension, and Zinc
diabetes. Unskilled or new vegetarian may rely heavily on whole-milk Potentially Iron
based products, thus consuming high fat, saturated fat, and cholesterol
intakes which could increase the risk of cardiovascular-related diseases.
Ovo-vegetarian Generally low risk of obesity, heart disease, cancer, hypertension, and Zinc
diabetes. Unskilled or new vegetarian may rely heavily on eggs and Potentially Iron
egg-based products, thus consuming high fat, saturated fat, and
cholesterol intakes which could increase the risk of cardiovascular-
related diseases.
Lacto-ovo Generally low risk of obesity, heart disease, cancer, hypertension, and Zinc
vegetarian diabetes. Unskilled or new vegetarian may rely heavily on whole-milk Potentially Iron
or egg-based products, thus consuming high fat, saturated fat, and
cholesterol intakes which could increase the risk of cardiovascular-
related diseases.
type of vegetarian diet followed. As discussed in Table 40.10, some nutrients are more
critical during specific developmental phases; deficiency of a particular nutrient at a
particular stage of the life cycle can have dramatic consequences.5,7-9
TABLE 40.10
Critical Periods of Importance for Selected Nutrients2,25,27
Nutrient Critical Periods during Lifecycle
Vitamin B12 Throughout, particularly critical during pregnancy, infancy, and childhood
Riboflavin (B2) Pregnancy, periods of growth
Vitamin D Childhood and pre-puberty, pregnancy, elderly
Calcium Childhood and pre-puberty, elderly
Iron Infancy, childhood, adolescence, pregnancy, adulthood (women particularly)
Zinc Puberty, pregnancy, elderly
Iodine Adolescence, pregnancy, lactation
Protein Infancy, childhood, adolescence, pregnancy
Omega-3 fatty acids Pregnancy, infancy
(especially DHA)
Energy Periods of growth, especially toddlers/preschoolers, due to small stomach capacity
TABLE 40.11
Definitions Related to Protein Complementation2
Complete protein Contains all essential amino acids in ample amounts; amino acid pattern is very similar
to humans
Incomplete protein May be low in one or more amino acids; amino acid pattern is very different from
humans
Limiting amino acid The essential amino acid(s) that are in the smallest supply in the food
Essential amino acid Cannot be synthesized by the human body. Include: Arginine, Histidine, Isoleucine,
Leucine, Lysine, Methionine, Phenylalanine, Threonine, Tryptophan, Valine
TABLE 40.12
Limiting Essential Amino Acids and Vegan Sources1,2
Food Limiting Amino Acids Vegan Sources of the Limiting Amino Acids
Legumes Methionine, Cysteine Grains, nuts, seeds, soybeans
Cereals/grains Lysine, Threonine Legumes
Nuts and seeds Lysine Legumes
Peanuts Methionine, Lysine, Threonine Legumes, grains, nuts, seeds, soybeans
Vegetables Methionine Grains, nuts, and seeds, soybeans
Corn Tryptophan, Lysine, Threonine Legumes, sesame and sunflower seeds, soybeans
TABLE 40.13
Guidelines for Protein Complementation1,2
Type of
Vegetarian Diet Guidelines for Complementationa
Lacto-ovo Dairy and eggs provide complete protein, as do other animal products.
Vegan A vegan diet that contains a variety of grains, legumes, vegetables, seeds, and nuts over the
course of a day in amounts to meet a person’s calorie needs will provide adequate amino
acids in appropriate amounts. Soybeans match human needs for essential amino acids as
precisely as animal foods, and are thus a complete protein.
Any It is not necessary to combine proteins in each meal. Young children, however, may need to
have the complementary proteins consumed within a few hours of each other.
a All proteins except gelatin provide all of the amino acids. Some protein sources have relatively low levels of
some amino acids, so a large amount of that food would need to be consumed if it were the only source of
those “limiting” amino acids.1
TABLE 40.14
Protein Intakes in the United States1
Type of Diet Percent of Calories from Protein Sufficient to Meet RDA?
Typical U.S. diet 14–18% Yes
Lacto-ovo vegetarians 12–14% Yes, provided adequate calories are consumed
Vegans 10–12% Yes, provided adequate calories are consumed
TABLE 40.15
Protein: Vegetarian Sources and Amounts27,35,36
Adult RDA: Males 63 g/day Females 50 g/daya
Food Portion Size Protein (g) Kcal
Cereals/Grains
Vegetables
Fruits
Prunes, dried 10 prunes 2.2 201
Dairy/Soymilk
Cottage cheese, 1% fat 1 cup 28.0 164
Yogurt, lowfat (1.5% milk fat), plain, Breyers 1 cup 11.0 130
Simple Pleasures, chocolate 0.5 cup 8.9 134
Gruyere cheese 1 oz. 8.5 117
Milk, low fat (1%) 1 cup 8.0 102
Cheddar cheese 1 oz. 7.1 114
Soymilk 1 cup 6.6 79
American processed cheese 1 oz. 6.3 106
Pudding, all flavors, from instant mix Jell-O brand 0.5 cup 4.0 155
Frozen yogurt, soft serve 0.5 cup 2.9 115
Ice cream, vanilla, regular (10% fat) 0.5 cup 2.3 133
Beans/Legumes
Soybean nuts, roasted 0.5 cup 30.3 405
Lentils, boiled 1 cup 17.9 230
Lima beans, boiled 1 cup 14.7 216
Kidney beans, canned 1 cup 13.3 207
Garbanzo beans, canned 1 cup 11.9 286
Soy Products/Meat Substitutes
Tofu, raw, firm 0.5 cup 19.9 183
Tempeh 0.5 cup 15.7 165
Pepperoni from meat substitute 16 slices 14.0 70
Better ‘n Burger, Morningstar Farms 1 patty 11.3 75
Soybeans, green, boiled 0.5 cup 11.1 127
Ground meatless, frozen, Morningstar Farms 0.5 cup 10.3 60
Meatless deli turkey 3 slices 9.0 40
Nuts/Seeds
Peanut butter, chunk style/crunchy 2 T 7.7 188
Sunflower seeds, dried 1 oz. 6.2 160
Almonds, blanched 1 oz. 6.0 174
Sesame butter (tahini) 2 T 5.0 174
Cashews, dry roasted 1 oz. 4.3 163
Eggs
Egg substitute, frozen 0.25 cup 6.8 96
Egg, chicken, whole, fresh/frozen 1 large 6.2 75
Egg, chicken, yolk fresh 1 large 2.8 61
Mixed Foods
Frozen French bread pizza, vegetarian 6 oz. pizza 17.0 270
Shells & cheese, from mix 1 cup 16.0 360
Burritos w/ beans 2 burritos 14.1 447
Biscuit w/ egg 1 item 11.1 316
Potato, baked, w/ sour cream & chives 1 potato 6.7 393
a Taking into account the lower digestibility and amino acid profile, a reasonable RDA for
vegans is approximately 10% more protein than omnivores.1
2705_frame_C40 Page 810 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:43 PM
TABLE 40.16
Vegetarian Sources of Energy-Dense, Nutrient-Dense Foods35,36
Food Portion Size Kcal
Cereals/Grains
Vegetables
Fruits
Dairy/Soymilk
Beans/Legumes
Nuts/Seeds
Mixed Foods
TABLE 40.17
Riboflavin:a Vegetarian Sources and Amounts28,35,36
Adult RDA: Males 1.3 mg/day Females 1.1 mg/day
Food Portion Size Riboflavin (mg) Kcal
Cerealsbc/Grains
Vegetables
Fruits
Dairy/Soymilk
Beans/Legumes
Nuts/Seeds
Eggs
Mixed Foods
Beverages
Miscellaneous
although vegetarians still have lower levels of blood DHA.1,22 The fetus and young infant
have a dramatically reduced ability to perform this conversion.23 Because DHA is needed
for brain and retinal development, some pregnant or breastfeeding vegetarian women
may need to reduce their intake of linoleic acid (an omega-6 fatty acid) relative to their
intake of alpha-linolenic acid to increase DHA levels, or they may choose to try DHA-
enriched eggs or DHA supplements derived from microalgae, although the safety of this
has not been established.22-26 Table 40.31 lists vegetarian dietary sources of the omega-3
fatty acid alpha-linolenic acid.
TABLE 40.18
Vitamin B12: Vegetarian Sources and Amounts28,35,36
Adult RDA: 2.4 µg/day
Food Portion Size Vitamin B12 (µg) Kcal
Cerealsa/Grains
Dairy/Soymilkb
Eggs
Mixed Foods
Miscellaneous
TABLE 40.19
Vitamin D: Vegetarian Sources and Amounts28,35-37
Adult Adequate Intake: 5 µg cholecalciferol (200 IU per day)
Food Portion Size Vitamin D (IU)a Kcal
Cereals/Grains
Vegetables
Dairy/Soymilk
Soymilk, Soy Moo, fat free, Health Valley 1 cup 100 110
Milk, nonfat 1 cup 98 85.5
Milk, whole 1 cup 97.6 150
Pudding, vanilla, instant, w/ whole milk 0.5 cup 49.0 162
Eggs
Mixed Foods
Fats/Oils/Dressings
Desserts
TABLE 40.20
Calcium: Vegetarian Sources and Amounts28,30,35,36
Adult AI: Males 1000 mg/day Females 1000 mg/day
Food Portion size Calcium (mg) Kcal
Cereals/Grains
Calcium fortified cereal bars 1 bar (37 g) 200 140
Vegetables
Collards, frozen, boiled 0.5 cup 179 31
Kale, frozen, boiled 1 cup 179 39
Turnip greens, canned 0.5 cup 138 16
Squash, acorn, baked 1 cup 90.2 115
Okra, boiled 0.5 cup 88 34
Squash, butternut, baked 1 cup 84 82
Broccoli, cooked 1 cup 72 44
Peas, green, cooked, from frozen 0.5 cup 19.2 62.4
Fruits
Calcium-fortified orange juice 8 oz 300 120
Dairy/Soymilk
Soy milk, fortified 8 oz (1 cup) 400 110
Malted milk, chocolate (Ovaltine) 8 oz 384 225
Evaporated milk, skim 4 oz 372 100
Evaporated milk, whole 4 oz 329 169
Goat’s milk 8 oz (1 cup) 327 168
Yogurt, tofu yogurt, frozen 8 oz 309 254
Cow’s milk, skim 8 oz (1 cup) 302 86
Cow’s milk, 1/2% 8 oz (1 cup) 300 90
Cow’s milk, 1% 8 oz (1 cup) 300 102
Yogurt, fat-free 8 oz 300 100
Yogurt, lowfat 8 oz 300 200
Yogurt, regular 8 oz 300 250
Cow’s milk, 2% 8 oz (1 cup) 297 121
Cow’s milk, whole 8 oz 290 150
Swiss cheese 1 oz 272 107
Cheddar cheese 1 oz 204 114
American cheese 1 oz 174 106
Mozzarella cheese, part skim 1 oz 183 72
Feta cheese 1 oz 140 75
Soy milk, non-fortified 8 oz (1 cup) 79.3 150
Cottage cheese, 1% fat 0.5 cup 69 82
Beans/Legumes
Great northern beans 0.5 cup 60 105
Soy Products/Meat Substitutes
Tofu, raw, firm 0.5 cup 258 183
Tempeh 1 cup 154 330
Nuts/Seeds
Almonds, dried 1 oz (about 24 nuts) 75 167
Desserts
Custard, 2% milk 1 cup 394 298
Sherbet, orange 1 cup 264 104
Soft serve ice cream, French vanilla 1 cup 226 370
Frozen yogurt, soft serve 1 cup 212 230
Ice cream, vanilla, regular, 10% fat 1 cup 168 226
Miscellaneous
Blackstrap molasses 1 Tbsp 172 47
2705_frame_C40 Page 817 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:43 PM
TABLE 40.21
Copper:a Vegetarian Sources and Amountsb 27,35,36
Adult RDA: 900 µg/day
Food Portion Size Copper (mg) Kcal
Cereals/Grains
Vegetables
Fruits
Dairy/Soy Milk
Beans/Legumes
TABLE 40.22
Iodine: Vegetarian Sources and Amounts27,35,36
Adult RDA 150 µg males and females
Food Portion Size Iodine (µg) Kcal
Cereals/Grains
Vegetables
Dairy/Soymilk
Eggs
Mixed Foods
Condiments/Seasonings
TABLE 40.23
Iron: Nonheme Sources in the Vegetarian Diet27,35,36,38
Adult RDA: Male 8 mg/Female: 18 mg
Available Iron (mg)
Food Portion Size Total Iron (mg) (where info available) Kcals
Cereals/Grains
Raisin Bran, dry 0.75 cup Range: 18.54 to 3.7 0.19 200
Quinoa 1 cup 13.4 — 576
Corn flakes, dry 0.75 cup 6.5 0.32 90
Oatmeal, instant, fortified 0.5 cup 4.2 0.21 145
Special K 0.75 cup 3.4 — 75
Bran muffin 1 med 2.4 0.12
Oatmeal, instant, regular 1 cup 1.59 —- 145
Shredded Wheat, dry 1 oz 1.2 0.06 102
Bagel, enriched 1/2, 3.5” diameter 1.2 0.06 154
Vegetables
Fruits
Beans/Legumes
Miscellaneous
TABLE 40.24
Iron: Absorption Enhancers and Inhibitors1,2,38
Effect on Iron
Class of Inhibitors Examples Found in Absorption
Polyphenols Tannic acid, gallic acid, Coffee, tea, red wines, Coffee-35-40%
and catechin certain spices, fruits, Tea-60%
and vegetables Red wine-50%
Phytates Substances that form Whole grains, bran, soy
insoluble complexes products
with nonheme iron
EDTA (ethylenediamine- Food additive used as Used broadly Possibly up to 50% in
tetraacetic acid) sodium EDTA, calcium some cases
EDTA (prevents color
changes and oxidation
in foods)
Calcium Calcium chloride Additive to bread Possibly up to 30-50% in
(naturally occurring products, potential some cases found with
sources of calcium in effect of other forms of calcium chloride
self selected diets did calcium fortification
not show an inhibitory
effect; however there is
a potential effect of
other forms of calcium)
Fiber Insoluble fibers, Phytate Whole grains Possibly 30-50%
content may be
responsible
Effect on Iron
Class of Enhancersa Examples Found in Absorption
Organic acids Malic, ascorbic, citric, Found widely in foods Enhances absorption
and bile acids
Amino acids Some amino acids such as Protein foods, also found Enhances absorption
cysteine widely in vegetables
and grains
a The presence of these acids with a meal will significantly improve iron absorption and in some cases potentially
overcome the inhibitory effects of other components in foods.
2705_frame_C40 Page 821 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:43 PM
TABLE 40.25
Manganese:a Vegetarian Sources and Amounts27,35,36
Adult AI: Male 2.3 mg/Female 1.8 mg
Food Portion Size Manganese (mg) Kcal
Cereals/Grains
Vegetables
Fruits
TABLE 40.26
Selenium:a Vegetarian Sources and Amounts27,35,36,39
Adult RDA: 55 µg/day
Food Portion Size Selenium (µg) Kcal
Cereals/Grains
Vegetables
Fruits
Dairy/Soymilk
Beans/Legumes
Nuts/Seeds
Eggs
Mixed Foods
Desserts
TABLE 40.27
Zinc: Vegetarian Sources and Amounts27,35,36,40
Adult RDA: Males 11 mg/Females 8 mg
Food Portion size Zinc (mg)a,b Kcal
Cereals/Grains
Vegetables
Dairy/Soymilk
Beans/Legumes
Nuts/Seeds
Eggs
Mixed Foods
Desserts
TABLE 40.28
Zinc: Absorption Enhancers and Inhibitors1,2,40
Possible Absorption Possible Absorption
Enhancersa Sources Inhibitorsb Sources
Yeast (acts by reducing Fermented bread dough Phytates Whole grains (rye, barley,
phytates) oatmeal, wheat), soy
products
Animal protein Animal products Oxalate Spinach, Swiss chard, leek,
kale, collard greens, okra,
rhubarb, raspberries,
coffee, chocolate, tea,
peanuts, pecans
Histidine Amino acid widely Fiber Whole grains, fruits,
distributed in foods vegetables, legumes
containing protein
Albumin Widely distributed in foods Non-heme iron Legumes, fortified cereals,
containing protein, egg leafy greens
white
Copper Legumes, whole grains,
nuts, seeds, vegetables
Calcium supplements Over-the-counter
supplements,
multivitamins, some
antacids
High iron intakes
relative to zinc intake
a Yeast is the only non-controversial zinc absorption enhancer.
b Phytates are the only non-controversial zinc absorption inhibitor.
2705_frame_C40 Page 825 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:43 PM
TABLE 40.29
Fiber: Types, Functions, and Sources1,2,36
Type of Fiber Fiber Type Food Sources Function
Cellulose Insoluble Whole wheat flour, bran, cabbage, Increases stool bulk and water
peas, green beans, broccoli, absorption, decreases transit time
cucumbers, peppers, apples, through the GI system
carrots
Hemicellulose Insoluble Bran cereals, whole grains, brussels
sprouts, greens, beet root
Lignin Insoluble Breakfast cereals, bran, older
vegetables, strawberries, eggplant,
pears, green beans, radishes
Gums Soluble Oatmeal, oat products, dried beans, Binds to bile acids and certain lipids to
oat bran, barley help lower blood cholesterol levels,
metabolized to short chain fatty acids
in gut which may play a role in
signaling hepatic slowed cholesterol
production
Pectin Soluble Squash, apples, citrus fruits,
cauliflower, cabbage, dried peas
and beans, carrots, strawberries
TABLE 40.30
Common Phytochemicalsa in Foods18
Chemical Names Sources Proposed Mechanism of Action
Sulforaphane Isothiocyanates found in broccoli, cauliflower, Activates phase II enzymes in liver
cress, cabbages, radishes (removes carcinogens from cells)
Flavonoids Citrus fruits and berries Blocks the cancer-promotion process
Monoterpenes Perillyl alcohol in cherries May inhibit the growth of early cancers
(polyphenols) Limonene in citrus
Ellagic acid in strawberries & blueberries
Genistein Soybeans, tofu Prevents the formation of capillaries
required to nourish tumors
Indoles Cruciferous vegetables (broccoli, cauliflower, Increase immunity, facilitate excretion of
cress, cabbages, radishes) toxins
Saponins Kidney beans, chickpeas, soybeans, lentils May prevent cancer cells from
multiplying
Lycopene Tomatoes May fight lung cancer
a More than 10,000 phytochemicals are thought to exist. This table represents only a partial listing.
TABLE 40.31
Omega-3 Fatty Acids: Vegetarian Sources and Amounts2,29,41
Reasonable intake: 0.5%-1% of total calorie intake
(represents 1.1-2.2 g on a 2000 kcal diet)
Alpha-linolenic
Food Portion Size Acid (18:3) (mg) Kcal
Cereals/Grains
Oats, germ 0.25 cup 0.4 119
Wheat germ 0.25 cup 0.2 104
Barley, bran 0.25 cup 0.1 115
Vegetables
Soybeans, green, raw 0.5 cup 4.1 188
Kale, raw, chopped 1 cup 0.13 21
Broccoli, raw, chopped 1 cup 0.1 24
Cauliflower, raw 1 cup 0.1 26
Fruits
Avocados, California, raw 1 medium 0.173 306
Dairy/Soymilk
Cheese, Roquefort 1 oz. 0.2 105
Beans/Legumes
Soybeans, dry 0.5 cup 1.5 387
Beans, pinto, boiled 1 cup 0.2 234
Nuts/Seeds
Butternuts (dried) 1 oz. 2.4 174
Walnuts, dried, English/Persian 1 oz. 1.9 182
Fats/Oils/Dressings
Linseed oil 1T 7.5 124
Flax seed 1T 2.2 124
Canola oil (rapeseed oil) 1T 1.6 124
Walnut oil 1T 1.5 124
Salad dressing, comm., mayonnaise, soybean 2T 1.38 116
Soybean oil 1T 1.0 124
Wheat germ oil 1T 1.0 124
Salad dressing, comm., Italian, regular 2T 1.0 140
TABLE 40.32
Effects of Cooking, Storage, and Processing on the Critical Nutrients2
Nutrient Cooking Storage Processing
Riboflavin Stable to heat Destroyed by light and —
irradiation
Vitamin B12 Some losses (30%) Stable Small losses (10%)
Copper Increased content using water Canning with copper adds —
from copper pipes content to the food
Iron Cooking in iron vessels — —
increases iron content of foods
Omega 3 fatty acids Stable in baking; unstable if May go rancid with prolonged —
(a polyunsaturated smoking point is reached storage
fatty acid)
2705_frame_C40 Page 827 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:43 PM
TABLE 40.33
General Vitamin and Mineral Deficiency and Toxicity Symptoms2,14,27,37
Vitamin/Minerala Deficiency Symptomsb Toxicity Symptomsc
Vitamins
Minerals
Calcium Bone deformities including osteoporosis, Hypercalcemia of soft tissues and bone
tetany, hypertension (children and adults)
Poor iron and zinc absorption (of particular
concern during pregnancy)
Iron Hypochromic, microcytic anemia Seen at 100 mg intake
Seen across populations, particularly in Constipation
women, children, and those from low Liver toxicity
socioeconomic status Infections
Fatigue Hemochromatosis
Spoon-shaped nails Potential increased risk for heart disease
and myocardial infarction
Zinc Growth retardation resulting in short Toxicity is rare (300 mg/d)
stature, mild anemia, low plasma zinc Continuous supplementation with high
levels, and delayed sexual maturation dose zinc can interfere with copper
Possible in diets very rich in fiber and absorption
phytate, which chelates the zinc in the Supplementation of 50 mg/c may decrease
intestine, thus preventing absorption HDL
Poor taste acuity, poor wound healing, night Zinc sulfate at 2 g/d can result in nausea,
blindness, baldness, and skin lesions have vomiting, diarrhea, dizziness
also been reported Iron and copper losses in urine with doses
as low as 25 mg/day and if large doses
(10-15× the RDA) are taken for even short
periods of time
2705_frame_C40 Page 828 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:43 PM
TABLE 40.34
Sample Meal Plan for Lacto-Ovo Vegetarian Adult35,36
Kcals: 2218; Carbohydrate: 374 g (67.35%); Protein: 100 g (18.%); Fat: 55 g (22.29%)
Raisin Bran (1 cup, 2.15 oz) Whole wheat bread, 2 slices Bean burrito
Milk, 1% fat, .75 cup (for cereal) Griller veg. burger patty, 1 each Black beans, 1 cup
Milk, 1% fat, 1 cup (beverage) Mustard Corn tortilla, 2 each, 6”
Orange juice, 1 cup Tomato, sliced, 1/2 tomato Rice, brown, 1 cup
Banana, 1 med Jack cheese, 1 oz Salsa, 2 Tbsp
Apple, 1 med Sour cream, 1 Tbsp
Cheddar cheese, 1 oz
Green salad, 2 cups
Vinegar & oil dressing (1 tsp olive oil)
Broccoli, 1 cup
Milk, 1% fat, 1 cup
Snack
TABLE 40.35
Sample Meal Plan for Vegan Adult35,36
Kcals: 2217; Carbohydrate: 350g (63%); Protein: 90g (16%); Fat: 62g (25%)
Raisin Bran (1 cup, 2.15 oz) Whole wheat bread, 2 slices Bean Burrito
Soy milk, 1% fat, 1 cup (for cereal) Griller veg. burger patty Black beans, 1 cup
Soy milk, 1% fat, 1 cup (beverage) (Morningstar Farms), 1 each, Corn tortilla, 2 each, 6”
Orange juice, 1 cup, Ca fortified cooked Rice, brown, 1 cup
Banana, 1 med Mustard Salsa, 2 Tbsp
Tomato, sliced, 1/2 tomato Walnuts, ground, .5 oz
Almonds, slivered, blanched, 1 oz Green salad, 2 cups
Apple, 1 med Vinegar & oil dressing (1 tsp olive
oil)
Broccoli, 1 cup
Soy milk, 1 cup
Snack
TABLE 40.36
Sample Meal Plan for Vegan Child Age 4 to 635,36
Kcals: 1864; Carbohydrate: 283 g (60.8%); Protein: 68 g (14.5%); Fat: 62 g (30%)
1 packet instant oatmeal 0.5 cup hummus spread made from veggie hot dog on bun
8 oz soymilk fortified with calcium chickpeas and sesame butter 0.5 cup mashed potatoes
and vitamin B12 2 slices whole wheat bread 0.5 cup cooked “creamed” spinach
1 banana 6 oz. 100% orange pineapple 0.5 cup applesauce
banana juice 8 oz soymilk
carrot sticks
2 molasses cookies
Snack Snack
TABLE 40.37
Sample Meal Plan for Lacto-Ovo Vegetarian Child Age 4 to 635,36
Kcals: 1794; Carbohydrate: 255 g (57%); Protein: 63 g (14%); Fat: 63 g (31.5%)
1 cup Honey Nut Cheerios with 4 0.5 cup homemade macaroni and burrito with salsa and sour cream,
oz milk on cereal cheese made with vegetarian chili
4 oz 1% milk to drink celery sticks and 2 Tbsp peanut 0.5 cup rice
orange slices butter 4 oz 1% milk
2 fruit cookies 0.5 cup green salad with broccoli
0.5 cup applesauce
Snack Snack
Summary
In summary, the term “vegetarianism” may mean different things to different people.
Before making or accepting generalizations about vegetarianism, it is important to define
the term. A person following a vegetarian lifestyle can have significantly lower risks of
many chronic diseases, such as heart disease or cancer, than an omnivore does. However,
some nutrients are more difficult to easily obtain from a vegetarian diet and may be a
concern for deficiency, especially in children or during other critical life-cycle periods.
References
1. Messina M, Messina V. The Dietitian’s Guide to Vegetarian Diets: Issues and Applications, Aspen
Publishers, Gaithersburg, 1996.
2. Mahan LK, Escott-Stump S. Krause’s Food, Nutrition, and Diet Therapy, 9th ed, WB Saunders,
Philadelphia, 1996.
3. Miller GD, Jarvis JK, McBean LD. Handbook of Dairy Foods and Nutrition, 2nd ed, CRC Press,
Boca Raton, 2000 pg 252.
4. Messina VK, Burke KI. J Am Diet Assoc 97: 1317; 1997.
5. Parsons TJ, Van Dusseldorp M, van der Vliet M, et al. J Bone Mineral Res 12: 1486; 1997.
6. Draper A, Lewis J, Malhotra N, Wheeler E. Br J Nutr 69: 3; 1993.
7. Remer T, Neubert A, Manz F. Br J Nutr 81: 45; 1999.
8. Sanders TA. Pediatr Clin N Am 42: 955; 1995.
9. Sanders TA, Reddy S. Am J Clin Nutr 59: 1176S; 1994.
10. Alexander H, Lockwood LP, Harris MA, Melby DL. J Am Coll Nutr 18: 127; 1999.
11. Craig WJ Am J Clin Nutr 59: 1233S; 1994.
12. Burr ML, Butland BK. Am J Clin Nutr 48: 840; 1988.
13. Harman SK, Parnell WR. NZ Med J 111: 91; 1998.
14. Gibson RS. Am J Clin Nutr 59: 1223S; 1994.
15. Nieman DC, Underwood BC, Sherman KM, et al. J Am Diet Assoc 89: 1763; 1989.
16. Donovan UM, Gibson RS. J Adol Health 18: 292; 1996.
17. Kadrabova J, Madaric A, Kovacikova Z, Ginter E. Biol Trace Element Res 50: 13; 1995.
18. Craig WJ. J Am Diet Assoc 97: 199S; 1997.
19. Tham DM, Gardner CD, Haskell WL. J Clin Endocrinol Metab 83: 2223; 1998.
20. Bingham SA, Atkinson C, Liggins J, et al. Br J Nutr 79: 393; 1998.
21. Uauy-Dagach R, Valenzuela A. Nutr Rev 54: 102S; 1996.
22. Sanders TAB. Am J Clin Nutr 70: 555S; 1999.
23. Gordon N. Brain Devel 19: 165; 1997.
24. Gibson RA, Neumann MA, Makrides M. Lipids 31: 177S; 1996.
25. Kretchmer N, Beard JL, Carlson S. Am J Clin Nutr 63: 997S; 1996.
26. Conquer JA, Holub BJ. Vegetarian Nutrition: An Internation Journal, 1-2: 42; 1997.
27. National Research Council, Recommended Dietary Allowances, 10th ed, National Academy Press,
Washington, DC, 1989.
28. Yates AA, Schlicker SA, Suitor CW. J Am diet Assoc 98: 699; 1998.
29. Health and Welfare Canada. Nutriton Recommendations: The Report of the Scientific Review Com-
mittee, Authority of the Minister of Health and Welfare, Ottawa, 1990.
30. Drezner MK, Hoben KP. Eating Well, Living Well with Osteoporosis. Viking Press, New York,
1996.
31. Thaler SM, Teitelbaum I, Berl T. Am J Kidney Dis 31: 1028; 1998.
32. Toohey ML, Harris MA, DeWitt W, et al. J Am Coll Nutr 17: 407; 1998.
33. Thorogood M, Carter R, Benfield L, et al. Br Med J 295: 351; 1987.
2705_frame_C40 Page 831 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:43 PM
34. Key TJA, Thorogood M, Appleby PN, Burr ML. Br Med J 313: 775; 1996.
35. Pennington JAT. Bowes & Church’s Food Values of portions Commonly Used, 17 ed, Lippincott-
Raven, Philadelphia, 1998.
36. Hands ES. Food Finder: Food Sources of Vitamins and Minerals, ESHA Research, Salem, 1995.
37. Holick MF, Shao Q, Liu WW, Chen TC. N Engl J Med 326: 1178; 1992.
38. Morris DH. Iron in Human Nutrition, 2nd ed, National Cattlemen’s Beef Association, 1998.
39. Holben DH, Smith AM. J Am Diet Assoc 99: 836; 1999.
40. McBean LD. Zinc in Human Nutrition, National Cattlemen’s Beef Association, 1997.
41. United States Department of Agriculture, Agricultural Research Service, Nutrient Data Lab-
oratory, USDA Nutrient Database for Standard Reference, Release 13,
www.nal.usda.gov/fnic/foodcomp/.
2705_frame_C40 Page 832 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:43 PM
2705_frame_C41 Page 833 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:43 PM
41
Allergic Disorders
Scott H. Sicherer
0-8493-2705-9/01/$0.00+$1.50
© 2002 by CRC Press LLC 833
2705_frame_C41 Page 834 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:43 PM
TABLE 41.1
Examples of Food Intolerance/Toxic Reactions (Non-Immunologic, Adverse Reactions to
Food)21,140,141
Disorder/Sensitivity Pathophysiology/Symptoms
Lactase deficiency (lactose intolerance) Bloating, diarrhea from inability to digest the lactose in cow’s milk;
may be dose-related
Tyramine sensitivity Tyramine in hard cheeses, wine may trigger migraine headache
Scombroid fish poisoning Oral pruritus, flushing, vomiting, hives from histamine released from
spoiled dark meat fish (tuna, Mahi-Mahi)
Caffeine Pharmacologic effects of jitteriness, heart palpitations
Myristicin Hallucinogen in nutmeg
Gallbladder disease Pain following ingestion of fatty foods
the protein to T-cells that specifically recognize the protein fragment (Figure 41.1). Cel-
lular interactions between the APC and T-cell may direct the T-cell toward allergic
responses (termed Th-2 responses). The sensitized T-cells replicate and then interact with
B-cells in the context of further exposure to the food antigen, leading these B-cells to
produce IgE antibodies that specifically bind a portion of the food protein (epitope).
These IgE antibodies bind to specific receptors found on mast cells in body tissues and
basophils in the bloodstream. The mast cells and basophils have preformed mediators
(e.g., histamine) that, when released from the cell, cause tissue swelling (edema from
capillary leakage of fluid) and pruritus. When the mast cell or basophil armed with the
food-specific IgE antibody comes in contact with the particular allergenic protein, the
IgE antibodies attach to the protein and crosslink, resulting in release of the mediators
and the onset of the food-allergic reaction.
Intestine
Immunologically intact
food protein
Lymphoid compartment
APC
Cross-linking of IgE,
release of mediators B cell Naïve T cell
IgE antibodies
Memory T cell
TABLE 41.2
Foods Responsible for the Majority (85 to 90%) of
Significant Allergic Reactions3,5,12,13
Infants/Young Children Older Children/Adults
Egg Peanut
Cow’s milk Tree nuts
Soy bean Shellfish
Peanut Fish
Wheat
Fish
Tree nuts (walnut, Brazil, hazel,
almond, cashew, etc.)
Shellfish
A second way in which the immune system may react adversely toward a food protein
does not involve the generation of IgE antibody (non-IgE-mediated). In this case the T-
cell may, through direct interaction with specific receptors on the cells, elaborate mediators
(cytokines) with direct effects. An example is the release of tumor necrosis factor alpha
that causes gut edema in certain forms of cow’s milk allergy.11 Further research is under
way to better delineate the mechanisms of non-IgE-mediated food allergy.
Food Allergens
Many studies have indicated that a rather short list of foods accounts for the majority
(85 to 90%) of food-allergic reactions: chicken egg, cow’s milk, wheat, soybean, peanut,
tree nuts, fish, and shellfish.3,12-15 However, virtually any food protein could elicit an
allergic response. Many of the allergenic food proteins have been characterized and are
generally heat-stable, water-soluble glycoproteins from 10 to 70 kd in size.16,17 For many
of these proteins, the particular allergenic epitopes that bind IgE or T-cell receptors have
been mapped.
Epidemiology
Population-based studies utilizing oral food challenges to confirm reactivity have deter-
mined that food allergy affects 6 to 8% of young children4 and almost 2% of adults.3 The
foods causing significant allergic reactions in different age groups are listed in Table 41.2.
Most children outgrow their sensitivity to milk, egg, soy, and wheat, but allergy to peanut,
tree nuts (e.g., walnut, cashew, Brazil nut, etc.), fish, and shellfish account for the majority
of significant food allergies in adults, and are foods for which tolerance rarely develops.12,18
Peanut and tree nut allergy alone affects 1.3% of the general population of the U.S.19
Allergic reactions to food dyes and additives are comparatively rare, affecting up to 0.23%
of the population.20 Food allergy is a cause of a number of particular illnesses, as shown
in Table 41.3.
2705_frame_C41 Page 836 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:43 PM
TABLE 41.3
Epidemiologic Role of Food Allergy in Various Disorders
Prevalence of Food Allergy as a
Disorder Cause of the Disorder
Anaphylaxis95,96,142 34-52%
Asthmatic children91 6%
Asthmatic adults92 <1%
Atopic dermatitis (moderate-severe) in children30 37%
Atopic dermatitis in adults34 Rare
Acute urticaria143 20%
Chronic urticaria144 1.4%
Infantile refractory reflux145 42%
Childhood refractory constipation73 68%
Chronic Urticaria
This disorder of longstanding hives lasting over six weeks is rarely associated with food
allergy. Only 1.4% of chronic/persistent urticaria is caused by food allergy, so a search for
a causative food in the initial evaluation of this illness is often futile.24
Contact Urticaria
In some cases, topical exposure to a food (e.g., on the skin of the face) can cause a local
reaction either through irritation or through specific immune mechanisms.25
extreme pruritis and a chronic and relapsing course.26 Atopic dermatitis is frequently
associated with allergic disorders (asthma, allergic rhinitis) and with a family history of
allergy.27 Evidence suggests that, particularly in children, IgE-mediated food allergy plays
a pathogenic role,27 although non-IgE-mediated food allergy has also been implicated.28
Clinical studies utilizing double-blind, placebo-controlled food challenges (DBPCFCs)
have shown a prevalence rate of food allergy in 33 to 37% of children with moderate to
severe AD.29,30 Studies of dietary elimination have repeatedly shown improvement in AD
symptoms.12,31,32 The more severe the rash, the more likely that food allergy is associated;33
however, AD is rarely associated with food allergy in adults.34,35
TABLE 41.4
Cross-Reactions Due to Proteins Shared by Pollens and Foods Leading
to Symptoms of the Oral Allergy Syndrome39,146,147,150
Birch Pollen Ragweed Pollen Grass Pollen
Apple Melons Peach
Carrot Potato
Cherry Tomato
Apricot Cherry
Plum
Celery
of obvious bleeding within 72 hours. The majority of infants who develop this condition
while ingesting protein hydrolysate formulas will experience resolution of bleeding with
substitution of an amino acid-based formula.46
food elimination in adults have had mixed success, but large groups have not been
evaluated for depth of infiltration and abdominal bloating,60,63,64 and those studied clearly
represent a heterogeneous group. In children with AEE, significant success from dietary
elimination has been achieved.61 AEE was associated with positive tests for food-specific
IgE antibody in some of the children, but most with this disorder do not have IgE-mediated
food allergy.
Celiac Disease
Celiac disease is a dietary protein enteropathy characterized by an extensive loss of absorp-
tive villi and hyperplasia of the crypts leading to malabsorption, chronic diarrhea, steat-
orrhea, abdominal distention, flatulence, and weight loss or failure to thrive. As the disease
represents an immune response to a food protein, it may be considered a food allergic
disorder.65 Patients with celiac disease are sensitive to gliadin, the alcohol-soluble portion
of gluten found in wheat, oat, rye, and barley. Endoscopy typically reveals total villous
atrophy and extensive cellular infiltrate. The prevalence of Celiac disease has been reported
between 1:3700 and 1:300.66 Chronic ingestion of gluten-containing grains in Celiac patients
is associated with increased risk of malignancy, especially T-cell lymphoma.67
Constipation
Constipation has also been associated with cow’s milk allergy in young children.72,73
Investigators have demonstrated the presence of eosinophilic proctitis in children with
chronic constipation, resolution of constipation after withdrawal of cow’s milk from the
diet (and substitution with soy-based formula), and recurrence upon reintroduction of
cow’s milk.
Infantile Colic
There is limited evidence that infantile colic is associated with food (cow’s milk) allergy
in a subset of patients (sometimes on an IgE-mediated basis), but more studies are needed
to define the relationship.75-77
TABLE 41.5
Gastrointestinal Diseases Associated with Food Allergy
Disorder Age Onset Duration Symptoms/Features Foods
Food protein- 1 day-9 months Usually 1-3 years Vomiting, diarrhea, Cow’s milk, soybean,
induced failure to thrive, (rare grains,
enterocolitis villus injury, poultry)
syndrome 53,54 dehydration,
acidosis
Enteropathy 15,48 2-18 months Usually 1-3 years Failure to thrive, Cow’s milk, soy
edema, diarrhea,
villus injury,
malabsorption
Celiac disease152 Any Lifelong Villus injury, Gluten
malabsorption
Proctocolitis 42 Infants 1 year Bloody stools Cow’s milk, soybean
Allergic eosinophilic Any Long-lived Vomiting, abdominal Multiple foods
gastroenteritis/ pain, diarrhea,
esophagitis59,61 eosinophilic
infiltration of gut
Asthma
Lower airway symptoms of wheezing, cough, and dyspnea induced by lower airway
inflammation and bronchoconstriction can be related to food allergy. Reactions may occur
based upon IgE-mediated reactions from ingestion of the causative food or from inhalation
of vapors released during cooking or in occupational settings.88-90 The prevalence of food-
related asthma in the general population is unknown, but studies utilizing DBPCFCs
report a prevalence of 5.7% among children with asthma,91 11% among children with
atopic dermatitis,88 and 24% among children with a history of food-induced wheezing.89
The prevalence of food-induced wheezing among adults with asthma is under 2%.92
Heiner’s Syndrome
This is a rare, non-IgE-mediated adverse pulmonary response to food, affecting infants.
The disorder is characterized by an immune reaction to cow’s milk proteins with precip-
2705_frame_C41 Page 841 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:43 PM
TABLE 41.6
Symptoms Occurring in Anaphylaxis14,15,94,96
Organ System Symptoms
Respiratory Throat tightness, wheezing, repetitive coughing, nasal
congestion rhinitis, hypoxia/cyanosis
Gastrointestinal Obstructive tongue edema, nausea, vomiting, diarrhea,
abdominal pain, oral pruritus, lip edema
Skin Pruritus, urticaria, angioedema, morbiliform rash
Cardiovascular Hypotension, syncope, dysrhythmia
Other Sense of “impending doom,” uterine contractions
itating antibodies (IgG) to cow’s milk protein resulting in pulmonary infiltrates, pulmo-
nary hemosiderosis, anemia, failure to thrive, and recurrent pneumonias.93 Elimination of
cow’s milk protein is curative.
Multisystem Disorders
Anaphylaxis
Clinically, anaphylaxis refers to a dramatic, severe multi-organ systemic allergic reaction
associated with IgE-mediated hypersensitivity that may be life-threatening. Anaphylaxis
has been defined technically as an immediate, systemic reaction caused by rapid, IgE-
mediated immune release of potent mediators from mast cells and basophils.94 Food is
the most common cause of out-of-hospital anaphylaxis.95-97 Symptoms may affect the skin,
respiratory tract, and gastrointestinal tract (Table 41.6). Symptoms can be severe, progres-
sive, and potentially fatal. Fatal food-induced anaphylaxis appears to be more common
among teenage patients with underlying asthma.14,15 In addition, patients who experi-
enced fatal or near fatal anaphylaxis were unaware that they had ingested the incrimi-
nated food, had almost immediate symptoms, had a delay in receiving adrenaline, and
in about half of the cases there was a period of quiescence prior to a respiratory decom-
pensation.14 The foods most often responsible for food-induced anaphylaxis are peanut,
tree nuts, and shellfish.14,15,98,99
reactions that are not immunologic in nature. Food allergy may play a role in a minority of
patients with migraine headaches,103 although the pharmacologic activity of certain chemi-
cals that are found in some foods (i.e., tyramine in cheeses) is more often responsible. The
role of food allergy in childhood behavioral disorders is also controversial. Although a small
subset of patients with behavioral disorders may be affected by food dyes, there is no
convincing evidence that food allergy plays a direct role in these disorders,104,105 and children
are not allergic to “sugar.” On the other hand, for individuals with these ailments who also
have bona fide allergies, treatment to relieve symptoms of asthma, atopic dermatitis, and
hay fever should be pursued in parallel to treatment directed at the unrelated disorder.
RASTs
In vitro tests for specific IgE (RASTs) are also helpful in the evaluation of IgE-mediated
food allergy.111 Unlike skin tests, RASTs can be used while the patient is taking antihista-
mines and does not depend on having an area of rash-free skin for testing. Like skin tests,
a negative result is very reliable in ruling out an IgE-mediated reaction to a particular
food, but a positive result has low specificity. Recent studies have been evaluating
improved RASTs that may have added predictive value for clinical reactivity.111-113
In addition to the high false positive rate of tests for food-specific IgE antibodies, several
other issues complicate interpretation. It is not uncommon for patients to have positive
skin tests and RASTs to several members of a botanical family or animal species. This
usually represents immunologic cross-reactivity but may not represent clinical reactivity.
For example, most peanut-allergic patients will have positive skin tests to at least a few
of the other members of the legume family, but only 5% will have clinical reactions to
more than one legume.114 Further testing with oral challenges, if the history does not
resolve the issue, would be required. More importantly, the foods selected for testing
should be carefully selected to include only those suspected to be at issue in order to avoid
false positive tests that inappropriately lead to questions about foods that have been
previously tolerated. Lastly, one should be wary of tests such as measurement of IgG4
antibody, provocation-neutralization, cytotoxicity, applied kinesiology, among other
unproved methods.115
(i.e., peanut) causes a sudden acute reaction and there is a positive test for IgE to the food.
This would also represent a therapeutic intervention. However, eliminating one or a few
suspected foods from the diet when the diagnosis is not so clear (asthma, atopic dermatitis,
chronic urticaria) can be a crucial step in determining whether food is causal in the disease
process. If symptoms persist, the eliminated food(s) is (are) excluded as a cause of symp-
toms. Alternatively, and as is more likely the case for evaluating chronic disorders without
acute reactions, eliminating a large number of foods suspected to cause a chronic problem
(usually including those that are common causes of food-allergic reactions as described
above) and giving a list of “allowed foods” may be the preferred approach. The primary
disadvantage of this approach is that if symptoms persist, the cause could still be attributed
to foods left in the diet. Thus, a third type of elimination diet is an elemental diet in which
calories are obtained from a hydrolyzed formula, or preferably from an amino acid-based
formula. A variation is to include a few foods likely to be tolerated (but, again this adds
the possibility that persistent symptoms are caused by these foods). This diet is extremely
difficult to maintain in patients beyond infancy. In extreme cases, nasogastric feeding of
the amino acid-based formula can be achieved, although some patients can tolerate the
taste of these formulas with the use of flavoring agents provided by the manufacturers.
This diet may be required when the diets mentioned above fail to resolve symptoms, but
suspicion for food-related illness remains high. It is also required in disorders associated
with multiple food allergies such as allergic eosinophilic gastroenteritis. With AEG, pro-
longed dietary elimination for three to six weeks is sometimes needed to determine
whether resolution of symptoms will occur.61
Food Challenges
An oral food challenge is performed by feeding the patient the suspected food under
physician observation. There are several settings in which physician-supervised oral food
challenges are required for diagnosis of food-allergic disease (Table 41.7). Because food
challenges may elicit severe reactions, they are usually conducted under physician super-
vision, with emergency medications to treat anaphylaxis immediately available.116 Chal-
lenges can be performed “openly” with the patient ingesting the food in its native form,
“single-blind” with the food masked and the patient unaware if they are receiving the
test food, or as DBPCFCs where neither patient nor physician knows which challenges
contain the food being tested. While open and single-blind challenges are open to patient
or observer bias, the DBPCFC is considered the gold standard for diagnosis, since bias
is removed.116
In all of these challenges, the food is given in gradually increasing amounts that may
be individualized both in dose and timing, depending on the patient’s history. For most
IgE-mediated reactions, experts suggest giving 8 to 10 grams of the dry food or 100 ml of
wet food (double amount for meat/fish) at 10 to 15 minute intervals over about 90 minutes
followed by a larger, meal-size portion of food a few hours later.116 Starting doses may be
a minute amount applied to the inner lip followed by 1% of the total challenge, followed
by gradually increasing amounts (4, 10, 20%, etc.). However, challenges may be individ-
TABLE 41.7
Indications for Performing Physician-Supervised Oral Food Challenges
To confirm a food allergy when history is unclear and tests not confirmatory
To exclude a food allergy
To monitor for development of tolerance
2705_frame_C41 Page 845 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:43 PM
ualized to parallel the clinical history (i.e., feeding over consecutive days for chronic
disorders with delayed symptoms). Similarly, higher risk challenges may start at extremely
low doses with very gradual increases over longer time intervals.
Symptoms are recorded and frequent assessments are made during the challenge for
symptoms affecting the skin, gastrointestinal tract, and/or respiratory tract. Challenges
are terminated when a reaction becomes apparent, and emergency medications are given
as needed. Generally, antihistamines are given at the earliest sign of a reaction, with
epinephrine and other treatments given if there is progression of symptoms or any poten-
tially life-threatening symptoms.
The practical issues in preparing food challenges include palatability and masking foods
in appropriate vehicles, with placebos for DBPCFCs. In many cases, dry forms of the food
(flour, powdered egg whites, etc.) can be hidden in puddings or liquids. Bulkier foods
may be hidden in pancakes or ground beef. Flavoring agents such as mint can be added
for further masking. Hiding the food in opaque capsules is a convenient method to
administer blinded challenges for patients who are able to ingest these capsules.
Non-IgE-mediated reactions (e.g., AEG, enterocolitis, etc.) are more difficult to diagnose
since there are no specific laboratory tests to identify particular foods that may be respon-
sible for these illnesses. In many cases, a biopsy may be needed (e.g., AEG) to establish
an initial diagnosis. Elimination diets with gradual reintroduction of foods and supervised
oral food challenges are often needed to identify whether diet plays a role in the disorder,
and to identify the causal food(s). Specific challenge protocols have been advised for food-
induced enterocolitis syndrome.53 Oral challenges can be used to evaluate reactions to
food additives (coloring and flavoring agents and preservatives) or virtually any complaint
associated with foods. When used to evaluate behavioral disorders or other complaints
not convincingly associated with food allergy, DBPCFCs are advised to avoid bias.
TABLE 41.8
Pitfalls in Dietary Allergen Avoidance
Pitfall Examples
Unfamiliar terms on food labels Various terms indicating particular food proteins such as casein (milk),
whey (milk), ovalbumin (egg)
Ambiguous terms on food labels “Natural flavoring” may indicate cow’s milk
Religious labels “Pareve” may indicate non-dairy but does not guarantee absence of milk
protein
Cross-contamination In processing lines (e.g., milk protein found in juice boxes) or in the home
setting (shared utensils)
Ingredient switching Large size of a product may have different ingredients than a small size,
despite similar packaging design
Hidden ingredients Egg white to make a pretzel shiny, peanut butter to seal the end of egg rolls,
peanut butter to thicken sauces
Natural History
Most children outgrow their allergies to milk, egg, wheat, and soy by age three years.18
However, patients allergic to peanuts, tree nuts, fish, and shellfish are much less likely to
lose their clinical reactivity,14,96,118,121 and these sensitivities may persist into adulthood.
Approximately one-third of children with AD and food allergy “lost” (or “outgrew”) their
clinical reactivity over one to three years with strict adherence to dietary elimination,
believed to have aided in a more timely recovery.12 Elevated concentrations of food-specific
IgE may indicate a lower likelihood of developing tolerance in the subsequent few
years.113,122 However, tests for food-specific IgE antibody (prick skin tests, RAST) remain
positive for years after the food allergy has resolved and cannot be followed as the sole
indicator of tolerance.12 Thus, it is recommended that patients with chronic disease such
as atopic dermatitis be rechallenged intermittently (e.g., egg: every two to three years;
milk, soy, wheat: every one to two years; peanuts, nuts, fish, and shellfish: if tolerance is
suspected; other foods every one to two years) to determine whether their food allergy
persists, so that restriction diets may be discontinued as soon as possible.
less AD and food allergy compared to infants whose mothers’ diets were unrestricted.123,126
However, the differences may not may not extend beyond early childhood.126,127
The delayed introduction of solid foods has also been associated with reduction in
allergic disease. In a study of 1265 unselected neonates, the effect of solid food introduction
was evaluated over a ten-year period.128,129 A significant linear relationship was found
between the number of solid foods introduced into the diet by four months of age and
subsequent AD, with a threefold increase in recurrent eczema at ten years of age in infants
receiving four or more solid foods compared to infants receiving no solid foods prior to
four months of age. A prospective, nonrandomized study comparing breastfed infants
who first received solid foods at three or six months of age revealed reduced AD and food
allergy at one year of age in the group avoiding solids for the six-month period,130 but no
significant difference in these parameters at five years.131 Since these series did not ran-
domize patients, the studies must be considered suggestive until further randomized trials
confirm the findings.
Future Therapies
Currently, strict avoidance of causal foods and treatment of accidental ingestion is the
only available therapy for food allergy. Immunotherapy (“allergy shots”) has not proven
practical for treatment132 except in the case of the oral allergy syndrome, in which immu-
notherapy with the pollens responsible for the cross-reactivity may provide relief.133
Toward a goal of more definitive therapies for food allergic disorders, a multitude of
experimental therapies is under investigation.
Humanized anti-IgE antibodies for injection into patients have been developed that are
able to bind and remove free-floating IgE antibodies from the bloodstream and may reduce
or abolish allergic responses. Anti-IgE may, therefore, provide treatment for many IgE-
mediated allergic disorders (not just food allergy). More allergen-specific novel therapies
include vaccination with proteins altered such that the epitopes that bind IgE are removed
while areas of the protein are left intact so that T-cells can still mount a response leading,
potentially, to tolerance.134-137 Another approach to induce tolerance to specific food aller-
gens is vaccination with DNA sequences that code for the production of food aller-
gens,138,139 and the use of immune modulators (cytokines, specific DNA sequences) that
can direct the immune system away from allergic responses and toward tolerance of the
proteins. It is hoped that these novel approaches will provide relief from chronic disease
and prevent anaphylaxis for food allergic individuals.
References
1. Altman DR, Chiaramonte LT. J Allergy Clin Immunol 97: 1247; 1996.
2. Sloan AE, Powers ME. J Allergy Clin Immunol 78: 127; 1986.
3. Young E, Stoneham MD, Petruckevitch A, et al. Lancet 343: 1127; 1994.
4. Bock SA. Pediatrics 79: 83; 1987.
5. Sicherer SH, Furlong TJ, DeSimone J, Sampson HA. J Allergy Clin Immunol 103: 186; 1999.
6. Bruijnzeel-Koomen C, Ortolani C, Aas K, et al. Allergy 50: 623; 1995.
7. Husby S, Jensenius J, Svehag S. Scand J Immunol 22: 83; 1985.
8. Zeiger R, Heller S, Mellon M, et al. Pediatr Allergy Immunol 3: 110; 1992.
2705_frame_C41 Page 848 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:43 PM
64. Scudamore HH, Phillips SF, Swedlund HA, Gleich GJ. J Allergy Clin Immunol 70: 129; 1982.
65. Ferguson A. Allergy 50: 32; 1995.
66. Cavell B, Stenhammar L, Ascher H. Acta Paediatr 81: 589; 1992.
67. Holmes G, Prior P, Lane M. Gut 30: 333; 1989.
68. Forget PP, Arenda JW. Eur J Pediatr 144: 298; 1985.
69. Cavataio F, Iacono G, Montalto G, et al. Am J Gastroenterol 91: 1215; 1996.
70. Cavataio F, Iacono G, Montalto G, et al. Arch Dis Child 75: 51; 1996.
71. Iacono G, Carroccio A, Cavataio F, et al. J Allergy Clin Immunol 97: 822; 1996.
72. Iacono G, Carroccio A, Cavataio F, et al. J Pediatr 126: 34; 1995.
73. Iacono G, Cavataio F, Montalto G, et al. N Engl J Med 339: 1100; 1998.
74. Zeigler RE, Fomon SJ, Nelson SE, et al. J Pediatr 116: 11; 1990.
75. Jakobsson I, Lindberg T. Pediatrics 71: 268; 1983.
76. Gerrard JW, MacKenzie JWA, Goluboff N, et al. Acta Paediatr Scand Suppl 234: 1; 1973.
77. Lothe L, Lindberg T. Pediatrics 83: 262; 1989.
78. Winitz M, Adams RF, Seedman DA, et al. Am J Clin Nutr 23: 546; 1970.
79. Teahon K, Smethurst P, Pearson M, et al. Gastroenterology 101: 84; 1991.
80. Griffiths AM, Ohlsson A, Sherman PM, Sutherland LR. Gastroenterology 108: 1056; 1995.
81. Messori A, Trallori G, D’Albasio G, et al. Scand J Gastroenterol 31: 267; 1996.
82. Fernandez-Banares F, Cabre E, Esteve-Comas M, Gassull MA. J Parent Enteral Nutr 19: 356;
1995.
83. Dainese R, Galliani EA, DeLazzari F, et al. Am J Gastroenterol 94: 1892; 1999.
84. Niec AM, Frankum B, Talley NJ. Am J Gastroenterol 93: 2184; 1998.
85. Addolorato G, Gasbarrini G, Marsigli L, Stefanini GF. Gastroenterology 111: 833; 1996.
86. Sampson H, Eigenmann PA. In: Rhinitis: Mechanisms and Management (Naclerio R, Durham
SR, Mygind N, Eds) New York: Marcel Dekker, pg 95, 1999.
87. Raphael G, Raphael M, Kaliner M. J Allergy Clin Immunol 83: 110; 1989.
88. James JM, Bernhisel-Broadbent J, Sampson HA. Am J Respir Crit Care Med 149: 59; 1994.
89. Bock SA. Pediatr Allergy Immunol 3: 188; 1992.
90. Thiel H, Ulmer W. Chest 78: 400; 1980.
91. Novembre E, deMartino M, Vierucci A. J Allergy Clin Immunol 81: 1059; 1988.
92. Onorato J, Merland N, Terral C. J Allergy Clin Immunol 78: 1139; 1986.
93. Heiner DC, Sears JW. Am J Dis Child 100: 500; 1960.
94. Joint Task Force on Practice Parameters, American Academy of Allergy, Asthma and Immu-
nology, American College of Allergy, Asthma and Immunology, and the Joint Council of
Allergy, Asthma and Immunology, J Allergy Clin Immunol 101: S465; 1998.
95. Yocum MW, Khan DA. Mayo Clin Proc 69: 16; 1994.
96. Kemp SF, Lockey RF, Wolf BL, Lieberman P. Arch Intern Med 155: 1749; 1995.
97. Novembre E, Cianferoni A, Bernardini R, et al. Pediatrics 101: E8; 1998.
98. Settipane G. Allergy Proc 10: 271; 1989.
99. Bock SA. J Allergy Clin Immunol 90: 683; 1992.
100. Romano A, Fonso M, Giuffreda F, et al. Allergy 50: 817; 1995.
101. Kidd IJM, Cohen SH, Sosman AJ, Fink JN. J Allergy Clin Immunol 71: 407; 1983.
102. Horan RF, Sheffer AL. Immunol Allergy Clin NA 11: 757; 1991.
103. Weber RW, Vaughan TR. Immunol Allergy Clin NA 11: 831; 1991.
104. Warner JO. Pediatr Allergy Immunol 4: 112; 1993.
105. National Institutes of Health Consensus Development Panel Am J Clin Nutr 37: 161; 1983.
106. Sicherer SH, Sampson HA. Immunol Allergy Clin NA 18: 49; 1998.
107. Sicherer SH, Sampson HA. J Allergy Clin Immunol 104: 114S; 1999.
108. Sampson HA, Albergo R. J Allergy Clin Immunol 74: 26; 1984.
109. Bock S, Buckley J, Holst A, May C. Clin Allergy 8: 559; 1978.
110. Ortolani C, Ispano M, Pastorello EA, et al. J Allergy Clin Immunol 83: 683; 1989.
111. Sampson H, Ho D. J Allergy Clin Immunol 100: 444; 1997.
112. Crespo JF, Pascual C, Ferrer A, et al. Allergy Proc 15: 73; 1994.
113. Sicherer SH, Sampson HA. Clin Exp Allergy 29: 507; 1999.
114. Bernhisel-Broadbent J, Taylor S, Sampson HA. J Allergy Clin Immunol 84: 701; 1989.
2705_frame_C41 Page 850 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:43 PM
115. Terr AI, Salvaggio JE. In: Allergy, Asthma, and Immunology from Infancy to Adulthood. (Pearlman
CW, Shapiro DS, Bierman GG, Busse WW, Eds): Philadelphia, W.B. Saunders, 749, 1996.
116. Bock SA, Sampson HA, Atkins FM, et al. J Allergy Clin Immunol 82: 986; 1988.
117. AAAAI Board of Directors, American Academy of Allergy, Asthma and Immunology. J Allergy
Clin Immunol 102: 173; 1998.
118. Bock SA, Atkins FM. J Allergy Clin Immunol 83: 900; 1989.
119. Hourihane JO, Dean TP, Warner JO. Br Med J 313: 518; 1996.
120. Hourihane JO, Kilburn SA, Dean P, Warner JO. Clin Exp Allergy 27: 634; 1997.
121. Hourihane JO, Roberts SA, Warner JO. Br Med J 316: 1271; 1998.
122. James JM, Sampson HA. J Pediatr 121: 371; 1992.
123. Zeiger RS. In: Allergy: Principles and Practice. (Middleton E, Reed C, Ellis E, Adkinson N,
Yunginger J, Busse W, Eds) St. Louis: Mosby, 1993, 1137.
124. Zeiger RS. Pediatr Allergy Immunol 5: 33; 1994.
125. Hattevig G, Kjellman B, Bjorksten B, Kjellman N. Clin Exper Allergy 19: 27; 1989.
126. Sigurs N, Hattevig G, Kjellman B. Pediatrics 89: 735; 1992.
127. Zeiger R, Heller S. J Allergy Clin Immunol 95: 1179; 1995.
128. Fergusson DM, Horwood LJ, Shannon FT. Pediatrics 86: 541; 1990.
129. Fergusson D, Horwood L, Shannon F. Arch Dis Child 58: 48; 1983.
130. Kajosaari M, Saarinen UM. Arch Paediatr Scand 72: 411; 1983.
131. Kajosaari M. Adv Exp Med Biol 310: 453; 1991.
132. Nelson HS, Lahr J, Rule R, et al. J Allergy Clin Immunol 99: 744; 1997.
133. Kelso J, Jones R, Tellez R, Yunginge J. Ann Allergy Asthma Immunol 74: 391; 1995.
134. Bannon GA, Li X-F, Rabjohn P, et al. J Allergy Clin Immunol 99: 141S; 1998.
135. Burks AW, Bannon GA, Sicherer SH, Sampson HA, Int Arch Allergy Immunol 119: 165; 1999.
136. Burks AW, King N, Bannon GA. Int Arch Allergy Immunol 118: 313; 1999.
137. Rabjohn P, Helm EM, Stanley JS, et al. J Clin Invest 103: 535; 1999.
138. Li X, Huang CK, Schofield BH, et al. J Immunol 162: 3045; 1999.
139. Roy K, Mao HQ, Huang SK, Leong KW. Nat Med 5: 387; 1999.
140. Sampson HA. J Allergy Clin Immunol 103: 981; 1999.
141. Sampson HA. J Allergy Clin Immunol 78: 212; 1986.
142. Pumphrey RSH, Stanworth SJ. Clin Exp Allergy 26: 1364; 1996.
143. Sehgal VN, Rege VL. Ann Allergy 31: 279; 1973.
144. Champion R, Roberts S, Carpenter R, Roger J. Br J Dermatol 81: 588; 1969.
145. Iacono G, Carroccio A, Cavataio F, et al. J Allergy Clin Immunol 97: 822; 1996.
146. Dreborg S, Foucard T. Allergy 38: 167; 1983.
147. Ortolani C, Pastorello EA, Farioli L, et al. Ann Allergy 71: 470; 1993.
148. Amlot PL, Kemeny DM, Zachary C, et al. Clin Allergy 17: 33; 1987.
149. Anderson L, Dreyfuss E, Logan J, et al. J Allergy Clin Immunol 45: 310; 1970.
150. Pastorello E, Ortolani C, Farioli L, et al. J Allergy Clin Immunol 94: 699; 1994.
151. Walker-Smith JA. Clin Gastroenterol 15: 55; 1986.
152. Trier JS. N Engl J Med 325: 1709; 1991.
2705_frame_C42 Page 851 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:44 PM
42
Enteral Nutrition
Introduction
Historically, enteral feeding can be traced back to ancient Egypt and Greece, where nutrient
enemas were used when patients were unable to take oral nutrition. Various combinations
of wine, milk, broth, grains, and raw eggs were used with limited success.1 Rectal delivery
of nutrients was continued up until the early 1900s despite lack of supportive benefit. In
fact, President James Garfield was given nutrient enemas every 4 hours for 79 days
following his attempted assassination until his death.1
The first reports of nutrient provision through feeding tubes into the esophagus were
in 1598, when an enteral feeding tube was fashioned from eel skin. In 1790 John Hunter
initiated the modern era of gastrointestinal (GI) access with his reports of tube feeding
the stomach.1 Up until this time, nutrient mixtures were delivered by gravity force limiting
flow rate consistency. The first stomach pump was invented in the 18th century, allowing
for consistent enteral nutrient delivery as well as gastric irrigation and emptying.1 Tubes
remained very primitive and uncomfortable until rubber was developed, thus leading to
the evolution of the currently available selections. In 1910 Max Einhorn began feeding
the duodenum through a rubber tube when gastric access was not feasible, claiming that
rectal feeding was unacceptable.1 The implementation of orojejunal tube feeding in sur-
gical patients implemented by Ravdin and Stengel followed in 1939. In 1950 the use of
polyethylene tubes was described with gastric and jejunal tubes 27 inches and 6 feet in
length, respectively. With these tubes came the introduction of the feeding pump to deliver
the formulation.1
Experimentation with the enteral formulations began in the early 1900s with the intro-
duction of the chemically defined or “elemental” diet. The late 1950s through the 1970s
marked the space age and the beginning of space diet research. These chemically defined
diets were investigated in both animals and healthy humans to produce a low residue
diet that would decrease fecal output during space travel. In the late 1960s chemically
defined diets were first reported being used in critically ill surgical patients.1 Since that
time, enteral formulations have undergone extensive modification and now exist for nearly
every metabolic disease state.
0-8493-2705-9/01/$0.00+$1.50
© 2002 by CRC Press LLC 851
2705_frame_C42 Page 852 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:44 PM
TABLE 42.1
Immune Benefits of Enteral Feeding
Improved mucosal integrity
Enhanced glycemic control
Normalization of GI flora
Preserved GALT
All epithelial surfaces benefit
common mucosal immune hypothesis
Increased secretory IgA
GI: gastrointestinal; GALT: Gut associated lymphoid tissue
Indications/Contraindications
Enteral nutrition is indicated for patients with access to an adequately functional GI tract
and whose oral nutrient intake is insufficient to meet estimated needs. Specific conditions
for which enteral nutrition is indicated are found in Table 42.2. Although enteral nutrition
is the preferred route of nutrient delivery, it is not innocuous and there are some contrain-
dications to its use (Table 42.3). It is not always clear when enteral nutrition will be
tolerated. If the individual’s needs are not met enterally, parenteral nutrition may be
implemented for either full nutrient provision or concurrently with the enteral delivery
to provide the balance of nutrients not tolerated.
Enteral Access
Route of administration and type of access for tube feedings are usually determined by
the expected length of therapy (Figure 42.1), risk of aspiration (Table 42.4), and local
2705_frame_C42 Page 853 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:44 PM
TABLE 42.2
Enteral Feeding Indications
TABLE 42.3
Enteral Feeding Contraindications
Bowel obstruction
Persistent intolerance (e.g., emesis, diarrhea)
Hemodynamic instability
Major upper GI bleeds
Ileus
Unable to safely access
Relative Contraindications
expertise. Nasoenteric or oroenteric tubes are generally used when therapy is anticipated
to be of short duration (i.e., <4 weeks) or for interim access before the placement of a long-
term device. Long-term access requires a percutaneous or surgically placed feeding tube.
Nasoenteric Access
Multiple methods exist for gaining enteral access (Table 42.5), all of which carry various
degrees of expertise, risk, and expense. The nasoenteric tube is the most commonly used
method of enteral access. It can be inserted into the stomach, duodenum, or jejunum. Since
these tubes have low complication rates, are relatively inexpensive, and are easy to place,
they are used most often for short-term use. The most common complications are tube
malposition and dislodgement.
2705_frame_C42 Page 854 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:44 PM
Yes No
Surgical
PEG
Tube
Laparoscopy
Candidate (?)
Yes No
Laparoscopic FT Open FT
FIGURE 42.1
Enteral access decision tree.
TABLE 42.4
Risk Factors for Aspiration
Altered mental status with inability to protect airway
Swallowing dysfunction
Central (CVA)
Local (vagal disruption, trauma)
History of aspiration
Severe gastroesophageal reflux
Gastric outlet obstruction
Gastroparesis
Patient position restrictions (supine versus semirecumbent)
It is often desirable to place tubes beyond the pylorus in patients with delayed gastric
emptying or absent gag reflex to potentially decrease the risk of aspiration. Positioning
a nasoenteric tube into the small bowel is much more difficult than positioning into the
stomach. Transpyloric tubes can be placed intraoperatively, at bedside, or with endoscopic
or fluoroscopic guidance. Intraoperative placement of a nasoenteric tube involves manual
manipulation during the surgery; however, this is not common practice, as it requires
open laparotomy. Spontaneous placement of a nasoenteric tubes involves advancing the
tube into the stomach and allowing it to migrate independently into the small bowel.
This technique is not very successful in hospitalized patients, especially the critically ill,
due to motility derangements. Several bedside manual methods using special placement
techniques, weighted versus non-weighted tubes, pH sensor tubes, prokinetic agents,
2705_frame_C42 Page 855 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:44 PM
TABLE 42.5
Methods of GI Access
Surgical
Gastrostomy
Jejunostomy
magnets, and bioelectrical detection devices have been reported, all with similar success
rates (~85%).23-29
Do to lack of universal success in manual placement of nasoenteric tubes, fluoroscopic
or endoscopic guidance is often sought. If portable equipment is not available, both of
these techniques require patient transport to the endoscopy or radiology suite, which may
not be feasible for critically ill patients. Fluoroscopic techniques of nasoenteric tube
placement involve manipulation of the tube with a long guide wire. Endoscopic tech-
niques include use of a guide wire as well as a “drag” method. In the drag method, a
gastrically placed tube is grasped with a snare or biopsy forceps and dragged with the
endoscope into the duodenum or farther, and then released. All risks of endoscopy
accompany these methods including dental injury, pharyngeal or esophageal injury, gas-
tric bleeding, perforation, and risk of aspiration with the use of intravenous sedation.30
Both fluoroscopic and endoscopic placement methods are ~85 to 95% successful in obtain-
ing postpyloric feeding tube placement. Although placement of postpyloric feeding tubes
using endoscopic, fluoroscopic, and manual techniques may be successful, these tubes
are frequently dislodged. Repeated tube insertion increases risk and costs of these access
methods. For this reason, patients requiring long-term enteral nutrition should receive
more permanent access.
Gastrostomy
Gastrostomy is the most common method for long-term enteral access since it eliminates
nasal irritation, psychological stress, and requirement for an infusion pump, as complex
formulas may be given as boluses. Gastric tubes, due to their large diameter, can serve
many other functions besides feeding, including gastric decompression, gastric pH mon-
itoring, and medication delivery. Insertion can be via laparatomy, laparoscopy, endoscopy,
or fluoroscopy.
Permanent gastric placement can be obtained either by surgical procedures (laparotomy
or laparoscopically) or by nonoperative procedures. Percutaneous endoscopic gastrostomy
(PEG) is the most popular nonoperative procedure for obtaining permanent gastric access.
Gauderer et al.31 first described the procedure in 1980, and despite some modifications,
the basic technique used by most endoscopists is similar. Compared to surgically placed
tubes, PEGs are less costly, have decreased procedure-related morbidity and mortality,
usually do not require general anesthesia, and allow enteral feeding to be initiated
2705_frame_C42 Page 856 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:44 PM
TABLE 42.6
PEG Indications and Contraindications
Indications Contraindications
Relative Contraindications
Peritoneal dialysis
Prior upper abdominal procedures
Pregnancy
Morbid obesity
quickly.30-36 Indications as well as contraindications for a PEG are described in Table 42.6.
Complications of PEGs include dislodgment, bleeding, tube site infection, intra-abdominal
leak, site leak, and persistent gastric fistula.30
Jejunostomy
The advantage of percutaneous tubes is less apparent when small bowel feeding is
required, owing to the high failure rate of PEG tubes with a jejunal extension (PEG/J).
While a PEG/J tube is beneficial in the acute care setting when a critically ill patient
requiring long-term access is intolerant of gastric feeds, they are not very practical for
long-term use. Long-term failure of the jejunal extension is attributed to its small lumen
leading to frequent clogging, as well as separation of the inner PEJ tube from the outer
gastrostomy tube.37 For these reasons as well as the expertise required to place the
jejunal extension, surgical placement of jejunal tubes is often preferred for long-term
jejunal access.
Several choices are available for intraoperative feeding jejunostomy placement. The
needle catheter jejunostomy (NCJ) is a quick and easy method that involves inserting a
small catheter into the lumen of the jejunum proximal to the ligament of Treitz. The
advantage of an NCJ is that nutrients can be administered almost immediately and the
catheter can easily be removed when it is no longer needed. Unfortunately, the small
lumen of the catheter occludes more readily than larger-bore feeding tubes. Catheters
originally designed for other uses have been adapted for jejunal feeding, with the red
rubber catheter most frequently used.
Jejunal access has also been obtained by direct percutanous endoscopic jejunostomy
placement (DPEJ).38 This method is similar to PEG placement except that the endoscope
is passed through the duodenum, past the ligament of Treitz, into a loop of jejunum
adjacent to the abdominal wall. A regular pull-through PEG tube is used for access. This
procedure is technically more difficult than a PEG due to the peristaltic action and
narrow lumen of the jejunum, but this procedure has many advantages over a PEG/J
such as a decrease in clogging due to the use of a larger diameter tube, and decreased
migration or kinking. As this is a fairly new procedure, data on long-term complications
are lacking.
2705_frame_C42 Page 857 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:44 PM
Enteral Formulas
The increase in the use of enteral over parenteral nutrition in the past few decades has
led to a rapid expansion in the number of commercially available enteral nutrition prod-
ucts. These products do not currently require Food and Drug Administration (FDA)
approval for their proposed clinical implications, and fall under the category of food
supplements. Nearly every major enteral formula company in the United States today
carries a similar line of products. These formulas can be categorized as oral supplements,
standard tube feedings, high-protein tube feedings, and disease-specific products. Table
42.7 provides an overview of these categories, specifying the types of macronutrients and
physical properties of the select formulas. Since these products do not require the rigorous
FDA examination prior to their marketing, it is left up to the experienced nutritionist to
decipher the product indications. The optimal selection and administration of a formula
requires a thorough knowledge of normal and abnormal digestive and absorptive phys-
iology and formula composition. The physical form and quantity of each nutrient may
determine the extent of absorption of and tolerance to the formula (e.g., long-chain versus
medium-chain triglyceride). The following discussion provides an overview of select
macronutrients found in these products, with related supportive research as available.
Macronutrients
Carbohydrate
Among formulas, the two main differences in carbohydrate composition are form and
concentration. The form, ranging from starch to simple glucose, contributes to the char-
acteristics of osmolality, sweetness, and digestibility. In general, the larger carbohydrate
molecules (e.g., starch) exert less osmotic pressure, taste less sweet, and require more
digestion than shorter ones (e.g., maltodextrin, sucrose, corn syrup solids). In the critical
care setting, optimal carbohydrate delivery should be at a level to allow maximal protein
sparing while minimizing hyperglycemia. Currently 4 to 6 mg/kg/min appears to meet
these criteria during states of hypermetabolism.
Fiber
It has been claimed that fiber is beneficial in the control of a myriad of gastrointestinal
disorders, as well as treatment of hyperlipidemia and control of blood glucose. Fiber-
containing formulas have 5 to 14 gm of total dietary fiber per liter. The form of fiber used
is primarily insoluble fiber (e.g., soy fiber), but some formulas also contain extra-soluble
fiber (e.g., guars, pectins). The insoluble fiber is beneficial with regard to colonic function
and bowel regulation. The soluble fibers may slow gastric emptying and decrease the rise
in postprandial blood glucose levels as well as bind bile acids and dietary cholesterol,
thus lowering serum cholesterol levels. The soluble fibers are also substrates for bacterial
fermentation in the colon, yielding short-chain fatty acids (SCFA), carbon dioxide, meth-
ane, hydrogen, and water. SCFAs are known to be the primary fuel for the colonocyte. It
is believed that SCFAs are required to maintain optimal colonocyte function. In patients
requiring long-term tube feeding, a fiber-containing formula may help to regulate GI
motility. Because of the higher viscosity of these formulas, the use of larger bore tubes (10
Fr or greater) or an infusion pump is suggested.
858
TABLE 42.7
Overview of Select Enteral Formulas
% Calories Caloric Product
Formula Protein % Calories Carbohydrate from % Calories Density mL for 100% mOsm/kg Names (Select
Category Sources from Protein Sources Carbohydrate Fat Sources from Fat (Calories/mL) NPC:g N RDI % Free Water Water Number)
2705_frame_C42 Page 858 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:44 PM
Oral supple- Sodium & cal- 14-24 Corn syrup, 47-64 Corn oil, cano- 21-39 1.0-2.0 78-154:1 946-2000 73-85 480-870 Ensure,
ments cium casein- sugar, su- la oil, soy oil, Ensure Plus,
ates, soy crose, malto- sunflower Sustacal,
protein iso- dextrin oil, safflower Sustacal with
late oil Fiber,
Resource Plus,
NuBasics,
Sustacal Plus
Standard tube Sodium & cal- 13-18 Corn syrup, 45-57 Soy oil, corn 29-39 1.0-1.5 116-167:1 830-1890 77-85 270-500 Isocal,
feedings cium casein- maltodextrin oil, canola IsoSource HN,
ates, soy oil, MCT, saf- Nutren 1.0,
protein iso- flower oil Nutren 1.5,
lates Osmolite,
Osmolite HN,
Comply
Standard tube Sodium & cal- 14-18 Corn syrup, 44-57 Canola oil, 29-37 1.0-1.2 110-149:1 933-1500 78-85 300-500 Fibersource,
feedings cium casein- maltodex- soybean oil, Jevity,
with fiber ates, soy trin, corn corn oil, Jevity Plus,
protein iso- syrup solids, MCT ProBalance,
late soy fiber, Ultracal,
guar gum, Nutren 1.0
oat fiber, FOS with Fiber
High protein Sodium and 22-25 Hydrolyzed 38-52 Canola oil, 23-40 1.0-1.5 75-91:1 1000-2000 78-85 300-490 IsoSource
tube feed- calcium cornstarch, MCT, soy- VHN, Re-
ings caseinates maltodex- bean oil, saf- plete with Fi-
trin, sucrose, flower oil ber, Promote,
fructose, oat Protain XL,
fiber, soy fi- TraumaCal
ber
Handbook of Nutrition and Food
Elemental & Free amino ac- 12-25 Hydrolyzed 36-82 Soybean oil, 3-39 1.0-1.5 67-175:1 1150-2000 76-86 270-650 Vivonex
semi-ele- ids, soy hy- cornstarch, safflower oil, T.E.N., Cru-
mental drolysates, maltodex- canola oil, cial,
hydrolyzed trin, sucrose, MCT sun- Peptamen,
whey, hydro- modified flower oil Perative,
lyzed casein, cornstarch Reablin,
hydrolyzed AlitraQ, San-
soy dosource
Peptide,
Enteral Nutrition
Subdue,
Optimental
Pulmonary Sodium and 17-20 Hydrolyzed 27-40 Canola oil, 40-55 1.5 102-125:1 933-1420 76-79 330-650 Nutrivent,
calcium cornstarch, soybean oil, Pulmocare,
caseinates corn syrup, MCT, corn Respalor,
sucrose, mal- oil, safflower Novasource
todextrin, oil, sardine Pulmonary,
sugar oil, borage Oxepa
oil
Renal Sodium & cal- 7-15 Corn syrup, 40-58 Corn oil, saf- 35-45 2.0 140-340:1 947-1000 70-71 570-700 Nepro,
cium casein- sucrose, fruc- flower oil, Magnacal Re-
ates, Whey- tose, malto- canola oil, nal, Nova-
L-amino ac- dextrin, MCT source Renal
2705_frame_C42 Page 859 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:44 PM
Fructooligosaccharides
Fructooligosaccharides (FOS) are undigestible sugars that occur naturally in food (e.g.
onions, blueberries). These sugars consist of a sucrose molecule linked to one, two, or
three additional fructose units. Gastric acid or digestive enzymes do not degrade FOS.
These oligosaccharides appear to remain intact in the small intestine and pass into the
colon unaltered, where they are fermented by colonic microorganisms (e.g., bifidobacteria)
to lactate and SCFAs. It is suggested that the proliferation of bifidobacteria species and the
presence of FOS with the consequent production of the fermented byproducts acetate and
lactate, produce an environment undesirable for some pathogenic bacteria such as Clostrid-
ium difficile by lowering the colonic pH.14,16 A few enteral formulations now contain FOS,
but proposed benefits remain to be elucidated.
Fat
The major sources of fat in standard lactose-free formulas are corn, soy, safflower, and
canola oils, lecithin, and medium-chain triacylglycerol (MCT). In addition to their impor-
tance as a concentrated caloric source (9 kcalories/gm), fat is required for essential fatty
acids, and serves as a carrier for the fat-soluble vitamins. Fat also enhances the flavor and
palatability of a formula without increasing osmolality. Long-chain triacylglycerol (LCT)
is a rich source of essential fatty acids, linoleic and linolenic acid. The estimated daily
requirement for essential fatty acids is 3 to 4% of total kcalories. However, due to LCT
route of absorption via the lymphatic system, their limited utilization during hyperme-
tabolism, and their immunosuppressive effects when given in large quantities, many
formulas now combine LCT with MCT.
MCTs are 6 to 12 carbons long and are prepared from palm kernel or coconut oil. MCT
is advantageous because it is more rapidly hydrolyzed and water soluble than LCT,
requires little or no pancreatic lipase or bile salts for absorption, and can be transported
directly into portal venous circulation where it crosses the mitochondrial membrane and
can be oxidized independent of carnitine.39 MCTs are generally well tolerated by the
enteral route but can be associated with some GI symptoms such as nausea, vomiting,
and diarrhea. As they produce ketones, they should not be used in patients who are
prone to high ketone levels.39 Since they do not contain essential fatty acids (EFA), most
enteral formulas that contain MCT also provide some LCT in order to meet the require-
ment for EFA.
Recent metabolic research has led to the incorporation of omega-3 fatty acids (linolenic)
into enteral formulas. Numerous reports using various in vivo and in vitro models suggest
that the slight structural difference between omega-3 and omega-6 fatty acids strongly
favors anti-inflammatory, antithrombotic, antiarrhythmic, hypolipidemic, and antiathero-
sclerotic effects.40-42
Structured lipids are a chemical mixture of LCTs and MCTs incorporated onto the same
glycerol molecule. They differ from the more simple random physical mixtures of LCT
and MCT. Structured lipids may offer the advantages of both types of fats. Structured
lipids have been shown to decrease infection and improve survival by producing less
inflammatory and immunosuppressive eicosanoids as compared with conventional tria-
cylglycerols.39 Enteral formulas, particularly the immune-modulated category, are begin-
ning to include structured lipids as a source of fat.
Protein
Protein contained in enteral formulas may be in the form of intact protein (e.g., lactalbu-
min, casein, caseinates), partially hydrolyzed protein (e.g., oligopeptides, di- or tripep-
2705_frame_C42 Page 861 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:44 PM
tides), or crystalline L-amino acids. Intact protein and protein hydrolysates (≥4 amino acid
residues) require further luminal digestion by pancreatic or brush border enzymes into
peptides (di- or tripeptides) and free amino acids, which are then absorbed primarily in
the proximal small bowel. The peptide transport mechanisms are felt to be responsible
for absorption of the majority of nitrogen, with the single amino acid carriers playing a
minority role in protein absorption. Intact proteins do not add appreciably to the osmo-
lality of the formula, unlike hydrolyzed or crystalline amino acids. The higher the per-
centage of hydrolyzed protein or free amino acids, the greater the solution osmolality will
be. A knowledge of the source and form of protein is essential when prescribing diets for
patients with defects in either protein digestion (e.g., pancreatic insufficiency) or absorp-
tion (e.g., short bowel syndrome).
Stress and other forms of injury may alter protein metabolism. In times of decreased
absorptive surface area, ischemic injury, or malabsorption, provision of enteral formulas
containing hydrolyzed protein or free amino acids has been suggested. At present, no
clear consistent clinical data support the use of solutions in which protein is in the form
of free amino acids or hydrolysates. This may be due to the fact that the small bowel has
a very adaptive absorptive mucosa, even when a large percentage of the small bowel
mucosa is nonfunctional or resected. Although patients with maldigestion and/or malab-
sorption may benefit from a peptide-based enteral formula, the higher cost of these
formulas and lack of clinical supportive data discourage routine use in patients with
normal GI physiology.
Glutamine
Glutamine is the most abundant amino acid in the body and in normal situations is
considered a non-essential amino acid. It can be synthesized in many tissues of the body,
predominantly skeletal muscle, and is the primary fuel for rapidly dividing tissues such
as the small bowel. Glutamine serves many purposes including maintenance of acid-base
status as a precursor of urinary ammonia, as a primary fuel source for enterocytes, as a
fuel source for lymphocytes and macrophages, and as a precursor for nucleotide synthe-
sis.43,44 Glutamine is also a precursor for glutathione, an important antioxidant that may
be protective in a variety of circumstances. During catabolic illness, glutamine uptake by
the small intestine and immunologically active cells may exceed glutamine synthesis and
release from skeletal muscle, making glutamine conditionally essential.43
Limited human data exist regarding the use of enteral glutamine supplementation. In
animal models, supplemental glutamine has been shown to enhance intestinal adaptation
after massive small bowel resection, to attenuate intestinal and pancreatic atrophy, and to
prevent hepatic steatosis associated with parenteral and elemental enteral feeding.43
Glutamine appears to maintain GI tract mucosal thickness, maintain DNA and protein
content, reduce bacteremia and mortality after chemotherapy, and reduce bacteremia and
mortality following sepsis or endotoxemia.43,44
In humans with surgical stress, glutamine-supplemented parenteral nutrition appears
to maintain nitrogen balance and the intracellular glutamine pool in skeletal muscle.43 In
critically ill patients, glutamine supplementation may attenuate villous atrophy and
increased intestinal mucosal permeability associated with parenteral nutrition.45
Parenteral nutrition supplemented with glutamine has also resulted in fewer infections,
improved nitrogen balance, and significantly shorter mean hospital length of stay in bone
marrow transplantation patients.46 Glutamine supplementation may also play a role in
protecting the GI tract against chemotherapy-induced toxicity. Oral glutamine supple-
mentation reduced the severity and decreased the duration of stomatitis that occurred
during chemotherapy.47
2705_frame_C42 Page 862 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:44 PM
While a large volume of animal data supports the beneficial effects of glutamine in a
variety of experimental models, the benefit of enteral glutamine supplementation in crit-
ically ill human patients is less clear. Well-designed clinical trials with clearly defined
endpoints and adequate statistical power are needed to assess whether the animal effects
translate into a reduction in hospital stay and mortality rate in humans.
Arginine
Arginine is classified as a nonessential amino acid in normal situations, since the body
synthesizes adequate arginine for normal maintenance of tissue metabolism. During inju-
ries such as trauma or stress an increase in urinary nitrogen, excreted largely as urea,
represents the end-products of increased tissue catabolism and reprioritized protein syn-
thesis. As the activity of the urea cycle increases, so does the demand for arginine.
Studies indicate that supplemental dietary arginine is beneficial for accelerated wound
healing, enhanced immune response, and positive nitrogen balance.43 The exact mecha-
nism for these benefits is unknown but may in part result from arginine’s role as a potent
stimulant of growth hormone, glucagon, prolactin, and insulin release.43 Arginine is also
a precursor for nitric oxide, a highly reactive molecule synthesized from arginine by the
action of nitric oxide synthase resulting in the formation of nitric oxide and citrulline.48
Nitric oxide is a ubiquitous molecule with important roles in the maintenance of vascular
tone, coagulation, the immune system, and the GI tract, and has been implicated as a
factor in disease states as diverse as sepsis, hypertension, and cirrhosis.48
In animal models, arginine supplementation has been associated with improved wound
healing, with increased wound tensile strength and collagen deposition.49 Arginine-sup-
plemented rats also had improved thymic function as assessed by thymic weight, the total
number of thymic lymphocytes in each thymus, and the mitogenic reactivity of thymic
lymphocytes to phytohemagglutinin and concanavalin A.48 Animal arginine supplemen-
tation resulted in improved survival in burns, and with intraperitoneal bacterial challenge.
Multiple human clinical trials have been conducted comparing the use of various enteral
formulations that contain arginine as well as other supplemental nutrients (e.g., glutamine,
omega-3 fatty acids, nucleotides) to a standard nonsupplemented formula. Results of these
trials have found the supplemented formula groups to have various improved outcomes
such as decreased number and severity of septic complications,50-53 decreased antibiotic
use,50 and decreased hospital and intensive care unit stay.50, 54
While supplemental arginine has been shown to improve survival in various animal
models and to improve a number of in vitro measures of immune function, the benefit of
arginine supplementation alone in critically ill humans is uncertain.
Other Nutrients
Vitamins and Minerals
Most nutritionally complete commercial formulas contain adequate vitamins and minerals
when a sufficient volume of formula to meet energy and macronutrient needs is provided.
Some disease-specific formulas are nutritionally incomplete in relation to vitamin and
mineral content (e.g., hepatic formulas). Liquid vitamin and mineral supplements may be
indicated for patients receiving nutritionally incomplete or diluted formulas for prolonged
periods of time. Fat-soluble vitamin supplementation such as vitamin K may be indicated
for patients with fat malabsorption or for patients with vitamin K deficiency; most com-
mercial formulas include vitamin K.
2705_frame_C42 Page 863 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:44 PM
Water
A large percentage of all enteral formulas is free water. The quantity of water in enteral
formulas is often described as water content or moisture content. The quantity of water is
usually reported in milliliters of water either per 1000 mL of formula or per liter of formula.
Most enteral formulas contain water in the general range of 690 to 860 mL per 1000 mL
of enteral formula. This must be considered when making fluid recommendations.
Physical Properties
Osmolality
Osmolality is the function of size and quantity of ionic and molecular particles (protein,
carbohydrate, electrolytes, and minerals) within a given volume. The unit of measure for
osmolality is mOsm/kg of water versus the unit of measure for osmolarity, which is
mOsm/L. Osmolality is considered the preferred term to use in reference to enteral
formulas.
Osmolality is important because of its role in maintaining the balance between intra-
cellular and extracellular fluids. Several factors affect the osmolality of enteral formulas.
The primary factor is nutrient hydrolysis. The smaller the chain length of carbohydrates
and proteins, the greater will be the formulation’s osmolality. Hence, formulas containing
increased amounts of simple sugars or free amino acids and/or di- and tripeptides will
have a greater osmolality than those containing starch and longer-chain intact proteins.
Lipids contribute minimally to the osmolality of an enteral formula with the exception of
MCT, owing to their water solubility. Because of dissociation properties and small size,
minerals and electrolytes also increase the osmolality.
GI tolerance (e.g., gastric retention, abdominal distention, diarrhea, nausea, and vomit-
ing) is influenced by the osmolality of enteral formulas. Generally, the greater the osmolality,
the greater the likelihood of GI intolerance. Administering hypertonic formulas at a slow,
continuous rate initially (10 to 20 cc/h) with a gradual titration to the final volume while
monitoring for GI complications can reduce the incidence of GI intolerance and allow these
formulas to be administered at full strength. What may be more important than the osmo-
lality of the enteral formula is the osmotic contribution from liquid medications either
infused with the enteral formula or bolused through the feeding tube. The average osmo-
lality range of commercially prepared liquid medications is reported to be 450 to
10,950 mOsm/kg. The osmolality of enteral formulas ranges from 270 to 700 mOsm/kg.
kcalorie-Nutrient Density
The kcalorie density of enteral formulas is generally 1.0, 1.5, or 2.0 kcalories per milliliter.
This is important as it not only determines how many kcalories, but also the other macro-
and micronutrients that the patient receives. As a formula becomes more nutrient dense,
it contains less free water.
Caloric density often affects the patient’s tolerance for tube feeding. Delayed gastric
emptying frequently occurs in patients who are given concentrated formulas. High fat
2705_frame_C42 Page 864 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:44 PM
formulas contribute to this, being potent inhibitors of gastric emptying. Since the patient’s
nutrient needs are met by a decreased volume of this class of formula, free water supple-
mentation should be given to ensure that fluid requirements are met, and to prevent
dehydration and constipation. Generally, these products are best tolerated as voluntary
oral supplements and not as tube feeding.
Disease-Specific Formulations
Most patients can tolerate enteral nutrition safely with a standard enteral formula and do
not require specialty enteral formulations. Specialty enteral formulas have an increased
cost that often may not be reimbursable; however, factors such as severe hypercatabolism,
renal or hepatic failure, pulmonary insufficiency, or malnutrition may alter nutrient metab-
olism and may thereby warrant an enteral formulation tailored to the specific disease
process. Determining the location of enteral nutrient delivery, mode of delivery, and the
patient’s overall current clinical condition as well as past medical history is necessary for
appropriate cost-effective formula selection.
Renal Formulas
The clinical status of patients with renal failure is diverse; therefore, prescribed nutrient
intake may vary greatly among patients and should depend on individual nutritional
status, catabolic rate, residual glomerular filtration rate, and intensity of dialysis or hemo-
filtration therapy. Formulas for renal insufficiency do not clearly distinguish the difference
between patients with acute failure and those with chronic renal failure.
Renal enteral formulas were first developed as oral supplements; therefore, they tend
to be hyperosmolar secondary to their large simple sugar content for flavor enhancement.
This hypertonicity often causes GI complications if these formulas are tube fed. The simple
sugar content can also be problematic, causing impaired glycemic control in patients who
are hypermetabolic, insulin resistant, or diabetic. The goal of feeding patients with renal
failure is to provide optimal nutrients without compromising their medical condition
through the accumulation of nitrogenous compounds, electrolytes, and fluid. Hence, renal
formulas are all calorically rich, providing 2 kcalories per milliliter and containing low-
to-moderate amounts of protein, electrolytes, and various minerals. Essential amino acid
2705_frame_C42 Page 865 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:44 PM
(EAA) formulas were developed to decrease urea toxicity. However, previously presumed
nonessential amino acids (NEAAs) are probably conditionally essential (e.g., arginine,
glutamine, histidine) during metabolic stress. Recent guidelines recommend the use of
EAAs and NEAAs for enhanced protein synthesis, correction of low plasma NEAA values,
provision of nonspecific nitrogen via NEAAs, and enhanced protein synthesis.55,56 Nutri-
ents should be provided as needed. The development of fluid and electrolyte disorders
or accumulation of metabolic waste products should not be minimized solely by nutrient
restriction, but also by adjusting the intensity of dialysis treatment as tolerated.57 Many
patients with stable levels of creatinine, blood urea nitrogen, and electrolytes with or
without dialysis can be fed with standard complete enteral formulas.
Pulmonary Formulas
Respiratory insufficiency and ventilator dependence can have a major impact on the
feeding of critically ill patients. Often these patients do not receive their full nutritional
needs due to the increased work of breathing, carbon dioxide retention, and fluid and
electrolyte restrictions. This reduced nutrient intake results in loss of lean body tissue (e.g.,
intercostals, diaphragm) and malnutrition that in turn leads to fatigue and further diffi-
culty with weaning from the ventilator.
Lipid oxidation is known to produce less carbon dioxide than oxidation of either glucose
or protein. This has been the basis for the development of high fat (~45 to 55% of kcalories)
and calorically concentrated (1.5 kcalories per milliliter) enteral formulas. Originally these
products consisted of 100% long-chain triacylglycerol, which can suppress the immune
system as well as cause malabsorption. Pulmonary formulas now contain a variety of
lipids including MCT, omega-6 and omega-3 fatty acids, and more recently, γ-linolenic
acid (GLA).
Animal research has shown that omega-3 fatty acids produce reduced amounts of
proinflammatory eicosanoids relative to animals fed omega-6 fatty acids.58 In another
study, animals fed diets enriched by GLA, as borage oil, were found to have higher
inflammatory exudate cellular levels of GLA and dihomogamma-linolenic acid (DGLA)
with reduced levels of prostaglandin E2 (PGE2) and leukotrienes,59 suggesting that GLA
modulates inflammatory status in a manner similar to that of omega-3 fatty acids. In
another animal study, authors concluded that dietary fish oil and fish and borage oil as
compared with corn oil may ameliorate endotoxin-induced acute lung injury by suppress-
ing the levels of proinflammatory eicosanoids in bronchoalveolar lavage fluid, and reduce
pulmonary neutrophil accumulation.60 More clinical trials are necessary to determine these
claims and patient indications.
Aside from the previously mentioned studies with pulmonary patients, previous
research evaluating the use of pulmonary enteral formulas has not demonstrated a clear
benefit in providing a high-fat, reduced-carbohydrate nutrient prescription for the patient
with compromised pulmonary function.61 The excessive carbohydrate associated with
overfeeding can result in a significant rise in pCO2 and respiratory quotient that influences
respiratory function. Close attention should be made to the avoidance of overfeeding by
providing energy intakes from 1.2 to 1.5 times the predicted resting energy expenditure
or by measuring energy expenditure via indirect calorimetry.61
There are potential detrimental effects in using a high-fat, low-carbohydrate enteral
formula. It is well known that high-fat diets can impair gastric emptying.62 Delayed
gastric emptying can result in increased gastric residual volumes and increased risk of
aspiration. Carbohydrate is the primary energy source during vigorous muscle exercise,
as required during ventilator weaning. During vigorous exercise, depleted muscle gly-
cogen stores may limit muscle endurance and strength. Nutritional support for the
2705_frame_C42 Page 866 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:44 PM
pulmonary compromised patient requires a balanced energy mix so that prompt replen-
ishment of respiratory muscle glycogen can occur.61 Pulmonary formulas, with their low
carbohydrate levels, are a potential disadvantage to fully support muscle glycogen reple-
tion during ventilator weaning.
Literature and clinical practice demonstrate that by not calorically overfeeding pulmo-
nary compromised patients, especially if they are septic, nutritional goals may be met
with a standard enteral product (~30% kcalories as fat).56,61
Diabetic Formulas
Nutrition is an integral component in the management of diabetes mellitus (DM). Whether
during critical illness or long-term support, it can be extremely challenging. Over the past
several years, enteral formulas have been developed emphasizing glycemic control for
patients with DM. These formulations contain high fat- low-carbohydrate nutrient ratios,
with actual ingredients varying among the manufacturers (see Table 42.7). The carbohy-
drate sources include fructose and fiber to assist in glycemic management. Some fat sources
have been modified to contain a higher ratio of monounsaturated fatty acids than saturated
fatty acids to better meet the 1994 guidelines of the American Diabetes Association.
A few individual outcome studies have been conducted to determine any benefit of
providing these formulations to gain optimal glycemic control.63,64 Overall, the recommen-
dation is to begin by administering a standard, fiber-containing enteral formula with
moderate carbohydrate and fat content. Blood glucose levels will vary based on the
patient’s diabetes history, metabolic stress level, and nutrient delivery method. Blood
glucose levels should be monitored closely with appropriate insulin management, espe-
cially if feeding regimens are altered or interrupted. If metabolically stable diabetic patients
do not exhibit desired glycemic control with a standard formula, then a diabetic enteral
formula may be beneficial.
Immune-Modulated Formulas
Over the past several decades, predominantly animal models have shown that certain
individual nutrients demonstrate immune benefits. These nutrients include arginine,
glutamine, omega-3 fatty acids, and nucleotides. Because of this, several enteral formula
manufacturers have developed immune-modulated enteral formulas to potentially
improve clinical outcomes in high-risk or critically ill patients. These products all vary in
the amounts of these nutrients they contain. More recently, several human studies have
been conducted to determine if critically ill or other immune-compromised individuals
experience positive outcomes as a result of receiving these formulations. Results of these
studies vary; they have been scrutinized for several variables, including lack of feeding
comparisons, lack of homogeneous study population comparisons, and the manner in
which the data were analyzed. Outcomes from the studies also vary, with some showing
no benefits regarding the immune formulas and others showing reduced rates of infection,
antibiotic use, incidence of intra-abdominal abscesses, and reduced intensive care unit
and hospital length of stay.40
Overall, the literature suggests that these immune-modulated formulas may be benefi-
cial for some patients. In patients who had undergone complicated GI surgery, sustained
severe trauma, or had complicated ICU stays, immune formulas were linked with
decreased incidence of infections and hospital length of stay, but were not shown to reduce
mortality in severely injured and immune-compromised patients.65 More research is nec-
essary to determine the optimal patient populations and duration of therapy for which
these formulas may be appropriate.
Methods of Administration
The method for enteral tube feeding is limited to the type and site of enteral feeding
access. The formula delivery method selected for the patient also depends on the patient’s
hemodynamic stability, gastric emptying rate, GI tolerance to tube feeding, type of formula
selected, nutrient needs, patient mobility, and ease of administration. The main methods
of tube feeding are by continuous, intermittent, or bolus delivery. Each institution should
have an established protocol for the initiation and advancement of enteral feedings.
Bolus Feeding
Bolus feedings involve the delivery of larger amounts of formula over short periods of
time, usually five minutes or less. The bolus method should only be used with gastric
delivery. The stomach can act as a reservoir to handle relatively large volumes of formula
(e.g., 400 mL) over a short time as opposed to the small intestine. The feedings are usually
administered via a gastrostomy tube, owing to the large lumen, but they can also be given
through a small-bore nasogastric tube. Usually a syringe or bulb is used to push 200 to
500 mL of formula into the feeding tube several times a day. A patient should demonstrate
adequate gastric emptying and the ability to protect his/her airway (i.e., an intact gag
reflex) prior to initiating bolus feedings, especially in the critical care setting, to decrease
the risk of aspiration. The ability to absorb nutrients using this type of feeding depends
on the access site and the functional capability of the gut.
Bolus feedings are considered the most physiologic method of administration since the
gut can rest between feedings and allow for normal hormonal fluctuations. They are the
2705_frame_C42 Page 868 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:44 PM
easiest to administer since a pump is not required. Bolus feedings also allow for increased
patient mobility, since they are delivered intermittently and do not require a pump. For
these reasons, this method of feeding is most desirable for stable patients who are going
home or to an extended care facility with tube feedings.
Intermittent Feedings
This method of feeding requires the formula to be infused over a 20- to 30-minute period.
A feeding container and gravity drip is usually used for this method. Intermittent feedings
are less likely to cause GI side effects than bolus feeding, since the formula is administered
over a longer interval. Depending on the volume delivered, this method may be used for
gastric as well as small bowel formula delivery.
Continuous Feedings
Continuous formula delivery is usually the enteral delivery method best tolerated. Con-
tinuous feedings are delivered slowly over 12 to 24 hours, typically with an infusion pump.
In order to avoid accidental bolus delivery, continuous infusion is preferred over gravity,
as a constant infusion rate can be sustained. Postpyloric feedings require continuous
infusion. The small bowel does not act as a reservoir for large volumes of fluid within a
short time, and GI complications usually arise if feedings are delivered in this manner.
Initiation and progression of continuous feedings should be individualized and based
upon the patient’s clinical condition and feeding tolerance. Typically, feedings may be
initiated at 10 to 50 mL/hour, with the lower range for the critically ill. Progression of tube
feedings may range from 10 to 25 mL/hour every 4 to 24 hours, depending on the patient’s
tolerance, until the desired goal rate is achieved. As a patient is beginning to transition to
oral intake, the tube feedings may be cycled to allow for appetite stimulation, or to allow
for bowel rest and time away from the pump. The feedings may be administered at night
and held during the day to allow for patient mobility and an opportunity to eat.
Monitoring
It is very important to continuously monitor patients for signs of formula intolerance,
hydration and electrolyte status, and nutritional status. Physical indicators that should be
2705_frame_C42 Page 869 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:44 PM
TABLE 42.8
Common Complications Associated with Enteral Feeding66,67
Complication Possible Causes Suggested Corrective Measures
Mechanical
Obstructed feeding tube Formula viscosity excessive for feeding Use less viscous formula or larger bore
tube tube
Obstruction from crushed medications Flush tube before and after feeding
administered through tube Give medications as elixir or assure
medications are crushed thoroughly
Flush tube before and after delivering
each medication
Coagulation of formula protein in tube Flush feeding tube only with warm
when in contact with acidic medium water
(medication, flushing solution) Avoid flushing with sodas, coffee, juices
or any other acidic medium
Metabolic
Hyperglycemia Metabolic stress, sepsis, trauma Treat origin of stress and provide insulin
Diabetes as needed
Avoid excessive carbohydrate delivery
Give appropriate insulin dose
Elevated or depressed Excessive or inadequate electrolytes in Change formula
serum electrolytes the formula
Refeeding syndrome Monitor electrolytes closely (e.g.,
potassium, magnesium, phosphorus)
and replace as indicated
Initiate carbohydrate gradually, not
increasing amount provided until
electrolytes and blood glucose levels
stabilized
Dehydration Osmotic diarrhea caused by rapid Infuse formula slowly
infusion of hypertonic formula Change to isotonic formula or dilute
with water
Excessive protein, electrolytes, or both Reduce protein, electrolytes or increase
fluid provision
Inadequate free water provision Assure patient receives adequate free
water, especially if provided calorically
dense formula
Overhydration Excessive fluid intake Assess fluid intake; monitor daily fluid
intake and output
Rapid refeeding in malnourished patient Monitor serum electrolytes, body weight
Increased extracellular mass catabolism daily; weight change >0.2 kg/d reflects
causing loss of body cell mass with decrease or increase of extracellular
subsequent potassium loss fluid
Cardiac, hepatic, or renal insufficiency Use calorically dense formula to
decrease free water if needed
Diuretic therapy
Gradual weight loss Inadequate calories Assure patient is receiving prescribed
amount of calories
Assure to monitor patient over time as
nutrient requirements may change due
to metabolic alterations
Excessive weight gain Excess calories Decrease calories provided, change
formula or decrease volume per day
Visceral protein Inadequate protein or calories Increase protein and/or calorie
depletion provision
2705_frame_C42 Page 870 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:44 PM
Gastrointestinal
Nausea and vomiting Improper tube location Reposition or replace feeding tube
Excessive formula volume or rate Decrease rate of infusion or volume
infusion infused
Very cold formula Administer formula at room
temperature
High osmolality formula infused Change to isotonic formula or dilute
with water prior to infusing
High fat formula infused Change to lower fat formula
Smell of enteral formulas Add flavorings to formula; use
polymeric as have less offensive odor
Diarrhea Too rapid infusion Decrease rate of infusion
Lactose intolerance Use lactose-free formula
Bolus feedings into small bowel Only provide continuous or slow gravity
feedings into small bowel
High osmolality formula infused Change to isotonic formula or dilute
with water prior to infusing
Hyperosmolar medication delivery Change medications or dilute with
water to make isotonic prior to delivery
Altered GI anatomy or short gut Change to hydrolyzed or free amino acid
formula with MCT oil
Vomiting and diarrhea Contamination Check sanitation of formula and
equipment; assure proper handling
techniques
Abdominal distention, Rapid bolus or intermittent infusion of Administer formula at room
bloating, cramping, gas cold formula temperature
Rapid infusion via syringe Infuse continuously at low rate and
gradually increase to goal
Nutrient malabsorption Use hydrolyzed formula, MCT
containing, lactose free
Rapid administration of MCT Administer MCT gradually as tolerated
Constipation Lack of fiber Use fiber containing formula or add
stool softener
Inadequate free water Increase free water intake
Fecal impaction, GI obstruction Rectal exam, digital disimpaction
Inadequate physical activity Increase ambulation if able
Aspiration or gastric Altered gastric motility, diabetic Assure post-pyloric nutrient delivery
retention gastroparesis, altered gag reflex, altered with continuous infusion
mental status Add prokinetic agent if changed feeding
position does not help
Head of bed <30 degrees Elevate head of bed to >30 degrees if
possible
Displaced feeding tube Verify feeding tube placement and
replace as needed
Ileus or hemodynamic instability If small bowel feedings not tolerated
then hold feedings and initiate TPN for
prolonged intolerance
Medications that may slow gastric Evaluate medications and change if
motility (e.g., opiates, anticholinergics) feasible
Gastric or vagotomy surgery
2705_frame_C42 Page 871 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:44 PM
TABLE 42.9
Example Monitoring Protocol for Enteral Feeding
During Initiation and
Advancement of
Feedings Until Stable at Long-term Enteral
Parameters Goal Rate Stable at Goal Rate Support — Stable
Body weight Daily 1-2 times per week Monthly
Fluid intake/output Daily Daily Daily
Bowel function
Glucose Daily unless abnormal 2-3 times per week; Every 6 months; unless
then every 1 to 8 hours unless diabetic, then diabetic, then daily
until stable daily
Electrolytes Daily 2-3 times per week Every 3-6 months
Blood urea nitrogen
Creatinine
Magnesium
Phosphorus
Calcium
Liver function tests 1-2 times per week 1-2 times per month Every 3-6 months
Triglyceride
Visceral proteins 1-2 times per week Weekly Every 3-6 months
(prealbumin,
transferrin)
Gastric residuals Every 4-6 hours If < 200 mL, then N/A unless
(for gastric feeds only) discontinue gastroparesis, then
every 4-6 hours
From Ideno, K.T. In: Nutrition Support Dietetics Core Curriculum, Gottschlich, M.M., Matarese, L.E., Shronts, E.P.,
Eds., ASPEN, Silver Spring, 1993, 71. With permission.
Summary
Enteral feeding is the preferred method of providing nutrition in those who cannot con-
sume adequate nutrients orally. Enteral feeding has many advantages over parenteral
nutrition, including preservation of the structure and function of the GI tract, more efficient
nutrient utilization, fewer infections and metabolic complications, greater ease of admin-
istration, and lower cost. In order for enteral nutrition to be successful, patient assessment
for the optimal access site, appropriate formula selection, nutrient requirements, monitor-
ing, and trouble-shooting complications are required.
2705_frame_C42 Page 872 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:44 PM
References
1. McCamish M, Bounous G, Geraghty M. In: Clinical Nutrition: Enteral and Tubefeeding (Rombeau
J, Rolandelli R, Eds) WB Saunders, Philadelphia, 1997, 1.
2. King BK, Kudsk KA, Li J, et al. Ann Surg 229: 272; 1999.
3. Kudsk KA. Ann Surg 215: 503; 1992.
4. Minard G, Kudsk KA. World J Surg 22: 213; 1998.
5. Suchner U, Senftleben U, Eckart T. Nutrition 12:13; 1996.
6. Hindmarsh JT, Clark RG. Br J Surg 60: 589; 1973.
7. Rowlands BJ, Giddings AB, Johnston AB, et al. Br J Anaesth 49: 781; 1977.
8. Peterson VM, Moore EE, Jones TN, et al. Surgery 104: 199; 1988.
9. Kudsk KA, Minard G, Wojtysiak SL, et al. Surgery 116: 516; 1994.
10. McArdle AH, Palmason C, Morency I, et al. Surgery 90: 616; 1981.
11. Bennegard K, Lindmark L, Wickstrom I, et al. Am J Clin Nutr 40: 752; 1984.
12. Swank GM, Deitch W. J Surgery 20: 411; 1996.
13. Kudsk KA. Nutrition 14: 541; 1998.
14. Bengmark S. Curr Opinion Clin Nutr 2: 83; 1999.
15. Cunningham-Rundles S, Ho Lin D. Nutrition 14: 573; 1998.
16. Bengmark S. J Parent Enter Nutr 19: 410; 1995.
17. Moore FA, Feliciano DV, Andrassy RJ, et al. Ann Surg 216: 172; 1992.
18. Kudsk KA, Croce MA, Fabian TC, et al. Ann Surg 215: 503; 1992.
19. Moore FA, Moore EE, Jones TN, et al. J Trauma 29: 916; 1989.
20. Trice S, Melnik G, Page C. Nutr Clin Prac 12: 114; 1997.
21. Lipman TO. J Parent Enteral Nutr 22: 167; 1998.
22. Adams S, Dellinger EP, Wertz MJ, et al. J Trauma 26: 882; 1986.
23. Zaloga GP. Chest 100: 1643; 1991.
24. Thurlow PM. J Parent Enteral Nutr 10: 104; 1986.
25. Heiselman DE, Vidovich RR, Milkovich G, et al. J Parent Enteral Nutr 17: 562; 1993.
26. Levenson R, Turner WW, Dyson A, et al. J Parent Enteral Nutr 12: 135; 1988.
27. Lord LM, Weiser-Maimone A, Pulhamus M, et al. J Parent Enteral Nutr 17: 271; 1993.
28. Kittinger JW, Sandler RS, Heizer WD. J Parent Enteral Nutr 11: 33; 1987.
29. Cresci G, Grace M, Park M, et al. Nutr Clin Pract 14:101; 1999.
30. Minard G. Nutr Clin Prac 9:172; 1994.
31. Gauderer MWL, Ponsky JL, Izant RJ, Jr. J Pediatr Surg 15: 872; 1980.
32. Baskin WN. Gastroenterologist 4: S40; 1996.
33. Larson DE, Burton DD, Schroeder KW, et al. Gastroenterol 93: 48; 1987.
34. Wasiljew BK, Ujiki GT, Beal JM. Am J Surg 143: 194; 1982.
35. Ruge J, Vasquez RM. Surg Gynecol Obstet 162:13; 1986.
36. Kirby DF, Craig RM, Tsang T, et al. J Parent Enteral Nutr 10: 155; 1986.
37. Kaplan DS, Murthy UK, Linscheer WG. Gastrointest Endosc 35: 403; 1989.
38. Shike M, Latkany L, Gerdes H, et al. Nutr Clin Prac 12: 38S; 1997.
39. Trujilo EB. In: Contemporay Nutrition Support Practice, Gottschlich MM, Matarese LE, Eds, WB
Saunders, Philadelphia, 1998, p. 192.
40. Barton RG. Nutr Clin Prac 12: 51; 1997.
41. Blackburn GL. Soc Exp Biology Med 200: 183; 1992.
42. Lin E, Kotani J, Lowry S. Nutrition 14: 545; 1998.
43. Barton RG, Nutr Clin Prac 12: 51; 1997.
44. Heys SD, Ashkanani F. Br J Surgery 86: 289; 1999.
45. Van Der Hulst RRW, Van Krell BK, Von Meyenfeldt MF, et al. Lancet 341: 1363; 1993.
46. Ziegler TR, Young LS, Benfell K, et al. Ann Intern Med 116: 821; 1992.
47. Anderson PM, Schroeder G, Skubitz KM. Cancer 83: 1433; 1998.
48. Evoy D, Lieberman MD, Fahey TJ, et al. Nutrition 14: 611; 1998.
49. Barbul A, Fishel RS, Shimazu S, et al. J Surg Res 38: 328; 1986.
2705_frame_C42 Page 873 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:44 PM
50. Kudsk DA, Minard G, Croce MA, et al. Ann Surg 224: 531; 1996.
51. Gottschlich MM, Jenkins M, Warden GD, et al. J Parent Enter Nutr 14: 225; 1990.
52. Moore FA, Moore EE, Kudsk KA, et al. J Trauma 37: 607; 1994.
53. Braga M, Vignali A, Gianotti L, et al. Eur J Surg 162: 105; 1996.
54. Bower RH, Cerra FB, Bershadsky B, et al. Crit Care Med 23: 436; 1995.
55. Oldrizzi L, Rugiu C, Maschio G. Nutr Clin Prac 9: 3; 1994.
56. ASPEN Board of Directors. J Parent Enteral Nutr 17: 1SA; 1993.
57. Kopple JD. J Parenter Enteral Nutr 20: 3; 1996.
58. Barton RG, Wells CL, Carlson A, et al. J Trauma 31: 768; 1991.
59. Karlstad MD, DeMichele SJ, Leathem WD, et al. Crit Care Med 21: 1740; 1993.
60. Mancuso P, Whelan J, DeMichele S, et al. Crit Care Med 25: 1198; 1997.
61. Malone AM. Nutr Clin Prac 12: 168; 1997.
62. Didery MB, MacDonald IA, Blackshaw PE. Gut 35: 186; 1994.
63. Printz H, Reche B, Fehmann HC, Goke B. Exp Clin Endocrinol Diabetes 105: 134; 1997.
64. Peters A, Davidson M. J Parent Enteral Nutr 16: 69; 1992.
65. Heys SD, Walker LG, Smith I, et al. Ann Surg 229: 467; 1999.
66. Stuart S, Melanie S, Unger L. In: Medical Nutrition and Disease, Morrison G, Hark L, Eds,
Blackwell Science, Cambridge, MA, 1996, p. 339.
67. Ideno KT. In: Nutrition Support Dietetics Core Curriculum, Gottschlich MM, Matarese LE, Shronts
EP, Eds, ASPEN, Silver Spring, MD, 1993, p. 71.
2705_frame_C42 Page 874 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:44 PM
2705_frame_C43 Page 875 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:45 PM
43
Parenteral Nutrition
Introduction
Parenteral nutrition can be considered one of the 20th century’s medical breakthroughs.
Its discovery and first implementation in the 1960s greatly enhanced clinical medicine by
providing a means for complete and safe feeding of patients with nonfunctional gas-
trointestinal (GI) tracts. Experimentation with intravenous feeding can be traced as far
back as the 1600s, when sharpened quills were used to administer a mixture of milk and
wine into the veins of dogs.1 The 1800s brought the administration of saline, and by the
1930s 5% dextrose and protein hydrolysates were being infused intravenously.2 Several
factors limited the safe infusion of nutrients intravenously. One factor was the large
volumes that were provided, usually more than 3 liters per day.2 These volumes were
generally not tolerated by patients for long periods of time, and often resulted in pulmo-
nary edema. Another factor was the attempt to deliver hyperosmolar solutions peripher-
ally, which was the common practice in the early years. Dextrose solutions greater than
10% concentration were not tolerated, and resulted in thrombosis. Lastly, volume and the
osmolality restrictions resulted in caloric delivery limitations. This all led to experimen-
tation with alternate fuel substrates, alcohol and fat, due to their increased caloric provision
of 7 and 9 kcalories per gram, respectively. Research quickly revealed that alcohol was
not going to be the answer, as it resulted in hepatoxicity and other side effects when
delivered in large amounts.1 Intravenous fat delivery was an enticing alternative due to
its high caloric load and decreased osmolality. Initially, provision of intravenous fat was
achieved with cottonseed oil in the 1950s. However, it was removed from the market, as
it was associated with jaundice, fever, and bleeding.3 Research continued in Europe, where
emulsions made from soybean oil were successfully administered.2
Great advancement came in 1967, when cannulating the subclavian vein was introduced
to administer intravenous nutrients. Wilmore and Dudrick4 first reported successful pro-
vision of centrally administered nutrition to an infant with intestinal atresia. In the 1970s
advancements continued with the use of crystalline amino acids rather than protein
hydrolysates, recommendations for standard amounts of vitamins and minerals, and the
reintroduction of lipids in the United States.1 After the 1970s, the focus turned to fine-
tuning the parenteral solutions with the development of specialized amino acid sources
0-8493-2705-9/01/$0.00+$1.50
© 2002 by CRC Press LLC 875
2705_frame_C43 Page 876 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:45 PM
TABLE 43.1
Development of Total Parenteral Nutrition (TPN) Guidelines
Organization Year
American Society for Parenteral and Enteral Nutrition 1986, 1993
American College of Physicians 1987, 1989
American Gastroenterology Association 1989
U.S. Dept of Health and Human Services 1990
TABLE 43.2
Indications for TPN5-8
Clinical Situation Consensus
Short bowel syndrome Inability to absorb adequate nutrients orally
<60 cm small bowel may require indefinite use
Severe pancreatitis Recommended if enteral nutrition causes abdominal pain, ascites, or
elevated amylase/lipase
Increased fistula output with enteral feedings
Intravenous lipids are considered safe if serum triglyceride levels are
<400 mg/dl
Enterocutaneous fistula Fistula that exhibits increased output with enteral nutrition
Intractable diarrhea or vomiting Recommended for losses greater than 500-1000 ml/day with inability to
maintain adequate nutritional status
Bowel obstruction, ileus With obstruction and malnutrition awaiting surgery >7 days
Prolonged ileus >5-7 days with poor nutritional status
Perioperative support Preoperative support is indicated for severely malnourished patients with
expected postoperative NPO status >10 days
For those with postoperative complications rendering NPO >10 days
Inflammatory bowel If enteral nutrition not tolerated or if precluded by GI fistulas
Critical care Unable to gain enteral access, instability, abdominal distention with
prolonged reflux of enteral feedings, expected to remain NPO >7 days
Eating disorders Severe malnutrition and inability to tolerate enteral feeding for psychological
reasons
Pregnancy Safe in pregnancy; hyperemesis gravidarum
for disease states, approval of total nutrient admixtures by the Food and Drug Adminis-
tration, and development of new access devices and delivery systems.1
TABLE 43.3
Factors that Contribute to Increased Gut Permeability
Absence of enteral stimulation
Broad spectrum antibiotics
H2-receptor blockers
Decreased GI hormone secretion
nutrients, but also serves as a large immunologic organ in the body by acting as a protective
barrier against intraluminal toxins and bacteria. Approximately 50% of the body’s immu-
noglobulin-producing cells line the GI tract, with 80% of the body’s manufactured immu-
noglobulin being secreted across the GI tract.9 During severe physiologic stress gut
ischemia can occur, leading to mucosal damage and disruption of the barrier function and
ultimately passage of bacteria and toxins into the bloodstream.10 In addition, common
clinical practices as well as physiologic changes during acute stress can lend to bacterial
overgrowth in the proximal GI tract and impact the gut’s protective barrier (Table 43.3).
Whether or not bacterial translocation occurring in animals and humans during acute
stress is clinically significant remains debatable. Animal studies support the statement
that enteral rather than parenteral nutrition maintains gut integrity and immune respon-
siveness, and prevents bacterial translocation.11-15 However, there was no significant dif-
ference in overall outcome in an acute pancreatitis model,11 but in animals with induced
bacterial pneumonia, those that received total parenteral nutrition (TPN) had a higher
mortality rate.15 There is no hard evidence to support the statement that parenteral nutri-
tion results in clinically significant bacterial translocation in humans.16,17
Despite this lack of evidence, other disadvantages of parenteral nutrition exist. The
metabolic response to intravenous glucose differs from oral glucose. This may be due to
the fact that the liver retains a large portion of glucose when provided orally, resulting in
less systemic hyperglycemia and hyperinsulinemia.18 A meta-analysis comparing enteral
and parenteral nutrition also concluded that plasma glucose concentrations are lower
during enteral than parenteral nutrition.19 Plasma glucose and insulin concentrations,
glucose oxidation, CO2 production, and minute ventilation increase in proportion to the
proportion of kcalories administered in TPN.20 Prolonged infusion of high rates of glucose
(>4 mg/kg/min) results in de novo lipogenesis in the majority of critically ill patients.20
Furthermore, TPN is associated with increased septic morbidity16,19,21,22 and increased
cost16, 23 when compared with enteral nutrition in trauma patients.
Vascular Access
Peripheral
Prior to initiating parenteral nutrition, vascular access is obtained. Determination of
venous access is based upon the duration of therapy, patient limitations, and availability
of equipment and facilities. Central or peripheral veins may be used for the provision of
parenteral nutrition. Peripheral access with conventional needles uses the small veins of
the extremities — typically the hands and forearms. These small veins are easily sclerosed
by hypertonic parenteral solutions. Therefore, to minimize phlebitis and thrombosis of
the veins, it is recommended that peripheral parenteral solutions (PPN) consist of osmo-
lalities ≤900 mOsm/L.5 Even with appropriate PPN, intravenous sites may need frequent
changing to maintain venous patency.1 The increased fluid requirement necessary to
2705_frame_C43 Page 878 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:45 PM
TABLE 43.4
Typical PPN Order
Usual Concentration gm/L or
Macronutrient in PPN Solution mEq/L Kcal/L mOsmol/L
Dextrose (6%) 5-10% 60* 240 150
Amino acids (3%) 3-5% 30* 120 300
Lipid (20%) 30-60% (of kcal) 20* 200 300
Sodium 35+ — 70
Potassium 30+ — 60
Magnesium 5+ — 5
Calcium — 7
Total 560 892
* gm/L; + mEq/L
TABLE 43.5
Indications for Peripheral Parenteral Nutrition
Indication Example
Patient expected to be NPO 5-7 days Postoperative ileus
Inadequate GI function expected for 5-7 days Hyperemesis gravidarum
Transitioning to an oral diet or tube feeding Patient with Crohn’s disease flare
Central venous access is contraindicated Coagulopathy, sepsis, venous thrombosis
Malnourished patients expected to be NPO Preoperative small bowel obstruction
for several days
Patients with nutrient requirements that can Obese patient with good venous access, small
be met with PPN or elderly people
minimize the PPN solution’s osmolality limits nutrient provision as well as the clinical
utility of PPN (Table 43.4).
PPN solutions vary considerably among institutions. Some may only use dextrose with
electrolytes, vitamins, and minerals while others may include lipids and amino acids to
increase the kcalories and minimize catabolism. PPN formulations composed of carbohy-
drate, amino acids, and lipid generally provide 1000 to 1500 kcal/day . However, PPN
may be useful when the long term plan for nutrition is uncertain and the patient requires
interim nutrition intervention in which the GI tract is nonfunctional, such as with pro-
longed ileus or hyperemesis gravidarum (Table 43.5).
Central
Central venous access refers to the large veins in the trunk. The primary indications for
central venous access include chemotherapy, antibiotic administration, risk of tissue necro-
sis with vesicant medications, and provision of TPN due to its pH and increased osmolality.
Access is obtained with specialized catheters, with the distal tip placed into the vena cava
or right atrial area. The most common venipuncture sites include the subclavian, jugular,
femoral, cephalic, and basilic veins (Table 43.6). Several varieties of central venous cath-
eters are available, the most common being polyurethane and silicone (Table 43.7). Most
catheters are available in a variety of French sizes, lengths, and number of portals or
lumens. Multilumen versions provide for simultaneous infusion of TPN with multiple or
incompatible drugs.
Physiologic, functional, psychological, and social factors all need consideration prior to
determining the type and location of catheter placement (Table 43.8). If the patient is in
the acute care setting and unlikely to be discharged with TPN, the physiologic factors are
2705_frame_C43 Page 879 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:45 PM
TABLE 43.6
Central Venous Catheter Placement24,25
Method Vessels Description
Percutaneous approach Subclavian a. Venipuncture and passage of a
a. Modified Seldinger technique Internal & external jugular guidewire through the needle
Antecubital followed by removal of the
needle and catheter placement
over the guidewire
b. Peel-away introducer sheath b. Catheter passes through the
and tissue dilator introducer into the vein and
introducer tears longitudinally,
leaving the catheter in place
Cutdown Cephalic Surgical dissection, isolation of the
External & internal jugular vessel, and catheter placement
Tunneled 6 cm catheter segment is tunneled
through the subcutaneous tissues
between the venipuncture site
and the skin exit site
Implanted ports A reservoir with a silicone disk and
attached silicone tube is
implanted under the clavicle in a
subcutaneous pocket
TABLE 43.7
Central Venous Catheter Characteristics
Material Description
Silicone elastomer Known as Silastic (Dow Corning)
Biomaterial for longterm indwelling devices
Increased elasticity and flexibility for minimal damage to intima
Resistant to hydrolytic enzymes; hydrophobic surface resists bacterial adherence
Considered chemically inert in blood
Guide wire or peel-away introducer needed for insertion due to soft texture
Polyurethane Increased flexibility and strength; resistance to hydrolytic enzymes
Decreased incidence of inflammatory changes and thrombophlebitis with short
term use
Anticoagulation required with long term use for thrombosis prevention
Polyvinyl chloride Stiff material
Increased rate of thrombogenicity
Infrequently used
Polyethylene High tensile strength
Minimal irritation if used for short duration
Associated with platelet adherance and fibrous capsule formation with long
duration
Polytetrafluoroethylene Known as Teflon; stable; demonstrates nonadhesive, antifriction properties;
resistant to degradative enzymes
Smooth and hydrophobic catheter surface
Not suitable for long term use due to rigidity which causes irritation and thrombosis
formation
Hydrogel Hydrophilic polymers designed for biological use
Absorbs water up to 90% of the catheter’s dry weight without dissolving
Most inert and nonthrombogenic of biomaterials
Material lacks durability unless copolymerized with other monomers
Coated/bonded catheters Antimicrobial impregnated catheters: catherters with the cationic surfactant
tridodecylmethylammonium chloride facilitate bonding of anionic antibiotics to
both the internal and external catheter surfaces
Antiseptic-coated catheters: polyurethane catheters bonded with silver sulfadiazine
and chlorhexidine to the external surface
From Krzywda, E.A. and Edmiston, C.E. ASPEN Practice Manual, 1998. With permission.
2705_frame_C43 Page 880 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:45 PM
TABLE 43.8
Patient Factors for Vascular Access Device Selection
Patient Factor Considerations
Physiologic Vein physiology
Hypercoagulable states
Diabetes
Clotting abnormalities
Skin disorders and conditions
Previous surgical procedures in the thorax or vascular system
Morbid obesity
Surgical risk
Known allergies to vascular materials
Functional Impaired vision, dexterity
Developmental disabilities
Frailty
Psychological Needle phobia (not ideal candidates for implanted ports)
Body image issues (implanted port less disturbing than tunneled)
Previous experience with vascular access devices
Social Support system for line and catheter care
Financial implications
From Evans, M. Nutr. Clin. Prac. 14: 172; 1999. With permission.
Carbohydrate
Carbohydrate serves as the primary energy source in parenteral solutions. The amount of
carbohydrate provided is based upon the patient’s individual nutrient requirements and
glucose oxidation rate. Although the exact requirement is individualized, guidelines are
available. A minimum of 100 gm per day is often used as the obligate need for the central
nervous system, white blood cells, red blood cells, and renal medulla.26 The maximum
rate of glucose oxidation in adults is 4 to 7 mg/kg/min,5 or 400 to 700 gm for a 70-kg
person, with the lower range suggested for critically ill patients secondary to endogenous
glucose production. Excessive carbohydrate provision is associated with hyperglycemia,
excessive carbon dioxide production, and hepatic steatosis.26
Carbohydrate is provided almost exclusively as dextrose monohydrate in parenteral
solutions. Each gram of hydrated dextrose provides 3.4 kcal/gram. Commercial dextrose
preparations are available in concentrations from 5 to 70% (Table 43.9). Dextrose solutions
have an acidic pH (3.5 to 5.5) and are stable after autoclave sterilization.26 Sterilization
2705_frame_C43 Page 881 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:45 PM
TABLE 43.9
Intravenous Dextrose Solutions
Dextrose
Concentration Carbohydrate Calories Osmolarity
% (gm/L) (kcal/L) (mOsm/L)
5 50 170 250
10 100 340 500
20 200 680 1000
30 300 1020 1500
50 500 1700 2500
70 700 2380 3500
also increases the shelf life of dextrose solutions so that they can be stored for extended
periods at room temperature.
Glycerol is a simple organic compound consisting of the elements carbon, hydrogen,
and oxygen. Glycerol yields 4.3 kcal/gram when oxidized to carbon dioxide and water,
and does not require insulin for cellular uptake. When provided in low concentrations
(3%) with amino acids, it has been found to be protein sparing.27 Because of these advan-
tages, glycerol is used an alternative source of calories in some parenteral formulations,
primarily in PPN.
Fat
Since its introduction in Europe in the mid-1960s, intravenous fat emulsions have been
extensively used as a nutrient source in parenteral nutrition. The aqueous fat emulsions
available in the U.S. as of 1999 consist of long-chain triacylglycerols (TAG) manufactured
from soybean and safflower oil. Therefore, the lipid emulsions not only provide a source
of kcalories but also essential fatty acids. These products contain egg yolk phospholipid
as an emulsifying agent and glycerin, which make the products nearly isotonic. The
glycerol raises the caloric concentration of the 10% emulsion to 1.1 kcal/mL and the 20%
emulsion to 2.0 kcal/mL. The phospholipid may contribute to the phosphorus intake of
patients who receive large amounts of lipids (>500 mL/day). Combinations of long-chain
and medium-chain TAG emulsions have been available in Europe for several years.
Most patients tolerate daily infusion of lipids provided as an intermittent or continuous
infusion, often as part of a total nutrient admixture (TNA). Continuous delivery with a
moderate dose is favored over intermittent infusion due to decreased fluctuations in serum
TAG levels and improved fat oxidation.28 The requirement of a test dose is usually elim-
inated with continuous delivery, as the administration rate tends to be less than that with
the test dose. Patients should still be monitored for fever, chills, headache, and back pain
during the first dose of intravenous lipid. Absolute contraindications to intravenous fat
emulsions include pathologic hyperlipidemia, lipoid nephrosis, severe egg allergy, and
acute pancreatitis associated with severe hypertriglyceridemia.26 Caution should be taken
in delivery to patients with severe liver disease, adult respiratory distress syndrome, or
severe metabolic stress. If serum TAG levels are greater than 500 mg/dL, lipids should
be held with only the minimal requirements for essential fatty acids (EFA) provided to
avoid further metabolic complications.
Lipid requirements are met by providing at least 4% of energy as EFA or approximately
10% of energy as a commercial lipid emulsion from safflower oil1 to prevent EFA deficiency.
Since lipid emulsions vary in their composition of EFA depending on the oil source, the
minimum amount provided is based upon the EFA content rather than a percentage of
2705_frame_C43 Page 882 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:45 PM
total energy. Recommendations for optimal lipid delivery have evolved over the years. It
once was common practice to provide 50 to 70% of energy as lipid due to its concentrated
energy source and decreased volume. However, over the years concerns that long-chain
triglycerides impair neutraphil function, endotoxin clearance, and complement synthesis
have resulted in the recommendation to limit lipid administration to 1 gm/kg per day29
or 25 to 30% of total energy.30
Protein
The primary function of protein in parenteral nutrition is to provide nitrogen to maintain
nitrogen balance to help minimize loss of lean body mass and protein degradation for
gluconeogenesis. The protein utilized for parenteral nutrition is primarily in the form of
crystalline amino acids. Parenteral amino acid products can be divided into standard and
modified. Standard amino acid products are suitable for the majority of patients. They
contain a balanced or physiologic mixture of essential and nonessential amino acids in
which the ratios are based on FAO/WHO recommendations for optimal proportions of
essential amino acids. Standard formulations are available in a range of concentrations
from 3 to 15%. Most institutions stock 10 and 15% concentrations, since more dilute
solutions can be made readily by adding sterile water with an automated compounder.
Modified amino acid solutions are designed for patients with disease- or age-specific
amino acid requirements. Formulations are marketed for adults with hepatic failure, renal
dysfunction, metabolic stress, and for neonates with special requirements for growth and
development. These modified formulations are significantly more costly than the standard
formulations and may not always prove as cost-effective; therefore, strict criteria should
be established for their use.
Patients with hepatic failure develop multiple metabolic abnormalities including elec-
trolyte disturbances and alterations in amino acid metabolism. In severe liver disease,
hepatic encephalopathy can occur which is associated with decreased branched chain
amino acid (BCAA) serum levels and elevated aromatic amino acid (AAA) and methionine
serum levels. Patients with hepatic disease without encephalopathy may be provided with
moderate levels of standard amino acids with close monitoring of their mental status.
When hepatic encephalopathy is severe (≥Grade II), a modified hepatic protein formulation
may be beneficial. These formulations have high concentrations of BCAA (~45% of protein)
and low concentrations of AAA and methionine. Improvement in hepatic encephalopathy
and lower mortality have been found in some patients who received this formulation.31
Modified formulations are marketed for patients with renal failure. These formulas
contain mainly essential amino acids, and were designed on the premise that endogenous
urea could be used to synthesize nonessential amino acids. This hypothesis has been
challenged, thus questioning the usefulness of these formulas. Prospective, randomized,
controlled studies have demonstrated that standard amino acids are as effective as mod-
ified amino acids in patients who have renal failure and who require parenteral nutri-
tion.32,33 Thus, patients with severe renal failure may be given standard amino acids as
part of parenteral nutrition in most clinical situations.24
A parenteral formulation with an enhanced BCAA formulation is marketed for patients
with metabolic stress such as that caused by trauma, burns, and sepsis. Metabolic stress
causes an efflux of amino acids from skeletal muscle and the gut to the liver for gluco-
neogenesis and support of acute phase protein synthesis.34 Metabolically stressed patients
have also been shown to have increased serum levels of AAA and decreased BCAA levels.
Therefore, the rationale of using a high BCAA formula in these patients is to provide the
preferential fuel to the body and normalize the patient’s amino acid patterns. Multiple
2705_frame_C43 Page 883 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:45 PM
studies have evaluated the benefits of high BCAA formulations in metabolic stress. Some
studies have shown positive benefits when using these formulations, such as nitrogen
retention, improved visceral protein levels, and reversal of skin test anergy, but there were
no differences in morbidity or mortality.35-37 Other studies have failed to exhibit significant
outcome advantages of BCAAs over standard amino acid formulas in metabolic stress.38-40
Therefore, since the cost-effectiveness of high BCAA solutions has not been clearly dem-
onstrated, initiation of nutrition support with a standard amino acid solution is recom-
mended in patients with metabolic stress.5
Protein requirements are based upon the patient’s clinical condition. For normal healthy
adults the recommendation is for 0.8 gm/kg per day.41 In the critically ill population, a
range of 1.5 to 2.0 gm/kg/day is appropriate.5 For patients with renal or hepatic disease,
protein recommendations vary according to the disease stage and its intervention. For
those with renal disease on peritoneal dialysis, 1.2 to 1.5 gm/kg/day of ideal body weight
is recommended for maintenance or repletion. For hemodialysis, 1.1 to 1.4 gm/kg of ideal
body weight per day is recommended for maintenance or repletion.42 For patients with
uncomplicated hepatic dysfunction, 0.8 to 1.5 gm/kg dry weight is suggested; for end-
stage liver disease with encephalopathy, 0.5 to 0.7 gm/kg; if a high BCAA formula is used,
then 0.8 to 1.2 gm/kg/day is suggested.43
Electrolytes
Electrolytes are essential nutrients that perform many critical physiologic functions. Elec-
trolytes are added to parenteral solutions based upon individual need. The amount added
daily varies based upon the patient’s weight, disease state, renal and hepatic function,
nutrition status, pharmacotherapy, acid-base status, and overall electrolyte balance. Extra-
renal electrolyte losses may be a result of diarrhea, ostomy output, vomiting, fistulas, or
nasogastric suctioning. As patients become anabolic during parenteral nutrient delivery
they may experience increased requirements for the major intracellular electrolytes (potas-
sium, phosphorus, and magnesium). During refeeding of undernourished patients, these
electrolytes should be monitored frequently and replenished accordingly.
Small adjustments in electrolyte intake can affect patient morbidity and mortality and
therefore need careful monitoring. General recommendations for electrolyte provision are
provided in Table 43.10. Electrolyte products are commercially available (Table 43.11), and
the composition of the parenteral solution is dependent upon the compatibility of each
electrolyte with the other components of the admixture. For calcium provision, calcium
gluconate is the preferred form for parenteral formulations due to its stability in solution
and decreased chance of dissociating and forming a precipitate with phosphorus. Whether
to provide an electrolyte as a chloride or an acetate salt depends on the patient’s acid-
base status. Generally, acid-base balance is maintained with providing chloride and acetate
TABLE 43.10
Parenteral Electrolyte Recommendations
Sodium 60-150 mEq/d
Potassium 70-150 mEq/d
Phosphorus 20-30 mmol/d
Magnesium 15-20 mEq/d
Calcium 10-20 mmol
Chloride Equal to Na+ to prevent acid-base disturbances
From Skipper, A. In: Contemporary Nutrition Support Practice. W.B.
Saunders, Philadelphia, 1998, p. 227. With permission.
2705_frame_C43 Page 884 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:45 PM
TABLE 43.11
Commercially Available Electrolyte Formulations25,26
Sodium chloride Magnesium sulfate
Sodium acetate Magnesium chloride
Sodium phosphate Calcium chloride
Sodium lactate Calcium gluconate
Potassium chloride
Potassium acetate
Potassium phosphate
Potassium lactate
in a 1:1 ratio. If a patient has altered acid-base status with skewed electrolyte levels, then
the chloride:acetate ratio can be adjusted to facilitate correction. Acetate and chloride are
also present in the base amino acid solutions in various amounts, and should be considered
when attempting electrolyte homeostasis.
Electrolytes increase the osmolarity of the parenteral solution; however, large amounts
can be added to solutions with amino acids and dextrose without affecting the stability.
When lipids are added to the parenteral solutions caution is needed when adding elec-
trolytes, as there are limitations and hazards.1 An insoluble precipitate can form when
there are excess cations in the parenteral solutions, as with calcium and phosphate, which
may not be visualized in total nutrient admixtures. Crystal formation in the lungs with
subsequent death was reported in patients as a result of precipitate formation in TPN
solutions.44 The solubility of calcium and phosphorus varies with the volume of the
solution, its pH, the type of calcium preparation, the temperature at which the solutions
are stored, and the order of admixture.1 Solutions can be prepared with a range of calcium
and phosphorus contents as long as the product of calcium (in mEq) and phosphorus (in
mmols) is less than 200.45
TABLE 43.12
AMA Recommendations for Parenteral Vitamin Intake
Vitamin Amount
Vitamin A 3,300 IU
Vitamin D 200 IU
Vitamin E 10 IU
Vitamin C (ascorbic acid) 100 mg
Folacin 400 µg
Niacin 40 mg
Riboflavin 3.6 mg
Thiamine 3 mg
Vitamin B6 (pyridoxine) 4 mg
Vitamin B12 (cyanocobalamin) 5 µg
Pantothenic acid 15 mg
Biotin 60 µg
Adapted from Multivitamin preparations for parenteral use.
A statement by the Nutrition Advisory Group. J Parenter En-
teral Nutr 3: 258, 1979.
2705_frame_C43 Page 885 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:45 PM
TABLE 43.13
AMA Recommendations for Parenteral
Mineral Intake
Element Amount
Zinc 2.5-4 mg/day
Copper 0.5-1.5 mg/day
Manganese 150-180 µg/day
Chromium 10-15 µg/day
Selenium* 40-80 µg/day
* Suggested intake.
Adapted from Guidelines for essential trace
element preparations for parenteral use: A
statement by the Nutrition Advisory Group.
J Parenter Enteral Nutr 3: 263, 1979.
Other Additives
Many patients receiving TPN are also receiving multiple medications, leading to the desire
to add the medications to the TPN solutions. Using TPN as a drug delivery vehicle is very
tempting, as it may allow for continuous medication infusion in addition to minimizing
fluid volume delivery by eliminating the need for a separate dilutent for each medication
2705_frame_C43 Page 886 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:45 PM
TABLE 43.14
Medications Compatible with Parenteral Solutions
Albumina Cyanocobalamin Hydromorphone Nafcillin
Amikacin Cyclophosphamide Imipenem-cilastatin Neostigmine
Aminophyllinea Cytarabine Insulin, regulara Netilmicin
Azlocillin Digoxina Iron dextran Oxacillina
Caffeine Dipyridamole Isoproterenola Oxytocin
Carbenicillina,b Dobutamine Kanamycina Penicillin Ga
Cefamandolea Dopaminea Lidocainea Phenobarbital
Cefazolina Doxycycline Meperidinea Phytonadionea
Cefoperazone Erythromycina Metaraminol Piperacillin
Cefotaxime Famotidinea Methicillina Polymyxin B
Cefoxitina Fluorouracilb Methotrexate Ranitidinea,b
Ceftazidine Folic Acid Methyldopa Tetracycline
Ceftriazone Furosemidea Methylprednisolone Ticarcillina,b
Cephalothina,b Ganciclovir Metoclopramidea Tobramycina
Chloramphenicola Gentamicina Mezlocillin Vancomycin
Chlorpromazine Heparina Miconazole
Cimetidinea Hydralazine Morphine
Clindamycina Hydrochloric acid Moxalactam
a Compatible with total nutrient admixtures (TNA)
b Some data suggest incompatibility under certain conditions. Visual compatibility
only; tested with parenteral nutrition solution without electrolytes; drug may
chelate with divalent cations and cause precipitation.
From Strausburg, K. Parenteral nutrition admixture. ASPEN Practice Manual, 1998.
With permission.
administered. However, scrutiny is needed prior to adding medications to the TPN solu-
tion, as there is potential for drug-drug and drug-nutrient interactions. Issues needing
consideration include medication compatibility with TPN constituents, the effect of pH
changes on TPN compatibility and drug effectiveness, whether the infusion schedule of
the TPN is appropriate to achieve therapeutic levels of the drug, and the potential for
interactions among the drugs if more than one is added.1 The complexity of these issues
usually leads to consultation with a pharmacist experienced in TPN compounding and
compatibility, reference to the institution’s policy and procedure manual, or contact with
the drug manufacturers. Medications most frequently added to TPN include albumin,
aminophylline, cimetidine, famotidine, ranitidine, heparin, hydrochloric acid, and regular
insulin.1 Table 43.14 list medications compatible with TPN solutions, and Table 43.15 lists
those medications which are incompatible with TPN solutions.
Insulin
Even with care to avoid excess carbohydrate delivery, patients receiving TPN often become
hyperglycemic. One method of achieving desired blood glucose control with continuous
TPN infusions is by adding regular insulin to the TPN solution. A few studies have
suggested that absorbance of insulin to glass bottles, polyvinyl chloride bags, and tubing
occurs,49,50 with the greatest loss occurring during the first hour of infusion.51 So, when
adding insulin to TPN solutions to optimize blood glucose control, it is important to
remember that the patient may have an increased insulin requirement due to absorbance.
TABLE 43.15
Medications Incompatible with Parenteral Solutions
Amphotericin B Methyldopaa
Amikacina Metronidazole (with NaHCO3)
Ampicillinb Phenytoina
Cephradine Tetracyclinea,c
Iron dextrana,d
a Incompatible with total nutrient admixtures (TNA)
b Some visual compatibility data suggest compatibility un-
der certain conditions
c Compatible with lipid alone; however, may chelate with
divalent cations of TNAs
d Visually incompatible with TNAs when reconstituted
with 5% dextrose in water; visually compatible when re-
constituted with normal saline solution
From Strausberg, K. Parenteral nutrition admixture. ASPEN
Practice Manual, 1998. With permission.
This may be achieved by adding the H2-receptor blockers to the TPN solution. Famotidine
(20 and 40 mg/L) and ranitidine hydrochloride have been shown to be stable in parenteral
nutrition solutions and three-in-one admixtures.52-56
Heparin
In order to reduce the complications of catheter occlusion related to fibrin formation
around the catheter tip, heparin may be added to the TPN solution. Adding up to 1000
units of heparin per liter reduces the incidence of catheter occlusion without exhibiting
anticoagulant effects on serum.1 Larger amounts of heparin may be used for peripheral
parenteral nutrition.
Methods of Administration
Serious complications with TPN may develop if careful initiation and monitoring are not
followed. TPN solutions may be infused continuously over a 24-hour period, or cycled
over shorter time intervals. If a patient is critically ill or just beginning to receive TPN, it
is suggested to infuse it over a 24-hour period until patient tolerance is demonstrated.
TPN should not be initiated at goal levels of nutrients, as many patients may not tolerate
this prescription. Proportional increases in carbohydrate-dependent electrolytes such as
magnesium and phosphorus, in protein-dependent electrolytes such as potassium, and
in volume-dependent electrolytes such as sodium should be made as the macronutrients
are increased.
For patients with diabetes mellitus, stress hyperglycemia, steroids, or risk for refeeding
syndrome, dextrose should be restricted initially to approximately 100 to 150 gm/day. For
other patients with normal glucose tolerance, dextrose may be initiated at 200 to 250 gm/
day. If after 24 hours serum glucose levels are acceptable, then the dextrose may be
advanced to goal over the next 24 to 48 hours as indicated. Capillary glucose measurements
should be obtained three to four times daily until the values are normal for two consec-
tutive days. Regular insulin may be administered according to a sliding scale.1 A contin-
uous intravenous insulin infusion may be substituted for sliding scale if serum glucose
levels are consistently elevated beyond suggested levels. Insulin may also be added to the
TPN solution; however, one needs to remember that providing insulin in this manner
2705_frame_C43 Page 888 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:45 PM
confines the delivery over the time period of the TPN mixture, and if the hyperglycemia
resolves then the TPN bag must be discontinued to avoid inadvertent hypoglycemia. For
patients requiring insulin prior to TPN institution, approximately half of the established
insulin requirement may be included as regular insulin in the initial bag of TPN formula.1
If blood glucose levels are less than 200 mg/dL, approximately two-thirds of the previous
day’s subcutaneous insulin dose may be added to the TPN as regular insulin. Regardless
of the method of insulin delivery, the goal is to consistently maintain blood glucose levels
between 120 and 200 mg/dl.5
Lipids may be infused for up to 24 hours, and may reduce the effect of lipids on the
reticuloendothelial system.29 Lipids can be given with the first TPN infusion unless serum
triacylglycerol levels are elevated. It is suggested to maintain triacylglycerol levels at
≤400 mg/dL while lipids are being infused.1 If triacylglycerol levels exceed the recom-
mended level, lipids should be held until levels normalize. As this occurs, patients may
be provided with lipids in amounts to prevent essential fatty acid deficiency. For persistent
or severe hypertriacylglycerolemia or for patients with egg allergy, oral or topical safflower
oil can be administered to alleviate the symptoms of essential fatty acid deficiency.58
Critically ill patients may also be receiving significant amounts of lipid from lipid-based
medications, which may predispose them to hypertriacylglycerolemia prior to TPN infu-
sion. The amount of lipid from medications should be considered in the final TPN for-
mulation to avoid providing excess long-chain triacylglycerol.
Although parenteral nutrition is usually provided over a 24-hour continuous rate, it
may also be delivered in a cyclic pattern. Cyclic TPN has been suggested for patients who
are stable and receiving TPN for an extended duration. During TPN, circulating insulin
levels remain elevated, reducing the amount of carbohydrate that enters the cell, thus
favoring hepatic lipogenesis.1 Cyclic TPN also allows for some time off of the TPN pump,
allowing for patient mobility, and therefore it is usually utilized with ambulatory patients.
For individuals with limited vascular access, cyclic infusion may be required in order to
administer necessary medications or blood products. Conversion from 24-hour continuous
infusion to cyclic infusion can be accomplished in two to three days. The largest concern
is with the initiation and discontinuation of the carbohydrate infusion and potential for
hyperglycemia and rebound hypoglycemia. Another concern is with the increased volume
delivery over a shorter time frame. Most stable patients can tolerate cyclic TPN over 8 to
14 hours.
TABLE 43.16
Mechanical Complications of Parenteral Nutrition
Complication Possible Cause Symptoms Treatment Prevention
Pneumothorax Catheter placement Tachycardia, Large Experienced
by inexperienced dyspnea, pneumothorax personnel to place
personnel persistent cough, may require chest catheter
diaphoresis tube placement
Catheter Pulling catheter Cardiac Surgical removal of Avoid withdrawing
embolization back through arrhythmias catheter tip catheter through
needle used for insertion needle
insertion
Air embolism Air is inspired Cyanosis, Immediately place Experienced
while line is tachypnea, patient on left side personnel to place
interrupted and hypotension, and lower head of catheter
uncapped churning heart bed to keep air in
murmur apex of the right
ventricle until it is
reabsorbed
Venous thrombosis Mechanical trauma Swelling or pain in Anticoagulation Silicone catheter,
to vein, one or both arms therapy with adding heparin to
hypotension, or shoulders or urokinase or TPN, low dose
hyperosmolar neck streptokinase; warfarin therapy
solution, hyper- catheter removal
coagulopathy,
sepsis
Catheter occlusion Hypotension, Increasing need for Anticoagulation Larger diameter
failure to maintain greater pressure to therapy with catheter, routine
line patency, maintain urokinase or catheter flushing,
formation of fibrin continuous streptokinase monitor solution
sheath outside the infusion rate for a precipitate
catheter, solution
precipitates
Phlebitis Peripheral Redness, swelling, Change peripheral Maintain
administration of pain at peripheral line site, begin osmolarity of
hypertonic site central TPN if peripheral
solution necessary solution ≤ 900
mOsm/kg
Catheter-related Inappropriate Unexplained fever, Remove catheter Follow strict
sepsis technique of line chills, red, and replace at protocols for line
placement, poor indurated area another site placement and
catheter care, around catheter care
contaminated site
solution
From Skipper, A. In: Contemporary Nutrition Support Practice. W.B. Saunders, Philadelphia, 1998: p. 227. With
permission.
2705_frame_C43 Page 890 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:45 PM
is important to ensure correct line placement and absence of internal injuries that may
have occurred during insertion.
Catheter-related infections can carry a high mortality rate and increased medical costs
for a single event. A catheter infection rate of less than 3% is desirable.5 Appropriate use
of aseptic technique by trained personnel is essential to maintain an acceptable catheter
infection rate. Nursing protocols should be established for dressing changes and line
manipulation. Dressings should be changed every 48 hours and should include local
sterilizing ointment and an occlusive dressing. Since gram-positive catheter-related sepsis
may be treated with antibiotics, removal of the catheter is not always necessary. Catheter
removal is usually necessary with gram-negative organisms.
With close monitoring of TPN, avoidance of metabolic complications (Table 43.17) is
possible. Refeeding syndrome may be defined as a constellation of fluid, micronutrient,
electrolyte, and vitamin imbalances that occur within the first few days after refeeding a
starved patient. Refeeding syndrome may involve hemolytic anemia, respiratory distress,
paresthesias, tetany, and cardiac arrythmias.59 Typical biochemical findings include
hypokalemia, hypophosphatemia, and hypomagnesemia. Proposed risk factors for refeed-
ing include alcoholism, anorexia nervosa, marasmus, rapid refeeding, and excessive dex-
trose infusion. In order to prevent the syndrome from occurring it is suggested to replete
serum potassium, phosphorus, and magnesium concentrations prior to beginning TPN;
limit initial carbohydrate to 150 gm/day, fluid to 800 mL, and sodium intake to no more
than 20 mEq/day in at-risk patients; include adequate amounts of potassium, magnesium,
phosphorus, and vitamins in the TPN solution; and increase carbohydrate-dependent
minerals in proportion to increases in carbohydrate when TPN is advanced.59
Hyperglycemia (nonfasting blood glucose >220 mg/dL) is a common metabolic com-
plication of TPN. Risk factors include metabolic stress, medications, obesity, diabetes, and
excess dextrose administration. Careful glucose monitoring, especially in the first few days
of TPN administration, can help guide advancement of dextrose to goal. Administration
of dextrose in amounts less than the maximum glucose oxidation rate (4 to 7 mg/kg/min)
and initiating dextrose in reduced amounts (100 to 150 gm/day) in at-risk patients may
help minimize the occurrence of hyperglycemia.5
Patients receiving TPN may also experience fluid and electrolyte abnormalities (Table
43.17). The etiology of the abnormalities may be related to several factors including the
patient’s medical condition and treatment, medications, or excessive or inadequate free
water provision. Fluid balance and electrolyte status should be monitored closely (Table
43.18), with corrections in abnormalities made accordingly.
Summary
Parenteral nutrition has been a major medical advancement over the past several decades.
Its institution has saved lives of many people who may have otherwise died of malnutrition.
The next several decades will most likely bring more advances in the technology and science
of parenteral nutrition. With careful selection, implementation, and monitoring, parenteral
nutrition is a medical vehicle for nutritional supplementation of numerous diseases.
2705_frame_C43 Page 891 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:45 PM
TABLE 43.17
Metabolic Complications of Parenteral Nutrition
Complication Possible Cause Treatment
Hypovolemia Inadequate fluid provision, Increase fluid delivery
overdiuresis
Hypervolemia Excess fluid delivery, renal Fluid restriction, diruetics, dialysis
dysfunction, congestive heart
failure, hepatic failure
Hypokalemia Refeeding syndrome, inadequate Increase intravenous or parenteral
potassium provision, increased potassium
losses
Hyperkalemia Renal dysfuntion, too much Decrease potassium intake,
potassium provision, metabolic potassium binders, dialysis in
acidosis, potassium-sparing drugs extreme cases
Hyponatremia Excessive fluid provision, nephritis, Restrict fluid intake, increase sodium
adrenal insufficiency, dilutional intake as indicated clinically
states
Hypernatremia Inadequate free water provision, Decrease sodium intake, replete free
excessive sodium intake, excessive water deficit
water losses
Hypoglycemia Abrupt discontinuation of parenteral Dextrose delivery
nutrition, insulin overdose
Hyperglycemia Rapid infusion of large dextrose load, Insulin, reduce dextrose delivery
sepsis, pancreatitis, steroids,
diabetes, elderly
Hypertriglyceridemia Inability to clear lipid provision, Decrease lipid volume provided,
sepsis, multisystem organ failure, increase infusion time, hold lipids
medications altering fat absorption, up to 14 days to normalize level
history of hyperlipidemia
Hypocalcemia Decrease vitamin D intake, Calcium supplementation
hypoparathyroidism, citrate binding
of calcium due to excessive blood
transfusion, hypoalbuminemia
Hypercalcemia Renal failure, tumor lysis syndrome, Isotonic saline, inorganic phosphate
bone cancer, excess vitamin D supplementation, corticosteroids,
delivery, prolonged immobilization, mithramycin
stress hyperparathyroidism
Hypomagnesemia Refeeding syndrome, alcoholism, Magnesium supplementation
diruetic use, increased losses,
medications, diabetic ketoacidosis,
chemotherapy
Hypermagnesemia Excessive magnesium provision, Decrease magnesium provision
renal insufficiency
Hypophosphatemia Refeeding syndrome, alcoholism, Phosphate supplementation,
phophate-binding antacids, dextrose discontinue phosphate-binding
infusion, overfeeding, secondary antacids, avoid overfeeding, initiate
hyperparathyroidism, insulin dextrose delivery cautiously
therapy
Hyperphosphatemia Renal dysfunction, excessive Decrease phosphate delivery,
provision phosphate binders
Prerenal azotemia Dehydration, excessive protein Increase fluid intake, decrease protein
provision, inadequate nonprotein delivery, increase non-protein
calorie provision with mobilization calories
of own protein stores
Essential fatty acid deficiency Inadequate polyunsaturated long- Lipid administration
chain fatty acid provision
From Skipper, A. In: Contemporary Nutrition Support Practice. W.B. Saunders, Philadelphia, 1998: p. 227. With
permission.
2705_frame_C43 Page 892 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:45 PM
TABLE 43.18
Suggested Monitoring of TPN
Parameter Baseline Level Acute Patients Stable Patients
Electrolytes, BUN, Cr Yes Daily 1-2 × week
Chemistry Panel Yes Daily until stable, then 2- Weekly
Ca2+, PO4–, Mg2+ 3 × week
LFTs Yes 2 × week Weekly-monthly
Triacylglycerol Yes Weekly unless abnormal Weekly-monthly
then 2 × week
Capillary glucose 2-3 × day 3 × day until consistently 2 × day until consistently
< 200 mg/dl < 200 mg/dl
Intake and output Yes Daily Daily or by physical exam
Weight If available Daily Monthly
CBC with differential Yes Weekly Weekly
PT, PTT Yes Weekly Weekly
BUN: blood urea nitrogen; PT: prothrombin time;
PTT: partial thromboplastin time; CBC: complete blood count;
LFT: liver function test; Cr: creatinine
References
1. Skipper A In: Contemporary Nutrition Support Practice. WB Saunders, Philadelphia, 1998: p. 227.
2. Rhoads JE, Dudrick SJ. In: Clinical Nutrition: Parenteral Nutrition. WB Saunders, Philadelphia,
1993, p. 1.
3. Meyer CE, Fancher JA, Schurr PE, Webster HD. Metabolism 6: 591; 1957.
4. Wilmore DW, Dudrick SJ. JAMA 203: 860; 1968.
5. ASPEN Board of Directors. J Parent Enteral Nutr 17(4): 1S; 1993.
6. American College of Physicians. Ann Intern Med 107: 252; 1987.
7. Sitzman JV, Pitt HA. Dig Dis Sci 34: 489; 1989.
8. Pillar B, Perry S. Nutrition 6: 314; 1990.
9. Levine GN, Derin JJ, Steiger E, Zinno R. Gastroenterology 67: 975; 1974.
10. Deitch EA. Arch Surg 124: 699; 1989.
11. Kotani J, Usami M, Nomura H, et al. Arch Surg 134: 287; 1999.
12. Li J, Kudsk D, Gocinski B, et al. J Trauma 39: 44; 1995.
13. King BK, Li J, Kudsk KA. Arch Surg 132:1303; 1997.
14. DaZhong X, Lu Q, Deitch E. J Parent Enteral Nutr 22: 37; 1998.
15. King B, Kudsk K, Li J, et al. Ann Surg 229: 272; 1999.
16. Lipman T. J Parent Enteral Nutr 22: 167; 1998.
17. Heyland D, MacDonald S, Keefe L, Drover J. JAMA 280: 2013; 1998.
18. Vernet O, Christin L, Schultz Y, et al. Am J Physiol 250: E47; 1986.
19. Moore FA, Feliciano DV, Andrassy RJ, et al. Ann Surg 216: 172; 1992.
20. Tappy L, Schwarz J, Schneiter P, Cayeux C, et al. Crit Care Med 26: 860; 1998.
21. Moore FA, Moore EE, Jones TN, et al. J Trauma 29: 916; 1989.
22. Kudsk K, Croce M, Fabian T, et al. Ann Surg 215: 503; 1992.
23. Trice S, Melnik G, Page C. Nutr Clin Prac 12: 114; 1997.
24. Evans M. Nutr Clin Prac 14: 172; 1999.
25. Krzywda EA, Edmiston CE. ASPEN Practice Manual, 1998.
26. Dickerson R, Brown R, Whithe, K. In: Clinical Nutrition: Parenteral Nutrition. WB Saunders,
Philadelphia, 1993: p. 310.
27. Freeman JB, Fairfull-Smith R, Rodman G, et al. Surgery 156: 625; 1983.
28. Abbott WC, Grakauskas AM, Bistrian BR, et al. Arch Surg 119: 1367; 1984.
29. Seidner DL, Mascioli EA, Istfan NW, et al. J Parent Enteral Nutr 13: 614; 1989.
2705_frame_C43 Page 893 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:45 PM
30. Jensen GL, Mascioli EA, Deidner DL, et al. J Parent Enteral Nutr 14: 467; 1990.
31. Cerra FB, Cheung NK, Fischer JE, et al. J Parent Enteral Nutr 9: 288; 1985.
32. Mirtallo JM, Schneider PJ, Mavko K, et al. J Parent Enteral Nutr 6: 109; 1982.
33. Feinstein EL, Blumenkrantz MJ, Healy M, et al. Medicine 60: 124; 1981.
34. Chiolero R, Revelly J, Tappy L. Nutrition 13: 45S; 1997.
35. Cerra FB, Shronts EP, Konstantinides NN, et al. Surgery 98: 632; 1985.
36. Cerra FB, Mazuski JE, Chute E, et al. Ann Surg 199: 286; 1984.
37. Bower RH, Muggia-Sullum M, Vallgren S, et al. Ann Surg 203: 13; 1986.
38. Yu YM, Wagner DA, Walesrewski JC, et al. Ann Surg 207: 421; 1988.
39. Freund H, Hoover HC, Atamian S, et al. Ann Surg 190: 18; 1979.
40. von Meyenfeldt MF, Soeters PB, Vente JP, et al. Br J Surg 77: 924; 1990.
41. Recommended Dietary Allowances, 10th ed, Washington, DC: National Academy Press, 1989,
pg 3.
42. Stover J (Ed). A Clinical Guide to Nutrition Care in End Stage Renal Disease. Chicago: American
Dietetic Association, 1994, pg 28, 43.
43. Shronts E, Fish J. In: Nutrition Support Dietetics: Core Curriculum, 2nd ed. Gottschlich M,
Matarese L, Shronts E, Eds, ASPEN, Silver Spring, MD, 1993, pg 311.
44. Lumpkin MM, Burlington DB. FDA safety alert: Hazards of precipitation associated with
parenteral nutrition. Rockville, MD: U.S. Food and Drug Administration, 1994.
45. Dunham B, Marcuard S, Khazanie PG, et al. J Parent Enteral Nutr 15: 608; 1991.
46. American Medical Association Department of Foods and Nutrition. J Parent Enteral Nutr 3:
258, 1979.
47. Guidelines for essential trace element preparations for parenteral use: A statement by the
Nutrition Advisory Group. J Parent Enteral Nutr 3: 263; 1979.
48. Forceville X, Vitoux D, Gauzit R, et al. Crit Care Med 26: 1536; 1998.
49. Weber SS, Wood WA, Jackson EA. Am J Hosp Pharm 34: 353; 1977.
50. Macuard SP, Dunham B, Hobbs A, Caro JF. J Parent Enteral Nutr 14: 262; 1990.
51. Hirsch JJ, Wood JH, Thomas RB. Am J Hosp Pharm 38: 995;1981.
52. Bullock L, Fitzgerald JF, Glick MR, et al. Am J Hosp Pharm 46: 2321; 1989.
53. Montov JB, Pou L, Salvador P, et al. Am J Hosp Pharm 46: 2329; 1989.
54. Williams MF, Hak LJ, Dukes G. Am J Hosp Pharm 47: 1547; 1990.
55. Cano SM, Montoro JB, Pastor C, et al. Am J Hosp Pharm 45: 1100; 1989.
56. Moore RA, Feldman S, Trenting J, et al. J Parent Enteral Nutr 5: 61; 1981.
57. Strausburg K. Parenteral nutrition admixture. ASPEN Practice Manual, 1998.
58. Miller DG. Am J Clin Nutr 46: 419; 1987.
59. Skipper A, Willikan KW. Parenteral nutrition implementation and management. ASPEN Prac-
tice Manual, 1998.
2705_frame_C43 Page 894 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:45 PM
2705_frame_C44 Page 895 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:46 PM
44
Sports — Elite Athletes
Michael F. Bergeron
Good nutrition is crucial in any athlete’s quest to reach peak performance. At all levels of
competition, whether for a local recreational league championship or in preparation for
the Olympics, athletes seem to be constantly searching for ways to improve their perfor-
mance and gain a competitive edge. This often includes trying the latest dietary fad or
nutritional supplements. However, dietary strategies for training and competition should
address the athlete’s need for nutrients as influenced by age, fitness, level of competition
and intensity of training, environment, time of competition, duration of play, amount of
time between competitions, and type of activity. Moreover, an effective diet for the athlete
also includes the same general dietary recommendations as for the non-athlete, and these
are intended to promote good health.
Although a healthy diet and body can clearly contribute to better performance, this
section will not focus on general nutrition guidelines to eating for good health; this is
comprehensively addressed in other sections. This section will review several basic nutri-
tion principles and other current nutrition issues as they relate to athletic performance.
The following recommendations are based on established results from research in adults
competing in certain sports or participating in exercise activities. While there has been
extensive research on nutrition and exercise performance in adults, such studies on chil-
dren and adolescents are lacking.
Much of the following information and guidelines related to preparing for competition,
competition, and recovery are also generally appropriate for training and practice sessions.
The unique metabolic demand characteristics and environmental circumstances associated
with the myriad activities classified as sports makes it nearly impossible to address all
athletes’ nutritional concerns for achieving peak performance. Individual preferences also
play a role. Therefore, this section focuses on selected general nutritional aspects that are
applicable for a variety of athletes, especially those who engage in long-duration, endur-
ance-based events.
A Balanced Diet
The primary dietary concern for all athletes should be to generally avoid the known
nutritional risk factors associated with health problems and to follow nutritional guide-
lines that will help promote good health. A diet that provides excess or deficient energy,
0-8493-2705-9/01/$0.00+$1.50
© 2002 by CRC Press LLC 895
2705_frame_C44 Page 896 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:46 PM
saturated fat, or alcohol or chronic vitamin and/or mineral deficiencies or excesses should
be avoided by anyone interested in good health or good athletic performance. A good
diet is one that supports normal growth and development, regulates metabolism, main-
tains normal menstrual status, and provides adequate energy during training and com-
petition. By following any of the various scientifically based food guides, such as the
United States Food Guide Pyramid,1 athletes, coaches, and parents can achieve appropriate
variety, proportions, and balance in their daily dietary planning such that an adequate
regular intake of all the essential nutrients is not left to chance.
Carbohydrates
Bread, cereal, rice, pasta, fruits, and vegetables are all good primary sources of carbohy-
drate that should be regularly included in any athlete’s diet. Sport drinks and sport bars
are also effective in helping to meet the athlete’s carbohydrate needs. It is generally
recommended that 55 to 70% of an athlete’s daily energy comes from carbohydrates.
However, this recommendation may not always be appropriate or practical, particularly
if the daily total energy requirement is very high. A better guideline for the athlete in
training or during competition would be to ingest at least 7 grams of carbohydrate per
kilogram of body weight each day, and up to 10 grams of carbohydrate per kilogram if
daily training or competition is intense and lasts for several hours or more.2,3 This is
equivalent to at least 490 grams (or 1960 kcalories) from carbohydrates for a 70-kg person,
and would represent roughly 65% of a 3000-calorie daily diet. This relative amount should
provide enough dietary carbohydrate to adequately replenish muscle and liver glycogen
each day under most circumstances.
Before they are absorbed into the blood, dietary carbohydrates are reduced by digestion
to single sugar units (the monosaccharides: glucose, fructose, and galactose). Glucose is
the body’s primary fuel for energy. Fructose (the very sweet sugar of fruit which is also
found in soft drinks and some sport drinks) and galactose (part of lactose or milk sugar)
are converted to glucose prior to use as an energy source. Foods that elicit a large and
rapid rise in blood glucose are categorized as having a high glycemic index.4 These foods
(Table 44.1) provide a rapid and readily utilizable energy source.5 Other carbohydrate-rich
foods provide glucose at a slower rate due to differences in rates of digestion, absorption,
and metabolism. Fructose, for example, is not actively absorbed by the intestine but is
absorbed via the less efficient facilitated diffusion. Consumption of large quantities of
fructose may slow down fluid absorption and cause a feeling of gastrointestinal distress,
particularly during exercise.6
Fats
The general recommendation for dietary fat intake is 20 to 30% of total daily energy intake.7
Further, saturated fats should account for less than 10% of each day’s energy supply. Not
only is fat needed for many biological functions, fat (as fatty acids) can be an effective
metabolic fuel for working trained muscle. Hence, fat provides considerable energy during
many sport activities.2,8,9 Fortunately, most athletes have enough body fat to support their
2705_frame_C44 Page 897 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:46 PM
TABLE 44.1
Glycemic Index (Number in Parentheses) of a Variety of Foods. The index
was calculated using glucose as the reference. Average serving size is
used; data are from Foster-Powel, K., and Brand Miller, J., Am. J. Clin.
Nutr. 62: 871S; 1995.
High Medium Low
Glucose (100) Banana (53) Fructose(23)
Sucrose (65) Orange juice (57) Apple, raw (36)
Honey (73) Potato chips (54) Soy beans (18)
Bagel (white flour) (72) White rice (56) Lentils (29)
Ready-to-eat cereal (70-90) Spaghetti, white (41) Peach, raw (28)
Carrots (71) Bread, mixed grain (45) Ice Cream, rich (27)
Graham crackers (74) Skim milk (32)
Potatoes (83) Yogurt (33)
Raisins (64)
Jelly beans (80)
White bread (70)
Sport drinks, high glucose (70)
performance energy requirement for fat, and fat intake during or just prior to exercise is
not necessary or appropriate.
Some athletes regularly exceed the recommendations for daily fat intake. This may be
for convenience or preference, but, for those involved with extensive competition or
training that carries a recurring high energy demand, it is often a practical means to help
maintain body weight. This practice is fairly common10-13 among many athletes and has
been promoted as being beneficial.14 As long as the daily energy need is met the athlete
is not in chronic positive energy balance, then from a performance point of view, this
periodic use of a high-fat diet is appropriate. From a long-term health perspective, the
risks associated with such a diet with fit, very active athletes have not yet been studied.
Presumably, however, excessive fat intake might adversely affect certain diet-related risk
factors for coronary heart disease, even in a fit population.9,15,16
Protein
The need for extra protein in an athlete’s diet has been a topic of considerable debate. The
general recommendation for daily protein intake has been 0.8 grams of high quality protein
per kilogram of body weight (about 10 to 15% of daily energy intake ).7 However, a growing
body of research17-20 suggests that many athletes may need more protein than non-athletes.
During and immediately after strenuous exercise, there is an increase in protein break-
down. This is followed by an increase in protein synthesis during the recovery period.
This suggests that more dietary protein is needed to maintain body protein mass and/or
to support increases in muscle size and muscle energy-producing components. Current
thought17-20 for endurance athletes suggests an intake of 1.2 to 1.8 grams of protein per
kilogram of body weight per day. Given the strong endurance component and physiolog-
ical demands of many competitive sports, athletes involved in extensive regular training
and competition may require this much protein each day to maintain protein balance.
Body builders and power lifters, for example, could require up to 2.0 grams of protein
per kilogram of body weight each day. Such an increase in dietary protein is likely already
2705_frame_C44 Page 898 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:46 PM
met by the typical diets that athletes usually consume. Unless an athlete is inappropriately
restricting energy, protein supplements are generally not needed — particularly not to the
extent that many resistance training athletes ingest regularly.20-22 There are instances such
as when traveling to competition events (especially abroad, where the foods available may
be unacceptable to the athlete) and when the travel/competition time is extensive, that
sufficient nutrient intake may be challenged or in question. Here, a protein-fortified drink
or an energy bar can be a convenient and effective food source to augment the athlete’s diet.
(such as bicycling or running) will cause many specific changes in an athlete’s body that
will positively affect performance.29,30 A comprehensive discussion of these enhancements
is beyond the scope of this section. However, several adaptations relating to the use of
nutrients for energy during competition are worth noting.
As a result of regular endurance training and the associated increase in muscle mito-
chondrial number and activity, there will be an increase in the muscle enzymes that are
used for glucose oxidation as well as for glucose conversion to glycogen and for glyco-
genolysis.31,32 This, along with other changes that improve the delivery and use of oxygen
in the muscles (e.g. an increase in capillary density), permits a more efficient use of
carbohydrate for energy.2 With endurance training there is also an increase in fatty acid
uptake and oxidation by the muscle fibers, due to the training-induced increase in mito-
chondrial number and an induction of the enzymes involved in this process. These are
important considerations for an athlete who consequently might not have to rely on blood
glucose as much and deplete glycogen stores as readily as a lesser-trained individual —
again, fatigue could be delayed, even during high-intensity competition. At the same
time, these changes could indirectly defer an undesirable increased reliance on protein
for energy as carbohydrate stores are diminished.28 Some research34 shows that training
results in an enhanced ability and tendency to use protein for energy during exercise.
This could supplement the use of glucose and fatty acids as metabolic fuel, and potentially
delay fatigue.
Precompetition Nutrition
The nutritional state of the athlete before competition can have a significant impact on
performance.25,35 Many precompetition nutritional strategies are designed to ensure ade-
quate hydration. Appropriate fat, protein, mineral, and vitamin intake are also important,
but, because of the metabolic nature of most sports, the other primary precompetition
nutritional concern for athletes is adequate carbohydrate intake. How to ensure that
carbohydrate stores are maximized prior to competition is the focus of this section.
Ideally, before competition begins, an athlete’s carbohydrate stores (muscle and liver
glycogen) should be full. The emphasis on precompetition dietary carbohydrates ought
to begin at least by the previous evening. The evening meal is typically when the majority
of daily energy intake occurs. Moreover, a progressive increase over several days in
carbohydrate intake and a concomitant decrease in training duration and intensity just
before the start of an event can optimize an athlete’s glycogen stores prior to competition.2
The immediate precompetition meal is often more of a challenge. Here, the goal is to eat
a well-balanced meal with an emphasis on carbohydrate-rich foods and fluids. The recom-
mended energy intake depends, in part, on the competition schedule. In general, the meal
size should be moderate. By the time competition begins, the athlete’s stomach should be
relatively empty, but without feelings of hunger. Prior to competition (three to four hours)
a variety of nutritious, easily digestible, nondistress-causing (e.g., low fiber) solid foods
can be consumed.2,36 Based on a person’s body weight, a general guideline is to consume
approximately 4 to 5 grams of carbohydrate per kilogram of body weight with this meal.
This means that a 70-kilogram athlete could consume 280 to 350 grams of carbohydrate.
This meal should be low in fat and protein, since too much of either could reduce gastric
emptying time. Various fluids (e.g., water, juice, milk, and sport drinks) can be consumed
with the precompetition meal, so long as alcohol and excessive caffeine are avoided.
2705_frame_C44 Page 900 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:46 PM
The precompetition meal depends on the time of the competition within the context of
the athlete’s usual meal pattern. Whatever meal or combination it is, the athlete should
not completely skip other regularly scheduled meals. For example, if a game, match, or
race is to begin in the early or middle afternoon, a good-sized early breakfast (emphasizing
carbohydrates) should be eaten, followed by a smaller precompetition lunch during the
late morning or midday. Alternatively, if the competition begins 3 to 4 hours after a
precompetition breakfast or lunch, the athlete should eat an additional small (1 to 1.5
grams of carbohydrate per kilogram of body weight), easily digestible carbohydrate snack
about 1 to 1.5 hours prior to the start of the event.2,36 A combination such as 500 ml of a
sport drink along with a sport bar or other solid carbohydrate food works well to “top
off” carbohydrate stores and body water.
A common problem encountered at some events arises when an early morning compe-
tition is scheduled — say, for 8 or 9 a.m. Athletes, parents, and coaches often wonder how
to manage breakfast. In this case, it’s usually best to have a smaller-than-usual breakfast,
again with an emphasis on carbohydrates and easily digestible foods, at least 90 minutes
before competition begins. Commercial high-carbohydrate, low-fat liquid meals work well
here, because they have less bulk and are easily digested and absorbed. Then, during
competition, it will be important to consume a carbohydrate-electrolyte drink throughout,
because the body’s stored carbohydrate levels will be initially somewhat lower at the
outset, and the supplemental carbohydrate will likely have a more readily prominent role
in providing energy and deferring hunger.25
Whether because of scheduling, preference, or precompetition anxiety, many athletes
simply do not consume enough energy before they compete. Inadequate precompetition
energy intake and perhaps partially depleted carbohydrate stores can result in premature
fatigue.36
Another common mistake is to neglect regular fluid and carbohydrate intake during
the precompetition warmup session. Such an oversight, especially if it is compounded by
a warmup that is too long and consists of excessive exercise, might increase the likelihood
that the athlete will begin competition unnecessarily fatigued, dehydrated, and carbohy-
drate-depleted. Thus, it is important that appropriate rates of fluid and carbohydrate
intake be followed during the precompetition warmup as well as during competition. If
carbohydrate is not consumed during the warmup period, a small carbohydrate snack
after warmup could be sufficient; its content and size depends on how much time is
available before competition begins.
taining fluid balance, but generally it is not a major dietary concern for most athletes while
they compete.
Even if an athlete eats well prior to competition, after 60 to 90 minutes of intense
exercise, liver and muscle glycogen stores will likely be significantly decreased.2 Further,
the ability to maintain blood glucose and meet the muscles’ demand for energy may be
2705_frame_C44 Page 901 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:46 PM
Postexercise Nutrition
After exercise, an athlete’s primary nutritional interest should be the restoration of lost
fluid, electrolytes, and carbohydrate.36,37,39,44 How immediate and aggressive this effort
needs to be depends on how much carbohydrate was used (roughly suggested by how
intense and long the activity was), how much sweat was lost, and, most importantly, when
the next competitive activity will begin.
Sometimes, with sports such as tennis, an athlete must compete more than once on a
given day. If the next activity is scheduled to begin shortly after the completion of the
first (e.g., within 1 to 2 hours), rehydration and carbohydrate intake (about 50 to 100 grams
or 1 to 1.5 grams of carbohydrate per kilogram of body weight) should begin immediately
(i.e., within 15 minutes of the end of the match).2,36 High-carbohydrate sport drinks, along
with sport bars, gels, and other carbohydrate-rich foods with a high glycemic index (e.g.,
bagels, crackers, certain ready-to-eat cereals, white bread, and jelly beans), are good
choices. These will facilitate the rapid restoration of muscle glycogen more than high-
fructose foods or meals with an emphasis on low glycemic index carbohydrate sources
(e.g., flavored yogurt, apples, oranges, pasta, and mixed-grain bread).5 Notably, some
research45 suggests that a carbohydrate and protein combination might be better than just
carbohydrate for rapid glycogen resynthesis. If convenience is a priority, certain commer-
cial high-carbohydrate sport drinks and sport bars are available that could provide appro-
priate amounts of carbohydrate and protein for this purpose. Otherwise, various
combinations of breads, cereals, and dairy products, for example, can provide similar
ratios of carbohydrate and protein. During the next activity, regular consumption of
carbohydrate may be necessary at an earlier stage to maintain blood glucose, provide
energy, and defer hunger, since the short between-activity recovery period may not have
been long enough to adequately replenish liver and muscle carbohydrate stores.
When preparing for a second competitive activity that begins four to five hours or more
after the completion of the first, athletes should generally follow the precompetition meal
guidelines described earlier; however, many athletes would rather not eat a large meal
between same-day events, even if there is plenty of time. Thus, if smaller quantities of
food are preferred, 50 to 100 grams of carbohydrate, for example, ingested immediately
after exercise, and again every two hours, can be an effective method for replenishing (at
least partially) one’s carbohydrate stores. Having more time to accomplish this task means
that an athlete can choose from a wider variety of foods (low, medium, and high glycemic
index). However, it is generally a good idea to consume some rapidly absorbed carbohy-
drates and fluid (i.e., high glycemic index) right after exercise, so that glycogen and
hydration status will be more promptly and completely restored for the next activity.5,39
If an athlete is not scheduled to compete again until the next day or later, appropriate
regularly scheduled meals and snacks (according to the above guidelines) should provide
enough of the necessary nutrients to nutritionally recover from the previous exercise and
adequately prepare for the next competition.
(i.e., carbohydrate, fat, and protein) to produce energy at a fast enough rate to meet the
body’s muscular demands. At this point, the fatigued athlete can no longer continue
competing at the desired level of intensity.
Following the initiation of exercise, an athlete’s blood glucose level tends to increase in
response to a variety of hormonal influences (i.e., cortisol and glucagon) designed to
mobilize carbohydrate. Without supplemental carbohydrate intake during the rest of the
exercise period, a continued high rate of glucose utilization in the muscles will eventually
lead to a much greater reliance on blood glucose for energy, which will, in turn, quickly
deplete liver glycogen stores. As exercise continues, blood glucose progressively
decreases.2,33,46 Pre-exercise carbohydrate status, of course, plays a role in how readily this
occurs. However, with high-intensity competition and repeated long bouts of muscle
activity combined with progressive dehydration, the active muscles’ use of energy will
be accelerated such that carbohydrate will be utilized at an even faster rate. Eventually,
carbohydrate availability will be diminished to the point that performance will be severely
hindered.36,38 This is why regular carbohydrate and fluid intake during difficult and long
sport and exercise activities is so important, especially in hot environmental conditions.
Moreover, if carbohydrate is not consumed during an extended bout of exercise, there
may be a significant increase in the conversion of protein to glucose in order to meet the
continued demand for energy. This could lead to a lower concentration of the branched-
chain amino acids (BCAA) in the blood, which could act as another contributory factor
in an athlete’s sense of fatigue (see Nutritional Ergogenic Aids in this section).47,48
Fluid Balance
When an athlete is involved with any vigorous physical exercise or sport activity, a
considerable amount of heat is produced, which will cause body temperature to rise. And
although athletes normally have several inherent means for dealing with this (e.g., con-
vection or radiated heat loss), sweating is typically the most effective and utilized method
for dissipating heat during exercise, especially in hot weather. However, long-term, exten-
sive sweating can pose a significant fluid balance challenge for athletes.49
If fluid balance and thermoregulation are not effectively managed during competition
and an athlete progressively dehydrates and becomes overheated, the athlete will fatigue
prematurely and possibly lose the race, game, or match. More severely, heat exhaustion,
heat cramps, or, at worst, heat stroke may ultimately ensue.50
In warm to hot conditions, most adult athletes will lose between 1 and 2.5 liters of sweat
during each hour of intense competition or training.37,39,51,52 Even more impressive, sweat
rates over 3.5 liters per hour have been observed with some well-conditioned, world-class
athletes competing in very hot and humid climates.53 During extended competition or
training sessions, it would therefore not be difficult for many athletes to lose 10 or more
liters of fluid.
The degree to which one sweats depends on a number of factors, including the envi-
ronmental heat stress (i.e., temperature, humidity, and solar radiation) and the intensity
of exercise — as an athlete works harder, sweating rate increases to offset the progressive
rise in core body temperature as a result of a higher metabolic rate.49,54 Acclimatization is
another factor. Athletes who have been training and playing in a hot climate for several
weeks or more (and thus, are acclimatized to the heat) may sweat more compared to those
who are not accustomed to such conditions. The same goes for cardiorespiratory fitness.
2705_frame_C44 Page 904 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:46 PM
Such training can improve sweat gland function and increase plasma volume, which can
help to maintain a higher sweating rate.54 One must keep in mind that a higher sweating
rate is a good adaptation, because it gives an athlete a thermoregulatory advantage,
although, at the same time, more extensive sweating will be a greater challenge to offset
with fluid intake, especially during competition.
Sweat is mostly water, but it also contains a number of other elements found in the
blood, including a variety of minerals in varying concentrations. The major mineral ions
found in sweat are sodium (Na+) and chloride (Cl–), although the concentration varies
with a number of factors. For example, well-conditioned athletes who are fully acclima-
tized to the heat often have sweat sodium concentrations in the range of 5 to 30 mmol
per liter (i.e., 115 to 690 mg of sodium per liter of sweat), whereas heat non-acclimatized
athletes typically lose much more sodium through sweating (e.g., 40 to 100 mmol or 920
to 2300 mg per liter). Still, some athletes can have a relatively high concentration of sodium
in their sweat, no matter how fit or heat acclimatized they are, which again suggests a
strong genetic influence. Sweat sodium and chloride concentrations also vary with sweat-
ing rate. As sweating rate goes up, the concentration of these minerals in sweat usually
increases as well.55-57
Without adequate salt replacement, the cumulative effect of such electrolyte losses can
bring about a progressive sweat-induced sodium deficit after several days of playing or
training in the heat. This can readily lead to incomplete rehydration, poorer performance,
and heat-related muscle cramps,58 and possibly put an athlete at a higher risk for
developing heat exhaustion. In contrast, potassium (K+) and magnesium (Mg2+) sweat
losses, for example, are typically much lower.56 In fact, athletes will generally lose 3 to
10 times as much sodium as potassium during exercise. With regard to calcium and
trace minerals such as iron and zinc, their concentrations in sweat are also very low;
however, repeated extensive sweating can lead to a deficit of one or more of these
elements.59-61 Such deficits will not have a direct effect on fluid balance per se, but a
chronic dietary deficiency of any one of these nutrients (i.e., not enough consumed to
offset sweat and other excretory losses) can clearly have a negative impact on overall
health and performance.
Unfortunately, it is also a challenge, and often impossible, to keep up with extensive
sweating rates over the course of an entire race or match. Therefore, it is critical that
athletes prepare and manage as best they can by following a predetermined and compre-
hensive hydration plan before, during, and after competition.
Heat-related muscle cramps (heat cramps) often occur during prolonged exercise when
there have been previous extensive and repeated fluid and sodium losses. Such is often
the case in a tennis tournament, for example, especially by the time a player reaches a
later round. Drinking plenty of water helps, but to completely restore fluids, the salt lost
through sweating must be replenished as well.62,63 Importantly, any plan for increasing
dietary salt intake should be individually designed and include appropriate and adequate
fluid intake. For most people with normal blood pressure, however, a slightly excessive
salt intake will not likely pose a health threat.64
If sufficient carbohydrates and electrolytes are provided by food, then water alone can
serve as a primary or sole precompetition beverage. However, other fluids such as milk,
juice, and sport drinks can be used as well, and their consumption should be encouraged
as part of a well-balanced dietary plan. Alcohol and excessive tea, coffee, and other
caffeine-containing beverages should be avoided, as they can accelerate fluid loss.65,66 An
athlete should be able to urinate, and the urine should be fairly clear or light-colored. This
can be interpreted as a good indication of adequate precompetition hydration.67 As
previously stated, before competition begins an athlete’s carbohydrate (i.e., glycogen)
2705_frame_C44 Page 905 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:46 PM
stores should be at or near capacity. Besides providing a readily available source of energy,
muscle glycogen also has a fair amount of water stored with it. Thus, by replenishing
carbohydrates (even partially), an athlete can improve hydration status as well.
Ideally, athletes should ingest, during competition, enough fluid, electrolytes, and
carbohydrate to fully support all circulatory, metabolic, and thermoregulatory require-
ments, and to offset all fluid losses so that normal body water status (i.e., euhydration)
is maintained. But even with relatively short periods of competition (e.g., less than 75
minutes), it is not unusual for some athletes to end up with a significant body water
deficit (i.e., a net loss near or greater than 2% of their precompetition body weight).51,56
In fact, because many athletes often begin competition or training dehydrated to some
degree,51,58 a post-exercise body water deficit may be even worse than is indicated solely
by one’s pre- and post-exercise body weight difference. Also, because thirst is not a
rapidly responding indicator of body water loss, there may not be a sufficient stimulus
to consume enough fluid in the exercise or post-exercise period.68 For some athletes, there
could be a fluid deficit of more than 1 liter before thirst is distinctly perceived. During
exercise, sweating rates can readily exceed 1.5 liters per hour. Few athletes can comfort-
ably consume this much fluid to replace such a loss. Moreover, it is likely that such a
high rate of fluid intake would readily exceed maximal gastric emptying and intestinal
absorption rates.39,42
After competition, athletes must rehydrate. Plain water alone will rehydrate an athlete
to a point, but it also readily prompts increased urine production and potentially a
premature elimination of the thirst drive.63 Excessive water intake for several hours or
more can lead to severe problems related to hyponatremia.69,70 Unless adequate sodium
and chloride are replaced, rehydration will remain incomplete. 62,63 Fluid ingestion after
prolonged exercise needs to be greater than the volume of fluid that was lost via sweating,
because during the rehydration process there is still an obligatory production of urine,
whether or not rehydration is complete. 62 Athletes should also keep in mind that alcohol
and caffeine can reduce the rate and amount of postexercise plasma volume restoration
and net fluid retention.62,71
Creatine
Creatine monohydrate has become one of the most popular “performance-enhancing”
nutritional supplements in use today, and for good reason. Supportive preliminary evi-
dence associated with creatine supplementation includes increased one-repetition maxi-
mum performance (i.e., how much weight a person can lift one time, such as with a bench
press or squat) and peak power, as well as enhanced rowing performance and repetitive
sprint performance in experimental swimming, running, and cycling bouts of exercise. In
addition, many studies have demonstrated increases in body weight.72
Does such laboratory data mean that creatine supplementation will enhance perfor-
mance during sports? Will the same effects be shown with highly trained and conditioned
athletes as have been demonstrated with moderately trained or untrained individuals? Is
creatine supplementation appropriate for the physiological demands of many sports? Are
the observed weight gains actual gains in muscle or mostly fluid retention? And what
about the long-term effects and health risks associated with continued supplementation?
The answers to these questions are not known at this point.
Creatine is a natural compound made by the body from two amino acids, arginine and
glycine. It is also present in fish, meat, and other animal products. During very brief,
explosive-type exercise, the muscles’ capacity to adequately meet the high demand for
energy is largely dependent on the availability of phosphocreatine (PC), a high-energy
compound found in muscle. It has been thought that by increasing the amount of creatine
in the muscles, more PC will be readily available to provide energy at a faster rate during
very high-intensity exercise.
Reports of increased muscle creatine and PC levels, enhanced performance, and desir-
able changes in body composition have been inconsistent and remain somewhat equivocal.
Regarding potential gains in muscle protein, proven and more effective ways exist to gain
the necessary lean body mass required for most sports. And, importantly, the long-term
consequences and health risks associated with continued creatine supplementation have
not yet been comprehensively examined. Potential negative effects on the kidneys, heart,
liver, fluid balance, and thermoregulatory capacity, for example, should be carefully stud-
ied. Lastly, given the specific loading patterns and metabolic demands on individual
muscle groups during many types of sport activities, the muscle creatine and PC levels
are probably (without supplementation) already more than adequate in most well-condi-
tioned athletes. At present, creatine supplementation for most athletes does not appear to
be justified.
A recent consensus statement written for the American College of Sports Medicine on
oral creatine supplementation provides a comprehensive review of the current creatine
literature as well as a critical evaluation of its potential health effects and clinical appli-
cation.72
Medium-Chain Tryglycerides
To increase the availability and oxidation of fats during exercise in an attempt to spare
carbohydrate and improve performance, several dietary fat supplements have been sug-
gested for athletes.9 From this category, medium-chain tryglycerides (MCTs) are one of
the ergogenic aids used by athletes today because of the professed ability of MCTs to
2705_frame_C44 Page 907 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:46 PM
enhance energy levels, fat metabolism, and endurance.73 Once ingested, MCTs leave the
stomach and are absorbed from the intestine in much the same way as are other triglyc-
erides.48 Thus far, MCTs or other fat-loading techniques have not been shown to affect the
rate of carbohydrate oxidation or improve performance. There have also been a number
of reports of gastrointestinal complaints and problems associated with MCT ingestion.48
Therefore, despite the need for fat in an athlete’s diet and the important role of fat in
providing energy during competition for many sports, fat loading prior to play or fat
supplementation during competition are not currently validated or recommended proce-
dures for most athletes.
Sodium Bicarbonate
During very high-intensity exercise, there is an increasing concentration of hydrogen ions
(H+) in the muscle cells as a result of a continuous rapid production of lactic acid. A high
level of H+ will rapidly lead to fatigue. Unless there is something to offset the growing
concentration of H+, there will soon be a decrease in muscle force output, a lower produc-
tion of energy, and a resultant decrease in performance, even in the presence of adequate
carbohydrate supplies. Fortunately, sodium bicarbonate, which is naturally present in the
body, buffers a portion of the H+ associated with the accumulating lactic acid during
anaerobic exercise. This helps to delay fatigue. Would augmented sodium bicarbonate
levels do a better job in delaying the onset of fatigue during high-intensity exercise by
helping to buffer more lactic acid? Probably. Will ingested bicarbonate enhance an athlete’s
overall performance during all sports? Probably not.74,75
The intermittent nature and overall moderate intensity of many sports precludes the
necessity for a great reliance on anaerobic carbohydrate metabolism during competition.
Consequently, lactic acid production is seldom very high.46 Thus, sodium bicarbonate
supplementation would not be very helpful for such activities, since these athletes do not
need to compensate for a large accumulation of H+. It likely rarely occurs. On the other
hand, certain sports that are characterized by high lactic acid production may be better
tolerated with an enhanced capacity to neutralize the accompanying decrease in pH within
the intracellular environment of the active muscles. Ingestion of buffering agents such as
sodium bicarbonate may provide a performance advantage during these activities.75
BCAA levels and increased free tryptophan, particularly during lengthy competitions.47
Would BCAA supplementation help to alleviate this situation by maintaining higher levels
of BCAA in the blood? As one might expect, some researchers have shown improved
performance with BCAA supplementation, and others have demonstrated no change in
performance.48,76 Although BCAA might in theory be helpful in delaying the onset of
fatigue during long periods of exercise or competition, especially if carbohydrate stores
are significantly diminished, adequate carbohydrate intake prior to and during competi-
tion could achieve the same effect by reducing the amount of free fatty acids released and
minimizing any potential increase in the free tryptophan:BCAA ratio. Furthermore, BCAA
supplementation could lead to higher levels of ammonia in the blood, which would
accelerate fatigue.76
Summary
Proper nutrition is important in any athlete’s quest to reach peak performance. When
integrated with proper training and adequate rest, a well-balanced diet, coupled with a
dietary strategy that optimizes hydration status and fuel availability in the pre-competi-
tion, and recovery periods will greatly enhance an athlete’s opportunity to be a regular
winner anywhere he or she competes. Table 44.2 summarizes the key performance-related
competition points for the elite athlete.
TABLE 44.2
Nutrition-Related Problems and Recommendations for the Elite Athlete
Water
Recommendations
Drink plenty of fluids (e.g., water, juice, milk, sport drinks) throughout the day.
Drink regularly during training and competition — typically, older adolescents and adults can comfortably
consume up to 48 ounces (~1.4 liters) per hour.
After training or competition, drink about 150% of any remaining fluid deficit.
Electrolytes
Athletes lose far more sodium and chloride (salt) from sweating than any other electrolyte.
Sodium and chloride losses are greater with higher sweating rates.
Sodium and chloride losses (via sweating) tend to be less when an athlete is acclimatized to the heat.
Sodium deficits can lead to incomplete rehydration and muscle cramps.
To completely rehydrate, an athlete must replace the sodium and chloride that was lost through sweating.
Excessive rapid water consumption, combined with a large sweat-induced sodium deficit, can lead to
hyponatremia.
Recommendations
When an athlete competes or trains in a hot environment, adding salt to the diet (or eating high-salt foods) can
help to prevent a sodium deficit and maintain/restore hydration. Good sodium and chloride sources include:
Salt: 1/4 teaspoon (or 1.5 grams) has 590 mg of sodium
Salted pretzels
2705_frame_C44 Page 910 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:46 PM
Carbohydrates
Recommendations
Generally, 7 to 10 grams of carbohydrate per kilogram of body weight (~500 to 700 grams per day for a 155 lb
athlete) is appropriate for periods of intense training or competition.
Athletes should consume about 30 to 60 grams of carbohydrate per hour during training and competition.
Foods and sport drinks with a high glycemic index can be particularly effective for providing rapid carbohydrate
energy or restoration during and after competition or training.
Lastly, all athletes differ in what foods and which nutritional strategies they can tolerate and that will enhance
their performance. New foods, drinks, or other dietary protocols should be experimented with well prior to
any important event.
References
1. USDA, Human Nutrition Service, Food Guide Pyramid: A Guide to Daily Food Choice, Home and
Garden Bulletin No. 252, 1992.
2. Coyle, EF. In: Perspectives in Exercise Science and Sports Medicine Volume 10: Optimizing Sport
Performance, Lamb, DR, Murray R, Eds. Cooper, Carmel, IN, 1997, ch. 3.
3. Hargreaves, M. J Sport Sci 9: 17; 1991.
4. Foster-Powell K, Brand Miller J. Am J Clin Nut. 62: 871S; 1995.
5. Walberg Rankin J. Glycemic index and exercise metabolism, Sport Science Exchange (Gatorade
Sport Science Institute), 10, 1997.
6. Murray R, Paul GL, Seifert JG, et al. Med Sci Sports Exerc 21: 275; 1989.
7. National Research Council, Recommended dietary allowances, 10th ed. Washington: National
Academy Press, 1989.
8. Bjorntorp P. J Sports Sci 9:71; 1991.
9. Sherman WM, Leenders N. Int J Sport Nutr 5: 1S; 1995.
10. Chen JD, Wang JF, Li KJ, et al. Am J Clin Nutr 49: 1084; 1989.
11. Faber M, Spinnler-Benade S-J, Daubitzer A. Int J Sports Med 10: 140; 1990.
12. Grandjean AC. Am J Clin Nutr 49: 1070; 1989.
13. Heinemann L, Zerbes H. Am J Clin Nutr 49: 1007; 1989.
14. Sears B. Essential Fatty Acids, Eicosanoids, and Dietary Endocrinology, Marblehead, MA: Eicotec
Foods, 1993.
15. Coggan A, Coleman E, Hopkins W, Spriet L. Dietary fat and physical activity: fueling the
controversy, Sport Science Exchange: Roundtable (Gatorade Sport Science Institute), 7, 1996.
16. Muoio DM, Leddy JJ, Horvath PJ, et al. Med Sci Sports Exerc 26: 81; 1994.
17. Brouns F. Nutritional Needs of Athletes, West Sussex: John Wiley & Sons, 1993.
18. Evans WJ, In: World Review of Nutrition and Dietetics Vol. 71: Nutrition and Fitness for Athletes,
Simopoulos AP, Pavlou KN, Eds. Basel, Karger, 1993, p. 21.
19. Lemon PWR. J Sports Sci 9: 53; 1991.
2705_frame_C44 Page 911 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:46 PM
Part VII
Clinical Nutrition
2705_frame_C45 Page 914 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:46 PM
2705_frame_C45 Page 915 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:46 PM
45
Alcohol: Its Metabolism and Interaction with
Nutrients
Charles S. Lieber
0-8493-2705-9/01/$0.00+$1.50
© 2002 by CRC Press LLC 915
2705_frame_C45 Page 916 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:46 PM
Impaired
activation,
utilization, and
detoxification
Ethanol
FIGURE 45.1
Organ damage in the alcoholic. Interaction of direct toxicity of ethanol on various organs with malnutrition
secondary to dietary deficiencies, maldigestion, and malabsorption, as well as impaired hepatic activation or
increased degradation of nutrients. (From Lieber CS, N Engl J Med 333: 1058; 1995, with permission.)
in order to eat or drink, the animals had no choice but to take the alcohol along with
whatever diet was given. With this technique, the quantity of ethanol consumed was
increased to 36% of total energy, an amount relevant to alcohol intake in man. It was found
that even with nutritionally adequate diets, isoenergetic replacement of sucrose or other
carbohydrates by ethanol consistently produced a 5- to 10-fold increase in hepatic triglyc-
erides.4-6 Furthermore, isoenergetic replacement of carbohydrate by fat instead of ethanol
did not produce steatosis.4 With this liquid-diet technique, alcohol was also shown to be
capable of producing cirrhosis in nonhuman primates, even when there was an adequate
diet.7 In addition, the hepatotoxicity of ethanol was established by controlled clinical
investigations which showed that even in the absence of dietary deficiencies, alcohol can
produce fatty liver and ultrastructural lesions in humans.4,5
Some dietary deficiencies were found to exacerbate the effects of alcohol, and judicious
supplementations were shown to have beneficial effects. When protein deficiency is
present, the deficiency may potentiate the effect of ethanol. In rats, a combination of
ethanol and a diet deficient in both protein and lipotropic factors leads to more pronounced
hepatic steatosis than with either factor alone.8 Indeed, protein deficiency impairs lipo-
protein secretion, which can be expected to markedly potentiate hepatic lipid accumulation
secondary to the direct effects of alcohol resulting from its metabolism in the liver. How-
ever, the effect of protein deficiency has not been clearly delineated in human adults. In
2705_frame_C45 Page 917 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:46 PM
children, protein deficiency leads to hepatic steatosis, one of the manifestations of kwash-
iorkor, but this condition does not progress to cirrhosis. In adolescent baboons, protein
restriction to 7% of total energy did not result in conspicuous liver injury (even after 19
months) either by biochemical analysis or by light- and electron-microscopic examination.
Significant steatosis was observed only when the protein intake was reduced to 4% of
total energy.9 On the other hand, an excess of protein (25% of total energy or 2.5 times the
recommended amount) did not prevent alcohol from producing fat accumulation in
human volunteers.10 Thus, in humans, ethanol is capable of producing striking changes
in liver lipids even in the presence of a protein-enriched diet, an effect linked to the
metabolism of ethanol.
The hepatocyte contains three main pathways for ethanol metabolism, each located in
a different subcellular compartment:
1. The alcohol dehydrogenase (ADH) pathway of the cytosol or the soluble fraction
of the cell
2. The microsomal ethanol oxidizing system located in the endoplasmic reticulum
3. Catalase located in the peroxisomes1
Each of these pathways produces specific metabolic and toxic disturbance, and all three
result in the production of acetaldehyde, a highly toxic metabolite.
lents generated overwhelm the hepatocyte’s ability to maintain redox homeostasis, and a
number of metabolic disorders ensue (Figure 45.2),1 including hypoglycemia and hyper-
lactacidemia. The latter contributes to the acidosis and also reduces the capacity of the
kidney to excrete uric acid, leading to secondary hyperuricemia, which is aggravated by
the alcohol-induced ketosis and acetate-mediated enhanced ATP breakdown and purine
generation.13 Hyperuricemia explains, at least in part, the common clinical observation
that excessive consumption of alcoholic beverages commonly aggravates or precipitates
gouty attacks. The increased NADH also promotes fatty acid synthesis and opposes lipid
oxidation with, as a net result, fat accumulation.14
The effects of ethanol were reproduced in vitro by an alternate NADH-generating system
(sorbitol-fructose) and were blocked by an H+ acceptor (methylene blue).14,15 The preventive
effect of methylene blue against ethanol-induced fat accumulation was recently confirmed.16
Extrahepatic ADH
The human gastric mucosa possesses several ADH isoenzymes,17 one of which (class IV
ADH or σ-ADH) is not present in the liver. This enzyme has now been purified,18 its full-
length cDNA obtained, the complete amino acid sequence deduced,19,20 and its gene cloned
and localized to chromosome 4.21 Gastric ADH is responsible for a large portion of ethanol
metabolism found in cultured rat22 and human23 gastric cells. Its in vivo effect is reflected
by the first pass metabolism (FPM) of ethanol, namely the fact that for a given dose of
ethanol, blood levels are usually higher after IV than after oral administration.24,25 While
the relative contribution of gastric and hepatic ethanol metabolism to FPM is still the
subject of debate,26-28 the role of gastric ethanol metabolism in this FPM has been estab-
lished experimentally.29,30 Furthermore, FPM is partly lost in the alcoholic,31 together with
decreased gastric ADH activity. Moreover, FPM disappears after gastrectomy.32 σ-ADH is
also absent or markedly decreased in activity in a large percentage of Japanese subjects,33
and their FPM is reduced correspondingly34 in keeping with a predominant role for σ-
ADH in human FPM. Thus, the FPM represents some kind of protective barrier against
the systemic effects of ethanol, including attenuation of liver damage.35,36
Organelle Immunologic
Dysfunction? Stimulation? Toxicity Secondary Malnutrition Vitamins
Proteins
Hypoxic Damage
Primary
MEMBRANE ALTERATIONS Fatty Liver
Usable Energy & Hyperlipemia
MICROSOMAL
ADH Hypoproteinemia
CYTOCHROME P-450 INDUCTION O2 Metabolic Hypoglycemia
Derangements Hypoglucuronidation
- 2E1 Hyperlactacidemia
OH. + O2
2705_frame_C45 Page 919 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:46 PM
FIGURE 45.2
Hepatic, nutritional, and metabolic abnormalities after ethanol abuse. Malnutrition, whether primary or secondary, can be differentiated from metabolic changes or direct
toxicity, resulting partly from ADH-mediated redox changes, effects secondary to microsomal induction, or acetaldehyde production. (From Lieber CS, J Stud Alcohol 59: 9;
1998, with permission.)
919
2705_frame_C45 Page 920 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:46 PM
ethanol that develops in the alcoholic (in addition to the central nervous tolerance), with
other cytochromes P450 (CYP1A2, CYP3A4) possibly also involved.45
In addition to tolerance to ethanol, alcoholics tend to display tolerance to various other
drugs. Indeed, it has been shown that the rate of drug clearance from the blood is enhanced
in alcoholics. Of course, this could be caused by a variety of factors other than ethanol,
such as the congeners and the use of other drugs so commonly associated with alcoholism.
Controlled studies showed, however, that administration of pure ethanol with non-defi-
cient diets either to rats or man (under metabolic ward conditions) resulted in a striking
increase in the rate of blood clearance of meprobamate, pentobarbital,46 and various other
drugs.1 The metabolic tolerance persists several days to weeks after cessation of alcohol
abuse, and the duration of recovery varies depending on the drug considered.47
Experimentally, this effect of chronic ethanol consumption is modulated, in part, by the
dietary content in carbohydrates,48 lipids,49 and proteins.50 It is now recognized that CYP2E1,
in addition to its ethanol oxidizing activity, catalyzes fatty acid ω-1 and ω-2 hydroxyla-
tions.51-53 Furthermore, acetone is both an inducer and a substrate of CYP2E154-56 (Figure
45.3). Excess ketones and fatty acid commonly accompany diabetes and morbid obesity,
conditions associated with non-alcoholic steatohepatitis (NASH). Experimentally, obese,
overfed rats also exhibit substantially higher microsomal ethanol oxidation, acetaminophen
activation, and p-nitrophenol hydroxylation (monooxygenase activities catalyzed by
CYP2E1).57 These diabetic rats are experimental models relevant to NASH, and indeed the
hepatopathology of NASH appears to be due, at least in part, to excess CYP2E1 induction.58
Clinically, a most important feature of CYP2E1 is not only ethanol oxidation, but also
its extraordinary capacity to convert many xenobiotics to highly toxic metabolites, thereby
explaining the increased vulnerability of the alcoholic. These agents include industrial
solvents (e.g., bromobenzene, vinylidene chloride), anesthetic agents (e.g., enflurane,59 meth-
oxyflurane), commonly used medications (e.g., isoniazid, phenylbutazone), illicit drugs
(e.g., cocaine) and over-the-counter analgesics (e.g., acetaminophen),60 all of which are
substrates for, and/or inducers of CYP2E1. The effects of acetaminophen, ethanol, and
fasting are synergistic,61 because all three deplete the level of reduced glutathione (GSH),
OH-Products
Detoxification
Glucose
_ . .
Activation to toxins, carcinogens
O2 , OH and other free radicals
CYP2E1
+
NADPH
O2
Ketones
a scavenger of toxic free radicals. Rats fed ethanol chronically have increased rates of GSH
turnover,62 and ethanol produces an enhanced loss from the liver.63 The selective loss of
the compound from liver mitochondria64 contributes to the striking alcohol-induced oxi-
dant stress and impairment of this organelle.
CYP2E1 also generates several species of active oxygen (Figures 45.2, 45.3) which, in
concert with a decrease in the level of GSH, promote injury by inactivation of enzymes and
peroxidation of lipids. In patients with cirrhosis, hepatic depletion of α-tocopherol,65 a major
antioxidant, potentiates this effect. GSH offers one of the mechanisms for the scavenging
of toxic free radicals. Replenishment of GSH can be achieved by administration of precursors
of cysteine (one of the amino acids of this tripeptide) such as acetylcysteine or S-adenosyl-
L-methionine (SAMe).66,67 Experimentally, CYP2E1 has also been downregulated by poly-
enylphosphatidylcholine (PPC),68 a potentially beneficial therapeutic approach.
of vitamins A, C, and thiamin may descend below the recommended daily allowances.81
Calcium, iron, and fiber intake are also lowered.83
The mechanisms underlying the altered pattern of food intake are under debate. Sup-
pression of appetite has been postulated.84 Depressed consciousness during inebriation,
hangover, and gastroduodenitis due to ethanol, partly explain the decreased food intake.
The contribution of subtle nutritional alterations produced by ethanol to the pathogenesis
of ethanol-induced or other disease states, including alcoholism, is largely unchartered.
Specific Nutrients
Vitamin C
The vitamin C status of alcoholic patients admitted to a hospital is lower than that of
nonalcoholics as measured by serum ascorbic acid, peripheral leukocyte ascorbic acid, or
urinary ascorbic acid after an oral challenge.85 In addition to a lower mean ascorbic acid
level, some 25% of patients with Laennec’s cirrhosis had serum ascorbic acid levels below
the range of healthy controls.85 Ascorbic acid status is low in alcoholic patients with and
without liver disease. When alcohol intake exceeds 30% of total kcalories, vitamin C
generally falls below recommended dietary allowances.86 The clinical significance is
unknown for patients who have low ascorbic acid levels but who are not clearly scorbutic.
Vitamin D
Alcoholics have illnesses related to abnormalities of calcium, phosphorus, and vitamin D
homeostasis. They have decreases in bone density87 and bone mass,88 increased suscepti-
bility to fractures,89 and increased osteonecrosis.90 Low blood calcium, phosphorus, mag-
nesium, and low, normal, or high vitamin D3 levels have been reported, indicating disturbed
calcium metabolism.88 In patients with alcoholic liver disease, vitamin D deficiency prob-
ably derives from too little vitamin D substrate, which results from poor dietary intake,
malabsorption due to cholestasis or pancreatic insufficiency, and insufficient sunlight.
Vitamin K
Vitamin K deficiency in alcoholism may arise when there is an interruption of fat absorp-
tion due to pancreatic insufficiency, biliary obstruction, or intestinal mucosal abnormality
secondary to folic acid deficiency. Dietary vitamin K inadequacy is not a likely cause of
clinical deficiency unless there is concomitant sterilization of the large gut, a reliable source
of the vitamin.
Folic Acid
Alcoholics tend to have low folic acid status when they are drinking heavily and their
folic acid intake is reduced. For example, a group of unselected alcoholics showed a 37.5%
incidence of low serum folate levels and a 17.6% incidence of low red blood cell folate
levels.74
In pigs fed ethanol for 11 months, folic acid absorption is normal but jejunal folate
hydrolase, an early enzyme of folate polyglutamate breakdown, is decreased.91,92 In vitro
preparations of rat intestine absorb folate less well when exposed to a variety of alcohols.93
Malnourished alcoholics without liver disease also absorb folic acid less well compared
to their better-nourished counterparts.94 Folic acid absorption, usually increased by partial
starvation, is less increased in rats when alcohol is ingested.95 It has not been clearly shown,
however, that either protein deficiency or alcohol94,95 decreases folate absorption in vivo.
2705_frame_C45 Page 923 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:46 PM
Thus, it is still unclear what aspects of malnutrition adversely affect folate absorption and
under what clinical circumstances alcohol may interfere with folate absorption.
Alcohol accelerates the production of megaloblastic anemia in patients with depleted
folate stores96 and suppresses the hematologic response to folic acid in folic acid-depleted
patients.97 Alcohol also has other effects on folate metabolism but their significance is not
clear: alcohol given acutely causes a decrease in serum folate, which is partly explained
by increased urinary excretion;98 alcohol administered chronically to monkeys decreased
hepatic folate levels, partly because of the inability of the liver to retain folate,99 and
perhaps partly because of increased urinary and fecal losses.100
Vitamin B12
Alcoholics do not commonly have vitamin B12 deficiency. Their serum levels are usually
normal even when they are deficient in folate, whether they have cirrhosis101,102 or not.94,95
This is probably due to large body stores of vitamin B12. Pancreatic insufficiency, however,
results in decreased vitamin B12 absorption as measured by the Schilling test. In this
circumstance there is insufficient luminal protease activity and alkalinity, which normally
serve to release vitamin B12 from the “r’’ protein secreted by salivary glands, intestines,
and possibly the stomach.103 Alcohol ingestion has also been shown to decrease vitamin
B12 absorption in volunteers after several weeks of intake.104 The alcohol effect may be in
the ileum, because co-administration of intrinsic factor or pancreatin does not correct the
Schilling test results. It is controversial whether the binding of intrinsic factor-vitamin B12
complex to ileal sites is abnormal.105,106
Riboflavin
When there is a general lack of B vitamin intake, riboflavin deficiency may be encoun-
tered.107 In one study, deficiency was found in 50% of a small group of patients with
medical complications severe enough to warrant hospital admission.108 Although none of
the patients exhibited classic signs of riboflavin deficiency, they had an abnormal activity
coefficient (AC) that returned to normal 2 to 7 days after intramuscular replacement with
5 mg riboflavin daily. Activity coefficient is measured as the ratio of erythrocyte glu-
tathione reductase activity upon addition of flavin adenine dinucleotide to the activity
with no additions. Riboflavin deficiency could be induced readily by alcohol feeding to
the Syrian hamster; the most severe deficiency was seen in animals also restricted in
riboflavin intake.109 Riboflavin and pyridoxine storage in the liver is adversely affected by
alcohol, at least in experimental animals.
chronic alcoholics who combine low vitamin E intake with steatorrhea from chronic
pancreatitis or prolonged cholestasis.
Magnesium
Acute doses of ethanol cause magnesium loss in the urine,113 and alcoholism is associated
with magnesium deficiency.114 Alcoholics have low blood magnesium and low body-
exchangeable magnesium; symptoms in alcoholics resemble those in patients with mag-
nesium deficiency of other causes; upon withdrawal from alcohol, magnesium balance is
positive. Hypocalcemia in alcoholics in the setting of magnesium deficiency has been
ascribed, in part, to impaired parathyroid hormone (PTH) secretion as well as renal and
skeletal resistance to PTH,115 and the hypocalcemia may only be responsive to magnesium
repletion. Hospitalized alcoholics with normal serum total magnesium had significantly
lower serum ionized magnesium.116
Iron
There may be either deficiency or excess of iron in the body. Alcoholics may be iron-
deficient as a result of the several gastrointestinal lesions to which they are prone and that
may bleed.
Hepatic iron content was found to be increased in autopsy studies of most patients with
early alcoholic cirrhosis.117 In most alcoholics, however, the iron content of the liver is
normal or only modestly elevated, although there may be stainable iron in reticuloendo-
thelial cells, possibly because of bouts of hemolysis. It is unclear whether increased intes-
tinal absorption of iron because of alcohol118 or hepatic uptake of iron from plasma in
established alcoholic liver disease119 contributes significantly to increased hepatic iron
levels. There is usually little difficulty in distinguishing the hepatic iron increases of
alcoholic liver disease from the much higher amounts characteristic of genetic hemochro-
matosis, using a measure of absolute iron content per gram of liver with upward adjust-
ments for age.120 The contribution that hepatic iron may make to liver damage via its role
in lipid peroxidation121 (in conjunction with the effects of alcohol) and its possible role in
promoting fibrogenesis122 are of great potential significance.
Zinc
Patients have low plasma zinc,123 low liver zinc,124 and increased urinary zinc levels.124,125
Acute ethanol ingestion, however, does not cause zincuria.126 The low zinc content of
chronic alcoholics with cirrhosis is attributed to decreased intake and absorption as well
as increased urinary excretion. Many Americans have a diet marginal in zinc.127 Alcoholics
fall into several of those groups with marginal intake. It is interesting that zinc absorption
has been shown to be low in alcoholic cirrhotics but not in patients with cirrhosis of other
causes,128 although cirrhosis of varied etiologies is characterized by low serum zinc.129
Currently, the therapeutic use of zinc in alcoholism is restricted to the treatment of night
blindness not responsive to vitamin A.
Copper
Hepatic copper content is increased in advanced alcoholic cirrhosis.117 Serum copper
content has been reported to be elevated in alcoholics independent of the stage of liver
disease,130 but others have reported normal levels.131
2705_frame_C45 Page 925 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:46 PM
Trace Metals
Nickel levels are consistently high in alcoholic liver disease; manganese and chromium
are unchanged.117 Intracellular shifts in trace metals have been described upon acute
administration of alcohol.132 Versieck et al. reported increased serum molybdenum in
patients with acute liver disease;133 increased levels were not seen in those patients with
cirrhosis. The clinical significance of trace metal changes is still obscure, except for the
cardiotoxicity ascribed to alcoholic beverages with high cobalt content.
liver function tests.140,141 Inadequate intake may partly explain low PLP, but increased
destruction and reduced formation may also contribute. PLP is more rapidly destroyed
in erythrocytes in the presence of acetaldehyde, the product of ethanol oxidation, perhaps
by displacement of PLP from protein and consequent exposure to phosphatase.140,142 Stud-
ies showed that chronic ethanol feeding lowered hepatic content of PLP by decreasing net
synthesis from pyridoxine.143-145 The acetaldehyde produced on alcohol oxidation was
thought to enhance hydrolysis of PLP by cellular phosphatases.140
METABOLITES
LIPID
PEROXIDATION
α_AMINO_n_BUTYRIC ACID
ETHANOL FREE
1 2 RADICALS GSH
ACETALDEHYDE CYSTEINE
METHIONINE d
c
a SERINE CYSTATHIONINE
S-ADENOSYL_METHIONINE HOMOCYSTEINE
3 PHOSPHATIDYLCHOLINE 4
b
PHOSPHATIDYLETHANOLAMINE
FIGURE 45.4
Lipid peroxidation and other consequences of alcoholic liver disease and/or increased free radical generation
and acetaldehyde production by ethanol-induced microsomes, with sites of possible therapeutic interventions.
Metabolic blocks caused by liver disease (a,b), folate (c), B12 (c) or B6 (d) deficiencies are illustrated, with
corresponding depletions in S-adenosylmethionine, phosphatidylcholine, and glutathione (GSH). New thera-
peutic approaches include 1) downregulation of microsomal enzyme induction especially of CYP2E1, 2) decrease
of free radicals with antioxidants, 3) replenishment of S-adenosylmethionine, and 4) phosphatidylcholine. (From
Lieber CS. J Hepatology. 32: 113; 2000, with permission.)
Phosphatidylcholine (PC)
In the presence of liver disease, the activity of phosphatidylethanolamine methyltrans-
ferase is depressed,154 with significant pathologic effects. This enzymatic block can again
be bypassed through the administration of the product of that reaction, in this case PC169
(Figure 45.4). This is emerging as potentially important approach to the treatment of liver
disease. Indeed, feeding of a mixture rich in polyunsaturated PCs (PPC), especially dili-
noleoylphosphatidylcholine (DLPC), which has a high bioavailability, exerted a remark-
able protection against alcohol-induced fibrosis and cirrhosis.170
PPC contains choline, but in amounts present in PPC, choline had no protective action
against the fibrogenic effects of ethanol in the baboon.171 In primates in general, choline
2705_frame_C45 Page 928 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:46 PM
plays a lesser role as a dietary nutrient than in rodents, in part because of lesser choline
oxidase activity. In fact, as reviewed elsewhere,172 choline becomes essential for human
nutrition only in severely restricted feeding situations. The decreased phospholipid meth-
yltransferase activity in cirrhotic livers154 is not simply secondary to the cirrhosis, but may
in fact be a primary defect related to alcohol, as suggested by the observation that the
enzyme activity is already decreased prior to development of cirrhosis.169 Another mech-
anism whereby ethanol may affect phospholipids is increased lipid peroxidation as
reflected by increased F2-isoprostanes,171 which could explain the associated decrease of
arachidonic acid in phospholipids.173
One concern was that PPC and DLPC, because of their polyunsaturated nature, may
aggravate the oxidative stress, but the opposite was found, both in vitro and in vivo. In
alcohol-fed baboons, PPC not only prevented septal fibrosis and cirrhosis170 but also
resulted in a total protection against oxidative stress, as determined by normalization of
4-hydroxynonenal, F2-isoprostanes and GSH levels.174 In patients with hepatitis C, PPC
improved the transaminase levels, but the effect on liver fibrosis was not assessed.175
However, a clinical trial on alcoholic fibrosis is presently ongoing in the U.S.
900
800
700
LIVER VITAMIN A (µg/g wet weight)
500
400
300
200
100
0
<0.001 <0.001 <0.001 <0.001
Normal Persistent Fatty Alcoholic Cirrhosis
Liver Hepatitis Liver Hepatitis
Autopsy liver
Diabetes
FIGURE 45.5
Hepatic vitamin A levels in subjects with normal livers, chronic persistent hepatitis, and various stages of
alcoholic injury (Data from Leo MA, Lieber CS, N Engl J Med 307: 597; 1982).
When dietary vitamin A intake was virtually eliminated, the difference in hepatic storage
between ethanol-fed rats and controls was much greater than could be accounted for by
the total vitamin A intake. Thus, malabsorption was not the only reason for the depletion
of hepatic vitamin A. Two possible mechanisms other than malabsorption can be invoked:
increased mobilization of vitamin A from the liver, and enhanced catabolism of vitamin
A in the liver or in other organs. There is experimental evidence for both.178-180
The various pathways involved in hepatic vitamin A metabolism have been reviewed.181
Drugs that induce the cytochromes P450 in liver microsomes were shown to result in a
depletion of hepatic vitamin A.182 A similar effect was observed after administration of
ethanol177,178 and other xenobiotics that are known to interact with liver microsomes,
including carcinogens.183 The hepatic depletion was strikingly exacerbated when ethanol
and drugs were combined,184 which mimicks a common clinical occurrence.
Retinoic acid has been shown to be degraded in microsomes of hamsters185 and rats.180,186
In both species, the reported activity was very low compared to the degree of hepatic
vitamin A depletion. These observations prompted the search for alternate pathways of
retinol metabolism, and two new pathways of retinol metabolism were described: rat
liver microsomes, when fortified with NADPH, converted retinol to polar metabolites,
including 4-hydroxyretinol.186 This activity was also demonstrated in a reconstituted
monooxygenase system containing purified forms of rat cytochromes P-450,187 including
P4502B1 (a phenobarbital-inducible isozyme). More recently, it has been shown that other
2705_frame_C45 Page 930 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:46 PM
cytochromes (such as P450 CYP 1A1) also catalyze the conversion of retinal to retinoic
acid.188 In addition, a new microsomal NAD+-dependent retinol dehydrogenase was
described.189 The classic pathway for the conversion of retinol to retinal in the liver
involves a cytosolic NAD-dependent retinol dehydrogenase (CRD), believed to be similar,
if not identical, to the liver cytosolic alcohol dehydrogenase (ADH, alcohol: NAD– oxi-
doreductase, EC 1.1.1.1). The observation that a strain of deermice lacks this enzyme
without apparent adverse effects190 prompted a search for an alternate pathway for the
production of retinal, the precursor of retinoic acid. Evidence was obtained for the exist-
ence of a NAD-dependent microsomal retinol dehydrogenase (MRD)189 which can convert
retinol to retinal using NAD, and retinal to retinol using NADH as cofactors. The activity
of the retinol189 as well as the retinal191 dehydrogenases is inducible by chronic alcohol
consumption, thereby contributing to hepatic vitamin A depletion. Finally, metabolism
of retinol and retinoic acid was also demonstrated with human liver microsomes and
purified cytochrome P-4502C8.191
In patients with severe as well as moderate depletion of hepatic vitamin A, multivesicular
lysosome-like organelles were detected in increased numbers.192 That a low hepatic vitamin
A concentration contributes to these lesions was also verified experimentally in rats.193
Hepatic vitamin A depletion plays a key role in hepatic fibrosis, and both hepatocytes
and stellate cells are involved. Hepatic stellate cells are the principal storage site of vitamin
A. The activation of stellate cells into myofibroblast-like cells, which then synthesize
collagen, is associated with a decrease in vitamin A storage in these cells.194 Retinoic acid,
and to a lesser extent retinol, were shown to reduce stellate cell proliferation and collagen
production in culture.194-196 Conversely, lack of retinoids could promote fibrosis in these
tissues, especially in the liver, consistent with the associated activation of stellate cells.194
Paradoxically, however, vitamin A excess may also promote fibrosis (vide infra).
Concomitant ethanol consumption and vitamin A deficiency resulted in an increased
severity of squamous metaplasia of the trachea.197,198 This potentiation of vitamin A defi-
ciency by alcohol may predispose the tracheal epithelium to neoplastic transformation.
A relatively high risk of squamous cell carcinoma of the lung was found in a Norwegian
population that drank large amounts of alcohol and had a low dietary intake of vitamin
A.199 Furthermore, a positive association of alcohol consumption with lung cancer has
been reported in Japanese men in Hawaii.200 In addition, ethanol-induced vitamin A
depletion is associated with decreased detoxification of xenobiotics, including carcinogens
such as nitrosodimethylamine,201 thereby playing a role in chemical carcinogenesis (vide
supra). Recent data also suggest that functional downregulation of retinoic acid receptors,
by inhibiting biosynthesis of retinoic acid and upregulating activator protein-1 (c-Jun and
c-Fos) gene expression, may be important mechanisms for causing malignant transforma-
tion by ethanol.202
In addition to promoting vitamin A depletion, ethanol may interfere more directly with
retinoic acid synthesis, since both were shown in vitro to serve as substrates for the same
enzymes.203 Specifically, one of the mechanisms by which ethanol induces gastrointestinal
cancer may be an inhibition of ADH-catalyzed gastrointestinal retinoic acid synthesis
which is needed for epithelial differentiation. Indeed, class I ADH (ADH-I) and class IV
ADH (ADH-IV) function as retinol dehydrogenases in vitro and are abundantly distributed
along the GI tract.204 Deficiency of retinoic acids can produce birth defects and, as discussed
above, ethanol promotes deficiency of retinoids. Duester203,205 and Pullarkat206 implicated
competitive inhibition by ethanol of the biosynthesis of retinoic acid from retinol, since
class I alcohol dehydrogenase (E.C. 1.1.1.1) can contribute to the biosynthesis of retinoic
acid from retinol. Indeed, this group identified one human ADH isozyme that exists in
the affected embryonic tissues to act as a retinol dehydrogenase catalyzing the synthesis
of retinoic acid. Ethanol did, in fact, reduce RA levels in cultured mouse embryos.207
2705_frame_C45 Page 931 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:46 PM
However, other results208 failed to verify, in conceptal tissues, that competitive inhibition
of the conversion of retinol to retinoic acid is a significant factor in ethanol-induced
embryotoxicity. More recently, Kedishvili et al.209 characterized an ADH enzyme (ADH-
F) that oxidizes all-trans-retinol and steroid alcohols in fetal tissues.
from excess of retinoids and carotenoids, and paradoxically, both have similar adverse
effects in terms of fibrosis, carcinogenesis, and possibly embryotoxicity. Treatment efforts
therefore must carefully respect the resulting narrow therapeutic window, especially for
drinkers in whom alcohol narrows this therapeutic window even further by promoting
the depletion of retinoids and potentiating their toxicity.
Acknowledgment
Modified from Annual Review of Nutrition, Lieber, C.S. 20: 395; 3000 (with permission).
References
1. Lieber CS. Medical and Nutritional Complications of Alcoholism: Mechanisms and Management.
New York, Plenum Press, 1992, p 579.
2. Perlow W, Baraona E, Lieber CS. Gastroenterology 72: 680; 1977.
3. Best CH, Hartroft WS, Lucas CC, Ridout JH. Br Med J 2: 1001; 1949.
4. Lieber CS, Jones DP, DeCarli LM. J Clin Invest 44: 1009; 1965.
5. Lieber CS, Jones DP, Mendelson J, DeCarli LM. Trans Assoc Am Phys 76: 289; 1963.
6. DeCarli LM, Lieber CS. J Nutr 91: 331; 1967.
7. Lieber CS, DeCarli LM. J Med Primatol 3: 153; 1974.
8. Lieber CS, Spritz N, DeCarli LM. J Lipid Reds 10: 283; 1969.
9. Lieber CS, DeCarli LM, Gang H, et al. In: Medical Primatology, Part III. Goldsmith EI, Moor-
Jankowski J, Eds, Basel: Karger, 1972, p 270.
10. Lieber CS, Rubin E. Am J Med 44: 200; 1968.
11. Bjorkhem I. Eur J Biochem 30: 441; 1972.
12. Bosron WF, Ehrig T, Li T-K. Seminars in Liver Disease 13: 126; 1993.
13. Faller J, Fox IH. N Engl J Med 307: 1598; 1982.
14. Lieber CS, Schmid R. J Clin Invest 40: 394; 1961.
15. Lieber CS, DeCarli LM, Schmid R. Biochem Biophys Res Comm 1: 302; 1959.
16. Galli A, Price D, Crabb D. Hepatology 29: 1164; 1999.
17. Hernández-Muñoz R, Caballeria J, Baraona E, et al. Alcohol: Clin Exp Res 14: 946; 1990.
18. Stone CL, Thomas HR, Bosron WF, Li T-K. Alcohol: Clin Exp Res 17: 911; 1993.
19. Yokoyama H, Baraona E, Lieber CS. Biochem Biophys Res Comm 203: 219; 1994.
2705_frame_C45 Page 936 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:46 PM
20. Farrés J, Moreno A, Crosas B, et al. Eur J Biochem 224: 549; 1994.
21. Yokoyama H, Baraona E, Lieber CS. Genomics 31: 243; 1996.
22. Mirmiran-Yazdy SA, Haber PS, Korsten MA, et al. Gastroenterology 108: 737; 1995.
23. Haber PS, Gentry T, Mak KM, et al. Gastroenterology 111: 863; 1996.
24. Julkunen RJK, DiPadova C, Lieber CS. Life Sci 37: 567; 1985.
25. Julkunen RJK, Tannenbaum L, Baraona E, Lieber CS. Alcohol 2: 437; 1985.
26. Levitt MD, Levitt DG. J Pharmacol Exp Ther 269: 297; 1993.
27. Lieber CS, Gentry RT, Baraona E. In: The Biology of Alcohol Problems, Saunders JB, Whitfield
JB, Eds, UK Elsevier Science Publishers, 1996, p 315.
28. Sato N, Kitamura T. Gastroenterology 111: 1143; 1996.
29. Caballeria J, Baraona E, Lieber CS. Life Sci 41: 1021; 1987.
30. Lim Jr RT, Gentry RT, Ito D, et al. Alcohol: Clin Exp Res 17: 1337; 1993.
31. DiPadova C, Worner TM, Julkunen RJK, Lieber CS. Gastroenterology 92: 1169; 1987.
32. Caballeria J, Frezza M, Hernández-Muñoz R, et al. Gastroenterology 97: 1205; 1989.
33. Baraona E, Yokoyama A, Ishii H, et al. Life Sci 49: 1929; 1991.
34. Dohmen K, Baraona E, Ishibadsshi H, et al. Alcohol: Clin Exp Res 20: 1569; 1996.
35. Battiston L, Moretti M, Tulissi P, et al. Life Sci 56: 241; 1994.
36. Imuro Y, Bradford BU, Forman DT, Thurman RG. Gastroenterology 110: 1536; 1996.
37. Day CP, Bashir R, James OF, et al. Hepatology 14: 798 and 15: 750; 1991.
38. Poupon RE, Nalpas B, Coutelle C, et al. Hepatology 15: 1017; 1992.
39. Lieber CS. Physiol Rev 77: 517; 1997.
40. Lieber CS. Alcohol: Clin Exp Res 23: 991; 1999.
41. Lieber CS, DeCarli LM. Science 162: 917; 1968.
42. Lieber CS, DeCarli LM. J Biol Chem 245: 2505; 1970.
43. Tsutsumi M, Lasker JM, Shimizu M, et al. Hepatology 10: 437; 1989.
44. Takahashi T, Lasker JM, Rosman AS, Lieber CS. Hepatology 17: 236; 1993.
45. Salmela KS, Kessova IG, Tsyrlov IB, Lieber CS. Alcohol: Clin Exp Res 22: 2125; 1998.
46. Misra PS, Lefevre A, Ishii H, et al. Am J Med 51: 346; 1971.
47. Hetu C, Joly J-G. Biochem Pharmacol 34: 1211; 1985.
48. Teschke R, Moreno F, Petrides AS. Biochem Pharmacol 30: 45; 1981.
49. Joly J-G, Hetu C. Biochem Pharmacol l24: 1475; 1975.
50. Mitchell JR, Mack C, Mezey E, Maddrey WC. Hepatology 1: 336; 1981.
51. Laethem RM, Balaxy M, Falck JR, et al. J Biol Chem 268: 12912; 1993.
52. Amet Y, Berthou F, Goasduff T, et al. Biochem Biophys Res Comm 203: 1168; 1994.
53. Adas F, Betthou F, Picart D. J Lipid Res 39: 1210; 1998.
54. Koop DR, Casazza JP. J Biol Chem 260: 13607; 1985.
55. Koop DR, Crump BL, Nordblom GD, Coon MJ. Toxicol Appl Pharmacol 98: 278; 1989.
56. Yang CS, Yoo J-S, Ishizaki H, Hong J. Drug Metab Rev 22: 147; 1990.
57. Raucy JL, Lasker JM, Kramer JC, et al. Molec Pharmacol 39: 275; 1991.
58. Weltman MD, Farrell GC, Hall P, et al. Hepatology 27: 128; 1998.
59. Tsutsumi M, Leo MA, Kim C, et al. Alcohol: Clin Exp Res 14: 174; 1990.
60. Sato C, Nakano M, Lieber CS. Gastroenterology 80: 140; 1981.
61. Whitecomb DC, Block GD. JAMA 272: 1845; 1994.
62. Morton S, Mitchell MC. Biochem Pharmacol 34: 1559; 1985.
63. Speisky H, MacDonald A, Giles G, et al. Biochem J 225: 565; 1985.
64. Hirano T, Kaplowitz N, Tsukamoto H, et al. Hepatology 6: 1423; 1992.
65. Leo MA, Rosman A, Lieber CS. Hepatology 17: 977; 1993.
66. Lieber CS, Casini A, DeCarli LM, et al. Hepatology 11: 165; 1990.
67. Lieber CS. J Hepatology 30: 1155; 1999.
68. Aleynik MK, Leo MA, Aleynik SI, Lieber CS. Alcohol: Clin Exp Res 23: 96; 1999.
69. Patek AJ, Toth EG, Saunders ME, et al. Arch Intern Med 135: 1053; 1975.
70. Iber FL. Nutr Today 6: 2; 1971.
71. Mendenhall C, Bongiovanni G, Goldberg S, et al. J Parenter Enteral Nutr 9: 590; 1985.
72. Morgan MY. Acta Chir Scand 507: 81; 1981.
73. Simko V, Connell AM, Banks B. Am J Clin Nutr 35: 197; 1982.
2705_frame_C45 Page 937 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:46 PM
74. World MJ, Ryle PR, Jones D, et al. Alcohol Alcoholism 19: 281; 1984.
75. World MJ, Ryle PR, Pratt OE, Thompson AD. Alcohol Alcoholism 19: 1; 1984.
76. Liu S, Serdula MK, Williamson DF, et al. Am J Epidemiol 140: 912; 1994.
77. Armellini F, Zamboni M, Frigo L, et al. Eur J Clin Nutr 47: 52; 1993.
78. Tremblay A, Buemann B, Theriault G, Bouchard C. Eur J Clin Nutr 49: 824; 1995.
79. Bebb HT, Houser HB, Witschi JC, et al. Am J Clin Nutr 24: 1042; 1971.
80. Neville JN, Eagles JA, Samson G, Olson RE. Am J Clin Nutr 21: 1329; 1968.
81. Gruchow HW, Sobociaski KA, Barboriak JJ. JAMA 253: 1567; 1985.
82. Lieber CS. Am J Clin Nutr 54: 976; 1991.
83. Hillers VN, Massey LK. Am J Clin Nutr 41: 356; 1985.
84. Westerfeld WW, Schulman MP. JAMA 170: 197; 1959.
85. Bonjour JP. Int J Vitamin Nutr 49: 434; 1979.
86. Gruchow HW, Sobocinski KA, Barboriak JJ, Scheller JG. Am J Clin Nutr 42: 289; 1985.
87. Saville PD. J Bone Joint Surg [Am] 47: 492; 1965.
88. Gascon-Barre M. J Am Coll Nutr 4: 565; 1985.
89. Nilsson BE. Acta Chir Scand 136: 383; 1970.
90. Solomon L. J Bone Joint Surg [Br] 55: 246; 1973.
91. Reisenauer AM, Buffington CAT, Villanueva JA, Halsted CH. Am J Clin Nutr 50: 1429; 1989.
92. Naughton CA, Chandler CJ, Duplantier RB, Halsted CH. Am J Clin Nutr 50: 1436; 1989.
93. Said HM, Strum WB. Digestion 35: 129; 1986.
94. Halsted CH, Robles EZ, Mezey E. N Engl J Med 285: 701; 1971.
95. Racusen LC, Krawitt EL. Am J Dig Dis 22: 915; 1977.
96. Lindenbaum J, Lieber CS. In Medical Disorders of Alcoholism. Pathogenesis and Treatment. Vol.
22. Lieber CS, Ed, Philadelphia, W.B. Saunders, 1982, p 313.
97. Sullivan LW, Herbert V. J Clin Invest 43: 2048; 1964.
98. Russell RM, Rosenberg IH, Wilson PD, et al. Am J Clin Nutr 38: 64; 1983.
99. Tamura T, Romero JJ, Watson JE, et al. J Lab Clin Med 97: 654; 1981.
100. Tamura T, Halsted CH. J Lab Clin Med 101: 623; 1983.
101. Herbert V, Zalusky R, Davidson CS. Ann Intern Med 58: 977; 1963.
102. Klipstein FA, Lindenbaum J. Blood 25: 443; 1965.
103. Herzlich B, Herbert V. Am J Gastroenterol 81: 678; 1986.
104. Lindenbaum J, Lieber CS. Ann NY Acad Sci 252: 228; 1975.
105. Lindenbaum J, Saha JR, Shea N, Lieber CS. Gastroenterology 64: 762; 1973.
106. Findlay J, Sellers E, Forstner G. Can J Physiol Pharmacol 54: 469; 1976.
107. van der Beek, EJ, Lowik MR, Hulshof KF, Kistemaker C. J Am Coll Nutr 13: 383; 1994.
108. Rosenthal WS, Adham NF, Lopez R, Cooperman JM. Am J Clin Nutr 26: 858; 1973.
109. Kim C-I, Roe DA. Drug-Nutr Interact 3: 99; 1985.
110. Marotta F, Labadarios D, Frazer L, et al. Dig Dis Sci 39: 993; 1994.
111. Bjørneboe GE, Bjørneboe A, Hagen BF, et al. Biochim Biophys Acta 918: 236; 1987.
112. Kawase T, Kato S, Lieber CS. Hepatology 10: 815; 1989.
113. McColister R, Prasad AS, Doe RP. J Lab Clin Med 52: 928; 1958.
114. Flink EB. Alcohol: Clin Exp Res 10: 590; 1986.
115. Abbott L, Nadler J, Rude RK. Alcohol: Clin Exp Res 18: 1076; 1994.
116. Wu C, Kenny MA. Clin Chem 42: 625; 1996.
117. Volini F, de la Huerga J, Kent G, et al. In Laboratory Diagnosis of Liver Disease, Sunderman FW,
Sunderman FW Jr, Eds, St. Louis, W.H. Green, 1968, p 199-206.
118. Chapman RW, Morgan MY, Bell R, Sherlock S. Gastroenterology 84: 143; 1983.
119. Chapman RW, Morgan MY, Boss AM, Sherlock S. Dig Dis Sci 28: 321; 1983.
120. Olynk J, Hall P, Sallie R, et al. Hepatology 12: 26; 1990.
121. Bacon BR, Britton S. Hepatology 11: 127; 1990.
122. Chojkier M, Houglum K, Solis-Herruzo J, Brenner DA. J Biol Chem 264: 16957; 1989.
123. Vallee BL, Wacker WEC, Bartholomay AF, Robin ED. N Engl J Med 255: 403; 1956.
124. Vallee BL, Wacker EC, Bartholomay AF, Hock F. N Engl J Med 257: 1055; 1957.
125. Sullivan JF. Gastroenterology 42: 439; 1962.
126. Sullivan JF. QJ Stud Alcohol 23: 216; 1962.
2705_frame_C45 Page 938 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:46 PM
180. Sato M, Lieber CS. Arch Biochem Biophys 213: 557; 1982.
181. Duester G. Biochemistry 35: 12221; 1996.
182. Leo MA, Lowe N, Lieber CS. Am J Clin Nutr 40: 1131; 1984.
183. Reddy TV, Weisburger EK. Cancer Lett 10: 39; 1980.
184. Leo MA, Lowe N, Lieber CS. J Nutr 117: 70; 1987.
185. Roberts AB, Lamb LC, Spron MB. Arch Biochem Biophys 234: 374; 1980.
186. Leo MA, Iida S, Lieber CS. Arch Biochem Biophys 234: 305; 1984.
187. Leo MA, Lieber CS. J Biol Chem 260: 5228; 1985.
188. Tomita S, Okuyama E, Ohnishi T, Ichikawa Y. Biochimica Biophys Acta 1290: 273; 1996.
189. Leo MA, Kim C, Lieber CS. Arch Biochem Biophys 259: 241; 1987.
190. Leo MA, Lieber CS. J Clin Invest 73: 593; 1984.
191. Leo MA, Lasker JM, Raucy JL, et al. Arch Biochem Biophys 269: 305; 1989.
192. Leo MA, Sato M, Lieber CS. Gastroenterology 84: 562; 1983.
193. Leo MA, Arai M, Sato M, Lieber CS. In Biological Approach to Alcoholism: Update. Research
Monograph-11, DHHS Publication No. (ADM) 83-1261, CS Lieber, Ed, Superintendent of
Documents, Washington, DC: US Government Printing Office; 1983, p 195.
194. Davis BH, Vucic A. Hepatology 8: 788; 1988.
195. Davis BH, Kramer RJ, Davidson NO. J Clin Invest 86: 2062; 1990.
196. Friedman SL, Wei S, Blaner W. Am J Physiol 264: G947; 1993.
197. Mak KM, Leo MA, Lieber CS. Gastroenterology 87: 188; 1984.
198. Mak KM, Leo MA, Lieber CS. J Natl Cancer Inst 79: 1001; 1987.
199. Kvale G, Bielke F, Gart JJ. Intl J Cancer 31: 397; 1983.
200. Pollack ES, Nomura AMY, Heilbrum L, et al. N Engl J Med 310: 617; 1984.
201. Leo MA, Lowe N, Lieber CS. Biochem Pharmacol 35: 3949; 1986.
202. Wang X, Liu C, Chung J, et al. Hepatology 28: 744; 1998.
203. Duester G. J Nutr 128: 459S; 1998.
204. Haselbeck RJ, Duester G. Alcohol: Clin Exp Res 21: 1484; 1997.
205. Duester G. Alcohol: Clin Exp Res 15: 565; 1991.
206. Pullarkat RK. Alcohol: Clin Exp Res 15: 565; 1991.
207. Deltour L, Ang HL, Duester G. FASEB J 10: 1050; 1996.
208. Chen H, Namkung J, Juchau MR. Alcohol: Clin Exp Res 20: 942; 1996.
209. Kedishvili NY, Gough WH, Chernoff EAG, et al. J Bio Chem 272: 7494; 1997.
210. Tuyns AJ, Riboli E, Doornbos G, Pequignot G. Nutr Cancer 9: 81; 1987.
211. DeCarli A, Liati P, Negri E, et al. Nutr Cancer 10: 29; 1987.
212. Graham S, Marshall J, Haughey B, et al. Am J Epidemiol 131: 454; 1990.
213. Soprano DR, Soprano KJ. Annu Rev Nutr 111; 1995.
214. Lammer EJ, Chen DT, Hoar RM, N Engl J Med 313: 837; 1985.
215. Rothman KJ, Moore LL, Singer MR, et al. N Engl J Med 333: 1369; 1995.
216. Oakley GP, Erickson JD. N Eng J Med 333: 1414; 1995.
217. Karl PI, Gordon BH, Lieber CS, Fisher SE. Science 242: 273; 1988.
218. Abel EL, Sokol RJ. Alcohol: Clin Exp Res 15: 514; 1991.
219. Whitby KE, Collins TFX, Welsh JJ, et al. Fd Chem Toxic 32: 305; 1994.
220. Russell RM, Boyer JL, Bagheri SA, Hruban Z. N Engl J Med 291: 435; 1974.
221. Farrell GC, Bathal PS, Powell LW. Dig Dis Sci 22: 724; 1977.
222. Geubel AP, DeGalocsy C, Alves N, et al. Gastroenterology 100: 1701; 1991.
223. Leo MA, Arai M, Sato M, Lieber CS. Gastroenterology 82: 194; 1982.
224. Worner TM, Gordon G, Leo MA, Lieber CS. Am J Clin Nutr 48: 1431; 1988.
225. Minuk GY, Kelly JK, Hwang WS. Hepatology 8: 272; 1988.
226. Leo MA, Lieber CS. Hepatology 8: 412; 1988.
227. Leo MA, Lieber CS. Hepatology 3: 1; 1983.
228. Olson JA. Am J Clin Nutr 45: 704; 1987.
229. Ahmed S, Leo MA, Lieber CS. Am J Clin Nutr 60: 430; 1994.
230. Ward RJ, Peters TJ. Alcohol Alcoholism 27: 359; 1992.
231. Forman MR, Beecher GR, Lanza E, et al. Am J Clin Nutr 62: 131; 1995.
232. Leo MA, Kim CI, Lowe N, Lieber CS. Hepatology 15: 883; 1992.
2705_frame_C45 Page 940 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:46 PM
233. Leo MA, Aleynik S, Aleynik M, Lieber CS. Am J Clin Nutr 66: 1461; 1997.
234. Greenberg ER, Baron JA, Karagas MR, et al. JAMA 275: 699; 1996.
235. Hennekens CH, Buring JE, Manson JE. N Engl J Med 334: 1145; 1996.
236. Bowen HT, Omaye ST. J Amer Coll Nutr 17: 171; 1998.
237. ATBC: α- Tocopherol, β-carotene and Cancer Prevention Study Group. N Engl J Med 330: 1029;
1994.
238. Omenn GS, Goodman GE, Thornquist MD, et al. N Engl J Med 334: 1150; 1996.
239. Leo MA, Lieber CS. N Engl J Med 331: 612; 1994 (letter).
240. Garro AJ, Gordon BHJ, Lieber CS. In Medical and Nutritional Complications of Alcoholism: Mech-
anisms and Management, Lieber CS, ED, New York, Plenum Press, 1992, p 459.
241. Paolini M, Forti GC, Perocco P, et al. Nature 398: 760, 1999.
242. Jewell C, O’Brien N. Br J Nutr 81: 235; 1999.
243. Burton GW, Ingold KU. Science 224: 569; 1984.
244. Lowe GM, Booth LA, Young AJ, Biton RF. Free Rad Res 30: 141; 1999.
245. Woods JA, Bilton RF, Young AJ. FEBS Lett 449: 255; 1999.
246. Albanes D, Heinonen OP, Taylor PR, et al. J Natl Cancer Inst 88: 1560; 1996.
247. Omenn GS, Goodman GE, Thornquist MD, et al. J Natl Cancer Inst 88: 155; 1996.
248. Albanes D, Virtamo J, Taylor PR, et al. Am J Clin Nutr 66: 366; 1997.
249. Leo MA, Seitz HK, Maier H, Lieber CS. Alcohol Alcoholism 30: 163; 1995.
250. Sarkar A, Basak R, Bishayee A, et al. Br J Cancer 76;855; 1997.
251. Kune GA, Bannerman S, Field B, et al. Nutr Cancer 18: 237; 1992.
252. Menkes MS, Comstock GW, Vuilleumier JP, et al. N Engl J Med 315: 1250; 1986.
253. Lieber CS. In Liver Annual — VI, Arias IU, Frenkel MS, Wilson JHP, Eds, Amsterdam, Excerpta
Medica, 1987, p 163.
254. Klatskin G. Yale J Biol Med 34: 124; 1961.
255. Rothschild MA, Oratz M, Mongelli J, Schreiber SS. J Clin Invest 50: 1812; 1971.
256. Jeejeebhog KN, Phillips MJ, Bruce-Robertson A, et al. Biochem J 126: 1111; 1972.
257. Preedy VR, Marway JS, Siddiq T, et al. Drug Alcohol Depend 34: 1; 1993.
258. Preedy VR, Siddiq T, Why H, Richardson PJ. Alcohol Alcoholism 29: 141; 1994.
259. Baraona E, Leo M, Borowsky SA, Lieber CS. Science 190: 794; 1975.
260. McGhee A, Henderson M, Milikan WJ, et al. Ann Surg 197: 288; 1983.
261. Gronbaek M, Deis A, Sørensen TI, et al. BMJ 310: 1165; 1995.
262. Bode C, Goebell H, Stahler M. Z Gesamte Exp Med 152: 111; 1970.
263. Bode C, Buchwald B, Goebell H. German Med 1: 149; 1971.
264. Meijer AJ, Van Woebkon GM, Williamson JR, Tager JM. Biochem J 150: 205; 1975.
265. Korsten MA, Matsuzaki S, Feinman L, Lieber CS. N Engl J Med 292: 386; 1975.
266. Lieber CS, Lasker JM, DeCarli LM, et al. J Pharmacol Exp Ther 1247: 791; 1988.
267. Lieber CS. N Engl J Med 333: 1058; 1995.
268. Lieber CS. J Stud Alcohol 59: 9; 1998.
269. Lieber CS. 2000. J Hepatology 32: 113; 2000.
2705_frame_C46 Page 941 Friday, August 16, 2002 11:45 AM
46
Anemias
Introduction
Hematopoiesis is the process whereby mature blood cells (red cells, white cells, and
platelets) are produced from the pluripotent hematopoietic stem cells in the bone marrow.
The process involves the proliferation and differentiation of stem cells into different
lineages (megakaryocytic, erythroid, lymphoid, granulocytic/marophage) with the ulti-
mate production of mature blood cells. This process is influenced by many complex factors
including the bone marrow microenvironment, an elaborate network of cytokines and
hematopoietic growth factors, and an adequate supply of nutrients, vitamins, and some
trace elements (Table 46.1). Erythropoiesis refers to the production of red blood cells whose
major function is oxygen transport and delivery. A decrease in red blood cell mass and
oxygen-carrying capacity results in anemia.
This section will provide an overview of the classification and pathogenesis of anemia,
and will primarily focus on a detailed discussion of nutritional deficiencies leading to
various types of anemia.
0-8493-2705-9/01/$0.00+$1.50
© 2002 by CRC Press LLC 941
2705_frame_C46 Page 942 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:47 PM
TABLE 46.1
Nutrients Important for Normal Red Blood Cell (RBC) Production
Protein/Calories
Vitamin B12 (cobalamin)
Folate
Iron
Vitamin B6 (pyridoxine)
Riboflavin
Nicotinic acid
Ascorbic acid
Vitamin A (retinol)
Vitamin E (α-tocopherol)
Copper
TABLE 46.2
Criteria for Anemia and Normal MCV Values
Hgb (g/dl) Hct (%) MCV (fl)
Infants
Children
TABLE 46.3
Initial Laboratory Data in the Evaluation of Anemia
CBC (complete blood count)
White count and differential
Platelet count
Hemoglobin and hematocrit
MCV (mean cell volume)
Reticulocyte count
Red cell morphology on peripheral blood smear
factors. The amount of volume inside the cell membrane is the MCV. The normal MCV
of a red cell is 80 to 100 fl. When evaluating either the MCV or the Hb of an individual,
it is important to consider the patient’s age and sex.
The functional classification takes the pathogenesis of anemia into consideration. Thus,
anemias can be hypoproliferative (bone marrow or stem cell defects, decreased stimulation
of erythropoiesis), or result from maturation defects (nuclear or cytoplasmic) or from blood
loss or destruction (hemorrhage, hemolysis, and sequestration) (Table 46.5).
2705_frame_C46 Page 943 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:47 PM
Anemias 943
TABLE 46.4
Classification of Anemias by Morphology
Low MCV (Microcytic) High MCV (Macrocytic) Normal MCV (Normocytic)
Fe deficiency Nonmegaloblastic Bone marrow failure
Thalassemia Liver disease Aplastic anemia
Sideroblastic anemia Hypothyroidism Red cell aplasia (acquired
Chronic disease Reticulocytosis and congenital)
Lead poisoning Aplastic anemia Marrow infiltration
Protein deficiency Chronic renal failure
Megaloblastic Endocrine abnormalities
Vitamin B12 deficiency Hypothyroidism
Folate deficiency Adrenal insufficiency
Myelodysplastic syndromes HIV
Chronic disease
Drug Induced
Chemotherapeutic agents
Nitrous oxide (laughing gas)
FIGURE 46.1
(See Color Figure 46.1) A normal peripheral blood smear.
Normal Erythropoiesis
A good understanding of normal erythropoiesis will enable one to better understand and
appreciate the pathogenesis of different types of anemias (Color Figure 46.2). The earliest
red cell precursor, the proerythroblast, is very large (12 to 20 µm) with a large nucleus.
The nucleus contains DNA necessary for cell division, and the cytoplasm contains RNA
necessary for hemoglobin synthesis. As the cells divide and mature, the nucleus becomes
very small and condensed. Eventually the nucleus is extruded and the mature red cell
remaining is only the cytoplasm full of hemoglobin. The normal red cell is smaller than
the precursor cells and is pink-colored from the hemoglobin.
Perturbations of either the nuclear (DNA) or cytoplasmic (RNA and hemoglobin) mat-
uration leads to anemia. The nucleus of the red cell precursor utilizes cobalamin (vitamin
B12) and folate in the synthesis of DNA. When either of these nutrients is sparse the nucleus
cannot divide or mature normally, despite normal cytoplasmic development. The red cells
formed are large (macrocytic). The bone marrow reveals red cell precursors that are
megaloblastic, that is, large with fine, sparse nuclear chromatin. Other nucleated bone
marrow cells are also affected such as the white cells, resulting in hypersegmented neu-
trophils in the peripheral blood (Color Figure 46.3).
In the cytoplasm, hemoglobin synthesis proceeds normally as long as both heme and
globin are manufactured normally. Defective heme synthesis can occur by two mecha-
2705_frame_C46 Page 944 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:47 PM
TABLE 46.5
Functional Causes of Anemia
Blood loss
Gastrointestinal bleeding
Menses/Menorrhagia
Internal bleeding
Decreased production of red blood cells
Nutritional deficiencies
Primary bone marrow failure
(myelodysplastic syndromes, leukemias, infiltrative processes)
Secondary bone marrow failure
(drugs, toxins, metabolic processes, infections)
Increased destruction of red blood cells
Immune hemolytic anemia
Mechanical hemolysis
(heart valve, microangiopathic hemolytic anemia, TTP, DIC)
Hereditary hemolysis
hemoglobinopathies
enzyme defects (G6PD, pyruvate kinase)
membrane defects
Acquired membrane defects
paroxysmal nocturnal hemoglobinuria
spur cell anemia
Infection related hemolysis
Clostridia, malaria, babesiosis
Splenic sequestration
Increased plasma volume
Pregnancy
Normal
B12
Folate
Deficiency
Iron
Deficiency
FIGURE 46.2
(See Color Figure 46.2) Erythropoiesis as it is affected by states of iron deficiency and vitamin B12 or folate
deficiency.
2705_frame_C46 Page 945 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:47 PM
Anemias 945
FIGURE 46.3
(See Color Figure 46.3) Macrocytic RBCs. Red blood cells that are larger than normal (macrocytic) and white
blood cells that have nuclei with multiple segments (hypersegmented neutrophils) are characteristic of a vitamin
B12 deficiency anemia.
FIGURE 46.4
(See Color Figure 46.4) Microcytic RBCs. Red blood cells that are smaller than normal and have pale features
(microcytic and hypochromic) are characteristic of Fe deficiency anemia.
nisms: faulty iron metabolism (iron deficiency anemia) or defective porphyrin metabolism
(sideroblastic anemia). A deletion in or defect of the genes encoding globin (thalassemia)
causes defective globin synthesis. All of these anemias are characterized by small red cells,
microcytosis, because the nucleus divides and matures normally (Color Figure 46.4).
The Reticulocyte
The normal red blood cell (RBC) lives about 120 days in the peripheral blood: when the
senescent RBC are destroyed they have to be replaced by new RBCs to maintain RBC
homeostasis. A newly produced, young RBC still has residual RNA and mitochondria in
the cytoplasm and is slightly larger than a normal red cell, appearing a little bluish on the
peripheral blood smear. This is called a reticulocyte. A special stain is performed using new
methylene blue, which stains the residual RNA, making a reticulocyte easy to identify and
count in the blood (Color Figure 46.5). The reticulocyte count is the number of reticulocytes
counted in 1000 red cells, reported as a percentage. A reticulocyte lives normally two days
before it matures into a fully developed RBC. In a normal person with normal red cells and
normal bone marrow the reticulocyte count will range from 0.5 to 1.5% (1/120 of RBCs
replaced daily). Thus, the reticulocyte count is a sensitive method to detect how rigorous
the bone marrow is producing new RBCs. Two corrections need to be made after the
reticulocyte percentage is obtained before a conclusion can be drawn about the bone marrow.
One, if a patient has decreased numbers of red cells to begin with, then a reticulocyte
count of 0.5 to 1.5% would not be considered an appropriate bone marrow response.
2705_frame_C46 Page 946 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:47 PM
FIGURE 46.5
(See Color Figure 46.5) Reticulocytes. The appearance of young, newly produced red blood cells, reticulocytes,
as seen in the peripheral blood smear that has been stained with new methylene blue.
Because of the fewer number of RBCs present, a reticulocyte percentage within that range
would actually reflect a much smaller absolute reticulocyte number; i.e., two percent of a
hundred cells is less than two percent of a thousand cells. The bone marrow should be
producing more reticulocytes in the setting of anemia. Thus, when reticulocytes are
counted it is important to take into account the degree of anemia present to avoid a
misleading “normal” percentage of reticulocytes. Dividing the patient’s hematocrit or
hemoglobin by the normal hematocrit or hemoglobin does this. This gives us the fraction
of normal red cells the patient has. That fraction is then multiplied by the reticulocyte
count giving us the corrected reticulocyte count.
Second, the faster the bone marrow is producing reticulocytes, the younger they are
when they are released into the peripheral blood. When the reticulocytes are counted on
the special stain, both older reticulocytes and younger reticulocytes are counted. Therefore,
adjustments for this can be made when calculating a patient’s reticulocyte index (Color
Figure 46.6). The corrected reticulocyte count is divided by the number of days the
reticulocyte lives in the peripheral blood. This number, of course, depends on the degree
of anemia. The more severely anemic someone is, the earlier the reticulocyte is pushed
into the peripheral blood and the longer it stays as a reticulocyte in the blood. (The usual
number used in the setting of anemia, however, is two.) After these two corrections have
been made to the reticulocyte count, then one has a fair estimate of how well the bone
marrow is able to make new RBCs. In the case of nutritionally caused anemias, the
reticulocyte index will invariably be low (Table 46.6).
Erythropoietin
Erythropoietin, a glycoprotein hormone produced in the kidney in response to tissue
hypoxia, is the major regulator of erythropoiesis. In cases of renal failure the erythropoietin
level may be low, causing anemia, usually normocytic. Measuring the erythropoietin level
may be a useful step in the evaluation of anemia; however, in cases of nutritionally
deficient anemia the level is normal or elevated and is not, therefore, routinely measured.
Symptoms of Anemia
Patients with anemia will often present with similar symptoms regardless of the cause.
Low RBCs decrease the oxygen-carrying capacity of the blood, producing generalized
symptoms (Table 46.7). The severity of the symptoms, however, is directly related to how
rapidly the anemia develops. Anemias that develop rapidly such as in acute bleeding,
2705_frame_C46 Page 947 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:47 PM
Anemias 947
2 1/2 days
2 days in blood
1 1/2 days in blood
1 day in blood
BLOOD in blood
BONE 1 1/2 days
MARROW 2 days
2 1/2 days maturing maturing in
3 days
maturing in bone bone marrow
maturing
in bone in bone marrow
marrow marrow
Patient Hct
Reticulocyte Index = X retic % measured Normal = 0.8-4%
Normal Hct
FIGURE 46.6
Understanding the reticulocyte index.
TABLE 46.6
Categorizing Anemias by Reticulocyte Count
Low Reticulocytes High Reticulocytes
Decreased production: Acute blood loss
Fe deficiency Splenic seqestration
B12 deficiency Increased destruction
Folate deficiency (hemolysis)
TABLE 46.7
Symptoms of Anemia
Dyspnea with exertion
Dizziness
Lightheadedness
Throbbing headaches
Tinnitus
Palpitations
Syncope
Fatigue
Disrupted sleep patterns
Decreased libido
Mood disturbances
Difficulty concentrating
2705_frame_C46 Page 948 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:47 PM
TABLE 46.8
Physical Findings in Anemia
Pallor of skin
Pallor of mucous membranes
Mild to moderate tachycardia
Widened pulse pressure
Systolic ejection murmur
Venous hums
Mild peripheral edema
will be more symptomatic than anemias that progress slowly over months to years. The
heart must increase the rate of blood flow to the body to compensate for anemia. This
may precipitate palpitations, shortness of breath, and throbbing headaches. Syncope
occurs with severe anemia due to decreased oxygenation of the brain in the upright
position. Often patients with chronic anemia such as those with sickle cell disease will
maintain a hemoglobin level much lower than normal and have few symptoms, due to
compensation by the body.
Physical Findings
Anemia causes general physical findings independent of the cause of the anemia (Table
46.8). These findings are due to the decrease in hemoglobin; skin and mucous membranes
may be pale and the heart rate may be increased. As in symptoms, the physical findings
may be influenced by the chronicity of the anemia.
Vitamin B 12 Deficiency
Mechanism of Anemia
Erythropoiesis depends on proper nuclear (DNA) and cytoplasmic (RNA and hemoglobin)
maturation. Vitamin B12 (or cobalamin) is important in DNA synthesis. When vitamin B12
is not available, the conversion of homocysteine to methionine is impaired. DNA is not
synthesized properly and megaloblastic anemia ensues.
Anemias 949
TABLE 46.9
Causes of Vitamin B12 Deficiency
Pernicious anemia (most common cause)
Gastrectomy
Zollinger Ellison syndrome
Intestinal causes
Ileal resection or disease
Blind loop syndrome
Fish tapeworm
Pancreatic insufficiency
Strict vegetarianism (those who exclude meats, eggs, and milk)
TABLE 46.10
Clinical Features of B12 Deficiency
Megaloblastic anemia
Pallor/icterus
Sore tongue or mouth
Gastrointestinal symptoms
Neurologic symptoms
Finger and toe paresthesias
Disturbance of vibration and position sense
Spastic ataxia — subacute combined degeneration
Somnolence, impairment of taste, smell, vision
Dementia, psychosis, “megaloblastic madness”
Well nourished, generally
interfere with the binding of intrinsic factor to the ileum include Crohn’s disease, ileal
resection, and tropical sprue. The fish tapeworm, Diphyllobothrium latum, competes for
vitamin B12 and can be a cause of deficiency in infected patients. If pancreatic enzymes
are not sufficient to aid in the binding of B12 to intrinsic factor, the absorption will be
impaired. Only very rarely is dietary deficiency of vitamin B12 seen in the United States.
Those cases are usually seen in very strict vegans, those who exclude meats, eggs, and
milk from their diets. The deficiency develops slowly over many years.
TABLE 46.11
Laboratory Features of B12 Deficiency
Hematologic
Megaloblastic anemia (MCV>110)
Leukopenia and thrombocytopenia
Bone marrow
Megaloblastic appearance
Ineffective erythropoiesis
Biochemical
Serum B12 level is decreased, i.e., <223 pg/ml
Methylmalonic acid is elevated, i.e., >0.4 µmol/L
Homocysteine is elevated, i.e., >14 µm
Marked increase in LDH, i.e., >3000 units/ml (normal 260 U/ml)
Serum folate levels may be elevated
Schilling Test
In vitamin B12 deficiency the red cell precursors in the bone marrow are large with
immature nuclei, megaloblastic. Ineffective erythropoiesis (destruction of RBC precursors
in the marrow) can be quite significant and is responsible for the elevated indirect bilirubin
level and high lactate dehydrogenase (LDH). In fact, up to 90% of the red cells may actually
be destroyed in the bone marrow before being released to the peripheral blood as com-
pared to the 10 to 15% seen in normal subjects. Furthermore, the white cell and platelet
lineages are affected, and the hematologic picture is often one of pancytopenia.
TABLE 46.12
The Laboratory Difference between Negative Nutritional Balance
and True Folate and B12 Deficiency
Serum RBC Serum Serum Serum
Lab Value Folate Folate B12 HCYS MMA
Condition
Negative folate balance ⇓ NL NL NL NL
Folate deficiency ⇓ ⇓ NL ⇑ NL
Negative B12 balance NL NL NL NL NL
B12 deficiency NL/⇑ NL/⇓ ⇓ ⇑ ⇑
Combined deficiency ⇓/NL ⇓ ⇓ ⇑ ⇑
HCYS = Homocysteine
MMA = Methylmalonic acid
2705_frame_C46 Page 951 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:47 PM
Anemias 951
TABLE 46.13
Treatment of B12 Deficiency
Standard dose is 1000 µg intramuscularly
Anemia only: 1000 µg daily for a week, then weekly until Hgb normalizes; maintenance dose is 1000 µg monthly
Neurologic deficits: 1000 µg daily for two weeks, then weekly until Hgb normalizes followed by twice a month
for 6 months, then monthly for life
If injections are not an option, oral dose is 1000 µg daily
For the rare case of decreased oral intake from malnutrition, replacement of 50 µg daily is adequate
Folate Deficiency
Mechanism of Anemia
Like vitamin B12, folate is utilized in the synthesis of DNA in the nucleus. The deficiency
of folate causes megaloblastic anemia due to the arrested nuclear maturation. The main
function of folate in the biochemistry of hematopoiesis is the transfer of carbon groups to
various compounds. The most important compounds formed by this carbon donation are
2705_frame_C46 Page 952 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:47 PM
TABLE 46.14
Causes of Folate Deficiency
Decreased nutritional intake
Poverty
Old age
Alcoholism/ cirrhosis
Children on synthetic diets
Goat’s milk anemia
Premature infants
Hemodialysis
Hyperalimentation
Nontropical sprue (gluten-sensitive enteropathy)
Tropical sprue
Congenital folate malabsorption
Other small intestine disease
Pregnancy
Increased cell turnover (chronic hemolysis, exfoliative dermatitis)
Drug induced
Alcohol
Trimethoprim and Pyrimethamine
Methotrexate
Sulfasalazine
Oral contraceptives
Anticonvulsants
the purines, dTMP and methionine. As explained above, methionine formation also
requires vitamin B12. Without vitamin B12, methionine is not formed and the prospective
folate cannot be recycled, causing a “folate trap.” Thus, vitamin B12 deficiency can also
give a laboratory picture of folate deficiency.
Anemias 953
TABLE 46.15
Clinical Features of Folate Deficiency
Blunted affect/ mask-like facies
Depression
Irritability
Forgetfulness
Sleep deprivation
Weight loss from underlying GI disease
Diffuse blotchy brownish skin pigmentation in nail beds/ skin creases
Poor nutritional state
Pallor/icterus from anemia
TABLE 46.16
Laboratory Diagnosis of Folate Deficiency
Red blood cell folate level is reduced
Serum folate level may be reduced but this is not specific; it may also be elevated,
depending on the recent folate intake
Serum B12 level is normal
TABLE 46.17
Treatment of Folate Deficiency
Dose is 1-5 mg orally, daily
Pregnancy maintenance dose is 1 mg daily
2705_frame_C46 Page 954 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:47 PM
TABLE 46.18
Causes for Treatment Failure
Wrong diagnosis
Additional vitamin and/or mineral deficiency (concomitant B12
and folate, for example)
Additional iron deficiency
Additional hemoglobinopathy (sickle cell disease or thalassemia)
Associated anemia of chronic disease
Hypothyroidism
TABLE 46.19
Who Should Receive Prophylaxis for B12 and Folate Deficiency?
Vitamin B12
Folate
Anemias 955
is found in hemoglobin. Heme is the component of hemoglobin that binds the iron, thus
other heme-containing compounds including myoglobin and enzymes also contain iron.
Hemoglobin accounts for 85% of all the heme-containing compounds in the body. Iron
exists in the body bound to proteins, both in storage and in heme compounds and enzymes
(Hb, myoglobin, and cytochrome). Unbound iron is toxic, primarily by generating reactive
oxygen species.
Iron is absorbed from the duodenum and transported via transferrin to tissues such as
RBC precursors. When not immediately utilized, the iron is stored mostly in the liver in
the form of ferritin. During erythropoiesis iron is incorporated in the hemoglobin, where
it functions as the transporter of oxygen. When senescent red cells are destroyed in the
reticuloendothelial system, macrophages of the spleen and liver take up the iron and
recycle it to transferrin to be transported back to the bone marrow.
While vitamin B12 and folate are used in DNA synthesis in red cell precursors, iron is
utilized in cytoplasmic hemoglobin synthesis. Heme requires adequate iron and porphyrin
metabolism for formation. Defective porphyrin metabolism (sideroblastic anemia) some-
times responds to pyridoxine treatment; however, the cause of anemia is not due to a
nutritional deficiency of pyridoxine but to inherent enzyme mutations disrupting normal
porphyrin metabolism. Thus, sideroblastic anemia is beyond the scope of this section.
Deficiency of iron creates a cytoplasmic maturation defect while the nuclear maturation
proceeds normally. The result is small (microcytic) cells with poorly hemoglobinized
cytoplasm (hypochromia).
TABLE 46.20
Causes of Iron Deficiency Anemia
Gastrointestinal bleed
Genitourinary bleed
Menses
Repeated blood donation
Growth
Pregnancy and lactation
Poor diets
Intestinal malabsorption
Hookworm/intestinal parasites
Gastric surgery
2705_frame_C46 Page 956 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:47 PM
TABLE 46.21
Clinical Features of Iron Deficiency
Symptoms of anemia
Pagophagia (heavy ice consumption)
Koilonychia (brittle spoon nails)
Blue sclera
glossitis
Angular stomatitis
Postcricoid esophageal web/stricture
(Plummer-Vinson syndrome)
Gastric atrophy
Impaired immunity
Decreased exercise tolerance
Neuropsychological abnormalities
Anemias 957
TABLE 46.22
Laboratory Features of Iron Deficiency
Hematologic
Microcytic anemia
Thrombocytosis
Bone marrow
Normal nuclear maturation
Cytoplasmic abnormalities
Absent iron stores on iron stain
Biochemical
Ferritin level is decreased
Total iron binding capacity is elevated
Iron saturation and serum iron are decreased
iron deficiency. Other laboratory features such as the transferrin level (or the iron-binding
capacity), the serum iron level, and the transferrin saturation are summarized in Table
46.22. If iron stores are low the iron binding capacity will, of course, be elevated reflecting
the vacant binding sites. The transferrin saturation will be decreased. The degree of iron
deficiency present and the resultant hematologic effects is an important concept. By the
time microcytosis is evident, the red cell hemoglobin content is decreased. Before that
stage, however, the body stores of iron will be decreased but the red cell amount of iron
will be maintained. This is why a patient may demonstrate a low ferritin, an elevated
TIBC, and decreased iron saturation, yet have no evidence of anemia. These patients will
develop symptoms of anemia in time if the iron loss is not corrected.
Ferritin is also an acute phase reactant. Thus, conditions such as renal failure, infection,
liver disease, acute or chronic inflammatory states will lead to elevated ferritin levels. In
these cases it may be necessary to ascertain iron stores directly with a bone marrow
aspirate. The bone marrow should demonstrate iron in the interstitium when stained with
an iron stain. If no iron is demonstrated in the marrow, the patient definitely has iron
depletion. Iron deficiency anemia, however, is only diagnosed by the RBC iron studies.
TABLE 46.23
Treatment of Iron Deficiency
Oral
Intravenous
Iron dextran with dose depending on body weight and degree of anemia is the most widely used preparation.
This is a one-time dose calculated from a chart included in the product insert. This solution of ferric
oxyhydroxide and low-molecular-weight dextran contains 50 mg of elemental iron per ml. An average dose
for a 70 kg patient with hemoglobin of 7 g/dl would be 40 ml of iron dextran (2000 mg of elemental iron.)
TABLE 46.24
Possible Side Effects of Iron Therapy
Oral
Constipation
Diarrhea
Nausea
Epigastric discomfort
Vomiting
Intravenous
Anemias 959
TABLE 46.25
Nutritional Information on B12, Folate, and Iron
B12 Folate Iron
Total body pool 3000 µg 5-10 mg Men: 50 mg/kg
Women: 35 mg/kg
Minimal daily adult 0.3-1.2 µg/day 50 µg/day 10-20 mg/day
Requirement (dietary)
Recommended dietary allowance 2 µg/day Men: 200 µg/day Men: 12 mg/d
(RDA) Women: 180 µg/day Women: 15mg/d
Average daily diet 5-15 µg/day 225 µg/day 6 mg/1000 kcal
(range 1-100 µg/d) (10-30 mg/d)
Prevalence of deficiency 0.2% of population 8% of men in NA 2% adult men
10-13% of women 8% women
Source foods Animal origin Green leafy vegs. Red meat
liver, kidney, liver, kidney
mollusks, muscle, fruits, breakfast cereals,
eggs, cheese, milk dairy, tea
Multivitamins Multivitamins
Time to develop blood signs after 5-6 years 3 weeks Years
abstinence of nutrient
47
Nutritional Treatment of Blood Pressure:
Nonpharmacologic Therapy
L. Michael Prisant
Blood pressure is a continuous variable, like temperature and heart rate.1 The level of
blood pressure gradually increases from birth to age 18 years. The dividing line between
a normal and an abnormal blood pressure is arbitrary. However, there is a continuous
relationship between the level of blood pressure and various cardiovascular events, includ-
ing myocardial infarction, strokes, congestive heart failure, renal failure, and mortality.
An optimal blood pressure is a systolic blood pressure less than 120 mmHg and diastolic
blood pressure less than 80 mmHg. Hypertension is defined by the average of multiple
measurements with either a systolic blood pressure ≥140 mmHg or a diastolic blood
pressure ≥90 mmHg.
The hallmark of hypertension is an elevated systemic vascular resistance. Hypertension
may be caused by various adrenal tumors producing cortisol, aldosterone, and norepi-
nephrine, hyperthyroidism, hypothyroidism, hyperparathyroidism with increased par-
athormone and calcium, acromegaly with increased growth hormone, renal failure, renal
artery stenosis resulting in renal ischemia and increased renin, and various drugs that
cause salt and water retention, increase renin, or activate the sympathetic nervous system.
The majority of patients with arterial hypertension do not have a known cause.
Why the prevalence of essential hypertension increases with aging and what causes it
remain an enigma. It is likely that what is called essential hypertension may be the result
of diverse causes. Multiple factors alter the level of blood pressure. The sympathetic
nervous system is important for modifying the tone of blood vessels. Circulating renin,
angiotensin, aldosterone, norepinephrine, and endothelin are vasoconstrictors. The kidney
is necessary to regulate sodium excretion and volume. Endothelial damage due to abnor-
mal lipids, glucose intolerance, tobacco use, hyperhomocystinemia, hyperinsulinemia, and
circulating vasoconstrictors is less responsive to local endogenous vasodilators such as
nitric oxide. Essential hypertension is not a homogenous disease state; it is likely a poly-
genic trait.
Hypertension affects 24% of the U.S. adult population. Since essential hypertension
accounts for 90 to 95% of all causes and the prevalence increases with each decade of life,
there is an interest in the role of nutrients and foods for both the etiology and treatment
of hypertension. A primary preventive approach is advocated by some epidemiologists
and researchers.
0-8493-2705-9/01/$0.00+$1.50
© 2002 by CRC Press LLC 961
2705_frame_C47 Page 962 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:48 PM
TABLE 47.1
Randomized Double-Blind Trials of Sodium Supplementation
Sodium Effect
Group on Pressure ∆
Differences Systolic/∆
in Na+ Excretion Diastolic
Author, Year Study Group Design n (mEq/24 hr) (mmHg)
Australian National Hypertensive Parallel 103 43 +4.8/+2.8
Committee, 1989
Dodson, 1989 Hypertensive Parallel 9 76 +9.7/+5.1
Type 2 Diabetes
McCarron, 1997 Hypertensive Crossover 99 55 +4.9/+2.9
MacGregor, 1982 Hypertensive Crossover 19 146 +10/+5
MacGregor, 1989 Hypertensive Crossover 20
High intake 141 +16/+9
Moderate intake 59 +8/+4
Mascioli, 1991 Normotensive Crossover 48 60 +3.6/+2.3
Palmer, 1989 Elderly Crossover 7 — +11.0/+8.6
Watt, 1983 Hypertensive Crossover 18 56 +0.5/+0.4
Updated and modified from Mascioli et al., Hypertension 17: 121; 1991.
diet run-in period, before treatment periods were initiated. Differences in systolic and
diastolic blood pressure between sodium and placebo treatment periods were significant.
Sodium excretion increased +20.4 mEq/8 hr (p < 0.001). An increase of systolic and diastolic
blood pressure with the salt capsules was experienced by 65 and 69% of study participants.
A number of meta-analyses have sought to summarize the impact of sodium restriction
on blood pressure.10-15 One meta-analysis of 2635 subjects with 32 randomized trials on
sodium reduction required random allocation, no confounding variables, an objective
measure of a change in sodium intake (i.e., urine sodium excretion), and no adolescents,14
updating an earlier analysis by the same authors.11 The individual studies are listed in
Tables 47.2 and 47.3. The largest meta-analysis of 4294 subjects included 58 trials of
hypertensive and 56 trials of normotensive persons.15 The mean reduction of blood pres-
sure by sodium restriction in hypertensive individuals was –3.9/–1.9 mmHg (p <0.001 for
both) and in normotensives was –1.2/–0.26 mmHg (p <0.001 for systolic only). Tables 47.4
and 47.5 provide a comprehensive list of the trials used in that meta-analysis. The authors
conclude that the cumulative blood pressure-lowering effect of individual sodium restric-
tion trials in both normotensive and hypertensive populations has been stable since 1985.
Future trials are unlikely to change the average treatment effect noted above.
The reduction of sodium intake for primary prevention as well as nonpharmacologic
treatment of hypertension has become controversial in recent years.16-18 In one study, 2937
hypertensive men provided 24-hour urine collections for sodium determination off med-
ication for 3 to 4 weeks.16 After 3.8 years of average followup, 117 cardiovascular events
(including 55 myocardial infarctions) occurred. There was an inverse relationship between
baseline urinary sodium excretion and myocardial infarction rate. A recent meta-analysis
indicated that renin, aldosterone, norepinephrine, total cholesterol, and low-density lipo-
protein cholesterol increases with sodium restriction.15 Other hazards of moderate sodium
restriction suggested include a potential increase in blood pressure in 15% of patients,
increased sympathetic activity and sleep disturbances, the potential of simultaneous
restriction of grain products, meat, poultry, and fish, and dairy products (which contain
50% of sodium intake), decreased iodine intake, decreased susceptibility of the elderly to
respond to blood loss or heat stress, the potential for fetal growth retardation during
pregnancy, and unknown effects of alternative food preservatives.19
964
TABLE 47.2
Descriptive Summary of Sodium-Reduction Trials in Normotensive Subjects*
Duration ∆ Urinary Na (No)¶ Changes in ∆ Systolic ∆ Diastolic
Author , Year n (mo) Blinding mmol/24 h Confounders mm Hg mm Hg
Crossover Trials
Parallel Trials‡
Puska , 1983 19, 19‡ 0.5 BP obs –117 Wt, K, Alc, (P:S) –1.5 –1.1
HPT, 1990 174, 177 36 BP obs (RZ) –16 (Wt), K 0.1 0.2
Cobiac, 1992 26, 28 1 DB –71 (Wt), (K) –1.7 0.8
TOHP, 1992 327, 417 18 BP obs (RZ) –44 (Wt), (K), (Ca), –1.7† –0.9†
(mg), (alc), (fat)
Nestel, 993 (Females) 15, 15 6 DB –94 (Wt), (K) –6.0† –2.0†
Nestel, 993 (Males) 17, 19 6 DB –76 (Wt), (K) –2.0† –1.0†
* NR, not reported; Wt, body weight; K, potassium excretion; BP obs, observers blinded; H, high blood pressure; L, low blood
pressure; DB, double blind; Alc, alcohol intake; P:S, ratio of polyunsaturated to saturated fat; HPT, Hypertension Prevention
Trial; RZ, random zero manometer; TOHP, Trials of Hypertension Prevention Collaborative; Ca, calcium intake; Mg, magnesium
intake; fat, fat intake.
† p < 0.05.
‡ values are the number of subjects in the sodium-reduction treatment and control groups, respectively.
Modified from Cutler.11 Reproduced with permission from Am J Clin Nutr, 1997; 65(2):643S-651S. Copyright Am. J. Clin. Nutr.,
American Society for Clinical Nutrition.
Handbook of Nutrition and Food
TABLE 47.3
Descriptive Summary of Sodium-Reduction Trials in Hypertensive Subjects*
Duration ∆ Urinary Na (No)¶ Changes in ∆ Systolic ∆ Diastolic
Author , Year n (mo) Blinding mmol/24 h Confounders mm Hg mm Hg
Crossover Trials
Parijs,1973 15 1 NR –98 (Wt) –6.7 3.2
MacGregor, 1982 19 1 DB –76 Wt, (K) –10.0† –5.0†
Watt,1983 18 1 DB –56 (Wt), (K) 0.5 –0.3
Richards, 1984 12 1–1.5 NR –105 (Wt), K –5.2 –1.8
Grobbee, 1987 40 1.5 DB –72 (Wt), (K) –0.8 –0.8
MacGregor, 1989 20 1 DB –82 (Wt), (K) –8 .0† –5.0†
Dodson,1989 9 1 DB –76 (Wt), (K) 9.7† –5.1
ANHMRC,1989 88 2 DB –67 (K) –2.6† –2.1†
Benetos, 1992 20 1 DB –78 (Wt), (K), (Ca) –6.5† –3.7†
Parallel Trials‡
Morgan, 1978 31, 31‡ 24 BP obs –27 NR –1.5† –6.9†
2705_frame_C47 Page 965 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:48 PM
‡ n values given for each study are the number of subjects in the sodium-reduction treatment and control groups, respectively.
Modified from Cutler.11 Reproduced with permission from Am J Clin Nutr, 1997; 65(2): 643S-651S. Copyright Am. J. Clin. Nutr., American Society for Clinical
965
Nutrition.
966
TABLE 47.4
Characteristics of Trials of Sodium Restriction and Blood Pressure in Normotensive Populations*
Cum Effect Effect Cum. Cum Z Z
Author, Year Design Dur. N Age NU SR SR SBP DBP SBP DBP SBP DBP
Sullivan, 1980 Op, CO 4 27 29 1 146 146 –7.1 –1.1 –7.1 –1.1 –2.2 –0.4
Skrabal, 1981 Op, CO 14 20 23 1 150 147 2.7 3.0 –2.7 0.7 –1.0 0.4
Myers, 1982 Op, CO 14 136 39 1 130 133 3.3 2.7 2.4 2.4 1.1 2.2
Puska, 1983 SB, P 72 38 40 3 90 123 1.5 2.1 2.4 2.2 1.1 2.2
Cooper, 1984 SB, CO 24 59 16 1 55 111 1.4 3.4 2.0 3.5 1.6 3.0
Cooper, 1984 SB, CO 24 54 16 1 72 107 –0.3 –0.7 1.3 2.7 1.3 2.6
Skrabal, 1984 Op, CO 14 30 23 1 137 109 –1.4 –0.8 1.2 2.3 1.0 2.2
Skrabal, 1984 Op, CO 14 22 23 1 167 113 7.7 4.6 1.5 2.4 1.9 2.7
Skrabal, 1985 SB, CO 14 34 23 1 144 115 0.1 0.6 0.9 1.9 1.9 2.8
2705_frame_C47 Page 966 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:48 PM
Skrabal, 1985 SB, CO 14 28 23 1 163 118 5.8 3.3 1.4 2.0 3.3 3.9
Watt, 1985 DB, CO 28 31 23 4 60 114 0.5 –1.4 1.3 1.4 3.4 3.3
Watt, 1985 DB, CO 28 35 22 4 75 111 1.4 –1.2 1.3 0.9 3.7 2.8
Teow, 986 Op, CO 14 9 25 1 200 112 0.6 2.7 1.3 0.9 3.6 2.9
Richards, 1986 SB, CO 4 8 36 4 181 114 2.0 –7.0 1.3 0.9 3.5 2.2
Fuchs, 1987 Op, CO 9 6 20 3 99 113 5.8 –3.0 1.3 0.8 3.6 1.9
Fuchs, 1987 Op, CO 9 11 20 3 93 111 1.1 –1.0 1.3 0.8 3.5 1.8
El Ashry, 1987 SB, CO 14 13 24 1 222 111 0.0 4.0 1.3 0.8 3.4 1.9
El Ashry, 1987 SB, CO 14 13 27 1 232 115 0.0 1.0 1.3 0.8 3.3 1.9
Lawton, 1988 Op, CO 6 13 24 1 313 119 2.0 –2.0 1.3 0.8 3.3 1.7
Hargreaves, 1989 DB, CO 14 8 23 2 106 119 6.0 3.0 1.3 0.8 3.4 1.7
Mtabaji, 1990 Op, P 7 30 • 1 272 121 9.0 9.0 1.4 1.0 4.0 2.3
Friberg, 1990 Op, CO 13 10 33 3 117 120 0.0 1.0 1.4 1.0 4.0 2.4
Dimsdale, 1990 Op, CO 5 19 34 2 183 129 –1.4 –4.1 1.2 0.5 3.7 1.6
Dimsdale, 1990 Op, CO 5 23 34 2 178 132 –1.0 –4.4 1.2 0.3 3.6 1.0
HPT, 1990 SB, P 1100 228 40 1 23 125 –0.3 –0.1 1.1 0.3 3.5 0.9
Sharma, 1990 SB, CO 7 15 24 2 192 127 0.9 3.7 1.1 0.3 3.4 1.1
Schmid, 1990 SB, CO 7 9 32 1 190 128 3.0 0.0 1.1 0.3 3.5 1.0
Bruun, 1990 Op, CO 4 10 46 1 341 131 5.0 1.0 1.1 0.3 3.6 1.1
Ruppert, 1991 SB, CO 7 98 35 3 275 179 –0.3 –0.3 1.1 0.3 3.5 1.0
Ruppert, 1991 SB, CO 7 24 36 3 275 190 –6.0 –6.0 0.9 0.1 2.9 0.4
Ruppert, 1991 SB, CO 7 25 46 3 262 198 7.5 7.5 1.0 0.2 3.3 0.9
Handbook of Nutrition and Food
Sharma, 1991 SB, CO 6 13 25 3 246 198 3.0 –0.5 1.1 0.2 3.6 0.9
Sharma, 1991 SB, CO 6 10 24 3 247 198 6.4 5.9 1.1 0.2 3.7 1.1
Mascioli, 1991 DB, CO 28 48 52 5 70 197 3.6 2.3 1.3 0.4 4.3 1.5
Steegers, 1991 SB, P 140 36 27 5 63 195 –2.0 –2.0 1.3 0.4 4.1 1.4
Cobiac, 1992 DB, P 28 52 66 2 75 194 3.1 2.8 1.3 0.4 4.3 1.8
Cobiac, 1992 DB, P 28 54 67 2 73 192 2.7 –0.6 1.3 0.4 4.4 1.7
TOHP, 1992 SB, P 550 744 43 3 47 135 1.7 0.9 1.4 0.4 4.7 2.0
Burnier, 1993 Op, CO 6 16 29 1 186 136 1.0 –0.5 1.4 0.4 4.7 1.9
Burnier, 1993 Op, CO 6 7 29 1 218 137 1.0 –1.2 1.4 0.4 4.7 1.8
Ruppert, 1993 SB, CO 7 30 46 3 270 146 12.6 5.6 1.4 0.4 5.1 2.3
Ruppert, 1993 SB, CO 7 108 36 3 275 160 1.4 –1.2 1.4 0.4 5.2 2.1
Ruppert, 1993 SB, CO 7 25 35 3 280 165 –5.9 –8.0 1.4 0.3 4.9 1.5
Sharma, 1993 SB, CO 7 16 24 3 224 166 0.8 0.5 1.4 0.3 4.9 1.5
Fliser, 1993 SB, CO 8 8 25 2 190 167 1.3 1.3 1.4 0.3 4.9 1.5
Fliser, 1993 SB, CO 8 8 26 2 181 167 0.6 0.6 1.4 0.3 4.8 1.5
Nestel, 1993 DB, P 42 72 66 4 56 166 2.0 1.0 1.4 0.3 4.9 1.6
Nestel, 1993 DB, P 42 60 65 4 73 165 6.0 2.0 1.4 0.4 5.1 1.7
2705_frame_C47 Page 967 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:48 PM
Donovan, 1993 SB, CO 5 8 36 1 152 164 2.0 –1.0 1.4 0.4 5.1 1.6
Grey, 1996 DB, CO 7 34 23 1 133 164 –1.0 –1.0 1.4 0.3 5.0 1.5
Feldmann, 1996 DB, CO 7 5 27 1 176 164 –5.0 –5.0 1.2 0.2 4.5 1.1
Schorr, 1996 DB, CO 28 16 64 2 61 162 1.0 0.0 1.2 0.2 4.4 1.0
Miller, 1997 Op, CO 7 12 23 2 182 163 1.0 1.0 1.2 0.2 4.5 1.1
Miller, 1997 Op, CO 7 10 • 2 194 163 –1.0 –1.0 1.2 0.2 4.4 1.1
Schorr, 1997 SB, CO 7 27 25 7 208 163 5.6 5.6 1.3 0.3 4.6 1.3
Schorr, 1997 SB, CO 7 76 25 7 208 165 –2.8 –2.8 1.2 0.3 4.5 1.2
* Dur.: duration of intervention, days; Op: open; SB: single blind; DB: double blind; P: parallel; CO: cross–over; N: number of
persons in trial; Age: mean age of persons in trial; NU: number of urine collections per person per treatment period; SR: sodium
Nutritional Treatment of Blood Pressure: Nonpharmacologic Therapy
reduction, mmol/24–h; Cum: cumulative; CI: 95% confidence interval of previous column. SBP: systolic blood pressure; DBP:
diastolic blood pressure; Z: summary statistic; •: no data.
Personal Communication from NA Graudal of unpublished data from his manuscript.15
967
968
TABLE 47.5
Characteristics of Trials of Sodium Restriction in Hypertensive Populations*
Cum Effect Effect Cum. Cum Z Z
Author, Year Design Dur. N Age NU SR SR SBP DBP SBP DBP SBP DBP
Parijs, 1973 Op, CO 28 15 41 1 98 98 6.7 –3.2 6.7 –3.2 1.6 –1.2
Mark, 1975 Op, CO 10 6 28 1 305 216 13.1 7.7 9.8 –0.1 2.7 0.4
Morgan, 1978 SB, P 90 62 60 2 23 114 1.0 2.0 6.2 1.2 2.6 0.9
Sullivan, 1980 Op, CO 4 19 27 1 153 121 –1.2 1.2 4.6 1.2 2.2 0.9
Morgan, 1981 SB, P 56 12 38 2 67 106 • 4.0 • 1.9 • 1.1
Morgan, 1981 SB, P 56 12 40 2 92 104 • 8.0 • 3.0 • 1.7
Ambrosioni, 1982 SB, CO 42 25 23 6 60 91 2.2 0.4 3.9 2.6 1.3 1.7
MacGregor, 1982 DB, CO 28 19 49 2 76 89 10.0 5.0 5.4 3.0 2.0 2.2
2705_frame_C47 Page 968 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:48 PM
Beard, 1982 Op, P 84 90 48 3 124 95 5.2 3.4 5.4 3.0 2.2 2.5
Watt, 1983 DB, CO 28 18 52 4 56 92 0.5 0.3 3.6 2.0 2.3 2.5
Silman, 1983 Op, P 90 28 55 4 63 91 –3.5 –0.5 3.5 1.9 2.1 2.4
Puska, 1983 SB, P 72 34 40 3 90 91 –1.8 –0.5 3.3 1.8 2.0 2.3
Koolen, 1984 Op, CO 14 20 41 2 213 97 6.5 4.9 3.4 1.9 2.2 2.5
Richards, 1984 SB, CO 28 12 36 2 100 97 4.0 3.0 3.4 2.0 2.4 2.7
Erwteman, 1984 SB, P 28 94 46 4 58 91 2.7 2.5 3.3 2.0 2.5 2.9
Maxwell, 1984 Op, P 84 30 46 4 161 92 2.0 –2.0 3.3 1.9 2.5 2.8
Fagerberg, 1984 Op, P 63 30 51 4 99 92 3.7 3.1 3.3 2.0 2.6 2.9
Resnick, 1985 Op, CO 5 12 • 1 190 96 3.0 1.0 3.3 1.9 2.7 2.9
Logan, 1986 Op, P 180 86 47 1 43 92 1.1 0.2 3.1 1.9 2.8 2.9
Chalmers, 1986 SB, P 84 100 53 6 70 91 4.8 4.2 3.3 2.3 3.0 3.5
Grobbee, 1987 DB, CO 42 40 24 4 72 88 0.8 0.8 3.1 2.3 3.0 3.5
MacGregor, 1987 DB, CO 30 15 52 2 100 88 13.0 9.0 3.6 2.4 3.6 3.9
Kurtz, 1987 DB, CO 7 5 58 2 217 91 16.0 8.4 4.7 2.6 4.6 4.3
Morgan, 1987 SB, P 60 20 58 5 57 90 6.0 4.0 4.7 2.6 4.5 4.4
Morgan, 1988 SB, CO 14 16 63 1 50 89 3.0 4.0 4.5 2.7 4.7 4.6
Lawton, 1988 Op, CO 6 9 25 1 328 91 1.0 –4.0 4.4 2.6 4.7 4.4
Shore, 1988 SB, CO 5 6 • 5 97 91 9.0 5.6 4.5 2.6 4.8 4.4
ANHMRC, 1989 Op, P 48 103 58 4 63 89 5.5 2.9 4.6 2.7 5.2 4.8
MacGregor, 1989 DB, CO 30 20 57 2 150 91 16.0 9.0 4.8 2.8 5.6 5.2
Dodson, 1989 SB, P 90 34 62 3 44 90 13.0 1.8 4.8 2.8 5.8 5.2
Dimsdale, 1990 Op, CO 5 16 34 2 178 93 6.4 –2.0 4.9 2.7 6.0 5.0
Handbook of Nutrition and Food
Dimsdale, 1990 Op, CO 5 17 34 2 198 98 0.1 –0.8 4.6 2.6 6.0 4.9
Parker, 1990 DB, P 28 31 50 4 73 97 –1.9 0.1 4.3 2.4 5.8 4.9
Parker, 1990 DB, P 28 28 54 4 49 97 –1.9 –1.8 4.1 2.4 5.6 4.7
Schmid, 1990 SB, CO 7 9 36 1 181 99 6.0 1.9 4.1 2.4 5.7 4.7
Bruun, 1990 Op, CO 4 12 47 1 331 103 8.0 4.0 4.2 2.4 5.8 4.8
Egan, 1991 DB, CO 7 27 39 1 194 106 1.1 1.1 3.9 2.3 5.9 4.8
Carney, 1991 DB, CO 42 11 54 4 102 106 1.0 –1.0 3.9 2.3 5.8 4.8
Singer, 1991 DB, CO 30 21 54 2 91 106 9.0 3.0 4.0 2.3 6.1 4.9
Sciarrone, 1992 DB, P 56 91 54 1 82 104 5.8 0.4 4.0 2.2 6.4 4.9
Benetos, 1992 DB, CO 28 20 42 1 78 103 6.5 3.7 4.1 2.3 6.5 5.1
Del Rio, 1993 DB, CO 14 30 49 1 151 106 1.4 0.5 4.0 2.2 6.5 5.1
Ruilope, 1993 DB, P 21 19 • 1 69 106 4.0 4.0 4.0 2.3 6.4 5.1
Redon-Mas, 1993 Op, P 28 418 55 1 104 105 –1.0 –1.9 3.5 1.6 6.3 4.7
Fotherby, 1993 DB, CO 35 17 73 2 79 105 8.0 0.0 3.6 1.5 6.5 4.7
Buckley, 1994 SB, CO 5 12 49 1 296 106 8.7 8.7 3.7 1.6 6.8 5.0
Jula, 1994 Op, P 365 76 44 3 57 105 6.7 3.8 3.7 1.7 6.9 5.2
Zoccali, 1994 SB, CO 7 15 45 1 163 106 14.0 8.0 3.8 1.7 7.2 5.6
2705_frame_C47 Page 969 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:48 PM
Weir, 1995 SB, CO 14 11 60 5 146 106 9.0 7.0 3.8 1.8 7.2 5.7
Weir, 1995 SB, CO 14 11 60 5 127 106 –4.0 –5.0 3.8 1.7 7.1 5.5
Overlack, 1995 DB, CO 7 11 61 3 240 109 9.9 9.9 3.9 1.8 7.4 5.8
Overlack, 1995 DB, CO 7 27 40 3 249 114 0.8 0.8 3.8 1.8 7.3 5.8
Overlack, 1995 DB, CO 7 8 43 3 234 115 –6.0 –6.0 3.7 1.7 7.1 5.6
Ferri, 1996 DB, CO 14 61 47 2 264 120 7.4 3.5 3.9 1.8 7.6 5.9
Feldmann, 1996 DB, CO 7 8 27 1 178 120 –2.0 –2.0 3.8 1.8 7.4 5.7
Mühlhauser, 1996 DB, P 28 16 36 4 107 120 2.0 0.0 3.8 1.8 7.2 5.5
McCarron, 1997 DB, CO 28 99 52 1 56 119 4.9 2.9 3.8 1.8 7.4 5.7
Cappuccio, 1997 DB, CO 30 47 67 2 83 118 7.3 3.2 3.9 1.9 7.7 6.0
Nutritional Treatment of Blood Pressure: Nonpharmacologic Therapy
* Dur.: duration of intervention, days; Op: open; SB: single blind; DB: double blind; P: parallel; CO: cross-over; N: number of
persons in trial; Age: mean age of persons in trial; NU: number of urine collections per person per treatment period; SR:
sodium reduction, mmol/24-h; Cum: cumulative; CI: 95% confidence interval of previous column. SBP: systolic blood pressure;
DBP: diastolic blood pressure; Z: summary statistic; •: no data.
Personal Communication from NA Graudal of unpublished data from his manuscript.15
969
2705_frame_C47 Page 970 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:48 PM
Potassium
Intracellular potassium is the major cation responsible for establishing the membrane
potential. The blood pressure of normotensives increases with potassium depletion.20
Observational studies suggest an inverse relationship between potassium intake and blood
pressure.21 Often there is an inverse relationship with dietary potassium and sodium or
a positive relationship between urinary Na+/K+ ratio and blood pressure.5, 21 In the
Scottish Heart Health Study, the relationship between blood pressure and the urinary
Na+/K+ ratio was stronger than the relationship between excretion of either sodium or
potassium individually and blood pressure.7 After adjusting for age, gender, BMI, ethanol
intake, and urinary sodium intake, it was observed in the INTERSALT study that the
systolic blood pressure was 2.7 mmHg lower for each 60 mmol/d higher excretion of
potassium.5 Since African Americans have a lower intake of potassium due to decreased
consumption of fresh fruits and vegetables, this may explain the higher prevalence of
hypertension in blacks compared to whites.21-24 Potassium supplementation (80 mmol/d)
compared to placebo reduced systolic and diastolic blood pressure (–6.9/–2.5 mmHg)
significantly in African Americans consuming a diet low in potassium for 21 days.25
Explanations for the hypotensive effects of potassium include direct vasodilatation, a direct
natriuretic effect, altered baroreceptor function, increased urinary kallikrein, or suppres-
sion of the renin-angiotensin-aldosterone axis or sympathetic nervous system.8
Studies using the Dahl salt-sensitive rat show a protective effect of potassium supple-
mentation, reducing mortality by 93% in the hypertensive rats.26 In a 12-year prospective
population study of 859 older persons, the relative risks of stroke-associated mortality in
the lowest tertile of potassium intake, as compared with that in the top two tertiles
combined, were 2.6 (p = 0.16) in men and 4.8 (p = 0.01) in women.27 A 10-mmol increase
in daily potassium decreased stroke-associated mortality by 40% (p <0.001) in a multi-
variate analysis. In the Health Professionals Follow-up Study, a multivariate analysis
demonstrated the greater the potassium intake, the lower the relative risk of stroke (p =
0.007) (Figure 47.1).28 Furthermore, use of potassium supplements, especially among men
1
1
0.9 0.85
0.78 0.76
0.8
0.7 0.62
0.6
Relative Risk
0.5
of Stroke
0.4
0.3
0.2
0.1
0
2.4 3.0 3.3 3.6 4.3
Median Intake of Potassium (g/d) for Each Quintiles
FIGURE 47.1
Multivariate adjusted relative risk of stroke of 43,738 United States men, 40 to 75 years by quintile of potassium
intake: adjusted for age, total energy intake, smoking, alcohol consumption, history of hypertension and hyper-
cholesterolemia, family history of premature myocardial infarction, profession, body mass index, and physical
activity (p = 0.007 for trend). Derived from Ascherio.28
2705_frame_C47 Page 971 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:48 PM
taking diuretics, was also inversely related to the risk of stroke. However, after further
adjustment for fiber and magnesium intake, the relative risk of stroke was no longer
statistically significant.
The largest meta-analysis (see Tables 47.6 and 47.7) observed a significant reduction in
both systolic and diastolic blood pressure (–4.44/–2.45 mmHg, p <0.01 for both) for oral
potassium supplementation.29 There was a greater decrease in blood pressure (–4.91/–2.71
mmHg, p <0.01 for both) when trials were examined that achieved a net change in urinary
potassium ≥20mmol/d. If trials excluded concomitant antihypertensive drugs, the change
in blood pressure was –4.85/–2.71 mmHg, p <0.01 for both). The change in blood pressure
was lower for normotensives (–1.8/–1.0 mmHg) compared with hypertensives (–4.4/–2.5
mmHg). The change for systolic blood pressure among black subjects was greater than
white subjects (–5.6 mmHg versus –2.0 mmHg, p = 0.03); however, the change for diastolic
blood pressure was not significant (–3.0 mmHg versus –1.1 mmHg, p = 0.19).
Interestingly, there was no overall association between 24-hour urinary potassium excre-
tion and change in systolic or diastolic blood pressure; however, the higher the urinary
sodium excretion at followup (see Figure 47.2), the greater the decline in both systolic
(p <0.001) and diastolic blood pressure (p <0.001).29 This explains the lack of benefit seen
in a study that combined sodium restriction and potassium supplementation in patients.30
This randomized, placebo-controlled, double-blind trial of 287 men assessed the effect of
96 mmol of microcrystalline potassium chloride or placebo on a sodium-restricted diet.
After the withdrawal of their antihypertensive medication at 12 weeks, there was no
significant difference in either systolic or diastolic blood pressure between the two groups
at any point in time up to an average of 2.2 years.30
Calcium
Most body calcium is found in the skeleton. Calcium is important for its role in smooth
muscle relaxation and contraction, especially the vascular smooth muscle that alters
peripheral vascular resistance directly. An inverse relationship between water hardness
and blood pressure has stimulated an interest in the role of calcium supplementation on
blood pressure.31 Paradoxically, data from the first Health and Nutrition Examination
Survey found that daily calcium intake was lower in 1012 hypertensive vs. 8541 normo-
tensive persons (608 mg vs. 722 mg, p <0.01).32 However, it was not associated with blood
pressure when age and BMI were controlled. For 58,218 female nurses with a calcium
intake of at least 800 mg/day, the reduction in the risk of hypertension was 22% when
compared with an intake of less than 400 mg/day.33 In men, calcium was inversely
associated with baseline blood pressure but not with change in blood pressure; further-
more, intake of calcium in men was not inversely associated with an increased risk of
stroke.28,34 Other observational studies have reported both positive and negative correla-
tions with blood pressure, but many studies did not adjust for weight and alcohol, vitamin
D, sodium, and other nutrient intake, and are based on dietary recall.35 Also, it has been
suggested that calcium supplementation is important in African Americans, since intake
of dairy products is especially low and the prevalence of hypertension much higher than
in caucasians. In addition, sodium excretion and calcium intake interact in salt-sensitive
individuals: increased ingested calcium facilitates sodium excretion.36 Calcium supple-
mentation is associated with controversy because of the association of hyperparathyroid-
ism and hypertension, the pressor effect of hypercalcemia in normotensives, and the direct
relationship of calcium and blood pressure.37 However, responders to calcium supplemen-
tation may be a subset of hypertensives with a low renin level, high parathormone level,
and low ionized calcium.36
2705_frame_C47 Page 972 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:48 PM
TABLE 47.6
Participant and Study Design Characteristics in 33 Potassium Supplementation Trials
Study
No. of Age, y Age, y % % % AntiHTN Study Duration,
Author, Year Subjects Mean Range Male White HTN† Medication Design* wk
Skrabal, 1981
(a) 20 ... 21-25 100 ... 0 No XO 2
TABLE 47.6
Participant and Study Design Characteristics in 33 Potassium Supplementation Trials
Baseline Supine Baseline Urinary Baseline
BP, mm Hg† Electrolytes, mmol/d K+
Intervention Control SBP/DBP K+/Na+ mmol/L
200 mmol K from diet, 200 mmol 80 mmol KCl, 200 mmol NaCl ... .../... 4.7
NaCl
200 mmol K from diet, 50 mmol 80 mmol KCI,50 mmol NaCl ... …/... 4.6
NaCl
64 mmol KCl Placebo 154/99 68/152 4.0
64 mmol KCl Placebo 118/74 73/138 ...
200 mmol K from diet, 180 mmol 60 mmol KCI,180 mmol NaCl 140-180/90-105 .../... 3.8
NaCl
64 mmol KCI, 70 mmol NaCl Placebo,70 mmol NaCl 163/103 72/68 3.9
60 mmol KCI Placebo 131/96 46/166 3.0
100 mmol KCI Placebo 154/96 .../... 3.8
64 mmol KCl Usual care 150/95 66/... 3.7
65 mmol KCl Placebo 154/105 62/172 3.8
80 mmol KCl Placebo 118/71 50/131 ...
64 mmol KCl Placebo 113/69 39/123 ...
TABLE 47.7
Urinary Electrolyte Excretion, Body Weight, and Blood Pressure during Followup in 33 Potassium
Supplementation Trials*
Mean Net Urinary Sodium Mean Net Mean Net Change,
Change in Urinary Excretion during Change in Blood Pressure,
Electrolytes, mmol/d Followup, in Body mm Hg
Author, Year K+/Na+ mmol/d Weight, kg Systolic/Diastolic
Skrabal, 1981
(a) 44/-55 155 -0.9 -1.7/-4.5
(b) 107/-12 28 -0.2 0.4/-0.5
MacGregor, 1982 56/29 169 -0.2 -7.0/-4.0
Khaw and Thom, 1982 52/9 164 ... -1.1/-2.4
Richards, 1984 129/5 200 0.8 -1.9/-1.0
Smith, 1985 50/7 80 0.1 -2.0/0
Kaplan, 1985 46/1 168 0.8 -5.6/-5.8
Zoccali, 1985 81/13 195 ... -1.0/-3.0
Bulpitt et at, 1985 40/10 149 1.2 2.3/4.8
Matlou et at, 1986 62/35 165 -0.4 -7.0/-3.0
Barden et at, 1986 68/5 130 ... -1.4/-1.4
Poulter and Sever, 1986 38/1 114 -0.1 -1.2/2.0
Chalmers et at, 1986
(a) 22/7 150 ... -3.9/-3.1
(b) 12/25 79 ... -1.0/1.6
Grobbee, 1987 57/12 69 0.4 -2.5/-0.6
Siani, 1987 30/6 189 ... -14.0/-10.5
Svetkey, 1987 .../... ... ... 6.3/-2.5
Medical Research Council, 1987 .../... ... ... 0.8/-0.7
Grimm, 1988 80/-9 114 ... 0.7/1.4
Cushman and Langford, 1988 36/177 177 ... .../-0.1
Obel, 1989 39/... 172 ... -41.0/-17.0
Krishna, 1989 47/44 144 -0.6 5.5/-7.4
Hypertension Prevention Trial, 0/-6 155 0.2 -1.3/-0.9
1990
Mullen and O’Connor, 1990
(a) 23/-12 141 -0.1 0/3.0
(b) 34/-15 138 -0.2 -2.0/2.0
Patki, 1990 22/-14 184 ... -12.1/-13.1
Valdes, 1991 68/19 166 -1 -6.3/-3.0
Barden, 1991 72/15 120 ... -1.7/-0.6
Overlack, 1991 105/-13 156 0 2.8/3.0
Smith et at, 1992 109/29 221 0.2 -4.3/-1.7
Fotherby and Potter, 1992 39/13 136 -0.7 -10.0/-6.0
Whelton, 1995 42/6 144 ... -0.3/0.1
Brancati, 1996 70/20 141 -0.1 -6.9/-2.5
* Ellipses indicate no data.
Table Modified from Whelton PK, He J, Cutler JA, et al. Reproduced with permission from May 28, 1997 JAMA
277(20):1624-32. Copyright 1997, American Medical Association.
1 0.1
0
-1
-2 -1.2 -1.4
Mean -3 -2.1
Net Change - 4
(mmHg) - 5 Systolic Blood Pressure
-4.7
-6 Diastolic Blood Pressure
-7
-8 -7.3
-9
<140 140-164 ≥ 165
Urinary Sodium During Follow-up
(mmol/d)
FIGURE 47.2
Effect of potassium supplementation on net blood pressure reduction according to urinary sodium excretion
during followup: the greater the sodium excretion, the greater the blood pressure reduction with potassium
supplementation (p <0.001 for both systolic and diastolic blood pressure). Derived from Whelton PK, He J, Cutler
JA, et al. JAMA 277: 1624, 1997. With permission.
tions. There have been several meta-analyses to assess the effect of dietary and nondietary
interventions on blood pressure.35,39-43 A larger effect of calcium supplementation on sys-
tolic blood pressure was observed with increasing age and among women.41 The subgroup
of hypertensive subjects had a greater reduction in blood pressure than the normotensives
(–4.30/–1.50 mmHg versus –0.27/–0.33 mmHg).42 The change in systolic and diastolic
blood pressure was significant for the hypertensives, but not the normotensives.42 The
largest meta-analysis (see Tables 47.8 and 47.9) shows a reduction of blood pressure of
–1.44/–0.84 mmHg (p <0.001 for each).43 There was no difference in the change in blood
pressure comparing 33 nondietary trials (–1.09/–0.87 mmHg) and the 9 dietary trials
(–2.01/–1.09 mmHg). The authors concluded that the small reduction in blood pressure
of calcium supplements does not merit its use in mild hypertension, and further suggest
that the use of calcium must weigh the benefits of reducing cardiovascular disease and
increasing bone density versus the risk of nephrolithiasis.
Despite this modest benefit in nonpregnant subjects, a meta-analysis (see Tables 47.10
and 47.11) of calcium supplementation in pregnancy observed a blood pressure reduction
of –5.40/–3.44 mmHg and a decrease in the rate of preeclampsia (odds ratio = 0.38 [95%
CI: 0.22 to 0.65]).44 Since the publication of the meta-analysis, the National Institutes of
Health sponsored trial, Calcium for Preeclampsia Prevention, has been completed.45 This
placebo-controlled, randomized, multicenter trial assigned 4589 nulliparous women 13 to
21 weeks pregnant to 2 g of calcium carbonate or placebo. There was no benefit in the
rate of preeclampsia (6.9 versus 7.3%), the prevalence of gestational hypertension (15.3
versus 17.3%), or pregnancy-associated proteinuria (3.4 versus 3.3%) in the calcium (n =
2295) and placebo (n = 2294) groups.
Magnesium
Magnesium is a divalent intracellular cation. The adult body contains about 25 g distrib-
uted between the skeleton (60%) and soft tissues (40%).46 It serves as a cofactor for many
enzyme systems. Intracellular calcium increases and blood pressure rises as magnesium
depletion occurs in rats. The hypotensive effect of magnesium is observed best when given
2705_frame_C47 Page 976 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:48 PM
TABLE 47.8
Randomized Controlled Trials Examining the Relationship of Calcium and Blood Pressure
No. of
Subjects Elemental Study
Author, Year, (Intervention/ Quality Calcium Calcium Duration
Study Design Control) Score* Formulation (mg/day) (weeks)
Nondietary Interventions
Dietary Interventions
TABLE 47.9
Randomized Controlled Trials Studying the Effect of Calcium Supplementation and Blood Pressure
Systolic Systolic Diastolic Diastolic
Position of Mean Mean Mean Mean
Blood Pressure Mean BP at Baseline, Difference, Baseline, Difference,
Author, Year Measurement Study End* mm Hg mmHg (SD) mm Hg mm Hg (SD)
Nondietary Interventions
Belizan, 1983
Women Lateral 1 102 -2.40 (1.03) 68 -4.50 (1.46)
Men Lateral 1 113 -0.80 (1.05) 71 -6.00 (1.94)
Sunderrajan, 1984
Normotensive Sitting 2 NA 1.89 (2.78) NA 1.89 (2.50)
Hypertensive Sitting 2 NA -1.63 (5.93) NA -4.13 (2.50)
Johnson, 1985
Normotensive Sitting 2 120 0.00 (3.01) 74 0.00 (1.67)
Hypertensive Sitting 2 141 -13.0 (6.52) 86 0.00 (2.79)
McCarron, 1985
Normotensive Standing 2 113 1.30 (2.00) 75 1.00 (2.62)
Hypertensive Standing 2 144 -5.60 (2.10) 92 -2.30 (1.40)
Grobbee, 1986 Sitting 1 143 -0.40 (2.27) 83 -2.40 (1.90)
Nowson, 1986
Normotensive Sitting 1 0.00 (2.97) 0.30 (2.33)
Hypertensive Sitting 1 157 1.60 (3.83) 92 1.30 (2.90)
Resnick, 1986
Salt-sensitive Sitting 1 NA NA NA -8.0 (6.0)
Salt-insensitive Sitting 1 NA NA NA 7.0 (6.0)
Strazzullo, 1986 Standing 2 145 -8.60 (4.98) 98 -1.70 (2.56)
Van Berestevn, 1986 Supine 1 115 -1.36 (1.88) 65 0.79 (1.66)
Cappuccio, 1987 Standing 2 156 2.00 (4.17) 112 0.40 (2.64)
Lyle, 1987
White Sitting 1 115 -2.44 (2.00) 75 -1.89 (2.31)
Black Sitting 1 114 -3.63 (3.85) 71 4.02 (5.67)
Meese, 1987 Sitting 2 143 -5.00 (4.21) 95 -2.00 (2.83)
Siani, 1987 Supine 2 154 5.10 (8.01) 96 1.30 (4.10)
Thomsen, 1987 Supine 2 124 -0.50 (6.10) 76 -1.30 (3.78)
Vinson, 1987 Supine 2 114 7.90 (4.93) 74 2.40 (2.05)
Zoccali, 1987 Sitting 1 141 6.45 (3.35) 88 4.64 (2.21)
Siani, 1988 Supine 2 139 2.20 (4.94) 91 0.70 (3.68)
Zoccali, 1988 Sitting 1 142 -2.80 (2.97) 88 -2.80 (2.47)
Orwoll, 1990 Sitting 1 131 2.60 (3.54) 84 3.08 (2.63)
Tanji, 1991 Sitting 1 146 3.00 (4.20) 95 2.00 (2.40)
Cutler, 1992 Sitting 1 126 -0.46 (0.67) 84 0.20 (0.46)
Lyle, 1992 Sitting 1 133 -5.90 (1.99) 87 -7.20 (1.71)
Galloe, 1993 Sitting 1 168 2.20 (4.49) 97 3.30 (2.75)
Jespersen, 1993 Supine 1 148 -0.57 (7.20) 93 -0.86 (3.88)
Pan, 1993 Sitting 1 136 -7.09 (7.89) 72 -0.87 (3.29)
Weinberger, 1993
Normotensive Sitting 2 116 1.00 (3.00) 72 -1.00 (2.64)
Hypertensive Sitting 2 131 -2.00 (5.68) 87 -1.00 (2.92)
Petersen, 1994 Sitting 2 145 4.50 (13.2) 81 -8.20 (5.10)
Zhou, 1994 Sitting 1 158 -14.6 (4.48) 103 -7.11 (2.43)
Gillman, 1995 Sitting 1 102 -2.20 (11.0) 58 -0.80 (7.16)
Sacks, 1995 Sitting 1 NA 3.70 (2.45) NA 3.60 (2.32)
Lijnen, 1996 Supine 1 114 -5.70 (2.18) 73 -3.50 (1.79)
Davis, 1997 Mean 24 h 1 125 -1.72 (1.20) 91 -0.49 (0.35)
ambulatory
Sanchez, 1997 Sitting 1 166 1.60 (1.60) 99 0.40 (1.21)
2705_frame_C47 Page 978 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:48 PM
Dietary Interventions
Trials Providing Data on Treatment Effects of Systolic and Diastolic Blood Pressure
TABLE 47.11
Change in Blood Pressure in Randomized Controlled Trials
of Calcium Supplementation in Pregnancy
Mean Difference Mean Difference
In Systolic Blood in Diastolic Blood
Author, Year Pressure, mm Hg Pressure, mm Hg
Belizan, 1983 -5.10 -5.70
Marya, 1987 -6.90 -3.40
Villar, 1987 -4.10 -4.90
Lopez-Jaramillo, 1989 -8.70 -6.60
Repke, 1989 -2.50 -2.77
Lopez-Jaramillo, 1990 -13.10 -11.80
Belizan 1991 -1.70 -0.90
Felix, 1991 -6.30 -5.80
Knight and Keith, 1992
Normotensive -2.70 0.50
Hypertensive +4.8 0
Sanchez-Ramos, 1993 +4.6 -0.82
Sanchez-Ramos, 1994 -4.08 -3.00
Levine, 1997* -0.3 +0.3
* Calcium for the Preeclampsia Prevention Trial (not in the original
meta-analysis)
Modified from Bucher HC. Reproduced with permission from April
10, 1996 JAMA 275(14):1113-7. Copyright 1996, American Medical
Association.
between the 10th and 15th percentiles, 16 weeks’ daily supplement of magnesium 14 mmol
had no significant treatment effect (–0.9/–0.7 mmHg). The administration of magnesium
with potassium did not enhance the effect of potassium alone.54
tinal symptoms, eructation, loose stool or diarrhea, and obstipation occurring in 28% of
experimental subjects — 13% of the control group (p <0.001).55
Another meta-analysis included 31 of 52 studies that included trials with a placebo
group and a report of pretreatment and post-treatment blood pressures (see Table 47.13).56
Like the previous meta-analysis, hypertensives (–3.4/–2.0 mmHg) had greater blood pres-
sure decline than normotensives (–0.4/–0.7 mmHg), but the dose of the fish oils was higher
in the hypertensive group (5.6 g/d) than the normotensive group (4.2 g/d). There also
was a statistically significant dose-dependent decline in blood pressure: ≤ 3g/d, –1.3/–0.7
mmHg; >3 to 7g/d, –2.9/–1.6 mmHg; and 15g/d, –8.1/–5.8 mmHg. The effect of fish oil
on blood pressure is maximally manifested by 3 to 4 weeks.
Since the completion of these meta-analyses, several new studies have supported their
conclusions. In a double-blind, placebo-controlled trial of parallel design, 59 overweight,
mildly hyperlipidemic men were randomized to 4 g/d of purified EPA, DHA, or olive oil
(placebo) capsules and continued their usual diets for 6 weeks. Fifty-six subjects completed
the study. Only DHA significantly reduced 24-hour and daytime ambulatory blood pres-
sure (p <0.05).57 In 63 overweight hypertensives, combining a daily fish meal with a weight-
reducing regimen led to additive reduction on ambulatory blood pressure and decreased
heart rate.58
Dietary Protein
Cross-sectional studies show that dietary protein intake is inversely related to blood
pressure, although a direct relationship was considered to exist.59 Protein intake was
thought to increase blood pressure due to adverse effects on renal function in partially
nephrectomized rats. The mechanism of action of high dietary protein intake is not clear,
but multicollinearity (multiple nutrient intake that correlated with one another) is a prob-
lem. Amino acid production (e.g., tryptophan, tyrosine, and arginine) may affect hormones
or neurotransmitters that ultimately alter blood pressure. For instance, the sulfonic amino
acid taurine given 6 g for 7 days in 19 young hypertensive subjects decreased blood
pressure –9.0/–4.1 mm Hg compared with to –2.7/–1.2 mmHg in the placebo-treated
subjects in a double-blind, placebo-controlled trial.60 Perhaps other protein metabolites
have natriuretic or diuretic activity.
Human observational studies on protein and blood pressure are displayed in Table 47.14.
These studies show in aggregate that increased protein intake, determined by food records
or recall or by urine studies of sulfate and urea nitrogen, is associated with decreased
blood pressure. The relationship of blood pressure and vegetable protein versus animal
protein is unclear. After adjustment for age, BMI, alcohol consumption, urinary sodium
excretion, dietary intake, and resident area for each one standard deviation higher level
of dietary protein intake (39 g), a 3.55 mmHg lower systolic blood pressure was observed.
Most intervention trials (Table 47.15) have been conducted in normotensive subjects,
were not designed to assess the relationship between protein and blood pressure or
determine a dose relationship, and were not powered adequately or randomized.59,61
Dietary Fiber
Vegetarians and other persons with high fiber intakes have lower average blood pressures
than persons with low fiber intakes do. In the Coronary Artery Risk Development in Young
Adults (CARDIA) Study, fiber intake predicted insulin levels, weight gain, and other
cardiovascular risk factors more potently than did fat consumption.62 High intake of fiber
was associated with lower systolic and diastolic blood pressure in whites but not African-
TABLE 47.13
Characteristics of the 31 Trials used for the Meta-Analysis of Fish Oil and Blood Pressure*
Study Blinding Blinding Study ω-3 Dose Gender Baseline BP Effect
Study, Year Design* Subject Observer§ Length n, Treatment* (g/d)‡ (Age Range) Pressure¶ SBP/DBP¶
Health Subjects
Hypertensive Subjects
17 Safflower (mean, 46 y)
Margolin, 1991 PG + + 8 22 Fish oil 4.7 Men & Women 164/94 +1.1/+0.1
24 Corn oil (60-80 y)
Morris, 1992 XO + + 6 18 Fish oil 4.8 Men & Women 130/87 -2.4/-1.8
18 Olive oil (32-64 y)
Hypercholesterolemic Subjects
Demke, 1988 PG + + 4 13 Fish oil 1.7 Men & Women 119/74 -3/+1.0
18 Safflower (18-60y)
Bach, 1989 PG + + 5 30 Total 2.5 Men & Women 130/85 -9.0-4.0
saturated (mean, 31 y)
Dart, 1989 XO NS NS 8 21 Fish oil 6 Men & Women 125/77 -5.3/-2.0
21 Olive oil (mean, 46 y)
Wilt, 1989 XO NS NS 12 38 Fish oil 6 Men 124/84 -2.7/-1.8
38 Safflower (mean, 42 y)
Kestin, 1990 PG + + 6 11 Fish oil 3.4 Men 124/75 -5.1/0.0
11 Linoleic (mean, 46 y)
Cobiac, 1991 PG - - 5 12 Fish 4.5 Men 128/79 -0.6/+1.3
13 Fish oil (30-60 y)
6 Saturated mix
Davidson, 1986 PG + + 4 30 Total 6 Age, sex: NS† 142/88 -9.8/-3.2
olive oil
Handbook of Nutrition and Food
Cardiovascular Disease Subjects
Diabetic Subjects
Haines, 1986 PG - - 6 19 Fish oil 4.6 Men & Women 136/82 +1.0/+1.7
22 Olive oil (30-59 y)
Jensen, 1989 XO + + 8 18 Fish oil 4.6 Men & Women 148/89 -9.0/-4.0
18 Olive oil (22-47 y)
Hendra, 1990 PG + + 6 40 Fish oil 3 Men & Women 143/83 +0.4/-0.6
40 Olive oil (mean, 56 y)
2705_frame_C47 Page 985 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:48 PM
Mixed Sample†
studies. SBP, systolic blood pressure; DBP, diastolic blood pressure; NS, not specified. Change in BP attributed to fish oil treatment.
§ Blinded to treatment status.
Tabulated from Tables 2 and 3 from Morris.56
985
2705_frame_C47 Page 986 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:48 PM
TABLE 47.14
Observational Studies on Protein and Blood Pressure*
Study Number, Age Protein Measurement Results
Cross-Sectional Studies
Yamori, 1981 1120, NS* Spot urine: sulfate:urea nitrogen ↓ SBP with ↑ animal protein
ratio
Kihara, 1984 1120, 30-70+ y Spot urine: sulfate:urea nitrogen ↓ SBP in men with ↑ animal
ratio protein
Reed, 1981 6496 men, NS Single 24-h recall: g/d ↓ SBP, ↓ DBP with ↑ total protein
Pellum, 1983 61, 22-25 y 3-d food record: g/d ↓ SBP with ↑ total protein
Elliott, 1991 1190, 20-59 y 24-h urine: total nitrogen, urea ↓ SBP with ↑ total and animal
nitrogen, sulfate protein
Dyer, 1992 2325, 20-59 y 24-h urine: total nitrogen, urea ↓ SBP with ↑ total protein
nitrogen
Stamler, 1992 11342 men, 35-57 y Four or five 24-h recalls: % ↓ SBP with ↑ total protein
energy intake
Eliott, 1992 1922, mean age 39 y 7-d weighed food record: g/d, ↓ SBP in women, ↓ DBP in men
% energy intake and women with ↑ total
protein
Liu, 1992 3809, 18-30 y Interviewer-administered food- ↓ DBP in white women, black
frequency questionnaire: % women, and black men with ↑
energy intake vegetable protein only
Zhou, 1989 2672, 35-50 y Three 24-h recalls: percentage ↓ SBP with ↑ animal protein
energy intake only
Zhou, 1994 705, 40-59 y Three 24-h recalls: % energy ↓ SBP, ↓ DBP with ↑ animal
intake protein only
Havlik, 1990 402 male twins, 42-56 y Interviewer-administered ↑ DBP with ↑ total protein
food-frequency questionnaire:
% energy intake, g/d, g/d
adjusted for energy
He, 1995 827 men, mean 31-45 y Three 24-h recalls: % energy ↓ SBP with ↑ total protein
intake
Stamler, 1996 10020, 20-59 y 24-h urine: total nitrogen, urea ↓ SBP, ↓ DBP with ↑ total protein
nitrogen, sulfate
Stamler, 1996 11342 men, 35-57 y Four or five 24-h recalls: % ↓ DBP with ↑ total protein
energy intake
Longitudinal Studies
Liu, 1993 1804 men, 40-56 y Quantitative diet history: % ↓ SBP with ↑ vegetable protein
energy intake only
Liu, 1995† 3809, 18-30 y Interviewer-administered food- No change, with ↑ total, animal,
frequency questionnaire: % or vegetable protein
energy intake
* SBP indicates systolic blood pressure; DBP, diastolic blood pressure; NS, not stated
† Personal communication
Reproduced with permission from May 22/29, 1996 JAMA 275(20):1598-603. Copyright 1996, American Medical
Association.
TABLE 47.15
Human Intervention Studies on Protein and Blood Pressure*
Study Number, Age, Cohort Study Design Results Conclusion
Chapman, 1950 8 men, 31-58 y, Sequential: (1) control, (2) rice-fruit; ↓SBP and ↓DBP, but both NS Compared with rice-fruit diet,
hypertensive protein (3) rice-fruit + 40 g milk (animal) no effect of animal protein on
BP
Hatch, 1954 9, 36-66 y, hypertensive Sequential: (1) low-sodium control; ↓SBP and ↓DBP, but both NS No effect of ↑animal protein on
(2) low-sodium + 30-50 g milk and BP
meat protein
Brussaard, 1981 69, 18-30 y, normotensive Parallel, randomized, each for 4 wk: Casein: ↓SBP and ↑ DBP, but No effect of animal or vegetable
(1) control; (2) casein protein; (3) soy both NS; Soy: ↑ SBP and ↑ DBP, protein on BP
protein but both NS
Sacks , 1981 21, 20-55 y normotensive Sequential: (1) 2 wk control ↑ SBP (p<0.05), ↓DBP (NS) Animal protein ↑ SBP
vegans vegetarian diet; (2) 4 wk 250 g of
added beef
2705_frame_C47 Page 987 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:48 PM
Sacks, 1984 18, 22-41 y, normotensive Crossover, randomized each for 6 wk Compared with low protein, No effect of ↑ vegetable protein
vegans (1) high protein (58 g soy and wheat high protein: ↑ SBP and ↑ DBP, on BP
protein); (2) low protein (7 g rice but both NS
protein)
Sacks, 1984 Study 1 — 19, 14-54 y Study I — Sequential: (1) 3 wk at Study 1 — Low-fat vegetarian Study 1 — No effect of
normotensive baseline (2) 3 mo lactovegetarian protein diet: ↑ SBP and ↑ DBP, vegetarian diet on BP
diet but both NS
Study 2 — 17, 18-24 y, Study 2 — Crossover, randomized, Study 2 — 1 egg/d: ↑ SBP and Study 2 — No effect of eggs on
normotensive vegetarians each for 3 wk: (1) no eggs; (2) 1 egg/ ↑ DBP, but both NS BP
d
Prescott , 1987 50, 18-60 y, normotensive Parallel, randomized, each for 12 wk: Compared with meat protein No difference in BP between
Nutritional Treatment of Blood Pressure: Nonpharmacologic Therapy
(1) meat protein (93 g of protein) (2) diet, vegetable protein: ↓SBP vegetable and animal protein
vegetable protein (84 g protein) and ↑ DBP, but both NS
Sacks, 1988 13, 21-41 y, normotensive Crossover, randomized, each for 3 Compared with casein protein; No difference in BP between
vegans wk: (1) 27 g casein protein; (2) 27 g soy protein: ↓SBP, and ↓DBP, vegetable and animal protein
soy protein but both NS
Kestin, 1989 26 men, 28-64 y, Crossover, randomized, each for 6 Lactoovovegetarian diet: No No difference in BP between
normotensive wk: (1) lean meat (high animal change in SBP and ↑ DBP, but low-fat animal and low-fat
protein); (2) lactoovovegetarian both NS vegetable protein diet
(high vegetable protein)
* SBP indicates systolic blood pressure; DBP, diastolic blood pressure; BP, blood pressure; and NS, not significant.
Reproduced with permission from May 22/29, 1996 JAMA 275(20):1598-603. Copyright 1996, American Medical Association.
987
2705_frame_C47 Page 988 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:48 PM
Americans. Among 30,681 white male health professionals, only dietary fiber had an
independent inverse association with hypertension after four years of follow up.34 The
relative risk of hypertension was 1.57 times greater for men with a fiber intake of less than
12 g/day versus greater than 24 g/day. In the Health Professionals Follow-up Study
(43,738 men), high intakes of cereal fiber and magnesium were inversely associated with
the risk of all strokes after 8 years.28 Among 827 Chinese men, a 10 g higher intake of
dietary fiber was significantly associated with a reduced systolic and diastolic blood
pressure (–2.2/–2.1 mmHg).63
The explanation for lower blood pressure with fiber is unclear. Suggestions include an
increased intake in dietary potassium and Vitamin C and/or a decreased sodium intake.64
Among controlled studies the average intake of fiber (primarily cereal) was increased by
14 g, resulting in an average reduction of blood pressure of –1.6/–2.0 mmHg.65 Better
studies need to be conducted to understand the relationship of fiber with blood pressure.
Cholesterol 1.0%
Linoleic Acid -1.2%
Vitamin C -11.9%
Vitamin A -11.8%
Potassium -7.1%
Sodium -1.3%
Phosphorous -3.4%
Calcium -7.6%
Carbohydrates -2.9%
Protein 1.3%
Fat -1.3%
Calories -0.6%
-16.0% -14.0% -12.0% -10.0% -8.0% -6.0% -4.0% -2.0% 0.0% 2.0%
% of Mean Difference in Nutrient Intake of Hypertensives and Normotensives
FIGURE 47.3
Health and Nutrition Examination Survey I: % mean difference in average nutritional consumption between
hypertensive and normotensive persons, adjusted for age. Derived from McCarron DA, Morris CD, Henry HJ,
Stanton JL. Science 224(4656), 1392, 1984. With permission.
2705_frame_C47 Page 989 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:48 PM
TABLE 47.16
Trials of Ascorbic Acid and Blood Pressure
Patient Blood Pressure (mm Hg)
Study Number Design Duration Intervention Systolic/Diastolic
Osilesi O, 1991 20 Crossover 6 wks 1000 mg/d -6.3 /0.6
Feldman EB, 1992 21 Single Blind 4 wks 1000 mg/d -4.2/-2.9
Lovat LB, 1993 27 Crossover 4 wks 400 mg/d -·2 to -5·3 /-0.2 to -1.9
Ghosh SK,1994 48 Controlled 6 wks 500 mg/d -2.5/-1.2
Duffy SJ, 1999 39 Controlled 4 wks 2000 mg bolus -11/-6
500 mg per day
Table modified from Ness A, Sterne J. Lancet 335(9211), 1271, 2000.
reduced the risk of stroke in the Health Professionals Follow-up Study of 43,738 men.70
In 168 healthy subjects, plasma concentrations of ascorbic acid (but not α-tocopherol,
selenium, or taurine) were significantly inversely related to systolic and diastolic blood
pressure.67 Intravenous vitamin C, thiopronine, and glutathione (all antioxidants) indi-
vidually demonstrated an acute decrease in blood pressure in 20 unmedicated hyperten-
sive and 20 diabetic subjects. 71 Few studies assess the impact of ascorbic acid
supplementation alone. Ascorbic acid — 500 mg twice daily in 21 subjects — lowered
blood pressure 4.2/2.9 mmHg in a pilot study.72 In a double-blind randomized crossover
study, ascorbic acid 200 mg twice daily or placebo for four weeks was given to 27 elderly
hypertensives.73 No significant treatment effect was observed. Following a 2-week run-in
phase, 48 untreated elderly hypertensive subjects in a randomized, double-blind, placebo-
controlled six week study received ascorbic acid 250 mg twice daily or placebo.74 The
change in blood pressure in the vitamin C group was –10.3/–5.9 mmHg, and in the placebo
group –7.7/–4.7 mmHg (p = nonsignificant). In a controlled trial, 20 subjects received
placebo and 19 subjects received a 2 g bolus followed by 500 mg daily of ascorbic acid
for 30 days.75 Systolic blood pressure decreased 13 mmHg (p <0.05); the change in diastolic
blood pressure was not significant. Table 47.16 summarizes several trials of vitamin C
supplementation and blood pressure.76 The effect on systolic blood pressure is consistently
greater than diastolic blood pressure.
Several studies have combined several antioxidants to assess an effect on blood pressure.
In a randomized, placebo-controlled, clinical trial of 297 retired teachers randomly
assigned to 2 to 4 months of the combination of 400 IU/day vitamin E, 500 mg/day vitamin
C, and 6 mg/day β-carotene or placebo, the antioxidant combination capsule had no
significant hypotensive effect.77 In a randomized, double-blind, crossover design placebo-
controlled study of 21 hypertensives and 17 normotensives, participants were assigned to
receive either 8 weeks of placebo followed by 2 weeks washout, then 8 weeks antioxidants
200 mg of zinc sulfate, 500 mg of ascorbic acid, 600 mg of α-tocopherol and 30 mg of β-
carotene daily, or the opposite sequence. Only systolic blood pressure (–5.3 mmHg)
decreased significantly at the end of the antioxidant phase compared with the placebo
phase (+3.7 mmHg) in hypertensive subjects (p <0.01).78
trolled, double-blind trial, 47 subjects with mild hypertension (diastolic blood pressures
from 95 to 104 mmHg) took either garlic powder or a placebo of identical appearance for
12 weeks.79 The supine diastolic blood pressure in the garlic treatment group decreased
13 mmHg after 12 weeks (p < 0.01) compared with no significant changes in the placebo
group. In a double-blind crossover study of 41 moderately hypercholesterolemic men
assessing the effect of aged garlic extract versus placebo on blood lipids, there was a 5.5%
decrease in systolic blood pressure and a modest reduction of diastolic blood pressure.81
Another study of 40 hypercholesterolemic men treated with 900 mg of garlic powder
observed a similar finding.80 In a randomized, double-blind study, 42 healthy adults took
either 300 mg three times a day of standardized garlic powder in tablet form, or placebo
for 12 weeks.86 There was no significant change in blood pressure.
A meta-analysis of 8 trials (415 subjects) using dried garlic powder 600 to 900 mg
observed a decrease for systolic blood pressure of –7.7 (95% CI –11.0 to –4.3) and diastolic
blood pressure of –5.0 (95% CI –7.1 to –2.9) mmHg, which represented the overall pooled
difference in the absolute change (baseline to final measurement) in blood pressure relative
to placebo (see Table 47.17).87 The same analysis for hypertensive subjects reported an
–11.1/–6.5 mmHg decline in blood pressure. The authors observe that blinding may have
been difficult due to the odor of garlic. Furthermore, they emphasize that their quality
assessment of the trials was poor because the authors did not state their technique to
achieve effective randomization. Side effects appear to be rare. A recent randomized,
multicenter, double-blind, placebo-controlled, 12-week parallel treatment study in hyper-
cholesterolemic subjects using garlic powder (Kwai) 300 mg 3 times per day found no
benefits in lowering blood pressure.88 The authors of this paper emphasize that negative
studies tend not to be submitted or published, suggesting that the current literature on
garlic represents a publication bias.87,88 Despite the suggested benefit, more trials need to
be conducted to assess the benefit in hypertensives.
Ethanol
Alcohol consumption increases the risk of the development of hypertension.89,90 The risk
increases above 28 g of ethanol per day (which is equivalent to 24 oz of beer, 10 oz wine,
and 3 oz of distilled spirits).91 The maximum addition to the prevalence of hypertension
of alcohol usage greater than two drinks daily is estimated to be 5 to 7%; however, the
11% risk in men is greater than in women because of greater alcohol intake.92 In another
study, alcohol consumption greater than 20 g per day gradually increases the risk of
hypertension among women.93 The relationship of alcohol intake to blood pressure is
graded and continuous with the effect clearer in men than in women and more consistent
in whites than in blacks (see Figure 47.4).94 The effect of alcohol consumption on systolic
blood pressure is independent of the effects of age, obesity, cigarette smoking, and physical
activity.95 In the INTERSALT Study (n = 10,079), both BMI and heavy alcohol consumption
were significantly and independently correlated with both systolic and diastolic blood
pressure (p <0.001).5 The effect of alcohol consumption on blood pressure is independent
of and additive to BMI and urinary excretion of sodium and potassium.96 The effect of
alcohol on change in blood pressure independent of other risk factors is displayed in
Figure 47.4.94 In the Scottish Health Heart Study, alcohol consumption showed a weak
positive correlation with blood pressure among 7354 men, but the correlation was greater
than for sodium.7
Resting plasma concentrations of norepinephrine, epinephrine, renin activity, angio-
tensin II, aldosterone, and cortisol are similar in drinkers and nondrinkers.97 In a prospec-
tive study of 7735 middle-aged British men, the prevalence of measured hypertension and
TABLE 47.17
Randomized Controlled Trials of Garlic and Blood Pressure*
Dose per Number of Heart
Reference Participants day (mg) Control Blinding Subjects Duration Position Rate Analysis
Kandziora, 1988 Hypertensives 600 Reserpine- Single 40 12 weeks Sup/St UC ITT
2705_frame_C47 Page 991 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:48 PM
diuretic
Kandziora, 1988 Hypertensives 600 Placebo Double 40 12 weeks Sup/St UC ITT
Auer, 1990 Hypertensives 600 Placebo Double 47 12 weeks Sup/St NS NS
Vorberg, 1990 Hyperlipidemics 900 Placebo Double 40 16 weeks Sup NS NS
Kiesewetter, 1991 SWISA 800 Placebo Double 60 4 weeks NS NS NS
Holzgartner, 1992 Hyperlipidemics 900 Bezafibrate Double 94 12 weeks NS UC ITT
Santos, 1993 NS 900 Placebo Double 60 6 months NS NS ORT
Jain, 1993 Hyperlipidemics 900 Placebo Double 42 12 months NS NA NS
* Sup, supine; St, standing; UC, unchanged; ITT intention to treat; NS, not stated; SWISA, subjects with increased spontaneous aggregation;
ORT, on randomized treatment; NA. not available. Crossover study.
Nutritional Treatment of Blood Pressure: Nonpharmacologic Therapy
Modified from Silagy CA, Neil HA. J Hypertens 12(4), 463, 1994. With permission.
991
2705_frame_C47 Page 992 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:48 PM
White Men
(n=20,171)
10 9.1
9 Systolic
8 Diastolic
Change in 7 5.6 5.6
Blood 6
Pressure 54 3.5
(mmHg) 3 2.8
2 1.6
1
0
1—2 3—5 6—8
Alcohol Consumption (drinks/day)
White Women
(n=23,191)
10
Systolic
8
Diastolic
Change in
6
Blood 4.6
Pressure 4
(mmHg) 2.9 3.1 2.5
2 1.4
0.5
0
1—2 3—5 6—8
Alcohol Consumption (drinks/day)
FIGURE 47.4
The effect of ethanol consumption on the change in blood pressure independent of other factors. Graph derived
from data of Klatsky AL, Friedman GD, Armstrong MA. Circulation 73(4): 628, 1986.
level of blood pressure were significantly higher on Mondays and lower on Fridays than
on other weekdays.98 This suggests a withdrawal effect of weekend ethanol consumption.
Modest alcohol intake has been associated with a protective effect on ischemic heart
disease events. Heavy alcohol intake has been associated with an increased rate of hem-
orrhagic strokes.99,100 However, mild to moderate consumption in men reduced the risk of
ischemic stroke without increasing the risk of hemorrhagic stroke.101
Several trials have been conducted to assess the impact of alcohol in moderation on
blood pressure. These are listed in Table 47.18. Prevention and Treatment of Hypertension
Study (PATHS)91,102 was designed to assess alcohol intake reduction in nondependent
moderate to heavy drinkers. 641 outpatient hypertensive and nonhypertensive veterans
with a diastolic blood pressure of 80 to 99 mmHg were randomized to observation or
behavioral cognitive intervention. To qualify for enrollment, self-reported alcohol intake
had to be ≥294 g/week or ≥21 drinks/week for the preceding six months. The goal of
behavioral cognitive intervention was to reduce alcohol intake to less than 50% of baseline
intake or 14 drinks per week.
For the entire cohort, the average reduction of alcohol intake at 6 and 24 months between
groups was 131 and 124 g/wk (p <0.001 for each). For the 265 hypertensive subjects, the
average reduction at 6 and 24 months was 157 and 135 g/wk (each p <0.001). At 6 and
12 months, this translated to a nonsignificant reduction in blood pressure (i.e., treatment
2705_frame_C47 Page 993 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:48 PM
TABLE 47.18
Randomized Controlled Trials of Alcohol Reduction on Blood Pressure
Age, Years Alcohol Intake Blood Pressure
(Mean ± SD Duration, Baseline BP, Difference, Reduction,
Study, Year n or Range) Weeks mm Hg Drinks†/Day mm Hg p Value
Puddey, 1985 46 35 ± 8 6 133/76 3.7 3.8/1.4 <.001/<.05
Howes, 1985 10 25-41 0.6 120/66 5.7 8/6 <.025/<.001
Puddey, 1987 44 53 ± 16 6 142/84 4.0 5/3 <.001/<.001
Ueshima, 1987 50 46 ± 7 2 148/93 2.6 5.2/2.2 <.005/NS
Wallace, 1988 641 42 ± 20 52 136/82 1.0 2.1/? <.05/NS
Parker, 1990 59 52 ± 11 4 138/85 3.8 5.4/3.2 <.01/<.01
Cox, 1990 72 20-45 4 132/73 3.4 4.1/1.6 <.05/<-05
Maheswaran, 1992 41 40s 8 144/90 3.1 Not reported NS
Puddey, 1992 86 44 18 137/85 3.0 4.8/3.3 <.01/<.01
Ueshima, 1993 54 44 ± 8 3 144/96 1.7 3.6/1.9 <.05/NS
PATHS, 1998‡ 641 57 ± 11 104 140/86 1.3 0.9/0.6 0.16/0.10
† A standard drink is defined as 14 g of ethanol and is contained in a 12-oz glass of beer, a 5-oz glass of table
wine, or 1.5 oz of distilled spirits.
‡ PATHS is Prevention and Treatment of Hypertension Study.
Modified from report of Cushman WC, Cutler JA, Bingham SF, et al. Am J Hypertens 7(9PT1), 814, 1994.
effect) for the entire cohort of –1.0/–0.6 mmHg and –0.9/–0.6 mmHg. For the hypertensive
participants, the nonsignificant treatment effect at 6 and 12 months was –1.9/–0.6 and
–1.6/–0.4 mmHg. There was no significant difference in the incidence of hypertension at
24 months: 16.6% in the intervention group and 21.8% in the control group. Weight
declined more in the intervention group by –0.5 and –1.0 kg at 6 and 24 months.
PATHS was designed to achieve a 2-drink reduction in alcohol between treatments, but
only achieved a reduction of 1.3 drinks per day. Furthermore, it was anticipated that 60%
of the intervention group and 20% of the control group could reduce baseline alcohol
intake to less than 50%; however, at 6 months the level for the control group was 23% and
the intervention group was 44%.
Caffeine
Caffeine may increase peripheral vascular resistance by blocking the adenosine receptors.
There are few randomized, controlled trials assessing the impact of coffee consumption
on blood pressure. A meta-analysis (see Table 47.19) reviewed 36 studies and identified
11 controlled trials with 522 subjects.103 The median duration of the trials was 56 days.
They estimated the overall pooled treatment effect attributable for a median coffee intake
of 5 cups/d as +2.4 mmHg (95% CI +1.0 to +3.7) for systolic blood pressure and +1.2
mmHg (95% CI +0.4 to +2.1) for diastolic blood pressure. Only one of the 11 trials included
a hypertensive cohort. This meta-analysis did not observe a treatment effect on blood
pressure based on treatment duration, the type of coffee (instant or not), whether coffee
was filtered, or the type of coffee control (decaffeinated or no coffee). Age, coffee con-
sumption, and sample size were independently associated with both systolic and diastolic
blood pressure. The systolic and diastolic blood pressure increased 0.8 and 0.5 mmHg per
cup of coffee consumed. A recent study using ambulatory blood pressure monitoring to
study nonsmoking men and women older than 50 years reported a +4.8/+3.0 mmHg
higher 24-hour systolic and diastolic blood pressure comparing 14 hypertensive coffee
drinkers of 5 cups/d for two weeks compared with 13 hypertensive abstainers after a
mandatory period of abstention of caffeine-containing foods for two weeks.104
994
TABLE 47.19
Controlled Studies of Coffee Consumption
Baseline Habitual
No. of Age, y Age, y BP Study Random Study BP, mmHg Intake, Run-time Coffee Coffee No Cups Caffeine
Author, Year Subjects Mean Range % Male Drugs Design* Study Duration SBP/DBP cups/d Time, d Method Filtered of Coffee Content
Ammon, 1983 8 27 20-30 100 No XO, D No 28 d 123/82‡ ... 7 Instant No 504
... 126/85§
Burr, 1989 54 35 18-58 65 No XO, S Yes 28 d 116/69 ... 7 Instant No 5 ...
Bak, 1989a 67 26 18-33 54 No PG, ... Yes 63 d 122/71 5.9 21 Boiled No 5 630
2705_frame_C47 Page 994 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:48 PM
Bak, 1989b 68 26 18-33 54 No PG, ... Yes 63 d 122/71 5.5 21 Boiled Yes 5 670
Van Dusseldorp, 1980 45 38 25-45 49 No XO, D Yes 42 d 124/76 .. 0 Drip Yes 5 435
Rosmarin, 1990 21 36 ... 100 No XO, ... Yes 56 d 115/72 ... 0 Drip Yes 3.6 ...
MacDonald, 1991† 52 47 26-67 44 No XO, D Yes 14 d 134/87¶ ... 0 Instant No 3 ...
Van Dusseldorp, 1992a 43 39 17-57 42 No PG, D Yes 79 d 110/69¶ 5.5 17 Boiled No 6 860
Van Dusseldorp, 1992b 42 39 17-57 42 No PG, D Yes 79 d 110/70¶ 5.5 17 Boiled Yes 6 887
Eggertsen, 1993 23 56 28-74 57 Yes XO, D Yes 14 d 130/80¶ 3.5 14 Instant No 3.5 ...
Superko, 1994 99 46 43-48# 100 No PG, D Yes 56 d 116/74 4.5 0 Drip Yes 4.5 584
* BP indicates blood pressure; SBP, systolic blood pressure; DBP, diastolic blood pressure; XO, crossover; D, double-blind; S, single-blind; and PG, parallel group.
† MacDonald (1991): mean ambulatory BID during caffeinated coffee regimen vs caffeine-free diet.
‡ Regular coffee group.
§ Decaffeinated coffee group.
¶ Ambulatory BP measurements.
# Range of means.
Modified from Jee SH, He J, Whelton PK, et al. Hypertension 33(2), 647, 1999.
Handbook of Nutrition and Food
2705_frame_C47 Page 995 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:48 PM
Summary
Table 47.20 summarizes the meta-analyses on nonpharmacologic intervention and blood
pressure. The importance of the amount of change in blood pressure varies with the
perspective of the clinician vs. that of the epidemiologist.
2705_frame_C47 Page 996 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:48 PM
TABLE 47.20
Meta-Analysis of Results of Studies on Nonpharmacologic Intervention and Blood
Pressure
Number Systolic Pressure Diastolic Pressure
Author, Year of Trials Nutrient (95% CI) (95% CI)
Jee, 1999103 11 Caffeine +2.4 (+1.0 to +3.7) +1.2 (+0.4 to +2.1)
Normotensives 10 +2.4 (+1.0 to +3.8) +1.2 (+0.4 to +2.1)
Cappuccio, 198939 15 Calcium -0.13 (-0.46 to +0.19) +0.03 (-0.17 to +0.22)
Hypertensives 10 +0.06 (-0.59 to +0.72) +0.03 (-0.21 to +0.27)
Cutler, 199035 19 Calcium -1.8 (-3.0 to -0.6) -0.7 (-1.5 to +0.2)
Normotensives 9 -1.3 (-3.2 to +0.8) -1.3 (-2.6 to -0.1)
Hypertensives 12 -2.1 (-3.6 to -0.6) -0.1 (-1.3 to +1.0)
Allender, 1996 41 22 Calcium -0.89 (-1.74 to -0.05) -0.18 (-0.75 to +0.40)
Normotensives 13 -0.53 (-1.56 to +0.49) -0.28 (-0.99 to +0.42)
Hypertensives 16 -1.68 (-3.18 to -0.18) +0.02 (-0.96 to +1.00)
Buchner, 199642 33 Calcium -1.27 (-2.25 to -0.29) -0.24 (-0.92 to +0.44)
Normotensives 33 -0.27 (-1.80 to +1.27) -0.33 (-1.56 to +0.90)
Hypertensives 6 -4.30 (-6.47 to -2.13) -1.50 (-2.77 to -0.23)
Griffith, 199943 42 Calcium -1.44 (-2.20 to -0.68) -0.84 (-1.44 to -0.24)
He, 199665 20 Fiber -1.6 (-2.7 to -0.4) -2.0 (-2.9 to -1.1)
Silagy, 199487 8 Garlic -7.7 (-11.0 to -4.3) -5.0 (-7.1 to -2.9)
Hypertensives 2 -11.1 (-17.2 to -5.0) -6.5 (-9.6 to -3.4)
Appel, 199355 17 ω-3-Fatty Acids -1.5 (-2.4 to -0.6) -1.0 (-1.6 to -0.4)
Normotensives 11 -1.0 (-2.0 to 0.0) -0.5 (-1.2 to +0.20)
Hypertensives 6 -5.5 (-8.1 to -2.9) -3.5 (-5.0 to -2.1)
Morris, 199356 31 ω-3- Fatty Acids -3.0 (-4.5 to -1.5) -1.5 (-2.2 to -0.8)
Normotensives 8 -0.4 (-1.6 to +0.8) -0.7 (-1.5 to +0.1)
Hypertensives 9 -3.4 (-5.9 to -0.9) -2.0 (-3.3 to -0.7)
Cappuccio, 1991106 18 Potassium -4.0 (-4.7 to -3.2) -2.4 (-3.0 to -1.8)
Hypertensives 12 -5.3 (-6.2 to -4.4) -3.0 (-3.7 to -2.3)
Whelton, 199729 32 Potassium -3.11 (-4.31 to -1.91) -1.97 (-3.42 to -0.52)
Normotensives 12 -1.8 (-2.9 to -0.6) -1.0 (-2.1 to 0.0)
Hypertensives 20 -4.4 (-6.6 to -2.2) -2.5 (-4.9 to -0.1)
Cutler,199111 23 Sodium -2.91 (-3.67 to -2.15) -1.60 (-2.09 to -1.11)
Normotensives 6 -1.70 (-2.68 to -0.72) -0.97 (-1.62 to -0.32)
Hypertensives 18 -4.92 (-6.19 to -3.65) -2.64 (-3.46 to -1.82)
Midgley, 199613 56 Sodium -0.5 (-1.17 to -0.07) -1.6 (-2.10 to -1.02)
Normotensives 28 -0.1 (-0.76 to +0.63) -0.5 (-1.16 to +0.14)
Hypertensives 28 -2.0 (-3.57 to -0.49) -2.7 (-3.77 to -1.58)
Cutler, 199714 32 Sodium -2.81 (-3.39 to -2.23) -1.52 (-1.90 to -1.14)
Normotensives 12 -1.90 (-2.62 to -1.18) -1.09 (-1.57 to -0.61)
Hypertensives 22 -4.83 (-5.87 to -3.79) -2.45 (-3.13 to -1.77)
Graudal, 199815 Sodium
Normotensives 56 -1.2 (-1.8 to -0.6) -0.26 (-0.3 to +0.9)
Hypertensives 58 -3.9 (-4.8 to -3.0) -1.9 (-2.5 to -1.3)
References
1. Prisant LM. Hypertension. In: Current Diagnosis 9. Conn RB, Borer WZ, Snyder JW, Eds.
Philadelphia: W. B. Saunders, 1997: p 349.
2. Denton D, Weisinger R, Mundy NI, et al. Nat Med 1(10), 1009, 1995.
3. Kurtz TW, Al-Bander HA, Morris RC. N Engl J Med 317(17), 1043, 1987.
4. Boegehold MA, Kotchen TA. Hypertension 17(1 Suppl), I158, 1991.
5. _________. Br Med J 297(6644), 319, 1988.
6. Stamler R. Hypertension 17(1 Suppl), I16, 1991.
2705_frame_C47 Page 997 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:48 PM
7. Smith WC, Crombie IK, Tavendale RT, et al. Br Med J 297(6644), 329, 1988.
8. _________. Arch Intern Med 153(2), 186, 1993.
9. Mascioli S, Grimm R, Jr, Launer C, et al. Hypertension 17(1 Suppl), I21, 1991.
10. Grobbee DE, Hofman A. Br Med J 293(6538), 27, 1986.
11. Cutler JA, Follmann D, Elliott P, Suh I. Hypertension 17(1 Suppl), I27, 1991.
12. Law MR, Frost CD, Wald NJ. Br Med J 302(6780), 819, 1991.
13. Midgley JP, Matthew AG, Greenwood CM, Logan AG. JAMA 275(20), 1590, 1996.
14. Cutler JA, Follmann D, Allender PS. Am J Clin Nutr 65(2 Suppl), 643, 1997.
15. Graudal NA, Galloe AM, Garred P. JAMA 279(17), 1383, 1998.
16. Alderman MH, Madhavan S, Cohen H, et al. Hypertension 25(6), 1144, 1995.
17. Alderman MH. Am J Hypertens 10(5 Pt 1), 584, 1997.
18. Alderman MH, Cohen H, Madhavan S. Lancet 351(9105), 781, 1998.
19. Alderman MH, Lamport B. Am J Hypertens 3(6 Pt 1), 499, 1990.
20. Krishna GG, Miller E, Kapoor S. N Engl J Med 320(18), 1177, 1989.
21. Langford HG. Ann Intern Med 98(5 Pt 2), 770, 1983.
22. Grim CE, Luft FC, Miller JZ, et al. J Chronic Dis 33(2), 87, 1980.
23. J Chronic Dis 40(9), 839, 1987.
24. Adrogue HJ, Wesson DE. Semin Nephrol 16(2), 94, 1996.
25. Brancati FL, Appel LJ, Seidler AJ, Whelton PK. Arch Intern Med 156(1), 61, 1996.
26. Tobian L, Lange J, Ulm K, et al. Hypertension 7(3 Pt 2), I110, 1985.
27. Khaw KT, Barrett-Connor E. N Engl J Med 316(5), 235, 1987.
28. Ascherio A, Rimm EB, Hernan MA, et al. Circulation 98(12), 1198, 1998.
29. Whelton PK, He J, Cutler JA, et al. JAMA 277(20), 1624, 1997.
30. Grimm R, Jr, Neaton JD, Elmer PJ, et al. N Engl J Med 322(9), 569, 1990.
31. Stitt FW, Clayton DG, Crawford MD, Morris JN. Lancet 1(7795), 122, 1973.
32. Gruchow HW, Sobocinski KA, Barboriak JJ. JAMA 253(11), 1567, 1985.
33. Witteman JC, Willett WC, Stampfer M, et al. Circulation 80(5), 1320, 1989.
34. Ascherio A, Rimm EB, Giovannucci EL, et al. Circulation 86(5), 1475, 1992.
35. Cutler JA, Brittain E. Am J Hypertens 3(8 Pt 2), 137, 1990.
36. Resnick LM, Am J Hypertens 12(1 Pt 1), 99, 1999.
37. Hypertension 8(5), 444, 1986.
38. McCarron DA, Morris CD. Ann Intern Med 103(6 (Pt 1)), 825, 1985.
39. Cappuccio FP, Siani A, Strazzullo P. J Hypertens 7(12), 941, 1989.
40. Cappuccio FP, Elliott P, Allender PS, et al. Am J Epidemiol 142(9), 935, 1995.
41. Allender PS, Cutler JA, Follmann D, et al. Ann Intern Med 124(9), 825, 1996.
42. Bucher HC, Cook RJ, Guyatt GH, et al. JAMA 275(13), 1016, 1996.
43. Griffith LE, Guyatt GH, Cook RJ, et al. Am J Hypertens 12(1 Pt 1), 84, 1999.
44. Bucher HC, Guyatt GH, Cook RJ, et al. JAMA 275(14), 1113, 1996.
45. Levine RJ, Hauth JC, Curet LB, et al. N Engl J Med 337(2), 69, 1997.
46. Appel LJ. Calcium, magnesium, and blood pressure. In: Izzo JH, Black HR, Eds. Hypertension
Primer. The Essentials of High Blood Pressure. Dallas: Lippincott Williams &Wilkins, 1999: p 253.
47. Sibai BM, Villar MA, Bray E. Am J Obstet Gynecol 161(1), 115, 1989.
48. Lucas MJ, Leveno KJ, Cunningham FG, N Engl J Med 333(4), 201, 1995.
49. Whelton PK, Klag MJ. Am J Cardiol 63, 26, 1989.
50. Mizushima S, Cappuccio FP, Nichols R, Elliott P. J Hum Hypertens 12, 447, 1998.
51. Ma J, Folsom AR, Melnick SL, et al. J Clin Epidemiol 48(7), 927, 1995.
52. Peacock JM, Folsom AR, Arnett DK, et al. Ann Epidemiol 9(3), 159, 1999.
53. Sacks FM, Brown LE, Appel L, et al. Hypertension 26(6 Pt 1), 950, 1995.
54. Sacks FM, Willett WC, Smith A, et al. Hypertension 31(1), 131, 1998.
55. Appel LJ, Miller ER, Seidler AJ, Whelton PK. Arch Intern Med 153(12), 1429, 1993.
56. Morris MC, Sacks F, Rosner B. Circulation 88(2), 523, 1993.
57. Mori TA, Bao DQ, Burke V, et al. Hypertension 34(2), 253, 1999.
58. Bao DQ, Mori TA, Burke V, et al. Hypertension 32(4), 710, 1998.
59. Obarzanek E, Velletri PA, Cutler JA, JAMA 275(20), 1598, 1996.
60. Fujita T, Ando K, Noda H, et al. Circulation 75(3), 525, 1987.
2705_frame_C47 Page 998 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:48 PM
48
Nutritional Treatment of Blood Pressure:
Major Nonpharmacologic Trials of Prevention
or Treatment of Hypertension
L. Michael Prisant
The group that did not receive the intervention was monitored. Baseline characteristics
are shown in Table 48.1. The incidence of hypertension was 8.8% of 102 intervention and
19.2% of monitored subjects (p = 0.027) over 5 years. The odds ratio for hypertension
development in the control group was 2.4 (90% CI 1.2-4.8, p <0.027).
0-8493-2705-9/01/$0.00+$1.50
© 2002 by CRC Press LLC 999
1000
TABLE 48.1
Nonpharmacologic Interventions in High Normal Blood Pressure*
Systolic/ Relative
Mean % % Study Initial Diastolic Risk of
Trial n Age (Yr) Male White Duration Intervention Blood Pressure Change Hypertension*
Primary Prevention of Hypertension 1 201 38 87 82 5 yr ↓calories & NaCl 123/83 -1.3/-1.2 0.46†
↓ethanol
↑physical activity
Hypertension Prevention Trial2 252 38 68 80 3 yr ↓calories 125/83 -2.4/-1.8 0.77
392 39 62 84 3 yr ↓NaCl 124/83 +0.2/+0.1 0.79
2705_frame_C48 Page 1000 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:49 PM
TABLE 48.2
Hypertension Prevention Trial (HPT): Six-Month Change in Interventions
High BMI Low BMI
Sodium/ Sodium/
Control Kcalories Sodium Calories Control Sodium Potassium
Number of subjects 121 112 109 113 191 173 180
∆SBP/DBP (mmHg) -1.8/-2.5 -6.9†/-5.3‡ -3.6/-3.4 -5.8/-4.0 -2.1/-3.0 -3.8/-3.4 -3.4/-3.7
∆Weight (kg) +0.18 -5.58† -0.04 -3.90 +0.27 +0.00* +0.27
∆Na+Excretion (mmol/8h) -4.5 -4.2 -7.8 -8.4 -3.9 -9.4¶ -11.4
∆K+Excretion (mmol/8h) 0.3 -1.1 0.9 -0.1 -0.1 0.2 1.2
* p = 0.025; † p <0.001; ‡ p <0.01; ¶ p = 0.002.
Derived from Tables 4 and 5 in the report of The Hypertension Prevention Trial, Arch Intern Med 150: 153; 1990.
Weight reduction used a combination of caloric reduction, exercise increase, and behav-
ioral self-management. Stress management involved teaching slow breathing, progressive
2705_frame_C48 Page 1002 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:49 PM
38.7%
40.0%
35.0%
31.2%
30.0% 28.2%
26.9%
Rate of 25.0%
Hypertension
20.0%
Treatment or BP
≥ 140/ ≥ 90 mmHg 15.0%
10.0%
5.0%
0.0%
Control Caloric Na+ Restriction Na+/Caloric
(n=124) Reduction (n=119) Reduction
(N=124) (n=125)
40.0%
35.0% 33.5%
30.0%
24.6%
Rate of 25.0% 21.7%
Hypertension
20.0%
Treatment or
≥ 140/ ≥ 90 mmHg 15.0%
10.0%
5.0%
0.0%
Control Na+ Na+
(n=194) Restriction Reduction/K+
(n=187) Increase
(n=189)
FIGURE 48.1
The Hypertension Prevention Trial: three-year rate of elevated blood pressure or treatment for hypertension,
according to BMI and intervention.
muscular relaxation, mental imagery, stretching, and managing stress perceptions, reac-
tions, and situations. The lifestyle modifications lasted 18 months and used blinded mea-
surement of blood pressure as an endpoint. The nutritional supplements were placebo
controlled, doubled blinded, and lasted 6 months.
The primary outcomes are displayed in Table 48.3 and Figure 48.2. Only weight reduc-
tion significantly lowered blood pressure and reduced the development of hypertension
2705_frame_C48 Page 1003 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:49 PM
TABLE 48.3
Intervention Outcome, Treatment Effect, and Blood Pressure Effect (Active – Control)
in Trial of Hypertension Prevention, Phase I
Outcome Treatment Blood Pressure
Intervention Effect Effect
* p <0.05; † p <0.01.
Derived from Tables 2 and 3 in Trial of Hypertension Prevention, Phase 1, JAMA 267: 1213; 1992.
14.0% 13.3%
2.0%
0.0%
Sodium Weight Stress Magnesium Calcium Potassium Fish Oil
Reduction Reduction Management (n=461) (n=471) (n=353) (n=350)
(n=744) (n=564) (n=562)
FIGURE 48.2
Trial of Hypertension Prevention, Phase 1. Incidence of hypertension in each lifestyle change and nutritional
supplement group. Only weight reduction significantly reduced incidence of hypertension, relative risk = 0.49
(95% CI, 0.29 to 0.83). Derived from corrected table in JAMA 1992; 267(17): 2330.
TABLE 48.4
Trial of Hypertension Prevention, Phase 1: Effect of Weight
Change on Blood Pressure Reduction at 18 Months by Gender
Quintile of Weight Change, kg
<-9.5 -9.5 to <-4.5 -4.5 to <-2.0 -2.0 to <1.0 ≥1.0
TABLE 48.5
Baseline Characteristics and Outcomes of Trials of Hypertension Prevention (Phase II)
Sodium
Weight Loss Restriction Combined Usual Care
Number 595 594 597 596
Age, y 43.4 44.2 43.6 43.2
Male, % 63.0 64.8 68.8 68.3
White, % 78.0 81.1 78.4 79.5
Weight, kg 93.4 94.0 93.6 93.6
Baseline sodium excretion, mmol/d 180.9 186.1 179.3 188.0
Baseline blood pressure, mmHg 127.6/86.0 127.7/86.1 127.4/86.0 127.3/85.8
36 Month Followup
TABLE 48.6
Dietary Intervention Study in Hypertension: Demographics and Outcome
Obese Obese Obese Obese Lean Lean Lean
Drug Therapy No Drug Sodium Weight Drug Therapy No Drug Sodium
Control Control Restriction Reduction Control Control Restriction
Number 48 89 101 87 33 70 68
Age (Yr) 59 57 57 56 58 57 56
% Black 75 70 64 62 58 73 56
% Women 69 64 59 68 52 50 47
BP (mmHg) 131/80 128/80 128/81 128/81 126/80 124/80 127/81
∆Weight (kg) -0.46 -0.46 0 -4.0 +0.46 0 +0.46
∆ Urine Na+ -13 -10 -59 0 +2 -5 -44
(mEq/d)
% on no BP 0 35 45 60 0 45 53
Drugs
Derived from Tables 1, 2, and 3 in article by Langford, H.G., et al. JAMA 253: 657; 1985.
2705_frame_C48 Page 1006 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:49 PM
TABLE 48.7
Hypertension Control Program: Demographics and Outcome
No BP Drugs No BP Drugs BP Drugs
Nutritional Therapy No Nutritional Therapy No Nutritional Therapy
Number 97 44 48
Age (Yr) 57 55 55
% Female 35 39 38
% Black 11 21 15
BP (mmHg) 122/78 118/77 119/79
∆ Weight (kg)* -1.8‡ +2.0 +2.0
∆ Urinary Na+ (mEq/d) -60‡ +20 -5
∆ Ethanol (g/d)† -12.5 -7.1 -10.2
% Without BP Drugs 39%‡ 5% 0%
* Among obese subjects only; † Among drinkers only; ‡ p <0.001
Derived from tables and manuscript of Stamler, R. et al. JAMA 257: 1484; 1987.
loss in this group was 4.0 kg (p <0.05 versus the no-medication control group). Among
obese and nonobese persons who were sodium restricted, the mean decrease in urine
sodium output was –59 mEq/24 hr and –44 mEq/24 hr (each p <0.05 versus the no-
medication control group) after 56 weeks. The percent not taking antihypertensive med-
ication among obese individuals was 35.3% in the control group, 44.9% in the sodium
restricted group, and 59.5% in weight loss group (p = 0.0015 versus control). In the lean
group, the percent not taking antihypertensive medication was 45% in the control group
and 53.4% in the sodium-restricted group (not significantly different).
The primary endpoint was the percentage of subjects remaining hypertensive in the
intervention versus the control group.
As shown in Table 48.7, in the nutritional intervention group, weight decreased (p
<0.001) and sodium output increased (p <0.001) significantly after four years. 39% of the
nutritional therapy group were maintained on no drug therapy compared to only 5% of
the control group (p <0.001).
TABLE 48.8
Trial of Antihypertensive Intervention and Management: Change in Blood
Pressure from Baseline by Treatment Group at Six Months
Usual Diet Weight Loss Low Na+/High K+
Placebo -10.34/-7.96 (n = 90) -11.49/-8.78 (n = 90) -8.66/-7.91 (n = 79)
Chlorthalidone -17.41/-10.78 (n = 87) -21.72/-15.06 (n = 87) -19.51/-12.18 (n = 89)
Atenolol -15.06/-12.43 (n = 87) -18.11/-14.81 (n = 88) -18.29/-12.76 (n = 90)
Derived from Tables 2 and 3 from Langford, H.G. et al. Hypertension 17: 210; 1991.
tional counseling weekly for 10 weeks, and individually thereafter every 6 to 12 weeks.
There was no change in the drugs or their dosages during the first six months of the trial
unless critical diastolic blood pressures were reached (treatment crossovers). Change in
diastolic blood pressure treatment failure (as assessed by the need to increase drug treat-
ment), quality of life, and calculated cardiovascular risk were assessed.
Table 48.8 shows the change in systolic and diastolic blood pressure from baseline to six
months by treatment group. In the weight loss group, the average decrease in weight was
4.5 kg after six months. Weight loss was more effective than usual diet (p = 0.001) or the
low sodium/high potassium diet (p = 0.019) in lowering diastolic blood pressure. Weight
loss in combination with either a diuretic (–4.3 mmHg, p = 0.002), added significantly to
blood pressure reduction compared to usual diet with a diuretic. The combination of weight
loss with a β-blocker (–2.4 mmHg, p = 0.07) did not add to the effect of the drug alone.
45% of the weight loss cohort lost ≥4.5 kg. For patients who were not treatment cross-
overs, placebo and usual diet (n = 71) was associated with a 7 mmHg decrease in blood
pressure and a 0.63 kg change in weight, and was less effective than placebo with >4.5
kg weight loss and diastolic blood pressure decrease of 11.6 mmHg (p <.01). There was a
graded relationship with the amount of weight reduction and blood pressure decrease:
<2.25 kg, –6.9 mmHg; –2.25 to 4.5 kg, –8.9 mmHg; and >4.5 kg, –11.6 mmHg. The change
in diastolic blood pressure inversely correlated with the baseline plasma renin indexed to
the 24-hour urinary sodium in the weight loss diet group.7 In fact, the change in diastolic
blood pressure with >4.5 kg weight change is comparable to low-dose drug therapy as
seen in Table 48.9. After 24 months, there was gradual return of weight toward the
baseline.8 Among the weight-loss diet patients, the least mean change in weight occurred
among atenolol-treated subjects. In fact, among atenolol-treated subjects assigned to usual
diet or electrolyte modification, there was a mean weight gain. The 5-year incidence of
treatment failure was lower in the weight loss group (49.8 per 100 subjects) than in the
usual diet group (56.7 per 100 subjects).9
TABLE 48.9
Trial of Antihypertensive Intervention and
Management: Change in Diastolic Blood Pressure with
>4.5 kg Weight Change — Comparable to Low-Dose
Drug Therapy
Usual Diet ≥4.5 kg Weight Loss
Placebo -7.0 (n = 71) -11.6 (n = 33)*
Chlorthalidone -11.1 (n = 80) -15.3 (n = 53)†
Atenolol -12.4 (n = 79) -18.4 (n = 26)‡
* p <0.01, † p = .002, and ‡ p = 0.0005 compared to usual diet.
Derived from Figures 2 and 3 from Wassertheil-Smoller, S. et
al. Arch Intern Med 152: 131; 1992.
2705_frame_C48 Page 1008 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:49 PM
In the low sodium/high potassium group, the average decrease in urinary sodium was
27.4 mmol/d and the average increase in urinary potassium 10.9 mmol/d. The effect on
blood pressure of the low sodium/high potassium diet did not differ from that of the
usual diet (p = 0.347) on blood pressure. The low sodium/high potassium diet did not
further lower diastolic blood pressure, but the baseline urinary sodium excretion was
already relatively low (133 mmol/d). However, in the placebo group, when urinary
sodium excretion ≤70 mEq/d was achieved, systolic and diastolic blood pressure reduction
was greater than in the usual diet group (–23.7/–13.9 mmHg versus –9.6/–7.0 mmHg,
each p <0.005).10
After 3 years, compared to the usual diet, the net difference of urinary sodium excre-
tion reduction was 30 mmol/d and urinary potassium excretion augmentation was
11 mmol/d.11 There was a 41% decrease (p = 0.01) in the risk of treatment failure for
women and 34% decrease (p = 0.03) among less obese patients. After 3.5 years among
patients assigned to low sodium/high potassium diet, treatment failures occurred in
68% of placebo-, 47% of diuretic-, and 35% of β-blocker-assigned subjects.
Quality of life was improved with weight reduction.12 Weight reduction significantly
reduced symptoms of physical problems, especially sexual problems, and improved sat-
isfaction with physical health. Weight loss improved the erectile dysfunction reported with
chlorthalidone and usual diet (12.1 versus 26.2%).13 Weight reduction reduced symptoms
of sexual problems in both men and women significantly. The low sodium/high potassium
diet with placebo was associated with greater fatigue (34.3%) than was either usual diet
(18.1%, p = 0.04) or weight reduction (14.6%, p = 0.009). The electrolyte intervention group
in combination with chlorthalidone (32.0%, p = 0.04) was associated with more sleep
disturbances than chlorthalidone versus usual diet (16%). A nonsignificant (p = 0.07)
similar trend was observed with atenolol.
Overall calculated cardiovascular risk worsened with chlorthalidone therapy in the
usual diet group at six months due to the changes in cholesterol and glucose.14 Those
persons treated with atenolol or weight reduction showed the lowest relative risk.
subjects; however, the combined intervention was not more effective than either single
intervention. Predictors of successful long-term withdrawal of pharmacologic treatment
include lower baseline systolic blood pressure, shorter duration of hypertension or drug
treatment, and absence of a history of cardiovascular disease.16
from high to intermediate sodium intake in the DASH group. The benefit of the DASH
diet over the control diet was confirmed by the change in blood pressure in the high (–5.9/
–2.9 mmHg), intermediate (–5.0/–2.5 mmHg), and low sodium intake (-2.2/-1.0 mmHg)
groups. The greatest benefit was seen in hypertensive subjects, African Americans, and
women. There was a less than additive effect of decreased sodium intake and DASH diet,
but a greater effect than either intervention individually.
Summary
The primary prevention trials prove that sodium restriction and weight reduction are
effective in reducing the rate of development of hypertension. However, the behavioral
changes are difficult to sustain over a 36-month period, and the treatment effects are
modest. Individual strategies of potassium, calcium, magnesium, or fish oil supplemen-
tation are not effective in nonhypertensive subjects in lowering blood pressure or prevent-
ing the development of hypertension.
The secondary prevention trials document a clear benefit for sodium restriction and
weight reduction in controlling blood pressure. However, the combination of weight
reduction and sodium restriction was not additive. Weight loss was additive to diuretic
therapy and improved quality of life, including sexual dysfunction. Although individual
dietary components of potassium, calcium, magnesium, and fish oil supplementation have
not been successful strategies for primary prevention, the DASH feeding study, which
reduced intake of total fat, total cholesterol, and saturated fat, and increased protein, fiber,
fruit, and vegetable intake, demonstrates the potential that can be achieved with nonp-
harmacological interventions rich in these individual components.
References
1. Stamler R, Stamler J, Gosch FC, et al. JAMA, 262: 1801; 1989.
2. Arch Intern Med 150: 153; 1990.
3. JAMA 267: 1213; 1992.
4. Arch Intern Med 157(6): 657; 1997.
5. Langford HG, Blaufox MD, Oberman A, et al. JAMA 253: 657; 1985.
6. Langford HG, Davis BR, Blaufox D, et al. Hypertension 17: 210; 1991.
7. Blaufox MD, Lee HB, Davis B, et al. JAMA 267: 1221; 1992.
8. Davis BR, Oberman A, Blaufox MD, et al. Hypertension 19: 393; 1992.
9. Davis BR, Blaufox MD, Oberman A, et al. Arch Intern Med 153: 1773; 1993.
10. Wassertheil-Smoller S, Blaufox MD, Oberman AS, et al. Arch Intern Med 152(1): 131, 1992.
11. Davis BR, Oberman A, Blaufox MD, et al. Am J Hypertens 7: 926; 1994.
12. Wassertheil-Smoller S, Blaufox MD, Oberman A, et al. Ann Intern Med 114: 613; 1991.
13. Wassertheil-Smoller S, Oberman A, Blaufox MD, et al. Am J Hypertens 5: 37; 1992.
14. Oberman A, Wassertheil-Smoller S, Langford HG, et al. Ann Intern Med 112: 89; 1990.
15. Whelton PK, Appel LJ, Espeland MA, et al. JAMA 279: 839; 1998.
16. Espeland MA, Whelton PK, Kostis JB, et al. Arch Fam Med 8: 228; 1999.
17. Appel LJ, Moore TJ, Obarzanek E, et al. N Engl J Med 336: 1117; 1997.
18. Svetkey LP, Simons-Morton D, Vollmer WM, et al. Arch Intern Med 159: 285; 1999.
19. __________ Arch Intern Med 153: 186; 1993.
20. Stamler R, Stamler J, Grimm R, et al. JAMA 257: 1484; 1987.
21. Sacks FM, Svetkey LP, Vollmer WM, et al. N Engl J Med 344: 3; 2001.
2705_frame_C49 Page 1011 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:50 PM
49
Chemoprevention of Cancer in Humans
by Dietary Means
This section will attempt to describe succinctly the basis for prevention of cancer by dietary
means. An understanding of the processes involved in carcinogenesis is vital to any efforts
in prevention. Reference 1 provides information on the metabolic activation of chemical
carcinogens to the ultimate forms, which interact with the genetic material of the cell. In
addition, the separate stages in carcinogenesis are described; namely, initiation or the first
step, promotion or enhancement of the process, and progression or increased growth and
expansion of the cancerous cells. Examples of how the different stages can be inhibited
or altered are provided.
Diet or nutrition is an essential part of life, for it furnishes the food elements needed to
sustain life, wards off some disease conditions, and helps insure a reasonable level of well
being. The choices we make for our diets can have an appreciable impact on our health
and vigor. Balanced and varied diets of natural foodstuffs, high in whole-grain products,
fruits, and vegetables, are more likely to enhance our health than diets of highly refined
foods. For a proper balance, various macronutrients, vitamins, minerals, and even non-
nutritive food constituents are necessary, as discussed herewith.
Macronutrients
Carbohydrates
Carbohydrates, either simple sugars or starches, are formed in plants through the process
of photosynthesis from carbon dioxide and water, and thus represent the means by which
the energy from the sun is converted into food. The simple sugars of dietary carbohydrates
are mono- and disaccharides such as glucose, sucrose, and fructose. Oligo and higher
polysaccharides, which include both starch and non-starch polysaccharides constitute the
major portion of dietary fiber. Starch occurs in cereals, legumes, roots, tubers, plantains,
and bananas; it is the energy source for plants, equivalent to liver glycogen in animals.
Starch which is resistant to digestion in the small intestine occurs in whole grains,
legumes, and potatoes, for example. This resistant starch is metabolized by the bacteria in
the large intestine to compounds which are important for both the growth of endogeneous
bacteria and for colonic epithelial cell proliferation. Nonstarch polysaccharides, along with
0-8493-2705-9/01/$0.00+$1.50
© 2002 by CRC Press LLC 1011
2705_frame_C49 Page 1012 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:50 PM
lignan from plant cell walls comprise dietary fiber, which plays an important role in
regulation of stool bulk and weight. Dietary fiber is considered to have a preventative
effect against colorectal cancer, since by increasing stool bulk, it dilutes any toxic material.2
Dietary carbohydrates should account for about 40 to 85% of total energy. Diets outside
these guidelines may be lacking in other needed constituents.3 Preferably, dietary carbo-
hydrates should include high fiber sources, since besides decreasing the risk of colorectal
cancer, there may be a preventative action for pancreatic and breast cancer. Conversely,
high starch diets or those high in refined starch may increase risk for stomach cancer.
Thus, the type of dietary carbohydrate can either be beneficial or deleterious with respect
to cancer risk.
Fats
Fats, often maligned as relatively undesirable dietary constituents, are nevertheless essen-
tial components of food. They are necessary building blocks for biological membranes,
have a high nutritive value, are a source of certain essential fatty acids and vitamins,
impart a pleasant feel to foods, solubilize or carry many of the flavor components of foods,
and serve as an energy storage depot. Chemically, fats are composed chiefly of the tri-
esters of long-chain aliphatic carboxylic acids with glycerol, along with minor amounts
of free acids and mono- and diacylglycerols. The composition of fat is affected by the
source — animal or vegetable, growth environment, type of food if from an animal, climate,
and location.
During the digestive process, fats are hydrolyzed by lipases to the respective acids which
serve as an energy source. The major acids from most domestic food animals are stearic,
palmitic, and oleic acids, while plant fats yield more of the unsaturated acids such as oleic,
linoleic, and linolenic. Fish oils, although containing some palmitic and stearic acids, have
varying amounts of other unsaturated fatty acids. As for nomenclature, the double bond
position is determined by counting from the methyl end of the aliphatic chain, using the
notation Ω (omega). Fatty acids from fish contain large amounts of Ω-3 fatty acids; those
from plants contain more of the Ω-6 type. The “shorthand” description of the fatty acid
depicts the number of carbon atoms in the chain and the number, positions, and config-
urations (cis/trans) of the double bonds (see Table 49.1).
The acids derived from fats or oils, besides being energy sources, have a role in enhanc-
ing or promoting, and suppressing or inhibiting, the processes involved with carcinogen-
esis. Generally, oleic acid and the Ω-3 unsaturated acids from fish oils appear to suppress
neoplastic effects, both in experimental and epidemiologic studies. Although epidemio-
logic studies cannot be controlled to the extent of animal studies, they indicate that
populations consuming diets richer in olive oil have a lower breast cancer incidence.4,5 In
some cases, higher fish consumption was associated with possibly decreased risk for
cancer of the larynx, pharynx, liver, colon, endometrium, and kidney.6,7 There are many
confounding factors in such studies, but the indications are that olive and fish oils are
beneficial, while the saturated fats from most meats and some of the Ω-6 unsaturated fats
from many oilseeds may enhance the action of exogenous or endogenous carcinogens.
An additional fatty acid with antimutagenic and anticarcinogenic effects in animal
systems is conjugated linoleic acid (CLA), a mixture of positional isomers of linoleic acid
where the double bonds are in positions 9 and 11 or 10 and 12 along the carbon chain.
Since the bonds can be in the cis or trans configuration, eight isomers are possible. CLA
was originally identified in grilled ground beef, but it has also been found in meat from
other ruminants, and in dairy products such as cheese. In animal experiments, CLA has
been effective as an inhibitor of tumors from application of polycyclic aromatic hydrocar-
bons, in decreasing the action of tumor promoters, decreasing cell proliferation, reducing
2705_frame_C49 Page 1013 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:50 PM
TABLE 49.1
Typical Dietary Fatty Acids
Name Melting
Designation Structure Systematic Common Point(°C)
4:0 H3C(CH2)2 COOH Butanoic Butyric acid -7.9
5:0 H3C(CH2)3 COOH Pentanoic Valeric -34.5
6:0 H3C(CH2)4 COOH Hexanoic Caproic -3.9
7:0 H3C(CH2)5 COOH Heptanoic Enanthoic -7.5
8:0 H3C(CH2)6 COOH Octanoic Caprylic 16.3
9:0 H3C(CH2)7 COOH Nonanoic Pelargonic 12.4
10:0 H3C(CH2)8 COOH Decanoic Capric 31.3
12:0 H3C(CH2)10 COOH Dodecanoic Lauric 44.0
14:0 H3C(CH2)12 COOH Tetradecanoic Myristic 54.4
15:0 H3C(CH2)13 COOH Pentadecanoic Pentadecylic 52.1
16:0 H3C(CH2)14 COOH Hexadecanoic Palmitic 62.9
17:0 H3C(CH2)15 COOH Heptadecanoic Margaric 61.3
18:0 H3C(CH2)16 COOH Octadecanoic Stearic 69.6
20:0 H3C(CH2)18 COOH Eicosanoic Arachidic 75.4
22:0 H3C(CH2)20 COOH Docosanoic Behenic 80.0
24:0 H3C(CH2)22 COOH Tetracasonoic Lignoceric 84.2
26:0 H3C(CH2)24 COOH Hexacosanoic Cerotic 87.7
18:1 (9) CH3(CH2)7 CH=CH-(CH2)7 COOH Oleic 13.4
22:1 (13) CH3(CH2)7 CH=CH-(CH2)11 COOH Erucic 34.7
18:2 (9,12) CH3(CH2)4-(CH=CH-CH2)2 (CH2)6 COOH Linoleic -5.0
18:3 (6,9,12) CH3(CH2)4-(CH=CH-CH2)3 (CH2)3 COOH γ-Linoleic
20:4 (5,8,11,14) CH3(CH2)4-(CH=CH-CH2)4 (CH2)2 COOH Arachidonic -49.5
18:1 (tr 9) CH3(CH2)7 CH=CH (CH2)7 COOH Elaidic 46.0
18:3 (9,12,15) CH3-CH2 (CH=CH-CH2)3 (CH2) 6 COOH α-Linolenic -11.0
From CRC Handbook of Chemistry and Physics, D.R. Lide, Ed., 80th ed., 1999-2000.
the activation of heterocyclic amine carcinogens for some organ sites but not others, and
modulating the action of protein kinase C proteins involved in signal transduction.8,9 CLA
was effective at a dietary level of 0.1%, one-hundredfold less than the level of dietary fish
oil needed to inhibit animal tumors. Despite the effectiveness in both animal and cell
culture studies, CLA as such has not been investigated in any sizable population studies.
A controversial aspect of the fatty acid situation relates to trans fatty acids. These
compounds, where the hydrogens are on opposite sides of the carbons in the double
bonds, are linear, akin to the shape of saturated fatty acids. Although trans fatty acids
occur in nature in plants and in milk and meat from ruminants, the main source of dietary
intake is through partial hydrogenation of vegetable oils, which have been used in mar-
garine, salad oils, shortenings, and cooking fats for most of this century. Animal studies
have shown that diets with up to 35% trans fat had no effect on growth or reproduction,
but like natural saturated fats, they increased blood cholesterol levels. Epidemiological
studies are controversial, but they have not shown untoward effects of trans fatty acids
if used prudently.10,11
Thus, monounsaturated dietary fatty acids and perhaps the Ω-3 unsaturated acids found
in fish oils may have a suppressing action against certain human cancers. Nevertheless,
even such advantageous fats should be used prudently.12,13
Protein
Proteins are complex molecules comprising combinations of amino acids. They can be
of plant or animal origin; for example, about 20 to 35% of legumes is protein, 8 to 25%
2705_frame_C49 Page 1014 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:50 PM
of nuts and seeds, 8 to 16% of cereals, 10 to 20% of meat and fish, 15% of eggs, 3.5% of
milk, and 13% of vegetables. Proteins are important nutritionally, as they supply the
necessary building blocks for protein biosynthesis in specific organisms, contribute to
the physical properties of food, and are either part of the flavor of food or are the
precursors for flavor components formed during thermal or enzymatic reactions occur-
ring during food processing.
Protein intake usually varies between 10 and 18% of total energy in different countries,
and the composition varies depending whether animal or vegetable proteins are con-
sumed.14 There are no definitive data in humans indicating an association between cancer
risk and protein intake, due to the presence of other macroconstituents in protein sources
and various micronutrients. Dietary use of soy products has been suggestive for a lower
risk of breast and endometrial cancer in Asian women.15-17 Whether this is due to the soy
protein, or more likely, the flavonoids present in soy has not been exactly determined. In
animal studies, however, low protein diets tend to inhibit cancer, probably due to slower
growth, while a high intake tends to enhance cancer development at various sites.
Proteins themselves are hydrolyzed or split by proteases to the individual amino acids,
some of which are essential for mammalian growth and development while others are
not (Table 49.2). Proteins from animal sources (animals, birds, fish, shellfish) are considered
complete proteins since all the essential amino acids are present. Proteins from plant
sources are generally incomplete since one or the other of the essential amino acids is low.
However, combinations of plant proteins can usually supply all the essential amino acids;
for example, corn and beans or rice and beans.
Chemically, some of the amino acids have nonpolar uncharged side chains; others have
uncharged polar side chains, while still others have charged polar side chains (Table 49.2).
These side chains are involved in the reactions and configurations of amino acids and the
proteins from them.
Of all the amino acids, only methionine appears to be involved in physiological processes
which have a chemopreventive action against cancer. As its S-adenosyl derivative or SAM,
it is important, in conjunction with folate, in methylation of nucleic acid bases. Under- or
hypomethylation of these cell constituents has been associated with cancer in animal
studies. In animal experiments, deficiencies of SAM and folate led to tumors in rats and
mice. The data for the folate/SAM effect for decreasing colorectal cancer in humans are
suggestive but not definitive.18,19
Total Energy
Total energy denotes the sum of the kcalories from fats, proteins, and carbohydrates within
the diet of an individual. Energy requirements for each person vary with weight, height,
age, body mass, and physical activity. Persons involved in strenuous physical activity such
as competitive sports or mountain climbing obviously require more kcalories than those
with sedentary lifestyles. However, it is excess total energy that becomes a problem, for the
caloric matter in excess food is converted to fat and stored as such in the body. Fat, besides
being an energy storage depot, also serves as a repository for all lipid-soluble xenobiotics
and leads to greater conversion of endogenous steroids to estrogen. Estrogen, in turn, is a
risk factor associated with breast and endometrial cancers. Higher body mass index is linked
to an increased risk for cancer of the kidney and possibly gallbladder, colon, pancreas, and
prostate. Continued physical activity and a body mass index below average tend to a
decrease in cancer risk. Thus, continued physical activity tends to decrease cancer risk.20
Recommendations on a diet for prevention of cancer emphasize the need to rely on a
low-fat diet, since dietary fat contains more kcalories on a weight basis than other macro-
TABLE 49.2
Amino Acids
Non- Non-polar, Polar, Uncharged Charged
Name Formula Essential essential Uncharged Sidechain Sidechain Sidechain
Alanine (Ala) H2N-CH(CH3) COOH X X
Arginine (Arg) H2N-C(=NH) NH(CH2)3 CH(NH2) COOH X X
Asparagine (Asn) H2N-CH (COOH) CH2 CONH2 X X
Aspartic acid (Asp) H2N-CH (COOH) CH2 COOH X X
Cysteine (Cys) H2N-CH (CH2SH) COOH X X
2705_frame_C49 Page 1015 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:50 PM
nutrients. However, there is no clear association between dietary fat and cancer in all
cases. In one study, a higher risk of prostate cancer was associated with higher energy
intake, but there was no clear association between fat intake and the cancer risk.21 Con-
versely, in a study of skin cancer patients, reducing the level of dietary fat from 37 to 40%
to about 20% led to a significant reduction in the incidence of new actinic keratosis and
nonmelanoma skin cancer.22
Numerous animal studies have shown an inverse relationship between cancer incidence
and lower body weight due to a calorie-restricted diet.23 Such results may not apply to
humans, but it seems that obesity, a sign of excess total energy, should be avoided by
matching energy intake with expenditure and increasing physical activity.24,25
Vitamins
Vitamin A
Vitamin A or retinol is a fat-soluble vitamin with an unsaturated aliphatic chain. It has a
role in cell differentiation, in the protein metabolism of cells originating from the ectoderm,
and in formation of the chromosphere component of visual cycle chromoproteins. Lack
of retinol causes night blindness and thickening of the skin; conversely, excess vitamin A
is toxic. Except for the occurrence in milk fat, egg yolk, and liver of mammals, most vitamin
A is usually obtained from carotenoids. These precursors to vitamin A occur in vegetables,
mostly green, yellow, and dark green leafy vegetables, and many yellow or orange fruits.26
They are converted to vitamin A in the intestinal tract. Investigations in different animal
species have shown that retinol esters and beta-carotene can inhibit the effects of various
carcinogens through modulating DNA stability and decreasing lipid peroxidation.27
As for humans, there have been many epidemiologic studies of retinol and carotenes,
with conflicting results. There were no protective effects against melanoma of the skin,
suggestive but insufficient evidence for a decreased risk of bladder cancer with higher
dietary retinol, and no consistent protective effect for cancer of the lung, stomach, breast,
and cervix. An IARC (International Agency for Research on Cancer) group concluded that
there is little evidence that vitamin A intake has a substantial cancer-preventive effect.28
The situation differs for dietary carotenoids, where there is evidence for a modest to
weak protective action against lung cancer29-31 and a possible decreased risk for esoph-
ageal,32 stomach, colorectal, breast, and cervical cancers,33-35 as well as an effect against
cancers of the thyroid36 and salivary gland.37 Some epidemiologic surveys showed no such
protective action.38-41 Conversely, supplemental beta-carotene or megadose vitamin sup-
plementation did not lead to any benefit.42
The controversy about carotenoids was heightened when studies of Finnish smokers
receiving supplemental beta-carotene showed a higher death rate from lung cancer in
those receiving additional beta-carotene than in those who did not.43 Likewise, a combi-
nation study of beta-carotene with retinol had a similar trend, leading to termination of
these studies.44
Nevertheless, another carotenoid which is not a vitamin A precursor, namely lycopene,
responsible for the color of tomatoes, has shown a protective action against chemical
carcinogens in animals.45 Furthermore, epidemiologic studies have indicated that con-
2705_frame_C49 Page 1017 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:50 PM
sumption of tomato products, along with a modest amount of fat to facilitate absorption,
has been associated with a lower incidence of prostate46 and digestive tract cancers.47
On balance, although dietary supplements do not seem efficacious, obtaining vitamin
A or carotenoids through a diet with high levels of fruits and vegetables seems to afford
modest protection against cancer.
Vitamin B
Vitamin B actually consists of several water-soluble compounds without any apparent
structural similarity. All are necessary for proper physiological function; the requirements
for some are actually filled through synthesis by endogenous intestinal bacteria (Table
49.3). Riboflavin, one of the B vitamins, was shown relatively early to have a chemopre-
ventive action in rats fed a carcinogenic aminoazo dye. In this situation, as part of the
enzyme system that reductively split the dye to two non-effective groups, dietary ribofla-
vin definitely was a preventive agent.48 However, there are no epidemiologic studies that
indicate a connection between riboflavin and the prevention of cancer.
The situation differs for the B6, B12, and Bc vitamins, as these are involved in reactions
of amino acids and one–carbon units. Methionine, an essential amino acid, combines with
adenosine triphosphate to form S-adenosylmethionine (SAM); in turn, SAM transfers
methyl groups to adjacent molecules, thereby regulating expression of genes, preservation
of membranes, and the action of various hormones and neurotransmitters. After the
transfer of the methyl group, methionine becomes homocysteine, which has toxic effects
on the cardiovascular system and the developing fetus. In the presence of B12 and Bc,
homocysteine is remethylated to methionine, with folate being especially important. Vita-
min B6, in turn, is involved by converting homocysteine to glutathione, another protective
body constituent.
Both hypo- and hypermethylation of DNA are markers of the early stages of carcino-
genesis. By maintaining a normal methylation pattern, folic acid may aid in decreasing
cancer risk. For example, high dietary folate intake was weakly associated with decreased
risk of colon cancer.18,19
Vitamin C
Vitamin C has been widely studied, both in animal systems and in epidemiologic trials.
Vitamin C, or ascorbic acid, is involved in biological hydroxylation reactions and formation
of collagen in connective tissues, is important in wound healing, and is necessary for the
prevention of scurvy. Most animals, except for primates and guinea pigs, synthesize their
daily requirements, but for species which do not, the following foods are excellent sources:
citrus fruits, strawberries, currants, cabbages, and potatoes. A great excess of vitamin C
is not especially beneficial, as it is metabolized to oxalic acid, which is harmful to the
kidneys. The recommended daily intake is 175 to 400 mg.
In many animal experiments, vitamin C had a beneficial action against skin or mammary
cancer with dimethylbenz(a)anthracene, benzo(a)pyrene, or against estrogen-induced kid-
ney cancer in hamsters. The most effective action was against formation of N-nitrosamines
in vivo by combined administration of nitrite and a secondary amine; in this case, ascorbic
acid reacts preferentially with nitrite, yielding non-effective compounds. However, in other
cases vitamin C had no beneficial action.49,50
Epidemiologic trials have been less definitive. Most studies have shown some possible
decrease in cancers of many organ systems, but the effects were not dramatic. Thus, the
question of whether any protection was due solely to vitamin C or to a combined action
with other constituents of the diet cannot be answered definitely.38,51
1018
TABLE 49.3
B Vitamins
Vitamin Name Function Dietary Sources Result of Deficiency
B1 Thiamine Component of enzymes catalyzing oxidative Wheat germ, pork Beri-beri
decarboxylation reactions in Krebs cycle.
B2 Riboflavin Occurs in flavin mononucleotides (FMN) and Yeast , liver, egg yolk, milk, Chellosis (cracking of lips)
flavin adenine dinucleotide (FAD), prosthetic fish, green vegetables
groups in flavoproteins which are respiratory
enzymes.
B3 Niacin Component of nicotinamide adenine Wheat germ, yeast, liver Pellagra
2705_frame_C49 Page 1018 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:50 PM
Vitamin D
Vitamin D, a fat-soluble vitamin (cholecalciferol; D3), is formed naturally from cholesterol
in the skin through photolysis of 7-dehydrocholesterol under the influence of ultraviolet
light. The active metabolites are the 1, 25-dihydroxy- and 1-α-hydroxy-forms. These are
needed for intestinal resorption of calcium and for its deposition into the organic matrix
of the bones, which then triggers the biosynthesis of calcium-binding proteins. Deficiency
of vitamin D in children leads to increased excretion of calcium and phosphate, thus
impairing bone formation due to inadequate calcification of cartilage and bones — the
disease known as rickets. In adults, deficiency leads to softening and weakening of bones,
or osteomalacia. Some foods, especially milk, are fortified with vitamin D. Biochemically,
vitamin D interacts with the vitamin D receptor, a member of the steroid/thyroid/retinoic
acid family of nuclear receptors, which either induce or repress the expression of specific
genes. In turn, the protein products of these genes include calcium-binding proteins
(calbindins), bone matrix proteins (osteocalcin, osteopontin), digestive enzymes such as
alkaline phosphatase, and vitamin D-metabolizing enzymes.52
The effect of vitamin D is linked to the level of dietary calcium, while therapeutic use
is limited due to the calcemic effect of vitamin D, which causes calcium carbonate or
phosphate disorders in various organs.
Although vitamin D inhibits the growth of breast cancer cells in vitro, the exact mech-
anism has not been delineated; induction of apoptosis has been implicated.53 There is some
evidence from population studies that higher serum vitamin D was associated with lower
risk of breast cancer; likewise vitamin D may possibly reduce the risk of colorectal and
prostate cancer.53-55 As with other protective factors, the effect of vitamin D alone is
relatively small. Animal studies with vitamin D in the chemoprevention of cancer have
been few, and the results were positive in some cases, but not in others.50 However, both
animal and human studies lend support to the concept that increased intake of calcium
and vitamin D can reduce the risk of colon cancer associated with high dietary fat.56
Vitamin E
Vitamin E occurs in vegetable oils, especially the germ oils of cereals as tocopherols; of
all these, d-α-tocopherol has the greatest biological activity. Tocopherols are antioxidants,
and thus retard the oxidation of lipids or stabilize vitamin A, ubiquinones, hormones, and
various enzymes. Vitamin E protects polyunsaturated fatty acids against autooxidation,
protects against the immune response, and decreases the adherence of platelets to blood
vessel walls.57 In experiments using the hamster buccal pouch or other animal systems,
vitamin E had a protective action against chemical carcinogens, but the effect on colon
cancer in model animal systems was inconsistent.50 In humans, vitamin E possibly protects
against cancer of the mouth and pharynx, esophagus, pancreas, stomach, colon and rec-
tum, cervix, and prostate.58 For breast cancer, the epidemiologic results have been incon-
clusive.38,51,59 The mechanism of its action, apart from the antioxidant properties, has not
been elucidated.
Minerals
Calcium
Calcium, one of the more abundant essential minerals of the body, has several roles in
building and maintaining bones and teeth, in blood clotting, and in muscle contraction.
The usual requirement is 500 to 700 mg daily, with more necessary during pregnancy and
lactation, or in osteoporosis patients. The main dietary sources are milk and dairy products,
2705_frame_C49 Page 1020 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:50 PM
although some vegetables (watercress, kale, spinach, broccoli) have reasonable levels.
Supplementation of fruit juices with calcium has also become popular.
As for any chemopreventive action against cancer, a number of studies show a beneficial
effect, but conflicts remain. A protective association for pancreatic cancer was noted in
one study,60 and for colorectal cancer, the weight of the evidence points toward an inhib-
itory action, as do some animal tests.61-65 However, conflicting results were also noted.54
Higher intake of calcium may reduce breast cancer risks,51 but the data on prostate cancer
and calcium intake levels are conflicting. 55,66
Thus, for continued good health and body function, sufficient calcium is necessary.
Except for breast and colorectal cancer, the epidemiologic studies are not definitive on
whether calcium protects against other cancers.
Chromium
Chromium is an essential micronutrient for utilization of glucose, since it activates phos-
phoglucomutase and increases insulin activity. The daily intake varies depending on the
region of the country, with most foods containing some chromium; brown sugar is a good
source along with meat and seafood. Average intake is about 80 µg per day.67 Few, if any,
chemopreventive experiments have been done with chromium, since hexavalent chro-
mium has been considered a human carcinogen by the IARC.68 Animal tests with trivalent
chromium were negative, and surveys on chromium levels in diets and cancer incidence
are lacking. Nevertheless, a sufficient supply is needed for good health. Although no long-
term toxicity studies have been done, the use of chromium picolinate as a dietary supple-
ment has increased recently. Chromium thus represents a paradox — it is needed for
proper body function, but it presents a hazard under certain conditions.69
Iodine
Iodine is an essential element for the thyroid gland to biosynthesize the hormones thy-
roxine or tetraiodothyronine and triiodothyronine; the requirement is 100 to 200 µg/day.
A deficiency of iodine is associated with goiter or thyroid enlargement, which in turn is
associated with a higher risk of cancer. Many epidemiologic studies have confirmed such
an effect.1
The opposite, excess intake of iodine (18 to 1000 mg/day) can block uptake of iodine
by the thyroid, leading to elevated thyroid-stimulating hormone (TSH) levels and an
increased risk of thyroid cancer, as confirmed by animal experiments.1 Thus, a proper
balance in iodine uptake is required to maintain thyroid hormone levels and to decrease
the risk of thyroid cancer.
Iron
The essential micronutrient iron is mostly present in the body in the hemoglobin of the
blood and the myoglobin of muscle tissue. Iron also occurs in various oxidative enzymes
such as the P450s, peroxidases, catalases, hydroxylases, and flavine enzymes. The daily
requirement is about 1 to 3 mg, but an intake of about 15 to 25 mg is needed due to poor
absorption of iron. Good sources of iron are egg yolks, liver, wheat germ, lentils, and
spinach.70
Deficiency of iron leads to anemia and has been associated with cancer of the esophagus
and Plummer-Vinson syndrome.71 Conversely, the risk of various other types of cancer
increases in association with higher body iron stores. High serum ferritin levels were
associated with an increased risk of colorectal adenomas or cancer,72 and a high concen-
2705_frame_C49 Page 1021 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:50 PM
tration of iron in the liver was linked to a greater risk of liver cancer.73 The suggestion has
been made that high dietary intakes of iron enhance the generation of free radicals, which
are implicated in the initiation or promotion phases of carcinogenesis. As with other
essential micronutrients, a balance between a deficiency and an excess of iron is needed
to maintain good health.
Selenium
Selenium was recognized only about 30 years ago as an essential micronutrient, with a
recommended intake of 75 to 125 µg daily. It is a component of the glutathione peroxidase
system and occurs in organ meats, seafood, and in cereals and seeds at levels proportional
to those in the soil.74 An excess of selenium is toxic, resulting in damaged hooves and hair
in range animals. A deficiency leads to “white muscle disease” in calves and lambs; thus,
a proper balance in selenium levels is needed.
A survey of soil selenium levels in the U.S. versus cancer incidence pointed toward a
decreased risk in high selenium areas. Likewise, animal studies with selenium, mostly as
the selenite salt, have shown an inhibitory action against tumor development in various
organs.75 In humans, the data are often conflicting. High blood levels of selenium were
correlated with esophageal cancer in a Chinese population,76 while in other studies, high
body selenium was protective against stomach cancer. Data for liver and pancreatic cancer
are somewhat conflicting, but overall there was some inhibitory effect. Evidence for a
protective action against colorectal and breast cancer in humans is limited.
Consumption of high-selenium brewer’s yeast did not prevent the appearance of new
skin cancers in patients who already had developed basal cell and squamous cell skin
cancers, but total cancer incidence and deaths were lower in the selenium-using group.77
Furthermore, higher body stores of selenium were associated with reduced risk of
advanced prostate cancer.78 Accordingly, although selenium suppresses most types of
cancer and has a beneficial action, the toxicity of selenium limits the amount that can be
administered, and must be considered.
Zinc
Zinc is an essential trace element, as it is a component of several enzymes, including
alcohol, glutamate, lactate, and malate dehydrogenases, carboxypeptidases, and carbonic
anhydrase. In addition, several other enzymes are activated by zinc. Zinc deficiency causes
serious disorders, but high zinc intake is toxic. A normal diet usually provides the daily
requirement of a little over 10 mg (6 to 22 mg).79
Many animal experiments have shown that dietary zinc deficiency as well as zinc
supplementation can increase the incidence of some carcinogen-induced tumors and
decrease the incidence of others.80 However, there are no definitive epidemiologic studies
that associate human cancers with either a deficiency or an excess of zinc.
Nonnutritive Components
Fiber
Of all the nonnutritive food constituents, dietary fiber has been the one most extensively
investigated in humans. The evidence is suggestive that high dietary fiber decreases the
2705_frame_C49 Page 1022 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:50 PM
risk of stomach, pancreatic, and breast cancer, and is protective against colorectal (and
possibly endometrial) cancer,17,3981-83 although contradicting studies are also available.84
Animal studies showing the preventive effects of fiber against intestinal cancer predated
most epidemiologic studies by a decade or more.34,85-87
Several possible reasons exist for the beneficial action of dietary fiber. The fiber may
physically trap or attach to various deleterious substances ranging from carcinogen metab-
olites to certain bile acids, and sweep them out of the intestinal tract. Fiber may also trap
hormonal constituents and thus help decrease breast cancer. Further, some fiber is even-
tually fermented by intestinal bacteria to butyric acid, which regulates cell cycles.88,89
For continued good health and function of the digestive system, a reasonable level of
fiber in the diet is needed. Generally, this can be attained by eating a diet with whole grain
products and fruits and vegetables.
Indole-3-carbinol
Indole-3-carbinol (I3C) was one of the first specific cancer chemopreventive compounds
to be isolated from a cruciferous vegetable, namely Brussels sprouts.100 Many animal
studies have shown its ability to suppress the effects of chemical carcinogens, presumably
through its induction of detoxifying enzymes.101 There is a concern that under certain
2705_frame_C49 Page 1023 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:50 PM
conditions it may act as a promoting agent, and possible application of I3C as a chemo-
preventive agent in humans should be approached cautiously.102
Isothiocyanates
Isothiocyanates occur naturally in the form of their glucosinolate conjugates in a variety
of cruciferous vegetables. When the plant cells are damaged by cutting or chewing, the
enzyme myrosinase is released, which causes hydrolysis of the glucosinolates followed
by a rearrangement which affords the isothiocyanates. These are generally responsible for
the sharp taste associated with cruciferous vegetables, mustard, horseradish, and water-
cress. Animal studies with isothiocyanates have shown definitive and often quite specific
inhibition of the action of some carcinogens, largely through suppressing metabolism to
an activated intermediate.103
Epidemiologic studies focused specifically on isothiocyanates are lacking. However, one
trial showed that if confirmed smokers ate watercress, a source of phenethyl isothiocyan-
ate, the oxidative action of 4-(methylnitrosamino)-1-(3-pyridyl)-1-butanone (NNK), a car-
cinogen present in tobacco smoke, was suppressed and higher urinary levels of a
detoxification product of NNK were observed.104
Another unique isothiocyanate, sulforaphane or 1-isothiocyanate-4-methylsulfinyl-
butane, has been isolated from broccoli.105 Sulforaphorane induces P450 enzymes which
tend to detoxify carcinogens.106 It appears to be still another component of the protective
substances present in cruciferous vegetables.
Methods have recently been developed to quantify the metabolic endproducts of isothio-
cyanates.107,108 This should expedite the further application of these compounds in both
metabolic and epidemiologic studies.109
Sulfides
The chemical background for the numerous sulfides and their selenium analogs occurring
in “Allium” vegetables has been presented in several reviews. The substances involved are
various sulfur derivatives, and in series are: alkyl cysteine-S-oxides, sulfenic acids, and
thiosulfinate esters, which in turn afford alkyl and allyl sulfides and the selenium analogs.110
Animal tests have shown an inhibitory action of garlic and onion constituents, especially
diallyl sulfide, on experimental carcinogenesis of the skin, esophagus, and colon. Epide-
miologic studies have noted the same trend — that Allium vegetables protect against
stomach and colon cancer — but no such action was noted for breast and lung cancer.111
In one animal trial, garlic enriched with selenium had a chemopreventive action against
the effects of a mammary carcinogen.112 However, application of these results to the human
situation will require much further study.
Terpenoids
The terpenoid substances which occur in foods generally are the monoterpenes; examples
include carvone, p-cymene, geraniol, limonene, linalool, nerol, perillyl alcohol, pinene,
and thymol, among others. These substances occur in the essential oils of fruits and plants,
in citrus and other fruits, cherries, certain grapes, mint, dill, and caraway, and are largely
responsible for the pleasant fragrances of the fruits and plants.
The inhibitory action of fruit oil containing a monoterpene on the effect of a potent
chemical carcinogen was noted several decades ago. More recent efforts have confirmed
2705_frame_C49 Page 1024 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:50 PM
TABLE 49.4
Cancer Preventive Action of Vitamins
Vitamin Species Organ/Tissue
A Mouse Skin
Rat Mammary gland
Urinary bladder
B (folate) Mouse Lung
Human Colon (weakly)
C Mouse Colon
Lung
Rat Mammary gland
Colon
Liver
Hamster Kidney
D Mouse Skin
Rat Colon
Human Breast
Colon/rectum
Prostate
E Mouse Skin
Colon?
Rat Mammary gland
Stomach
Colon?
Ear duct
Liver
Hamster Buccal pouch
Human Mouth (possibly)
Pharynx (possibly)
Esophagus (possibly)
Pancreas (possibly)
Stomach (possibly)
Colon/rectum (possibly)
Cervix and prostate (possibly)
that d-limonene, the putative active component of sweet orange oil, has several inhibitory
mechanisms.113 It suppresses the activation of nitrosamines114 and azoxymethane,115
induces glutathione-S-transferase, and inhibits oncogene activation by depressing the
isoprenylation of oncogene products. The benefits of consuming citrus fruits may lie not
only in their vitamin C content, but also in the limonene contained therein. Another
monoterpene, perillyl alcohol, also inhibits protein isoprenylation, thus suppressing even-
tual oncogene activation,116 even in human-derived cell lines.117
Although other monoterpenes have not been investigated, it is gratifying to know that
these compounds with a pleasant fragrance are beneficial for health.
TABLE 49.5
Chemopreventive Action of Nonnutritive Principles of Foods
Substance Species Organ/Tissue
Fiber Human Stomach
Pancreas
Breast
Colon/rectum
Endometrium
Rat Colon
Flavonoids, isoflavones, polyphenols Human Breast
Endometrium
Rodents Mammary gland
Skin
Indole-3-carbinol Mouse Forestomach
Rat Mammary gland
Isothiocyanates Mouse Lung
Forestomach
Rat Mammary gland
Sulfides Human Stomach
Colon
Rat Esophagus
Lung
Thyroid
Mouse Forestomach
Lung
Colon
Terpenoids Mouse Forestomach
Lung
Rat Mammary gland
References
1. Food, Nutrition and the Prevention of Cancer: A Global Perspective. World Cancer Research
Fund/American Institute for Cancer Research, Washington, DC, 1997.
2. Food, Nutrition and the Prevention of Cancer: A Global Perspective. World Cancer Research
Fund/American Institute for Cancer Research, Washington, DC, 1997, p 377.
3. Food, Nutrition and the Prevention of Cancer: A Global Perspective. World Cancer Research
Fund/American Institute for Cancer Research, Washington, DC, 1997, p 521.
4. Trichopoulos A, Katsouyanni K, Stuver S, et al. J Natl Cancer Inst 87: 110; 1995.
5. LaVecchia C, Negri E, Franeschi S, et al. Cancer Causes Control 6: 545; 1995.
6. Caygill CP, Hill MJ, et al. Eur J Cancer Prev 4: 329; 1995.
7. Schloss I, Kidd MS, Tichelaar H, et al. S Afr Med J 87: 152; 1997.
8. Ip C, Chin SF, Scimeca JA, et al. Cancer Res 51: 6118; 1991.
9. Cesano A, Visonneau S, Scimeca JA, et al. Anticancer Res 18: 1429; 1998.
10. Leviton A, Shapiro SS, Gans K, et al. Am J Pub Health 85: 410; 1995.
11. Kritchevsky D. Chemistry & Industry 5: 565; 1996.
12. Cave WT, Jr. In Nutrition and Cancer Prevention, Watson RR, Mufti SI, Eds. CRC Press, Boca
Raton, 1996, p 84.
13. Reddy BS. In Nutrition and Cancer Prevention. Watson RR, Mufti SI, Eds. CRC Press, Boca Raton,
1996, p 105.
14. Food, Nutrition and the Prevention of Cancer: A Global Perspective. World Cancer Research
Fund/American Institute for Cancer Research, Washington, DC, 1997, p 395.
15. Wu AH, Ziegler RG, Nomura AM, et al. Am J Clin Nutr 68: 1437S; 1998.
2705_frame_C49 Page 1026 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:50 PM
16. Nagata C, Kabuto M, Kurisu Y, et al. Nutr Cancer 29: 228; 1997.
17. Goodman MT, Wilkens LR, Hankin JH, et al. Am J Epidemiol 146: 294; 1997.
18. Slattery ML, Schaffer D, Edwards SL, et al. Nutr Cancer 28: 52; 1997.
19. Ma J, Stampfer MJ, Giovannucci E, et al. Cancer Res 57: 1098; 1997.
20. Food, Nutrition and the Prevention of Cancer: A Global Perspective. World Cancer Research
Fund/American Institute for Cancer Research, Washington, DC, 1997, p 366.
21. Rohan TE, Howe GR, Burch JD, et al, Cancer Causes Control 6: 145; 1995.
22. Black HS. Mutat Res 422: 185; 1998.
23. Frame LT, Hart RW, Leakey JE. Environ. Health Perspect 106: 313S; 1998.
24. Goldin-Long P, Kreuser ED, Zunft HJ. Rec Results Cancer Res 142: 163; 1996.
25. Kritchevsky D. In Nutrition and Cancer Prevention, Watson RR, Mufti SI, Eds, CRC Press, Boca
Raton, 1996, p 91.
26. Yang Y, Huang CY, Peng SS, et al. Biomed Environ Sci 9: 386; 1996.
27. Duthie SJ, Collins AR, Duthie GG. Subcell Biochem 30: 181; 1998.
28. Vainio H, Rautalahti M. Cancer Epidemiol Biomarkers Prev 8: 107; 1999.
29. Nyberg F, Agrenius V, Svartengren K, et al. Int J Cancer 78: 430; 1998.
30. Ocke MC, Bueno-de-Mesquita HB, Feskens EJ, et al. Am J Epidemiol 145: 358; 1997.
31. Albanes D. Am J Clin Nutr 69: 1345S; 1999.
32. Zhang ZF, Kurtz RC, Yu GP, et al. Nutr Cancer 27: 298; 1997.
33. Longnecker MP, Newcomb PA, Mittendorf R, et al. Cancer Epidemiol Biomarkers Prev 6: 887; 1997.
34. Verhoeven DT, Assen N, Goldbohm RA, et al. Br J Cancer 75: 149; 1997.
35. Zhang S, Hunter DJ, Forman MR, et al. J Natl Cancer Inst 91: 547; 1999.
36. D’Avanzo B, Ron E, La Vecchia C, et al. Cancer 79: 2186; 1997.
37. Horn-Ross PL, Morrow M, Ljung BM. Am J Epidemiol 146: 171; 1997.
38. Kushi LH, Fee RM, Sellers TA, et al. Am J Epidemiol 144: 165; 1996.
39. MacLennan R, Macrae F, Bain C. J Natl Cancer Inst 87: 1733; 1995.
40. Flagg EW, Coates RJ, Greenberg RS. J Am Coll Nutr 14: 419; 1995.
41. van Poppel G. Eur J Clin Nutr 50(3): S57; 1996.
42. Rose RC. Med Hypotheses 51: 239; 1998.
43. Koo LC. Int J Cancer 10: 22; 1997.
44. Omenn GS, et al. N Engl J Med 334: 1150; 1996.
45. Krinsky NIT. Proc Soc Exp Biol Med 218: 95; 1998.
46. Giovannucci E, Clinton SK. Proc Soc Exp Biol Med 218: 129; 1998.
47. La Vecchia C. Proc Soc Exp Biol Med 218: 125; 1998.
48. Mueller GC, Miller JA. J Biol Chem 185: 145; 1950.
49. Mirvish SS. Eur J Cancer Prev 5(1): 131S; 1996.
50. Arcos JC, Argus MF, Woo YT, et al. Chemical Induction of Cancer, Modulation and Combination
Effects, Berkhauser, Table 2, 1995, p 326.
51. Franceshi S. Eur J Cancer Prev 6: 535; 1997.
52. Welsh J, Simboli-Campbell M, Narvaez CJ, et al. In Diet and Cancer, AICR, Washington, DC,
1995, p 45.
53. Giovannucci E. Cancer Causes Control 9: 567; 1998.
54. Pritchard RS, Baron JA, Gerhardsson de Verdier M. Cancer Epidemiol Biomarkers Prev 5: 897;
1996.
55. Chan JM, Giovannucci E, Anderson SO, et al. Cancer Causes Control 9: 559; 1998.
56. Newmark HL, Lipkin M. Cancer Res 52: 2067S; 1992.
57. Weber P, Bendich A, Machlin LJ. Nutrition 13: 450; 1997.
58. Moyad MA, Brumfield SK, Pienta KJ. Semin Urol Oncol 17: 85; 1999.
59. Kimmick GG, Bell RA, Bostick RM. Nutr Cancer 27: 109; 1997.
60. Farrow DC, Davis S. Am J Epidemiol 132: 423; 1990.
61. Lipkin M, Newmark H. J Cell Biochem 22: 65S; 1995.
62. Holt PR, Atillasoy EO, Gilman J, et al. J Am Med Assoc 280: 1095; 1998.
63. Hyman J, Baron JA, Dain BJ, et al. Cancer Epidemiol. Biomarkers Prev 7: 291; 1998.
64. Ghadirian P, Lacroix A, Maisonneuve P, et al. Cancer 80: 858; 1997.
2705_frame_C49 Page 1027 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:50 PM
109. Shapiro TA, Fahey JW, Wade KL, et al. Cancer Epidemiol Biomarkers Prev 7: 1091; 1998.
110. Block E. In Dietary Phytochemicals in Cancer Prevention and Treatment, AICR, Washington, DC,
1996, p 155.
111. Wargovich MJ, Uda N. In Dietary Phytochemicals in Cancer Prevention and Treatment, AICR,
Washington, DC, 1996, p 171.
112. Ip C, Lisk DJ. In Dietary Phytochemicals in Cancer Prevention and Treatment, AICR, Washington,
DC, 1996, p 179.
113. Arcos JC, Argus MF, Woo YT, et al. Chemical Induction of Cancer, Modulation and Combination
Effects, Berkhauser, 1995, p 106.
114. Wattenberg LW, Coccia JB. Carcinogenesis 12: 115; 1991.
115. Kawamori T, Tanaka T, Hirose Y, et al. Carcinogenesis 17: 369; 1996.
116. Crowell PL, Ayoubi AS, Burke YD. In Dietary Phytochemicals in Cancer Prevention and Treatment,
AICR, Washington, DC, 1996, p 131.
117. Hohl RJ. In Dietary Phytochemicals in Cancer Prevention and Treatment, AICR, Washington, DC,
1996, p 137.
2705_frame_C50 Page 1029 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:50 PM
50
Nutrition and Cancer Treatment
0-8493-2705-9/01/$0.00+$1.50
© 2002 by CRC Press LLC 1029
2705_frame_C50 Page 1030 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:50 PM
TABLE 50.1
Metabolic Abnormalities in Cancer Patients
Hypogonadism in male cancer patients7
Increased glucose production8,9
Increased protein catabolism10,11
Increased lipolysis and fatty acid oxidation12,13
Insulin resistance14,15
TABLE 50.2
Research Strategies to Counter Metabolic Abnormalities
Hydrazine sulfate to inhibit gluconeogenesis16
Anabolic androgens to counteract metabolic effects of hypogonadism17
Insulin supplementation to counteract apparent insulin resistance18
Based on autopsy studies performed in the 1920s19,20 and animal studies done in the
1950s21 it was postulated that tumors acted to siphon off needed energy and protein from
the host. In the 1970s and 1980s, specific abnormalities of intermediary metabolism were
identified in cancer patients that could account for the common observation that such
patients lost weight even in the face of apparently adequate nutrition. Studies conducted
in a number of laboratories, including our own, have demonstrated that maladaptive
metabolic abnormalities occur frequently in patients with cancer. In 1983, we demonstrated
that adequate energy and protein administered to six patients with active localized head
and neck cancer via forced continuous enteral alimentation under metabolic ward condi-
tions for 29 days failed to lead to significant weight gain.22 The mean nitrogen balance in
these patients is shown in Figure 50.1. The observed failure of these patients to gain weight
despite adequate caloric intake under metabolic ward conditions supports the concept
that malnourished cancer patients are hypermetabolic.
If metabolic abnormalities promote the development of malnutrition or interfere with
renutrition, then there should be some evidence of abnormally increased energy expen-
diture. A number of investigators have used indirect calorimetry and the abbreviated Weir
formula to calculate energy expenditure at rest, and then compared this to the basal energy
expenditure (BEE) determined using the Harris-Benedict formulas. Long et al.23 demon-
strated a mean difference of 2% when this comparison was performed in 20 normal
controls. In 1980, Bozetti et al.24 found that 60% of a group of patients with advanced
cancer had basal metabolic rates increased 20% above predicted. In 1983, Dempsey et al.25
studied energy expenditure in a group of 173 malnourished gastrointestinal (GI) cancer
patients. Fifty-eight percent had abnormal resting energy expenditure (REE) by indirect
calorimetry compared to BEE, but a greater percentage were hypometabolic rather than
hypermetabolic (36 versus 22%). Knox et al.26 studied 200 patients with a variety of cancers
and found abnormal energy metabolism in 59%, but found more hypometabolic than
hypermetabolic individuals (33 versus 26%). Figure 50.2 shows that while standard for-
mulae accurately predict metabolic rate in normal individuals, the measured metabolic
rates in patients with cancer have a much wider distribution.
Lean body mass rather than fat mass correlates with the individual variations observed
in measured REE. The hypothesis that the malnourished cancer patient may be hyper-
metabolic relative to the amount of lean body mass remaining has been examined. Peacock
et al.27 studied resting energy expenditure in non-cachectic patients with sarcomas. These
patients had no prior treatment, had large localized sarcomas, and had no weight loss or
history of decreased food intake. REE corrected for body cell mass (BCM) determined by
total body potassium counting or body surface area was significantly greater in male
2705_frame_C50 Page 1031 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:50 PM
11
10
9
8
7
6
Mean Nitrogen Balance (g/24hrs)
5
4
3
2
1
0
-1
-2
-3
-4
-5
10
12
14
16
18
20
22
24
26
4
Day
FIGURE 50.1
Mean nitrogen balance in grams per 24 hours in six patients with head and neck cancer receiving 1.25 × BEE
kcal for 5 days and 2.25 × BEE for 19 days as a continuous enteral infusion. (From Geber, D., Byerley, L.O., Chi,
J., et al. Cancer 58: 1867; 1986. With permission.)
40
Percentage of patients
30
Normals
20
10
Cancer patients
0
60 80 100 120 140 160 180
Measured resting energy expenditure as a percentage
of predicted energy expenditure
FIGURE 50.2
Measured resting energy expenditure as a percentage of predicted energy expenditure. (From Knox, L.S., Crosby,
L.O., Feurer, I.D., et al. Ann Surg 197: 152; 1983.
2705_frame_C50 Page 1032 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:50 PM
sarcoma patients compared to controls. This difference was due to both a decrease in
BCM and an increase in REE in these patients before the onset of weight loss. Tumors
have been demonstrated to increase the rate of glucose utilization in a number of tissues.28
Since there are only 1200 kcal stored in the body as liver and muscle glycogen, blood
glucose levels would be expected to fall. This does not occur since there is also an increase
in hepatic glucose production in cachectic and anorectic tumor-bearing animals and
humans. The regulation of protein metabolism is tightly linked to carbohydrate metabo-
lism, since these processes are critical to the normal adaptation to starvation or under-
feeding. During starvation there is a decrease in glucose production, protein synthesis,
and protein catabolism. The decrease in glucose production occurs as fat-derived fuels,
primarily ketone bodies, are used for energy production. While there are 54,000 kcal of
protein stored in the body cell mass, only about half of these are available for energy
production. In fact, depletion below 50% of body protein stores is incompatible with life.
Whole body protein breakdown is increased in lung cancer patients and has been shown
to correlate with the degree of malnutrition such that more malnourished patients have
greater elevations of their whole body protein breakdown rates expressed per kg of body
weight (Figure 50.3).11 The results of metabolic studies in lung cancer patients compared
7.0
6.0
5.0
Protein Turnover (gm/kg/day)
r= 0.69
4.0
3.0
2.0
1.0
0.0
60 70 80 90 100 110 120
FIGURE 50.3
Whole-body protein turnover determined by [U-14C] lysine infusion in the fasting state in g/kg/day versus
percentage of ideal body weight for height in non-oat cell lung cancer patients (●) and age-matched healthy
controls (). The correlation coefficient of the linear regression drawn (- - - -) is shown as r (p < 0.05). (From
Heber D, Chlebowski RT, Ishibashi DE, et al. Cancer Res 42: 4815, 1982. With permission.)
2705_frame_C50 Page 1033 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:50 PM
TABLE 50.3
Total Body Protein Turnover, Glucose Production, and 3-Methylhistidine
Excretion in the Fasting State on Day 5 of Constant Nitrogen and Kcalorie Intake
in Lung Cancer Patients Compared to Healthy Controls
Protein Turnover Glucose Production 3-Methylhistidine Excretion
Group (g/kg/day) (mg/kg/min) (µmol/g creatinine/day)
Control 2.12 ± 0.38 2.18 ± 0.06 71 ± 8
Lung Cancer 3.15 ± 0.51a,b 2.84 ± 0.16a 106 ± 11a
a p < 0.05 versus control subjects.
b Mean ± S.D.
to healthy controls are shown in Table 50.3. Muscle catabolism, measured by 3-methyl-
histidine excretion, was increased in lung cancer patients compared to that of healthy
controls. Methylhistidine excretion rates did not correlate with weight loss, percentage
of ideal body weight, or age in the lung cancer patients studied. Glucose production rates
were markedly increased in lung cancer patients compared with healthy controls, and
changes in glucose production rates in the cancer patients studied did not correlate with
weight loss, percent of ideal body weight, or age.
Hydrazine sulfate is a non-competitive inhibitor of gluconeogenesis. When this drug is
administered to lung cancer patients not only does whole body glucose production
decrease as expected, but there is also a decrease in whole body protein breakdown rates.29
Increases in glucose production are directly and quantitatively linked to increased protein
breakdown and changes in the circulating levels of individual glucogenic amino acids.
Table 50.4 shows the influence of hydrazine sulfate on lysine flux. At one month, there
TABLE 50.4
Whole Body Lysine Flux in Lung Cancer Patients
Lysine Flux (µmol/h)
Baseline 1 mo
Placebo Group
1 2172 2812
2 1869 2959
3 2373 2674
4 2772 2269
5 2758 3195
6 3542 3585
Mean (SD) 2580 (580) 2920 (450)a,b
Hydrazine Treated
7 2675 1146
8 2522 2119
9 2666 3129
10 1808 1217
11 2264 1438
12 3114 2006
Mean (SD) 2510 (440) 1840 (750)b,c
a p = 0.08; b p < 0.05, paired t-tests with baseline; c p <
0.01 by combined paired t-test both groups
2705_frame_C50 Page 1034 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:50 PM
was a significant reduction in the hydrazine group and a nonsignificant increase in the
placebo group.
Both anorexia and abnormal metabolic adaptations to starvation play a role in the
genesis of cancer cachexia. Anorexia has been given less attention than the metabolic
abnormalities of increased glucose production, protein breakdown, and lipolysis. The
tumor-bearing host does not adapt to decreased food intake normally, but studies of
glucoregulatory and thyroid hormones fail to reveal systematic abnormalities other than
insulin resistance which could impair renutrition. The immune response of the host to the
tumor results in the local and perhaps systemic release of cytokines with potent metabolic
effects. In fact, TNF-α has been shown to cause all of the metabolic abnormalities charac-
teristic of cancer cachexia. It is possible that other cytokines may also participate in the
pathogenesis of cancer cachexia. The study of the mechanisms of action of these cytokines
and their interactions with cellular and soluble receptors may lead to improved strategies
for the treatment of this perplexing clinical problem.
TABLE 50.5
Nutritional Assessment Factors in the Cancer Patient
Involuntary weight loss
Comparison to usual, pre-illness, or ideal body weight
Anorexia and decreased food intake
Anthropometric measures
Biochemical and cellular biomarkers
2705_frame_C50 Page 1035 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:50 PM
range may help us determine the patient’s nutritional status. An additional variable for
consideration is usual or pre-illness weight. Therefore, both information on percent ideal
weight and percent usual or pre-illness weight should be collected on all patients.There
are healthy individuals who are below their projected weight for many years. From a
clinical standpoint, stable weight and an adequate diet often equate with good nutrition
even if the individual is below the ideal body weight range.
Anorexia and decreased food intake have long been recognized as key causes of under-
nutrition in patients with malignancies.33,34 Anorexia is a treatable symptom of cancer
which, if left untreated, leads to significant patient discomfort in addition to malnutrition.35
This information can be obtained by simply questioning the patient about a subjective
loss of appetite and decrease in food intake. In order to further quantify these changes,
we ask the patient to rate the appetite level from 0 to 7 (0 = no appetite; 1 = very poor; 2
= poor; 3 = fair; 4 = good; 5 = very good; 6 = excellent; 7 = always hungry). We also ask
whether the amount eaten is enough to meet the patient’s needs (0 = not at all; 1 = less
than enough; 2 = enough; 3 = more than enough).
Detailed anthropometric measurements (such as mid-arm circumference and triceps
skin fold) have long been utilized to determine skeletal muscle mass and nutritional
status.36 Although the value of these measurements can be limited if done in the hospital
setting, serial measurements by the same professional in the outpatient clinic can help
assess the patient’s ongoing nutritional state. Problems with these measurements include
interobserver variability and interference by edema or patient positioning. The decision
to do these measurements should be individualized according to the acuteness of the
underlying process, the availability of trained personnel, and intervention goals. It should
be noted that muscle wasting and loss of adipose tissue reserves seen on physical exam-
ination are important but late signs of undernutrition. Ideally, early diagnosis and inter-
vention should be directed at avoiding this advanced stage of undernutrition or cachexia.
The role of laboratory parameters, such as albumin or prealbumin level, transferrin, or
total lymphocyte count, are less well defined in patients with cancer. These and other tests
can be useful to assess protein depletion, but are difficult to interpret in patients with
advanced cancer who often have metastases to visceral sites with organ dysfunction as
well as metabolic and immunologic derangements due to cancer therapy.
Routine chemistry panels include albumin levels, which can be a useful indication of
nutritional state. Albumin has a half-life in the circulation of about three weeks. Hypoal-
buminemia can result from malnutrition but is also associated with liver disease, dissem-
inated malignancies, protein-losing enteropathy, nephrotic syndrome, and conditions
leading to expanded plasma volume such as congestive heart failure.
Prealbumin has a half-life of just under two days, and its level may increase with the
use of steroid hormones and can be decreased by liver disease, disseminated malignancies,
nephrotic syndrome, inflammatory bowel disease, the use of salicylates, or malnutrition.37,38
Transferrin can be measured by the transferrin antigen assay; the iron binding capacity
provides with roughly equivalent results. Transferrin has a half-life of about one week, and
it may increase with storage iron depletion or the use of hormonal agents and decrease with
infection, malignancy, inflammation, liver disease, nephrotic syndrome, or malnutrition.39
Absolute lymphocyte counts can be reduced by malnutrition as well as a variety of other
factors. More sophisticated tests (bioimpedance, total body K, basal metabolic rate [BMR]
and others) are clinical research procedures.40
In many instances, a brief clinical nutritional assessment based on the degree of weight
loss from usual or pre-illness weight, current weight as a percentage of usual and ideal
body weight, and dietary history is sufficient to determine the clinical situation and
consider potential interventions. We therefore reserve the use of anthropometric and
2705_frame_C50 Page 1036 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:50 PM
TABLE 50.6
Patient Characteristics in 644 Consecutive Cancer Patients*
Characteristic Percent of Patients
Age <65 45
Age ≥65 55
Sex
Women 53
Men 47
Type of Cancer
Breast 16
Colon/rectum 14
Leukemia/lymphoma 13
Lung/non-small cell 14
Prostate 5
Stomach 4
Head/neck squamous 4
Ovary 3
Kidney/urinary bladder 3
Lung/small cell 2
All others 22
Stage of Cancer
Metastatic 52
Non-metastatic 48
* Seen at Pacific Shores Medical Group and St. Mary Medical
Center, Long Beach, California.
TABLE 50.7
Nutritional Variables in 644 Consecutive Cancer Patients*
All Stages Patients with Metastases
Variable (n = 644) (n = 377)
Decreased appetite 54% 59%
Decreased food intake 61% 67%
Underweight 49% 54%
Normal weight 37% 33%
Overweight 14% 13%
Weight loss
Any 74% 76%
Up to 5% 15% 15%
>5 to <10% 22% 20%
10-20% 26% 27%
None 26% 24%
* Seen at Pacific Shores Medical Group and St. Mary Medical Cen-
ter, Long Beach, California.
metastatic disease. Ideal body weight range was calculated using the GRC tables. The
vast majority of patients sustained the weight loss shown within a period of six months
from cancer diagnosis.
As shown in Table 50.7, the incidence of weight loss is very high in all patients, but
particularly in those over the age of 65. Thus, 72% of all patients 65 or older with metastatic
cancer had some degree of weight loss; 56% were underweight, 54% had decreased
appetite, and 61% reported a decrease in food intake. Thirty-eight percent of patients 65
or older with metastatic disease had weight loss of 10% or more of their usual body weight.
These data suggest that undernutrition at various stages is highly prevalent among oncol-
ogy patients, particularly in the older population. Attention to the nutritional status of
patients may afford the clinician opportunities for early diagnosis and intervention.
TABLE 50.8
Benefits, Methodology, and Risks of Nutrition Interventions
Benefits Methodology Risks
1. Counseling Patient satisfaction 1 initial and 2 follow-up visits by None
Nutrition maintenance dietitian
Adherence to protocols
2. Food Supplements Nutrition maintenance Limited risks: diarrhea, nausea
a. Home-made Avoid or delay need for more expensive a. Three 8-oz servings = 750 kcal/day a. Diarrhea with lactose intolerance
b. Commercial therapy b. Three 8-oz servings = 750-1080 kcal/ b. Patients may not like taste
day
2705_frame_C50 Page 1038 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:50 PM
3. Appetite Stimulants
a. Megestrol acetate oral suspension a. Improved appetite, weight, wellbeing, a. 200 mg/d, 1 month supply a. Impotence, vaginal bleeding, deep
b. Dronabinol quality of life 400 mg/d, 1 month supply vein thrombosis
c. Prednisone b. Improved appetite, no significant 800 mg/d, 1 month supply
weight change b. 2.5 mg/d, 1 month supply b. Euphoria, somnolence, dizziness,
c. Short-term (4 weeks) appetite 5 mg/d, 1 month supply confusion
stimulation (see text) c. 40 mg/d, 1 month supply c. Hypokalemia, muscle weakness,
cushingoid features, hyperglycemia,
immune suppression
4. Enteral nutrition Maintenance of nutrition via enteral Requires nasogastric, gastrostomy, or Aspiration, diarrhea, nausea, bloating,
route when oral route is not possible jejunostomy tube placement infection, bleeding
5. Home parenteral nutrition Maintenance of nutrition when no other Central catheter surgically placed; Catheter-related pneumothorax, sepsis,
alternative is appropriate; no evidence parenteral infusion equipment and thrombosis, bleeding; hepatic
of improved survival in end-stage parenteral formulas: dextrose (20-25% dysfunction, fluid and electrolyte
cancer w/w), crystalline amino acids (2-4% imbalance
w/w), lipid emulsions (500 cc/d →
500 cc/wk)
Handbook of Nutrition and Food
2705_frame_C50 Page 1039 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:50 PM
Food Supplements
Liquid concentrated food supplements provide high kcalorie and protein, low volume
nutrients, and are reviewed elsewhere.17 Instant breakfast and milk provide an inexpensive
and usually well-tolerated alternative. Commercial products may be more convenient and
better tolerated in those patients with lactose intolerance. Dietitians will help patients
select products on the basis of tolerance and palatability. These products are particularly
helpful when patients can not maintain an adequate intake through a regular diet but are
able to swallow and have a relatively intact GI tract.
Commercially prepared supplements are available in a variety of flavors (including
unflavored) and in a variety of nutrient compositions. Most commercially prepared sup-
plements are available in ready-to-drink eight-ounce cans or boxes and are usually lactose
free, which for the patients is often more acceptable due to the increased incidence of
perceived milk intolerance in this population. When patients have difficulty consuming
adequate volumes of enteral supplement, a high-caloric supplement containing 2 kcal/
ml (e.g., Isocal HCN [Mead Johnson] or Magnacal [Sherwood Medical]) can be used.
Homemade supplements can also be made with commercially available products com-
prising a dry milk base to which whole milk and flavoring is added for a nutrient-dense
2705_frame_C50 Page 1040 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:50 PM
TABLE 50.9
Foods Recommended to Increase Kcalorie and Protein Intake of the Patient with Cancer
Food Group Recommendations
Fruits and vegetables Fruit juice added to canned fruit; pureed fruit added to milk, cereals, pudding,
ice cream, gelatin; gelatin made with fruit juice to replace water; tender,
cooked vegetables (mashed white or sweet potatoes, squash, spinach, carrots);
vegetables added to soups and sauces; vegetables in cream or cheese sauces
Grains Hot cereals prepared with milk instead of water; high protein noodles; noodles
or rice in casseroles and soups; breaded and floured meats; bread or rice
pudding; dense breads (i.e., bagels) and dense cereals (granolas, mueslis)
Beverages Milk beverages; shakes made with fruit juices and sherbet when milk is not
tolerated
Milk and calcium equivalents Custards; milkshakes; ice cream; yogurt; cheeses; cheesecake; double-strength
milk (1 quart fluid milk mixed with 1 cup nonfat dry milk powder); cottage
cheese; flavored milk; pudding; commercial eggnog; cream soups; nonfat dry
milk powder added to puddings, soups, sauces and gravies, casseroles and
mixed dishes
Meat and protein equivalents Diced or ground meat; casseroles; smooth peanut butter; cheese; egg and egg
dishes; chopped, diced or puréed meats mixed with soups, sauces, and
gravies; fish, poultry, and vegetable protein meat substitutes; tuna, meat, or
cheese in cream sauces
Fats Margarine or oil added to vegetables, hot cereals, and casseroles; cream used
in place of milk or added to fruits and desserts; sour cream; salad dressings;
mayonnaise mixed with tuna, egg, chicken salad
Sweets Desserts made with dry milk powder, peanut butter, or eggs
beverage. Commercially prepared powdered breakfast drinks (e.g., Ultra Slim-Fast, Instant
Breakfast), to which whole milk is added, is an inexpensive effective supplement when
lactose intolerance is not an issue. These supplements have vitamin, mineral, kcalorie, fat,
carbohydrate, and protein content similar to most commercially prepared supplements.
An eight-ounce supplement varies in nutrient density from 240 to 480 kcals, 7 to 20
grams of protein, 5 to 19 grams of fat and 12 to 25% of the U.S. Recommended Dietary
Allowances (USRDA) for vitamins and minerals.
A nutritional supplement is advisable for patients whose GI tract is functional but who
are unable to obtain adequate nutrition from a regular diet. The volume and choice of
supplement is based on patients’ individual nutrient needs and preferences, and GI tol-
erance. Supplements with fiber, generally soy or oat fiber, are available and may be
beneficial to the patient who has diarrhea or constipation. Nutritional supplements are
generally well accepted and may offer relief to a patient who has difficulties eating solid
food. Tolerability can be enhanced by starting with small quantities and diluting the
supplement with water or ice to decrease osmolality. A patient will usually accept one to
three 8-ounce supplements per day, but there is great individual variability. Patients who
have alterations in taste or nausea may better tolerate an unflavored supplement.
A common concern of patients and families is whether adding vitamins and other
micronutrients to the patient’s diet is beneficial. An analysis of the dietary record for the
recommended number of servings from the Basic Four Food Groups (milk, meat and meat
substitutes, vegetable and fruit, and grain) helps establish whether the minimum vitamin
and mineral requirements are met. A computerized diet analysis program can help to
quickly and accurately assess the nutrient content including vitamins and minerals. When
intake is inadequate, we prescribe a daily multivitamin.
Patients should be provided with practical dietary advice about how to improve daily
caloric intake, and the following are some simple tips to increase food intake:
2705_frame_C50 Page 1041 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:50 PM
• Avoid favorite foods after highly emetogenic chemotherapy to prevent the devel-
opment of food aversions.
• Patients should be encouraged to consume any foods regardless of foods being
labelled “non-nutritious,” such as potato chips, nuts, or ice cream.
• Emphasize consumption of “nutrient-dense” foods as part of main meals or
snacks, i.e., peanut butter, cheese, whole milk, and yogurt.
• Avoid the “Why don’t you eat?” complaint. The patient should not be psycho-
logically punished by the cancer care team and/or the family for not eating, but
rather should be supported to overcome anorexia and other problems that lead
to decreased food intake.
• Emphasize the pleasurable as well as social aspects of meals. Encourage patients
to have their meals in a relaxed, friendly, and familiar atmosphere.
• Moderate alcohol intake is usually compatible with treatments and should be
allowed before meals unless contraindicated.
• Avoid odors that can cause nausea. A short walk outside while meals are being
prepared is advisable.
• Encourage food supplements and snacks between meals without being con-
cerned that they may affect intake at meal time.
Patients are often deeply interested in the topic of nutrition as an unproven treatement.
However, many will not bring up this topic unless encouraged and listened to in a non-
judgmental fashion. Open discussion and patient education may help prevent untoward
effects of these diets and introduce nutrition-related issues into the mainstream of
oncology care.
TABLE 50.10
Alternative Nutritional Therapies Used by Cancer Patients
Multivitamins and single vitamin supplements
Low fat-, high fiber-, soy protein-supplemented diets
Specific macrobiotic diets
Vegetable and grass juicing
Herbal supplements (green tea extract, antioxidants)
Chinese herbal medicine (mushrooms, teas, roots)
2705_frame_C50 Page 1042 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:50 PM
TABLE 50.11
Potential Side Effects and Concerns
Vitamin toxicities (e.g. vitamin A >5000 IU per day)
Possible vitamin effects on tumor biology (apoptosis, proliferation)
Vitamin imbalances and conditioned deficiencies
Drug-nutrient interactions
References
1. Nixon DW, Heymsfield SB, Cohen A, et al. Am J Med 68: 683; 1980.
2. Shils ME. Cancer Res 37: 2366; 1977
3. Brennan MF. Cancer Res 58: 1867; 1977
4. DeWys D, Begg C, Lavin PT, et al. Am J Med 69: 491; 1980
5. Brennan MF. New Engl J Med 305: 375; 1981.
6. Shike M, Russell DM, Detsky AS, et al. Ann Int Med 101: 303; 1984.
7. Chlebowski RT, Heber D. Cancer Res 42: 2495; 1982.
8. Holroyde CP, Gabuzda T, Putnam R, et al. Cancer Res 35: 3710; 1975.
9. Chlebowski RT, Heber D. Surg Clin North Am 66: 957; 1986.
10. Burt ME, Stein PT, Schwade JG, Brennan MF. Cancer 53: 1246; 1984.
11. Heber D, Chlebowski RT, Ishibashi DE, et al. Cancer Res 42: 4815; 1982.
12. Jeevanandam M, Horowitz GD, Lowry SF, Brennan MF, Metabolism 35: 304; 1986.
13. Shaw JHF, Wolfe RR. Ann Surg 205: 368; 1987.
14. Bennegard K, Lundgren F, Lundholm K. Clin Physiol 6: 539; 1986.
15. Byerley LO, Heber D, Bergman RN, et al. Cancer 67: 2900; 1991.
16. Chlebowski RT, Heber D, Richardson B, Block JB. Cancer Res 44: 857; 1984.
17. Chlebowski RT, Herrold J, Oktay E, et al. Cancer 58: 183; 1986.
18. Moley JF, Morrison SD, Norton JA. Cancer Res 45: 4925; 1985.
19. Warren S. Am J Med Sci 184: 610; 1932.
20. Terepka AR, Waterhouse C. Am J Med 20: 225; 1956.
21. Fenninger LD, Mider GB. Adv Cancer Res 2: 229; 1954.
22. Heber D, Byerley LO, Chi J, et al. Cancer 58: 1867; 1986.
23. Long CL, Schaffel N, Geiger JW, et al. J Parent Ent Nutr 5: 366; 1981.
24. Bozzetti F, Pagnoni AM, Del Vecchio M. Surg Gynecol Obstet 150: 229; 1980.
25. Dempsey DT, Feurer ID, Knox LS, et al. Cancer 53: 1265; 1984.
26. Knox LS, Crosby LO, Feurer ID, et al. Ann Surg 197: 152; 1983.
27. Peacock JL, Inculet RI, Corsey R, et al. Surgery 102: 465; 1987.
28. Heber D. Nutrition 5: 135; 1989.
2705_frame_C50 Page 1043 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 1:50 PM
51
Cardiovascular Disease Risk — Prevention by Diet
Elaine B. Feldman
Introduction
Coronary heart disease (CHD) is the leading cause of death in both men and women in
developed countries. Mortality rates vary from ~50/100,000 in Japanese women to 436/
100,000 in Scottish men.1 In the U.S. 32% of women and 50% of men will develop CHD,
and CHD is the cause of death in 31% of men and 24% of women. The current concepts
of the role of the diet in the etiology of cardiovascular disease (CVD) relate components
of the diet to the pathogenesis of atherosclerosis. Primarily dietary fats, especially satu-
rated fat and cholesterol, impact on the levels of circulating lipids to raise total and low-
density lipoprotein (LDL) cholesterol that increase CHD risk. Dietary factors increase
triacylglycerol (TG) levels that also increase the risk of CHD and/or decrease high density
lipoprotein (HDL) cholesterol the lipoprotein that lessens CHD risk. Thus, diets that lower
LDL cholesterol and/or TG and/or raise (or do not lower) HDL are protective against
CHD. Other dietary components such as antioxidants (carotenoids, vitamin C, vitamin E)
may lessen the risk of CVD by decreasing oxidized LDL, which is more atherogenic. High
blood levels of homocysteine are atherogenic, and the levels of this amino acid are
decreased by intake of folate, vitamin B6 and vitamin B12. This section will review:
0-8493-2705-9/01/$0.00+$1.50
© 2002 by CRC Press LLC 1045
2705_frame_C51 Page 1046 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 2:06 PM
TABLE 51.1
Foods and Nutrients that Affect Cholesterol Levels
Cholesterol-Lowering Cholesterol-Raising
Plant sterols, 3 g/day Saturated fatty acids
Fruits and vegetables, 5 servings/day Trans fatty acids
Soy proteins, 25 g/day Dietary cholesterol
Whole grains
Soluble fiber, 30 g/day
Psyllium
Monounsaturated fatty acids
The Mediterranean diet
N-6 polyunsaturated fatty acids
vascular mortality that was observed during the depression and with World War II.2 Food
was scarce, with a decrease in the consumption of dairy products and eggs, rich sources
of saturated fat and cholesterol. The dietary fat–heart hypothesis was proposed by Keys.3
Epidemiologic studies related CHD rates to the intake of dietary fat, especially saturated
fat (Figure 51.1). A high-fat diet, enriched in saturated fats, was also related to the rise in
serum cholesterol with age. The related cholesterol hypothesis proposes that increasing
serum cholesterol raises the risk of CHD, and that decreasing serum cholesterol levels will
reduce risk.2
The risk of developing CHD is continuous over the range of serum total cholesterol
levels. Cholesterol levels exceeding the 75th percentile are associated with moderate risk
of atherosclerosis, and at >90th percentile with high risk.4 Low-density lipoprotein cho-
lesterol levels similarly can be classified into low, moderate, and high risk.5 Small, dense
LDL particles are associated with a tripling of the risk of myocardial infarction (MI),
compared to the larger, more buoyant LDL particle.6 Elevated lp (a) increases the risk of
700
CHD Deaths/10,000 Men/Decade
500
300
100
4 8 12 16 20 24
% Calories Saturated Fat
FIGURE 51.1
Death rates from CHD and the intake of saturated fat in the Seven Countries Study. The ordinate represents
deaths from coronary heart disease that occurred over a 10-year period per 10,000 men enrolled in the study.
The cohorts are from sites in seven countries: the U.S., Japan, Greece, Italy, Yugoslavia, the Netherlands, Finland.
The regression equation is y = –83 + 25.1x, r + 0.84. Adapted from Keys A. Seven Countries Study — A Multivariate
Study of Death and Coronary Heart Disease, Harvard University Press, Cambridge, 1980.)
2705_frame_C51 Page 1047 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 2:06 PM
TABLE 51.2
Factors Affecting HDL Cholesterol Levels
Increased Levels Decreased Levels
Saturated fats Polyunsaturated fat, high
Dietary cholesterol Simple sugars/high carbohydrate diet (short period)
Alcohol <2 drinks/day Some antihypertensive drugs
Long-term aerobic exercise program Physical inactivity
Estrogens Androgens
Progestogens
Anabolic steroids
Female gender Male gender
Obesity
Diabetes mellitus
Cigarette smoking
A puzzling and as yet unanswered aspect of CHD risk is that the lipid levels of patients
with various clinical symptoms or pathologic signs of atherosclerosis often fall within the
“normal range.” In the most recent National Health and Nutrition Examination Survey
(NHANES III) (Table 26.4), the average level of total cholesterol in the U.S. was 225 mg/
dl, and the average level of LDL cholesterol was 142 mg/dl.16 Patients studied with CHD,
such as in the Framingham Study, have had total cholesterol levels ranging from 200 to
250 mg/dl and LDL cholesterol ranges of 132 to 156 mg/dl.8
Diets high in total fat, saturated fat, and cholesterol are atherogenic for many animal
species. Long-chain saturated fatty acids (Figure 51.2) in animal or vegetable fats raise
plasma cholesterol levels and decrease LDL receptor activity.17 Paradoxically, these fats
also raise HDL cholesterol levels. Predominantly monounsaturated liquid vegetable oils
have a cholesterol-lowering effect, lowering LDL cholesterol, but not HDL cholesterol;
some monounsaturated oils have shown a TG-lowering effect.18,19 Polyunsaturated fats of
the n-6 series in liquid vegetable oils decrease LDL cholesterol and increased amounts
lower HDL cholesterol.4 The n-3 series of polyunsaturated fatty acids found in fish (espe-
cially deep-water ocean fatty fish) and fish oil have variable effects on total LDL, and HDL
cholesterol, and lower TG levels.20 Trans-fatty acids produced from some processes of
partial or complete hydrogenation of unsaturated liquid vegetable oils (in the U.S. pre-
dominantly soybean oil) raise LDL cholesterol to a somewhat lesser degree than long-
chain saturated fats or butter, but in contrast, lower HDL cholesterol.21 Investigators
concluded that vegetable shortening and stick margarine have advantages over butter
with respect to LDL cholesterol levels (–5 to 7%), with ingestion of liquid soybean oil or
semiliquid margarine resulting in 11 to 12% lowering of LDL cholesterol in comparison
100
90 Coconut Oil
Palm Kernel Oil
% Saturated Fatty Acids
80
70
Butterfat
60
Beef Tallow
50 Palm Oil
Menhaden Oil
40 Lard
Chicken Fat
30 Cottonseed Oil
Cod Liver Oil
20
Soybean Oil Corn Oil Sunflower Oil
10 Peanut Oil Olive Oil Safflower Oil
0 Canola Oil
FIGURE 51.2
The saturated fatty acid content of various fats and oils.
2705_frame_C51 Page 1049 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 2:06 PM
to butter. Cholesterol is found in the diet only in animal products and is not present in
any plant sources.
Atherosclerosis
Theories of Atherogenesis
Theories of atherogenesis propose that LDL cholesterol is the pathogen, delivering cho-
lesterol to the arterial wall. Endothelial injury initiates proliferation of vascular smooth
muscle cells and conversion of monocytes to macrophages (cholesterol ester-laden foam
cells) and fibroblasts under the influence of growth factors and cytokines.22 Oxidized LDL
accelerates formation of foam cells, atheroma, and the fibrous plaque.23 Plaque rupture
initiates the events of myocardial infarction. CHD progression is related to levels of total
and LDL cholesterol, and decreased levels of HDL cholesterol, especially HDL2, or the
ratio of HDL2 to LDL cholesterol.1,2 Levels of TG >2.28 mmol/L (250 mg/dl) also increase
the risk of MI and warrant intervention; more recent data suggest lowering this level,
perhaps to 0.91 mmol/L (100 mg/dl).13,14 Regression of atherosclerosis occurs when cho-
lesterol ester is mobilized from the superficial layers of plaque. Cholesterol is removed
from plaque when LDL cholesterol levels are reduced to <2.5 mmol/L (95 mg/dl).2 This
level of LDL usually parallels a total cholesterol value <4.6 mmol/L (180 mg/dl).
Current theories of atherogenesis implicate plaque rupture with release of a necrotic
lipid core as the precipitating factor for thrombosis at the site and MI.22 Lipid lowering,
especially of LDL cholesterol, stabilizes the plaque and reduces the risk of MI. Lower lipid
levels may also decrease local concentrations of modified lipoproteins that have proin-
flammatory effects.24 Evaluation of recent cholesterol-lowering clinical trials in the aggre-
gate suggests that with treatment, CVD mortality is decreased by 25% and MI by 50%,
and that a drop of 44% in LDL cholesterol halts progression of coronary atherosclerosis.
The percent drop in LDL correlates 1:1 with the decrease in coronary events.25,26
Atherosclerosis begins in childhood and is strongly associated with LDL cholesterol
levels. A lipid-lowering diet applicable to the general population can be recommended
for children over the age of two years.27
Some mutations that predispose to atherosclerosis by affecting lipid levels and lipopro-
tein concentrations and composition are listed in Table 51.3.
TABLE 51.3
Mutations that Predispose to Atherosclerosis
Heterozygous LPL gene mutation
(May be associated with pattern B LDL)
LDL subclass pattern B (small dense)
Increased apo C-II, C-III or A-II on TG-rich lipoproteins
(Delays clearance and increases atherogenic remnant particles)
? Subtle polymorphisms in ABC-1 gene contribute to reduction in HDL levels
TABLE 51.4
National Cholesterol Education Program Guidelines, Adult Treatment Panel III, mg/dla
Near/Above Borderline
Factor Optimal Optimal High High Very High
LDL cholesterol <100 100-129 130-159 160-189 >190
Non-HDL cholesterol <130 <160 <190
Total cholesterol Desirable 200-239 >240
<200
HDL cholesterol Low >60
<40 men
<50 women
Triglycerides Normal 150-199 200-499 >500
<150
a Full report available on the NHLBI Web site: http//www.nhlbi.nih.gov/guidelines/cholesterol/
index.htm
Adapted from expert panel on detection, evaluation, and treatment of high blood cholesterol in
adults. JAMA 285: 2486, 2001.
• Cigarette smoking
• Hypertension
• Diabetes mellitus
• Obesity, especially truncal; weight gain 5 kg+ after age 18 (women)
• A sedentary lifestyle (physical inactivity)
• Gender (males at increased risk, females at lower risk)
• Increasing age
• Excessive alcohol
• (Low socioeconomic status)
Obviously, optimal prevention should aim at modifying any or all of these factors that
can be manipulated.
• Lower total fat from the usual 35% in the American diet to 30% (low fat), or to
<20% (very low fat)
2705_frame_C51 Page 1051 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 2:06 PM
TABLE 51.5
Selected Foods High in Monounsaturated Fatty Acids
Food g/30 g Portion
Canola oil 16.4
Olive oil 20.0
High oleic safflower oil 20.4
High oleic sunflower oil 23.4
Hazelnuts 14.7
Macadamia nuts 16.5
Pistachios 10.1
Pecans 11.4
• Emphasize that the decrease in fat content should mainly reduce saturated fat
(+trans) intake to <10%, or to <7% (Figure 51.1 shows the saturated fatty acid
content of some common fats and oils)
• Decrease saturated fat similarly but not total fat by substituting monounsat-
urated fat for saturated fat (Mediterranean diet)
• Concentrate on the ratio of saturated, monounsaturated, and polyunsaturated
fats to decrease saturates, increase polyunsaturates, and result in a l:l:l proportion
of the three types of long-chain fatty acids
• Consume primarily a plant-based diet and limit meat and dairy products
• Increase whole grains and soluble fiber and limit refined sugars and foods with
a high glycemic index. Dietary fiber has been estimated to lower LDL cholesterol
from 3 to 10%.1.2 Fiber sources include oats, barley, beans, psyllium, pectin, and
guar gum. Gastrointestinal side effects are common. The AHA recommends a
total dietary fiber intake of 25 to 30 g/day from food, about double the current
intake in the U.S.
• Balance energy intake with energy expenditure to prevent or treat obesity which
contributes to the atherogenic lipid pattern
Food sources of saturated fat, monounsaturated fat, and cholesterol are listed in Tables
51.5 through 51.7. The AHA Step 1 and Step 2 diets are described in Table 51.8.
Maximal dietary therapy typically reduced LDL cholesterol by 15 to 25 mg/dL, or about
5 to 10%.5,30,31 Addition of a vigorous exercise program (10 miles/week of brisk walking
or jogging) doubled LDL lowering in contrast to the Step 2 diet while preserving HDL
cholesterol levels.32
Other proposals emphasize increasing the intake of fish and n-3 oils like flaxseed, in
part because of their favorable action on eicosanoids.33-35 Recently, commercial food prod-
ucts have been developed that add cholesterol-lowering plant sterols or their derivatives
(sitosterol, sitostanol) to fats and salad dressings. Studies have shown a reduction in total
cholesterol of 6 to 13% and a 9 to 20% reduction of LDL cholesterol with 3 g/day of stanol
ester in margarine.36 Other dietary components that lower cholesterol or reduce oxidized
cholesterol include 25 g/day of soy protein, perhaps 35 mg/day of the soy isoflavones,37
and antioxidant vitamins (E, C, and carotenoids).38 The amount and type of dietary protein
can affect levels of total and LDL cholesterol, i.e., animal proteins are hypercholesterolemic,
and plant proteins are cholesterol-lowering. This may be attributable to the content of
amino acids lysine and methionine in animal proteins, and arginine in plant proteins.39
Some additional foods that may favorably influence CV risk and lipid/lipoprotein levels
and atherogenicity include garlic (putative lipid lowering) or green tea (antioxidant).40 In
2705_frame_C51 Page 1052 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 2:06 PM
TABLE 51.6
Dietary Sources of Cholesterola
Foodb Cholesterol
Fruits, grains, vegetables 0 mg LOW
Scallops (cooked) 53 mg
Oysters (cooked) 45 mg
Clams (cooked) 65 mg
Fish, lean 65 mg
Chicken, turkey, light meat (without skin) 80 mg
Lobster 85 mg
Beef, lean 90 mg
Chicken, turkey, dark meat (without skin) 95 mg
Crab 100 mg
Shrimp 150 mg
Egg yolk 270 mg
Beef liver 440 mg
Beef kidney 700 mg
a From National Heart, Lung, and Blood Institute, NIH
Publication No. 85-2606, January 1985.
b Seafood, fish, poultry, and meat are cooked, and portion
size is about 3 1/2 oz.
TABLE 51.7
Selected Foods High in Saturated Fatty Acids
Food g/100 g Edible Portion
Beef, roast, chuck, cooked 11.2
Beef, steak, prime rib, cooked 12.8
Ground beef, cooked 9.9
Bologna, beef, regular 13.8
Frankfurter, all beef, Kosher, regular 13.6
Frankfurter, regular, beef and pork 13.7
Salami, hard or dry, pork 16.0
Bacon, regular cut 23.7
Egg, yolk only, cooked 9.6
Cream, half-and-half 32.6
Cream, light, coffee cream 12.0
Parmesan cheese, dry 19.1
American cheese, processed 18.7
Cream cheese, Neufchatel 13.8
Cheddar cheese, natural 21.1
Cheddar cheese, low fat 10.9
Swiss cheese, natural 17.8
Monterey Jack cheese, natural 19.1
Mozzarella cheese, part skim milk 10.9
Brie cheese 15.3
American flavor cheese, low fat 9.8
Coconut oil 86.5
Palm oil 49.3
Palm kernel oil 71.5
Lard 39.2
Butter, regular, salted 50.5
Coconut, fresh 29.7
Adapted from Table A 21-a in Modern Nutrition in Health and
Disease, Shils M.E., Olson J.A., Shike M., Ross, A.C., Eds, 9th ed,
Williams & Wilkins, Baltimore, 1999, p A-121.
2705_frame_C51 Page 1053 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 2:06 PM
TABLE 51.8
Step I and Step II Diets
Nutrient Step I Recommend Step II Recommend
Total fat <30 % of kcalories <30% of kcalories
Saturated fat 8%-10% of kcalories <7% of kcalories
Polyunsaturated fat Up to 10% of kcalories Up to 10% of kcalories
Monounsaturated fat Up to 15% of kcalories Up to 15% of kcalories
Carbohydrate >55% of kcalories >55% of kcalories
Protein ~15% of kcalories ~15% of kcalories
Cholesterol <300 mg/day <200 mg/day
Kcalories Achieve, maintain desirable weight Achieve, maintain desirable weight
addition to effects on blood lipids and LDL oxidation, these nutrients also may influence
factors involved in vascular reactivity, such as nitric oxide and thrombus formation.41
Chinese red yeast rice is another traditional herbal remedy that may be lipid lowering
because of its content of statins and precursors.42
HDL cholesterol levels are raised by moderate intake of alcoholic beverages;43 red wine,
grapes, and grapeseed oil also may contain favorable antioxidants.44 Short-term replace-
ment of usual dietary oil with grapeseed oil in subjects with moderate elevations of LDL
cholesterol and low HDL cholesterol resulted in a 7% lowering and 8% increment respec-
tively (personal communication, D.T. Nash). Similar antioxidants are found in rice bran
oil.45 Ingestion of rice bran oil has resulted in decreases in LDL and increases in HDL
comparable to effects of canola oil. Components of fats and oils that are not the fatty acids,
but perhaps the tocotrienols, plant sterols, or flavonoids may be partially responsible for
an antiatherogenic effect. As vascular biologists derive more scientific data, foods may
influence atherogenesis by mechanisms less dependent on lipid/lipoprotein levels.
Nutritionists debate the importance of limiting dietary cholesterol intake (see Table 51.7
for sources), especially in relation to the established merit of decreased saturated fat.
Examples of some menus and foods for lipid-lowering diets are provided in Table 51.9.
Diet Trials
There has been no large scale long-term trial of the effects of diet on serum lipids and
lipoproteins, or most importantly on cardiovascular risk (morbidity, mortality). Dietary
recommendations are derived by consensus and are modified as new scientific information
is obtained, usually from epidemiologic or animal studies.
Some relevant diet and lifestyle trials include the GISSI (Gruppo Italiano per lo Studio
della Sopravvivenza nell Infarto [Miocardico]) trial that evaluated dietary supplementa-
tion with n-3 polyunsaturated fatty acids and vitamin E in patients after MI.33 Patients
who took 1 g daily of n-3 PUFA (equivalent to about 100 g/day of fatty fish), but not
those who took 300 mg/day of vitamin E, had significant benefit attributable to the 20 to
30% decrease in risk for overall and cardiovascular mortality. The fish oil capsule contained
375 mg DHA ethyl ester and 465 mg EPA ethyl ester. All of these study patients in Italy
were also ingesting a Mediterranean diet and were taking cardiac medications. The inves-
tigators propose the benefit of n-3 PUFA on arrhythmogenesis over the 3 1/2 years of
treatment. A similar protective effect of fatty fish in the secondary prevention of CHD
(29% reduction in overall mortality) has been reported in the Diet and Reinfarction Trial
2705_frame_C51 Page 1054 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 2:06 PM
TABLE 51.9
Step I AHA — Meal Plan
Goals: <30% Fat
<10% Sat. Fat
<300 mg Chol.
Total Fat Sat. Fat Chol.
Food Kcal (g) (g) (mg)
Breakfast
Lunch
Dinner
Snacks
(DART).46 The protective effect of fish also was reported in the observational Health
Professionals Study34 and the U.S. Physicians Health Study.35 Diet recommendations devel-
oped and updated by the American Heart Association and the federal government will
be modified in 2000.
Since TG levels are raised by diets high in carbohydrate, especially refined sugars, and
also are sensitive to alcohol and excess kcalories, TG-lowering diets limit sugars, alcohol,
and kcalories, and increase energy expenditure.47
2705_frame_C51 Page 1055 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 2:06 PM
FIGURE 51.3
Homocysteine metabolism is regulated by enzymes dependent on folate and vitamins B6 and B12. + = activation,
– = inhibition. Abbreviations: THF = tetrayhydrofolate; MeTHF = methylene tetrahydrofolate; MTHF = methyl-
tetrahydrofolate; SAM = S-adenosylmethionine; PLP = pyridoxalphosphate (biological active form of vitamin
B6); CS + cystathionine synthase; CL = cystathionine lyase; MS = methionine synthase; MTHFR = methylene
tetrahydrofolate reductase; BHMT = betaine homocysteine methyl transferase.
in the earlier diet-lovastatin study30 and continue to be less than earlier predictions from
Keys-Hegsted.1
References
1. Feldman EB. In Modern Nutriton in Health and Disease, Shils ME, Olson JA, Shike M, Eds, 8th
ed. Lea & Febiger, Philadelphia, 1993, ch 72.
2. Grundy S.M. In Modern Nutrition in Health and Disease, Shils ME, Olson JA, Shike M, Ross AC,
Eds, 9th ed, Williams & Wilkins, Baltimore, 1999, ch 75.
3. Keys A. Seven Countries Study — A Multivariate Study of Death and Coronary Heart Disease,
Harvard University Press, Cambridge, 1980.
4. Feldman EB. Essentials of Clinical Nutrition, FA Davis, Philadelphia, 1988.
5. National Cholesterol Education Program. Circulation 89: 1329; 1994.
6. Austin MA, Breslow JL, Hennekens CH, et al. JAMA 260: 1917; 1988.
7. Assmann G, Schulte H, von Eckardstein A. Am J Cardiol 77: 1179; 1996.
8. Dawber TR. The Framingham Study: The Epidemiology of Atherosclerotic Disease, Harvard Uni-
versity Press, Cambridge, 1980.
9. Austin MA. Am J Cardiol 83: 13F; 1999.
10. Lamarche B, Tchernof A, Mauriege P, et al. JAMA 279: 1955; 1998.
11. Stampfer MJ, Krauss R, Ma J, et al. JAMA 276: 882; 1996.
12. Meigs JB, Mittleman MA, Nathan DM, et al. JAMA 283: 221; 2000.
13. Austin MA. Am J Cardiol 83: 13F; 1999.
14. Miller M. Clin Cardiol 22: II-1; 1999.
15. Jeppeson J, Hein HO, Svadicani DD, Gyntelberg MD. Circulation 97: 1029; 1998.
16. NHANES III. JAMA 269: 3000; 1993.
17. Dupont J, White PD, Feldman EB. J Am Coll Nutr 10: 577; 1991.
18. Kris-Etherton PM. Circulation 100: 1253; 1999.
19. Lorgeril M de, Salen P, Martin JL, et al. Circulation 99: 779; 1999.
20. Harris WS. Clin Cardiol 22: II-40; 1999.
21. Lichtenstein AH, Ausman LM, Jalbert SM, Schaefer EJ. N Engl J Med 340: 1933; 1999.
22. Libby P. Circulation 91: 2844; 1995.
23. Steinberg D. Circulation 95: 1062; 1997.
24. Steinberg D, Gotto AM, Jr. JAMA 282: 2041; 1999.
2705_frame_C51 Page 1059 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 2:06 PM
25. Grundy SM. In: Cholesterol-Lowering Therapy — Evaluation of Clinical Trial Evidence, Grundy
SM, Ed, Marcel Dekker, New York, 2000, ch 1.
26. Ferraro-Borgida M, Waters D. In: Cholesterol-Lowering Therapy — Evaluation of Clinical Trial
Evidence, Grundy SM, Ed, Marcel Dekker, New York, 2000, p. 221.
27. Fisher EA, Van Horn L, McGill HC, Jr. Circulation 95: 2332; 1997.
28. Schuler G, Hambrecht R, Schlierf G, et al. Circulation 86: 1; 1992.
29. Willett WC, Manson JE, Stampfer MJ, et al. JAMA 273: 461; 1995.
30. Hunninghake DB, Stein EA, Dujovne CA, et al. N Engl J Med 328: 1213; 1993.
31. Ginsberg HN, Kris-Etherton P, Dennis B, et al. Arterioscler Thromb Vasc Biol 18: 441; 1998.
32. Stefanick ML, Mackey S, Sheehan M, et al. N Engl J Med 339: 12; 1998.
33. GISSI-Prevenzione Investigators. Lancet 354: 447; 1999.
34. Ascherio A, Rimm EB, Stampfer MJ, et al. N Engl J Med 332: 977; 1997.
35. Albert CM, Hennekens CH, O’Donnell CJ, et al. JAMA 279: 23; 1998.
36. Hallikainen MA, Uusitupa MIJ. Am J Clin Nutr 69: 403; 1999.
37. Anderson JW, Johnstone BM, Cook-Newell ME. N Engl J Med 333: 276; 1995.
38. Tribble DL. Circulation 99: 591; 1999.
39. Stone NJ, Nicolosi RJ, Kris-Etherton P, et al. Circulation 94: 3388; 1996.
40. Neil HAW, Silagy C. Curr Opin Lipidol 5: 6; 1994.
41. Anand SS, Yusuf S. JAMA 282: 2058; 1999.
42. Heber D, Yip I, Ashley JM, et al. Am J Clin Nutr 69: 231; 1999.
43. Pearson TA. Circulation 94: 3023; 1996.
44. Weisburger JH. Food Chem Toxicol 37: 943; 1999.
45. Seetharamaiah GS, Chandrasekhra N. Atherosclerosis 78: 218; 1989.
46. Burr ML, Fehily AM, Gilbert JF, et al. Lancet 2: 757a; 1989.
47. Greene JM, Feldman EB. J Am Coll Nutr 10: 443; 1991.
48. Graham IM, Daly LE, Refsum HM, et al. JAMA 277: 1775; 1997.
49. Malinow MR, Bostom AG, Krauss RM. Circulation 99: 178; 1999.
50. Stein JH, McBride PE. Arch Intern Med 158: 1301; 1998.
51. Feldman EB. In Nicotinic Acid, Altschul R, Ed, CC Thomas, Springfield, 1964.
52. Medeiros DM, Milton A, Brunett E, et al. Biol Trace Elements Res 30: 19; 1991.
53. The Heart Outcome Prevention Evaluation Study Investigators. N Engl J Med 342: 154; 2000.
54. Keller C. Atherosclerosis 86: 1; 1991.
55. Holmes CL, Schulzer M, Mancini GBJ. In Cholesterol-Lowering Therapy — Evaluation of Clinical
Trial Evidence, Grundy SM, Ed, Marcel Dekker, New York, 2000, p 191.
56. Kannel WB. Am J Cardiol 76: 69C; 1995.
57. Gould KL, Ornish D, Kirkeeide R, et al. Am J Cardiol 69: 845; 1992.
58. Ornish D, Scherwitz L, Billings JH, et al. JAMA 280: 2901; 1998.
59. Watts GF, Lewis B, Brunt JNH, et al. Lancet 339: 563; 1992.
60. Knopp RH, Walden CE, Retzleff BM, et al. JAMA 278: 1509; 1997.
2705_frame_C51 Page 1060 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 2:06 PM
2705_frame_C52 Page 1061 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 2:07 PM
52
Hyperlipidemias and Nutrient-Gene Interactions
Elaine B. Feldman
A variety of factors under genetic control are involved in the production and metabolism
of serum lipids and lipoproteins (Table 52.1).1,2 Nutrients in the diet may affect one or
more steps of gene regulation of lipoproteins, resulting in abnormal lipid or lipoprotein
levels and predisposition to atherosclerosis. The factors affected are listed in Table 52.1.
Examples of effects of diet and lifestyle on genetic mechanisms are included in Table 52.2.1
Hyperlipidemias
These lipid disorders reflect abnormal increase in one or another serum lipid component
and/or lipoprotein carrier (Tables 52.3, 52.4). The abnormalities often are inherited and
are strongly influenced by the diet. Their management requires accurate diagnosis and
evaluation, searching for other diseases that may induce secondary hyperlipidemia.3 The
dietary intervention, if unsuccessful, should be followed by appropriate medication that
normalizes the lipids and lipoproteins in order to prevent complications of atherosclerotic
disease (myocardial infarction, peripheral vascular disease) or pancreatitis.4
These subjects have lipid levels generally above the 90th percentile for their age and sex
(Table 26.3). Blood samples should be obtained after a 12 to 14-hour fast in individuals
ingesting their usual diet. At least three blood samples should be evaluated, two or three
weeks apart. The lipid studies may need to be more elaborate than the usual lipid screen or
profile (see Section 26). Ultracentrifugation of the plasma often is necessary, usually per-
formed in a specialized lipid laboratory. These lipid disorders can be suspected from the
patient’s history, family history, and physical examination. First degree relatives should also
be investigated in order to detect others with the disorder and to characterize the genetics.
Numerous mutations have been associated with the various types of familial hyperli-
poproteinemias (Table 52.4).5 In the future, nutrient modulation of gene expression may
be used as therapy. More than half the variability in serum cholesterol (low density
lipoprotein, LDL cholesterol) among individuals is attributable to genetic variation, pre-
sumably polygenic. Polymorphisms in apo-E or apo-B are examples. The remaining vari-
ability in cholesterol levels may be attributable to the diet, diet-gene interactions, or
postulated genes that control variability of response to the environment. The prevalence
of hyperlipidemias is increased in patients with premature coronary heart disease (CHD),
i.e., <55 years of age.
0-8493-2705-9/02/$0.00+$1.50
© 2002 by CRC Press LLC 1061
2705_frame_C52 Page 1062 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 2:07 PM
TABLE 52.1
Factors Involved in the Formation and Metabolism of Lipoproteins
Type Action
Apoproteins
Enzymes
Lipoprotein lipase (LPL) Hydrolyzes TAGs to free fatty acids in chylomicrons and VLDL to form
chylomicron remnants and IDL. Excess lipoprotein surface
components are released to form HDL particles
Hepatic lipase (HL) Functions as a phospholipase and TAG hydrolase. Important for
conversion of IDL to LDL. Increased activity leads to LDL pattern B
(small dense) and low HDL
Lecithin:cholesterol acyltransferase Catalyzes the esterification of free cholesterol to cholesterol ester on
(LCAT) plasma lipoproteins
Acyl CoA:cholesterol acyltransferase Catalyzes cholesterol esterification
(ACAT)
Carboxyl ester lipase (CEL)
Receptors
Transfer Proteins
Cholesterol ester transfer protein Required for normal clearance of HDL. Transfers cholesterol esters
(CETP) synthesized in HDL to the apo B-containing lipoproteins in exchange
for TAG
ATP-binding-cassette transporter 1 Actively transports free cholesterol out of cells and into HDL particles
(ABC-1) transforming lipid-poor A-I particles into nascent HDL particles
Microsomal triglyceride transfer Necessary to generate LDL (VLDL)
protein (MTP)
2705_frame_C52 Page 1063 Friday, August 16, 2002 11:43 AM
TABLE 52.2
Effects of Diet and Lifestyle on Gene Regulation of Lipoprotein Expression
Factor Effect
Cholesterol Decreases expression of the LDL receptor by suppressing transcription of its gene
Regulates H:MG CoA reductase expression by controlling the stability of the
HMG CoA reductase protein (post-translational level)
Polyunsaturated fatty acids Block transcription of the fatty acid synthase gene
Fats Excessive intake induces excessive secretion of apo-B containing lipoproteins by
stabilizing the protein (post-translational)
Affects LDL receptor expression
Increases expression of LPL activity, inducing adipose tissue LPL activity and
suppressing skeletal muscle LPL activity (perhaps via insulin). Post-
translational regulation by glycosylation is possible.
Atherogenic diet Decreases HDL
Decreases the expression of the gene encoding paraoxonase, an enzyme that
protects LDL from oxidation
Exercise Increases muscle LPL activity pre-translationally
Glucose Increases fatty acid synthesis by stabilizing the fatty acid synthase mRNA (post-
transcriptional)
Other Subjects with the E3/E4 phenotype respond to a low fat, low cholesterol diet
intervention with a greater LDL decrease than those with the E3/E3 or E3/E2
phenotype
TABLE 52.3
Classification (Type) of Hyperlipidemia and the Underlying Lipoprotein Abnormality
Type Lipoprotein Abnormality
I Increased exogenous triacylglycerols (TAG) in the form of chylomicrons
IIa Hypercholesterolemia with increase in LDL and normal TAG levels
Iib Hypercholesterolemia combined with mild hypertriglyceridemia (increase in LDL and
VLDL particle number, overproduction of apo-B)
III Remnant hyperlipemia; hypercholesterolemia with hypertriglyceridemia and increase
in IDL
IV Mild to moderate endogenous hyperlipemia; increased VLDL with TAG 2.8-7.9 mmol/
L or 250-700 mg/dl
V Mixed hyperlipemia; moderate to severe hypertriglyceridemia (>11.3 mmol/L or 1000
mg/dl) with mixed VLDL and chylomicrons
Types of Hyperlipidemias
Chylomicronemia (Type I Hyperlipoproteinemia)3-7
Dietary TAGs that are transported as chylomicrons are increased in Type I. This rare
disorder results from a defect in removal of chylomicrons from the blood due to the
presence of a recessive gene that results in deficiency of lipoprotein lipase (LPL, Table
52.4).6 A similar disorder results from the absence or abnormal function of the apo-C II
activator of LPL,7 or from the presence of a circulating inhibitor of LPL. Type I may present
in infants and children. It does not usually predispose to vascular disease, but patients
are at risk of recurrent severe pancreatitis. Signs of lipemia retinalis (Color Figure 52.1*),
eruptive xanthomas (Color Figure 52.2), and hepatosplenomegaly may be present. The
plasma shows a chylomicron creamy layer over a clear infranatant. Plasma TAG levels
usually exceed 17 mmol/L.
TABLE 52.4
Genetic Basis of Familial Hyperlipidemias
Type Abnormality Mutation
Type I Familial lipoprotein lipase deficiency 40 known missense and nonsense mutations of gene
encoding enzyme
Familial lipoprotein lipase inhibitor
Familial apo C-II deficiency 14 defects identified
Familial hepatic lipase deficiency
Type II Familial hypercholesterolemia 400 deletions/point mutations in 5 classes of the LDL gene
Familial defective apo B100 Apo B 3500 mutation impairs binding to the LDL receptor
Polygenic hypercholesterolemia Apo A-I/C-III/A-IV gene clusters
Type Iib Familial combined hyperlipidemia Apo A-I/C-III/A-IV
LCAT
Mn superoxide dismutase linkage
Partial LPL deficiency
Type III Familial dysbetalipoproteinemia Apo E gene polymorphism affects amino acid coding
E2/E2 phenotype
Type IV Familial hypertriglyceridemia (mild) Apo A-I/C-III/A-IV
?Hepatic lipase deficiency
Type V Familial hypertriglyceridemia (severe) Apo A-I/C-III/A-IV
Familial lipoprotein lipase deficiency Apo A-II
Apo C-II deficiency
FIGURE 52.1
(See Color Figure 52.1) Lipemia retinalis visualized in the optical fundus of a patient with chylomicronemia
with TAG levels exceeding 3000 mg/dl.
2705_frame_C52 Page 1065 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 2:07 PM
FIGURE 52.2
(See Color Figure 52.2) Eruptive xanthomas observed in a patient with chylomicronemia.
FIGURE 52.3
(See Color Figure 52.3) Eyelid xanthelasma from a woman with familial hypercholesterolemia.
FIGURE 52.4
(See Color Figure 52.4) Corneal arcus observed in a 31-year-old man with familial hypercholesterolemia.
2705_frame_C52 Page 1067 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 2:07 PM
FIGURE 52.5
(See Color Figure 52.5) Xanthomas of the Achilles tendons of a patient with familial hypercholesterolemia.
FIGURE 52.6
(See Color Figure 52.6) Tuberous xanthomas in the skin of the elbows of a teenage girl with familial hypercho-
lesterolemia.
2705_frame_C52 Page 1068 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 2:07 PM
FIGURE 52.7
(See Color Figure 52.7) Yellow linear deposits in the creases of the fingers and palms of the hands of a 33-year-
old man with Type III hyperlipoproteinemia.
The disorder is due to a genetic defect in the apo-E isoforms. The normal E3 is replaced
by one or two E2 proteins that have defective receptor binding. This results in a lesser rate
of removal and increases the circulating level of IDL. Preparative ultracentrifugation
demonstrates increased cholesterol relative to TAG in the VLDL fraction, with more rapid
migration of the lipoprotein on electrophoresis. Apo-E isoforms should be determined (E
phenotype). Patients show planar xanthomas of the palms (Color Figure 52.7) and tuberous
xanthomas as early as the third decade of life. Patients have premature peripheral vascular
disease and CHD.15
Type IV Hyperlipoproteinemia5
Endogenous hypertriglyceridemia is characterized by mild to moderate increase in TAG
levels (3 to 8 mmol/L, 250 to 700 mg/dl), with increase in VLDL.16,17 Both overproduction
and decreased removal of VLDL TAG may be responsible. LDL cholesterol levels are
within the normal range. Usually HDL cholesterol is decreased. These subjects may be at
increased risk of atherosclerosis, and hypertriglyceridemia per se may be an independent
risk factor for cardiovascular disease (CVD).16,17 Patients often have no signs or symptoms
other than the abnormal lipid and lipoprotein values, and may present initially with
cardiovascular events. Underlying mechanisms and genetic defects are multiple.5 See also
atherogenic dyslipidemia, below.
Type V Hyperlipoproteinemia
Moderate to severe increases in TAG levels exceeding 11.3 mmol/L or 1000 mg/dl char-
acterize this disorder, often termed the chylomicronemia syndrome.3,4,6,15 Chylomicrons
appear along with increased levels of VLDL. Patients exhibit eruptive xanthomas and
lipemia retinalis (TAG levels >34 mmol/L, 3000 mg/dl) (Color Figures 52.1, 52.2). They
are at high risk for recurrent episodes of acute pancreatitis, at times resulting in pancreatic
insufficiency. Fifty percent or more of these patients have diabetes mellitus that must be
2705_frame_C52 Page 1069 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 2:07 PM
TABLE 52.5
Metabolic Syndrome Risk Factors
Insulin resistance
Elevated Triaglycerides
Increased dense LDL
Low HDL
Hyperinsulinemia
Glucose intolerance
Hypertension
Prothrombotic state
Truncal obesity
Premature CVD
controlled to effectively lower TAG levels. Alcohol intake or estrogen treatment may
convert a type IV patient to type V, or worsen type V and precipitate pancreatitis.3
Underlying mechanisms and genetic defects are a mixture of those of Type I and Type IV
(Table 52.4).
TABLE 52.6
Evaluation of Patient for Hyperlipidemia
History of:
Physical Examination:
Laboratory:
Blood, after 12-14 hour overnight fast, cholesterol, TAG, HDL cholesterol, glucose
Plasma turbidity
Apoproteins, ultracentrifugation, electrophoresis
Post-heparin lipolytic activity
Tests of renal, hepatic, and thyroid function
Electrocardiogram
FIGURE 52.8
(See Color Figure 52.8) The appearance of plasma, refrigerated overnight, from fasting patients. The tubes with
plasma samples are taken from (left to right): a subject with normal lipid levels and clear plasma (similar to a
patient with Type IIa); a patient with chylomicronemia (Type I) with a creamy top layer above a clear infranatant;
a patient with hypercholesterolemia (Type IIa) with clear plasma; a patient with Type III hyperlipoproteinemia
with diffusely turbid plasma; a patient with Type IV hyperlipoproteinemia also showing diffuse turbidity; and
a patient with Type V hyperlipoproteinemia with plasma exhibiting a creamy top layer over a turbid infranatant.
2705_frame_C52 Page 1071 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 2:07 PM
TABLE 52.7
Guidelines of Food Choices and Menu Plans for Patients with Severe
Hypercholesterolemia (FH)a
Very Low-Fat Diet-Meal Plan Goal 10-15% Fat Kcals
Total Fat Sat Fat Chol
Food Kcal (g) (g) (mg)
Breakfast
Lunch
Turkey sandwich:
Turkey breast, fat-free luncheon meat, 2 oz 52 0.4 0.2 23
Mayonnaise, light, 1 Tb 50 5 1 0
Whole wheat bread, 2 slices 130 2 0.4 0
Sliced tomato, 1/2 med 13 0.2 0 0
Apple, 1 med 81 0.5 0.1 0
Lunch subtotal 326 8.1 0.7 23
Dinner
Snacks
See Table 52.7 for food choices and menu plans for patients with Type II hyperlipidemia
or FH.19,20 Compliance with and response to these changes may lower total and LDL
cholesterol by 10 to 20%.
TABLE 52.8
Guidelines of Food Choices and Menu Plans for Patients with Severe
Hypertriglyceridemia (Type V)a
Goals: <30% Fat
<10% Sat Fat
low refined sugar
Triglyceride-Lowering Meal Plan low cholesterol
Total Fat Sat Fat Sugar Cholesterol
Food Kcal (g) (g) (g) (mg)
Breakfast
Lunch
Dinner
Snacks
placement on diets with the fat content lowered to 20 g/day. Alcohol should be eliminated
from the diet, which also controls kcalories and increases exercise to optimize weight.
Table 52.8 indicates some food choices and menu plans for TAG lowering in patients with
more severe forms of hypertriglyceridemia (Type V). 20 Patients may respond rapidly to
withdrawal of dietary fat, with TAG levels falling by 50%/day.
2705_frame_C52 Page 1073 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 2:07 PM
+20
+10
-10
% Change
-20
-30
-40
-50
FIGURE 52.9
The efficacy of various lipid-lowering drugs in treating patients with hypercholesterolemia. Data represent the
percent change in lipoprotein lipid levels from levels obtained from patients ingesting a baseline lipid-lowering diet.
2705_frame_C52 Page 1074 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 2:07 PM
Plasmapheresis has been used successfully for treating severe forms of FH that are
poorly controlled with diet and multiple medications. Liver transplant may improve
patients with homozygous FH.
References
1. Semenkovich CF. In Modern Nutrition in Health and Disease, 9th ed, Shils ME, Olson JA, Shike
M, Ross AC, Eds, Williams & Wilkins, Baltimore, 1999, ch 74.
2. Havel RJ, Kane JP. In: The Metabolic and Molecular Bases of Inherited Disease, 7th ed, Scriver CL,
Beaudet AL, Sly WS, Valle D, Eds, McGraw Hill, NY, 1995, ch 56.
3. Feldman EB. In: Modern Nutrition in Health and Disease, 8th ed, Shils ME, Olson JA, Shike M,
Eds, Lea & Febiger, Philadelphia, 1993, ch 72.
4. Grundy SM. In: Modern Nutrition in Health and Disease, 9th ed, (Shils ME, Olson JA, Shike M,
Ross AC, Eds, Williams & Wilkins, Baltimore, 1999, ch 75.
5. Humphries SE, Peacock R, Gudnason V. In Lipoproteins in Health and Disease, Betteridge DJ,
Illingworth DR, Shepherd J, Eds, Oxford University Press, NY, 1999.
6. Brunzell JD. In The Metabolic and Molecular Bases of Inherited Disease, 7th ed, Scriver CL, Beaudet
AL, Sly WS, Valle D, Eds, McGraw Hill, NY, 1995, ch 59.
7. Santmarina-Fojo S. Curr Opin Lipidology 3: 186; 1992.
8. Brown MS, Goldstein JL. Science 232: 34; 1986.
9. Goldstein JL, Hobbs HH, Brown MS. In The Metabolic and Molecular Bases of Inherited Disease,
7th ed, Scriver CL, Beaudet AL, Sly WS, Valle D, Eds, McGraw Hill, NY, 1995, ch 62.
10. Sohar E, Bossak, ET, Wang CI, Adlersberg D. Science 123: 461; 1957.
11. Aouizerat BE, Allayee H, Cantor RM, et al. Arterioscler Thromb Vasc Biol 19: 2730; 19XX.
12. Kwiterovich PO, Jr. Curr Opin Lipidology 4: 133; 1993.
13. Campos H, Dreon DM, Krauss RM. J Lipid Res 34: 397; 1993.
14. Mahley RW, Rall SC, Jr. In The Metabolic and Molecular Bases of Inherited Disease, 7th ed, Scriver
CL, Beaudet AL, Sly WS, Valle D, Eds, McGraw Hill, NY, 1995, ch 61.
15. Feldman EB. In Essentials of Clinical Nutrition. FA Davis, Philadelphia, 1988, ch 19.
16. Brewer HB, Jr. Am J Cardiol 83: 3F; 1999.
17. Austin MA, Hokanson HE, Edwards KL, Am J Cardiol 82: 7B; 19XX.
18. Grundy SM. Circulation 95: 1; 1997.
19. Greene JM, Feldman EB. J Am Coll Nutr 10: 443; 1991.
20. Bloch AS, Shils ME. In Modern Nutrition in Health and Disease, 9th ed, Shils ME, Olson JA,
Shike M, Ross AC, Eds, Williams & Wilkins, Baltimore, 1999, pp A167, 170.
21. Harris WS. Curr Opin Lipidology 7: 3; 1996.
2705_frame_C52 Page 1075 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 2:07 PM
22. Nestel P, Noakes M, Belling B, et al. J Lipid Res 33: 1029; 1992.
23. Lipid Research Clinics Program. JAMA 251: 351; 1984.
24. Jones P, Kalonek S, Laurora I, Hunninghake D. for the CURVES Investigators, Am J Cardiol
81: 582; 1998.
25. Knopp RH, Waldaen CE, Rezlaff BM, et al. JAMA 278: 1509; 1997.
26. Goldberg AC, Schonfeld G, Feldman EB, et al. Clin Ther 11: 69; 1989.
2705_frame_C52 Page 1076 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 2:07 PM
2705_frame_C53 Page 1077 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 2:08 PM
53
Nutrition in Diabetes Mellitus
Introduction
Diabetes mellitus is a common metabolic disorder.1,2 The hallmark of diabetes is fasting
and/or post-prandial hyperglycemia. Hyperglycemia results from insulin deficiency or
interference with its action (insulin resistance) or both. Uncontrolled diabetes leads to
widespread metabolic derangement. Sixteen million people in the United States have
diabetes mellitus. The prevalence of diabetes is increasing at an alarming rate in all age
groups, from children to the elderly. The disorder is progressively more common with
advancing age. Fifty percent or more of the population after 80 to 90 years of age has
glucose intolerance or diabetes. It is the sixth leading cause of death due to disease in the
U.S. and decreases the average life expectancy up to 15 years when compared to the
population without diabetes. Diabetes has an enormous social impact, mostly due to its
chronic microvascular (retinopathy, nephropathy, and neuropathy) and macrovascular
complications. Diabetic retinopathy is the leading cause of blindness in the U.S. In people
with diabetes, age 20 to 74 years, there are 12,000 to 24,000 new cases of blindness each
year. Diabetic nephropathy is responsible for a large number of the patients on renal
dialysis and undergoing renal transplantation. In 1996 more than 130,000 people with
diabetes underwent either dialysis or kidney transplantation. Diabetic neuropathy is
present in 60 to 70% of all patients with diabetes. Besides increasing the risk for sudden
death and silent myocardial infarction, diabetic neuropathy leads to impotence, which is
experienced by 50% of men with diabetes. Diabetic neuropathy together with peripheral
vascular disease is responsible for more than 200,000 cases of foot ulcers and 80,000 limb
amputations each year. Finally, diabetes is also responsible for macrovascular complica-
tions including peripheral vascular disease, stroke, and cardiovascular disease. Cardio-
vascular disease is the leading cause of death in diabetes (80% of all patients with diabetes
die of cardiovascular disease). Seventy five percent of the cardiovascular mortality in
diabetes is from coronary heart disease and 25% is from cerebral or peripheral vascular
disease. Coronary heart disease, peripheral vascular disease, and stroke account for nearly
one million hospital admissions each year among patients with diabetes. In women,
diabetes carries yet another burden since it may lead to problems during pregnancy —
mainly congenital malformations in babies born to diabetic mothers. The rate of major
0-8493-2705-9/02/$0.00+$1.50
© 2002 by CRC Press LLC 1077
2705_frame_C53 Page 1078 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 2:08 PM
Type 2 Diabetes
Type 2 diabetes is characterized by insulin resistance and an insulin secretory defect.3,4 It
is the most prevalent type of diabetes, and comprises 90% of the population with diabetes.
As with type 1 diabetes, type 2 has both a genetic and an environment component. Type
2 diabetes may range from cases with predominantly insulin resistance and relative insulin
deficiency to cases with a predominantly secretory defect and some degree of insulin
resistance.
TABLE 53.1
Etiologic Classification of Diabetes Mellitus
I. Type I diabetes* (β-cell destruction, usually leading to absolute insulin deficiency)
A. Immune mediated
B. Idiopathic
II. Type II diabetes* (may range from predominantly insulin resistance with relative insulin deficiency to a
predominantly secretory defect)
III. Other specific types
A. Genetic defects of β-cell function
1. Chromosome 12, HNF-1a (MODY3)
2. Chromosome 7, glucokinase (MODY2)
3. Chromosome 20, HNF-4a (MODY1)
4. Mitochondrial DNA
5. Others
B. Genetic defects in insulin action
1. Type A insulin resistance
2. Leprechaunism
3. Rabson — Mendenhall syndrome
4. Lipoatrophic diabetes
5. Others
C. Diseases of the exocrine pancreas
1. Pancreatitis
2. Trauma/pancreatectomy
3. Neoplasia
4. Cystic fibrosis
5. Hemochromatosis
6. Fibrocalculous pancreatopathy
7. Others
D. Endocrinopathies
1. Acromegaly
2. Cushing’s syndrome
3. Glucagonoma
4. Pheochromocytoma
5. Hyperthyroidism
6. Somatostatinoma
7. Aldosteronoma
8. Others
E. Drug- or chemical-induced
1. Vacor
2. Pentamidine
3. Nicotinic acid
4. Glucocorticoids
5. Thyroid hormone
6. Diazoxide
7. β-adrenergic agonists
8. Thiazides
9. Dilantin
10. α-interferon
11. Others
F. Infections
1. Congenital rubella
2. Cytomegalovirus
3. Others
G. Uncommon forms of immune-mediated diabetes
1. “Stiff-man” syndrome
2. Anti-insulin receptor antibodies
3. Others
H. Other genetic syndromes sometimes associated with diabetes
1. Down’s syndrome
2705_frame_C53 Page 1080 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 2:08 PM
Diagnostic Criteria
The diagnostic criteria for diabetes, for type 1, type 2, and other specific types of diabetes,
have been modified recently. In the past, the criteria used was that recommended by the
National Diabetes Data Group3 or World Health Organization (WHO);1 the revised criteria
are shown in Table 53.2. For epidemiological studies determining prevalence and/or
incidence of diabetes, the first criterion (fasting plasma glucose >126 mg/dl) can be used,
but it will lead to slightly lower estimates of prevalence/incidence than the combined use
of the fasting plasma glucose and oral glucose tolerance test. That is clearly demonstrated
by the data obtained in NHANES III2 as summarized in Table 53.3. WHO criteria were
2705_frame_C53 Page 1081 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 2:08 PM
TABLE 53.2
Criteria for the Diagnosis of Diabetes Mellitus*
1. Symptoms of diabetes plus casual plasma glucose concentration ≥200 mg/dl (11.1 mmol/l). Casual is defined
as any time of day without regard to time since last meal. The classic symptoms of diabetes include polyuria,
polydipsia, and unexpected weight loss.
or
2. FPG ≥126 mg/dl (7.0 mmol/l). Fasting is defined as no caloric intake for at least 8 h.
or
3. 2-h PG ≥200 mg/dl (11.1 mmol/l) during an OGTT. The test should be performed as described by WHO (2),
using a glucose load containing the equivalent of 75-g anhydrous glucose dissolved in water.
* In the absence of unequivocal hyperglycemia with acute metabolic decompensation, these criteria should be
confirmed by repeat testing on a different day. The third measure (OGTT) is not recommended for routine
clinical use.
Reprinted with authorization from American Diabetes Association (Diabetes Care 23(1): 11S; 2000).
TABLE 53.3
Estimated Prevalence of Diabetes in the U.S. in Individuals 40 to 74 Years of Age using
Data from the NHANES III
Prevalence (%) of Diabetes by
Glucose Criteria without a Medical Total Diabetes
Diabetes Diagnostic Criteria History of Diabetes* Prevalence (%)#
Medical history of diabetes — 7.92
WHO (2) criteria for diabetes:
FPG ≥140 mg/dl (7.8 mmol/l) or 6.34 14.26
2-h PG ≥200 mg/dl (11.1 mmol/l)
FPG ≥126 mg/dl (7.0 mmol/l) 4.35 12.27
* Diabetes prevalence (by glucose criteria) in those without a medical history of diabetes × (100%-
prevalence of diabetes by medical history).
# First column of data plus 7.92.
Data are from K. Flegal, National Center for Health Statistics, personal communication. Reprinted
with authorization from American Diabetes Association (Diabetes Care 23(1): 11S; 2000).
based on the fact that the prevalence of retinopathy and nephropathy would rise markedly
when the level of glucose 2 h after a standardized glucose load was >200 mg/dl. The
revised criteria are based on results of several studies showing that fasting plasma level
>126 mg/dl, like a 2-h post glucose load of >200 mg/dl, is associated with a marked rise
in the prevalence of vascular complications.4 In other words, levels of glucose ≥126 mg/
dl reflect a serious metabolic disorder associated with the development of serious chronic
diabetic complications.
Impaired fasting glucose is defined by glucose levels ≥110 mg/dl and <126 mg/dl after
an eight-hour fast. Impaired glucose tolerance is defined by a level of glucose ≥140 mg/
dl but <200 mg/dl two hours after a 75 g oral glucose load. The impaired glucose tolerance
criteria will identify more people with impaired glucose homeostasis than the criteria of
impaired fasting glucose.
TABLE 53.4
Major Risk Factors for Diabetes Mellitus
Family history of diabetes (i.e., parents or siblings with diabetes)
Obesity (i.e., ≥20% over desired body weight or BMI ≥27 kg/m2)
Race/ethnicity (i.e., African-Americans, Hispanic-Americans, Native Americans, Asian-Americans, Pacific
Islanders)
Age ≥45 years
Previously identified IFG or IGT
Hypertension (≥140/90 mm Hg)
HDL cholesterol level ≥35 mg/dl (0.90 mmol/l) and/or a triglyceride level ≥250 mg/dl (2.82/l)
History of GDM or delivery of babies over 9 lb
Reprinted with authorization from American Diabetes Association (Diabetes Care 23(1): 21S; 2000).
surface protein epitopes in the β-cell. The markers that may identify patients at risk before
development of the disease are many. However, the levels of the markers that would
permit the diagnosis of high-risk patients are not well established. Furthermore, the
methodology is not easily accessible, and there is no consensus about what to do if high
levels of auto-antibodies are observed. Nowadays, there is no effective and safe treatment
to prevent the development of type 1 diabetes. A number of ongoing clinical trials testing
various ways to prevent the development of type 1 diabetes are being conducted, and it
is possible that in the near future, screening for patients at high risk for developing type
1 diabetes will be justifiable. At present the cost effectiveness and clinical relevance of
such testing is questionable.
Screening for type 2 diabetes is, however, highly recommended. Undiagnosed type 2
diabetes is very common in the U.S. Approximately 50% of patients with type 2 diabetes
are undiagnosed.7 Some epidemiological studies have shown that retinopathy will start
developing seven years prior to making the diagnosis of diabetes.8 Even more worrisome
is the fact that patients with undiagnosed diabetes are at significantly higher risk of
developing premature macrovascular disease.9 The risk of developing type 2 diabetes
increases with age, obesity, and lack of physical activity. Furthermore, diabetes is more
common in certain racial/ethnic groups (Hispanic, Asian, African-Americans, and native
Americans), in women with gestational diabetes, and in individuals with a family history
of diabetes, hypertension, or dyslipidemia. The major risk factors for developing diabetes
are listed in Table 53.4.
The American Diabetes Association (ADA) recommends screening individuals who have
one or more of the risk factors shown in Table 53.4 at three-year intervals. Fasting plasma
glucose measurement or oral glucose tolerance test are adequate to perform screening for
diabetes. Fasting, as mentioned before, represents a period of at least eight hours without
food or beverage other than water. When an oral glucose tolerance test is performed, a
load of 75 g of anhydrous glucose is considered the standard load for adult testing.
Interpretation of the results is crucial, and should be made according to the criteria shown
in Table 53.5. It is important to remember that certain drugs including furosemide, gluco-
corticosteroids, thiazides, estrogen-containing preparations, β-blockers, and nicotinic acid
may induce hyperglycemia. In community screening tests it is sometimes impossible to
use a fasting plasma glucose assay; therefore, a fasting capillary whole blood glucose is
performed due to its convenience and simplicity of measurement. The levels are not,
however, as accurate as those measured in plasma, and they are lower. If the measurement
is made in capillary whole blood, individuals with blood glucose ≥110 mg/dl should be
referred to a physician for further evaluation and testing. Criteria for diagnosis of gesta-
tional diabetes mellitus (GDM) is summarized in Table 53.6.
2705_frame_C53 Page 1083 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 2:08 PM
TABLE 53.5
Criteria for the Diagnosis of Diabetes Mellitus using Glucose Tolerance Results
Normoglycemia Impaired Glucose Metabolism DM*
FPG < 110 mg/dl FPG ≥ 110 mg/dl and < 126 mg/dl FPG ≥ 126 mg/dl
2-h PG† < 140 mg/dl 2-h PG† ≥ 140 mg/dl and < 200 mg/dl 2-h PG† ≥ 200 mg/dl
Symptoms of DM and random plasma
glucose concentration ≥ 200 mg/dl
* A diagnosis of diabetes must be confirmed on a subsequent day by measurement of FPG, 2-h PG or random
plasma glucose (if symptoms are present). The FPG test is greatly preferred because of ease of adminis-
tration, acceptability to patients, and lower cost. Fasting is defined as no caloric intake for at least 8 h.
† This test requires the use of a glucose load containing 75 g anhydrous glucose dissolved in water.
* DM, diabetes mellitus; 2-h PG, 2-h postload glucose.
Reprinted with authorization from American Diabetes Association (Diabetes Care 23(1): 21S; 2000).
TABLE 53.6
Screening and Diagnosis Scheme for Gestational Diabetes Mellitus (GDM)*
Plasma Glucose 75-g Oral Glucose Load 100-g Oral Glucose Load
Fasting 95 mg/dl 95 mg/dl
1-h 180 mg/dl 180 mg/dl
2-h 155 mg/dl 155 mg/dl
3-h not done 140 mg/dl
* The diagnosis of GDM requires any two or more plasma glucose values obtained
during the test to meet or exceed the values shown above.
Reprinted with authorization from American Diabetes Association (Diabetes Care 23(1):
78S; 2000).
TABLE 53.7
Screening and Followup of Patients with Diabetes for Retinopathy
Recommended Ophthalmologic Recommended Minimum
Examination* Followup
Type 1 diabetes > 10 years of age Within 3-5 years after onset of Yearly
disease
Type 2 diabetes At the time of diagnosis of diabetes Yearly or more often if retinopathy
is progressing
Diabetic patients during pregnancy Prior to conception if programmed As often as necessary, according to
and during the 1st trimester physician
Patients with macular edema, Immediately after diagnosis of the As often as necessary, according to
severe proliferative retinopathy condition physician
* The ophthalmologic exam recommended is a dilated and comprehensive exam by an ophthalmologist or
optometrist.
Screening
Screening for the presence of retinopathy depends on the rates of progression of diabetic
retinopathy and the risk factors that may alter these rates. Most of the available data is
based on studies on Caucasian populations, and it is not certain whether these data can
be applied to the ethnic groups with the highest incidence of diabetes and complications.
The guidelines for screening and followup of patients with diabetic retinopathy are sum-
marized in Table 53.7.
Neuropathy
Symptomatic and potentially disabling neuropathy affects nearly 50% of diabetic patients.
Neuropathy can be symmetrical or focal, and often involves the autonomic nervous
2705_frame_C53 Page 1085 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 2:08 PM
TABLE 53.8
Classification of Diabetic Neuropathy
Diabetic Polyneuropathies Diabetic Mononeuropathies
Distal symmetrical Peripheral
Chronic sensorimotor Cranial
Autonomic Radiculopathy
Proximal motor Isolated nerve lesions
Acute sensory
TABLE 53.9
Symptoms and Signs of Diabetic Polyneuropathy
Symptoms Signs
Polyneuropathy Pain and paresthesias most Diminished sensation to touch, temperature,
common at night pain, and vibration; loss of reflexes
Atrophy of intrinsic hand muscles; sensory
impairment
system. The prevalence of symmetrical neuropathy is similar in type 1 and type 2 diabetes,
but the focal forms of neuropathy are more common in the older type 2 diabetic patient.
The classification of neuropathy is made according to the areas affected due to the
relatively poor understanding of the pathogenic mechanisms of this diabetic complica-
tion. Table 53.8 includes the most commonly accepted classification of diabetic neuro-
pathic syndromes.
The cause for mononeuropathies is unknown, but they usually have a sudden onset,
which suggests a vascular component in their pathogenesis. They usually tend to resolve
with time, and although they occur in diabetes they are not the typical neuropathic lesions
of diabetes. Diabetic polyneuropathies are the main problem for diabetic patients, and
they will be discussed in some detail. To assess diabetic neuropathy, history of clinical
symptoms and physical exam, electrodiagnostic studies, quantitative sensory testing, and
autonomic function testing should be performed. Table 53.9 summarizes the clinical signs
and symptoms of diabetic polyneuropathy, and Table 53.10 summarizes the functional
changes associated with autonomic failure. In Table 53.11, adequate diagnostic testing to
assess diabetic neuropathy is summarized.
TABLE 53.10
Functional Changes Associated with Autonomic Failure
Systems
Involved Manifestations
Cardiovascular Resting tachycardia, impaired exercise-induced cardiovascular responses, cardiac
denervation, orthostatic hypotension, heat intolerance, impaired vasodilatation, impaired
venoarteriolar reflex (dependent edema)
Eye Decreased diameter of dark-adapted pupil (dark-adapted miosis)
Gastrointestinal Esophageal enteropathy, gallbladder atony, impaired colonic motility (diarrhea, constipation),
anorectal sphincter dysfunction (incontinence)
Genitourinary Neurogenic vesical dysfunction (decreased bladder sensitivity/incontinence/retention),
sexual dysfunction, (male: penile erectile failure and retrograde ejaculation; female: defective
lubrication)
Sudomotor Anhidrosis/hyperhidrosis (heat intolerance), gustatory sweating
Endocrine Hypoglycemia-associated autonomic failure
Reprinted with authorization from American Diabetes Association (Diabetes Care 19(1): 82S; 1996).
2705_frame_C53 Page 1086 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 2:08 PM
TABLE 53.11
Electrodiagnostic Studies, Sensory Testing, and Autonomic Function Testing for the Diagnosis of
Diabetic Neuropathy
Sensory Testing Electrodiagnosis Autonomic Function Testing
Vibration/touch thresholds Motor and sensory nerve conduction R-R variations, orthostasis, Valsalva
Thermal thresholds studies Resting heart rate
Pain thresholds Needle electromyography of extremity QTc, DAPS, NPT, CMG+BST
and paraspinal muscles REPs, QSART, TST
Solid phase gastric motility
Clamped hypoglycemia
Clamped insulin infusion test
Abbreviations: QTc — corrected QT interval on EKG; DAPS — dark-adapted pupil size; NPT — nocturnal
penile tumescence, CMG+BST — cystometrogram+Bethanechol supersensivity test; REPs — reflex-evoked
potentials; QSART — quantitative sudomotor axon reflex test; TST — thermoregulated sweat test.
TABLE 53.12
Definition of Abnormalities in Albumin Excretion
24-h Collection Timed Collection Spot Collection
Normal <30 mg/24 h <20µg/min <30 mg/g creatinine
Microalbuminuria* (incipient nephropathy) 30-300 mg/24 h 20-200 µg/min 30-300 mg/g creatinine
Nephropathy* >300 mg/24 h >200 µg/min >300 mg/g creatinine
* Two out of three urine specimens collected within a 3 to 6 month period should be abnormal before diagnosing
a patient as having incipient nephropathy or nephropathy.
Nephropathy
Diabetic nephropathy is characterized by persistent albumin excretion exceeding 300 mg/
24 h, a progressive decline in the glomerular filtration rate, and increased blood pressure.14
The earliest clinical evidence of nephropathy is the increased excretion of albumin in the
urine. This phase of incipient nephropathy is designated as microalbuminuria. The levels
of albumin excretion in the microalbuminuria stage of nephropathy range from 30 to 300
mg/24 h. Table 53.12 summarizes the cutoff levels for diagnostic purposes as well as the
correspondent values in spot urine collections. Measurement of creatinine and albumin
excretion simultaneously in the same urine specimen is necessary when a spot urine is
collected, and it is also recommended in timed specimens to ensure that a proper urine
collection was obtained. Interpretation of microalbuminuria needs to take into consideration
factors such as hyperglycemia, level of exercise preceding the urine collection, uncontrolled
hypertension, urinary tract infections, acute febrile illnesses, and heart failure, since all of
these conditions may lead to increased albuminuria. Diagnosis of nephropathy needs to be
based on data from three urine specimens collected within a three- to six-month period. At
least two of the specimens may be concordant to allow establishment of a valid diagnosis.
About 20 to 30% of patients with type 1 or type 2 diabetes develop nephropathy. A high
percentage of subjects with type 2 diabetes are found to have microalbuminuria shortly
2705_frame_C53 Page 1087 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 2:08 PM
after their initial diagnosis. Two possible reasons are that in many cases diabetes has been
present for many years and not diagnosed, and microalbuminuria in type 2 diabetes is
less specific of diabetic nephropathy, as shown by renal biopsy studies.
Approximately 80% of individuals with type 1 diabetes who develop sustained microal-
buminuria will progress to overt nephropathy over a period of 10 to 15 years. Once overt
nephropathy occurs and if there is no therapeutic intervention, 50% of these patients will
progress to end-stage renal disease in 10 years, and 75% in 20 years. The progression to
overt nephropathy in type 2 diabetes, without therapeutic intervention, is less than in type
1 diabetes (approximately in 20 to 40% of the cases), and only approximately 20% will
progress to end-stage renal disease. A marked racial/ethnic variability exists, however, as
far as progression to end-stage renal disease in type 2 diabetes. Native Americans, Mex-
ican-Americans and African-Americans have a much higher risk of developing end-stage
renal disease than the other populations with type 2 diabetes. In the U.S., diabetic neph-
ropathy is responsible for one third of all cases of end-stage renal disease, and that is a
terrible burden in the country’s economy. Regardless of the fact that subjects with type 1
diabetes are more prone to progress to end-stage renal disease, half of the patients with
diabetes on dialysis have type 2 diabetes due to the higher prevalence of type 2 diabetes
in the population.
Two major risk factors that can be easily intervened upon are involved in the progression
of nephropathy: hypertension and hyperglycemia. The standards of care for hypertension
and hyperglycemia in diabetes will be discussed later in this section.
study of patients with renal disease in which 3% had type 2 diabetes failed to show any
benefit of protein restriction. In reality, marked decrease of protein intake in patients with
end-stage renal disease on dialysis showed that the main predictive factor of mortality
was low albumin due to protein-energy malnutrition.
Treatment of Hypertension
Hypertension accelerates not only atherosclerosis, but also nephropathy and probably
retinopathy. Thus in diabetes, it is important to treat even minimal elevations of blood
pressure that in nondiabetic patients might be dismissed. The normal nocturnal fall in
blood pressure may be lost in diabetic patients, leading to a more sustained hypertension
throughout the day. Initially, nonpharmacologic measures such as weight loss, exercise
training, and sodium restriction should be implemented (see Section 48). If blood pressure
is not lower than 130/85 mmHg, drug therapy is indicated. Among the various therapeutic
options, ACE inhibitors offer special advantages, mainly when there is concomitant renal
disease. Calcium channel blockers and vasodilators have no adverse metabolic effects,
and therefore are good alternatives.
2705_frame_C53 Page 1089 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 2:08 PM
Treatment of Dyslipidemia
Dyslipidemia is common in subjects with diabetes. The more common lipid abnormalities
in diabetes are increased triglycerides and low HDL cholesterol levels. Small, cholesterol-
poor, dense LDL particles are also common in patients with hypertriglyceridemia and the
insulin resistance syndrome. Dense LDL is more readily oxidized and more atherogenic.
Aggressive treatment of dyslipoproteinemia is crucial to prevent the development and/or
progression of macrovascular complications in diabetes.15 Recommendations by the ADA
concerning goals for therapy of hyperlipidemia as well as guidelines for medical nutrition
therapy (MNT), physical activity, and drug treatment have been widely promulgated. Opti-
mal triglyceride levels in diabetes are below 150 mg/dl, as in nondiabetic patients. This level
was recommended by the National Cholesterol Education Program Adult Treatment Panel
III (NCEP0-ATP III) on the recently released guidelines15a and it is lower than the 200 mg/dl
previously recommended by both the NCEP-ATP II and the ADA. HDL-cholesterol levels
above 45 mg/dl are the target in diabetes. According to ADA guidelines and the NCEP-ATP
III guidelines, values below 40 µg/dl for men and above 50 mg/dl are used to define the
metabolic syndrome. Levels of HDL-cholesterol below 40 mg/dl instead of 35 mg/dl are
considered in the new NCEP guidelines a risk factor for CHD. The AFCAPS-Tex CAPS trial
was instrumental in this change since it showed clearly that CHD risk decreases with levels
of HDL-cholesterol above 40 mg/dl. Weight loss, increased physical activity, and good
glycemic control are important measures to lower triglycerides and increase HDL-cholesterol
levels. Increased LDL-cholesterol levels were not considered important in the treatment of
diabetic dyslipidemia until recently. However, in the past decade it became apparent that
lowering LDL-cholesterol levels in diabetes led to a significant reduction in the risk of a
major congestive heart disease (CHD) event. That was clearly shown in several clinical trials
including two major secondary prevention trials: Scandinavian Simvastatin Survival Study16
and CARE trial.17 The results of these trials were instrumental in the establishment of the
guidelines to treat dyslipidemia in diabetes recently published by the ADA, and together
with the results of several studies, among them the East West Study,17a were behind the
change in the NCEP-ATP III guidelines that now considers diabetes as a CHD equivalent.
Optimal LDL-cholesterol levels for adults with diabetes are <100 mg/dl, regardless of their
risk factor profile or presence or absence of established cardiovascular disease.
TABLE 53.13
Indications for Cardiac Testing in Diabetic Patients
Testing for CAD is warranted in patients with the following:
with type 1 diabetes. Hypoglycemia is defined as a blood glucose of ≤60 mg/dl that may
occur with or without symptoms.18 During the course of the DCCT trial and even under
optimal conditions, the incidence of severe hypoglycemia was more than three times
higher in patients on intensive therapy when compared with patients treated with con-
ventional therapy. The effects of hypoglycemia cannot be ignored, since they can be
devastating, particularly on the brain. The first signs of hypoglycemia are shakiness,
sweating, tachycardia, hunger, irritability, and dizziness. These symptoms are followed
by inability to concentrate, confusion, slurred speech, irrational behavior, blurred vision,
and extreme fatigue. Finally, the symptoms of severe hypoglycemia are seizures, unre-
sponsiveness, and loss of consciousness. Symptoms of hypoglycemia may occur at any
time, and therefore patients with diabetes should always be prepared to address them.
The level of glucose that leads to symptoms of hypoglycemia may vary from person to
person and also varies in the same individual under different circumstances. Hypoglyce-
mia is a much less frequent problem for people with type 2 diabetes except in the elderly,
mainly when they have associated diseases that require the use of beta blockers. Hypogly-
cemia usually occurs gradually, and in general is associated with warning signs, including
rapid heart beat, perspiration, shakiness, anxiety, and hunger. However, warning symp-
toms of hypoglycemia may be absent, causing the clinical syndrome of hypoglycemia
unawareness. This syndrome results from excessive insulin in the setting of absent glu-
cagon secretory responses to falling glucose levels. These episodes, in turn, cause reduced
autonomic responses and lead to further decrease of the warning symptoms of hypogly-
cemia. This creates a vicious cycle that can only be broken by avoiding inducing iatrogenic
hypoglycemia. The most common causes of hypoglycemia include: a) skipping, delaying,
or reducing the size of the meals and snacks; b) increased physical activity without
adequately adjusting therapy; c) alcohol intake mainly on an empty stomach; and d)
treatment with excessively high levels of insulin or other antidiabetic medications.
Hypoglycemia occurs mainly when the patient is being treated with insulin or sulphony-
lureas. In theory, biguanidines, thiazolidinediones, and α-glucosidase inhibitors would
not be expected to induce hypoglycemia, since by themselves they will not increase the
level of plasma insulin. However, it is conceivable that any intervention that limits hepatic
glucose production, favors glucose utilization, or both may lead to hypoglycemia, since
increased hepatic glucose production and limited glucose utilization are mechanisms of
defense against a drop in plasma glucose levels. In the elderly, it is not uncommon to have
hypoglycemia episodes, and these may be dangerous since these subjects often live alone.
A recent study examining the risk of sulphonylurea-induced hypoglycemia in elderly type
2705_frame_C53 Page 1091 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 2:08 PM
2 diabetic patients concluded that therapy with sulphonylureas is well tolerated by the
elderly, and that the primary mechanism of protection against hypoglycemia is an increase
in epinephrine secretion.19 That suggests that glucagon secretion in elderly patients is
diminished, and supports the concept that treatment of these patients with sulphonylureas
or insulin when they are also being treated with β-blockers may be dangerous, and close
followup is needed. Oral antidiabetic agents other than sulphonylureas are probably better
candidates for the treatment of these patients if their hyperglycemia is relatively modest.
Although hypoglycemia during treatment with these agents may also occur, it is likely to
be less frequently observed and less severe.
General Principles
It is accepted that lowering blood glucose levels to normal or near-normal levels will reduce:
It is also well accepted that lowering lipid levels will result in a decrease in diabetic
macrovascular complications.
Thus, proper standards of diabetes care should include:
2705_frame_C53 Page 1092 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 2:08 PM
Special Considirations
Pregnancy
To reduce the risk of fetal malformations and maternal and fetal complications, pregnant
diabetic women require excellent glycemic control. Followup by a multidisciplinary team
including a diabetologist, internist or family physician, obstetrician, and diabetes educator
is essential. Other specialists need to be called upon if necessary. Self-management skills
essential for glycemic control and preparation for pregnancy include:
• Designing an appropriate meal plan, with timing of meals and snacks and an
appropriate physical activity plan
• Self-monitoring blood glucose levels, choosing the time and site for insulin
injections, using therapy with glucagon or carbohydrate intake for treatment of
hypoglycemia, and self-adjusting insulin dosages
• Reducing stress and coping with denial
Macrovascular Disease
Recommendations listed in Table 53.14 for LDL and HDL cholesterol levels as well as for
triglycerides have a goal of reducing the risk for development of coronary heart disease
TABLE 53.14
Recommended Diabetes Management Guidelines
Parameters to Assess Frequency of Evaluation Goal Action Indicated If: Recommended Treatment
Hyperglycemic episodes/ Each visit No episodes Episodes occur Change in lifestyle, diet, and
ketonuria drug treatment
Blood pressure Each visit ≤ 130/80 mm Hg > 130/80 mm Hg ACE Inhibitors and off other
antihypertensive medications
Lipid profile: At least yearly. Quarterly or
LDL-Cholesterol more frequently if levels are < 100 mg/dL** >100 mg/dL Stepped approach to lipid
HDL-Cholesterol abnormal >45 mg/dL < 45 mg/dL control with lipid lowering
Triglycerides <150 mg/dL > 150 mg/dL medications, diet, and exercise
Low dosage aspirin for patients
with established
macrovascular disease or
patients with several risk
factors for macrovascular
disease
EKG Annually Normal Abnormal Stress test and/or referral to
cardiology
Ankle/brachial ratio Annually Normal Abnormal Peripheral vascular assessment
and/or referral to vascular
surgery
1093
1094
Retinopathy:
Dilated eye exam by eye care Annually Normal Abnormal Referral to ophthamology
specialist Adequate glycemic control
2705_frame_C53 Page 1094 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 2:08 PM
Nephropathy:
Microalbumin Annually or quarterly if < 30 mg/24 h or < 30 mg/g of ≥ 30 mg/24 h or ≥ 30 mg/g of Adequate glycemic control
abnormal creatinine (spot urine) creatinine (spot urine) Adequate treatment with ACE
inhibitors
Adequate treatment of
hyperlipidemia
Referral to nephrology if
necessary
Neuropathy:
Peripheral sensory Annually Intact sensation Abnormal Protective and preventive
education
Adequate glycemic control
Drug treatment for
symptomatic disease
Feet exam Each visit No complications Corns, calluses, ulcers, wounds, Referral to podiatry and/or
infections vascular surgery specialist
Adequate control of lipid
abnormalities and blood
glucose
Treatment of infections if
present
Handbook of Nutrition and Food
Assessment of Other Complications
Oral/periodontal Each visit Healthy gums/teeth If no routine dental visits and Referral for dental hygiene and
Dental visit and hygiene every hygiene are being performed care
6 months Adequate glycemic control*
Other infection Each visit Absence of infection If infection is present Adequate glycemic control*
Appropriate treatment of
infection and referral to ID if
necessary
Lifestyle Assessment
Nutrition in Diabetes Mellitus
Exercise Each visit 20-45 minutes on most days < 3 times weekly Exercise counseling related to
type, frequency, duration, and
intensity
Smoking, tobacco use Each visit No use Any use Smoking cessation counseling
Weight Each visit Ideal body weight Patient is over- or underweight For overweight: diet adjustment
2705_frame_C53 Page 1095 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 2:08 PM
TABLE 53.15
Treatment Decisions Based on LDL Cholesterol Levels in Adults
Medical Nutrition Therapy Drug Therapy
Initiation Initiation
Level LDL Goal Level LDL Goal
With CAD, PVD, or CVD >100 ≤100 >100 ≤100
Without CAD, PVD, or CVD >100 ≤100 ≥130 ≤100
Data are given in mg/dl.
Reprinted with authorization from American Diabetes Association (Diabetes Care 23(1):
58S; 2000).
and to stop progression or cause regression in patients with already established macrovas-
cular disease. The goal for LDL cholesterol levels is 100 mg/dl for all diabetics. Lipid-
lowering drug therapy is recommended to be started in patients with established vascular
disease (coronary heart disease, peripheral vascular or cerebrovascular disease) if the levels
of LDL-cholesterol are above 100 mg/dl. In diabetic patients without established macrovas-
cular disease, lipid-lowering drug therapy is recommended for LDL-cholesterol of 130 mg/
dl or above. The recommendations for treatment of elevated LDL-cholesterol are summa-
rized in Table 53.15. Pharmacological therapy should be initiated after behavioral interven-
tions are used. However, in patients with clinical CAD or very high LDL-cholesterol levels
(i.e., ≥200 mg/dl), pharmacological therapy should be initiated at the same time that
behavioral therapy is started. According to the NCEP-ATP III guidelines, diabetes drug
treatment and behavioral modification should be performed simultaneously. The ADA
guidelines recommend that diabetic subjects with clinical CAD and an LDL cholesterol
level of >100 mg/dl be treated with pharmacological agents. For diabetics without pre-
existing CAD, the current ADA recommendations for starting pharmacological therapy are
LDL-cholesterol levels ≥130 mg/dl. Recent clinical trial data strongly suggests that these
goals may become more stringent soon.
A point to consider in diabetic patients is the method used to measure LDL-cholesterol.
Due to the prevalence of dense LDL in these patients, the conventional method to calculate
LDL-cholesterol is inappropriate and the levels determined are in general falsely low.
Increased triglyceride levels are also recognized as a target for intervention. The levels
of triglycerides considered acceptable are <150 mg/dl, and the HDL-cholesterol levels >45
mg/dl. The initial therapy for hypertriglyceridemia is behavioral modification with weight
loss, increased physical activity, and no alcohol consumption. In the case of severe hyper-
triglyceridemia (≥1,000 mg/dl according to the ADA guidelines and ≥500 mg/dl according
to NCEP-ATP III guidelines), severe dietary fat restriction (15 to 20% of kcalories as fat)
in addition to pharmacological therapy is necessary to reduce the risk of pancreatitis.
These patients are hard to manage, and improving glycemic control rather tightly is a
very effective measure for reducing triglyceride levels and should be aggressively used
before the introduction of fibric acid derivatives.
TABLE 53.16
Goals of Medical Nutrition Therapy for Diabetes
• Achieve and maintain near-normal blood glucose goals
• Achieve and/or maintain optimal blood lipid levels
• Achieve and/or maintain normal blood pressure
• Prevent, delay or treat nutrition-related complications
• Provide adequate kcalories for achievement of reasonable body weight
• Provide optimal nutrition for maximizing health and for growth, development, pregnancy, and
lactation
individualized for the person with diabetes to integrate the therapy into the daily routine
of living. A registered dietitian completes a nutritional assessment and develops the
individualized meal plan and behavioral interventions with the person with diabetes and
the family.22 The effectiveness of the dietary interventions in helping the person with
diabetes achieve the identified goals should be evaluated routinely until goals are
achieved. If goals are not met, changes in the overall management plan are needed. When
goals are achieved, reassessment, continuing education, and evaluation should occur at
least annually, and more often with changes in lifestyle, to assure optimal control of
diabetes and maintenance of health.
TABLE 53.17
Survival Skills for Managing Diabetes
• To acquire an adequate knowledge of:
Basic food and meal guidelines (including when eating out)
Effect of carbohydrates on blood glucose
Amount of carbohydrates taken daily
Carbohydrate food groups, portion sizes, and label information
• To coordinate insulin administration with food intake
• To be able to perform self-monitoring of blood glucose
• To schedule exercise according to food intake and glucose control
• To acquire knowledge of how to treat hypoglycemia:
(in general, 15 grams of carbohydrates should raise blood glucose 50-100 mg/dl in 15 minutes)
• To know that alcohol intake may cause hypoglycemia (by inhibiting gluconeogenesis in liver)
• To know why, when, and how to call the health care provider and/or dietitian
• To have an established plan for recording self-management and returning for continuing care
2705_frame_C53 Page 1098 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 2:08 PM
Conventional Intensive
therapy therapy
FIGURE 53.1
Nutrition therapy for type 1 diabetes. Reprinted with permission from Maximizing the Role of Nutrition in Diabetes
Management, American Diabetes Association, Alexandria, 1994.
two approaches to nutrition therapy currently recommended by the ADA.25 Blood glucose
levels need to be monitored and insulin doses and/or food intake to control blood glucose
adjusted according to recommended levels (Table 53.14).
Type 2 Diabetes
The person with newly diagnosed type 2 diabetes may have had asymptomatic type 2
diabetes for a number of years prior to diagnosis, and may present with one or more
complications. Most are obese or have increased percentage of body fat distributed pre-
dominately in the abdominal region. The goals of therapy are to achieve and maintain
glucose, lipid, and blood pressure within the recommended range and to achieve a mod-
erate weight loss (5 to 9 pounds) if overweight.26,27 Methods for attaining these goals are
outlined in Figure 53.2. There is no clear answer about which goal should have first
priority; however, the UKPDS researchers found that blood pressure control produced the
most improved outcomes.28 The desired outcomes of medical nutrition therapy for persons
with type 2 diabetes are outlined in Tables 53.14 and 53.16.
Glucose Control
and
Blood Pressure Control Improve food choices
Increase physical
activity
FIGURE 53.2
Nutrition therapy for type 2 diabetes. Adapted with permission from Maximizing the Role of Nutrition in Diabetes
Management, American Diabetes Association, Alexandria, 1994.
2705_frame_C53 Page 1099 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 2:08 PM
TABLE 53.18
Goals for Medical Nutrition Therapy in GDM
• Optimal nutrition for developing fetus
• Optimal nutrition for mother
• To maintain maternal euglycemia keeping an adequate diet
• Good nutrition patterns taught to the family ‘gatekeeper’
• To develop nutritional patterns that prevent or forestall recurrence of GDM and onset of type 2 diabetes
mellitus
Reprinted with permission from American Diabetes Association: Thomas-Dobersen, D., et al. Clinical Diabetes 1:
172; 1999.
TABLE 53.19
Blood Glucose Goals for Pregnancy
Preexisting Diabetes Gestational
Mellitus Diabetes
Fasting 70-100 mg/dl ≤105 mg/dl
Premeal 70-100 mg/dl 70-105 mg/dl
Postprandial 1 hour ≤140 mg/dl ≤120 mg/dl
Postprandial 2 hour ≤120 mg/dl ≤120 mg/dl
Adapted with permission from Hoeer, J.H., Green-Pastors, J.,
Diabetes Medical Nutrition Therapy, American Diabetes Associa-
tion, Alexandria, ch. 8, 1997.
Diabetes in Pregnancy
The goal of nutrition therapy for diabetes in pregnancy is to produce a healthy baby at
term and maintain optimal health for the mother. If type 1 or type 2 diabetes is diagnosed
prior to pregnancy, counseling is recommended to attain optimal control of diabetes prior
to conception and throughout pregnancy. The pregnant woman is defined as having
gestational diabetes if first diagnosed during the present pregnancy. GDM does not exclude
the possibility that diabetes may have been unrecognized prior to pregnancy; however,
GDM typically occurs around the 24th week of pregnancy. Women diagnosed with GDM
in a prior pregnancy have a 30 to 65% probability of developing GDM in a subsequent
pregnancy. Studies also show that women with GDM have a 22 to 30% probability of
developing type 2 diabetes in 7 to 10 years and a 50 to 60% risk of developing diabetes in
their lifetime. Additionally, the offspring have an increased risk of obesity and GDM.29
The overall goals for medical nutrition therapy are shown in Table 53.18, and blood
glucose goals are shown in Table 53.19. To accomplish these goals, meal patterns, nutrient
composition, and caloric needs are reviewed in Table 53.20, and a typical meal/snack
pattern is shown in Table 53.21.
Nutritional Recommendations
Guidelines for nutrient consumption and other nutrition components such as sweeteners
and cholesterol along with technical reviews of the evidence for the guidelines have been
published by the ADA,30-34 and are summarized in Table 53.22. The energy nutrients can
be converted into blood glucose, and Table 53.23 summarizes their degree of conversion.
Protein and fats have minimal effect on blood glucose except in patients whose diabetes
is poorly controlled, since these nutrients may lead to a rapid increase in gluconeogenesis
and deteriorated glycemic control.32 Many persons with diabetes initially think that only
sugar can increase blood glucose; thus, diabetes education about the effect of nutrients
(especially carbohydrates) is essential to good control.
2705_frame_C53 Page 1100 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 2:08 PM
TABLE 53.20
Summary of Intensive Nutritional Therapy for GDM
Meal Pattern
Composition
Energy Levels
Weight Gain
TABLE 53.21
Intensive Medical Nutrition Therapy for GDM
Total Carbohydrate Carbohydrate
Meal or Snack kcalories (%) (g)
Breakfast 10-15 15-30
A.M. snack 10 15-30
Lunch 20-25 30-60
P.M. snack 15 15-45
Dinner 25 45-60
Bedtime snack 15 30 or more
Daily total 100 150-250
Reprinted with permission from American Diabetes As-
sociation. Gunderson, E.P., Diabetes Care 20: 223; 1997.
Carbohydrate level should vary according to kcalorie
prescription and the individual’s tolerance for carbohy-
drate, which worsens as gestation progresses. The re-
stricted levels listed above are characteristic of late
gestation.
TABLE 53.22
Medical Nutrition Therapy Recommendations
Nutrient Recommendation Comments
Protein
Sources: chicken, fish, meat, eggs, 10-20% of total kcalories should come from protein sources. Research indicates needs are similar for people with or without
milk, tofu, nuts, peanut butter diabetes.
With onset of nephropathy, limit protein to adult RDA (0.8 g/
kg/day).
Some research studies suggest vegetable protein may not be as
Nutrition in Diabetes Mellitus
molasses, etc. this generally equates to 45-60% of total kcalories from Sucrose and sucrose-containing foods should be consumed
carbohydrate. within the context of a healthful diet. These foods are often high
in total carbohydrate and fat and low in vitamins and minerals.
Sugars and Other Sweeteners
Sources: sucrose, fructose, corn % of kcalories will vary and is individualized based on usual Sucrose and sucrose-containing foods should be consumed
sweeteners such as corn syrup, fruit eating habits, glucose and lipid goals. Sucrose and other within the context of a healthful diet. These foods are often high
juice, or fruit juice concentrate, sugars/sweeteners can be integrated into a healthy eating in total carbohydrate and fat and low in vitamins and minerals.
honey, molasses, dextrose, maltose; pattern for persons with diabetes. Individuals can be taught to substitute sucrose-containing foods
sorbitol, mannitol, xylitol (sugar for other carbohydrate foods in their meal plans.
alcohols)
Nonnutritive sweeteners such as All are approved by the FDA and the FDA determines an
saccharin, aspartame, acesulfame K, acceptable daily intake (ADI) which includes a 100-fold safety
and sucralose factor. Actual intake by persons with diabetes is well below the
ADI.
Fat
Sources: monounsaturated: olive and 60-70% of total kcalories should be divided between Individuals with diabetes should limit total fat to 25-35% of total
canola oils, avocado, nuts monounsaturated fats and carbohydrates. kcalories and <200 mg of dietary cholesterol per day.
polyunsaturated: safflower, Up to 10% of kcalories should be from polyunsaturated fats. If obesity and weight management are the primary issues,
sunflower, corn, and soy oils reduced total fat to reduce total kcalories and increasing
exercise should be recommended.
1101
1102
others.
Dietary cholesterol <200 mg per day MNT typically reduces LDL Cholesterol 15-25 mg/dl (0.40-0.65
mmol/l)
Fiber 10-25 grams of soluble fiber per day — same recommendation Research suggests that in the amounts typically consumed, fiber
as for individuals without diabetes.* intake has very little impact on blood glucose levels.
Sodium Same as for general population: <3000 mg per day. There is an association between hypertension and both IDDM
If hypertensive, individuals should reduce sodium intake to and NIDDM, with an increase for people with NIDDM who
<2400 mg per day. are obese. There is also evidence that individuals with NIDDM
Food selection guidelines: <400 mg sodium per single serving are more salt sensitive.
of food; <800 mg sodium per entree or convenience meal.
Alcohol Abstinence is recommended for those with history of alcohol
1 drink = 12 oz. beer, 5 oz. wine, 1 oz. Insulin users: limit to 2 drinks per day and do not cut back on abuse or alcohol-induced hypertriglyceridemia, and during
80-proof liquor food. pregnancy.
Nutrition in Diabetes Mellitus
Non-insulin users: substitute alcohol for fat. Drink only with food. Alcohol can lead to hypoglycemia via
inhibition of gluconeogenesis.
Limit for weight loss and elevated triglycerides.
Micronutrients The vitamin and mineral needs of people who are healthy appear Individuals at greatest risk for vitamin/mineral deficiency
to be adequately met by the RDAs, which include a generous include those on weight loss diets, strict vegetarians, the elderly,
2705_frame_C53 Page 1103 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 2:08 PM
TABLE 53.23
Energy Nutrients and Their Absorption
% Nutrient Converted Estimated Time
Nutrient Kcalories/Gram to Glucose for Absorption*
Carbohydrate 4 100%
Simple 5-30 min
Complex 1-3 h
Protein 4 50-60% 3-6 h
Fat 9 10% 3-8 h
* The absorption time is affected by the nutrient mix. For example, the sugar
from a candy bar with high fat content is more slowly absorbed than a piece
of candy than contains no fat.
TABLE 53.24
Meal Planning Approaches
Approach Benefits Drawbacks
Food guide pyramid Well known by the general public Little focus on meal spacing
Health food choices Mixes guidelines with meal plan Often perceived as diet
Exchange lists for meal planning Places emphasis on all nutrient Concept difficult to understand by
groups the lay person
Counting plans Good approach for specific Requires committed learner
nutrient intervention
Carbohydrate indications Useful for adequate glucose control Ignores other nutrients
Protein indications Address diabetic nephropathy Ignores other nutrients
Fat indications Address weight or hyperlipidemia Ignores other nutrients
Reprinted with permission from American Diabetes Association. Karlsen, M., Khakpour, D., and Thomson, L.L.
Clincal Diabetes, May/June: 54; 1996.
Food Guides and Planning Food Intake for Persons with Diabetes
Historically, the approaches to planning food intake for persons with diabetes have ranged
from starvation diets (during the pre-insulin era) to high-fat, low-carbohydrate diet plans,
to our present system of more liberalized food intake. Various food guides and methods
for planning food intake have been used. An overview of the meal planning approaches
for providing MNT to persons with diabetes is reviewed in Table 53.24. A meal planning
approach that provides the desired outcomes (decrease of complications and optimal
health and satisfaction) is desirable. Carbohydrate counting is one method that allows
maximum flexibility as well as excellent glycemic control. The different ways to count
carbohydrates are reviewed in Table 53.25.
Food Labeling
Teaching patients with diabetes how to read a food label is especially important to those
who count carbohydrate, fat, or protein in their meal plans. For persons using exchange
2705_frame_C53 Page 1105 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 2:08 PM
TABLE 53.25
Ways to Count Carbohydrates
Premeal or Bolus Dose
Method Description Ease vs. Accuracy Calculation*
Counting carbohydrate Count each serving of Easiest method but also Calculate pre-meal dose
exchanges starch, fruit, and milk as the least accurate units/exchange
(interchanges) one carbohydrate Requires the least math
exchange and consider skill
them equal in
carbohydrate value
Counting food exchanges Add the carbohydrate Easy and fairly accurate Calculate pre-meal dose
values of all exchanges as units/exchange,
that contain counting vegetables as
carbohydrate (including carbohydrates, or
vegetables) to obtain the calculate the bolus by
carbohydrate total for a dividing the total grams
meal of carbohydrate in the
meal by the insulin-to-
carbohydrate ratio
Carbohydrate gram Add carbohydrate gram More time-consuming Calculate pre-meal dose
counting values for all foods than methods 1 and 2 by dividing the total
eaten to obtain the total but also quite accurate. grams of carbohydrate
carbohydrate intake per Requires more math skill in the meal by the
meal to add and divide 2- and insulin-to-carbohydrate
3-digit number ratio
Calculating available Count grams of Most difficult; requires Multiply grams of
glucose carbohydrate for all the most math skill of all protein in meal by 0.6 to
foods eaten, then methods obtain available glucose,
calculate the glucose add to grams of
available from protein carbohydrate; calculate
and add this value to the the dose by dividing this
carbohydrate grams to total by the insulin-to-
obtain the meal total carbohydrate ratio
* Short-acting insulin adminstered before meals to control the meal-related glucose rise. The calibration of
insulin to food intake is recommended for individuals with type 1 diabetes, especially those following
intensive therapy.
lists for meal planning, information about how to use the nutrition information to fit foods
into the exchange lists is helpful (and essential for combination foods). The key question
for the patient to ask is “how does this food, based on the nutritional information, fit into
my food plan for controlling diabetes?”35
exercise program.36 If complications are present, the patient should have an individual-
ized exercise program prescription that specifies the frequency, intensity, and duration
of exercise, along with specific precautions for minimizing risks. The benefits of physical
activity are many, including cardiovascular fitness and psychological wellbeing. How-
ever, the risks of exercise for the person with diabetes are many, including fluctuations
in blood glucose control, ketosis, lower-extremity injury, and exacerbation of pre-existing
complications.
Exercise Recommendations
For Persons with Cardiovascular Disease
Diabetics at risk or with diagnosed cardiovascular disease should undergo medical eval-
uation of cardiac status and special evaluation for exercise tolerance before participating
in increased physical activities. Supervised cardiovascular risk reduction or rehabilitation
programs often provide the patient and his family with increased support for increasing
physical activities.
Positive effects of regular exercise on reducing blood pressure have been consistently
demonstrated in hyperinsulinemic persons.
Autonomic
Autonomic neuropathy increases the risks of exercise-related problems, and certain precau-
tions need to be taken to tailor the exercise prescription to each individual patient following
an in-depth evaluation. Thermoregulation may be difficult, so avoiding exercise in hot or
cold environments, and special attention to adequate hydration are most important.
TABLE 53.26
Food Adjustments for Exercise for Persons with Type 1 Diabetes
General Guidelines
Types of Exercise If Blood Suggestion of Food
and Examples Glucose Is: Increase Food Intake By: Exchanges to Use:
Short duration, low-to- <100 mg/dL 10 to 15 g of CHO 1 Fruit or 1 starch
moderate intensity (walking ≥100 mg/dL None
a half mile or leisurely
bicycling for <30 minutes)
Moderate intensity (1 hour of <100 mg/dL 25 to 50 g CHO before 1 Meat sandwich with a milk
tennis, swimming, jogging, exercise, then 10 to 15 g/h or fruit
leisurely bicycling, golfing, of exercise
etc.) 100-180 mg/dL 10 to 15 gm CHO 1 Fruit or 1 starch
180-300 mg/dL None
>300 mg/dL Do not begin exercise until
blood glucose is under
control
Strenuous (about 1-2 hours of <100 mg/dL 50 g CHO, monitor blood 1 Meat sandwich (2 slices of
football, hockey, racquetball, glucose carefully bread) with a milk and fruit
or basketball; strenuous 100-180 mg/dL 25 to 50 g CHO depending Meat sandwich with a milk
bicycling or swimming; on intensity and duration and fruit
shoveling heavy snow) 180-300 mg/dL 10 to 15 g CHO 1 Fruit or 1 starch
>300 mg/dL Do not begin exercise until
blood glucose is under
better control
Self-blood glucose monitoring is essential for all persons to determine their carbohydrate needs. Persons with
type 2 diabetes usually do not need an exercise snack. During periods of exercise, all individuals need to increase
fluid intake.
CHO = carbohydrates.
Adapted with permission from Franz, M.J., and Barry, B., Diabetes and Exercise: Guidelines for Safe and Enjoyable
Activity, American Diabetes Association, Alexandria, 1996, p. 16.
2705_frame_C53 Page 1108 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 2:08 PM
during exercise. If the duration of exercise is 30 minutes or more during peak action time
of insulin and blood glucose is in good control, reduction of insulin is recommended. The
reduction of insulin is based on duration and intensity of exercise, and usually ranges
from 5 to 60% of daily requirements. After exercise, an extra carabohydrate snack may be
necessary. Frequent monitoring of blood glucose and adequate food/fluid intake to pre-
vent hypoglycemia are essential for self-management and maintaining a healthy lifestyle.
TABLE 53.27
Developing a Consistent Carbohydrate Diabetes Meal Plan Menu for Health Care Facilities
1. Establish the desired kcalorie range.
2. Determine the desired percentages of macronutrients (carbohydrate, protein, saturated fat, total fat).
3. Determine the numbers of CHO choices to be given at each meal, and if included, at bedtime snack.
4. Determine how often to include sucrose-containing desserts and the maximum number of CHO choices to
be allotted to each dessert.
5. Analyze current fat-modified menus for distribution of macronutrients (% carbohydrate, protein, saturated
fat, total fat) to determine if they meet goal ranges of new diabetic menus.
6. Determine how many grams of carbohydrate or CHO choices are in each item in the fat-modified menu (i.e.,
fruits, salads, starches, casseroles, desserts, milk, juices).
7. For nonselective menus, adjust the fat-modified menus to provide the established number of CHO choices,
and include a bedtime snack if desired.
8. For facilities with menu selections, identify the CHO choices for each carbohydrate item, and include
instructions on the menu regarding the number of carbohydrate choices to make at each meal.
9. For long-term care facilities that wish to base their diabetic diet (consistent carbohydrate diet) on regular
menus, use the same process as for fat-modified menus.
Reprinted with permission from Schafer, R.G. Practical Diabetology 16:3, 48; 1997.
sistent carbohydrate diabetes meal plan;” a plan for developing a menu is shown in
Table 53.27.
TABLE 53.28
States that have Enacted Diabetes Reform Laws (as of
January 2000)27
Arizona Iowa Nebraska Rhode Island
Arkansas Kansas Nevada South Carolina
California Kentucky New Hampshire South Dakota
Colorado Louisiana New Jersey Tennessee
Connecticut Maine New Mexico Texas
Florida Maryland New York Vermont
Georgia Minnesota North Carolina Virginia
Illinois Mississippi Oklahoma Washington
Indiana Missouri Pennsylvania West Virginia
Wisconsin
From Maggio, C.A., Pi-Sunyer, F.X. Diabetes Care 20: 1744; 1997.
2705_frame_C53 Page 1111 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 2:08 PM
References
1. World Health Organization: Diabetes Mellitus: Report of a WHO Study Group. Geneva, World
Health Org, 1985 (Tech Rep Ser no 727).
2. Harris MI, Flegal KM, Cowie CC, Eberhardt MS, Goldshtein DE, Little RR, Wiedmeyer HM,
Byrd-Holt DD. Diabetes Care 21: 518; 1998.
3. National Diabetes Data Group. Diabetes 28: 1039; 1979.
4. Expert Committee on the Diagnosis and Classification of Diabetes Mellitus, Diabetes Care 21(1):
5S; 1998.
5. Reaven GM. Diabetes 37: 1595; 1988.
6. Tominaga M, Eguchi H, Manaka H, et al. Diabetes Care 22: 920; 1999.
7. Harris MI, Hadden WC, Knowler WC, Bennett PH. Diabetes 36: 523; 1987.
8. Harris MI. Diabetes Care 16: 642; 1993.
9. Klein R. Diabetes Care 18: 258; 1995.
10. Aiello LP, Gardner TW, King GL, et al. Diabetes Care 21: 143; 1998.
11. The Diabetes Control and Complications Trial Research Group, N Engl J Med 329: 997; 1993.
12. UK Prospective Diabetes Study Group, Lancet 352: 837; 1998.
13. UK Prospective Diabetes Study Group, Lancet 352: 854; 1998.
14. DeFronzo RA. Diabetes Reviews 3: 510; 1995.
15. Haffner SM. Diabetes Care 21: 160; 1998.
15a. Expert Panel on Detection, Evaluation, and Treatment of High Blood Cholesterol in Adults.
JAMA 285: 2486, 2001.
16. Pyorala K, Pederson TR, Kjekshus J, et al. Diabetes Care 20: 614; 1997.
17. Sacks FM, Pfeffer MA, Moye LA, et al. N Engl J Med 335: 1001; 1996.
17a. Haffner SM, et al. N Engl J Med 339, 229, 1998.
18. Cryer PE, Fisher JN, Shamoon H. Diabetes Care 17: 734; 1994.
19. Burge MR, Schmitz-Firentino K, Fischett C, et al. JAMA 279: 137; 1998.
20. Weir GC, Nathan DM, Singer DE. Diabetes Care 17: 1514; 1994.
21. Franz MJ, Horton ES, Bantle JP, et al. Diabetes Care 17: 490; 1994.
22. Schafer RG, Bohannon B, Franz M, et al. Diabetes Care 20: 96; 1997.
23. Clement S. Diabetes Care 18: 1204; 1995.
24. Funnell MM, Haas LB. Diabetes Care 18: 100; 1995.
25. American Diabetes Association. Maximizing the role of nutrition in diabetes management, Amer-
ican Diabetes Association, Alexandria, 1994, ch 5, 6.
26. Hoeer JH, Green-Pastors J. Diabetes Medical Nutrition Therapy. American Diabetes Association,
Alexandria, 1997, ch 3.
27. Maggio CA, Pi-Sunyer FX. Diabetes Care 20: 1744; 1997.
28. American Diabetes Association. Diabetes Care 23(1): 27S; 2000.
29. Thomas-Dobersen D. Clinical Diabetes 17: 179; 1999.
30. Franz MJ, Horton ES, Bantle JP, et al. Diabetes Care 17: 490; 1994.
31. Karlsen M, Khakpour D, Thomson LL. Clinical Diabetes 14: 54; 1996.
32. Henry RR. Diabetes Care 17: 1502; 1994.
33. Warshaw H, Franz M, Powers MS. Diabetes Care 19: 1294; 1996.
34. Mooradian AD, Failla M, Hoogwerf B, et al. Diabetes Care 17: 464; 1994.
35. Wheeler ML, Franz M, Heins J, et al. Diabetes Care 17: 489; 1994.
36. American Diabetes Association. Diabetes Care 22(1): 50S; 2000.
37. Wasserman DH, Zinman B. Diabetes Care 17: 924; 1994.
38. Schneuider SH, Ruderman NB. Diabetes Care 13: 785; 1990.
39. American Diabetes Association. Diabetes Care 22(1): 47S; 2000.
40. American Diabetes Association. Diabetes Advocate (Newsletter) January, 2000.
41. Kulkarni K, Castle G, Gregory R, et al. J Am Diet Assoc 98: 62; 1998.
2705_frame_C53 Page 1112 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 2:08 PM
2705_frame_C54 Page 1113 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 2:09 PM
54
Nutrition and Oral Medicine
Introduction
In the Spring of 2000, the Surgeon General of the United States released the first-ever
report on “Oral Health in America.” The intent of this landmark report is to alert the
American people to the full meaning of oral health and its importance to general health
and well being. The report has five major themes:1
The overlying theme is that the etiology and pathogenesis of diseases and disorders
affecting the craniofacial structures are complex and multifactional, involving an interplay
and interaction among genetic, environmental, and behavioral factors. The major envi-
ronmental factor in this interplay is diet and nutrition during development of the cranio-
facial complex, the maintenance of craniofacial structure integrity, and fending off
subsequent microbial challenge. In fact, the two classic dental diseases, caries and peri-
odontal disease(s), both have vital nutrition and dietary components. Caries is intimately
linked to adequate nutrient intake during development of teeth and salivary glands, and
to the frequent ingestion of fermentable carbohydrates post-eruption. Periodontal disease
is generally considered to be caused by bacterial plaque residing on the tooth structure,
but the inflammatory response can be modulated by adequate systemic nutriture. In terms
of craniofacial disorders, cleft lip and palate — among the most common birth defects
affecting humans — are linked, in part, to adequate folate nutriture during critical periods
in craniofacial development, much the same way that neural tube defects are linked to
0-8493-2705-9/02/$0.00+$1.50
© 2002 by CRC Press LLC 1113
2705_frame_C54 Page 1114 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 2:09 PM
folate nutriture. Importantly, the diet and nutrition relationship to oral, dental, and cran-
iofacial diseases is much more extensive than those classic illustrations. For example,
systemic disease resulting from infectious oral microbes is generally recognized to occur
in patients with immunological and nutritional deficiencies such that individual host
defenses are compromised, allowing oral microbes to gain systemic access.2 In turn, the
oral, dental, and craniofacial tissues are the sites of signs and symptoms of about 120
systemic diseases.1 Additionally, changing demographics suggest that an aging population
will increasingly present medically significant oral problems.1
This section reviews the relationship between nutrition and oral, dental, and craniofacial
diseases and disorders, the nutrient-tissue interplay, and, where appropriate, prevention,
treatment, or intervention strategies using diet and nutrition. The section begins with an
illustration of the burden of oral disease and proceeds to discuss chronic oral infectious
disease (caries, periodontal disease, others); selected systemic diseases; neoplastic diseases;
craniofacial-dental-oral birth defects; and health promotion, health education, and behav-
ioral change.
families and some racial/ethnic • 12,300 deaths and 40,400 new cases evidence of anterior tooth trauma and stroke
minorities per year for oral, pharyngeal and
• 19% of all young children age 2-5 laryngeal cancers combined Pain Oral Complications of Cancer
have untreated caries in primary • Five years after diagnosis, half of all • 22% of adults report some form of Therapy
teeth; the rate is 30% for children patients with oral and pharyngeal orofacial pain in last 6 months • Each year an estimated 490,000
living in poverty cancers survive; less than a third of • 6% of adults report pain symptoms patients undergoing cancer therapy
2705_frame_C54 Page 1115 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 2:09 PM
• 45% of school children and 94% of African American male patients commonly associated with suffer from such complications as
adults have experienced caries in survive that long temporomandibular joint disorders painful mouth ulcers, mucositis,
permanent teeth (TMD) rampant caries, fungal infections,
• 5x more common than asthma and 7x Osteoporosis & Oral Bone Loss • Orofacial pain is a major component impaired taste, and salivary gland
more common than hay fever • Osteoporosis is a major health threat of Bell’s palsy, trigeminal neuralgia, dysfunction
for 28 million Americans, 80% female fibromyalgia, and diabetic
Dental Orthopedics • Oral bone loss is also found in neuropathy Older Adults
• 20% of adults and 18% of children patients with osteoporosis • About 30% of adults 65 years and
have mild to severe malocclusions older are edentulous
requiring orthodontic treatment Salivary Gland Dysfunction • 23% of 65- to 74-year-olds have severe
• Between 1 and 4 million Americans periodontal disease
Candidiasis are estimated to have Sjögren’s • Most older Americans take
• Candidiasis is the most common oral syndrome medications which have oral side
fungal infection in patients with • Cystic fibrosis affects about 30,000 effects, especially dry mouth
immunodeficiency disorders, such as Americans. More than 500
HIV infection prescription and over-the-counter
drugs have xerostomic effects
FIGURE 54.1
The burden of disease. From: NIDCR (www.nih.nidcr.gov) 1999 and Surgeon General’s Report, 2000.
1115
2705_frame_C54 Page 1116 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 2:09 PM
No Caries Caries
FIGURE 54.2
The caries balance: a schematic diagram of the balance between pathological and protective factors in the caries
process. From: Featherstone, J.D.B., J. Amer. Dent. Assoc. 131: 887; 2000. With permission.
when the plaque pH drops, such as when carbohydrates (sugars) are fermented by plaque
bacteria to form organic acids.6 Mineral flows back when the pH is neutralized mostly
due to the presence of salivary buffers and mineral ions, particularly when supplemented
with fluoride.6 Fluoride, when ingested at optimum amounts during tooth development
(about 0.7 to 1.0 ppm), makes the enamel hydroxapatite crystal less soluble. Additionally,
individuals with hyposalivation or xerostomia due to use of specific medications, head
and neck irradiation, or chronic diseases like Sjögren’s syndrome, lack appropriate salivary
buffering capacity and thus have increased risk for caries.7
In a recent review, Featherstone illustrated that caries balance is dependent on the
interaction of protective and pathological factors (Figure 54.2).6 Dental caries represent an
excellent example of how understanding the complex etiological agents of this multifac-
torial disease can have health promotion, intervention, and treatment consequences that
can effect not only the disease itself, but the intricate interactions between health and
nutritional status. As shown in Figure 54.3, the balance between health and disease in the
oral and craniofacial complex is dependent on food choices and dietary patterns interwo-
ven with nutritional and oral health status. Furthermore, there is a synergy between these
two measures of health, (nutriture and oral status) that has a significant impact on general
health and thus individual risk for many contemporary chronic and disabling diseases. If
dietary intake leads to poor nutritional status, chronic disease is more likely to occur in
the presence of additional risk factors that might include other lifestyle, environmental,
and genetic factors.
Periodontal Disease(s)
Periodontal disease is an infection with local and systemic inflammatory effects. The
initiation and progression of periodontal disease is markedly affected by risk factors. The
relationship between nutrition and periodontal disease is multifaceted, where environ-
mental and host risk factors contribute to its pathogenesis. Some of the host factors related
to diet and nutrition include presence of other systemic or chronic disease, lifestage (preg-
2705_frame_C54 Page 1117 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 2:09 PM
ORAL
Remineralization FUNCTIONAL
LIMITATIONS
Nutrient
Adequacy
Demineralization
Food Choices
Topical and
Effect Dietary Patterns
Bacteria
Fluoride
Saliva
FIGURE 54.3
Diet and dental health.
nancy, menopause, elderly, etc.), osteoporosis, medications, and nutrition status. The cur-
rent knowledge of nutrition and periodontal disease can be viewed in one of three ways:
Environmental and
acquired (behavioral)
risk factors
FIGURE 54.4
A new paradigm for the pathobiology of periodontitis. From: Page and Kornman, 1997, Periodontology 2000,
14: 9; 1997, with permission. Reprinted in Surgeon General’s Report.
5% increase in body mass index.13 Although type 2 diabetes is a recognized risk factor for
periodontal disease, there was no association in this study between fasting blood glucose
or glycosolated hemoglobin values and periodontal disease.13 Further research is needed
to explore relationships between obesity and periodontal disease, particularly in individ-
uals with diabetes, a disease in which obesity can further compromise metabolic control.
Changes in oral tissues associated with aging can also impact periodontal status. Alve-
olar bone loses approximately 1% per year after age 30, and tooth mobility occurs more
frequently in the elderly.1 Soft tissue changes include thinning of the surface epithelium
of the mucus membranes and gingival recession. Decreased salivary flow, most often
secondary to medications or disease, is also common. These changes can also impact on
nutrition status and eating ability. If severe, diet intake and nutrition status can suffer.
The combined changes in the oral cavity increase the risk for nutrient intake compromise
and periodontal disease.
Consumption of a balanced diet consistent with the food guide pyramid and inclusive
of fruits, vegetables, grains, and adequate protein will provide sufficient vitamins, minerals,
phytochemicals, and protein for overall and oral health. At this point, no published scien-
tifically sound evidence exists to support the notion that individuals with periodontal
disease need supplemental doses of any individual nutrients or groups of nutrients.
TABLE 54.1
Supplemental Fluoride Dosage Schedule (mg/day)a
Concentration of Fluoride in Drinking Water (ppm)
Age < 0.3 0.3 to 0.6 >0.6
6 months to 3 years 0.25 mg 0 0
3 to 6 years 0.50 mg 0.25 mg 0
6 to 16 years 1.00 mg 0.50 mg 0
a ppm = parts per million; 2.2 mg sodium fluoride contains 1 mg fluoride.
From American Dental Association, J. Am. Dent. Assoc. 126: 19S; 1995. With
permission.
Systemic Diseases
General Observations
The oral cavity is the gateway to the rest of the body, and at times reflects systemic as
well as oral health and disease.1 The mechanisms by which oral manifestations occur as
a result of some systemic diseases are not fully known. Systemic diseases which affect the
integrity of the oral cavity, and oral diseases themselves, may impact upon nutrition status,
as well as the converse. Any condition affecting the functional capacity of the oral cavity
(sensory or motor function) and/or the health and integrity of the soft tissue may impact
on diet intake. If the integrity of the oral tissues is compromised due to infection, surgery,
trauma, or medications, nutrient needs are increased. Unfortunately, this is often in the
face of compromised intake due to pain, dysphagia, or anorexia. In these situations,
nutrition status is compromised and the risk of malnutrition is increased. Malnutrition in
turn can compromise wound healing and integrity of the immune system, further increas-
ing the risk of oral infectious disease.
Emerging areas of research in dentistry in the 21st century include the relationships
between oral infections and systemic diseases, and the oral manifestations and complica-
tions of systemic diseases and chronic disabling diseases.2 It is anticipated that when fully
appraised of these oral health–systemic health and nutrition interactions, health care
professionals will be able to work collectively to identify dental and nutrition patient
management strategies.
It is well documented that nutritional status may influence disease progression and
recovery from illness, infection, and surgery. Malnutrition and individual nutrient defi-
ciencies can affect tissue integrity and muscle function. A selected list of chronic diseases
with recognized oral manifestations affecting nutrition status, and diseases with associated
oral infections are listed in Table 54.2. Nutrition status may be affected via two primary
mechanisms, functionally and metabolically, both of which can effect the sense of taste.
Additionally, functional integrity of the oral cavity is critical for optimal smell, mastication,
and swallowing; negative impacts on any of these functions can influence food and fluid
intake, and consequently nutrition status. Metabolic impacts also include altered nutrient
metabolism, typically increased catabolism of protein stores for energy, as well as increased
protein and kcalorie needs due to infection. The end result of either a functional or
metabolic mechanism(s) is often compromised nutrition status, increased risk of secondary
infection, and altered response to disease and treatment. Weight loss of 10% or more,
which can occur as a result of these diseases, increases morbidity and mortality.
2705_frame_C54 Page 1121 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 2:09 PM
TABLE 54.2
Selected Systemic Diseases with Potential Oral
Manifestations Affecting Nutrition Status
Arthropathies Autoimmune disorders
Cancers Chronic orofacial pain
Cardiovascular disease Diabetes
End-stage renal disease HIV infection/AIDS
Inflammatory bowel disease Liver disease
Megaloblastic anemia Oral-facial pain syndromes
Osteoporosis Pulmonary disease
Vesiculobullous diseases Herpes Zoster
TABLE 54.3
Medications with Associated Oral Manifestations
Anticonvulsants Antipsychotics
Antidepressants Corticosteroids
Diuretics Immune suppressing agents
Opiates Serotonin uptake inhibitors
Tricyclic antidepressants Protease inhibitors
Anti-anxiety agents
Medications used to treat chronic diseases may also have oral sequellae that in turn
compromise food intake and nutrition status. Xerostomia may occur independently, as a
consequence of another systemic disease, or as a side effect of medication. More than 400
prescribed and over-the-counter medications are associated with xerostomia.1 Xerostomia
can affect sense of taste and swallowing ability as well as caries risk. Food texture and
temperature may need to be modified for individuals with moderate to severe xerostomia.
Drugs may also alter appetite and nutrient metabolism. Antidepressant medications and
steroids can increase appetite, thus leading to increased risk of weight gain and subsequent
obesity. Steroids increase catabolism of protein and carbohydrate, and lead to calcium
losses. Individuals on long-term steroids are at risk for type 2 diabetes, and require calcium
supplementation and added protein in their diets to reduce risk of osteoporosis and
malnutrition, respectively. Classes of medications with oral manifestations are found in
Table 54.3. Individual drugs are not listed; practitioners should check the Physicians Desk
Reference (PDR) for individual drugs and their associated oral manifestations.
Table 54.4 addresses clinical symptomatology with associated oral clinical and systemic
disorders and nutritional implications. Clinical features may represent one or more local
and systemic diseases. It is imperative that clinicians look beyond the symptom to discern
the actual cause of the symptomatology so as to treat the symptoms and the primary
cause or disease. Although select clinical features may have an associated nutritional
etiology, all other causes must be considered, and treatment aimed at the root cause and
associated symptoms.
HIV-AIDS
As of December 1999, there were 33.6 million individuals with HIV/AIDS.21 Estimates
indicated 5.6 million new cases alone in 1999 and 2.6 million deaths worldwide from
AIDS.21 In the U.S., combination antiretroviral therapies have contributed to a decline in
death due to AIDS as well as a reduction in the incidence of complications. Individuals
with immunosuppressive diseases including HIV infection and AIDS are at increased risk
2705_frame_C54 Page 1122 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 2:09 PM
TABLE 54.4
Abnormal Oral Findings: Associated Local and Systemic Diseases
Associated Nutritional
Clinical Feature Associated Finding Disorders Considerations
Xerostomia Excessive dental caries, Drug-induced xerostomia, Increase fluids, minimize
candidiasis, dysphagia, head and neck irradiation, cariogenic foods, modify
dysgeusia, burning Sjögren’s syndrome, food consistency and
mouth/tongue diabetes flavoring, evaluate
glucose control in diabetes
Burning May be associated with Anemia, diabetes, Determine etiology of
mouth/tongue mucosal erythema/ candidiasis anemia (iron, folate, B12),
atrophy, glossitis check riboflavin, modify
food consistency and
flavoring, evaluate
glucose control
Angular cheilitis Dry, cracked, fissured Dehydration, anemia, ill- Determine etiology
corner of the mouth fitting dentures (drooling)
Candidiasis White and/or red Immunodeficiency, Determine etiology
removable patches on the diabetes
oral mucosa
Difficulty chewing Partial or complete Cranial nerve disorders Determine etiology, referral
edentulism, poor for medical nutrition
occlusion, ill fitting therapy
dentures
Adapted from Touger-Decker R, Sirois D. Support Line 3: 1; 1996.
of oral complications and malnutrition due to the disease and associated metabolic, oral,
GI, immune, psychosocial, and pharmacological sequellae. Macronutrient metabolism is
often altered; women lose more fat tissue, further contributing to malnutrition, while men
tend to lose lean tissue, again contributing to malnutrition and increased needs.21 The
psychological and physiological stress associated with HIV and AIDS contributes to alter-
ations in nutrient intake and subsequent nutrition status.
Poor oral hygiene, malnutrition, and lack of dental care are key factors in the develop-
ment and severity of oral lesions in this population. Candidiasis occurs in 80 to 100% of
HIV patients with AIDS upon onset of the disease.3 Periodontal disease including necro-
tizing ulcerative periodontitis (NUP) is common in patients with HIV. Cancers of the oral
cavity, Kaposi’s sarcoma, and lymphoma may also occur. Thus, oral challenges, combined
with common nutrition problems such as wasting syndrome, visceral and somatic protein
depletion, maldigestion and malabsorption, altered nutrient and energy needs, polyphar-
macy, and reduced oral food intake secondary to anorexia, nausea, or compromised oral
health status further contribute to the malnutrition observed in this population.
The possible causes of anorexia in this population can be seen in Table 54.5. Medical
Nutrition Therapy (MNT) by the Registered Dietician (RD) and physician is warranted to
prevent further nutritional depletion, altered taste perception, odynophagia/dysphagia,
TABLE 54.5
Possible Causes of Anorexia in HIV/AIDS
Polypharmacy Dysgeusia
Odynophagia/dysphagia Nausea/vomiting
Depression Weakness/lethargy
Oral infections/lesions Tooth loss
GI disease Kaposi’s sarcoma
2705_frame_C54 Page 1123 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 2:09 PM
TABLE 54.6
Impact of HIV Infection on Nutrition and Diet in the Upper GI Tract
Location Problem Effect Diet Management
Oral cavity Candidiasis, KS herpes, Pain, infection, lesions, Increase kcalories & protein
stomatitis, apthous ulcers altered ability to eat, saliva; Oral supplements
dysgeusia Caries risk reduction
Xerostomia Caries risk, pain, no Moist, soft foods; non-spicy,
moistening power, food “smooth,” cool/warm, fluids
sticks, dysgeusia Caries risk reduction
Esophagus Candidiasis, herpes, KS, Dysphagia, odynophagia Oral supp 1st, 2nd = NG using
Cryptosporidius silastic feeding tube or PEG
CMV CMV + ulceration Dysphagia, food Percutaneous endoscopic
accumulation gastrostomy
TABLE 54.7
Common HIV-Associated Oral Disorders
Infection
Neoplasm
Other
TABLE 54.8
Oral Manifestations of Diabetes
Gingivitis Altered taste
Periodontal disease Burning mouth
Reduced saliva (with resultant xerostomia) Increased thirst
Salivary hyperglycemia Neuropathies
Increased risk of infectious disorders and complications
Slowed wound healing
lovirus cause pain and reduced oral intake. Oral and esophageal candidiasis results in
painful chewing, sucking, and swallowing, consequently reducing an already compro-
mised appetite and intake. Kaposi’s sarcoma compromises oral intake and increases nutri-
ent needs. The oral disorders found with HIV and AIDS increase nutrient demands on
the body for healing, and compromise eating ability. MNT is critical to healing and
maintenance of lean body mass. Oral diets with or without nutritional supplements should
be tried first, followed by tube feedings if needed. The dental professional should observe
patients for changes in intake, weight, and overall nutritional wellbeing, and refer indi-
viduals to an RD and/or physician early in the process of disease management.25,26
Diabetes
Over 11 million individuals in the U.S. have diabetes; another 13 million have impaired
glucose tolerance.27 Diabetes is the seventh leading cause of death in the U.S. Oral sequellae
occurring with diabetes are usually a result of poorly controlled diabetes, or hyperglyce-
mia. Oral cell metabolism, immune surveillance, and vascular integrity as well as salivary
chemistry may be altered in individuals with diabetes, particularly when uncontrolled.
Over 90% of individuals over age 13 with diabetes have some periodontal problems
relative to diabetes.28 While there is limited evidence that periodontal infection affects
glycemic control,29 any infection can contribute to adverse alterations in glycemic control.
Other oral manifestations may occur, impacting diet intake and nutrition status. These
can be seen in Table 54.8.
Diabetes, particularly when poorly controlled, is associated with a higher prevalence of
all infections including oral infections, as compared to non-diabetics.28 The susceptibility
to periodontal disease in diabetes is likely directly related to impaired defense mecha-
nisms. Micro- and macrovascular circulation are altered, along with wound healing, col-
lagen metabolism, neutrophil chemotaxis, and proteolysis. Pathologic tissue destruction
contributes to periodontal tissue destruction. Increased salivary glucose increases bacterial
substrate and plaque formation. Microangiopathies, altered vascular permeability, and
metabolic alterations may lead to an altered immune response and precipitate periodontal
disease progression. The oral complications associated with diabetes are often referred to
as the sixth major medical complication of diabetes.
The relationship between oral manifestations in diabetes and diet/nutrition is a complex
two-way street. While uncontrolled diabetes is partly due to poor diet management, oral
manifestations challenge and ultimately compromise eating ability and consequent dietary
intake. Taste in patients with diabetes is often altered due to salivary chemistry, xerostomia,
and/or candidiasis. Management of burning mouth/tongue requires a determination of
the cause. When due to a nutrient deficiency, augmentation of the diet with the appropriate
nutrient(s) or supplements will treat the cause and subsequent symptomatology. When a
physical or biochemical abnormality cannot be found, the symptoms of burning mouth
can be improved using tricyclic antidepressant medications. However, the unfortunate
2705_frame_C54 Page 1125 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 2:09 PM
side effect of tricyclic antidepressants is xerostomia, which may compound any existing
alterations in saliva, and increase risk of candidiasis and dental caries.
Diet management is the cornerstone of diabetes care. Proper diet control, in kcalorie
and macronutrient distribution throughout the day, is critical to glycemic control, partic-
ularly in type 1 diabetes. In both type 1 and type 2 diabetes, a diet consistent with the
food guide pyramid consisting of 50% carbohydrate, 20% protein, and 30% fat is recom-
mended with attainment and maintenance of desirable body weight. In most states, MNT
by an RD with several follow-up visits is a benefit covered by all third party payers and
Medicaid. The oral health professional should work closely with the patient’s physician
and refer patients, as appropriate, to an RD, reinforce the need to adhere to the diabetic
diet, integrate oral hygiene into daily routines, and modify diet consistencies as needed
to manage oral conditions and surgeries.
Crohn’s Disease
Crohn’s disease can present with apthous ulcers, angular stomatitis, and/or glossitis. Oral
lesions present on the lips, gingiva, and buccal mucosa may precede gastrointestinal
symptoms and have a dramatic impact on oral function. The size of the lesion may not
coincide with the intensity of pain reported or degree of compromise in food and fluid
intake. Ability to eat may be hampered by pain; topical anesthetic agents (or a 1:1 mixture
of Milk of Magnesia and Benadryl as a rinse and spit) prior to meals may temporarily
relieve pain and allow more comfort in eating. Pharmacological management is critical;
steroids are often needed. The impact of steroids on nutritional wellbeing has been
addressed in other sections of this handbook.
Autoimmune Disease
Autoimmune diseases such as Pemphigus Vulgaris (PV) increase nutrition risk by virtue
of the oral and facial sequellae of the disease and the medications used to manage it.
Steroids are often used in the management of vesiculobullous diseases of the oral cavity
including PV. PV can impact diet intake and nutrition status by virtue of the disease
process as well as the medications used to manage it. Much like other diseases with oral
lesions, PV affects appetite and eating ability due to associated pain. In addition to the
medications used for the disease, topical anesthetics, as well as a rinse-and-spit 1:1 mixture
of Benadryl and Milk of Magnesia immediately prior to eating, provides a topical coating,
allowing more comfort during mealtime. Other autoimmune diseases including Sjögren’s
Syndrome and rheumatoid arthritis (RA) can affect the oral cavity and subsequent nutri-
tion status. Oral and nutritional implications of select diseases in this category are outlined
in Table 54.9. While diet modifications are addressed, particular attention needs to be paid
to the individual’s stage of disease. During disease exacerbation, eating ability may be
severely compromised and a liquid diet using oral supplements (meal replacement for-
mulas) such as Sustacal or Boost (Mead Johnson) or Ensure+ (Ross) may be required to
meet energy and protein needs. During remission, individuals may be able to liberalize
diets considerably.
Osteoporosis
Osteoporosis is the most common bone disease.30 Osteoporosis is clinically defined as
reduced bone mineral density.30 The majority of individuals with osteoporosis are women
2705_frame_C54 Page 1126 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 2:09 PM
TABLE 54.9
Autoimmune Disorders with Associated Oral and Nutritional Side Effects
Disease Oral Manifestation Nutrition Implications
Rheumatoid arthritis TMJ ankylosis Pain upon eating
Limited mandibular opening Modify diet consistency
Erythema multiforme Oral mucosal lesions, often Pain upon eating
ulcerative Increased needs for healing
Modify diet, often liquid
consistency with straw during
exacerbation
If treated with steroids: increase
calcium, protein
Pemphigus Vulgaris Oral mucosal lesions Eating painful and difficult
If treated with steroids: increase
calcium, protein
Modify diet as needed in
temperature, consistency
Sjögrens syndrome Xerostomia; mucosa dry, Increased fluids with and between
erythematous; fissures; more meals, increase fluidity of foods,
susceptible to trauma; soft, temperate foods, non-spicy
increased risk of caries; fissured
tongue; periodontal disease;
cervical caries
Systemic lupus Ulcerations of mucosa Manage side effects of steroids and
erythematosus medications, diet as per Sjögrens
(80%); however it is a risk for up to 28 million Americans, and is often known as a “silent
killer.”1 One in two caucasian women will have an osteoporotic fracture in their lifetime.30
Nonmodifiable and modifiable causes of osteoporosis are listed in Table 54.10. Since dental
health care professionals see patients on a regular basis and since alveolar boss loss is
associated with osteoporosis, the dental professional is in an ideal situation to access
patients at risk for osteoporosis. Simple screening in the dental office can include asking
patients about calcium intake in the form of dairy products (milk, cheese, yogurt), func-
tional foods or foods fortified with calcium (orange juice, cereal), and calcium supple-
ments. Other individuals at risk for osteoporosis (see Table 54.10) should be referred for
a dexascan to determine risk for or presence of osteopenia or osteoporosis.
Bone loss is a common denominator for both periodontal disease and osteoporosis. The
relationship between the two diseases remains to be fully determined.31 However, an
association between periodontal disease and systemic osteopenia and osteoporosis has
been documented in adults.31,32 The relationship between calcium intake and risk of peri-
odontal disease has also been demonstrated; lowered dietary intakes in adults have been
found to be associated with increased periodontal disease risk.11 While a serum calcium
level may not be associated with actual calcium intake, decreasing levels of intake below
the recommended dietary intakes is associated with increased risk and incidence of
osteoporosis.33 Tezal et al. pose “four possible pathways” for the relationship between
osteoporosis and severity of periodontal disease, including systemic loss of bone mineral
density, modified local tissue response to infection as a result of “systemic factors of bone
remodeling”, genetics, and lifestyle factors.31 The final pathway, lifestyle factor, links the
issues of hygiene, diet, and exercise with local and systemic disease. Osteoporosis has also
been linked to the development of tooth loss, particularly in post-menopausal women.10
Please refer to Section 61 for a thorough description of osteoporosis and other bone
diseases and disorders.
2705_frame_C54 Page 1127 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 2:09 PM
TABLE 54.10
Risk Factors for Osteoporosis
Nonmodifiable
Potentially Modifiable
cancer.39 More specifically, citrus, dark yellow and other fruits were more consistently
associated with decreased risk than were estimated intake of specific nutrients including
carotene, vitamin C, fiber, folate, thiamine, riboflavin, niacin, vitamin E, and iron. A case-
control study conducted in Italy illustrated that the more a micronutrient, such as vitamin
C, carotene, or vitamin E, was correlated to total vegetable and fruit intake, the stronger
was its protective effect against oral cancer.40 Thus, it appears that total fruit and vegetable
intake may offer greater risk reduction than singular antioxidant nutrients in supplemental
doses. Fioretti et al. reported that even in the absence of tobacco use, if subjects reduced
alcohol and saturated fat intake and increased fruit and carrot consumption, there
appeared to be a favorable effect on oral cancer risk among subjects who participated in
a large case-control study.41
Nutritional care of the patient with oral cancer will vary based on treatment modalities
and side effects that can include changes in weight, sore mouth or throat, xerostomia,
mucositis, dental caries, gingival infection, changes in sense of taste and smell, nausea,
vomiting, and fatigue. Nutritional management strategies will require the services of
oncology health care professionals.
of the homeobox gene, Hoxb-1, is highly responsive to vitamin A. Since Hoxb-1 regulates
embryonic axial patterning, excess vitamin A induces altered pattern formation with
apoptosis.44 Thus, folic acid and vitamin A represent excellent examples of the exquisite
sensitivity of embryogenesis, and the craniofacial complex in particular, to nutrients. A
critical message for the oral health practitioner is the necessity to work closely with the
nutritionist and physician to educate prospective and expectant parents regarding nutri-
tion and oral health.
Importantly, following the birth of a “cleft” child, depending on the extent and severity
of clefting, a series of physiological, psychological, medical, dental, and social issues
emerges. The establishment of a craniofacial anomaly or cleft team to manage patients
with clefting and/or other craniofacial defects is ideal. This multidisciplinary team
assesses the child and his/her various medical, nutritional, social, and psychological
needs. Often a nutritionist/dietician is an integral part of such a team, since one of the
major issues to overcome for such children is the ability to ingest adequate amounts of
food and nutrients consistent with increased nutrient requirements of the early develop-
mental years. These nutrition requirements are exacerbated by multiple surgical interven-
tions and the extent of the defects. Therefore, craniofacial anomalies present two challenges
for the health care professional and the nutrition community in particular. One is to
identify women at risk for birth defects and use appropriate interventions to prevent
craniofacial anomalies. The second is to work closely in an interdisciplinary team to
mitigate the effects of the anomaly.
TABLE 54.11
Global Nutrition Messages Addressing Primary and Secondary Prevention of Dental Caries
Message Rationale
Eat a balanced diet representing moderation and Focus on positive aspects of healthy eating.
variety Fermentable carbohydrates can contribute to dietary
intake and be consumed in moderation.
Combine and sequence foods to encourage chewing Combinations of raw and cooked foods can increase
and saliva production saliva flow. Protein-rich foods combined with cooked
carbohydrates, and dairy foods combined with
fermentable carbohydrates can alter dental plaque
pH. (Rugg-Gunn, 1993)50
Space the frequency of eating or drinking fermentable It may take up to 120 minutes for dental plaque pH to
carbohydrates at least two hours apart return to neutral after exposure to fermentable
carbohydrate. (Edgar, 1996)51
Chew sugarless gum after meals and snacks to increase The Food and Drug Administration authorized the use
saliva of sugar alcohol containing foods to be labeled “does
not promote,” or “useful in not promoting,” or
“expressly for not promoting” dental caries if the food
does not cause a drop in dental plaque pH below 5.7
when a fermentable carbohydrate is present. (U.S.
Food and Drug Administration, 1996)52
Drink water to satisfy thirst and hydration needs A review of fermentable carbohydrate consumption in
the U.S. identified carbonated beverages as the major
contributor to total intake. (Gibney, 1995)53
content, milk formulas (with the exception of some soy-based and protein hydrolyzed
formulas), bovine milk, and human milk may indeed be cariostatic and not a source of
cariogenic substrate in ECC. However, the nursing bottle can effectively block salivary
access to tooth surfaces and may increase the caries-promoting potential of any food that
remains in the mouth.56 Reisine and Douglass have suggested that psychosocial and
behavioral issues related to elements of the environment may be greater modulators of
ECC than the baby bottle.57
Numerous opportunities exist for nutrition messages to be included in oral health
promotion initiatives. Table 54.13 lists a variety of health topics that impact oral health
outcomes and status. With the advent of The Surgeon General’s Report on Oral Health,
attention has been drawn to the need for health care professionals to address oral health
and systemic health as one entity: health!1 This list in Table 54.13 provides insight into the
aforementioned synergy between oral and nutritional status, and offers targeted messages
for health promotion in public health and private practice.
Better understanding of the role of behavioral variables in health and disease, including
the role of prevention, is important in the delivery of messages that promote both nutri-
tional and oral health status. Practices that attempt to translate the scientific discoveries
in nutrition and oral health will provide a basis upon which to plan and execute future
health promotion activities.
2705_frame_C54 Page 1131 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 2:09 PM
TABLE 54.12
Nutrition Messages to Integrate into Parenting Practices for Primary Prevention of ECC
Message Rationale
Encourage feeding schedules that encourage breast The American Academy of Pediatrics (AAP)
milk and formula consumption on a regular routine encourages breastfeeding on demand in response to
basis rather than continuously on-demand. signs of hunger, described as increased alertness or
activity, mouthing or rooting.
The American Academy of Pediatric Dentistry (AAPD)
recommend that infants not be put to sleep with a
bottle and that nocturnal breastfeeding should be
avoided after the first primary tooth begins to erupt.
Instruct mothers to avoid introduction of food until The AAP recommends breastfeeding exclusively for
the infant doubles the birth weight or weighs at least about the first six months after birth, after which time
13 pounds. iron-enriched solid foods can be added to
complement the breast milk diet. Infants will double
their birth weight or reach 13 pounds at between 4
and 6 months of age, or approximately 5 months.
Hold the infant when bottle and/or breast feeding. This will prevent bottle propping, prolonged exposure
to caries-promoting substrate, and allowing infants
to drink from bottles on a continuing basis.
6 to 12 Months
Promote weaning from the bottle in combination with The AAPD encourages parents to have infants drink
the introduction of a cup and spoon. from a cup prior to their first birthday and be weaned
from the bottle at 12-14 months of age.
Promote introduction of foods to encourage self- The AAPD recommends implementation of oral
feeding and growth and development as well as hygiene measures by the time of eruption of the first
dental health. primary tooth.
1 to 16 Years of Age
Promote snacking habits that support growth and The AAPD endorses the Dietary Guidelines for
development and dental health. Americans that promote variety, a healthy weight, a
diet that includes vegetables, fruits, and grains, and
use of sugars in moderation for children and adults.
Advocate discontinued bottle and breast feeding
practice.
Stress the value of mealtime and the importance of
variety and moderation.
Encourage the beginning of routine dental visits for The AAPD recommends an oral evaluation visit within
the child. six months of the eruption of the first tooth and no
later than twelve months of age.
American Academy of Pediatrics, Pediatrics 11: 1035; 1997.
Journal of The American Academy of Pediatric Dentistry Reference Manual 1996-97. Pediatr. Dent. 18: 25; 1996.
2705_frame_C54 Page 1132 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 2:09 PM
TABLE 54.13
Nutrition Messages for Targeted Oral Health Promotion Topics
Oral Health Promotion Topics Nutrition Messages
Hypomineralized or Children who are malnourished pre-, peri-, or postnatally and/or low
hypoplastic primary teeth and birthweight are more likely to have this condition. (Alvarez 1995, Lai
caries risk 1998)58,59
Craniofacial development Causes are attributed to genetic defects often working in concert with
environmental factors such as alcohol intake and possibly excessive
therapeutic vitamin A. Neural tube defects and risks of cleft lip and palate
may be reduced in children if women support dietary folic acid intake with
additional supplementation to equal 400 µg. (Bonin 1998)60
Bone status Loss of teeth leads to bone atrophy. Localized diseases like periodontal disease
and systemic diseases like osteoporosis may further affect alveolar bone loss.
Promotion of diets adequate in calcium and vitamin D to target these effects
should be discussed in the context of oral health. (Bhaskar 1991)61
Oral soft tissue integrity Nutritional status can enhance the ability of healthy epithelial tissue to
prevent penetration of bacterial endotoxins into gingival tissue. Protein,
vitamins A, C, and E, as well as the B-compex vitamins and zinc will help
to maintain immune system integrity, but there is a paucity of scientific data
to support supplemental use of these nutrients. Prevention of diseases of
the soft tissue related to diseases like periodontal disease and systemic
diabetes may challenge utilization of nutrients and can increase risk of
decreased oral soft tissue integrity. (Touger-Decker 2000)62
Salivary output Saliva and salivary glands provide clues to overall health and disease and
function in the mucosal immune system to protect oral tissue integrity. Saliva
moistens food and lubricates the bolus for swallowing. Fiber intake and
frequency of eating can promote salivary output. Xerostomia (dry mouth)
associated with disease and drug therapies may require medical nutrition
therapy. (Martin 1999)48
Edentulous state Toothless persons or those who wear dentures need to be encouraged to
modify food selection habits and method of preparing foods for easier biting
and chewing. One can still achieve good nutritional status important to the
maintenance of the oral tissue.
Oral cancer prevention Promoting five or more servings a day of fruits and vegetables from a variety
of sources that include both dark green and yellow sources may decrease
risk for oral cancer. Weight management strategies for those interested in
smoking cessation can possibly enhance success and should be explored
when appropriate. (Jones and Mobley 2000)63
Dental erosion Fruit juices, citrus fruits, acid sweet candies and mints, pickles, and cola
drinks can cause loss of tooth enamel. Vomiting and regurgitation associated
with gastroesophageal reflux and eating disorders can also cause this dental
condition. Encourage dietary practices to neutralize the impact of these
products and conditions. (Rugg-Gunn 1993)50
2705_frame_C54 Page 1133 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 2:09 PM
References
1. U.S. Department of Health and Human Services. Oral Health in America: A Report of the Surgeon
General. Rockville, MD: U.S. Department of Health and Human Services, National Institute
of Dental and Craniofacial Research, National Institutes of Health, 2000.
2. Slavkin H, Baum BJ. JAMA 284: 1215; 2000.
3. National Institute of Dental and Craniofacial Research. Burden of Disease. www.nidcr.nih.gov/
discover/ctfy2001, accessed July 26, 2000.
4. Kaste LM, Selwitz RH, Oldakowski RJ, et al. J Dent Res 75: 631; 1996.
5. Winn DM, Brunell JA, Selwitz RH, et al. J Dent Res 75: 642; 1996.
6. Feathersone JDB. J Am Dent Assoc 131: 887; 2000.
7. Winston AE, Bhaskar SN. J Am Dent Assoc 129: 1579; 1998.
8. Page RC, Kornman KS. Periodontology 2000 14: 9; 1997.
9. American Dietetic Association. Position of The American Dietetic Association: Oral Health
and Nutrition. J Am Diet Assoc 96: 184; 1996.
10. Krall EA, Garcia RI, Dawson-Hughes B. Calcif Tissue Int 59: 433; 1996.
11. Nishida M, et al. J Periodontal 71: 1215; 2000.
12. Leggot PJ, et al. J Dent Res 70: 1531; 1991.
13. Saito T, et al. N Engl J Med 339: 482; 1998.
14. Achievement in public health, 1900-1999; MMWR Weekly 48: 933; 1999.
15. Horowitz HS. J Public Health Dent 56: 253; 1996.
16. Newbrun E. J Public Health Dent 49: 279; 1989.
17. American Dental Association. J Am Dent Assoc 126: 15; 1995.
18. American Academy of Pediatrics. Pediatrics 11: 1035; 1997.
19. Leverett DH, Vaughn BW, Adair SM, et al. J Public Health Dent 53: 205A; 1993.
20. Clarkson HB, Fejerskov O, Ekstrand et al. In: Fluorides in Dentistry. Fejerskov O, Ekstrand J,
Burt BA, Eds, 2nd ed. Copenhagen: Munksgaad; 1996, p 347.
21. American Dietetic Association. J Am Diet Assoc 100: 708; 2000.
22. Centers for Disease Control. MMWR 41: 1; 1992.
23. Kotler D, Tierney AR, et al. Am J Clin Nutr 57: 1; 1989.
24. Sirois D. Mt Sinai J Med 65: 322; 1998.
25. Touger-Decker R. Mt Sinai J Med 65: 355; 1998.
26. Touger-Decker R, Sirois D. Support Line 3: 1; 1996.
27. National Institute of Dental and Craniofacial Research. Workshop on Oral Disease and Diabetes,
December 6-7, 1999.
28. Baron S. Bacterial Infection in Diabetes. Workshop on Oral Disease and Diabetes, National Institute
of Dental and Craniofacial Research, December 6-7, 1999.
29. Taylor G, Burt B, Becker M, et al. J Periodontol 67: 1085; 1996.
30. Osteoporosis Coalition of New Jersey and the New Jersey Department of Health and Senior
Services. Recommended Practice Guidelines for the Diagnosis and Treatment of Osteoporosis. Wash-
ington Crossing PA: Scientific Frontiers Inc, 1998.
31. Tezal M, Wactawski-Wende J, Grossi SG. J Periodontol 71: 1492; 2000.
32. Payne JB, Reinhardt RA, et al. Osteoporosis Int 10: 34; 1999.
33. National Osteoporosis Foundation, Physicians Guide to Prevention and Treatment of Osteoporosis.
Washington DC: National Osteoporosis Foundation, 1998.
34. Mashberg A. J Am Dent Assoc 96: 615; 1978.
35. Shklar G. N Engl J Med 315: 1544; 1986.
36. Blot WJ, McLaughlin JK, Winn DM, et al. Cancer Res 48: 3282; 1988.
37. Spandidos DA, Lamothe A, Field JK. Anticancer Res 5: 221; 1985.
38. Handelman GJ, Packer L, Cross CE. Am J Clin Nutr 63: 559; 1996.
39. Marshall JR, Boyle P. Cancer Causes Control 7: 101; 1996.
40. Negri E, Franceschi S, Bosetti C, et al. Int J Cancer 86: 122; 2000.
41. Fioretti F, Bosetti C, Tavani A, et al. Oral Oncology 35: 375; 1999.
2705_frame_C54 Page 1134 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 2:09 PM
42. Slavkin H. Meeting the Challenge of Craniofacial-Oral-Dental Birth Defects, J Am Dent Assoc
127: 681; 1996.
43. Slavkin H. Prospects for Dental, Science, Education and Practice in the 21st Century. 2nd Asia Pacific
Congress, Japan, May 2000. www.nidcr.nih.gov/discover/slides.
44. Slavkin H. Nutrients and Micronutrients: Progress is Science-Based Understanding, Insights on
Human Health, NIDCR; 1-11, 1998. www.nih.nidcr.gov.
45. Green LW, Kreuter MW. Health Promotion Planning: An Educational and Environmental Approach.
3rd ed. Mountain View CA: Mayfield Publishing Company, 1999.
46. Epp L. Achieving Health of All: A Framework for Health Promotion in Canada. Toronto:
Health and Welfare Canada, 1986.
47. Edmunds M, Coye MJ, Eds. America’s Children: Health Insurance and Access to Care. Committee
on Children, Health Insurance and Access to Care, Division of Health Care Services, Institute
of Medicine. Washington: National Academy Press, 1998.
48. Martin WE. Oral health in the elderly. In: Geriatric Nutrition; The Health Professional’s Handbook.
2nd ed. Chernoff R, Ed, Aspen Publishers, Gaithersburg, 1999, p 107.
49. Nutrition and Your Health: Dietary Guidelines for Americans. 5th ed, Washington, DC, U.S.
Depts of Agriculture and Health and Human Services, Home and Garden Bulletin, No. 232, 2000.
50. Rugg-Gunn AJ. Nutrition and Dental Health. Oxford: Oxford University Press, 1993.
51. Edgar WM, O’Mullane DM. Saliva and Oral Health. London: British Dental Association, 1996.
52. United States Food and Drug Administration. Health claims: dietary sugar alcohols and dental
caries, Fed Reg, 43433, August 23, 1996.
53. Gibney M, Sigman-Grant M, Stanton Jr, JL, et al. Am J Clin Nutr 62: 178S; 1995.
54. Journal of The American Academy of Pediatric Dentistry Reference Manual 1996-97. Pediatr
Dent 18: 25; 1996.
55. Seow WK. Community Dent Oral Epidemiol 26: 8; 1998.
56. Bowen WH. Community Dent Oral Epidemiol 26: 28; 1998.
57. Reisine S, Douglass JM. Community Dent Oral Epidemiol 26: 32; 1998.
58. Alvarez JO. Am J Clin Nutr 61: 410S; 1995.
59. Lai PY, Seow WK, Tudehope DI, et al. Pediatr Dent 19: 42; 1997.
60. Bonin MM, Bretzlaff JA, Therrien SA, et al. Northeastern Ontario Primary Care Research
Group, Arch Fam Med 7: 438; 1998.
61. Bhaskar SN. In: Orban’s Oral Histology and Embryology. Bhaskar SN, Ed, St Louis, Mosby
Yearbook; 1991, p 239.
62. Touger-Decker R. In: Krause’s Food, Nutrition and Diet Therapy. 10th ed. Mahan LK, Escott-
Stump S, Eds, WB Saunders: Philadelphia, 1999, p 633.
63. Jones DL, Mobley CC. Tx Dent J 26; 2000.
2705_frame_C55 Page 1135 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 2:10 PM
55
Foodborne Infections and Infestations
Introduction
The microbiological safety of foods is a major concern to consumers and to the food
industry. During the last decade, food safety received considerable attention due to the
emergence of several new foodborne pathogens, and the involvement of foods that tradi-
tionally have been considered safe in many foodborne disease outbreaks. Further,
increased globalization of the food supply and consumer demands for preservative-free
convenience foods and ready-to-eat meals highlight the relevance of the microbial safety
of foods. A recently published study by the U.S. Centers for Disease Control and Preven-
tion reported an estimated 76 million cases of foodborne illness which resulted in 325,000
hospitalizations and 5000 deaths in the United States annually.1 Besides the public health
impact, outbreaks of foodborne illness impose major economic losses to both the food
industry and society. The various microbiological hazards associated with foods can be
classified as bacterial, viral, fungal, and parasitic.
0-8493-2705-9/02/$0.00+$1.50
© 2002 by CRC Press LLC 1135
1136
TABLE 55.1
Bacterial Foodborne Pathogens
Biochemical and Estimated No. of Incubation Period,
Growth Sources/ Foodborne Cases Symptoms and
Microorganism Characteristics Reservoirs Vehicles Annually in USA1 Duration Detection Methods Control/Prevention
Escherichia coli Gram negative, facultative Cattle, Raw or undercooked 62,500 3 to 9 days Cultural methods Adequate cooking of beef;
O157:H7 anaerobe, nonspore- humans beef, unpasteurized Severe abdominal cramps, followed by pasteurization of milk
forming, optimum milk and apple juice, watery diarrhea that can confirmatory and apple juice; use of
growth at 37°-40°C, lettuce, alfalfa become bloody, absence biochemical tests102,103 potable water for
2705_frame_C55 Page 1136 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 2:10 PM
inability to grow at ≥ sprouts, water of fever, kidney failure, Latex agglutination drinking; avoid eating
44.5°C in presence of seizures, coma assay104, 105 alfalfa and vegetable
selective agents, inability Duration is days to weeks ELISA106, 107 sprouts; good personal
to ferment sorbitol PCR108 hygiene
within 24 h, does not
produce β-glucuronid-
ase, acid tolerance
Salmonella spp. Gram negative, facultative Cattle, swine, Raw or undercooked 1,340,000 6 to 72 h up to 4 days. Cultural methods Adequate cooking of food;
(non typhoid) anaerobe, oxidase poultry, meat, poultry, eggs, Abdominal cramps, followed by avoid cross-contamina-
negative, catalase humans and milk and diarrhea, fever, chills, confirmatory tion of raw foods of
positive, untreated water headache and vomiting. biochemical tests109, 110 animal origin with
nonsporeforming, Duration is few days to Latex agglutination cooked or ready to eat
growth at 5°-47°C, one week, occasionally assay111 foods; avoid eating raw
optimum growth at up to 3 weeks. ELISA112 or undercooked foods of
37°C, metabolize PCR113, 114 animal origin; use of
nutrients by respiratory potable water; good
and fermentative personal hygiene
pathways
Salmonella enterica Gram negative, facultative Humans Raw milk, shellfish, 660 (> 70% of cases 7 to 28 days Biochemical tests115 Good personal hygiene
serovar Typhi anaerobe, ferment D- raw salads, under acquired abroad) Remittent fever with Latex test116 and food handling
xylose cooked foods stepwise increments ELISA117 practices; proper sewage
over a period of days, PCR118 systems; effective
high temperature of 103 surveillance of known
to 104°F, abdominal pain, carriers
diarrhea, and headache
Duration is up to 3 weeks
Handbook of Nutrition and Food
Campylobacter jejuni Gram negative, Poultry Raw or undercooked 1,960,000 1 to 11 days, usually 2 to 5 Cultural methods Adequate cooking of
and coli microaerophilic, Swine chicken, pork, and days followed by meat; avoid cross-
nonsporeforming, Cattle beef, and Abdominal pain, diarrhea, confirmatory contamination of raw
optimal growth at 42°C, Sheep unpasteurized milk malaise, headache, fever biochemical tests31, 119 foods of animal origin
CO2 is required for good Wild birds Duration is up to 10 days Immunoassay120 with cooked or ready to
growth, growth optimal PCR121, 122 eat foods; pasteurization
in 3-6% O2, sensitive to of milk
dehydration, survives
best at refrigeration
temperature
Shigella spp. Gram negative, facultative Humans Raw foods and water 89,600 1 to 7 days Cultural methods Good personal hygiene,
anaerobe, nonspore- contaminated with Severe abdominal and followed by including adequate
forming, does not human feces; rectal pain, bloody confirmatory cooking of food,
ferment lactose, growth prepared salads diarrhea with mucus, biochemical tests123 drinking potable water
at 10°-45°C, optimal fever ELISA124
growth at 37°C Dehydration PCR125
Duration is few days to
few weeks
Foodborne Infections and Infestations
Yersinia Gram negative, facultative Swine is Undercooked or raw 86,700 1 to 11 days, usually 24 to Cultural methods Adequate cooking of pork,
enterocolitica anaerobe, nonspore- principal pork, especially 36 h followed by disinfection of drinking
forming, growth at 0°- reservoir of tongue Severe abdominal pain, confirmatory water, control of Y.
2705_frame_C55 Page 1137 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 2:10 PM
44°C, optimal growth at pathogenic nausea, diarrhea, fever, biochemical tests126 enterocolitica in pigs,
ca. 29°C, growth at pH strains sometimes vomiting PCR127 prevent cross-
4.6-9.0, growth in Duration is usually 2-3 contamination of pig
presence of 5% NaCl but days but may continue viscera, feces, and hair
not 7% NaCl for up to 3 weeks with food and water
Vibrio cholerae Gram negative, facultative Humans, Undercooked or raw 49 1 to 3 days Cultural methods Safe disposal of human
anaerobe, marine seafoods; vegetables Profuse watery diarrhea, followed by sewage, disinfection of
nonsporeforming, waters, fertilized with which can lead to severe confirmatory drinking water, avoid
growth at 18°-42°C with especially contaminated human dehydration, abdominal biochemical tests128, 129 eating raw seafood,
optimal growth at 37°C, brackish feces or irrigated pain, vomiting ELISA130 adequate cooking of food
growth is stimulated in water and with contaminated Duration is up to 7 days PCR131, 132
presence of 3% NaCl, pH estuaries water; water
range for growth is 6-11
Vibrio Gram negative, facultative Coastal Raw or undercooked 5100 9 to 25 hours, up to 3 days, Cultural methods Adequate cooking of
parahaemolyticus anaerobe, nonspore- seawater, fish and seafoods Profuse watery diarrhea, followed by seafood, rapid chilling of
forming, growth in estuarine abdominal pain, confirmatory seafoods, prevent cross-
presence of 8% NaCl, brackish vomiting, fever biochemical tests128, 129 contamination from raw
optimal growth at 37°C waters above Duration is up to 8 days ELISA133 seafoods to other foods
with rapid generation 15°C, marine PCR134 and preparation surfaces
time (ca. 10 minutes), fish, shellfish
growth at 10°C, sensitive
to storage at refrigeration
temperature
1137
1138
oxidase positive, some fish mild fever biochemical tests137, 138, 139 refrigerated foods,
strains are (especially Duration is days to weeks PCR140, 141 adequate cooking of
psychrotrophic (4°C) Salmonids) foods, disinfection of
optimum growth at ca. drinking water
28°C
Plesiomonas Gram negative, facultative Fresh and Fish, shellfish, oysters, Very few 1 to 2 days Cultural methods Avoid consumption of
shigelloides anaerobe, estuarine shrimp and Abdominal pain, nausea, followed by raw seafoods,
nonsporeforming, waters, fish, untreated water vomiting, diarrhea, confirmatory disinfection of drinking
oxidase positive, some and shellfish chills, headache biochemical tests137, 138 water
strains are Duration is days to weeks
psychrotrophic
Listeria Gram positive, facultative Soil, sewage, Raw milk, soft cheese, 2490 Few days to several weeks Cultural methods Proper sanitation of food
monocytogenes anaerobe, vegetation, pâte, ready-to-eat Flu-like symptoms such as followed by processing equipment
nonsporeforming, water, and cooked meat fever, chills, headache confirmatory and environments,
growth at 2°-45°C, feces of products (poultry, Abdominal pain and biochemical tests142, 143, 144 adequate cooking of
optimal growth at 30°- humans and hot dogs) and cooked diarrhea are present in Immunoassay145 meat and meat products,
35°C, growth in presence animals seafoods (smoked some cases PCR146 prevent recontamination
of 10% NaCl fish), and raw In pregnant women, of cooked products,
vegetables spontaneous abortion proper reheating of
and stillbirth cooked food, avoid
Duration is days to weeks drinking raw milk, avoid
certain high risk foods
(e.g., soft cheeses and
pâtes) by pregnant
women and
immunocompromised
individuals
Handbook of Nutrition and Food
Staphylococcus Gram positive, facultative Humans (nose, Ham, chicken and egg 185,000 2 to 6 h Cultural methods Good personal hygiene in
aureus anaerobe, throat and salads, cream-filled Abdominal cramps, followed by food preparation and
(staphylococcal nonsporeforming, skin) and pastries nausea, vomiting, confirmatory handling, adequate
enterotoxin) coagulase positive, animals diarrhea, headache, biochemical tests147, 148 cooking of foods, proper
growth at 7°-48°C, chills, and dizziness PCR149, 150 refrigeration of cooked
optimal growth at ca. Duration is up to 2 days Detection of toxin by foods
37°C, toxin production at microslide gel double
aw of 0.86, toxin is heat diffusion test151
stable (can withstand
boiling for 1 h)
Clostridium Gram positive, obligate Soil, dust, Beef, pork, fish, 58 12 to 36 h, can range from Cultural methods Boiling of foods will
botulinum anaerobe, sporeforming, vegetation, vegetables, and few h to 8 days followed by destroy toxin, adequate
(botulinum produce seven potent animals, honey (infant Very severe life confirmatory heat processing of home-
neurotoxin) neurotoxins A-G (only A, birds, insects, botulism) threatening intoxication, biochemical tests152 canned foods, proper
B, E and rarely F and marine headache, fixed and PCR153, 154 refrigeration of vacuum-
associated with human and fresh dilated pupils, vertigo, Detection of toxin by packaged fresh or lightly
illness), proteolytic water blurred or double vision, mouse bioassay155 cooked/smoked foods,
strains grow at 10°-50°C, sediments lack of muscle acid-preserved foods
Foodborne Infections and Infestations
nonproteolytic strains and the coordination, dry mouth, should be below pH 4.6,
can grow at 3.3°C, spores intestinal difficulty in breathing discard swollen cans,
are resistant to normal tracts of fish Gastrointestinal avoid feeding honey to
2705_frame_C55 Page 1139 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 2:10 PM
associated outbreaks are reported each year, with 340 outbreak-associated confirmed cases
reported in 1997.2 A wide variety of foods, including undercooked ground beef, raw milk,
roast beef, venison jerky, salami, yogurt, lettuce, unpasteurized apple juice, cantaloupe,
alfalfa sprouts, and coleslaw, have been implicated as vehicles of E. coli O157:H7 infection.3
In addition, outbreaks involving person-to-person and waterborne transmission have been
reported.3 Cattle have been identified as an important reservoir of E. coli O157:H7,4, 5 with
undercooked ground beef being a major vehicle of foodborne outbreaks.6 A survey per-
formed by the National Animal Monitoring System of the U.S. Department of Agriculture
revealed that 1.6% of feedlot cattle shed E. coli O157:H7 and 0.4% shed E. coli O157
nonmotile bacteria in their feces.7 This is likely an underestimate of the actual percentage
of E. coli O157:H7 harbored by cattle. The use of more sensitive isolation procedures will
likely identify considerably higher carriage rates. E. coli O157:H7 localizes in cattle pri-
marily in the rumen and colon, and is shed in feces.8 E. coli O157:H7 can survive in bovine
feces for many months,9 hence potentially contaminating cattle, food, water, and the
environment. During slaughter and subsequent processing operations, contamination of
carcasses with E. coli O157:H7 from the digesta or feces of cattle can occur. Moreover, fruits
and vegetables grown on soil fertilized with cattle manure or irrigated with water con-
taminated with cattle manure has the potential of being a vehicle of E. coli O157:H7.
Acidification is commonly used in food processing to control growth and survival of
spoilage-causing and pathogenic microorganisms in foods. The U.S. Food and Drug
Administration does not regard foods with pH ≤ 4.6 (high-acid foods) to be microbiolog-
ically hazardous. However, E. coli O157:H7 has been associated with outbreaks attributed
to high-acid foods, including apple juice, mayonnaise, fermented sausage, and yogurt,10
raising concerns about the safety of these foods. Several studies have revealed that many
strains of E. coli O157:H7 are highly tolerant to acidic conditions, being able to survive for
extended periods of time in synthetic gastric juice and in highly acidic foods.10,11 Further,
exposure of E. coli O157:H7 to mild or moderate acidic environments can induce an acid
tolerance response, which enables the pathogen to survive extreme acidic conditions. For
example, acid-adapted cells of E. coli O157:H7 survived longer in apple cider, fermented
sausage, and hydrochloric acid than non-acid adapted cells.12,13 However, E. coli O157:H7
is not unusually heat resistant14 or salt tolerant15 unless cells are preexposed to acid to
become acid adapted. Acid-adapted E. coli O157:H7 cells have been determined to have
increased heat tolerance.
In humans, three important manifestations of illness have been reported in E. coli
O157:H7 infection. These include hemorrhagic colitis, hemolytic uremic syndrome, and
thrombocytopenic purpura.16 Two important factors attributed to the pathogenesis of E.
coli O157:H7 include the ability of the pathogen to adhere to the intestinal mucosa of the
host, and production of Shiga toxin I and/or Shiga toxin II.16 Retrospective analysis of
foods implicated in outbreaks of E. coli O157:H7 infection suggest a low infectious dose
of the pathogen, probably less than a hundred cells.17
Salmonella Species
Salmonella spp. are facultatively anaerobic, gram-negative, rod-shaped bacteria belonging
to the family Enterobacteriaceae. Members of the genus Salmonella have an optimum growth
temperature of 37°C and utilize glucose with the production of acid and gas.18 Salmonella
spp. are widely distributed in nature. They colonize the intestinal tracts of humans,
animals, birds, and reptiles, and are excreted in feces, which contaminate the environment,
water, and foods.19 Many food products, especially foods having contact with animal
feces, including beef, pork, poultry, eggs, milk, fruits, and vegetables, have been associated
2705_frame_C55 Page 1142 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 2:10 PM
with outbreaks of salmonellosis.20 Salmonella spp. can be divided into host-adapted sero-
vars and those without any host preferences. Most of the foodborne serovars are in the
latter group.
The ability of many strains of Salmonella to adapt to extreme environmental conditions
emphasizes the potential risk of these microorganisms as foodborne pathogens. Although
salmonellae optimally grow at 37°C, the genus Salmonella consists of strains which are
capable of growth from 5° to 47°C.21 Salmonella spp. can grow at pH values ranging from
4.5 to 7.0, with optimum growth observed near neutral pH.19 Pre-exposure of Salmonella
to mild acidic environments (pH 5.5 to 6.0) can induce in some strains an acid tolerance
response, which enables the bacteria to survive for extended periods of time exposure to
acidic and other adverse environmental conditions such as heat and low water activity.22,23
However, most Salmonella spp. possess no unusual tolerance to salt and heat. A concen-
tration of 3 to 4% NaCl can inhibit the growth of Salmonella.24 Most salmonellae are
sensitive to heat, hence ordinary pasteurization and cooking temperatures are capable of
killing the pathogen.25
The most common species of Salmonella that cause foodborne salmonellosis in humans
are S. enterica serovar Typhimurium and S. enterica serovar Enteritiditis.26 A wide variety
of foods, including beef, pork, milk, chicken, and turkey have been associated with out-
breaks caused by S. Typhimurium. S. Enteritidis outbreaks, however, are most frequently
associated with consumption of poultry products, especially eggs. During the period from
1985 to 1987, 77% of S. Enteritidis outbreaks in the U.S. was associated with Grade A shell
eggs or foods containing eggs.27 One of the major routes of S. Enteritidis contamination
of intact eggs is through transovarian transmission of the pathogen to the yolk.28
S. enterica serovar Typhi is the causative agent of typhoid (enteric fever), a serious human
disease. Typhoid fever has a long incubation period of 7 to 28 days, and is characterized
by prolonged and spiking fever, abdominal pain, diarrhea, and headache.18 The disease
can be diagnosed by isolation of the pathogen from urine, blood, or stool specimens of
affected individuals. S. typhi is an uncommon cause of foodborne illness in the U.S.
Campylobacter Species
The genus Campylobacter consists of 14 species, however, C. jejuni subsp. jejuni and C. coli
are the dominant foodborne pathogens. C. jejuni is a slender, rod-shaped, microaerophilic
bacterium that requires approximately 3 to 6% oxygen for growth. It can be differentiated
from C. coli by its ability to hydrolyze hippurate.29 C. jejuni is the most common bacterial
agent causing diarrheal disease in humans in the U.S. and many other countries.30 Many
animals including poultry, swine, cattle, sheep, horses, and domestic pets harbor C. jejuni
in their intestinal tracts, hence serving as reservoirs of human infection. Although a
number of vehicles such as beef, pork, eggs, and untreated water have been implicated
in outbreaks of campylobacter enteritis, chicken and unpasteurized milk are reported as
the most commonly involved foods.31 The organism does not survive well in the environ-
ment, being sensitive to drying, highly acidic conditions, and freezing. It is also readily
killed in foods by adequate cooking.32
Usually campylobacter enteritis in humans is a self-limiting illness characterized by
abdominal cramps, diarrhea, headache, and fever lasting up to four days. However, severe
cases, involving bloody diarrhea and abdominal pain mimicking appendicitis, also occur.29
Guillain-Barré syndrome (GBS) is an infrequent sequela to Campylobacter infection in
humans. GBS is characterized by acute neuromuscular paralysis32 and is estimated to occur
in approximately one of every 1000 cases of campylobacter enteritis.33 A few strains of C.
jejuni reportedly produce a heat-labile enterotoxin similar to that produced by Vibrio
cholerae and enterotoxigenic E. coli.29 Some strains of C. jejuni and C. coli also can produce
2705_frame_C55 Page 1143 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 2:10 PM
a cytolethal distending toxin, which causes a rapid and specific cell cycle arrest in HeLa
and Caco-2 cells.30
Shigella Species
The genus Shigella is divided into four major groups: S. dysenteriae (group A), S. flexneri
(group B), S. boydii (group C), and S. sonnei (group D) based on the organism’s somatic
(O) antigen. Humans are the natural reservoir of Shigella spp. The fecal-oral route is the
primary mode of transmission of shigellae, and proper personal hygiene and sanitary
practices of cooks and food handlers can greatly reduce the occurrence of outbreaks of
shigellosis. Most foodborne outbreaks of shigellosis are associated with ingestion of foods
such as salads and water contaminated with human feces containing the pathogen.
Shigellosis is characterized by diarrhea containing bloody mucus, which lasts one to two
weeks. The infectious dose for Shigella infection is low. The ID50 of S. flexneri and S. sonnei
in humans is approximately 5000 microorganisms, and that of S. dysenteriae is a few
hundred cells; hence secondary transmission of Shigella by person-to-person contact fre-
quently occurs in outbreaks of foodborne illness.
Yersinia enterocolitica
Swine have been identified as an important reservoir of Yersinia enterocolitica, in which the
pathogen colonizes primarily the buccal cavity.34 Although pork and pork products are
considered to be the primary vehicles of Y. enterocolitica, a variety of other foods, including
milk, beef, lamb, seafood, and vegetables, has been identified as vehicles of Y. enterocolitica
infection.35 One of the largest outbreaks of yersiniosis in the U.S. was associated with
milk.36 Water has also been a vehicle of several outbreaks of Y. enterocolitica infection.36
Surveys have revealed that Y. enterocolitica is frequently present in foods, having been
isolated from 11% of sandwiches, 15% of chilled foods, and 22% of raw milk in Europe.37
However, most isolates from foods of non-pork origin are nonpathogenic for humans.
Although contaminated foods are a major source of Y. enterocolitica infection, contaminated
blood used in transfusions has resulted in many cases of Y. enterocolitica sepsis.38 Several
serovars of pathogenic Y. enterocolitica have been reported, which include O:3, O:5, O:8,
and O:9,39 with serovar 0:8 being common in the U.S.40
An unusual characteristic of Y. enterocolitica that influences food safety is its ability to
grow at low temperatures, even as low as –1°C.41 Several studies have revealed growth
of Y. enterocolitica in foods stored at refrigeration temperature. Y. enterocolitica grew on
pork, chicken, and beef at 0 to 1°C.42,43 The ability of Y. enterocolitica to grow well at
refrigeration temperature has been exploited for isolating the pathogen from foods, water,
and stool specimens. Such samples are incubated at 4 to 8°C in an enrichment broth for
several days to selectively culture Y. enterocolitica based on its psychrotrophic nature.
Vibrio Species
The genus Vibrio consists of 28 species, of which V. parahaemolyticus, V. vulnificus, and V.
cholerae are the most important foodborne pathogens. Vibrios are associated with estuarine
and marine waters, and their populations in surface waters and in seafoods are higher
during the warm than cold months of the year.44 V. parahaemolyticus is present in coastal
waters of the U.S. and the world. A survey by the U.S. Food and Drug Administration
revealed that 86% of 635 seafood samples contained V. parahaemolyticus, being isolated
from clams, oysters, lobsters, scallops, shrimp, fish, and shellfish.44 An important virulence
2705_frame_C55 Page 1144 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 2:10 PM
Aeromonas hydrophila
Although Aeromonas species have been recognized as pathogens of cold-blooded animals,
their potential to cause human infections, especially foodborne illness, received attention
only recently. A. hydrophila has been isolated from drinking water, fresh and saline waters,
and sewage.48 It also has been isolated from a variety of foods such as fish, oyster, shellfish,
raw milk, ground beef, chicken, and pork.48 Although A. hydrophila is sensitive to highly
acidic conditions and does not possess any unusual thermal resistance, some strains are
psychrotrophic and grow at refrigeration temperature.49 A. hydrophila can grow on a variety
of refrigerated foods, including pork, asparagus, cauliflower, and broccoli.50,51 However,
considering the widespread occurrence of A. hydrophila in water and food and its relatively
infrequent association with human illness, it is likely that most strains of this bacterium
are not pathogenic for humans. A. hydrophila infection in humans is characterized by
watery diarrhea and mild fever. Virulent strains of A. hydrophila produce a 52-kDa polypep-
tide, which possesses enterotoxic, cytotoxic, and hemolytic activities.52
Plesiomonas shigelloides
P. shigelloides has been implicated in several cases of sporadic and epidemic gastroenteri-
tis.53 The pathogen is present in fresh and estuarine waters, and has been isolated from
various aquatic animals.49 Seafoods such as fish, crabs, and oysters have been associated
with cases of P. shigelloides infection. The most common symptoms of P. shigelloides infection
include abdominal pain, nausea, chills, fever, and diarrhea. Potential virulence factors of
P. shigelloides include cytotoxic enterotoxin, invasins, and β-hemolysin.49
Listeria monocytogenes
L. monocytogenes has emerged into a highly significant and fatal foodborne pathogen
throughout the world, especially in the U.S. There is an estimated approximately 2500
cases of listeriosis annually in the U.S., with a mortality rate of ca. 25%.1 A large outbreak
of listeriosis involving more than 100 cases and associated with eating contaminated
turkey frankfurters occurred during 1998-99.54 During this period of time there were more
2705_frame_C55 Page 1145 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 2:10 PM
Staphylococcus aureus
Pre-formed, heat stable enterotoxin that can resist boiling for several minutes is the agent
responsible for staphylococcal food poisoning. Humans are the principal reservoir of S.
aureus strains involved in outbreaks of foodborne illness. Colonized humans can be long-
term carriers of S. aureus, and thereby contaminate foods and other humans.61 The organ-
ism commonly resides in the throat and nasal cavity, and on the skin, especially in boils
and carbuncles.61 Protein-rich foods such as ham, poultry, fish, dairy products, custards,
cream-filled bakery products, and salads containing cooked meat, chicken, and potatoes
are the vehicles most frequently associated with S. aureus food poisoning.62 S. aureus is
usually overgrown by competing bacterial flora in raw foods; hence raw foods are not
typical vehicles of staphylococcal food poisoning. Cooking eliminates most of the normal
bacterial flora of raw foods, thereby enabling the growth of S. aureus, which can be
introduced by infected cooks and food handlers into foods after cooking. The incubation
period of staphylococcal food poisoning is very short, with symptoms observed within
two to six hours after eating toxin-contaminated food. Symptoms include nausea, vomit-
ing, diarrhea, and abdominal pain.
S. aureus can grow within a wide range of pH values from 4 to 9.3, with optimum growth
occurring at pH 6 to 7. S. aureus has an exceptional tolerance to sodium chloride, being
able to grow in foods in the presence of 7 to 10% NaCl, with some strains tolerating up
to 20% NaCl.62 S. aureus has the unique ability to grow at a water activity as low as 0.83
2705_frame_C55 Page 1146 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 2:10 PM
to 0.86, which is unusual for a nonhalophilic bacterium.63 S. aureus produces nine different
enterotoxins which are quite heat resistant, losing their serological activity at 121°C but
not at 100°C for several minutes.63
Clostridium botulinum
Foodborne botulism is an intoxication caused by ingestion of foods containing pre-formed
botulinal toxin, which is produced by C. botulinum under anaerobic conditions. There are
seven types of C. botulinum (A, B, C, D, E, F, and G) classified on the basis of the antigenic
specificity of the neurotoxin they produce.64 The organism is present in soil, vegetation,
and sedimentation under water. Type A strains are proteolytic, whereas type E strains are
nonproteolytic.65 Another classification divides C. botulinum into four groups: group 1
(type A strains and proteolytic strains of types B and F), group II (type E strains and
nonproteolytic strains of B and F), group III (type C and D strains), and group IV (type
G strains). Types A, B, E, and F are associated with botulism in humans. Type A C.
botulinum occurs frequently in soils of the western U.S., whereas type B strains are more
often present in the eastern states and in Europe.65 Type E strains are largely associated
with aquatic environments and fish. Foods most often associated with cases of botulism
include fish, meat, honey, and home-canned vegetables.64 Type A cases of botulism in the
U.S. are frequently associated with temperature-abused, home-prepared foods. Proteolytic
type A, B, and F strains produce heat-resistant spores, which pose a safety concern in low-
acid canned foods. In contrast, nonproteolytic type B, E, and F strains produce heat-labile
spores, which are of concern in pasteurized or unheated foods.65 The minimum pH for
growth of group I and group II strains is 4.6 and 5, respectively.64 Group I strains can grow
at a minimum water activity of 0.94, whereas group II strains do not grow below a water
activity of 0.97.66 The proteolytic strains of C. botulinum are generally more resistant to
heat than nonproteolytic strains.
Clostridium perfringens
C. perfringens strains are grouped into five types: A, B, C, D, and E, based on the type(s)
of toxin(s) produced. C. perfringens foodborne illness is almost exclusively associated with
type A isolates of C. perfringens. C. perfringens is commonly present in soil, dust, water,
and in the intestinal tracts of humans and animals.67 It is frequently present in foods; about
50% of raw or frozen meat and poultry contain C. perfringens.68 Spores produced by C.
perfringens are quite heat resistant, and can survive boiling for up to one hour.68 C. perfrin-
gens spores can survive in cooked foods, and if not properly cooled before refrigerated
storage, the spores will germinate and vegetative cells can grow to large populations
during holding at growth temperatures. Large populations of C. perfringens cells (>106/g)
ingested with contaminated food will enter the small intestine, multiply, and sporulate.
During sporulation in the small intestine C. perfringens enterotoxin is produced, which
induces a diarrheal response. Although vegetative cells of C. perfringens are sensitive to
cold temperature and freezing, spores tolerate cold temperature well and can survive in
refrigerated foods.
Bacillus cereus
B. cereus is a spore-forming pathogen present in soil and on vegetation. It is frequently
isolated from foods such as meat, spices, vegetables, dairy products, and cereal grains,
2705_frame_C55 Page 1147 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 2:10 PM
especially fried rice.69 There are two types of foodborne illness caused by B. cereus, i.e., a
diarrheagenic illness and an emetic syndrome.70 The diarrheal syndrome is usually mild
and is characterized by abdominal cramps, nausea, and watery stools. Types of foods
implicated in outbreaks of diarrheal syndrome include cereal food products containing
corn and corn starch, mashed potatoes, vegetables, milk, and cooked meat products. The
emetic syndrome is more severe and acute in nature, characterized by severe vomiting.
Refried or rewarmed boiled rice dishes are frequently implicated in outbreaks of emetic
syndrome.71 The dose of B. cereus required to produce diarrheal illness is estimated at
more than 105 cells/g.72
Brucella Species
Brucella spp. are pathogens in many animals, causing sterility and abortion. In humans,
Brucella is the etiologic agent of undulant fever. The genus Brucella consists of six species,
of which those of principal concern are B. abortus, B. suis, and B. melitensis.73 B. abortus
causes disease in cattle, B. suis in swine, and B. melitensis is the primary pathogen of sheep.
B. melitensis is the most pathogenic species for humans. Human brucellosis is primarily
an occupational disease of veterinarians and meat industry workers. Brucellosis can be
transmitted by aerosols and dust. Foodborne brucellosis can be transmitted to humans by
consumption of meat and milk products from infected farm animals. The most common
food vehicle of brucellosis for humans is unpasteurized milk.73 Meat is a less common
source of foodborne brucellosis because the organisms are destroyed by cooking.
Helicobacter pylori
H. pylori is a human pathogen causing chronic gastritis, gastric ulcer, and gastric carci-
noma.74,75 Although, humans are the primary host of H. pylori, the bacterium has been
isolated from cats.58 H. pylori does not survive well outside its host, but it has been detected
in water and vegetables.76,77 A study on the effect of environmental and substrate factors
on the growth of H. pylori indicated that the pathogen likely lacks the ability to grow in
most foods.78 However, H. pylori may survive for long periods in low-acid environments
under refrigerated conditions. Presently, the mode of transmission of H. pylori in human
infection has not been elucidated, but contaminated water and food are considered poten-
tial vehicles.
TABLE 55.2
Viral Foodborne Pathogens
Estimated No. of
Foodborne Cases Incubation Period,
Significant Sources/ Annually in Symptoms and
Microorganism Characteristics Reservoirs Vehicles USA121 Duration Detection Methods Control/Prevention
Hepatitis A virus Single-stranded RNA Humans, Raw or undercooked 4170 15 to 45 days, usually ca. Cultural methods 164, 165 Avoid consumption of
virus, spherical in shape, sewage- shellfish and 25 days Enzyme immunoassay166 raw seafoods,
remains viable for long polluted seafoods harvested Loss of appetite, nausea, PCR167, 168 disinfection of drinking
periods of time in foods waters from sewage- abdominal pain, fever, water, good personal
stored at refrigeration polluted water, jaundice, dark urine, hygiene and food
temperature, virus ready-to-eat foods pale stools handling practices,
multiplies in the gut such as salads Duration is a few weeks to vaccination of
2705_frame_C55 Page 1148 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 2:10 PM
Hepatitis A virus
Hepatitis A virus is a member of the family Picornaviridae and is transmitted by the fecal-
oral route. Raw shellfish harvested from waters contaminated by human sewage is among
the foods most frequently associated with outbreaks of hepatitis A virus.79 Hepatitis A
virus is more resistant to heat and drying than other picornaviruses.79 The incubation
period for onset of symptoms of hepatitis A infection ranges from 15 to 45 days, and
symptoms include nausea, abdominal pain, jaundice, and fever. The virus is shed in feces
by infected humans many days before the onset of symptoms, indicating the importance
of good personal hygienic practices of cooks and food handlers who could otherwise
contaminate food during the period of asymptomatic fecal shedding.
Norwalk-like viruses
Norwalk-like viruses belong to the family Calciviridae, and are often referred to as small,
round structured viruses. Viruses of this type are believed to be the most common cause
of foodborne viral diseases in the U.S. Raw or undercooked shellfish and other seafoods
are common vehicles of Norwalk-like viruses. The incubation period of infection ranges
from 24 to 48 h, and symptoms include nausea, vomiting, and diarrhea. Infected humans
shed the virus in feces for up to a week after symptoms have subsided. Although little
information is available on the stability of these viruses in foods, qualitative studies in
human volunteers indicate that the viruses are infective for up to 3 h when exposed to a
medium at pH 2.2 at room temperature or for 60 minutes at pH 7 at 60°C.80
Rotavirus
Rotavirus is the most common cause of diarrhea in children worldwide, especially in
developing countries. In the U.S., there are an estimated 3.9 million cases of rotavirus
diarrhea each year; however, only 39,000 cases are estimated to be acquired through
contaminated foods.1 Rotavirus infection has an incubation period of one to three days,
and is characterized by fever, vomiting, and diarrhea. The virus is shed in the feces of
infected humans and can survive on vegetables at 4° or 20°C for many days.81 It also has
been shown to survive the process of making soft cheese.81
Aspergillus Species
A. flavus and A. parasiticus are the most important toxigenic foodborne aspergilli. A wide
variety of foods such as nuts, corn, oil seeds, and sorghum are potential vehicles of these
1150
TABLE 55.3
Fungal Foodborne Pathogens
Sources/
Microorganism/ Significant Reservoirs Control/
Toxin Characteristics of Fungi Vehicles of Toxins Toxic Effects Detection Methods Prevention
Aspergillus parasiticus and Growth at 10°-43°C, Environment, Corn, peanuts, Effects of aflatoxin in animals: Cultural methods172, 173, 174 Proper storage of cereal
Aspergillus flavus/ optimal growth at 32°C, soil, vegetation cottonseed Acute: hemorrhage in the ELISA175 products, detoxification of
Aflatoxin produces aflatoxins at gastrointestinal tract, liver PCR176 mycotoxins in cereal
2705_frame_C55 Page 1150 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 2:10 PM
Penicillium Species
The genus Penicillium consists of more than 150 species, of which nearly 100 produce known
toxins. Three important foodborne toxigenic Penicillium species include P. verrucosum, P.
expansum, and P. citrinum. P. verrucosum is present on grains grown in temperate zones,
and is commonly associated with Scandanavian barley and wheat.84 P. verrucosum produces
Ochratoxin A, which has immunosuppressive and potential carcinogenic properties.84 Och-
ratoxin A also has been associated with nephritis in pigs in Scandanavia.85 P. expansum,
which is frequently associated with fresh fruits, produces patulin, a toxin that produces
immunological, neurological, and gastrointestinal toxic effects in animal models. P. expan-
sum is commonly present in rotten apples and pears, and to a lesser extent in cereals. An
unusual characteristic of P. expansum is its ability to grow at low temperature, i.e., –2° to
–3°C.84 P. citrinin is a widely occurring mold commonly present on rice, wheat, and corn.
P. citrinin produces the metabolite citrinin. Although the toxicological effect of citrinin in
humans is not known, it has been reported to cause renal toxicity in pigs and cats.86
Fusarium graminearum
F. graminearum is a toxigenic mold commonly present in soil and on cereals such as wheat
and corn. It produces a number of mycotoxins, including deoxynevalenol and zearale-
none.87 Ingestion of foods containing deoxynevalenol produces illness termed Scabby
grain intoxication, which is characterized by anorexia, nausea, vomiting, diarrhea, dizzi-
ness, and convulsions. Foods most frequently implicated as vehicles of deoxynevalenol
include cereal grains, wheat, barley, and noodles.
Giardia lamblia
G. lamblia is a flagellated protozoan parasite that colonizes the intestinal tract of humans
and animals. It is commonly present in lakes, rivers, and stagnated waters. The life cycle
of G. lamblia includes flagellated trophozoites, which become pear-shaped cysts.88 The
1152
TABLE 55.4
Parasitic Foodborne Pathogens
Estimated No. of Incubation Period,
Significant Sources/ Foodborne Cases Symptoms and Control/
Parasite Characteristics Reservoirs Vehicles Annually in USA1 Duration Detection Methods Prevention
Giardia lamblia Flagellate protozoa, Humans, Drinking water, raw 200,000 4 to 25 days, usually 7 to 10 Immuno- Adequate cooking of
produces oval- animals, fruits and vegetables days fluorescence182 foods, filtration of
shaped cysts ranging especially contaminated with Abdominal cramps, Immunochromato- drinking water, good
from 8 to 20 µm in beavers and cysts, ready-to-eat nausea, abdominal graphy183 personal hygiene and
length and 5 to 12 µm muskrats, water foods such as salads distension, diarrhea PCR184 food handling
in width, cysts contaminated by which can be chronic and practices
contain four nuclei infected food relapsing, fatigue, weight
and are resistant to handlers loss, anorexia
chlorination used to Duration is weeks to years
disinfect water
Entamoeba histolytica Amoeboid protozoa, Humans, dogs, Foods and water Unknown 2 to 4 weeks Microscopic Good personal
2705_frame_C55 Page 1152 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 2:10 PM
anaerobe survives in rats contaminated with Abdominal pain, fever, examination hygiene and food
environment in feces or irrigation vomiting, diarrhea ELISA185 handling practices,
crypted form, cysts water containing blood and PCR185, 186 adequate cooking of
remain viable in feces mucus, weight loss foods, filtration of
for several days and Duration is weeks to water, hygienic
in soil for at least 8 months disposal of sewage
days at 30°C and for water, treatment of
more than 1 month at irrigation water
10°C, relatively
resistant to chlorine
Cryptosporidium Obligate intracellular Humans, wild Contaminated 30,000 2 to 14 days Immunofluorescence Thorough cooking of
parvum coccidian parasite, and domestic drinking and Profuse, watery diarrhea, assay187 food, avoid contact
oocysts are spherical animals, recreational water, abdominal pain, nausea, PCR188 with infected
to oval in shape with especially calves raw milk from vomiting animals, filtration of
an average size of 4.5 infected cattle, fresh Duration is few days to 3 drinking water, good
to 5.0 µm, oocysts are vegetables and other weeks personal hygiene and
resistant to foods contaminated food handling
chlorination used to with feces from practices
disinfect water infected humans and
animals
Cyclospora cayetanesis Obligate intracellular Humans Water, fruits and 14,600 1 week Staining and Good personal
coccidian parasite, vegetables Watery diarrhea, microscopic hygiene, filtration of
oocysts are spherical contaminated with abdominal pain, nausea, examination189 drinking water
in shape with an oocysts vomiting, anorexia, PCR190
average size of 8 to 10 myalgia, weight loss
µm Duration is a few days to 1
month
Handbook of Nutrition and Food
Toxoplasma gondii Obligate intracellular Cats, farm Raw or undercooked 112,500 5 to 23 days Cell culture and Prevent
coccidian protozoa animals, meat, raw goat milk, Fever, rash, headache, mouse inoculation191 environmental
transplacental raw vegetables muscle pain, swelling of Immunoassay192 contamination with
transmission lymph nodes; PCR191 cat feces, avoid
from infected transplacental infection consumption of raw
mother to fetus may cause abortion meat and milk, safe
Duration is variable disposal of cat feces,
wash hands after
contact with cats
Trichinella spiralis Nematode with no Wild and Raw or undercooked 50 Initial symptoms: Microscopic Adequate cooking of
free living stage in domestic meat of animals 24 to 72 h, examination meat, freezing of
the life cycle, adult animals, containing encysted Systemic symptoms: 8 to 21 ELISA193 meat at -15°C for 30
female worms are 3 especially swine larvae such as swine days PCR194 days or at -35°C,
to 4 mm in length, and horses or horses Initial phase: abdominal preventing
transmissible form is pain, fever, nausea, trichinosis in pigs by
larval cyst which can vomiting, diarrhea not feeding swine
occur in pork muscle Systemic phase: periorbital garbage containing
oedema, eosinophilia, infected meat
Foodborne Infections and Infestations
myalgia, difficulty in
breathing, thirst, profuse
sweating, chills,
2705_frame_C55 Page 1153 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 2:10 PM
weakness, prostration
Duration is 2 weeks to 3
months
Anisakis spp. Nematode, slender Sea mammals Some undercooked Unknown 4 to 12 h ELISA195 Adequate cooking of
threadlike parasite salt water fish, sushi, Epigastric pain, nausea, PCR196 saltwater fish,
measuring 1.5 to 1.6 herring, sashimi, vomiting, sometimes freezing fish at -23°C
cm in length and 0.1 ceviche hematemesis for 7 days
cm in diameter Duration is variable
Taenia solium Tapeworm, dependent Humans, cattle, Raw or undercooked Unknown Few days to >10 years Detection of eggs or Adequate cooking of
Taenia saginata on the digestive swine beef or pork Nausea, epigastric pain, proglottids in feces beef and pork,
system of the host for nervousness, insomnia, ELISA197 proper disposal of
nutrition anorexia, weight loss, PCR198 sewage and human
digestive disturbances, wastes, freezing of
weakness, dizziness meat at -10°C for 2
Duration is weeks to weeks
months
Diphyllobothrium latum Largest human Saltwater fish, Raw or undercooked Unknown Epigastric pain, nausea, Detection of eggs in Adequate cooking of
tapeworm humans saltwater fish abdominal pain, diarrhea, feces fish, proper disposal
weakness, pernicious of sewage and
anemia human waste
Duration is months to years
1153
2705_frame_C55 Page 1154 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 2:10 PM
cysts contaminate water or food through feces of infected animals or humans. Following
ingestion of cyst-contaminated water or food, the trophozoites reach the small intestine,
where they undergo excystation and multiply by binary fission. New trophozoites subse-
quently become cysts in the distal small intestine, and the encysted trophozoites are shed
in the feces. The symptoms of giardiasis include abdominal pain, abdominal distension,
nausea, vomiting, and diarrhea. Although water and foods contaminated with cysts are
primary vehicles of giardiasis, little is known about the survival characteristics of the cysts
in foods. In most cases of foodborne transmission, infected food handlers transfer the cysts
to foods they prepare.
Entamoeba histolytica
E. histolytica is a protozoan parasite that causes amoebiasis or amoebic dysentery in
humans. Although the parasite survives in the environment and water, humans are the
principal source of amoebiasis. In humans, cysts containing the trophozites are released,
which in turn multiply and are subsequently excreted in the feces as cysts.89 Foods and
water contaminated with the cysts transmit the disease. Since the fecal-oral route is the
principal route of transmission of amoebiasis, personal hygiene of infected food handlers
plays a critical role in preventing foodborne amoebiasis. Human amoebiasis can occur in
two forms: intestinal amoebiasis and amoebic liver abscess, which is usually a sequela to
the intestinal form. Intestinal amoebiasis is characterized by abdominal pain, vomiting,
and watery diarrhea containing mucus and blood. Symptoms of the hepatic form of
amoebiasis include wasting, painful and enlarged liver, weight loss, and anemia.
Cryptosporidium parvum
C. parvum is a protozoan parasite that infects a wide range of animals and humans. C.
parvum is monoexenous in its life cycle, requiring only one host for its development.88
Infected hosts shed in their feces oocysts of the parasite, subsequently contaminating the
environment, food, and water. The life cycle of C. parvum can be summarized as follows.88
Upon ingestion of contaminated water or food, or by inhalation of oocysts, sporozoites
are released by excystation of oocysts into the gastrointestinal or respiratory tract. The
sporozoites enter the epithelial cells and develop into trophozoites, which in turn differ-
entiate into type I and type II meronts. The merozoites from type I meronts invade new
tissues and develop into trophozoites to continue the life cycle. The merozoites from type
II meronts invade infected cells and undergo sexual multiplication to give rise to male
and female gametes. The zygotes resulting from fertilized gametes become infectious by
sporulation, and the sporulated oocysts are excreted in feces.
Cryptosporidiosis is a self-limiting disease with an incubation period of one to two
weeks, and is characterized by profuse, watery diarrhea, abdominal pain, vomiting, and
low-grade fever. Water is the most common source of C. parvum for human infections.58
Oocysts of the pathogen have been detected in fresh vegetables, raw milk, sausage, and
apple cider.58 Infected food handlers can also transfer the oocysts to foods.90, 91 C. parvum
oocysts are sensitive to freezing and freeze-drying. The oocysts lose infectivity in distilled
water stored at 4°C.92 However, the oocysts are quite resistant to chlorine; no loss in
infectivity was observed in water containing 1 to 3% chlorine for up to 18 hours.93 How-
ever, the oocysts are sensitive to ozone, losing more than 90% infectivity in the presence
of 1 ppm ozone for 5 minutes.94
2705_frame_C55 Page 1155 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 2:10 PM
Cyclospora cayetanensis
C. cayetanensis is an emerging foodborne, protozoan pathogen, especially in the U.S. The
parasite was implicated in several foodborne outbreaks in the U.S. during 1996 and 1997.95
C. cayetanensis is spread through infected feces and is transmitted to humans by the fecal-
oral route. Water and foods, especially fruits and vegetables containing oocysts, are com-
mon vehicles of human infection. The symptoms of C. cayetanensis infection in humans
include watery diarrhea, nausea, abdominal pain, vomiting, and weight loss. Presently,
very little information is available on the effects of heat, freezing, and disinfection agents
on Cyclospora oocysts. Preliminary studies revealed that exposure of oocysts to –20°C for
24 h or 60°C for 1 h prevented oocysts from sporulating. Exposing oocysts to 4° or 37°C
for 14 days delayed sporulation.96
Toxoplasma gondii
T. gondii is an obligate intracellular protozoan parasite for which cats are the definitive
hosts. In the intestines of cats, the parasite undergoes sexual reproduction to form oocysts,
which are excreted in feces.97 The oocysts undergo maturation and survive in the envi-
ronment for months. Toxoplasmosis in humans results following ingestion of food or water
contaminated with oocysts. Transmission also occurs from an infected pregnant mother
to child by transplacental transmission.89 Symptoms in healthy adults are usually mild,
and include rash, headache, muscle pain, and swelling of lymph nodes. The oocysts are
sensitive to both heat and cold;98 hence the cysts are killed in properly cooked foods.99
Trichinella spiralis
T. spiralis is a roundworm that primarily infects wild and domestic animals, especially
pigs. Humans contract trichinosis by consumption of raw or undercooked meat containing
larvae of the parasite. Pigs are infected by consuming uncooked scraps of infected pork.
The encysted larvae upon ingestion are liberated from the cyst in the intestine, where they
sexually mature.100 The mature male and female worms copulate in the lumen of the small
intestine, giving rise to a new generation of larvae. The newly born larvae migrate to
various tissues in the body. Those larvae that reach the striated muscles penetrate into the
sarcolemma of the muscle fibers and develop to maturity as encapsulated cysts.100 The
larvae continue their life cycle when raw or undercooked meat, especially pork containing
the larvae, is consumed by humans.
Anisakis Species
Anisakiasis in humans is caused by two foodborne roundworms. These include A. simplex,
whose definitive host is whales, and Pseudoterranova decipiens, which primarily inhabits
seals. The eggs of these roundworms are excreted in feces by their respective hosts. The
eggs then undergo molting in suitable intermediate hosts and subsequently develop into
larvae, which are ingested by fish.101 Humans contract anisakiasis by consumption of raw
or undercooked fish and seafoods containing the larvae. In noninvasive anisakiasis, the
worms released from ingested foods migrate to the pharynx, resulting in “tingling throat
syndrome.”101 The worms are ultimately expelled by coughing. In the invasive form of
anisakiasis, the worms penetrate the intestinal mucosa, causing symptoms that include
epigastric pain, nausea, vomiting, and diarrhea.
2705_frame_C55 Page 1156 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 2:10 PM
Taenia Species
The genus Taenia includes two meatborne pathogenic flat worms, T. saginata (beef tape-
worm) and T. solium (pork tapeworm). The eggs of T. saginata survive in the environment,
including on pastures, and are ingested by cattle in which they hatch into embryos.100 The
embryos migrate to skeletal muscles or the heart, and develop into larvae known as
cysticercus bovis. Humans become infected by consuming raw or undercooked beef con-
taining the larvae. Larvae that are released into the small intestine develop into mature,
adult worms. The symptoms of T. saginata infection in humans include decreased appetite,
headache, dizziness, diarrhea, and weight loss.
In the normal life cycle of T. solium, pigs serve as the intermediate host. Eggs ingested
by pigs develop into embryos in the duodenum, penetrate the intestinal wall, migrate
through the blood and the lymphatic system, and finally reach the skeletal muscles and
myocardium, where they develop into larvae known as cysticercus cellulose. Humans
consuming raw or undercooked pork are infected with the larvae, which develop into
adult worms in the small intestine. The symptoms of T. solium infection in humans include
discomfort, hunger pains, anorexia, and nervous disorders. Worms are passed in the feces.
In the abnormal life cycle of T. solium, humans serve as intermediate hosts in which the
larvae develop in striated muscles and in subcutaneous tissue.
Diphyllobothrium latum
D. latum is commonly referred to as the broad tapeworm because it is the largest human
tapeworm.101 Humans contract diphyllobothriasis by consuming raw or undercooked fish
containing the larval forms called plerocercoids. Upon ingestion, the larvae develop into
mature worms in the intestines. Eggs produced by mature worms are excreted in feces.
If feces containing the eggs contaminate water, the eggs develop into free-swimming larvae
called coricidia. Coricidia are ingested by crustaceans, where they develop into a juvenile
stage known as procercoid. Following ingestion of infected crustaceans by fish, procercoids
develop into plerocercoids to continue the life cycle. Diphyllobothriasis in humans is
characterized by nausea, abdominal pain, diarrhea, weakness, and pernicious anemia.101
Cases of diphyllobothriasis have been associated with eating raw salmon and sushi.
References
1. Mead, PS, Slutsker, L, Dietz, W et al. Emerg Infect Dis 5: 607; 1999.
2. Centers for Disease Control and Prevention, Morbid Mortal Weekly Rep 47: 782; 1997.
3. Meng, J, Doyle, MP. In: Microbiology of Shiga Toxin-Producing Escherichia coli in Foods, Escher-
ichia coli O157:H7 and Other Shiga Toxin-Producing E. coli Strains, Kaper, JB, O’Brien, AD, Eds,
ASM Press, Washington, DC, 1998, p 92.
4. Faith, NG, Shere, JA, Brosch, R, et al. Appl Environ Microbiol 62: 1519; 1996.
5. Zhao, T, Doyle, MP, Shere, J, Gerber, L. Appl Environ Microbiol 61: 1290; 1995.
6. Riley, LW, Remis, RS, Helgerson, SD, et al. N Engl J Med 308: 681; 1983.
7. Zhao, T, Doyle, MP, Harmon, BG, et al. J Clin Microbiol 36: 641; 1998.
8. Brown, CA, Harmon, BG, Zhao, T, Doyle, MP. Appl Environ Microbiol 63: 27; 1997.
9. Wang, GT, Zhao, T, Doyle, MP. Appl Environ Microbiol 62: 2567; 1998.
10. Uljas, HE, Ingham, SC. J Food Prot 61: 939; 1998.
11. Arnold, KW, Kaspar, CW. Appl Environ Microbiol 61: 2037; 1995.
12. Buchanan, RL, Edelson, SG. Appl Environ Microbiol 62: 4009; 1996.
13. Leyer, GJ, Wang, L, Johnson, EA. Appl Environ Microbiol 61: 3152; 1995.
2705_frame_C55 Page 1157 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 2:10 PM
14. Doyle, MP, Schoeni, JL. Appl Environ Microbiol 48: 855; 1984.
15. Glass, KA, Loeffelholz, JM, Ford, JP, Doyle, MP. Appl Environ Microbiol 58: 2513; 1992.
16. Padhye, NV, Doyle, MP. J Food Prot 55: 555; 1992.
17. Doyle, MP, Zhao, T, Meng, J, Zhao, S. In: Food Microbiology: Fundamentals and Frontiers, Doyle,
MP, Beuchat, LR, Montville, TJ, Eds, ASM Press, Washington, DC, 1997, p 171.
18. D’Aoust, J-Y. In: Food Microbiology: Fundamentals and Frontiers, Doyle, MP, Beuchat, LR,
Montville, TJ, Eds, ASM Press, Washington, DC, 1997, p 129.
19. Jay, JM. Modern Food Microbiology, Aspen Publishers, Gaithersburg, 1998, p 509.
20. Bean, NH, Griffin, PM, Goulding, JS, Ivey, CB. J Food Prot 53: 711; 1983.
21. D’Aoust, J-Y. Int J Food Microbiol 13: 207; 1991.
22. Leyer, GJ, Johnson, EA. Appl Environ Microbiol 59: 1842; 1993.
23. Leyer, GJ, Johnson, EA. Appl Environ Microbiol 58: 2075; 1992.
24. D’Aoust, J-Y. In: Foodborne Bacterial Pathogens, Doyle, MP, Ed, Marcel Dekker, New York, 1998,
p 336.
25. Flowers, RS. Food Technol 42: 182; 1988.
26. Millemann, Y, Lesage, MC, Chaslus-Dancla, E, Lafont, JP. J Clin Microbiol 33: 173; 1995.
27. Banhart, HM, Dreesen, DW, Bastien, R, Pancorbo, OC. J Food Prot 54: 488; 1991.
28. Keller, LH, Benson, CE, Krotec, K, Eckroade, RJ. Infect Immun 63: 1134; 1995.
29. Jay, JM. Modern Food Microbiology, Aspen Publishers, Gaithersburg, 1998, p 556.
30. Whitehouse, CA, Balbo, PB, Pesci, EC, et al. Infect Immun 66: 1934; 1998.
31. Stern, NJ, Kazmi, SU. In: Foodborne Bacterial Pathogens, Doyle, MP, Ed, Marcel Dekker, New
York, 1989, p 71.
32. Altekruse, SF, Stern, NJ, Fields, PI, Swerdlow, DL. Emerg Infect Dis 5: 28; 1999.
33. Allos, BM. J Infect Dis 176: 125S; 1997.
34. Robins-Browne, RM. In: Food Microbiology: Fundamentals and Frontiers, Doyle, MP, Beuchat, LR,
Montville, TJ, Eds, ASM Press, Washington, DC, 1997, p 192.
35. Jay, JM. Modern Food Microbiology, Aspen Publishers, Gaithersburg, 1998, p 555.
36. Shiemann, DA. In: Foodborne Bacterial Pathogens, Doyle, MP, Ed, Marcel Dekker, New York,
1989, p 631.
37. Greenwood, M. Leatherhead: Leatherhead Food Research Association. 1990.
38. Bottone, EJ. Clin Microbiol Rev 10: 257; 1997.
39. Schifield, GM. J Appl Bacteriol 72: 267; 1992.
40. Toma, S, Lafleur, L. Appl Microbiol 28: 469; 1974.
41. Walker, S. Organisms of emerging significance, Microbiological and Environmental Health Issues
Relevant to the Food and Catering Industries. Symposium Proceedings, Campden Food and Drink
Research Association, Chipping Campden, UK, 1990.
42. Hanna, MO, Stewart, JC, Zink, DL, et al. J Food Sci 42: 1180; 1977.
43. Palumbo, SA. J Food Prot 49: 1003; 1986.
44. Oliver, JD, Kaper, JB. In: Food Microbiology: Fundamentals and Frontiers, Doyle, MP, Beuchat,
LR, Montville, TJ, Eds, ASM Press, Washington, DC, 1997, p 228.
45. Miyamato, Y, Obara, Y, Nikkawa, T, et al. Infect Immun 28, 567, 1980.
46. Mintz, ED, Popovic, T, Blake, PA. In: Vibrio cholerae and Cholera: Molecular to Global Perspectives,
ASM Press, Washington, DC, 1994, p 345.
47. Jay, JM. Modern Food Microbiology, Aspen Publishers, Gaithersburg, 1998, p 544.
48. Beuchat, LR. Int J Food Microbiol 13: 217; 1991.
49. Kirov, SM. In: Food Microbiology: Fundamentals and Frontiers, Doyle, MP, Beuchat, LR, Montville,
TJ, Eds, ASM Press, Washington, DC, 1997, p 265.
50. Berrang, ME, Brackett, RE, Beuchat, LR. Appl Environ Microbiol 55: 2167; 1989.
51. Palumbo, SA. Int J Food Microbiol 7: 41; 1988.
52. Jay, JM. Modern Food Microbiology, Aspen Publishers, Gaithersburg, 1998, p 620.
53. Holmberg, SD, Wachsmuth, IK, Hickmann-Brenner, FW, et al. Ann Intern Med 105: 690; 1986.
54. Nickelson, N. Food Quality, April, 28, 1999.
55. Brackett, RE. Food Technol 52: 162; 1998.
56. Cox, LJ, Keiss,T, Cordier, JL, et al. Food Microbiol 6: 49; 1989.
57. Jeong, DK, Frank, JF. J Food Prot 57: 576; 1994.
2705_frame_C55 Page 1158 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 2:10 PM
58. Meng, J, Doyle, MP. Annu Rev Nutr 17: 255; 1997.
59. Rocourt, J, Cossart, P. In: Food Microbiology: Fundamentals and Frontiers, Doyle, MP, Beuchat,
LR, Montville, TJ, Eds, ASM Press, Washington, DC, 1997, p 337.
60. Jay, JM. Modern Food Microbiology, Aspen Publishers, Gaithersburg, 1998, p 490.
61. Jablonski, LM, Bohac, GA. In: Food Microbiology: Fundamentals and Frontiers, Doyle, MP,
Beuchat, LR, Montville, TJ, Eds, ASM Press, Washington, DC, 1997, p 353.
62. Newsome, RL. Food Technol 42: 182; 1988.
63. Bergdoll, ML. In: Foodborne Bacterial Pathogens, Doyle, MP, Ed, Marcel Dekker, New York, 1989,
p 463.
64. Dodds, KL, Austin, JW. In: Food Microbiology: Fundamentals and Frontiers, Doyle, MP, Beuchat,
LR, Montville, TJ, Eds, ASM Press, Washington, DC, 1997, p 288.
65. Pierson, MD, Reddy, NR. Food Technol 42: 196; 1988.
66. Jay, JM. Modern Food Microbiology, Aspen Publishers, Gaithersburg, 1998, p 462.
67. Hobbs, BC. In: Foodborne Infections and Intoxications, Riemann, H, Bryan, FL, Eds, Academic
Press, New York, 1979, p 131.
68. Labbe, R. In: Foodborne Bacterial Pathogens, Doyle, MP, Ed, Marcel Dekker, New York, 1989, p
191.
69. Doyle, MP. Food Technol 42: 199; 1988.
70. Kramer, JM, Gilbert, RJ. In: Foodborne Bacterial Pathogens, Doyle, MP, Ed, Marcel Dekker, New
York, 1989, p 327.
71. Johnson, KM. J Food Prot 47: 145; 1984.
72. Hobbs, BC, Gilbert, RJ. Microbiological counts in relation to food poisoning, Proc IV Intl Cong
Food Sci Technol 3: 159; 1974.
73. Stiles, ME. In: Foodborne Bacterial Pathogens, Doyle, MP, Ed, Marcel Dekker, New York, 1989,
p 706.
74. Labigne, A, De Reuse, H. Infect Agents Dis 5: 191; 1996.
75. McColl, KEL. J Infect Dis 34: 7; 1997.
76. Goodman, KJ, Correa, P. Int J Epidemiol 24: 875; 1995.
77. Hopkins, RJ, Vial, PA, Ferreccio, C, et al. J Infect Dis 168: 222; 1993.
78. Jiang, X, Doyle, MP. J Food Prot 61: 929; 1998.
79. Cromeans, T, Nainan, OV, Fields, HA, et al. In: Foodborne Diseases Handbook, Vol 2, Diseases
Caused by Viruses, Parasites, and Fungi, Hui, YH, Gorham, JR, Murrel, KD, Cliver, DO, Eds,
Marcel Dekker, New York, 1994, p 1.
80. Dolin, R, Blacklow, NR, Dupont, H, et al. Proc Soc Exp Biol Med 140: 578; 1972.
81. Sattar, SA, Springthorpe, VS, Ansari, SA. In: Foodborne Diseases Handbook, Vol 2, Diseases Caused
by Viruses, Parasites, and Fungi, Hui, YH, Gorham, JR, Murrel, KD, Cliver, DO, Eds, Marcel
Dekker, New York, 1994, p 81.
82. Buchi, G, Rae, ID. In: Aflatoxins, Goldbatt, LA, Ed, Academic Press, New York, 1969, p 55.
83. Hocking, AD. In: Food Microbiology: Fundamentals and Frontiers, Doyle, MP, Beuchat, LR,
Montville, TJ, Eds, ASM Press, Washington, DC, 1997, p 343.
84. Pitt, JI. In: Food Microbiology: Fundamentals and Frontiers, Doyle, MP, Beuchat, LR, Montville,
TJ, Eds, ASM Press, Washington, DC, 1997, p 406.
85. Krogh, P, Hald, B, Perdersen, EJ. Acta Pathol Microbiol Scand Sect B81: 689; 1977.
86. Friis, P, Hasselager, E, Krogh, P. Acta Pathol Microbiol Scand 77: 559; 1969.
87. Bullerman, LB. Food Microbiology: Fundamentals and Frontiers, Doyle, MP, Beuchat, LR,
Montville, TJ, Eds, ASM Press, Washington, DC, 1997, p 419.
88. Smith, J. J Food Prot 56: 451; 1993.
89. Speer, CA. In: Food Microbiology: Fundamentals and Frontiers, Doyle, MP, Beuchat, LR, Montville,
TJ, Eds, ASM Press, Washington, DC, 1997, p 478.
90. Hoskin, JC, Wright, RE. J Food Prot 54: 53; 1991.
91. Petersen, C. Lancet 345: 1128; 1995.
92. Tzipori, S. Microbiol Rev 47: 84; 1983.
93. Reduker, DW, Speer, CA. J Parasitol 71: 112; 1985.
94. Korich, DG, Mead, JR, Madore, MS, et al. Appl Environ Microbiol 56: 1423; 1990.
95. Sterling, CR, Ortega, YR. Emerg Infect Dis 5: 48; 1999.
2705_frame_C55 Page 1159 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 2:10 PM
96. Smith, HV, Paton, CA, Mtambo, MMA, Girdwood, RWA. Appl Environ Microbiol 63: 1631; 1997.
97. Casemore, DP. Lancet 336: 1427; 1990.
98. Fayer, R, Dubey, JP. Food Technol 39: 57; 1985.
99. Fleck, DG. PHLS Microbiol Digest 6: 69; 1989.
100. Kim, CW. In: Food Microbiology: Fundamentals and Frontiers, Doyle, MP, Beuchat, LR, Montville,
TJ, Eds, ASM Press, Washington, DC, 1997, p 449.
101. Hayunga, EG. In: Food Microbiology: Fundamentals and Frontiers, Doyle, MP, Beuchat, LR,
Montville, TJ, Eds, ASM Press, Washington, DC, 1997, p 463.
102. Kleanthous, H, Fry, NK, Smith, HR, et al. Epidemiol Infect 101: 327; 1988.
103. March, SB, Ratnam, S. J Clin Microbiol 23: 869; 1986.
104. Doyle, MP, Schoeni, JL. Appl Environ Microbiol 53: 2394; 1987.
105. March, SB, Ratnam, S. J Clin Microbiol 27: 1675; 1989.
106. Okrend, AJG, Rose, BE, Matner, R. J Food Prot 53: 936; 1990.
107. Padhye, NV, Doyle, MP. Appl Environ Microbiol 57: 2693; 1991.
108. Pollard, DR, Johnson, WM, Lior, H, et al. J Clin Microbiol 28: 540; 1990.
109. Cox, NA, Fung, DYC, Bailey, JS, et al. Dairy Food Environ Sanitat 7: 628; 1987.
110. Cox, NA, Fung, DYC, Goldschmidt, MC, et al. J Food Prot 47: 74; 1984.
111. Feng, P. J Food Prot 55: 927; 1992.
112. Tietjen, M, Fung, DYC. Crit Rev Microbiol 21: 53; 1995.
113. Cano, RJ, Rasmussen, SR, Sanchez Fraga, G, Palomers, JC. J Appl Bacteriol 75: 247; 1993.
114. Nguyen, AV, Khan, MI, Lu, Z. Avian Dis 38: 119; 1994.
115. Le Minor, L, Craige, J, Yen, CH. Can Publ Health J 29: 484; 1938.
116. Lim, P, Tam, FCH, Cheong, Y, Jegathesan, M. J Clin Microbiol 36: 2271; 1998.
117. Chaicumpa, W, Ruangkunaporn, D, Burr, D, et al. J Clin Microbiol 30: 2513; 1992.
118. Hashimoto, Y, Itho, Y, Fujinaga, Y, et al. J Clin Microbiol 33: 775; 1995.
119. Park, CE, Smibert, RM, Blaser, MJ, et al. Compendium of Methods for the Microbiological Exami-
nation of Foods, 2nd ed, Speck, ML, Ed, American Public Health Association, Washington, DC,
1984, p 386.
120. Rice, BE, Lamichhane, C, Joseph, SW, Rollins, DM. Clin Diagn Lab Immunol 3: 669; 1996.
121. Linton, D, Lawson, AJ, Owen, RJ, Stanley, J. J Clin Microbiol 35: 2568; 1997.
122. Ng, LK, Kingombe, CI, Yan, W, et al. Appl Environ Microbiol 63: 4558; 1997.
123. Morris, GK. Compendium of Methods for the Microbiological Examination of Foods, 2nd ed, Speck,
ML, Ed, American Public Health Association, Washington, DC, 1984, p 343.
124. Pal, T, Al-sweih, N, Herpay, M, Chugh, TD. J Clin Microbiol 35: 1757; 1997.
125. Lampel, KA, Jagow, JA, Trucksess, M, Hill, WE. Appl Environ Microbiol 56: 1536; 1990.
126. Restaino, L, Grauman, GS, McCall, WA, Hill, WM. J Food Prot 42: 120; 1979.
127. Kapperud, G, Vardund, T, Skjerve, E, Michaelsen, TE. Appl Environ Microbiol 59: 2938; 1993.
128. Farmer, JJ III, Hickmann-Brenner, FW, Kelly, MT. Manual of Clinical Microbiology, 4th ed,
Lennette, EH, Balows, A, Hausler, WJ, Jean-Shadomy, H, Eds, American Society for Microbi-
ology, Washington, DC, 1985, p 282.
129. Twedt, RM, Madden, JM, Colwell, RR. Compendium of Methods for the Microbiological Examina-
tion of Foods, 2nd ed, Speck, ML, Ed, American Public Health Association, Washington, DC,
1984, p 368.
130. Castillo, L, Castillo, D, Silva, W, et al. Hybridoma 14: 271; 1995.
131. Miyagi, K, Sano, K, Imura, S, et al. J Med Microbiol 48: 883; 1999.
132. Varela, P, Pollevick, GD, Rivas, M, et al. J Clin Microbiol 32: 1246; 1994.
133. Honda, T, Yoh, M, Kongmuang, U, Miwatani, T. J Clin Microbiol 22: 383; 1985.
134. Kim, YB, Okuda, J, Takahashi, C, et al. J Clin Microbiol 37: 1173; 1999.
135. Parker, RW, Lewis, DH. Appl Environ Microbiol 61: 476; 1995.
136. Hill, WE, Keasler, SP, Truckess, MW, et al. App Environ Microbiol 57: 707; 1991.
137. Janda, JM, Abott, SL, Carnahan, AM. In: Manual of Clinical Microbiology, 6th ed, Murray, PR,
Baron, EJ, Pfaller, MA, Tenover, FC, Yolken, RH, Eds, American Society for Microbiology,
Washington, DC, 1995, p 477.
138. Jeppesen, C. Int J Food Microbiol 26: 25; 1995.
139. Joseph, SW, Carnahan, A. Ann Rev Fish Dis 4: 315; 1994.
2705_frame_C55 Page 1160 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 2:10 PM
140. Borrel, N, Acinas, SG, Figueras, MJ, Martinez-Murcia, AJ. J Clin Microbiol 35: 1671; 1997.
141. Cascon, A, Anguita, J, Hernanz, C, et al. Appl Environ Microbiol 62: 1167; 1996.
142. Jones, GL. Isolation and identification of Listeria monocytogenes, U.S. Department of Health and
Human Services, Public Health Service, Centers for Disease Control, 1989.
143. McClain, D, Lee, WH. J Assoc Off Anal Chem 71: 876; 1988.
144. VanNetten, P, Perales, I, van de Moosdijk, A, et al. Int J Food Microbiol 8: 299; 1989.
145. Fliss, I, St. Laurent, M, Emond, E, et al. Appl Environ Microbiol 59: 2698; 1993.
146. Bubert, A, Hein, I, Rauch, M, et al. Appl Environ Microbiol 65: 4688; 1999.
147. Bennett, RW. In: Foodborne Microorganisms and Their Toxins: Developing Methodology, Pierson,
MD, Stern, NJ, Eds, Marcel Dekker, New York, 1986, p 345.
148. Taitini, SR, Hoover, DG, Lachicha, RVF. In: Compendium of Methods for the Microbiological
Examination of Foods, 2nd ed, Speck, ML, Ed, American Public Health Association, Washington,
DC, 1984, p 411.
149. Tsen, H-Y, Chen, TR. Appl Microbiol Biotechnol 37: 685; 1992.
150. Van der Zee, A, Verbakel, H, van Zon, J, et al. J Clin Microbiol 37: 342; 1999.
151. Bennett, RW. In: Bacteriological Analytical Manual, 6th ed, U.S. Food and Drug Administration,
Association of Official Analytical Chemists, Arlington, 1984, 15.01.
152. Dowell, VR, Lombard, GL, Thompson, FS, Armfield, AY. Media for isolation, characterization,
and identification of obligate anaerobic bacteria, Center for Disease Control, Atlanta, Georgia,
1981.
153. Aranda, E, Rodriguez, MM, Asenio, MA, Cordoba, JJ. Lett Appl Microbiol 25: 186; 1997.
154. Fach, P, Gilbert, M, Griffais, R, et al. Appl Environ Microbiol 61: 389; 1995.
155. Kautter, DA, Lynt, RK, Solomon, HM. Clostridium botulinum, Bacteriological Analytical Manual,
6th ed, US Food and Drug Administration, Association of Official Analytical Chemists, Ar-
lington, 1984, 18.01.
156. Fach, P, Popoff, MR. Appl Environ Microbiol 63: 4232; 1997.
157. Baez, LA, Juneja, VK. Appl Environ Microbiol 61: 807; 1995.
158. Harmon, M, Goepfert, JM. Compendium of Methods for the Microbiological Examination of Foods,
2nd ed, Speck, ML, Ed, American Public Health Association, Washington, DC, 1984, p 458.
159. Beecher, DJ, Wong, ACL. Appl Environ Microbiol 60: 4614; 1994.
160. Mantynen, V, Lindstrom, K. Appl Environ Microbiol 64: 1634; 1998.
161. Ruiz, J, Lorente, I, Perez, J, Simarro, E, Martinez-Campos, L. J Clin Microbiol 35: 2417; 1997.
162. Luccero, NE, Foglia, L, Ayala, SM, et al. J Clin Microbiol 37: 3245; 1999.
163. Romero, C, Pardo, M, Grillo, MJ, et al. J Clin Microbiol 33: 3198; 1995.
164. Smith, EM. In: Methods in Environmental Virology, Gerba, CP, Goyal, SM, Eds, Marcel Dekker,
New York, 1982, p 15.
165. Williams, Jr, FP, Fout, GS. Environ Sci Technol 26: 689; 1992.
166. Polish, LB, Robertson, BH, Khanna, B, et al. J Clin Microbiol 37: 3615; 1977.
167. Abbaszadegan, M, Stewart, P, LeChavallier, M. Appl Environ Microbiol 65: 444; 1999.
168. Atmar, RL, Neill, FH, Romalde, JL, et al. Appl Environ Microbiol 61: 3014; 1995.
169. Herrmann, JE, Blacklow, NR, Matsui, SM, et al. J Clin Microbiol 33: 2511; 1995.
170. Tsunemitsu, H, Jiang, B, Saif, LJ. J Clin Microbiol 30: 2129; 1992.
171. Le Guyader, F, Dubois, E, Menard, D, Pommepuy, M. Appl Environ Microbiol 60: 3665; 1994.
172. Pitt, JI, Hocking, AD, Glenn, DR. J Appl Bacteriol 54: 109; 1983.
173. Pitt, JI, Hocking, AD. Fungi and Food Spoilage, Academic Press, Sydney, 1985.
174. Samson, RA, Hoekstra, ES, Frisvad, JC, Filtenborg, O. Introduction to Foodborne Fungi, 4th ed,
Centraalbureau voor Schimmelcultures, Baarn, The Netherlands, 1995.
175. Shapira, R, Paster, N, Menasherov, M, et al. Appl Environ Microbiol 63: 990; 1997.
176. Shapira, R, Paster, N, Eyal, O, et al. Appl Environ Microbiol 62: 3270; 1996.
177. King, AD, Pitt, JI, Beuchat, L, Corry, JEL. Methods for the Mycological Examination of Food, Plenum
Press, New York, 1986.
178. Matheis, JP, Roberts, RG. Appl Environ Microbiol 58: 3170; 1992.
179. Nelson, PE, Tousoun, TA, Marasas, WFO. Fusarium Species: An Illustrated Manual for Identifi-
cation, The Pennsylvania State University Press, University Park, 1983.
2705_frame_C55 Page 1161 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 2:10 PM
180. Trane, U, Filtenborg, O, Frisvad, FC, Lund, F. In: Modern Methods in Food Microbiology, Hocking,
AD, Pitt, JI, King, AD, Eds, Elsevier Science, New York, 1992, p 285.
181. Hue, F, Huerre, M, Rouffault, M, de Bievre, C. J Clin Microbiol 37: 2434; 1999.
182. Deng, MQ, Cliver, DO. Parasitol Res 85: 733; 1999.
183. Pillai, DR, Kain, KC. J Clin Microbiol 37: 3017; 1999.
184. Mahubhani, MH, Schafer, FW, Jones, DD, Bej, AK. Curr Microbiol 36: 107; 1998.
185. Zengzhu, G, Bracha, R, Nuchamowitz, Y, et al. J Clin Microbiol 37: 3034; 1999.
186. Haque, R, Ali, K, Akther, S, Petri, WA Jr. J Clin Microbiol 36: 449; 1998.
187. Sterling, CR, Arrowood, MJ. Pediat Infect Dis 5: 139; 1986.
188. Laxter, MA, Timlin, BK, Patel, RJ. Am J Trop Med Hyg 320: 1372; 1989.
189. Eberhard, ML, Pieniazek, NJ, Arrowood, MJ. Arch Pathol Lab Med 121: 792; 1997.
190. Jinneman, KC, Wetherington, JH, Hill, WE, et al. Food Prot 62: 682; 1999.
191. Hitt, JA, Filice, GA. J Clin Microbiol 30: 3181; 1992.
192. Hofgartner, WT, Swanzy, SR, Bacina, RM, et al. J Clin Microbiol 35: 3313; 1997.
193. Yopez-Mulia, L, Arriaga, C, Viveros, N, et al. Vet Parasitol 81: 57; 1999.
194. Wu, Z, Nagano, I, Pozio, E, Takahashi, Y. Parasitology 118: 211; 1999.
195. Yagihashi, A, Sato, N, Takahashi, S, et al. J Infect Dis 161: 995; 1990.
196. Zhu, X, Gasser, RB, Podolska, M, Chilton, NB. Int J Parasitol 28: 1911; 1998.
197. D’Souza, PE, Hafeez, M. Vet Res Commun 23: 293; 1999.
198. Gottstein, B, Deplazes, P, Tanner, I, Skaggs, JS. Trans R Soc Trop Hyg 85: 248; 1991.
2705_frame_C55 Page 1162 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 2:10 PM
2705_frame_C56 Page 1163 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 2:10 PM
56
Nutrition and Hollow Organs of the Upper
Gastrointestinal Tract
Introduction
The general roles of the various parts of the digestive system are given in Table 56.1.
Diseases of these various parts not only cause damage to individual organs but also disrupt
the harmonious mechanisms that enable adequate handling and digestion of food.
Food enters through the mouth where it is lubricated and broken down into pieces by
mastication. Lubrication serves several purposes including protection of the mouth from
damage by food, ease of transfer of food over surfaces of the GI tract and, formation of a
liquid medium in which chemical reactions of digestion can occur. Mastication is not only
necessary for food breakdown, but also helps to increase the surface area of the food
particles to allow reach by digestive enzymes.
Transport of food through the mouth and the pharynx into the esophagus is accom-
plished by the swallowing reflex. This reflex involves coordinated actions of the tongue,
the soft and hard palates, the pharyngeal muscles, the glottis, the epiglottis, and the upper
esophageal sphincter. It is extremely rapid with a duration less than a second, and is
regulated by both peripheral nerves and a swallowing center in the brain stem.1 The
multiple levels of control of swallowing and the redundancy of the control mechanisms
allow compensating for minor problems.
Once swallowing is initiated voluntarily or involuntarily and the content of the mouth
is pushed back into the pharynx, the swallowing reflex results in closure of the larynx by
the epiglottis and concomitant relaxation of the upper esophageal sphincter (UES) to
enable reception of bolus into the esophagus. Subsequently, the esophageal body, which
has a short segment of striated muscle proximally but mainly is made up of smooth muscle,
0-8493-2705-9/02/$0.00+$1.50
© 2002 by CRC Press LLC 1163
2705_frame_C56 Page 1164 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 2:10 PM
TABLE 56.1
Parts of the Digestive System and Their Functions
Parts Functions
Mouth, salivary glands, Breakdown of food into parts for transport to downstream; lubrication of food
and pharynx pieces for transport; initiation of the digestion of carbohydrates in food
Esophagus Transport and lubrication of food pieces; protection of the airway from food entry
Stomach Storage and trituration of food into small pieces (<1 mm3); initiation of the
digestion of proteins with acid and proteases; initiation of the digestion of fats
Small intestines Breakdown of foods into molecules; and absorption of macro- and micronutrients;
maintenance of water and electrolyte balance
Colon Absorption of water and electrolytes; synthesis of certain vitamins and breakdown
of carbohydrates to short chain fatty acids by bacteria; excretion of waste
propels the bolus downward with peristaltic motion. As the bolus travels through the
distal esophagus, the lower esophageal sphincter (LES) relaxes and food is transported
into the stomach for short-term storage and digestion. The integrity of the entire esoph-
ageal food transfer mechanism is very important to prevent food entering the airway.
Food goes through two functionally distinct compartments in the stomach. The proximal
compartment, consisting of the fundus and upper body, acts as a reservoir. An adequate
capacity in this compartment is achieved through receptive relaxation of the stomach wall,
mediated by inhibition of vagal pathways and hormones such as secretin, gastric inhibitory
peptide, and cholecystokinin (CCK). This relaxation allows for a wide range of storage
volumes up to 1 to 2 liters without significant increases in intragastric pressure. At the same
time, release of acid and digestive enzymes into the reservoir initiates gastric digestion.
The distal and second compartment of the stomach consists of the lower body and
antrum, whose main function is dissolution of food into gastric chyme with particle size
<1 to 2 millimeters prior to exit through the pylorus. This process, termed trituration, is
achieved by the strong propulsive motor activity of the stomach. After initiation of the
electrical signal that is generated by specialized pacemaker cells located in the mid-portion
of the greater curvature, the stomach begins to contract from the mid-body, the contraction
gradually spreads towards the antrum in a peristaltic fashion, and partial closure of the
pyloric channel occurs. The stomach contents are forced backward against the antral walls
and a closed pylorus, with passage of only a small amount of well-ground food into the
duodenum. The shearing physical forces generated in this repetitive propulsion and
retropulsion of gastric contents attain the particle size required of solid foods before
passage into the small intestine.
Antral contractions cause emptying of solid food from the stomach. Liquids exit pro-
portional to the pressure gradient between the duodenum and the stomach. This pressure
gradient increases after completion of a meal when receptive relaxation fades away and
the gastric fundus returns to its normal tone, increasing intragastric pressure. The rate of
emptying from the stomach is also determined by the chemical and physical composition
of the meal, as well as the way the body reacts to the food via the vagus nerve and the
GI hormones. Liquids empty faster than solids; foods with high carbohydrate contents
empty faster than foods that contain fat or are high in fiber. Hypo- or hypertonic fluids,
highly viscous fluids, acid (pH 3.5), chyme with a high caloric density, polypeptides,
oligosaccharides, and fatty acids entering the duodenum, or overdistention of the small
intestine inhibit gastric emptying. If nutrients rapidly enter or bypass the jejunum, rapidly
reaching the ileum and colon, GI transit time is extended via an ileal “brake.” This brake
is mediated through neurohumoral mechanisms and GI hormones, the most important of
which is peptide YY. These mechanisms assure that food is gradually released into the
2705_frame_C56 Page 1165 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 2:10 PM
small intestine, is optimally mixed with pancreatic and biliary secretions, and has adequate
contact time with digestive enzymes and the small intestinal absorptive mucosa.
The small intestine is designed to have a large surface area, by arrangement of its cells
into villi and crypts. The epithelial cells’ lumenal surfaces have fingerlike projections
termed microvilli that collectively make up the brush border. Most intestinal secretions
come from the crypt cells, whereas the major function of the cells of the villi is digestion
and absorption of water and nutrients. The villi, as well as their lining cells, are taller in
the jejunum, and the height of both decreases caudally towards the ileum. Intestinal cells
also become more specialized towards the ileum, where absorption of bile salts and certain
vitamins occurs. Digestion of nutrients is accomplished both by brush border and intralu-
minal enzymes, especially pancreatic exocrine ones. The different types of nutrients and
how they are digested by the various enzymes in the GI tract are shown in Figure 56.1.
After gastric chyme arrives at the small intestine, its acidity is rapidly neutralized by
duodenal secretions and bicarbonate released from the pancreas. This neutralization is
important for establishing a favorable milieu for optimal enzyme action. Furthermore,
large amounts of electrolytes and water are secreted into the jejunal lumen to make chyme
isoosmolar, dilute toxins, and enable mucosal defense mechanisms such as secretory IgA.
Almost simultaneously, motor activity of the intestines changes: propulsive movement
decreases and segmental motor contractility increases. The net effect is stirring of intestinal
contents with slow forward motion, which in turn increases contact of nutrients with
intestinal cells.
During this process, blood flow and lymphatic drainage of the intestine are tightly
regulated. Both flows increase as food, electrolytes, and water are absorbed, rapidly
carrying these away to facilitate further diffusion. This rapid circulation ensures meeting
intestinal oxygen, salt, and water demands, especially during secretion.
The products of digestion get absorbed, utilizing various mechanisms such as passive
diffusion and osmosis, facilitated diffusion, and active transport. The sites of absorption
of different nutrients and the mechanism(s) involved in this process are given in Table
56.2. A small amount of macronutrients leaves the small intestine undigested. Undigested
portions are larger for complex carbohydrates, vary with fat intake, and are minimal for
proteins.
In the colon, bacteria act on the remaining nutrients and fiber, forming short chain fatty
acids and a variety of vitamins. These and large amounts of electrolyte and water are
avidly absorbed by the colon, resulting in a small amount of feces. Together with the
enterohepatic circulation of bile, the absorption of 98% of all GI fluid and electrolytes
makes the GI system one of the most efficient parts of the body. The various GI secretions
are listed in Table 56.3, along with calculation of the net fluid balance.
Branched oligosaccharides
2705_frame_C56 Page 1166 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 2:10 PM
Monoglyceride lipase
Phospholipase A and B (+Bile) Small polypeptides and amino acids
Maltose and dextrins Lecithinase
(Pancreas)
Disaccharidases Aminopeptidases
(Small bowel brush border) Dipeptidases
Fatty acids, Glycerol, Phosphoric acid (Small bowel brush border &
cytoplasm of absorptive cells)
FIGURE 56.1
Digestion of macronutrients.
Handbook of Nutrition and Food
2705_frame_C56 Page 1167 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 2:10 PM
TABLE 56.2
Overview of Nutrient Absorption
Nutrient Absorption Site Mechanism of Absorption
Lipids Proximal and distal jejunum, Passive diffusion, facilitated diffusion*
colon
Monosaccharides Proximal and distal jejunum Na-dependent active transport
Amino acids Proximal and distal jejunum Carrier-mediated active transport, simple diffusion
Small peptides Proximal and distal jejunum Na-independent tertiary active transport
Bile salts and Distal ileum Passive absorption, specific active absorption
acids
Calcium Duodenum, mid-jejunum, ileum Active transcellular process via specific channels,
colon binding to calbindin and Ca-ATPase
Passive paracellular diffusive process
TABLE 56.3
Gastrointestinal Secretions
Approximate Volume
Site (in ml)
1. Salivary glands 1500
2. Stomach 2500
3. Liver (as bile) 500
4. Pancreas 1500
5. Small intestine 1000
Absorption –9300
Net excretion in the form of stool 200
TABLE 56.4
Symptoms of GERD
Esophageal Extraesophageal
Heartburn (pyrosis) Hypersalivation
Acid regurgitation Nocturnal choking sensation
Dysphagia Symptoms related to asthma:
Odynophagia Wheezing
Chest pain Shortness of breath
Globus sensation Chronic cough
Nausea/Vomiting Other symptoms of asthma
Symptoms of GI bleeding: Symptoms related to posterior laryngitis:
Coffee ground emesis Chronic hoarseness/Dysphonia
Melena Frequent throat clearing
Chronic cough
Sore throat
Other symptoms of laryngitis
Symptoms related to dental caries
2705_frame_C56 Page 1169 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 2:10 PM
TABLE 56.5
Histopathological Changes Related to GERD
Reflux esophagitis: Destruction of esophageal epithelium: erosions, ulcers, balloon cells in
epithelium
Neutrophilic or eosinophilic infiltration of the mucosa
Large basal zone (>15% of the total epithelial thickness)
Extension of mucosal papillae
Regenerative changes in the epithelium
Barrett’s esophagus: Metaplastic columnar epithelium replacing normal esophageal mucosa
Adenocarcinoma of the esophagus
Peptic strictures
Inflammatory polyps of the esophagus
Pseudodiverticula
Esophageal fistulas
TABLE 56.6
Major Mechanisms Thought to be Involved in the Pathogenesis
of GERD
1. Incompetent lower esophageal sphincter (LES)
a. Increased transient relaxations of LES
b. Hypotensive LES, i.e., decreased LES tone
c. High gastroesophageal pressure gradient
2. Irritant effects of the refluxed material (especially gastric acid and pepsin)
3. Abnormal esophageal clearance/ neutralization of the refluxed material
4. Delayed gastric emptying
5. Increased esophageal sensory perception
Mechanisms
Factors and mechanisms important in GERD pathogenesis are listed in Table 56.6. Current
dietary management of GERD is based on preventing or counteracting these mechanisms.
TABLE 56.7
Major Complications of GERD
1. Acute GI bleeding
2. Chronic GI bleeding with anemia
3. Peptic strictures
4. Esophageal perforation
5. Barrett’s esophagus
6. Adenocarcinoma of the esophagus
TABLE 56.8
Lifestyle Factors That May Adversely
Affect Severity or Frequency of GERD
1. Obesity
2. Smoking
3. Exercise
4. Alcohol consumption
5. Recumbent body position
6. Tight clothing over abdomen
Obesity
GERD is associated with obesity, and the occurrence of GERD is positively correlated with
increasing body mass index (BMI). The frequency and severity of GERD seems to be worse
in obese individuals; a significantly higher number of GERD-related hospitalizations
occurred among the obese in the NHANES study.5 Obese individuals also tend to have a
higher incidence of hiatal hernia that adversely affects LES function and competence.6 In
some obese individuals, LES pressures are lower than controls,7 but this is not a consistent
mechanism of GERD.8 It is postulated that the gastroesophageal pressure gradient (dif-
ference between the pressures in the esophagus and stomach) may play a more important
role. As a result of the mechanical effects of increased intraabdominal fat, this gradient
may be high in many obese patients with GERD. This forces gastric contents towards the
relatively lower pressure esophageal environment and may promote reflux during any
sphincter relaxation. Additionally, obese individuals have a higher incidence of esophageal
motility disturbances8 and cannot clear acid/gastric contents from the esophagus as fast
as non-obese controls.9 Combination of the high gastroesophageal pressure gradient with
decreased clearance may explain the frequency and severity of GERD with obesity.
One study among obese GERD patients who are not medication dependent for symptom
control showed significant symptomatic improvement with weight loss.10 The authors
have anecdotal evidence that even loss of a few pounds may improve symptoms. However,
definitive evidence that relates weight reduction to improvement in GERD is lacking.
Some studies show no benefit, although most of these studies have been undertaken in
individuals who are medication dependent with severely symptomatic disease. Large
amounts of weight loss may be required in the morbidly obese before symptomatic
improvement is evident. Nevertheless, most obese individuals should be encouraged to
lose weight as first line treatment not only for GERD, but also for other health benefits.
Exercise
Exercise such as rowing, cycling, or jogging may cause GERD in healthy volunteers.11
Reflux is further potentiated if the exercise is performed after meals.11-13 There are no
definitive studies of GERD patients in this area.
2705_frame_C56 Page 1171 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 2:10 PM
Tight Clothing
Tight clothing worn over the abdomen and stomach has been postulated to elevate the
gastroesophageal pressure gradient, especially postprandially.14 Therefore, loose-fitting
clothing has been recommended, although no clinical data support this recommendation.
Meal Types and Foods That May Adversely Affect the GERD Patient
A recent study comparing various different meals suggests that more than one component
or feature of the meal determines induction of GERD.20 Use of spices, caloric density, fat
content, and alcohol consumption with the meal, alone or in combination, may affect
initiation of symptoms.
Various foods that are known to induce GERD, worsen its severity, or adversely affect
healing of esophagitis are given in Table 56.9 together with their mechanisms of action.
Alcohol’s effects on promoting reflux are well documented and may be potentiated in the
presence of fatty meals. Different than other alcoholic beverages, wine is very hypertonic,
acidic, and has high tyramine content. Tyramine competes with histamine for degradation
and may therefore delay the breakdown of the latter, which increases gastric acid secretion.
In a survey of 349 individuals with GERD, wine has been reported to cause reflux in 37%.21
While there is no evidence that meal consistency (solid vs. liquid) affects reflux, osmo-
lality of food may be important. Hyperosmolar versus isoosmolar foods reproduce esoph-
ageal symptoms. Coffee is thought to provoke GERD symptoms because of its high
osmolality and irritant effects on the esophageal mucosa22,23 rather than its effects on LES
pressure and transient LES relaxations, which are variable.
The relationship between fat intake and GERD is unclear. Fat may increase GERD by
decreasing LES pressure24 caused by cholecystokinin (CCK) release, and by slowing gastric
emptying, which in turn is thought to increase the frequency of transient LES relaxations
resulting from a vagovagal reflex originating in stomach mechanoreceptors.25
Survey findings show that fatty foods precipitate symptoms of GERD in 38% of normal
subjects. Earlier studies show that in healthy volunteers, LES pressures decrease after
ingestion of a fatty meal, as opposed to increase with a protein meal. When adjusted for
body position, this effect of fat on LES pressure was present only in recumbency in one
study,26 and only in the upright position in another.27 In a third study, high fat content
(50%) compared to low (10%) made no difference.28 However, nonphysiological fat expo-
2705_frame_C56 Page 1172 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 2:10 PM
TABLE 56.9
Foods That May Worsen GERD
Food Effect(s)
Methylxanthines ↓ LES pressure 2o inhibition of phosphodiesterase → increased cAMP and smooth
(e.g., theophylline in tea) muscle relaxation
Carminatives ↓ LES pressure
(e.g., peppermint) ↑ transient LES relaxations
Chocolate Methylxanthines in it cause ↓ LES pressure
High fat content ↓ gastric emptying
↑ transient LES relaxations
Alcohol ↓ or ↑ LES pressure
↓ esophageal peristalsis → ↓ acid clearance
Caustic effect on mucosa
Adverse effects on protective mucus
↑ gastric acid secretion
↑ number of reflux episodes
↑ nocturnal acid reflux
Citrus juice Directly irritant to the esophageal mucosa
Tomatoes Directly irritant to the esophageal mucosa
↑ transient LES relaxations possibly secondary to salicylate content
Capsaicin Directly irritant to the esophageal mucosa
(found in peppers) ↑ gastric acid and pepsin secretion
Spearmint Directly irritant to the esophageal mucosa
Coffee Directly irritant to the esophageal mucosa
↑ gastric acid secretion
↓ or ↑ LES pressure
(effects worse with concomitant food intake)
(effects vary with brand and treatment prior to consumption)
Onions ↑ transient LES relaxations
↑ acid-pepsin injury possibly through inhibition of arachidonic acid metabolism
(raw ones create worse symptoms compared to cooked)
Milk ↑ gastric acid secretion
sures (100% fat infused into the duodenum) increased the rate of reflux episodes and the
incidence of reflux during transient LES relaxations.29 The discrepancy in results may be
related to variations in composition of the diets used, the small number of patients
involved, and the differences in baseline characteristics of the study subjects.
Results are more consistent for GERD patients. In terms of esophageal acid exposure when
identical protein content, volume, and kcalories are provided to patients, fat does not seem
to matter.27 Recent work confirms that a high fat meal (52%), compared to 24% fat meal in
an isovolumic and isoosmolar balanced one, affects neither the acidity of the esophagus nor
resting LES pressures and the rate of transient LES relaxations three hours postprandially
in healthy subjects and GERD patients.30 However, these studies involve small numbers of
subjects; findings may not apply to various subgroups of patients, and there may not be
enough power to detect significant differences. Nevertheless, based on these results, a low
fat diet cannot be recommended for all patients with GERD. For the individual symptomatic
patient who cannot tolerate fat, avoidance of fatty meals is reasonable.
The type of fat in a meal may also affect GERD. In preterm infants, medium-chain
triglycerides have been shown to significantly increase gastric emptying compared to long-
chain triglycerides. One study investigating reflux rates two hours postprandially has
found no difference with or without medium-chain triglycerides in pediatric formulas.31
In healthy adults, new non-digestible fats (e.g., olestra) do not alter esophageal acid
exposure or delay gastric emptying.32
2705_frame_C56 Page 1173 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 2:10 PM
TABLE 56.10
Summary of Tips for the GERD Patient
1. If overweight, lose weight
2. Try avoiding foods that may worsen GERD (given in Table 56.9)
3. Eat small quantities of food at a time
4. Eat in an upright position
5. Avoid drinking large quantities of liquids with meals
6. Do not recline for at least 2 hours after meals
7. Do not exercise for several hours after meals
8. If night time symptoms are present, try elevating the head of the bed with a wedge
9. If taking proton pump inhibitors, take medication 30 minutes before a meal
Data on other macronutrients and components of diet and GERD are sparse. High
protein meals increased LES pressure in volunteers in one study,24 but a commercially
available amino acid solution infused intravenously or given intragastrically did not
change reflux episodes or transient LES relaxations.33 Oral L-Arginine did not promote
reflux, despite increasing nitric oxide and lowering LES pressures.34 High fiber did not
cause reflux in 20 patients with suspected GERD.35
Gas-containing foods such as carbonated beverages are commonly believed to initiate
reflux episodes through belching. Although no definitive data exists, in one study among
GERD patients, postprandial gas reflux made up 47% of the reflux episodes versus liquid
reflux, which happened 78% of the time. Only 24% of liquid retroflow into the esophagus
was preceded by gas reflux, which suggests that most episodes occur without belching.36
Another reflux-promoting mechanism may be stimulation of gastric acid secretion, as seen
with cola beverages.
Do We Really Need a Certain Diet for GERD? Is There Enough Scientific Evidence for a Particular
Diet?
There is no scientific evidence for a specific diet for all or most GERD patients. While a
combination of lifestyle modifications such as weight loss, bland diet, elevation of the
head of the bed, and antacids has been used in the past, the majority of patients with
chronic symptoms and complications (about 81% in one study) do not respond, and
ultimately require use of medications like H2 blockers and proton pump inhibitors (PPIs),
or surgical therapy. However, this may not apply to numerous individuals with less severe
GERD, who may not even present to physicians. Given the high disease prevalence, the
potential side effects of medications, and the expense of chronic PPI therapy, studies
pertaining to the utility of diet therapies alone or in combination with other lifestyle
modifications in patients with less severe disease are needed urgently. In the meantime,
the authors assert that all patients should be educated about various aspects of diet and
its effects on GERD. Patients should be given a chance to experience and experiment with
the nutritional tips for GERD patients given in Table 56.10. Treatment with a diet consisting
of avoidance of reflux-promoting foods (as in Table 56.9) should be reserved for the
individual patient responding with the most symptomatic relief. The physician should
ascertain that such treatment does not impair the patient’s quality of life, as effective
alternative management exists.
Mechanisms
Proposed mechanisms of peptic ulcer pathogenesis are given in Table 56.12. Of these, the
most important is the presence of gastric acid. Many studies have shown that when acid
is eliminated, ulcers do not form. Therefore, the current treatment of PUD is directed at
TABLE 56.11
Causes of PUD
Common Uncommon
Helicobacter pylori Diseases that cause hyperacidity:
Nonsteroidal anti-inflammatory drugs Zollinger Ellison syndrome (gastrinoma)
Stress-related mucosal damage Mastocytosis/Basophilic leukemia
Antral G cell hyperplasia or hyperfunction
Infections of the gastric mucosa:
Cytomegalovirus
Herpes simplex
Vascular diseases:
Chronic radiation injury
Crack cocaine-related injury
Chemotherapy related injury
2705_frame_C56 Page 1175 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 2:10 PM
TABLE 56.12
Major Mechanisms of Tissue Damage and Repair Involved in the Pathogenesis of PUD
1. Epithelial cell injury resulting from:
a. Exogenous irritants like NSAIDs and alcohol
b. Endogenous irritants like acid, pepsin, bile acids, and lysolecithin
c. Breakdown of epithelial defense mechanisms:
i. Weak mucus and bicarbonate layer
ii. Low resistance of the apical cell membrane to acid back diffusion
iii. Inadequate acid clearance intracellularly because of derangements of the Na+/H+ antiporter
iv. Inadequate acid clearance extracellularly because of altered mucosal blood flow
2. Inadequate repair of epithelial injury:
a. Inadequate epithelial cell restitution and growth
b. Inadequate wound healing
decreasing gastric acidity with medications. If H. pylori is present, treatment with antibi-
otics is undertaken to preven recurrence.
Diet in PUD
The role of diet in PUD occurrence and treatment has changed tremendously as our
knowledge about the pathogenesis of PUD increased. In the early 1900s, with the rationale
that food buffers stomach acid, Lenhartz39a proposed that frequent small meals might be
of benefit in PUD treatment. Physicians of the day followed with restrictive dietary treat-
ment programs that advocated small quantities of bland food at frequent intervals, in the
hopes that such a feeding regimen would also stimulate less acid secretion and thereby
hasten healing. One PUD treatment consisting of milk, cream, and eggs with subsequent
addition of soft and “nonirritating” foods, the Sippy diet, was formulated by Sippy and
Hurst in 1910.40 This diet and its modifications prevailed in PUD treatment over eight
decades. A 1977 survey by Welsh et al. of 326 hospitals in the U.S. demonstrated that 77%
used a bland diet and 55% routinely or usually gave milk to PUD patients.41 Marked
variations were seen in the composition of these supposedly similar diets.
The benefits of restrictive diets, including the Sippy and its modifications, are refuted
in numerous studies.42-45 First, acidity of the stomach following bland diets and freely
TABLE 56.13
Major Complications Related to PUD
1. Atrophic gastritis
2. Gastric carcinoma related to H. pylori
3. Obstruction, esp. at gastric outlet
4. Hemorrhage (acute or chronic)
5. Perforation
6. Penetration of ulcers
2705_frame_C56 Page 1176 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 2:10 PM
chosen diets do not differ.46 More importantly, controlled studies of radiological ulcer
healing or resolution of clinical symptoms show no improvement on these diets.47,48 The
same is true for ulcer recurrence, which is not different with or without such diets when
patients are followed up to a year or more.47,49 Instead, these diets in the long-term may
be harmful; they can result in nutritional deficiencies such as scurvy.50 Given this evidence,
there is no reason to support the use of a restricted or bland diet for PUD. Further evidence
for and against various dietary interventions are given below.
Alcohol Consumption
Alcohol ingestion can cause acute erosive gastritis with ulcerations and bleeding. Alcohol
concentrations of at least 8% were required to break the gastric mucosal barrier in one
study,63 while higher levels of 40% or more were needed in another study.64 Alcohol as
low as 5% stimulates gastric acid secretion both through direct stimulation of parietal cells
and through release of antral gastrin, although the effects may vary depending on the
type of beverage consumed.65 Beer, for example, can increase acid independent of its
ethanol content. Intake of alcohol with salicylates may contribute to its irritant effects by
2705_frame_C56 Page 1177 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 2:10 PM
causing back-diffusion of acid and stimulating pepsin secretion. Furthermore, acute alco-
hol ingestion can weaken duodenal defenses against ulcer formation by inhibiting basal
and secretin-stimulated pancreatic fluid and bicarbonate secretion,66-68 which is not entirely
due to alcohol-induced contraction of the sphincter of Oddi.69
Epidemiological studies, however, show no difference in alcohol consumption between
high and low PUD areas throughout different parts of the world, and alcohol intake is
not independently predictive of PUD prevalence in surveys (although most studies were
conducted before testing for H. pylori was implemented.) Indeed, in one prospective study,
alcohol consumption was lower among PUD patients compared to controls. Alcohol does
not adversely affect ulcer healing either. In one study, moderate alcohol consumption
(20g/day or less) promoted healing of duodenal ulcers. An author of this study, Sonnen-
berg, also reported that alcohol in small amounts is protective against NSAID injury, and
hypothesized that alcohol may be similar to mild irritants in that low doses may heighten
mucosal defenses through stimulation of prostaglandin production.70
Caffeine/Coffee/Tea/Carbonated Drinks
Caffeine stimulates both acid and pepsin release, and patients with duodenal ulcer have a
greater and longer response. The effects of coffee and tea, however, exceed what their
caffeine content induces.71 Serum gastrin and gastric acidity (especially in ulcer patients)
is higher than caffeine, and decaffeination diminishes this acid-secretory potency only
minimally.71 In one study, the addition of milk and sugar to tea lessened this effect.72
Whether these translate into clinical significance is unknown. Habitual coffee consumption
in college students was linked to development of PUD in later life. Conversely, a very large
survey of 37,000 subjects failed to show an association between coffee and PUD. Carbonated
beverages similarly stimulate acid production, but this may also be unrelated to caffeine.71
Salt Intake
A large oral load of salt can be an irritant to the gastric mucosa, leading to gastritis.73 In
epidemiological studies, PUD mortality correlates linearly with increasing salt consump-
tion.74 Case control studies also show that gastric ulcer patients have a higher level of salt
intake compared to healthy controls.75
Dietary Fiber
Fiber has been postulated to be beneficial for PUD because of its buffering effects, short-
ening of GI transit leading to decreased acid secretion, and binding of irritant bile acids.79
The role of dietary fiber in treatment or prevention of PUD is controversial. Reduction in
clinical and endoscopic ulcer recurrence with high-fiber diets has been shown,80,81 although
epidemiological studies have found elevated incidence of PUD in areas of the world with
high fiber consumption. Low fiber consumption may predispose to PUD, rather than high
fiber having protective effects.82
Supplementation of fiber in the form of pectin has not affected ulcer recurrence.83 Guar
gum may reduce gastric acid; it has not been shown to normalize it.84 Therefore, compo-
nents of the high fiber diet other than fiber itself may be protective.
Fiber given as wheat bran can bind bile acids and may reduce their elevated concentra-
tion in gastric ulcer patients;85 it may be beneficial in biliary reflux-associated ulcerations.
TABLE 56.14
Summary of Evidence on Diet and PUD
Bland and restrictive diets including the Sippy diet and its modifications
Frequent milk intake
Alcohol
Caffeine
Coffee/Tea
Carbonated beverages
Certain spices
High salt load
TABLE 56.15
Summary of Nutritional Tips for PUD Patients
1. Avoid restrictive diets
2. Avoid frequent milk intake
3. Avoid high salt intake
4. Avoid concentrated alcoholic beverages
5. Avoid directly irritant foods and spices such as peppers, chili powder, etc.
6. Take proton pump inhibitors, 30 minutes before a meal
therapy has a limited role in treatment of PUD. Patients with PUD should be allowed to
eat as they desire, with few exceptions.
Gastroparesis
Abnormally slow emptying of the stomach from causes other than mechanical obstruction is
called gastroparesis. The many causes are given in Table 56.16, with diabetes the most common.
The various factors and medications that affect the rate of gastric emptying are given
in Table 56.17. The mainstay of the dietary treatment of gastroparesis involves avoidance
of the factors that delay emptying (as shown in Table 56.17) while adopting a diet that
exits the stomach easily. No one diet has been shown effective.
In general, dietary fiber usually needs to be decreased, as it may result in bezoar
formation. Koch promotes six smaller meals in order to decrease symptom severity, and
he advocates a three-step nausea and vomiting diet.88 These recommendations need to be
tested to prove their usefulness.
Dietary treatment frequently needs to be combined with prokinetic medications, usually
administered before meals. Oral medications should preferably be in liquid formulations
that are absorbed faster than capsules and tablets, which may lie in the stomach for hours.
As the disease progresses, dietary and medical treatment may not suffice, and refractory
patients may require drainage gastrostomy with jejunal enteral feeding. Although no
controlled studies exist, in one retrospective study, enteral feeding via a jejunostomy
improved overall health status in diabetic patients.89 Nutritional tips for the gastroparetic
patient are summarized in Table 56.18.
Dumping Syndrome
Dumping syndrome is the collection of symptoms triggered by rapid entry of large boluses
of food into the small bowel. The syndrome most often occurs in patients who have had
a vagotomy and/or gastrectomy, frequently done in the past for PUD. The two main types
of the syndrome, the symptoms, and possible mechanisms are given in Table 56.19.
Dietary treatment of early dumping aims to slow emptying of the stomach and decrease
the volume and osmolality of food boluses delivered to the small bowel. For this purpose,
2705_frame_C56 Page 1180 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 2:10 PM
TABLE 56.16
Causes of Gastroparesis
Iatrogenic:
Surgical damage to vagal trunk, drugs, radiation damage to stomach
Neurological:
Intracranial/spinal cord lesions, Guillain-Barré syndrome, acute dysautonomic syndrome, Shy-
Drager syndrome, Parkinson’s disease, seizure disorder, multiple sclerosis, labyrinthitis
Psychogenic:
Anorexia, bulimia, psychological stress
Inflammatory:
Viral gastritis, Chagas disease, Botulinum toxin, celiac sprue
Rheumatologic:
Scleroderma, SLE, PM/DM, amyloidosis
muscular disorders
Paraneoplastic:
Small cell lung cancer, breast cancer
Idiopathic
TABLE 56.17
Factors that Affect the Rate of Gastric Emptying
Factor Fast Emptying Slow Emptying
Luminal:
Consistency of food Liquid Solid
Macronutrient composition Fat Protein Carbohydrate
Fiber content of food Low High
Osmolality in stomach or duodenum Low High (>800 mOsm/L)
Change in temperature of stomach Hot/Cold Body temperature
Gastric distention High Low
Volume in duodenum Low High
pH in duodenum High Low
patients are advised to avoid consuming liquid and solids simultaneously, stay away from
highly osmolar foods, and eat small meals. Dietary treatment of late dumping syndrome
aims to decrease rapid entry of large amounts of carbohydrates, especially concentrated
simple sugars, into the small intestine. Patients are advised to keep away from concen-
trated sweets such as candy, honey, syrup, etc. These latter recommendations have not
been rigorously tested but are consistent with the pathophysiology of dumping.
2705_frame_C56 Page 1181 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 2:10 PM
TABLE 56.18
Summary of Tips for the Gastroparesis Patient
1. Eat small quantities at a time
2. Eat in upright position
3. Do not recline until several hours after meals
4. Chew every bite of food well
5. Consume a low fat diet
6. Avoid fiber/roughage
7. Eat well-cooked foods
8. Turn foods into liquid/pureed form if unable to tolerate solids
9. Take medications in liquid formulation, 30 minutes before meals
TABLE 56.19
Types of Dumping Syndrome
Timing Following
a Meal Cause Mediators Symptoms*
Early 15-30 min Rapid fluid shift from Release of vasoactive intestinal Flushing
intravascular space to hormones (e.g., VIP, Dizziness
small intestinal lumen neurotensin, motilin, etc.) Nausea
Palpitations
Diaphoresis
Syncope
Late 2-4 h Rapid rise of blood glucose Rapid rise in insulin in
response to glucose
* Symptoms are similar for both early and late dumping.
TABLE 56.20
Summary of Nutritional Tips in Dumping Syndrome
1. Eat small and drink quantities at a time
2. Spread meals throughout the day
3. Avoid drinking liquids with meals, instead drink liquids in between meals
4. Avoid hypertonic foods and concentrated sweets (such as soft drinks, juices, pies, cakes, cookies, candy, etc.)
5. Avoids foods rich in simple carbohydrates, replace with complex carbohydrates
6. Consume high-protein, moderate fat foods
7. Increase fiber intake if tolerated
8. Lie down after meals if possible
Additionally, in order to delay gastric emptying, and especially bind the liquid compo-
nent of the meal, fiber such as guar gum and pectin has been added to meals. Results
with pectin are variable: in small studies it delays gastric emptying in the majority of
patients but may also increase it; therefore, doses may need to be individualized to achieve
a particular viscosity.90,91 In one study, muffins that contain 5 g of pectin failed to alter
symptoms or gastric emptying.92 In open-label studies, addition of 5 g of guar gum to
meals for four weeks symptomatically benefited 8/16 patients with proximal selective
vagotomy-induced dumping, although the effect was minimal in 3 patients.93 Recent work
also suggests that increasing viscosity of the liquid phase of a meal by pectin or guar gum
may stimulate more propulsive forces in the stomach, causing a detrimental effect.94 Most
patients with severe dumping do not respond to the commonly used dietary instructions.
In these refractory patients, octreotide is useful.95
Nutritional tips for patients with dumping syndrome are summarized in Table 56.20.
2705_frame_C56 Page 1182 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 2:10 PM
References
1. Jean A. Brain Behav Evol 25:109; 1984.
2. Nebel OT, Fornes MF, Castell, DO. Am J Dig Dis 21:953; 1976.
3. Hiebert CA. Ann Thorac Surg 24:108; 1977.
4. Bellou A, Aimone-Gastin I, De Korwin JD, et al. J Intern Med 240(3):161; 1996.
5. Ruhl CE, Everhart JE. Ann Epidemiol 9:424; 1999.
6. Wilson LJ, Ma W, Hirschowitz BI. Am J Gastroenterol 94:2840; 1999.
7. O’Brien TF, Jr. J Clin Gastroenterol 2:145; 1980.
8. Jaffin BW, Knoepflmacher P, Greenstein R. Obes Surg 9:390; 1999.
9. Mercer CD, Rue C, Hanelin L, Hill LD. Am J Surg 149:177; 1985.
10. Murray FE, Ennis J, Lennon JR, Crowe JP. Ir J Med Sci 160:2; 1991.
11. Yazaki E, Shawdon A, Beasley I, Evans DF. Aust J Sci Med Sport 28:93; 1996.
12. Peters HP, Wiersma JW, Koerselman J, et al. Int J Sports Med 21:65; 2000.
13. Clark CS, Kraus BB, Sinclair J, Castell DO. JAMA 261:3599; 1989.
14. Dent J. Baillieres Clin Gastroenterol 1:727; 1987.
15. Demeester TR, Johnson LF, Joseph GJ, et al. Ann Surg 184:459; 1976.
16. Johnson LF, DeMeester TR. Dig Dis Sci 26:673; 1981.
17. Hamilton JW, Boisen RJ, Yamamoto DT, et al. Dig Dis Sci 33:518; 1988.
18. Stanciu C, Bennett JR. Digestion 15:104; 1977.
19. Harvey RF, Gordon PC, Hadley N, et al. Lancet 2:1200; 1987.
20. Rodriguez S, Miner P, Robinson M, et al. Dig Dis Sci 43:485; 1998.
21. Feldman M, Barnett C. Gastroenterology 108:125; 1995.
22. Lloyd DA, Borda IT. Gastroenterology 80:740; 1981.
23. Price SF, Smithson KW, Castell DO. Gastroenterology 75:240; 1978.
24. Nebel OT, Castell DO. Gastroenterology 63:778; 1972.
25. Franzi SJ, Martin CJ, Cox MR, Dent J. Am J Physiol 259:G380; 1990.
26. Iwakiri K, Kobayashi M, Kotoyori M, et al. Dig Dis Sci 41:926; 1996.
27. Becker DJ, Sinclair J, Castell DO, Wu WC. Am J Gastroenterol 84:782; 1989.
28. Pehl C, Waizenhoefer A, Wendl B, et al. Am J Gastroenterol 94:1192; 1999.
29. Holloway RH, Lyrenas E, Ireland A, Dent J. Gut 40:449; 1997.
30. Penagini R, Mangano M, Bianchi PA. Gut 42:330; 1998.
31. Sutphen JL, Dillard VL. J Pediatr Gastroenterol Nutr 14:38; 1992.
32. Just R, Katz L, Verhille M, et al. Am J Gastroenterol 88:1734.
33. Gielkens HA, Lamers CB, Masclee AA. Dig Dis Sci 43:840; 1998.
34. Luiking YC, Weusten BL, Portincasa P, et al. Am J Physiol 274:G984; 1998.
35. Floren CH, Johnsson F. J Intern Med 225:287; 1989.
36. Sifrim D, Silny J, Holloway RH, Janssens JJ. Gut 44:47; 1999.
37. Kelly KJ, Lazenby AJ, Rowe PC, et al. Gastroenterology 109:1503; 1995.
38. Mittal RK, Stewart WR, Schirmer B. Gastroenterology 103:1236; 1992.
39. Kirby DF, Delegge MH, Fleming CR. Gastroenterology 108:1282; 1995.
39a. Lawrence JS. Lancet 1:482-485, 1952.
40. Sippy BW. Landmark article May 15, 1915. JAMA 250:2192; 1983.
41. Welsh JD. Gastroenterology 72:740; 1977.
42. Marotta RB, Floch MH. Med Clin North Am 75:967.
43. Berstad A. Scand J Gastroenterol Suppl 129:228; 1987.
44. Kirsner JB, Palmer WL. Am J Dig Dis 1940:85; 1940.
45. Bingle JP, Lennard-Jones JE. Gut 1:337; 1960.
46. Lennard-Jones JE, Babouris N. Gut 6:113; 1965.
47. Doll R, Friedlander P, Pygott F. Lancet 1:5; 1956.
48. Truelove SC. Br Med J 2:559; 1960.
49. Buchman E, Kaung DT, Dolan K, Knapp RN. Gastroenterology 56:1016; 1969.
50. Zucker GM, Clayman CB. JAMA 250:2198; 1983.
2705_frame_C56 Page 1183 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 2:10 PM
57
Nutrition and Hollow Organs of the Lower
Gastrointestinal Tract
Basic principles of nutrition in diseases of the small and large intestines are covered in
this section. Often the disease processes are complex and result in challenges frequently
requiring that nutritional treatment be individualized. Thus, consultation with a nutrition
specialist is usually necessary and highly recommended.
Mechanisms
Gluten, the main allergen, is a protein found in wheat. The prolamin fraction of gluten is
an alcoholic extract rich in proline and glutamine residues. This fraction is also termed
gliadin, and certain amino acid sequences occurring in it (proline-serine-glutamine-
0-8493-2705-9/02/$0.00+$1.50
© 2002 by CRC Press LLC 1185
2705_frame_C57 Page 1186 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 2:11 PM
TABLE 57.1
Histological Features of Celiac Sprue (CS)
1. Loss of villi with resultant flat absorptive surface
2. Presence of cuboidal epithelial cells at surface
3. Hyperplasia of crypts, with increased mitotic figures
4. Increased intraepithelial lymphocytes
5. Increased cellularity in lamina propria
TABLE 57.2
Clinical Manifestations/Presentations of Celiac Sprue
Gastrointestinal Extra-Intestinal
Diarrhea Dermatitis herpetiformis
Steatorrhea/Weight loss Amenorrhea/Infertility/Miscarriages
Nausea/Vomiting Anemia (iron or folate deficiency)
GERD Osteoporosis/Osteomalacia
Abdominal pain/Dyspepsia Brittle diabetes
Bloating/Flatulence Dementia
Occult blood in stool Depression
Elevated transaminases Neuropathy
Recurrent pancreatitis Seizures
Hyposplenism
Headaches
Hypoparathyroidism
IgA nephropathy
Malaise/Fatigue
TABLE 57.3
Patient Populations at Risk for CS
At Risk Population Disease Prevalence
Family members of a patient with CS: 5-20%
Monozygotic twins 70-90%
Siblings with HLA DQW2 or HLA DR5/DR7 40%
First degree relatives 10-20%
Autoimmune thyroid disease 4-5%
Diabetes mellitus type I 2-5%
Ig A deficiency 15%
Sjögren’s syndrome 15%
Down’s syndrome 4-5%
Name of
prolamin Gliadin Secalin Hordein Avenin
fraction
Toxic in CS Considered toxic in Non-toxic in CS
U.S. but allowed
Nutrition and Hollow Organs of the Lower Gastrointestinal Tract
in certain parts
of Europe
FIGURE 57.1
Taxonomy of grains.
1187
2705_frame_C57 Page 1188 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 2:11 PM
TABLE 57.4
Pathogenetic Factors in Celiac Sprue
1. Dietary gluten
2. Genetic predisposition
a. Association with HLA-DQw2, B8 and DR3
3. Autoimmunity
a. Heightened gut permeability to macromolecules
b. Increased T lymphocytes (esp. γ∆ type) in lamina propria
c. Increased humoral mucosal immune response
d. Tissue transglutaminase
i. Creation of new antigenic epitopes by binding gliadin
ii. Deamidation of glutamine residues in gliadin, causing increased binding to HLA
4. Acute trigger factors
a. Infection with viruses
b. Acute inflammation due to food allergy, etc.
c. Mechanical stress
deamidate glutamyl donor molecules, which can bind to celiac disease-specific HLA-DQ2
better than their non-deamidated counterparts.
How tissue transglutaminase and gluten come into contact is unclear. Postulated mech-
anisms include exposure during mechanical stress, inflammation, infection, or apoptosis.
For example, instigation of tissue injury by infection with adenovirus 12 has been hypoth-
esized to cause release of tissue transglutaminase into the extracellular environment where
it links with gluten. Supporting this hypothesis, Kagnoff et al.2 have shown that a particular
portion of the E1B protein of adenovirus 12 and alpha-gliadin are homologous, and 89%
of patients with CS have evidence of prior exposure to this virus. Others propose that
gluten is inadequately digested and toxic fractions accumulate. Subsequent sampling of
the intestinal milieu leads to presentation of the gliadin peptides on antigen presenting
cells within the cleft of the HLA-DQ2 molecules carried by susceptible individuals. Various
hypotheses and factors important in the pathogenesis of CS are given in Table 57.4.
TABLE 57.5
Principles of the Gluten-Free Diet (GFD)
1. Avoid the following grains: wheat, rye, barley, oat, spelt (dinkel), kamut, buckwheat
2. Avoid the following grain based products: bulgar*, couscous*, wheat starch, wheat germ, semolina*, durum*,
bran, oat bran, germ, graham flour
3. Avoid potentially grain based products or additives: malt**, malt flavoring, malt extract, malt syrup, food
starch (edible starch)***, icing sugar****, soy sauce*****, filler+, gum base, oat gum, cereal binding, white
vinegar*****, hydrolyzed vegetable protein or hydrolyzed plant protein
4. Avoid sauces, salad dressings, and fat substitutes as these may typically contain grain-derived products.
5. Avoid grain-based alcohol such as beer or alcoholic extracts of grains.
6. Corn and rice are the only allowable cereal grains.
7. All fresh vegetables and fruits are allowed.
* derived from wheat
** may be derived from barley
*** may be derived from wheat
**** contains 5% wheat starch
***** may contain wheat or barley
+ found frequently in medications and vitamins
2705_frame_C57 Page 1190 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 2:11 PM
TABLE 57.6
Manifestations of CS Responsive to GFD
1. Gastrointestinal symptoms
a. Diarrhea
b. Malbsorption
2. Osteopenia/Osteoporosis
3. Anemia
4. Dermatitis herpetiformis
5. Depression
6. Increased risk of malignancy
7. Amenorrhea/Infertility/Spontaneous abortions
Malignant complications correlate with GFD; in patients who have been on GFD for five
years or more, malignancy risk reverts back to that for the general population.13,14 For
those on a reduced gluten or normal diet, the risk for non-Hodgkin’s lymphoma and
cancers of the mouth, pharynx, and esophagus is 78-fold, and 23-fold higher compared
to the general population.13
The time to respond to GFD clinically varies, depending on the severity of disease. A
prompt improvement in symptoms is expected within days to a few weeks. Patients with
milder disease in biopsies tend to respond sooner than those with villus atrophy, in whom
resolution of symptoms may take up to several months. Still, normalization of biopsy
samples when total villus atrophy is present has been reported incomplete even after two
years.15 Dermatitis herpetiformis takes longer to resolve with GFD than other symptoms
(on average two years), and older patients take longer to respond than younger ones.
TABLE 57.7
Nutritional Tips for CS Patients
1. Avoid lactose (mainly milk and dairy products) in acute disease
2. Follow a gluten free diet (Table 57.5) at all times:
a. Read food labels
b. Ask about grains in foods and medications
c. Avoid all foods if it is not certain that they do not contain the restricted grains
d. Select plain meats, fresh fruits, and vegetables when eating outside of the home if not sure
e. Record weight and symptoms, and keep a food diary until symptoms resolve on the GFD
3. Avoid foods that initiate/exacerbate symptoms as they may contain hidden sources of grains or other food
allergens
4. Consult an experienced dietitian with questions
5. Report persistent symptoms promptly
6. Join support groups for people with CS
Mechanisms
Various factors and mechanisms important in the pathogenesis of IBD are listed in Table
57.9. Most recently, certain genetic foci associated with IBD have been discovered, and it
TABLE 57.8
Differences between UC and CD
UC CD
Clinical Bloody diarrhea is main symptom Obstruction, fistulae, perianal disease
may be present
Site of involvement Rectum extending proximally into Any part of the GI tract
colon as a continuum Normal tissue between areas of
involvement (i.e., skip areas)
Small bowel normal 70% small bowel involvement
Only mucosal involvement Involvement of the entire bowel wall
Pathological appearance No granulomas Presence of granulomas
Prognosis/recurrence Can be cured with colectomy Cannot be cured with surgical resection
2705_frame_C57 Page 1193 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 2:11 PM
TABLE 57.9
Factors Important in the Pathogenesis of IBD
1. Genetic predisposition
2. Environmental factors (e.g., smoking, urban lifestyle, etc.)
3. Dietary factors
4. Infectious agents
a. Mycobacteria
b. Measles virus
5. Immune reactivity
6. Psychosocial factors and stress
TABLE 57.10
Causes of Malnutrition in IBD Patients
1. Reduced dietary intake
a. Anorexia to avoid symptoms
b. Restricted diets
c. Drug-induced taste alterations
2. Maldigestion and malabsorption
a. Inadequate mucosal surface
b. Bile salt malabsorption from ileal disease
c. Bacterial overgrowth
d. Drug induced
3. Increased requirements
a. Inflammatory catabolism
b. Drug-induced nutrient wasting
4. Exudative protein losses from inflamed intestine or fistulae
2705_frame_C57 Page 1194 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 2:11 PM
TABLE 57.11
Micronutrient Deficiencies in IBD
% Prevalance in:
Micronutrient UC CD
Iron 81 39
Folic acid 35 54-67
Vitamin B12 5 48
Potassium 6-20
Calcium 13
Magnesium 14-33
Vitamin A 26-93 11-50
Vitamin D 35 75
Zinc 40-50
Selenium 35-40
Fecal energy and protein losses in IBD are significant in active IBD, but most patients
compensate by increased food intake. Generally, patients on corticosteroids are also in
positive energy balance, possibly due to the appetite stimulant properties of these drugs.49
Yet, attention should be paid to the provision of adequate protein to meet increased protein
need by the patient with active IBD, especially in malnourished patients who may require
as much as 2 g/kg/day of protein.50
Food intolerances are twice as common among IBD patients as in the general population.51
These intolerances are commonly towards corn, wheat, cereals, cruciferous vegetables, and
milk, although intolerances to foods such as rice or even tap water have been observed.
In patients without obvious malabsorption, food intolerances together with less hunger,
decreased appetite, and fewer sensations of pleasure related to eating lead to significantly
reduced food intakes.52 This is the major cause of weight loss in patients with IBD.52 In
patients without other objective evidence of active inflammation, weight loss should not
be attributed to IBD, but rather close attention should be paid to the patient’s food intake.
Patients with IBD commonly have many micronutrient deficiencies, as shown in Table
57.11. Low levels of zinc and selenium that are cofactors for oxidant-protective enzymes
and low antioxidant vitamins (A, E, and C) have been implicated in worsening of the
disease course as well as contributing to the high rate of carcinogenesis among IBD patients.
Osteopenia, a well-recognized complication of IBD, is widespread among both adult
and pediatric patients53 and may occur independent of steroid use. Both osteopenia and
osteoporosis have been linked to vitamin D and calcium deficiencies, and supplementation
has been beneficial in treatment of these disorders.
Diet in IBD
Diet as a Potential Cause of IBD
Epidemiological evidence suggests that the incidence of Crohn’s disease (CD) has been
increasing over the last half century, while that of ulcerative colitis (UC) is declining,
especially in developed countries. Moreover, migrant populations of Asians into England,
or of European Jews into the U.S., have a much greater increase in the incidence of CD
compared to their counterparts living in their native countries. Assuming that the migrants
and natives have similar genetic pools, the increase has been attributed to environmental
factors. Strikingly, a higher incidence of CD in urban areas as opposed to rural ones further
suggests environmental factors at play. Among these factors, diet is important.
2705_frame_C57 Page 1195 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 2:11 PM
Does Milk Cause IBD? Should Patients with IBD Avoid Milk?
The role of milk in initiating or worsening IBD is debatable, and whether lactose intoler-
ance is more common in IBD is controversial. Even among IBD patients who are not lactose
malabsorbers, elimination of milk from the diet leads to improvement in diarrhea in 1/5
to 1/4 of the cases with UC, and in 1/3 of the patients with CD.66,67
Although no clear-cut explanation for this exists, morphological changes in small intes-
tinal mucosa are well documented in CD and UC.68,69 The extent to which these changes
are related to decreased food intake or starvation as a result of disease symptoms is
unknown. Nevertheless, in CD, improvements related to a milk-free diet are not attribut-
able to changes in brush border lactase levels.70 In UC, measurements of intestinal lactase
have shown that deficiencies of lactase are real during active disease, but lactase deficit
is not necessarily more frequent in the active phase compared to inactive.71
This raises the question of whether milk itself is an allergen. One group of studies has
searched for humoral immune responses to milk proteins. Antibodies to milk proteins can
be readily detected in sera of IBD patients,72 but their levels may not be increased73,74 nor
are they particularly common.75 Some investigators have correlated antibody response
against milk to disease activity in CD but not in UC.76 However, disruptions of the
intestinal barrier as a result of inflammation can easily lead to such antibody formation,
making it a secondary phenomenon rather than the cause of disease. Other studies have
directly looked at the effects of a milk-free diet. In one, elimination of milk from the diet
decreased relapses of UC when patients were followed up to one year subsequent to
treatment with steroids77 even though strict statistical comparisons between treatment and
control groups were not undertaken. In another small study, 40% of IBD patients without
lactose intolerance improved.66 Allergy to cow milk may play a role in initiating or per-
petuating inflammation in IBD in a subset of patients, although no evidence clearly
establishes milk as an allergen.
Milk may also modify the intestinal flora, causing harm to individuals genetically
susceptible to IBD, or to IBD patients. Supporting this hypothesis, lack of breastfeeding
has been an independent risk factor for childhood CD,78 but not UC.79
2705_frame_C57 Page 1196 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 2:11 PM
Unproven Diets
High Fiber Diets that Restrict Sugar or Provide Unrefined Carbohydrates
Investigators have studied the impact of a diet with little or no sugar, rich in unrefined
carbohydrates and fiber on IBD. In one open-label study of CD patients and matched
controls, hospital admissions were significantly fewer and shorter in the treatment group.64
Subjects were given over 30 g of fiber/day on average, with no adverse effects seen in the
patients with strictures. In a larger, better-designed, controlled, multicenter trial with CD,
the diet intervention group did not have a clinically different course than the group
consuming a low-fiber, unrestricted sugar diet.81
polymeric carbohydrates, refuting the possibility that taking in only simple carbohydrates
will be successful. To date, the SCD diet has not been tested scientifically; therefore it
cannot be advocated for general use. If it is proven effective after objective scientific
evaluation, this may be based on features other than its “simple carbohydrates.” For the
patient who wishes to stay on the SCD diet, adequate macro- and micronutrient intake
should be supervised by an experienced dietitian.
Elimination Diets
Report of food intolerances by IBD patients have led to investigations into elimination
diets as a potential therapy. In an uncontrolled trial, 66% of CD patients were able to find
a nutritionally adequate diet after elimination of various foods.84 More than half of these
patients needed elimination of more than one or two foods. The relapse rate was 33% at
the end of the first year on the diets, with annual averages of about 14% within the first
three years. A controlled trial by the same investigators showed that 7/10 patients in the
treatment group remained in remission after three months, as opposed to all patients
relapsing in the control group given an unrefined carbohydrate fiber rich diet.84 Unfortu-
nately, these beneficial results have not been confirmed with better-designed studies to
eliminate bias. In fact, in a study of 42 eligible CD patients put into remission with
elemental diet, 33% dropped out of the study; 19% did not identify food intolerance, and
48% did.85 Among this 48%, food sensitivity was confirmed in half, in open-challenge with
the item, and this was reproducible in only three patients on double-blind challenge. These
findings suggest that elimination diets are of little help in the day-to-day treatment of IBD.
Capsaicin
Capsaicin, found in peppers, worsens colitis in IBD animal models by interfering with
sensory neuroimmunomodulation.95 No data exists in humans.
Gut Microflora/Probiotics/Prebiotics
A large body of research indicates that the intestinal flora may be proinflammatory in
IBD. This may explain why antibiotics that alter the flora, such as fluoroquinolones or
metronidazole, or diversion of the fecal stream with an ostomy, are utilized in the treatment
of IBD. The proinflammatory effect of the flora may be a result of expansion of harmful
colonies of normal gut microorganisms in the presence of certain lumenal conditions such
as an acidic pH, etc. Therefore, novel probiotic therapies that administer “good colonies
(non-inflammatory)” of gut bacteria, which compete with “bad colonies,” have been
developed for treatment of IBD. One of these, E. coli strain Niessle 1917 most recently has
been shown to be as effective as conventional treatment with 5-ASA drugs in the main-
tenance of remission in UC.101 Another probiotic preparation containing 5 × 1011 composed
of four strains of lactobacilli, three strains of bifidobacteria and one strain of Streptococcus
salivarius can prevent recurrence of pouchitis, (inflammation of the ileal pouch anasto-
mosed to the rectum in patients who have undergone colectomy for UC), in a nine month
follow-up period.102 A different approach has been the use of prebiotics, nondigestible
food substances that promote only the growth of a defined subset of good bacteria. Certain
foodstuffs or their components have been found to be prebiotics (e.g., fructo-oligosaccha-
rides and oats) that can profoundly influence the gut microflora, favoring expansion of
good organisms like lactobacillus. Although no controlled studies with these substances
exist in humans, a pilot study of patients with IBD has reported increases in favorable
intestinal flora as well as SCFA.103
Primary Therapy
Randomized prospective studies have shown a response rate to parenteral nutrition in
the 30 to 50% range in acute UC, but no significant differences over placebo have been
demonstrated.117-120 Furthermore disease-free maintenance rates on total parenteral nutri-
tion (TPN) have been poor, and complications requiring surgery may be higher; therefore,
there is no role for TPN as primary therapy of UC.117-120
In retrospective and prospective analyses in CD, parenteral nutrition can induce remission
in 70 to 100% of patients refractory to conventional treatments,114,115,117,118 but in at least one
prospective study, 60% relapse rate is seen within two years.121 This rate is four times higher
than historical controls treated with surgical resection. Therefore, consideration of parenteral
nutrition is recommended only in patients who are malnourished and have extensive disease
precluding surgical treatment. Given the many complications of parenteral nutrition, this
treatment should be a last resort, after exhaustion of other therapies.
Micronutrients
Antioxidants
Lower levels of antioxidant vitamins such as vitamin A, E, C, and beta-carotene have been
shown in both sera and colonic tissue of patients with IBD when compared to healthy
controls.122,123 In one study, vitamin C level also correlated with disease severity.122 Vitamin
C can especially be low in patients with fistulous tracts.
2705_frame_C57 Page 1200 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 2:11 PM
Animal studies suggest that antioxidant supplementation over and above corrections
for deficiency states may ameliorate colitis; however, no randomized placebo controlled
trials have been performed in humans.
Calcium/Vitamin D
Low levels of vitamin D are found in 75% of patients with CD and 35% of patients with
UC.109 Low levels also correlate with disease activity in undernourished CD patients.124
Of such patients, 45% have osteoporosis.125 Therefore, supplementation of vitamin D and
calcium is essential for the prevention of osteopenia/osteoporosis in IBD. Smoking also
independently increases the rate of osteoporosis, and should be avoided.
Folate
In retrospective analyses, folate supplementation has been shown to reduce incidence of
dysplasia and cancer in patients with UC.126,127 Folate requirements in IBD are increased
due to anemia and medications such as azathioprine, 6-mercaptopurine, and sulfasalazine;
therefore supplementation is recommended in almost all patients.
Zinc
Zinc deficiency is especially common among patients with fistulous disease, and has been
implicated as a cause for poor wound healing in these patients.128
Vitamin B12
Deficiency of vitamin B12 occurs as a result of ileal involvement or resection as well as
bacterial overgrowth in CD. All patients with CD should have supplementation either
nasally or as monthly injections, because oral absorption is inadequate. Recently, sublin-
gual administration of two over-the-counter vitamin nuggets (1000 µg/nugget) daily for
seven to ten days to a small group of patients with B12 deficiency has been reported to be
effective in raising blood levels. This latter route requires further study.
Specific Situations
Obstruction
Patients with intermittent obstruction are advised to consume a low-residue diet, although
no definite data exists.
Fistulae
Postoperative fistulae may respond to TPN, but CD fistulae are less likely to close and
frequently reopen promptly after food intake is resumed.129,130 Similar results are seen with
elemental diet.111,113,131,132 In the era of effective anti-tumor necrosis factor therapies, TPN
cannot be recommended as first-line therapy for fistulae in CD.
TABLE 57.12
Nutritional Tips for IBD Patients
1. Seek dietary counseling from an experienced dietitian
2. Avoid milk and milk products during active disease
3. Consume 10-20% more kcalories and 50% more protein with active disease
4. Do not avoid fiber, in fact try to increase fiber in diet as long as there is no obstruction in the GI tract
5. Follow a low residue diet if there is partial obstruction in the GI tract, consult with a physician and dietitian
before making dietary changes
6. Prefer fish over other dishes (fish with high fat/fish oils such as catfish, salmon, etc., should be selected)
7. Take a multivitamin supplying 100% of RDA of vitamins and minerals, make sure to have monthly vitamin
B12 injections if having CD
8. During inactive disease, consume foods that are rich in naturally occurring probiotics (such as yogurt
containing lactobacillus)
Extraintestinal Manifestations
Unconfirmed reports suggest associations between resolution of pyoderma gangrenosum
and uveitis with diet therapy.133
TABLE 57.13
Factors That Affect the Type of Nutrition Required by SBS Patients
Factors The Effect
Phases of SBS See Table 57.14
Length of remaining small intestine Very short lengths (60-100 cm) worsen severity of SBS
The extent of disease in remaining intestine Impact of even mild disease on nutritional status can be
profound. As disease worsens, the length of functioning small
intestine decreases
Absence of the stomach Loss of timed and slow release of gastric chyme decreases
contact time between food and digestive/absorptive
epithelium, thereby worsening SBS. Lack of stomach acid
facilitates bacterial overgrowth aggravating malabsorption
Absence of the ileocecal valve Leads to bacterial overgrowth enabling passage of colonic
bacteria into the small intestine
Absence of the colon Promotes water and electrolyte losses. Kcaloric losses are more
extensive. Lack of gastrocolic reflex results in rapid transit of
food, enhancing malabsorption
TABLE 57.14
Phases of SBS with Their Characteristics
Phase Duration Main Problems
Postoperative 1-2 weeks High volume/severe diarrhea
Gastric hypersecretion
Related fluid and electrolyte imbalances
Transition 1-3 months Diarrhea with oral intake
Malabsorption:
Increased kcaloric requirements
Micronutrient deficiencies
Social problems
TPN related problems
Adaptation 3 months to 1-2 years Dietary restrictions
Adequacy of oral intake
Complications:
Renal stones
Gallstones
D-Lactic acidosis
1. Most of the intestinal fluid secretion that balances the osmotic load of gastric
chyme entering the small bowel occurs in the jejunum. Subsequently, a large
percentage of the proximally secreted water/electrolytes are absorbed distally
in the ileum. Therefore, ileal as opposed to jejunal resections/insults result in
more voluminous diarrhea, with loss of nutrients in stool.
2. GI transit is faster in patients with ileal resections because of the lack of the ileal
brake mechanism, discussed in the first GI section.
3. The ileum has a greater adaptive potential.
2705_frame_C57 Page 1203 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 2:11 PM
FIGURE 57.2
Anatomic types of short bowel syndrome.
Most patients with SBS fall into two main categories: those with and those without a
colon. Patients with a colon usually have the majority of their ileum and some of their
jejunum resected, with a resultant jejunocolic anastomosis. Those without a colon usually
have end-jejunostomies (see Figure 57.2). Patients with a colon typically do better, espe-
cially in maintaining fluid and electrolyte balance, and cases with >50 cm of jejunum
remaining may be managed with oral/enteral nutrition instead of TPN.
Diet in SBS
Dietary interventions in SBS should be individualized for each patient, as the needs differ
considerably. Some general recommendations are given in the following paragraphs.
Postoperative Phase
No enteral nutrition is given at this phase because of the osmotic effects of food, and all
patients require TPN. There are massive losses of fluids and electrolytes, and the amount
is highly variable; therefore, careful monitoring of all intake and output as well as daily
laboratory tests must be done. Patients should be given back their entire deficit plus an
extra estimated 300 to 500 cc/day for insensible losses. Preferably, this type of replacement
should be done on an hourly basis and separate from the TPN.
Agents that slow intestinal transit such as parenteral codeine and drugs that reduce the
commonly seen gastric hypersecretion are also helpful in reducing the volume of stool
2705_frame_C57 Page 1204 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 2:11 PM
output. Gastric hypersecretion is usually comparable to the level seen in duodenal ulcer
patients,135 can lead to significant volume losses, especially within the first six months
following surgery,136 and can contribute to malabsorption by inactivating pancreatic lipase
and deconjugating bile salts. Treatment with cimetidine has been shown to improve
absorption.136,137 A study of 13 patients with large-volume ostomy output has shown that
omeprazole can increase water absorption in cases with fecal outputs >2.5 kg/day, but
does not alter absorption of kcalories, macronutrients, or electrolytes.138
Octreotide (50 to 100 µg subcutaneously twice a day) has also been shown useful in
patients with end jejunostomies who have >3 L/day of ostomy output.139 Initial concerns
that octreotide may delay adaptation have not been substantiated in animal studies.140
Enteral Feeding
Patients who are not able to take in adequate kcalories via the oral route should be tried
on enteral feedings. There is no consensus on which type of enteral feeding is best for
SBS, but isotonic polymeric formulas are recommended over elemental ones, which are
expensive and poorly tolerated by patients because of their taste, smell, and high osmo-
lality that increases jejunal secretion.
TABLE 57.15
Dosages for Antidiarrheals in SBS
Antidiarrheal Typical Dosage
Loperamide 4-6 mg/4-5 times a day
Lomotil 2.5-5 mg/4 times a day
Tincture of opium 5-10 cc every 4 hours
Codeine phosphate 30 mg/3-4 times a day
2705_frame_C57 Page 1205 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 2:11 PM
TABLE 57.16
Selected Complications of TPN in SBS and Their Prevention/Treatment
Complication Treatment
Line infections Remove catheter completely if fungal infections or Staph.
aureus are the cause (change over a wire is not acceptable)
Staph. aureus requires 2-6 weeks of antibiotics
Staph. epidermidis may be cured 80% of the time with 7-
10 days of iv vancomycin
Bacterial overgrowth Treat with broad spectrum antibitotics (tetracycline,
ciprofloxacin, metronidazole, etc.)
Rotate antibiotics every 4-8 weeks
Liver disease Pursue enteral feedings aggressively
Take care to prevent line infections
Avoid overfeeding with excessive kcalories
Prefer lipid kcalories to high carbohydrate nutrition
Treat bacterial overgrowth
Screen for cholelithiasis
Parenteral Nutrition
Patients who cannot stop TPN need to be monitored for complications such as feeding
catheter infections, liver disease, bacterial overgrowth, and nutritional deficiencies. Some
of these, together with their treatments, are given in Table 57.16.
output148 in some cases, but they also exert a higher osmotic load in the small intestine
and have a lower caloric density compared to LCFAs. Besides, LCFAs are better in inducing
intestinal adaptation;149 thus, a mixture of LCFAs and MCTs seems to be the most logical
approach. A recent study compared the effects of a high fat (56% of kcalories as fat) diet
in SBS. Patients were given fat in the form of LCFAs or a mixture of MCTs and LCFAs
(about 1:1). Only patients with a colon benefited, with an increase in energy absorption
from 46 to 58%.150
Lactose
Although the concentration of lactase in the intestine of SBS patients is unaltered, there
is a reduction in the total quantity of available lactase. Thus, intake of food with high
lactose content (e.g., milk) is discouraged, although many patients are able to tolerate
small quantities of cheese and yogurt well.
Insoluble Fiber
Insoluble fiber such as bran decreases intestinal transit time and should be avoided by
SBS patients.
Micronutrients
Deficiency of divalent cations such as calcium, magnesium, and zinc are typical. Water-
soluble vitamin deficiencies are rare because most are absorbed in the proximal jejunum.
Vitamin B12, which is absorbed in the terminal ileum, and fat-soluble vitamins A, D, E,
and K need to be replaced routinely. A water-soluble form of vitamin A (Aquasol A) may
be tried. Monthly injections of 1000 µg vitamin B12 are necessary.
Renal Stones
Risk of oxalate stones is increased, occurring in 25% of all SBS patients with a colon.154
Calcium, which normally binds to oxalate and causes its excretion with feces, actually
binds the malabsorbed fatty acids in the lumen in SBS, leaving oxalate available for
absorption in the colon. Unabsorbed bile acids that enter the colon also stimulate absorp-
tion of oxalate.
Urinary oxalate excretion should be measured in patients with a colon, and oxalate
should be restricted in patients with high levels of excretion. In patients with a history of
2705_frame_C57 Page 1207 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 2:11 PM
stones, restriction of fat in the diet may be considered. Additionally, urinary citrate and
magnesium, which inhibit stone formation, are low and may need to be supplemented.
Gallstones
There is a two- to threefold increased risk of cholesterol gallstones because of the decreased
bile acid pool in SBS. This increased risk is not different for patients with or without a
colon, but risk of calcium bilirubinate stones is higher in patients on TPN because of
gallbladder stasis and low oral intake. Cholecystokinin injections have been tried in dogs155
with good success in preventing gallbladder stasis. Some advocate prophylactic cholecys-
tectomy in SBS.156
Social Problems
Patients with end-jejunostomies and those dependent on TPN frequently have social
problems that require help of psychiatrists and psychologists.
D-Lactic Acidosis
Fermentation of malabsorbed carbohydrates in the colon produces D-lactic acid that can-
not be metabolized by humans. Elevated levels cause an anion-gap metabolic acidosis
with confusion, ataxia, nystagmus, opthalmoplegia, and dysarthria.157 The condition is
more likely when thiamine deficiency is present, and it is treated with nonabsorbable
antibiotics (neomycin or vancomycin) and restriction of carbohydrates (especially mono-
and oligosaccharides) in the diet.158
In summary, nutritional management of SBS is complex, and patients should best be
referred to an experienced multidisciplinary nutrition management team.
less in patients given the maize starch ORS compared to controls given standard ORS.161
Further studies are needed before the latter is incorporated into common clinical practice.
Although it is rational to advise patients to stay away from hard-to-digest foods such
as red meat, high fiber-containing vegetables (e.g., salads, greens, broccoli, etc.), and lactose,
because of the increased rate of intestinal transit and concurrent malabsorption that occur
in acute diarrhea, there exists no data in this regard. Most recently, an antidiarrheal factor
has been found in rice, suggesting that a rice-based diet may be useful.162 This factor blocks
the secretory response of intestinal crypt cells to cyclic adenosine monophosphate and
targets the cystic fibrosis transmembrane regulator (CFTR) chloride channel.
Mechanisms
Various factors and mechanisms thought to be important in the pathogenesis of these
disorders are listed in Table 57.17. Currently recommended dietary management is based
on decreasing food allergies, affecting GI motility and lowering intestinal gas production
in an effort to decrease bowel wall distention.
TABLE 57.17
Factors Important in Pathogenesis of FGIDs
1. Cognitive factors
a. Illness behavior
b. Illness coping strategies
2. Behavioral/Emotional factors
a. Psychosocial stress
b. Physical and/or sexual abuse
c. Anxiety
d. Depression
3. Physiological factors
a. Visceral hyperalgesia
b. Altered intestinal motility
c. Altered neuroendocrine response
4. Environmental factors
a. Dietary allergens
b. Enteric infections
Diet in FGIDs
There is no particular diet for patients with FGIDs, and there is little evidence for dietary
therapies of functional upper digestive tract diseases. Some patients with functional
chest pain may improve with diets similar to ones recommended for GERD patients
(given in the previous GI section, Table 56.10). Others with functional dyspepsia may
benefit from elimination of foods that delay gastric emptying (given in the previous GI
section, Table 56.17).
Bran
Fiber, in the form of bran, for IBS was popularized after Burkitt’s initial work in early
1970s demonstrating that it increases stool weight and decreases intestinal transit time.
2705_frame_C57 Page 1210 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 2:11 PM
Others confirmed these findings,166 and a lack of fiber was implicated for the development
of many GI diseases including diverticular disease, colon cancer, and IBS. Consequently,
studies in the 1970s undertook bran replacement as therapy for IBS, and the results were
positive in some167 but clearly negative in many others.168 Most of these studies had
methodological flaws, and were usually done with small numbers of patients. Neverthe-
less, given the lack of other effective therapies for the disease, bran became the standard
of care.
Evidence over the last two decades contradicts this, and indicates that patients with IBS
consume equal amounts of total fiber but less vegetable fiber compared to healthy con-
trols.169 Fiber replacement in the form of bran is no more effective than placebo,170-172 and
is poorly tolerated in many subjects. In one study, 55% of patients worsened after bran
therapy, with deterioration in bowel habits, abdominal distention, and pain.173 Improve-
ment was seen in only 10%. These findings are corroborated by data from other studies
upon careful review;174 not only may patients worsen initially and not tolerate bran, but
they also may have a high subsequent withdrawal rate.175
Soluble Fiber
Soluble fiber replacement seems to be better tolerated and more effective for IBS in
comparison with bran.176 It has also been used in combination with antispasmodics,
anxiolytics, and antidepressants, and has a synergistic effect in such combinations177 in
some studies. Soluble fiber (such as psyllium, methylcellulose, or calcium polycarbophil)
is most effective for constipation predominant IBS patients, and should be gradually
increased over a period of weeks to avoid bloating and flatulence.
High-Fiber Diets
The role of a high-fiber diet for IBS is debatable, given the above controversies regarding
bran as treatment for IBS. In an open-label trial, the symptoms that have been shown to
benefit most from a high fiber diet are hard stools, constipation, and urgency. In this study,
all patients who were able to consume 30 g or more fiber improved symptomatically.178
In another trial of 14 patients followed for two to three years, 50% improved greatly,
whereas 28.5% had worsening of their symptoms.179 In conclusion, fiber is not ideal therapy
for all patients with IBS, but should be tried especially in patients with constipation-
predominant symptoms.
13.7% of the patients were symptomatic with foods that they were allergic to on prick
tests.182 These findings argue against undertaking a search for food allergies as part of
the clinical evaluation of IBS patients.
A positive response to elimination diets in IBS ranges from 15 to 71%, but most studies
have methodological flaws.180 Supporting the role of food allergy in IBS, equal improve-
ment of symptoms up to 50% has been noted in both study groups in trials with diet versus
sodium chromoglycate administration for diarrhea-predominant disease.185,186 These find-
ings need to be confirmed in well-designed placebo controlled experiments before they
can be considered clinically applicable, given a high placebo response rate in IBS.
Recently an in vivo colonoscopic allergen provocation (COLAP) test based on wheal and
flare reactions in the colonic mucosa has been developed, and has shown positive reactions
in 77% of patients with food-related symptoms.187 The clinical utility of this test in IBS is
yet to be determined.
In conclusion, a small subgroup of patients with true food allergies is classified as IBS.
These patients tend to have atopy in general, and diarrhea-predominant disease. In
selected patients, a symptom and food diary may be useful as an initial investigation for
food allergy. Foods that lead to symptoms may then be eliminated and rechallenges may
be done. Referral to an allergy specialist may be useful in such cases.
For the majority of cases, however, elimination of certain foods that the individual
patient believes to cause symptoms is adequate therapy. Physicians also need to ensure
that the patient’s self-imposed dietary restrictions do not lead to macro- or micronutrient
deficiencies.
Carbohydrates in IBS
Fructose and Sorbitol
A number of studies show that IBS symptoms are exacerbated in patients after ingesting
fructose and sorbitol mixtures. Fructose is a natural ingredient of fruits, as is sorbitol. The
latter is also a common sweetener in dietetic foods. Ingestion of 10 g of sorbitol, equivalent
of 4 to 5 sugar-free mints or two medium pears, can produce moderate to severe abdominal
discomfort, bloating, and diarrhea in 27% of healthy volunteers.188 Symptoms may last up
to six hours.
A subset of IBS patients has true malabsorption of fructose and sorbitol as assessed by
breath hydrogen production,189,190 although the level of breath hydrogen produced does
not necessarily correlate with the degree of symptoms.191 Whether fructose and sorbitol
malabsorption is more common or more severe among IBS patients compared to healthy
controls is uncertain. In one large study, there was no higher incidence or higher level of
malabsorption.192 Among malabsorbers, symptoms cannot be explained by changes in
jejunal sensitivity and motor function of the small bowel. At present, avoidance of sorbitol
and high intakes of fructose may be considered in selected patients.
Lactose
Subjective lactose intolerance is also increased in IBS, and lactose malabsorption is com-
mon. Most lactose malabsorbers among IBS patients are malabsorbers of fructose and
sorbitol as well. However, elimination of lactose from the diet does not impact on the
disease course or reduce symptoms when assessed objectively in long-term followup.193
In contrast with these findings, many patients subjectively feel that identification of their
lactose malabsorptive state has helped them gain awareness of food-symptom relation-
ships and alleviate their symptoms partially. Treatment with lactase194 or acidophilus milk
2705_frame_C57 Page 1212 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 2:11 PM
have shown no benefit over unaltered milk in IBS patients with and without lactose
malabsorption.
TABLE 57.18
Summary of Nutritional Tips for the IBS Patient
1. If constipation predominant IBS, try soluble fiber supplements
2. If diarrhea predominant disease and atopic patient, keep food diary and seek
help from an allergy specialist
3. Avoid only those foods that cause symptoms every time they are consumed
4. Replace consumption of heavily processed foods, containing preservatives,
additives, food coloring, etc., with a natural balanced diet
5. Seek help from a dietitian to ensure adequate macro- and micronutrient intake
if having to avoid many food items
6. Avoid gas-producing vegetables (e.g., legumes, cruciferous vegetables, etc.)
7. Avoid carbonated and caffeinated beverages
Mechanisms
Role of Diet in the Pathogenesis
Dietary fiber deficiency along with the theory of colonic segmentation has been the leading
hypothesis for the etiology of diverticular disease of colon. According to the segmentation
theory, contraction of the colon at the haustral folds causes the colon to act as a series of
“little bladders” instead of a continuous single-chambered lumen.202 Formation of these
segments leads to delayed transport, increased water absorption, and more importantly,
a rise in intraluminal pressure, resulting in mucosal herniation.204
The incidence of diverticula within a society increases following the adoption of a
Western diet that is low in fiber.205 This is supported by animal data as well as epide-
miological studies.205,206 Compared to patients on a diet high in fiber content, those who
consume a low-fiber diet have a threefold increase in the incidence of diverticulosis.207
Consumption of a low-fiber Westernized diet leads to a lower intake of crude cereal
grains, increase in consumption of white flour, refined sugar, conserves, and meat. Lack
of “adequate” dietary fiber decreases stool weight, prolongs transit time, and increases
the colonic intraluminal pressure, all of which predispose to the diverticula formation
in concert with segmentation.202,208 Additionally, a high meat diet changes bacterial
metabolism in the colon, and bacteria may produce a toxic metabolite favoring diver-
ticulosis, which is hypothesized to be a spasmogen, or an agent that weakens the colonic
wall.209
References
1. Dieterich W, Ehnis T, Bauer M, et al. Nat Med 3:797; 1997.
2. Kagnoff MF, Paterson YJ, Kumar PJ, et al. Gut 28:995; 1987.
3. Corazza GR, Di Sario A, Sacco G, et al. J Intern Med 236:183; 1994.
4. Mazure RM, Vazquez H, Gonzalez D, et al. Am J Gastroenterol 91:726; 1996.
5. Mustalahti K, Collin P, Sievanen H, Salmi J, Maki M. Lancet 354:744; 1999.
6. Rude RK, Olerich M. Osteoporos Int 6:453; 1996.
7. Valdimarsson T, Lofman O, Toss G, Strom M. Gut 38:322; 1996.
8. McFarlane XA, Bhalla AK, Robertson DA. Gut 39:180; 1996.
9. Mautalen C, Gonzalez D, Mazure R, et al. Am J Gastroenterol 92:313 1997.
10. Bai JC, Gonzalez D, Mautalen C, et al. Aliment Pharmacol Ther 11:157; 1997.
11. McFarlane XA, Bhalla AK, Reeves DE, et al. Gut 36:710; 1995.
12. Logan RF, Rifkind EA, Turner ID, Ferguson A. Gastroenterology 97:265; 1989.
13. Holmes GK, Prior P, Lane MR, et al. Gut 30:333; 1989.
14. Leonard JN, Tucker WF, Fry JS, et al. Br Med J (Clin Res Ed) 286:16; 1983.
15. Grefte JM, Bouman JG, Grond J, et al. J Clin Pathol 41:886; 1988.
16. Roufail WM, Ruffin JM. Am J Dig Dis 11:587; 1966.
17. Regan PT, DiMagno EP. Gastroenterology 78:484; 1980.
18. DiMagno EP, Go WL, Summerskill WH. Gastroenterology 63:25; 1972.
19. Carroccio A, Iacono G, Montalto G, et al. Dig Dis Sci 39:2235; 1994.
20. Carroccio A, Iacono G, Montalto G, et al. Dig Dis Sci 40:2555; 1995.
21. Faulkner-Hogg KB, Selby WS, Loblay RH. Scand J Gastroenterol 34:784; 1999.
22. Trier JS, Falchuk ZM, Carey MC, Schreiber DS. Gastroenterology 75:307; 1978.
23. Sinclair TS, Kumar JS, Dawson AM. Gut 24: A494 1983.
24. Longstreth GF. Ann Intern Med 119:1014; 1993 & 120:443; 1994.
25. Love A, Elmes M, Golden M, McMaster D. In: Perspectives in Celiac Disease. McNicholl B. MCF,
Fottrell PF, Ed, Lancaster, England, MTP, 1978, pg 335.
26. Jones PE, L’Hirondel C, Peters TJ. Gut 23:108; 1982.
27. Kumar PJ, O’Donoghue DP, Stenson K, Dawson AM. Gut 20:743; 1979.
28. Chartrand LJ, Russo PA, Duhaime AG, Seidman EG. J Am Diet Assoc 97:612; 1997.
29. Selby WS, Painter D, Collins A, et al. Scand J Gastroenterol 34:909; 1999.
30. Dissanayake AS, Truelove SC, Whitehead R. Br Med J 4:189; 1975.
31. de Ritis G, Auricchio S, Jones HW, et al. Gastroenterology 94:41; 1988.
32. Vainio E, Varjonen E. Int Arch Allergy Immunol 106:134; 1995.
33. Srinivasan U, Leonard N, Jones E, et al. Br Med J 313:1300; 1996.
34. Hardman CM, Garioch JJ, Leonard JN, et al. N Engl J Med 337:1884; 1997.
2705_frame_C57 Page 1215 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 2:11 PM
35. Janatuinen EK, Pikkarainen PH, Kemppainen TA, et al. N Engl J Med 333:1033; 1996.
36. Auricchio S, Follo D, de Ritis G, et al. J Pediatr Gastroenterol Nutr 2:428; 1983.
37. Bouguerra F, Hajjem S, Guilloud-Bataille M, et al. Arch Pediatr 5:621; 1998.
38. Greco L, Mayer M, Grimaldi M, et al. J Pediatr Gastroenterol Nutr 4:52; 1985.
39. Ivarsson A, Persson LA, Nystrom L, et al. Acta Paediatr 89:165; 2000.
40. Ascher H, Krantz I, Rydberg L, et al. Arch Dis Child 76:;1997.
41. Han PD, Burke A, Baldassano RN, et al. Gastroenterol Clin North Am 28:423; 1999.
42. Klein S, Meyers S, O’Sullivan P, et al. J Clin Gastroenterol 10:34; 1988.
43. Al-Jaouni R, Hebuterne X, Pouget I, Rampal P. Nutrition 16:173; 2000.
44. Stokes MA, Hill GL. J Parent Enteral Nutr 17:3; 1993.
45. Kushner RF, Schoeller DA. Am J Clin Nutr 53:161; 1982.
46. Barot LR, Rombeau JL, Feurer ID, Mullen JL. Ann Surg 195:214; 1982.
47. Capristo E, Mingrone G, Addolorato G, et al. J Intern Med 243:339; 1998.
48. Mingrone G, Capristo E, Greco AV, et al. Am J Clin Nutr 69:325; 1999.
49. Mingrone G, Benedetti G, Capristo E, et al. Am J Clin Nutr 67:118; 1998.
50. Christie PM, Hill GL. Gastroenterology 99:730; 1990.
51. Ballegaard M, Bjergstrom A, Brondum S, et al. Scand J Gastroenterol 32:569; 1997.
52. Rigaud D, Angel LA, Cerf M, et al. Am J Clin Nutr 60:775; 1994.
53. Cowan FJ, Warner JT, Dunstan FD, et al. Arch Dis Child 76:325; 1997.
54. Mayberry JF, Rhodes J, Allan R, et al. Dig Dis Sci 26:444; 1981.
55. Persson PG, Ahlbom A, Hellers G. Epidemiology 3:47; 1992.
56. Panza E, Franceschi S, La Vecchia C, et al. Ital J Gastro 19:205; 1987.
57. Dietary and Other Risk Factors of Ulcerative Colitis. A Case-Control Study in Japan. Epide-
miology Group of the Research Committee of Inflammatory Bowel Disease in Japan. J Clin
Gastroenterol 19:166; 1994.
58. Reif S, Klein I, Lubin F, et al. Gut 40:754; 1997.
59. Mayberry JF, Rhodes J, Newcombe RG. Digestion 20:323; 1980.
60. Jarnerot G, Jarnmark I, Nilsson K. Scand J Gastroenterol 18:999; 1983.
61. Thornton JR, Emmett PM, Heaton KW. Br Med J 280:293; 1980.
62. Thornton JR, Emmett PM, Heaton KW. Br Med J (Clin Res Ed) 290:1786; 1985.
63. Kasper H, Sommer H. Am J Clin Nutr 32:1898; 1979.
64. Thornton JR, Emmett PM, Heaton KW. Br Med J 2:762; 1979.
65. Shoda R, Matsueda K, Yamato S, Umeda N. Am J Clin Nutr 63:741; 1996.
66. Gudmand-Hoyer E, Jarnum S. Gut 11:338; 1970.
67. Wright R, Truelove SC. Br Med J 250:138; 1965.
68. Salem SN, Truelove SC. Br Med J 250:827; 1965.
69. Salem SN, Truelove SC, Richards WCD. Br Med J 248:394; 1964.
70. Park RH, Duncan A, Russell RI. Am J Gastroenterol 85:708; 1990.
71. Cady AB, Rhodes JB, Littman A, Crane RK. J Lab Clin Med 70:279; 1967.
72. Taylor KB, Truelove SC. Br Med J 242:924;1961.
73. Dudek B, Spiro HM, Thayer WR. Gastroenterology 49:544; 1965.
74. Jewell DP, Truelove SC. Gut 13:796; 1972.
75. Sewell P, Cooke WT, Cox EV, Meynell MJ. Lancet 2:1132; 1963.
76. Knoflach P, Park BH, Cunningham R, et al. Gastroenterology 92:479; 1987.
77. Wright R, Truelove SR. Am J Dig Dis 11:847; 1966.
78. Koletzko S, Sherman P, Corey M, et al. Br Med J 298:1617; 1989.
79. Koletzko S, Griffiths A, Corey M, et al. Br Med J 302:1580; 1991.
80. Imes S, Pinchbeck B, Thomson AB. Digestion 39:7; 1988.
81. Ritchie JK, Wadsworth J, Lennard-Jones JE, Rogers E. Br Med J (Clin Res Ed) 295:517; 1987.
82. Levenstein S, Prantera C, Luzi C, D’Ubaldi A. Gut 26:989; 1985.
83. Gottschall E. Breaking the Vicious Cycle, 1999 ed, Baltimore, Ontario, Kirkton Press Ltd., 1999.
84. Jones VA, Dickinson RJ, Workman E, et al. Lancet 2:177; 1985.
85. Pearson M, Teahon K, Levi AJ, Bjarnason I. Gut 34:783; 1993.
86. Ruuska T, Savilahti E, Maki M, et al. J Pediatr Gastroenterol Nutr 19:175; 1994.
87. Iannoli P, Miller JH, Ryan CK, et al. Surgery 122:721 & 728; 1997.
2705_frame_C57 Page 1216 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 2:11 PM
88. Byrne TA, Persinger RL, Young LS, et al. Ann Surg 222:243 & 254; 1995.
89. Slonim AE, Bulone L, Damore MB, et al. N Engl J Med 342:1633; 2000.
90. Hawthorne AB, Daneshmend TK, Hawkey CJ, et al. Gut 33:922; 1992.
91. Stenson WF, Cort D, Rodgers J, et al. Ann Intern Med 116:609; 1992.
92. Aslan A, Triadafilopoulos G. Am J Gastroenterol 87:432; 1992.
93. Greenfield SM, Green AT, Teare JP, et al. Aliment Pharmacol Ther 7:159; 1993.
94. Ikehata A, Hiwatashi N, Kinouchi Y, et al. Am J Clin Nutr 56:938; 1992.
95. Eysselein VE, Reinshagen M, Patel A, et al. Ann N Y Acad Sci 657:319; 1992.
96. Breuer RI, Buto SK, Christ ML, et al. Dig Dis Sci 36:185; 1991.
97. Steinhart AH, Brzezinski A, Baker JP. Am J Gastroenterol 89:179; 1994.
98. Patz J, Jacobsohn WZ, Gottschalk-Sabag S, et al. Am J Gastroenterol 91:731; 1994.
99. Scheppach W, Sommer H, Kirchner T, et al. Gastroenterology 103:51; 1992.
100. Rolandelli RH, Saul SH, Settle RG, et al. Am J Clin Nutr 47:715; 1988.
101. Rembacken BJ, Snelling AM, Hawkey PM, et al. Lancet 354:635; 1999.
102. Gionchetti P, Rizzello F, Venturi A, et al. Gastroenterology 119:305; 2000.
103. Umemoto Y, Tanimura H, Ishimoto K. Gastroenterology 114:A1102; 1998.
104. O’Morain C, Segal AW, Levi AJ. Br Med J (Clin Res Ed) 288:1859; 1984.
105. Gorard DA, Hunt JB, Payne-James JJ, et al. Gut 34:1198; 1993.
106. Seidman EG, Bouthullier L, Weber AM. Gastroenterology 90:A1625; 1986.
107. Griffiths AM, Ohlsson A, Sherman PM, Sutherland LR. Gastroenterology 108:1056; 1995.
108. Gonzalez-Huix F, de Leon R, Fernandez-Banares F, et al. Gut 34:778; 1993.
109. Dieleman LA, Heizer WD. Gastroenterol Clin North Am 27:435; 1998.
110. Lochs H, Steinhardt HJ, Klaus-Wentz B, et al. Gastroenterology 101:881; 1991.
111. Axelsson C, Jarnum S. Scand J Gastroenterol 12:89; 1977.
112. O’Brien CJ, Giaffer MH, Cann PA, Holdsworth CD. Am J Gastroenterol 86:1614; 1991.
113. Lochs H, Egger-Schodl M, Schuh R, et al. Klin Wochenschr 62:821; 1984.
114. McIntyre PB, Powell-Tuck J, Wood SR, et al. Gut 27:481; 1986.
115. Greenberg GR, Fleming CR, Jeejeebhoy KN, et al. Gut 29:1309; 1988.
116. Rombeau JL, Barot LR, Williamson CE, Mullen JL. Am J Surg 143:139 1982.
117. Dickinson RJ, Ashton MG, Axon AT, et al. Gastroenterology 79:1199; 1980.
118. Elson CO, Layden TJ, Nemchausky BA, et al. Dig Dis Sci 25:42; 1980.
119. Sitzmann JV, Converse RL, Jr, Bayless TM. Gastroenterology 99:1647; 1990.
120. Solomons NW, Rosenberg IH, Sandstead HH, Vo-Khactu KP. Digestion 16:87; 1977.
121. Muller JM, Keller HW, Erasmi H, Pichlmaier H. Br J Surg 70:40; 1983.
122. Fernandez-Banares F, Abad-Lacruz A, Xiol X, et al. Am J Gastroenterol 84:744; 1989.
123. Kuroki F, Iida M, Tominaga M, et al. Dig Dis Sci 38:1614; 1993.
124. Harries AD, Brown R, Heatley RV, et al. Gut 26:1197; 1985.
125. Vogelsang H, Ferenci P, Woloszczuk W, et al. Dig Dis Sci 34:1094; 1989.
126. Lashner BA, Heidenreich PA, Su GL. Gastroenterology 97:255; 1989.
127. Lashner BA, Provencher KS, Seidner DL. Gastroenterology 112:29; 1997.
128. Kruis W, Rindfleisch GE, Weinzierl M. Hepatogastroenterology 32:133; 1985.
129. Ostro MJ, Greenberg GR, Jeejeebhoy KN. J Parent Enteral Nutr 9:280; 1985.
130. Hawker PC, Givel JC, Keighley MR, et al. Gut 24:284; 1983.
131. Teahon K, Bjarnason I, Pearson M, Levi AJ. Gut 31:1133; 1990.
132. Calam J, Crooks PE, Walker RJ. J Parent Enteral Nutr 4:4; 1980.
133. Levine JB, Lukawski-Trubish D. Gastroenterol Clin North Am 24:633; 1995.
134. Nightingale JM, Bartram CI, Lennard-Jones JE. Gastrointest Radiol 16:305; 1991.
135. Fielding JF, Cooke WT, Williams JA. Lancet 1:1106; 1971.
136. Murphy JP, Jr., King DR, Dubois A. N Engl J Med 300:80; 1979.
137. Cortot A, Fleming CR, Malagelada JR. N Engl J Med 300:79; 1979.
138. Jeppesen PB, Staun M, Tjellesen L, Mortensen PB. Gut 43:763; 1998.
139. Farthing MJ. Digestion 54(Suppl 1):47; 1993.
140. Vanderhoof JA, Kollman KA. J Pediatr Gastroenterol Nutr 26:241; 1998.
141. Woolf GM, Miller C, Kurian R, Jeejeebhoy KN. Dig Dis Sci 32:8; 1987.
142. Levitt MD. Gastroenterology 85:769; 1983.
2705_frame_C57 Page 1217 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 2:11 PM
143. Bond JH, Currier BE, Buchwald H, Levitt MD. Gastroenterology 78:444; 1980.
144. Nordgaard I, Hansen BS, Mortensen PB. Lancet 343:373; 1994.
145. Mobarhan S. Nutr Rev 52:354; 1994.
146. McIntyre PB, Fitchew M, Lennard-Jones JE. Gastroenterology 91:25; 1986.
147. Messing B, Pigot F, Rongier M, et al. Gastroenterology 100:1502; 1991.
148. Bochenek W, Rodgers JB, Jr., Balint JA. Ann Intern Med 72:205; 1970.
149. Vanderhoof JA, Grandjean CJ, Kaufman SS. J Parent Enteral Nutr 8:685; 1984.
150. Jeppesen PB, Mortensen PB. Gut 43:478; 1998.
151. Gruy-Kapral C, Little KH, Fordtran JS, et al. Gastroenterology 116:15; 1999.
152. Selby PL, Peacock M, Bambach CP. Br J Surg 71:334; 1984.
153. Fleming CR, George L, Stoner GL, et al. Mayo Clin Proc 71:21; 1996.
154. Nightingale JM, Lennard-Jones JE, Gertner DJ. et al. Gut 33:1493; 1992.
155. Doty JE, Pitt HA, Porter-Fink V, Denbesten L. Ann Surg 201:76; 1985.
156. Thompson JS. Arch Surg 131:556 & 559; 1996.
157. Anon. Lancet 336:599; 1990.
158. Mayne AJ, Handy DJ, Preece MA, et al. Arch Dis Child 65:229; 1990.
159. Pizarro D, Posada G, Sandi L, Moran JR. N Engl J Med 324:517; 1991 & 326:488; 1992.
160. Krishnan S, Ramakrishna BS, Binder HJ. Dig Dis Sci 44:1924; 1999.
161. Ramakrishna BS, Venkataraman S, Srinivasan P, et al. N Engl J Med 342:308; 2000.
162. Mathews CJ, MacLeod RJ, Zheng SX, Gastroenterology 116:1342; 1999.
163. Pochapin M. Am J Gastroenterol 95:S11; 2000.
164. Drossman DA. Gut 45 Suppl 2:II1; 1999.
165. Gee MI, Grace MG, Wensel RH, et al. J Am Diet Assoc 85:1591; 1985.
166. Payler DK, Pomare EW, Heaton KW, Harvey RF. Gut 16:209; 1975.
167. Manning AP, Heaton KW, Harvey RF. Lancet 2:417; 1977.
168. Soltoft J, Krag B, Gudmand-Hoyer E. Lancet 1:270; 1974.
169. Hillman LC, Stace NH, Fisher A, Pomare EW. Am J Clin Nutr 36:626; 1982.
170. Snook J, Shepherd HA. Aliment Pharmacol Ther 8:511; 1994.
171. Lucey MR, Clark ML, Lowndes J, Dawson AM. Gut 28:221; 1987.
172. Arffmann S, Andersen JR, Hegnhoj J, et al. Scand J Gastroenterol 20:295; 1985.
173. Francis CY, Whorwell PJ. Lancet 344:39; 1994.
174. Cann PA, Read NW, Holdsworth CD. Gut 25:168; 1984.
175. Kruis W, Weinzierl M, Schussler P, Holl J. Digestion 34:196; 1986.
176. Hotz J, Plein K. Med Klin 89:645; 1994.
177. Ritchie JA, Truelove SC. Br Med J 1:376; 1979.
178. Lambert JP, Brunt PW, Mowat NA, et al. Eur J Clin Nutr 45:601; 1991.
179. Hillman LC, Stace NH, Pomare EW. Am J Gastroenterol 79:1; 1984.
180. Niec AM, Frankum B, Talley NJ. Am J Gastroenterol 93:2184; 1998.
181. Locke GR, 3rd, Zinsmeister AR, Talley NJ, et al. Am J Gastroenterol 95:157; 2000.
182. Dainese R, Galliani EA, De Lazzari F, et al. Am J Gastroenterol 94:1892; 1999.
183. Bentley SJ, Pearson DJ, Rix KJ. Lancet 2:295; 1983.
184. Petitpierre M, Gumowski P, Girard JP. Ann Allergy 54:538; 1985.
185. Stefanini GF, Saggioro A, Alvisi V, et al. Scand J Gastroenterol 30:535; 1995.
186. Stefanini GF, Prati E, Albini MC, et al. Am J Gastroenterol 87:55; 1992.
187. Bischoff SC, Mayer J, Wedemeyer J, et al. Gut 40:745; 1997.
188. Jain NK, Rosenberg DB, Ulahannan MJ, et al. Am J Gastroenterol 80:678; 1985.
189. Fernandez-Banares F, Esteve-Pardo M, de Leon R, et al. Am J Gastroenterol 88:2044; 1993.
190. Rumessen JJ, Gudmand-Hoyer E. Gastroenterology 95:694; 1988.
191. Symons P, Jones MP, Kellow JE. Scand J Gastroenterol 27:940; 1992.
192. Nelis GF, Vermeeren MA, Jansen W. Gastroenterology 99:1016.
193. Tolliver BA, Jackson MS, Jackson KL. J Clin Gastroenterol 23:15; 1996.
194. Lisker R, Solomons NW, Perez Briceno R. Am J Gastroenterol 84:756; 1989.
195. Lasser RB, Bond JH, Levitt MD. N Engl J Med 293:524; 1975.
196. Jain NK, Patel VP, Pitchumoni S. Ann Intern Med 105:61; 1986.
197. Suarez F, Levitt MD, Adshead J, Barkin JS. Dig Dis Sci 44:1317; 1999.
2705_frame_C57 Page 1218 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 2:11 PM
198. Jain NK, Patel VP, Pitchumoni CS. Am J Gastroenterol 81:532; 1986.
199. Friedman G. Gastroenterol Clin North Am 20:313; 1991.
200. King TS, Elia M, Hunter JO. Lancet 352:1187; 1998.
201. Painter NS, Burkitt DP. Br Med J 2:450; 1975.
202. Painter NS, Burkitt DP. Clin Gastroenterol 4:3; 1975.
203. Parks TG. Clin Gastroenterol 4:53; 1975.
204. Srivastava GS, Smith AN, Painter NS. Br Med J 1:315; 1976.
205. Ohi G, Minowa K, Oyama T, et al. Am J Clin Nutr 38:115; 1983.
206. Berry CS, Fearn T, Fisher N, et al. Lancet 2:294; 1984.
207. Gear JS, Ware A, Fursdon P, et al. Lancet 1:511; 1979.
208. Burkitt DP, Walker AR, Painter NS. JAMA 229:1068; 1974.
209. Cummings JH, Hill MJ, Jivraj T, et al. Am J Clin Nutr 32:2086; 1979.
210. Aldoori WH, Giovannucci EL, Rockett HR. J Nutr 128:714; 1998.
211. Brodribb AJ. Lancet 1:664; 1977.
212. Ornstein MH, Littlewood ER, Baird IM, Br Med J (Clin Res Ed) 282:1353; 1981.
213. Roberts P, Abel M, Rosen L, et al. Dis. Colon Rectum 38:125; 1995.
2705_frame_C58 Page 1219 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 2:12 PM
58
Nutrient Metabolism and Support in the Normal
and Diseased Liver
Mark T. DeMeo
Introduction
The liver plays a dual role in nutritional wellbeing. First, it contributes to nutrient assim-
ilation through the synthesis of bile acids. At the time of a meal, as the gallbladder
contracts, bile acids are released into the gut lumen. These bile acids enable lipids to be
absorbed efficiently. Second, the liver plays a major role in substrate metabolism and
allocation. It maintains nutrient blood levels at a constant level despite variations in
substrate availability. It is therefore not surprising that damage to this vital organ has a
tremendous impact on nutritional status.
0-8493-2705-9/02/$0.00+$1.50
© 2002 by CRC Press LLC 1219
2705_frame_C58 Page 1220 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 2:12 PM
Insulin/Glucagon
cAMP Glycogen
+ Glucose-1-P
+
Protein
Kinase
Glucose-6-P Glucose
Fructose-6-P
PFK-2 PFK-1 FDPase
Fructose-1-6-P
F-2,6 P2
Phosphoenopyruvate
PK
FIGURE 58.1
Hormonal regulation of glucose homeostasis in the liver. During fast, the insulin/glucagon ratio decreases. This
stimulates an increase in cAMP in the hepatocyte. cAMP activates cAMP-dependent protein kinase, which
activates glycogen phosphorylase. This enzyme leads to the breakdown of glycogen and the formation of glucose-
1-phosphate. Protein kinase also inactivates phosphofructokinase-2 (PFK-2). PFK-2 catalyzes the conversion of
Fructose-6-Phosphate to fructose-2, 6-bisphosphate (F-2, 6 P2). F-2, 6 P2 is an important activator of Phosphofruc-
tokinase 1 (PFK-1). The impaired activation of PFK-1 slows glycolysis and favors the conversion of Fructose-1-6-
P to Fructose-6-P and ultimately favors the formation of glucose. Protein kinase also interferes with the conversion
of Phosphoenopyruvate (PEP) to Pyruvate, by blocking the enzyme pyruvate kinase (PK). This favors the forma-
tion of Fructose-1-6-P and ultimately glucose. Glucagon also stimulates gluconeogenesis, in part through carrier
mediated uptake of alanine, the major gluconeogenic amino acid. This and other gluconeogenic amino acids enter
the TCA cycle with the resultant formation of Oxaloacetate (OAA). OAA is converted to PEP and proceeds toward
the formation of Glucose-6-P and ultimately glucose. (Adapted from Brodsky IG. In: Modern Nutrition in Health
and Disease, 9th ed, Shils ME, Olson JA, Shike M, Ross AC, Eds, Williams and Wilkins, Baltimore, 1999, p. 699.)
of the fasted state. The drop in insulin decreases the activity of pyruvate kinase (Figure
58.1). This “blockage” drives the equation back to Glucose 6-phosphate and ultimately
increases hepatic output of glucose.
In the fed state, metabolic and hormonal signals change the liver’s response to carbo-
hydrates. It is estimated that between 25 and 45% of an oral glucose load is taken up by
the liver. This percentage may increase as the carbohydrate load increases.1 Glucose taken
up by the liver is largely used to replenish the glycogen depleted after an overnight fast.
2705_frame_C58 Page 1221 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 2:12 PM
Nutrient Metabolism and Support in the Normal and Diseased Liver 1221
O
CH3 C
S CoA
Fatty acid
Acetyl-CoA synthase (FAS)
CH3 CH2 CH2 C FAS
O O
O
C CH2 C Butyryl group-FAS
O S CoA
Malonyl-CoA
elongases
Butyryl group-FAS 7 Malonyl-CoA Palmitate Saturated Fatty Acids
elongases
desaturases
Unsaturated Fatty Acids
FIGURE 58.2
Fatty acid synthesis. Acetyl-CoA combines with Malonyl-CoA in the presence of the fatty acid synthase complex.
Then through a series of condensation, reduction, dehydration, and translocation steps, a four-carbon, saturated
fatty amyl compound is formed. Seven more cycles take place to form plasmatic acid (C16: 0). Other fatty acids,
both saturated and unsaturated, can be formed using a series of elongates and desaturases.
High postprandial glucose levels stimulate the pancreas to release insulin. This decreases
hepatic glucose production and increases glucose metabolism and storage. Insulin facili-
tates the synthesis of glycogen by stimulating the enzyme glycogen synthase. However,
the liver glycogen concentration also influences synthesis. As the concentration of this
storage form of glucose increases, its rate of formation slows. This phenomenon can occur
in spite of high insulin levels and glucose concentrations, emphasizing the fact that this
is a limited form of energy storage. It should also be noted that glucose is a relatively
poor substrate for glycogen synthesis. Only about 50% of “neoglycogens” come from
ingested glucose, while the remainder is derived from gluconeogenic precursors. Thus,
the amount of carbohydrates presented to the liver could exceed the ability to form
glycogen. Insulin also stimulates glucose oxidation by increasing pyruvate dehydrogenase,
which converts pyruvate to acetyl-CoA. When the acetyl-CoA generated by glycolysis is
not needed for oxidative phosphorylation, it is converted to fatty acids and ultimately to
triglycerides3 (Figure 58.2).
FIGURE 58.3
Fatty acid transport. Co-lipase attaches to the lipid droplet and then binds lipase, the principal enzyme of
triglyceride digestion. Lipase then hydrolyzes the ester bonds of the tryglycerides forming free fatty acids. The
fatty acids are taken up by the lipophilic inner core of the micelle. The outer core of the micelle is hydrophilic,
allowing for this particle to traverse the unstirred water layer of the intestine. The fatty acids in the inner core
of the micelle are placed in approximation to the lipid soluble membrane of the enterocyte, allowing for diffusion
across the enterocyte membrane. (Adapted from Reference 5.)
receptors in the terminal ileum and transported back to the liver via the enterohepatic
circulation. Some unabsorbed bile acids are excreted into the feces.5
In the enterocyte, fatty acids are reesterified into triglycerides and packaged into lipo-
proteins called chylomicrons. Chylomicrons are secreted into the lymphatics, travel
through the thoracic duct to the superior vena cava, and are then circulated to target tissues.
Chylomicrons are part of the exogenous transport system for lipids. The endogenous
system is comprised of three main carriers, VLDL, LDL, and HDL.5,6 Many of the protein
components of these lipoproteins, called apoproteins, are also synthesized in the liver.
The liver can also manufacture triglycerides from fatty acids synthesized by repetitive
additions of two carbon fragments, derived from Acetyl-CoA, to malonyl CoA, or from
non-esterified fatty acids removed from the blood.3 Triglycerides synthesized by the liver
are transported by the lipoprotein LDL to target tissues. Similarly, cholesterol synthesized
in the liver is taken by the LDL carrier to target tissues. Peripheral tissues transport
cholesterol back to the liver for excretion by the gallbladder through the action of HDL.
Nutrient Metabolism and Support in the Normal and Diseased Liver 1223
are either essential or non-essential. The distinguishing feature between these two types
of amino acids is the ability of the body to synthesize their carbon skeleton. Essential
amino acids have a carbon skeleton that cannot be synthesized de novo and must be
obtained from the diet.
The first step in the catabolic process of most amino acids is the removal of the α-amino
group from the carbon skeleton. This occurs via a pathway known as transamination. In
the liver, most of α-amino groups derived from ingested protein, muscle protein, or protein
from other tissues are separated from the parent carbon skeleton, leaving a ketoacid and
an amino group. This amino group is combined with α-ketogluterate to form glutamate.
Glutamate then undergoes oxidative deamination in the mitochondria, yielding the pro-
tonated form of ammonia (NH4+). The NH4+ is a co-substrate in forming carbamoyl phos-
phatase. It then enters the urea cycle. As ammonia is toxic to animals, the urea cycle
enzymes, also located largely in the liver, allow excretion of this harmful metabolite (Figure
58.4). Transamination can also occur between other amino acids. The presence of transam-
inase enzymes in the liver ensures that the liver is able to conserve essential amino acids
and interconvert nonessential amino acids. Although most amino acid catabolism occurs
in the liver, the three amino acids with branched side chains (leucine, valine, and isoleu-
cine) are particularly noteworthy. They are oxidized as fuels to be used primarily by
extrahepatic tissue, particularly muscle, adipose, kidney, and brain. These extrahepatic
tissues contain a single aminotransferase not present in the liver. This acts on all three
branched chain amino acids (BCAAs) to produce the corresponding α-ketoacid.
Amino acid carbohydrate skeletons can metabolize to pyruvate or intermediates of the
tricarboxylic acid cycle. These can be converted into glucose and are called glucogenic
amino acids. These precursors contribute to a process known as gluconeogenesis. In
humans, gluconeogenesis occurs largely in the liver, and to a much smaller extent in the
renal cortex. Since some tissues in the body are obligate glucose utilizers, this pathway is
extremely important during periods of relative glucose deficiency. It maintains hepatic
glucose output to glucose-utilizing tissues.8,9
The liver absorbs amino acids from plasma to be utilized in protein synthesis. The most
abundant plasma protein secreted by the liver is albumin. Albumin is the most important
regulator of plasma oncotic pressure and is the principal transport protein for many
endogenous and exogenous substances. The liver also produces transport proteins for
lipids (lipoproteins), iron (transferrin), and copper (caeruloplasmin) as well as steroid
hormone-binding proteins, thyroid hormone-binding proteins, and several vitamin-bind-
ing proteins. An equally essential role for the liver is the synthesis of many of the coag-
ulation and fibrinolysis proteins. The liver is also the primary site of synthesis of the
complement system that plays an important role in host defense against infectious agents.
Finally, it is the major site of synthesis of protease inhibitors, inhibitors of coagulation and
fibrinolysis, as well as many other proteins involved in immunomodulation, drug binding,
and other aspects of the acute phase response.10
COO COO
+ transamination
H3N-C-H C O
H3N +
R R
Amino Acids from α-Keto
ingested proteins acids
Glutamate α-Ketoglutarate
Hepatocyte
α-Ketoglutarate
Citrulline
Ornithin
Transcarbamylase
Carbamoyl Urea
Glutamate NH4
phosphate
Ornithine cycle
Carbamoyl
phosphate
synthetase I
α-Ketoglutarate
Mitochondria
Urea
FIGURE 58.4
NH3 Metabolism. Amino acids from ingested proteins are transaminated to yield NH3 and α-keto acids. The
amino group is then transferred to α-ketogluterate to form glutamate. Glutamate is transported to the hepatocyte
mitochondria where α-ketogluterate is reformed with the loss of NH4. This ammonium group combines with
HCO3 and 2 ATPs to form carbamoyl phosphate. Carbamoyl phosphate enters the urea cycle, is converted to
urea after a series of reactions. (Adapted from Nelson DL, Cox MM. In: Principals of Biochemistry, 2nd ed,
Lehninger AL, Nelson DL, Cox MM, Eds, Worth Publishers, New York, 1993, pg 506.)
absence of oral intake. However, hypoglycemia is rare in liver disease, usually seen only
in fulminant hepatic failure or in the terminal stages of chronic hepatic insufficiency. This
is probably due to the tremendous reserve capacity of the liver to produce glucose, with
approximately 20% of the hepatic mass needed to maintain normal glucose levels in the
fasted state.1
More commonly, fasting glucose levels in patients with liver disease are normal or high.
Despite high levels of glucagon seen in these patients, increased hepatic glucose production
does not seem to be a contributing factor. Unless there is coexistent diabetes, studies suggest
that hepatic glucose production in liver disease varies from normal to 20-40% lower than
normal. However, diabetic cirrhotics with fasting hyperglycemia displayed increased
hepatic glucose production, which was not appropriately decreased by insulin.4
Since glycogen synthesis is impaired in liver disease and glycogen stores are rapidly
depleted in the fasted state, patients with liver disease more rapidly transition to gluco-
2705_frame_C58 Page 1225 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 2:12 PM
Nutrient Metabolism and Support in the Normal and Diseased Liver 1225
neogeneisis and ketogenesis to fill their glucose and energy needs. It is estimated that
gluconeogenesis accounts for about 67% of hepatic glucose production, with the remainder
coming from glycogenlysis. The rapid switch to a fatty acid/ketone economy for energy
needs is an adaptive response, as it decreases reliance on hepatic glucose production.
Glucose production by the damaged liver may be limited due to decreased glycogen stores
and potentially diminished delivery of gluconeogenic precursors to the liver.1
After glucose ingestion, many patients with liver disease have abnormally elevated
blood glucose concentrations.1 In fact, 60 to 80% of patients with cirrhosis are glucose
intolerant, and 10 to 30% eventually develop frank diabetes.4 In a recent study, non-diabetic
cirrhotics given a mixed meal had elevated blood glucose levels in spite of a fivefold
increase in blood insulin levels.12 It appears that in these glucose-intolerant patients, both
oxidative and nonoxidative glucose disposal is impaired.1,4 The oxidative impairment of
glucose utilization, the less significant of the two abnormalities, is due in part to the
preferential utilization of fatty acids seen in this patient population. The generation of
Acetyl-CoA from the metabolism of fatty acids inhibits pyruvate dehydrogenase resulting
in a diminution of pyruvate oxidation.4 The nonoxidative utilization of glucose is essen-
tially the formation of glycogen. In spite of hyperinsulinemia seen in these patients, they
demonstrate peripheral insulin resistance. As such, glucose uptake by muscle and stimu-
lation of glycogen synthesis is significantly impaired. This accounts for most of the
decreased glucose disposal and consequent glucose intolerance seen in these patients, as
hepatic glucose production is still normal in the basal state and normally suppressed by
insulin.1,4 In contrast, liver disease patients with diabetes not only have abnormalities with
glucose disposal but also are unable to appropriately suppress hepatic glucose suppres-
sion, suggesting a relative lack of insulin. Petrides et al. hypothesized that patients with
liver disease become frankly diabetic when the pancreatic β-cells cannot meet the increased
demand for insulin secretion due to insulin resistance.4
of cirrhotic patients decreases but still remains elevated compared to controls. The
increased reliance on endogenous fat during fasting and the continued high rate of fat
oxidation in spite of ingestion of a mixed meal may account for the reduction in body fat
stores common in this patient population.12
Nutrient Metabolism and Support in the Normal and Diseased Liver 1227
that use age, weight, and height are standardized for normal proportioned individuals.
They do not make allowances for differences in body compartments that may occur in
liver disease. For example, if there is depletion of body fat, a common occurrence in
cirrhotics, there is a relative overrepresentation of metabolically active tissue per unit mass.
If this were the case, formula equations may predict a lower energy expenditure relative
to a measured value. One method to address this potential discrepancy is to correct for
lean body mass by using creatinine secretion. Since the secretion of creatinine roughly
correlates with the presence of lean body tissue, standardization to this value should help
account for discrepancies in somatic protein/fat composition. However, it should be kept
in mind that creatine, the precursor of creatinine, is synthesized in the liver. Thus, signif-
icant liver disease can compromise the urinary recovery of creatinine and result in an
underestimation of the amount of metabolically active tissue. This could subsequently
result in an underestimation of lean body tissue and an overestimation of metabolic rate
when a measured value is compared to a predicted value corrected for fat-free mass.14
Alternatively, fluid retention tends to increase weight or body surface area; formulas
that standardize energy expenditure on these values overestimate the predicted metabolic
rate compared to a measured value.15 More recently, researchers have attempted to mea-
sure fat-free mass, since this a more accurate indicator of metabolically active tissue. They
use this variable in predictive formulas for resting energy expenditure. However, even
with these more complicated formulas, only 50 to 60% of the observed variation between
measured and predicted values can be accounted for.
Most studies have failed to show significant differences in energy expenditure between
cirrhotics and control patients.14,16,17 However, others, such as in a study by Madden, have
demonstrated that the mean measured resting energy expenditure in patients with cirrho-
sis is significantly higher than in controls when adjusted for body weight. Overall, using
multiple predictive formulae, 12% of the patients were considered hypometabolic while
30% were determined to be hypermetabolic. A recent comprehensive study by Müller
found a similar proportion of hypermetabolic patients (33.8%). Unfortunately, neither
author could identify the hypermetabolic patients on the basis of demographic or clinical
variables.18,19 A possible exception to this is primary biliary cirrhosis patients, in whom
worsening disease was associated with increased resting energy expenditure and pro-
longed diet-induced thermogenesis after a meal.20
Müller also demonstrated that increased levels of catecholamines in hypermetabolic
patients could be a contributing factor in increased metabolic rate. He further determined
that for these patients, a propranolol infusion resulted in a pronounced decrease in energy
expenditure.19
Clinically, determining hypermetabolism is important for these patients, as they are
more likely to present malnourished, and this clinical status may be further complicated
by difficulty in nutrient assimilation. Thus, hypermetabolism may further negatively
impact outcome. A study assessing preoperative risk factors in patients undergoing liver
transplantation associated hypermetabolism and diminished body cell mass (<35% of
body weight) with reduced survival after liver transplantation.21 Given the clinical impli-
cations of determining an accurate metabolic rate in cirrhotic patients and the fact that
this rate cannot be accurately determined from formulas and clinical variables, many
authors are advocating that the metabolic rate should be measured in cirrhotic individuals
to accurately determine this value.18,19
depending in part on the criteria used to determine PCM.22 In the Veterans Administration
Cooperative study on alcoholic hepatitis, malnutrition was a ubiquitous finding and
correlated with dietary intake and severity of liver dysfunction.23,24 In hospitalized patients
with less severe alcoholic and nonalcoholic liver disease, the prevalence of PCM ranged
from 30 to 40%. It should be noted that much of the data on malnutrition is derived from
the alcoholic liver disease population. However, a recent study by Sarin et al.24 demon-
strated that malnutrition in patients with alcoholic and nonalcoholic cirrhosis is very
common, and present to the same degree. The patterns of malnutrition appear to be
different depending on the underlying liver disease. Patients with nonalcoholic cirrhosis
demonstrated decreases in both fat and muscle mass, while those with alcoholic liver
disease demonstrated a greater decrease in muscle mass but relative sparing of fat stores.
The authors of the accompanying editorial hypothesize that this discrepancy may be due
to the “precirrhotic nutritional status” of the patient or to toxic effects of alcohol on meal-
stimulated protein secretion. They also speculated that alcohol might lead to changes in
intestinal permeability, which could potentially lead to transmigration of intestinal bacteria
or toxins with resultant release of proteolytic cytokines.25 The authors determined that the
dietary intake of both groups was reduced to a similar degree.24
Nutritional Assessment
The presence of liver disease may affect many of the traditional modalities used to evaluate
the nutritional status of patients. Visceral protein stores can be greatly influenced by acute
and/or extensive damage to the liver. Liver injury can result in decreases in visceral
markers that may be unrelated to the nutritional status of the patient, and may therefore
not improve significantly with nutritional intervention. In fact, serum visceral protein
appears to correlate better with the degree of liver damage than with the nutritional status
of the patient. Chronic liver disease can also cause alterations in cellular immunity and
total lymphocyte count independent of protein malnutrition.22 Furthermore, abnormal
immunologic reactivity, again independent of nutritional status, is a prominent feature of
chronic autoimmune hepatitis, primary biliary cirrhosis, and possibly viral hepatitis.27
From a clinical standpoint, a thorough nutritional evaluation should be performed and
repeated serially. A bedside assessment of somatic protein stores and subcutaneous fat
stores usually provides a reliable nutritional assessment.26 Other important aspects of this
subjective global assessment tool adapted for liver patients included the presence of
encephalopathy, edema, weight change, renal insufficiency, constipation, satiety, and dif-
ficulty chewing. Anthropometric data, specifically the assessment of fat stores by tricep
or subscapular skinfold thickness and the assessment of somatic stores by midarm muscle
circumference or body weight to height, can yield valuable information. Assessments
should be performed by a skilled person, as there can be problems with reproducibility.
Additionally, apparent or subclinical edema can lead to a potential underestimation of the
severity of protein and fat losses.27 The creatinine height index is generally a good indicator
of lean body mass in patients with liver disease. However, it, too, has shortcomings, as
there is frequently associated renal dysfunction which could impair collection. Further-
more, with severe liver disease there can be a decrease in creatinine formation, as its
substrate creatine is synthesized in the liver. Both of these circumstances could result in
underestimation of lean body tissue.
In summary, given the numerous limitations of standard nutritional parameters in
patients with liver disorders, it is preferable to rely on collective information generated
from the use of several parameters used simultaneously and on a serial basis.27
2705_frame_C58 Page 1229 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 2:12 PM
Nutrient Metabolism and Support in the Normal and Diseased Liver 1229
Nutrient Metabolism and Support in the Normal and Diseased Liver 1231
hepatic encephalopathy. Fluid retention has not been a major problem.34 It should also
be noted that there is no published study demonstrating an adverse effect of nutritional
supplementation. These studies point out that nutritional supplementation, though very
important, is only one of several factors likely to determine the ultimate outcome in liver
disease patients. As this is a factor that can be influenced, at least to some degree, and
there do not seem to be untoward effects when used appropriately, attention to nutrition,
with supplementation when indicated, should be considered a mainstay in the therapy
for these patients.
The use of branched chain amino acids (BCAA) has been advocated in the treatment of
liver disease. It has been suggested that 50 to 60% of patients with chronic liver failure
will tolerate 60 to 80 g/d of a standard amino acid mixture as part of a parenteral nutrition
regimen. The remainder, in particular those with grade III or IV hepatic encephalopathy,
seem to respond better to with modified solutions containing BCAA.54 One rationale for
their use in hepatic encephalopathy concerns the high aromatic amino acid (AA)-to-BCAA
ratio in the blood of patients with decompensated liver disease. This is primarily due to
poor metabolism of AAs by the failing/injured liver. Conversely, BCAAs are deaminated
mainly by skeletal muscle, and so have an alternate pathway for their metabolism. Since
both of these amino acids compete for the same transmembrane transport system in order
to cross the blood brain barrier, the increase in AA/BCAA in the blood favors the transport
of AAs. In the central nervous system these AAs can be metabolized to false neurotrans-
mitters (octopamine and phenylethanolamine) and thus contribute to hepatic encephal-
opathy. Additionally, infusion of BCAAs has been shown to reduce blood ammonia
levels.46 The branch chain amino acids have also been reported to augment protein syn-
thesis in humans. Leucine, or more specifically, its deamination product, βα-keto-isocap-
rioic acid, is thought to have an important role in stimulating protein synthesis and
inhibiting protein degradation.46,47 Thus, it would seem that a BCAA mixture would be
an ideal mode of therapy in patients with liver disease.
Several studies have looked at the use of BCAA in the treatment of hepatic encephalop-
athy. The largest study was by Cerra et al., who concluded that the BCAA-enriched formula
resulted in more rapid and complete recovery from encephalopathy as compared to the
standard treatment of neomycin. The treatment group also showed improvements in nitro-
gen balance and survival. Interestingly, the control group was not given any protein, and
their sole source of kcalories was a 25% dextrose solution. Both the BCAA and dextrose
solutions were started at 1.5 liters and advanced to a maximum of 3 liters over the ensuing
days.48 Unfortunately, the lack of protein in the control group challenges the validity of the
nitrogen balance data and perhaps the mortality differences in these populations.
Overall, studies regarding the use of BCAA in encephalopathy have yielded mixed
results.47,69 A recent meta-analysis by Naylor et al. suggests that BCAA solutions have a
significant and beneficial effect on recovery from hepatic encephalopathy, though the
authors state that analysis is difficult, given the diversity of the studies involved. The
same authors were unable to verify an advantage of BCAA solutions on mortality.54
Another extensive analysis by Eriksson et al. presented a much more skeptical view of
the benefits of BCAA solutions in either acute or chronic encephalopathy. The authors
proposed that problems with data analysis, biased assignment of patients to groups in
regard to etiology of the encephalopathy, and study design disallowed any firm conclusion
that BCAA or their keto analogues were beneficial.55 Thus, though the use of BCAA-
enriched supplements may lead to mild improvement in encephalopathy compared to
standard therapy, other positive effects are not consistently demonstrated. The benefits
do not seem to justify routine use of this enriched formula at the present time.
An exception to this may be the patient with chronic encephalopathy who is intolerant
to increases in protein or standard amino acid solutions. Eriksson’s analysis did concede
2705_frame_C58 Page 1232 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 2:12 PM
Nutritional Recommendations
In multiple diverse populations, malnutrition can negatively impact infection, wound
healing, and organ function. The great majority of patients who present for liver disease
are malnourished, and the severity of their malnutrition has prognostic implications.
However, when studies on nutritional intervention in liver disease are considered, it is
difficult to ascertain whether nutritional intervention can positively impact the course of
the disease. A similar conclusion can be arrived at in most disease states, both acute and
chronic, in which nutritional intervention has been critically assessed. This does not
necessarily mean that nutritional intervention is not important in the individual patient.
The diverse baseline nutritional status in patients (both from a macronutrient as well as
a micronutrient perspective), the differences in insult severity, and the myriad of therapies
and approaches given to the individual patient, explain why there does not appear to be
a guiding light for nutritional intervention. In spite of this, some general recommendations
can be made with regard to energy and protein requirements.
Energy Needs
As discussed previously, difficulties in estimating energy expenditure in cirrhotics have
been attributed to fluid retention, relative changes in body compartments, and other
variables related to metabolic abnormalities in patients with liver disease. Nonetheless,
in stable cirrhotics, various studies have measured energy expenditures ranging from
approximately 1500 to 2100 kcals/d.16,18,19 Thus, though the controversy over whether these
patients are hypermetabolic compared to controls remains unanswered, the absolute
energy requirements in these patients do not appear to be excessive. Furthermore, in the
acute setting, increases in the metabolic rate are influenced by many variables including
the severity of the insult, the presence of infection, and medications that the patient may
be receiving. These latter variables further complicate accurate extrapolation of energy
needs from formula equations. REE, or resting energy expenditure, is measurement of the
body’s daily energy expenditure, not involving activity or caloric intake. REE with indirect
calorimetry remains the most accurate and practical way of estimating total caloric needs.
In the absence of indirect calorimetry, the simplest and most accurate predictive formula
is the Schofield formula. This formula, referenced by Madden et al.,18 varies significantly
by age. In men between the ages of 30 to 60 it is as follows:
2705_frame_C58 Page 1233 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 2:12 PM
Nutrient Metabolism and Support in the Normal and Diseased Liver 1233
Most interventional studies have used a caloric intake of 2000 to 3000 kcals. In the VA
cooperative study, a level of 2500 kcalories and above was considered adequate therapy.
Alternately, values ranging from 25 kcals/kg/d (stable cirrhotic) to 45 kcals/kg/d (post-
operative cirrhotic) have been proposed.22 Excessive caloric delivery is not beneficial, as
it can create metabolic and respiratory stresses. High caloric delivery may also involve
increasing the fluids given to these usually fluid-restricted patients. Additionally, nutri-
tional repletion is not usually accomplished during hospitalization in the current medical
climate. Energy goals should thus be directed at maintenance without causing metabolic
abnormalities.
Perhaps more important than delivery of a caloric load is the mixture of the kcalories
provided. In an interesting study by Chanda and Mehendale, rats subjected to a hepato-
toxin demonstrated a decrease in hepatocellular regeneration and tissue repair when given
15% glucose in drinking water.56 Conversely, in a similar experiment, rats given palmitic
acid and L-carnitine were protected against similar doses of that hepatotoxin. The authors
suggest that the regenerating liver uses fatty acids as the main source of cellular energy.
The increased demand for cellular energy in the form of ATP needed to support hepato-
cellular division is essentially derived from fatty acid oxidation.57
It is also interesting to note that the two outwardly “negative studies” doing BCAA
supplementation in a test group were compared to a control group on a lipid-based
formula. It is possibile that the lack of efficacy in these studies was due to the lipids
conveying some advantage to the control group, thus decreasing by comparison the
effectiveness of the BCAA solution in the treatment group.
Other interesting animal data suggests that lipids, specifically saturated fatty acids, may
offer protection against alcoholic liver injury. Nanji et al. found that diets enriched with
saturated fatty acids (palm oil) reverse the pathological changes induced by ethanol.
Conversely, omega-3 fatty acids (fish oil) do not improve the severity of alcohol-induced
injury. The authors suggest that the protective effects may be explained in part by differ-
ences in lipid peroxidation. Dietary fat helps to modify the expression of cytochrome p450
2E1, which contributes to NADPH-dependant lipid peroxidation. The animals fed the
diets rich in saturated fatty acids demonstrated less induction of the CYP2E1 enzyme
system.58 Alternately, the protective effect may be through positive changes in eicosanoid
metabolism manifested as an increase in the prostacycline-to-thromboxane B2 ratio. In
previous studies, these authors found that decreases in this ratio preceded the production
of pathologic liver disease.
Saturated fats are probably not the only nutrients that may have a protective effect
against liver disease. Lieber found that baboons maintained on a chronic ethanol-enriched
diet supplemented with polyunsaturated phospholipids (55 to 60% of which was polyun-
saturated phosphatidylcholine [PPC]) were protected against alcohol-induced fibrosis. In
a similar study, the animals were given a purer extract, comprising 94 to 96% phosphati-
dylcholine. The researchers found that these baboons given ethanol for up to eight years
did not develop cirrhosis or septal fibrosis when fed this supplemented diet. Leiber
proposed that the phosphatidylcholine directly affects collagen metabolism and opposes
oxidative stress.3,59,60 Unfortunately, supplementing fat does not appear to be the entire
answer. In a rat model, Lieber also found that in the setting of chronic alcohol consumption,
increased triglycerides in the diet results in increased fat accumulation in the liver.3
Extrapolating from animal data, it would therefore seem that in the setting of alcoholic
liver disease, 25 to 35% of the total kcalories should be derived from a mixture of these
lipids. Thus, it would appear that the type as well as amount of fat are important consid-
erations in supplementing patients with liver disease.
2705_frame_C58 Page 1234 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 2:12 PM
Protein supplementation in the patient with acute liver injury is probably the most con-
troversial aspect of macronutreint nutritional supplementation. These patients usually dem-
onstrate somatic protein wasting and decreases in muscle strength, immune reactivity, and
protein synthesis. These deficiencies may in part be due to diminished protein stores. Also,
repair of injury, extrapolated from other clinical settings, requires adequate protein. Finally,
it has been assumed that liver regeneration is delayed when there is insufficient protein.3
In their studies of nutritional intervention in patients with alcoholic liver disease, Men-
denhall et al. have stated that all patients with alcoholic hepatitis achieved positive nitro-
gen balance with 1.2 g/kg of protein. Additionally, this intake of protein was well tolerated
in spite of severe liver disease. Encephalopathy was observed in 20% of patients, but its
occurrence did not correlate with protein intake.39 In patients with chronic liver disease,
Lieber states that positive nitrogen balance can be attained with a protein intake of 0.74 g/
kg. Thus it appears that the stringent protein restrictions often imposed on hospitalized
patients with liver disease can be eased. Protein provisions in the range of 0.6 to 0.8 g/
kg can usually be safely given during the acute setting, increasing protein delivery as
tolerated to at least 1.2 g/kg. It should be noted that the protein supplemented in Men-
denhall’s study, and the basis of his recommendations, was enriched with BCAA. Although
there have been no definitive studies comparing tolerability of standard amino acid mix-
tures to BCAA, it is possible that an individual patient with acute liver injury may tolerate
a larger quantity of protein if supplemented with BCAA supplementation. Thus, clinical
surveillance is important when increasing protein load in these patients.
Finally, the remainder of patients’ energy needs should be met with carbohydrates. As
discussed previously, insulin resistance is common in patients with cirrhosis, and this
intolerance is further exacerbated in the setting of acute injury. Therefore, providing
carbohydrates to the point of inducing metabolic aberrations is not advisable. Cirrhotics
may further benefit from complex carbohydrates to reduce insulin requirements. Complex
carbohydrates may also be advantageous in the setting of encephalopathy, as they tend
to decrease transit time and and lower colonic pH, both of which serve to decrease
ammonia absorption from the gastrointestinal tract.3
Nutritional Supplements
S-Adenosylmethionine
S-Adenosylmethionine (SAMe) is synthesized by the transfer of an adenosyl group from
ATP to the essential amino acid methionine. SAMe serves primarily as a methyl donor.
These SAMe-dependent methylations are essential for the biosynthesis of a variety of
cellular components including carnitine, phospholipids, proteins, DNA, and RNA, as well
as polyamines needed for cell regeneration.31,61 In addition, it serves as one source of
csyteine for glutathione production (Figure 58.5). Furthermore, it has been shown that
methionine metabolism is impaired in patients with liver disease and that the activity of
SAMe synthase is decreased in human cirrhotic livers.31,62,63
The administration of exogenous SAMe should be effective in liver disease. In baboons,
correction of ethanol-induced hepatic SAMe depletion with oral SAMe supplementation
resulted in a corresponding attenuation of ethanol-induced liver injury.32,64 Thus, supple-
mentation with SAMe dampens the depletion of hepatic glutathione (GSH) stores. Without
supplementation, depletion of GSH leads to inactivation of SAMe synthetase, which would
tend to further reduce GSH stores, thereby predisposing to hepatic injury.32 The studies
that have evaluated SAMe supplementation have demonstrated significant improvements
in subjective symptoms, serum markers of cholestasis, and hepatic GSH levels.32,65,66 More
recently, Mato et al. demonstrated that SAMe supplementation could improve survival or
delay time to transplantation compared to controls. These results demonstrated a positive
2705_frame_C58 Page 1235 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 2:12 PM
Nutrient Metabolism and Support in the Normal and Diseased Liver 1235
Methionine Phosphatidylcholine
ATP
Tetrahydrofolate Pi+PPi Phosphatidylethanolamine
S-Adenosyl-Methionine
Acceptor
Methyl-tetrahydrofolate
Methylated
acceptor
Homocysteine S-Adenosyl-homocysteine
Serine
Cystathionine
trend in favor of the supplemented group, but achieved significance only when patients
with advanced cirrhotic liver disease (Child C) patients were excluded.31,67
Supplementation with SAMe shows significant promise in the treatment of liver disease
and will undoubtedly be investigated with larger studies in the future.
Zinc
Zinc (Zn) is the most abundant intracellular trace element. It is involved in a multitude
of diverse catalytic, structural, and regulatory functions. Many physiologic functions
require zinc, including protein metabolism, normal immune functioning and wound heal-
ing, neurosensory function such as cognition and taste, and membrane stability.68,69
Hypozincemia is common in various types of liver disease.69 The deficiency is multifac-
torial and is believed to involve poor dietary intake and impaired intestinal absorption
(possibly due to a cytokine-induced intestinal metallothionein, which dampens zinc
absorption). Additionally, there is decreased affinity of albumin for zinc in cirrhotics, which
might influence bioavailability and lead to increased urinary losses of zinc. Finally,
increased cytokine or hormonal concentrations may lead to altered zinc metabolism.69
Zinc deficiency may play a role in increasing plasma ammonia levels. Zinc deficiency
was shown to decrease activity of glutamate dehydrogenase and ornithine transcarbam-
2705_frame_C58 Page 1236 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 2:12 PM
ylase (OTC), enzymes important in normal nitrogen metabolism (Figure 58.4). Urea syn-
thetic capacity is believed to be reduced in zinc-deficient patients due to reduced OTC
activity, as zinc acts as a cofactor in the activity of this enzyme. Zinc supplementation
speeds up the kinetics of nitrogen conversion from amino acids into urea in cirrhotics.11
Zinc deficiency also increases muscle glutamine synthetase and adenosine monophos-
phate deaminase, enzymes that increase ammonia production from aspartate.70
Although zinc deficiency may play a role in some of the altered taste sensations seen
in liver disease, it is unlikely to be a major cause of anorexia in liver disease. It is much
more likely that the anorexia seen in this disease is cytokine mediated.69 Conversely, zinc
deficiency, at least in part, does appear to play a role in immune dysfunction and perhaps
in delayed wound healing. The latter may occur through the effect of zinc on insulin-like
growth factor.69 In regard to protein synthesis, a recent study showed lower serum albumin
levels in children undergoing liver transplantation than in other transplant patients in
whom serum zinc levels were normal. This correlates with the findings by Bates and
McClain, which demonstrated improvement or normalization of serum transport proteins
in zinc-deficient patients on parenteral nutrition when supplemented with zinc.71,72
Selenium
There are at least eleven selenoproteins; the most well known class is the glutathione
peroxidases. These proteins are important participants in the body’s antioxidant defenses.
Selenium concentrations have been reported to be lower in patients with cirrhosis com-
pared to healthy controls. Selenium deficiency could therefore contribute to the morbidity
of cirrhosis. This deficiency could be easily addressed with supplementation. However, a
recent study by Burk et al. reported that, though plasma selenium is indeed depressed in
patients with cirrhosis, the changes noted in plasma selenoproteins of cirrhotics are not
the same as those found in selenium-deficient subjects without liver disease. Functionally,
these patients had an increase in the plasma gluatathione concentration, arguing against
a true selenium deficiency.73,74
Carnitine
Fatty acids are the preferred fuel for patients with cirrhosis. Since carnitine is essential for
the mitochondrial use of long-chain fatty acids for energy production, decreased avail-
ability of this quaternary amine may lead to energy deficiency in cirrhotics. Deficiency
can arise from poor dietary intake or disruption of carnitine biosynthesis, the last step
occurring almost exclusively in the liver. Measured levels of carnitine in patients with
chronic liver disease can be reduced or increased. The literature suggests that plasma and
tissue carnitine levels can be altered in patients with chronic liver disease, depending on
both its cause and progression.75,76
A recent study by Krahenbuhl and Reichen found that patients with chronic liver disease
are normally not carnitine deficient. They also concluded that carnitine metabolism can
be disturbed in subgroups of patients with liver disease. For example, patients with
alcoholic cirrhosis demonstrated increased plasma concentrations. Patients with primary
biliary cirrhosis were able to maintain normal plasma levels of carnitine, but demonstrated
increased renal excretion.76
Conclusion
It is clear that the relationship between nutrition and the liver is intricate and interdepen-
dent. Liver disease can result in anorexia, malabsorption, and abnormalities in nutrient
2705_frame_C58 Page 1237 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 2:12 PM
Nutrient Metabolism and Support in the Normal and Diseased Liver 1237
metabolism leading to a compromise in the nutritional status of the host. This impaired
nutritional status can impact negatively on immune function, compromise the ability of
the liver to limit the extent of hepatic insults, and retard an appropriate response to injury.
Nutritional deficiencies in patients with liver disease can range from subtle abnormalities
to advanced protein calorie malnutrition. Some degree of nutritional compromise is invari-
ably present. In treating patients with liver disease, the recognition and aggressive treat-
ment of these deficiencies is paramount. In milder forms of liver disease, this intervention
may take the form of nutrient and vitamin supplementation. In more advanced liver
disease, aggressive nutritional support, preferably in the form of enteral access and feed-
ing, may be the “controllable” factor that leads to an improved outcome.
References
1. Kruszynska YT. In: Oxford Textbook of Clinical Hepatology 2nd ed, Bircher J, Benhamou J,
McIntyre N, Rizzetto M, Rodes J, Eds, Oxford University Press, Oxford, 1999, p 257.
2. Rothman DL, Magnusson I, Katz LD, et al. Science 254: 573; 1991.
3. Lieber CS. In: Modern Nutrition in Health and Disease 9th ed, Shils ME, Olson JA, Shike M, Ross
AC, Eds, Williams and Wilkins, Baltimore, 1999, pg 1177.
4. Petrides AS, Vogt C, Schulze-Berge D, et al. Hepatology 19: 616; 1994.
5. Jones PJH, Kubnow S, In: Modern Nutrition in Health and Disease 9th ed, Shils ME, Olson JA,
Shike M, Ross AC, Eds, Williams and Wilkins, Baltimore, 1999, pg 67.
6. Harry DS, McIntyre N. In: Oxford Textbook of Clinical Hepatology 2nd ed, Bircher J, Benhamou
J, McIntyre N, Rizzetto M, Rodes J, Eds, Oxford University Press, Oxford, 1999, pg 287.
7. Ma Z, Lee SS. Hepatology 24: 451; 1996.
8. Kruszynska YT, McIntyre N. In: Oxford Textbook of Clinical Hepatology 2nd ed, Bircher J, Ben-
hamou J, McIntyre N, Rizzetto M, Rodes J, Eds, Oxford University Press, Oxford, 1999, pg 303.
9. Nelson DL, Cox MM. In: Principals of Biochemistry 2nd ed, Lehninger, Nelson, Cox, Worth
Publisher, New York, 1993, pg 506.
10. Gerok W, Gross V. In: Oxford Textbook of Clinical Hepatology 2nd ed, Bircher J, Benhamou J,
McIntyre N, Rizzetto M, Rodes J, Eds, Oxford University Press, Oxford, 1999, pg 346.
11. Haussinger D. In: Oxford Textbook of Clinical Hepatology 2nd ed, Bircher J, Benhamou J, McIntyre
N, Rizzetto M, Rodes J, Eds, Oxford University Press, Oxford, 1999, pg 325.
12. Riggio O, Merli M, Romiti A, et al. JPEN 16: 445; 1992.
13. Denninger M. In: Oxford Textbook of Clinical Hepatology 2nd ed, Bircher J, Benhamou J, McIntyre
N, Rizzetto M, Rodes J, Eds, Oxford University Press, Oxford, 1999, pg 367.
14. Schneeweiss B, Graninger W, Ferenci P, et al. Hepatology 11: 387; 1990.
15. Heymsfield SB, Waki M, Reinus J. Hepatology 11: 502; 1990.
16. McCullough AJ, Raguso C. Am J Clin Nutr 69: 1066; 1999.
17. Merli M, Riggio O, Romiti A. Hepatology 12: 106; 1990.
18. Madden AM, Morgan MY. Hepatology 30: 655; 1999.
19. Müller MJ, Böttcher J, Selberg O, et al. Am J Clin Nutr 69: 1194; 1999.
20. Green JH, Bramley PN, Losowwsky MS. Hepatology 14: 464; 1991.
21. Selberg O, Böttcher J, Tusch G, et al. Hepatology 25: 652; 1997.
22. McCullough AJ, Mullen KD, Smanik EJ. Gastro Clin N Am 18: 619; 1989.
23. Mendenhall CL, Anderson S, Weesner RE, et al. Am J Med 76: 211; 1984.
24. Sarin SK, Dhingra N, Bansal A, et al. Am J Gastro 92: 777; 1997.
25. McCullough AJ, Bugianesi E. Am J Gastro 92: 734; 1997.
26. Hasse J, Strong S, Gorman MA, et al. Nutrition 9: 339; 1993.
27. Munoz SJ. Sem in Liver Dis 11: 278; 1991.
28. McCullough AJ, Tavill AS. Sem Liver Dis 11: 265; 1991.
29. Mendenhall CL, Moritz TE, Roselle GA. Hepatology 17: 564; 1993.
30. Patek AJ, Ratnoff OD, Mankin H, et al. JAMA 138: 543; 1948.
2705_frame_C58 Page 1238 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 2:12 PM
31. Schenker S, Halff GA. Sem in Liver Dis 13: 196; 1993.
32. Lieber CS. J Hepatol 32(1): 113S; 2000.
33. Nasrallah SM, Galambos JT. Lancet ii: 1276; 1980.
34. Nompleggi DJ, Bonkovsky H. Hepatology 19: 518; 1994.
35. Mendenhall CL, Tosch T, Weesner RE. Am J Clin Nutr 43: 213; 1986.
36. Mendenhall CL, Anderson S, Weesner RE, et al. Am J Med 76: 211; 1983.
37. Silk DBA, O’Keefe SJD, Wicks C. Gut 29S; 1991.
38. Achord JL. Am J of Gastro 82: 1; 1987.
39. Mendenhall CL, Moritz TE, Roselle GA. JPEN 19: 258; 1995.
40. Bonkovsky HL, Fiellin DA, Smith GS. Am J of Gastro 86: 1200; 1991.
41. Cabre E, Rodriguez-Iglesias P, Caballeria J. Hepatology 32: 36; 2000.
42. Cabre E, Gonzalez-Huix F, Abad-Lacruz A, et al. Gastroenterology 98: 715; 1990.
43. Bonkovsky HL, Singh RH, Jafri IH, et al. Am J Gastro 86: 1209; 1991.
44. Kearns PJ, Young H, Garcia G, et al. Gastroenterology 102: 200; 1992.
45. Morgan TR. Sem Liver Dis 13: 384; 1993.
46. Weber FL, Bagby BS, Licate L, et al. Hepatology 11: 942; 1990.
47. Buse MG, Reid SS. J Clin Invest 56: 1250; 1975.
48. Cerra FB, Cheung NK, Fischer JE. JPEN 9: 88; 1985.
49. Fischer JE. JPEN 14: 249S; 1990.
50. Egberts EH, Schomerus H, Hamster W, et al. Gastroenterology 88: 887; 1985.
51. Base W, Barsigian C, Schaeffer A, et al. Hepatology 7: 324; 1987.
52. Tessari P, Zanetti M, Barazzoni R, et al. Gastrology 111: 127; 1996.
53. Charlton MR, Branched Chains Revisited Gastroenterology 111: 252; 1996.
54. Naylor CD, O’Rourke K, Detsky AS, et al. Gastroenterology 97: 1033; 1989.
55. Eriksson LS, Conn HO. Hepatology 10: 228; 1989.
56. Chanda S, Mehendale HM. FASEB J 9: 240; 1995.
57. Chanda S, Mehendale HM. Toxicology 111: 163; 1996.
58. Nanji AA, Sadrzadeh SMH, Yang EK, et al. Gastroenterology 109: 547; 1995.
59. Lieber CS, DeCarli LM, Mak KM, et al. Hepatology 12: 1390; 1990.
60. Lieber CS, Robins SJ, Li J, et al. Gastroenterology 106: 152; 1994.
61. Stipanuk MH. In: Modern Nutrition in Health and Disease 9th ed, Shils ME, Olson JA, Shike M,
Ross AC, Eds, Williams and Wilkins, Baltimore, 1999, pg 543.
62. Horowitz JH, Rypins EB, Henderson JM, et al. Gastroenterology 81: 668; 1981.
63. Duce AM, Ortiz P, Cabrero C, et al. Hepatology 8: 65; 1988.
64. Lieber CS, Casini A, Decarli LM, et al. Hepatology 11: 165; 1990.
65. Frezza M, Surrenti C, Manzillo G, et al. Gastroenterology 99: 211; 1990.
66. Vendemiale G, Altomare E, Trizio T, et al. Scan J Gastro 24: 407; 1989.
67. Mato JM, Camara J, Fernendez de Paz J, et al. J Hepatol 30: 1081; 1999.
68. King JC, Keen CL. In: Modern Nutrition in Health and Disease 9th ed, Shils ME, Olson JA, Shike
M, Ross AC, Eds, Williams and Wilkins, Baltimore, 1999, pg 223.
69. McClain CJ, Marsano L, Burk RF, et al. Sem in Liv Dis 11: 321; 1991.
70. Mullen KD, Weber FL. Sem in Liv Dis 11: 292; 1991.
71. Narkewicz MR, Krebs N, Karrer F. Hepatology 29: 830; 1999.
72. Bates J, McClain CJ. Am J Clin Nutr 34: 1655; 1981.
73. Burk RF, Levander OA. In: Modern Nutrition in Health and Disease 9th ed, Shils ME, Olson JA,
Shike M, Ross AC, Eds, Williams and Wilkins, Baltimore, 1999, pg 256.
74. Burk RF, Early DS, Hill KE, et al. Hepatology 27: 794; 1998.
75. Rebouche CJ. In: Modern Nutrition in Health and Disease 9th ed, Shils ME, Olson JA, Shike M,
Ross AC, Eds, Williams and Wilkins, Baltimore, 1999, pg 505.
76. Krahenbuhl S, Reichen J. Hepatology 25: 148; 1996.
77. Brodsky IG. In: Modern Nutrition in Health and Disease 9th ed, Shils ME, Olson JA, Shike M,
Ross AC, Eds, Williams and Wilkins, Baltimore, 1999, pg 699.
78. Nelson DL, Cox MM. In: Principals of Biochemistry 2nd ed, Lehninger AL, Nelson DL, Cox
MM, Eds, Worth Publishers, New York, 1993, pg 506.
2705_frame_C59 Page 1239 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 2:13 PM
59
Nutrition and the Pancreas: Physiology and
Interventional Strategies
Mark T. De Meo
Introduction
The pancreas plays a major role in nutrient digestion as well as in the control of interme-
diate metabolism. Patients with pancreatic disease will likely have their nutritional homeo-
stasis compromised with both macronutrient and micronutrient deficiencies. This section
will explore the effects of a diseased pancreas on nutritional health and nutritional inter-
ventions that may be beneficial to patients with a diseased or inflamed pancreas.
Carbohydrate Digestion
Dietary carbohydrates are an important component of daily caloric intake in adults.
Ingested carbohydrates take three major forms: monosaccarides such as fructose; disaccha-
rides such as lactose and sucrose; and polysaccharides, of which starch is the predominant
form. Monosaccharides are absorbed directly by the normal small bowel mucosa. Disac-
charides require the action of enzymes called disaccharidases, found in the brush border
0-8493-2705-9/02/$0.00+$1.50
© 2002 by CRC Press LLC 1239
2705_frame_C59 Page 1240 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 2:13 PM
TABLE 59.1
Digestive Enzymes Secreted by the Pancreas
Amylase Splits alpha 1-4 glycosidic linkages of dietary polysaccharides
Trypsin Cleaves internal bonds with a preference for positively charged amino acids
Chymotrypsin Cleaves internal bonds with a preference for amino acids with aromatic side groups
Elastase Cleaves internal bonds with a preference for amino acids with aliphatic side chains
Carboxypeptidase A Cleaves carboxy-terminal amino acids
Carboxypeptidase B Cleaves carboxy-terminal amino acids with a preference for peptide bonds after arginine
or lysine residues
Lipase Preferentially hydrolyzes the 1 & 3 position of dietary triglycerides
Colipase Binds to the lipid/aqueous interface between the emulsion and the unstirred water layer
and also binds to lipase; this allows for the approximation of lipase to dietary
triglycerides and facilitates digestion
Phospholipase A2 Cleaves the phospholipid at the 2 position to yield a lysophosphoglyceride and a fatty
acid
Cholesterol esterase Cleaves esterfied fatty acid from cholesterol moiety
From Lowe, M.E. In Physiology of the Gastrointestinal Tract, 3rd ed., Johnson, L.R. et al., Eds., Raven Press, New
York, 1994, p. 1531, with permission.
of mucosal cells lining the small bowel. The disaccharidases break down these small
carbohydrates into their component sugars prior to absorption. Starches are much larger
molecules of repeating glucose molecules joined by either a C1-4 or C1-6 linkage (Figure
59.1). Starches require digestion prior to absorption.
Digestion of starch begins with the release of salivary amylase in the mouth. However,
salivary amylase becomes neutralized quickly by gastric acid. Starch then passes to the
duodenum where α-amylase, secreted by the pancreas, continues the digestive process.
1-4 linkage
amylase
+
amylose maltotriose maltose
1-6 linkage
amylase
OR
Enterocyte Na Glucose
Enterocyte
FIGURE 59.1
Mechanism of monosaccharide absorption. Monosaccharides can be absorbed directly by the small bowel
mucosa. Disaccharides are futher metabolized by brush border disaccharidases. Polysaccharides are cleaved by
amylase at the 1-4 but not the 1-6 linkages forming oligosaccharides. These oligosaccharides are cleaved by
brush border enzymes to their constituent monosaccharides.
2705_frame_C59 Page 1241 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 2:13 PM
Pancreatic amylase cleaves the 1-4 glucose linkages but not the 1-6 linkages or the 1-4
linkages juxtaposed to the 1-6 links. This hydrolysis results in the formation of large
oligosaccharides, with an average chain length of about eight glucose units with one or
more 1-6 linkages. These oligosaccharides are hydrolyzed by intestinal brush border
enzymes into their constituent monosaccharides. The resultant monosaccharides are trans-
ported into the mucosal epithelial cell.1,2
Protein Digestion
Protein digestion begins in the stomach with the nonspecific actions of pepsin and hydro-
chloric acid. Enzymes secreted from the pancreas also play a major role in protein diges-
tion. These enzymes are released in the form of zymogens or inactivated enzymes.
Trypsinogen is activated by enterokinase, which is released from the intestinal mucosa.
The active enzyme, trypsin, then activates the proenzyme forms of chymotrypsin, elastase,
and carboxypeptidase A and B. Trypsin, chymotrypsin, and elastase are called endopep-
tidases, as they cleave internal bonds. Interluminal digestion of protein results in the
generation of free amino acids and oligopeptides. Oligopeptides are further hydrolyzed
by the membrane-bound oligopeptidases of the enterocyte brush border.3
Lipid Digestion
Lipid digestion begins in the oral cavity with the secretion of lingual lipase and the
mechanical effects of mastication. In the stomach, gastric lipase is released and mixes with
lingual lipase. In addition, gastric contractions cause a mechanical grinding of the ingested
fat, resulting in the formation of an emulsion. An emulsion is a suspension of enzymatically
partially digested and mechanically disrupted fat droplets in liquid. The emulsion acquires
a coating comprised of phospholipids, bile acids, and triglycerides which serves to stabilize
the fat globule. This stabilized emulsion ultimately passes into the duodenum.
Pancreatic lipase, the principal enzyme of triglyceride digestion, hydrolyzes ester bonds
at the 1 and 3 positions of the glycerol moiety. However, in the presence of bile acids, this
enzymatic process is inefficient. Another enzyme secreted by the pancreas, colipase, avidly
binds to the triglyceride/aqueous interface of the emulsion and also has a binding site
for lipase. Colipase thus ensures the adhesion of lipase to the lipid droplet and increases
the efficiency of the latter enzyme in the digestion of triglycerides. Phospholipase A2 is
also secreted by the pancreas and acts upon ingested phospholipids to yield a fatty acid
and a lysophosphatidylcholine (Figure 59.2). Finally, cholesterol esterase hydrolyzes an
esterafied fatty acid from the parent cholesterol molecule.
Once hydrolyzed, lipid products have to traverse the unstirred water layer of the gut
prior to being absorbed by the mucosal absorptive cell. However, since fat is not water
soluble, fat digestion products have difficulty crossing this water layer. Bile acids, secreted
by the liver, greatly facilitate this diffusion. Bile acids are effective because they have a
hydrophilic (water-soluble) end and one hydrophobic or lipophilic end (water-insoluble
or, conversely, lipid-soluble). These bile acids, when secreted in sufficient quantity, form
micelles, which are small spheres with an outward hydrophilic projection and an inner
lipophilic core. The products of fat digestion pass into the fat-soluble core while the outer
layer remains soluble in the unstirred water layer. This lipid-rich conduit is able to traverse
the unstirred water layer and bring the inner lipid core into proximity with the mucosal
absorptive cell membrane, which is largely comprised of lipids. Once in contact with the
lipid membrane, the micelle core lipids diffuse into the endothelial absorptive cell. This
2705_frame_C59 Page 1242 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 2:13 PM
O
CH2 O C
O
CH O C
O
CH2 O P O CH2 N(CH3)3
O
Phospholipase A2
O
CH2 O C
O
CH O H + HO C
O
CH2 O P O CH2 N(CH3)3
O
FIGURE 59.2
Phospholipase A2 action. Phospholipase A2 hydrolyzes the phospholipid at position 2 to yield a fatty acid, and a
lysophospatidylcholine and a fatty acid. (Adapted from Linscheer WG, Vergroesen AJ. In: Modern Nutrition in
Health and Disease 8th ed, Shils ME, Olson JA, Shike M, Ross AC, Eds, Williams and Wilkins, Baltimore, 1999, pg. 47.)
“shuttling of lipids” from the lumen, where digestion takes place, to the absorptive
enterocyte membrane, greatly facilitates lipid absorption.4,5
Maldigestion
Decreases in enzyme and bicarbonate secretion parallel progressive injury to the pancreas.
Preliminary studies in patients with pancreatic insufficiency suggest that 5 to 10% of
normal postprandial enzyme output by the pancreas is sufficient to maintain normal
digestion.9,10 Maldigestion does not proceed equally among the three macronutrients.
Fat maldigestion is invariably the first to become clinically manifest as nonpancreatic
mechanisms do not perform well in lipid digestion. However, there is some compensation
for fat digestion, such as to the action of small amounts of lingual or gastric lipases.
Given these compensatory mechanisms, an estimated 50% of dietary fat is absorbed.11
The synthesis and secretion of pancreatic lipase is also more impaired in the damaged
pancreas compared to other enzymes. Additionally, lipase is much more sensitive to
inactivation in an acidic milieu. Thus, a corresponding decrease in the production of
bicarbonate by the damaged gland results in a greater deactivation of lipase. Finally,
lipase, once secreted, is more rapidly degraded in the intestinal lumen than the other
pancreatic enzymes.
When fat malabsorption is present, the standard for the diagnosis is the finding of greater
than 7 g of fat per day in stool collected over a three-day period. Prior to obtaining the
specimen, the patient should consume 100 g fat/day for three days and continue on this
diet during the three days of collection.12
Malabsorption
Malabsorption occurs secondary to the effects of chronic pancreatitis on micelle formation.
The failure of the damaged pancreas to secrete sufficient bicarbonate to neutralize the
stomach’s acidic chyme causes precipitation of bile acids. This impairs micelle formation,
which leads to decreased solubility and absorption of ingested fat. A diminished secretion
of pancreatic enzymes lessens the bactericidal effect of these enzymes and can result in
bacterial overgrowth. The bacteria deconjugate bile acids, which leads to impaired micelle
formation, again resulting in malabsorption. Finally, associated complications such as
diabetes and cirrhosis can also impair absorption. The former promotes bacterial over-
growth and the latter impairs synthesis of bile acids. Additionally, when diabetes compli-
cates pancreatitis, the nutrient wasting and relatively high glucagon-to-insulin ratio
promote malnutrition.
Many patients with chronic pancreatitis have low serum albumin and cholesterol. The
latter is in part due to a malabsorption of bile acids which causes increased demand to
form bile acids from cholesterol. Other contributing factors include a decrease in the
consumption of cholesterol-containing food and malabsorption of luminal cholesterol.
Blood fatty acid profiles are also abnormal and can lead to several of the abnormalities
2705_frame_C59 Page 1244 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 2:13 PM
that are seen in this disease. Specifically, the blood levels of linoleic acid and arachidonic
acid are elevated, while those of eicosapentanoic acid and docosahexanoic acid are
increased. There is also a compensatory increase in palmitoleic acid. Polyunsaturated fatty
acids play an important role in vascular endothelial cells and platelets in coagulation and
thrombus formation. Thus, abnormalities in the levels of these lipids may impact on
hemostasis. Finally, the serum concentration of fat-soluble vitamins is low due to poor
intake and malabsorption.13
A recent study found a slightly greater metabolic rate in patients with chronic pancreatitis
compared to a malnourished control group, even when corrected for fat-free mass. There
was also a difference within the chronic pancreatis group between those who were normally
nourished and those who were undernourished, with the latter group being more “hyper-
catabolic.” This increased resting energy expenditure was seen in over 60% of the stable
population with chronic pancreatitis. The authors concluded that the differences were not
readily explained by infection, alcohol use, or nicotine use. They suggested that this unex-
plained metabolic status might contribute to the malnutrition seen in this disease.14
Patients with pancreatic cancer are at particularly high risk for nutritional problems.
They have the highest incidence of weight loss of any group of patients with cancer, with
approximately 80 to 90% losing weight during the course of their illness.15,16 The devel-
opment of cachexia and weight loss, which are poor prognostic variables in this disease,16
is due in part to damage to an organ that is crucial to nutrient digestion as well as
constitutional symptoms such as nausea, depression, and anorexia associated with advanc-
ing disease. Cytokines released by the tumor or by host cells in response to the tumor
lead to anorexia and metabolic dysregulation.
FIGURE 59.3
Ranson criteria and APACHE II severity of pancreatitis. Ranson criteria and the APACHE II severity of disease
classification system are two scoring systems used to judge the severity of acute pancreatitis. In the APACHE
II system, points were given for each of twelve variables (in box) based on the severity of those variables. Points
were also awarded for increasing age, a history of organ dysfunction, immunocompetence, and surgical inter-
ventions. Three or more Ranson criteria or eight or more APACHE II points are considered significant disease.
The inflammatory challenge also brings with it a state of substrate intolerance, partic-
ularly to carbohydrates and less so to lipids, which makes imprudent use of nutritional
support potentially harmful. Additionally, visceral proteins such as albumin, which often
are used as nutritional parameters in epidemiological studies, are affected by the inflam-
matory response and lose value as predictors of substrate exhaustion. Perhaps in the future
we will be guided by readily available tests of immune function that will allow us to
discern when the immune response is faltering from lack of available substrate. However,
currently, we must estimate the severity and duration of the inflammatory response as
well as the underlying nutritional status of the host to determine whether nutritional
intervention will be of benefit.
Approximately 80% of patients admitted to the hospital with acute pancreatitis have
mild disease. These patients are expected to be able to ingest kcalories orally in five to
seven days. From a nutritional perspective, unless there is severe underlying malnutrition
antedating the episode of pancreatitis, there is little need to intervene.
Severe pancreatitis occurs in about 20% of patients, and with prolonged absence of oral
intake nutritional intervention may be necessary. The diagnosis of severe pancreatitis is
suspected on the basis of clinical and laboratory evaluations and can be modified by
imaging criteria. Several criteria, including Ranson and APACHE II scores, have been
established and validated as indicators of severity in acute pancreatitis17-19 (Figure 59.3).
There is one reason for providing nutrition in acute pancreatitis accompanied by a
mitigating circumstance. Nutrition is provided to support the underlying nutritional status
of the host while the patient is beseiged by mediators of the inflammatory process. If there
is a deficiency in endogenous substrate, artificial nutrition will furnish the needed building
blocks to survive the insult. The mitigating circumstance is whether the treatment itself
does more harm, as the therapy may stimulate the inflamed pancreas and aggravate the
underlying problem. Additionally, metabolic aberrations potentially caused by the therapy
may complicate the clinical picture.
Several studies in animals (with and without pancreatitis), healthy humans, and humans
with stable pancreatic fistulas demonstrate little convincing evidence that parenteral nutri-
tion or enteral feeding delivered to the jejunum produce significant pancreatic stimulation.
The more convincing data come from human trials in patients with pancreatitis, in whom
there is no increased rate of pancreas-related complications using either modality.20,21
2705_frame_C59 Page 1246 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 2:13 PM
Unfortunately, only a few randomized controlled studies exist on the benefit of nutri-
tional intervention. In a study by Sax et al., patients with mild pancreatitis (average Ranson
criteria 1 to 2) were randomized to receive either standard hydration or parenteral nutri-
tion.22 The authors found no advantage to using parenteral nutrition with respect to
hospital days or number of pancreatic complications. The authors did find a greater risk
of line infections in this group than in patients with other diseases requiring parenteral
nutrition who were cared for concurrently using the same central line care. The importance
of parenteral nutrition in this study may have been understated, as all the patients had
mild disease.
Another study by Kalfarentzos et al. examined parenteral nutrition in patients with
more severe disease (Ranson criteria 3 or greater). The study was retrospective, and the
groups were divided on the basis of whether patients began parenteral nutrition within
the first 72 hours. The authors stated that the initiation of parenteral nutrition was based
on clinical grounds, but it is not clear what factors initiated the use of TPN and why the
authors chose 72 hours as a reference point. In spite of these potential biases, the authors
showed a statistically significant reduction in local complications and mortality. The
authors also reconfirmed the apparent increased risk of catheter-related complications in
this group of patients (again, compared to concurrent, nonpancreatic disease patients who
were receiving parenteral nutrition).23 Thus, the interpretation of this one prospective
study and several retrospective studies is that parenteral nutrition does not worsen pan-
creatitis and may be of benefit in severe disease, though the data are not convincing.
McClave et al. compared enteral jejunal feedings to parenteral nutrition in patients with
mild pancreatitis, generally of alcoholic etiology. The authors found that the enteral route
was safe and there were no differences in clinical or biochemical resolution of pancreatitis
in their study patients. However, the cost of nutritional intervention in the enteral group
was significantly lower than the parenteral group.24 Kalfarentzos and colleagues also
performed a randomized prospective trial of enteral versus parenteral feeding in severe
acute pancreatitis (APACHE II score 8 to 15). They not only showed that enteral feeding
was safe, they also showed that these patients had a significantly lower septic complication
rate than the parenteral nutrition group. Other morbidities, including the incidence of
infectious pancreatic or peripancreatic necrosis, were also lower in the enteral nutrition
group but did not reach statistical significance, probably because of the small numbers of
patients in the groups.25
Jejunal feeding in patients with pancreatitis is not only safe but also as effective as
parenteral nutrition in supporting the patient. An additional question is whether the
enteral route, by stimulating trophic factors which can potentially maintain the integrity
of the gut as a barrier against bacterial translocation, is beneficial to patient care in ways
that are not realized with parenteral nutrition. The issue of translocation in other predis-
posing states such as trauma and sepsis has been more readily proven in animal models
than in humans.26,27 The proof that this process is clinically significant in humans is less
established.28 The causative bacteria in infected pancreatic necrosis are often of gut origin,
and translocation of bacteria and/or endotoxin can contribute to the inflammatory pro-
cess.29-31 Enteral nutrition in pancreatitis appears to be safe from the available clinical
studies, and it offers cost savings and fewer septic complications. It should be considered
strongly as the treatment of choice in these patients. If it also decreases the incidence of
infected pancreatic necrosis, which is associated with a significantly increased morbidity
and mortality, it moves out of the realm of purely nutritional support and into the realm
of a therapeutic intervention.
A recent study examined the immunoinflammatory response and its relationship to
nutritional outcome with enteral feeding. In addition to finding that enteral nutrition was
associated with decreases in sepsis and multiorgan failure (though not significant), the
2705_frame_C59 Page 1247 Wednesday, September 19, 2001 2:13 PM
authors reported significant decreases in the APACHE II scores for enterally fed patients
(11 to 2) versus parenterally fed patients (12 to 10). They also reported moderate decreases
in c-reactive protein (CRP). Parenterally fed patients had significant increases in IgM
antiendotoxin response, while these levels remained unchanged in enterally fed patients.
These data support enteral feeding as an intervention that will improve disease severity
and clinical outcome by modifying the acute phase response. Moreover, these findings
lend support to the concept that enteral feeding maintains the integrity of the gut as a
barrier against translocation, which can be a contributor to the inflammatory response
seen in this disease.32
As more evidence shows that enteral nutrition is safe and beneficial, it should begin to
supplant parenteral nutrition in the management of pancreatitis. In reality, although these
studies are promising, they are still small in number and the practice of enteral nutrition
is not widespread.
In severe acute disease, the predominant treatment in most hospitals and medical centers
is parenteral nutrition. Knowledge of the appropriate use and the individual components
of the parenteral solution becomes a mainstay in treating patients with severe disease.